





* 

AV 



.^ J* t 



^# 










Class L 

Book __ 

Copyright N° 



COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT 




it 



.. 






■ : •■.■" 







If 







THE 



ROMANCE OF THE 
RED STAR 



A 



BIOGRAPHY OF THE 
EARTH 




> » 



PUBLISHED BY 

DENVER FRATERNITY OF EMETHACHAVAH 

DENVER, COLORADO 

AN ORDER FOUNDED ON THE PRINCIPLES HEREIN LAID DOWN. 
FOUNDED KOSMON 50. 



WB3 



I 



THE L IBRARY OF 

— cgHrQtyt£sgr"l 

Two Copies Receive* 

J«ft«*9 490»,j 

COPYRIGHT ENTRY * 

CLASSO-XXo. N». 






Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1901, by the Denver Fraternity of Emethachavah 
in the office of the Librarian ofCongress, at Washington, D. C. 
All rights reserved. 






DEDICATED 
TO ALL MANKIND 



JEHOVIH. 



All was. All is. All ever shall be. 

The All spake, and Motion was, and is, and ever shall be; 

And being positive was called He and Him. 

The All Motion was His speech. 

He said: I Am, and comprehended all things, the seen and the unseen. 

Nor is there aught in all the universe but what is part of Him. 

He said: I am the soul of all. 

The seen and unseen are of My person. 

By virtue of My Presence all things are. 

By virtue of My Presence is life. 

By virtue of My Presence are the living brought forth into life. 

I am the Creator, the Quickener, the Destroyer. 

Of two apparent entities am I; nevertheless I am but one. 

These entities are the unseen, which is potent; and the seen, which of 

itself is impotent. 
Of these two entities, in likeness of Myself, made I all the living. 
For as the life is the potent part, so is the corporeal part the impotent 

part. 
Chief over all that live on the earth I made man, male and female. 
And that man might distinguish Me, I commanded him to give Me a 

name. 
And man named Me not after anything visible in heaven or on the 

earth. 
By virtue of My Presence named he Me after the sounds the wind 

utter eth, 
And he said: 

E— O— IH, 
Which is now pronounced 

JEHOVIH, 
And is written thus: 




Cycle or Creation 



CHAPTER I. 

In Kosmon man looked upward in 
prayer, desiring to know the manner of all 
created things, both on earth and in hea- 
ven. And Jehovih answered him, saying: 

By virtue of My presence created I the 
seen and unseen worlds. 

I created Earth, and placed it in the 
firmament; and by My presence brought 
man forth a living being. A corporeal 
body gave I him that he might learn cor- 
poreal things; and death I made that he 
might rise in the firmament and inherit My 
etherean worlds. 

To es I gave dominion over corpor; 
with es I filled all place in the firmament. 
But corpor I formed into worlds and 
moons and suns; beyond number made I 
them, and I caused them to move in the 
places I allotted to them. Es I divided 
into two parts, etherea and atmospherea. 
These are the three kinds of worlds I cre- 
ated; but I gave different densities to at- 
mospherean worlds, and different densities 
to etherean worlds. 

Think not, O man, that I created space 
a barren waste, and void of use. Even as 
man in the corporeal form is adapted to 
the corporeal earth, so is he in the spiritual 
form adapted to My etherean worlds. 
Three great estates have I bestowed upon 
man; the corporeal, the atmospherean and 
the etherean. 

The corporeal worlds I created round, 
with land and water, and I made them im- 
penetrable, for I bring forth the living on 
their surface. 

The whirlwind made I as a sign to man 
of the manner of the creation of My 
corporeal worlds. As thou beholdest 
the power of the whirlwind gathering 
up the dust of the earth and driv- 
ing it together, know that even so 
do I bring together the a'ji and ji'ay and 
nebulae in the firmament of heaven. By 
the power of the whirlwind create I the 
corporeal suns and moons and stars. By 
the power of rotation, swift driving forth 



in the extreme parts, condense I the at- 
mospherean worlds that float in the firm- 
ament; and these become My corporeal 
worlds. In the midst of the vortices made 
I them, and by the power of the vortices I 
turn them on their axes, and carry them in 
the orbits I allotted to them. Wider than 
to the moons of a planet have I created 
the vortices, and they carry the moons 
also. About some of My corporeal worlds 
have I given nebulous belts and rings, th?t 
man might comprehend the rotation of 
their vortices. 

A great vortex created I for each sun, 
and within such vortices, and subject to 
them, made I the vortices of corporeal 
worlds. The sun vortices I caused to ro- 
tate, and I gave them power to carry the 
vortices of their corporeal worlds. Ac- 
cording to their density and position are 
corporeal worlds thus carried forth and 
around their suns. 

And above the earth, and to the north 
and south, I placed polar lights, that 
man might bear witness that light depended 
not on the sun. But the sun I placed in 
the midst of the great vortex, so that 
every side was as a pole to the corporeal 
worlds around it. And I made atmos- 
pherea as a condensing lens, so that the 
rotation of each and every corporeal world 
should manufacture its own light, on the 
side poling to the sun, by the rotation of 
its vortex. 

Atmospherean worlds I also created in 
the firmament, and I gave them places and 
orbits and courses for themselves. But 
atmospherean worlds I created shapeless 
and void of fixed form, for they are the 
elements of corporeal worlds in pro- 
cess of condensation or dissolution, being 
intermediate in density betwixt My ethe- 
rean and My corporeal worlds. Of 
three degrees of density created I them, 
a'ji, ji'ay and nebula. But all of them 
are composed of the same substances, 
being like the earth, but rarefied. 
Nor is there on Earth or in it one thing, 
even iron, lead, gold, water, oil, or stone, 



CYCLE OF CREATION 



but the same things are in My atmospher- 
ean worlds. As I have given light to 
Earth so have I given light to many of 
them. And I also created atmospherea 
around all My corporeal worlds; together 
made I them. 

For the substance of My ethe r e<*.n 
worlds I created ethe. And I made ethe 
the most rarified and subtle of all created 
things, and gave it power and place, not 
only by itself, but also power to penetrate 
and exist within all things, even in the 
midst of corporeal worlds. And to ethe 
gave I dominion over both atmospherea 
and corpor. 

In the All Highest places created I the 
etherean worlds, and I fashioned them of 
all shapes and sizes, and I made the ethere- 
an worlds habitable both within and with- 
out, with entrances and exits, in arches, 
angles and curves thousands of miles high 
and wide, and in colors of endless change 
and brilliancy, and overruled I them with 
perfect mechanism. To them I gave mo- 
tions and orbits and courses of their own. 
Independent made I them and above all 
other worlds in potency and majesty. Nei- 
ther created I one etherean world like an- 
other in size or density or in component 
parts, but every one differing from another, 
and with a glory matchless each in its 
own way. And were a man to travel a 
million years on one alone, he could not 
see half its beauty and glory. And the 
firmament of heaven hath tens of thou- 
sands of millions of etherean worlds. 

And I made the snowflake and caused 
it to fall, that man might behold the 
beauty and glory of its formation. Let 
the snowflakes stand before your eyes as 
microscopic patterns of the etherean 
worlds in high heaven; and ye shall tint 
them as a rainbow, and people them with 
countless millions of angels, spotless, pure, 
holy, and rich in the knowledge of Me and 
My works, and full of the majesty of My 
love. 

CHAPTER II. 

Man perceived the general foundation 
of the world, and he prayed that his eyes 
might be opened for a sign in heaven; and 
Jehovih answered him, saying: 

The clouds in the air I bring into view 
suddenly; by different currents of wind 
make I thus the unseen visible and tangi- 



ble to man's senses. In like manner do I 
cause etherean currents to bring forth a'ji 
and ji'ay and nebulae, prior to making cor- 
poreal worlds. In all the universe have I 
made the unseen to rule over the seen. 
Let the formation of the clouds stand in 
the view of man on Earth, that he may 
witness the manner of the unseen becom- 
ing seen. 

Man perceived, and he prayed for a 
sign of duration, and Jehovih answered 
him, saying: 

Behold the tree which has sprung up 
out of the ground and fulfilled its 
time; it falls, decays and returneth to the 
earth. But the wind, which thou seest 
not, never ceaseth to blow. Even so is the 
comparative duration of all things. Think 
not, O man, that corporeal things are an- 
nihilated because they disappear; for as a 
drop of water evaporates and riseth in the 
air as unseen vapor, so do all corporeal 
things, even earth, stones, gold, silver and 
lead, become as nothing in the firmament 
of heaven in course of time. 

Things that man seeth, created I with a 
beginning and an end; but the unseen I 
made of endless duration. The corporeal 
man made I belonging to the seen; but the 
spiritual man made I as one within the 
unseen and everlasting. 

As the corporeal man beholdeth cor- 
poreal things, so doth the spiritual man 
behold spiritual things. As corporeal 
things are tangible to corporeans, so are 
es things tangible to the spirits of the 
dead. 

When I condensed the earth, and 
it became firm and crusted over, there 
arose from the earth heat and moisture, 
But I limited the ascent of the sub- 
stances going upward, and the boundary 
of the limit of moisture was as the clouds 
that float in the air, and the heat was of 
like ascent. 

Let this be a sign that even as there 
riseth up from the earth heat and moist- 
ure, so there are representatives of all 
things on Earth which have evaporated 
upward, and all such things rise to the 
level of the density like unto themselves, 
every one to its own level, and they 
take their places in the strata of the vor- 
tex. These plateaux of spheres surround 
the whole earth. Some of them are 



. CYCLE OF CREATION 



ten miles high, some a thousand, some 
a hundred thousand or more miles. And 
all these spheres that rotate and travel with 
Earth are the atmospherean or lower 
heavens. 

As I cause water to rise upward as va- 
por, and take a place in the air above, let 
it be a sign and testimony of the places 
in atmospherea whereon dwell the spirits 
of the lower heaven. As I made a limit to 
the ascent of the clouds, so made I a limit 
to the places of the different kinds of sub- 
stances in atmospherea; the more subtle 
and potent to the extreme, and the more 
dense and impotent nearer to the earth. 

According to the condition of these dif- 
ferent plateaux in atmospherea, whether 
they be near the earth or high above, so 
shall the spirit of man take its place in 
the lower heaven. According to his diet, 
desires and behavior during his mortal 
life, so shall he dwell in spirit on the 
plateau to which he hath adapted himself. 
For I made the power of attraction mani- 
fest in all things before man's eyes, that 
like should attract like. 



CHAPTER III. 

Man sought to know the progress of 
things, and Jehovih answered him, saying: 

Open thine eyes, O man! There is a 
time of childhood, a time of maturity, a 
time of old age, and a time of death to all 
men. Even so is it with all the corporeal 
worlds I have created. 

First as vapor the vortex carrieth it 
forth, and as it condenseth, its friction en- 
gendered heat, and it is molten, becoming 
as a globe of fire in space. Then it tak- 
eth its place as a new born world, and I 
set it in the orbit prepared for it. 

In the next age I bring it into se'mu, 
for it is ripe for the bringing forth of liv- 
ing creatures; and I bestow the vegetable 
and animal kingdoms. Next it entereth 
ho'tu, for it is past the age of begetting,, 
even as the living who are in dotage. 
Next it entereth a'du, and nothing can gen- 
erate upon it. Then cometh uz, and it is 
dissolved away into space. Thus create I, 
and thus dissipate suns, planets, moons 
and stars. 

My examples are before all men. My 
witnesses are without number. I raise the 



tree up out of the ground; I give it a time 
to bring forth fruit; and then barrenness; 
and then death and dissolution. I prepare 
the new field with rich soil, bringing forth; 
and the old field that is exhausted, barren; 
and so shall man weigh the progress and 
destiny of a world. 

Let no man marvel because of the size 
of the mastodon and mammoth, for there 
was a time for them as there is a time for 
the infusoria of this day. I have given thee 
a sign, O man, in the queen of the honey 
bee. Because of the change of the 
cell cometh she forth a queen, even 
from the same manner of germ as the 
other bees. Be wise, therefore, and re- 
member that Earth is not in the same 
place in the firmament as of old. Let this 
be a testimony to thee of the growth, the 
change and the travel of Earth. 

Nevertheless, O man, the seen and the 
unseen are but parts of My person. I am 
the Unity— the Whole. 

CHAPTER IV. 

Man perceived the magnitude and glory 
of the corporeal worlds. He said: How 
shall I speak of Thy great works, O Je- 
hovih, and of Thy wisdom and power? I 
look upon Thy countless suns, moons and 
stars, spread out over the heavens. For 
millions of years Thou hast driven them 
on in the never-ending firmament. Pro- 
cessions in and out, and round about, of 
mighty worlds; by Thy breath going forth. 

Tell me, O my Creator, whence came 
life? This unseen within me that is con- 
scious of being? Tell me how all the liv- 
ing came into life. 

Jehovih heard the words of man, and 
He answered them, saying: 

I caused the jelly-fish and the green 
scum of water to be permanently coming 
forth in all ages, that man might compre- 
hend the age of se'mu, when the earth and 
the shores by the water, and the waters, 
also, were covered over with commingled 
atmosphere and corporeal substance. And 
by My presence I quickened it into life, 
and thus made all the living, both vege- 
tation and animals. Not that se'mu is 
jelly-fish or the green scum on water; for 
the earth in this day produceth not se'mu. 
Nevertheless, the jelly-fish and the green 
scum of water are relics of the condition 



8 



CYCLE OF CREATION 



which existed in that day of Earth, even 
as the action of frost on glass in making 
forms of ferns, trees and grasses, is a relic 
of the manner of the creation of the vege- 
table kingdom. 

As I have given to females a time to 
bring forth their young, so gave I to 
Earth a time for the conception of 
the living species on the land, in 
the water and in the air above, and 
I called the time the age of se'mu. In 
the time of se'mu I brought the earth into 
a'ji and ji'ay, and darkness was upon the 
face of the earth for the space of three 
thousand years; and yet for another three 
thousand years, half darkness covered all 
the land and water. 

And there fell upon the earth condensed 
nebula in dust and stones and water com- 
bined, sufficient in some places to 
cover up the forests I had made. And 
that which fell was hot like molten iron, 
and the trees and forests of the valleys 
were beaten down, and covered up, and 
burnt to blackness, forming coal, which 
bears witness of the regions of a'ji, ji'ay 
and nebulae in the firmament of heaven. 

Because of my presence quickened 
I into life all that live, or ever have 
lived. Because I am male and female, 
even in My likeness, thus made I them. 
Because I am the power to quicken 
into life; so, in likeness of Me thus, made I 
them, and with power to bring forth. Ac- 
cording to their respective places created 
I the living; not in pairs only, but in hun- 
dreds, thousands and millions of pairs. 
According to their respective places and 
the light upon se'mu, so quickened I them 
in their color, adapted to their dwelling 
places. 

Each and every living thing created I 
new upon the earth, of a kind each to it- 
self; and not one living thing created I out 
of another. As a sign upon the earth, 
that man in his darkness may not believe 
that one animal changeth and becometh 
another, I gave permission for different 
animals to bring forth a new living ani- 
mal, which should be unlike either its 
father or mother, but I caused the new 
product to be barren. 

And this shall be testimony before 
all men that I created each and all 
the living to bring forth after their 



own kind only. And when I bring a new 
world into the time of se'mu, My presence 
quickeneth the substance into life. Ac- 
cording to the locality and the surround- 
ings, so do I bring forth the different spe- 
cies; for they are flesh of My flesh and 
spirit of My spirit. To themselves give I 
themselves. Nevertheless, they are all 
members of My person. 

As a testimony to man, behold Earth 
was once a globe of liquid fire. Nor was 
there any seed thereon. But in due sea- 
son I rained down se'mu on the earth; 
and by virtue of My presence quickened I 
into life all the living. Without seed quick- 
ened I the life that is in them. 

CHAPTER V. 

When man comprehended the earth he 
looked upward and beheld that each and 
everything in the firmament was orderly. 
Then Jehovih spake, saying: 

As I have shown system in the cor- 
poreal worlds, know thou, O man, that 
system prevaileth in the firmament. As a 
farmer soweth corn in one place, and 
wheat in another, and flax — everything in 
a separate place; even so do I store 
the ingredients of which worlds are 
made, everything in its place; the substance 
of the iron in one place, the substance of 
the stones in another, the substance of the 
vegetable kingdoms in another, and even 
so of the substance of the animal kingdom; 
and the oils and sand; for I have places 
in the firmament of heaven for all of them. 
These that thou hast seen are the a'ji and 
ji'ay and the nebulae; and amidst them in 
places there is se'mu also. 

Let no man say: Yonder only is hydro- 
gen, and yonder only oxygen. The divi- 
sions of the substances of My creations are 
not as man would make them. All the el- 
ements are to be found not only in places 
near at hand, but in distant places also. 

When I drive forth My worlds in the 
heavens, they gather a sufficiency of all 
things. So also cometh it to pass that 
when a corporeal world is yet new 
and young it is carried forth, not at 
random, but purnosely, in the regions suit- 
ed to it. Hence there is a time for se'mu, 
a time for falling nebulae to bury deep the 
forests and se'muan beds, to provide coal 



CYCLE OF CREATION 



and manure for a time thereafter. So is 
there a time when the earth passeth a re- 
gion in the firmament when sand and oil 
are rained upon it and covered up, and 
gases bound and sealed up for the coming 
generations of men. 

CHAPTER VI, 

And man said: Teach thou me, O Je- 
hovih, how was the beginning of man on 
Earth? 

Jehovih said: To the tree I gave life. 
To man I gave life and spirit also. And 
the spirit I made was separate from the 
corporeal life. Out of se'mu I made man, 
and man was but as a tree, but dwelling in 
darkness and incapable of immortality; 
and I called him Asu. 

I looked over the wide heavens of 
etherea, and I saw countless millions of 
spirits of the dead, that died in infancy 
on other corporeal worlds. I spoke in the 
firmament. And there came in answer to 
the sound of My voice, myriads of angels 
from the earth's roadway in etherea where 
Earth traveled. I said to them: Behold, a 
new world have I created. Come ye and 
enjoy it. Yea, ye shall learn from it how 
it was with other worlds in ages past. 

There came to the new Earth millions 
of angels from etherea; who had never 
fulfilled a corporeal life, having died in in- 
fancy, and these angels comprehended not 
procreation nor corporeal life. And I said: 
Go and deliver Asu from darkness, for he 
shall also rise in spirit to inherit My ether- 
ean worlds. 

And now was Earth in the latter 
days of se'mu, and the angels could readily 
take on corporeal bodies for themselves. 
Out of the elements of the earth clothed 
they themselves, by force of their wills, 
with flesh and bones. By the side of the 
Asuans took they on corporeal forms. 

And I said: Go forth and partake of all 
that is on Earth; but if you heed the voice 
of corpor you will become bound to your 
offspring and as if dead to the heavens 
whence ye came. 

But those who had never learned cor- 
poreal things, being imperfect in wisdom, 
comprehended not My words, and they 
dwelt with the Asuans, and there was born 
of the first race, Asu, a new race, capable 



of immortality; and I took the earth out 
of the travail of se'mu, and the angels gave 
up their corporeal bodies. And I said: 

From this time forth on Earth it shall 
be a crime for angels to cohabit with mor- 
tals. Because ye have raised up such as 
shall be joint heirs in heaven, ye shall 
tread the earth with your feet, and walk 
by the side of the new born, being guar- 
dian angels over them, for they are of 
your own flesh and kin. 

Fruit of your seed have I quickened 
with My spirit, and man shall come forth 
with a birth-right to My etherean worlds. 
As I have quickened the seed of the first- 
born, so will I quicken all seed to the end 
of Earth. And each and every man 
child and woman-child born into life, will 
I quicken with a new spirit which shall 
proceed out of Me at the time of concep- 
tion. As the corporeal earth passeth away, 
so shall pass away the race of Asu. Nei- 
ther will I give to any spirit of the 
higher or lower heavens power to en- 
ter a womb, or a fetus of a womb, and be 
born again. 

CHAPTER VII. 

Jehovih said: As I bequeathed to 
Earth a time for creating the living and a 
time for angels to come and partake of 
the first fruits of mortality, so shall man 
at certain times and seasons receive testi- 
mony from My hosts in heaven. 

As a sign to the inhabitants of the earth 
that they may comprehend dan'ha in the 
firmament of heaven, I caused Earth and 
the family of the sun to travel in an orbit, 
the circuit of which requireth them four 
million seven hundred thousand years. 
And I placed etherean lights at distances 
of three thousand years in the line of the 
orbit, at which places, as Earth passeth 
through, angels from etherea come into its 
corporeal presence. As ambassadors they 
come, in companies of hundreds and thou- 
sands, and tens of thousands, and these are 
called the etherean hosts of the Most High. 
Not as single individuals come they; not 
for a single individual mortal come they. 

And I gave this sign to man on Earth: 
In the beginning of the light of dan'ha the 
spirits of the newly dead shall have power 
to take upon themselves the semblance of 
corporeal bodies, and appear and talk face. 



10 



CYCLE OF CREATION 



to face with mortals. Every three thou- 
sand years I gave this sign on Earth, that 
those who learned the powers and capaci- 
ties of such familiar spirits might bear tes- 
timony in regard to the origin of man on 
Earth. 

And when it shall come to pass in any 
of the times of dan'ha, that these signs are 
manifest, man shall know that the hosts of 
the Most High are visiting Earth. Let 
him who will become wise, enumerate the 
great lights of my solar serpent, for in 
such times I set aside things that are old, 
and establish My chosen anew. 

In the time of Earth when man was 
brought forth from mortal to immortal 
life, the Earth passed beyond se'mu, and 
the angels of heaven remained with cor- 
poreal man, but not in the semblance of 
mortals, but as spirits; and by virtue of 
their presence, strove to make man wise 
and upright. Upon the earth the number 
of such angels was millions. To these 
angels I spake, saying: 

Behold, the work ye have taken in 
hand. Ye now have sons and daugh- 
ters on the earth. By your love to them 
are ye become bound spirits of the lower 
heaven. Until ye redeem them in wisdom 
and power even to the sixth generation, ye 
shall not again arise and inherit My eman- 
cipated heavens. To which end ye shall 
become co-workers with one another in 
system and order. In My name shall ye 
become an organic body in the heaven of 
the earth, or lower heaven. 

And I will allot unto you a Chief, who 
is wise in experience in founding heavenly 
kingdoms; and he shall appoint, from 
amongst you, officers and mesengers and 
ashars, and asaphs, and es'enaurs, and ye 
shall be numbered and apportioned unto 
your labor and places like unto My lower 
heavens on other worlds. And he who is 
Chief shall be called God of Earth. 

And God shall have a Council and 
throne within his heavenly city; and the 
place shall be called Hored, because it is 
the first heavenly kingdom on Earth. 
And God shall rule on the throne for it is 
his; and the Council shall rule with him. 
In My name shall they have dominion over 
angels and mortals belonging to Earth. 

And God shall appoint Chiefs under him 
who shall go down and dwell on the earth 



with mortals; and such Chiefs' labor shall 
be with mortals for their resurrection. And 
these Chiefs shall be called Lords, for they 
are Gods of land, which is the lowest rank 
of My commissioned Gods. 

And God and his Lords shall have do- 
minion from two hundred years to a thou- 
sand or more years; but never more than 
three thousand years. According to the re- 
gions of dan into which I bring Earth, 
so shall be the terms of the office of My 
Gods and My Lords. And God and his 
Lords shall raise up officers to be their 
successors. By him and them shall they 
be appointed and crowned in My name. 

At the termination of the dominion of 
My God and his Lords they shall gather 
together in these My bound heavens, all 
such angels as have been prepared in wis- 
dom and strength for resurrection to My 
emancipated heavens. And these angels 
shall be called Brides and Bridegrooms to 
Jehovih. And to God and his Lords, with 
the Brides and Bridegrooms, I will send 
down ships from etherea in the time of dan. 
By My etherean Gods and Goddesses shall 
the ships descend to these heavens, and re- 
ceive God and his Lords with the Brides 
and Bridegrooms, and carry them up to 
the exalted regions I have prepared for 
them. And all such as ascend shall be 
called a Harvest unto Me through My God 
and Lords. 

And the time of My harvests shall be 
according to each dan, which is two hun- 
dred, four hundred, six hundred and five 
hundred years. And these shall be called 
My lesser cycles, because they are the 
times of the tables of prophecy which I 
give unto My chosen. But at no other 
times, nor in any other way, shall My Har- 
vests ascend to My emancipated worlds in 
etherea. Seven dans have I created for 
each and every dan'ha. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

The angels understood the command- 
ments of Jehovih according to their knowl- 
edge in the etherean heavens; having 
died in infancy, and having matured in the 
es worlds; but they understood not the 
Creator according to the practice of the 
lower heavens. 



CYCLE OF CREATION 



11 



Jehovih said: I condemn ye not because 
ye have become joint procreators with the 
Asuans; for ye have done two services 
unto Me, which are to teach yourselves 
corporeal things, that ye may understand 
and sympathize with corporeans, and sec- 
ondly, because ye have caused Earth to 
become peopled with such as are capable 
of immortality. 

Behold ye now what shall happen. 
Such as are of your flesh and kin who 
cohabit together, shall rise in wisdom 
and virtue; but such of them as co- 
habit with the Asuans will bring forth heirs 
in the descending grade of life. The first 
shall bring forth heirs unto everlasting life; 
but the second shall bring forth heirs that 
shall go out in darkness. Of which mat- 
ters your God and Lords will instruct you, 
that ye may, by inspiration and otherwise, 
learn to control the behavior of mortals 
unto everlasting life. And that these la- 
bors be not too severe upon you, I created 
the dans and the dan'has in the firmament, 
wherein ye may be relieved from the watch 
by other angels coming to exchange with 
you. 

This also do I put upon you: That to 
rule over mortals to virtue, by your own 
wills governing them in all things, is con- 
trary to My commandments. For what 
honor hath any man if made to do a thing? 
But ye shall give mortals of My light, 
leaving them to choose. Better is it for 
them to suffer some than to grow up in 
ignorance of the stings of disobedience. 

Behold, I make this a willing service 
on your part. Because ye have bound 
your affections on Earth to your kin, 
ye willingly become guardian angels over 
mortals. Yet I make not a separate law 
unto you. As it is with wou, so shall it 
be with the spirits of these mortals when 
they are born into the es world. They will 
also desire to become guardian angels 
over their mortal kin. But these spirits, 
never having known My higher heavens, 
will be unsuitable for the office of ashars. 
They would be but as the blind leading the 
blind. 

To prevent which, God and his Lords 
shall provide these spirits in the first res- 
urrection with places to dwell in; and with 
occupations and opportunities for educa- 
tion. For I desire them not to remain 



bound to Earth, but to rise up and in- 
herit My etherean worlds. And in this 
also shall ye be discreet in governing 
them, giving them the light of My heavens 
with some liberty to choose and to perfect 
themselves. Otherwise, they would only 
be slaves in heaven. According to their 
weakness or strength, so shall ye provide 
for these new spirits entering My es world. 

Therefore such of you as are appointed 
by My God and My Lords as guardians 
over mortals shall be called ashars, and ye 
shall report to your respective Lords ac- 
cording to the sections of the earth where 
ye may be. Of many watches shall be the 
ashars. 

And such of you as are appointed to 
receive the spirits of the dead into heaven 
shall be called asaphs and ye shall report 
to your respective Lords. 

And the ashars shall make a record of 
every mortal, of the grade of his wisdom 
and good works; and when a mortal dies, 
and his spirit is delivered to the asaphs, the 
record shall be delivered with him ; and the 
asaph receiving, shall deliver such spirit, 
with the record, into such place in these 
heavens as is adapted to his grade, where 
he shall be put to labor and to school, ac- 
cording to the place of the resurrections 
which I created. 

And ye shall thus become organic in 
heaven, with teachers and physicians; and 
with capitals, cities and provinces; and 
with hospitals, nurseries, schools and fac- 
tories; even so shall ye ultimately inspire 
man on the earth to the same things. 

And mortals that are raised up to do- 
minion over mortals shall be called kings 
and emperors. As My Gods and Lords 
are called My Sons, so shall kings and em- 
perors be called sons of God. Through 
him shall they be raised up to their places, 
and given dominion unto My glory. 

CHAPTER IX. 

Jehovih said: And God shall cause a 
record to be kept in heaven, of his domin- 
ions and his Lords. And he and they shall 
enjoin it upon their successors forever to 
keep a like record. And in the times of 
My harvest a copy of these records shall 
be taken up to My etherean heavens, and 
filed with My Orian Chiefs and Archan- 



12 



CYCLE OF CREATION 



gels in the roadway of the travel of the 
great solar serpent, for their deliberation 
as to the progress and management of the 
inhabitants of Earth and her heavens. 

Think not, O ye angels, that the resur- 
rection of your heirs, and their descendants 
that come up out of Earth, is an easy 
matter and of steady progress, devoid of 
mishaps and woeful darkness. 

The angels under you shall become at 
times rebellious and defiant; disregarding 
your laws and decrees; and they shall de- 
sert your heavenly places and go down to 
the earth in millions and hundreds of mill- 
ions. And they shall drive away the 
ashars, and then assume guardianship 
over mortals. But they shall develop no 
righteousness, but they will inspire mortals 
to war and destruction. And these angels 
will themselves take to war and evil on 
every hand within the place of your hea- 
vens. With the foul gases of atmospherea 
shall they make weapons of war and places 
of torment. With these elements shall they 
make suffocating hells in order to cast 
one another in chaos. 

And mortals who shall be slain in war, 
shall be born in spirit in chaos on the bat- 
tlefields; in chaos shall such spirits enter 
the es world. And they shall not know 
that they are dead (as to earth life), but 
shall still keep fighting right and left. And 
enemy shall take enemy in these heavens, 
and cast them in places of torment which 
they shall have built, and they shall not 
know peace nor wisdom. 

And the work of your heavens shall be- 
come as nothing. And ye shall turn to, go- 
ing about delivering hells and the spirits 
in chaos. And your labor shall be ex- 
haustive. Verily shall ye cry out because 
ye came and peopled Earth. 

This also have I created possible: For 
both angels and mortals shall learn to know 
the elements of the heavens and the earth, 
and to know the trials and misfortunes of 
love. Nor have I made wisdom possible 
unto any man or angel that knoweth not 
My elements, and the extremes of evil and 
good which I created. 

But in the times of great darkness which 
shall come upon Earth and these heavens, 
I will bring the earth into dan'ha; and My 
ethereans shall come in My name and de- 
liver them. And again for another cycle 



shall they be left with the lessons given 
unto them; but they shall fall again and 
again in course of time. But again will I 
deliver them. Through My Gods and God- 
desses will I cause them to comprehend 
the magnitude of My creation. 

As ye travel from heaven to heaven in 
atmospherean ships, even so shall ye in- 
spire mortals to build corporeal ships and 
sail across the oceans, that the inhabitants 
of different divisions of the earth may be- 
come known to one another. 

And when the inhabitation of the earth 
shall be completed, and the nations shall 
have established civil communion around 
from east to west, in that same time will I 
bring the earth into the Kosmon Era, and 
My angel ambassadors, Gods and God- 
desses, shall render up the records of these 
heavenly kingdoms. Through them will I 
reveal unto mortals the creation of My 
worlds, and the history and dominion of 
My Gods and Lords on Earth, even from 
this day down to the time of kosmon. 

A time shall come when Earth shall 
travel in the roadway of the firmament, and 
so great a light will be thereon, that its 
vortex shall burst, even as a whirlwind 
bursteth, and the whole world shall be 
scattered and gone as if nothing had been. 
But ere that time cometh My etherean 
hosts shall have redeemed man from dark- 
ness. Nor shall the inhabitants of Earth 
marry, for the time of begetting will be 
at an end, and man shall become extinct. 
The red star, Earth, will have fulfilled its 
labors, and its services shall be no more. 
The vortex of the sun shall be round, and 
the body of the great serpent coiled up. In 
the place where Earth was, shall some of 
my far-off worlds come and fulfill the 
labor allotted to them. And the atmos- 
phereans who have not been redeemed 
from darkness in that day shall alight on 
the new world and also fulfill their labor. 

And Jehovih caused the angels of at- 
mospherea to asemble together and organ- 
ize the first kingdom of the heaven on the 
earth. 

And the record of the great serpent 
showed the firmament of Tem'yi in the 
third circuit of c'work'um and dan'ha 
twenty-four. 

Thus ended the inorganic habitation of 
Earth and her atmospherea. 



Cycle of Sethantes 



CHAPTER I. 

Jehovih called the angels of atmospher- 
ea to assemble together and organize the 
first kingdom of the heaven of the earth. 
And the place was called Hored, because 
it was the first organic abiding place of the 
first God of this world. And Hored was 
situated above the mountains of Aotan in 
Ughoqui, to the eastward of Ul, of that 
country called the continent of Pan. 

And the Archangel Sethantes was the 
wisest of them all, and he said unto them: 

Behold, we have come from far-off hea- 
vens. By the Voice of Jehovih came we to 
partake of the glory of the red star, 
Earth. Jehovih said unto us: Come ye 
and enjoy the new world I have created. 
And many obeyed the voice of corpor and 
became bound by the tie of life which is in 
the blood. 

And the Voice of Jehovih came to me, 
saying: Sethantes, My Son, behold, I gave 
into thy charge in My etherean heavens 
millions of angels, and thou hast brought 
them to Earth, and they have fallen 
from their high estate. Go thou, and de- 
liver them. 

And I said: What shall I do? And Je- 
hovih said: Bring thy angel hosts to Hor- 
ed, for there will I crown thee God of 
Earth for the resurrection of angels and 
mortals. And it shall be a heavenly 
kingdom from this time forth to the end 
of the world. For it is the time of the arc 
of Wan, and I will bring from etherea My 
high raised Goddess, Etisyai, chief factor 
of Harmuts, and she shall crown thee in 
My name, God of Earth. 

God said: When I had thus spoken in 
Hored before the angels of heaven, a great 
light, like a sun, was seen descending from 
the firmament above. And I commanded 
my es'enaurs to chant in praise of Jehovih 
and His works. 

Meanwhile I had the angels of Hored 
numbered, and there were of them twenty- 
seven million six hundred thousand, and 
these were the same who were on an ex- 



cursion in my charge when the Voice of 
Jehovih commanded us to visit Earth. 

The light above us descended fast to- 
ward us; the ship of fire came nearer 
and nearer, till we saw that it was wider far 
than the place of Hored and all my angel 
hosts. And when it had descended 
to the plateau of Hored there came 
forth out of the ship one million Archan- 
gels, from the arc of Wan in the Hosts of 
A'ji, in the orbit of Fow'sang in etherea, 
and they bore regalia and crowns from the 
Orian Chief of Harmuts. Foremost of the 
Archangels was Etisyai, and her brother 
Ya'tiahaga, commissioners from the ether- 
ean heavens. 

When they came near me, Etisyai gave 
the sign of Jehovih's name, greeting and 
saying: All hail! In Jehovih's name, and 
in the love of Harmuts, Orian Chief, we 
come to greet and crown thee first God of 
the lower heaven belonging to the corpor- 
eal earth. 

The Archangels then came forward, sa- 
luting, and Etisyai said: In Thy name, O 
Jehovih, I found here a throne. 

And she caused to rise the form and 
substance thereof; then I said: All hail, O 
emissaries of Harmuts! Come, Etisyai, 
thou and thy brother, honor my throne in 
Great Jehovih's name! 

And she ascended thereon, and Ya'- 
tiahaga with her. And the other Arch- 
angels formed a crescent in front of 
the throne, all of them bearing crowns or 
diadems, but they stood upright. And now 
the angel hosts of Sethantes took their 
places, that they might witness the testi- 
mony of Jehovih's commission, but the 
lights from the columns of fire, brilliant in 
all colors, shades and tints, bafHed many of 
them from seeing plainly. When all things 
were in readiness, Etisyai, standing erect 
and brilliant like a star, raised her right 
hand, saying: 

Jehovih, All Wise and Powerful! In 
Thy name this, Thy son, I crown God! 
From the Orian Chief Harmuts, raised to 
the rank of God, and by Thee, O Jehovm, 



14 



CYCLE OF SETHANTES 



ordained! Henceforth to be known for- 
ever in Thy emancipated heavens as Thy 
Son. Peace, wisdom, love, power. 

And now with her left hand she raised 
high the crown, so that all might see and 
bear witness, and again giving the sign of 
Jehovih's name above the crown, where- 
from a flame of light shot forth brilliantly, 
she placed the crown on God's head, say- 
ing: 

Arise, O my Son, Thou Son of Jehovih! 
Instantly there arose from the millions of 
souls one universal shout: All hail, O Son 
of Jehovih. And God rose up, having the 
crown on his head, and the people cheered 
him heartily, for he was well beloved. 

Etisyai said: Bring forth thy five chief 
Lords, that I may crown them also. God 
then caused the five chief Lords whom he 
had selected to sit at the foot of the throne. 
Again Etisyai raised her right hand, say- 
ing: 

O Jehovih! Almighty! From Whom 
all glories emanate! In Thy name, these 
Thy Sons, I crown, Lords of Earth, and 
of the waters of the earth! From the Orian 
Chief Harmuts! By my commission do I 
raise them to the rank of Lords for king- 
doms of heaven! Peace, wisdom, love, 
power. 

Then Etisyai took the crowns, which 
were handed her by the other Archangels, 
and placed them on the heads of the Lords, 
saying: 

Arise, O my Lords, and be ye Lords of 
Jehovih for His glory! And be ye Lords 
of God, having dominion over the earth 
and the waters of the earth, in love, wis- 
dom and power. Amen! 

The Lords rose up, having on their 
heads the crowns of Lords, and again the 
multitude saluted with great cheering. 
When the applause ceased, Etisyai said: 

My God and My Lords, give now the 
sign of Jehovihs' name, that His glory 
may be fulfilled. For this was the oath of 
office. And God and his Lords saluted Je- 
hovih before the hosts of heaven. And 
they stood apart a little distance, and Et- 
isyai said: 

Behold the All Light, Jehovih, encom- 
passeth me. My voice shall be His Voice. 
By the glory of faith in Him am I one with 
the Father. 



And a fleece of golden hue descended 
from above and encompassed Etisyai 
around about, and she was like a central 
star with rays of light emanating. She was 
entranced by Jehovih. Through her the 
Creator spoke, saying: 

My Son, God, I brought thee forth out 
of corpor, quickened into life everlasting. 
By faith I inspired thee to do whatsoever 
thou hast done. Faith gave I unto thee, as 
the tree whereon all perfection is the fruit. 
By that faith within man that nurtureth 
the I Am within himself unto perfection, 
becometh he My son, doing by virtue of 
My presence. According to thy wisdom 
and love have I given thee strength; and by 
thy strength raised thee up. Behold, this 
day have I given thee a kingdom in at- 
mospherea, and made thee God before all 
the kingdoms of heaven. This place shall 
be thy place and Mine also. Here shalt 
thou dispense laws in wisdom, and appoint 
officers in My name and by virtue of My 
power. And thy kingdom shall be like 
two kingdoms; one here with the hosts of 
heaven, and one on the earth with these thy 
Lords. For thine is the judgment seat and 
thou art the creator of order over the 
whole earth. Stretch forth thy hand, My 
Son, and clothe thyself in the golden flece. 

God made the sign, and then raised his 
hands upward, saying: Jehovih! Jehovih! 
By Thy command I call upon Thee to ar- 
ray me in Thy golden fleece! Behold I am 
Thy Son. 

And the Archangels tossed up the rai- 
ment and regalia they had brought from 
their etherean arc in a'ji, and by the faith 
that was in God, the substance flew to him 
and encompassed him in raiment of the 
upper heaven. 

Then Jehovih spake to the Lords, say- 
ing: As God hath built a kingdom in 
Hored, and reigneth over this heaven, and 
over you and your helpmates, so shall you 
build kingdoms on the earth, and ye shall 
rule over mortals in My name, teaching 
them of Me and My everlasting kingdoms 
in the firmament above. In testimony of 
My Voice receive ye this raiment of silver 
and gold from My archangels. 

The Archangels then draped the Lords 
in shining raiment. And Etisyai came 
down from the throne still entranced, say- 
ing: 



CYCLE OF SETH ANTES 



15 



Though My daughter Etisyai will rise 
up in a flame of fire, yet will I, even Jeho- 
vih, abide with thee, O God, and with ye, 
My Lords, now and forever! And then 
Etisyai took God's hand and led him to 
the center of the throne, saying: Sit thou 
on this throne, for it is thy Father's king- 
dom in the lower heaven of the earth! 

Then God sat down, the entrancement 
departed from Etisyai, and the Light of 
Jehovih went and settled upon God and 
the Lords. But Etisyai sat down at the 
foot of the throne, and thereupon all the 
Archangels sat down also. 

God said: Behold, she that is greatest 
maketh herself least of all. Arise, O 
Daughter of Jehovih, and enjoy my king- 
dom, for it is Jehovih's also. And God 
came down from the throne and took Etis- 
yai's hand, and she rose up, whereupon 
God proclaimed the freedom of the hour. 
Thus was established the first throne of 
God in these heavens. And now all the 
hosts mingled together, angels and Arch- 
angels, joyfully. 

CHAPTER II. 

When the hour was ended, God again 
ascended the throne, and the marshals 
raised the signals of order, and the Arch- 
angels went and stood in a crescent in 
front of the throne. Etisyai sat at the feet 
of God, and the splendor of her form, un- 
adorned, save with white and yellow drap- 
ery, shone through all the talents Jehovih 
had given her — the perfection of purity, 
wisdom and love — the like of which only 
Gods had looked upon. 

God said: In Thy name, O Jehovih, do 
I now found the session of Thy kingdom 
in the lower heaven. As long as man and 
woman shall bring forth heirs upon Earth 
unto Thee, this kingdom shall not cease 
to glorify Thee. Let the Lords approach 
the throne. The es'enaurs now sang, and 
in the meantime the marshals and escorts 
conducted the Lords before the throne. 
When they were in order, the music 
ceased, and God said: 

Five great divisions of the earth there 
are, and I have ordained ye the five Lords 
thereof in Jehovih's name. According to 
the number of inhabitants on the earth's 
divisions, and your relative rank before 



heaven have I placed you. When ye have 
seated yourselves in your respective king- 
doms, you shall have each twelve messen- 
gers, whose duties shall be betwixt you 
and me. Choose ye, therefore, your mes- 
sengers, this hour, that ere the resurrec- 
tion of the Archangels they may be con- 
firmed and their registry borne to heaven 
above. The Lords chose their messengers, 
and they were confirmed in the name of 
Jehovih, and the swift messengers, who 
ply with the upper heavens, made a record 
of their names and places. Thereupon God 
said to them: 

According to your talents have you 
been chosen. According to your excellence 
will you be promoted to wider fields of la- 
bor. May the love, wisdom and power of 
Jehovih be with you all. Amen. 

And now Etisyai signified that her time 
of departure had arrived. God came down 
from the judgment seat, and standing one 
moment in sorrow, reached forth and took 
Etisyai's hand, saying: 

Arise, O Daughter of Jehovih, and go 
thy way! 

Etisyai rose up and pointing upward, 
said: My home is in the arc of Wan. Jeho- 
vih dwelleth with thee and me. My swift 
messengers shall come to thee at times. 
My love will abide with thee and thy Lords, 
and the harvest of thy resurrection. In 
Jehovih's name, farewell! 

Etisyai then walked to the ship of fire; 
but ere she entered she turned and took 
one more look at the hosts of Hored, and 
then, stripping from the frames, luminous 
drapery, cast it playfully over the es'enaurs, 
and quickly disappeared in the light. The 
es'enaurs chanted, and the hosts of Arch- 
angels joined in with them, and in that 
same moment of time the ship began to 
rise, and it was as thousands of columns 
of fire surrounding one majestic column, 
and the whole circle rising in spiral form, 
turning and rising, rising and turning. 
And when it was a little way up, it seemed 
like an ascending sun; and then higher 
and higher, like a far-off star, and then it 
passed beyond the vision of the angels of 
Hored. 

When order was proclaimed, the All 
Light began to gather around about the 
throne, covering over God and the Lords. 
Jehovih, through God, said: 



16 



CYCLE OF SETHANTES 



Hear ye, for I abide also with these My 
Lords of the hosts of heaven. 

The Lords said: What shall we do? 
And Jehovih answered: 

Summon all the angels to pass before 
the throne of God, one by one, that I may 
judge them. For as many as dwelt on any 
of my corporeal worlds of the fifth of the 
second rate shall abide in the kingdom of 
Hored, and their labor shall be with the 
es'yans only. But all of the full of the first 
rate shall abide in the kingdoms of My 
Lords, and their labor shall be with mor- 
tals on earth. 

Then the marshals arranged the an- 
gels, and they passed in front of the throne. 
And those destined for labor in atmospher- 
ea only, turned one way, and those for the 
earth as ministering angels, turned the 
other way. And when they had all passed, 
they were correctly divided according to 
Jehovih's commandment. 

God said: Hear me, O ye Lords. Take 
your laborers and repair to your respective 
places on the divisions of the earth, and the 
waters of the earth. And ye shall be Lords 
with me, your God, for the glory of Je- 
hovih. Whatsoever ye do on the earth will 
I ratify in heaven. Whomsoever ye de- 
liver from the earth will I receive in hea- 
ven. As ye shape and build up mortal 
man, delivering his spirit into my kingdom, 
so will I receive him. That your kingdoms 
may accord with me and mine, I will give 
you messengers sufficient, and they shall 
pass daily betwixt us. According to their 
proficiency and power to pass from place 
to place, so have I chosen them. 

Let a record be kept within your own 
kingdoms, and these records shall be your 
own, to be carried upward with you in the 
next resurrection to etherea. And yet, ye 
shall have a record jointly with me, sep- 
arate from your own record, pertaining to 
your kingdom's relation with mine. 

When mortals die and are born in spir- 
it, ye shall enter them in your records as 
es'yans. And for these es'yans ye shall pro- 
vide temporary abodes, where they shall 
tarry, some for a few days, and some for 
the space of one year or more. Of their 
numbers and conditions ye shall inform me 
through the messengers, and I will send 
ships to bring them to my kingdom. Ye 
shall appoint asaphs, whose office it shall 
be to receive es'yans from the ashars. 



Whilst a mortal is alive on the earth, 
the ashars shall abide with him, guarding 
him in Jehovih's name. And when he dies 
the ashar shall deliver the es'yan to the 
asaph, saying: In Jehovih's name receive 
this new born spirit. He was my protege; 
for the good or evil in him charge thou me. 
And the ashar shall deliver up a record of 
the mortal life of the es'yan, and the rec- 
ord shall be kept within your own king- 
doms. And the asaph shall take the es'- 
yan saying: In Jehovih's name receive I 
this new born spirit. He shall then take 
the es'yan to the place provided to receive 
it, where it will have nurses and attend- 
ants acording to its requirements. 

When ships come to your kingdoms 
the asaphs shall deliver all the es'yans they 
have received, and bring them to my place 
in heaven. When God ended, the Lords 
answered: 

We will labor with thee for the glory of 
Jehovih. 

God said: To each of you have I given 
a great division of the earth, and each di- 
vision shall be named after you. 

This, then, was the rank assigned: Wha- 
ga, Jud, Thouri, Vohu and Dis; and the 
lands were called after the names of the 
Lords and so entered in the books of hea- 
ven in Hored. 

When all was finished, the Lords came 
and sat at the foot of the throne, and the 
es'enaurs chanted a hymn of praise to Je- 
hovih, and the entire multitude joined 
therein. When the hymn was ended God 
rose up, standing midst a sea of light, and 
raising up both hands, said: O Jehovih, 
almighty and everlasting. Help us estab- 
lish this Thy kingdom for Thy glory. 

Then making the sign of Jehovih's 
name with his right hand, he came down 
to the foot of the throne, and taking the 
hand of Whaga, Lord of Whaga, he said: 
Arise, my son, and go thy way, and Jeho- 
vih will bless thee. Whaga rose up and 
stood aside, and then in like manner God 
raised the other four Lords, and they stood 
aside also. 

The marshals filed past the throne, sa- 
luting, and after them the Lords, saluting 
also; then came the asaphs, and lastly the 
ashars; and the procession passed be- 
tween the pillars of fire with which God's 
laborers had ornamented Hored. 



CYCLE SETHANTES 



17 



This was the beginning of the reign of 
the Lords on Earth. 

CHAPTER III. 

And God appointed angel surveyors, to 
survey the earth and her atmospherea; and 
astronomers to note the place of the stars; 
enumerators to number the inhabitants of 
the earth and atmospherea, to grade them 
and apportion their places; nurses and 
physicians to receive the es'yans; builders 
of heavenly mansions; weavers of fabrics 
for covering the new born, the es'yans; 
and builders of heavenly ships for carrying 
the inhabitants from place to place. And 
God appointed unto all of these, officers 
and teachers according to grade. And when 
God had completed his appointments, the 
people were apportioned in heaven, every 
one to his place, to begin the work allot- 
ted to them. And God called the asaphs 
and said unto them: 

Go ye down to the earth, and bring me 
the fruit of the first resurrection. 

The asaphs said: Thy will is our will, 
but what meanest thou by the fruit of the 
first resurrection? 

God said: The spirits of the dead. 

The asaphs said: The spirits of the 
dead? Who are they? 

God said: When a spirit cometh forth 
from his corporeal body, this shall be 
called death. 

The asaphs said: Who, then, are the 
spirits of death? 

And God answered them, saying: O ye 
that died in infancy, how can ye learn cor- 
poreal things? Go ye then to my Lord 
Whaga, and he will show you. 

The asaphs departed and went down to 
the earth, and the Lord through the ash- 
ars, delivered unto the asaphs five hun- 
dred es'yans, and they brought them to 
Hored, before the throne of God. And 
God said unto them: Who are these? 

The asaphs said: These are the fruit 
of the first resurrection. Behold, we know 
now the beginning and the end of mortal- 
ity. The earth body of these es'yans was 
but a womb from which they are now de- 
livered. 

God said: Even so. Take ye these es'- 
yans and feed and clothe them, for this is 
your labor. 



The asaphs answered: Alas, we have 
tried them with all manner of food on 
which we ourselves subsist, but they will 
not eat. 

God said: O ye innocents. You feed 
on etherean food; these es'yans must have 
atmospherean food. 

The asaphs then departed, taking the 
es'yans with them. But after a time they 
returned to God, saying: 

Behold, O God, we have gathered the 
atmospherea of trees of all kinds, and of 
seeds and plants that grow on the earth, 
all most beautiful to our senses, and we 
gave these to the es'yans, but lo, they will 
not eat. Being alarmed, we again hasten- 
ed to thee. 

God said: O ye of little wisdom, know- 
ing so much of heaven and so little of 
earth. Go back to the place whence ye 
brought these es'yans, and learn what 
manner of food they subsisted on in mortal 
life. 

The asaphs went back with all haste 
to learn in reference to the food. And 
again they came before God, saying: 

What shall we do, O God? Behold 
these es'yans whilst in mortality feasted 
on fish and worms. How can we bring 
them the atmospherean part of these 
things? 

God said: Even the last time ye were 
present ye said ye had gathered of the at- 
mospherea of trees, and seeds and plants 
growing out of the earth. Why, then, can- 
not ye gather of the atmospherea of fish 
and worms? 

The asaphs said: Alas, this difference 
have we observed: The trees, and plants 
and fruits emit delightful atmospheres, most 
nutritious to the spirit, but that which is 
emitted from the living fish and living 
worm is foul smelling, being but the sweat 
and dead substance. What, then, shall we 
do? 

God said: Go ye to the place where 
mortals kill fish and worms, and in the 
same time that mortals tear these things 
with their teeth, snatch from their hands 
and mouths the atmospherean part thereof, 
and give that to the es'yans. But remem- 
ber, that little by little ye shall teach them 
to live on other kinds of food. And as ye 
do by these es'yans, do ye also in after 



18 



CYCLE OF SETHANTES 



time to others, for what men subsist on in 
corporeal life, is entailed on their spirit 
for a space of time after entering atmos- 
pherea; and of like substance shall they be 
fed spiritually. The asaphs then departed. 
The Voice of Jehovih came to God, say- 
ing: 

My Son, behold what the asaphs have 
done in thy name thoughtlessly. They 
came to the fishery and did as thou badest, 
gathering food for the es'yans, and at their 
side stood the es'yans, saying: Why gath- 
er ye food for us? Behold we are now 
strong in spirit; allow us to gather food 
for ourselves. And the asaphs said: It 
seemeth well; do as ye desire. Thereupon, 
the es'yans went to the fishermen and wo- 
men, who were eating raw flesh, and the 
es'yans laid hold of the atmospherean part, 
and ate thereof. And then the asaphs said 
to them: Ye have feasted sufficiently; come 
away with us. But lo, the es'yans engraft- 
ed themselves upon the fishermen and wo- 
men, and would not depart. The asaphs 
not knowing what to do, called on My 
name. Send thou, O God, quickly to them, 
those skilled in deliverance, that My es'- 
yans be preserved unto everlasting life. 

And God summoned those skilled in de- 
liverance of engraftment, and despatched 
them hastily with messengers to the place 
of the fisheries. 

Jehovih said: From the trees, fruits, 
flowers, grains and seeds, have I created a 
ceaseless harvest going upward into the 
atmosphere, which shall be the food 
of the spirits of men newborn in heaven. 
But whosoever feasteth on flesh on earth, 
shall not find spiritual food in heaven, but 
he shall return to the butcheries and eat- 
ing houses where flesh is eaten, and he shall 
feast on the atmospherean part thereof 
before it is rotten. Be ye guarded of them, 
lest they engraft themselves on mortals, 
feasting on their feasts and so go down to 
destruction. 

After many days the asaphs came before 
God, saying: The physicians severed such 
as were bound, and we brought them away. 
Shall this be our labor day and night, to 
lead these es'yans about, finding them 
clothes and food? This we have observed, 
the more we do for them, the less they do 
for themselves. 



Jehovih spake through God, saying: A 
nurse I provided for the new born, but 
when he is grown I commanded him to 
provide for himself that he may be a glory 
in My kingdom. By charity alone ye can- 
not raise man up; but be diligent to teach 
him to try continually to raise himself, for 
herein lieth the glory of man. 

The asaphs said: If we leave the es'- 
yans alone they will return again to the 
fihseries and fasten themselves upon mor- 
tals, doing nothing but eat. 

God said: Near the fisheries, but in at- 
mospherea, go ye and fashion a colony, 
and it shall be your colony in heaven. 
Thither take these es'yans, not showing 
them the way to the fisheries. In the colo- 
ny put ye them to work, weaving and mak- 
ing clothes and otherwise producing; but 
go ye for the food at the fisheries, and 
bring sufficient every day, giving only to 
them who labor, or to invalids and helpless 
ones. By this ye shall inspire them to la- 
bor, which is the foundation of growth; 
and in course of time they will not only 
care for themselves, but join in helping 
others, which is the beginning of the sec- 
ond resurrection. Behold, this lesson have 
ye learned; that according to the diet and 
the habits of mortals on earth, so must ye 
provide their spirits when first entered in 
heaven. 

Choose ye, therefore, of your own peo- 
ple a sufficient number to make all things 
required in a delightful colony, whether it 
be food, clothing, nurseries, hospitals, or 
places of worship or of dancing, raising 
them up in industry, love, wisdom, virtue, 
mirth, benevolence and adoration, and this 
shall be a new heaven unto you all. This 
shall be an example of all the kingdoms in 
heaven. The time cometh when the whole 
atmospherea around the earth shall be 
filled with countless millions of angels 
from the earth. 

Be swift in your labor; the people spring 
up from the earth rapidly into heaven, 
and every colony ye now found shall in 
time to come, be a great kingdom, requir- 
ing experienced workmen. Whosoever la- 
boreth most efficiently for Jehovih, him 
will I promote to wider fields. Words are 
already taking root in the mouths of mor- 
tals; and for thousands of years will war 
reign; might against might, darkness 



CYCLE OF SETHANTES 



19 



against darkness. Hundreds of millions 
will be slain in wars on the earth, and their 
souls be thrown into chaos. Even as ye 
beheld these spirits fastening on to mortals 
for food, so will millions of spirits in cha- 
os, fasten themselves on the battlefieds, 
still battling, or upon mortals, obsessing 
them to madness and death. 



CHAPTER IV. 

So God and his Lords established 
such colonies in heaven, and they embraced 
the arts of healing, education, industry, 
drapery, manufactures, the building of 
ships, and all things required for the spirit. 
And great labor came upon the hosts of 
God who founded these things, toiling day 
and night, receiving the es'yans and pro- 
viding for them food and clothing. And 
many of the hosts of God lamented that 
they had come to the corporeal earth, and 
they framed songs and anthems of lament- 
ation, and these they chanted even whilst 
at labor. God was troubled that they 
should thus lament in presence of the es'- 
yans, and he called together the proper of- 
ficers that he might rebuke them; but the 
Light of Jehovih spake from the throne, 
saying: 

Rebuke them not, My son. Did I not 
command them, saying: Behold I have 
created a new world; come ye and enjoy 
it. And they listened to the voice of cor- 
por, becoming bound. Wherefore, then, 
shall they not lament? Do they not re- 
member their former homes in etherea, 
and thus aspire to regain them? But seek 
thou, O My Son, to make their lamenta- 
tions a glory in the souls of the es'yans, 
that they may also aspire to a higher hea- 
ven. 

The Voice departed, and God perceiv- 
ing the wisdom of Jehovih, commanded 
certain officers to collect many of the an- 
thems and deposit them in the library of 
Hored in heaven, and they did so. This, 
then, is the manner of their lamentations: 

Where is my home, O Jehovih? Where 
I was happy? I dwelt with Thy hosts 
afar. 

O the songs in Thy upraised kingdoms! 
When shall I rejoice in the music of my 
own home in etherea? O those sparkling, 



running waters! O the pastimes and 
feasts of love! 

Where is it, O Jehovih? It was my 
home in high heaven. 

I fell in darkness! Wandering soul 
within me, that leddest me forth. The gar- 
dens of Jehovih stood on every hand. O 
senseless feet to take me onward. Into 
the darkness I was lured; sweet perfumes 
rose midst the darkness. Intricate in Thy 
glory, O Jehovih! I lost the way. I was 
lost! The music of Thy spheres was shut 
out. I was environed in darkness! 

Where is my home, O Jehovih? Why 
have I forsaken it? Crystals and high 
arches on every hand; standing out, shin- 
ing. And the songs of my sweet loves! 
Such was my home, a place of glory! I 
bartered them all away, wandering forth. 
Buried in the dark. O for my home in 
high heaven! Mirth, song, rest and love, 
clear shining. 

Thou, O Jehovih, hast given me sons 
and daughters. Out of this darkness my 
gems were born. O I will polish them up. 
Kin of my kin, I will raise them up. The 
Goddesses in heaven above will come, de- 
scending in ships of fire. My jewels shall 
enter and rise with me. We shall search 
for my home; the haven of rest. 

I see Thee, O Jehovih, afar off. High- 
er than the highest of heavens. O hasten 
my home and my rest! O ripen my pre- 
cious fruit. O take us to etherean worlds! 

But no one could repeat their numer- 
ous lamentations, for there were hundreds 
of thousands of them. And as the ethereans 
sang them, the es'yans, the newborn in at- 
mospherea, listened, longingly listened and 
looked upward. 



CHAPTER V. 

In the first year of Hored there were re- 
ceived into God's kingdom one and a half 
million es'yans, men, women and children 
born from the earth. And there were still 
left within the different divisions of the 
earth, with the Lords, three and a quarter 
million es'yans, being for the most part 
fetals. 

In the first one hundred years there 
were born of the earth, one hundred and 
seventy million es'yans. The number of 



20 



CYCLE OF SETHANTES 



three generations of Thins was fifty-four 
millions, and each of the Lord's heavenly 
places had become large kingdoms. 

In those days the period of five years 
was allotted to the es'yans as their time of 
infancy in heaven, requiring nurses and 
helpers, but some of them required many 
years more. After five years the es'yans 
were taken from the nurseries, and taught 
by symbols and objects the rudiments of 
education; and drilled in processions, mu- 
sic, dancing and gymnastics; but every day 
they were required for a brief period to 
labor, some at weaving, some at spinning 
and some at transportation. 

The Voice of Jehovih directed God, say- 
ing: For the prosperity of My kingdom in 
heaven, thou shalt make all labor an agree- 
able exercise for the growth of the spirits 
of thy dominions. 

And God commanded the officers of 
Hored to lengthen the hours of labor, ac- 
cording to the age and strength of the spir- 
its received up from the earth. 

Jehovih spake to God, saying: Allot 
to those who have come up from the earth 
the labor that is most congenial. But thou 
shalt not allow them to return to their 
earth kindred unattended, lest they engraft 
themselves thereon, because of their love, 
becoming bound to mortals. But when 
they have lived fifty years in heaven, thou 
shalt not only permit them to return to 
mortals, but thou shalt direct them to do 
so, for after that period they will have no 
further desire for engraftment. As fast as 
thou canst appropriate the labor of the 
earth-born spirits to help in the resurrec- 
tion of others, so thou shalt do in My 
name. 

And God and his Lords did so. And in 
one hundred years' time there were raised 
up to the second rate, twenty million 
souls. And many of them comprehended 
the manufactories, nurseries, schools and 
hospitals in heaven to the full, and they 
were in many things equal to the require- 
ments of their teachers. 

The Voice of Jehovih came to God, 
saying: It is well, My Son, to take a rest. 
Behold, thou hast toiled a hundred years, 
day and night, without ceasing. Thou 
shalt, therefore, annoint other officers, and 
spread out the kingdom of Hored to cover 
all the land of Whaga. And thou shalt ap- 



point in My name thy most efficient officer 
to sit on the throne for a short time, and 
thou shalt travel and visit the five Lords 
of the earth and their kingdoms. And thou 
shalt take with thee a thousand heralds, a 
thousand mesengers and five thousand mu- 
sicians. And thou shalt have a ship suffi- 
cient to carry thy host, and to be thy house 
whithersoever thou goest; and set all 
things in order for an absence of one 
year. 

-And God called in the surveyors, who 
brought maps of earth and heaven showing 
the best places for extending the kingdom 
of Hored. And God appointed fifty gov- 
ernors for the fifty places required, and he 
gave each of them five thousand men and 
women to accompany them. And when 
they were chosen God addressed them from 
the throne, saying: 

According to the commandment of Je- 
hovih are ye chosen; and by His command 
will I come to your respective places, and 
bestow jou with all that is required for 
building up colonies in Jehovih's name. 
As ye witnessed the founding of Hored by 
the Archangel Etisyai, so may you under- 
stand that I will come to you all. Go forth, 
then, taking your hosts, and lay the foun- 
dations for your cities. As ye have learn- 
ed from me, go ye forth doing as I have 
done; and as ye do with a small colony, 
so I will give into your keeping that which 
is greater when ye are prepared therefor. 

When God ceased, the marshals led the 
way, and the hosts following their govern- 
ors filed in front of the throne, saluting 
with the sign of Jehovih's name, which 
was answered by God's hands upraised. 
Meanwhile the es'enaurs sang in glory to 
Jehovih. Presently the hosts passed out 
and beyond the pillars of fire. 

When all had quieted, God said: Let 
the builders of ships begin now and build 
a ship for me and my hosts, for the time 
draweth near. And let the graders choose 
from my laborers, who have toiled a hun- 
dred years, day and night without ceas- 
ing, such as shall be my companions and 
hosts on my journey. And they were so 
chosen and notified. 

And God said: Whilst I shall be absent, 
he who standeth highest in the grades, 
shall sit on my throne, being God in my 
place. 



CYCLE OF SETHANTES 



21 



And God commanded the graders to 
present before the throne the records, that 
the Council of Hored might determine the 
matter. And this was done. And Ha'jah, 
an etherean, was chosen. And God com- 
manded them to send word to Ha'jah, 
with an escort to conduct him to the 
throne. In due time the escort brought 
Ha'jah into the place of the kingdom of 
God, while God was sitting on the throne. 
They came in with music and filed in 
front of the throne, forming a crescent, 
and Ha'jah stood betwixt the horns. 

God said: By the light of Jehovih have 
I summoned thee hither, O Ha'jah. Long 
have I known thee, even on other worlds. 
Of all virtues in man which stand highest, 
which is, never to mention one's self, thou 
excellest all men in my kingdom. Thy 
labors for the general upraising of Hored 
excellest all others. For this reason thou 
art preferred, and by Jehovih chosen to be 
my assistant whilst I am here, and in my 
absence to be God in Jehovih's name. 

Ha'jah said: This being the will of Je- 
hovih, proceed thou. 

God struck the gavel, and the holy coun- 
cil rose to their feet. 

God said: In Jehovih's name I salute 
thee, Ha'jah, as God of Earth, to hold do- 
minion in Hored. Come forth and receive 
thou my throne in Jehovih's name. 

The marshals then conducted Ha'jah to 
the foot of the throne. God came down 
and took his hand and led him up. And as 
they were going forth, a light, as of gold- 
en fire, came down from the firmament 
above, sent by the kingdoms high exalted; 
and God and Ha'jah were covered and il- 
luminated. 

God said: By Thy Love, Wisdom and 
Power, O Jehovih, do I receive this Thy 
Son on Thy throne. Be Thou with him in 
wisdom and strength for Thy glory for- 
ever. Amen. 

God stretched forth his hand unto Je- 
hovih, saying: Give me a crown for Thy 
Son, God of Earth, O Jehovih! 

And there descended, as if a small star, 
far lengthened out, a light of gold and sil- 
ver, and it settled on God's hand, and he 
fashioned it into a crown, and emblazoned 
it with the sign God of Earth, and placed 
it on Ha'jah's head, saying: In Jehovih's 



name, thee I crown, to sit on the throne in 
Hored during my absence. 

Ha'jah said: Thy Son, O Jehovih, shall 
fulfill Thy commandments in wisdom and 
love. O Father, Creator of worlds, 
give this Thy Son rest and comfort for the 
glories he hath wrought in Thy name. 
Amen. 

The Council said: Amen. The es'- 
enaurs chanted an anthem of praise to Te- 
hovih. And God led Ha'jah forth and seat- 
ed him on the throne, saying: Thou art 
God in my name and Jehovih's also. And 
since I go down to the earth to sojourn 
for a season, thou shalt be known as God 
of both Earth and heaven. 



CHAPTER VI. 

So God departed out of'Hored and em- 
barked on a ship, taking with him seven 
thousand men and women for an escort, 
beside a thousand es'enaurs and a crew of 
three thousand to work the ship. 

And God went to the provinces of the 
governors in heaven dwelling on earth, 
whom he had appointed and sent forth; 
and as he himself had been commissioned 
by Jehovih in Hored, so did he install the 
governors on their seats. And the govern- 
ors were situated within Whaga at re- 
mote distances, and God sent messengers 
to them, notifying them of the time he 
would visit them. And the Lord whose 
kingdom was situated in the earthly city 
of Ul'oo, being apprised of God's intend- 
ed journey, and having first appointed an- 
other in his place, went and joined God in 
his ship and traveled with God throughout 
Whaga, being present at the inauguration 
of the governors in these heavens. 

To each of the governors God said: 
That which is given you to accomplish per- 
taineth to things in heaven; for the Lord's 
matters pertain to earthly things, and to 
angels that labor with the corporeans. But 
ye are to attend to the es'yans, receiving 
them in heaven, providing them with places 
to sojourn, and in their helplessness sup- 
ply them with food and clothes, and the 
rudiments of learning. Remember also, 
the time cometh when each of these gov- 
ernorships shall attain to an independent 
kingdom; and instead of being governors 
you shall be raised as sub-Gods. 



22 



CYCLE OF SETHANTES 



After God had established the govern- 
ors, the Lord invited him to visit his place 
in Ul'oo, and thence go about on 
earth and see the mortals with whom the 
Lord had to deal. And God accepted, and 
the Lord sent messengers on before him, 
that the house of the Lord which mortals 
had built, might be replenished and cleans- 
ed. And his substitute notified the ashars, 
and the ashars impressed mortals to go and 
cleanse and purify the house of the Lord. 
And so mortals fell to work and cleansed 
the place and burned incense therein of 
sweet myrrh and hepetan, not even know- 
ing they were fulfilling the command of 
the Lord. 

When the ship of the hosts of God came 
to the city of Ul'oo, mortals saw it high up 
in the air, and they feared and ran hastily 
so consult the prophet of the Lord. And 
the prophet said: Behold, God appeareth 
in a sea of fire in the firmament of hea- 
ven. 

And God caused the ship to be made un- 
seen, that fear might subside on earth, and 
he descended with his hosts into the house 
of the Lord, and they went and touched the 
things mortals had built that they might 
perceive corporeally. And the Lord gave 
a banquet, and God and his companions 
tarried four days, exchanging fellowship 
with the ashars. And the ashars took 
the angels who were with him around 
amongst mortals, both whilst mortals were 
asleep and awake, showing many things 
to them. And because of the presence of 
the hosts of God, mortals were aroused 
with new vigor to worship the Lord, rising 
early and going to the house of worship 
and continuing all day, and not one of them 
knew the cause thereof. On the evening of 
the fourth day God commanded his hosts 
to prepare to renew the journey. 

God said: O Jehovih, who created all, 
look down and bless Thy Lord. He hath 
descended from his high estate in etherea 
to raise these mortals up. Already hath 
he toiled with them a hundred years. Three 
generations have risen up out of the earth, 
and they begin to glorify Thee in Thy 
kingdoms above the earth. Who but 
Thee, O Jehovih, can honor Thy Lord or 
know his sore trials? Behold, man grow- 
eth up out of the earth, saying: There is 
no Lord and no God. But his feet and 



hands are guided every hour of the day. 
Yea, when he enters the unseen worlds, 
they become seen; but he is helpless in a 
strange place, and Thy Lord provides him 
and teaches him. Thy Lord finds a suita- 
ble place on earth and says: Here will I 
build a city. He sends his angels forth 
and they inspire man to come and build a 
city in the same place. Yet when the city 
is built, man says: Behold, there is no 
God and no Lord. The Lord brings the 
corporeans together and guards them day 
and night; but man turns away in strife 
and destruction. Then Thy Lord with- 
draws his angels from the city because of 
its wickedness, and it falls in ruins. But 
man knoweth not the cause. Yet Thy Lord 
toileth on, day and night, watching, 
guarding and striving to lift man up out 
of darkness. O Jehovih, bless Thy Lord 
and his hosts. Hasten the time when man 
shall comprehend the foundation of Thy 
kingdoms. 

The Lord said: O Jehovih, Ever Pres- 
ent. Hear the words of Thy God. He who 
comprehends the whole earth and the hea- 
ven of the earth. He deals with millions. 
Great is his wisdom and love. Glorify him, 
Thy Son, of heaven and earth. He fashions 
the homes of Thy Lords and little ones in 
great wisdom. His love is the glory of all 
men. Give swiftness, rest and joy to him, 
Thy God. 

The mortals of the city of Ul'oo had 
gathered together to worship, and they 
were singing and dancing to the Lord, and 
the angels joined in the singing also. And 
God went and sat on the altar and illumin- 
ated it so the mortals could see him. And 
the chief prophet came near the place of 
the Lord, and the Lord placed his hand on 
the forehead of the prophet so he might 
speak in the name of God. The prophet 
said: Behold me, I am the God of heaven 
and earth, and my words come out of the 
mouth of this my prophet. Keep holy the 
four days of the moon, for they are the 
Lord's days. Do no evil, but strive for 
wisdom and to do good. And when ye 
are dead, behold, ye shall live, for I have 
places prepared for you in my heaven. Re- 
joice and be merry, for the Lord lives and 
reigneth. 

The prophet ceased, and God rose up 
from the altar, and his traveling host also, 



CYCLE OF SETHANTES 



23 



and saluting the Lord in the name of Je- 
hovih, resumed his journey in heaven. 

CHAPTER VII. 

First to Jud, God headed his ship, run- 
ning close to the earth, gathering fuel from 
the tall forests to feed the phosphorescent 
flame, traveling steadily till the wild coast 
on the west of Whaga was reached. Here 
he haltd his ship till his navigators told the 
distance of the wide sea before them, gath- 
ering fuel and substance from the rich 
growing lands. And God commanded: Go 
forth. Go forth into the sea of heaven. 
And on plunged the ship of God in the 
winds of the blue firmament, soaring high 
above the black clouds. And the music of 
his thousand es'enaurs leaped forth in time 
to the waves. 

Onward sped the ship of God; mer- 
rily sang the crew. On one side the 
rising moon, the setting sun on the 
other; beneath lie the black clouds and 
great corporeal sea; and yet above 
twinkled the stars and planets of the 
Great Serpent on his long journey. 
God surveyed the scene, and the power 
of Jehovih moved upon him. Then 
gathered round him his seven thou- 
sand loves and traveling companions; and 
God said: 

All Thy places are new, Great Jehovih! 
For thousands of years have I gazed on 
Thy matchless splendors; but Thy glory 
groweth richer day by day. When Thy 
Voice came to me, more than a hundred 
years ago, saying: Go, My Son, I have a 
new garden planted; take some workmen 
and till the soil; I foresaw the long labor 
of generations that would spring up out of 
the earth. I feared and trembled. 

I said: How shall it be, O Jehovih? 
Shall the new Earth be peopled over, and 
mortals run their course as on other cor- 
poreal worlds? First, in wholesome love 
and worship and due reverence to the 
Gods, and then for ages bury themselves in 
bloody wars? O lead me forth, Jehovih. I 
will take Thy garden for a season, and 
fence it around with Lords, and wise king- 
doms. And by the power of Thy pres- 
ence hedge mortals on every side, that the 
Earth may bloom as a paradise for angels 
and men. And Thy sons and daughters 



came with me, and peopled the earth with 
immortal souls. 

How is it now? How compares my la- 
bor with that of the Gods on other cor- 
poreal worlds? O ye Gods and Goddesses, 
look down upon Earth. Jehovih hath 
filled my arms with a great load. I trem- 
ble in the immortal scales. 

And God looked up, transfixed, into the 
swift passing sky; for his voice reached to 
the thrones of etherean worlds whereon the 
Orian Chiefs reigned in all power. And 
down from amidst the stars shot a single 
ray of light engrossed with the words: 

Jehovih's Son, all hail! 
Hail, God of Earth, Jehovih's Son! 
Glory, glory to Great Jehovih, 
For all that thou hast done! 

Then upward furled the shining light 
till it faded midst the far-off stars. Anew 
the trumpeters and singers sent forth a 
strain of sweet, soulful music. And as the 
music glided forth across the waters, other 
music, strange and welcome, came from 
the west land to the borders of the sea. 
The ship was across the sea, and hosts of 
the Lord of Jud had come to meet the God 
of Earth and Heaven. And now, saluting 
loud and long, the two ships drew close to 
anchorage. Presently they exchanged mes- 
sengers, and God and his hosts greeted 
the Lord and his hosts in Jehovih's name, 
and they were old-time friends. And pres- 
ently the two ships sped forth, close to the 
earth, conjoined in the music of anthems of 
olden times. And they sped on far up into 
the country, till one pillar of fire standing 
on a mountain side, proclaimed the place 
of the Lord, and here they halted and made 
fast the vessels unseen by mortals. 

CHAPTER VIII. 

These chieftans had long been friends 
on other worlds, and pledged to join in an 
adventure on some new corporeal world, 
to raise up sons and daughters to Jehovih. 
Now was the pledge being fulfilled, and 
they had eagerly looked forward to the 
time of this visit. And so God and the 
Lord came forth, saying: In Jehovih's 
name, we meet at last! And they embraced 
and reassured each other that what they 
had talked of a thousand years before had 
really come to pass. 



24 



CYCLE OF SETHANTES 



And then came forward the hosts of 
God and the Lord, knowing one another 
and saluting and embracing also. There- 
upon they proceeded to the house of the 
Lord, which mortals had been inspired to 
build of wood and clay. And when they 
were within they joined in prayer and 
thanks to Jehovih, and sang and danced 
and rejoiced to their souls' content. 

At sunrise the next morning the mortal 
priests and priestesses, led by a prophet, 
went into the house of the Lord, to pray 
and sing and dance as they had been taught 
by inspiration of the Lord, but many people 
lingered without, saying to one another: 
I fear! For last night I saw lights in the 
house of the Lord, and I heard singing and 
dancing before the altar. 

After a time of rejoicing and of quiet, 
the Lord said: Behold, O God, the follies 
of judgment, and the vain calculations of 
even Lords and Gods. We look upon the 
mature man, saying: Alas, he is stubborn 
in his own way; we cannot convert him. 
Then we desire the immature, saying: Him 
will I raise up in mine own way, and he 
shall not depart from my judgment. But 
we tire of his immaturity and slow growth. 

God said: Hereon hangs the highest 
testimony of the Person of Great Jehovih. 
The nearest blank of all the living created 
He man, unlike all the rest and devoid of 
reason. Whereas, according to the order 
of the animal world a newborn babe should 
be already wise. 

Jehovih saith: All the living have I pro- 
vided with certain paths to travel in; and 
man created I new that he should grow 
forever. To the beast I have given an al- 
ready created sense, to man I allotted an- 
gels. And even these have I provided with 
others above them; and yet others above 
them, forever and ever. Hence, the new- 
born babe I created a blank in sense and • 
judgment, that he may be a witness that 
even he himself was fashioned and created 
anew by My hand. Neither created I him 
imperfectly that he should re-enter a womb 
and be born over again. That which I do 
is well done, saith Jehovih. 

The Lord said: Thou art wise, O God. 
Man standeth on the earth, but the earth 
resteth on that which is lighter than the 
earth. Jehovih saith: The unseen that 



holdeth the corporeal earth in its place, is 
of Me. 

And yet, O God, who can attain to 
know Jehovih? The mortal saith: When 
I am dead and risen in heaven, I shall see 
the Great Spirit; but when he dies, he is 
still helpless; yes, as helpless in his place 
as he was on the earth. Then he saith: 
When I am strong arid wise, like Lords and 
Gods, and can traverse the wide firma- 
ment, then will I see Jehovih. But when 
he riseth and can shape his vessel through 
the whirlwinds of the vortices of heaven, 
and he is called Lord or God, he findeth 
the arcs and ethea standing before him 
still. More and more is he appalled at the 
thought of the Great I Am who liveth still 
beyond. 

He hurries down to the corporeal 
earth to teach mortals and spirits of Jeho- 
vih, and of His endless worlds and exalted 
heavens. But, lo, the darkness of them, 
they say: I see Him not; I hear Him not; 
I believe not in Him. He is but as the 
wind, going without sense. He is void; 
He is nothing. And the Lord inventeth 
ways and means. Yea, he teaches man to 
sing and pray to Jehovih, that the sounds 
may lead his soul upward. The Lord tell- 
eth him to wear clothes to hide his naked- 
ness and the Lord sendeth angels to award 
him for his good deeds. And the angels 
of the Lord lay plots and strategems in 
man's pathway to stir him up. Yea, Jeho- 
vih gave man sleep, so that his corporeal 
bound spirit might see and hear heavenly 
things. But man loadeth his stomach and 
debaucheth on intoxicating smoke and 
drink till his soul is buried in darkness. 
And the Lord crieth out in despair: How 
weak am I, O Jehovih, before Thee! I 
undertook to be a Lord over men on 
Earth, to learn my lesson in the gov- 
ernment of worlds. But O Jehovih, I 
know I fail in Thy sight. What will Thy 
God say when he beholdeth my little good? 
What pity have the Archangels for Thy 
struggling Lord of earth? 

God perceived the sorrow of his friend 
and he said: O Jehovih, Who art Almigh- 
ty, how keener hast Thou made our sense 
of our own weakness, than those who look 
upon us. Thy Lord is a God in the glories 
he hath wrought out of such crude sub- 
stance, and I sing to his praise and love. 



CYCLE OF SETHANTES 



25 



I have looked upon the naked man and 
woman of this great land, crawling on 
hands and feet, with no thought but to eat, 
and I have seen them raised up by Thy 
Lord and his ashars, to walk upright and 
use words of speech and to wear clothes 
and skins to hide their nakedness. Yea, I 
have cried out with great joy, and I called 
aloud unto Thee, O Jehovih, saying: Who 
knoweth the labor of the Lord? Will man 
ever forget to sing his praise? But Jeho- 
vih says: I will keep some of the tribes 
of men in darkness till the last days, for 
man shall perceive that the barbarous 
tribes cannot put away their own darkness. 
Yea, man shall bow down in reverence to 
My Lords. 

Thus conversed God and his Lord, as 
they went forth to see the work of the 
Lord, and to find the mortals that had 
given up the places of Asu and come to 
live in villages and cities. Around about 
over the continent of Jud they traveled for 
many days and nights. And when God 
had seen all the work of the Lord, he said: 

Behold, it is good. Thy toil and seclu- 
sion away from the Lords of the upper hea- 
vens are severe, but thou art fashioning 
the love of millions, who shall bless thee. 

And while God sojourned with the Lord 
of Jud, his hosts regaled themselves with 
the company of the asaphs in the kingdoms 
of the Lord, and great was the love and 
rejoicing amongst them. 

CHAPTER IX. 

When God's visit was ended, and the 
hosts notified, the Lord gave a banquet, 
during which the angels sang and danced 
and trumpeted. After that God and his 
hosts embarked on the ship in readiness to 
proceed on the journey; and the Lord and 
his hosts went up to the ship to take 
leave. 

God said: When dan approacheth we 
shall meet again. May Jehovih prosper 
thy harvests till then. 

The Lord said: That is another hun- 
dred years, O God; I almost live in a wil- 
derness. I have not ten millions of souls, 
mortals and spirits. 

God said: Thy kingdom shall be mighty 
when I come again. May it glorify Jeho- 
vih! 



They embraced and separated. Each 
gave the sign of Jehovih's name. Upward 
raised the ship of God with banners out- 
stretched, and taking course still west, sped 
on above the mountain tops, like a meteor 
hurled from heaven. Meanwhile the trum- 
peters gave forth the gladly solemn sound 
of the March of God. 

But ere the ship had made half its 
journey, an approaching light came forth 
from the far west, radiant and laden with 
hosts from the Lord of Dis. When the 
ships drew near and halted, God called 
with a loud voice, saying: In Jehovih's 
name, all hail. I know my Lord cometh. 

And thereupon the Lord answered: 
Hail to thee, O God, Son of Jehovih! 
And they turned the Lord's ship and lash- 
ed the twain together even as they sped on. 
And after they had all exchanged welcome 
and good wishes, the Lord said: Ere we 
go to my exalted throne let us survey the 
continent over which thy servant is Lord. 
And God answered: Thy will be done, O 
Lord. And so they journeyed for many 
days, oft descending to the earth in places 
where the Lord's angels had begun colo- 
nies with mortals, impressing man with 
words of speech, and to live in villages. 

And God said that all he saw was well 
done. So they came to the throne of the 
Lord and sojourned there for sixty days. 
And God and his hosts and the Lord and 
his ashars and asaphs were together in 
general reunion, praying, singing and 
dancing and reasoning on the endless 
works of Jehovih. But one book could 
not contain all that was said and done, 
and of the excursions made, and the visits 
over the mountains and plains, where in 
thousands of years hence man should live 
and build cities, and go to war and destroy 
them. And the mathematicians foretold 
the great cities and nations that would rise 
up; how this one and that one would 
move to battle; how their great cities 
would fall in ruins and be covered up by 
falling nebulae, and by mountains wash- 
ing down upon them, so that even their re- 
membrance should be lost. And yet, fur- 
ther on, the mathematicians foretold the 
the coming of kosmon when the ruined 
cities would be discovered and their histo- 
ries deciphered by the su'is of man in 
Great Jehovih's hand. And now when all 



26 



CYCLE OF SETHANTES 



these things were estimated, the prophets 
and mathematicians went before God, as 
the Lord had commanded them, and they 
spake to God, Son of Jehovih, telling of 
all these wonders. 

When they had finished, God said: 
What is our service on the earth, O Lord? 
A few centuries at most, and we will have 
risen up from the earth, taking our hosts 
with us to dwell in higher realms. But 
there shall be other Gods and Lords after 
us, to deal with mortals and spirits newly 
born. Aft^r awhile there shall be great 
warriors and great cities and nations, and 
they shall have Gods and Lords of their 
times who will dwell many a weary year, 
aye, century, in the darkness with man. 
After that again, even the Gods and Lords 
will be forgotten. And man will turn 
against Great Jehovih, putting to death 
His worshippers, themselves preferring 
idols of stone and metal, and spirits of 
men born of woman. 

The Lord said: And yet further on 
a brighter light adorneth the way. Great 
Jehovih's hand sendeth the traveling 
worlds into the light of Kosmon, and new 
prophets arise gathering up the histories 
lost, and glorious plan of the Great Spirit 
over all. Yea, even our labor and our 
ships will be seen by mortals of that day. 

Thus they discoursed, reading the past 
and future, and weighing the present; 
whilst angels less informed, gathered 
around to learn how worlds are peopled, 
and nations and cities destroyed; the far- 
off and the near at hand, being as nothing 
in Jehovih's vast universe. 

But the time came for God's departure, 
and he and his traveling host embarked, 
and the Lord and his hosts drew around 
to receive God's prayer ere he left. And 
so after they had embraced, God said: 
Though I go away, my love abideth with 
you all. And now, O Jehovih, bless these 
my fellow-laborers, and make them strong 
to endure their great trials. Thine is the 
power and glory, O Father. Amen. 

The ship rose up and the hosts ex- 
claimed: Glory to Thee, O Jehovih, for- 
ever and forever. 

CHAPTER X. 

Jehovih spake to God, saying: Steer 
thy ship to the south land, My Son, and 



visit the Lord of Vohu. And God went 
as commanded to the south, running close 
to the earth, over deserts and mountains. 
But when they were a short way on the 
journey they were met by the ship of the 
Lord, who had been apprised of God's 
coming, and they made fast to the vessel 
of God, and all the angels saluted and in- 
termingled, having known one another for 
hundreds of years, and some for more 
than a thousand years. 

The Lord said: On our journey let 
us run through the valleys and the banks 
of rivers, for it is here that both Asu and 
men dwell. And so they journeyed, sur- 
veying the earth as they sailed above. 
The country was mostly barren, support- 
ing neither man nor beast. But by the 
river sides man dwelt, burrowing in the 
ground to avoid the heat by day and the 
cold by night. And they came to places 
where the angels of the Lord were dwell- 
ing with mortals, having inspired them to 
make villages and to hide their nakedness. 

The Lord said: Behold, O God, only 
the unseen is potent over man. Could the 
beasts or the stones of the forest tell man 
to hide his nakedness, he would not; nei- 
ther will he heed his brother's voice. 
Without experience man cannot be ad- 
vised profitably to himself, for so hath 
Jehovih made him. Because man cannot 
discern angel presence, the angels alone 
can teach man and inspire him to new life. 
For they talk to him in his sleep, and 
show him what is for his own good. And 
when he waketh in the morning he imag- 
ines it was himself talking, and is ambitious 
to obey himself. Patient and of long en- 
durance are the angels of Jehovih. 

God said: Will man ever know he hath 
been raised up? Will he be believing? 
Or will he, too, need to go to some new 
world and raise up the first fruits thereof 
and toil his hundreds of years with naked 
mortals? O Jehovih, how wisely Thou 
hast shapen the labors of the believing and 
the unbelieving. Lo, man comes forth 
out of the earth, boasting of his unbelief, 
saying: Except I see with my own eyes, 
and feel with my own hands, I will not 
believe. But thou, O Jehovih, hast fitted 
a labor for his eyes, and for his hands, to 
his heart's content. And yet another man 
cometh forth out of the earth, believing, 



CYCLE OF SETHANTES 



27 



and quickly he mounts to the thrones of 
Thy exalted heavens. 

The Lord said: Who knoweth Thy 
wisdom, O Jehovih! Who cannot perceive 
Thee in the foundations of Thy everlasting 
worlds? Thou hast provided nurses for 
the new Earth; and thou wilt bring forth 
on Earth many who will, in the far fu- 
ture time, be laboring as Thy Lord and his 
angels labor here. Of what expanse is 
Thy wisdom, O Jehovih. 

Thus they conversed and journeyed 
forth till they reached the throne and place 
of the Lord. . And here they made fast 
their ships, and they descended down to 
the city of Ong'oo, which was situated 
about the middle of the continent of Vohu. 
And the Lord now sent messengers to all 
the ashars in his dominions, appointing 
ten days of rest, and time for feasting, 
music, dancing and worshipping Jehovih. 
And the hosts of the. Lord and of God held 
a reunion, being the first for over a hun- 
dred years. 

And then God went about over all 
the continent of Vohu, inspecting the 
work the Lord had done, and he pro- 
nounced it good before Jehovih. When 
God had rested the full time, he and his 
hosts entered the ship of God, and taking 
leave of the Lord and his hosts, departed 
on the journey, saluting the Lord ^Ich a 
thousand trumpeters in the name of Jeho- 
vih. 

CHAPTER XI 

And now came the long journey across 
the ocean. God said: Great is Thy wis- 
dom, O Jehovih, in the division of waters. 
These barriers provide nations against na- 
tions. A refuge Thou hast made beyond 
the waters, and the evil man cannot pur- 
sue. But greater still are Thy spirit 
oceans, O Father. The spirits of darkness 
cannot cross over, and the spirits of new- 
born people are not contaminated. Thou 
far-seeing, Thou bestower of thrift into 
the hands of Thy Gods and Thy Lords. 

The master of the ship provided well 
for the journey; and presently the vessel 
of fire sped over the water, high above 
the clouds that cover the ocean, onward 
to the bleak and desolate west. On the 
far-off coast, the Lord of the land of 
Thouri stood, stationed in a ship, to wel- 



come God to the great west lands. And 
this was the land called by angels in after 
time North Guatama, signifying the meet- 
ing of nations and the dawn of kosmon. 

God came down out of the ship and 
stood on the land, and a light of etherean 
flame descended upon him, and Jehovih 
spake out of the Light, saying: Hear Me, 
O My Son, hither have I brought thee. 
This land is the last of the circle, even 
as Whaga is the first. Behold, when the 
earth is circumscribed around about with 
such as choose Me, I will come hither with 
a great awakening light to the souls of 
men. 

On this land will I finish the dominion 
of the self Gods and Lords on earth. 
Through Thee and Thy Lords will I now 
lay the foundation for My kingdoms. On 
this land will I raise up a people who shall 
be the fulfilling of that which the I'hins 
of Whaga profess; for My chosen shall 
come out boldly against all dominion save 
Mine, even Jehovih. Look over this land, 
My Son, and provide unto the time of kos- 
mon. My prophets shall foretell thee what 
shall happen. Thou shalt look upon the 
mountains and strong standing rocks, and 
the thought of thy soul shall pierce them, 
and the impression thereof shall be as a 
written book before the races of men in 
that day. Neither shall they know the 
cause, but they shall come forth in tens of 
thousands, putting away all self Gods and 
Lords and ancient tyranny, for My sake. 
Thy soul shall be My talisman, deep en- 
graven in the land, water and mountains. 
On this land shall not any Lord nor God 
be established by the sword, for it is My 
land, which I planned for the deliverance 
of the nations of the earth. 

The hosts of both the ships came and 
joined in happy reunion after a hundred 
years' separation; and God traveled over 
the land and waters of the great west con- 
tinent. And all the places that the Lord 
had searched out, to the east and west and 
north and south, even to the farthest 
boundary, were recorded in the books of 
heaven. 

God said: And thou, My Lord, shall 
mark out the place whereon shall be found- 
ed Jehovih's kingdom on earth. And a 
record of thy labors shall descend through 
the Lords and Gods that come after thee, 



28 



CYCLE OF SETHANTES 



down to the time of the coming light of 
Kosmon. And the people who shall dwell 
here till that day, shall never be worship- 
pers of any Lord or God, such as other 
people shall worship. Let my seal be put 
upon this land in the name of Jehovih. 

So, after that time, God and his Lords 
rested from their labors. And the Lord 
prepared a feast of reunion for all the an- 
gels of his dominions. And they assem- 
bled and sang and prayed and danced, and 
conversed on things long past and things 
of the future, reassuring one another of 
their love and high esteem. 

When the banquet was ended, God and 
his traveling host, in due ceremony and 
order, took their leave. Thus God depart- 
ed. And when the ship of God was raised 
up and under way, the Voice of Jehovih 
came to God, saying: 

Steer thy ship, My Son, around over 
all the other lands and islands and waters 
of the earth. Go low down to the earth 
that thy recording angels may witness the 
affairs of men and all the places I created 
on the earth. 

Thus God visited all places on land and 
water, even where man lived not, as well 
as where he lived, and the angels made a 
record thereof in the books of heaven. 

And the time of the journey and the 
visits of God to the places of earth and 
her heavens, was one year and seven days, 
and his visit to the Lords was completed. 
He sent messengers to Hored announcing 
the time of his coming. And he then set 
sail therefor. 

CHAPTER XII. 

When it was known in Hored that God 
was about to return, Ha'jah put all things 
in readiness for God's reception. 

And there volunteered ten thousand 
musicians and five thousand bearers of 
banners, one thousand marshals, and offi- 
cers of the throne, and one hundred thou- 
sand receivers, to go part way and meet 
God and his companions. And Ha'jah 
granted their prayers and they started at 
once, being the most majestic host that 
had as yet gone forth in the lower heaven. 
And when they were a little way off, God 
and his ship of fire approached in heavenly 
splendor. And the marshals met him and 



laid hold of the han'iv of the ship, whereon 
all the hosts did in like manner, save the 
musicians, who sang and played. 

When they drew near and entered Hor- 
ed, Ha'jah broke down from his high es- 
tate, running to meet God as a child would 
run to its father. And when the multitude 
saw this, they also broke loose from decor- 
ous behavior and gave full vent to their 
outbursting love for God and his hosts. 
And all the people became as a tumult in 
rivalry of rejoicing. After a short time 
God and Ha'jah turned and walked to the 
throne, and Ha'jah took his place, and God 
sat on his right and order reigned. 

Ha'jah said: In Thy % name, O Jehovih, 
I welcome back Thy first God of Earth to 
the kingdom Thou hast bestowed upon 
him, and Thy sons and daughters. As 
much as he hath glorified Thee, by his la- 
bor and by his wisdom and love, so do 
we honor him in Thy, name and for Thy 
glory. 

God said: In Thy name, O Jehovih, 
do I return to these, my loves. That I am 
returned I glorify Thee, O my Father. 
That thou hast made me to rejoice, is the 
glory of my life. 

And now a great light gathered 
around the throne, so that many could not 
look thereon, and the power of Jehovih 
came^upon Ha'jah, and the Voice spake 
through him, saying: 

This is again thy throne, O My Son! 
Thou shalt finish that which I put upon 
thee. Thy people shall learn the manner 
of My kingdoms, and know that even as I 
make all, so do I rule over all. Hang up 
thy traveling garb, My Son; dismiss thy 
traveling hosts and resume thy seat on the 
throne. 

The Voice departed: Ha'jah rose up 
and stood aside, and the light fell upon 
God, and he resumed the throne and was 
hailed by the multitude in Jehovih's name. 

God said to Ha'jah: Because thou hast 
prospered my kingdom during one whole 
year, thou shalt be my companion and as- 
sistant, with power and wisdom to super- 
intend all matters that are not direct with 
my Lords. 

Behold, this day have I set apart as a 
new day in heaven and earth; because on 
this day the sun taketh its course for the 
Hi'dan line; and it shall be called the new 



CYQLE OF SETHANTES 



29 



year's day. And from this time forth, it 
shall be the day of the relief watch in Hor- 
ed. And ye shall proclaim it throughout 
heaven and earth to all who serve Jeho- 
vih. 

The kingdom of Hored has so increas- 
ed that we must enlarge it, and the Council 
shall be called Moeb, and it shall be an as- 
sembly over all councils below it. And 
Moeb shall no longer deal with the affairs 
of individuals, even though they be Lords; 
but it shall have dominion with the cities 
and kingdoms of heaven, and with judg- 
ments and decrees. 

But in all matters of less degree, this 
my son Ha'jah, shall have dominion. And 
thou, O Ha'jah, shall build thee a house in 
Hored, near this throne, and it shall be thy 
place of business. 

CHAPTER XIII. 

So God enlarged the place of Hored, 
and built one thousand more pillars of fire, 
enlarging the circle and otherwise making 
it a place of splendor. And God called to- 
gether the recorders of heaven, and bade 
them select one hundred thousand new 
members for the house of Moeb, choosing 
them from the highest on the lists. 

God said: In this case, seek not the 
most learned, nor the most prayerful; but 
choose ye such as rank highest in assim- 
ilating to Jehovih and to their fellows; 
for such are the first to become Gods and 
Goddesses. Jehovih saith: A strong man 
may do more good works than a weak one, 
and yet the latter may stand fairer in My 
sight. I open the way to the weak and 
the strong; to the learned and the un- 
learned. 

God said: In all these matters, what- 
ever man or woman hath put away self 
desires for self's sake, serving Jehovih by 
laboring for others, is on the road to wis- 
dom. And if the records show a sufficient 
time for growth in such man or woman, 
whereby these virtues become organic, 
then choose ye that person, for of such 
shall be Moeb. 

So the laborers erected walls consist- 
ing of pillars of fire, and built Moeb 
within, suitable for the members to be 
seated according to their rank, and the 
day it was finished the recorders brought 



the new members, and they went into the 
temple to their respective places. 

And when seated, God spake from the 
throne, saying: To thee, O Jehovih, have 
I built the house of Moeb in Hored; and 
by Thy wisdom have I chosen the mem- 
bers thereof. To thee, O Father, I dedi- 
cate this temple, and it shall be Thy house. 
Give us of Thy light, O Jehovih, that we 
may not err. 

A light descended from the heavens 
above, and fell upon the members of Moeb, 
as a symbol of approval by the Archan- 
gels. Presently the new members stood 
up and God said: 

Above your heads I make the sign of 
Jehovih's name, in a circle of fire, with 
the cross lines and the leaf of life. 
By it are ye sworn to the Father's la- 
bor. Hear me, then, O my beloved. Ye 
are henceforth denied individual ministra- 
tion with mortals; but ye are now become 
a unit with many, and as such must labor 
that your love and wisdom be strong in 
concert of action. Henceforth ye shall 
not say: What can I do for this man 
or that man, or this woman or that woman, 
or this child or that child? For this is in- 
dividual labor; and on the earth such min- 
istration belongeth to the ashars, and 
in atmospherea such ministration be- 
longeth to the asaphs. But ye shall 
minister to organic communities who 
are composed of individuals. There are 
communities for factories, others for edu- 
cation, others for treatment of the sick; 
and such communities exist both on earth 
and in heaven. 

Ye shall divide yourselves into groups 
for this purpose, and every group shall 
have its special business in charge; and 
each group shall stand in Moeb as one 
member of Jehovih's judgment seat. Ac- 
cording to your talents shall ye divide, 
and group together, choosing such depart- 
ment wherein each one hath the greatest 
wisdom and strength. Withdraw, then, 
and thus complete your groups according 
to the rates my proper officers will assign, 
and then return into Moeb, and in 
Jehovih's name, take the seats allotted to 
you all. 

CHAPTER XIV. 

On the second day after Moeb was 
founded, and all the members were in 



30 



CYCLE OF SETHANTE8 



their respective places, Jehovih spake 
through God, saying: 

Now have you begun the second res- 
urrection. Even as the mortal putteth off 
the corporeal body, and is born in spirit, 
beginning the first resurrection, so are ye, 
putting away individual self and becoming 
an organic community, the beginning of 
the second resurrection. As they of the 
first are for individual self, so have I bound 
them close on the face of the earth. As 
they survived on the earth on corporeal 
food, so have I made them to survive in 
the lowest heaven on atmospherean food. 
As Moeb has risen above these conditions, 
so will I raise the foundations of the tem- 
ple of Moeb higher up from the earth than 
Hored, and Hored shall be the lower 
house of My kingdom. 

The Voice departed, and God saluted 
Ha'jah in the name of Jehovih; and a 
great light enveloped the temple of Moeb, 
and the es'enaurs chanted a hymn of praise; 
after which God arose and stood in the 
throne of Jehovih, saying: 

Glory, glory be to Jehovih! Boundless 
and Almighty Creator. Thou art ever 
present, and full of love, wisdom and pow- 
er. Glory, glory to Thee, forever and 
ever. Amen. 

The members of Moeb chanted. The 
swift messengers assumed their respective 
globes of light, and began to ascend in 
every direction, carrying the word to the 
exalted heavens that the second resurrec- 
tion had been founded in the heavens of 
the earth. 

And God crowned Ha'jah as sub-God 
of Hored, and he was proclaimed to all 
the quarters of heaven and earth. 



CHAPTER XV. 

Ha'jah said: With the exaltation of 
Moeb, so shall my places be exalted before 
Jehovih. Let the enumerators of the com- 
munities of heaven send representatives 
before me. The communities of manufac- 
turers who produce food and clothes for 
the es'yans, the communities for hospitals 
and nurseries, the communities for educa- 
tion, the communities for training messen- 
gers, and all other communities. 



When the representatives came, accord- 
ing to the instructions of the marshals, 
and were before the throne, Ha'jah said: 

The toilers shall not be always toilers; 
the physicians not always runners after 
the sick. Whosoever is proficient will I 
exalt. He that can walk shall no longer 
creep. Many are wise and strong, and 
some have passed beyond the boundary of 
self-desires for self-sake. A child may not 
have self-desires, but then it lacketh wis- 
dom and strength. A full-grown man or 
woman may have wisdom and strength, 
but lack in the abnegation of self. 

I will make every community a double 
from this time forth, and one shall be 
called Maga, and the other shall be called 
Minga. Maga shall be my promoted la- 
borers, who are being prepared for the sec- 
ond resurrection. And Maga's labor shall 
be in concert with Moeb, the house of Je- 
hovih. But Minga's labor shall be as 
heretofore, even with individual affairs and 
the organizing of new places for the de- 
livered es'yans, who are the fruit of the 
Lords and their kingdoms on the earth. 

Let the marshals select judges to carry 
out these my decrees, in the name of Jeho- 
vih! 

CHAPTER XVI. 

From the founding of Hored until the 
instalment of Ha'jah, was one hundred 
and thirty years, and at that time the 
kingdom of heaven was fully organized ac- 
cording to the decree of Jehovih. And 
the kingdoms of the Lords on earth were 
also established. 

And at that time the earth had passed 
into Hon'she, in the etherean space, where 
dwell the Orian Shrevarhs, to whom the 
swift messengers from God had reported 
the condition of the earth's surface, with 
tablets denoting the upward and down- 
ward grade of mortals. 

The Shrevarhs said: The earth hath 
not attained her fullness. The gases of 
her low regions must be purified to make 
more places for mortals. 

And there fell upon Earth fire and 
brimstone, iron and phosphorus, and the 
shower fell in the lowest regions where 
swamps abounded in poisonous gases, in 
each of the five divisions of the earth. And 
God being apprised of the danger com- 



CYCLE OF SETHANTES 



31 



manded the Lords to cause the guardian 
angels to impress mortals to depart away 
from such places as were to be visited by 
the shower, and all who could be inspired 
to leave were not harmed. But many of 
the Asuans were consumed in the fire. 

And God sent extra workmen, and sur- 
geons and physicians down from heaven 
to such spirits as were falling into forget- 
fulness and dissolution, and commanded 
that they be engrafted on the surviving 
Asuans for pity's sake; and this was ac- 
complished through the Lords of the earth 
and the ashars. 

At the end of two hundred years God 
enumerated the people of the lower hea- 
ven, and there were besides the spirits of 
the fetals (many of whom were doubtful 
as to everlasting life), two hundred and 
ninety-six million souls. Of this number 
there had been raised up to the grade of 
Brides and Bridegrooms to Jehovih more 
than thirty million, who were the first of 
Earth's production. 

As this was the sixth generation of the 
offspring of the etherean hosts of Sethan- 
tes, and all being raised to the rank of 
Brides and Bridegrooms, their earth bond- 
age was completed. 

God summoned the house of Moeb for 
the revelations of Jehovih on the first day 
of the first year of dan of Hon'she. And 
when they were thus assembled, and had 
chanted to Jehovih appropriate anthems 
for the times past, the All Light came 
upon God, and he said: 

Behold, the time of dan of Hon'she is 
at hand. Ere three days pass by, the 
hosts from the etherean heavens will de- 
scend to accomplish the resurrection of my 
hosts to the regions whence they came two 
hundred years ago. Summon My Lords 
of the earth, and my people of heaven; 
proclaim my words unto them. 

O ye that peopled the earth with ever- 
lasting life; the harvest of the new year is 
ripened, it shall be gathered into the hea- 
vens above. Rejoice ye, for the glory of 
deliverance is at hand. In Orian fields 
hosts of angels and Archangels full of 
hope and love, wait to receive these, the 
first fruits of the new Earth. Make ready, 
for etherean Gods and Goddesses are set- 
ting sail in the regions above to come and 
deliver you. Proclaim My words in all 



places, saying: To as many as desire to 
ascend, come ye to Moeb in the name of 
Jehovih. 

Messengers went forth, both in heaven 
and on earth, and proclaimed as had been 
commanded. And on the third day there 
assembled in Moeb and Hored ninety mill- 
ion angels, to witness the descending and 
ascending of Jehovih's chosen. And the 
Archangels of Hon'she sent a hundred 
thousand Gods and Goddesses to guard 
Moeb and Hored around about, to dispel 
and keep away the clouds and sunshine, so 
as to add glory to the scene. 

CHAPTER XVII. 

The Loo'is came before God, and hav- 
ing organized themselves into one com- 
munity, so as to make it lawful to speak 
in Moeb, they appointed Ga'wasa to speak 
on behalf of the community. 

Ga'wasa said: Hear me, O God, in 
the name of Jehovih. Thou hast ordained 
me according to the custom of heaven, to 
be a master of generations with mortals, 
and yet one generation is incomplete; 
wherefore I have come before thee. This 
day I have been summoned by Jehovih 
through Thy messengers, saying: To as 
many as desire to ascend to etherea in the 
next resurrection, come, for the time of 
harvest is at hand. Thus saith God, Son 
of Jehovih. Behold, now, another gener- 
ation do I desire to dwell on earth. 

God said: The places of heaven are 
open to all. If thou wouldst ascend now, 
do even so. If thou wilt tarry one gener- 
ation, then thou shalt tarry two hundred 
years, for of such period will be the next 
harvest. 

Ga'wasa said: In Jehovih's name let 
my brethren pass before thee in judgment. 

God said: Jehovih's will be done. 

Ga'wasa withdrew and went and told 
his brethren what was said; and presently 
they came in and passed in judgment be- 
fore God. 

God said: Thou hast said: Let me 
pass in judgment before thee. Hear me, 
then, for this is my judgment: If thou as- 
cend with thy work incomplete, thou wilt 
be unhappy. Remain, therefore, for a 
greater glory is within thy reach. 

The loo'is passed to the left, signify- 
ing their determination to tarry yet two 



32 



CYCLE OF SETHANTES 



hundred years with mortals. After the 
loo'is came others desiring to be ad- 
judged by God, and to all who had incom- 
pleted work, God said: Remain. And 
they so remained. 

Besides these were seventy thousand 
ethereans eligible to ascend, who volun- 
teered to remain with mortals another two 
hundred years. Amongst these were the 
five Lords and Ha'jah, and four hundred 
messengers belonging to Hored, and 
seven hundred women in fetal in the west- 
ern division of Hored under the dominion 
of the Lord of Whaga. 



CHAPTER XVIII. 

Jehovih said: The time of Earth is 
at hand; the deliverance of her first-born 
will fall at your doors. Come forth, O My 
Sons and Daughters of the Orian fields 
of Hon'she, receive ye them from my 
hand. 

Onesyi, high aspiring Goddess of Hon'- 
she, and the thousand counselors, called 
together a host of five millions of emanci- 
pated angels, and to them the dignified 
Onesyi said: 

Unlike all harvests heretofore delivered 
to us from other corporeal worlds, Jehovih 
sendeth us the first born of Earth. Let 
us rejoice and glorify Him, O my beloved. 
Send forth to the boundaries of Hon'she 
and proclaim the hosts of Earth upraised. 
Provide them with mansions, ye who re- 
main at home. And you who volunteer to 
go to Earth to receive them, come quickly. 

Swift messengers have just come 
to me from the arc of Wan, proclaiming 
Etisyai will be there. She it was who be- 
stowed Jehovih's crown on the first God of 
the corporeal Earth. Her hosts, a million 
strong, go by the way of Tiviyus, and 
pray we meet them in O'wea. And thou, 
Wistaw, shall sit on my throne while I 
go to Earth, to receive the thirty mill- 
ion new born, the glorious gift of Jehovih. 

The young Earth hath given birth. O 
the joy of the first-born. I will take with 
me a host of singers, a million strong. 
Their voices shall have power and sweet- 
ness to win the love and adoration of all 
the thirty million. The glory of Jehovih's 
works shall shine so brilliantly upon them 



that all past trials shall be forgotten. 
Hasten, O ye Gods and Goddesses! Let 
down the curtains of fire. Here begins 
the play of Jehovih in the management of 
a new world. 

Now gathered together men and wo- 
men long raised up in the emancipated hea- 
vens, whose wills were potent over a'ji 
and nebulae, and swift in appropriating 
what Jehovih had fashioned in the firma- 
ment. And they built a ship, the size of 
which was equal to the width of Hored. 
And they let down curtains from the ship, 
and the curtains were like flames of fire, 
and they reached downward equal to the 
breadth of Earth. 

These Gods and Goddesses were as a 
unit in will, and potent and swift in work, 
and the etherean ship was quickly laden 
and started on her course through the 
vault of heaven. Past the a'jian fields of 
Che'wang she rode swiftly. Soon the hosts 
of the much-loved Etisyai were seen in a 
smaller craft, highly polished and swift, 
making way for O'wea. 

Up went a shout of joy from millions 
of throats, then a song of delight; O the 
joy in Jehovih's boundless dominions. 
And now the twain approached O'wea; 
they slackened speed and neared each oth- 
er till the ships touched and were joined 
by skilled workmen. Forth leapt the two 
Goddesses, Etisyai and Onesyi, in no 
stateliness or ceremony, but like children 
in whom love is transcendant they fly to 
each other's arms, amidst the outburst of 
joy from the countless throng. Still on- 
ward moves the etherean ship, beautiful 
and majestic, steadily taking course to the 
new Earth. 



CHAPTER XIX. 

And now the evening of the third day 
had come, and God and his hosts in Moeb 
were hastening all things, to be ready for 
the great light that was to descend from 
high heaven. The ninety million angels 
looked upward, waiting and watching. 
And many a one who remembered Etisyai 
of two hundred years ago, wondered if she 
would return in such glory as she display- 
ed when she came and crowned God by 
Jehovih's command. 



CYCLE OF SETHANTES 



33 



Some were robing themselves in white, 
and hastening nervously, like a bride about 
to wed. Some were inclined to sorrow for 
leaving the earth and lower heaven where 
they had toiled so long. And some were 
stately, and by their presence said: Thy 
will be done, O Jehovih. 

God ascended the throne and Ha'jah 
came up and sat on his right hand; and the 
light of Jehovih shone so brightly upon 
them that many new-born es'yan specta- 
tors could not look upon them. 

God said: One dan hath come and 
gone; this harvest is but thirty millions. 

Ha'jah said: Thy Son, O Jehovih, 
hath shaped the destiny of a world. Great 
is his glory. 

A light of golden hue gathered above 
the throne, taking the form of a triangle; 
and there was engraven on each corner a 
single letter which read, I-O-D; and it 
was in the characters of the land of Wha- 
ga, bestowed by the Lord on the altars in 
the houses of worship on earth, and its 
meaning was thirty-three million, which 
was the number of the earth-born spirits 
prepared for the emancipated heaven in 
etherea. 

God said: Take thou this triangle, O 
thou Son of the Most High. And as 
long as Seffas endureth on the earth shall 
it be the bequeathed heirloom of heaven, 
descending from God to God. 

As God stretched forth his hands the 
triangle became solid, and God hung it on 
Ha'jah's neck, adding: In the name of 
Jehovih, receive this jewel in memory of 
this parting. 

Ha'jah said: O God, thou symbol of 
the three attributes, love, wisdom and 
power. Thou didst leave thy stately home, 
where thou had Gods and Goddesses for 
companions, and come to Earth, which 
was young and curtained round with poi- 
sonous gases, to guard the young and im- 
perfect angels of other worlds in their wan- 
derings forth. Thou didst give them lib- 
erty and yet redeem them. Thou hast 
stretched forth thy hand over the earth 
and made it to yield souls to glorify the 
Creator. And yet in all the while thou 
hast never quoted thyself. O that this 
could be taught to angels and men. This 
day I am to be crowned to fill the place 



thou hast built up; but I falter and tremble 
like a child. 

Ha'jah burst into tears, and after a 
while he added: O Jehovih, Thou hast 
created love in my soul, and it hath 
grown to be a mountain. God, Thy Son, 
who has been my tutor for a thousand 
years, and on many worlds, corpor and 
es, is now thrusting Thy glory upon me. 

God said: Heed thou Earth and 
her heavens, for they are to be thine for 
one dan. And remember also, that though 
I ascend with my hosts to etherea, yet I 
have charge of this world until the com- 
pletion of this cycle, two thousand eight 
hundred years. My Archangels shall 
henceforth answer to thy prayers to Je- 
hovih. 

Suddenly a light came down from the 
firmament, like a new star, twinkling, with 
a halo extending wide on every side. All 
eyes were turned up, full of expectancy. 
Hushed and still the ninety million stood. 
Presently the star assumed a brighter 
phase and spread its halo onward, with 
horns descending like a crescent, such as 
is formed in sacred worship when a God 
is standing in the midst. Larger and larger 
the light grew, and tremulous and wav- 
ing like sheets of fire. Then shot down 
toward Hored and Moeb three rays oC 
light, piercing, and in advance of the cen- 
tral orb. And the three rays were red,, 
blue and yellow; but the crescent beyond 
was white, and it shone abroad over the 
heavens, so that the corporeal sun and 
stars in the firmament were invisible. 

At beholding the majesty and grandeur 
of Jehovih's hosts descending, millions of 
es'yans in the lower heaven broke and 
fled; some ran and hid to avoid the 
threatening light. For such is the magni- 
fying power of etherean flame, that all 
dark thoughts and hidden evil lurking in 
the soul are magnified, and made so plain 
that even the dumb can read them through. 

Millions of the ethereans on God's staff 
had seen such scenes before, and now 
stood as though riveted by the joy within 
them. To them- clung the newly-raised 
from earth, who had known no other hea- 
ven. From these there arose millions of 
whispers, saying: It is like a new death; 
like a new birth. Behold, a man dies on 
the earth, and his spirit findeth itself in 



34 



CYCLE OF SETHANTES 



another world. And now again we are 
going to still another world. 

Quickly now, came the great light, the 
three rays projecting; and these were the 
orders of marshals from the a'jian fields of 
O'wea and Hon'she. And there were of 
marshals one million, and they cast the 
curtains round about to cover all of the 
great kingdom of Hored. Chief of the 
marshals was Ah'jeng; and next to him 
were five sub-chiefs; and next came one 
thousand tributary chiefs, who were mas- 
ters of the ceremonies; and they came in 
the center of the three great rays of light, 
descending swiftly and direct toward the 
throne of God. And the substance of the 
rays of light was like curtains of cloth, 
one end of which reached up to the now 
near approaching crescent sea of fire. 

When the great ship was nearly touch- 
ing the pillars of fire surrounding Moeb, 
its speed slackened a little and it came 
more and more slowly. The chieftains 
leaped from the etherean flames and stood 
at the foot of God's throne, saluting in Je- 
hovih's name. 

God and Ha'jah stood up and answered 
the sign, then descending went to the left 
and right of Ah'jeng, and Ah'jeng sat 
upon the throne and the Voice of Jehovih 
spake through him, saying: 

Hold up your heads and rejoice, O My 
sons and daughters. Behold, I come in a 
flame of fire. I am here and there, through- 
out the place of heaven, boundless. I 
gather together and I put asunder the 
loves of mortals and angels. For they 
shall go abroad in My firmament and be- 
hold My glorious works. Down to the 
corporeal world I descend, and carry hence 
the loved. I will make all people look up 
to My kingdoms. Down to the lower hea- 
ven I come in ships of light, curtained 
about with etherean mantles, and gather 
in My harvest of new births to higher 
worlds, more radiant. My hosts below 
shall look up and glorify My everlasting 
splendors. I give the tear of grief and sor- 
row and pity; but in its flowing forth, I 
come with holier light and power to stir 
up the souls of My people. For they shall 
learn to speak to their Father, Who hears 
their cry, and is full of love. 

My joy is in the birth and growing up 
of souls, and in the joy of their joys, and in 



the proclaiming of their adoration for My 
boundless universe. I call to them in 
darkness and they come forth; when they 
halt in the darkness, I call again; and 
I send my high raised angels to them, 
and they call also. Yea, I fill the sky with 
the splendor of my works, that I may stir 
man up to rise and enjoy the things I have 
made. 

The Voice departed, and Ah'jeng said: 
Behold the glory of the heavens, O my be- 
loved, and the reward of the diligent in 
heart. Jehovih lives and reigneth, the 
Highest and never to be reached; the For- 
ever Beyond, and yet Ever Present. 

O Thou Light of Light and Life of 
Life, how wonderful is the substance of 
Thy creation. Thou hast given me light 
to behold Thy splendors, which are for- 
ever new. O Jehovih, Thou Past, Present 
and Future, of one time, which is and was 
and ever shall be. Jehovih, Thou Seen 
and Unseen and Potent, who hast from 
Thy very self imparted a part to all the liv- 
ing. Who hast raised up these of Hored. 
Glory be to thee, forever. 

And now by signs and signals, Ah'jeng 
directed the officers of his hosts to take 
possession of Moeb and Hored. And the 
marshals extended out around the place, 
and by their presence added new light to 
the pillars of fire. The marshals were dec- 
orated with colored raiment and signs and 
symbols, denoting the places whence they 
came, and their ranks as Gods, and the 
experience they had passed through. 

And when Ah'jeng ceased speaking, the 
music of the hosts of angels who had been 
chosen to make music for the Brides and 
Bridegrooms filled all the place of Hored, 
first faintly and far off. The work of the 
marshals was in keeping with the time of 
the music; and as the music drew nearer 
and stronger the marshals descended and 
filed off to their respective places. 

Presently the advance of the horns of 
the crescent, and the cold wave of the 
falling sea of fire, swept over the lower 
heaven fearfully and of unquestionable 
power. By a signal from God, the Brides 
and Bridegrooms joined in the music of 
the Archangels, and great was the glory 
thereof. Betwixt the horns of the crescent 
was a star of wonderful beauty; and it 
came toward God's throne, reflecting 



CYCLE OF SETHANTES 



35 



countless rays of light, brilliant and awe- 
inspiring. And as the star drew near, it 
opened on the advance side, as a shell is 
opened, and there with arms entwined, sat 
Etisyai and Onesyi. 

Ah'jeng stepped down and stood at the 
foot of the throne. Masters of the inner 
temple gathered about the star, and unroll- 
ed a carpet reaching across the threshold, 
and the two Goddesses stepped forth from 
the crystaled cushion within the star, and 
glided as if on a ray of light, up to the 
judgment seat of Jehovih. Meanwhile, the 
musicians, a million of voices, chanted: 

Glory, Glory to Jehovih, Creator of 
Worlds! 

Whose place magnificence is, and coun- 
terpart to endless time. 

The All, whose great existence surpass- 
ed 

The grandest thoughts of men and 
Gods. 

Whose worlds in splendor are the 
scrolls 

On which His hands write with the 
souls of mortals. 

His Almighty Will and Boundless 
Love! 

Then the millions of Gods and God- 
desses, formed a mighty amphitheater, in 
which Moeb, with its thirty-three million 
Brides and Bridegrooms of Jehovih, occu- 
pied the arena, themselves arrayed in 
white, but differently from the redeeming 
hosts from the etherean worlds. 

In time to the music, without a word of 
command, moved the hosts, as one person, 
and each as a shining crystal in the place 
allotted, and all as perfect as if Jehovih had 
made each a special work of wonder to 
inspire man with reverence for the talents 
He had created withal. Now when the 
music ceased, all was still. The throne 
was in the east, facing the west. The hosts 
of Moeb, who were the Brides and Bride- 
grooms of Jehovih, occupied the lower 
place, and the ethereans surrounded them 
on all sides, rising higher and higher in 
the distance. 

God and Ha'jah met the Goddesses at 
the foot of the throne. God knew Onesyi 
hundreds of years before in other worlds, 
and he remembered Etisyai, who had 
crowned him two hundred years ago. So 
also did Ha'jah know Etisyai and Onesyi. 



When they met they all saluted by touch- 
ing the right hands; and immediately the 
Gods ascended to the center of the throne, 
and God went on the right and Ha'jah on 
the left. Etisyai and Onesyi looked hope- 
fully on the Brides and Bridegrooms. 
Presently the Voice of Jehovih spake out 
of the light of the throne, saying: 

Soul of My soul, substance of My sub- 
stance, created I man. Out of My cor- 
poreal self clothed I him with flesh and 
blood and bones. Man's spirit I gave 
from out Mine own spirit, and I quickened 
him to move on the face of the earth. 

God and the Brides and Bridegrooms 
responded, being moved by the All Light: 
Out of corpor I came, quickened by Jeho - 
vih's Ever Presence. By virtue of his 
Love, Wisdom and Power came I into the 
world. To Jehovih all glory is due for- 
ever. 

Again, Jehovih spake, saying: A Time 
I allotted to man to grow, to attain love, 
wisdom and power; a time to rejoice and 
a time of sorrow; a time to beget offspring 
and know a father's care and love; to him 
gave I attributes of My attributes that man 
might know Me and My love. 

Response: By the bondage of my love 
to my begotten, do I know my Father lives 
and reigneth, and will watch over me for- 
ever. 

Again the Voice of Jehovih said: A 
time of mortality I gave to man that he' 
might learn corporeal things, and in the 
place I quickened him into life, I bound 
him for a season. But when man hath ful- 
filled his corporeal life, I provide death to 
deliver him into a new world. 

Response: Beautiful is Thy wisdom, O 
Jehovih, and far reaching. I was bound in 
the flesh even as a beast; likened unto the 
attributes of a beast was my judgment, 
struggling for things of the corporeal 
world. With horror I looked upon death; 
as a sore calamity did I value Thy cutting 
me off. But Thou delivered me into an- 
other world, preserving my reason, bring- 
ing me to the heavens of my forefathers. 

Then Jehovih said: In no time brought 
I man new born into the world without a 
mother and nurse and rich nourishment 
to feed him withal. Yea, I gave him an- 
gels to inspire him and lift him up; and I 
provided a Lord of the earth to manage 



36 



CYCLE OF SETHANTES 



his kingdoms and nations, and a God in 
heaven with a throne and judgment seat, 
that man in the angel world should be pro- 
vided and wisely instructed in soul to 
comprehend the glory and harmony of My 
worlds. 

Response: Bountiful, O my Father, 
above. From nothing that I knew of 
Thou broughtest me into conscious be- 
ing, and in my helpless days fed me with 
rich nourishment. Thou gavest me rulers 
and examples of government on the earth 
to discipline my soul to the order of men. 
And when I was born in heaven, I found 
God on his throne and a well ordered ha- 
ven of rest, with willing angels to clothe 
me and feed me and teach me the ways of 
Thy kingdoms in the firmament. 

Again Jehovih said: When man hath 
fulfilled his time in the lower heaven, I 
prepare him by ample teachers for a higher 
resurrection. As Brides and Bridegrooms 
My hosts adorn them, and I come in a sea 
of fire. First was man wedded to the 
earth; then to the lower heaven was he 
wed, laboring with spirits and mortals. 

The Voice departed, and now Onesyi 
spoke, saying: Behold the Brides and 
Bridegrooms of Jehovih. When they were 
young they were wed first to the earth and 
then to the lower heaven without their 
wills. Now they stand before the throne 
of God. In Thy name, O Jehovih, I com- 
mand them to speak their wills. 

Response: I put away myself for Thee, 
O Jehovih. Make me one with Thee. I 
put away the earth for Thy kingdom's 
sake, O Jehovih. Make me one with 
Thee. I put away Thy Lord and Thy 
God, O Jehovih, for sake of Thee. Thy 
Lord and Thy God raised me up and made 
me strong but lo, the small spark of Thy- 
self within my soul hath grown to be a 
giant, bowing to none but Thee, O Jeho- 
vih. O make me Thy Bride (or Bride- 
groom), O Jehovih. 

Onesyi said: The lame and the weak 
shall have a crutch, but the glory of the 
Father is to see His Brides and Bride- 
grooms walk alone. Whoever to Jehovih 
is wed, shall never more to man nor wo- 
man, nor Lords nor God, nor to any per- 
son, for self's sake, say: Help. 

Response: God and the Lords were 
my saviors. Without them I had never 



known of Thy exalted heavens, O Jehovih. 
Thy spirit calleth me forever upward. 
Thy Lord and Thy God taught me to look 
upward; yea, they prayed for me. Now I 
am strong before Thee, O Jehovih. Hence- 
forth will I pray to Thee only; but never 
for mine own benefit, nor for glory, nor 
for ease, nor for exaltation; but that I may 
be quick and strong and wise to do Thy 
will forever. 

Onesyi said: Brides and Bridegrooms 
of Jehovih, All Hail! All Hail! 

Voice of Jehovih, All Hail! All Hail! 

Onesyi said: To Jehovih and His ever 
lasting kingdoms are ye wed forever. 

Response: To Thee, O Jehovih, am 1 
wed forever. 

Onesyi said: To be one with Him for- 
ever. 

Response: To be one with Jehovih for- 
ever. 

The Voice of Jehovih said: They shall 
judge from My judgment seat. In them 
shall My wisdom shine; for they are Mine 
forever. 

Response: Henceforth, I will consider 
Thee first in all things, O Jehovih, for- 
ever. 

The Voice said: Behold I have woven 
a crown for them. Adorn them in My 
name. 

Response: I will have no crown, save 
that which is woven by Thee, O Jehovih. 
For Thy glory, will I wear Thy crown for- 
ever. 

The Voice said: Behold, they that were 
My sons and daughters have become My 
Brides and Bridegrooms. 

Response: I am Jehovih's forever. 

Onesyi said: Pass before the throne, O 
My beloved. The testimony of Jehovih 
awaited His redeemed. Ye shall dwell in 
the emancipated kingdoms forever. 

And now the hosts of Brides and Bride- 
grooms passed singly before the throne of 
God, the whole thirty-three million. And 
the es'enaurs chanted a hymn of glory, 
and there came down from the firmament 
above mists of yellow, blue and red; and 
the mists fell into the Archangels' hands 
who stood about the throne, and by them 
were woven into crowns, which were placed 
on the heads of the Brides and Bride- 
grooms as they passed. And on the 



CYCLE OF SETHANTES 



37 



crowns were the words: In Wan brought 
forth; delivered in Hon'she. 

As the hosts passed in front of the 
throne, Onesyi said: By that which 
springeth out of the earth is the atmospher- 
ean fed and clothed; but the etherean draw- 
eth from the etherean worlds. Behold the 
crowns of the earth and of the lower hea- 
ven are but symbols of love, wisdom and 
power; but that which I bring from Jeho- 
vih's kingdoms containeth real virtue. 

And lo and behold, the Brides and 
Bridegrooms became as Archangels by vir- 
tue of the crowns from Jehovih's hand. 

CHAPTER XXI. 

When the ceremonies were ended, 
Onesyi said: In the name of Jehovih, we 
will soon rise and go on a long journey, 
and I now proclaim the freedom of the 
hour in Jehovih's name. 

And the people went and mingled with 
each other, rejoicing and saluting. And 
Ha'jah and God and and Etisyai greeted 
one another, and the Lords came forward 
and were also greeted; and then the mar- 
shals and the es'enaurs, and all long-serv- 
ing laborers. And lastly, all that had re- 
deemed any man or woman from darkness 
to light, came also, and were saluted and 
duly honored. 

And for the space of one hour all the 
angels indulged in reunion with fullness 
of heart; but no book could relate a thou- 
sandth part of the questions asked and love 
assurances expressed. 

When the hour was ended, Onesyi sig- 
naled the proper officer, and he sounded 
the gavel thrice, whereupon all was hushed. 

Onesyi said: As Jehovih bestoweth a 
new-born child, so also doth He take the 
father and mother away to the es world. 
As Jehovih sent Etisyai, my sister, to es- 
tablish the lower heaven, so have I come 
by His command to bear hence this harvest 
to His everlasting kingdom. As a child 
bewaileth the loss of his father and mother, 
so will ye that remain bewail the loss of 
this rich harvest of angels. It is Jehovih's 
will that ye drink deep of the sorrow of 
parting, for by this bondage will ye be 
again reunited in the heavens still above. 
The progress of the soul of man is forever 
onward, and the glory of the resurrection 
of him that goeth before is equally great 



as is the sorrow of him that remains be- 
hind. But the love that bindeth together is 
as a chain outstretched across the uni- 
verse. Swift messengers, well trained to 
course the vault of heaven, will pass be- 
tween you, carrying the tidings of your 
soul's delight. And as Jehovih giveth 
summer to follow winter, and the winter 
the summer, so shall the time come again 
and again, in which ye shall mingle and 
part; again labor together in broader 
fields, and again part for a season. Behold 
the wisdom of Jehovih in placing far apart 
the places of the souls of men; for all 
things abiding near together equalize 
themselves. Even as there is glory in a 
new birth, so is there glory in death; as 
there is sorrow in death, so is there joy in 
resurrection. The time has now come when 
these that you love you shall not see for 
a long time. But you should rejoice in 
the hour of parting, for they rise as Brides 
and Bridegrooms to Jehovih. 

The es'enaurs sang an anthem of praise 
in which all the hosts united, and great 
was the glory thereof. And now Onesyi 
arose, saying: 

Jehovih, Almighty and Everlasting. 
Look upon this, Thy Son, Ha'jah. In Thy 
name, O Father, and by virtue of Thy 
power in me vested, do I perpetuate and 
crown him God of Earth. 

Ha'jah, now God, said: Thy will be 
done, O Jehovih. 

Then Onesyi turned to the five chief 
Lords of the five divisions of the earth, 
and bestowed them in like manner. 

And Onesyi stretched forth her hand, 
saying: Give me a crown, O Jehovih, for 
Thy Son, God of Earth. And there de- 
scended etherean substance into her hand, 
and she raised it up, and it became a 
crown of great beauty, and she put it on 
God's head. Then in like manner did she 
crown the Lords of Earth. 

And Etisyai and Onesyi came down and 
sat at the foot of the throne. God came 
down, and stretching forth his hands, said 
to Etisyai, Onesyi and Sethantes: 

Arise, O Goddess, and go thy way- 
Arise, O Goddess, and go thy way. Arise, 
O God, and go thy way. And they rose 
up and marched forth. 

The proper officers had already pre- 
pared the ship for its etherean journey, 



38 



CYCLE OF SETRANTES 



and soon as Etisyai and Onesyi had en- 
tered the central star, all the people that 
were to ascend went into the places as- 
signed to them. 

God and the Lords returned in tears to 
the throne; and now the plateau of ever- 
lasting light began to ascend. Music 
sprang from every side, glorifying Jehovih 
and the magnificence of His bountiful 
worlds. And those of the lower heaven 
were as the echo of the music above; and 
the light of the ascending ship of fire 
made all else as a shadow. But higher 
and higher it rose, in the form of a cres- 
cent, slowly turning, turning and rising, 
higher and higher, and the music faded 
away in the distance. 

Thus ascended to the emancipated hea- 
vens in etherea, the first harvest of angels 
born on Earth. 

CHAPTER XXII. 

God said: Arise, O Lords of my realm, 
and go to the kingdoms which ye have 
received from Jehovih's hand; and may 
His love, wisdom and power be with you 
all. 

And the Lords departed, they and their 
attendants, and went to their kingdoms 
over mortals. 

And God dispensed laws and govern- 
ment after the manner of his predecessors, 
enlarging all the places according to the 
increase in the number of spirits rising up 
from the earth. And the Voice of Jehovih 
was with God; and as the first kingdom 
had been called Hored, so was the second 
called Hored. And as it had been with 
the Lords of Earth in their places, so 
continued it with the new Lords, and they 
enlarged their places also, according to 
the increase in the number of inhabitants 
of the earth. And as it had been of old 
that messengers went constantly from Hor- 
ed to the Lords' places, so did they also 
continue to do; and by this means all the 
affairs of the lower heaven were kept in 
harmony, Lords and God. And God ruled 
in Hored four hundred years, and Hored 
spread over all the lands of the earth. 

When the time of God and his hosts 
was fulfilled, Jehovih brought the earth 
into dan of Eyon, in the arc Lais, whose 
angels descended in a ship of fire, and de- 



livered God and his Lords and all the 
hosts under them who were prepared for 
the etherean resurrection. At this time 
there were in atmospherea six hundred and 
twenty-five million inhabitants. And the 
number of the second harvest was two 
hundred and eighty million. After the 
manner of the ascent of the first harvest, so 
was the ascent of the second harvest. And 
the place of the landing of the second har- 
vest in the firmament of heaven was in 
Lais, and Bin, and the grade of the harvest 
was seventy-eight, being two less than the 
grade of the first harvest. 



CHAPTER XXIII. 

So Earth and her heavens passed into 
the care of succeeding God and Lords, 
who had been raised up and prepared 
therefor. And for the present there were 
no more ethereans dwelling in these re- 
gions. 

Jehovih said: They that come out of 
Earth shall be sufficient unto them- 
selves. As a mother provideth for her 
child, so do I provide for the spirit gener- 
ations of a corporeal world. But when 
they are mature in wisdom, strength and 
love, I command them to take the places 
of Lords and Gods in the management of 
My kingdoms. 

Now after the ascent of the ethereans 
the whole Earth and its lower heavens 
were under the dominion of angels born 
on Earth. Hence, it became a saying: 
The first was etherean rule; the second was 
atmospherean rule. For Earth had a God 
and Lords who had been on no other 
world. 

And it likewise came to pass that the 
atmospherean rulers were more lenient 
and less tyrannical than had been the eth- 
ereans. For the ethereans had forbidden 
the es'yans to return to their mortal kind- 
dred till they had been in heaven fifty 
years; but the present God and Lords in- 
dulged hundreds of thousands of es'yans 
for sympathy's sake to return to their mor- 
tal kindred. And these es'yans became not 
not workers in heaven, either for others 
or for their own resurrection, and they be- 
came idlers and vagabonds in the lower 
heaven, oft living with their mortal kin- 



CYCLE OF SETHANTES 



39 



dred till their mortal kindred died, and 
then in turn persuading such es'yans to do 
as they did. 

And God perceived, when it was too 
late, that his leniency had laid the founda- 
tion for disorganizing the kingdom of hea- 
ven; for the strolling idlers knowing no 
other heaven, sowed the spirit of disbelief 
in the places of learning and industry in 
the lower heaven, persuading others that 
they were toiling to no good purpose. 

They said: Behold, it was told us on 
earth that there was a Jehovih. But we are 
in heaven, and yet we find Him not. Now 
do we know of a truth there is no All 
Person. Come, then, let us seek ease and 
the rich viands that rise up out of the 
earth. A man liveth on the earth and 
dieth, and his spirit floateth round about, 
and there is no more of him. Why will ye 
serve the Lord? Why will ye serve God? 
Be free and live for yourselves instead of 
others. 

Thus it came to pass that little by lit- 
tle the lower heaven began to fall from its 
high estate. 

The third dan was six hundred years, 
and God and his Lords, having provided 
successors, ascended with their harvest to 
etherea. And the number thereof was 
four hundred and eight million Brides and 



Bridegrooms, and their grade was sixty- 
six. 

The fourth dan was five hundred years, 
and the harvest was six hundred million 
Brides and Bridegrooms; and their grade 
was fifty-eight. 

The fifth dan was three hundred years; 
and the harvest was two hundred millions, 
and their grade was fifty, which was the 
lowest grade capable of emancipation, or 
capable of surviving in etherea. 

And now darkness set in and covered 
all Earth around. And from this time 
until the end of the cycle, which was three 
thousand years from the birth of man on 
Earth, there were no more resurrections to 
the emancipated heavens. The kingdom of 
Hored was broken up and dissolved. The 
spirits loved not to labor according to T e- 
hovih's plan, but remained on the earth; 
and they were called drujas because they 
desired not resurrection. 

And God and his Lords, and their offi- 
cers and teachers, were without subjects 
and pupils. And mortals were beset by 
thousands of millions of drujas, so that 
the ashars were powerless to accomplish 
good inspiration. At this time there were 
more than three thousand million angels in 
atmospherea, and most of them dwelt on 
earth. 

Thus ended the first cycle. 




LORDS' RECORD FOR CYCLE OK SETHANTES 



Jehovih, Creator of all the living, spoke 
to Sethantes and his hosts who were trav- 
eling in the region through which the 
Earth passed, saying: 

That these, My Sons and Daughters, 
may understand the manner of the creation 
of man on a new world, go ye to Earth. 

And they came to Earth; and man 
was like the beast, not having immortality. 
They were naked, and knew not even the 
sin of incest. They were called Asu. 

Now by the power of their wills, the 
ethereans took on corporeal bodies, and 
being immature in corporeal judgment they 
dwelt with the Asuans, and a new race was 
born upon the earth which was called I'hin 
because they were begotten of both heaven 
and earth. 

Now the first race of man was called 
Asu, and possessed not immortality; but 
the race of Thins was capable of everlasting 
life and of being taught spiritual things. 

Jehovih's light came to Sethantes, say- 
ing: Go build a kingdom in the lower 
heavens, and call it Hored; and an etherean 
Goddess came down to Earth and 
crowned Sethantes first God of Earth, 
and also appointed and crowned five 
Lords, one to each of the great divisions 
of the earth. And the Lords also estab- 
lished kingdoms, but on earth, and as God 
dealt with angels the Lords had to do 
with mortals through the ashars. 

Jehovih said: Of all that live on the 
earth, or in the waters, or in the air, that 
breathe the breath of life, man only have I 
delivered unto knowledge of his Creator. 

And the Lord spake unto the I'hin 
through the ashars, saying: Go hide thy 
nakedness. And the Thins were afraid 
and they clothed themselves. And the 
Lord commanded the angels to give up 
their corporeal forms, and to be no more 
seen as mortals, and they did so. 

And Jehovih said unto them: Because 
ye brought forth heirs in flesh and blood, 
ye shall be bound to them for six genera- 
tions. And that man may continue to walk 
upright, ye shall teach him the law of in- 
cest, for man of himself cannot attain to 



know this. Neither shall ye permit the 
Thins to dwell with Asu, lest his offspring 
go down in darkness. 

And man was thus inspired by the an- 
gels and he walked upright, and prospered 
on the earth. But after a season man be- 
came conceited in his own judgment, and 
he disobeyed the commandments. And 
he began to dwell with the Asuans, and 
there was born into the world a new race 
called Druk, and they had not the light 
of the Father in them; neither could they 
be inspired with shame, nor of heavenly 
things. 

And the Thins were grateful to the 
Lord, and they said unto the Druks: 
Go ye and sacrifice to the Lord, and he 
will prosper you. But the Druks under- 
stood not; and slew many of the I'hins. 
And the Lord said unto the Druks: Be- 
cause you have slain my people, ye shall 
depart out of the place where they dwell; 
and that ye may be known to all the people 
of the earth I put a mark upon you. So 
the nations of the Druks were accursed 
with war, and the Lord said: By this 
sign shall the tribes of Druks and their 
descendants be known unto the end of the 
world. 

And woman, being more helpless than 
man, cried out with fear, saying: O Lord, 
how shall I bring forth unto thee, and not 
unto the sons of death? 

And the Lord said: Because thou hast 
brought forth in pain, and yet called on 
my name, behold I will be unto thee as a 
shield and protector. For I will also put 
a mark upon the I'hins, my chosen, so 
thou shall know them as they come unto 
thee. 

And the Lord commanded the male 
I'hins, old and young, to be circumcised, 
that woman might not be deceived by the 
Druks. And the I'hins circumcised one 
another, old and young, for it was the tes- 
timony of the Lord unto woman, that their 
offspring was born unto everlasting life. 

And the Druks went away into the wil- 
derness, and dwelt with the Asuans and 
with one another. And the I'hins labored 



CYCLE OF SETHANTES 



LORDS' RECORD 



41 



and clothed themselves; but the Druks 
wandered in the wilderness, neither labor- 
ing nor clothing themselves. 

CHAPTER II. 

The time of the habitation of Asu was 
eight thousand years; and they survived 
two thousand years after the time of the 
birth of the I'hins, and then disappeared 
off the earth. And there remained on the 
earth the sacred people, the I'hins, and the 
carnivorous people, the Druks. 

The I'hins were white and yellow, but 
the Druks were brown and black; the 
I'hins were small and slender, but the 
Druks were tall and stout. 

Now, because the Druks had not pre- 
viously obeyed the Lord, but went and 
dwelt with the Asuans, there was a half 
breed race born on the earth called Yak, 
signifying ground people; and they bur- 
rowed in the ground. And the Yaks did 
not walk wholly upright, but also went on 
all fours. 

The Lord said: Because the Yaks can- 
not be taught the crime of incest, behold 
they shall not dwell forever on the earth. 
So also shall it be with the Druks, save 
wherein they cohabit with the I'hins, 
whose seed is born unto everlasting life. 
But with the Druks and their heirs that 
spring from the Yaks, there shall be an 
end, both in this world and the next. 

And the arms of the Yaks were long, 
and their backs were stooped and curved. 
And the Lord said: Because they are the 
fruit of incest, and not capable of speech, 
nor of eternal life in heaven, the I'hins 
shall make servants of them. And that 
they may not tempt my chosen to bring 
forth unto destruction, they shall be neu- 
tralized. 

And the angels of the Lord taught the 
I'hins to make eunuchs of the Yaks, both 
males and females, and the I'hins took 
them for servants. 

And the Lord said: The Yaks shall 
serve the I'hins, and build and reap for 
them. 

The I'hins were disposed to live alone, 
but the Lord called them together, saying: 
Come and dwell together in cities; for it 
is better that ye dwell after the manner of 



my kingdoms in heaven. Build ye there- 
fore a temple for the Lord, and my angels 
shall dwell with you, teaching you to sing 
and dance for the glory of your creator. 

And man built a temple for the Lord, 
and established worship on earth after the 
manner of heaven. Now it came to pass 
that the Druks came to witness the rites 
and ceremonies of the I'hins, but they took 
no part therein; neither comprehended 
they the meaning thereof. 

And the Lord said unto the I'hins: 
That ye may teach some of them of the 
Lord, build ye within the house of worship 
an image of me in likeness of man. And I 
will manifest unto as many as are capable 
of everlasting life. 

And the I'hins, men and women, built 
images of the Lord in stone, and clay and 
wood, and stood them by the altars of sac- 
rifice. And in the time of worship the 
angels came and possessed the idols and 
with audible voices spake before mortals. 
And the Druks inquired of the I'hins as 
to the cause thereof. And the I'hins said: 
Behold, there is a Lord in heaven, more 
subtle than the air of heaven. He it was 
that brought us forth out of darkness. He 
speaketh in the idol that ye may know he 
abideth with his people. 

The Druks said: What saith he? The 
I'hins answered: That whomsoever hath 
attained to remember the Lord is in the 
way of everlasting life. 

The Druks inquired: How shall a man 
live forever? Behold, ye that believe also 
die. The I'hins answered, saying: As the 
voice of the Lord is unseen but potent, so 
is there a spirit in man unseen and potent 
which shall never die, but ascend in hea- 
ven to habitations prepared by the Lord. 

And many of the Druks pondered on 
these things, and their thoughts quickened 
their souls within them, so that they 
brought forth heirs unto eternal salvation. 
And the Lord said unto the I'hins: Be- 
cause ye have done a good thing, go ye 
abroad, by the roadsides and in other 
places, and build images unto me and 
mine, and my angels shall bestow gifts 
and signs and miracles. 

And the I'hins covered the roadways of 
the earth over with idols of stone and 
wood and clay, and the angels of heaven 
descended to the idols and established 



42 



CYCLE OF SETHANTES 



LORDS' RECORD 



thereabout heavenly kingdoms. And when 
man came hither and called on the name of 
the Lord, is was as a password for the an- 
gels; and they wrought miracles, and oth- 
erwise gave evidence unto man of the un- 
seen. 

CHAPTER III. 

And the Lord gave these command- 
ments unto man: 

Thou shalt strive to remember the Lord. 

Thou shalt not kill. 

Thou shalt build walls around about thy 
cities, that beasts and serpents may not 
enter and do thee harm. And if thy hab- 
itation be in the wilderness, thou shalt 
build mounds of wood and earth to sleep 
on at night, that serpents and beasts may 
not molest thee. 

The I'hins inquired of the Lord, saying: 
If we build walls around about our cities, 
how shall we get in and out? How shall 
we gather our harvests of fruit and nuts 
and seeds of the field? How shall we as- 
cend on the mounds which we build in the 
wilderness? 

The Lord said: Behold, my angels 
shall teach you to build ladders and how to 
use them. And when you go into the city 
at night, you shall take the ladders in after 
you; and when ye come out in the morn- 
ing, ye shall let them down again. 

And the angels taught man these things, 
and man provided the cities and mounds, 
with ladders. And the I'hins prospered 
and spread abroad over all the earth, and 
thev built hundreds of thousands of cities 
and mounds, and they rejoiced in the glory 
r* all created things. Neither killed they 
any man, beast, fish, bird, nor creeping 
thing that breathed the breath of life. 

And the Lord saw that man was good 
and grateful in all things, and the Lord 
called unto the angels of heaven, saying: 
Why are the I'hins good? For as yet, 
they are ignorant. 

And the angels answered: Because 
thou said unto us: Go ye, as guardian an- 
gels, and inspire man to live without evil, 
even so have we administered unto the 
I'hins, guarding and inspiring them night 
and day. 

The Lord said: Then the I'hins have 
no honor. Except they learn of them- 



selves to be good, they will be void of wis- 
dom in heaven. For this reason ye shall 
withdraw a little, that man may attain in- 
dividuality. 

And the angels withdrew awhile from 
the I'hins. And now it came to pass that 
they had stored in their cities and on their 
mounds ample provision of food and rai- 
ment for the winter; but the Druks fol- 
lowed not the example of the I'hins, for 
the Druks stored up nothing. And when 
the angels departed a little way, satan came 
to the Druks and said unto them: Behold, 
it is winter, and ye are hungry. Go ye 
over the ladders and possess the stores of 
the I'hins. 

And the Druks plundered the I'hins, 
and satan came to the I'hins also, and 
many of them were inspired to defend their 
stores. And war ensued; and it spread 
around about the whole earth. And the 
I'hins besought the Lord as to why Jeho- 
vih suffered evil to come upon his chosen. 

And the Lord said: Because ye de- 
pended upon me for all things, ye develop- 
ed not yourselves. Henceforth shall man 
learn to face evil on his own account. 
Otherwise he could not attain wisdom. 
Two entities has the Creator given thee, 
that which is flesh and that which is spirit. 
And the flesh shall desire earthly things; 
but the spirit shall desire heavenly things. 
Behold, when the Druks came upon thee 
for thy stores, thy flesh cried out for war, 
and thy people fell. Again, have I come to 
raise thee up, to make thee understand the 
spirit within. It is that, and not the flesh, 
which shall learn to triumph. 

The I'hins said: Our people are scat- 
tered and gone. Will they not mingle with 
the Druks and thus go out in darkness? 
The Lord said: Behold there were Druks 
who had learned a little from the images. 
Now because thy people are scattered and 
gone they shall go amongst the Druks and 
teach them, and they shall begin to hide 
their nakedness. 

So the Lord inspired other people be- 
side the I'hins, to make and wear clothes, 
and they thus wore them. 

And again the Lord brought the I'hins 
together in lodges and cities and he said 
unto them: Henceforth ye shall live upon 
the earth as an example of righteousness. 
And your brethren who have mingled with 



CYCLE OF SETH ANTES 



LORDS' RECORD 



43 



the tribes of darkness shall no longer mo- 
lest you, but be your defenders and pro- 
tectors. 

And there began to be a new tribe on 
Earth; and they were called I'huans, be- 
cause they were half-breeds betwixt the 
Druks and I'hins. The I'huans were red 
like copper; and they were taller and 
stronger than any other people in all the 
world. And the Lord commanded the 
I'huans, saying: 

Protect ye the I'hins, the little people, 
white and yellow; call them, the sacred 
people. For ye are flesh of their flesh. 

CHAPTER IV. 

About this time man began to use his 
lips and tongue in enunciating words, prior 
to which he spoke in the thorax. And the 
Lord spake unto the I'hins, saying: That 
the labor of the Lord may be remembered 
on the earth, go provide me a stone, and I 
will engrave it with my own hand, and it 
shall be called Se'moin, because it shall be 
a testimony unto all nations and peoples, 
on the earth, of the first written language in 
all the world. 

And the I'hins prepared a stone, and 
hewed it flat and then polished it smooth; 
and the Lord came down in the night and 
engraved it. And the Lord through his 
angels taught the I'hins the meaning of 
the characters engraved thereon. 

And the Lord said: Go into all cities 
in all countries, and provide ye copies like 
the tablet I have given. And the angels 
inspired the I'hins to make tablets and to 
read them, that the first language of the 
earth might be preserved to the races of 
men. 

Now, the I'huans partly obeyed the 
Lord, and partly obeyed the way of the 
flesh, and they became warriors and de- 
stroyers. Nevertheless, they harmed not 
the I'hins, nor suffered harm to come upon 
them. 

The Lord had commanded the I'hins to 
make eunuchs of the Yaks, the monstrosi- 
ties, and use them as servants, for the Lord 
saw that the Yaks were not capable of 
everlasting life. Now the I'huans also 
served the Yaks in the same way; but they 
disobeyed the Lord in inflicting the neu- 
tral gender on their enemies whom they 



captured in war. And although they were 
themselves half-breeds with the Druks, yet 
they hated the Druks and pursued them 
with vengeance. 

In those days the relative proportion of 
the races of men was: I'hins, one hun- 
dred; I'huans, three hundred; Druks, five 
thousand; Yaks, five thousand; and of 
monstrosities betwixt man and beast, three 
thousand; but the latter died each genera- 
tion, for they had not the power of procre- 
ation amongst themselves. 

And the Lord saw the work of destruc- 
tion going on, and he sent the I'hins to 
preach amongst the I'huans, saying: 

Say to the I'huans: Whomsoever is 
created alive, kill not, for it is the com- 
mandment of the Lord. For in the time 
of your most success is slaughtering your 
fellow man, ye are also peopling heaven 
with the spirits of vengenace. And they 
will return upon you, and even the I'huans 
shall turn upon one another. 

But the I'huans understood not; believ- 
ed not; and great darkness covered the 
earth. And all men, save the few I'hins, 
indulged in wickedness all their mortal life. 
And the Lord's people worshipped and 
preached in the temples, and the Lord and 
his heavenly hosts ministered unto them; 
but the other races of men would not come 
to learn of God. 

And the Lord became tired of his la- 
bor, and he called his angels to him, and 
said unto them: Behold, man on Earth 
hath gone so far from my ways that he 
will not heed my commandments; he can- 
not hear my voice. And your labor is in 
vain also. For which reason we will tarry 
no longer on the earth till man hath ex- 
hausted the evil that is in him. 

So the Lord and his hosts departed 
away from the earth. And clouds came 
over the face of the earth; and the moon 
shone not; and the sun was only as a red 
coal of fire; and the stars stood in the 
firmament as well in the day as at night. 
The harvests failed; the trees yielded no 
nuts, and the roots on which man fed 
ceased to grow. 

And the monstrosities, and the Yaks, 
and the Druks, died off, tens of millions 01 
them. And even yet they were not ex- 
tinct. Nevertheless the I'huans suffered 
less; and the I'hins not at all. For the 



44 CYCLE OF SETHANTES 

Lord had previously inspired them to pro- monished him, but he would not heed. I 

vide against the coming famine. showed him that every living creature 

And the Lord bewailed the earth, and brought forth after its own kind. But he 

the generations of man: understood not; believed not; and he dwelt 

I made man upright, and walked by his with the beasts, falling lower than all the 

side, but he slipped aside and fell. I ad- rest. 




Cycle ok Ah'shong 



CHAPTER I. 

When God of Earth and heaven and 
his Lords had "lost their heavenly domin- 
ions, the swift messengers bore the re- 
port to Jehovih's kingdoms in etherea. 
Earth had passed the ji'ayan eddies at 
Shrapah, in the etherean roadway Hi-a- 
balk'yiv, and was heading for the eastern 
fields of Anakaron, having entered the 
dan'haian arches of Vehetaivi, where lay 
the great kingdoms of the Orian Chief, 
Hieu Wee, with his millions of Gods and 
Goddesses and high raised ethereans. 

Before Hieu Wee, came the swift mes- 
sengers, fresh from the heavens of 
Earth, with their pitiful tales of woe that 
had befallen the inhabitants thereof. 

Hieu Wee said: I behold the red star, 
Earth, O Jehovih. I have heard the 
tale of horror. What shall be done, O Fa- 
ther? 

Then spake Jehovih, saying: Call thy 
tributary Chief, Ah'shong. Let him hear 
the will of Jehovih. 

Then sent Hieu Wee for Ah'shong, 
who had dominion over the fields of Anak- 
aron in etherea, through which lay the 
roadway where Earth was to travel for 
three thousand years. And when Ah'- 
shong came before the Holy Council of 
Hieu Wee's million Gods and Goddesses, 
the All Light fell upon the throne like a 
sun, and the Voice of the Creator spake in 
the midst of the light, saying: 

Behold the red star, Earth; she en- 
tereth the fields of Anakaron. She is drip- 
ping wet and cold in the ji'ayan eddies. 
Her Gods and Lords are powerless in the 
spell of darkness. Go thou, My Son, Ah'- 
shong, and deliver Earth and her hea- 
vens; for behold, I will bring them to thy 
door. 

Then spake Ah'shong, saying: Thy 
will be done, O Jehovih. Though I have 
been long honored in etherea, with many 
etherean worlds to command, I have not 
as yet redeemed one corporeal world and 
her heaven from a time of darkness. 



Jehovih said: Go then, My Son, to 
the laboring Earth and deliver her; but 
first appoint thou a successor for Anaka- 
ron. 

Then Hieu Wee, who was older than 
the red star, who had seen many corporeal 
worlds created; had seen them run their 
course and then disappear — said to Ah'- 
shong: 

Send thou to Wan, and Hivigat, in 
etherea, and get the history of Earth 
and her heaven; and obtain thou also an 
account of her harvests of Brides and 
Bridegrooms to Jehovih. And thou shalt 
call from my realms as many million ether- 
ean angels as thy labor may require, and 
with them proceed to Earth, and thou 
shalt have a line of swift messengers estab- 
ished betwixt this place and thine, and by 
the power of Jehovih I will answer thy 
prayers in whatsoever thou shalt need. 

Ah'shong went back to Anakaron, his 
etherean kingdom, and before his Holy 
Council made known Jehovih's will. And 
he called for sixty million volunteers to go 
with him, and they came; some from Yo- 
han; some from T'seing, some from Araith, 
some from Gon Loo, and from various 
other places in Anakaron. 

So Ah'shong raised up a successor to 
Jehovih's throne in Anakaron, and he was 
installed and crowned according to the dis- 
cipline of the etherean heavens. 

And Ah'shong sent swift messengers 
into the former roadway of Earth to 
obtain its history; its harvests of Brides 
and Bridegrooms. Thus Ah'shong, well 
skilled in the course and behavior of 
worlds, gathered together his millions oi 
angels, trained in arduous enterprise. 
Quickly they framed and equipped an Ori- 
an port-au-gon, and illuminated it with 
fire-lights. 

Jehovih's Voice spake to Ah'shong, 
saying: For three days and nights stand 
thou in the firmament that man on earth 
and in atmospherea may behold the power 
and majesty of My chosen in heaven. 



46 



CYCLE OF AH'SHONG 



Ah'shong and his hosts embarked and 
sped forth, and they halted close above 
Chinvat, so near that the down-hanging 
curtains of etherean fire almost touched 
the moon. Here they remained that mor- 
tals and angels belonging to Earth might 
behold and fear, for so Jehovih made man, 
that unusual sights make him weak and 
trembling, and thus change his behavior. 

Ah'shong said: On the fourth day, O 
Jehovih, I will cross Chinvat; on the fifth 
descend toward the earth. Bring me, O 
Father, Thy mesengers from the lower 
heaven. I will converse with them. 

Jehovih sent the angels of the lower 
heaven up to Ah'shong; disheartened they 
came, to know Jehovih's will. 

Ah'shong said unto them: Jehovih's 
hosts are come from etherea to redeem 
these fallen heavens, and teach man on the 
earth. It is our labor to come in love to 
the helpless, and. teach them how to sing 
in Jehovih's praise. Then the swift mes- 
sengers answered: 

In the All Person's boundless love, find 
thou recompense for thy holy words, most 
honored God. Down in darkness, long 
and earnestly, have the Lords of Earth la- 
bored conjointly with heaven's God, whose 
kingdom fell. Alas, our God, who minis- 
tered over the lower heaven, is crushed 
and humiliated. The enemies of high 
heaven, exulting in their spoil of Jehovih's 
kingdom and His name, mock us, saying: 
Where now is Jehovih? Whence cometh 
the higher light, O ye Faithists in an All 
Person? But now thy ship of etherean 
fire, maketh the sons and daughters of the 
earth and her heavens to look up and 
tremble. And when thy light appeared 
we made all haste in hope of succor. Our 
souls are more than filled with thankful- 
ness; and in Jehovih's name we will back 
and employ a million trumpeters to pro- 
claim around the earth and heaven: Je- 
hovih is come. 

After due salutation the swift messen- 
gers departed; and Ah'shong made all 
things in readiness for his descent when 
the proper time should arrive. 

CHAPTER II. 

Jehovih spake to Ah'shong, saying: On 
the evening of the third day shalt thou 
move thy etherean ship toward the earth. 



And when thou hast arrived within an ar- 
rafon thou shalt halt for another three 
days, that thy magnificence may awe the 
men and angels of Earth with the power 
and glory of My emancipated sons and 
daughters. 

Ah'shong proceeded as commanded, 
and the magnificence of the scene over- 
came the stubbornness of men on earth 
and angels in atmospherea. 

Again Jehovih said: Proceed thou, My 
Son, and when thou art within half the 
breadth of Earth, halt once more and 
make there a plateau, and therein shalt 
thou remain during the time of dawn, 
which shall be seven years and six days. 
This, then, shall be the rule that from this 
time forth My etherean hosts shall not re- 
main in atmospherea more than eight 
years at any one time, and the time shall 
be called the first dawn of dan, and the 
next succeeding shall be called the second 
dawn of dan, and so on, as long as the 
earth bringeth forth. 

Ah'shong proceded again, and moved 
to within four thousand miles of the earth. 

Jehovih said: Thy place shall be a dis- 
tance away from the earth, that thy domin- 
ion be not disturbed by the confusion of 
the fallen angels thereof. So also, to as 
many as thou shalt redeem away from the 
earth and from mortal contact, the distance 
of thy kingdom will prevent them from re- 
turning. 

Ah'shong perceived, and he proclaimed 
what Jehovih had spoken to him. And the 
hosts cast out fastenings to the plateau, 
that the kingdom together with the ether- 
ean sea of fire might rotate with Earth 
and its atmosphere. 

Jehovih said: Make strong the founda- 
tion of thy place, and erect ten thousand 
pillars of fire around about; and in every 
direction provide roadways and mansions, 
and in the midst thou shalt build a house 
of council, wherein shall sit thy host of 
dominion during dawn. 

Ah'shong built the place as commanded 
by Jehovih, and when it was finished Je- 
hovih said: Thou shalt call the place Ye- 
shuah, because it is a place of salvation. 

Choose now thy council, My Son, and 
also thy sub-officers, and when thou hast 
completed the list, leave in Yeshuah the 
sub-officers and proceed thou, and thy 



CYCLE OF AH'SHONG 



47 



council of one million men and women 
with thee, down to the earth and heaven 
thereof, and cast thine eyes upon the in- 
habitants, for they are in distress. And 
when thou hast come to the place of My 
Lords and My God, deliver thou them and 
bring them to Yeshuah, for they need 
rest. And as many I'hins in heaven as 
are capable, bring thou also away with 
thee, and give them into the care of thy 
people. 

Ah'shong did as commanded, first se- 
lecting his council and officers, then he 
and his hosts proceeded to the earth as had 
been commanded. 

CHAPTER III. 

Up to this time the ancient names of 
the divisions of the lands of the earth had 
been maintained, and God and his Lords 
being driven from the place of Hored, 
which had gone into dissolution, dwelt 
part of the time in Whaga and part in Jud 
and Vohu. And God and his Lords had 
established three kingdoms, one in Whaga, 
one in Jud and one in Vohu; and within 
these kingdoms of heaven there were two 
hundred million of angels capable of the 
second resurrection, and one hundred mill- 
ion es'y an s and unlearned apprentices. 
Chief of the three heavens was Whaga, 
and thither had God and his Lords con- 
gregated with their chief officers when the 
etherean ship appeared in the firmament. 

Jehovih spake to God, saying: My Son, 
make ready thy places. Behold, I come in 
a ship of fire, and My faithful workers shall 
find rest and happiness. Ah'shong will 
redeem thy sons and daughters. Yea, he 
will girdle Earth about with new ether- 
ean light and great power. Call together 
thy people, and bid them rejoice and be 
merry, for the time of deliverance is at 
hand. 

Then God communicated to the Lords 
and they again to others, the words of Je- 
hovih; and at sight of the sign in heaven, 
the faithful began to rejoice and to gather 
together in their respective places. But the 
unbelieving angels dwelling on earth with 
mortals, of whom there were hundreds of 
millions, were overcome by the sight of 
the ship of fire in heaven, and fled in fear 
in every direction; and by their presence 
caused mortals to fear and flee also in 



search of some secure place. And many of 
these spirits of darkness came beseeching- 
ly to be admitted into the kingdoms of the 
Lords, whither they had been invited for 
hundreds of years, but would not come. 

But God and the Lords encompassed 
their places about with walls of light and 
would not receive the unbelieving. God 
said: Till such time as Ah'shong shall 
arrive, let order be maintained within my 
kingdom. So it came to pass that for six 
days and nights the fear that prevailed on 
earth and in heaven was such as had never 
been before since the world was created. 

And so great was the splendor and 
magnificence of Ah'shong's hosts with his 
musicians and heralds, and the great multi- 
tude arrayed in shining ranment that even 
God and the Lords were overcome. 

The etherean marshals approached and 
divided, first into single columns, then 
double, then quadruple, and so on, till the 
fifty thousand marshals had enclosed all 
sides, save the east, where was an open 
space through which Ah'shong came, at- 
tended by his chief counselors, of which 
there were five thousand. After these came 
the council of one million, and groups of 
thousands of es'enaurs, who were chant- 
ing hymns of praise to Jehovih. 

The lower heaven about the continent 
of Whaga, and parts of Jud and Vohu, was 
illuminated by the hosts of Ah'shong, the 
like of which had never been in atmospher- 
ea before. Nor was there any work being 
done on earth or in heaven, but all was 
commotion and fear. 

And now Ah'shong approached before 
the throne of God and the Lords, saluting 
with the sign of Jehovih, saying: In Jeho- 
vih's name, and by His love, wisdom and 
power, am I come to give you joy. 

God said: In Jehovih's name, all hail. 
Ah'shong, Chief of Anakaron, all hail. 

And God went forward to the foot of 
the throne and received Ah'shong, and the 
Lords came forward, saluting also. The 
es'enaurs ceased singing, and Ah'shong 
proceeded to the throne and sat thereon, 
and God took off his crown and gave it 
to Ah'shong, and also gave him the trian- 
gle, the heirloom of the heavenly kingdoms 
of Earth bestowed by Jehovih. 

The Voice of Jehovih spake out of the 
light above the throne, saying: Behold, I 



48 



CYCLE OF AH'SHONG 



have come in might and swiftness, for it is 
the springtime of Earth. My Son, Sef- 
fas, is afoot on the earth; he hath stirred 
up the Earth-born; and I will establish My 
light anew in these heavens. 

Have I not planted the tree of everlast- 
ing life on Earth, and given God and 
his Lords dominion over mortals and spir- 
its to teach them the glories of My upper 
heavens? And ye that came up from the 
earth I commanded to be My God and My 
Lords of Earth and her heavens. Ye 
were installed by My hand, and have done 
a good work. Despair not because Hored 
and Moeb are fallen? Knew I not before- 
hand that these things would be? Behold, 
I have provided all My works so that man 
should be forever making new things. Had 
Hored stood, there had been no heaven to 
rebuild on Earth in this day. How, then, 
could My new-born Gods learn? Think 
not that I come to teach with Mine own 
labor. I provide My people that thev shall 
teach one another. 

What is so conceited as man? And yet 
I bring him into life the dumbest of ani- 
mals? Man prideth himself in his power 
and wisdom. I send the drouth, the rains 
and winds, the weakest of My members, 
and they show man he is nothing. So also 
do My Gods and Lords in the lower hea- 
ven become conceited of their power and 
wisdom. Thousands of millions of souls 
turn from order and high estate into con- 
fusion and anarchy. Thus do I confound 
men and angels, and in their seeming mis- 
ery lay the foundation for an everlasting 
good. 

The Voice ceased, and Ah'shong said: 
In the name of Jehovih, I announce my 
presence over Earth and the lower heavens. 

The marshals said: All hail. Ah'shong, 
God of Earth and her heavens. Proclaim 
him in Jehovih's name. 

Hardly had these words gone forth, 
when the voice of the entire hosts joined 
in proclaiming: All hail, O God, Son of 
Jehovih! 

Ah'shong, now God, said: Thy crown 
shall be my crown, for under this shall Je- 
hovih's power triumph. Otherwise, people 
would say: Behold there is no virtue in 
Jehovih's crowns. 

So he placed it on his head and rose 



up and saluted the retired God and Lords, 
saying to them: 

I have a place for you; and it is called 
Yeshuah. Retire thither with my proper 
officers, and partake of rest and the free- 
dom of the place until I come also. 

But the retired God and Lords said: 
We pray thee, put us to labor. But God 
said: Jehovih's sons must not be humiliat- 
ed; how, then, can ye labor under me? 
Were ye not Jehovih's God and Lords? 

They perceived, and after due saluta- 
tions, were provided with an escort of five 
hundred thousand men and women; and 
they departed for Yeshuah. 

God. said: Let M'ghi come before me, 
and Bing'fo and Nest. They shall be my 
Lords of dawn in Jehovih's name. 

The three came and stood before the 
throne. 

God said: I announce the presence of 
Jehovih's Lords of Earth. The mar- 
shals said: All hail. O M'ghi, and Bing'- 
fo and Nest, Jehovih's Lords of Earth. 

These were also proclaimed by the 
voice of the assembled hosts. 

God said: In Jehovih's name, go your 
ways, O Lords of Earth. 

Accordingly the Lords were crowned 
and departed at once, saluting reverently. 

God said: Bring the atmospherean 
marshals before me. They were brought 
and stationed in front of the throne. 

God said: Glory be to Thee, O Jeho- 
vih. I have looked upon Thy sons and 
daughters who have withstood a great 
darkness, but retained faith in Thee. In 
Thy name, and by virtue of Thy power, do 
I deliver them. Let him who is chief, an- 
swer me: How many angels are prepared 
for the second resurrection? 

Sawni, chief marshal, said: Two hun- 
dred million. 

God said: Retire thou and thy compan- 
ions, and gather together Jehovih's harvest 
of souls, and I will send them to Yeshuah. 

The atmosphereans were then duly ar- 
ranged as commanded, and God called a 
number of swift messengers and one thou- 
sand etherean marshals, and they provided 
an abattos; and the hosts prepared for the 
second resurrection departed for Yeshuah, 
as commanded. 

God said: I have now remaining my 
etherean hosts and the atmosphereans in 



CYCLE OF AH'SHONG 



49 



darkness. Of the latter, let them remain as 
they are for three days, for I will travel 
around the world, and my etherean hosts 
with me, observing mortals and spirits in 
their places and habits, that I may better 
judge them and provide accordingly. 

So God and his etherean angels provid- 
ed an abattos, and they embarked and 
started on their journey, traveling unseen 
by mortals. 

CHAPTER IV. 

After God and his hosts had visited the 
earth and the lower heaven, they returned 
to Yeshuah and sat in council on the affairs 
of mortals and atmospherea. 

The council of Yeshuah, of which there 
were one million members, was formed in 
groups, and these again represented in 
groups, and these in still other groups. 
Consequently, a group of one thousand 
had one speaker, who became the voice of 
the thousand. Of these speakers, one hun- 
dred had one voice in council; and of these, 
ten had one voice before God, and he was 
the voice of the whole, and Jehovih was 
his voice. Thus was the whole council 
represented in all its parts. And this was 
the manner of proceeding: 

God commanded the subject; the coun- 
cil deliberated in thousands, and each 
speaker became aware of the voice of his 
group. Then these speakers assembled in 
hundreds and deliberated, and they again 
centered into one voice; and each ten of 
these had one voice before God. Thus it 
came to pass that the decrees of God were 
both the wisdom of men and of Jehovih. 
Hence, the saying: When God said this, 
or God commanded that, it was the Voice 
of Jehovih expressed by men and angels. 

God said: We will withdraw from the 
druj and the druk and leave them desti- 
tute. Who can approach the beggar with 
wisdom, or the king with inspiration? A 
drowning man will try to swim; but the 
reveler in lust must endure the torments of 
hell before his soul can learn of Jehovih. 
Better is it to labor with a child from in- 
fancy, and thence to maturity, to teach it 
aright, than to strive with a score of con- 
ceited adults and fail to redeem one. They 
that give to such as can help themselves, 
but will not, make but a mockery of char- 
ity. Wisdom and uprightness of heart are 



but bread. Jehovih made hunger, and so 
men love bread. Without hunger they 
would not eat. Preach not to unwelcome 
ears. Sermons of wisdom are not to be 
forced into men's souls. A wise God driv- 
eth home to man's understanding his help- 
lessness in spirit when Jehovih is denied. 

I will leave the earth in darkness 
one more year, that mortals shall cry 
out to Jehovih. Evil spirits have de- 
spoiled Hored and Moeb. Evil spirits and 
evil men say: Behold, there is enough; 
let us divide; and they produce not, but are 
devourers living on the substance of oth- 
ers. They seek ease and comfort. They 
become more and more helpless. They 
are on the road to everlasting destruction. 
The God who can arouse them must be 
wise indeed. 

Blessed is the surgeon's knife. With its 
burn comes the return of health. But yet 
a fool will cry out: Hold, hold, enough — 
thou inflicter of pain. 

Who hath an eye like Jehovih? His 
whipping posts are on all sides, but there 
is a clear road between them. Yet man 
followeth it not. Withdraw all good an- 
gels and men, and there is no person left. 
A man without an arm or a leg is but part 
of a man. A man without perception of 
the All Person is a deformity in soul. He 
seeketh a home for his own ease and glory; 
but the son of Jehovih seeketh to find the 
labor that will profit his brethren most. 

To Yeshuah I will bring the fruit of 
heaven below. There I will build my train- 
ing schools, and they shall learn the ways 
of etherea. Build me a house of brother- 
hood and fill it with willing pupils sworn 
to labor, and I will make them Gods and 
Lords in power and wisdom. Behold, a 
man maketh a factory and turneth out fab- 
ric for sale. I build a college and make 
sons and daughters of Jehovih to give 
away. Bring me such material for warp 
and filling; Jehovih's fabric shall endure 
forever. Search out the seed of the I'hin 
and house them with care, for they shall 
redeem the earth-born after I ascend to 
my kingdom in etherea. 

CHAPTER V. 

So the angels of atmospherea who were 
of sufficient grade were brought to Ye- 
shuah and placed in the schools and facto- 



50 



CYCLE OF AH 'SHONG 



ries which the hosts of Ah'shong had built, 
and such angels were mostly Thins. The 
sick and deranged spirits were placed in 
hospitals and nurseries. Now those who 
were capable of the second resurrection 
numbered two hundred million. 

God said: Build a ship and take them 
to Theistivi, which is the most dense ether - 
ean heaven, and is situated nearest the at- 
mosphere of Earth. 

Thus a second time the light of Jeho- 
vih was founded on Earth. God's ether- 
ean hosts became as teachers in a training 
school to raise up a God and Lords and 
marshals and es'enaurs and other officers 
for a lower heaven. One hundred million 
spirits did God and his Lords and fellow- 
laborers bring from the earth to Yeshuah. 
And God divided the time of study, and of 
recreation, and of music, and of discipline, 
marching and so on, suited to all the peo- 
ple. 

God said: For without discipline there 
is no order; and discipline cannot be with- 
out ceremony; nor ceremony without 
rites and forms and established words. Is 
it not a foolish soldier that saith: Behold, 
I am wise. I need no discipline nor manual 
of arms. What more is he than one of an 
untutored mob? 

As I drill them in heaven to make them 
a unit, so give ye to mortals rites and cer- 
emonies, that coming into heaven, they go 
not back to their old haunts and fall in 
darkness. Whatever tendeth to harmonize 
the behavior ot individuals is of Jehovih; 
the opposite tendeth to evil. Better is it 
that men march to the sound of one mon- 
otonous word, than not to march at all. 
The value lieth not in the word, but in 
bringing in unison that which was in chaos. 
A fool saith: I need not pray, there is no 
virtue in words; and his soul groweth up 
at variance with Jehovih. Neither is there 
more virtue in the prayer or the words 
than in marching before Jehovih; but what- 
ever tendeth to unite men in one expres- 
sion of soul in harmony, is Jehovih's. 

Sacred dances and rites and ceremonies 
were established in Yeshuah in the name of 
Jehovih; and the new heaven became a 
place of delight. 

God said: Teach my chosen to labor 
hard and wisely; and to dance with ener- 
gy, and to sing with strength and fullness 



of soul. For what more is there in any 
man or woman than to learn to put forth? 
What more pitiful thing is there in heaven 
than a man or woman who has only drag- 
ged along? 

CHAPTER VI. 

Now God had left on the earth only 
the very lowest of spirits, and for one 
whole year the earth was void of Jehovih's 
light. And mortals loved to commune 
with the spirits of their kindred, who knew 
little of heaven, more than they did with 
ethereans who were wise and holy. 

God said: What man or woman have 
ye found who saith: Come ye angels of 
Jehovih, tell me wherein I can do more 
good works, for I long to serve Jehovih 
with all my wisdom and strength in doing 
good to my fellows. Rather do they turn 
away from such, and drink in the tales of 
the strolling druj, and so wrap themselves 
up in darkness. 

When the year of darkness was ended, 
God sent two million pruners to the earth, 
saying to them: Find all the evil spirits 
dwelling with mortals, whether they be 
fetals or familiars, and gather them into 
one place. Then find the spirits and fai- 
ries who have taken caves and waterfalls 
on earth as their abode, and bring them to 
the same place. Then find the idiotic and 
chaotic spirits who dwell on battlefields, 
and bring them to the same place. Then 
find the lusters, who dwell in old castles 
and ruined cities, and in houses of evil, 
and when they are going out for raids on 
mortals, seize them and bring them to the 
same place. 

The ethereans went and collected all 
the spirits of darkness belonging to the 
earth, and brought them to a place in at- 
mospherea, and there were of them nine 
hundred million. 

God said: Prepare a ship suitable to 
transport them to Hudaow, in Ji'ya, and 
there provide them a kingdom to them- 
selves, giving them a God and Lords, and 
proper officers to discipline and educate 
them for Jehovih's kingdoms. 

Thus they were removed, and Earth 
and its lower heaven were purified from 
evil spirits by the decree of God in Ye- 
shuah, in the second year of the first dawn. 



CYCLE OF AWSHONG 



51 



CHAPTER VII. 

And at the time mortals died, their 
spirits were taken by the asaphs to Ye- 
shuah. 

God said: Tell my Lords of Earth 
to teach mortals by inspiration and other- 
wise of my kingdom, Yeshuah. 

And through the Lords and the ashars, 
the name, Yeshuah, was established on the 
earth. 

God said: In the time of Kosmon, men 
shall say: Whence came the name of hea- 
venly things? But Yeshuah shall lie hid 
away, and Jehovih will in that day stretch 
forth His hand and disclose all. 

But mortals were thick of tongue, and 
could not say Yeshuah, and they said 
I-e-su; hence came the name of many 
men Iesu, signifying without evil. 

Jehovih spake through God saying: 
The end of the dawn cometh, and My 
emancipated sons and daughters shall re- 
turn to their places, taking the resurrected 
with them. But that the earth and lower 
heaven may not be left in darkness, pro- 
vide ye a God and Lords, and marshals 
and messengers, and all other officers, to 
rule and teach in My name. Suffer not 
My etherean hosts to remain longer than 
dawn, either on the earth or within atmos- 
pherea, for I shall take Earth into dark 
regions in order to build it up to a higher 
state for the time that cometh after. 

The Voice departed. God said: Let the 
members of the council deliberate on this 
matter, and speak before the Father. For 
I will provide also a heaven in the ancient 
place of Hored, and it shall be called Bis- 
pah, for it shall be a place of reception for 
the spirits of the dead preparatory to their 
being brought to Yeshuah. 

In the seventh year of dawn God com- 
manded his council to select another God 
and Lords and other officers; and the coun- 
cil proceeded, selecting the purest, holiest 
and most learned, and a record was made 
of these matters and deposited in the li- 
brary of Yeshuah. God called in his Lords 
of Earth, and they chose the first day of 
the new moon as the day on which to ap- 
point their successors, and God called the 
day Mas. 

When the chosen were in place before 
the throne, God said: By command of 



Jehovih are ye brought before me, His 
Son. In his name will I allot you to the 
places commanded by Him. 

Then he who had ranked highest in 
godliness was led up to the throne, and 
God said: In the name of Jehovih, and by 
His love, wisdom and power, do I declare 
thee God of Earth. 

The initiate said: All love, wisdom and 
power cometh from Jehovih. In His name 
and by virtue of His commandments re- 
ceive I all that is put upon me, for His 
glory forever. 

God then said: Give me a crown, O Je- 
hovih, for Thy Son. 

A scarlet light descended from above, 
and God reached forth his hands and wove 
it into a crown and placed it on the initi- 
ate's head, saying: God of Earth, thee I 
crown. And now shalt thou receive also 
the sacred triangle, which is the heirloom 
of the Gods of earth. And he hung it 
around his neck, adding: And since there 
can be but one God on Earth or in this 
heaven, I herewith uncrown myself in Je- 
hovih's name, and salute thee, God of 
Earth. 

Ah'shong now stood to the right, and 
God went and sat on the throne and there 
descended red and blue lights from above, 
enveloping him completely. 

He said: Let the initiates for Lords of 
earth approach the throne of the Most 
High Jehovih. 

The five Lords came forward. God said: 
Join hands and receive ye from Jehovih. 
By virtue of the love, wisdom and power of 
Jehovih vested in me, do I receive you as 
the highest chosen; and I proclaim you 
Lords of Earth, in Jehovih's name. Ac- 
cept these crowns from heaven above, 
which cannot be woven from earthly 
things. By their power you shall remain in 
accord with Yeshuah and the kingdoms 
above. 

God fashioned the crowns and crowned 
them Lords of the five divisions of the 
earth. 

The Lords said: In Thy name, O Je- 
hovih, do I accept that which Thou hast 
put upon me. With all my wisdom and 
strength and love will I serve Thee, O my 
Father, Jehovih! 



52 



CYCLE OF AH'SHONG 



The Lords retired and the es'enaurs 
sang, more than a million voices in con- 
cert. 

CHAPTER VIII. 

Now had the time come for the end of 
the first dawn of dan after the creation of 
man. And this was known in the ethere- 
an heavens, where lived countless millions 
of Jehovih's sons and daughters emanci- 
pated. And, as might be expected, they 
determined to descend from all sides to 
witness the labors of Ah'shong, and to re- 
ceive his works as a profitable lesson for 
their own future on other new worlds. 
Consequently, there began to appear in the 
firmament far-off stars, where the name of 
Ah'shong had been known for thousands 
of years. From all sides they came, grow- 
ing brighter and brighter, larger and larg- 
er. 

Ah'shong spoke to his companions, 
saying: Make ready, O my beloved, My 
friends and your friends are coming. Put 
our ship in order. Light the pillars of fire 
and spread out the sails, shining, that they 
may be glorified in Jehovih's name. 

The proper persons accomplished these 
things, and to the eastward of Yeshuah, 
the etherean ship of Ah'shong was anchor- 
ed; and so great was the size thereof that 
there was room for the ethereans of Anak- 
aron and upward of three hundred million 
of the redeemed of Earth besides. 

Ah'shong said: When our friends ar- 
rive, we shall join them and make an ex- 
cursion around the world, discovering its 
rank and glorious promises; but as to the 
nine hundred million drujas which I sent 
off to Hudaow, in Ji'ya, we shall pass 
thither on our way to Anakaron. 

Brighter and brighter grew the descend- 
ing stars, the etherean ships from far-off 
worlds; and larger and larger, till in ma- 
jesty they neared Yeshuah. Ah'shong then 
came down and sat at the foot of the throne 
according to the custom of Gods. God 
came down and cook him by the hand, say- 
ing: Son of Jehovih, arise, and take thy 
hosts and embark in Jehovih's ship, going 
wherever thou wilt. Ah'shong rose up. 
The es'enaurs and trumpeters pla.yed and 
sang. Then Ah'shong said: 

One more love have I in the world, O 
Jehovih. I go from Yeshuah, but my love 
remains. To thee, O God, will I look back 



in hope and love for thou wert raised by 
me. And to thy Lords what less could I 
say? Yea, and to all the hosts I leave with- 
in these realms. 

Ah'shong touched God's right hand, 
then saluting with the third sign of Emeth 
to Jehovih, departed, and the marshals 
conducted him off to the ship. 

Ah'shong and his etherean hosts rose 
up in curtains of light; and presently the 
ship was loosened from its anchorage and 
floated upward, and all the angels having 
entered it, the sails were spread out, and 
the mantles suspended on every side, till 
the whole vessel, with its thousands of 
masts and arcs, looked like a world on 
fire. The inhabitants of Yeshuah feared 
and trembled for the mighty works of the 
Gods and Goddesses; and yet, as the es'- 
enaurs on the departing ship chanted, more 
than a million voices, the Yeshuans sang 
with them, amidst their tears, with souls 
overflowing with awe and love and admir- 
ation. 

And at the same time the descending 
ships of other Gods and Goddesses from 
etherea were drawing nearer and nearer; 
and on every side the firmament seemed 
filled with worlds on fire. Presently they 
came, first one and then another of the 
ethereans, and they made fast to Ah'shong's 
ship, until thus more than five hundred 
were united into one mighty vessel, and 
yet so near to Yeshuah that all could be 
seen. 

And when they had united there were 
countless millions of angels thus in close 
proximity, many who had known one an- 
other for thousands of years, and some 
who were older than Earth, and knew 
its history. And these had companions as 
old as themselves; and they were ripe in 
experience with corporeal worlds, stars and 
suns in other regions of Jehovih's king- 
doms. 

So great was the wisdom of these Gods 
and Goddesses that to come within 
Earth's atmosphere was sufficient to en- 
able them to read all the souls and pray- 
ers of mortals, and all the thoughts and 
desires of the spirits of the lower heaven 
belonging to Earth. To each and all 
of them the Voice of Jehovih was ever 
present, and their power was like their 
wisdom. 



CYCLE OF AH'SHONG 



53 



Jehovih hath said: To the corporean I 
have given power to hear one or two 
things at the same moment of time; but 
My Gods can hear intelligently tens of 
thousands of men speaking at the same 
time. They can find a way to answer 
them also. 

When the ships were ready for depart- 
ure, Ah'shong said: Let us pass low over 
Yeshuah, and ye shall hear and see those 
I have founded in a new heaven. 

His companions said: Jehovih's will 
be done. 

And after they had visited Yeshuah 
they descended to the earth, and round 
about the places of the Lords; and when 
they had seen all, and heard the explana- 
tion, from those with Ah'shong, of the 
state the earth was in, and of the heavens 
of Earth, they rose and sailed toward Ana- 
karon, whither Ah'shong had invited them. 
CHAPTER IX. 

After the ascent of the etherean hosts 
of Ah'shong to etherea, God and his Lords 
worked faithfully as Jehovih had com- 
manded. 

The Lords, who were now called Adon- 
ya, were such as had been brought forth 
on Earth. And God, who had dominion in 
the atmospherea of Earth, was also' Earth- 
born; and so were all the angels of atmos- 
pherea the product of Earth. 

Jehovih said: Through the flowers of 
the field I express myself in color and per- 
fume; through the lion and mastodon I 
express myself with power and voracious- 
ness; through the lamb and the dove I ex- 
press myself in meekness and docility. 
Through man I express myself in words 
and actions; and all men, the wise and the 
ignorant, are channels of my expression. 
Some have thick tongues and poor speech, 
nevertheless they are My babes, My sons 
and daughters. 

After the se'muan age I gave to the 
earth from my etherean heavens sons and 
daughters, and they abode with mortals 
for three thousand years. And My ether- 
eans established loo'is on the lands of the 
earth, and they commanded the loo'is, say- 
ing: Your office is to lead man and wo- 
man by inspiration to dwell together as 
husband and wife. 

In Kosmon I will confound the wise 
man for he shall not know why man and 



woman lived not indiscriminately as the 
beasts. I will show him that they who pro- 
fess Me are led by Me, but they who deny 
Me go down to indiscriminate communion. 
Out of My works shall the lessons of the 
early days of Earth show the presence 
of My hand. But My loo'is was man and 
woman inspired to raise up sons and 
daughters to glorify Me and My works. 
Such as could comprehend Me, having 
faith that My presence should ultimately 
triumph for the highest and best, I com- 
manded to be called Faithists, and I will 
keep a thread of the line of Faithist on the 
earth till the end. 

God through his Lords sent loo'is to 
the I'hins, and by controlling the parent- 
age of the unborn brought into the world 
a new race of men of the same blood 
as of old, and these heard the Voice of 
the Lord. And man was delivered into wis- 
dom, peace and virtue, and the earth be- 
came as a garden of sweet smelling flowers 
and luxurious fruit. 

The first harvest was two hundred years, 
and the number of Brides and Brode- 
grooms was six hundred millions of grade 
ninety-two. 

The second harvest was two hundred 
years, and was eight hundred million an- 
gels, of grade eighty-nine. 

The third harvest was six hundred 
years, and was two thousand millions of 
angels of grade eighty-three-. 

The fourth harvest was five hundred 
years, and was twenty-three hundred mill- 
ion angels, of grade seventy-four. 

The fifth harvest was three hundred 
years, and was six hundred million angels 
of grade sixty-two. 

And now began wars in atmospherea, 
thousands of angels against thousands, and 
millions against millions. And again dark- 
ness came upon Earth and her hea- 
vens, and war and destruction were upon 
all the nations of the world, for so great 
was the number of spirits of darkness 
around mortals that they destroyed even 
their own cities and kingdoms. 

The sixth harvest was four hundred 
years, and was nine hundred million an- 
gels, of grade fifty-one. And this was the 
last harvest, for none were of sufficient 
grade to abide in the etherean heavens. 
For the attractions of the great wickedness 



54 



CYCLE OF AH'SHONG 



caused the angels of heaven to desert their 
schools and factories, and descend to mor- 
tals. 

At the end of the second cycle there 
were in atmospherea six thousand million 
angels of darkness who knew not who they 
were or where they dwelt; neither knowing 
nor caring whether there were other hea- 
vens or not. 

And man distinguished not his sister 
or mother, and woman distinguished not 
her brother or father. And man became as 
a harvest that is blighted and rotted be- 
cause of its rankness. 



Jehovih said: Now will I bewail thee, 
O Earth. The glories of thy heavens that 
are past and gone shall be a lesson to the 
Gods. Thy place of Hored and Moeb, 
once the holy place of My Son Sethantes, 
has been destroyed. Now Yeshuah, where 
floated the plateau of many resurrections, 
is filled with millions of souls that hear not 
and see not, but are forever burrowing 
deep in darkness. The plateaux are broken 
up, the substance scattered and unorganiz- 
ed. Nor is there anything left of the 
glorious work of the Gods in these hea- 
vens. 




Synopsis ok First sixteen cycles 



CHAPTER I. 

Sethanthes was the first God of Earth 
and her heavens, and his place was within 
the arc of Wan. And during his cycle of 
three thousand years, he raised up from 
Earth four thousand four hundred million 
Brides and Bridegrooms to Jehovih. 

After Sethantes came Ah'shong, sub- 
Chief in the realms of Hieu Wee in the 
Haian arc of Vehetaivi. And during his 
cycle, also three thousand years, Ah'shong 
raised up from Earth a harvest of seven 
thousand two hundred million Brides and 
Bridegrooms. 

The third cycle was under the domin- 
ion of Hoo Le, surveyor of Kakayes'sta in 
the arc of Gimmel, and his harvest was 
three thousand seven hundred million. 

The fourth cylce was under C'pe Aban, 
Chieftainess of Sulgoweron in the arc of 
Yan, and her harvest was four thousand 
eight hundred million. 

The fifth cycle was under Pathodices, 
road-maker of Chitivya in the arc of Yaho- 
mitak, and his harvest was six thousand 
four hundred million. 

The sixth cycle was under Goemagak, 
God of I'seg, in the arc of Somgwothga, 
and his harvest was seven thousand nine 
hundred million. 

The seventh cycle was under Goepens, 
God of Kaim, in the arc of Srivat, and his 
harvest was nine thousand three hundred 
million. 

The eighth cylce was under Hycis, God- 
dess of Ruts, in the arc of Hohamagollak, 
and her harvest was nine thousand four 
hundred million. 

The ninth cycle was under See'itcicius, 
inspector of roads in Kammatra, in the arc 
of Jusyin, and his harvest was ten thousand 
one hundred million. 

The tenth cycle was under Miscelitivi, 
Chieftainess of the arches of Lawzgowbak, 
in the arc of Nu, and her harvest was ten 
thousand eight hundred million. 

And now the world was full of people. 
All the continents and islands of the earth 
were inhabited by man: nor was there left 
any wilderness wherein man did not dwell 



But the generation of man had fallen from 
thirty-three to twelve years. And man and 
woman were at maturity at seven years 
old; and not many lived thirty years; but 
they were prolific, many of the mothers 
bringing forth two score sons and daugh- 
ters, and from two to four at a birth. 

And man dwelt in peace, and the earth 
was tilled, and brought forth abundantly 
of everything that was good for man to 
eat, and to clothe himself. And there were 
in those days great cities of hundreds of 
thousands of inhabitants; thousands and 
thousands of such cities, and in all the five 
divisions of the earth. And man built 
ships and sailed over the ocean in all di- 
rections, around about the whole world. 
By the angels of the Lord was he taught 
and guided in all things. And man had 
books, both written and printed; and the 
young were taught in schools a knowledge 
of the sun and moon and stars, and of all 
things that are upon the earth and in the 
waters thereof. This was therefore called 
the first period of civilization on Earth. 

Now, for the most part, all the people 
had become I'hins, small, white and yel- 
low. Nevertheless there were ground -^°o 
pie with long arms, who were large; but 
they dwelt by themselves, and their food 
was of all manner of flesh, and fish and 
creeping things. The ground people were 
brown and black, and they lived to be two 
hundred, and even four hundred, years old. 

Jehovih said: In the early days I raised 
up I'huans, and I gave them certain com- 
mandments, amongst which was not to co- 
habit with the Druks lest they go down in 
darkness. But they obeyed not My words; 
and lo and behold, they are lost from the 
face of the earth. Because the Thins have 
become a spiritual people and have pros- 
pered in peace and spirit, behold, they have 
degenerated in the corporeal body. They 
yield abundant harvests for My etherean 
realms, but are like untimely births. Now 
will I bring Earth into a'jian fields and 
forests for a long time, and the time of a 
generation shall be thirty-three years. For 
My harvests shall be of fruit that is mature. 



56 



SYNOPSIS OF FIRST SIXTEEN CYCLES 



And Jehovih brought Earth into new 
regions in the etherean worlds, and cov- 
ered it over with a'ji. And after a time 
many of the I'hins lost the generative de- 
sire; but the brown people burned with de- 
sire, and they laid hold of the I'hin women 
when they went into the fields, and thus 
brought forth again the I'huan race, the 
copper colored, strong and bright and 
quick. 

Accordingly the eleventh cycle, which 
was under Gobath, God of Ticongothaga, 
in the arc of Su'ie, brought forth a harvest 
of six thousand seven hundred million. 

The twelfth cycle was under F'aiyis, 
Goddess of Looga, in the arc of Siyan, and 
her harvest was two thousand six hundred 
million. 

The thirteenth cycle was under Zinea- 
thaes, in the arc of Oleganaya, and his 
harvest was one thousand two hundred 
million. 

The fourteenth cycle was under Toth- 
sentaga, road-maker in Hapan-nogos, in 
the arc of Manechu, and his harvest was 
only six hundred million. 

The fifteenth cycle was under Nimeas, 
God of Thosgothamachus, in the arc of 
Seigga, and his harvest was only forty 
million. 

The sixteenth cycle was under Neph, 
God of Sogghonnes, in the arc of Ar- 
broohk, and he failed to bring forth any 
harvest. 



CHAPTER II. 

Now the time of a generation of mor- 
tals had risen to eighty years, and there 
were many who lived to be three hundred 
years old. And they were large and strong 
and prolific, but were without judgment, 



not knowing their own species. And they 
mingled together, relatives as well as oth- 
ers; so that idiocy ?.nd disease were the 
general fate of the tribes of men. 

This is the grade of declension in the 
heavens of Earth after Kishalon had 
changed the period of generation from 
twelve years. 

Abner, seventh dawn of dan, enduring 
three thousand two hundred years in Has- 
taf, etherean a'ji seven, Hoe'tan, grade 
ninety-nine. 

Enseeni, Goddess of Marsef, etherean, 
dan of Gem, enduring three thousand 
years, grade ninety-three. 

Boaz, God of Horn, Orian field, dan 
of Josh, enduring two thousand seven hun- 
dred years, grade eighty-eight. 

Dai'vi, Goddess of Wowitski in a'ji 
thirty-six, dan of Ruth, enduring two 
thousand nine hundred years, grade ninety- 
two. 

Lia'mees, Goddess of War in Broek, 
dan forty, Orian field, enduring three thou- 
sand years, grade seventy-seven. 

Divi'yas, God of Hut in Habak, ji'ya 
twenty-two, dan of Neth, enduring three 
thousand one hundred years, grade sixty- 
nine. 

Roa'yis'yis, Goddess of Tamak, dan of 
Bent, one of Hud'du'owts, enduring three 
thousand and seventy years, grade sixty- 
one. 

Yij, Chief of Orian field, Lud in Goo, 
dan seventy-four, enduring two thousand 
six hundred years, grade fifty-eight. 

Gulyaniv, Chieftainess, Orian field, Ob'- 
Low in ji'ya forty, enduring three thou- 
sand four hundred years, grade fifty-one. 

From this time onward there was found 
no grade in the roadway of the solar pha- 
lanx sufficiently dense for the angels of 
Earth. 



Cycle of Aph 



CHAPTER I. 

In the time of the world twenty-four 
thousand years before the Kosmon Era, 
the solar serpent being in the arc of Noe, 
in the etherean heavens, and of the Sum 
of ji'ya eighty-seven, Earth and her hea- 
vens were in great darkness. Mortals 
had turned away from God and his Lords. 
In conceit and darkness had they shut 
themselves up. They had peopled the hea- 
vens of Earth with spirits of darkness, 
the drujas of men of darkness and canni- 
bals. Like devouring vermin their fetals 
had floated back upon them, and burrowed 
deep in pollution. 

Jehovih's Voice spake to the counsel- 
lors and high ruling chieftains of the ex- 
alted kingdoms in the firmament, saying: 

O ye Orian Chiefs, and etherean God- 
desses that dwell in the roadway of the 
great serpent, behold, the red star, 
Earth, hath attained her maturity, but she 
is rank. For fifty thousand years hath 
she played her part as an ornament of hea- 
ven and a harvester of bright souls for My 
exalted regions in the firmament. Call ye 
a council of those that plant My a'jian gar- 
dens and My a'jian fields; and of them 
that whirl My nebulous vortices in the 
firmament. 

And there assembled in the etherean 
gardens of Senaya, near the roadway of 
the solar phalanx, millions of Jehovih's 
high-raised Gods and Goddesses, and the 
place was like a park a hundred times 
larger than Earth; and round about on 
every side lie the crystalline borders of 
etherean worlds. And when they were as- 
sembled, Jehovih spake out of the light 
inherent, saying: 

Sixteen times have My etherean hosts 
redeemed Earth and her heavens from 
darkness into light, and yet ere the end of 
a cycle she falleth again, and her atmos- 
pherea with her. And her heavens are fill- 
ed with thousands of milions of spirits that 
know not Me and My emancipated worlds. 
Speak, O Gods and Goddesses. 



Thereupon Sut'loo said: O Jehovih, I 
have heard. Too prolific is Earth, this 
young daughter of heaven. 

Next spake Ka'waha, saying: Thou 
hast spoken, O Jehovih. Too prolific is the 
rich Earth. Her mortals are overpowered 
by her atmospherean hosts. For a time 
her people build up cities and nations, but 
they are soon overflooded with fetals and 
drujas, and the mortals devour one another 
as beasts of prey. 

Chi'jong said: Her people have tilled 
all the soil of Earth and covered it over 
with cities, but where are they? Her peo- 
ple have been learned in matters of heaven 
and earth, but their knowledge is dissipated 
by the dread hand of war. 

Dhu'itta said: Her people become wise 
in a day, but on the next they are fools. 
One generation becometh skilled in books 
and knowledge of the sun and moon and 
stars, and in the mathematics of corporeal 
things; but a generation followeth, and lo, 
her people are cannibals again. 

Gaw'zin said: I have heard, O Jeho- 
vih. I have witnessed, O Father. The red 
star is too prolific. She is like a garden 
too rich. Her products are overgrown, 
and they fall down and doubly enrich the 
soil again, to reproduce an imperfect giant 
stock that is barren. So are her sons and 
daughters; they run all to earthly sub- 
stance. 

Loo' wan said: Great Spirit, I have 
heard. We gather Earth's harvests for 
Thee, O Jehovih, but they are small. We 
gather Earth's harvests of dark spirits, 
O Jehovih, and they are ten times larger. 
Behold, there is no balance between them. 

Thus spake the Gods and Goddesses, 
till thousands of them had spoken. After 
that the Voice of Jehovih spake, saying: 

Ye are blessed, My sons and daughters. 
How can ye bequeath the administration of 
Earth and her heaven to the Earth-born, 
till she is made suitable as a gift from My 
hand? Now hear Me, O My sons and 
daughters. Five great divisions of the 
earth have I made, and they have all been 



58 



CYCLE OF APH 



inhabited over and tilled by mortals. Yea, 
on all the divisions of the earth have there 
been great cities and nations, and men and 
women of great learning. And as oft as 
they are raised up in light, so are they 
again cast down in darkness, because of 
the great desire of the spirits of the dead 
to return back to the earth. These drujas 
return to mortals and fasten upon them as 
fetals or as familiars, and inspire them to 
evil. Go now to Earth, O My beloved, 
and find the division of the earth where 
most of these drujas congregate, for I will 
uproot their stronghold. I will break them 
from their haunts and they shall no longer 
carry My people down to destruction. 

And now the council deliberated, and 
after a while caused the records of 
Earth and her atmospherea to be examined, 
and they discovered that the heaven of the 
land of Pan was beyond redemption 
because of the great numbers of the 
spirits of cannibals and of the multitude of 
fetals. It was as if a disease in the flesh 
be healed over externally, leaving the root 
of the disease within. The redemption of 
the cycle remained not with her, but evil 
broke out forever in a new way. 

Jehovih said: Now will I prune Earth 
and her heavens. Behold, the division of 
Pan shall be hewn off and cast be- 
neath the waters of the ocean. Her hea- 
ven shall be no longer tenable by the spir- 
its of destruction. 

And because man is without knowledge, 
let My Gods and Lords appoint certain 
masters of generations, who are ethereans 
of great wisdom, to abide with mortals 
and inspire such marriages as will best pro- 
mote spiritual growth. And there will 
come forth amongst all people certain ones 
capable of sar'gis and su'is, and they will 
heed the commandments of My Gods and 
Lords, forsaking evil and striving to serve 
Jehovih in all things. 

Go ye, therefore, down to Earth and 
provide nets and vanchas for receiving the 
spirits of darkness, and for receiving the 
spirits of mortals who shall perish in the 
waters. And provide ye a place in My ex- 
alted heavens suitable for them; and ye 
shall wall them about in heaven that they 
cannot escape, but that they may be weaned 
from evil. 



And when ye are come to Earth and 
its heavens, acquaint My God and His 
Lords with my decree, and say to them: 
Thus saith Jehovih: Behold, I will sink 
the land of Pan beneath the waters of 
the ocean, and her heaven will I carry away 
to a place in My firmament where she shall 
no longer engulf My people in darkness. 

Go thou, O God of Earth, and Thou, O 
Lord of Pan, down to My chosen, and say 
to them: 

Thus saith the Great Spirit. Behold, I 
will sink the lands of the earth beneath the 
ocean, because of the evil of the spirits of 
darkness. Hear Me, O My chosen, and 
heed My commandments. Go build ye 
ships on the mountains, and gather within 
the ships for My hand is surely stretched 
over the earth. 

My God of Earth and his Lords, shall 
gather together all the angels of the earth, 
from east to west and from north to south, 
to the land of Pan. 

My etherean ships of fire shall surround 
Pan on every side. And I will cut loose 
the foundations of the earth, at the borders 
of the ocean and the mountains of Gan, 
nor shall any prop or corner stone stay My 
hand. And I will send rains and winds and 
thundering; and the waters of the great 
deep shall come up upon the lands, and the 
great cities shall go down and be swallow- 
ed in the sea. And the rich valleys of Mai, 
with her thousand cities, shall be rent with 
the madness of men and women fleeing be- 
fore the waters of the ocean. And women 
and children shall fall by the way and be 
drowned; and men shall go down in the 
water and rise not. 

And the wide plains of Og, with her 
thousand cities, and with the great capital 
of Penj, and the temples of Khu, and Bart, 
and Gan, and Saing, shall sink to rise no 
more. And in the deluge, the air of hea- 
ven shall be filled with the screaming and 
wailing of millions of mortals going down 
to destruction. 

I will rescue them from darkness. I 
will carry them to a'jian regions which I 
previously created for spirits of darkness. 
And I will appoint over them Gods and 
Goddesses to teach them of Me and My 
kingdoms. 

And Earth and her heavens shall take a 
new start amongst My habitable worlds. 



CYCLE OF APH 



59 



Thus have I provided labor for My high 
raised angels in the places I created. 

CHAPTER II. 

Jehovih said: Hear Me, O ye etherean 
Gods and Goddesses. They desire not 
wisdom and resurrection. Their love lieth 
in darkness. To eat, to sleep and to de- 
vour are the delights of their souls. The 
first lesson of life they have not learned. 
The first heaven of Earth is to them the 
All of the created worlds. Hear My judg- 
ment upon them, My holy angels. For I 
have raised them up again and again. I 
have founded lower heavens for them that 
they might learn; but they fall the moment 
My Gods leave them alone. 

The drujas and fetals shall be carried to 
Hautuon and surrounded by walls of fire. 
And they shall be divided up into groups. 
Kin shall be torn away from kin, and 
friend from friend, and mother from daugh- 
ter, and father from son; for they are be- 
come as absorbents, sucking one another 
continually. And the walls of fire shall go 
up around them without ceasing, and they 
shall not escape. And they that guard 
them shall keep them from one another, 
that they shall do no evil. Neither shall 
they sleep nor rest, but be stirred up and 
made to know that they are alive, and can 
exist independent of fetal. For what more 
is the earth to these spirits of darkness, — 
what more is their first heaven,— than a 
place of perpetual devouring? Have they 
not made it a place of everlasting destruc- 
tion? They visit their evils upon mortals. 
The young child cannot escape them, nor 
the middle aged, nor the old man nor old 
woman. The heavenly kingdoms founded 
by Gods and Lords have become pest- 
houses for drujas and fetals. There is no 
place left for founding the upright and vir- 
tuous in heart. 

And God cried out to me, saying: Hear 
me, O Jehovih. Earth and her hea- 
vens are gone down in darkness. The Thin 
hath been despoiled on all the divisions 
of the earth save Pan. More than thir- 
ty thousand million angels are gathered on 
the surface of Earth, and they are too 
low in grade to be delivered. What shall 
Thy God do, O Father? Mortals are de- 
scending in breed and blood. Only as dis- 
eased vermin do they inhabit Earth. 



Their cities are destroyed, and they dwell 
after the manner of four-footed beasts. 
The inspiration of Thy God and his an- 
gels can no longer reach them. When 
they die and enter these heavens they art 
as festering sores upon one another, thou- 
sands of millions of them. For three thou- 
sand years have I labored with them, but 
the abundance of their darkness outmatch- 
eth Thy God. What shall I do with them, 

Father? How shall Thy God deliver 
so great a carcass of death? 

Now have I answered in the firmament 
of My holy sons and daughters. I have 
called them from remote places in heaven 
to witness the work of My hand. For as I 
made Earth and its heaven, so rule I 
over it to the same end for which I cre- 
ated it. When they are short of My meas- 
ure I lengthen them out. When they run 
foul, I prune them to My own liking, for 
they are Mine. Behold, the fool hath said: 
Jehovih hath made a failure. Behold, the 
Creator created a world for a certain pur- 
pose, but it ran foul of His mark. 

Did I not quicken man into life in my 
own way? At zero created I him, and I 
said: Two roads have I made, O man. 
One leadeth to everlasting light, and the 
other to everlasting darkness. Now have 

1 shown him the darkness. It is My wit- 
ness whereby man knoweth My word is 
All Truth. Wherefore, then, should I not 
create the world, and man, and angels, 
that they go down in darkness? Is it not 
by darkness and pain that I push man for- 
ward? Yea, the conceited man would fail 
himself but for the failures I set up be- 
fore him. Wherefore, then, have I not 
created wisely? Have I not a right to do 
Mine own way? Are not all things mine? 
If a man die in the corporeal part, is he a 
failure? How else could man rise to My 
etherean worlds? 

He was not and I created him. He 
presumeth to look into My plans and judg- 
ments. By his little learning he exalteth 
his conceit and pretendeth to know all 
things. I cause grain to grow in the field, 
and the day before it is ripe I send wind 
and rains to destroy it utterly. I bring 
forth man with shapely limbs and strong 
arms, but in the day of his prime I cut 
him down. I gave the passion of love to 
the mother, but I take away her first-born. 



60 



CYCLE OF APH 



Know I not that first of all things, man 
shall be taught to know My power, and 
after that My wisdom? Shall man of 
Earth say: The Creator was angry, and so 
sent the land beneath the ocean? He hath 
not wisdom to comprehend that this day I 
cast out hell and destruction. The druj 
is his love, and as vampires they feed on 
each other to the ruin of both. But I 
know what is for their own good, and My 
decree hath gone forth. 

CHAPTER III. 
Aph, Orian Chief, said: When I was in 
the Orian arc of Noe, and the red star pass- 
ed the Utswowldayark, in the etherean 
group of Vorh, the Voice of Jehovih came 
to me saying: Go thou, My Son, and de- 
liver Earth. Take with thee all whom I 
may send. 

And I examined the records of the 
stars of heaven, and of Earth and the 
accounts of Jehovih's harvests, and I per- 
ceived the bondage and labor of the red 
star were of the seventh magnitude in the 
advance of habitable worlds. 

When His Voice called the legions in 
high heaven from every side, and below 
and above Earth, there moved myriads 
of shapely stars, which were ships of fire, 
coursing the firmament, whereon rode the 
Gods and Goddesses called by Jehovih to 
the labor of Earth and hada. Closing in on 
every side they came, and nearer and more 
compact, and brighter, with sparkling pil- 
lars of fire, till all the space around Earth 
was hedged in with this army of Jehovih's 
etherean ships of fire. 

Again I heard Jehovih's Voice saying: 
O Aph, My Son, My holy one, hearken to 
the Voice of Jehovih, Creator of Gods and 
Goddesses. Behold, I sent My Son Neph 
to the red star with wisdom and power. 
Long hath he been gone, long struggling 
with the black darkness of men and angels. 
As a valiant soldier rusheth into the hea- 
viest part of battle, and forgetteth himself 
in desperate contest, but ceaseth not to 
struggle on against all odds, even so for 
three thousand years hath My God, Neph, 
hoped to save whole all the limbs of 
Earth. From My holy place have I watch- 
ed the battle for everlasting life; but the 
too prolific Earth contributed more to the 
corporeal man than to the spiritual man. 



And I bring My legions to the rescue ot 
My valiant Son, Neph. Send thou to him, 

Aph, My Son. Proclaim to him and his 
Lords, and to his ethereans, My Just de- 
crees. 

Aph said: And I sent swift messengers 
down to hada, informing Neph, Son of 
Jehovih, of the march and presence of 
Gods, and of the decree of the Father; and 

1 added thereunto, saying: O Neph, Son 
of Jehovih, come hither, bringing thy hosts 
with thee. 

Presently Neph answered me in Jeho- 
vih's name, saying: O Aph, Son of Jeho- 
vih, I come. My prayers are answered. 
All praise to the All Highest. 

Then we saw, making ready in hada, 
preparatory to ascending, the ship of Neph 
and his faithful hosts; and that which was 
seen from my place was also seen by myri- 
ads of Jehovihs' vessels surrounding the 
earth. And my place became as a central 
throne to which the hosts now made 
speed, swiftly and orderly. And in the time 
they came, also rose up the ship of Neph 
from hada. Meanwhile my ship rested on 
the borders of Chinvat, in the School of 
Hein, and from the moon seven agus. 

Jehovih said: Aph, My Son, put a walL 
of pillars of fire around about the land of 
Pan; for the false Gods and Goddesses 
of hada, when perceiving their habitation 
going down into the water, will endeavor 
to escape to Jud and Vohu, and other 
countries. But thou shalt not suffer one 
to escape; for they have migrated to this 
division of the earth because of its sump- 
tuous productions, the better to feast their 
evil desires. 

And thou shalt spread a net around the 
borders of Pan, against the line of the 
ocean and to the high north mountains; 
and che net shall encompass the continent 
of Pan, and it shall be to the height of 
a thousand miles, and in breadth so that 
no spirit of darkness can escape and find 
the way abroad. And when thou hast 
spread the net, thou shalt send a sufficient 
number of ethereans; and they shall take 
with them birth blankets; and in the time of 
destruction, when the mortals go down in 
death, thy servants shall receive the liberat- 
ed spirits on the birth blankets, and bear 
them to the atmospherean column of as- 
cent. And hither shall thy hosts receive 



CYCLE OF APH 



61 



them and provide them with food and 
clothes after the maner of es'yans. 

But it shall come to pass that many 
mothers shall perish in the waters, with 
children in the womb, which live by fetal, 
as is proper in My sight, for so I created 
them. Therefore, to all such fetals give 
special care for they are without sin. And 
when the mother is dead corporeally, and 
the fetal also, bring hence their spirits, but 
together and provide a volunteer angel of 
fetal power, and deliver the infant spirit to 
her to be nurtured until the proper time of 
weaning, and provide in the same place a 
home for the mother of the child, that she 
may inherit its love and mirth. 

When the Voice ceased, I, Aph, Son of 
Jehovih, looked about over the hosts as if 
in search of a sign that the time had come; 
but again Jehovih spake, saying: 

In the misfortunes of a fallen world, 
created I food for the warm love of My 
etherean Goddesses. Behold them here- 
about in millions, every one in hope of re- 
ceiving a prize of that which was lost in 
darkness, to raise up sons and daughters 
who shall rejoice in everlasting paradise. 
Think not that I gave the talent of love 
only to a mother for her child, and there 
the talent to end; for as the talent in its in- 
cipient stage bindeth her soul to her child, 
so doth the same talent in My Goddesses 
overspread a helpless world. Are they not 
as midwives and mothers to thousands and 
millions of souls being delivered from cor- 
poreal bondage into everlasting light? And 
who can number them? Here standeth a 
hundred milion come from Laygas; a hun- 
dred million from Inopta; two hundred 
million from Karduk; a hundred million 
from Buchk; two hundred million from 
Nin; two hundred and fifty million from 
Luth'wig; a hundred million from Pied; 
two hundred million from Raig; and 
fifty million from Naivis; two hundred 
million from Dak'dak; and two hundred 
and fifty million from Od. I spake in the 
etherean firmament, and they have an- 
swered Me. Yea, they come not as curi- 
osity seekers, and with empty arms; but 
behold them arrayed with their thousands 
and millions of small equipments suited to 
the newborn. What is there they have not 
remembered to bring with them in some 
part, for regimen or drapery, to rejoice the 



souls of them that are to be cut off from 



corpori 



CHAPTER IV. 



Again the Voice of Jehovih came to 
me, saying: My Son, make fast thy ship, 
for thy place shall be the head of the army 
of My hosts. And let thy consorts extend 
in a line from thy place down to the earth, 
for this shall be the delivery of them whom 
I shall cut off. 

So I made fast, and my messengers 
hastened to the congregating forces of 
heaven, informing the etherean groups on 
Jehovihs' ships of His commandments. 
And now came Neph. His ship rose up 
filled with his long laboring hosts. And I 
greeted him, saying: By the power and 
wisdom of Jehovih, the continent of Pan 
is to be cut loose and submerged, and 
her heavens carried away. Return thou 
to Earth and bring all the spirits of dark- 
ness from all the divisions of Earth and 
her heavens to Pan, that I may carry them 
away. 

Then Neph and his hosts viewed the 
imposing scene and returned back to 
Earth. 

Quickly now, the ships of fire formed 
in line, extending from my place down to 
hada, where rested Neph and his Lords 
of Earth, whose hosts extended to all 
the divisions of land and water, embracing 
the various heavenly kingdoms previously 
built by the Lords. And in the line of 
the etherean ships were stationed the pla- 
teaux of rank; and the hosts of Gods and 
Goddesses took their places according to 
the rank, of love, wisdom and power man- 
ifested in the etherean departments whence 
they came, with an Orian Chief at each ex- 
tremity. 

And I divided the line into sections, 
each with two hundred and fifty ships, 
and there were one thousand sections. And 
every ship was contracted ten thousand 
fold, which was the force required to 
break the crust of Earth and sink a con- 
tinent. Along the line I stationed senti- 
nels and talemen and messengers, without 
number, so that Jehovih's Voice and His 
Sons' voices could traverse in a moment 
of time to every part. And after that I 
formed the tube of transit, which extended 
in front of the ships, and from the earth to 



62 



CYCLE OF APH 



beyond Chinvat; and I filled it with the 
Earth's atmospherea to the extreme where 
it joined Io'sank, whither I had determined 
to deliver the drujas and fetals of such as 
were to perish in the ocean. For every 
ten sections I appointed one hundred mar- 
shals and one God, and for every ten Gods 
one Chief in Emuts. According to their 
rank in the heavens whence they came so 
appointed I them. These, then, were the 
Chief Emuts, to-wit: 

Agar, of the order of Achav, Son of Je- 
hovih, in Bowitch, from the corporeal star 
Godad raised in Ben of a'ji seventy, of sev- 
en hundred thousand years inhabitant of 
Gon. 

Hoe'ghi, Son of Jehovih, Marsh'wan of 
Hadom and Ag, nebulae four and Petrath; 
swift messenger of Jun, of the corporeal 
star Alanx, of one million two hundred 
thousand years inhabitant of Roth'wuk in 
Jois. 

Fist'humitaivi, Daughter of Jehovih, 
ji'ya'an Oods'lon in Kaih; Goddess of Ine; 
Goddess of Ad; Governess of Walwal, of 
the corporeal star Ter'wig, and of the 
plains of Exwer and Gohen, in the ether- 
ean arc of Labis, of one million three hun- 
dred thousand years. 

Hi'ata, Daughter of Jehovih, and nurse 
of Hue'enbak, in fifty-seven a'ji, of the cor- 
poreal star Heats, a milkmaid, Goddess of 
Luf, Goddess of the plateau of O'banf, in 
etherea, rank ninety, and of two millions 
of years inhabitant of Nud and Ix. 

Gon'leps, Son of Jehovih, God of Ney, 
God of Aper, God of Don, God of Mu, 
God of Reau; physician of Bo and of Ir, 
and of Jan'er; marshal of Kute and Oblin 
of Sharar, in etherea, of the a'ji'an field of 
Do; of seven hundred thousand years in- 
habitant of Onlof and Rick'tus. 

Neo, God of Lun and Hintaya; God of 
Mors, and of Thespune; Master of Peh 
and Savior of Woh'haggai, a'ji plain seven, 
and risen from the corporeal star Se'etiyi, 
and inhabitant of Sirne one million seven 
hundred thousand years. 

Sicci, Goddess of Nu, in Lotos and 
Rab; Goddess of Bad; Goddess of Ture; 
Goddess of Red, a'ji twenty, from the cor- 
poreal star Ith'mule, inhabitant of Suga 
one million of years; inhabitant of Ranna 
one million two hundred thousand years. 

Listiac'ca, Goddess of Man; Goddess of 



Hirze; Goddess of Som and Nye; Weaver 
of Olt'bak and Agimus; rank ninety; rais- 
ed on the corporeal star Mem; inhabitant 
of Das'sawig and Gabriomety two million 
nine hundred thousand years. 

Tussica, Goddess of Kol; Goddess of 
Lowst and Wittawhaggat; Goddessof Du'- 
e'jhi and Loo of Maggatza; Goddess of 
Ep; Goddess of Gek of Hennasshalonkya; 
Goddess of Tur in the ji'ay'an swamps of 
Dobbokta, fifty-five; raised on the corpor- 
eal sun Nitz, of the serpent Tan, inhabit- 
ant of Tayay'hitsivi, two million years; in- 
habitant of Palla one million seven hun- 
dred thousand years. 

Fiatisi, Goddess of Labbuk; Goddess of 
Saran'ya, in Gowlodo; Goddess of Iz; God- 
dess of Serl; Goddess of Lok'low; God- 
dess of Um of a'ji, seventy-five; Goddess 
of Wartz and Do'e'huitta; Goddess of 
Crayya; Goddess of Bak'hoo; Goddess of 
Teel and Ros'itz; Goddess of Mutz-mutz; 
Goddess of La'errets of Wouk'humhowtz; 
Goddess of Bil and Du'sk'wan'guessel; 
Goddess of Ork'sa; Goddess of Unksoot; 
Goddess of Si'huitta; Goddess of Shein; 
Goddess of Isa; Goddess of Ham; Goddess 
of Reikowow and Shuitit; Goddess of 
Daing and Gou'wok; Goddess of Faitta'- 
zammel; Goddess of Zittayya'howb of the 
gardens of Zittayya'bauf in a'ji seven; sur- 
geon of Lum'zon; nurse of Paigga of Sen- 
athais; nurse of Zid; nurse of Loosee; 
nurse of Home; nurse of Briathath; Queen 
of Ouppa; Queen of Rog'ga; disciplinarian 
of Tuh, of Kaibbi'summak, of Tootz'mutz, 
of Bir'bir, of Ctenski, of Rivvia, of Soon 
of Hadab, of Fussuhowtz and Ceres; rais- 
ed on the star Planzza; swift messenger 
in Bal and Wawa'lauk five hundred thou- 
sand years; swift messenger in To'wakka 
and Runfwot five hundred thousand years; 
inhabitant of Terashash one million years; 
inhabitant of the fields of Ni'jayay one 
million years; inhabitant of Gun five hun- 
dred thousand years; maker of corporeal 
roadways five hundred thousand years. 

So Fiatisi outranked all other Gods 
and Goddesses, and was special guest of 
honor, and the star of Fiatisi's etherean 
ship was stationed near the earth, that she 
might the better behold the deliverance of 
the spirits that were to be freed by the 
submersion of the land of Pan. 



CYCLE OF APR 



63 



CHAPTER V. 

When the etherean hosts were arranged 
in due order, I called out to Jehovih, say- 
ing: O Jehovih, deliver thou Earth from 
evil, for Thy glory forever! 

And now the vortex of Earth was 
closed in from the extreme, and the earth's 
crust was broken. A mighty continent was 
cut loose from its fastenings, and the fires 
of Earth came forth in flames and clouds. 
And the land rocked to and fro like a ship 
at sea in a storm. 

Again the vortex of Earth closed in 
about on all sides, and by the pressure sank 
the land beneath the water. And the mor- 
tals who lived thereon went down to 
death. And the delivering hosts hastened 
in all directions with their birth blankets, 
to receive the drujas and fetals and es'yans, 
bringing them to the place which had been 
provided for them. And their numbers 
were so great that even Gods had scarce 
seen the like before. And there were of 
drujas and fetals sixteen thousand six 
hundred million, many of whom had lived 
on earth as fetals and drujas, and many of 
whom were not capable of everlasting life. 

Now when Earth was delivered, and 
there was no escape for the spirits of the 
dead, and no returning to mortals, I called 
out to Jehovih, saying: 

Give me of Thy power, O Jehovih, and 
I will carry up all the plateaux of hell and 
the heavens of the buried continent. 

And Jehovih's hand swept over the 
ocean of the sunken land, cleaving all 
asunder, and I and My hosts rose, higher 
and higher, turning and rising. 

I said: Upward, O Jehovih; upward, 
O Jehovih. 

And all the hosts repeated the same 
words, for by their wills and knowledge 
they had strength in their Creator. 

CHAPTER VI. 

Jehovih spake to me, Aph, in the firm- 
ament, saying: Bring the new-born into 
the forests of Uk'loo and the ji'ay'an roads 
of the arc of Noe, in the etherean heaven 
of Hautuon; and when thou hast founded 
them on a world of their own, leave thou 
Gods and Goddesses with them, to sort 
them and provide according to their neces- 



sities, for all things shall be provided unto 
them that they may attain to knowledge 
and individuality. And when thou hast 
placed them, hasten thou with My Son, 
Neph, back to Earth where I have labor 
with the ships of the I'hins. And they were 
thus delivered. 

So I departed as soon as possible, tak- 
ing leave of Fiatisi, thanking her for her 
assistance in this great deliverance; and I 
took with me Neph, Son of Jehovih, and 
other thirty thousand Gods and Goddesses 
besides ten million ethereans who had had 
thousands of years' experience in heaven 
and on various corporeal worlds; and we 
came back to earth, even to the ocean 
where the land had gone down. And 
when I came to the ships in which the 
I'hins were escaped, finding the Gods who 
had them in charge, even as I had previ- 
ously commanded, Jehovih's Voice came 
to me saying: 

Bend thou the currents of the winds of 
heaven, O My Son, and shape the course 
of the ships, that they shall fall into groups, 
and thou shalt divide the groups, making 
four groups in all. And thou shalt drive 
the groups of ships before the winds of hea- 
ven, and bring them into the four different 
lands of the earth, according to its previous 
history and adaptation. For in all countries 
shall My chosen begin the laying down of 
the foundation of My everlasting kingdom, 
and they shall never more be destroyed 
by the people of darkness. 

So I divided my hosts according to 
the commandments put upon me, mak- 
ing four divisions of them. And I 
said unto Neph: Direct them, O God, to 
such countries as Jehovih hath shown 
thee; for, remember, thou art still God of 
Earth. 

I said: By thy light, Jehovih, I desire 
two ships to go to the north land, which 
was not sunken, for they shall be a testi- 
mony in time to come. Let Thy Gods, 
therefore, shift the winds and drive two 
ships aside from the rest, and in that same 
time my messengers will go and lead the 
way to the north land, whither Thy God 
shall shape the winds of heaven. 

Now, those in charge of the wind cur- 
rents divided the ships and drove two of 
them off to the north land. And the Gods 
and angels turned the currents about and 



64 



CYCLE OF APH 



drove the four groups of ships in four dif- 
ferent ways, according to the directions of 
God, Son of Jehovih. And the messengers 
of God lead the way, showing the Gods 
and angels of the wind the countries des- 
ignated by Jehovih. 

In one hundred and fifty days time all 
the ships of the Faithists were in the 
ports, and the people went ashore in the 
different countries whither they had been 
taken. Again Jehovih's Voice came to 
me, saying: Behold, my people are few in 
the' world, and lest they take the ships and 
sail about, and so get divided and lost, 
thou shalt send thy hosts down to the sea 
at night to sink the ships. 

And I told Neph what Jehovih had 
said, and he answered: My angels shall 
inspire the I'hins to take all things out of 
the ships, and this night shall thy hosts 
fulfill the commandment of Jehovih. 

And so it came to pass, that the I'hins 
took all their goods out of the ships, not 
knowing they were inspired; and in the 
night Neph sent angels down and they sank 
the ships. And in the morning the I'hins 
beheld their ships had disappeared, and 
they said with one voice: Of a truth, I 
know I was inspired, for I could not rest 
till all the goods were taken out of the 
ships. Let us, therefore, build an altar 
unto the Lord, and sing and dance, be- 
cause he is with us. 

And when Neph saw that their souls 
were propitious for good works and mir- 
acles, he stationed his ashars around the 
altars, and sent other ashars into the 
country, and they gathered fruit which was 
growing wild, and brought it to the 
I'hins, casting it on the altars, even whilst 
the people danced. 

Thus did I fulfill the work Jehovih 
commanded me, Aph, to do, whereupon I 
surrendered my commission to Neph. 

CHAPTER VII. 

Neph, God of Earth, said: Behold, O 
Aph, Son of Jehovih, by the power and 
magnificence of thy work am I bewildered 
in thy presence. Who can come so near 
the Almighty? Who but Jehovih hath at- 
tained beyond the power of thy soul? Who 
hath wisdom like unto thee, save the 
great Creator? Thou hast stretched a line 
beyond the moon, and by thy spoken word 



crushed in the side of the great Earth as 
if it were nothing. Thou hast said: Arise' 
and a world moved at thy command. Yea, 
thou hast the love and esteem of millions 
of Gods and Goddesses. And thou earnest 
against the winds of the earth, saying: 
Turn ye hither or turn ye thither, and the 
winds moved before thy words as an obe- 
dient child to its father's voice. Thou 
callest down the fire of heaven. It cometh 
at thy bidding, and thou sayest: O Jeho- 
vih, put Thy hand under the heavens of 
Earth, and straightway a light and floor 
wide as Earth fly into the place of thy de- 
sire. Now behold, thou hast said: O Je- 
hovih, I surrender my commission. I have 
finished that which Thou commandest me 
to do. Wherefore, O Aph, my soul hath 
great sorrow. But because thou hast clean- 
ed up the whole Earth and her heavens, as 
one might sweep the floor of a house, I am 
bowed down in gratitude. 

Then Aph, Son of Jehovih, said: O 
Jehovih, what have I done that Thy Son's 
love hath come to me? So far as I have 
become one with Thee, O Thou Everlast- 
ing Creator, so Thou showest me plainer 
and plainer that I am nothing. And yet 
Thy Son heapeth praise upon me, seeing I 
am but as a figure moved by Thy hand. 
Shall a man lose sight of the Almighty? 
Nevertheless, O Jehovih, who so weak in 
love as I, Thy servant? Because Thou 
hast quickened me in wisdom and power, 
so hast Thou made my love as a place that 
can never be supplied to the fill. How 
shall I find strength to leave this, Thy 
Son, on the far off Earth? Do I not glory 
in his love and great esteem; and yet 
know I not that I will repine because I 
have him not with me? 

Hear me, O Jehovih, for I will meas- 
ure Thy Son with swiftness. Scarce forty 
thousand years raised up to etherea, and 
yet Thou madest him God of Earth and her 
heavens. For three thousand years strug- 
gled he in the battle against evil and dark- 
ness and the broad heavens of ether- 
ea looked on in sympathy, love and 
hope, because of his tenacity in wis- 
dom and love. It was as one man fight- 
ing against a house on fire, and the place 
filled with helpless babes. And yet Thy 
God ceased not, nor once rested and said: 
It is useless; but forever renewed the bat- 



CYCLE OF APH 



65 



tie in new ways and stratagems. As a 
light showeth better in the dark, so did 
Thy Son Neph, O Jehovih, move the souls 
of even Gods and Goddesses in Thy ex- 
alted heavens. 

Then came Thy Voice, O Jehovih, say- 
ing: Go thou, O Aph, My Son, and de- 
liver Earth. 

And behold, the congregating of Gods 
and Goddesses; so eager to fly to the as- 
sistance of Thy honored Son. 

And Neph said. One favor, O Aph, Son 
of Jehovih, I ask of thee; which is that 
thou shalt tarry three days and honor my 
throne. For I will have it founded and 
ready; and My Lords shall have the honor 
of speaking to thee face to face. 

Aph, Son of Jehovih, said: By Thy 
permission, O Jehovih, I will tarry three 
days and three nights with Thy Son, God 
of Earth, and I will honor his throne and 
speak face to face with his Lords, that I 
may win their love. 

In three days' time the kingdom of 
God was founded, and situated in atmos- 
pherea over the land of Jaffeth, but the 
plateaux extended with two wings, so as 
to embrace Shem and Ham; and thither 
went the Gods with their Lords and at- 
tendants. 

Now, there were with the God of Earth 
two million spirts, earth-born, who had 
volunteered to serve two hundred years for 
the founding of the new kingdom of hea- 
ven, and they were well learned in official 
capacity, knowing how to found plateaux, 
with factories, mansions, hospitals, nurser- 
ies, and all such places as are required in 
heaven for the new-born, so that God only 
had to say: Do ye this, or so, and they ac- 
complished the same without error. And 
now from the hosts of Aph, Son of Jeho- 
vih, there came before God half a million 
etherean volunteers who desired to re- 
main two hundred years with God and 
his hosts. God said to them: 

Behold, Earth hath passed Tryista, and 
it is no longer lawful for any but 
Earth-born to hold the places of sub- Gods 
and sub-Lords and marshals; and since ye 
are from different stars raised, and from 
different etherean circuits, what shall I do 
that ye may be honored, and also profit- 
able to yourselves in development? 



Gaitivaya, chief spokesman for them, 
said: We desire to be laborers only. For 
what is two hundred years to us? We pray 
thee, appoint us not to the Thins, for they 
are already advanced, but appoint us to 
those who speak but little, and who bur- 
row in the ground. Neither do we desire 
a place in thy heaven, but we will abide 
with mortals, and in the first resurrection 
of those who are born in darkness. 

God said: Thou shalt remain, and thy 
people with thee. For since thou hast vol- 
unteered to leave thy high estate and come 
and dwell for one dan on the lowest of all 
places, laboring for the blind and dumb, 
thou shalt be recompensed with the love 
of millions in time to come. 

Then God departed, and Aph, Son of 
Jehovih, went with him; and they came 
into the midst of the kingdom of God, 
whereat they halted and God said: Here 
will I build my throne; and inasmuch as 
Sethantes in the olden time, called his 
place Hored, so will I call my place Hored 
also, and on the earth it shall be called the 
Mountain of God, for it shall be my home. 

So God stretched forth his hand, say- 
ing: Throne of Thy throne, O Jehovih. 

And there came down from the heavens 
above a great light, and it settled around 
about in the midst of the place of God and 
Aph, Jehovih's Son; and presently the 
light gathered up of the atmospherean 
substance and made it shining and con- 
densed, and the attendants built the throne 
of God, and fenced it around with pillars 
of fire, after the manner of Hored of the 
ancient days. And God ascended and sat 
on the throne, and Aph sat on the right 
hand of God, and the four Lords of 
Earth on the left hand; but the fifth Lord, 
Eolait, stood down at the foot. And he 
said: Behold the division of the earth 
that was mine is sunk beneath the sea. 
How then shall I sit on the throne of 
God? 

God said: Since thy labor hath been 
taken from thee, thou art as a parable on 
the newly dead who have lost the earth 
and have no place in heaven. Since the 
es'yan serveth a time through the proxy 
of others, so shalt thou in that which I will 
bestow upon thee. Know then, thou 
shalt sit on my right hand, for thou shalt 
be my assistant during the time of my so- 



66 



CYCLE OF APH 



journ; and after that whatsoever thou wilt. 

Eolait said: Thou hast honored me, O 
God. Jehovih's will be done. So God 
rose up, raising his hand, and said: O 
Thou All Light, crown Thou Thy Son, 
Vice-God of Hored, for Thine own glory 
forever. 

And as the light of etherea descended 
into God's right hand, he shaped it into 
a crown and placed it on Eolait's head, 
with the usual ceremony of such rank in 
heaven. And Eolait came and sat on the 
right hand of God. And in that same 
time, Aph, Son of Jehovih, rose up, 
whereupon God and the Lords and the 
people, sat down. 

Aph said: As a father is made to com- 
prehend his own early life by looking on 
his infant son, so hast Thou, O Jehovih, 
raised up before my eyes the images of 
times and conditions long past. In these, 
Thy Lords, Thou hast called me back to 
the time and place when first Thou and 
Thy Son crowned me a Lord and a Vice- 
God over one of the divisions of my native 
star. And my soul rose up to Thee in fear 
and prayer; for I understood how un- 
mindful men and angels are of the labor 
of Gods and Lords, and prone to rate 
themselves as Chiefs of all created things. 
But Thy Voice, O Jehovih, came to me, 
saying: Complain not, My Son, against 
the self conceit of men and angels, nor of 
their criticisms of My God and Lords; for 
to such boasters do I provide trials, which 
they perceive not till they are encompassed 
therewith. Suffer them, therefore, within 
thy dominions to grow up in their own 
glory, for I have sufficient labor for them, 
both in mortality and in heaven. 

And I perceived Thy wisdom, and ap- 
plied it through my angels; and when my 
people rose to the first resurrection, and 
the second resurrection, I knew where to 
place them. And Thy light came upon 
me in my place, saying: As thou hast 
profited in the first lesson, so shalt thou 
comprehent the second, and even up to 
the etherean heavens. 

Nevertheless, O Father, Thou suffer- 
edst all things to harass and perplex my 
soul; and I was filled with fear and rever- 
ence because of the great responsibility 
Thou gavest into my keeping. So great 
were my tribulations and trials that I 



called out to Thee in Thy holy place to 
remember all other Gods and Lords in 
Thy whole universe. 

And Thou saidst: Hear the words of 
thy Creator, My Son; for I created man 
to enter heaven as he entered mortal life, 
and dependent on those above him, that 
he might comprehend the unity between 
high and low, strong and weak, light and 
darkness; and I placed him in My mills 
wherein he should learn that even as oth- 
ers grind for him, so should he grind for 
those beneath him. Otherwise, of what 
profit is it for My Lords to come down 
from their liberty and glory in My ether- 
ean firmament and become Lords over the 
grovelers in the flesh, or over the es'yans 
in darkness? Shall selfishness reign in 
heaven, and everyone for himself? Have 
I not proven in mortal life that the love 
of doing good works unto others is all 
that insures a rich harvest of love in re- 
turn? Because they stoop from their high 
estate in order to promote My children 
which I created alive, are they not be- 
coming the more one with Me? 

And I perceived Thy wisdom, O Jeho- 
vih, and Thy power and wisdom came 
upon me tenfold. Then I sought forever 
after to go to the lowest and darkest 
places; but lo, when I had grown in Thy 
judgment, thou spakest again to me, say- 
ing: 

O Aph, My Son, because thou hast 
found the key to unlock the doors to the 
highest heavens, behold, thou art too 
mighty for small labor. Come, therefore, 
with Thy Creator, for I have a whole 
etherean world at thy command, and thy 
wisdom and power are required at My 
hand. 

And I obeyed Thy call, O Jehovih. 
And then again, after a time, Thou called 
me again, and my labors extended 
into many etherean worlds. But I love 
to look back and glorify Thee for my first 
Lord-dom, and to treasure up the millions 
of loves I found in those days. And 
again, O Jehovih, hast Thou blessed me 
to meet many millions of them in this 
pruning of the red star, Earth. Now 
hast Thou called me to speak on the throne 
of Thy God of Earth. Alas, Thy God 
hath said: O Aph, son of Jehovih, come 
thou and honor my throne. Whereas, O 



CYCLE OF APH 



67 



Jehovih, I am the most honored of men 
and Gods because I have again opened my 
mouth before Thee and in Thy name. All 
glory be to Thee, O Jehovih, now and for- 
ever. 

Then Aph, Son of Jehovih, sat down, 
and God signalled to the marshals, who 
proclaimed freedom for two days. There- 
upon the Gods and Goddesses of Aph's 
staff filed past the throne, and after them 
came the hosts of God, and then the hosts 
of the Lords, for they all desired to pass 
near and look upon Aph, and receive the 
signal of his blessing. 

And presently all the people joined in 
with the es'enaurs and sang a song of 
glory unto Jehovih, the All Highest. And 
when it was finished the multitude turned 
to recreation and social intercourse. 

CHAPTER VIII. 

When the time came, God called his 
proper officers, and they proclaimed his 
presence. 

And God said: As it was before the 
submersion, so shall it be now, for you 
shall fill the same places as before. Nev- 
ertheless, from this time forth, all work in 
heaven and on earth will be new, and as if 
nothing had been. Let My Lords and 
their attendants, and their ashars, prepare 
for their departure; and from such other 
volunteers as have come into my kingdom 
they shall receive as they desire, and be 
assigned to labor suited to them, whether 
it be with mortals or with spirits in the 
first resurrection. And my marshals, mes- 
sengers and asaphs shall travel throughout 
atmospherea, selecting and appropriating 
all suitable places for the spirits of the 
dead, and apportion builders and workmen, 
and erect factories, schools, hospitals, nur- 
series, and all other suitable places, adapt- 
ed to receiving those of the first resurrec- 
tion, as is done in all atmospherean hea- 
vens, and all who are thus received shall 
be called es'yans for the first five years; 
but after that they shall be called es'seans, 
signifying having separated from corporeal 
desire, being full residents of the es world. 
But those who will not become es'seans, 
being the spirits of druk mortals and fast- 
bound to the earth, shall be called drujas, 
signifying wandering spirits of darkness 
and of evil. And those who engraft them- 



selves on mortals shall be called fetals, sig- 
nifying sucklings, and these names shall 
continue in heaven and on earth to the end 
of the world. Wherein ye may perceive 
the fault of leniency of the Gods and Lords 
of old, be ye circumspect in these times. 

When God thus completed all his com- 
mandments, and the people were ready to 
depart, the es'enaurs and trumpeters sang 
and played a hymn adapted to the new hea- 
ven; and when this was finished, Aph, Son 
of Jehovih, spake, saying: 

Behold, the light of the high heaven 
ooens. Thy Son, O Jehovih, longeth for a 
great labor. I go on a journey farther 
than ten thousand suns. Fiatisi, Thy 
Daughter, O Jehovih, and Goddess of a 
thousand worlds, hath set apart to join 
two corporeal stars in a far-off heaven, 
whereon a thousand million shall be de- 
livered into spirit life in a single day. With 
her, by Thy will and power, O Jehovih, I 
go. But yet, let not these, Thy Gods and 
Lords and all their hosts, surmise I will 
forget one single soul of all that are here. 
And when the next dan appeareth, behold, 
I will return to them to enjoy a portion of 
their sweet love. 

And now he descended and sat at the 
foot of the throne, and God, suffused with 
tears, came down and took his hand, say- 
ing: Behold, he who is greatest maketh 
himself least of all. Arise, O Aph, Son of 
Jehovih, and crowned immortal God of the 
Arc of Noe, Son of the Almighty, arise 
and go thy way. 

So Aph rose up, and shaking hands 
with God and his Lords, descended to the 
borders beyond the foot of the pillars of 
fire, and his hosts with him, being ten mill- 
ion in number, where the proper persons 
had in readiness an ascending otevan 
wherein they all entered. At a given sig- 
nal the otevan started, but toward the east, 
and swift as a shooting star it sped forth, 
and presently disappeared in the distance. 

CHAPTER IX. 
Jehovih said: Neph, My Son, God of 
Earth, hear thou the Voice of Thy Creator. 
For as thou callest on Me in thy sore hour 
of trial, so did I come to thee and deliver 
Earth and her heavens through My Son of 
the arc of Noe in etherea. Remember now, 
the upraised of Hautuon, heaven of dark- 



68 



CYCLE OF APH 



ness, in Uk'loo, in the frmament, for they 
are thine until the next dan. 

God said: I have hear.d thy Voice, O 
Jehovih. But what shall Thy servant do? 
Behold Aph, hath left with the upraised 
children of darkness, Gods and Goddesses 
who transcend Thy servant so far in wis- 
dom and power that he scarce can look up- 
on them. How, then, shall it be with me, 
Thy servant? 

Jehovih said: Nevertheless, the up- 
raised children of darkness are thine own 
family, and the glory of thy house in hea- 
ven shall be the light thou shalt make 
manifest in them. Fear not, the Gods and 
Goddesses understand this matter. 

Therefore, when thou hast put Thy 
kingdom in order, and established the hea- 
ven of Earth in all its parts, and sta- 
tioned messengers betwixt thy throne and 
the thrones of Thy Lords on the earth, 
thou shalt leave thy Vice-God to rule in thy 
stead for a season, and thou shalt go to 
Hautuon, in the etherean forests, for they 
will be expecting thee. 

God said: Thy will be done, O Fa- 
ther. I perceive Thy wisdom and glory 
and justice. Now will I sojourn on my 
throne one year, and thou, my Vice God, 
shall relieve me whilst I go and visit my 
rebellious children in Uk'loo, where Gods 
and Goddesses are overseeing them. 

The Vice-God said: Thy will be done, 
O God of Earth. 

Ands in one year's time God had estab- 
lished heaven in such good manner that 
he could control the affairs of angels and 
men into the way of everlasting life. God 
informed his council, which consisted of 
five hundred thousand ethereans, men and 
women, of the words of Jehovih. When 
it became known in heaven that God was 
to make a visit of one year's time to Hau- 
tuon, his hosts from *far and near, to the 
number of ten million, came to see him de- 
part. And God proclaimed a day of rec- 
reation, and the people mingled together 
to converse on the matter of the deliver- 
ance of Earth and her heavens and the go- 
ing down of the continent of Pan. 

On the following day, all hands being 
refreshed and assembled in order, accord- 
ing to the discipline of Gods, God spake 
from the throne, saying: 



Hear the words of your God, and re- 
joice in the founding of a new heaven. 
Be wise in heeding that which I shall utter, 
and make yourselves steadfast in all 
proven things. Here are millions who 
stood by my side in the name of Jehovih, 
in the days of darkness in heaven and 
earth. For three thousand years our bat- 
tle lasted; and from out the darkness be- 
hold our prayers went up to Him who is 
over all and above all. And your God said: 
Surely Jehovih will deliver when the vor- 
tex mergeth into Hi'dan; and ye all re- 
peated the same thing; and the unity of our 
souls desire reached up to the Orian 
Chiefs, Jehovih's mighty Sons and Daugh- 
ters. 

For as it is proven that a man in con- 
flict with himself accomplisheth nothing, 
whilst he who is in harmony with himself 
is mighty, wherein he ruleth himself to a 
good purpose; even so hath it been proven 
that the unity of many angels can, by force 
of their wills in connection with their work, 
control the place and proceedings of a 
world. And ye became a star of faith in 
Jehovih. 

And they who were without faith in an 
All Highest Person, were without power, 
and of no effect save to build up discord 
to our proceedings. Whilst those who as- 
sumed to be Gods and Lords, but ignored 
Jehovih, were not sustained, for having 
nothing higher than themselves, they rose 
only to themselves. Which is manifested 
on earth, even as it was in those days in 
heaven, boasting of good works or of good 
prayers, but housing themselves about with 
the earnings of others. Did not these 
false Gods and false Lords set up self and 
worship it? And the fruits of their inspir- 
ation and their slaves under them, were the 
angels they sent to rule over mortals, for 
the glory of their philosophy, wherein 
mortals soon said the same things of them- 
selves, which was: Behold, there is no 
God nor Lord of wisdom in heaven and 
earth. Whereby the doctrines of the false 
Gods and Lords overturned their own 
kingdoms, changing heaven into hada. 
But when the Light of Jehovih came, ye 
and your God and Lords were one with 
His Voice. And now that your God and 
Lords have established a new heaven and 
new earth for the glory of Jehovih, he who 



CYCLE OF APH 



69 



labored so long in your love goeth to the 
other wing of the battle, where your breth- 
ren toiling with those in darkness, will re- 
joice to hear of your fruitful labors. 

Then God turned to the right, and said 
to Eolait, Vice-God of Earth: Because 
thou wert robbed of thy division of the 
earth, Jehovih hath bestowed thee well. 
Thou shalt therefore, hold the triangle of 
the Gods of Earth until thy God returns. 

Thereupon, God hung the triangle on 
Eolait's neck, saying: In Jehovih's name, 
all hail, God of Earth. 

The hosts of millions repeated: All 
hail, God of Earth. 

And Neph came down and sat at the 
foot of the throne; and God came down 
and took his hand, saying: Arise, O God, 
and go thy way. 

So Neph rose up, and the two, with 
their marshals and attendants, went down 
to where the proper persons had a ship 
with mantles and curtains in readiness, and 
Neph, and his hosts, five hundred thousand 
in number, entered the ship. Meanwhile 
the es'enaurs sang an anthem of Glory to 
Jehovih. At a given signal the ship start- 
ed upward, amidst the applause of millions 
of angels assembled. Like a star of light 
it shot upward higher and higher, till it 
was seen no more. 

CHAPTER X. 

The Council of Hored being in session, 
God ascended the throne, and the light of 
Jehovih fell upon him so that he was well 
night obscured from sight, and the Voice 
of Jehovih spake, saying: 

As by My presence, and of Mine own 
self I made each self, and gave thereto 
power of words, so do I in light manifest 
by words to My etherean hosts. As to the 
Lords of Earth ye have provided ashars, 
and above them asaphs, and betwixt all 
my kingdoms allotted messengers, so shall 
ye also provide for barbarians, familiar 
spirits, who shall be subject to the order of 
the ashars and their Lords. 

I create all men, whether I'hins or bar- 
barians, and your labor shall be not alone 
with My chosen, whom it is easy to save, 
but with those also who know Me not, and 
know not My es worlds. For, besides 
those destroyed by the flood, behold the 
earth is still covered over with men, wo- 



men and children. In the time of Aph, ye 
received volunteers from Osi, in etherea; 
give them this matter in hand. 

This was done, and they were divided 
up into groups, and the corporeans having 
already been numbered by the angels of 
heaven, the ethereans were distributed ac- 
cordingly. And these again selected and 
apportioned familiar spirits to abide with 
the barbarians. And these familiar spirits 
were the fathers and mothers and friends 
who had recently died, and still sojourned 
in the first resurrection. So the officers 
provided places on earth for these spirits 
and persuaded them to reappear before 
mortals in order to prove continued life. 

Jehovih hath said: Provide ye the way, 
but cause the familiars to do the labor, but 
do not make a familiar of the spirit of a 
young man or woman, lest they become 
fetals. 

So it came to pass that a new depart- 
ment of heaven and earth was opened, dur- 
ing the absence of Neph. At the end of 
one year Neph returned from the Hautuon 
colony, bringing with him five million vol- 
unteers, being of the third resurrection. 
And it being known in Hored when he 
would return, a great concourse of angels . 
gathered to receive him in honor, and to 
welcome the volunteers. So that when 
God's etherean star descended, the Vice- 
God, Eloait, proclaimed a recreation of 
ten days, which was to follow immediately 
after God should ascend the throne. And 
whilst the es'enaurs were singing, the ship 
of Neph alighted, and the marshals and 
hosts of honor proceeded to the places, and 
received God, who at once ascended to 
the throne and saluted Eolait, Son of Je- 
hovih, saying: 

By Thy will and power, O Jehovih, Thy 
Son rejoiceth. 

Eolait said: Welcome, God of Earth. 
And he saluted with the sign of Jeho- 
vih's name, and was answered in like man- 
ner. Without more ceremony he took off 
the triangle of the Gods and placed it on 
Neph's neck, saying: In Jehovih's name, 
receive thou the gift of the ancient Gods. 

God said: Let the marshals proclaim 
ten days of recreation, whilst we account to 
our loves how we found matters in Hau- 
tuon, and of the power of Jehovih mani- 
fested. 



70 



CYCLE OF APH 



CHAPTER XL 
The Voice of Jehovih spake through 
God, saying: Because a new heaven is es- 
tablished, and because the old hath been 
raised up, let signs be manifested whereby 
men and angels in after times may know 
what hath happened. For men and angels 
may forget the flood and the purging of 
Earth. Bethink ye, O Gods and Goddesses,, 
what shall be done? 

Eloait spoke in behalf of the Council, 
saying: What shall be done, O Jehovih? 

Jehovih said: In kosmon, men and an- 
gels shall ask for proofs. One will say: 
How is it possible to relate the words spo- 
ken in the olden time? Another will say: 
How can it be proven that the old heaven 
was taken away? 

Hear, therefore, the words of your Cre- 
ator; and when one saith: Behold in those 
days few men had the gift of words and 
speech, answer ye him, saying: Even so 
was it in heaven, and because they had not 
words they could not be made to under- 
stand. 

And another shall say: The Creator 
ruleth in large matters, but not in the small; 
and another shall say: Because the angels 
come in kosmon, so could they in the old- 
en time. And ye shall answer them, say- 
ing: Who knoweth the plan for an earth- 
quake, whether it be small or large before 
Jehovih? Is He not ever present, and do 
not certain conditions bring certain re- 
sults? And they will answer: Yea. 

Say ye: Give then, a name to the High- 
est Cause beyond all research and they will 
say: By the ancients called Jehovih. 

And they shall see that they have en- 
tangled themselves in a net. For if the 
condition of ignorance on earth begot ig- 
norance in heaven, how could the light of 
heaven come afterward to Earth save 
from above? Since, then, the light of hea- 
ven came from above, who should invent 
the wisdom of a flood to come upon the 
speech of nations? 

Give them, therefore, words in heaven 
and words on earth which are matters of 
this nature, and make the sounds thereof 
sacred, so that it shall be proven in Jaf- 
feth, Shem, Ham and Guatama, and in the 
heavens thereof. 

God said: Thou are all wisdom, O Je- 
hovih. Now have I a place for the new 



volunteers come from etherea. For this 
shall be their matter and business with the 
familiars who dwell with the barbarians. 

So, accordingly, they were alloted. And 
they were enjoined to sing to mortals the 
song of the flood; and they thus establish- 
ed its history to endure forever on the 
earth. 

CHAPTER XII. 

All things prospered in heaven for 
many years, nor were there great wars on 
earth, nor famines, nor epidemics. And 
the Lords appointed sufficient loo'is for 
all the Faithists, so as to control the I'hin 
marriages to bring forth sons and daugh- 
ters who would rejoice in heaven. And 
when they died their spirits were carried 
to heavenly places, and entered as es'yans. 

But the Lords appointed no loo'is over 
the barbarians, and only commanded the 
asaphs to watch for their spirits in the 
hour of death, and if possible, to bring 
them to the organic places of God in Hor- 
ed. This continued for many years, and in 
course of time, the familiar spirits aroused 
up the barbarians, and they began to have 
dreams and see visions when familiars talk- 
ed to them whilst they slept. And when 
this became common, Jehovih said: 

Behold, the time is come to appoint 
loo'is to abide with the barbarians. The 
I'hins are a harmless and defenseless peo- 
ple and cannot subdue the earth. There- 
fore, I have created the barbarian; for he 
shall drive away and destroy all evil beasts 
and serpents; and the forests shall fall 
down before him. For this purpose the 
loo'is shall select marriages with a view of 
raising up great kings and queens. But 
since, in the olden time, the kings depend- 
ed on the prophets of God for counsel, 
and thus were advised against killing any- 
thing I had created alive, so in this time 
of the new heaven ye shall permit the kings 
and queens to consult the spirits of the 
dead with the talents I have given them. 

This was done also; and the barbarians 
were attended by familiar spirits, many of 
whom called themselves God or Lord, or 
the name of some great king of the olden 
time. And these familiars, being stupid, 
supposed themselves to be such persons. 
The result of their stupid impressions was 
to inspire the barbarians to believe they 



CYCLE OF APH 



71 



were attended by Gods or Lords, or by the 
spirits of kings or queens; and so they held 
up their heads and began to think. For 
as it had been said by the Gods of ancient 
times: Some are led by flattery, some by 
self-conceit, some by duty, some by love 
of righteousness; so are there others who 
can be led to self improvement by persuad- 
ing them they are chosen especially by 
some God or Lord, or the spirit of a re- 
nowned king or queen, to work wonders. 

God said: There was a certain sick 
man who could not be cured by the physi- 
cians. So there came a foolish woman, 
seeing visions, and said to the sick man: 
To-morrow thou shalt be healed. God 
hath been trying thee; but thou hast prov- 
en thyself in soul, and thy God will with- 
draw the spell of thy infirmity. Behold, 
thy God standeth by thee. 

Now on the following day the sick man 
put forth his spirit and rose up and was 
well. Wherefore, it hath been adjudged 
even deceit may accomplish what truth 
could not. Suffer then the familiars to 
lead the barbarians on for a season, but be 
ye watchful at the proper time to appoint 
new spirits to be with them. 

To the messengers God said: Instruct 
the Lords that the time is come to reveal 
the seven tetracts to mortals, especially to 
the I'hins; for as the ashars are withdrawn 
a pace, so shall mortals advance a pace. 
These are the inheritances of all men born 
on the earth: AN ASH, which is persistent 
stubbornness by word or thought; ZIM- 
MAH, wicked device; RA, delight in be- 
ing bad; BELYYAAL, worthlessness; 
AVEN, vanity and self-conceit; DIBBAH, 
slander and reporting of evils; and SA- 
TAN, to be a leader, especially to the de- 
light of the other six entities. 

These are the members of the beast in. 
all men and women; nor is any one with- 
out them in some manner or degree. Go 
ye, therefore, to the Lords and say to 
them: Jehovih hath set the beginning of 
the resurrection through Aph, His Son, 
Chief of the Arc of Noe, to lay the te- 
tracts on the shoulders of mortals. 

The marshals of the Council provided 
messengers who were at once sent down 
to the different divisions of the earth; for 
the tetracts were some of the words se- 
lected in heaven to be given as everlasting 



names, whereby, in after ages, the tribes 
of Faithists might be discovered. And 
they were given alike to the Faithists of 
Guatama, Jaffeth, Shem and Ham, who 
were the sons of the Arc of Noe preserved 
on the earth in that day. For these words 
were provided in the Hebraic, Vedic and 
Algonquin languages, to be synonymous, 
till the coming of the kosmon era. 

CHAPTER XIII. 

The Voice of Jehovih came to God, say- 
ing: Hored shall advance to the second 
resurrection, and the first resurrection 
shall be established with My Lords. And 
every thirty-three years the Lords shall 
bring to this, My holy place, those who 
are capable of the second resurrection, 
where they shall be prepared for the next 
resurrection to etherea. 

Accordingly, every thirty-three years 
there was one migration from the Lords' 
first resurrection to that of Hored. 

God said: Close the gates of Hored, 
and from this time ever after only those of 
the second resurrection can enter. And it 
was so. And Hored was extended over 
Jaffeth, Shem and Ham; and over Guata- 
ma the Lords made two kingdoms, the 
first and second resurrections, and allot- 
ted the first to a sub-Lord in his own 
name, and over the second he presided in 
person, teaching his people of God in Hor- 
ed. As the distance of the sea lay be- 
tween these heavens, the Lord and his at- 
tendants maintained an etherean ship, and 
crossed the sea at intervals of eleven 
years. 

And now new colleges were established 
in the second resurrection, and the spirits 
began the study of elements and illustra- 
tions in es and uz, and the process of travel 
and of carrying corporeal entities. And 
these spirits were at times taken down to 
mortals by the ashars to assist in mira- 
cles. For the lessons in the second resur- 
rection embraced the mastery of corpor in 
alalysis and synthesis. 

And God visited Hautuon every eleven 
years, and remained one year of Earth's 
time; so that in two hundred years he 
made eighteen visits. On his first visit he 
brought back with him a number of volun- 
teers, being of those raised by the Arc of 
Noe; and the next visit he brought back 



72 



CYCLE OF APH 



twice as many as the first; and the next 
time three times as many as the second, 
and increasing for the eighteen visits. And 
on the last visit it was estimated how many 
he had brought back in all, and the num- 
ber was one thousand million. And they 
were raised to the second resurrection, 
having been under the training of Gods 
and Goddesses in Hautuon, under the di- 
rection of Aph, Son of Jehovih. And 
now that the time of dan was drawing 
near, and Aph should return to provide 
for the ascent of Jehovih's harvest, God 
looked up with a cheerful heart; for it was 
evident that by the expiration of the two 
hundred years from the submersion of 
Pan, many of the spirits delivered from 
Earth in that day would be prepared to 
take the second resurrection. Wherefore, 
God prophesied, saying: Through thee, 
O Jehovih, in another hundred years, I 
shall have delivered them into etherea as 
Thy Brides and Bridegrooms. 

CHAPTER XIV. 

Jehovih spake in the light of the throne 
of God in Hored, saying: Behold a star 
cometh. 

The Voice ceased, but God and his 
hosts knew the meaning, for it was the 
time of Aph to return and complete his 
deliverance of Neph and his hosts, and his 
Lords and their hosts. The Council look- 
ed up into the firmament; and the messen- 
gers who had heard the Voice, and who 
were departing on their various missions, 
also looked upward, even as they sped 
forth in their places; and they proclaimed 
it in the places of all the heavens of Earth, 
and to Lords and their divisions of the 
earth. 

And the angels of heaven and those 
that abode with mortals were so stirred up, 
and because of their presence mortals com- 
prehended that something unusual was 
about to happen. The Council of Hored 
knew not how they should proceed, for 
the event was to surpass in magnificence 
anything they had ever witnessed. 

God said: I have heard Thy Voice, O 
Jehovih. I know a star cometh, and great 
shall be the glory thereof. Give me light, 
O Father. How shall Thy servant know 
the decorum of Orian Chiefs? Behold, I 



am as one abashed with obscurity in Thy 
wide universe. 

Jehovih's Voice answered: Fear not, 
My Son. And let Thy council be strong 
also. Proceed at once to decorate thy peo- 
ple preparatory to receiving the resurrec- 
tion. And those who are to be My Brides 
and Bridegrooms clothe ye in white. 

The whole Council heard Jehovih's 
Voice, and they ordained officers to pro- 
ceed throughout atmospherea and put in 
effect Jehovih's commandment. And the 
decorated angels, and those prepared as 
Brides and Bridegrooms for etherea, were 
ordered to form in companies near the 
throne of God in Hored; and the officers 
of companies were also provided with 
badges, whereon was inscribed an account 
of their labor on earth and in heaven, the 
number and nature of their self sacrifices 
for others' good, and their grade in purity 
and power and wisdom. And the privates 
were decorated with stars to illustrate the 
same things, in degree and number; and 
the stations of their file in Hored were pro- 
vided in the order of music, rating them 
acording to their chord, and their social 
adaptability. 

For these things were done before eth- 
erean judges, to whom Jehovih had said: 
Let the people pass before you, and judge 
ye them, that being assorted and arranged 
they shall make one harmonious whole. 
For it is only by this they will have power 
to ascend and endure in My regions of 
light. 

There were one million of these judges, 
and they took up their stations in different 
parts of atmospherea, wherever the second 
resurrection had been established, every 
judge choosing a district for himself or 
herself, for they were both men and wo- 
men. And as the angels passed before 
them, the wisdom of the judges was so 
great they could comorehend all they had 
ever done, either on earth or in heaven. 
And by signals the proper officers were ad- 
vised how to decorate and adorn all of 
them. And as fast as companies of one 
thousand passed, they were provided with 
conductors who took them to their places, 
which had been previously determined by 
the command of God. 

Whilst the work was proceeding, lights 
began to appear in the firmament above. 






CYCLE OF APH 



73 



These were the marshals of the Orian 
fields in etherea in their star-ships, making 
course for Hored, and their number was 
legion. But presently one brighter and 
more powerful than the rest appeared, com- 
ing from the western arc of Onah'yi, and 
it steered direct to God's throne, growing 
brighter and larger as it came. And when 
it entered past Chinvat, and was well with- 
in the vortex of Earth in the belt of 
the moon's orbit, its light spread across the 
whole of atmospherea, Hored was illum- 
ined, and great was the enthusiasm of the 
angels of Hored. Not long the brilliant 
star delayed, for he who sailed it was a 
God of millions of years, and by his wis- 
dom attained to such mastery that the 
elements of Earth and atmospherea gave 
way, as .if appalled by a heaven on fire. 
Down came the star-ship whose majesty 
outweighed all ceremony, a very crown of 
magnificence, even to the arena of the 
Council of Hored. And he who came, at- 
tended by half a million, was Sue'ji, master 
of ceremonies. 

God rose up, saluting, and all the hosts 
rose up, saluting, whereupon Sue'ji as- 
cended the throne, greeted by God and his 
Council. 

Sue'ji said: In Thy name, O Jehovih. 
And God said: In Thy name, O Jehovih, 
welcome Thy Son. 

And presently all the place was aglow 
with a golden light, which ranks first in 
heaven of all colors, and the Voice of Je- 
hovih descended on Sue'ji, and he said: 

Behold, I came in the darkness and de- 
livered Mi, for she was of twins heavily 
laden. And the one dwelt with the moth- 
er, but the other I sent to nurse in Hau- 
tuon. And they are grown to maturity, a 
son and daughter twin. Turn ye to Hau- 
tuon; lo, the twin cometh. She was the 
puny child; but look ye upon her, O ye 
Gods and Goddesses. Her thousands of 
millions came in an avalanza from ji'ay'an 
worlds. Open your arms, O My beloved 
sons and daughters. 

The Voice ceased, and Sue'ji said: 
When the harvest of Hautuon arriveth, at- 
tended by the Gods and Goddesses who 
helped to deliver the children of darkness, 
and who have changed them into beacons 
of light, there shall be three days of recre- 
ation in atmospherea; for the hosts of Hau- 



tuon shall be shown their native world 
whence they came. But on the first day, 
behold, Aph, the Orian Chief, will de- 
scend in all his glory. And on the fourth 
day all your upraised sons and daughters 
shall ascend into the etherean worlds, 
where there are in waiting, to receive you, 
millions of millions of souls who have 
long dwelt in Nirvana. 

Sue'ji ceased speaking, having given 
commands as to the stations of his mar- 
shals around Earth and her heaven. 

God sent his messengers, saying: Go 
ye to Wak'hah and say: God saith: My 
heavens have been numbered, and the ac- 
count of my labors rendered and recorded 
in the libraries of Hored. And of all the 
hosts who have labored with thy God, be- 
hold, thou, Wak'hah, stands the highest 
in grade. Come, therefore, to the throne 
of thy God, and be anointed God of Earth 
for the next four hundred years. 

The messengers, attended by one thou- 
sand marshals, departed for Ad'jun, the 
place of labor where Wak'hah dwelt, be- 
ing a physician's nurse for es'yans and still 
born mortal children and those killed by 
abortion. And they delivered the message 
of God, to which Wak'hah replied: O Je- 
hovih, I have been all my life, now some 
thirty thousand years, trying to learn 
where I should be most serviceable to 
Thee and Thy sons and daughters. And 
when I think that I have found it, lo, a 
summons cometh from another way, say- 
ing: Come thou hither. It seemeth that 
Thou dost forever hurry us onward. Thy 
will be done, O Jehovih. 

So the marshals provided an otevan, 
and Wak'hah was conducted to Hored, to 
the foot of the throne of God, where he 
was saluted, according to his rank. 

CHAPTER XV 

Nearer and nearer came the visiting 
stars, the etherean ships from thousands 
of worlds, with countless millions of eman- 
cipated souls, dwellers in the Nirvanian 
regions of Jehovih. And when they reach- 
ed the boundary of Earth's vortex they 
halted a while, to form in rank and 
rank, that their glory might add to one 
another; and whilst they stood thus in the 
great vault of heaven there opened on one 
side a gateway amidst the star-ships; 



74 



CYCLE OF APH 



and far beyond came what appeared 
to be a strange and mottled sun, 
swaying to and fro, and this was the 
thousands of millions of spirits who 
were delivered from earth to Hau- 
tuon. And as it came into view ev- 
ery soul burst forth in one universal shout 
of applause. And as it came nearer, the 
curtains and sails and streamers, made of 
yellow, red and blue fire, began to 
wave and surge, like a ship in a rough 
sea, but steadily holding course in the un- 
dulating elements. Presently could be 
seen guardian ships, thousands and thou- 
sands, traveling beside the hosts of Hau- 
tuon. And the guardian ships were them- 
selves like stars, and carried millions of 
etherean souls who had been Gods and 
Goddesses on many worlds; and they form- 
ed wings for the Hautuon avalanza, to 
hold steady the course to the red star, 
Earth. And thus, in honored discipline, 
came the millions of Jehovih's worship- 
pers, who only two hundred years since 
were but as vermin delving in darkness, 
and deep buried in death, to whom Great 
Jehovih, and his exalted worlds were un- 
known. 

Brighter and brighter grew that great 
waving sun, sailed by the immortal Gods, 
and larger and more imposing, till, when 
it entered Earth's vortex, it became as 
living fire, large as Earth, and of bril- 
liant colors, from black to adamant, and 
blue and white, and purple, yellow, scar- 
let, pink, and of all shades; and living and 
sparkling, with the broad curtains suspend- 
ed, deep as the breadth of a world, with 
sails and flags that reached upward high as 
the moon. 

Midway in the vortex of Earth it 
halted, and the myriads of stars beyond 
now gathered in majestically from every 
side, till around Earth's atmospherea 
was not a place but glowed with Jehovih's 
fire of heaven. Music, which rose from the 
throne of God, a little while before, ceased; 
for here was the play of elements in harmo- 
ny. Moving, changing, forming, the great 
kaleidoscope of splendor forever evolved, 
new and glorious changes stretching 
abroad over the firmament of heaven. 

And now another gateway opened 
amidst the stars; and a cluster star was 
seen approaching from the southeast. It 



was as a star surrounded by stars, and 
brighter than all the others. This was 
the star-ship of Aph, the Orian Chief. At 
sight of which, all who were present turned 
in pride and wonder. Swift and mighty 
above all the countless millions of Gods 
and Goddesses assembled had he attained 
in the play and management of worlds. 
And at the sight of his etherean star, an- 
gels and Gods whispered: Aph! And 
the magic of his name, widely known in 
the Nirvanian fields of the emancipated 
heavens, spread abroad, till every soul ut- 
tered, Aph, in all the regions of atmos- 
pherea. 

Nearer and nearer he came, nor halted 
at Chinvat, the boundary of Earth's 
vortex; but steadily and with power, sailed 
on till his star stood in the doorway of 
heaven, and here halted as if to complete 
the wondrous scene. But a moment more, 
and all the fleets of the glorious star- 
ships moved onward toward Earth, and 
surrounding it on every side. 

And now the marshals took their parts. 
First, Sue'ji, chief over all the rest, from 
the throne of God, cried out: All hail, 
O Aph, Son of Jehovih. 

And the words were caught up on ev- 
ery side, and uttered in one breath around 
the world, went like an echo over all the 
heavens. Yet, nearer and nearer gath- 
ered the great star-ships and sun of Hau- 
tuon, till like a net they joined and filled 
Earth's atmospherea in the east and west 
and north and south, and below and above; 
on every side. 

Then Aph's fleet drew near, and he and 
his hosts alighted, and he ascended the 
throne, saying: All hail, O Neph, God of 
Earth. 

And this was also uttered by the mill- 
ions of hosts. 

Whereupon the signs and ceremonies of 
the Gods were briefly concluded, and a rec- 
reation of three days proclaimed. And the 
angel hosts came forth out of their ships. 
And for three days and nights the visitors 
dwelt on the earth and in the lower atmos- 
pherea; inspecting how Earth was made; 
its land and water; its mountains and 
valleys; its beasts of prey and beasts 
of burden; its birds and fishes; and above 
all, its mortal people and spirits who lin- 
gered on the earth. And then they 



CYCLE OF APH 



75 



surveyed atmospherea and the works of 
God and his Lords; their nurseries, hospi- 
tals, factories, schools and colleges. 

And the Chiefs from many worlds, and 
Gods and Goddesses, mingled together, 
and exchanged their varied experience in 
the wide regions of Jehovih's universe, of 
the management of both corporeal and es'- 
sean worlds, and of the cosmogeny of ether- 
ean worlds, and of the turning worlds from 
their orbitic courses, or changing their 
axic rotation, and of the deliverance of 
millions of souls into the ji'ay'an fields, 
and of the creation of new corporeal worlds 
and the dissolution of others, and the gath- 
ering together of the spirits who are thus 
disinherited, and of their final resurrection. 
Neither seemed there any end to Jehovih's 
universe, where such wonders go on for- 
ever. 

And on the fourth day the marshals 
called order; and so great was the disci- 
pline of the hosts and the arrangement of 
the star-ships, that in a moment of time 
order reigned amongst all these countless 
millions of people. 

When order was restored, God com- 
manded Wak'hah to rise, and he said: In 
Thy name, O Jehovih, I proclaim this, Thy 
Son, God of Earth for the next four hun- 
dred years. Guide him in wisdom and 
love, O Father. 

And God made a crown and placed it on 
Wak'hah's head, saying: Hail God of 
Earth, Jehovih's Son. 

And his words were repeated by the 
hosts. And then God took off the trian- 
gle, heirloom of the Gods of the red star, 
Earth, and hung it on Wak'hah's neck, 
saying: Take this heirloom, the symbol 
of three entities in one, and wear it for the 
glory of Jehovih. 

To which Wak'hah, now God, answer- 
ed: Thy will be done, O Father, Creator 
and Ruler over all. And all on the throne 
stood aside, and God ascended the throne 
and sat in the midst. The es'enaurs chant- 
ed and the hymn sounded around the 
whole world. Then Aph, Son of Jehovih, 
spake, saying: 

In four hundred years, O God, I will 
come and deliver thee and thy harvest, 
and thy Lords and their harvest, for the 
glory of Jehovih, the Unapproachable Al- 
mighty. Amen. 



And now Aph went and sat down at the 
foot of the throne, and God came down 
according to custom and took his hand, 
saying: Arise, Son of Jehovih, and go thy 
way. 

And Aph rose up, saluting, and he and 
his attendants departed and entered his 
star-ship. The es'enaurs chanted, the 
trumpeters played, and the solemn march 
of Jehovih's sea of fire sounded from hea- 
ven and Earth. 

The marshals now put the great works 
in order. Neph and his attendants were 
stationed on the right of Aph in a ship 
new built. Next to Neph the ship of his 
Lords and their attendants; after them, 
their marshals from the different divisions 
of Earth and atmospherea. Next to 
them the ships of the messengers; then the 
factors, then the nurses, then the physi- 
cians, and so on; and finally the divisions 
of Earth-raised, who Avere now adjourned 
to the sun-fleet, being of the same 
rank. And these comprised the harvest of 
Neph for Jehovih's emancipated realms; 
and the number of souls exceded all other 
harvests raised up from Earth. 

And now had come the time for the as- 
cent, and Aph said: Give us of Thy pow- 
er, O Jehovih. And his words were ech- 
oed in all places in heaven. And 
the ships started from their founda- 
tions, and slowly moved back outward 
from Earth. The es'enaurs played the 
march; the ethereans tore off strips of 
fabric and threw them down to Hored, and 
then formed flowers and leaves and per- 
fumed them, and cast them out, to fall in 
the lower heavens. Outward the etherean 
ships moved, and then parting the breadth 
of the world rose slowy upward. Pres- 
ently they turned, and were as one entire 
world; but with the rotation of the different 
stars began to separate, all except the har- 
vest of Neph, which was the central figure, 
led onward and upward by Aph, Son of 
the Great Spirit. 

Faster and faster rose the glorious 
scene, and more awful, and sparkling with 
splendor. Onward it rose higher and high- 
er, till it disappeared in the firmament 
above. 

CHAPTER XVI 

Now was atmospherea like a new hea- 
ven stripped of visitors, and ready to re- 



76 



CYCLE OF APH 



sume labor after a glorious festival. So 
God at once dispatched all hands to their 
places, and the factories, schools and col- 
leges, nurseries and hospitals, were once 
more alive with willing workers. 

And Hored prospered in every depart- 
ment; and so also did the departments of 
the Lords on Earth; and mortals also 
prospered under the light of the Great 
Spirit. For four hundred years God 
reigned in heaven, and his Lords under 
him, and the second dan of Aph fell up- 
on Earth. So God appointed An'on as 
his successor. And now Aph and his at- 
tendants came to deliver God, his Lords 
and people prepared for their resurrection 
up into etherea. And the number of Jeho- 
vih's harvest was one thousand million 
souls. 

And God and his Lords reigned their 
time, and they were also delivered by Aph, 
and the harvest of Jehovih was eight hun- 
dred million souls. 

And his successor, God of Hored and 
atmospherea, and his Lords, fulfilled their 
dan, and they and their harvests were de- 
livered by Aph also; and the number of 
souls delivered was six hundred million. 
And Jehovih commanded Aph to commit 
Earth and atmospherea to the successors 
of Ra'zan of Garowista, in the etherean 
phalanx of Ar'doth. 

And the next harvest of God and his 
Lords was two hundred million souls. 

After that Earth passed into the a'ji 
of Urk'stand for eight hundred years, 
and the light of the upper heavens was 
lost to Earth and atmospherea; so there 
was no harvest for the etherean realms. 
And because of the darkness in atmospher- 



ea it began to fall in grade; and the 
seven tetracts took root in Hored, and 
overspread the dominions of God and his 
Lords. And many in heaven rose up, and 
proclaiming themselves Gods and Lords, 
obtained followers, some to the extent of 
three million souls. And these false Gods 
made slaves of their followers, exacting 
service, and in lieu giving pitiful homes 
and regimen; and by the labor of their 
slaves embellishing their mansions and cit- 
ies in hada. 

Jehovih had said of old: Before mortals 
I keep death forever present that they may 
not forget the change from corporeal to 
spirit life. Otherwise, they would dispute 
it possible in My hands for these things to 
be. But My resurrections in heaven are 
far apart, and the inhabitants thereof lose 
faith in those above them. Through faith 
is all power and glory attained. 

And during the last thousand years of 
the cycle of Aph, there being no resurrec- 
tions to etherea, many fell into disbelief of 
the emancipated heavens, and so set about 
building up heavenly kingdoms on their 
own account, and for their own glory. And 
in order to have exalted kingdoms they 
sent their slaves back to mortals to inspire 
them with the glory of their false God's 
kingdoms, that others in turn might be- 
come slaves. And confusion reigned in 
heaven again, and it reacted on mortals, 
through the angels' presence, and war and 
misery overspread the nations and tribes 
of men on Earth. 

Thus ended the cycle of Aph, being two 
thousand six hundred years after the flood, 
and three thousand six hundred years in 
all. 



kM 



LORDS' RECORD FOR THE CYCLE OP APH 



CHAPTER I. 

Hear me, O man, I am the Lord of 
Earth, Son of Jehovih. I am one of thine 
elder brothers. I, thy Lord, with my 
brother Lords and Gods, in the name of 
Jehovih speak, saying: 

Peace and patience be unto all men, 
that ye may comprehend my words, and 
bear witness that heaven and earth in every 
part is Jehovih's and that all men and wo- 
men are His sons and daughters. 

As over mortal kingdoms, kings, so 
hath Jehovih in His heavens crowned cer- 
tain Chieftains for times and places, and 
given them titles by which they have been 
proclaimed to men and angels. And they 
are honored in high heaven, and known 
to the people on the earth as Jehovih's 
Lord of Earth, and my predecessors have 
been known for thousands of years 
amongst mortals as the Lord of Earth. 

If it be said: The king said thus; and 
generations after, it be said: The king 
said thus; all men know it was not the 
same man, but was nevertheless the king. 
So it is with the Lords, for all of them 
have been the Lord. Wherefore I, the 
Lord, by virtue of my authority, in Jeho- 
vih's name, proclaim the light and the 
darkness of the past, for inasmuch as I 
have been exalted by Jehovih, so are ye 
all in waiting for your turn in the heavens 
above to become Lords and Gods and 
Goddesses. 

To draw your souls up in heavenly as- 
pirations, to become one with the Father 
in righteousness and good works, Jehovih 
sendeth His sons and daughters down to 
the earth, to reveal the glory of His king- 
doms in the etherean worlds. But be- 
cause of the darkness of man's soul, man 
setteth up to mock the words of his Lord, 
saying: How can I become a Lord or a 
God? Behold, his word hath not been 
heard; none have written his speech. 

Was it. not so in all times of Earth? 
And because of this darkness amongst 
men, they have laid bare the iniquity of 
their own hearts. For out of the mouths 



of my chosen, who utter my words, come 
words of truth, love, wisdom, kind- 
ness, and the exaltation of virtue. But 
from those who deny me, come corrup- 
tion, war, avarice, and the love of earthly 
things for self-sake. 

Behold, they have quibbled about words 
and the meaning of words. One saith: 
How much of this came from the Lord, 
and how much from the prophet? Making 
of themselves mathematicians on a matter 
separate from the subject of the righteous- 
ness of their own souls. Are not all words 
at best but pictures and paintings of the 
spirit that findeth them? And whether 
the Lord or an angel carry the light to the 
prophet, what does it matter to the man or 
woman who seeketh to serve Jehovih by 
doing good works? if only the words help 
them in this work? 

Some have said: Behold, I have given 
all I had to the poor, and I rise early and 
visit the sick; and in the night I sit up 
with them; and I gather up orphans and 
helpless ones, and make them so joyous of 
heart they thank Jehovih they are created 
into life. Now, verily all men know that 
such behavior cometh from them that rec- 
ognize my word, whether it come from the 
mouth of a babe or the pen of a fool. 
Who, then, shall not find delight in the 
word of the Lord? for they are the ex- 
pression of Jehovih's light within him, and 
my word cometh as well now as in the old- 
en time? 

Behold, I am not for one man only, nor 
for one woman, nor for one book. But 
wherever the light of wisdom and the de- 
sire for virtue and holy deeds shine, there 
will my speech manifest. Is not Jehovih 
wide as the universe, and immutable? And 
to be in harmony with Him, is not this the 
sum of all wisdom? Therefore, if thy Lord 
or thy God hath attained to be one with 
the Father, and he come in dominion on 
Earth with his millions of angels and 
ye are inspired by them to do Jehovih's 
will, what discussion shall man have against 
heaven or its representative? 



78 



CYCLE OF APH 



LORDS' RECORD 



I declare freedom unto all men in Jeho- 
vih's name, but with freedom I also give 
the experience of the Lords of Earth. Suf- 
fer therefore my prophets on all hands to 
embellish the pictures of the past in their 
own way. Herein is wisdom, for they that 
strive for the light of my dominion shall 
receive my angels in Jehovih's name; and 
by the words they find to express my com- 
mandments shall they be known to be 
from me. All words come from the Lord; 
by him was man made upright on the 
earth. 

But as the light of a full-grown man dif- 
fereth from that of a child; so, in different 
degree was the light of men; and those 
with Jehovih's light were called Faithists, 
because they perceived that wisdom shaped 
all things, and ruled to the ultimate glory 
of the All One. But those of the lesser 
light were called Druk, because their trust 
was more in corporeal than in spiritual 
things. And the Faithists were also called 
the chosen people, because they had faith 
in Jehovih; but the Druks were classed as 
enemies to the Lord, because they sacri- 
ficed by means of war and death that which 
Jehovih made alive. And these two people 
have lived on the earth from the first. 

And I, the Lord, Son of Jehovih, gave 
a certain commandment to man, saying: 
Thou shalt love the Lord with all thy soul, 
thy wisdom and strength. But man had 
little strength in this matter; neither did I 
ask for more than he could give. And an- 
other commandment was: Thou shalt not 
kill, and if man had obeyed this command- 
ment there would have been no war in the 
world. In like manner gave I the light of 
heaven unto all men, but my enemies per- 
verted my words to justify themselves in 
sin. And if one man saith: The Lord said: 
Thou shalt not kill; and yet another man 
saith: The Lord said: Thou shalt kill; no 
man need mistake which is of the Lord in 
fact. For the Lord desireth not to see any 
man killed whom Jehovih created alive. 

And man multiplied and peopled Earth 
over, building cities and nations and 
prospering in all earthly things. But as I 
came to the earth to develop the soul of 
man chiefly, and for his own ultimate hap- 
piness in the etherean worlds, I labored 
not with such as heeded me not, but suf- 
fered them to go on in their own conceit; 



and they became divided against one an- 
other, and war and pestilence came upon 
mortals, resulting in their downfall. And 
the spirits of those that denied me on earth, 
still denied me in heaven; and in their 
stubbornness and conceit continued to 
dwell with man on the earth. So that in 
the course of time the world was overrun 
by spirits of darkness who knew not hea- 
ven. 

In all of the four great divisions of the 
earth, my enemies killed many of the 
Faithists, and there were but few left in 
mortality. In Pan there was a remnant, 
but they were scattered and in hiding from 
their evil pursuers. 

CHAPTER II. 

The Lord said: A wise physician am- 
putateth a diseased limb, and so preserveth 
the trunk to become healed. Saw I not 
the rankness of the tribes of darkness, the 
Druks; and that the proceedings of man 
would render Earth void? What is all the 
world if it bring not forth heirs unto ever- 
lasting life? 

Behold, my chosen had become de- 
spoiled on all the divisions of Earth save 
Pan. And they who had been their 
destroyers had in turn nearly exterminated 
one another. And as for the land of Pan, 
it was already in the throes of death. 
And spirits and mortals had become as a 
festering sore. The spirits of the dead, 
tens of thousands of millions of them, 
would not quit their hold on mortals whilst 
they lived on the earth. 

And I sent my angels around about the 
whole earth, and gathered in the spirits of 
darkness; gathered them unto the land of 
Pan. 

And I said: I will destroy man from 
the face of the earth; for the flesh of man 
is. corrupt, for by the eating of flesh and 
unwise cohabitation hath he corrupted 
his race upon Earth. And I, the Lord, 
called unto my chosen who were perse- 
cuted and hidden away in the valleys and 
mountains in the land of Pan. And I said 
unto them: Because ye have kept my 
commandments, and sown the seed of 
righteousness in your generations, you 
have found favor in my sight. 

Go, therefore, and build ships sufficient 
to carry all my chosen, and go within them 



CYCLE OF APH 



LORDS' RECORD 



79 



where none can pursue or destroy. For, 
behold, I will bring a flood of waters upon 
the land even unto the highest mountains, 
to destroy the corruption thereof. Take 
with you sufficient food to last one hundred 
and fifty days, for ye shall not be able to 
come forth to procure food. 

The ships were all built on the moun- 
tains and numbered one hundred and 
thirty-eight. I numbered them that were 
saved, and there were twelve thousand 
four hundred and twenty; and these were 
descendants of the first race of man on 
Earth. The ships were divided into five 
fleets; four fleets of thirty-four ships, and 
one fleet of two ships. 

The Lord said: I will name the fleets 
of my chosen Guatama, Shem, Jaffeth, 
Ham and Yista, and their names shall be 
everlasting on Earth. From these few 
Thins will I people the world over; and I 
will inspire them to write a history of the 
flood. 

And in one hundred and fifty days from 
the beginning of the flood, the ships were 
brought into their respective places, as the 
Lord decreed that they should. The fleet 
Guatama was carried to the eastward and 
the country where it landed was called 
Guatama. 

The Lord said: From this place shall 
my chosen spread out north and south. 
But they shall not inhabit the lands to the 
east or west; for they shall be testimony in 
time to come of the landing place from the 
continent of Pan. 

The fleet of two ships carried to the 
north was named Yista, which in the Panic 
tongue was Zha'Pan, which is the same 
country that to this day is called Japan, 
signifying, relic of the continent of Pan, 
for it lay to the north where the land was 
cleaved in twain. 

And the Lord said to them: Behold, 
eight dan'has shall come and of all 
people ye shall be reckoned the old- 
est in the world. And until I come and 
unlock the sea, ye shall remain an exclus- 
ive people from all tribes and nations. 
Preserve ye, therefore, the names of my 
rites and ceremonies, and especially the 
names of land and water, and the firma- 
ment above, and ships that plow the wa- 
ter, and all sounds whatever that man mak- 
eth in the throat and without the tongue 



and lips; for in the time of my glory on 
Earth ye shall also be glorified. Pre- 
serve ye also peace, righteousness and in- 
dustry, for ye shall be a testimony in the 
time to come of the presence of my hand 
and of the Great Spirit also. 

The fleet named Jaffeth was driven to 
the westward and north, and the country 
was called Jaffeth. 

The fleet named Shem landed to the 
south, and the country was called Shem. 

The fleet named Ham landed southwest, 
and the country was called the land of 
Ham. 

The Lord said: Behold, my chosen 
shall manifest many signs and words com- 
mon to one another in these different di- 
visions of Earth 

They shall remember the flood. 

They shall repudiate idols, but worship 
the Great Spirit, Jehovih. 

They shall have the crescent. 

They shall have the triangle. 

They shall preserve the four days of 
the change of the moon as sacred days, 
and they shall be called Sabbaths. 

They shall be circumcised. 

They shall remember the seven tetracts: 
DIBBAH, the enticing evil; RA, the flesh 
evil; ZIMMAH, the joking evil; BALY- 
YAAL, worthlessness; AVEN, vanity; 
AN ASH, delight in destruction; SA'TAN, 
desire for leadership for self sake. 

They shall have three lights: God's an- 
gels and Lords; the prophets; the rabbahs. 

They shall have three representative 
symbols of light: The sun, the moon and 
the burning flame. 

And my chosen shall use these lights 
and symbols, signs and seasons in all the 
divisions of Earth whither I have set- 
tled them. And in the Kosmorr era I will 
come and show them the framework of my 
building which I raise up to the Almighty. 
CHAPTER III. 

And now was the world of one language 
and one speech. In all places my people 
spake alike, man to man. 

The Lord spake unto the I'hins, saying: 
Behold the earth; I give it to you to be 
yours forever. Mingle not with the Druks, 
for they are without understanding and not 
heirs to everlasting life. 

Now many inquired of the Lord, say- 
ing: If these, having no understanding, be 



80 



CYCLE OF APH 



LORDS' RECORD 



not heirs to everlasting life, how shall it 
be with our children who die in infancy? 

The Lord said: This is a matter of 
seed, and not of learning. Whosoever is 
born of my chosen shall inherit my ever- 
lasting kingdom. 

And I said unto the guardian angels 
whom I had given to man: In the lands 
whither I will take my people, let them 
build mounds and walled cities, with lad- 
ders to enter, after the manner of the an- 
cients. In all divisions of Earth, alike 
and like shall they build. For in the time 
of Kosmon their relics shall be testimony 
that the I'hin preceded the I'huan, the cop- 
per-colored race, in all the world. So also 
will I, the Lord, provide in the Kosmon 
era to discover the sunken land of Pan, 
that mortals may comprehend the magni- 
tude of the work of the Lord. 

In those days the Thins dwelt not 
alone, but in cities and villages; and they 
were clothed; and they tilled the ground 
and brought forth grains and seeds good to 
eat; and flax and hemp from which to 
make cloth for covering the body. And 
their food was of herbs, roots, grains, seeds, 
and fruits of the earth; but they ate not 
flesh nor fish, nor of anything that breathed 
the breath of life. They toiled by day, 
bringing within their cities the fruit of 
their labor. And they slept within their 
cities and on mounds at night, that they 
might not be molested by beasts of prey 
and by serpents. 

And every city had one rabbah (head fa- 
ther), who knew the way of the Lord. 
By the rab'bah were the altars of the Lord 
built, and the times of the sacred days 
foretold. And the rab'bahs made records 
in writing on stone, which they taught to 
their successors, and to whomsoever de- 
sired to learn of the Lord. And the Lord 
abode with them; and they kept the com- 
mandments and multiplied in all the divi- 
sions of the world. 

And in course of time, there were thou- 
sands of cities and hundreds of thousands 
of inhabitants who had spread abroad over 
the lands of the earth. And they built 
ships and sailed abroad on the seas, and 
inhabited the islands thereof, north and 
south, and east and west. 



CHAPTER IV. 

The Lord said: That my people may 
remain upright, behold I give unto them 
and their successors forever, certain sacred 
words. 

Seven degrees of sacred rites bestow I 
unto my people. And no man shall take 
the second till he hath learned all the 
words of the first; nor shall he take the 
third till he hath learned all the words of 
the second; and so on, shall man learn all 
my sacred words. From mouth to mouth 
shall they be learned by every man and 
woman of my people. 

And the Lord said to his prophets: Go 
to the Druks and cause them to sit on the 
ground in a circle, and stand ye in the 
midst, saying: Behold, O Druk, the Great 
Spirit hath spoken; I have heard His 
Voice. His words are holy words. Who- 
ever learneth His words shall have power 
over sickness and poison and the flowing 
of blood. And, if a woman, she shall be- 
come fruitful and have great rejoicing. 
Hold up your hands and repeat the words 
of the Lord. 

I will serve the prophets of the Lord. 

Heal my flesh, O Lord, and cure poison. 

The Lord is spirit unseen in the hea- 
vens. 

He is all power and wisdom and love 
and anger. 

He can heal and he can tear the flesh, 
and strike dead. 

His prophets have his good grace; they 
can hear his voice and interpret him. 

The Lord is my guardian; ten times a 
day will I remember him. 

The Lord can stop blood; choke it up, 
O Lord. He can give blood stopping as 
a power of the prophet's hands. 

Confound my enemies, O Lord. 

The ashars shield me. 

I will honor the Thins, the sacred peo- 
ple of the Lord. They are my brethren. 

This was the first lesson. 

Blessed be the name of the Lord. He 
can make me to be alive after I am dead, 
and this is all he requireth of me, to say: 
Blessed be the name of the Lord. In the 
morning I will say it. At noon I will say 
it. At night I will say it. Blessed be the 
name of the Lord. 

I will wear clothes to hide my naked- 
ness, because the Lord requireth it of me. 



CYCLE OF APH 



LORDS' RECORD 



81 



I will not steal nor speak untruth. 

If my brother taketh what is mine, I 
will not be in anger, nor judge him; but I 
will lay the matter before the prophets of 
the Lord. 

I will do no violence for it is the 
Lord's commandment. 

This was the second lesson; and the 
third lesson was: 

I will have but one wife; I will go not 
after other women whilst she liveth. (I 
will have but one husband; I will receive 
no other man whilst my husband liveth). 

I will not allow any man or woman who 
is diseased to come near the oe'ugah. In 
the Lord's name I will drive them hence. 
I renounce them nor will I mingle there- 
with, for it is the Lord's commandment. 

The fourth lesson was: 

I forswear the hunt. But whatsoever 
cometh, and it is fit food for man to eat, I 
will kill it. I will take up fish in the name 
of the Lord, for they suffer no pain. 

I will till the soil and gather roots to 
eat, and fibres of barks for clothing, and 
live like the I'hins, the chosen people of 
the Lord. 

I renounce murderers ; nor will I marry 
with them, nor live as they live. They are 
the enemies of the Lord. 

I will curse no man, nor woman, nor 
child, for it is the Lord's commandment. 

I renounce anger and all weapons of 
death. They are enemies of the Lord. 

If a man injure me, I will lay the mat- 
ter before the Lord's prophet, for his judg- 
ment is holy. 

If a women entice me, I will go secrete 
myself and repeat the sacred words. 

I will respect the times of woman, for 
she is the gift of the Lord to be man's 
helpmate. 

When my wife hath a newborn child, I 
will do her labor for forty days, for it is 
the Lord's commandment. 

The fifth lesson was: 

The four days of the moon are the 
Lord's; on those days I will not labor. 

I will keep sacred the four days of 
every moon, and I will repeat the sacred 
words of the Lord thrice. 

And when the prophets say: Behold 
the Lord saith this is a sacred day; then 
will I keep that day holy. 



When the I'hins worship before the al- 
tar of the Lord, I will keep on the outer 
circle, for the I'hins are the chosen ser- 
vants of the Lord. 

When the I'hins march forth, following 
the prophets, I will come after them, for I 
will honor the Lord's chosen. 

When the prophets say: Pitch the 
tents here, I will do so, for the prophet 
cannot err. 

The sixth lesson was: 

I will provide for the sick, and for the 
woman with a newborn child. I will give 
first to the I'hins, then to the Druks. 

To warriors I will give in time of sick- 
ness, but when they are healed I will say: 
Go your way. 

And if a man be sick of poison, or a wo- 
man sick of poison, I will go to the same. 
But before I go in I will say: O Lord, I 
go in a place of danger. Come thou 
through thy ashars and protect me. For 
the Lord can encompass me around about, 
and I shall not receive the poison. 

The seventh lesson was: 

I will keep these holy words secret in 
the name of the Lord. 

When the Lord commandeth, saying: 
Go here, or go there, or build here a city, 
or a house or an altar; then will I do the 
Lord's bidding. 

Thus did the Lord establish laws 
amongst men; and because of the sacred- 
ness of the Lord's words, man treasured 
them and kept holy the commandments of 
the Lord. And when mortals repeated 
words for the stopping of blood, behold, 
my angels compressed the veins. Not the 
words stopped the blood, but by the words 
mortals became in concert with my hosts. 

And when a man went into the presence 
of dangerous diseases, repeating the sacred 
words, the angels protected him from the 
disease. 

And the Lord caused the rab'bah to 
make a wheel, and hang it beside the al- 
tar. And the meaning thereof was: As 
this wheel has no beginning or end, so is 
the Creator. Whosoever turneth the wheel 
once round hath said: In Thee, my Cre- 
ator, I trust. 

And the Lord made an image to stand 
beside the altar, where only holy men and 
women might pass, and the Lord called 



82 



CYCLE OF APR 



LORDS' RECORD 



the emblem fete, signifying: Beyond me 
there is no appeal. 

And the form of the fete was a circle 
and an all light center with four dark cor- 
ners cut off. And the Lord explained the 
meaning, which was: 

That there is a central light within man 
seeing clearly, but that the four dark cor- 
ners of the world beset him on all sides. 

And the Lord made an instrument and 
called it Gau, which was a triangle with a 
plumb line from the upper corner; and 
across the plumb line was a hollow reed 
for seeing through; and at the bottom end 
of the pumb line was a weight attached, 
which pointed to marks on the lower bor- 
der of the triangle. 



And the Lord explained to the prophets 
how to use the gau for proving all things, 
even as to the height of mountains, and the 
velocity of running waters, and how to lay 
the foundations of the temples. And the 
prophets on their part taught the Thins, 
but with them the mysteries were kept a 
secret against all the world. Hence, in af- 
ter time came the saying: Even the wick- 
ed were compelled to employ the Thins. 

In all there were two hundred and 
eighty signs and emblems and symbols and 
implements given by the Lord to his peo- 
ple; and when they were all completed the 
Lord taught the prophets the meaning; and 
these became the sacred language of mor- 
tals in all the divisions of Earth. 




Cycle of Sue 



CHAPTER I. 

Jehovih spake to Sue, Orian Chief, in 
the gardens of Atahavia, saying: Sue, My 
Son, behold the red star, the far-off Earth. 
Her harvests are blighted; she. has ceased 
to bring forth immortal souls to My un- 
ending realms. 

Sue heard the Voice, and answered: 
In Thy name, O Jehovih, will I summon 
My Gods of Hoit and Izaracha. 

And Sue, quick-perceiving God of two 
worlds in the etherean Seamar, sent swift 
messengers to Hoit and Izaracha. Then 
came Le Wing, God of Hoit; and presently 
Sivian, Goddess of Izaracha, and they stood 
before Jehovih's throne. 

Sue said: Jehovih's Voice spake to me, 
saying: Behold the red star, she bringeth 
forth no sons and daughters more to peo- 
ple My etherean realms. She is weak and 
out of tune and cometh this way. And I 
answered: 

In Thy power and wisdom, O Jehovih, 
will I visit the red star. Six years will I 
remain, stand on her soil, and course her 
heavens, and give such potency to her con- 
fused God and Lords as will make a thou- 
sand millions sing for joy. 

I have charts and maps of her atmos- 
pherean and corporeal parts; and a history 
of her, as yet, young and adventurous in 
the field of worlds. I have called you to 
accompany me. 

Then spake Le Wing and Sivian, say- 
ing: To do Jehovih's will and thine are 
we come to thee. 

To the swift messengers Sue said: Go 
proclaim my will throughout my etherean 
worlds, and summon up from Ithyivius a 
hundred million skilled volunteers. When 
the red star shall cross the boundary line of 
Izaracha, we will go forth in power in a 
ship of golden light. 

CHAPTER II. 

In the Arinisca of Portan of the ether- 
ean worlds of Hoit and Izaracha, flew the 
call of the Gods for volunteers, and so 



welcome was the sound thereof that hosts 
of ethereans rose up on every hand ready 
to volunteer and soon the required num- 
ber stood in waiting. And yet so vast were 
the fields and arcs of Izaracha that the hun- 
dred millions chosen were as but a fraction 
compared to those left uncalled. 

Coming near the throne of Sue in Hoit, 
the hundred millions formed in squares 
and stars, and the chosen God took his 
place at the head and front, looking to the 
low horizon, where rose the red star, 
Earth. And now the builders, who had 
measured the elements lying in the route 
toward Earth, formed their crescent ship 
of fire, and equipped it with mantles, 
curtains and banners. When the ship was 
completed, Jehovih's light encompassed it 
about on all sides, and though it was beau- 
tiful before, it was now illuminated and 
sparkling and bright as a sun, and rich in 
golden color. 

When Sue entered the ship the Voice 
of Jehovih spake, saying: Thou shalt go 
now, My Son, and give wider range to the 
tetracts both in angels and mortals. Give 
broader dominions to tyrant kings and 
queens on Earth, and greater scope to the 
self Gods and Lords, and thus increase 
their responsibility. 

Then all the hosts entered the etherean 
ship singing and rejoicing, observed by 
countless millions come to wish them joy 
on their six years' visit to Earth. 

Sue said: In Thy name, O Jehovih, 
and by virtue of Thy power in me vested, 
my hosts shall speed forth at my command. 

And Sue stretched forth his hands, and 
the mighty ship of heaven turned on its 
axis, cutting loose from the high firma- 
ment. And it turned, with its great cur- 
tains and banners sailing gracefully and 
swiftly through the blue ether. The music 
of her es'enaurs swelled and rolled along 
on the spheres of many worlds, where 
dwell countless millions of spectators view- 
ing the marvelous speed and power and 
brilliant colors of the great ship. 



84 



CYCLE OF SUE 



When the ship came to the bridge of 
Chinvat, and halted, to take in the plan of 
the whirling Earth, Sue said: Light of Thy 
light, O Jehovih. And at once as high as 
the moon and as bright as the sun, the il- 
luminated ship stood for three days and 
nights to over-awe the self Gods and war- 
rior kings and murderers of the earth, 
whose plentiful souls in chaos polluted hea- 
ven. And then slowly entered the vortex 
of Earth, for Sue desired that both cor- 
poreans and atmosphereans should witness 
the coming power. So that when the ship 
neared the disorganized Hored, the self 
Gods and Lords fled with their hosts, and 
left their well supplied kingdoms desolate, 
and rushed down to the earth in millions 
to hide themselves. 

But the true God and Lords stood firm 
in their depleted kingdoms, fearing naught, 
but in faith that this etherean ship was Je- 
hovih's answer to their long cry for help 
from the heavenly spheres. And by their 
pillars of fire still standing, great Sue knew 
where to land in the lower heaven. And 
when he neared the place his es'enaurs 
chanted and the trumpeters played. And 
God and his hosts sent up rockets, display- 
ing the three primary colors, and God's es'- 
enaurs joined in chanting with the hosts 
above. 

Presently the ship of fire was at the 
place of landing, and Sue, Jehovih's Son, 
descended with his host of a hundred mill- 
ion angels, led by Gussitivi, marshaless of 
the throne of Sue, in Izaracha. 

Sue said: Hail, O God of Earth. In 
Jehovih's name, I am come in power and 
wisdom. 

And God answered: Glory be to Thee, 
O Jehovih, that Thy Son hath come so far 
to bless Thy bewildered kingdom. 

Then they saluted, and God said: In 
the name of the Great Spirit come thou and 
honor my throne. 

So Sue went forward and greeted by 
shaking hands; and Sue ascended and sat 
on the throne, saying: I feel the light of 
the Father descending on my head. 

Presently the All Light enveloped Sue, 
and Jehovih's Voice spake through him, 
saying: 

Hear the words of thy Creator, My Son, 
and rejoice because I have not forgotten 
thee and thy people. Behold, this is the 



hour of thy redemption from the trials of 
tetracts, which are run abroad in My do- 
minions. Was it not worse than this in 
the olden time? And I came with My 
hosts and delivered them. I created man 
in darkness and gave to him no judgment, 
that the creation of his own thoughts 
might be for his own glory forever. But 
instead of beautifying his thoughts, he 
hearkeneth to tetracts and buries himself 
in darkness. The heaven I build for him 
he destroys, and then buildeth his own, but 
only to be displeased and turbulent. Nei- 
ther will he content himself with providing 
with his own hands, but searches out my 
most dutiful sons and daughters and makes 
slaves of them for his own exaltation. 

In the ancient times I sent My sons and 
daughters to search out these traitors, de- 
claring unto them that only by forsaking 
evil and practicing righteousness could 
they attain to My exalted kingdoms. Their 
evil places have I cast down, and rebuilt 
in honor and glory, that their own judg- 
ment might determine that virtue and good 
works are the sure foundation for happi- 
ness that will endure forever. But when 
I have raised them up in one cycle and 
made the lower heaven a paradise, alas, My 
ethereans have been gone away but a little 
while when the tetracts take root and grow, 
and turn all things upside down. 

But now will I build them up in a new 
way. Yea, I will appropriate the evil to 
their own good in a way they dream not of. 
The false Gods and Lords shall be arrested 
and brought before this judgment seat, and 
I will judge them by their own behavior 
and desires. Neither will I torment them 
nor abridge their happiness. Send, there- 
fore, My Son, thy marshals into the hidden 
places of these self Gods and Lords and 
say to them: Thus saith the hosts of hea- 
ven. Come, My Son, and inherit a king- 
dom in hada in thine own way, for lo, 
there is room for all; but that thou art not 
left behind, come quickly to Hored. 

And they will come, hoping to embellish 
themselves in the old manner. But My 
Light shall come in due time in Mine own 
way. 

The Voice ceased and Sue spake, say- 
ing: What Jehovih hath ordered, do ye. 

So marshals were sent in all directions 
in atmospherea to gather in the false Gods 



CYCLE OF SUE 



85 



and Lords who had deserted their domin- 
ions in fear of the light of Sue's etherean 
ship. And after many days the false ones 
were brought to Hored, and there were of 
them seven thousand Gods and Lords. 
Now when they were before Sue, Jehovih's 
Son, and arranged so that all could hear 
and see, the Light gathered about the 
throne, and Sue addressed them, saying: 

Hear me, O men and women. I have 
sent for you and you are here. In this I 
am pleased. Know, then, that what I speak 
shall be in love and tenderness. Ye have 
deserted Jehovih's kingdoms, and it must 
be because it pleased you better than to re- 
main. Is this not true? And ye also de- 
serted your own kingdoms? 

For a little while they consulted togeth- 
er, and then answered: Nay, it pleased us 
not to desert our own kingdoms; but we 
were afraid. 

Sue said: Who think ye I am? They 
answered: A God from some far-off 
world, but where it lieth we know not. We 
desire to know who thou art. 

Sue said: I am but an angel like your- 
selves. Fear me not. But since ye feared, 
and so deserted your kingdoms, does it 
not prove that ye are not the all highest? 
And do ye not perceive that because ye 
had no All Highest, ye were divided and 
inharmonious? 

Hear, then, that which I say, and con- 
sider my words. I want not your king- 
doms nor anything you have; but that har- 
mony may reign in heaven, I will give unto 
every one of you more than you had, and 
add power unto you also. Since ye behold 
I am come to Hored, the throne of the an- 
cients, perceive ye not that whatsoever ac- 
cordeth with me is of my power also? 
Take, then, your kingdoms and be Gods 
and Goddesses, and I will make you as 
part of one united whole. 

Again, they consulted together, and 
again they answered: Why shall we take 
our kingdoms? Our slaves have deserted 
us; our kingdoms are pillaged of all their 
value. Yea, our slaves have become wan- 
dering spirits, and are making their habit- 
ations with mortals. 

Sue said: What can ye say to these 
wandering spirits that will induce them to 
come away from mortals? 



To which they answered: If we prom- 
ise them provender and clothes, and plenty 
of rest, they will come. But when we put 
them to labor, they will run away, having 
tasted of liberty. 

Sue said: How, then, made ye slaves 
of them in the first place? 

To which they answered: We took 
them in the day their mortal bodies died, 
and they never saw nor knew any other 
place in heaven. So we appropriated them 
to our service dutifully. 

Sue said: Know, then, this is my con- 
clusion. First, that ye shall be made as 
sub-Gods to one confederacy, and your 
kingdoms shall be fair to look upon, and 
well supplied with all things. 

Behold, there are on earth, with the 
barbarians, hosts of familiars and fetals. 
Whoever, then, of you, will go down to 
the earth and bring them away to Hored, 
shall have them for his slaves. And who- 
ever bringeth the greatest number, to him 
will I award the greatest kingdom. And if 
it be that ye can find emissaries to work 
for you in bringing fetals and familiars 
away from the barbarians, then shall such 
labor be accounted to your credit. And ye 
shall station round about in the corporeal 
cities certain angels whose labor shall be 
to receive newborn spirits, on birth blank- 
ets, and bring them to your kingdoms also, 
for they shall be your slaves. 

After that manner spake Sue, and the 
false Gods and Goddesses were highly 
pleased, and they divided themselves into 
certain districts over mortals and for the 
lower heaven, and were at once sent off to 
labor in their own way, and they were 
named sub-Gods. 

Sue said: These sub-Gods have much 
weight with the barbarians, because they 
advise them in war. But, behold, it shall 
come to pass when the sub-Gods have rob- 
bed the barbarians of their familiar spirits 
the I'hin priests will have greater weight 
with them. And the sub-Gods will desire 
to find favor in my sight, and so teach 
their slaves, which will cause them to 
emancipate themselves in time to come. 

CHAPTER III. 

Jehovih spake through Sue, saying: 
Two states have I created open to all 
men, both on earth and in atmospherea, 



8ti 



CYCLE OF SUE 



which are, liberty and bondage. And man 
I made to choose that which he will; but 
that he might not err I send my emanci- 
pated angels to explain these things before- 
hand. Even so are governments ordained 
by My holy ones, wherein ye may judge 
whether a government be of Me or against 
Me. For if it give liberty to all righteous 
works, and for the promotion of knowl- 
edge, providing teachers to the extent of 
the demand, it is of Me. But if the govern- 
ment maketh of itself a self, for which its 
aggrandizement is at the expense of My 
children's liberty, then it is against Me. 

For I have not created a people to be 
to-day as were their forefathers, but pro- 
vided them with perpetual growth in wis- 
dom and virtue; wherefore the rising gen- 
erations shall rebel against that which was 
well and good for their forefathers. All 
My governments understand this, whether 
on earth or in heaven. Whatever govern- 
ment accepteth not this rule, shall go down 
to destruction. For as I have hedged man 
about with sentinels, such as pestilence, 
poverty and hunger, in order to awaken 
him to knowledge and industry, so have I 
hedged in all governments with sentinels, 
such as rebellion, assassinations, war and 
bankruptcy. As pestilence proveth man's 
disobedience to My commandments, so do 
rebellion and anarchy prove the disobedi- 
ence of governments to the progressive 
spirit with which I created man. 

The self God saith: I will make a 
strong government. By armies and cruel 
masters will I bind the subjects in my do- 
minions. And he draweth up a multitude 
of laws, and heaps up books to explain the 
laws, and he says: Behold, how wise I 
am! Behold the great wisdom of my 
judges. Behold the great learning of my 
books. Behold my most perfect laws. Be- 
hold my armies that stand behind all, and 
in great power. But when a ship of fire 
appeareth in heaven, his kingdom is de- 
stroyed like a spider's web. For instead 
of choosing his Creator, Who is strong, he 
erecteth things that were as nothing. 

As thou hast apportioned to the self- 
Gods to take kingdoms, suffer them to 
hedge themselves about with a multitude of 
laws; but thou thyself shall have no laws 
save the rites and ceremonies, which thou 
shalt adorn with music and processions. 



And it shall come to pass that the domin- 
ions of the self-Gods will prosper for a 
season; and they will, for sake of self 
glory, deplete mortals of their familiar 
spirits and fetals. But in time after, their 
subjects will tire of the laws of the self- 
Gods, and hearing that thou hast no laws 
save rites and ceremonies, they will come 
to Hored of their own accord. And thou 
shalt make the nurseries, hospitals, facto- 
ries and places of education, into places 
of delight and recreation. 

Sue called the Council, and his own 
hosts from labor to recreation for one day, 
and the people mingled together rejoicing; 
for with the ethereans with the hosts of 
Sue were many who had been Earth-born, 
many thousands of years before, and their 
assurance of the emancipated heavens 
above had greater weight with the atmos- 
phereans than anything that others could 
say. Then Sue and his hosts visited the 
earth and atmospherea, and returned again 
to Hored. 

And Sue said: Behold, a time cometh, 
in all the atmospherean heavens, when the 
discipline of former days must give way 
to something new. And such a time is now 
in this kingdom. It may be likened to a 
young child that hath been led by the 
hand for a long time, but now hath be- 
come strong of limb so as to walk 
alone. For this purpose hath Earth been 
brought through the fields of Izaracha, 
and my hosts are come with music and 
wisdom. 

Hear then, my decree, O God of Earth, 
and thou shalt be the most blessed of Gods. 
Send thy messengers into all parts of at- 
mospherea, proclaiming a recreation of 
ten days, of music and dancing, and march- 
ing with pageantry and feasting. 

CHAPTER IV. 

When the time of the festival had come, 
there congregated in Hored, besides the 
etherean hosts more than a thousand mill- 
ion souls, to witness and to participate in 
the ceremonies. 

Sue said: Here is wisdom and folly; 
false Gods and their dupes; laziness and 
industry; swiftness and sloth. Yea, here is 
a world worthless before Jehovih. And 
why? Simply for lack of discipline and 
harmony. Every one is for self, and none 



CYCLE OF SUE 



87 



are producers for the general good. Alas, 
they are the same as mortals, but stript of 
flesh. They are of no value to one an- 
other, and consequently of no value to 
themselves. Now will I show thee, O God, 
that these hapless beings, with no joy in 
life nor hope of resurrection, shall become 
a great glory to Jehovih and His kingdoms. 

God said: It is over a thousand years 
since they have been visited by angels from 
the higher heavens. Many of them are 
learned but doubt that there are other 
heavens than the plateaux of the atmos- 
pherea of Earth. Millions and millions of 
them have never seen an etherean. Alas, I 
fear for them. 

Sue said: Fear not, O God. They are 
as mortar in my hands. Neither shall 
there be preaching to them, nor praying 
for them. They are tired of these things. 
But I will found a new light amongst 
them, and it shall speak for us. 

Hear me, then, and with the populace 
I shall be as one that is unknown. Call, 
then, thy es'enaurs, and thy trumpeters 
and harpists, and all the musicians belong- 
ing to thy kingdom and to the kingdoms 
of thy Lords, and let the procession begin. 
For in all public matters, those who are at 
the front, if wise, can lead on forever. 
Be politic, therefore, and shape the popu- 
lace whilst the self-Gods are amazed at 
the immensity of the hosts assembled. 

God did as commanded, and the people 
saw there was a head to the proceedings. 

Sue said: Send thy marshals and dec- 
orators to follow close after the musicians, 
distributing raiment to all who will follow 
in the procession. My etherean hosts are 
advised. They will stand by the way, and 
with marvelous swiftness, provide the rai- 
ment. And all possible extravagant colors 
and fabrics, and hats and ornaments, shall 
be distributed, and gratuitously. My hosts 
shall be arrayed in plain white; and they 
shall march not, but be as servants and 
workmen. And when the atmosphereans 
have played and sung over all the boundar- 
ies of Hored, then shall my etherean hosts 
sing and play and start the dance. 

All these things were done, and from 
the very start to the termination of the 
music there was harmony in every place 
and corner amongst the thousands of mill- 
ions assembled. Nor was there ever so 



extravagantly equipped a multitude in 
Earth's heaven. And so completely capti- 
vated were the people, their enthusiasm 
was boundless. Then came the etherean 
dance, which so far surpassed the ca- 
pacity of the atmosphereans that not one 
of them could join in. Neither could they 
take part in the etherean music. So the 
atmosphereans looked on, confounded by 
the excellence of that which was before 
their eyes. 

Thus ended the first day's proceedings, 
which to describe in full would require a 
large book. So the people were called to 
refreshment. And the ethereans, still 
dressed in white, and as servants and la- 
borers, provided the viands. And so easily 
and with such swiftness did they their 
work, that now for the first time did the 
more learned of atmospherea begin to ob- 
serve them with surprise and wonder. 
Presently inquiries were made as to who 
they were and whence they came. For so 
Jehovih created man, that when of his own 
accord he admireth the excellence of his 
neighbor, he goeth to the extreme in prais- 
ing him. 

So God said: On the morrow shall a 
new entertainment be given, and new rai- 
ment and new viands for the feast. And 
the hosts shouted with great vigor and 
praise. Then the people mingled together 
to converse on all they had witnessed. 

When the next day came the ethereans 
had been divided into groups, and the rites 
of the ancients and the hosts of a'ji in 
Partha were anounced, requiring extrava- 
gant toilets and millions of atmosphereans 
as assistants. So great was their ambition 
to take part that only by promises of some- 
thing in the next rites could the marshals 
make selections. 

Sue, Jehovih's Son, had previously sta- 
tioned signal bells at remote distances from 
one another, and connected them so the 
sounds would answer quickly. And in the 
intervening places, extemporized forests 
and waterfalls were arranged; and near the 
middle space one thousand columns of fire 
were erected. So in the morning of the 
second day, when all these glorious scenes 
were completed, and the ethereans, still 
plain and in white, stationed about, the at- 
mosphereans were more confounded than 
ever. 



88 



CYCLE OF SUE 



First came the birth rites ; then marriage 
rites; then death rites and the first resur- 
rection; then the rites of harmony. And 
the play represented a million of ethereans 
who went to a corporeal world and follow- 
ed it through its life, and to death and res- 
urrection; its darkness and inharmony and 
terrible suffering in atmospherea; ending 
with a tableau of a great sun descending to 
deliver them into everlasting paradise. So 
grand was the spectacle, and so sublime the 
music, and the spoken words, that thfe 
hosts of Hored wept, and laughed and 
shouted and prayed, as if their souls would 
break with joy. 

Thus ended the second day, and so com- 
plete was the glorious work that every 
soul had sworn a solemn oath to forsake 
the earth and lower heaven forever. 

Then God announced for the third day, 
the display of etherean power. And the 
people were so bewildered already that a 
child could have led the most stubborn of 
them all. 

So on the third day the ethereans dis- 
played their power over the elements of 
the atmosphere; making corporeal sub- 
stances and dissolving them at pleasure; 
making light into darkness and darkness 
into light; weaving fabrics and making dia- 
dems and precious stones. Gathering vi- 
ands from the essence of things evaporated 
up from the earth; founding plateau and 
temples in heaven; making ships and 
chains and musical instruments. And last- 
ly, the etherean marshals, with half a mill- 
ion ethereans, turned the winds and sent a 
heavy shower of rain down to the corporeal 
earth. 

And all the while the musicians of the 
hosts of Sue were discoursing music, the 
sweetness and grandeur of which surpassed 
the atmosphereans so far that they were 
as nothing. 

Because of the exhibition of great pow- 
er and wisdom, the third day had changed 
the aspirations of every man and woman in 
the lower heaven. And they were running 
hither and thither, pleading to be taken as 
apprentices or servants, pledging them- 
selves to do everything required of them. 
So it was decided that half of the next day 
should be given to initiating them as real 
beginners in the second resurrection. 



Then God spake to them, saying: I 
have pleaded with you for hundreds of 
years to put away your fine raiment and 
sparkling gems, and to begin adorning 
your souls, so as to become Brides and 
Bridegrooms of the Great Spirit. And you 
would not, but strove continually to adorn 
yourselves, forgetting to labor for those 
beneath you. Behold, now. stand Jehovih's 
Brides and Bridegrooms before you. Are 
they not plain? And are you not decorat- 
ed? 

But millions of voices rose up, saying: 
We will do whatever Thou shalt command, 
O God. 

Then God answered: Hear me, then, 
further: This it is to begin the second 
resurrection; to put away your jewels and 
diadems and ornaments, and above all 
things, to forsake self, and henceforth la- 
bor for others who are beneath you. If 
ye do this in a brotherhood, ye are already 
beginning the second resurrection. Nei- 
ther is there any other road to wisdom and 
power. 

Again the multitude cried out: We will 
do anything; we have faith. 

And God answered them: Suffer ye, 
then, a few to be initiated on to-morrow; 
but be ye patient and of good judgment; 
slow to resolve, but firm forever. 

So, on the fourth day, in the morning, 
behold, more than a hundred million spir- 
its had abandoned their showy raiment and 
stood arrayed in white, devoid of jewels 
and diadems, ready to be initiated and take 
the vows of the second resurrection. And 
accordingly new music was prepared, and 
the procession and ceremonies so arranged 
that the greatest possible glory would be 
manifested. Canopies were stretched over- 
head, and arches and columns on the bor- 
ders of the march, decorated with flowers 
and vines; and amidst these, half conceal- 
ed, were nestled the response singers, who 
were to speak for and with the initiates. 

And the glad and solemn sound of the 
Immortal Voice came upon the souls of 
millions impatient to vow themselves to a 
new life; and God and his hosts welcomed 
them with great joy. So grand and impos- 
ing were the ceremonies, that ere midday, 
another hundred million applied, also robed 
in white. And this was continued on the 
fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, ninth and tenth 



CYCLE OF SUE 



89 



days. And behold, a thousand million an- 
gels had taken the vows of the second res- 
urrection. 

CHAPTER V. 

After this manner were the words of 
the initiation, led by the etherean hosts: 

God on the throne said: Jehovih! Al- 
mighty! Almighty! Boundless! 

Response: How shall I comprehend 
Thee, Thou Mighty One? 

God: Thou higher than All Gods and 
Lords! 

Response: Who moves the universe, 
with power unlimited. 

God: Creator and controller of the cor- 
poreal worlds! 

Response: In Whose hands the ether- 
ean firmament is like a fruitful garden, 
wider than the boundaries of time. 

God: Whose members are all space. 

Response: Whose members are the all 
that is within space, beyond measure. 

God: Thou, O Jehovih! Thou foun- 
tain and terminus of all things! 

Response: Jehovih! Jehovih! Of 
Whom all things are but parts, attuned to 
Thy will! 

God: Thou All Person, O Jehovih! 
Incomprehensible. 

Response: Who speakest in the light. 
Whose Voice is the progress of the uni- 
verse. 

God: Jehovih, Thou all giver. By giv- 
ing, createth. 

Response: What are Thy secrets, O 
Mighy One? O Jehovih, everlasting and 
greater than magnitude. 

God: I see nothing in all the universe 
but Thee! All selfs are but fractions of 
Thyself, O Jehovih! 

Response: Who hath not beholden 
Thee, O Jehovih? Thy Person is in the 
east and west, north and south. 

God: Who hath not heard Thy Voice? 
Who hath not found Thy hand? 

Response: Without Thee, O Jehovih, 
I go not; I move not. I set out to do 
things of myself, and fail utterly. 

God: What is man before Thee, O Je- 
hovih? He setteth up a kingdom and it 
falleth as a house of straw. 

Response: O Jehovih, how I have 
wasted my time! My buildings were light- 



er than chaff! My virtues were but bub- 
bles, and they are bursted and gone! 

God: When will man learn to attune 
himself to Thee, O Jehovih? 

Response: How can I put away my- 
self, O Jehovih? Have I not said: I can- 
not put away mine own judgment? 

God: Man saith: I will not put away 
my judgment. 

Response: Have I not said: To pro- 
tect myself is the first law, and to preserve 
mine own the highest? 

God: Man assumeth to protect him- 
self, because he is without faith in Thee, O 
Jehovih; and to preserve his own which in 
fact is not his. 

And here the Light fell upon the 
throne, and Jehovih spake out of the Light, 
saying: 

I have called Thee, O man, from thy 
youth up! My voice hath never ceased in 
thine ear. Who can come into life without 
me? Who can measure his own footsteps? 
Behold, he treadeth on my ground. Of all 
that he is made, the substance is Mine. 

The kingdoms on the earth, and the 
kingdoms of Gods and Lords in heaven are 
My works. When they have faith in Me, I 
am with them in love, wisdom and power. 
Shall a man butt his head against a wall 
to prove he is greater than his Creator? 
Behold, I came in the ancient days, saying: 
Strive to become one with Me, and Thou 
shalt rejoice that I created thee, Strive to 
set up for thyself, and thy vanity shall in 
time pierce thee as a two-edged sword. 

I made thee, O man, with fondness for 
thy sons and daughters. Of love like Mine 
own I gave thee a part. And as Thou send- 
est to thy wayward son, beseeching him to 
return to thee, so do I bring My messen- 
gers from higher worlds to call thee. And, 
that thou mayest not mistake their higher 
place, I have given them power and wis- 
dom surpassing thine. 

The Voice ceased, and then the initiates 
said: 

Henceforth, I will serve only Thee, O 
Jehovih. For I know Thou wilt appropri- 
ate me wisely, O Jehovih. 

Accordingly, as the stone is hewn and 
polished, so wilt Thou put it in the walls 
of Thy house. 

My labor is to hew and polish and per- 
fect mine own soul forever. 



90 



CYCLE OF SUE 



My soul shall become as a shining star. 
My love like Thy etherean angels. And 
plain my raiment, and clean forever. Nor 
more will I boast, nor speak untruth, for- 
ever. Nor will I talk of myself. Nor criti- 
cise my brethren, for they are Thine, O Je- 
hovih! To do righteous works and lift up 
my fellows shall be my labor henceforth, 
forever. 

Make me strong in Thee, O Jehovih. 
And wise to do Thy will forever. Amen. 

CHAPTER VI. 

So impressed were the angels of at- 
mospherea with the words and music of 
the ceremonies, that the divided kingdoms, 
which were without unity and discipline 
before, were now replaced by extreme sanc- 
tity and decorum. 

Sue said: The false Gods and Lords 
have gone off to build kingdoms of their 
own, and know not what has taken place 
in Hored. Allow them to proceed until 
they have purified the corporeans from fa- 
miliars and fetals; and when they have fin- 
ished, call thou another festival of all these 
people, and also send word to the false 
Gods and Lords who deny Jehovih, the All 
Person, and they will come bringing their 
slaves with them adorned in extravagant 
raiment and jewelry. For they will expect 
by their pageantry, to triumph over all 
other Gods, hoping to carry back with 
them millions of subjects. 

So God did as commanded, and in 
course of time the false Gods and Lords 
stript the barbarians on the earth of their 
familiars and fetals, making slaves of such 
spirits in heaven. And God gave another 
festival and it was greater than the first, 
and there were present about three thou- 
sand million angels. And the false Gods 
and Lords came to the festival, equipped in 
chariots and ships, and with banners and 
flags, and crowns and diadems, and such 
wonderful extravagances, the like of which 
had not been in heaven since the time of 
the flood. And each and every false God 
and Lord endeavored to outdo the others 
in show and parade. The first day of the 
festival they neither won applause nor cen- 
sure. The second day they ceased to at- 
tract attention, for the thrift, purity and 
wisdom manifested in the countless mill- 



ions of the second resurrection caused even 
children to receive more praise than the 
false Gods and Lords with all their glitter 
and show. On the third day one-half of the 
false Gods and false Lords cast aside their 
adornments and appeared in plain white, 
pleading to be initiated into the mysteries 
of the second resurrection. And on the 
day following the rest of them came also, 
seeking like admission. 

And the Light of Jehovih spake through 
God on the throne, saying: 

Think O ye Gods and Lords, what are 
you doing? Yesterday you asked for king- 
doms, desiring to be rulers over your fel- 
lows. And ye obtained your desires, be- 
coming Gods and Lords over millions. 
And these became your dutiful subjects,, 
and ye adorned your thrones and your per- 
sons in great splendor. 

Behold I gave a festival, and ye came as 
living witnesses of what self-made Gods 
and Lords could accomplish. And your 
dutiful subjects came with you to attest 
their loyalty and good faith in your wisdom 
and power. 

Now you have cast aside your crowns 
and high estate, praying to become work- 
ers among the host of men and women. 
Are you not mad? And are you not mak- 
ing yourselves the destroyers of your own 
subjects? For behold, because of your ab- 
juration of pomp and glory, all your sub- 
jects are cast aside in ignorance and misery. 

With one voice the self-Gods and Lords 
answered: Alas, O God, what shall we do? 
We can give away our crowns, raiment and 
our jewels, and our thrones and kingdoms. 
But we cannot give away our subjects; 
they will not go. We have bound them to 
us; and we are bound to them because we 
accepted them. What shall we do, O God. 
The burden is more than we can bear. 

God said: Be not disconsolate. You 
have done a great work. You have res- 
cued millions of familiars and fetals. And 
even before you asked to be initiated into 
the second resurrection most of your sub- 
jects had already deserted you. Hear the 
judgment of your Creator, which is that 
when all your subjects and fetals are risen 
in wisdom and virtue and good works, so 
as to take the second resurrection, shall you 
be promoted. For only until then can ye 
have freedom of soul. 



CYCLE OF SUE 



91 



The Voice ceased, and the self Gods 
and Lords answered: Thou are just, O 
Jehovih. We will go to work amongst 
our poor and ignorant subjects, and make 
them comprehend Thy wisdom, power and 
justice. 

For ten days the festival lasted. Thus 
were first established rites and ceremonies 
in the lower heaven as a power to work 
wisdom and virtue. And after that time 
music, marchinsr and dancing were included 
in all ceremonies by the Gods and Lords of 
heaven. 

CHAPTER VII. 

In the fifth year of Sue he dispatched 
swift messengers to Opnetevoc, in etherea, 
saying: Thus saith Sue, God of two ether- 
ean worlds: Behold, I am sojourning on 
Earth, and with the God of Earth and 
his Lords, have prepared one thousand 
million Brides and Bridegrooms for Jeho- 
vih's etherean harvest. Greeting to Nista, 
of Ho and Tow'en, Goddess; in the name 
of Jehovih, send an airavagna and com- 
plete the resurrection of the Father's 
Brides and Bridegrooms. 

And the Goddess Nista, provided an 
airavagna, an etherean ship, resolving to 
come as commander in chief. Sue advised 
God, saying: Make thou of this matter a 
great testimony in thy heaven. Send, 
therefore, thy messengers into all parts, 
and to thy Lords on the earth, inviting all 
people to be present to witness the ascent 
of Jehovih's Brides and Bridegrooms. 

God did as commanded, and on the day 
of the appearance of Nista, daughter of Je- 
hovih, in her sun-ship, in the firmament, 
there were assembled in Hored countless 
millions of souls inspired of Jehovih. Great 
was the manifestation of delight when the 
sun-ship came in full view, descending like 
a world of fire. And when she passed Chin- 
vat and was fully within Earth's vortex, 
the enthusiasm of the people knew no 
bounds. They sang, and prayed and danc- 
ed and clapped their hands, as if mad with 
delight. Meantime the Brides and Bride- 
grooms had been arrayed in etherean white, 
and were now saluting those whom they 
were soon to leave. Quietly the etherean 
hosts filled their part in the great play of 
the immortal resurrection. 



Nearer and nearer came Nista in her 
sun-ship, slowly turning and descending, 
with ten thousand curtains suspended and 
waving, and ten times ten thousand ban- 
ners and flags waving. And then slowly 
down, lower and lower, till the airavagna 
rested on the plateau of Hored, to the 
south of the Temple of Jehovih. Gussitivi, 
marshaless to the throne of Sue, in Izara- 
cha, with ten thousand deputies, went for- 
ward, and with open arms received Nista, 
saluting her with the sign of the star and 
square, having been warm friends for two 
hundred thousand years in the plains of 
Oayad, in the etherean es'tu of Hi'dan. 

The es'enaurs of both hosts were chant- 
ing, and the angels of the airavagna com- 
ing forth in hundreds of thousands, to be 
saluted by the previously trained Brides 
and Bridegrooms of Jehovih, and by the 
hosts of Sue, the etherean laborers. And 
when Nista came up to the throne, God 
and Sue rose up amidst the light that was 
now fast gathering as a mantle of brilliant 
fire over the place of council. 

Sue said: All hail, O Nista, Jehovih's 
Daughter! God said: In Jehovih's name, 
welcome, O Nista. To which Nista an- 
swered: By the wisdom and power of Je- 
hovih, O my beloved. 

And Sue and God parted, and Nista as- 
cended and sat in the midst of the throne. 
After the ceremonies of salutation Nista 
said: Let the Brides and Bridegrooms of 
Jehovih approach the throne of God. 

The marshals then ushered the thousand 
million to their places, and the swift mes- 
sengers bounded them on all sides, so that 
the responses should be uniform and as if 
spoken by one person. And Nista spake 
from the throne, and the Brides and Bride- 
grooms responded in the usual form, and 
then took the necessary vows and renunci- 
ations of the earth and lower heaven, ac- 
cording to Jehovih's commandment. When 
the ceremonies were finished God proclaim- 
ed one day of recreation, which was partici- 
pated in joyously by four thousand million 
souls. 

So, on the next day, Nista and her 
hosts, with the thousand million Brides 
and Bridegrooms, entered the airavagna 
amidst the cheers and weepings of mill- 
ions of atmosphereans, who had never wit- 
nessed so grand a spectacle. 



92 



CYCLE OF SUE 



And then Nista, by the power of Jeho- 
vih, set her ship in motion, raised it up 
from the lower heaven; moved it upward 
by her command, saying: Arise! Arise! 
Airavagna. Embrace thou the realms of 
great Jehovih! The es'enaurs and trumpet- 
ers were singing and playing; and those 
ascending threw down flowers and per- 
fumes as pleasant remembrances to the 
countless millions below. And soon the 
airavagna disappeared in high heaven. 

And this, then, is what followed Sue's 
ministration: When the end of dawn had 
come, that is, the six years, he delivered 
God and his Lords and another thousand 
million Brides and Bridegrooms, taking 
them into the borders of Izaracha, where 



were assigned the a'ji'an fields of Rus'tsoo 
with twelve etherean worlds. 

And Sue left T-hi, as the anointed God 
of the lower heaven for the next four hun- 
dred years. And God (T-hi) anointed 
Lords for the divisions of the earth. And 
Earth and its heavens prospered, so that in 
the dan following there were raised up two 
thousand million Brides and Bridegrooms. 

From this time on there was a decrease 
in the etherean harvests for two thousand 
years, after which time there came great 
darkness on Earth and the heavens be- 
longing to it; and self Gods filled all at- 
mospherea, so that men and angels knew 
not whether there was a true God or Lord 
in all the universe. 




LORDS' RECORD FOR THE CYCLE OK SUE 



CHAPTER I. 

I, the Lord, a one time mortal, with 
my holy angels who had sprung from 
Earth in former times, walked with man 
to keep him upright. By command of the 
Lord, the angels watched over man, oft- 
times unknowingly to himself, in all good 
works and industry. By constant changes 
of watch the angels relieved one another 
daily. And in no time did the angels 
leave the Thins alone and without the light 
of heaven. And wheresoever the I'hins 
went the angels went also, and the angels 
often took on sar'gis, and were seen by 
man, and man talked with them face to 
face. And the angels told man what was 
good for him, showing him the way of 
righteousness. And man depended on the 
Lord and his angels for all things helpful 
to his understanding. 

Now when Earth was inhabited in 
many places, and there were thousands of 
cities and villages, the Lord said unto 
man: 

Behold, thou hast made the earth the 
joy of the Lord, and now I give it into thy 
keeping. 

And man answered: It is well. I can 
keep the earth, and I shall rejoice thereon 
because it is the gift of the Lord. 

The Lord said: If I stay with thee, day 
and night forever, thou wilt not put forth 
thine own power and judgment. 
Man said: Go thy way, O Lord. 
Then the Lord withdrew a while, taking 
his angels with him. 

Now in those days there were ground 
people dwelling in the wilderness, who had 
not the light of heaven in them, neither 
could they be made to understand. As one 
may discourse to an ox, and it heedeth not; 
so was speech to the people of darkness. 
Nevertheless in winter, when food was 
scarce, the ground people came to the 
cities of the I'hins, beseeching for food. 
And the I'hins, remembering the com- 
mandments of the Lord, went out unto 
them giving them food. Now, behold, the 
chosen were tempted by the people of 



darkness, and a new race was born on the 
earth, and they were called I'huans. These 
I'huans were copper colored and were ca- 
pable of speech. 

When the Lord beheld what had hap- 
pened, he called to the I'hins, saying: O 
ye that could dispense with the Lord. Gave 
I not unto you the mark of circumcision as 
a limit to the line of my chosen? Hear 
me now in my prophecy: The I'huan shall 
be taught the name of Jehovih, the Great 
Spirit, and the plans of Earth and heaven. 
And the I'huan shall inhabit the whole 
earth in time to come; and he shall have 
dominion over everything on earth. And 
in time to come the I'hin race shall disap- 
pear from the earth. 

The I'hins inquired of the Lord when 
these things should come to pass. The 
Lord said: According to the cycles some 
twenty-one thousand years. 

The Lord said: From this time forth 
the I'hins shall not mingle with any other 
people on the face of the earth. This is 
my commandment. And whosoever vio- 
lates my word shall be cast out of my cit- 
ies, and go and dwell with the barbarians. 
Inasmuch as the I'huans are your heirs, 
and are capable of everlasting life, ye shall 
be unto them the light of my kingdoms; 
teaching them peace, righteousness and 
mercy. But ye shall in no case allow them 
to live in your cities. Neither shall you 
raise a hand to do them harm. But if they 
come upon you in multitudes to take your 
stores, then shall ye depart out of that city, 
leaving the I'huans to take the goods and 
food for themselves. For you shall be as 
an example of non-resistance for the sake 
of establishing the love of the Lord in 
them. 

CHAPTER II. 

The Lord foresaw that the I'huans 
should be separated from the Druks, oth- 
erwise Yaks would again be born into the 
world. And he said unto the I'hins: Be- 
hold, the I'huans cannot hear the voice of 
the Lord. Therefore, go ye unto them, 
saying: Thus saith the Lord: If ye min- 



94 



CYCLE OF SUE 



LORDS' RECORD 



gle with the Druks your seed shall not in- 
herit everlasting life, but go down in dark- 
ness. 

And the I'hins went and told the I'hu- 
ans the words of the Lord. But many of 
the I'huans broke the commandment. And, 
indeed, Yaks were again born into the 
world. 

The I'hins said to one another: Are 
not these like those of the legends of old, 
who were made eunuchs and servants? 

The I'huans inquired the meaning; and 
when they were told they made a law unto 
themselves, making servants of both Yaks 
and the ground people wherever they came 
upon them. 

The I'hins feared for the judgments of 
the Lord, and they called out to him for a 
remedy. 

And the Lord answered them, saying: 
Because of the enmity betwixt these two 
races, behold they will not marry. Suffer 
ye the I'huans to do in their own way. 
For of what profit is it to bring forth heirs 
that cannot inherit my exalted heavens? 
Because the tribes of darkness cannot be 
made to understand, behold, their souls go 
out of being. 

So it came to pass that the I'huans 
made eunuchs of both sexes of the tribes 
of darkness, and they made slaves of them 
also. 

The Lord said: The I'huans shall have 
laws of their own. Let my chosen go unto 
them and make laws for them, saying: 

Thus saith the Lord: 

The I'huans shall be guardians over the 
I'hins, the sacred people; and through the 
I'hins will I bless the I'huans and make 
them mighty. Since it is not lawful for the 
I'hins to kill beast, nor bird, nor serpent; 
behold, their cities and mounds are invaded 
by all manner of evil beasts and serpents. 
The I'huans shall slay all such. And they 
shall guard around about the cities and 
mounds, where my chosen abide. 



Hear ye, then, the law of the Lord be- 
twixe the I'huans one with another: 

Whoso doeth an injury to his neighbor 
or to a stranger, the same shall be done 
unto him. 

Whoso taketh from another, shall return 
two-fold. 

Whoso killeth a man or woman, or 
child, shall be put to death. 

If a man marries his sister or mother, 
they shall suffer death together. 

Whoso oppresseth another shall be cast 
out of the tribe of his people. 

He that blasphemeth the Great Spirit 
shall be put to death. 

He that respecteth not the time of wo- 
man shall be put to death. 

The fields have I given to the I'hins, 
but the forest and wilderness have I, the 
Lord, given unto the I'huans. 

The I'huans learned the laws and obey- 
ed them; and they looked upon the I'hins 
as a sacred people, doing them no harm. 
The I'huans were a prolific people; four 
times more prolific that the I'hins, or the 
ground people. And they spread rapidly 
over the earth, in all the regions where the 
earth brought forth fruit and roots, flesh 
and fish. 

The I'huans were carnivorous, but the 
I'hins ate neither flesh nor fish. 

The I'hins dwelt in both the warm and 
the cold countries, for they clothed them- 
selves and built habitations. But the 
I'huans wore only a covering about the 
loins; neither built they any habitations; 
and they roved about far and near. 

For two thousand years, the I'huans 
prospered, and they became mighty in 
many countries. And in course of time 
they began to war upon one another. And 
for hundreds of years they descended lower 
and lower in darkness. 

And they obeyed no longer the com- 
mandments of the Lord, and mingled with 
the ground people, bringing forth heirs of 
darkness. 




Cycle ok Apollo 



CHAPTER I. 

Apollo, Son of Jehovih, resident of Pit- 
mus in etherea, and God of Sufad, Donga 
and Tah, in the south province of Bum, 
Orian Chief, Controller of Vortices, said: 

I, Apollo, Earth born of the continent 
of Pan, submerged by Aph, the Orian 
Chief, by Jehovih's command, proclaim in 
the name of Jehovih, Creator of Worlds, 
peace and wisdom unto all nations and 
tribes of men. 

Jehovih's Voice came to me in the eth- 
erean firmament, place of Pitmus, saying: 
Apollo, My Son, Thou God of Sufad, 
Donga and of Tah, behold the red star, 
Earth, she cometh through thy domin- 
ions. Go thou to her with thy hosts a suf- 
ficient number and give her a new God 
and call him Apollo. For neither men nor 
angels of the red star comprehend the har- 
mony of My works, and because of the in- 
harmony in their own souls they deny Me. 
They know no higher heaven. Behold, they 
have mutinied against My God and Lords. 
They have rejected My prof erred wisdom. 
Their delight is in war and deeds of vio- 
lence. As men on earth gather round to 
witness beasts in battle, so gather these 
countless millions of spirits to witness the 
kingdoms of mortals in war, fire and plun- 
der, and by their presence urge men to 
cruelty and cunning horrors. 

The false Gods and Lords have said: 
It is well that there be war and destruction. 
Otherwise, the earth would become too 
full; for they saw not the higher heavens. 
Their arguments were framed in a dark 
corner. And because of their evil inspira- 
tion mortals have the same philosophy and 
say: War is justifiable lest the earth be- 
come too full. For these dark angels shut 
out from mortals the higher light of faith 
in Me, thus justifying themselves in 
war and the slaying of those whom I cre- 
ated alive, and because they of heaven are 
given to deeds of darkness, their sins react 
on mortals, making druks out of men and 
women. Go, thou, My Son, and make 



them idolaters of harmony, symmetry and 
music, that they may become organically 
attuned from the time of their birth. 

I answered: I remember Earth, O Jeho- 
vih, men and women with long hair, and 
hands with claw nails, fierce and warlike; 
whose eyes were like a lion's, with mouth 
wide and falling open like a dog that is 
tired. I perceive thy wisdom, O Jehovih. 

So I called together a hundred million 
of Jehovih's sons and daughters, and told 
them what had been said, and they an- 
swered: We have examined the records 
of the red star since the time of Wan, and 
we perceive that the time has come for thy 
labor. 

And I commanded them to send an oni'- 
yah to the heavens of Earth and deliver 
her God and Lords and all persons who 
were capable of the second resurrection, 
and say ye to God and his Lords: Thus 
saith Apollo, son of Jehovih: Greeting in 
the name of the Father, and love unto you 
all. For your glorious work I have as- 
signed seven teres in Donga, where is pre- 
pared a place of rest and comfort. Thither 
gather your hosts. Earth and her 
heavens shall be left in darkness for thirty 
of her days, having neither God nor Lords. 

So my hosts departed for Earth in 
an etherean ship of fire led by Tu'ain, God- 
dess of Proe'king, place of great learning 
in the etherean mountains of Hore-tanad, 
and they delivered my message, and Earth 
was without a God or Lords for thirty 
days. 

And the Voice of Jehovih came to me, 
saying: The stories of Sue and his mighty 
resurrections, and of the Gods and God- 
desses who sang and danced before the at- 
mosphereans, are still preserved to mortals 
and angels of Earth. The people of the 
red star have become rich in rites and cere- 
monies, and prefer the, swift-footed to the 
slow, the nimble to the clumsy. The loo'is 
have well laid out the road to thy success. 

When the time came, I departed, and 
that all things should express the labor Je- 
hovih had given me, my oni'yah excelled in 



96 



CYCLE OF APOLLO 



beauty all other etherean vessels that had 
ever yet descended to Earth. I still re- 
membered my native star with well treas- 
ured pride. And why shall I not be proud 
of my native star, and hold up my head in 
etherea where I have neighbors who 
sprang from other star worlds? Shall a 
man forget his love because he is a God? 
When I was a mortal I loved my neigh- 
bors. When I entered the second resur- 
rection I loved all the people of Earth; 
and when I rose to etherea, my love ex- 
panded to a thousand worlds; but of all 
places how can I make Earth and her 
heavens second in the love of my soul? 

So from Thy etherean realms, O Jeho- 
vih, wherein for fifty thousand years Thy 
Gods and Goddesses had trained me in the 
descipline of Thy etherean heavens, I came 
down to the red star where Thou first 
quickened me into being, that I might ful- 
fill Thy mandates. Thy hand took me up; 
Thy hand sent me down. How shall I 
comprehend Thy magnitude, O Jehovih? 
What is the journey of a God before Thee? 
We build a ship for a hundred million, and 
are vain of its size and beauty, but when we 
launch out into Thy etherean realms, we 
fain would hide our faces in shame of our 
vanity. We sail through a thousand of 
Thy crystal worlds, and talk of great dis- 
tances, but the mirror of Thy boundless 
creation lieth still before us. We recall 
the red star, our native home, a single gem 
amidst the countless millions Thou hast 
cast into the universe, and we are speech- 
less because of Thy awful extent. As a 
mortal goeth into a dark cavern where the 
air is damp, so came my hosts, O Jehovih, 
into the vortex of Earth, the dull at- 
mosphere. 

CHAPTER II. 

Jehovih's Voice came to me, saying: Go 
around Earth with thy oni'yah, My Son, 
stir up the atmosphereans; which I did, 
saying: 

I, Apollo, once a mortal, proclaim: 
First, wisdom, peace and patience unto all 
men, and comprehensive judgment whereof 
I speak. Second, to perceive the reason of 
things as to what has been and what is to 
come. The Great Spirit is all harmony, 
abounding in time and in worlds. As one 
may assert that ripe fruit is nearer perfec- 



tion than that which is green, which is self 
evii lent, so he who asserteth that harmony 
is more to the order of Jehovih than that 
which is ill-formed and out of tune, hath 
little reason to prove his assertion before 
a wise man. Since, then, man perceiveth 
thai words at best are but slow and coarse 
repi esentations of the soul's conception of 
things, how much further lieth a God's 
wisdom beyond the reach of mortal un- 
derstanding. Remember, O man, that 
could thou in a moment recollect all thou 
had ever learned, thou would be wise in- 
deed. Wert thou in tune with thyself such 
would be thy wisdom. To become attuned 
first with thyself, then with thy immediate 
sun oundings, and then with Jehovih, so 
that thou can act, move and comprehend 
harmoniously, is to become one with the 
All One, which condition awaiteth all men, 
and is called in high heaven, Nirvana, be- 
cause to him that hath attained it, things 
past and things to come are as an open 
book. 

Marvel not, O man, that the Gods re- 
veal the words and signs of things long 
since perished corporeally. The proofs he 
could give thou could not understand, for 
the basis of spiritual entity lies not within 
the measure of the corporeal senses. Nev- 
ertheless Jehovih has given thee compari- 
sons. A portrait of a man showeth his 
looks even after his corporeal body is per- 
ished; and yet the picture is but a repre- 
sentative. To the spirit, the corporeal body 
is but a representative, being a manifested 
production of spirit. 

Let him who desires to comprehend Je- 
hovih describe the all highest constantly. 
To him that desires to comprehend the eth- 
erean worlds, the homes of spirits long ris- 
en in Nirvana, let him describe them. Fear 
not, O man, that thou shalt err. All the 
imagery thou canst devise is surpassed mill- 
ions of times in the magnitude of Jehovih's 
kingdoms. Until thou canst shoot an ar- 
row without striking the air, fear not for 
thy weak thoughts shooting amiss in Je- 
hovih's worlds. 

I, Apollo, proclaim against all vanity 
and self conceit in the souls of men, where- 
in every cycle asserteth itself wise and great 
and learned, and the ancients fools. For the 
evidence of wisdom lieth not in learning 
one thing only, but in the adaptation of 



CYCLE OF APOLLO 



97 



man to Jehovih and His works, in which 
measure the modern and the ancient stand 
not on their judgment in the matter, but by 
Jehovih's. For if the ancient was not per- 
fect in his place, neither art thou, O man, 
in thine. Jehovih revealed to the ancients 
that which was profitable to the soul of 
man in that day, and that which is profita- 
ble to the soul of man of this day is re- 
vealed to him now. 

Wherefore I, Jehovih's Son, am come 
to fulfill my labor even as all men in time 
must complete that which has been as- 
signed to them. Turn thine eyes inward, O 
man, and look at the spirit of things. Make 
thyself as a God looking down on Earth 
where man has been quickened into life 
and attained to strength and learning. Be- 
hold his temples and palaces; his work in 
stone and iron, gold and silver; his knowl- 
edge of the sun, moon and stars; with 
clothes for the body and shoes for the feet; 
with great generals and armies of soldiers. 
Is man civilized and war abounding? Who 
has measured the inhabitants on the earth 
and found them pure and wise? Do more 
people live on the land in peace and happi- 
ness than in cycles past? Because thou art 
different in many excellencies, thou shalt 
also remember that many great inventions 
are forgotten. The world has been peopled 
over and laid desolate many times. 

Hear me, O man of earth and ye angels 
of heaven. I proclaim harmony, symmetry 
and music. One man heareth music, and 
he crieth out: A tune, a tune. Another 
man heareth music, but he cannot discern, 
and he crieth out: A noise, a hideous 
noise. The one hath an ear for music, and 
the other has not. The one is one with 
music; the other, being discordant with 
himself, declares there is no tune, but only 
noise. Who has not beholden jehovih, the 
All Person? Who is it that crieth out, I 
behold Him not? There is no harmony, 
no symmetry, no music, no complete 
whole? Is not the judgment of the per- 
ceiver higher than he who perceiveth not? 
If the lack of an ear for music maketh a 
man dumb to a tune, is it not the lack of 
spiritual harmony that causes man to per- 
ceive not the everlasting presence of Je- 
hovih, the All Person? Can a man learn 
to sing who hears not the harmony of a 
tune? How much less, then, can a mortal 



or the spirits of the dead harmonize with 
the eternal whole if they perceive Him 
not? 

Hear me, O men and angels. From my 
words learn to be wise and deep perceiving, 
He who standeth in darkness seeth not. 
The time of Jehovih none can comprehend. 
Before my days, time was no nearer the be- 
ginning of the universe ,than now. There 
were men who believed that with death, all 
would be ended to every man. And Jeho- 
vih sent angels to prove him in his folly, 
and though they saw them and talked with 
them face to face, many would not believe. 
And in the lower, heaven they were the 
same. They would not believe in a higher 
heaven. And though ethereans came to 
them to prove them in their folly, and 
talked with them face to face, yet many 
would not believe. I have searched the 
disbelievers to understand their souls, and 
I have found they were begotten in inhar- 
mony. They pride themselves in their wis- 
dom, but that which they called wisdom 
was as a serpent in the soul. 

He who setteth himself up against the 
king, what is he? He who setteth himself 
up against the All Person, what is he? 
Where is the fruit he has brought to mar- 
ket? His speech is cunning in denial; his 
arguments for liberty the bait of hada. He 
crieth out in justification of his mutiny: 
Liberty, liberty! But he leadeth to inhar- 
mony and darkness. After that he rusheth 
to the front, crying out: Follow me! Fol- 
low me! I will lead to truth and light. 
And he himself becometh a God, but in 
falsehood, even as by falsehood he denieth 
the true God. 

A line lieth betwixt the man who hath 
too much opinion of his own, and he who 
hath no opinion at all. One is to be pitied, 
the other censured. Which, judge ye, do the 
Gods pity of these two, and which censure? 
Pity ye him who hath too much opinion of 
his own; for of all men he standeth the 
furthest from Jehovih. But the wise man 
and wise angel follow the median line be- 
twixt the two. 

CHAPTER III. 

Think not, O man, that the Gods de- 
liver the nations of the world in a day, or 
by miracles. They first inspire the nations 
with rites and ceremonies. Then come and 



98 



CYCLE OF APOLLO 



appropriate the rites and ceremonies. The 
hosts of high heaven, unseen by mortals, 
stir up the whole world, and in one gener- 
ation behold a new race is born, and man 
becomes unfitted for war and deeds of vio- 
lence. The self Gods turn from the peace- 
ful earth to find their old petty kingdoms 
broken down and gone. 

Be wise, O man, heed the voice of thy 
brother, God of three worlds. Man and 
woman and pro-creators. Whom they be- 
get are theirs not for a day, but forever, 
saith Jehovih. Take heed, O man, that thy 
offspring may be such as will glorify Jeho- 
vih and not bring bondage upon thee to 
drag thee down. 

Hear me, O man, the angels of heaven 
who are good, labor for those beneath 
them. This is their work day and night. 
Think not that they go away to idleness 
forever. To the etherean industry becom- 
eth rest. To those who have attained to 
be Gods, there is a spontaneous growth 
forever. Remember this and be wise. To 
the atmospherean and mortals, idleness 
leadeth downward forever; remember this 
also. The rose and the lily are perfect in 
their order. Being one with Jehovih they 
painted not themselves. Let thy soul be- 
come one with Thy creator; find thou the 
symmetry of flesh, the symmetry of spirit, 
the harmony of music, and consider wisely 
thy behavior. The star of Jehovih is within 
thy soul. Feed it, O man, and thou, O an- 
gel of heaven, and it will grow to be a God. 
Rob it, and thou shalt remain nothing. It 
is weak and dim in the vain; but in him 
who forgetteh himself in laboring for oth- 
ers, it is bright and of great power. 

CHAPTER IV. 

Jehovih spake to me, saying: Hear 
your Creator, O My Son. Thou shalt 
build a new kingdom in heaven and call it 
Gau; and it shall be thy judgment seat with 
a council of one hundred thousand men 
and women. Thou shalt appoint ten thou- 
sand Lords, and each of the Lords 
shall be named Apollo, and Earth and 
the inhabitants thereof shall be divided 
amongst them. And they shall inspire 
man to make images of stone and wood, 
and the images shall have short arms and 
long legs, and nails instead of claws on 



the fingers, and well formed mouths for 
motion of the cheeks. 

And the loo'is who have been prepar- 
ing mortals by birth, shall lead the angels 
around amongst mortals, finding the most 
comely formed men and women and young 
children, and when they have thus chosen 
them, they shall. report the matter to the 
Lords, and thou shalt send ethereans to 
such mortals and they shall be aroused by 
signs and miracles; and it shall be proven 
to the kings and queens and governors of 
all the nations of the earth that comeliness 
of form are pleasant in My sight. And 
those who are thus selected shall sing and 
dance by entrancement so that kings and 
queens shall be overcome by the achieve- 
ment. For I will make man wish to beauti- 
fy himself, and in so doing learn to per- 
ceive beauty and harmony in My works. 

So I founded Gau where Hored had 
been, extending over Jaffeth, Shem and 
Ham, and the rest of my atmospherean 
heavens I divided amongst my ten thou- 
sand Lords and Lordesses, whom I select- 
ed and ordained in the manner of the an- 
cients. And many of the ten thousand 
kingdoms of the Lords of Earth had 
their thrones within the corporeal tem- 
ples of worship where the hosts of 
angels assembled in council on the affairs 
of mortals, and to advise with them 
through the prophets. 

And they inspired kings and queens to 
erect images in the temples, and the images 
were given a name signifying harmony, 
symmetry and music, and the names varied 
in many countries because of the languages 
of the people, and mortals were taught by 
the inspiration of angels to make the im- 
ages. According to the perfection thereof 
were they favored by Jehovih, and the sign 
of Jehovih's approval was manifested in 
the time of the sacred dance given by the 
su'is, which was, if the whirling dance caus- 
ed many women to fall down by enchant- 
ment, then Jehovih was pleased. The -en- 
chantment of the women was what the 
Lords desired, for the impression of the 
soul of woman shapeth the unborn child. 

And when kings and queens came to 
consult on matters of war or personal ag- 
grandizement, my hosts answered them not 
to their own profit, but with the Voice of 
Jehovih. Neither was there a temple in all 



CYCLE OF APOLLO 



99 



the world for consulting the spirits but was 
controlled by my etherean hosts. And the 
false Gods and Lords having lost all inter- 
est in mortal affairs, became earnest work- 
ers to establish themselves in harmony, 
symmetry and music; and at the end of the 
time of dan there was not one false God 
or Lord in atmospherea. 

CHAPTER V. 

Jehovih spake in the light of the throne 
of Gau, saying: My Son, thou hast set the 
temples of earth wisely, and thy ten thou- 
sand Lords have the Voice of Thy Creator. 
Behold this dawn of dan has but five years 
and two hundred days. The five years are 
already gone. Call together thy etherean 
hosts, and they shall report to thee who 
shall be successors to God and thy Lords. 
And I answered: Thy will be done. 

So I sent messengers to God in 
Donga, and around about the world 
repeating what Jehovih had command- 
ed, and I said: When the time of 
dawn is complete, my hosts shall assemble 
in Gau, from whence we will ascend to our 
etherean worlds. Invite all the the people 
in all the kingdoms of atmospherea to be 
present. 

So the proper officers went to the li- 
braries of atmospherea to learn who of all 
the etherean hosts should be selected to re- 
main as God, and who as Lords, for the 
next four hundred years. And in twenty 
days the examiners returned and came be- 
fore the throne of God and the Council of 
Gau, whither God and his hosts had re- 
turned. Zadakawaski, chief speaker, said: 
We have found that Gur is the highest and 
most perfect of all the hosts of heaven, to 
be anointed God for the next four hundred 
years. 

Apollo said: I remember Gur from Ma- 
gel in Siftus in etherea, God of Rheata and 
a'ji seventy-two. Let the marshals go to 
him and acquaint him with Jehovih's de- 
cree. 

So ten thousand marshals prepared an 
otevan adorned with one thousand pillars 
of light, and with ten thousand musicians 
escorted Gur, and those who had been se- 
lected to be his Lords, before the throne 
of God. 

God said: I salute the, O Gur, in the 
name of Jehovih. And Apollo stretched 



forth his hand and Gur came and shook 
hands with him, standing by the throne. 

Gur said: That I have lived to see this 
day, O Jehovih, I am blessed indeed. Thy 
will be done. 

Apollo said: To be a weak man is 
nothing. To be a weak king is nothing. 
To be a weak God is nothing. But to be 
strong in Jehovih furnisheth food for the 
kingdoms of men and angels. Think not, 
O God and Lords, that to be a good God 
or Lord is easy. He who ruleth in heaven- 
ly matters must forever furnish food for the 
souls of angels and men. I will give you 
a parable suitable for Gods and Lords. A 
multitude go into a forest. One man go- 
eth a little before the rest, and he calls: 
Here, here. Then he goes a little farther 
and calls: Here, here; and the multitude 
follow. If the leader go too fast for the 
multitude, they will not follow. And if he 
does not go fast enough they cannot fol- 
low. The glory of the emancipated hea- 
vens in etherea lies in the development of 
every soul to ripeness and bloom, with 
none too fast and none too slow, but all 
as one with Jehovih. 

Think not that great thunders and terri- 
ble strategems can govern heaven and earth 
righteously. For as one man in an army 
may cause a panic, or one brave man's up- 
raised hand lead a nation on to victory, so 
can ye, O God and Lords, by wisdom in 
the smallest of Jehovih's plans, rule over 
Earth and heaven for the glory of His ever- 
lasting kingdoms. 

CHAPTER VI. 

God said: Behold, the dawn of dan is 
within thirty days to end, and all who 
choose, and are prepared for the third res- 
urrection, shall be taken up to etherea. 
Besides, thyself, O Gur, there are two 
hundred thousand ethereans who have vol- 
unteered to remain another four hundred 
years in these atmospherean heavens, and 
on earth. From them thou shalt select ten 
thousand Lords and bestow them with 
kingdoms over mortals. 

To thee, O Gur, I bequeath two thou- 
sand million atmosphereans who have been 
initiated in the second resurrection. And 
of the first resurrection, two hundred and 
fifty million; and of fetals three hundred 
million; and besides these, the inhabitants 



L.fC 



100 



CYCLE OF APOLLO 



of the earth (men, women and children), 
seven hundred million. 

God ceased speaking, and Gur said: Thy 
will be done, O Jehovih. 

Then the es'enaurs sang, and the trum- 
peters played the March of Apollo, Jeho- 
vih's Son. Presently, the marshals and 
messengers filed before the throne; and a 
light of golden fire came down from the 
throne of Helmatia, Orian arc of Tanaya, 
in etherea, and it fell about the throne of 
God, and many could not look thereon be- 
cause of the brilliancy. 

God raised up, and Apollo by his side. 
God said: I stretch forth my hand untu 
thee, O Jehovih. Behold, Thy Son Gur, 
God of Ra'yatuf, in etherea, an Earth-born, 
forty thousand years inhabitant of Thy 
emancipated realms. By Thy power, and 
in Thy name, O Jehovih, I proclaim him 
God of Earth. Be with him, O Father, that 
he may add unto Thy glory forever. Amen. 

God took off the triangle, and hung it 
on Gur's neck, saying: I now bestow thee 
with the heirloom of the Gods of the red 
star, the triangle of the ancients. And that 
thou mayest be still further honored, Apol- 
lo shall weave a crown for thy head. 

Apollo walked to the left and raised 
his hand upward, saying: Incomprehensi- 
ble All Light, weave me a crown for Thy 
Son, God of Earth. 

And whilst he spake there came from 
unseen space a flame of yellow fire and 
lodged on his hand. He turned it once 
round, and a crown with sparkling gems 
stood upon his fingers' ends, and he placed 
it on Gur's head. And Gur went and sat 
in the midst of the throne, saying: Throne 
of Thy throne, O Jehovih. All things are 
Thine. This shall be my resting place to 
do Thy will. 

When the new God was crowned the 
multitude of a thousand million applauded 
with great joy. 

When all was quiet, God rose up from 
the throne, saying to Apollo and to him 
who had been God: In Jehovih's name, 
come and honor my throne. Accordingly, 
they both sat down on the right hand of 
God. 

God said: In thirty days the dawn of 
dan will end. Let the marshals through 
the messengers proclaim the resurrection 
of two thousand million to the etherean 



heavens on that day. Proclaim it in all the 
heavens of Earth, inviting all to come 
who can; for it shall be a day of the feast 
of glory. But say not to any one that there 
has been a change of Gods, lest sorrow 
come upon the people. 

The marshals then selected messengers, 
a great number, and then sent them 
throughout the heavens of Earth, pro- 
claiming the commandments of God. 

God spake further, saying: For thirty 
days shall the Council deliberate on my 
ten thousand Lords, selecting and allot- 
ting them; and I will crown them in the 
name of the Father. 

Apollo then said: Now will I clothe 
myself in strange colors, that none shall 
know me, and during the thirty days I yet 
tarry, I will go round the earth, that I may 
again look upon the star of my birth. 

And he who had given up the throne 
said: I, too, will again visit the star of 
my birth. 

Accordingly, God said: Joy be unto 
ye twain, in Jehovih's name. Behold, I 
will throw a blanket over the throne, and 
ye shall change your attire, and when I 
withdraw it, ye may walk forth unknown. 

And this was done. 

CHAPTER VII. 

So Apollo visited all the great divisions 
of the earth, and the islands of the ocean; 
and his traveling attendants, companions 
and officers, made a record of all things 
they saw, especially those relating to the 
corporeans; their manners, sizes, color, 
habits, education and procreative capaci- 
ties; and the records were to be carried to 
etherea in the coming ascent. 

And Apollo and his companions then 
visited atmospherea, making like observa- 
tions of the people in the first and second 
resurrections, recording the number and 
kind of nurseries, hospitals, factories, 
schools and colleges, together with the 
asaphs, teachers and physicians, nurses and 
so on. And this record was also prepared 
so as to form a brief history of Earth's 
heaven. 

On the twenty-eighth day, Apollo and 
his hosts returned to Gau. In the mean- 
time, the word of God, commanding the 
assembly for the ascent of two thousand 
million of Jehovih's Brides and Bride- 



CYCLE OF APOLLO 



101 



grooms, had aroused the people of the 
lower heaven; millions of them never hav- 
ing witnessed an ascent, nor seen an ether- 
ean adavaysit, a ship of fire. On the even- 
ing of the twenty-ninth day a light was 
seen high up in the firmament to the north- 
west, brilliant, like a star of the first mag- 
nitude. Presently it grew larger and 
brighter, and shot across toward the south- 
west, and then began to descend toward 
Earth, growing larger and brighter as it 
came. 

The people of the lower heaven knew it 
was the adavaysit of the third resurrction, 
and they rejoiced before Jehovih, singing 
and praying. And now the marshals com- 
menced to form the groups of Brides and 
Bridegrooms of Jehovih. And the groups 
were formed in stars, crescents, squares, 
circles and ovals, being classified according 
to their rates, and the groups had banners, 
and signals of colored lights, according to 
their rank in love and intelligence, or good 
works, or other characteristic virtues. And 
these groups were arranged into combina- 
tions, every combination representing the 
work done by a sub-Lord or sub-God. And 
these combinations were again formed into 
four divisions, representing the four great 
divisions of Earth, and the four Lords, 
Jehovih's sons. So that when the whole 
two thousand million spirits were in due 
form, they characterized Harmony, Sym- 
metry and Music, being the symbol of 
Apollo, Son of Jehovih. 

At midnight, the adavaysit reached 
Chinvat. Here the ship halted for 
four hours, and then c^gain began to 
descend, and rapidly, fearful to be- 
hold, becoming more scarlet within 
the vortex, but growing larger and 
more definite in figure. And when the 
adavaysit drew near, it was in the form and 
figure of the groups of Brides and Bride- 
grooms of Jehovih. It had fifty thousand 
curtains, and one hundred thousand ban- 
ners, and the hosts within the ship, seven 
million souls, bore each a streamer of phos- 
phorescent light, of all colors, shades and 
tints, and arrayed in symbols of the name, 
Apollo. 

Unlike all other etherean ships of fire 
that had as yet yisite^ Earth's heavens, 
it was provided with openings in the bot- 



tom, five hundred thousand in number, 
which were the places of entrance and exit. 
And the openings were studded with crys- 
tals of ceaseless fire, of all conceivable col- 
ore, shades and tints, sizes and figures, 
curves, circles, angles, crescents, and so on. 
And within the openings were the crystal 
and opaque chambers provided for the 
heirs of the third resurrection. And yet 
within these chambers, where the reports of 
the guardian angels of the lives and good 
works heretofore done by every man and 
woman of all the two thousand million who 
were to ascend to Jehovih's higher hea- 
vens. But in all the records there was not 
recorded one evil thing, or dark deed, or 
selfish thought, for of these things the as- 
cended hosts had long since purged them- 
selves, till they were gems of the pure light 
of the Father of all. High up within the 
ship were the beams and network of tim- 
ber and ropes and arches. And around 
about the whole ship was the photosphere 
of its power, so that the whole adavaysit 
was like a crystal ship within a globe of 
phosphorescent light; and yet, in fact, the 
ship was the true light, and the angels the 
light of that light, whilst the photosphere 
was really the shell of darkness made re- 
flective. 

And the size of the adavaysit was two 
thousand miles, east and west, and north 
and south, and seven thousand miles high. 
And the ship within it was one hundred 
miles, east and west, and north and south, 
and two hundred miles high, being light 
and habitable within as well as without, 
like the etherean worlds in the firmament. 

As Jehovih maketh worlds, and sendeth 
them forth in the places of His firmament; 
so in imitation of Him, His etherean Gods 
and Goddesses make adavaysits to traverse 
space from star to star, and from one ether- 
ean region to another. Great in wisdorn 
and power are Jehovih's Gods and God- 
desses. Yet they, too, were once but men 
and women, with corporeal bodies. 

Jehovih said; I have given power to 
spirits of the newly dead to clothe them- 
selves from the atmosphere with corporeal 
semblances of flesh and blood. And to My 
exalted atmospherean angels, I have given 
power to clothe themselves from ethe in 
forms of light. But to My exalted ethex- 



102 



CYCLE OF APOLLO 



can angels, I have given power to clothe 
their hosts with ships of fire, and otevans 
and adavaysits. 

CHAPTER VIII. 

Cventi, marshalless for the hosts of 
Apollo, with ten thousand marshals and 
fifty thousand respondents of ceremonies, 
made ready to receive the hosts of the ada- 
vaysits, commanded by Cim'iad, Goddess 
of Du'e'ghi, Goddess of Noad and Rak, in 
etherea, well known to Apollo, and to 
Phae'ja, God of Norse, long residents of 
Um, in etherea. 

Cim'iad was a small women, dark and 
of deep love, most jovial of Goddesses; 
and had long looked forward with joy to 
her pleasure of bringing so large a ship to 
deliver two thousand million of Jehovih's 
Brides and Bridegrooms. And so, when 
the adavaysit was about the land in Gau, 
Cim'iad looked out from the clusters of 
central stars, the ornaments of the throne 
within the ship, to see the hosts who were 
assembled beneath, and joyously clapped 
her hands with delight, and she was then 
saluted by Apollo and Phae'ja, and by God 
and his Lords. Presently the mighty ves- 
sel landed and made fast; and the ship of 
Apollo was moved up alongside and made 
fast to the adavaysit. Meantime Cim'iad 
came forth out of the ship, and was receiv- 
ed in the arms of Cventi, marshalless of 
Apollo, and then proceeded to the throne 
of God. All the while the musicians had 
been playing and singing; and the music 
of the lower heaven was thus united with 
the music of the upper heaven. 

God said: Welcome, O Daughter of 
Jehovih. Come thou and honor my throne 
and His name. 

Cim'iad said: By the grace and love of 
Jehovih, am I come, O God. And to thee, 
O Apollo, most wonderful of Earth-born 
Gods, how can I express my boundless 
love? And to thee, O Phaeja, long endur- 
ing Son of Jehovih, my soul is as a twin, 
for the glory of our everlasting Creator. 
Behold I am come in Jehovih's name to 
wed these two thousand million Brides and 
Bridegrooms to Jehovih. 

Phaeja said: Thy will and Jehovih's 
be done. And now they shook hands, and 
Cim'iad went and sat on the throne, salut- 



ing all the assemblage by making the sign 
of Jehovih's name with her right hand, 
which was answered by three thousand 
million spirits. And now the musicians 
played and sang the Stars of Jehovih. 
Meanwhile the All Light began to descend 
on Cim'iad's head, so brilliant that many 
could not look thereon. And Jehovih 
spake through Cim'iad, saying: 

I blow my breath upon a corporeal 
world, and man springeth forth into life. 
In the womb of Mi I fashion his spirit. 
When he is shapely I deliver him. I open 
the heaven of suns, and warm his soul. 
Brighter than diamonds he cometh forth, 
as stars for my everlasting worlds. Dress- 
ed as Brides and Bridegrooms for My 
chambers of Light and Love. In My arms 
shall they be blessed forever. In My man- 
sions rejoice forever. 

The respondents said: I am Thy Bride 
(or Bridegroom), O Jehovih. My soul 
findeth love in Thee only, forever. From 
Mi, my mother, Earth, who conceived me, 
I rise up. 

All praise to Thee, O Jehovih. And to 
thee, O God of Earth. And to ye, O Lords 
of Earth. Thy Lords, O Jehovih, raised 
me up. How can I render them joy 
for my stubbornness of heart. And Thy 
God, for my second resurrection. Thou 
made us brothers and sisters, O Jehovih. 
O joy of my soul. To Thee am I behold- 
en, O Jehovih, Everlasting Creator. 

The All Light answered: Behold Me, 

Brides and Bridegrooms. I am the All 
that is within All and Over All. Members 
of My body are all things, seen and un- 
seen, boundless, forever. 

Response: Who can give like unto 
Thee, O Jehovih? Not only gavest Thou 
myself, but sent Thy Gods and Lords to 
me to teach me how to live to enjoy Thy 
fullness. I will rise to Thy immortal king- 
doms, and learn the mysteries of Thy glo- 
ry and wisdom, O Jehovih. And when I 
am strong, I will go forth to them who are 
beneath me, and raise them up to rejoice 
forever. 

Jehovih said: Laborers with Me. 
Helpers and companions forever. With ye 

1 wed. 

Response: With Thee we wed, help- 
mates, forever. In the glory of Thy worlds, 
without end. 



CYCLE OF APOLLO 



103 



Jehovih said: Mine are all harmony; 
all symmetry; all love; and will endure 
forever. 

Response: When I was in darkness, I 
fed on hate and anger, war and lust. 
But thou hast taught me harmony, 
symmetry and love, and I shall indulge in 
them forever. 

Jehovih said: Receive ye My mantles, 
and My crowns, O My beloved. The dark- 
ness is come and gone; the rain is dried 
up; and My flowers are blooming for you, 
My beloved. 

Response: Glory be to Thee, My Cre- 
ator and Preserver. All hail to Thy won- 
drous works, O Jehovih. In all my giving 
I cannot attain to Thee, forever. Thy 
crown shall shine in my behavior. 

Jehovih: Thou art Mine, forever. 
Amen. 

I am Thine, O Jehovih, forever. Amen. 

CHAPTER IX. 

When the marriage ceremonies were 
completed, and the music of five hundred 
thousand singers and players had ceased, 
the great light slowly diminished from 
about the throne, and God announced six 
hours' recreation and the angels of Gau 
and of the etherean heavens mingled to- 
gether joyfully. When the six hours' rec- 
reation was over, Apollo rose up, and after 
making the sign of Jehovih's name, stepped 
aside from the throne of God. Then Cim'- 
iad arose and gave the same sign, and then 
stepped aside. Then followed Phaeja, and 
when they stood on the floor of the throne 
where all the assembled millions could see 
them, the silence was so deep that it seem- 
ed as though time had come to an end. 

The marshals opened the arches of the 
adavaysit, but as yet not a soul moved 
from his or her place. Then Apollo, Cim'- 
iad and Phaeja, more loved than all the 
Gods who had as yet visited Earth and 
her heavens, came down and stood at the 
foot of the throne. God came down from 
the throne and took Apollo's hand, saying: 
Arise, O Son of Jehovih, and Go thy way. 
Apollo rose up and stood aside. And God 
now took the hand of Cim'iad, saying: 
Arise, O Daughter of Jehovih, and go thy 
way. Next he took the hand of the long- 
tried Phaeja, and both burst into tears 
and fell into each other's arms. Phaeja, 



who was of few words, was last to break 
the fond embrace. Then he, Apollo, and 
Cim'iad, marched forth to the etherean ship 
of fire, and God assumed the throne blind- 
ed by his tears. The mantles and crowns 
of Jehovih now fell on the two thousand 
million Brides and Bridegrooms. The 
awakening light of etherea bespoke Jeho- 
vih's awful presence. With one accord the 
hosts moved and went into the adavaysit 
amidst a shower of etherean flowers. 

Then bright Cim'iad stretched forth her 
slender hand and arm to Jehovih, saying: 
By Thy power, O Father, I command: 
Arise, Arise. Adavaysit, arise. And the 
mighty vessel, with the vessel of Apollo ad- 
joined, rose up from Gau, rocking, rising 
and moving to the music of a million trum- 
peters and singers. Higher and higher rose 
the etherean ship of fire, turning and ris- 
ing, passing beyond the vortex of Earth 
beyond Chinvat, out into the firmament of 
etherea, higher and higher till it was lost 
to sight. 

CHAPTER X. 

Jehovih said: Hear your Creator, O 
Gau. Make seven more plateaux for the 
second resurrection. Out of the idolatry 
of My Son, Apollo, will I beautify the in- 
habitants of Earth. And the cast and 
mold of men and of women shall become a 
great power. Make seven more plateaux 
in the second resurrection, and sort the es'- 
yans in the hour of birth. 

God and the Council perceived, and so 
God appointed workmen, and fulfilled the 
commandments of Jehovih. And he es- 
tablished seven hundred tributary king- 
doms of the second resurrection belonging 
to Gau. These sub-kingdoms were provid- 
ed with sub-Gods, of whom there were ten 
thousand. And the Lords had a suffi- 
ciency of guardian angels, ashars, and 
loo'is, so that they could direct any re- 
quired number to such mortals as they 
chose. The affairs of the sub-Gods were 
with matters in heaven, save when com- 
manded by the Lords for special work. 

So Jehovih changed the forms of the 
Earth-born, and they became worshippers 
of Apollo. And because of the idolatry of 
the women for Apollo, their children were 
born of good flesh, and shapely; so that in 
four hundred years, the hair on their heads 



104 



CYCLE OF APOLLO 



grew long and straight, and men began to 
have beards. Neither considered any 
young man any virtue in a young woman 
so important as her form; nor did young 
women value any virtue in man so great 
as a well-molded form. And when mortals 
died, and their spirits entered the first 
resurrection, half the labor of the asaphs, 
the receiving angels, was accomplished. 

So perfect was the way of heaven, that 
at the end of four hundred years, God and 
his Lords, and his sub-Gods, had ready 
for the third resurrection, eight and a half 
thousand million souls for Jehovih's har- 
vest, of grade eighty-eight. 

So Apollo sent Adova, division Goddess 
of Reth, in Coak, in etherea, down to the 
lower heaven, to deliver God and his hosts. 
And they were thus raised up to etherea in 
a sea of fire, and made one with Jehovih. 

In like manner was the next government 
on Earth and its heavens, and the next 
deliverance was ten thousand million souls, 
of grade sixty-five. 



In like manner was the next adminis- 
tration, and the deliverance was ten thou- 
sand million, of grade fifty. 

In like manner was the next administra- 
tion, and the deliverance was ten thousand 
million, of grade thirty-eight. So Apollo 
commanded these to be delivered in the 
a'ji'an fields of Oth, in Sanak and Orant, 
for they were unsuited for etherea. 

In like manner was the next administra- 
tion in the lower heaven and on the earth, 
and the deliverance was sixteen thousand 
million, but they were of grade twenty- 
four. And Apollo commanded them to be 
delivered in the nebulous straits of Kappa- 
wotchiaka. 

In like manner was the next administra- 
tion in the lower heaven, but on earth the 
kings and queens began to destroy ill- 
formed children and cripples, thus casting 
the ills of mortality into heaven. And Je- 
hovih received no harvest for the last dan 
of Apollo's cycle. 

Thus ended the cycle of Apollo, being 
two thousand eight hundred years. 




CHAPTER I. 

In the beginning of the cycle of Apollo 
the mortals on Earth brought forth off- 
spring who were deformed and unshapely. 
They sat on their haunches all day and 
even went hungry rather than seek for 
food. Jehovih's Voice spake to the Lords 
of the earth saying: 

Hear ye the words of your Creator, O 
My Beloved. Sing songs of Apollo and 
his Lords. Let my angels rejoice for the 
glory of My Son is upon them. I created 
Apollo for the glory of angels and men. 
In his idols and images shall my peoole 
behold the harmony of My beloved. With 
mine own hands moulded I the ankle, and 
foot and well-rounded thighs. Behold the 
arms of My Son with dimples and small 
wrists. His neck is straight and slender, 
smooth and round; his shoulders like hewn 
stone and tapering. His instep is high. 
He can spring like a deer swift as the wind. 
He sitteth not on his haunches all day with 
his hands down like a druk that is tired. 
He fleeth to the plain and the forest with 
swift feet. 

But the mortals on earth are without 
shapeliness before Me. Tney sit on their 
haunches, but Apollo cometh to the young 
mother's dreams, and shapeth her unborn, 
with limbs straight and shapely, with long 
hair on the head. He standeth by the idol 
and knoweth the mother's prayer. Who 
calleth on the name Apollo calleth on Je- 
hovih, Creator of all things. Bletsed are 
the Lords of Apollo. Blessed are they 
that bring forth in shapeliness like My Son 

A 11 •"' 

Apollo. 

In Shem, Ham and Jaffeth the Lords 
inspired mortals to build temples and im- 
ages in likeness of Apollo, and caused the 
young mother to look thereon, and by 
worshipping the images night and day she 
brought forth shapely, beautiful children. 

But in Guatama the Lord did after 
this manner: 

The Lord called to man, saying: Where 
are the Thins, the chosen of the Lord? 



Speak, O man; come forth at the call of 
thy Lord. 

Then spake man, answering to the call 
of the Lord, saying: More than four mil- 
lion are thy people, O Lord. 

The Lord inquired: Where are my 
people? Where is the place and boundary 
of the sacred people, the I'hins, whom I 
delivered in the time of the flood? 

And man answered, saying: From the 
head of the Ca'ca'tsak, the mountain river 
or rivers. In Thes'onka, wide as the 
ocean, and the mountain plains of Om. To 
the great cities of O'wan'gache and Na- 
thon; and Neshesh, and Tesumethgad and 
Naphal; and Yeshuah, by the Lake Owane, 
here standeth the tower of Rakowana, 
shining with copper and silver and gold. 
And by the river Raxaa, and her lake Jon'- 
gaii. And over the plains of Go'magat, and 
Takshan, where they build great boats with 
sails of cloth and beams across. And to 
the north land of Uphsic and E'chaung, 
where beginneth the still river Eph'su, 
running to the wide oceans, Vid and Sa- 
jins, where the I'huans dig deep down and 
bring copper and silver and lead in boats 
to the King of Avaya, Thuan monarch and 
good protector. 

The Lord said: The greatest place ot 
all thou hast not named. Search, there- 
fore and be wise. 

And man was ashamed before the Lor^, 
so he set out to get great learning to know 
of what the Lord spake. And traveled one 
year to the north, and many moons to the 
south and east. 

Man said: I found a rab'bah of great 
learning, both in books and spoken words; 
and not a few prophets of the Lord in the 
great cities. So I inquired, saying: Which 
is the greatest place of the Lord's chosen? 
And they answered even as I had answered 
the Lord. Then I came to the city of 
Ta'zuntqua, a place for the yearly dance in 
the valley of On'out'si, where the rab'bah's 
temple is covered with polished, copper; 
and I asked the same question. For the 
che'ba within me desired to make a record 



106 



CYCLE OF APOLLO 



LORDS' RECORD 



of all things valuable. But alas, I got no 
other answer than the echo of my own 
words. 

The Lord said: Where are my chosen? 
Where is the greatest place of the I'hins? 
Thou hast shown me the I'huans, their 
great cities and kingdoms; their places 
of great learning? But the greatest of 
all thou hast not shown. 

Man answered: I know not. 

The Lord said: In amongst the I'huans 
are the I'hins, the little sacred people. The 
little cities in the suburbs of the large cities 
of the I'huans. These are the greatest 
cities. 

Man inquired of God: How can that 
be? The I'huans outnumber the I'hins 
ten to one. 

The Lord said: These that build tem- 
ples of hewn stone, and cover them with 
polished copper are not my people. These 
warrior kings who fortify their cities with 
soldiers are not my people. But these 
are my chosen, that live in mounds, and 
in cities with wooden and clay walls. They 
are the greatest of all people. They dress 
not in gaudy colors, nor ornament them- 
selves with copper, silver and gold. They 
are the people of learning. They survey 
the way for the canals. They find the 
square and the arch. They lead the I'huan 
to the mines, where lead and copper and 
silver are buried. Without them the I'huan 
could not build his own house, nor provide 
the square of his temple. The I'hins are 
the greatest people. 

My chosen have shapely legs and arms, 
feet and hands, and their hair, which is 
white and yellow, grows long and straight. 

The Lord said unto the I'hins: You 
have built houses and temples for the 
I'huans, but of what avail are these things? 
They are at war tribe against tribe, nation 
against nation. They no longer hearken 
to the rab'bahs of my chosen. Long have 
I prophesied through my chosen, the 
I'hins. Now will I raise up prophets 
amongst the I'huans, the copper-colored 
race. 

The Lord was weary with laboring for 
the I'huans, for they went more after the 
way of darkness than light. And the Lord 
called hence his guardian angels, leaving 
the I'huans alone for a season, and spirits 
of darkness came upon them. And in that 



same time the Lord inspired his chosen to 
display the mold of their thighs, and their 
short shapely arms. And the I'huans 
tempted them contrary to law, and the 
I'huan women brought forth heirs of more 
shapeliness. And when these heirs grew 
to be men and women, they had the gift 
of prophecy, and of seeing visions, and of 
hearing the voices of the angels of heaven. 
And they are called Ongwee'ghan, signi- 
fying good shaped men. 

CHAPTER II. 

The Lord said: Do not allow the Ong- 
wee to dwell with the I'hins lest the seed 
of my chosen be lost. 

Thousands and thousands of the Ong- 
wees came into the world; came in the 
north, south, east and west. And they had 
long, coarse, black hair, but their skin was 
brown, and their arms were short like the 
I'hins. Very proud were the Ongwees. 
They would not mix with the I'huans; and 
they dared not mix with the sacred people, 
because of the commandment of the Lord. 

So the Ongwee'ghan became a new race 
in the world, having all the symmetry of 
the I'hins, and the savageness of the 
I'huans. And being feeders on flesh and 
fish, fell under the dominion of angels of 
the lower heaven, and they rejected the 
Lord. 

The Lord said: Even this will I ap- 
propriate for their own salvation in time to 
come. 

So the Lord commanded the I'hins to 
give to the Ongwees laws, rites and cere- 
monies; and these things were done as 
commanded. Then came the angels of the 
lower heaven, teaching the Ongwees the 
secret of making eunuchs of their enemies, 
the I'huans with the long arms; teaching 
them how to make spears and bows with 
arrows, and darts, fishing hooks and nets; 
teaching them how to make fire by strik- 
ing flint stones; teaching them how to cook 
flesh and fish and make them more palat- 
able. And this was the first cooked food 
for man since the days of the flood. 

The I'hins feared the Lord would visit 
a judgment upon the land because of the 
Ongwees killing and eating flesh; but the 
Lord said unto them: Suffer ye the Ong- 
wees to fulfill their labor, the land is too 
full of beasts and serpents. Nevertheless 



CYCLE OF APOLLO 



LORDS' RECORD 



107 



destruction shall come upon the I'huans, 
and the ground people, and the Ongwees. 
Their great cities shall be destroyed, and 
the land laid desolate; but they shall be 
built again with greater glory than be- 
fore. 

In three hundred years the large and 
handsome race, the Ongwees, transcended 
the I'huans. 

CHAPTER III. 

In the time of Apollo were the first 
prophets of God raised up from other than 
the I'hin race. And thy Lord commanded 
man to remember the God of harmony, 
symmetry and music, and to build images 
of them in all the divisions of the earth. 

In Guatama, the Lord raised up hunt- 
ers, whom he instructed in the methods of 
slaying beasts of prey and serpents. In the 
same period of time raised he up for the 
same purpose other men in Shem, Ham 
and Jaffeth. And the names of the great 
slayers were preserved in the mortal his- 
tories of these countries. 

Thus created the Lord a new race on 
Earth; and in all the divisions thereof, 
the new race came of the I'hins and the 
I'huans. They built great cities and estab- 
lished mighty kingdoms. 

Then the Lord sent I'hin priests to cir- 
cumcise the new race, the Ghan. And he 
commanded the Ghans to marry amongst 
themselves, promising to give all the world 
into their keeping. 

And the Ghans began to wear clothes 
after the manner of the I'hins; and the 
latter gave them rites and ceremonies, and 
taught them how to pray and dance be- 
fore Jehovih. 

The Lord said: Hear me, O man. Un- 
derstand the labor of the Lord. Jehovih 
saith to the Lord: Go thou to yonder 
earth, and make man upright. And the 
Lord accomplished it. Then saith Jeho- 
vih: Go yonder and make man shapely. 
And the Lord findeth a way to do this 
also. 



Forget not the Lord, for such labor will 
fall to thy lot when thou art long risen in 
heaven. Behold, there are millions of 
new worlds coming into being every day. 
Expand thy judgment; make thyself com- 
prehensive, that thou mayest fulfill in 
wisdom the glory of the Almighty. 

Hear the words of the Lord, O man; 
be considerate in thy little wisdom of the 
magnitude of the labor of thy Lord. Cer- 
tain times and seasons are allotted by Je- 
hovih for the development of new orders 
of men on the worlds He created. Accord- 
ing to the times and seasons and condition 
of Earth, so hath the Lord provided 
the race of man. To raise man up, that he 
may comprehend the beautiful creation, 
and that he may be adapted in harmony 
therewith, is the glory of thy Lord. 

Think not that as one division of Earth 
is made answerable to my will by a certain 
rule, that another division of the earth is 
provided in the same way. The Lord find- 
eth one place filled with beasts of prey and 
great serpents, which must be destroyed; 
and he provides a race of men to accom- 
plish this. And man is allowed to become 
carnivorous for a season. 

In another country the Lord findeth 
drouth and famine, and he provideth man 
with knowledge adapted thereto. So also 
are there seasons on Earth, when man 
shall be changed from one condition to an- 
other; according to the progress of Earth, 
so the Lord lifteth up man for the glory of 
the Almighty. 

Suffer not thy judgment to mislead 
thee as to a law of selection. There is 
no law of selection. Man hath no inspira- 
tion of his own, to select »and provide his 
progeny, neither in shapeliness nor judg- 
ment. He marrieth because of the flesh; 
nor careth he for the issue, whether they 
have long legs or short ones, or whether 
they become warriors or imbeciles. Nei- 
ther considereth he what may result there- 
from. And the Lord and his angels lead 
man unknowingly to himself, to fulfill his 
times and seasons. 



Cycle of Thor 



CHAPTER I. 

In the Holy Council of Gods and God- 
desses in Don'ga, the Voice of Jehovih 
came to Thor, Orian Chief, of Don'ga, in 
etherea, God of Palla, Surveyor of Torretz 
and Thassa, God of Galeb, Receiver of Saf- 
fer, and Hoesonya, God of Wartz and Lo 
and Yisain, Counselor of the etherean 
worlds Hituna, Ctaran, Seeing, Sethawan 
and Hababak, saying: 

My Son, behold the red star, Earth, 
is travelling from Mos to Dae, and is now 
dragging through the swamps of Asath. 

Thor spoke before the Holy Council, 
saying: The young world, Earth, com- 
eth our way. For three thousand, two 
hundred years, she will journey in the 
fields of Don'ga. 

Then the Holy Council deliberated on 
the matters of Earth and her heavens, 
and all other corporeal worlds that were to 
pass through Don'ga for three thousand 
years; and it was found that the dawn of 
dan would fall upon Earth first of all. 

Then called Thor for the swift messen- 
gers that, course the firmament in the re- 
gions of Apperwaith, the former roadway 
to Earth, to learn her history. And the 
swift messengers came and laid their report 
before the throne of Jehovih, as to what 
world Earth was, and the harvests of angels 
she had yielded up to the emancipated hea- 
vens. When their reports were finished, 
and deliberated on by the Holy Council, 
Thor, Son of Jehovih, said: 

For further knowledge as to the present 
condition of this world, Earth, it is my 
wish that Yathai, God of Gammotto, 
choose one million volunteers, and in an 
airiata, proceed to Earth and her hea- 
vens to visit her God and Lords, and ascer- 
tain the condition of their angels and mor- 
tals, and report back in Don'ga. 

So Yathai, God of Gammotto, was ap- 
pointed for this purpose, and he provided 
an airiata, and took with him one million 
ethereans, and proceeded to Earth and 



her heavens as commanded. And when 
Yathai came to the throne of God in Gau, 
God sent an invitation to his seventy-two 
Lords to come also. 

God said to Yathai: Behold, the Earth 
and these atmospherean heavens are full of 
false Gods and Lords. 

Yathai inquired how many there were. 
God said: More than thirty thousand 
Gods and one hundred and sixty thousand 
Lords. In every great city on earth there 
is a false God or Lord, and he has a small 
heavenly kingdom of his own. And the 
spirits of the dead in that place are his 
slaves, for his own exaltation. And in 
many of these heavenly kingdoms there 
are wars and anarchy, where the angels 
torment one another endlessly. Nor will 
these false Gods and Lords and their sub- 
jects admit that there are higher heavens 
than their own. 

The spirits of the newly dead are cap- 
tured and kept in ignorance of Jehovih and 
His vast creations; and made to bow in 
adoration to the false God or ; Lord, and 
they inspire mortals to the same worship, 
and in the time of death they fall as slaves 
into the dominion of him whom they wor- 
shipped. The wars in heaven have inspired 
mortals to war so that wars are continually 
raging on the earth. And such as are 
slain on earth battle fields linger on the 
battle fields still battling. These battle 
fields are all over the earth and are cov- 
ered with spirits in chaos and with the 
spirits of Druks, Yaks and ground people, 
who know nothing more than the beasts 
of the field. 

Return, therefore, O Yathai, to thy 
Orian Chief, Thor, Son of Jehovih, and. 
say to him: The Qod of Earth is power- 
less to rescue her angels and mortals from 
the great darkness upon them; and beseech 
him in Jehovih's name to help me to de- 
liver my kingdoms. 

Yathai inquired as to the rescue of men 
on earth, and as to the times of their ter- 
mination. 



CYCLE OF THOR 



109 



God said: In time to come the I'hin 
race,' the mound builders, will come to an 
end. And by that time the Ghans will 
have triumphed over all the races of Earth. 

When Yathai had obtained this infor- 
mation, and also learned the localities of 
the divisions of Earth and her heavens, 
he departed in his airiata with his compan- 
ions, and returned to Don'ga in etherea, 
Where he reported to Thor, Son of Jehovih, 
all he had learned of the condition of Earth 
and her heavens. 

Then came the Light of Jehovih to 
Thor, saying: My Son, take thou a suf- 
ficient host of ethereans, and go to the red 
star and her heavens, and deliver them in 
My name. 

CHAPTER II. 

So Thor called for thirty million volun- 
ters, and he provided, an avalanza, an 
etherean ship of fire, in which they 
embarked to travel to the red star, Earth. 
God and his Lords had been apprised 
of Thor's coming, and had the cs»pital 
made ready for his reception, and they 
had gathered all the angels of the 
second resurrection, and as many of 
the first as chose to come, to wit- 
ness the arrival of the ship of Thor arid 
his hosts. 

Outward, onward, through etherea sped 
Thor with his thirty million onward 
through etherean seas of Hoesonga, 
toward the arc of Mos, thence to Chinvat 
and still onward till they reached the pla- 
teau of Gau and anchored near the throne 
of God. Thor saluted in the name of Je- 
hovih, and God answered likewise, after 
which God proclaimed a day of recreation 
and the atmosphereans and ethereans min- 
gled together joyfully. 

When the day of recreation was over 
Thor ascended the throne and gave the 
following commands: 

Let one million coristables go to the 
false Gods and Lords and arrest them, 
and bring them to Gau for judgment. 

One million captors to possess the 
thrones and temples of the false Gods and 
Lords, and hold them. 

Eight million captors to gather in the 
angel slaves in all the hadan heavens. 

Six milliori dispersers to overthrow and 
disperse the hells. 



Six million physicians to remove fetals 
from mortals. 

Two million founders of es'yan nurser- 
ies for the spirits of infants and helpless 
ones born into heaven before their time. 

One million founders of hospitals for 
chaotic and diseased angels. 

Half a million marshals; half a million 
messengers; and three million builders. 

And these were selected by the proper 
officers and dispatched to their several 
places and duties. 

Then Thor reorganized the Council of 
Gau for the period of dawn. And God and 
his Lords rested for a season, whilst Thor 
and his hosts delivered Earth and her 
heavens. 

In one year all the false Lords and Gods 
and Goddesses were captured and brought 
to Gau; but Thor did not pass judgment 
upon them till they were all brought in. 
And on this occasion there were assembled 
in Gau millions of angels to witness the 
proceedings. 

Thor said to them: Perceive ye not 
that my power is greater than yours? How 
can that be? I have but thirty million; 
and of you there are more than thirty 
thousand million. Wherein, then, am I the 
more powerful? Behold, I have arrested 
all your heavens and heavenly rulers? 
How is this? Whence my power? 

No one could answer Thor. 

Then Thor said: My army is a unit. 
Yours are divided. This I declare unto 
you all: Jehovih first of all. To learn to 
master the elements of earth and heaven, 
this is the foundation for acquiring all 
power. Because ye bound yourselves in 
heavenly places on the earth, ye rose not 
up to the places prepared for you. An- 
swer me now: How standeth the world as 
to what is to come? 

Many of the false Lords and Gods an- 
swered after this manner: I fear to speak 
my mind, lest thou in anger cast me in 
hell. 

Thor said: Who hath learnt to know 
Jehovih, and to serve Him, feareth nothing 
On earth, nor in heaven. Fear is but the 
manifestation of weakness. Speak, there- 
fore, what ye desire. No harm shall befall 
you. 

Many of them said: This do I per- 
ceive, O God, the strongest Gods rule over 



110 



CYCLE OF THOR 



the weaker. The strongest mortals rule 
over the weaker. Therefore, make me thy 
slave; I am content. Then Thor said: A 
greater hardship give I unto all. I give 
you your liberty and freedom. Go, there- 
fore, whither ye desire; I ask no one to 
serve me, but say unto you: Go serve Je- 
hovih by lifting up whomsoever is beneath 
you. 

They answered: Where shall we go? 
We know not the way from one heaven to 
another, nor the way down to the earth. 
Thou sayest: Go serve Jehovih by lift- 
ing up such as are beneath us. Now, ver- 
ily, we cannot lift ourselves up. Had we 
great riches, or power, or wisdom, then 
would we willingly do for those beneath us. 

Thor said: Wait not for any of these 
things, but go at once and serve Jehovih. 

They answered: When we have first 
provided a way for ourselves, then will we 
serve Him. 

Thor said: Ye have spoken the dark- 
ness of all the world. I say unto you: Go 
serve Jehovih first. 

They answered: How can one serve 
Jehovih by lifting others up, if he have not 
clothes, nor food nor habitation? 

Thor said: It is well to ask that ques- 
tion to your own souls. Let it be the 
question ye ask yourselves every hour of 
the day; and watch for an opportunity to 
answer it by the labor of your own hands. 

Then Thor commanded the light of the 
pillars of heavenly fire to be raised to a 
higher grade, and the false Lords and Gods 
desired to flee before the brilliancy of the 
light, but knew not where to go. 

Thor said unto them: Why have ye 
assumed to be Lords and Gods, since ye 
cannot even master the elements in the 
lower heavens? I say unto you: The re- 
gions of Jehovih's universe are boundless. 
Let no one assume to do that which he 
cannot do; but little by little, learn to mas- 
ter the elements surrounding him, and he 
will in time learn to traverse Jehovih's 
beautiful firmament, a fit companion for 
Gods and Goddesses. 

Then spake the false Lords and Gods, 
saying: O that we had some one to show 
us the way. 

Then Thor allotted unto them teachers 
and disciplinarians, and they were taken 
into educational colonies and put to work. 



CHAPTER III. 

When the false Gods and Lords' were 
dismissed, Thor said: 

To induce men and angels to find the 
way of resurrection, this is the greatest of 
all teaching. Man saith: O God, raise up 
thy servant. And the Lord saith: Hold 
up thy hands and I will lift thee up. But 
man will not. Man saith: Send wise and 
holy angels to me, O Lord, to guide me in 
righteousness and good works. And the 
Lord saith. As thou asketh of God, even 
so do thou of thy fellows. But man will 
not. 

As it is with man on earth so do we 
find it in hada. To induce angels to de- 
velop themselves by taking hold with their 
own hands, and by the exercise of their 
own talents, this is the work of Lords and 
Gods. To rule over them without their 
knowing it, so as to lead them in the right 
way, this is wisdom. 

The first passion of man is to eat; the 
second, the sexual desire; the third, to 
make others serve him. And if he accom- 
plish the latter, then is he indeed the prince 
of evil. 

So also as man buildeth these habita- 
tions in his soul on earth, how vain his ef- 
fort for happiness in heaven. To teach 
him to undo all his past, and to make full 
restitution unto others, this is the work of 
Gods and Lords. 

Thor established two thousand educa- 
tional colonies in atmospherea, besides in- 
numerable places of manufacturing and 
building; teaching the angels of heaven 
how to provide habitations for those born 
of earth into spirit life. 

In three years of dawn Thor had pre- 
pared for etherean ascension four thou- 
sand million Brides and Bridegrooms. 

Now all this while the angels of atmos- 
pherea had been taught much in regard to 
the emancipated kingdoms in etherea; of 
the splendor and majesty and power of 
Gods and Goddesses. 

Thor spake from the throne of God, be- 
fore the Holy Council, saying: Send swift 
messengers to Betatis, Goddess of Terow, 
in etherea, greeting and say to her: Thus 
saith Thor, Jehovih's Son, Orian Chief of 
Don'ga: Come thou to the heavens of 
Earth. I have four thousand million Brides 
and Bridegrooms as Jehovih's harvest. 



CYCLE OF THOR 



111 



Provide thou an airiata of great size and 
splendor. 

The swift messengers departed. And 
proper officers at once set about making 
ready to receive Betatis. Others were sent 
into different parts of atmospherea to bring 
atmosphereans to Gau, that they might 
witness the glory of the higher heavens in 
the descent and ascent of the airiata. 

All these things were accomplished. 
Betatis came in great splendor; and all the 
kingdoms and sub-kingdoms of Gau were 
rilled with the thousands of millions come 
to witness the ceremonies. And the size 
of Betatis' airiata was. Diameter, east and 
west and north and south, two thousand 
miles to the borders of the photosphere, 
and nine thousand miles high. The ship 
within the photosphere was one hundred 
miles east and west, north and south, and 
was two hundred miles high. Of beams 
the entire length, there were twelve million 
four hundred thousand. And there were a 
sufficient number of chambers within the 
airiata for every soul to have one; and 
there were halls and temples also, suitable 
for music and other entertainments. 

The colors, shades and tints, the mir- 
rors with opaque ornaments, both movable 
and fixed, were provided in all possible 
ways, for ornament and service, the like of 
which for beauty, had never been surpassed 
in Don'ga. And when the whole airiata 
was completed, it looked like an oval globe 
of light, with a framework within alter- 
nately transparent and opaque, so as to add 
beauty to every part. And it was fitted and 
equipped for the third resurrection, having 
no storage places for atmospherea, or any- 
thing in common with the lower heavens. 

To add still further to its splendor, Be- 
tatis had her airiata ornamented with ban- 
ners and streamers illuminated, so that at 
a distance, when seen descending, the whole 
vessel seemed like a sun surrounded on ev- 
ery side with movable stars and waving 
streams of light. Among her hosts were 
one million trumpeters and harpists, and 
two million singers. 

In the fore part of the ship was the Holy 
Council chamber, with four million mem- 
bers. Above the Council chamber was the 
chamber of worship; and at either side were 
the halls for dancing and social reunion. 

When Betatis' ship neared the atmos- 



pherean kingdom of God, millions of her 
hosts stationed themselves on the galley 
beams and stay-lines, adding a scene of life 
to the etherean ship of surpassing beauty. 

With ballast Betatis had provided her 
ship, so that when she came within 
Earth's vortex she could stand where she 
desired whilst Earth and her heavens 
turned their axial course, that both mortals 
and angels might witness the brilliancy 
and glory of the works of Don'ga's chief 
Goddess. And thus Betatis stood just be- 
yond the plateau of Gau in her ship of fire, 
whilst Earth and her heavens made one 
revolution. The next day she descended 
into Gau, where God and his Lords, under 
direction of Thor, Jehovih's Son, had pre- 
pared the mighty audience. 

When the ship was made fast, the chief 
marshal of Betatis's hosts conducted Be- 
tatis up in front of the throne of God. 

Thor said: In Jehovih's name, welcome, 
Daughter of Light! 

Betatis said: Praise the Almighty. In 
love am I come in answer to thy prayer. 

Then spake God, saying: Welcome, O 
Goddess. Come and honor my throne. 

Then Betatis went forward and was 
greeted after the manner of Gods and God- 
desses. Then she sat in the midst of the 
throne, after which the ceremonies of ini- 
tiation for the Brides and Bridegrooms was 
accomplished. Then came a day of recre- 
ation. When it was completed, Betatis 
and her hosts, together with the four thou- 
sand million Brides and Bridegrooms, en- 
tered her airiata and departed upward for 
the etherean heavens. 

CHAPTER IV. 

In the fourth year of the dawn, Thor, 
Son of Jehovih, received from the Holy 
Council in Buru, of Don'ga, in etherea, a 
message from the Orian Chiefs allotting 
to Earth one hundred years' travel in 
Vocent. And Thor called up Waak, God of 
Rhines, and said to him: A sore travail 
hath Jehovih put upon these heavens. Go 
thou to Hey'loo, Son of Jehovih, and com- 
mand him to provide an avalanza sufficient 
to deliver twenty thousand million atmos- 
phereans to the a'ji'an forests of Gonaya. 
For the inhabitants of these heavens are too 
dark to endure the vocent of a hundred 



112 



CYCLE OF THOR 



years, and would be precipitated to the 
earth and engage in fetalism. 

An a'ji'an habitation in etherea is made 
after this manner. Amidst the ethe'ic waves, 
the ethereans gather up the atomic ele- 
ments floating therein, and giving them 
axic motion, propelling them forth aggre- 
gating the while, till from a mite it grow- 
eth as large as the whole world, and is 
habitable within and without by the spirits 
of the dead, the angels. 

Jehovih said: In likeness of the solid 
Earth, and moon and stars, that float in the 
unseen firmament, so made I atomic parts 
to all things, and made them to float in 
ethe. As the earth is to the air, and the 
ether above, so is an atom of corpor in 
the ethe'ic solution. Think not, O man, 
there is but one member of My Person, and 
that different conditions and states of that 
one comprise My universe. 

So Waak, God of Rhines, proceeded at 
once to Hey'loo, informing him of the de- 
crees of the higher heavens. Thor then 
sent a messenger to his Lords and mar- 
shals, to inform them also, and command- 
ing them to bring to Gau, all the lowest 
grades of angels from all parts of Earth. 

Thor appointed Ti'See'inij, Goddess of 
Ares, to superintend the reception of the 
angels, and to arrange them for entrance 
into the avalanza, and he gave her as as- 
sistants, five thousand marshals and cap- 
tains and one million es'enaurs. And these 
she apportioned to their respective duties 
and places. 

To accomplish all this Thor allotted 
seventy-seven of Earth's days. And so 
wisely were carried out all the proceedings 
that on the seventy-seventh day, the ava- 
lanza was at hand, and all the angels ready 
to enter therein. Accordingly these things 
were accomplished; the twenty thousand 
million angels were carried away on the 
avalanza, which was walled around on ev- 
ery side with pillars of fire, so that not one 
spirit could escape, even were he chaotic 
or imbecile. Waak and Hey'loo had entire 
charge of the migration; and they pro- 
ceeded upward and outward from Earth, 
seven diameters of Earth's vortex, which 
brought them into the forests of Gon- 
aya, where they alighted. Ti'See'inij, 
Goddess of Ares, had previously sent thith- 
er a sufficient force of angels, wise and 



strong, to provide for their reception. 
And when the avalanza arrived, all things 
were in readiness; and the angels were ap- 
portioned to different sections of the Gon- 
aya forests, according to their develop- 
ment. And proper officers and teachers 
were provided for them. 

Ti'See'inij established a throne of a'ji, 
and provided a temple of Council, and all 
such things as are required in the govern- 
ment of a new colony. And she promoted 
Hazadeka, a surveyor in Thalsia, to be 
God of Gonaya after the expiration of the 
time of dawn, and she gave him the title, 
God of Gonaya, for four hundred years. 

After the departure of the avalanza, 
Thor, Son of Jehovih, provided a new 
God unto Earth and her heavens, and 
crowned him, and bestowed upon him the 
triangle, the heirloom of the Gods of Earth. 
And the remaining time of dawn, Thor 
traveled about Earth and her heavens, 
making records of all things upon the 
earth, the records to be carried with him 
to Bum in the time of his ascent. 

In consequence of the depletion occa- 
sioned by the resurrection of the twenty 
thousand millions to Gonaya, God and his 
Lords were greatly relieved of their bur- 
dens both in Gau and on the earth. 

CHAPTER V 

At the time of the expiration of the 
dawn of Thor, peace and prosperity were 
established on earth and in heaven. And 
now came the time for the ascent of Thor 
with his hosts. So he sent swift messen- 
gers to etherea, asking to be delivered 
with his hosts, and six thousand million 
Brides and Bridegrooms to Jehovih. 

See We'ing, Goddess of Hotosk, in eth- 
erea, was appointed by the Council of 
Buru, to descend for Thor and his hosts, 
and his six thousand million Brides and 
Bridegrooms. Accordingly, See We'ing 
built her ship and gathered in her host, 
ten million, for the journey, and she named 
the ship Harp. The photosphere was flat 
to the north and south, but oval east and 
west. The openings were on the flat sides, 
with passages through. The crescent de- 
scribed a circle of three thousand four hun- 
dred miles and the depth of the Harp 
north and south was three hundred miles. 



CYCLE OF THOR 



113 



, 



The pillars of fire that ascended from the 
midst were one thousand seven hundred 
miles high. 

The stars within the photosphere were 
provided with five points; and each star 
had one million chambers, one chamber 
being allotted as the habitation of one 
Bride or Bridegroom; and there were 
seven thousand of these stars. The frame- 
work was crystalline, transparent and 
opaque, of all possible colors, shades and 
tints. Now besides the stars and their 
chambers the base of the crescent was pro- 
vided with a salon sufficient for one mill- 
ion musicians. 

God had commanded information to be 
sent to the Lords located on the earth, ask- 
ing them to invite all who chose to come 
and witness the ascent. And there came, 
besides the Brides and Bridegrooms, two 
thousand million angels, many not yet de- 
livered from the first resurrection. 

So See We'ing, Goddess of Hotosk, 
came down to Gau in her ship of fire, in 
great magnificence, and was received by 
Thor and by God and his Lords. And she 
ascended the throne and performed the 
marriage rite for the six thousand million. 
And after that a recreation of one day was 
proclaimed in Gau, during which time the 
atmosphereans and ethereans mingled to- 
gether freely. 

On the day following, Thor accompan- 
ied See We'ing into her ship; and their 
hosts went also, being nearly seven thou- 
sand million. And then amidst a rain of 
etherean flowers, See We'ing started her 
fire ship upward. 

God and his hosts remaining in Gau, 
saluted in the sign, Jehovih Forever, which 
was properly answered by the ascending 
millions. Then on its axis turned the great 
ship, rising aud turning, higher and higher. 
And in a little while only an ascending 
star was seen, and then it disappeared in 
the distance. 

Thus fulfilled Thor his great mission in 
dawn to -Earth and her heavens. 

Again Earth and its heavens pros- 
pered for another season of two hundred 
years, and the next dan there were deliver- 
ed five thousand million souls. And a new 
God and Lords succeeded, and they also 
prospered. The next harvest was four 
thousand million souls. 



But again false Gods and Lords began 
to set up kingdoms of their own in hea- 
ven, and in the cities of mortals. And ev- 
ery one called himself either Thor or Apol- 
lo. And the spirits who manifested in the 
temples, and in the oracles, all gave one 
of these names. And mortals who were 
obsessed believed themselves to be the re- 
incarnation of Apollo or Thor, for the ob- 
sessing spirits so called themselves. Oth- 
ers, more intelligent, said: Have not the 
prophets foretold that there was to be a 
second coming of Apollo? And are not 
these spirits, who appear through the sar'- 
gis, the very person? 

So great became the superstition of the 
nations of the earth, that in the fall of the 
leaf they found proof of the second coming 
of Apollo or Thor. Many of the spirits 
deserted the second resurrection in hea- 
ven, and returned to earth, to wait for in- 
formation concerning the coming event. 

Jehovih said: All corporeal worlds pass 
through the age of too much belief. As I 
gave man a judgment, that he might ex- 
amine and weigh a matter, so runneth he 
into unbelief. Then My angels go to him, 
and show him wherein he believed to lit- 
tle; but lo, he goeth to the other extreme, 
believing all things, and not using his 
judgment. 

God said: Why will not men and an- 
gels be patient, and wait till a matter is 
proven meritorious before they pursue it to 
extremes? The same sun shineth, the 
same stars stand in the heavens, and 
Earth, travels steadily on her way; her 
winds blow, her summers and winters come 
as in the olden time, yet man thinks that a 
great wonder is near at hand. And no won- 
der cometh and nothing new is near at 
hand. 

How shall I stay them, O Jehovih? 
Their desires for Apollo call down millions 
of spirits from my places of resurrection. 
And in trials and hardships they fall, and 
become suitable prey for designing false 
Gods and Lords. 

God and his Lords bewailed the dark- 
ness of Earth and her heavens. But high 
up in the etherean heavens, came the Voice 
of Jehovih, saying: 

Hear your Creator, O ye Gods and 
Goddesses. Behold the magnitude of My 
works. I labor not for the profit of this 



114 



CYCLE OF THOR 



man or that man; nay, nor for this people 
nor that people; nor for the inhabitants of 
one star and one heaven; but for the glory 
of millions of stars and millions of heavens. 
Doth not one corporeal man bewail a 
shower of rain? — and yet his neighbor re- 
joiceth thereat? One man prayeth for sun- 
shine and another for shade. Think not 
that I labor for each one separately, but 
for the perfection of the whole. Wherefore, 
then, shall the God of Earth and his Lords 
bewail the darkness that falleth on Earth 
in this day. I have prepared places of 
darkness in the etherean firmament, and 
places of light; and My corporeal worlds 
must travel through them. And these 
places of darkness and places of light are 
as changes of seasons for My harvests. 
Now Earth is passing through deep 
darkness, for the races of men must receive 
new growth corporeally for things that 
shall come after. As they absorb from the 
a'ji of My places in this age, so also do 
their souls become full of superstition and 
darkness. 



Thus went Earth into great darkness 
during the last six hundred years of the 
cycle of Thor, and there was no harvest 
from her for the etherean heavens. But 
the spirits deserted atmospherea in mill- 
ions and millions, and went down to the 
earth, to dwell with mortals. The light of 
Jehovih was shut out from men except the 
Thins. Thus ambition for improvement 
was at an end. They became as drones 
and vagabonds; and when they died their 
spirits continued to lie about in the places 
of their mortal life. And many of these 
spirits persuaded mortals to suicide, and 
they killed themselves by thousands and 
tens of thousands, and men had not 
courage to endure anything. They 
wanted to be with the spirits of the 
dead, to talk to them, to see them, and to 
be rid of earth trials. Neither had the 
spirits that congregated on earth any 
knowledge of the higher heavens. They 
did nothing useful to heaven or earth, not 
even to themselves. 

Thus ended the cycle of Thor; three 
thousand two hundred years. 



© 



LORDS' RECORD FOR CYCLE OK THOR 



CHAPTER I. 

The Lord foresaw that the knowledge 
of one generation could be handed down 
to the next by altars and temples, and by 
idols and images, and by painted signs and 
engraved words. 

The Lord said: Behold, I establish my- 
self with my chosen in written words. 
Now the time has come when all the races 
of men on Earth shall be made to know 
me. And the Lord commanded man to 
make stone and wooden images of every- 
thing upon the earth, and also engravings. 

And the Lord sent his angels down to 
man to inspire him in the workmanship of 
images and engravings, and man thus ac- 
complished the commandments of the 
Lord. 

The Lord said: As every living crea- 
ture has a name, so shall the image thereof 
have the same name. 

And the meaning of the images and en- 
gravings were as follows: A picture of a 
man was a man; a picture of a tree repre- 
sented a tree; a picture of a bird repre- 
sented a bird; and even so was everything 
represented by its own image. 

The Lord said: Thou shalt make the 
picture of a spear; and when thou desires 
to show which way a man goeth, thou shalt 
add to the graven image the likeness of a 
spear; and the way it pointeth shall show 
the way the man is going. Even so shalt 
thou express the going of everything. 

Thus man in every region of the earth 
made a written language. The Lord said: 
This shall be called Panic language, be- 
cause it is made of earthly images. 

The Lord said: As in the olden time 
man named all things according to their 
own spoken words and sounds uttered, so 
in the days of Thor came to the Ghans the 
written words of everything on earth and 
in heaven. 

When man had written the names of all 
things on earth, the Lord said: Thou shalt 
write the name of thy Creator. 

Then man inquired: How can I find a 
word to express the Creator? I know no 
name save the names I have already made. 



If I could hear the Creator, or see Him, 
then I could write His name. 

The Lord said: Thou hast named the 
wind which thou hast not seen: wh'sh. 
Name thou thy Creator. 

Then man drew a circle and called it 
O, for it represented that which was with- 
out beginning or end, and which contained 
all within itself. Then man drew a line 
cutting through the circle from east to 
west, to represent the light of the east 
traveling to the west. Then man drew a 
line from below upward, cutting the circle 
at right angles with the horizontal, to rep- 
resent the one road of all things from the 
bottom upward forever. The first line 
man called E, for it was the name the 
wind speaketh in the leaves. And the sec- 
ond line he called IH. And when man had 
completed the engraving, he called it 
E-O-IH. 

The Lord said: Keep thou His name 
and the image thereof a secret betwixt the 
rab'bahs and thy Lord. Neither shalt thou 
utter it aloud, for it is sacred. Betwixt 
thou and thy Creator stands Thy Lord. 
Behold, 1 am the key of life and death; 
through me shalt thou unlock all the mys- 
teries of heaven and earth. Neither shall 
my rab'bah, nor my prophets, call on the 
name of any spirit, except the Lord. 

And when man had attained to the 
knowledge of a written language, the, Lord 
said: Now shall he have books, and learn 
to keep records after the manner of the 
angels of heaven. And the Lord sent an- 
gels to man in different places, teaching 
them how to make books of skins, bark 
and cloth. 

CHAPTER II. 

In those days the lands of Jaffeth and 
Shem and Ham were inhabited by millions 
of I'huans and Ghans; but the countries 
lying between them were inhabited by I'hu- 
ans only. And the Lord spake to the peo- 
ple of Ham, saying: 

Behold, there are two other countries 
inhabited by kin of your kin, flesh of your 



116 



CYCLE OF THOR 



LORDS' RECORD 



flesh; they are Ghans also. And they speak 
and write with Panic words even as ye do. 

And the Hamites inquired: How far 
are the two other countries? Where are 
they? 

The Lord said: Gather together two 
thousand men and women; provide ye oxen 
and asses and all things requisite for a 
journey of four years; and I will lead you 
to your brethren, whose forefathers were 
also saved from the flood, by the little sa- 
cred people, the I'hins. 

The Hamites obeyed the Lord, having 
provided themselves as commanded, and 
started on their journey to Jaffeth and 
Shem in two companies of a thousand 
each. 

Then spake the Lord to the people of 
Jaffeth, saying: Behold, there are two 
other countries inhabited by kin of your 
kin, flesh of your flesh; and they speak and 
write the Panic words even as you do. 

The Jaffeth'eyans said: How far are 
the two other countries? Where are they? 

The Lord said: Gather together two 
thousand men and women; provide ye all 
things requisite for a journey of four years; 
and I will lead you to your brethren, whose 
forefathers were also saved from the flood, 
by the little sacred people, the I'hins. 

The Jaffeth'eyans obeyed the Lord, 
and having provided themselves as com- 
manded, started for Ham and Shem, in 
two companies of a thousand each. 

Then spake the Lord to the people of 
Shem in the same way, telling them of 
Jaffeth and Ham. And they also equipped 
themselves in two companies and started 
for Ham and Jaffeth. 

Thus the Lord inspired these three sep- 
arate peoples to go and visit one another, 
in the same period of time. And the Lord 
said unto them ere they started: 

Very fierce and savage are the I'huans 
who inhabit the wilderness on the way. 
Behold, they eat the flesh of both man and 
beast. But they will not harm the I'hins. 
Therefore, O my beloved, on your long 
journey take two score of I'hins. Through 
the I'hins can the Lord speak all languages, 
even the language of the barbarians, the 
I'huans. 

So after a journey of four years, the mi- 
grants from each country came to the place 



of their destination. And by their written 
and spoken words they knew one another. 
And the Lord inspired them to leave 
records of the journeys. And in all 
these countries there were made images 
of stone and copper, and engravings there- 
on of the children of Noe, and of the flood, 
and of the tribes of Shem, Ham and Jaf- 
feth. 

CHAPTER III. 

The migrants tarried in the countries 
they visited for two years, going much 
about, showing themselves, and relating 
the history of the country whence they 
came. And the Lord spoke to the mi- 
grants in their respective places, saying: 
The time is come for your departure. Re- 
turn to your own country, and there relate 
the glories of this other country. So they 
returned to their own homes. 

Now during the travel of the migrants, 
the Lord spake to them every day, through 
the I'hin priests. The Lord said: Keep 
together, O my beloved. Ye shall not be 
lost. 

But the journey was so long that many 
lost faith, and were not heedful of the 
words of the Lord. And some of them 
strayed off among the I'huans and were 
lost. 

Of the six thousand migrants, there 
were lost in all, three hundred and eighty- 
six people, men and women. Some were 
lost in one place and some in another. 

The Lord said: Sing ye songs of la- 
mentation for those who are lost, and this 
shall become a matter of record to the end 
of the world. And the time shall come 
when the Lord shall reveal the mystery of 
this day. 

So, when the people had returned to 
their respective places, they all sang songs 
of lamentation for the people that were 
lost. 

The Lord said: I have shown you the 
far-off people. I have marked out the 
road. Keep the road open between the 
great countries that I have shown you. 
One expedition shall start to the far-off 
countries every eleven years. And if per- 
chance ye find my chosen, bring them 
home. And on all the camping places of 
your journey ye shall build an altar to the 



CYCLE OF THOR 



LORDS' RECORD 



117 



Lord. Ye shall build it in a circle, and the 
congregation shall sit in the circle thereof, 
and the priest shall sit in the midst. And 
through my priests I will speak words of 
wisdom and comfort. But in all your jour- 
neys, keep aloof from the I'huans, the bar- 
barians, the man-eaters; for they have not 
kept my commandments but have mixed 
with the Druks. And carry with you on all 
your expeditions I'hin priests. In all your 
journeys ye shall encounter your brethren 
coming and going, who dwell in the far-off 
countries. And that ye may distinguish 
them, keep secret the sacred password of 
the rites of Emethachavah. 



So in the beginning of the cycle of Thor 
the Lord opened up many ways for the de- 
liverance of the tribes of men on Earth, 
and man prospered in the way of righteous- 
ness for a long time. 

Then darkness came upon the races of 
men; millions of them returned to savag- 
ery. And angels of darkness came upon 
the earth, many of them taking upon them- 
selves the semblance of corporeal forms, 
and dwelling with mortals, and engaging 
in practices whereof it is unlawful to write 
or speak. So that at the termination of 
three thousand years, the lands on Earth 
were covered with darkness. 




Cycle ok Osire 



CHAPTER I. 

Now Earth came into the dominions 
of Osire, Son of Jehovih, God of Lowtsin, 
an etherean world, where his reign a hun- 
dred thousand years had illumined many a 
corporeal star; who ruled in Lowtsin most 
amiably with equals, but was high strung 
with impatience toward self-willed ignor- 
ance. The Voice of Jehovih spake to him 
on his throne, saying: 

Osire, My Son, go forth and grasp the 
perishing Earth in her debauched flight, and 
proclaim thyself with uplifted rod; for as 
an indulgent father treads softly by his in- 
fant son, guiding him tenderly, and with 
wholesome advice, so have I through My 
Gods and Chiefs, coaxed the red star along 
for many thousands of years. But as a 
wise father turneth to his truant son, of lat- 
er years, commanding, so do I now through 
thee, stretch My hand over Earth and her 
heavens. 

She lieth deep buried in anarchy, and 
false Gods and Lords are despoiling her 
heavens with war, and casting down on the 
troubled Earth her millions of spirits of 
darkness. As driftwood on a surging sea, 
now riseth high on towering waves, and 
quickly plungeth down in the roaring wa- 
ters, to rise again and fall, and repeat for- 
ever the ceaseless struggle, so do the spir- 
its of the dead of earth, rise in heaven to 
be plunged back again in unending toil and 
darkness on the earth. 

My most holy God and his Lords are 
powerless to divert the terrible heedless- 
ness of men and angels. 

Osire summoned a million swift mes- 
sengers, well trained in the rise and fall of 
worlds, and bade them go to the red star, 
Earth, with great speed, promising suc- 
cor to God and his Lords of Earth, then 
return quickly back and report to Jeho- 
vih's throne in Lowtsin. 

When they had departed, Osire called 
together his Council, and told them the 
story that had stirred his soul with com- 
passion; of the spirits newborn in the at- 



mospherea of Earth who persisted in bur- 
rowing their souls down in hada, heedless 
of the call and persuasion of a loving God 
and Lords. 

Jehovih's Light overspread the throne 
of Osire, and curtained the Gods and God- 
desses around so that all were clear to 
comprehend the full history of Earth 
and her heavens. Yet not one soul moved 
to answer with haste, but slowly one by 
one, the speakers, each a representative of 
a thousand Gods and Goddesses, gave ut- 
terance to Jehovih's light upon them. And 
when the multitude had spoken, Osire rose 
up, and stood in the throne of Jehovih, 
mantled in white, like one new illumined 
with a great change in his long life's ad- 
ministration. To the Gods and Goddesses 
he spake: 

The veil of the arc of Se'ing uprises be- 
fore our hallowed shrine. Step by step, all 
things advance by Jehovih's will, and new 
roadways in etherea open up fields unex- 
plored by traveling stars; so onward, step 
by step, our own endless realm takes the 
course of manhood in its giant strides. 
By you have the worlds of corpor and es 
been blessed for hundreds of thousands of 
years. Your busy scenes in an old routine 
change now, and an Orian arc cometh. 
As an oscillatory star feedeth itself 
with a change of seasons, so hath 
Jehovih coursed the wave of his trav- 
eling suns, to give our etherean realms an 
endless life, diversified by change of scenes 
and constant surprises, which are the glory 
of the soul. 

As thus Osire, the Mighty, with a soul 
full of words, engraved by Jehovih's hand, 
discoursed on the glories awaiting the high 
worlds, where he and his brother Gods and 
Archangels dwelt in the All Perfect, there 
came back, hastening, as with Omnipo- 
tence impelled, the swift messengers from 
the slow Earth, with their etherean arrow 
ship shooting like a meteor on fire. Then 
came Hagan, spokesman of the messen- 
gers, before Jehovih's throne, his mantle 



CYCLE OF OSIRE 



119 



turned back, and his eyes radiant with sure 
knowledge, saluting in Jehovih's name. 
He. said: 

Osire, Jehovih's Son, and ye Gods and 
Goddesses, as the All Light gave Voice to 
our far-seeing God of Lowtsin, so stand I 
here to corroborate in Jehovih's name. 
The day of sweet persuasion to the Earth- 
born is done. Jehovih led the I'hins in 
fortuitous paths by gentle words and love, 
but left them weak before the warring ele- 
ments. But now Jehovih hath provided a 
race called the Ghans who can and will 
master the earth and subdue it. The Ghans 
are like untamed lions, born conquerors, 
with capacity to learn and reason, with faith 
in mastery, but not faith in Jehovih. As a 
man, having two sons, the one low-strung 
and passionless, the other in ceaseless mis- 
chief and desire for havoc, so stand the 
twain, the I'hins and the Ghans, on the 
earth. And when they die and enter hea- 
ven, the first, the I'hins, go as they are 
directed; but the second, the Ghans, still 
full of inherent stubbornness and self will, 
unheed the God and Lords; but back to 
the earth these well-formed and stately 
souls return, and set up heavenly kingdoms 
of their own, in darkness, and fain pursue 
with most relentless zeal their former ene- 
mies. And by their loud clamor they 
break up the kingdoms of Jehovih's Lords, 
and despoil them, proclaiming heaven and 
earth free to all. Thus the hapless souls 
in the lower heaven have been persuaded 
to fly from the hospitals and nurseries 
back to mortals, and there fasten them- 
selves as fetals, shutting their eyes against 
all further light. 

So mortals have given themselves up to 
doing the wills of the spirits of darkness, 
making spoil and desolation a holiday. 

We then came to God, Jehovih's Son, 
whose throne lieth in Gau, and he said: 
Take this message to Osire, Jehovih's Son, 
God of Lowtsin: Greeting, in the Father's 
name. Behold, the arc of Se'ing is at hand. 
Send thou, O God, a ship, and deliver my 
hosts, four thousand million. And after 
that, in due salutation, we hastened hither. 

CHAPTER II. 

Osire said: In written words will I set 
down explicit laws for these unruly false 
Gods, the Ghans, and give then bondage 



like the people of other worlds. O that 
they had had discipline before, instead of 
sweet persuasion. 

Send ye an es'elene, with suitable at- 
tendants, to deliver God, his Lords, and 
their hosts, the Brides and Bridegrooms 
of Jehovih; and leave Earth in darkness 
thirty days. 

And command my builders to provide 
me a ship for my hosts, and let the heralds 
go forth in Se'ing, anouncing that I am to 
visit Earth with fifty million helpers. 

Say'ah, scribe of C'taran, thus described 
the scene. Osire had spoken; his word 
had gone forth. Heaven was stirred up. 
Gods and Goddesses knew that new work 
was at hand. Earth had sons at last worthy 
the will and service of Gods. Osire, im- 
petuous and much loved God of Lowtsin, 
was going to visit these Earth sons. 

Say'ah said: When some Gods give 
command, the people move along; but 
when Osire decreed, the whole heaven of 
Lowtsin ran. And quickly now, the .man- 
dates were fulfilled. The ships were built; 
first, the es'elene, commanded by Yok, and 
equipped with five million souls, and start- 
ed off in haste to Earth to deliver God 
and his Lords, and such Brides and Bride- 
grooms as were prepared for the resurrec- 
tion. Next, the ship, Buer, an adavaysit, 
built for Osire and his hosts, fifty million. 

Osire said: Let swift messengers be 
stationed along the roadways; and they 
shall announce the proceedings of my Gods 
and Lords, and their whereabouts. And 
even so was the order of heaven executed. 

In due time Osire left his high place 
and with his hosts in the etherean ship of 
fire, started out toward Earth at break- 
neck speed; for such was the disposition 
of this most determined God. Nor halted 
he at Chinvat, the boundary of Earth's 
vortex, but sped on with banners and cur- 
tains flying, and martial music to stir up 
the souls of his hosts. Down he came to 
the earth with his fire ship, and sped round 
it, to learn its weak points; and next rose 
up a little to view the atmospherean spir- 
its who had presumed defiance toward 
high heaven. In the place where Gau had 
been (whose God had ruled by love for 
eight hundred years, and was unappreciat- 
ed by the crude boasters, the unlearned 
druj), there now stood castles and man- 



120 



CYCLE OF OSIRE 



sions of the false God, Utaya, round 
whom a million sentinels armed for battle 
were stationed to protect and do his will. 

Hither came Osire and over the battle- 
ments raised his ship, and brought it into 
the arena of the Council of hada. Then, 
halting, bade his marshals proclaim his 
voice: Come forth, O Utaya; behold my 
power. Thy sentinels stand appalled. 1 
raised my hosts by higher law, and stand 
on my feet in thy citadel. 

Utaya said: Strange and audacious God. 
From what unmannerly region hast thou 
sprung? Know thou, Gods should kneel 
outside my walls and beg to know my will 
for an audience. Then Osire determined 
to hear his arguments, and thus spake: 

From Great Jehovih, I am come. I 
kneel to none save Him. To do His will 
in reverence am I come in power and ma- 
jesty. But erst I demolish thy pitiful 
walls, and cast thee down, suppliant, to do 
my will, tell me wherein excusest thou thy- 
self to turn from the exalted heavens and 
build here a kingdom of slaves for thy 
own glory? 

Utaya said: O thou jester! Erst I de- 
molish thee and thy ship, and enslave thy 
hosts as mine, I will then, pacify thy worth- 
less curiosity, that thou mayest hereafter 
know thy lesson well. But first, thou hast 
mocked me for my slaves. What more are 
thy hosts? Hast thou not tampered with 
their too willing love by stories of thy un- 
seen Jehovih, and persuaded them to suffer 
thee to lead them on to glory? Now I de- 
clare before thee, there is no Jehovih, no 
All Person. Hence, thy philosophy is 
founded on falsehood. The space is be- 
fore us; the worlds are before us; there is 
nothing more. Let him who will, assume 
a kingdom; let him who will, be a slave. 
I am Apollo. 

Osire said: When I shall have cast 
thee down, thou mightest say it was merely 
because it so happened, that one was 
stronger than another. So, then, that thou 
mayest remember my words are more in 
wisdom than in blind force, hear me whilst 
thou can, for it is not long that I can talk 
to such as thou. He who admitteth the uni- 
verse moveth in harmony and discipline, 
already admitteth the All Person, Jehovih. 
He who denieth the All Person, Jehovih, 
denieth unity in all things. If all things 



are not in unity, then are all things divided, . 
one against another. Wherefore, if there 
be greater strength in unison than in isola- 
tion, then therein hath unison won the bat- 
tle and become the All Person. 

Touching the matter of slaves; there is 
but one Master; and He ruleth over all; 
but it lieth in the power of each and every 
soul to attune himself to the All Person, 
which is freedom. Of such are my hosts. 
Thy slaves attune themselves to thee. They 
cannot rise higher than thou. My hosts 
have the universe for their model. Be- 
cause thou canst not find the cause of thy 
coming into life, why not say thou: A 
name I will call Him, and it shall be Jeho- 
vih? 

And now Utaya began with a long dis- 
course, which Osire waited not to hear, 
but turned to his marshals, saying: Break 
ye down the walls of Gau, and raise me ten 
thousand pillars of fire. I will here rebuild 
Jehovih's kingdom. Let the es'enaurs 
chant, All Hail to Osire, God of Earth! 

At which the astonished Utaya stood si- 
lently, as if to know if it were real, or but a 
frenzied dream, that any one should deny 
his power which had been established for 
three hundred years. Out of the ship came 
the hosts, and without waiting to be as- 
signed their part, every one in time to the 
music took their place in the citadel. Osire 
strode forward, and by the majesty of his 
power, overturned the throne of Utaya, 
the false God, and heaped the rubbish 
aside. Then stretching forth his hand, he 
said: 

In Thy name, O Jehovih, and by vir- 
tue of Thy power in me vested, do I here 
command the elements to do my will, and 
raise me a throne worthy of Thy Immortal 
Son. And quickly the substance of a 
throne was brought to the place by an un- 
seen power, and Osire formed it into a 
throne, and hung it round with transparent 
tapestry, woven with the elements of silver 
and gold. 

Meanwhile the laborers of Osire over- 
turned the walls of Utaya's city, and set 
free his millions of slaves, even whilst 
Utaya's officers, panic-stricken, dropped on 
their knees, pleading for pity, or fled to 
the earth. And Utaya, conjecturing the 
worthlessness of his stuff, compared to that 
which descended from the higher heavens, 



CYCLE OF OSIRE 



121 



shouted and called in vain to his most 
steadfast devotees. 

Osire's work could be compared to a 
man overturning the toys of a child. And 
Utaya, to prove his faith in himself, stood 
sole spectator, unmoved, but helpless, won- 
dering what would happen next. But now 
Osire, with no words of explanation or ex- 
cuse, ascended the new throne and gave 
the sign of Jehovih's name, which was an- 
swered by his mighty hosts; when, from 
the vault of heaven above there descended 
mantles of light, matchless in brilliancy. 

Utaya was himself illumined, and all his 
former evil deeds and cruelty stood out as 
if in huge black spots; and round on every 
side stood millions of souls, all pure, and 
transparent, washed by the ordeal of time 
and holy works. But Utaya was not all 
evil, or short in owning an honorable ad- 
versary; and so, quickly comprehending 
his awful plight in the midst of purity, first 
let fall a tear, which in pity blinded him 
from witnessing further his dire humilia- 
tion, and next weeping like a beaten 
school-boy, he cried out: 

Enough. Enough. Thou God. Take 
me hence from thy dissolving fire. I need- 
ed but to witness some great God's deed 
to find proof of mine own worthlessness. 

But Osire was not new to such a situa- 
tion, and proceeded with the affairs of hea- 
ven, appointing officers and laborers, and 
apportioning his High Council to do Jeho- 
vih's will, and so left Utaya alone a while 
in his own torments. 

O give me relief, cried Utaya, thou God 
of heaven and earth. I consume. I burn 
in purity's flame. For pity's sake, turn 
down the consuming fire. 

Osire halted from his labors long 
enough to answer thus: All Light cannot 
cease for convenience of one man. Clothe 
thyself, O false one, with robes of dark- 
ness, and hide thy cruel butcheries. Thou 
that wouldst have made slaves of my hosts, 
should be made of holier metal than to 
plead for help. Behold, not one of thy 
slaves have I taken, or asked to bow in 
obedience. To the righteous, the worlds 
are free. Only evil men and evil Gods 
quail before Jehovih's ceaseless fire. 

Meanwhile Utaya drew close around 
himself his glittering robes, and pulled his 
flashing crown down over his scalded eyes, 



which worthless fabric but fed the fury of 
the All Light that shone from the throne 
of God, Osire's resting place. The slaves 
of Utaya had fled, or lay piteously pros- 
trate, speechless with fear and wonder. 
Over these the hosts of Osire watched, and 
hastily took them beyond the now rapidly 
rising pillars of fire, where they were tem- 
porarily housed. 

Still the voice of Utaya rang aloud for 
help and pity; but to him none came. Then 
he saw that the prostrate victims fared bet- 
ter, and were less conspicuous. So Utaya 
cast himself prostrate, along with the rub- 
bish of his former throne. Then Osire 
sent Yesta, sister of Atonas, Goddess of 
Opsa, in etherea, to rescue him, and mantle 
him around with balm from the upper hea- 
vens. 

So Yesta and her band took Utaya 
hence, far beyond the boundaries of the 
newly built Gau. 

CHAPTER III. 

Osire spake from the throne, saying: 
Proclaim in the east and west, and north 
and south, that which has transpired in 
Gau. Go tell the false Gods and Lords in 
hada that Osire has come. 

Messengers started forth in every quar- 
ter of the world, inspired by the impetuous 
utterances of the commanding God. And 
so, half breathless, and in hastening speed, 
these young Gods and Goddesses, the mes- 
sengers, dropped in upon the Lordly de- 
famers of holiness, and told the tale of the 
overturned Gau where proud Utaya fell. 
And they inspired the false rulers to ex- 
pect even a worse calamity. 

Osire called his council, and appointed 
new places, with new officers, having no- 
thing in common with all past administra- 
tions of Gods of Earth. So far, these ap- 
pointments were from his etherean hosts, 
and moved by the fire of his own energy. 
Some were to build, some to survey and 
lay the course of streets, and places of hab- 
itation, and yet others to remove the old 
hospitals, nurseries and factories, and 
make way for new ones. 

There were millions of souls now scat- 
tered and lost in dire confusion, struggling 
in the outside darkness, whence rose a con- 
stant wail of fear and torment, strangely 
wild, compared to the glorious light fast 



122 



CYCLE OF OSIRE 



spreading from the rising pillars of fire 
about the throne of God. Osire's hosts, 
fifty millions, attuned to harmony, and pre- 
cision, were proceeding fast with their 
labor; not one but knew his part. 

Here, a road. Osire would speak; or 
with his hand command, An otevan to 
those helpless slaves, and his etherean 
workmen rushed to fulfill his commands. 
No loss of time or space to inquire how 
the matter should be done; for heaven's 
trained workmen had learned the power of 
concentrated effort, and the power of 
knowledge by which the elements stoop to 
do their wills. 

Jehovih saith: To learn the elements 
and master them is to become a God or 
Goddess. How, then, may the false Gods, 
by evil deeds, fortify their thrones? My 
etherean hosts come unarmed, and by a 
breath blow away their mighty kingdoms. 

And so it was in Gau. Only one Earth 
day had come and gone since Utaya reign- 
ed over a hundred million slaves, who daily 
brought tribute up from the earth to orna- 
ment his crown-like city; and now the 
dawn of another world stood supreme in 
the demolished kingdom.. 

What more pitiful sight than to see the 
former slaves still loyal to their deposed 
Utaya; coming to him in his banish- 
ment, fifty millions, swearing terrible oaths 
of fidelity to him forever. For so the 
Great Spirit created man, to even wed 
himself to misery and ignorance, to prove 
a most foolish love. And but for Utaya's 
guardians his very slaves had smothered 
him, in desperate effort to manifest fidelity. 

Then spake Yesta to him, saying: Raise 
thy voice against this unseemly crowd, and 
be commander still, at least to save thy- 
self. Remember how Jehovih gives this 
lesson to mortals, to say to evil: Away! 
For to allow first one and then another to 
fasten upon thee is as much a crime as a 
debauched passion unchecked. Bid them 
begone. For love of self, is a gift from 
Great Jehovih. Be thou thyself. It will be 
better for them also. 

Utaya, struggling, said: Alas, fair an- 
gel, these were my slaves. The hardest 
blow of all is their acknowledged love. 
The fire of the throne of Osire was tame to 
this. For hundreds of years, I gave these 
creatures pangs and wretchedness, and now 



they give me love. I cannot drive them 
hence. 

And Utaya bowed his head, sobbing, 
for such sudden great truths turned all his 
judgment into the darkness of his past 
deeds and wickedness, even whilst crowd- 
ing close on every side, the fifty million 
kept up their ceaseless assurances of endless 
love. Nor was there any way open to flight 
from their ignorant jargon and foul breath. 
So when Yesta saw how helplessly Utaya 
had given up, she raised her hand, saying: 
What shall I do, O Jehovih? 

And the Light descended, and Jehovih 
spake through Yesta, saying: Flesh of 
My flesh, created I man. From Mine own 
spirit gave I man a spirit also; and unto 
all men alike gave I all things in My 
worlds. But some men are not content 
with what I gave, but ask for more, even 
that they may have their fellows for sub- 
jects. To these I have given in answer to 
their prayers. Behold thou, then, O man, 
why seekest thou to put away to-day even 
what, a day since, thou didst pray for? 
They are as good to-day as yesterday. 
Thou hast said: Man can make himself 
whatsoever he will. So, thy Creator is 
worthless to thee. Love is the lightest of 
all burdens. If thou desirest not to carry 
their love, how didst thou carry their hate 
so long? Nevertheless, if thou desirest, 
thou canst put them away. They are thine, 
to do as thou wilt. 

Utaya said: How can I put them away? 
I cannot reason with fifty millions. Nay, 
before I persuaded a score, the first ones, 
so ignorant, would forget what I said. 
Tell me, then, thou Goddess, what shall I 
do to free myself from this great multi- 
tude? 

Yesta said: Call not on me, but on thy 
Creator; and not to be freed for thine own 
good, but for wisdom to do some good 
unto them over whom thou hast so long 
been a remorseless tyrant. These are a 
small curse to thee, compared to thine 
own judgment, for from thyself thou canst 
never flee. Thou shalt undo thy selfish 
deeds, which thou hast practiced so long. 
So. turn thou at once, and make oath to 
Him who made thee, that from this time 
forth thou wilt do good unto others with 
all thy wisdom and strength. 



CYCLE OF OSIRE 



123 



Utaya said: Alas, thy words are wise 
and holy, but I have no faith. 

Yesta said: Say not this. Thy words 
are another bondage on thy soul. To say, 
I have no faith, is to imprison thyself 
away from the All Light. Come, haste, or 
I leave thee; for if thou profess not faith, 
why shall I longer labor with thee? Say 
thou, I have faith in Thee, O Jehovih. I 
can, I will raise up these whom I have 
cast down. 

Utaya wept, and thus answered: O that 
I had faith like unto thee. But for long 
years I taught myself that prayer to Jeho- 
vih was not required of one so great and 
strong as I. Alas, I smothered out the fire. 
And, amidst his sobs, Utaya fell prostrate 
at Yesta's feet. 

Quickly now she raised her slender 
hand toward high heaven, saying: O Je- 
hovih, by Thy power vested in me, I here 
encircle this, Thy prostrate child, with ad- 
amantine light. Down from above there 
came phosporescent flames of light, and 
Yesta drew a circle round about, while the 
multitude stood back and looked on in 
wonder and fear but the surging mass be- 
yond pressed forward, shouting: Utaya! 
Utaya! 

Little by little, Yesta extended the light, 
and her assistants put up a structure to 
guard the place, so that in a little while it 
was like a miniature throne in heaven. 
Yesta then assumed the throne and so 
took command, placing helpless Utaya by 
her side. Meanwhile, her assistants sped 
through the multitude, making roadways, 
and selecting out the most intelligent of 
the former slaves and making guards of 
them. 

Yesta said to Utaya: Now will I give 
thee a lesson in righteousness; for thou 
shalt educate and develop all this host, thy 
former slaves, to thine own level, before 
thou shalt be raised. Think not it is easy 
to assume to be a God or a Lord, or even 
a mortal king. They that make servants 
of others must also raise them up to be an- 
gels of light. Heaven is just, as well as 
bountiful. To whom Jehovih hath given 
bountifully, it is commanded he shall give 
bountifully. For hundreds of years thou 
hast had the service of these hapless crea- 
tures; so shalt thou now serve them by 
making them intelligent men and women. 



Yea, till the lowest of them are thine own 
equals, of whom thou canst be proud, and 
say before the Father: Behold, my sister! 
Behold, my brother! — thou, Utaya, shalt 
not be free. 

Utaya said: I perceive thy words are 
from the All Highest. This is justice. I 
perceive now that whilst I rated myself su- 
preme judge of right and wrong, I judged 
with partiality to myself. Yea, without an 
All Highest, I perceive there can be no jus- 
tice in heaven or earth. O Thou All 
Light, how can I approach Thee? I have 
been feeding myself with an endless poi- 
son; my darkness was my fortress. Teach 
me the way, O thou angel of Light. What- 
soever Jehovih wills, that will I do, from 
this time onward, with all my wisdom and 
strength. 

So Yesta restored order, and divided 
the multitude into many parts, and sent 
officers amongst them to select and assort 
them, so that as soon as Osire should allot 
asylums and schools for them, they could 
be taken thereto. 

CHAPTER IV. 

Osire lost no time, but installed officers 
in Gau, and established his Council in as 
short a time as possible, crowning Ote 
God on the throne temporarily whilst he 
himself went forth to other regions to 
overturn false Gods and Lords. Leaving 
a sufficient guard and council, Osire, with 
a host of twenty million, went westward in 
atmospherea, over the central part of the 
great north lands, where Wotchak, a false 
God, was established with a hundred mill- 
ion slaves, to do his will. 

Wotchak, having been advised by mes- 
sengers of Osire's approach to Earth's 
heavens, supposing Osire to be from some 
remote star, and not knowing there were 
etherean worlds in the firmament, had 
walled his kingdom round with a new wall, 
and doubly fortified his throne, and attired 
himself and officers gaudily, hoping to 
overawe the coming God. 

To Wotchak Osire came, and waited 
not to be announced, nor halted for his 
sentinels, driving his ship straight up to 
the throne. 

Halt, halt! cried the astonished Wot- 
chak. Who dares to profane my throne 
and set all the rules of virtuous Gods at 



124 



CYCLE OF OSIBE 



defiance? Come down from thy ship and 
crawl on thy belly to thy sovereign God. 
Know thou, I am great Apollo. 

But Osire deigned only to say: By 
what authority hast thou made slaves of 
Jehovih's sons and daughters to augment 
thy self glory? 

And not waiting a reply, stepped down 
before the throne, even while a thousand 
well drilled ethereans stood with him in 
the form of a star. Then the upper light 
descended in great brilliancy. Wotchak 
was frightened, and fled from his throne, 
and all his council with him. Then spake 
Osire, saying to his hosts: 

Suffer not this false God and his council 
to escape. Encircle them around and hold 
them, to know my will and the decree of 
Jehovih. Presently, the ethereans brought 
back Wotchak, who cried out: O let me 
go! Take all, but let me go! What am I 
to thee? 

Osire answered him: Such hath been 
the history of these heavens. In ages 
gone, the usurping false Gods were suf- 
fered to go their way, leaving their former 
subjects helpless on the hands of the eth- 
erean hosts. That day is past. I am come 
to make such Gods know that their fate 
and responsibilities rest on the decrees of 
the Higher One, even the Creator, Jeho- 
vih. Behold, thou hast cast down and 
blighted a hundred million of Jehovih's 
children, making slaves of them to do thy 
will. As thou wert the cause of their fallen 
state, from liberty to bondage, so, now, 
thou shalt redeem them to freedom, wis- 
dom and truth. 

Whilst Osire spake, the proper officers 
let fall the light from the upper heavens, 
the like of which Wotchak had never seen. 
Presently all things became transparent, 
and the enraged Wotchak, foreseeing 
trouble, thus answered: 

Accuse me not, Thou audacious God. 
These, my council, urged me hundreds of 
years ago to my course, only praying they 
might remain my close advisers. I was 
their tool, and, if thou desirest justice, 
make them to feel the sting of repentant 
labor. Let them have my slaves. I want 
them not. I have been a most honest, up- 
right God. 

And now his counselors accused one 
another, all of them heaping the blame on 



Wotchak. Lighter and lighter grew the 
etherean flames, from which there was no 
concealment; and all their former false- 
hoods and cruel words and evil deeds, 
were unveiled, disclosing souls dark and 
hideous, with long covered up crimes, now 
made bare for the gaze of every eye. 

The scene brought the curious slaves in 
millions, and they all reassured the suffer- 
ing false God of their love and loyalty. 
And when Wotchak looked and beheld the 
abject wretches who claimed him as their 
worshipful God, he cried out: Enough! 
Enough! Unfeeling God! Thou art come 
in pretended right and peace; and because 
of thy power imposes on me and my coun- 
cil torments more terrible than I ever 
gave to slave of mine. 

Then Osire by waving his hand, caused 
his hosts to cast aside the false God's 
throne, with all its glittering gems, and to 
scatter abroad relics for the multitude. 
And now three pillars of fire were erect- 
ed and stood beside Osire and his attend- 
ants, which took all the strength and cour- 
age out of Wotchak and his confederates, 
and they crouched down at Osire's feet. 

Osire called Itu, saying: Take them 
without, and hand them over to their 
slaves a while. And Itu and his guard 
gathered them from the light and bore 
them hence. Quickly, now, Osire officered 
this newly conquered place in heaven, and 
called it Autat, signifying, foundation of 
perishable laws. And on a new throne, 
appointed Luce as temporary God, giving 
him acouncil of one thousand ethereans. 
And now Osire drew the plan for roads, 
and temples, and schools, and hospitals, 
and nurseries, and all such other habita- 
tions as are required by spirits newborn in 
heaven, leaving orders to have them com- 
pleted by a given time. 

Next, Osire ordered the divisions and 
selections to be made in the now scattered 
hosts of atmosphereans, and to have them 
all arrested and put into their proper 
places. These things he left in the charge 
of God, Luce, to be carried out. 

Far out in the plateau, Itu and his at- 
tendants carried Wotchak and his confed- 
erates, followed by forty million of his for- 
mer slaves. There Itu left Wotchak and 
his people, and Itu and his attendants went 
aside to witness what should transpire. 



CYCLE OF OSIRE 



125 



And now Osire departed with his ship 
and steered southward over the land of 
Shem, coming to a place in the lower hea- 
ven called Vibrahj, signifying resplendent, 
where ruled the false God Daveas, who had 
eight hundred million slaves, a thousand 
Lords and ten thousand Governors. And 
even as Osire rushed in headlong upon the 
other false Gods, so came he with his fire 
ship into the great city of Vibrahj, at this 
time the largest city in the lower heaven. 
Daveas had been warned by his sentinels, 
and so came to the front of his capital just 
in time to see the fearless Osire alight in 
front of the Council House. 

CHAPTER V. 

Osire said: In Jehovih's name, peace 
be unto thee. But Daveas replied: Nay, 
in the name of Apollo, who I am. How 
darest thou to approach my resting place 
except on thy belly? For four hundred 
years the honor of my kingdom has been 
revered by all visiting Gods; but thou com- 
est as a barbarian. Down, wretch, before I 
have thee bound and cast into prison. 

Osire said: Why should I not come 
before thee? Behold the Great Spirit cre- 
ated the whole universe for His sons and 
daughters. By what right hast thou usurp- 
ed any portion of it? And whence thy au- 
thority to bid me kneel to thee? But if 
thou canst show me wherein thou hast one 
just claim to enslave these people, rather 
let thy argument run thither, for I am come 
in the name of the Father to liberate them, 
that they may be prepared for the second 
and third resurrections. 

Daveas said: Think not that I have 
neglected to prepare for rebellious Gods 
like thee. Behold my millions of subjects! 
What is thy handful? Verily, I tell thee, I 
have prisons large enough to hold thee and 
thy hosts. Neither flatter thyself that I am 
ignorant. For two hundred years I work- 
ed in the so-called resurrections. I made 
myself a slave to the multitude, giving all 
my labor and time. Then I beheld my fol- 
ly, and so built a third resurrection myself. 
This is, therefore, my lawful kingdom. 
Moreover, I tell thee to thy face, thou 
wretch, there is no higher heaven than 
mine. Neither comest thou from a hea- 
ven great as mine. But having great self 
conceit, thou art come for mischief. I 



have heard of thee in other heavens. But 
now thou hast put thy head into the halter. 
Seize him, marshals! Seize him and his 
hosts! Cast them into prison. 

Osire spake not, but raised his hand 
upward, and suddenly his hosts cast forth 
sheets of light brighter than the sun. 
Daveas stood back affrighted, and his mar- 
shals fled. Presently, Osire, with a thou- 
sand attendants, stepped forth in flames of 
light, and went into the capital and sur- 
rounded Daveas, the usurper, but touched 
him not. And now the ship was illumined, 
and the sentinels of Daveas' Council fled. 
Then Osire spake, saying: 

By the strength of Thy hand, O Jeho- 
vih, destroy thou this house and throne. 

Then a great light from the upper hea- 
vens fell and rested on Osire's palms, and 
he overthrew the house and throne of Da- 
veas as easily as though they were made 
of straw; and as fast as Osire could give 
the commands his hosts pulled down and 
scattered the walls and temples. 

Meanwhile the officers of Daveas fled in 
terror, save such as were overcome by the 
light, and these fell and buried themselves 
amidst the rubbish. 

Hold, hold! cried Daveas. Give me air. 
I am perishing in a consuming fire, and he 
covered his face with his glittering robes. 
And now Osire called forth thunder and 
lightning, and the din and roar confounded 
all the eight hundred million souls, so they 
ran no further but stood and waited. 

Osire halted not, but went to a more 
suitable place to build his throne. Jeho- 
hovih, Almighty! he cried: Elements of 
Thy elements, O Father! Found here a 
throne for Thy son. And whilst his words 
went forth, the elements rose to do his 
will, and there was raised a most excellent 
throne, strong and adamantine, on which 
Osire ascended. 

Daveas had fallen down flat, weeping 
and wailing; but Osire, by a motion of the 
hand, called Wang-te, a most enlightened 
Archangel, with her attendants, to bear 
him hence, which was quickly done. 

Now, the place being clear, the hosts 
of Osire walled around a sufficient space 
for a city of a thousand million souls, with 
pillars of light, as brilliant as an arc in 
etherean firmament. Then Osire ap- 
pointed Klesta, Dawn Goddess, and he 



126 



CYCLE OF OSIRE 



gave her a council of fifty thousand ether- 
eans. Outside of the walls were Daveas 
and his eight hundred million subjects, in 
dire confusion. 

Wang-te, the Archangel, said to Dav- 
eas: Thou art favored to be free thyself 
awhile, to organize a new kingdom, but in 
holiness return and command obedience 
from this smothering host. Behold, thou 
hast taught them to believe thou art 
Apollo. Say to them now: I am not 
Apollo! I have been false! 

Daveas madly replied: Never! Jeho- 
vih and His kingdoms accursed be forever! 
Ye strange spirits, come from far-off king- 
doms, to despoil and overturn the most 
righteous place in heaven! Are Jehovih 
and His servants destroyers? To which 
Wang-te replied: This is no time for ar- 
gument. Behold these countless millions! 
If I withdraw from thee, and my attend- 
ants also withdraw, thou wilt be as one 
drowned amidst this sea of ignorance and 
horrid smells. For pity's sake purge thy- 
self of thy lifelong falsehoods and treacher- 
ous tyranny. Announce thyself as Daveas, 
as thou art, and I can save thee! 

Daveas rudely thrust her aside, saying: 
Never! I acknowledge to none! If there 
be a higher heaven, I will ascend thither 
as I am, Apollo! Wang-te said: In Jeho- 
vih' s name, put me not off! Remember 
what thou art and of the little thou hast 
seen, how powerless thou art before Om- 
nipotence! Thy fate is like that of all dic- 
tators, on the verge of a chasm of horrors. 

Daveas waited not to hear her further, 
but proclaimed aloud, Apollo! Apollo! and 
stood aside. And presently his former offi- 
cers rushed to him, and with that came the 
sea of millions of spirits, unorganized, un- 
washed, unfed, frightened and mad, for 
love of the name, Apollo, the meaning of 
which they knew not; and they became as 
a knot of serpents, entwined around Da- 
veas and his officers. And in the terrible 
brawl not one voice could be distinguished 
from another. And the outer extreme 
pressed inward on every side, and present- 
ly the eight hundred million were as a 
ball, a knot of darkness, with a dull and 
rumbling moan within, and fearful clamor 
on the surface, from which horrid smells 
issued. 



Wang-te and her attendants hastened 
back to the throne of Osire, Son of Jeho- 
vih, to tell what had happened. Osire said: 
What shall I do, O Father? Then the 
Light of Jehovih came, and Jehovih spake, 
saying: Consider My creation, My Son. 
The young child I made to fall with few 
bruises; but the full-grown man falleth 
heavily. Shall I make a separate rule to 
favor kings and queens of earth, and false 
Gods in heaven? Nay, I will make of Da- 
veas an example in heaven, and on earth, 
also. Because he hath spurned his own 
name, so will I make both angels and mor- 
tals to curse and shun the name Daveas. 

Osire said: Proceed ye with my king- 
dom, in the name of the Father. Let Da- 
veas remain as he is. 

Then Osire departed, taking the re- 
mainder of his hosts with him in his fire- 
ship; and he went to a heavenly place to 
the westward, where was Seru, a false 
God, with ten million slaves; and Osire de- 
stroyed Seru's kingdom also. Next he 
went to a heavenly place in the north, 
where Raka, a false God, had several mill- 
ion slaves; and Osire destroyed his king- 
dom also, liberating his slaves, and putting 
a guard over Raka. 

Thus went Osire throughout atmos- 
pherea, demolishing all the heavenly king- 
doms of the false Gods, of whom there 
were in all, seven hundred and eighty; but 
many of them had not a million subjects. 

Osire and his hosts labored thirty days 
destroying the kingdoms of the evil Gods, 
and when this work was completed Osire 
said to his hosts: In the next thirty days 
we will build to Jehovih. Take the ship, 
therefore, to Vibrahj, for there I will found 
my central kingdom. And after we shall 
have completed the work of starting the 
second resurrection on a sure foundation, 
then will we go down to the earth and 
overturn the kingdoms of the false Lords 
with men. 

Jehovih spake to Osire, saying: Send 
officers out into all the divisions of hea- 
ven where thou hast destroyed the evil 
kingdoms, to arrest all the false Gods 
whom thou hast dispossessed, and bring 
them hither that I may speak with them. 

Then Osire spake to the officers, say- 
ing: Go ye out into all the divisions of at- 



CYCLE OF OSIRE 



127 



mospherea, and arrest and bring hither 
all the false Gods whom I have dethroned, 
saying to each: Osire, God of the lower 
heavens, commandeth thy presence. Come 
thou, and hear the Voice of Thy Creator. 
But many will fear to come because of the 
Light. Say to all such: The light will be 
lowered for a short space of time; come, 
therefore, quickly. 

To all the knots where the false Gods 
are enveloped, shall ye take sufficient um- 
brae that ye may release them. But leave 
a guaid with each knot to hold them in 
their places. 

The officers went aboard as command- 
ed, and after many days the false Gods 
were arrested and brought before the 
throne of God. And there were assembled, 
one hundred thousand Archangels, of 
whom two thousand had risen to the rank 
of Gods and Goddesses, and thirty thou- 
sand to the rank of Lords and Lordesses. 

Osire said to the false ones: Greeting 
in the name of Jehovih! Do not fear me. 
Be not expectant of torture or punishment. 
Though I come in all power, my words 
shall be tempered with wisdom. But I 
can be no respecter of persons, nor swerve 
in the least from Jehovih's commandments. 
In Jehovih's name, I came to deliver those 
ye had bound; and through Him have I 
attained power to that end. For I cannot 
bind you, or cast you in prison. Have not 
my officers just delivered you from bond- 
age, and are now holding you free from 
the knots? 

Most of you are learned men of the sec- 
ond resurrection; but ye have used your 
wisdom for self-glorification, being proud 
to call yourselves Gods; not to teach them 
of Jehovih and His Kingdoms, but falsely 
teaching that your own kingdoms were 
the All Highest, thereby shutting out the 
true light from the unlearned. 

Jehovih hath blessed you with strong 
minds and handsome forms, whereupon ye 
have each of you falsely proclaimed ye were 
Apollo. Think not that this matter was 
not known in high heaven. I have here 
the reports of swift messengers, which were 
brought to me in the firmament above. I 
came not in ignorance of what you were 
doing; neither came I in weakness. More 
than a hundred thousand million, who 
have been raised up to etherea from Earth 



and her heavens, stood by my side. 
Besides these, a million times as many 
ethereans, from other worlds; and above 
all of these, the Great Orian Chiefs; and 
yet beyond, and over all, Great Jehovih! 

Have I not proved my power before 
you all? Did I go away in a corner and 
say: Come, I will show you my power? 
Nay, I came close to you all. As the Fa- 
ther first proveth power, so have I. That 
I may talk to you in wisdom, I have had 
you arrested and brought hither. Hear me 
then, and remember my words. 

In former cycles, the high Gods who 
descended to these heavens, finding false 
Gods, simply liberated their slaves, and put 
no labor of restitution on the false Gods. 
This was because the false Gods of those 
periods were too imbecile and unlearned. 
But Earth and her heavens have reach- 
ed a higher state. And with progression 
cometh responsibility. Ye bound your sub- 
jects to your kingdoms; and now ye can- 
not put them aside? Ye taught them your 
kingdoms were the All Highest and they 
must now be taught of Jehovih's king- 
dom. Ye taught them that you were the 
All Highest Gods! They must now be 
taught that Jehovih is the All Highest. 
Ye put aside the ancient rites and cere- 
monies, wherein the name of Jehovih was 
used, teaching them to sing to. you only. 
They must be taught new songs, substitut- 
ing the Great Spirit, to Whom none can 
attain, forever. Ye taught them to be un- 
thinking and contented as slaves. They 
must now be taught to think for them- 
selves, and to labor for everlasting liberty. 

And now, touching the law of the res- 
urrection, remember this is the same in all 
the created worlds; that the spirit of man 
groweth by giving away of whatsoever the 
spirit hath to give. If you have great 
learning, and you give of it, then more 
learning shall be added unto you; if ye 
have goodness of heart, and gentle words, 
then, by giving this away, more shall be 
added unto you. If ye have craft in inven- 
tions or mechanics, and ye bestow of these 
talents unto others, then will more be add- 
ed unto you. The corporeal man accumu- 
lated corporeal things by not giving 
them away, but the spirit of man only re- 
ceives greater wisdom by giving away. For 
he who locketh up the light of the Father 



128 



CYCLE OF OSIRE 



that is in him, cannot obtain more light. 
He who locketh up goodness of heart can- 
not obtain strength of spirit; and without 
strength of spirit no man can attain to the 
third resurrection. But, that men may 
learn to obtain strength of spirit, the sec- 
ond resurrection hath been established in 
atmospherea. 

The chief delight of man shall be, 
therefore, to find some way to impart his 
spiritual talents and strength to the great- 
est possible number of people. Think not 
that preaching to the ignorant is sufficient; 
but ye shall take hold with your own hands 
and show them how to accomplish. Yet 
not labor alone; for some are so created 
that ye cannot inspire them without rites 
and ceremonies and music. 

Now shall a man after having taught 
and raised up a few, say: Behold, what a 
good work I have done! But as long as he 
findeth a man, woman or child who is lack- 
ing in anything, he shall say to himself: 
Alas, what I have done is as nothing in the 
resurrection of my fellows. 

Ye have had your kingdoms. Yea, and 
boasted of them. Your boasts have as- 
cended to etherea. Will ye go thither and 
be asked: Where are your kingdoms? 
Shall it be said ye shirked the responsi- 
bility of caring for them whom the Father 
gave into your keeping? 

Osire ceased; and now a brilliant light 
descended around about the throne, and Je- 
hovih spake through Osire, saying: 

As I have given seasons to my corpor- 
eal worlds, so have I given times in the 
atmospherean heavens of Earth, where- 
in my etherean hosts came from my 
everlasting heavens to accomplish the 
resurrection of My Brides and Bride- 
grooms to etherea. And I sent Gods to 
teach these things to mortals and angels on 
the earth, and they proclaimed My words, 
saying: There is no such thing as individ- 
ual resurrection, for Jehovih created prog- 
ress to be in compact, that man might 
learn the strength of unison wherein the 
Creator is all power because He is the All 
One. And I caused them to give rites 
and ceremonies,, chief of which was the 
oath of service unto Me and My king- 
doms, wherein many bound themselves, 
which was, and is, the beginning of lib- 
erty. And I created examples on earth 



and in the lower heavens, that even the 
unlearned might understand Me and My 
works. 

For to him that begetteth children I 
gave bondage; but this is a bondage that 
circumventeth not liberty in time to come, 
for they can ascend to heaven and progress, 
together better than alone. But some 
gave themselves up to love earthly things, 
such as houses and money and kingdoms, 
which things have no resurrection. Hence, 
such bondage holdeth the person after 
death to the thing he loved. And many 
have set up kingdoms in the lower heavens 
binding themselves to things that have no 
resurrection but belong on the plateau in 
atmospherea where I created them. And 
to them who have bound themselves to 
their fellows, saying: I am thy salvation! 
it is like a young man saying to a maiden: 
Come, I will be thy husband. And she 
goeth to him in confidence. Here, then, 
is bondage, and neither of them can annul 
that which hath been united; for by their 
bondage, I am also a party to the contract. 
And in the same manner, they that assume 
kingdoms, professing to be Gods of salva- 
tion, and thus enticing My innocent ones 
unto themselves, become bound, not only 
to their subjects, but to the contract ot de- 
liverance unto salvation. 

The Voice ceased, and Osire said: If a 
man wed a woman with an evil temper, his 
glory lieth not in going away from her, 
but in teaching her to overcome her tem- 
per; or, if her husband be evil, her glory 
lieth not in going away from him, but in 
reforming him. It is wiser to accomplish 
whatever work Jehovih hath put in thy 
way, than to desert it for sake of per- 
sonal comfort. Nevertheless, there is a 
limit; and to the wise there is power to 
accomplish much that seemeth impossible. 
Hear ye, then, my judgment unto you: 

Ye shall again assume kingdoms, 
and every one have the same subjects he 
had before. And ye shall be provided with 
places and thrones and have councils of 
my Archangels also. And I will give each 
one of you an assistant God, who shall sit 
on your right hand for four years, which 
is the time of this dawn, teaching you what 
to teach and how to teach it. 

My hosts will now conduct you to the 
places prepared for you, around which are 



CYCLE OF OSIRE 



129 



erected walls of fire. And when ye are 
safely seated on your thrones, your former 
subjects shall be brought before you in 
groups, and adjudged to labor, and to 
schools, and such other places as are suit- 
ed to them, according to their strength 
and talents. And ye shall not be free from 
this labor until you have delivered your 
subjects unto the third resurrection. 

My hosts shall labor with you to this 
end, that Jehovih may be glorified in your 
harvests for the emancipated worlds. 
Therefore, in Jehovih's Name, receive ye 
ordination from my hands, by the power 
and wisdom of the Great Spirit. 

The officers showed them how to make 
the sign of Jehovih's Name, and how to 
stand before the throne; and then Osire 
said: By Thy Love, Wisdom and Power, 
O Jehovih, do I anoint these, Thy Gods, 
for Thy service, and for the exaltation of 
Thy kingdoms, forever! Amen. 

The light was now becoming so bril- 
liant that many of the newly made Gods 
quailed before it But the marshals stood 
beside them, and they passed before the 
throne of Osire, where they were crowned 
and arrayed as Gods of the second resur- 
rection; after which they were again con- 
ducted before the Council, and saluted in 
the sign of Jehovih's Name; and from 
thence they were taken to the kingdoms 
prepared for them to the time of martial 



CHAPTER VII. 

Thus Osire established Vibraj, the re- 
splendent heaven, with a thousand and 
eight hundred sub-kingdoms, in atmos- 
pherea, all under the commandments of 
the central kingdom. And then he estab- 
lished the roadways between them, and 
appointed seven hundred thousand messen- 
gers. And the several sub-kingdoms es- 
tablished their places of learning and la- 
bor; their hospitals and nurseries, and 
their innumerable asaphs, the receivers of 
es'yans. 

Osire said: Behold, there is order in 
heaven. Now will I appoint a God to hold 
dominion two hundred years; and during 
the remainder of the dawn of dan I will 
assist him. Let the examiners search, 
amongst my hosts, from such as sprang 
from Earth. 



So the examiners searched; and after 
thirty days they selected Konas; and when 
Osire was informed, he sent a thousand of 
his own attendants, in an otevan, and 
they brought Konas to Vibraj, to Jeho- 
vih's throne. Osire said: 

Greeting, in the name of the Father! 
Thou art chosen above all others; and, 
after the dawn of dan is ended, thou shalt 
be God of Earth for two hundred years. 
Before the ascent of my hosts and of my- 
self, behold I will crown thee. Till then 
thou shalt sit on my throne, and fill my 
place whilst I am absent. 

I have now restored order in heaven, 
having given all the inhabitants a purpose 
in concert, whereby their resurrection is 
founded. Now will I go down to the false 
Lord's kingdom, on the earth, and to the 
mortal kings and queens, and restore or- 
der there also. 

Konas said: Thy will and Jehovih's be 
done! I am exalted and rejoiced in what 
is bestowed upon me. Make me strong 
and wise, O Jehovih, that I may glorify 
Thy kingdoms! 

So, after due preparation, Osire de- 
parted privately, taking with him one hun- 
dred thousand attendants, going down to 
the earth and to the false Lords' king- 
doms, in the cities and temples of mor- 
tals. 

Seven days Osire spent traveling round 
about the earth, visiting angels and mor- 
tals, but telling none who he was, or what 
was his object; and then he halted his ote- 
van, which had been built for the purpose, 
in the regions of the mountains of We-ont- 
ka-woh, in Western Jaffeth. He said: 

We-ont-ka-woh shall be my headquar- 
ters for a season. Here, then, will I found 
the first Lord's kingdom for mortals, and 
inasmuch as mortals have made an idol of 
Apollo, so will I cast down Apollo, and 
make them know that I, Osire am Lord of 
Earth. Then spake We'taing, saying: 

Behold the glory of Jehovih from the 
first! In our journey around the earth we 
found the I'hins not idolators, but still 
worshipers of the Great Spirit, Jehovih. 
But as to the half-breeds, who can under- 
stand them? They believe nothing; they 
believe everything. They ask the idol for 
rain, and for dry weather; for strength to 
slay the Druks; for flesh to eat, and for 



130 



CYCLE OF OSIRE 



famine to be visited on their enemies. 
They are as living prey for drujas to feast 
on; they invite the darkest of all evil. And 
to do their wills in return, the drujas, the 
evil spirits, busy themselves inoculating the 
air with poison to kill their enemies. 

Osire said: With the Thins we have 
little to do; but as to the Ghans and the 
I'huans, they shall be converted into dis- 
believers of the presence of all spirits, save 
two, Jehovih and satan. To accomplish 
which end, I will give them three figures: 
The signs of seasons, which shall represent 
the Creator in all the parts of the living; 
the sign of the sun, with motion and all 
life coming forth; and the hand of man. 

CHAPTER VIII. 

Through Osire, Jehovih said: 

I created man with a corporeal life, 
that he might learn corporeal things; but 
behold the I'huans have lost all energy to 
acquire earthly knowledge, depending on 
their familiar spirits for information on 
everything; thereby wasting their mortal 
lives in non-impiovement. So that when 
they die and enter heaven they are easily 
made slaves of by evil spirits. Better were 
it for them had they no knowledge of spirit 
life, that they might put to service the tal- 
ents I created within them. See to this 
matter, O my Sons and Daughters; for 
their desire for the presence of the spirits 
of the dead will draw fetals upon them- 
selves, and they will go down in darkness 
like the ancients. 

The Voice departed, and then Osire 
said: Hear me, my brothers and sisters; 
this is my commandment to you, and to 
your successors. 

Possess ye the temples and oracles, 
where the familiar spirits speak; neither 
aUow ye familiars to come to kings, nor 
queens, nor governors, nor to leaders nor 
rulers of men; but take possession of all 
such, and answer ye the corporeans with 
corporeal knowledge only. 

And that ye may be as a unit unto 
mortals, give ye all the same name, 
Jehovih through His son Osire. For when 
ye answer at the oracle, or in the altar or 
temple, they will ask who the spirit is; and 
ye shall say: Osire, Son of Jehovih; doing 
this in my name and the Father's. 



And when ye speak by entrancement, 
through the seers and prophets, also assert 
the same thing. And they will ask: Why 
has the Son of Jehovih come to us? And 
ye shall say: 

Because ye are an idolatrous people, 
worshiping before stone and wood; where- 
by evil spirits take advantage of you, and 
rule you to your downfall. 

And they will reason amongst them- 
selves, saying: How know we, then, that 
thou thyself be not an evil spirit? And ye 
shall say: It is well that ye ask this, for 
I declare unto you, ye shall not worship 
Osire, but only Jehovih, the Creator. This 
doctrine only is safe. 

Again they will say: Who is satan and 
his attendants? Ye shall answer: Who- 
ever professeth any name except Jehovih 
is of satan. 

Now whilst ye are thus reasoning with 
them, certain ones in the temple will be 
worked by the familiar spirits, writhing 
and twisting, and ye shall say to the next 
akin: Behold, I will tell thee how to cast 
out the evil spirit. Thou shalt say: I 
charge, in the name of Jehovih, to depart. 
And they will do this, and at the time 
they use the words: In the name 
of Jehovih, depart! ye shall drive hence the 
familiars, thus proving the power of Je- 
hovih greater than all spirits. 

But that this matter may spread rap- 
idly, and be valued highly, impart the 
name of Jehovih in secret, not allowing 
them to speak it aloud. Choose ye, there- 
fore, certain mortals, and ordain them 
through the king, and their labor shall be 
to cast out evil spirits. 

It will come to pass in many places 
where ye dispossess the false Lords and 
their confederates, these evil spirits will 
inoculate the cattle and beasts of burden 
with poison, and they will die; and the 
evil spirits will show themselves to the 
dogs, and cause them to howl; and the 
evil spirits will obsess the swine, which are 
easily influenced, and the swine will appear 
drunk and foolish. All of which things 
ye shall prophecy to mortals beforehand, 
thereby attesting the wisdom of the Great 
Spirit. 

After these things are accomplished 
mortals will say further: Behold, thou 
Son of Jehovih, erst thou came Apollo told 



CYCLE OF OSIEE 



131 



us when the plant, and when to reap, when 
to bring the male and female cattle to- 
gether; but now that we have put him 
aside, what shall we do? And ye shall 
answer them: 

Come in the starlight and I will give 
you the signs, that ye may know these 
things yourselves. And where ye speak in 
the oracle or by entrancement, ye shall 
point out to them certain stars, and teach 
them the names thereof; and certain 
groups of stars, with their names also; and 
ye shall show them the travel of the sun, 
north and south, and give them a table of 
onk, divided into twelve groups, with 
twelve lines coming from the sun. 

And ye shall raise up priests by inspira- 
tion, and by entrancement, and through 
them illustrate the position of the sun in 
the signs of the onk. And the priests 
shall explain these things to the unlearned, 
that they may comprehend of their own 
knowledge. 

When these things are accomplished ye 
shall inspire the I'huans to go to the Thins 
and ask to be circumcised unto Jehovih; 
and the I'hins, being also under inspira- 
tion, will bestow them with the sign. 

CHAPTER IX. 

When Osire had completed his instruc- 
tions to his hosts, he sent messengers to 
Vibraj, saluting, in the name of Jehovih, 
calling for one million ethereans; and 
when they had come Osire divided them 
into ten thousand groups, giving each 
group one or more of his attendants, 
whom he had instructed. When all of 
them were in readiness for the work, Osire 
said: 

Experience hath proven that to dispos- 
sess familiar spirits in one place is but to 
drive them to another. It is wise, there- 
fore, that in the same day ye make an at- 
tack in one city or temple, ye shall do so 
in the principal places all over the earth, 
giving the familiars no place to fasten 
upon. Therefore, let the time of attack, in 
each and every place, be at the begin- 
ning of sunrise on the morrow; and ye 
shall possess all the temples, and places of 
the oracles, and the cities, and the kings, 
queens, rulers and leaders of men, driving 
hence, by stratagem or by force, all 
the false Lords, and all spirits professing 



the name of Apollo, or any representative 
spirit in the name of Apollo or Thor. 

And mortals will immediately recog- 
nize that some change is going on in the 
unseen world; and they will go to the 
places of spirit communion, asking for 
Apollo to explain; and ye shall answer: 
Apollo is cast out! Hear ye the wisdom of 
the Great Spirit, Jehovih! After which ye 
shall instruct them as I have commanded. 

So the ethereans drove out the false 
Lords of the earth, and they banished the 
familiars of all the kings, queens and 
leaders of men. And the ethereans taught 
in the temples and oracles, by entrance- 
ment and by inspiration, even as com- 
manded by Jehovih, through his son, 
Osire. But in all places the Great Spirit's 
name was made a secret; and it was com- 
manded of mortals that His name should 
only be spoken in a low whisper, 
because Jehovih speaketh to the soul of 
man silently. And these things were es- 
tablished; and this was the first universal 
teaching of the Great Spirit to mortals. 

And Osire decreed: One Lord shall ye 
give to every city and oracle; but every 
Lord shall profess Jehovih, being his Son. 

And this was also accomplished; and 
when the people consulted the oracles as 
to who the spirit was, the answer was: Je- 
hovih, through his Son, Lord of Earth or 
God of Earth. But it was made lawful to 
use the names Lord and God with audible 
words; and they were thus used and spok- 
en by mortals as the substitutive words, 
permissible in public, in place of the name 
Jehovih. 

Osire said: It is an easy matter to rule 
over the kings and queens and prophets, 
and all learned people, but not so easy to 
rule over the ignorant, who, having been 
accustomed to worship Apollo through the 
idols will long continue to do so. There- 
fore, ye shall cause the kings to issue 
edicts prohibiting familiar spirits, and for- 
bidding soothsayers and workers of magic; 
and teach ye mortals that these things 
come of satan. 

This was also done, according to the 
commandments; and now there was no 
place left for familiar spirits to obsess 
mortals. And these spirits distributed 
themselves after the manner of the spirits 
of the olden time, some going into swine 



132 



CYCLE OF OSIRE 



and living with them; whereupon Osire 
commanded his hosts to inspire the kings 
and queens to pass laws prohibiting the 
eating of swine's flesh, lest mortals be- 
come bound with fetals. Accordingly, this 
law was established on the earth. Some of 
the dispossessed spirits went into the for- 
ests to dwell, and some to the fountains 
and mists in waterfalls; others, who were 
depraved, dwelt in the fisheries and slaugh- 
ter houses, and still others in the kennels, 
with dogs and cats. Nevertheless there 
were many mortals who were dealers in 
magic and witchery, and these had an 
abundance of familiars. And when such 
mortals died the familiars went to their 
sons and daughters; and so it was said of 
them they inherited the gift of magic. 

Osire, having overcome the evil spirits, 
now called a council at We-ont-ka-woh; 
and there came five hundred thousand 
angels. 

Osire said: In Jehovih's name will I 
now deliver them I have cast out; and ye 
shall labor in conjunction with the Gods 
of atmospherea to this end. Behold, I 
have had the familiars enumerated, and 
there are more than six thousand million 
of them on earth. Ye shall go forth, there- 
fore, into all the divisions of the earth and 
proclaim a great festival, to be held in 
We-ont-ka-woh, inviting them hither. And 
ye shall provide them conveyance, bring- 
ing them across the seas in suitable ves- 
sels; and when they are congregated here 
I will destroy the ships so that they can- 
not return. 

This was accomplished, and more than 
five thousand million spirits came to the 
festival, where were provided for them 
food and clothes of fantastic colors to 
please the eye of the ignorant; and when 
they were provided with these things they 
were entertained with music and dancing, 
they themselves being taught to take part. 
For seventy days the festival lasted, and 
each day varied from another, and the 
multitude became so intoxicated with de- 
light and so broken off from their old 
habits and associations that they forgot all 
about the ships and conveyances. 

Osire spake to his council in private, 
saying: Provide ye an airiata large enough 
for all these people. So, whilst the festi 
val was going on the proper workmen 



built the vessel, and its capacity was suffi- 
cient to carry all the multitude of spirits, 
besides a sufficiency of regimen for them 
on a long journey. 

Now after the festival had lasted sev- 
enty days, Osire proclaimed order that he 
might speak unto them. He said: 

Brothers and sisters, in the name of 
Jehovih, greeting to you all. I am about 
to depart to a higher world. That ye 
might hear my voice, I proclaimed order. 
That ye may rejoice in my words, I speak 
in love and tenderness. My home is in a 
world far away, where there is no suffer- 
ing, no sorrow. And the spirit of my peo- 
ple is radiant with light. I would tell you 
of the beauty and glory of my home, but 
it would not be just to you. Ye would no 
longer be content to remain here. Be- 
cause ye suffered, and my soul was full of 
pity, I made this festival. The Great 
Spirit taught me how to make food and 
clothes, and to travel far and be not afraid. 
All the people where I live can hear the 
Voice of the Great Spirit. They learn all 
things by first learning to hear Him. His 
wisdom supplieth every want. My love 
will remain with you, but it will be a long 
time before I come again. The time of 
the festival is ended. Your time has come 
to return to your old places with these 
Lords of yours whom you have worshiped 
so long. 

When Osire began to speak the people 
desired at once to go whither he would 
decree; and when he suggested for them 
to return to their former Lords, who were 
also present, they answered with a uni- 
versal voice: Nay, never more with them! 

Osire said: I perceive ye desire to go 
with me and my hosts. I have learned to 
understand your souls. But do ye under- 
stand me? I mentioned the great glories 
in my heavens, but I did not tell you that 
we worked to make them; yea, we work 
every day. The Great Spirit made the tree 
to get its food and clothes without labor; 
but, behold, it hath no power to travel. 
Some things in the world labor not; but 
man, who hath neither feathers, nor hair 
to cover his body, is provided with talents. 
Talents are the greatest of all gifts. The 
air and the ground provide the substance 
of fruit and foliage to the tree, but the 
spirit who hath talent can find the sub- 



CYCLE OF OSIRE 



133 



stance of fruit and foliage in the air, and 
gather it. 

Lights of various colors were now 
being set up by the ethereans and the 
place enriched with the most enticing per- 
fumes. 

Osire proceeded: By the cultivation of 
talents, all things are possible unto all 
men and women. With a sufficiency of 
talent ye need no Lords nor oppressive 
rulers. I mentioned the great beauties of 
my etherean home. Ye go to the spray of 
fountains, and disport yourselves in rain- 
bows; but ye are in a small corner at best, 
and the substance of your joys are in per- 
petual failure. Behold the sprays and 
bows made by my hosts! Hear the music 
played by the elements of their handi- 
work. 

The hosts here overcast the entire mul- 
titude with the vapor of the air, converted 
into millions of kaledioscopic pictures, and 
filled the place with the music of currents 
of wind trained to tunes. 

The hosts were overjoyed beyond 
measure. 

Again Osire said: Hear me further; 
the festival must cease. Ye forget, I told 
you I must go. My marshals will now 
conduct me and my hosts to my fire-ship. 
As for ye, my heart is broken. I know 
the toils and hardships put upon you. But 
if ye desire these things, they are yours. 

The universal shout was: We will go 
with thee! Take us in your fire-ship. 
Teach us how to improve our talents! 

Osire said: What will the Lords do? 
Shall they remain without subjects? But 
the false Lords answered quickly: We will 
also go with thee and be thy servants to 
do thy bidding. 

Osire said: When I am on the ship 
I will answer. 

So he departed and went into the airi- 
ata, to the side of which his own fire-ship 
was made fast; and presently he command- 
ed all who chose to come aboard; and be- 
hold the whole of them, even more than 
five thousand million, went in. Osire at 
once commanded the ascent; and thus he 
delivered them high up in atmospherea, 
where the proper officers had already pro- 
vided a plateau of habitation for them; and 
the name of the plateau was Assan, signi- 
fying no escape, for here Osire intended to 



have them educated and purged from evil; 
nor was it possible for them to return to 
the earth. 

CHAPTER X. 

In Assan Osire appointed Sha'bon as 
God over the delivered hosts; and Sha'bon 
selected officers and teachers, and then di- 
vided the people into groups and sections, 
according to their development, and then 
erected schools, and nurseries, and facto- 
ries,- and put the inhabitants to work, 
feasting them with rites and ceremonies. 

After Assan was duly organized, Osire 
departed and went and visited in various 
kingdoms that had been established by his 
Lords. 

And the heavens of Earth were thus 
organized anew under Osire. And the 
whole time of organization was three 
years. But Osire spent the remainder of 
dawn in Vibraj, perfecting it as the central 
kingdom of atmospherea. And, lastly, he 
decreed the appointment of ten thousand 
Lords to dwell on earth; some at the tem- 
ples of worship, or oracles; some within 
the cities of the Ghans; and he decreed to 
his Lords as follows: 

Ye shall teach mortals of heavenly 
things by inspiration, but not through the 
oracles. 

Ye shall not allow them to commune 
with the spirits of the dead, not even their 
own kin. 

Ye shall not permit spirits to come to 
their mortal kin. And the spirits of those 
who die in infancy ye shall deliver to the 
asaphs in Vibraj. 

Ye shall not permit spirits to inhabit 
deserted houses, nor permit them to form 
habitations on the graveyards of the earth. 

Ye shall not permit spirits to inhabit 
caves or waterfalls on the earth. 

Ye shall not permit spirits to obsess 
mortals, nor to speak through them by en- 
trancement, unless they be such spirits as 
ye appoint in order to carry out these, my 
decrees; or masters of generation, whom 
ye shall appoint over mortals. 

Ye shall control the selecting and ap- 
pointing of guardian spirits over newborn 
mortals. And all such guardian spirits 
shall teach their wards nothing of heaven 
near the earth, but inspire them that it 



134 



CYCLE OF OSIRJE 



lieth far away, and very high, from which 
place none return. 

And the guardians shall also inspire 
their wards to consult God only, or his 
Lord, and to do this by secret prayer. 

And that the Lord and God are good- 
ness, wisdom, love and power. And that 
all evil cometh from tetracts born with 
man. 

And ye shall inspire mortals to acquire 
a knowledge of the sun and moon and 
stars, giving names unto them, together 
with their places in the firmament. And 
give them temples for observation and 
tablets for instruction. 

For in all things ye shall direct man's 
soul to the acouisition of corporeal knowl- 
edge, causing him to look into corporeal 
things to find a reason for the behavior 
of all created substance. 

And they shall not depend on the spirits 
for knowledge, for I am not laying the 
foundation for spiritual knowledge on 
earth; that must come afterwards. For as 
Jehovih first gave to man a corporeal life, 
and then a spiritual life, so am I laying a 
foundation for a new race on Earth; and 
from their kin shall spring the heirs of 
Kosmon, who shall embrace both cor- 
poreal and spiritual knowledge. But these 
shall rise in corporeal knowledge and go 
down in it. 

Ye shall teach them in truth, but they 
will in after generations contort your 
teachings into corporeal worship, prostrat- 
ing themselves before the sun and moon 
and stars, going down into disbelief in not 
only the spiritual life, but in the Great 
Spirit, and His Gods and Lords. 

All these things must come to pass on 
the corporeal world; nor is there any res- 
urrection in the latter days, unless these of 
this day go through the fall which I am 
preparing for them. For which reason ye 
shall found corporeal knowledge in the 
stars, and name them; for these things will 
be testimony in Kosmon of the fate of the 
worshipers of corporeal knowledge in the 
time of the Osirian cycle. So, leave noth- 
ing undone that can be done to make mor- 
tals put aside all spirituality, save to be- 
lieve in the Great Spirit and a distant 
heaven; but make them pursue knowledge 
wholly corporeal. 



For the labor of God and his Lords 
shall not always be to bring spirits back to 
earth, to learn of corpor, for this is not 
Jehovih's plan. A heaven shall be built 
up of corporeal knowledge, which shall 
have a base in the firmament of heaven, 
where spirits can be taught in time to 
come. 

Fear not that man can be too unbe- 
lieving in spiritual things in this age; 
Jehovih requireth even perfection in unbe- 
lief in certain periods of time. And this 
is the founding of that era on Earth. 
Therefore, do these matters with all your 
wisdom and strength; and may the Light 
of Jehovih be with you now and forever. 

CHAPTER XI. 

Who shall tell the story of the Gods of 
earth in the cycle of Osire! Their 
mighty kingdoms overspreading the 
whole earth! Hundreds and hundreds, 
and thousands! Their libraries of rec- 
ords of holy deeds! A council cham- 
ber of half a million souls! Hundreds of 
departments and thousands. Here a com- 
mittee to select young students to the col- 
leges of messengers; another to select 
students to the college of arts; another to 
select students of mathematics; another 
for prophecy; another for great learning; 
another for factories; another for com- 
pounding and dissolving elements. Then 
come the departments of the cosmogeny 
of the stars; then of the etherean worlds; 
then the roadways of the firmament; then 
a'ji and ji'ay and nebulae; then se'mu; 
then hi'dan and dan; then the dawn of 
dan; then histories of corporeal affairs, 
and of the affairs of the heavens, far and 
near; then genealogy of thousands of 
Orian chiefs; the creation of mineral, 
vegetable and animal kingdoms. Indeed, 
to enumerate half of what cometh before 
a God and his council would itself fill a 
book. 

Who, then, O Jehovih, shall venture to 
tell the labor and wisdom of thy etherean 
Gods! And of the multitude of questions 
that come before the council from far-off 
places? A strange voice riseth up from 
the earth, saying: Have they anything to 
do in heaven? O, ye Gods! And one-half 
of the Earth-born coming hither in in- 
fancy! And the countless millions who 



CYCLE OF OSIRE 



135 



know little more than the beasts of the 
field! Having been falsely taught that 
these unfortunates would fly off to para- 
dise and possess great learning in the 
hour of death! 

O that their understanding could be 
opened up to Thy kingdoms, Thou All 
Extending Creator! That their eyes could 
look upon the greatness of even Thy lower 
heavens! To behold a thousand depart- 
ments reaching as wide as the world! And 
then the hundreds of thousands of branch 
departments, of hundreds of grades, adapt- 
ed to every soul that riseth up from the 
earth. 

O that they could look into the dark 
places of atmospherea! That they could 
see a million souls, crazed, wild and bat- 
tling, plunged into chaos by terrible war, 
not knowing they are dead! The cease- 
less toil of nurses and physicians, laboring 
day and night with them! O the dark- 
ness upon them! O the glory of thy ex- 
alted ones! 

Thy swift Gods of dawn! How they 
hear a hundred tongues at one time, and 
frame answers for all of them, and by a 
motion of the hand dispatch messengers 
to fulfill the same! How they select officers, 
to know a hundred at a glance, and know 
where to place them, that every one shall 
fit his place! Who is there, O Father, can 
frame into words the proceedings of 
heaven, so that mortals can comprehend 
even a fraction of Thy great glories! 

Shall a man light a candle and say it 
represents the sun? How, then, shall 
they find the affairs of mortals compara- 
ble to Thy kingdoms? O that they knew 
the meaning of the difference between All 
Light and the darkness of man's judg- 
ment! 

O that they knew Thee, Thou Central 
Sun of All Light! They have put away 
Thy person. Thy great Gods are but 
myths to them, because of the darkness of 
their souls. Behold, they look for a small 
man with a large sword! The power of 
great wisdom they know not. 

O that they could behold the coming and 
going of thousands of messengers from 
far-off kingdoms before the throne of God ! 
How he hath answered them instantly, 
and meanwhile heeded the voices of a 



thousand marshals! O that they knew the 
glory of order, the power of harmony! 

They have seen a clock with a hundred 
wheels, and the eye of its maker oversee- 
ing every part in motion, and they call it 
wonderful! But how can they compre- 
hend Thy councils, O Jehovih, Thy mill- 
ions and Thy God on his throne, mantled 
in Thy light, overseeing a whole heaven! 
What majesty of words can make mortals 
comprehend his wisdom, power and great 
labors ! 

CHAPTER XII. 

Osire, through his mathematicians, 
furnished the Lords with maps of cor- 
poreal stars, and moon, and sun, and the 
position of Earth with the sun-belt, 
and bestowed names of animals upon them. 
Showed where the region of cows was; 
the place of bulls; the place of bears; the 
place of horses; the place of fishes; the 
place of scorpions; the place of sheep; the 
place of lions; the place of crabs; the 
place of death; the place of life; and 
marked the seasons, and made sections to 
the year, which was the width of the sun- 
belt. And he placed the sun in the midst 
and made lines thence to the stars, with 
explanations of the powers of the seasons 
on all the living. 

When the tablets were completed and 
ready to be delivered to the Lords, Osire 
said: Take these and bestow them on 
mortals, both through the oracles and by 
inspiration, making them sacred with the 
prophets, seers, and priests, and their 
kings and queens. 

And ye shall inspire them to build tem- 
ples of observation, to study the stars; 
teaching by the gau and by the travel of 
the sun north and south, and by Cnest, 
and by dark chambers. For with the cul- 
ture of the corporeal senses man becometh 
vigorous, strong and independent; and 
with the culture of the spiritual senses in 
corporeans they become weak, sensitive 
and dependent. 

In the first case they ultimately be- 
come selfish and wicked, in the second 
case they become impotent and unadapted 
to corporeal life, and thus become extinct. 

On all corporeal worlds Jehovih hath 
provided two seasons for every race; a 
season for the development of the cor- 



136 



CYCLE OF OSIRE 



poreal senses and a season for the develop- 
ment of the spiritual senses. To find the 
balance, this is to find kosmon, which lieth 
far in the future. 

In this day, therefore, I give the mat- 
ter into your charge, in the name of Je- 
hovih, that you consider not the spiritual 
nature of the corporeans in any respect, 
leaving that matter to God and his sub- 
Gods, who will receive them at the time 
of their mortal death. But ye shall teach 
them to fear no spirit, nor Lord, nor God; 
teaching them that by their own wills they 
can cast out the tetracts. Rather inspire 
ye them to be Gods and Goddesses them- 
selves; and by their aspirations they will 
become large, powerful and fearless. 

CHAPTER XIII. 

And now the dawn of dan was finished. 
Order reigned in heaven and on 
earth. Men and angels had their eyes 
turned inward, to know of what capacity 
Jehovih had made them. And Earth 
and moon, the sun and stars, were shown 
in a new light to the senses of men; not to 
be shunned and despised, but glories given 
by the Great Spirit for useful purposes. 

Osire prayed to the Creator: Send for 
my resurrection, O Jehovih. I have up- 
rooted the evil of idol worship. I have 
opened man's eyes to Thy corporeal 
worlds and set a mark on men's souls, 
wherein man shall not come from earth 
to heaven, saying: Alas, I have no cor- 
poreal knowledge! 

Jehovih said: To further man's ulti- 
mate glory, I have decreed Earth to 
ji'ay'an fields for three thousand years, in 
which thy fruit shall have its full growth. 

Osire foresaw the times that from his 
decrees would spring corporeal philoso- 
phy, whereto man should look back in 
after ages, saying: Thence sprang the 
Osirian system. Yet he looked further on 
when men should become disbelievers of 
spiritual things, doing worship to the sun, 
moon and stars; and profess to find the 
cause and foundation of all things in 
corpor. 

Jehovih said: Man shall search all 
things in order to find Me; but I gave this 
labor not to one generation of men, nor 
to those of a hundred, or a thousand years, 
but to cycles. For when I come in Kos- 



mon to found My kingdom on earth, man 
shall have the testimony of all speculations 
and philosophies before him, together with 
the fruits thereof. And he shall judge that 
which is good by the evidence of the past. 

High in the arc of Se'ing rose Osire's 
call, where millions waited, knowing the 
dawn of dan on the red star was near its 
end. Swift messengers told the story of 
Jehovih's work through his Son, Osire, 
and, measuring the width of the harvest, 
laid the matter before the reigning God- 
dess, Antwa. 

And they embarked in an obegia, 
amidst music and dancing, five million 
souls aboard, commanded by Eticene, 
Goddess of Antwa's garden, an etherean 
plain, where dwelt ten thousand million 
souls. A place of rest for Gods and God- 
desses. Off to the red star, Earth, steered 
the obegia, the pride of Eticene, for the 
marriage festival of seven thousand million 
Brides and Bridegrooms, the yield of 
Osire's harvest for etherea. 

Meanwhile Osire and his hosts pre- 
pared in the usual way and awaited the 
coming of Jehovih's light within Earth's 
vortex. So the obegia pierced the vortex 
of Earth, with the hosts of Eticene 
aboard, and the Brides and Bridegrooms 
shouted with joy, whilst the millions of 
guests who assembled to witness the awe- 
inspiring ceremonies joined in applause. 

Down came the ship of fire, broad as a 
sea, adorned in majesty, to the floors of 
Vibraj. And from the mantles of light 
came Eticene, to salute Osire in the name 
of the Great Spirit, and receive his con- 
tribution to the emancipated worlds! 

Osire and his attendants, the Archangels 
gels of Lowstin, received Eticene under the 
sign of Ormazd, and then presented his 
delivered sons and daughters, seven thou- 
sand millions. Whereupon, due ceremo- 
nies were proclaimed, and the Brides and 
Bridegrooms of Jehovih entered the 
obegia. Osire saluted God, who was or- 
dained to be ruler of Earth and heaven, tor 
the next two hundred years, and departed, 
going into the obegia, the fire-ship, for a 
higher heaven, where waited millions of 
loves, calling to him to come home. 

Then upward rose the mighty ship, 
commanded by the slender Eticene, the 
young Goddess of Antwa's Garden, her 
little hands stretched upward to Jehovih. 



LORDS' RECORD FOR CYCLE OK OSIRE 



CHAPTER I. 

In the beginning of the cycle of Osire 
the angels in the lower heaven and mor- 
tals on the earth worshiped Apollo, and 
mortals depended on the angels to tell 
them when to sow, when to reap, and when 
to lay in stores for the winter; neither ob- 
served man the time for any of these 
things. But after having destroyed the 
kingdoms of the numerous false Apollos, 
Osire appointed a great many Lords on 
the earth, and when man sought to know 
the time for sowing and reaping, and of 
laying in stores, Jehovih's Lords answered 
them by teaching man to observe the po- 
sition of the stars in the firmament, and 
the Lord taught men to call the different 
groups by name that he might distinguish 
between them; and man became independ- 
ent and sought to find the cause of all 
things in corpor. 

Now Shem had many tribes who had 
settled on the borders of the sea at Haven- 
ti and Gats, and the Lord who dwelt with 
them spoke through the chief prophet Tah, 
who made a record on stone, and wood, 
and cloth, of the Lord's word, and these 
were preserved in the valens of the Lord. 
And when Tah died the mantle of the 
Lord's gifts fell on Tah's son; who also had 
power to hear the Voice; and he also kept 
a record of the Lord's words. And when 
he died his son succeeded in the same 
way, and because of this truth the Lord 
called all of them by the sacred name Tah, 
the order of which continued for a hun- 
dred generations. And these tribes filled 
the country far and near with cities; and 
yet, in all the while, they killed nothing 
that had been created alive on the earth, 
or in the waters, or in the air above. 

In the early days of the Thins the Lord 
spake through the chief prophet, saying: 
When the inhabitants of one city or tribe 
marry with those of another city or tribe, 
it is but just that the names of father and 
mother be given to the offspring. But 
man understood not the Lord. So accord- 
ingly the inhabitants combined the names 
belonging to the neighboring tribes, thus: 



One tribe said ut, another for the same 
thing said yat, and another tribe said wat, 
and another hoot, and so on. So the 
after generation said utyatwathoot (mean- 
ing wheat), and this was called the Yiha 
language. And so great was the number 
and size of the words used that the writ- 
ings of the ancient prophets were lost, be- 
cause none could understand them. 

The Lord spake, saying: Because I de- 
sired to preserve the genealogy of my 
chosen, ye have applied the law to things 
that are worthless in my sight. Ye have 
built a tower of words, so that your lan- 
guages are confounded one with another. 

The Lord said: Come now, into 
murdhan, and I will deliver you. 

So the people sat in crescent, and the 
Lord stood betwixt the horns saying: Be- 
hold, I am the spirit. My word shall 
stand against all the world. Hear, then, 
the commandments of the Lord: 

Because ye have built a tower of words, 
ye are confounded; but I come to deliver 
you. Neither will I write nor teach writ- 
ten words, for they are folly, save to the 
learned. By word of mouth will I teach, 
and ye shall repeat after me. And these 
shall be sacred words to the end of the 
world. 

So the Lord taught orally in the temple, 
face to face with the people, and they 
learned the words and the meaning there- 
of. And those who learned the best, the 
Lord named Ritjiv, because he made them 
teachers over others. 

The Lord said: Because ye have con- 
founded the language of the ancients I will 
give you a new language, and it shall be 
called Vede, meaning perfect; nor shall 
any man alter the words I give? 

And the Lord spake not about foolish 
stories, but taught man how to live that 
he might be happy himself and a glory to 
the Great Spirit. 

CHAPTER II. 

The tribes of Ham were of many 
colors, and the Lord caused the name 
Ham to stand as a living testimony to the 



138 



CYCLE OF OSIBE 



LORDS' RECORD 



coming time of Kosmon. For the Lord 
foresaw that the time would come when 
the nations would look back for histories 
of his peoples, and so the Lord caused cer- 
tain words and signs to be perserved which 
should be testimony in the later times of 
earth. 

Of all colors (black, white, yellow, cop- 
per, red, and brown) were the tribes of 
Ham. Nevertheless they were of I'hin 
blood having flat nails and short arms, and 
of such as desired to acquire knowledge. 
And the Lord brought them to a country 
of rich pastures, where lived but few 
natives, the dark people, with short hair. 
The Lord said: Behold the multiple lan- 
guage of the tribes of Shem, side by side 
with the tribes of Jaffeth. The latter shall 
use the derivation of the Panic language of 
this day even in Kosmon. 

For I gave unto the tribes of these two 
different lands my ten commandments and 
ten invocations, to be not written, but 
spoken and taught from mouth to ear, to 
be sacred in the language given. And I 
locked up sufficient of the Panic language 
in Jaffeth as a testimony to be discovered 
in after years, showing that unlike Ham 
and Shem, a mighty nation could retain 
one language for thousands of years. For 
I foresaw that philosophers would try to 
prove that languages were of mortal ori- 
gin, and that they would change according 
to the growth of knowledge amongst men. 

The tribes of Ham had previously 
loved to migrate westward, and the tribes 
of Jaffeth and Shem loved to stay within 
their own countries. Jehovih said: 

Having designed Ham for teaching the 
barbarian world of Me and My dominion, 
I also prepared them that through their 
blood men and women should have hair 
neither straight nor short, but long 
and curled, red, white and brown, where- 
by might be traced in after ages the gene- 
alogy of nations. 

Now, in the midst of these three great 
countries, Jaffeth, Shem and Ham, was 
the chief place of the I'huans, where they 
founded a new nation; and the Lord 
called them Par'si'eans, because he cre- 
ated them as a shield to guard his 
chosen, the I'hins. The difference be- 
tween the I'huans and the Par'si'eans 
was that the Ihuans lived near and 



about the I'hins, but the Par'si'eans lived 
in a nation by themselves. Nevertheless 
they were all of the same blood and kin, 
being half breeds betwixt the I'hins and 
the native Druks; and they were large and 
of the color of new copper. And because 
they were favored of the Lord, the Lord 
gave them separate laws, and commanded 
them not to mix with the Druks, which 
commandments they kept for more than a 
thousand years. But in course of time the 
Par'si'eans were tempted by the Druks, 
and some of them fell from their high 
estate and thev became cannibals. 

And the Lord sent the Ghans, to whom 
he delivered his oral scriptures, to travel 
in search of his people; and a number of 
the Ghans were lost in the wilderness; and 
this was the country of the Par'si'eans, and 
that land was filled with wild goats. And 
the lost Ghans not being flesh eaters could 
find no food, and they said: Come, let us 
live on goats' milk. And they so lived for a 
long season, taming the goats and keeping 
herds of them. And they roved about, driv- 
ing their herds with them, for which reason 
they were called Shepherd Kings. And the 
Lord looked on them with favor, saying: 
These that call themselves shepherd kings 
shall have this country. Out of the seed 
of these people will I work wonders. And 
the Lord taught the shepherd kings how 
to make leather out of skins. The shep- 
herd kings made bags of leather in which 
they carried milk, which was thus churned, 
and they made butter. 

CHAPTER III. 

It being not the will of Jehovih that 
man should be led forever, the Lord said: 
A teacher that doeth all things for his 
pupil also sacrifices his pupil; he who 
teacheth his pupil wrongly sinneth against 
the Father; he who teacheth his pupil not 
at all is accessory to evil. So standeth the 
Lord over the childern of men. 

Behold, I have demonstrated that my 
chosen can maintain themselves unharmed 
amongst barbarians; also that by unre- 
strained marriages a sacred people is 
quickly lost amongst barbarians; and that 
man, witnessing terrible conflicts, would 
rather desire sons of strong limbs and 
crafty minds, to do murderous work; 
from which condition he had no incentive 



CYCLE OF OSIRE 



LORDS' RECORD 



139 



to rise in gentleness and love for the glory 
of the Great Spirit. 

That I, your Lord, might show after 
generations, first, that without my hand in 
the work no good nor peace could come 
amongst men, and, second, that only by a 
race of I'hins, as examples of my power, 
through signs and miracles, could the bar- 
barians be reached for their own good. 
Not only did I leave the ruins of my cities, 
which had no gates of entrance, and 
houses without doors of entrance, that ye 
might have testimony of the race of I'hins, 
but I have shown you that only by such 
procedure could the barbarians be induced 
to seek a higher and better mode of living. 

CHAPTER IV. 

When the Lord established the five 
peoples who were saved from Pan; and he 
commanded them to preserve Panic words 
in their respective countries, and they so 
preserved them. And the following is 
what became of these I'hins: 

Those who came to Guatama survived 
twenty-one thousand years, and attained to 
one thousand large cities, and three thou- 
sand small cities, being more than four 
million souls, and then became extinct as 
tribes. And they never had any king 
or queen, or other ruler save the Lord, 
who ministered unto them through the 
prophets. And they retained their sacred 
name of Guatama to the last; but the 
I'huans called them Ooch'lo'pan, signify- 
ing people of another world. And in course 
of time they became diminutive, and de- 
sired not to marry. And there came great 
darkness on the earth, with falling ashes, 
and heat and fevers; and so the Lord took 
them up to heaven. 

Those who came to Jaffeth survived 
twenty-one thousand years, and attained to 
two thousand large cities, and seven thou- 
sand small ones, being more than eight 
million souls, and then became extinct as 
tribes. And they had no king, serving 
the Lord only. And they retained the 
name Jaffeth to the last. But the I'huans 
called them Tua Git, signifying people of 
spirit light. And then came a'ji on the 
earth, and it touched them with impoten- 
cy, and they brought forth no more heirs. 

Those who came to Shem survived 
twelve thousand years, and attained to six 



hundred large cities, and two thousand 
small cities, being more than two million 
souls, and they became extinct by amalga- 
mation. Neither had they any king, but 
served the Lord through the prophets. 
And they retained their name Shem to the 
last; but the I'huans called them Sri-vede- 
iyi, signifying people of the perfect light. 
And impotence came upon them and they 
disappeared, for many of them married 
with the I'huans, but their children became 
I'huans, neither having the silken hair nor 
the musical voices of the I'hins, nor the 
light of the upper heavens. 

And those who came to Ham survived 
twenty-one thousand years, and attained to 
one thousand two hunderd large cities, and 
three thousand small cities, being four 
million souls, but being of mixed colors. 
But they broke the law of God more than 
all other Faithists, and they mingled with 
the I'huans. And they had no kings or 
queens, serving the Lord only through the 
prophets. And they retained the name of 
Ham to the last, when they ceased to exist 
as a separate people because of their amal- 
gamation with the I'huans. 

But the tribes that went in the two 
ships to the north land (Japan) could not 
be distinguished after a thousand years 
from the I'huans, because they mingled 
therewith, and were lost as I'hins. Never- 
theless they redeemed the barbarians unto 
wisdom and peace. 

CHAPTER V. 

In the time of Osire, the Lord pro- 
vided for the light and knowledge, that had 
been with the I'hins, to be merged into the 
new races, the Ghans and I'huans. By the 
Lord and his angels was such foundation 
laid. Before this time the I'hins could not 
inspire the barbarians to make leather and 
cloth; nor could they inspire them to in- 
dustries of any kind. 

The Lord provided oracle houses unto 
the inhabitants of the earth wherein the 
Lord could speak face to face with mor- 
tals, through his angels chosen for this 
purpose; persuading them to industries, 
and peace and righteousness, after the 
manner of the I'hins; teaching them of the 
stars and sun and moon; showing them 
how to find the times and seasons of the 



140 



CYCLE OF OSIRE 



LORDS' RECORD 



earth, and inspiring them to observe the 
stars and name them. 

But the Lord taught not that man 
should worship them, but that he should 
learn their glory and majesty in the firma- 
ment. But man forgot his Creator because 
of the wonder of His works. 

Behold, O all ye that say there is no 
Lord, I have left a remnant of the barba- 
rians. Let them that find the cause of the 
progress of man, to come of the earth, go 
raise up the barbarian. 

I say to man: Go commune with the 
spirits of the dead; and man doeth it. I 
say: Come away from such worship and 
fall down before the stars; and man 
doeth it. 

Jehovih said: My Lord, go thou; call 
man to one thing to-day and let him wor- 
ship it. For man shall fall down and wor- 
ship everything in heaven and earth. By 
trying them shall man know them. For in 
the day of My glory, Kosmon, man shall 
put away all worshipful things save Me, his 
Creator. 

Jehovih said: It is not the plan of My 
heavens for the spirits of the dead to re- 
main on the earth, engaging in mortal 
servitude and practices. Behold, the way 
of My kingdom is upward. Rather shall 
man on the earth seek to rise upward than 
that the angels of heaven go downward. 

Hence the Lord carried away the spir- 
its of the dead, and he turned man's judg- 
ment to learning the glories of the lower 
kingdoms. And man advanced in great 
learning, both of the sun, moon and stars, 
and of all things on the face of the earth. 

The Lord said: These signs have I 
given to man that he may comprehend the 
cycles of his Creator. When spiritual re- 
search is chief amongst men, they advance 
not in science, art, nor inventions. But 
when man is bereft of spiritual aspiration 
he advanceth in corporeal knowledge and 
inventions. 

These signs show the changes being 
wrought on mortals by the hand of the 
Almighty, through His Gods and Lords. 

The Lord said: Behold, I raised up 
great kings and queens on the earth; and 
I gave them pageantry, and rites and cere- 
monies, after the manner of heavenly 
things. And these I made as an inspiration 
to the multitude, that they might learn to 



provide themselves with the luxuries of all 
cerated things. For I desired not that man 
should become spiritual until the earth and 
all manner of savage beasts and serpents 
were subdued. Otherwise man had de- 
scended into impotence and failed on 
Earth. These testimonies have I left be- 
fore thee, that the spiritual man inclineth 
to shut himself up in seclusion and prayer; 
but the Osirians go forth to work man- 
fully. 

Thus gave the Lord to man the names 
of the stars, and their seasons; and the 
seasons of the sun, moon and Earth. 

CHAPTER VI. 

Great became the wisdom and power 
of man on earth in that day, and his 
power and glory were greater than had 
ever been before. He established mighty 
kingdoms and sub-kingdoms over the 
lands of Jaffeth, Shem, Par'si'e and Arab- 
in'ya.. He excelled in building temples 
and palaces, and in all manner of 
inventions; in fabrics of linen and silk, and 
wool and fine leather; in writing books 
and tablets; in mathematics, in navigation 
and inland travel; in making thermom- 
eters, and barometers, magnetic needles, 
telescopes and microscopes; in chemistry 
and botany. Verily did the philosophers of 
those days know the mysteries of heaven 
and earth. 

And man became no longer thankful to 
God and his Lords; but man became con- 
ceited, saying: 

The Gods are fools! All things are 
Nature and of growth. Man has become 
wise in spite of God and His Lords. All 
things evolve into higher states. It is the 
natural order. Neither is there any All 
Person, Jehovih! He is void, like the 
wind. 

And the Lord saw the conceit of man, 
and he said: He that I have raised up 
turneth against me. Now, will I go away 
from man for a season, that he may learn 
wisdom. Behold, man shall also find that 
many of his fellows will turn against him. 

So the Lord departed out of the star 
chambers, and the places became filled 
with the spirits of the newly dead, who 
were not of the heavens above nor the way 
of the Almighty. And man inquired of 
them thus: Behold, thou art now a spiritl 



CYCLE OF OSIRE 



LORDS' RECORD 



141 



Tell me, is there any God or Lord or Je- 
hovih! 

And the spirits, desiring to flatter man, 
and not knowing the heavenly kingdoms, 
answered: Nay, there is no God, nor 
Lord, nor All Person, Jehovih! 

So the kings issued edicts, commanding 
the people to no longer worship God, nor 
Lord, nor Jehovih! But woe for the judg- 
ment of kings and queens. Man, having 
inherent worship in his soul, ceased indeed 
to worship God, and his Lords, and even 
Jehovih; but instead he took to worship- 
ing the stars. 



Now the spirits manifesting in the tem- 
ples advised one thing through one seer, 
and another through another; for they 
were of little knowledge and wholly un- 
organized. So presently the kings took to 
war against one another. Anarchy ensued, 
and man fell to destroying all the glories 
he had made. 

Thus again, after three thousand years 
of prosperity, man went down in darkness, 
again fell under the obsession of drujas, 
and again became a barbarian for three 
hundred years more. 




Cycle or Fragapatti 



CHAPTER I. 

In Horub, an etherean world on the 
borders of the arc of Aza, in the proces- 
sion of Sayutivi, Chod and Gorce, a 
region of light, where reigned Fraga- 
patti, Orian Chief of Obsod and Goo- 
matchala one thousand years; God of 
Varn, God of Lunitzi, Witchka, Schleinka 
and Dows, thirty thousand years; Survey- 
or of Gies, roadway and trail of Fetisi and 
Mark, seventy thousand years; Prim of 
Vaga, Tsein, Loo-Gaab and Zaan, forty 
thousand years. 

Fragapatti said: Jehovih spake to me 
in the capital of Horub, whilst sitting in 
the Council of Obsod, where sat my mill- 
ion Gods, and there came from the Al- 
mighty's throne a great light, and with the 
Matchless Voice, Jehovih said: 

My Son! Go to the red star, Earth. 
She cometh thy way; her coat is red with 
mortal blood! 

Fragapatti said to the Council of Gods: 
The Father saith: The red star cometh 
this way; her coat is red with mortal 
blood! 

The Gods and Goddesses turned to 
their tables to mark the time, and quickly 
the whisper ran to a million ears: The 
red star! Earth! Ye recollect it was 
the little star where Sethantes stood man 
upright, now some sixty thousand years 
ago; and Aph crushed in her walls and 
pruned her to the quick. 

And then they overhauled Earth's his- 
tory, these Gods and Goddesses; meas- 
ured her course to learn just when she 
would pass; and they found five years and 
fifty days would be her dawn of dan, her 
time to cross the arc of Aza. And as yet 
she roamed two hundred years away. 

Fragapatti said: Because the All Light 
hath given such long warning, great labor 
cometh anon. Let my swift messengers 
come; I would speak to them. 

Then the marshals ushered in the swift 
messengers, saluting before the throne. 



Fragapatti said: Autevat, my son, the 
All Light fell upon me, saying: My son, 
go to the red star, Earth; her coat is 
red with mortal blood! Now, by her 
time, she standeth more than two hundred 
years beyond the boundaries of Horub. 
For this I called thee and thy attendants. 
How long will it take thee to go and sur- 
vey Earth and her heavens and return? 

Autevat, well trained in such matters, 
said: Of Earth's time, forty days. 
Fragapatti said: What number of attend- 
ants wilt thou require for so great a dis- 
tance? And Autevat said: Twenty thou- 
sand. 

Fragapatti said: Provide thee, then, 
all thou requirest and go at once. And if 
thou shalt find the inhabitants of Earth 
suitable for sacred records, commission 
thou the God to send loo'is to raise up an 
heir for Jehovih's kingdom. 

Autevat said: Thy will and Jehovih's 
be done. And, duly saluting, he and his 
attendants withdrew, and, coming to Gat- 
wawa, ordered an arrow ship of twenty 
thousand gauge. In two days it was com- 
pleted; and during the time Autevat had 
chosen his attendants for the red star, 
Earth, to see what was the matter, that a 
God so far away as Fragapatti was could 
feel and know the flow of human blood! 

For as mortals can sense things a short 
distance, Jehovih's upraised Gods can feel 
the breath of the stars, and know when 
they are disordered, and the manner of 
their disorder. 

CHAPTER II. 

Fragapatti and the Council were deeply 
engaged in the Sortiv of an Orian arc, 
through which the phalanx of Inihab and 
her constellation was soon to pass; 
an etherean region where the star Un- 
howitchata had been dissolved some 
twenty days before and thirty thousand 
million bound spirits removed by the chief 
of Avaia and his band of etherean Gods, 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



143 



who had drawn largely on the inhabitants 
of Ful, a garden of Horub, in Fragapatti's 
dominions. And Avaia had quartered the 
dismembered hosts near Sortiv, where the 
light of the arc fell sharply on them; to 
complete which concourse taxed the Gods 
for more help than was at hand. To rem- 
edy which, Fragapatti's hosts were extend- 
ing the ji'ay'an fields of Uth and lowering 
the grade suitable to the spirits of dark- 
ness rescued from Unhowitchata, a prolific 
world, bringing forth imperfect human 
souls too abundantly. 

And Inihab was soon to pass the arc 
of Sortiv, with her three hundred stars. 
many of them larger than Earth, to 
seventy of which the inhabitants of Horub 
would need go as redeeming Gods and 
Goddesses for the dawn of dan upon them. 
To apportion all of which. Fragapatti and 
his million Council had work on hand, so 
that the condition of Earth and her hea- 
vens weighed not seriously upon them. 

But in such period as would be forty 
days on Earth, Autevat and his attend- 
ants, with the arrow ship of fire, returned 
from Earth and her heavens, speeding 
close to Obsod, where the marshals re- 
ceived them, and announced them to the 
Council. Fragapatti said: Let Autevat 
and his attendants approach the throne. 

And Autevat went in, saluting, and 
stood before the chief, Fragapatti. Aute- 
vat said: In Jehovih's name, and by His 
power and wisdom, am I here to proclaim 
of the red star and her heaven. 

First, then: It is three thousand one 
hundred years since great Osire sowed the 
seed of mental culture amongst mortals, 
and it hath grown to be a giant, and a 
most merciless tyrant. To learn whereof 
I speak, God and his Lords gave me voice 
and word, and opened the libraries of their 
heavens, and accompanied me around 
about Earth, to all nations, tribes and wan- 
derers. To me the God of Earth said: 

Greeting to Fragapatti, in the name of 
the Father! And to thee, His Son! Take 
thou this record to him and his Council 
in Horub. For I am powerless through 
my Lords and hosts against such odds. 

From the time great Osire ascended to 
his etherean realm, our heaven yielded 
ample harvests for one thousand five hun- 
dred years. And God and Lords succeed- 



ed in regular order for every dan put upon 
Earth. But then came a change, for the 
a'ji'an fields pressed close on every side 
of heaven, and the souls of angels and 
mortals turned down to the earth. After 
which time only such as were already with- 
in the second resurrection strove for the 
upper grades. Thus our colleges, schools 
and factories were left vacant; for the hosts 
of es'yans, newborn from Earth, were 
stubborn in their earthly learning, spurn- 
ing wise counsel and association. And 
there were born from Earth into atmos- 
pherea millions and millions of spirits, 
who could not believe they were dead, but 
maintained they were confined in dark 
dungeons, howling and cursing day and 
night. For the seed of corporeal knowl- 
edge had taken root in the I'huan race. 
They had learned the motions, names and 
places of the stars, the moon and sun; and 
from these prophesied the affairs of 
nations and men. And duly marked out, 
with maps and charts, the destiny of 
things, according to the dates of corporeal 
births and movements, attributing the 
highest central cause to the sun. 

And thus they cast aside all spirit, even 
Jehovih, reasoning that if the sun made 
winter and summer, and grass to grow 
and die, so it ruled over animals and men. 
And so the temples built to observe the 
stars, before which men once fell down 
and worshiped Jehovih, became the places 
of decrees to horrid deaths of all who 
taught or believed in spirit. And now 
rose a mighty nation on earth of the 
I'huans, called Par'si'e, and they ignored 
the decrees of Gods and Lords to build no 
city larger than two thousand souls; for- 
sooth declaring the Gods and Lords to be 
but inspirations from the quickening 
power of the sun and stars, made dark 
and personal by the credulity of past ages. 
And so, in representation of the solar pha- 
lanx, they built Oas, a sun city, which 
standeth to this day of a million souls, 
sworn to make it the central ruler over all 
the world, and all other places tributary 
and paying for its glory. And over Oas 
they made a king, and called him King of 
the Sun, the kingship to be passed down 
from him to his heirs forever. 

And Oas was embellished and adorned 
above all other places that had been on the 



14:4: 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



earth, the fame of which spread abroad 
over Jaffeth, Shem and Ham, betwixt 
which it lieth. Its colleges became fam- 
ous, and its observatories were of such 
magnificence that their roofs were covered 
with silver and gold. The mirrors and 
lenses and dark chambers within the tow- 
ers were so constructed that the stars 
could be read as well in the day as at 
night, and the records of observation cov- 
ered more than a thousand years by men 
of great learning. But now, alas, Oas as- 
pires not only to be the central sun in 
knowledge, but in power and dominion, 
over the whole world. And so, from her 
ample treasures, she sendeth forth armies 
to conquer and destroy, to gather and 
plunder, to build up her magnificence still 
greater. 

So Jaffeth, Shem and Ham ran red 
with human blood, whereat I raised my 
voice to high heaven, that Jehovih would 
send deliverance for the souls of men. For 
of the millions slain, whose spirits still lie 
on the battle-fields in chaos, or madly 
fighting some unseeen horror, none can 
be persuaded to come to holier places in 
heaven; whilst hosts of them rush madly 
into Oas, to find their souls accursed by 
mortals. So the heaven of Earth hath 
fallen to the earth, save the I'hins and the 
far-off I'huans, whose spirits my Lords 
gather in and prepare for resurrection. But 
amongst the Par'si'e nation, none more be- 
lieve the dead shall rise, nor that spirit is; 
but that with the mortal death there is the 
end, to which the king hath made a de- 
cree that never more shall man teach or 
preach of a heaven for spirits of the dead, 
nor proclaim a Great Spirit, a Creator. 

Autevat said: In such manner God dis- 
closed the affairs of earth and heaven, 
which things, in fuller detail, I, with my 
attendants, beheld in every land and king- 
dom. And as we sat in Vibraj, in the 
sacred circle, a light, a single star, ap- 
peared before us, even at the throne of 
God; and from its center the book of 
heaven fell, as if to send broadcast before 
mortals the plan and will of Jehovih, near 
at hand. 

At this God said: Tell me, Autevat, 
thou that travelest across the mighty 
heavens and art stored with the knowledge 
of Gods ruling over other worlds, what is 



the signal of this light and sacred book? 
To which I replied: This, O God: The time 
hath come to Earth to prove to mortals the 
things whereof the Gods and Lords have 
taught. History shall no longer be locked 
up with the chosen race, the I'hins, but it 
shall stand before all men. Thou shalt 
prove the resurrection before these stub- 
born kings, these slaughterers of men, 
that they may say, not as the I'hins, we 
believe the soul immortal, because handed 
down from the ancients, but because it 
hath been demonstrated before our eyes. 

God said: How shall this be? To 
which I replied: Not I, great God, can 
tell, for that department is not in my keep- 
ing. But this much I know: Thou shalt 
send loo'is into the city of Oas, and they 
shall raise up a su'is sar'gis of the fourth 
grade. All else leave thou till Fragapatti 
cometh. 

God said: To reach the fourth grade 
will require five generations, which shall 
spring from the I'hin race,' commingling 
the I'huans. Go, then, O Autevat, to thy 
etherean home before the Council of 
Obsod, to Jehovih's throne, and say to 
great Fragapatti: An heir to the light 
shall be born ere the dawn of dan of 
Horub. 

Autevat said: On learning these things 
I took my leave and came swiftly back to 
thy realm. 

Fragapatti said: It is well. In the 
time of the next dawn of dan on Earth 
I will take a vacation in which to fulfill 
Jehovih's plan on Earth and in her heav- 
ens. 

So saluting Autevat, who retired, Frag- 
apatti proceeded with his Council in the 
affairs of other worlds, having made a 
memorandum of the time and place Earth 
should near the plains of Horub, in 
the etherean worlds, some two hundred 
years yet to come. 

CHAPTER III. 

And when the time of dawn had come, 
Jehovih's voice spake to Fragapatti, in his 
etherean home, saying: My Son! Behold, 
the dawn of dan neareth the border of 
Horub, and God and Lords of Earth 
are proclaiming the name of My infant 
Son, Zarathustra. 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



145 



So Fragapatti went into his etherean 
Council of Gods and Goddesses and said: 
The time hath come; the red star borders 
on the plains of Horub. Jehovih calleth! 

Then the Council rejoiced, for the 
weighty matters of hundreds of etherean 
worlds were settled for a space of time, 
with promised rest and recreation in cor- 
poreal fields. 

First spake Ad'ar, God of many worlds, 
a decreer of time in a'ji'an vortices, in the 
regions of Hispian suns, saying: O Jeho- 
vih, I rejoice that Thou hast decreed Frag- 
apatti five years' rest, the dawn of Earth in 
dan, with only Earth and her heavens to 
deal with. 

Next spake Fivaka, Goddess of three 
etherean worlds, the white-haired wielder 
of the Scimetar of Bars, period of Os, Car- 
bon fashioner of the arcs of Job and Sawl. 
She said: 

O Jehovih, what shall be the prayer of 
thy daughter Fivaka? What can her love 
devise for the rest and glory of our Orian 
Chief, Fragapatti? 

Then spake Che'sin, marshal in chief 
for seven etherean worlds, small man, with 
flowing beard, brought forth from the star 
Indr. He said: O Jehovih, make me con- 
tributor of my much love to the rest and 
glory of our Holy Chief, Fragapatti! 

Thus spake ten thousand Gods and 
Goddesses of their love and high esteem 
for the worker, Fragapatti, rich in love, 
power and wisdom, above all etherean 
Gods in Horub. 

Fragapatti said: Ten millions strong 
my hosts shall be. On Earth and her 
heavens, during the dawn of dan, five 
years and fifty days we shall have no other 
labor, thus making it as a holiday for 
Gods and Goddesses to redeem the fallen 
world ! 

When Fragapatti had spoken, the 
proper officers and workmen proceeded to 
their parts, and in seven days the Yattal 
announced the fire-ship, the beyan float, 
ready for the journey. Meantime, the se- 
lection of ten million redeemers had been 
made, and they came, every one like a 
brilliant star, to take their rooms in the 
monarch vessel. Fragapatti made Huod 
commander in chief, and gave him ten 
thousand aids. For the curtains and tallij, 
he made Metrav, Goddess of Rook, Mis- 



tress of the Flowing East. And for the 
spires, he made lata Mistress of Restless 
Morn. She was Weaver to Ga'ing, in 
Reth, four thousand years, and much 
loved, with black eyes, piercing. Of music 
Fragapatti made Theritiviv conductor. She 
was Goddess of Helm, an etherean world 
in the roadway Zi and Olus, four thou- 
sand years Mistress of Ne'alt and Exan; 
one time companion to Etisyai, the Vruiji, 
loved in Wan and Sangawitch for her 
mirth in adversity. Of the trumpeters, 
Fragapatti made Boan conductor; he was 
God of Ixalata, now on leave of absence. 
For Chartist, he made Yan the chief; he 
was Surveyor of Oatha, an etherean sea in 
the Orian arc of Wede and Hollenpoit- 
chava, also on leave of absence during the 
red star dawn. He made Hetta Chief Mis- 
tress of the Libraries. She was Goddess 
of Vitia in the Wails of South Eng, thirty 
thousand years Teacher of Imies, and ten 
thousand years Counselor of the Orian 
chief Erris, of the arc Wiamesse. 

Besides these, Fragapatti distributed 
the minor offices of the float to such Gods 
and Goddesses whose most exalted states 
were the extreme opposite. And thus they 
started on their course, amidst the ap- 
plause of thousands of millions of ethere- 
ans, wishing them love and joy on their 
mirthful cruise in furtherance of Jehovih's 
will. 

Speeding swiftly across the swamps of 
Ull, where seven corporeal stars were dis- 
membered a thousand years ago, now set 
with a'ji'an fields and forming nebulae; 
whereto they bring at times the drujas, the 
dark spirits of other worlds, that they may 
take on the semblance of corporeal forms 
to complete their neglected works in times 
past; the ship rose, and they shot into the 
pastures of Ze, where Lepsa, God of the 
corporeal star Tessa four hundred years, 
was caring for seventy million es'yans, col- 
onizing them to truth and good works. 
Lepsa knew the float was coming, and so 
had called a thousand million spectators, 
knowing they desired to see great Fraga- 
patti; and they sang and blew their trum- 
pets, rejoicing; to which the Gods and 
Goddesses of the float cast out myriads of 
arc'ian flowers and sweet perfumes. 

To Evul, now, the ■ ship made way, 
where seven etherean worlds bordered in 



146 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



the arc of Nu, pastures of Elim, God of 
Ooh'sin, where congregated another host 
of two thousand million to see them pass, 
cheering and singing and playing with 
trumpets and stringed instruments; and to 
this God, Elim, Fragapatti caused the 
banners of the float to salute on the sign 
Jehovih's name, being friends for ninety 
thousand years, and Elim answered him 
with a million posts of light, amidst the 
waving of innumerable banners. 

Onward moved the float, the fire-ship, 
with its ten million joyous souls, now 
nearing the borders of Horub, the boun- 
dary of Fragapatti's honored regions, 
known for hundreds of thousands of years, 
and for his work on many worlds. Here, 
reaching C'vork'um, the roadway of the 
solar phalanx, near the post of dan, where 
were quartered five hundred million ethe- 
erans, on a voyage of exploration of more 
than four million years, rich stored with 
the glories of Great Jehovih's Universe. 

Their Koa'loo was almost like a world, 
so vast and stored with all appurtenances. 
They talked of going home! Their pilots 
had coursed the firmament since long be- 
fore Earth was made, and knew more 
than a million roadways in the etherean 
worlds, and where best to travel to witness 
the grandest contrasting scenes. 

By invitation, Fragapatti halted here 
awhile, and the hosts interchanged their 
love and discoursed on their purposes, re- 
joicing in the glories of Jehovih's everlast- . 
ing kingdoms; and though they had lived 
so long and seen so much, every one had 
new and wondrous works to tell of; for so 
great is the inventive power of the Great 
Spirit that never twice alike will one find 
the scenes in the etherean worlds, but ra- 
diantly different, moving into everlasting 
changes, as if each one were to outdo the 
former in beauty and magnificence. 

Onward sped Fragapatti's fire-ship, 
richly stored with the soul-stirring won- 
ders they had just heard from strange trav- 
elers. Presently the float neared Chin- 
vat. Here Fragapatti halted for a day, 
sending swift messengers down to the 
lower heavens and to the earth, to re- 
solve where he should anchor during 
dawn. And the next day he ordered 
the lights lowered, and now slowly 
moved toward the rolling Earth, down, 



down, till he reached the third grade 
of plateau from Earth's surface, called 
Haraiti. 

CHAPTER IV. 

Jehovih said: Here, My Son, in Hara- 
iti, have I laid the foundation of thy king- 
dom. Here make fast thy fire-ship; call 
forth thy hosts; build thou a throne. Frag- 
apatti said: Here will I build a throne, O 
Jehovih. Haraiti shall be my headquar- 
ters for the dawn of dan. Come forth, O 
ye Gods of dawn! Come forth, O ye God- 
desses of dawn! Hear the voice of the 
Son of Jehovih. 

The ship was anchored and the ten 
millions came forth and assembled in a 
living altar. Fragapattti raised his hand, 
saying: Throne of Thy throne, O Jeho- 
vih! And the hosts raised their hands, 
and the elements took shape and majesty, 
rising into a| throne brilliant as fire. Then 
Fragapatti ascended and sat on the throne, 
saying: Glory be to Thee, O Father! 

A light came down from the etherean 
firmament and covered the throne over 
with a canopy wide enough for five mill- 
ion men to sit under; and at the borders of 
the canopy the ethereans, whose work it 
was, set up columns of crystals, opaque 
and transparent, illuminated with all pos- 
sible colors, shades and tints. 

Fragapatti said: I will build here a 
Council Chamber, O Jehovih. And now 
the hosts, Gods and Goddesses, held up 
their arms and Jehovih cast down material 
with which they built the habitable Mouru, 
a council chamber and capital of Haraiti. 
Then all hands turned to prayers; then 
sang in praise. After which Fragapatti 
said: 

In Thy name, and by Thy Power and 
Wisdom, O Jehovih, will I now establish 
Earth's heavens anew. My marshals 
shall proceed down to Vibraj and com- 
mand the presence of God and his Lords, 
and all such others as can endure this 
light. They shall hear my voice and learn 
my decrees. 

Ten thousand marshals, saluting, de- 
parted for the earth and regions below. 

Fragapatti said: Meanwhile, I will ap- 
point my High Council of the first house 
of Mouru, Gods and Goddesses of dawn. 
Hear me, then, in the name of Jehovih. 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



147 



Caoka, God of Airram; Ata-kasha, God of 
Beraitis; Airyama, God of Kruse; Pathe- 
ma, Goddess of Rhon; Maidayarrya, Mis- 
tress of Karyem; Gatha-Ahunavaiti, God- 
dess of Halonij ; Rama-quacktra, God of 
Veres; Vahista, God of Volu; Airam- 
ushya, God of Icisi, the Myazdas; Haptan- 
haiti, God of Samatras; Yima, God of 
Aom; Sudgha, God of Laka; I'ragha, God 
of Buhk-dhi; Elicic, Goddess of N'Syrus; 
Harrwaiti, Goddess of Haut-mat, in a'ji; 
Dews, Goddess of Vaerenthagna; Wette- 
maiti, Goddess of Dyhama; Quactra, God- 
dess of Aegima; Ustavaiti, Goddess of 
Maha-Meru; Cura, Goddess of Coronea; 
Yenne, Goddess of Aka; Caoshyanto, God 
of Aberet; Rathweiska, God of Huri; 
Cpentas, God of Butts; Vairyo, God of 
Nuga-gala; D'Zoata and her brother, 
Zaota, God and Goddess of Atarevasksha; 
Ratheweiskare, God of Nece; Yatha, God 
of Ameshas,. and Canha, God of Srawak, 
shall be members of the Council of Dawn. 

Fragapatti said: O Jehovih, behold 
the glory of my house! I have chosen 
only such as have ruled over whole worlds. 
Was ever a God favored with such a Coun- 
cil? Was ever so great a light sent to so 
small a world as the red star? 

Jehovih said: As I have created man 
to need relaxation . at times, so have I 
carried the same conditions to be desired 
by My highest of Gods. Neither have I 
exalted any God so high but the most 
menial office in his glory. Neither shall 
the autocrat learn sympathy till he liveth 
with a beggar, nor the highest man learn 
love and tenderness without taking a sea- 
son in the depths of misery. 

Fragapatti said: Shall the strong man 
forget he was once a child? Can an Orian 
Chief forget he was once a slave? Can he 
that is in the light forget those who are 
in the dark? Mighty art Thou, O Jeho- 
vih! I came to Earth and her heavens to 
rest myself in Thy service; but Thou wert 
here before me. Thy Voice riseth up to 
counsel me; yea, I am still but a child to 
Thee! 

CHAPTER V. 

When Fragapatti had selected both de- 
partments of his Council, which comprised 
one hundred thousand souls, he said: 

When a God espouseth a new kingdom 



it is customary for him to create his own 
capital and affix the boundaries of his 
lights and hall of audience; but when he 
hath Gods and Goddesses for his assist- 
ants, it is proper for them to help in the 
buildings. In this case I make it your 
labor to provide this realm. 

Hardly had his words gone forth when 
the Gods and Goddesses stretched forth 
their hands unto Jehovih, and the elements 
of the plateau took shape, and there stood 
the canopy of the new kingdom; then 
again they stretched forth their hands to 
Jehovih and there came materials of the* 
walls of the house of heaven; and yet again 
they stretched forth their hands to Jeho- 
vih, and there came also materials for the 
floor and foundation. And the house was 
called the House of Mouru, the place of 
the throne of Fragapatti in the lower heav- 
ens. On the plains beyond the house 
Fragapatti created a thousand fields, and 
in each of them he created ten thousand 
mansions, and every mansion was capable 
of one thousand souls, with roadways from 
one to another, Fragapatti designing 
them, his hosts being the workmen, in the 
wisdom and power of Jehovih. 

Whilst this work was going on, the 
marshals who went down to Vibraj re- 
turned, bringing God and his Lords with 
them, and also twelve hundred thousand 
spirits of the second resurrection. Fraga- 
patti commanded them to bring God and 
his Lords into the house of Mouru, and 
they were so brought. 

Fragapatti said: In the name of Jeho- 
vih, I salute thee, God of Earth, and thy 
Lords, and thy hosts. 

God said: In Thy name, O Jehovih r 
am I, and my Lords, and my hosts, blessed 
with great joy. Now that thou hast come, 
O Fragapatti, to redeem the Earth-born, 
this is a joyful period in the time of 
worlds. 

The Lords said: For ourselves and 
our hosts, O Jehovih, do we thank Thy 
Son, Fragapatti. 

Fragapatti said: That thou, O God, 
may know my decrees, I commanded thee 
and thy Lords and thy exalted hosts hith- 
er. Hear me, then, and to whom I send 
thee do thou my commandments, in the 
name of Jehovih. The time hath come 
when mortals on Earth shall begin 



148 



CYCLE OF FBAGAPATTI 



their lessons in spiritual things, being 
themselves made part in the building of 
Jehovih's kingdoms. Through thee, the 
present reigning God of Earth and her 
heavens, must be carried out the death 
and resurrection of thy chosen heir, Zara- 
thustra, to prove first, that man on the 
corporeal earth can live All Pure and with- 
out sin; second, that corporeal death be- 
longeth to the earth-body of man, and not 
to the spirit; and, third, that after death 
the same person can rise in spirit and ap- 
pear to mortals, to be seen and known; 
after which he shall show his final ascent 
toward the upper heavens in the arms of 
his God. 

Whilst this cometh upon thee in per- 
son, thou shalt also, through thy minister- 
ing angels, prove to mortals the advantage 
of virtue and truth over sin and darkness. 
For thou shalt cause to be stricken in 
death two men who are all impure; and 
they shall suffer death at the same time 
with thy heir, Zarathustra; but these shall 
not have power of themselves to appear 
before mortals after death. For mortals, 
shall hereafter be a testimony to one an- 
other of the reward of virtue, and the 
power of being one with the Gods who 
are Sons of Jehovih. But since all attesta- 
tion by spirits can be set at defiance by 
the craft of philosophers, thou shalt not 
wait till after the death of thy heir to teach 
the truths of the Father's kingdom, but 
beforehand. Causing Zarathustra, whilst 
yet mortal, to write down rules of mortal 
life, and doctrines, and faith, and repent- 
ance, and praise of the Great Spirit, and 
of prophecy, and all manner of righteous 
gifts, and the power of miracles, and the 
triumph of the spirit of man over cor- 
poreal elements. And when thou hast com- 
pleted these things thou shalt bring the 
spirit of Zarathustra to this House; but 
the druks who suffer death with him thou 
shalt deliver in the usual way to the places 
prepared for their resurrection. 

Tell me, then, how standeth thy heir? 
And ask of me whatsover thou wilt to as- 
sist thee to carry out these, my decrees, 
and it shall be granted unto thee. 

God said: Zarathustra hath attained 
his twentieth year, and comprehendeth the 
destiny put upon him. He is pure and 
wise, with faith and gentleness; but he is 



larger and more powerful than any other 
man in the world. He is instructed both 
in the spiritual and corporeal senses, hav- 
ing a knowledge of the books of the 
ancients, and of writing and of making of 
tablets. 

Fragapatti said: Five years thou shalt 
have in which to complete thy labor. De- 
part, therefore, to thy place, taking with 
thee such of thy Lords and hosts as thou 
mayest require. I will appoint a thousand 
messengers to travel betwixt thy place and 
this, that every day thou shalt ask for this 
or that, and whatever thy requests may be, 
it shall be granted unto thee. To which 
God replied: 

I will go now and cause Zarathustra to 
write a book of wisdom, and give him 
prophecy over the kings and nations and 
tribes of men. What I do shall be cited 
to thee in Mouru. 

Thus saying, God withdrew and select- 
ed such asssistants as he desired; and after 
this Fragapatti granted a day of recrea- 
tion, in which time the ethereans were 
made well acquainted with the conditions 
of mortals and of the thousands of mill- 
ions of spirits still lingering in the first 
resurrection, and in darkness and chaos. 
On the next day God and his hosts de- 
parted for the earth, well attended by 
thousands of volunteers from the etherean 
sojourners of Haraiti. 

CHAPTER VI. 

Fragapatti said: The Voice of Jehovih 
spake to me, saying: My Son, appoint 
thou an assistant chief to sit on thy 
throne, and go thou around about atmos- 
pherea, taking surveyors and inspectors 
with thee; for thou shalt see with thine 
own eyes the condition of the thousands 
of millions of spirits in hada. 

Fragapatti said: In Jehovih's name, I 
announce Athrava my assistant, God of 
Mouru. There was great rejoicing in the 
Council at this. Then came Athrava for- 
ward and ascended Jehovih's throne, and 
sat on the right hand of Fragapatti. 
Etherean lights fell upon the place on 
every side, and Fragapatti gathered from 
the elements and made a crown for Ath- 
rava, and crowned him. Officers and 
workmen were sent to build a conveyance 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



149 



for Fragapatti, and for such attendants as 
he might take with him. So the next day 
Fragapatti chose his companions, thirty 
thousand, making Verethragna speaker, 
and he and they departed for their inspec- 
tion of hada and the Earth. His ship was 
built without lights or curtains, so they 
might travel unobserved. First, he in- 
spected the plateau of Haraiti, which prior 
to this had never been inhabited; and he 
found its distance from the Earth was 
equal to ten diameters of the Earth; and 
its east and west and north and south di- 
ameters corresponded in size to what the 
Earth would be were it that volume; that 
is, the superfice of the plateau was five 
hundred and twenty-eight thousand miles 
in every direction. And in the ratio of 
the number of mortals on the Earth, this 
plateau would inhabit five hundred and 
twenty-eight million souls. And yet this 
was not the thousandth part of the num- 
ber it could sustain. 

Fragapatti said: Such is Haraiti, O 
Jehovih. And yet there have been till now 
no spirits to come and inhabit it! Who 
can survey Thy works, O Father? Who 
shall fear for the limit of Thy handiwork? 

Verethragna said: And yet we shall 
find in the lowest places spirits huddled 
together like bees in a hive. And is it not 
so with mortals also? They cluster to- 
gether in cities and tribes, warring for 
inches of ground, whilst vast divisions of 
the Earth lay waste and vacant. 

Fragapatti said: Is this not the sum of 
the darkness of mortals and of spirits in 
the lowest realms? They know not how 
to live? A spider or an ant is more one 
with the Creator than they. 

Fragapatti and his companions now 
visited Zeredho, which was six diameters 
of the Earth distant. Here they found a 
colony of two thousand million spirits that 
had been founded by Osire three thousand 
three hundred years before; but not the 
same people, being such as came up from 
the Earth afterwards. They had a God 
named Hoab, an atmospherean two thou- 
sand one hundred years. And he was up- 
right and wise, and of most excellent good 
works; but, knowing nothing of etherea, 
had no ambition to rise thither. And his 
content had visted itself on the colony, 
and they were contented also. 



Fragapatti asked: To remain here for- 
ever, is this the extent of thy desires, 
Hoab? And Hoab answered him, saying: 
Yea, Master. What more is life than to 
reach the highest place and remain there? 
To which Fragapatti said: Is this the all 
highest? And Hoab said: Yea, Master. 
Any place and condition is the all highest 
if man make it so. None can attain higher 
than I; no people higher than my people. 
We are freed from the Earth and hada, 
and we desire not to return thither, nor to 
go to any other place. 

Fragapatti said: Let us walk a little 
that I may see thy kingdom. Hoab con- 
sented, and they walked along, seeing the 
inhabitants lying at ease, some amusing 
themselves weaving threads of light, then 
unraveling them and weaving them over 
again; others playing with crystals and 
lenses and opaque and transparent ele- 
ments, but not one doing anything for 
another; nor in fact needed they, for all 
were capable of doing for themselves. 
Now after they had traveled awhile Fraga- 
patti said: Hast thou not a desire to re- 
turn to the plateau below thee, Hoab, 
where the inhabitants are in misery and 
darkness, and bring them into thine own 
realm? To which Hoab said: 

Nay, Master. Let them shift for them- 
selves. Even if we helped them, they 
would be thankless. Nay, my doctrine is: 
Man is the highest of all things; the ele- 
ments are dumb; the worlds are many and 
wide. Let man choose a corner for him- 
self, and there settle forever. 

Fragapatti asked: Because a man 
chooseth a corner, is it necessarily his 
own? Hoab said: Our place was be- 
queathed us by our forefathers; of course 
it is ours, and will remain ours forever. 
Neither allow we any other spirits to set- 
tle in our dominions. Being far away 
from the rest of the world, we are not 
much molested. 

Fragapatti said: How came ye hither? 
Hoab said: Long ago there came a God 
hither, named Osire, bringing six thou- 
sand million drujas up from the Earth. 
With them he founded a colony here, with 
factories, colleges, hospitals and all things 
necessary to enlighten the people, giving 
them ample teachers. In course of time 
many of the inhabitants migrated away 



150 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



from this place, and it was almost depleted 
of its people. But the Gods below this 
sent new supplies of inhabitants, of which 
we are the second and third installments; 
so we inherited the place, with all its fac- 
tories and educationals and other places. 

Fragapatti said: As ye were raised up 
by the Gods of other places, would it not 
give ye joy to raise up others who are still 
in darkness? Hoab said: Nay, Master. 
We are pure and refined; the atmosphere 
of drujas is unpleasant to us. They would 
vitiate our own happiness, besides entail- 
ing toil and responsibility upon us. We 
cannot mix with any people but the refined 
and holy. We take care of ourselves; let 
others do the same. 

Fragapatti said: Who thinkest thou I 
am, and my people with me? Hoab said: 
Visitors from some far-off realm, who are 
either discordant with yourselves or bent 
on meddling with the affairs of other peo- 
ples. We have had visitors before, and we 
never grieved when they left us. To which 
Fragapatti replied: 

Thou art strong in thy philosophy. To 
be satisfied with one's own self and be- 
havior is to be a God in fact. Hadst thou 
nothing to fear from immigration coming 
to thy shore, or to fear from some new 
philosophy undermining thy long estab- 
lished convictions, thou mightest indeed be 
the happiest of Gods and thy people the 
happiest of people. 

Hoab said: True. Thou perceivest 
wisely. O that there was nothing to fear, 
nothing to dread forever! 

Then Fragapatti said: And I declare 
unto thee, Hoab, that such a condition can 
be attained. For I have seen kingdoms in 
heaven so fortified. And wert thou and 
thy people prepared to receive the sacred 
secrets pertaining thereto, I would most 
willingly unfold them before thee. Hoab 
said: Thou art a wise God; tarry thou 
and teach us. 

Fragapatti said: I am now on a jour- 
ney and cannot remain longer; but on one 
condition I will return hither and disclose 
these matters, so that never more shalt 
thou fear for immigration into thy coun- 
try, nor for any philosophy which any man 
or God can teach. Exact a promise of se- 
crecy from all thy people. Hoab said: 
It shall be done. 



So Fragapatti and his hosts withdrew 
and proceeeded on their journey, promis- 
ing to return when notification had been 
served on Hoab's people. But Fragapatti 
inspected the whole superfice and found it 
capable of educating and providing for ten 
hundred thousand million spirits, whereas 
there were but two thousand million in 
Hoab's kingdom; and they inhabited only 
a small corner of the plateau; neverthe- 
less, Hoab laid claim to the whole. 

After this Fragapatti descended to the 
next plateau, the first grade plateau above 
the Earth, called Aoasu, signifying land 
and sky world, for the first spirit life after 
mortal death. Aoasu had its foundation 
on the Earth, and it undulated with moun- 
tains and valleys, having seas over the 
corporeal seas. And the outer superfice 
of Aoasu was from twenty to a hundred 
miles above the Earth's surface, and hab- 
itable within and without. But the first 
resurrections were within it and on the 
earth's surface, and the second resurrec- 
tion mostly on its superfice. On the road- 
way betwixt Aoasu and Zeredho, next de- 
scending, it was that Osire established 
Vibraj, which was now so depleted of 
its people that Fragapatti halted not to 
examine it, but proceeded to Aoasu direct. 
Here lay the mountains of Morn and Eve, 
and the mountains of Moon and Sun and 
Stars, chief of which groups were: Ushi- 
daho, Ushidarena, Erezifya, Fraorepa, 
Ezora, Arezura, Tudae, Bumya, Doitya, 
Raiodhita, Mazassavao, Autare, a place 
of light, inhabited by Hura, Lord of Vou- 
ta; Ereasho, Vata-gaiko, a place of Uz, 
signifying torments because of its dark- 
ness. This group of mountains was ninety 
miles higher than the Earth mountains of 
Jaffeth. 

South of these were Adarana, Aayana, 
Isakata, Somya, Kanaka-tafegrhao, Vahra 
and the double mountain Hamanakanna; 
eight ranges of the round mountains, Fra- 
vanku; the four peaks, the Vidwaana. 
These extended over the Earth mountains 
of Shem, and had an altitude above the 
Earth of one hundred miles. These were 
the oldest inhabited spirit heavens since 
the submersion of Pan, whose plateaus 
were carried up to a higher heaven. 

Extending east and west lay the group 
called the Red Men's group — Aezaka, 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



151 



Maenaka, Vakhedrakae, Akaia, Tudhak- 
kae, Ishvakhaya, Draoshisvao, Cairivao, 
Nanhusmao, Kahayuyu, Autarekanhae, 
Karayaia, which were the first places in 
heaven for colonizing the spirits of the 
I'huan race. 

The next group lay to the west and 
south, which were Gichindava, I'huna- 
Varya, Raegamna, Akaya, Asha-Cteam- 
bana, Urinyovadidkae, Asnahovao, Usha- 
oma, Utsagaerenao, Cyamakhama, Cyama- 
ka, Vafrayaotso, Vafrayao, Vourrusha and 
Uasoakhao. 

To the south of this group were the 
Towering Eagles: Ijatarra, Adhutuva- 
vata, Ceptimavarenao, Cpentodata, Asna- 
voaya, Kairogakhaivacao, Tauraiosa, Ba- 
royo, Barocrayama, Fraayapoa, Udrya, 
Usayaokhava, Raevao. All of which 
groups were named by the Gods 
and Lords of the intermediate pla- 
teau during the time of the Yi-ha 
language amongst the mortals, being 
named after the amalgamation of the 
tribes of I'hins, every syllable in former 
ages being one tribe, whereof the Gods 
have made this testimony to endure from 
before the time of Fragapatti and Zara- 
thustra, wherein it may be proven to mor- 
tals and spirits that this division of the 
spirit world was revealed to man at the 
time language was carried to its highest 
compounding. 

Besides these mountains in the lowest 
heavens there were four thousand others, 
the names of which were fully registered 
in the libraries of heaven by Thor and his 
sub-Gods; but more than two thousand of 
them were uninhabited. 

Fragapatti said: Alas, these heavens! 
Who can measure the vanity of men and 
angels that cut loose from the Great 
Spirit, endeavoring to set up kingdoms on 
their own account! Their places perish. 
Behold these vagrant spirits, strolling 
about, or hiding amidst the ruins, millions 
of them prowling around, ashamed of their 
rags and nakedness. 

Verethragna said: I thank thee, O Je- 
hovih, that I am once again amongst the 
lowest! Keep me, O Father, amidst this 
darkness, till I shall never again forget 
the lowest of my brothers and sisters. I 
behold thy wisdom, O Jehovih! But for 
these cycles of time, in the dawns of which 



Thy ethereans can come down to witness 
the bounden in hell, they would themselves 
forget the horrors. O that Thou wilt not 
suffer me to rest till I have helped to 
raise them up to know Thee, and to be a 
glory within Thy works ! 



CHAPTER VII. 

Fragapatti surveyed Aoasu in the east, 
and his officers enumerated the spirits and 
recorded their condition, and then he 
called his conductors, saying: I have 
measured the East, take me now to the 
West. 

So the ship, with its passengers, was 
raised a little and started for the west, 
running low over the regions lying west 
of Ham, Shem and Jaffeth. Fragapatti 
said: 

I see the plan of the Gods on this star 
was to complete its inhabitation by going 
westward. For this reason I will see 
where they designed to have the Eve of 
Death and the birth of the Father's king- 
dom on the corporeal part. 

When they came to the Atlantic ocean 
they raised their ship still higher and sped 
across for the regions inhabited by the 
I'hins and I'huans. Arriving thither, they 
came to Ipseogee, a region in the lower 
heaven, where Hapacha, Lord of the 
I'hins, had a kingdom of seventy million 
souls, many of whom were I'huan spirits. 
Here Fragapatti halted and made fast his 
ship, remaining seven days. And Hapacha 
received him and his hosts and entertained 
them. And during the time of their so- 
journ Hapacha sent his otevan out around 
over all the heavens belonging to Guata- 
ma, north and south, taking the surveyors 
and inspectors of the hosts of Fragapatti 
into all inhabited places, so they could 
complete their records. In the meantime 
Hapacha conducted Fragapatti through- 
out his kingdom, exhibiting the factories, 
schools, colleges, hospitals and all such 
places as belong to the second resurrec- 
tion. 

Fragapatti said to Hapacha: In thee 
and thy kingdom I am well pleased. Thou 
shalt hear from me ere many days. At 
present I must depart. 



152 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



So Fragapatti told not who he was, nor 
what was his mission, but, gathering to- 
gether his hosts, departed, still going west- 
ward until he completed the circumference 
of the Earth. 

Now will I again go around the Earth, 
said Fragapatti, and inspect mortals and 
their kingdoms. So his conductors now 
ran the ship just above the lands, being 
guided by messengers familiar with the 
Earth and all the habitable places. And 
they zigzagged their course, going into all 
kingdoms, into all large cities, and into 
forests and plains, determining the condi- 
tion of the earth and its capabilities, 
as well as the conditions of mortals 
and their capabilities. And when Frag- 
apatti had completed this latter in- 
spection he returned to Mouru, in Hara- 
iti; and the whole time of his absence was 
twenty-seven days. And all the records 
obtained on the expedition were immedi- 
ately filed in Mouru, where the High 
Council and others who chose could read 
them. And on the third day thereafter 
Fragapatti resumed the throne of Jehovih, 
and was prepared to found anew the king- 
doms of atmospherea, and those of Earth, 
to overthrow or set aside what was not 
good, and to raise up both mortals and 
spirits who had proved themselves 
worthy. 

CHAPTER VIII. 

Now this was the manner of procedure 
in the House of Mouru: Fragapatti 
would announce the subject, then the rep- 
resentatives of hundreds would speak on 
the subject, each rank according to exalta- 
tion. When all that desired to, or whom 
Fragapatti asked, had spoken, then Fraga- 
patti would announce the decree, in the 
name of Jehovih. And this is an example 
of the decrees: 

Fragapatti said: What shall be the di- 
visions of the Earth and who the Lords 
thereof? And when the speakers of the 
House had expressed their light, then 
Fragapatti said: In the name of Jehovih 
these shall be the divisions of the Earth: 

Jaffeth on the east and north, by the 
sea and to the ice regions, and on the west 
to the mountains of Oh'e'loo, and it shall 
be called the first division. 



To the waters in the east and souths 
and westward to the highlands of E'zar, 
shall be named Shem. 

The south land shall henceforth be 
called Arabin'ya, encompassed by the sea. 
And north of this, the first country of the 
brown red race, shall be called Heleste, 
bordering on Shem and Jaffeth on the 
east and extending half way to the east on 
the west. 

Uropa shall be Goddess of the west 
part, and it shall be called after her. And 
the two great west lands shall be called 
North Guatama and South Guatama. And 
all the islands of the Earth shall be called 
Oce'ya, and the waters of the earth shall 
be called Oce'a, signifying mirror of the 
earth and sky. 

For the seven divisions of the Earth 
there shall be seven rulers of the rank of 
Lord God; and for South Oce'ya, one 
ruler of the rank of Lord; and for North 
Oce'ya, one ruler of the rank of Lord; and 
for Japan, one ruler of the rank of sub- 
God. 

Hear me, O ye Gods and Goddesses: 
Whom I shall proclaim from amongst you 
shall reign during the dawn of dan only, 
but they shall raise up successors in Je- 
hovih's name, to the same rank, to hold 
dominion two hundred years, the next 
succeeding resurrection. 

Fragapatti said: I proclaim, in the 
name of Jehovih, Ah-oan, Lord God of 
Jaffeth; Yima, Lord God of Shem; E'chad, 
Lord God of Arabin'ya; Gir-ak-shi, Lord 
God of Heleste; Uropa, Lord Goddess of 
Uropa; Yaton'te, Lord God of North Gua- 
tama; Kow'anea, Lord God of South 
Guatama; M'wing'mi, Lord God of South 
Oce'ya; Otshata, Lord God of North 
Oce'ya, and Soofwa, sub-God of Japan. 
Approach the throne, O ye Lord Gods 
and Lords, and sub-God, that ye may be 
annointed in the name of the Father, and 
duly crowned with the emblem of All 
Light. 

First came the Lord Gods, and they 
stood before the throne of Jehovih, now 
illumined brilliantly in gold and white. 
Fragapatti said: By Thy power and wis- 
dom, O Jehovih, which rest in me, do I 
annoint these, Thy Lord Gods, and be- 
stow to Thy kingdoms, for Thy glory. 
Receive ye this fire, for it is Jehovih's, an- 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



153 



nointing with power and wisdom, that all 
men, women and children, mortals and 
spirits coming under your dominion may 
rejoice in their Creator forever! 

The Lord Gods responded: May I 
glorify Thee, O Jehovih, in the kingdom 
Thou hast bestowed upon me! In Thy 
name I receive this fire, for it is Thy bap- 
tism with power and wisdom. Whomso- 
ever Thou hast entrusted to my dominion 
will I cause to rejoice at all times, and to 
rise up forever in Thy numberless king- 
doms! And there came down from above 
a stream of light and settled upon them. 

Fragapatti said: And to you I be- 
queath, in Jehovih's name power to exalt 
successors, that ye may also bequeath to 
your successors power to exalt successors 
also; and so on till the next dawn 
of dan from the etherean kingdoms, 
for of such manner shall be the do- 
minion of the Gods and Lords of Earth 
and her heavens for a long season here- 
after. 

The Lord Gods responded: Thy pow- 
er, O Jehovih, do I accept, to exalt a suc- 
cessor to me in my dominions, with power 
to his successors after him, to the next 
etherean dawn of dan. 

Fragapatti said: Crown of Thy Crown, 
O Jehovih, do I weave of Thy golden 
light for these, thy exalted Sons and 
Daughter; and with my hand in Thy 
name crown them. Be Thou with them 
now and forever. Amen. Then Fraga- 
patti gathered of the light present, and 
fashioned crowns for them, and they came 
forward to the foot of the throne, and he 
crowned them. 

And now they sat down at the foot of 
the throne in ancient custom, and Fraga- 
patti came down from the throne, bring- 
ing attendant Gods with him; and they 
took the hands of the newly annointed 
Gods and raised them up; and Fragapatti 
said: Arise thou, O Lord God, and go 
thy way. Jehovih is with thee. Then they 
stood aside. 

Then came forward the two Lords. 
Fragapatti said: O Jehovih, by Thy pow- 
er and wisdom in me vested, do I appoint 
and announce these, Thy Lords, to their 
divisions of the Earth; and with my hands 
and in Thy name weave I a crown for each 



of them, and crown them Lords of Thy 
Light, for Thy glory. Amen. 

Hear me, O Lords; that which I be- 
stow in the name of the Father, and ye 
receive, ye shall also bestow in the name 
of the Father upon your successors at the 
end of this dawn of dan. Though a Lord 
God hath dominion, first with mortals, 
and, second, with the first heaven in his 
division which resteth on the Earth; and 
though a Lord hath dominion with mor- 
tals only, and with such ashars as minister 
unto them, ye twain are made Lords of 
far distant islands, where ye shall deter- 
mine many things in your own way, often 
being Gods also, which I also bequeath 
unto you and your successors forever. 

The Lords said:. What Thou hast put 
upon me, O Jehovih, I will do, with Thy 
power and wisdom, for Thy glory forever. 
Amen. I receive Thy crown with praise 
and thanksgiving, and will bestow it in 
Thy name upon my successor, bright as 
I now receive it. 

Fragapatti then laid the crowns upon 
them, and they sat at the foot of the 
throne also. Then Fragapatti took them 
by the hand and raised them up, saying: 
Arise, O Lords of Jehovih, and go your 
ways. And when they stood aside Soo'fwa 
came forward. Fragapatti said: In Thy 
name, O Jehovih, and by Thy power in 
me vested, do I this, Thy son, crown sub- 
God of his division of the Earth and its 
heavens. Of Thy Light I crown him and 
bestow him with a rod of water and a rod 
of fire, that he may have dominion in Thy 
name, and for Thy Glory. Amen! 

Hear me, O God: Thy duties make 
thee both Lord and God; but thy second 
resurrections shall be removed at short in- 
tervals, as thou shalt be hereafter informed. 
But thou shalt have power to appoint as- 
sistant Lords to be with thee, in my 
name and the Father's. And thou shalt 
also exalt a successor after thee, with pow- 
er to his successors also. In Jehovih's 
name, receive thou this crown of yellow 
light, for it is the emblem of the oldest 
habitable country above the waters of the 
Earth! And may the Father be with thee 
now and forever. Amen. 

He also sat at the foot of the throne, 
and Fragapatti raised him up, even as the 



154 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



others, saying: . Arise, O God, and go 
thy way. So he stood aside. And now 
the es'enaurs sang and chanted; and the 
marshals led the way; and the newly em- 
powered Gods departed out of the House 
of Mouru. And there had been provided 
for them already a vessel sufficient to re- 
conduct them back to the Earth; and they 
entered the vessel, and amidst the flying 
banners and the music of the trumpeters 
they sped forward and were soon out of 
sight. 

CHAPTER IX. 

The hosts of the second resurrection 
were now conducted to the mansions pre- 
viously created in Haraiti by Fragapatti; 
and they were provided with teachers and 
occupations, according to their develop- 
ments. 

Fragapatti said: The marshals in chief 
will now send the builders of fire-ships be- 
fore me; I will speak to them. And when 
the builders had come, and duly saluted 
before the throne, Fragapatti said: 

Go build me an avalanza capable of 
carrying three thousand million angels, 
with as many rooms, capable of descent 
and ascent, and east and west and north 
and south motion, and prepare it with a # 
magnet that it may face to the north 
whilst traveling. 

The builders saluted, and then with- 
drew, and went and built the vessel. And 
it was two hundred thousand paces east 
and west, and the same north and south; 
its height was one thousand lengths, and 
the vesture around it was a thousand paces 
thick; and it was provided with etherean 
curtains, two hundred thousand; and with 
four hundred thousand banners, of all pos- 
sible colors, shades and tints. 

Besides there were fifty thousand small 
flags and streamers. The floor was woven 
in copy of a spider's net, extending from 
the center outward, and with circular bars 
at crosses; and the frame-work within was 
constructed with one million uprights, the 
entire height of the vessel; and yet across 
these were twenty million bars; and with- 
in the whole were the rooms and halls and 
places for musicians. 

When it was completed the builders 
notified Fragapatti. He said: Athrava, 
come thou and sit on the throne. I prom- 



ised to go and see Hoab and his colony, 
in Zeredho, when he should send me word 
regarding certain matters. Behold, mes- 
sengers have notified me, and Hoab de- 
sires to know how he shall establish his 
colony, that he may never more fear to be 
annoyed by other Gods and angels. Let 
fifty thousand musicians enter the ship 
with me, besides a sufficient number of 
captains and officers to manage the ship. 

The marshals at once made the proper 
selections, and took them to the ship, 
when they all entered, Fragapatti with 
them, and they departed. So Fragapatti 
returned to Zeredho, where the ambitious 
Hoab and his colony desired to be sole 
occupant forever. Hoab was waiting to 
receive him, having aroused up a suffi- 
cient number of his indolent subjects to 
maintain the semblance of a heavenly 
Council. But what a surprise! He had 
expected only a small vessel, with a few 
attendants. And now when he beheld the 
magnificence of the avalanza and the 
majesty of the band of musicians, so far 
transcending anything he had ever seen, 
he feared and was awe-stricken. 

Fragapatti approached slowly, but 
with Avon lights, and when the ship was 
near at hand, the hosts aboard cast out 
hundreds of thousands of perfumed 
ovaries, which exploded with beautiful 
colors, filling the atmosphere around about 
with the most delightful perfume. Finally 
the avalanza came to anchor, and Fraga- 
patti, without any ceremony, alighted, tak- 
ing a thousand attendants with him, and 
came directly up to Hoab, who was some- 
what abashed on account of his shabby ap- 
pearance. 

Fragapatti said: Friend and brother, 
peace and joy be unto thee and thy house! 
To which Hoab replied: All hail, Great 
Chief! Happiness attend thee and thy 
hosts! And were it not that I had pre- 
viously discovered thou wert a philosopher 
like myself, I would apologize for the vast 
difference betwixt the respective appear- 
ances of our hosts. But ye are welcome 
all the same! 

Fragapatti said: A mere incident of 
conditions, most noble God. Thou art 
aware, when children go on a holiday ex- 
cursion, they attire themselves in their 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



155 



best; so it is better that I find an apology 
than that thou shouldst. 

Hoab said: Nay, Chief, there is a 
philosophy in this matter which hath wor- 
ried me of late. A thousand years ago, my 
colony was ambitious to attire itself in 
grandeur, and to build fine ships, and go 
on excursions also. Five hundred years 
later, they ceased building ships and going 
on excursions saying: What is the use? 
Latterly, they are utilitarians, doing just 
as little as posible. In fact, many of my 
subjects deny themslves comforts on the 
plea that they can do without them. 

Fragapatti said: Do you remember 
that when I was here before I remarked 
that without contentment no people had 
attained to peace; and thou didst acquiesce. 
Why, then shouldst thou not rejoice that 
thy people have thus subdued ambition and 
curiosity? Hast thou lost contentment in 
so short a time? Thou knowest I came 
hither to impart to thee and thy people the 
great secret, that ye may so fortify your- 
selves that ye shall never fear for Gods or 
angels molesting you. 

Hoab said: Hear me, O Chief: If my 
people lose all ambition for rites and cere- 
monies, and dancings and excursions; and 
keep constantly striving to deny them- 
selves of everything save what necessity 
calleth for; and if that necessity becometh 
smaller and smaller, where will it end? 
Will not all inspiration die out? For. 
to tell the truth, since my people have 
given up rites and ceremonies, and prayers 
and singings, they have also given up re- 
joicings of soul, and are becoming like a 
dead people. 

Fragapatti said: Then thou wouldst 
seem to prove that to hold on only to the 
useful in life would ultimately end in sui- 
cide to the state, to the family, to the in- 
dividual, and even to the soul? 

Hoab said: Many of my people are 
too lazy to clothe themselves; and because 
of shame, they seek secluded places, as 
they say, to live as they please. Do not 
such people commit suicide against the 
state? Has any man a right to withdraw 
himself from his fellows, saying: It suiteth 
me better? We have been told that in the 
first age of mortals they had no ambition 
to live together, being void of all talents, 
and that the Gods inspired them to lan- 



guage and to society, giving them rites 
and ceremonies as an inducement to make 
them harmonious and attractive to one an- 
other. 

Fragapatti said: How shall I account 
for the difference betwixt thy arguments 
now and the other time I was with thee? 
Thou desired me to believe that thou and 
thy people were the highest, best, happiest 
of all people in all the heavens. Why this 
change? 

Hoab said: Thou didst promise me 
thou wouldst teach us some way of pro- 
tection against being molested by other 
Gods and spirits from other kingdoms. 
Since then I have reasoned on the subject, 
and I perceive that if such a state of se- 
curity could be given to my people they 
would wander off in isolation, and even 
forget language and lose all judgment. 
How, then, was it thou told me thou hadst 
been in heavens where such a state of 
seeming impossibility existeth? 

Fragapatti said: Let not arguments 
sway thee, O Hoab. But rather examine 
proofs for thyself. I mistrusted that my 
statement to thee was too extravagant to 
be believed without evidence. Behold, 
then, what I have done. I brought a ves- 
sel large enough for all thy people, desir- 
ing that ye go with me to my kingdom, 
new founded in Haraiti; and if thou 
shouldst have any further desire, at the end 
of a few years, I will take thee and thy 
people to still another kingdom, in a far- 
off world. After that, if you still desire it, 
I will provide thee the same conveyance 
back to Zeredho, with power to rule over 
it to thy heart's content. 

Hoab said: Fairest of Gods! I feared 
indeed thou hadst come with the old story, 
to worship the All Light, the Unknowa- 
ble Nothingness, with foolish ceremonies, 
rites, prayers and songs of praise, which, 
however good for the ignorant and super- 
stitious, are worthless to a God as en- 
lightened as I am. This thou canst per- 
ceive with thine own judgment. Gladly 
will I go with thee, and I will persuade 
as many of my people as possible to go 
also. Thou art the first God that ever 
came to our heaven that wanted not to 
circumscribe our liberties, which neither 
I nor my people can tolerate. 

These things were then communicated 



156 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



to the people of Zeredho; and after a few 
days they gathered together and went into 
the avalanza, every soul of them. Fraga- 
patti signaled the commander not to go 
direct to Haraiti, but by way of Utza, one 
of the hells in the Aoasu mountains, in- 
habited by thousands of millions of spirits 
in darkness, many of whom knew not who 
they were, nor had they names, being 
infants, idiots, chaotic and foul smelling. 

CHAPTER X. 

When they came to Utza Hoab cried 
out: What do my eyes behold? As I 
live, here are people that once belonged 
to Zeredho, mine own heaven! By what 
strange law left they my kingdom to come 
and dwell in these torments? 

Fragapatti caused the avalanza to halt, 
that information be obtained. So he called 
the drujas, and there came thousands of 
them, ragged and drunken. Hoab knew 
many of them, and he said: Know ye 
who I am? And they answered: Yea, 
Hoab, God of Zeredho. 

Again spoke Hoab, saying: For what 
reason left ye my glorious kingdom to 
come and dwell in this hell of iniquity? 
They answered, saying: Alas, that we left 
indeed! But since it is so, it is so. Hear 
us, then, O Hoab, this is the reason: 
Even as mortals oft leave purity in order 
to revel in sin. More reason we know not. 

Then spake Fragapatti, saying: Je- 
hovih saith: I have given man many tal- 
ents. Because the roadways are not open 
for their growth, he plungeth into dark- 
ness. Think not that ye can draw a line 
and say: O man, thou shalt not do this; 
for ye are powerless to hold him whom I 
created to go forward. And if he find not 
a way to go forward, he will turn and go 
backward. 

The drujas said: Yea, master; Zered- 
ho did not fill our souls. We were thirsty 
for amusement and lightheartedness. We 
heard no voice but utility. We sheared off 
all ornaments, and diversion, and art, and 
finally even music. We fain would hear 
from Zeredho, to know if they have not 
ceased to talk, and perhaps to live, for- 
sooth, Utility hath spoken. And they 
laughed and frolicked about like idiots 
and fools, mingling with harlots, thieves, 
liars and drunkards. 



Fragapatti caused the ship to move on 
a while, and then halted, and called other 
drujas, and questioned them in the same 
manner, and received answers of the same 
character. 

Again they moved onward, and the 
same was repeated. Finally they came to 
a place where all was darkness and noise' 
and confusion, where they even heeded 
not the ship, nor the calls made to them. 
Then spake Fragapatti to Hoab, saying: 
Has it not been proven to thee that man 
cannot stand still? * Hoab said: It is true. 
I perceive now that had I not come out of 
Zeredho I had not witnessed these things, 
nor had I seen Zeredho as I now see it. 

Fragapatti said: Be not hasty against 
thine own philosophy, for I will show thee 
thine own wisdom by and by. So they 
traveled seven days in hell, the lowest di- 
vision of hada, where there was neither 
government, order, truth, nor virtue, but 
only torments, wailings and cursings. 

Fragapatti said: Thou hast seen that 
these many people know not their own 
darkness. Hoab said: Is it not true, O 
Chief, that no man knoweth his own 
darkness? Who knoweth he is not on the 
downward road? 

Fragapatti said: Thou hast said man 
is the All Highest. But does it not come 
home to us all, as to the ancients, that to 
do good with all our wisdom and strength, 
and have faith therein, that we are on the 
road to the All Highest? 

Thou hast certainly proven, said Hoab, 
that Zeredho is not the All Highest, for it 
cannot retain its people. Even hell hath 
prevailed over her. And doth not hell pre- 
vail over all self-righteousness, and over 
riches, and kingdoms and empires? If, 
therefore, hell prevaileth, is not hell the 
most powerful? And if the most power- 
ful, is not hell, therefore, the All Highest? 
The ancients were happy in ignorance, for 
in believing in an All Person, a Creator, 
and that they should ultimately see Him, 
they had an object in view. But with the 
growth of wisdom we find we cannot re- 
alize such a Person, and so have no ob- 
ject in view ahead of us. Thus we recoil 
upon ourselves, and all is dead. 

Fragapatti said: Has man no lessons 
from the past? In the ancient times the 
Gods persuaded mortals to make stone 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



157 



idols and worship them. And they were 
sufficient until man attained more knowl- 
edge. Again came the Gods to mortals, 
inventing a large man-God in the sky, 
persuading them to worship him. He was 
a sufficient God till man learned to com- 
mune with angels; and the angels contra- 
dicted that philosophy. But, Hoab, have 
we not a lesson in this, which is, that we 
must ever have an All Highest Person so 
far ahead that we cannot attain him? If 
this be true, when we have surpassed a 
Person whose figure and condition we 
can comprehend, is it not incumbent upon 
us to create within our own souls the 
thought of an All Person beyond our com- 
prehensibility? 

Hoab said: It seemeth so. But how 
canst thou teach thy soul to think of an 
All Person beyond man's comprehension? 
Fragapatti said: For a basis to reason 
from, let us consider the etherean, the at- 
mospherean and the corporeal worlds to 
constitute His body; and the motion there- 
in and thereof, the manifestations of His 
Power and His Wisdom. Since, then, 
we ourselves have these things in part, we 
find also, we have another attribute em- 
bracing all the others, which is combina- 
tion concentrated into one person. Shall 
we not then give to Him, who embraceth 
all things within Himself, combination 
concentrated into one person? Otherwise, 
He is our inferior, which cannot be. 
Therefore, being ourselves persons, are 
we not mere offshoots from the All Per- 
son? Otherwise, we could not have at- 
tained personality. Does not a child take 
its personality because its mother was a 
person? Can man have an entity save he 
receive it from an entity? Could man be 
a person, save he sprang from a Person? 

Hoab said: Thou art a great light, O 
Chief! Verily, thou hast unfolded a uni- 
verse before me! Yea, there must be an 
All Person! O that I had seen this 
philosophy before. 

Fragapatti said: Be not infatuated, O 
Hoab, with sudden appearances. For 
were I to show thee first, what it is to 
believe in an All Person, whose magnifi- 
cence surpasseth the universe itself, and 
then that man can attain to be one with 
Him, even as a note in music is one with- 
in a tune, I would so far enrapture thy 



soul that thou wouldst do nought but 
listen. Let us, therefore, suspend our re- 
search awhile, that we may devise some 
resurrection for this hell of suffering 
millions. 

CHAPTER XI. 

The avalanza was so constructed that 
the words spoken by Fragapatti and Hoab 
could be heard by all who chose to listen, 
of whom there were two thousand million 
on board. And when Hoab expressed con- 
viction, the same sentiment seized upon 
the whole assembly; whereupon Fragapat- 
ti raised his hand, saying: By virtue of 
Thy power, O Jehovih, will I illumine 
this hell! And by the strength of Fraga- 
patti's oneness with Jehovih there was 
created a sudden light so brilliant, none 
present save the ethereans could look 
upon him. Hoab bowed down, and hid 
his face, and Hoab's hosts were overcome 
with fear, prostrating themselves on the 
floors of the avalanza. Fragapatti said 
to the swift messengers: Go at once to 
Mouru, greeting, and say that Fragapatti 
demandeth at once, one million etherean 
volunteers, for signal centers in Aoasu's 
lowest hells, bringing rods of fire and 
water. 

The swift messengers departed hastily. 
Fragapatti then commanded that the ava- 
lanza be anchored for a day; and he and 
many of his hosts went into the hell, where 
the spirits were weeping and wailing, and 
cursing, or lying in drunkenness and leth- 
argy. Many of them were naked and foul 
smelling; and hundreds of thousands of 
them, having had diseased corporeal bod- 
ies, had carried with them into hell the 
substance of their corruptions, even the 
rottenness of plague and consumptions, 
and other diseases too terrible to mention. 

Fragapatti said: By Thy Power, O 
Jehovih, shall a wall of fire compass these 
people about. They shall not escape. For 
were they to return to mortals, they would 
inoculate them unto death. Fire, O Je- 
hovih, fire! Thou All Purifier! 

And he cast his hands outward and up- 
ward in majesty, and there rose up walls 
of fire on the face of the mountains; and 
the light thereof fell in the valleys of 
Ugh'sa, the pit of hell. To the east and 
west and north and south, Fragapatti 



158 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



turned, saying: A wall of fire! A wall of 
fire! And he, himself, shone as a sun, 
united with the Eternal All Creator, whose 
voice was full of power to wield the ele- 
ments to his will. Presently there were 
hemmed into one field, more than five 
hundred million drujas, who by the sud- 
den transformation were roused up to des- 
perate wildness, with bated breath, run- 
ning hither and thither. And yet there 
were other millions of them so low and 
stupid and crazed, that the others ran over 
them as if they were but a heap of rubbish. 

Then Fragapatti went to Hoab, saying: 
For pity's sake, come thou and help me, 
and persuade thy hosts also. 

Hoab said: O friend and brother, do 
not mock me! Thou hast undone me en- 
tirely. I am nothing. My hosts are noth- 
ing. For pity's sake temper thine own 
light. It pierceth me through! 

Fragapatti said: Shall I not send thee 
quickly back to Zeredho, with thy hosts? 
Hoab said: My wish is nothing; my will 
is nothing! Thine and the Great All 
Power's will be done. 

Fragapatti said: If ever thou hadst 
faith in thy life, I charge thee now quickly 
to summon it to thy soul, for Great Je- 
hovih is with me now, and but ask and 
speak in faith to the Creator, and it shall 
be granted unto thee. Speak quickly, 
whilst yet the power holdeth upon me. 
Shall I put on a thousand-fold more 
light? Say thou: In faith I will endure 
all, for the glory of Jehovih! Give me of 
fire or torments, or whatsoever Thou wilt, 
O Jehovih! 

Hoab trembled, and then strained in 
every part, and at last suddenly sprang up 
facing the light, almost melting in the 
flame of fire, and he said: I will endure 
all in faith of Thee, O Jehovih! Give me 
of fire or torments, or whatsoever Thou 
wilt. Henceforth I will do for Thee for- 
ever! 

Presently his spirit took the crystal 
form, and the victory dawned upon his 
soul. A smile, denoting knowledge of All 
Holiness and Majesty gleamed in his 
countenance! The light began to retract 
and to reflect from his face, brilliant and 
sun-like. He had conquered and won. He 
said: Thanks, O Jehovih! 



Fragapatti said: Quick now, seize the 
goal; go forth practicing thy light for oth- 
ers, and it will grow giant-like. And 
Hoab was strong in faith, almost mad 
with the delight of such wondrous change; 
and he rushed forth, commanding, in the 
name of Jehovih, raising up hundreds and 
thousands, even as he had been raised, 
crystalizing. 

All one day and all one night they la- 
bored; and all the ethereans with them; 
and they rescued, and divided, and sub- 
divided the spirits of darkness into grades 
and sections. And many of the spirits be- 
longing to the hosts of Hoab were thus 
raised to the second resurrection, with 
light and power. But of the hunderds of 
millions of spirits in the torments of hell 
none were as yet raised even to the first 
resurrection. But they were stirred up 
and routed out of lethargy; and the sup- 
plies for their drunkenness were cut off 
by the walls of fire, created by Fragapat- 
ti, which went up day and night without 
ceasing. 

And Fragapatti stationed sentinels with 
power near the walls of fire, commanding 
them to cast in the elements of ughs and 
brimstone, so that the suffocating smell 
would prevent the drujas from escaping. 

On the second day, a million ethereans, 
with rods of water and rods of fire, came 
from Mouru, in answer to Fragapatti's 
commandment. And when they had arrived 
before him, and had saluted in the sign of 
Jehovih's name, he said unto them: Be- 
hold, I have established one signal center 
in hell. It will require a thousand more 
centers before we have broken them up 
and delivered them. From the rank of das 
the marshals shall select from amongst 
you ten thousand, to remain in this cen- 
ter and complete the work I have laid out. 

So the marshals selected from the 
ethereans of the rank of das ten thousand. 
Now the das are such as have attained to 
power with the rod with water, and the 
rod with fire, but not with the hand, like 
the ranks above them. They go amongst 
the denizens of a signal center with the 
two rods, casting water with one and fire 
with the other. And the hosts of spirits 
of darkness run for them, like cattle for 
salt; and the das thus discover and assort 
them; for the lowest spirits go for the 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



159 



rods with water, and the highest for the 
rods of fire. Because the lowest spirits 
dread the light; and because the highest 
desire to be rescued from the lowest. 

On the second day, therefore, the das 
began work; and there were baptized with 
water many millions; but with fire only 
one million. The latter were then taken 
without and beyond the, walls of fire, and 
colonized, and clothed and fed, and guar- 
dians placed over them, preparatory to the 
nurseries, hospitals, schools, factories, and 
such other educationals as belong in the 
lowest heaven. 

On the third day the das went through 
the same labor again, and again many 
millions were baptized with water, and 
but two million with fire. The latter were 
also taken without and beyond the walls 
of fire, and colonized in the same manner 
as those of the previous day. 

Such, then, is the labor of the das in 
hell, baptizing and selecting; and it contin- 
ueth until all the people are taken beyond 
the walls. 

The last taken are, therefore, the low- 
est grade, and the first taken are the high- 
est grade. But the last are usually so low 
in knowledge and ambition that they move 
not of themselves, but are bestowed in 
nurseries and hospitals, to be cleansed 
from their foulness, and to be healed of 
their infirmities. 

CHAPTER XII. 

Fragapatti caused the ship, the ava- 
lanza, to be moved to other black moun- 
tains, deep buried in revolting crimes and 
misery, wherein no one with God-like 
power had ventured for hundreds of 
years. Again, he called down Jehovih's 
fire, and raised walls impenetrable, high 
on every side, affrighting and stirring up 
the self-condemned with frenzied fear. 
And they ran, all polluted with foul 
thoughts, which had clothed them about 
with terrible foulness, and oaths and 
curses and imprecations against all right- 
eousness. 

And Hoab, now a very sun, desperate 
to do overwhelming good deeds, even 
more a thousand times than in his self 
ease of other days he refrained from dark 
company lest he be polluted; proclaiming 
Jehovih, and working hard to stir them 



up, and by his quick and unmistakable zeal 
proved his soul's connection with the Al- 
mighty's Power. 

Fragapatti and Hoab rushed in, and 
hundreds of thousands of ethereans did 
likewise, laboring for Jehovih, cutting 
loose with flames of fire the demons' grips 
of torture on the helpless, and hurling 
them separate. None could escape be- 
cause of the walls around, now seething 
with the choking smell of brimstone, and 
must needs fall prostrate before the crys- 
talizing lights thrust at them, weeping and 
wailing. 

All day and all night Fragapatti and 
Hoab and the etherean hosts rested not, 
but waded into the hell of death. Turning 
them to the right or left, the miserable, 
devouring wretches, brothers and sisters 
of mortals and spirits, now engulfed in 
their own depravity, and by their desperate 
desire for sin holding millions of the mod- 
erately good as officers of torture, in order 
to glut their horrid desire of witnessing 
horrors. Into groups and series they 
roughly selected them as a starting point 
for the das that were to come after and 
more carefully divide them. Then Fraga- 
patti called the das and put them to work 
with their rods of water and fire, making 
stations beyond the walls of fire, where the 
naked, trembling, rescued sufferers and 
drujas were housed and fed, restrained by 
guardians of ample strength and foresight. 
For of such nature is the low man and 
low woman that love of evil in time de- 
lighteth to feed itself in evil more than in 
good, and will even turn against benefac- 
tors and spurn good offerings. 

Of whom Jehovih saith: As by fire 
the dross of metal is burned and cast out, 
leaving that which is pure; so created I 
the righteous with light from My counte- 
nance to burn out the dross which the 
wicked nestle in their bosoms. Go, then; 
deliver the wicked in hell, and make them 
clean with water and fire, and ye shall 
find a star in every soul. And as many of 
these as ye deliver, so is your glory in My 
etherean kingdoms. For each deliverer 
is as a sun around which these stars con- 
gregate, and they magnify one another 
forever. And when these stars have grown 
they also go and do in like manner; for it 
is of such that My exalted ones are in the 



160 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



highest heavens, whom ye call Gods and 
Lords, and justly so, because of their su- 
premacy. 

Thus went Fragapatti through the 
lowest regions of Aoasu; for forty days 
and nights he and his hosts labored, and 
he broke up the regions of hell and cast 
out the souls of the tortured, thousands of 
millions of them. Neither was there left 
any place standing in all the lowest hells 
where evil held dominion. And there 
were esablished in those regions around 
about two hundred thousand colonies, 
comprised of the evil ones who had been 
rescued. But the very lowest, who 
knew not anything, who were: some in- 
fants who died at the time of birth; some 
infants of drunkards who came to the 
lower heavens with the intoxicating 
liquors or smoke of their mother's de- 
bauchery; some very young abortions, 
slain by their mothers and fathers; some 
chaotic, killed in wars, who were mad and 
crazed, howling, screaming and fighting, 
of whom there were nine hundred million. 
These Fragapatti had brought away from 
all the others, putting guardians over 
them for the present. 

Then he called together the crew of the 
avalanza, and all the hosts of Hoab, and 
Hoab himself; and when they were duly 
in order Fragapatti extemporized a throne 
and sat upon it, and thus spake, saying: 

Without Thee, O Jehovih, man is noth- 
ing. Nor can he stand upright, nor hold 
up his head, save but by Thee. When he 
cutteth himself off from Thee he falleth 
like a limb of a tree that is severed. 
He goeth about boasting: There is 
no All Person. But his words are as 
a severing knife, and he knoweth it 
not. He setteth up his judgment, 
saying: Thou wert good for fools, O 
Jehovih; but as for me, Thou art a fool- 
ish encumbrance. Yea, he saith: Who 
hath seen Jehovih? And he laughs at his 
cleverness. He says: What stood Jehovih 
upon when He created the worlds? How 
long slept He before He created? What a 
foolish Creator! He created sin and death. 
Who knoweth the size of his head, the 
length of His arm, the place He liveth or 
who hath heard His voice? Verily, there 
is no All Person, no All Highest, no Light. 
This is the second downward stage; and 



in the third he saith: A curse upon Faith! 
A curse upon all things! A curse upon 
myself! And then cometh hell and its 
horrors to swallow him up. 

But Thou art near, O Jehovih! Thy 
hosts traverse the universe. They come in 
Thy name, and Thy power and glory are 
with them. In their majesty they encoun- 
ter all evil; they cast out hell and its pris- 
oners. 

Then Fragapatti turned to Hoab say- 
ing: Speak Thou, O Hoab. Nine hun- 
dred millions that are still sleeping in 
death lie at thy -feet. These regions are 
unsuited for their treatment; whither 
shall we take them? Or shall we, because 
they are so dead, leave them to shift for 
themselves. 

Then rose Hoab, saluting, and tears 
were in his eyes. He said: Mighty art 
Thou, O Jehovih! Lo, I was on the verge 
of an everlasting fall! I was on a steep 
precipice, but saw it not. With blinded 
eyes I walked about. I lost Thy counte- 
nance. My family became strangers to 
Thee, and we were following close after, 
to become strangers to one another! Yea, 
I was ungrateful before Thee. I forgot 
that Thou hadst created me. I forgot that 
all the joys I had ever had were bestowed 
by Thee, and that by Thee I had been 
made capable of appreciating mine own 
judgment. And then I raised up my voice 
against Thee and turned Thee out of the 
world. Yea, I chose a corner, and appro- 
priated it for my own ease and glory, say- 
ing: To keep other Gods and angels 
away from my lands, this is all I desire. 
But thou wert mindful of me, O Jehovih! 
Thy Voice sounded in the heavens above, 
and Thy Son came down in Thy glory. 
He beheld my vanity and weakness, and 
he rebuked me not. Yea, I told him I 
loved not to go to those beneath me and 
raise them up. I said: Let them shift for 
themselves! 

Now am I rebuked in mine own words! 
Now have I cast myself out of hell. Be- 
hold, I said: Zeredho shall be a place for 
me and my people forever! None shall 
come hither to make us afraid or to annoy 
us. And Thy Son said to me: I can 
teach thee and thy people that ye shall 
never more fear to be annoyed by the low 
or by the evil-minded; nor shall ye fear 



CYCLE OF FRACAPATTI 



161 



for Gods or angels to come and inhabit 
Zeredho! Thus spake Thy Son, O Jeho- 
vih ! And he hath given us the secret. We 
no longer fear that others will encroach 
upon Zeredho. Behold, Zeredho is Thy 
place, O Jehovih! These unfortunates, 
these drujas, are Thy children. They shall 
go to Zeredho. I fear not pollution, nor 
do my hosts. We will wade into this 
filth like scavengers into a filthy street, 
and we will make these children like shin- 
ing stars in Thy firmament! Yea, nothing 
more can make us afraid, O Jehovih! We 
own nothing; we have nothing to lose. 
We are Thy servants, now and forever! 

Then spake Fragapatti, saying: Be- 
hold the size of my avalanza, O Hoab! If 
thou wilt but take the measure thou shalt 
find it just the size to take thee and thy 
hosts and these drujas. Think not that 
this matter so happened, for I sent before- 
hand and had all these unfortunates enum- 
erated, and thy people enumerated also. 

When Hoab perceived this great wis- 
dom in Fragapatti, and comprehended the 
care that had been used to accomplish so 
much, he made no reply at first, but, look- 
ing at him, burst into tears. Presently he 
said: By Thy power and wisdom, O Je- 
hovih, will I also lift my fellows up out of 
darkness and misery! 

CHAPTER XIII. 

Then Fragapatti sent swift messengers 
to Mouru, relating all that had been ac- 
complished, giving also the names of the 
generals and capains over the newly es- 
tablished colonies redeemed from Utza, in 
the Aoasuan mountains, that they might 
be registered in the libraries of Haraiti. 
And Fragapatti established a line of mes- 
sengers betwixt the colonies, and also 
from the colonies to Mouru, and appoint- 
ed the messengers to hold office during 
dawn. And when the affairs of this region 
of the lower heavens were completed, 
Fragapatti was ready to ascend with the 
mad and dumb drujas rescued from hell; 
and the proper persons carried them into 
the avalanza, being obliged to blindfold 
them because of the light. Nor did the 
drujas cease wailing and crying with fear 
and pain and craziness. But because of 
the multitude of infants, Fragapatti had 
previously provided five hundred thousand 



women of fetal, that the infants might be 
redeemed to everlasting life. Sixty thous- 
and physicians had Fragapatti aboard, and 
they worked hard resuscitating and restor- 
ing to consciousness the unfortunates. And 
of the hosts of Hoab, not one was there 
but went to work, willingly, as nurse and 
helper. 

Thirty thousand es'enaurs now played 
and sang, softly and gently as a breath of 
wind, carrying the tones around the ship 
as an endless echo, calling and answering 
from all directions, a continuous and en- 
rapturing change, now as if near, again as 
if afar off. So that the uninformed knew 
not whence the music came, nor how it 
was produced. 

When the great avalanza was ready to 
start Fragapatti went into the ship, being 
almost the last to enter. Already was the 
light gathering bright and dense about 
him. And then he called out: Arise! 
In Jehovih's name, upward rise! And 
as he spoke, behold, the avalanza moved, 
and presently the great fire-ship started 
upward, for all the hosts joined in the 
same expression, leaving the burning walls 
and signal centers flickering below, so that 
even hell overthrown shone with grandeur, 

Fragapatti spake to Hoab, saying; 
When I took thee and thy hosts from 
Zeredho, I promised to take thee to Mou- 
ru, the capital city of Haraiti, my king- 
dom. Now thou desirest me to go with 
these drujas to Zeredho. Do you think 
you could plan their salvation and restore 
them to light? 

To which Hoab replied: I perceive 
that of myself I can do nothing but go 
down hill, or at best keep on a level road. 
As I now comprehend All Light, there is 
no one thing in all the universe that can 
rise of itself. To attain to be one with 
Jehovih is the beginning of the resurrec- 
tion of the individual; but he who hath 
attained power to resurrect others is 
strong indeed. There are many who 
spasmodically resurrect others, but, alas, 
how few can keep them resurrected? Not 
only must he have the light of Jehovih 
within himself, but power to make others 
obtain the Light for themselves. Alas, I 
am weak! 

Fragapatti said: Understand thyself, 
O Hoab. Be not deceived, nor short in 



162 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



faith to accomplish; for herein lieth the 
key to all Wisdom and Power. Suffer not 
thyself to go to the other extreme, saying, 
man of himself can accomplish nothing. 
To teach a child this is to hew off its legs 
and arms. To teach it that it can accom- 
plish is to make it giant-like. 

Hoab said: I perceive thy wisdom, O 
Chief. How, then, shall we find a line by 
which we can train this economy? If we 
inspire them not with faith to accomplish 
they will accomplish nothing. If we teach 
them they are dependent on Jehovih for 
all things, and that Jehovih doeth all 
things, and that no man can change his 
own destiny, that he is moved as a ma- 
chine; then we will make non-entities of 
our people. On the other hand, if we in- 
spire them that they can accomplish, it 
will grow upon them, and finally they will 
believe that they do all and Jehovih noth- 
ing. This was the mire my other king- 
dom ran into. 

Then spake Fragapatti, saying: Thou 
perceivest that reason can not solve the 
matter. Let us, then, suspend the subject, 
and I will take thee to Mouru and her 
kingdoms, and we may obtain facts more 
pertinent than opinion or reason. 

CHAPTER XIV. . 

Upward rose the avalanza with its con- 
trasting assemblage of the souls of light 
and the souls of darkness; the es'enaurs 
chanting anthems of praise and thanks- 
giving, while the drujas were engaged 
in cursing everything in heaven or 
earth, or in weeping and moaning, or in 
stupor, dull as if dead. Fragapatti had 
previously sent swift messengers to Ath- 
rava and the Holy Council of Mouru, 
where had descended the Light of Jeho- 
vih, whose Voice came upon them, saying: 

Lo, my hosts come in an avalanza; pre- 
pare ye a place for them. Choose ye from 
My ethereans and my atmosphereans thir- 
ty millions who shall receive the hosts 
of the avalanza, the nine hundred million 
in darkness. Go, ye, therefore, to the bor- 
ders of the sea Che-wan, near the cross- 
roads Tse-loo, where I have created the 
plains of Hoo'e'tse-gam, ample for their 
resurrection. And ye shall provide them 
houses and hospitals and nurseries, suita- 



ble for them to dwell in, being ready to 
deliver them when the avalanza arrives. 

Athrava and the Holy Council had re- 
sponded to this, and the swift messengers 
in turn had informed Fragapatti of the 
place prepared. Accordingly, the ava- 
lanza was landed in Hoo'e'tse-gam, where 
the thirty millions were in waiting to re- 
ceive them, disciplined by Ardi'atta, God- 
dess of Zhei, in etherea, first of the seven 
Ie'tas in Gom. And they had ten thous- 
and trumpeters, and four thousand two 
hundred other players. Ardi'atta had pre- 
pared the open fields in green, red and 
brown, and the green fields were near Che- 
wan, where the avalanza would land; 
hence it was called Hoo'e'tse-gam, signi- 
fying green for the newborn. Thus the 
drujas were delivered from the avalanza, 
on an open, green plain, neither too dark 
nor light, but suited to the diseased in 
mind. 

Fragapatti knew Ardi'atta, for her 
former kingdom in etherea lay in one of 
his own provinces, and before the ava- 
lanza landed he sent a message to her, 
saying: I will place the drujas on the 
green fields, and thou and thy hosts shall 
resuscitate them to consciousness, and they 
shall be selected and carried into the 
houses and nurseries which thou hast pro- 
vided for them. 

Thus were the drujas placed in the care 
of Ardi'atta and her hosts in Haraiti to re- 
ceive treatment prior to being carried to 
Zeredho, Four million of Hoab's hosts 
also remained with them, as volunteers, to 
assist in the redemption. Then Fragapatti 
directed the ship to be steered for Mouru, 
whither it arrived in due season; and there 
were in waiting to receive him more than 
one thousand million souls, and they had 
provided one million musicians, players 
and singers, who filled the place with a 
sea of sweetest melody. 

When Hoab looked upon the beauty 
and magnificence of the scene, and espe- 
cially the discipline, his soul was filled with 
rapture so that he could scarcely speak. 

And when he mastered himself a little 
he said: O, Fragapatti! How could one 
so exalted as thou come to me in Zeredho? 
When I see the perfect discipline of these 
heavens I am cast down and abashed be- 
cause of my former vanity. 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



163 



Fragapatti said: To learn not to speak 
of one's self, whether praised or rebuked, 
is this not the right road to Jehovih? 
Hoab said: It is true; therefore the oppo- 
site must be the wrong road. 

CHAPTER XV. 

When the avalanza was made fast, and 
the hosts came forth, many of the Zered- 
ho'ans, fearing the brilliancy of the lights 
of Mouru, were permitted to go and dwell 
a little way off; but the others, led by 
Fragapatti and Hoab, entered the capital 
city and came before the throne of Jeho- 
vih, greeted by Athrava and the Holy 
Council. 

Athrava said: In the name of Jehovih, 

Chief, greeting: And to thee, O Hoab. 
Come ye and honor the throne of Mouru. 

Fragapatti said: Greeting to thee, Ath- 
rava; and to ye, most Holy Council, in 
the name of the Father! Hoab said: 
Greeting, in Jehovih's name! 

And then Fragapatti and Hoab went 
forward and ascended the throne and sat 
on the left hand of Athrava. At once the 
Light from the etherean worlds began to 
fall upon the throne and the whole coun- 
cil, and the color thereof was the most 
sacred golden yellow. Hoab had never 
seen such before, and was overwhelmed 
with fear and delight; but many of his 
hosts were obliged to hide their faces. 
Presently the light condensed over the 
throne, even whilst three thousand mill- 
ions looked on, until like a very sun it 
stood above Fragapatti's head. And then 
came the Voice of the Almighty Jehovih 
out of the midst of the light, saying: 

Hear the words of thy Creator, O ye 
angels of heaven! I, who created the cor- 
poreal and the es'sean worlds! Behold the 
works of My hands ! Who can find a place 
where I have not created? Think not that 

1 cannot also create a voice and words. 
For is this not easier than to create a 
man who shall create words? Behold My 
corporeal suns amidst my corporeal star 
worlds! Behold My etherean suns amidst 
my es'sean worlds! I made corporeal 
darkness, and I made corporeal light. I 
made spiritual darkness, and I made spir- 
itual light! But I am the light of all 
light. 



As the wisdom of man inventeth 
words, so doth the Light of My Light 
come in words to them that can bear My 
Light. Behold My wisdom, O man, in 
creating souls out of the substance of cor- 
poreal darkness! Thus can their souls 
hear me and be not afraid. But when they 
have become pure souls, I come openly. 
Their throne becometh My throne, their 
voice My Voice. 

Hear, then, thy Creator, O Hoab! Thy 
people called to Me in their darkness, but 
I came not. Thy hand was upon them. 
Thou hadst said unto them: Behold my 
wide countries; my mountains and valleys; 
my bright rivers and refreshing winds. 
Come ye; they are yours to keep forever. 
And because thy hand was upon them 
they were beset with darkness. They could 
not find their way out; neither beheld they 
more the glory of My kingdoms. Yea, thou 
wert as a wanton going after My chosen, 
and thy voice lured them away from 
Me. But I spoke in Nirvana, high above, 
in My thrones of light. And My Sons 
and Daughters heard My Voice. I said 
unto them: Lo, the red star and her 
heavens are fallen in darkness! Go ye to 
them and deliver them into a new resur- 
rection. 

I had spoken in the ancient days, say- 
ing: Inasmuch as ye raise up those who 
are beneath you, so will I send those who 
are above down to you to raise you up. 
But they had forgotten My words; 
neither strove they more to raise up those 
who were in the hells below. And I said 
unto My Nirvanians: Go ye to Zeredho, 
for she hath enticed My holy ones away 
from Me. And ye shall give them a para- 
ble of compensation, and they shall come 
before My Light and hear My Voice. And 
ye shall take them to hell and cause them 
to deliver the drujas through the light of 
My countenance; and thereafter shall ye 
bring them to Mouru, that I may speak 
with them face to face. 

Hear the commandments of your Cre- 
ator, O Hoab, for that which I give unto 
you shall be inviolate. Thou shalt have 
dominion over the Earth and her heavens 
for two hundred years, commencing at the 
close of this dawn of dan. And thou 
shalt be crowned God, with power to 
raise up successors with power and wis- 



164 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



dom. Be wise, O My children, and profit 
ye in the wisdom of My etherean hosts 
whilst yet the dawn of dan remaineth. 

The Voice ceased. Then spake Ath- 
rava, saying: In Thy name, O Jehovih, 
do I resign from Thy throne till it be the 
will of Fragapatti and Thy will also. And 
he rose up and stood aside. Then Fraga- 
patti went and sat in the midst of the 
throne. 

Fragapatti said: I proclaim three days 
recreation to the Holy Council and to the 
City of Mouru. Behold, my people shall 
mingle together as brothers and sisters, 
rejoicing in the Light of the Father. Be 
ye joyful, singing and dancing. The 
ascent to Jehovih's kingdoms may be lik- 
ened unto a ladder with steps, and not an 
even plain, and ye shall call this the first 
step in the resurrection of the Earth's 
heavens in this dawn. 

The hosts then mingled together, greet- 
ing and rejoicing, for the Zeredho'ans had 
long desired to - see the ethereans now 
dwelling in Mouru, and the ethereans had 
been equally desirous of seeing the atmos- 
phereans. 

CHAPTER XVI. 

When the time of recreation was ended 
Fragapatti ascended the throne of Jeho- 
vih and signaled to the marshals to pro- 
claim order. Then the vast multitude took 
their places, and the es'enaurs chanted 
anthems of praise, and when they finished 
the signal for business heavenly was given 
and Fragapatti said: 

Again am I about to depart, and again 
to leave the God of Mouru, Athrava, with 
you. And Hoab and such of his hosts as 
I may choose shall go with me. For, ac- 
cording to the rank and glory of Gods, I 
must now deliver Hapacha and his king- 
dom of Ipseogee, raised up from Guatama. 

Fragapatti then descended to the foot 
of the throne and sat down; and Athrava, 
God of Mouru for dawn, came down and 
took him by the hand and said: Behold, 
thou hast honored my throne, and the 
time of thy departure is upon thee. Arise, 
then, O God, and go thy way. 

And Fragapatti rose up and stood 
aside, and signaled for Hoab to go and be 
raised in the same manner, which he did, 



becoming wise in the behavior of Gods 
toward one another. 

The marshals had selected fifty thousand 
attendants, besides ten thousand es'enaurs, 
and at a signal from Fragapatti they 
marched forth out of the capital, followed 
by the hosts of Hoab and one hundred 
thousand ethereans. And when they 
were beyond the lights of Mouru, be- 
hold some of the hosts of Hoab rejoiced, 
because they were better pleased to be 
where there was less light. Yet there were 
seven hundred millions of them who re- 
joiced not, but rather loved the light. 
Then Fragapatti said: 

It is well that not all are of one mind. 
The seven hundred millions who love the 
light more shall be my traveling compan- 
ions to Ipseogee. Because they are strong 
in light, I have work for them. But the 
others shall be taken back to Zeredho, 
whither I will also come in due time. And 
after they are settled in Zeredho I will 
send a God to them, and they shall found 
a new kingdom, in Jehovih's name. There- 
fore, enter the avalanza all of you. 

The hosts entered the ship, and Fraga- 
patti gave the word to- be off, and they 
sped forth direct for Zeredho, led by 
swift messengers who knew well the near- 
est route and the lightest places. And the 
route taken was through the sea of Foo'- 
witcha and the Oram of Haiti. Hardly 
had they gotten under way when the light 
of the upper heavens began to descend 
upon Hoab, whose excitement from the 
wondrous scenes made him propitious to 
the change, and, feeling the buoyancy of 
the light, he thus spake: 

How could I forget Thee, O Jehovih, 
or Thy purposes observe and deny Thy 
designs? Why saw I not that at my 
quickening in my mother's womb I was 
the farthest from Thee? And yet, even 
then, Thy breath was upon me! And 
when Thou hadst fashioned me and badest 
me walk upright, Thou didst send Thy an- 
gels to me, saying: Behold, Thy Creator 
liveth! Thou art life of His life, flesh of 
His flesh. And He gave thee thyself in 
proof of Himself. I was conceived on the 
Earth in darkness and built up by Thine 
own hand. 

And Thou created the honey bee and 
bade him speak to my soul. He said* 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



165 



Behold me, O man, I am a work- 
er. In a community I live with my 
brothers and sisters. I shut my eyes 
to things sour and bitter, and I store 
my house with sweet provender. I am 
the voice of Thy creator. Behold the 
harmony of mine house, and the provision 
I make for my newborn! And Thou also 
created the ant and bade him speak to 
me. The lesson he taught was: Behold, 

man, I am a worker. In a community 

1 live with my brothers and sisters. I am 
the voice of thy Creator. Behold the in- 
dustry of mine house and the burdens we 
bear jointly into our stores. And Thou 
created the spider and bade him speak to 
me. He said: Behold me, O man! I am 
one with thy Creator. By the geometrical 
figures of the unseen worlds I build mine 
house. Think not that I reason or take 
lessons. I move by the spirit within me, 
which is the inspiration of the ever present 
Creator. 

And Thou didst hold up before mine 
eyes continually that the unseen ruled over 
the seen. Then I became vain before 
Thee, O Jehovih! I said: When I am 
dead and born a spirit, then will I see the 
unseen, and cannot err more. But lo, my 
folly in Thy sight! When I was risen in 
spirit I saw the spirit of things; but, alas, 
the soul lay still beyond. And to me the 
soul was now the unseen cause and ruler 
over the spirit. Again thy holy ones came 
from the etherean worlds, speaking to me, 
saying: Beyond the soul cometh Nirvana. 

Now have I beholden Thy crystal 
spheres and Thy matchless glories. Yea, 
I look into this sea of Foo'witchah, whith- 
er I had often gazed before, seeing noth- 
ing; but now beholding ships laden with 
Gods and Goddesses from Thy Nirvanian 
fields, in higher works and worlds moving. 
And Thy fire stirreth me to the soul, to 
expand to the mastery of these atmospher- 
ean heavens. O that I could vent the hal- 
lowed glory Thou hast bestowed upon 
me! O that I could thank Thee for the 
happiness I have because Thou hast cre- 
ated me! O that I could open up the 
souls of men to behold Thy wondrous 
works, and the majesty of becoming one 
with Thee, Thou Almighty Jehovih! O 
that they would hear me and believe! O 
that they would turn not away from Thy 



Light! O that they could learn to glorify 
Thee every day, for the little light and 
little joy they receive. How like Gods and 
Goddesses could they become in Thy 
kingdoms. But they harbor discontent; 
they discourse on the little they have re- 
ceived from Thee. Like the canker worm 
that groweth to devour, they feed their 
sorrows by recounting them over and 
over. For pain they cry out, and for dis- 
appointment they weep. Yea, they feed 
their own darkness, and in the end forget 
Thee, Thou All Light! 

Hoab ceased. Then Fragapatti said: 

Behold Thy wisdom, O Jehovih! 
Whom Thou wouldst make strong Thou 
hast made to feel adversity's sting. For 
the emergencies that . lie ahead Thou 
plannest Thy Gods to run near the cliffs 
whereon millions perish. 

Who can attain to know Thy wisdom, 
O Jehovih! Who can comprehend the 
millions of Thy Sons and Daughters? 
And yet Thou knowest every one, and 
carries them by a breath so gently they feel 
Thee not, nor know Thee. Within a very 
hair's breadth Thou takest them, and in 
the time of desperation Thy hand cometh 
to the rescue. Man saith: Now will I 
fortify myself with riches and houses, and 
all manner of possessions; adversity shall 
not come upon me. Mine is a kingdom I 
can see; but Jehovih is afar off. He has 
more faith in his possessions than in Thee. 
Thou art suffering him to go away from 
Thee in his vanity for a season, but sooner 
or later Thou wilt bring him in with a 
short turn, either on Earth or in heaven. 
And he goeth down as an example to 
hundreds and thousands that envied him. 

Thou hast set up the poor man in 
faith. He toileth day and night. He is 
weary and sore; he crieth out with hun- 
ger; his rags are a shame to him, but he 
remembereth Thee, O Jehovih! In Thy 
praise he singeth a song in his soul every- 
day. To do good unto others is his great 
delight. And Thy hand reacheth down to 
him in time thereafter; his soul is like a 
giant. Thou hast planned him for a very 
God in heaven! The spark of faith that 
was in him he nurtured, and it became as 
a mighty tree that fell not down before the 
blast. The good he received he exalted, 
and it fructified and grew as a harvest in 



166 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



rich soil. In Thy praise are his songs, and 
they endure forever. His psalms are the 
voice of Thy loves, and the multitude of 
Thy people remember him. 

Thy work hath a sure foundation. Thy 
wisdom standeth before man's wisdom. 
No one hath found a failure in Thy word 
as it speaketh to his own soul. Thy labor 
is from the subtle and unseeen. But the 
vain man looketh to Thy object. In his 
mind he turneth Thy ways upside down. 
And Thou suffereth him to drink to the 
fill of his own vanity; and when he findeth 
himself in torments Thou findest a way 
to reach him and bring him home. Great 
is his glory when he findeth Thee. His 
voice becometh the love of Thy loves for- 
ever! For thou hast shaped him as an 
example, and given him scope to run his 
extreme for his own glory. Yea, Thou 
hast planned him to be one of Thy great 
workers that would not go down when he 
had at last found Thee. 

CHAPTER XVII. 

On the way to Zeredho Fragapatti and 
his hosts in the avalanza were joined by 
a ship of a thousand million explorers 
from the north regions, a thousand times 
further than the north star, of the seventh 
magnitude of light, even three higher than 
Fragapatti. Ctu, the Chief in command 
of the expedition, greeted in the sign Je- 
hovih's name, and Fragapati answered in 
he same sign; and by certain signals the 
ships approached and made fast, the 
es'enaurs of both singing and playing the 
same anthem, five million voices. 

Then Ctu came near to Fragapatti, sa- 
luting, and the hosts stood in line that 
they might hear what was said. And after 
due ceremonies, and acquainting each 
other with who they were, and whence 
they came, Ctu said: I see thou hast thy 
ship ballasted with a north magnet. 

Fragapatti said: This is but a five 
years' dawn, and I teach my hosts how to 
ballast that they may better read the maps 
and roadways of stars and suns. Of these, 
my hosts, five hundred millions have be- 
come capable of being delivered into ethe- 
rea, save in cosmogeny. I am providing 
them, that when they shall have ascended 
they may not be lost in the etherean 
worlds, or be dependent on others. 



Ctu said: What is the length of this 
serpent? Fragapatti said: Seven and one- 
eighth hoitumu. And he asked Ctu what 
distance he had come from his home, and 
Ctu said: One million four hundred and 
twelve thousand eight hundred thirty and 
two hoitumu. 

What time hath thy journey yet before 
thee? Ctu said: Five hundred thousand 
years. Then Fragapatti inquired how many 
star worlds Ctu had so far passed on the 
journey, and Ctu answered: Twenty 
thousand star worlds we have passed, some 
smaller than this red star, and some ten 
thousand times larger. Some of them yet 
liquid balls of fire, some newly crusted 
over, some with atmosphere and water 
and earth and minerals not yet separated, 
but boiling, seething, whirling; some firm 
and just entering the age of se'mu, and 
some old and worn out. And one we 
passed had become barren as to living 
creatures; and the God through whose 
pastures it passed dissolved and dissipated 
it in our presence, having invited thou- 
sands of millions of guests to witness the 
scene. 

Of atmospherean worlds we have 
passed more than ninety thousand; some 
of them larger than the vortex of this red 
star, and capable of giving homes to a 
million times a million of inhabitants; and 
yet on many of them there were no people. 

Thus they discoursed on the size and 
wonder of Jehovih's kingdoms; but their 
number and description were so vast only 
Gods themselves could comprehend them, 
and when they had about concluded Ctu 
remarked: 

The mortal desireth to become a spirit; 
then his ambition is to become an ethe- 
rean; next a Nirvanian; next an Oe'tan, 
and then to travel in the surveys of magni- 
tudes. But those ahead are still more sur- 
passing in magnificence! Who then can 
approach the Unapproachable, All High- 
est! He who fashioned the plan of all 
creations! Who is there that is not over- 
whelmed with devotion and awe of Him, 
who is Ever Present, that extendeth be- 
yond all limit, our Father, Jehovih? 

CHAPTER XVIII. 

When they drew near Zeredho, Ctu, 
with his ship and hosts withdrew, duly sa- 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



167 



luting, and they sped on their journey. 
But Fragapatti halted on the borders of 
Zeredho and landed seven hundred mill- 
ions of his hosts, the others remaining 
aboard. Again the avalanza started forth. 
Fragapatti said: Now will I visit Yaton'- 
te, Lord God of North Guatama, and see 
what he hath accomplished, and perchance 
he will accompany us to Ipseogee. 

Now when they came to the sea of 
Ctevahwitich they raised the avalanza 
fifty thousand miles, for the benefit of 
Hoab, for here lieth the roadway of Terns, 
whither pass countless numbers of fleets 
filled with students in the dismembered 
warks belonging to the earth. Here the 
students learn the process of condensa- 
tion, and the process of dissolution of 
meteoric stones and small planets, such as 
a mortal could walk around in a day. On 
the outer extreme of this sea, the nebulae 
is in constant waves, where the vortices 
play, condensing and bursting, like whirl- 
winds on the earth or corporeal ocean. 

Here Fragapatti explained, saying: In 
this thou shalt behold the wisdom of Je- 
hovih, and the uniformity of His works.. 
Here lieth the first belt away from the 
Earth capable of having nebulae condensed 
into meteoric stones. All nebulae lying 
nearer than this to the Earth's surface is 
either thrown to the Earth or repulsed 
from it. Compute, therefore, the distance 
of this belt from the Earth, together with 
its density, and thou shalt find that it is 
the same distance that the wark belts are, 
with the stars in the firmament of the size 
of the Earth, and of its density and ve- 
locity. The first wark belt of the sun is, 
therefore, the place of its nearest planet, 
the second wark belt is the place of its 
next nearest planet, and so on, and these 
wark belts are all graded in distances ac- 
cordingly as I have spoken. 

Jehovih hath said: Two ways have I 
created for my mathematicians to prove 
My works; one is to measure that which 
is near at hand, in order to determine that 
which is far off; the other is, to observe 
that which is far off, in order to deter- 
mine that which is near. For, since man 
could not measure the wark belts of this 
world, I provided him with means to de- 
termine the wark belts of the sun, so that 



he might the better comprehend his own 
world. 

Fragapatti caused the avalanza to be 
driven in amidst a forest of whirlwinds, to 
illustrate and to explain, so that the hosts 
might observe. He said: Thou shalt per- 
ceive now, that such stones as are con- 
densed beneath the apex fall to the earth, 
whilst those ascending frequently rise 
toward the lighter plateau and explode, to 
be drawn back within the wark belt. 
This belt compareth unto the cloud belt 
near the Earth. Thither the wind currents 
make rain drops and snow flakes; here 
the currents make the first nebulous form- 
ations. 

Whilst Fragapatti was thus discours- 
ing, the avalanza rocked to and fro, and 
many of the people perceived now more 
than ever, the knowledge and power re- 
quired by angels and Gods, to contend 
successfully with the elements. But the 
beauty and grandeur of these fountains, 
these fire-spouts, whirlwinds of fire, to- 
gether with the roar and whistling of the 
flying stones, so enraptured Hoab and his 
hosts, that they could do naught but look 
and wonder at the glory thereof. 

For seven days and seven nights did 
Fragapatti and his hosts travel in this 
wark belt, observing and studying these 
miniature worlds, creating and dissipating, 
and on the eighth day the avalanza was 
lowered beneath the currents, and they 
sailed direct for the kingdom of Yaton'te, 
Lord God of North Guatama, piloted by 
messengers well acquainted with the 
course. But not being in a much fre- 
quented roadway they encountered few" 
ships of other Gods. 

Yaton'te had been apprised of Fraga- 
patti's coming, and had accordingly noti- 
fied his kingdom, and summoned seventy 
of his Lords to his capital, which was 
named after himself. So Yaton'te com- 
manded his otevan to be put in order, 
and having provided five hundred es'en- 
aurs in addition to his crew, together with 
his Lords and ten thousand attendants, 
went forth to the borders of Hagak, a 
thousand miles, to meet Fragapatti. And 
behold, the otevan was only as a small 
boat is to a ship, when compared to the 
avalanza. And when they approached 



168 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



each other, Fragapatti caused the front of 
the avalanza to be opened, and the otevan 
entered within the walls and was made 
fast. And the hosts of the otevan came 
out and were received with great joy by 
Fragapatti and his people. 

Yaton'te had founded the throne of his 
kingdom a thousand miles north of the 
northern line of the sun on the Earth, and 
in the center betwixt the east and the west 
of North Guatama, and from the Earth 
upward five hundred miles, and it was 
here that Fragapatti came to see him. 
Five hundred miles westward lay Ipseo- 
gee, extending north and south two thou- 
sand miles, where reigned Hapacha, who 
was known as God of the West Wind. 

When the avalanza had reached Ya- 
ton'te's capital, and the hosts were duly 
landed in the lower heaven, Yaton'te as- 
cended his throne, and proclaimed recre- 
ation for three days and nights. Then 
Fragapatti said to Yaton'te: How glad 
I shall be to hear the story of thy adven- 
tures, and of thy success in this kingdom, 
for thy record must also be my record to 
be taken with me at the end of this dawn 
to the upper heavens. Hoab and his hosts 
shall also hear thy words. 

Yaton'te replied: I have done what I 
could. Nevertheless, he who hath built 
great kingdoms may find little to admire 
in a small one. 

Fragapatti said: The Creator has pro- 
vided us with a talent which enables us to 
live our youth over again in the young, 
and thus find a new way open to remind 
us of our follies in youth, and a new chan- 
nel in which to behold Jehovih's wisdom. 

Yaton'te answered thus: If a man con- 
vert his neighbor from evil to good, two 
things are accomplished, the triumph of 
the man and the reformation of the neigh- 
bor. If on the other hand a man fail to 
convert his neighbor, two misfortunes 
have transpired, the disappointment of 
one and the loss of glory to Jehovih. It 
is a strong man indeed that can recount 
his own failures and say he praises the 
Father because thereof. 

Fragapatti said: How shall we meas- 
ure magnitudes, O Yaton'te? Has not a 
mortal, that hath delivered one Druk into 
light as great a glory as a God that de- 
livereth hundreds of thousand? Is not the 



one as great in magnitude as the other? 
According to our worthiness in righteous 
persistence, no matter what our limit is, is 
not this the greatest glory? Jehovih com- 
manded man first to deliver himself, to 
master himself, to rule himself. He who 
can do this is a great ruler. Then Jehovih 
gave him a small kingdom to rule over, 
perhaps in the form of a drunkard, or a 
wanton, or even his own family, to right- 
eousness. He who doeth this is a great 
ruler. Is not, then, man's persistence in 
righteousness the whole glory of his king- 
dom? 

Yaton'te said: Yes. To try, and again 
to try, is the sum of the good a man does. 
And yet what man is there in heaven or on 
earth but can find an apology for the good 
work he accomplisheth? Does not the 
poor man say: O, if I had this, what great 
good I would ccomplish. And the rich 
man maketh the same speech; as also does 
the king. And yet Jehovih has given a 
kingdom to each and everyone of them. 
But he who can say: I have done all I 
could according to my strength and wis- 
dom, rateth among the highest of men and 
Gods. Hear me, then, O Fragapatti: and 
cause thyself to forget all the light of high 
heaven, and to imagine thyself in a place 
of darkness, where three thousand million 
spirits are vagrants, scattered far and 
wide on the corporeal earth. Such was 
this kingdom; but the spirits congre- 
gated not together in hells, as they did in 
the east, for they had no association; no 
Gods nor Lords. They were all perpetual 
migrants, except those who dwelt with the 
Druks and familiars. And the spirits of 
those who died in infancy, were taken by 
the spirits of their fathers and mothers, 
and cared for only until they gained suf- 
ficient knowlede to serve as vagrants. And 
all these spirits were without clothes or 
drapery of any kind, and devoid of shame; 
neither were they good or evil, nor had 
they desire for or knowledge of, a higher 
heaven, being content to simply rove 
about, to sleep and to eat. And they had 
at least a thousand different kinds of signs 
and utterances, which they had acquired 
on earth, and mixed up so that neither 
Lords nor Gods could converse with them. 
Thus I found them before I built this capi- 
tal amongst them. I traveled amongst 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



169 



them with music and with fire, and gaudy 
apparel, in hope to gain their aspiration; 
but alas they neither smiled nor frowned 
on my fine shows, but vacantly gazed at us, 
or even fell asleep whilst our otevan was 
paraded before them. 

Then I came and built this capital and 
founded this throne to Jehovih. And then 
I sent to them, here and there, presents of 
gaudy attire, in hope to inspire the multi- 
tude through the few; but alas those attired 
soon divested themselves of their clothes, 
perfering nakedness. Thus my second 
venture became a failure. I then sent a 
hundred thousand preachers amongst them 
to portray the greater glory of a higher 
heaven. But alas, they heeded not, on if 
heeding would forget all that had been told 
them. And thus transpired the third fail- 
ure. Then we held a holy council, implor- 
ing Jehovih for light and power; and His 
Voice came to me, saying: Go to their 
mortal loves my son. Begin thou with 
es'yans. 

Then I commanded my hosts to go and 
live for a season amongst mortals; and they 
brought the es'yans to Yanton'te, under 
guard of the asaphs. And their kindred 
followed and desired to remain. And I 
said unto them: Behold, my place is fair, 
and my people are clothed. Save ye be 
clothed, also, ye cannot dwell with us, 
nor shall ye look upon your kindred 
whom I have taken for myself. And there 
came many mothers and fathers and broth- 
ers and sisters, belonging to the recent 
dead; and they allowed themselves to be 
clothed. Thus were the first of them 
clothed in my kingdom. 

Again I called my hosts together and 
said unto them: I will divide North 
Guatama amongst a thousand Lords, and 
they shall dwell with mortals, having a 
sufficiency of ashars to give one to each 
mortal man, woman and child. And when 
they die by natural death, or in war, the 
es'yan spirits shaH be brought to my king- 
dom. 

Then I provided nurses and places of 
entertainment for those who were brought 
here. But, alas, the tens of thousands 
of spirits who thus came because of their 
kin, and accepted clothing for sake of re- 
maining, had little talent and less de- 
sire for anything. At the next holy coun- 



cil the Light came to me, saying: Hear 
the Voice of thy Creator, O My Son; be- 
cause thou hast been diligent in striving 
for the resurrection of My children, I am 
come to thee. I created men naked, as 
the foundation of industry. But because 
this people followed in the Osirian age the 
abandonment of spirit communion whilst 
they were yet mortals, they lost sight of 
My countenance. Neither canst thou in- 
spire them to industry, save through cloth- 
ing the body; but, first of all, thou shalt 
make them ashamed of nakedness; other- 
wise there is no resurrection for them. 

Then I inquired of the Creator how I 
should teach them shame. He said: Thou 
shalt inspire them through mortals. Every 
plateau except the lowest shall be a thou- 
sand miles in breadth, and the lowest shall 
be two thousand miles in breadth. Each 
plateau shall have a rise of one degree, so 
that the plateaux shall extend from the 
earth up to thy kingdom like a stairway. 
And thy Lords shall provide subjective 
entertainments and subjective teaching for 
the two lowest plateaux. And it shall be 
provided with forests, lakes and rivers, 
and with all manner of animals and birds 
and fish, and of whatsoever is suitable 
food for the mortals. And the lowest pla- 
teau shall be called Hochedowa, signifying 
happy hunting ground. And there shall 
not be any real thing on these two plateaus 
save the inhabitants and their food, and 
the mirrors, lenses and machinery for pro- 
ducing subjective things. And when this 
work is completed ye shall teach mortals 
and say to them also: Go tell one an- 
other, for after death the soul shall go 
thither in great delight; but except ye 
wear garments to hide your nakedness ye 
shall not enter Hochedowa. 

Yaton'te said: When the lowest plateau 
was made habitable, covering a large por- 
tion of North Guatama, the Voice came 
again, saying: Through thy Lords, My 
Son, thou shalt possess all mortals, every 
man, woman or child, allowing not one of 
the drujas to come near them. And be- 
hold, I will send upon the land in many 
places great drouths, because of the con- 
struction of the plateaux, and these wan- 
dering spirits shall not find sustenance 
except through thee and thy Lords. And 
when they come to thee, thou shalt oblige 



170 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



them to be clothed, and thou shalt show 
preference to all such as wear ornaments. 

Yaton'te said: This much have we 
accomplished, O Fragapatti. The founda- 
tion of my heavenly kingdom is broad and 
sure, but I have few subjects to show thee. 

Fragapatti said: Behold, I will take 
two days of rest, and then I will inspect 
thy places. Proclaim, therefore, recrea- 
tion for two more days. 

CHAPTER XIX. 

When the time of recreation was ended 
Yaton'te called his council together, and 
when he sat on the throne with Fraga- 
patti and Hoab on his left hand, the Voice 
of Jehovih came to him, saying: 

Behold, O My Sons and Daughters, in 
this heaven and on this land shall rise in 
time after those who shall begin the 
founding of My kingdom amongst mor- 
tals. For in the lands of the East, and the 
heavens of the East, I have given false 
Gods and Lords whom mortals fall down 
and worship, but in this heaven and this 
land no false God nor Lord shall ever be 
established by violence, for so I have de- 
creed. And to accomplish this end I have 
had these subjective heavens created, and 
they shall endure till the dawn of kosmon 
and the overthrow of war and mortal 
kingdoms. From this throne will I come 
in that day, through My Chiefs, and reveal 
the histories of My Kingdoms. And from 
this heaven I will extend outward until 
My kingdoms encircle the whole Earth. 

And whether the I'huans be mortals or 
spirits, ye shall teach them to worship 
none save the Great Spirit. For a ques- 
tion will arise amongst mortals in the be- 
ginning of kosmon as to whether mortals 
are ruled by the angels of heaven, and as 
proof to them I will keep out all false 
Gods, Lords and Saviours, and mortals, 
through the inspiration that shall descend 
from this heaven, through the spirits of 
the I'huan dead, shall become worshipers 
of the Great Spirit; for I, Jehovih, alone 
rule over all, and within all My works. 
And as ye find little inspiration amongst 
the hosts of wandering spirits now, so will 
the same lack of inspiration be manifested 
in the beginning of kosmon amongst mor- 
tals. The Voice ceased. 



Yaton'te called Et'seing, his assistant 
God, saying: Come thou and sit on the 
throne, whilst I accompany Fragapatti to 
inspect my dominions, and also' to visit 
God of Ipseogee, after which I will return 
hither. 

Et'seing sat on the throne, duly salut- 
ing. Then Fragapatti, perceiving that the 
great multitude desired to hear him speak, 
rose up and said: 

I am well pleased with what they have 
done, O Jehovih. Thou hast wisely 
chosen them, for in this dawn I perceive 
the foundation of that which will reach 
mortals in kosmon. And because Thou 
hast chosen this place, great is the respon- 
sibility of these Thy Lords and Thy Lord 
God. Because they have supplicated Thee, 
Thou hast guided them, and they cannot 
err. Because their work hath been slow, 
they have great honor in patience and per- 
sistence. May Thy Wisdom, Power and 
Love continue with them, for Thy glory, 
now and forever. Amen! 

Fragapatti ceased, but the light became 
brilliant above his head; and the Voice 
spake out of the Light, saying: 

More shall they concern themselves in 
a righteous foundation of My kingdom 
than in a multitude of conversions and res- 
urrections. For the standard of their 
Lords and Gods and their successors is of 
more value than tens of thousands of the 
redeemed who are of little wisdom and 
strength. 

The Voice ceased, and Fragapatti came 
down from the throne, followed by Ya- 
ton'te and Hoab. The es'enaurs chanted, 
All Hail, Great Jehovih's Power! And 
when they had advanced to Ctius they 
halted for a moment ,and then filed in 
front of the throne, saluting in the Sign 
of Om, and were answered by Fragapatti. 
After them came the marshals of the trav- 
eling hosts. Passing out of the capital to 
the place of the ships of fire, they entered 
the avalanza, with music and cheering; 
and thus they departed to survey the king- 
dom of Yaton'te, and then to go to Ipse- 
ogee. 

CHAPTER XX. 

After Fragapatti had examined the 
places of the asaphs and physicians which 
belong to the lower heavens, he descended 



CYCLE OF FEAGAPATTI 



171 



to Hochedowa, the happy hunting ground, 
in order to witness the games and tourna- 
ments, which were so far maintained by a 
great expenditure of labor on the part of 
the ethereans, in order to teach the dead 
by subjective illustrations. Jehovih had 
said: 

As mortal children can be taught by 
objective illustration, so can the young 
spirit be taught in a subjective school. 
Behold the rainbow! It is a subjective il- 
lustration to mortals of a bow without 
substance. Man bendeth a stick and saith: 
Behold a bow! And he holdeth it in his 
hand; but Mine he cannot touch. I cause 
mortals to teach their sons and daughters 
many combinations by the use of objects, 
that they should know a circle, a square ,a 
triangle, or learn to compute numbers by 
the use of objects. Inversely in the same 
way I created subjective means for the 
spirits of the dead, that they might be 
taught and amused by My works. 

To corporeans I gave corporeal eyes 
and corporeal ears, that they might attain 
to wisdom on the earth; and to a few I 
give su'is that they may see and hear 
things spiritually. To the spirits of mor- 
tals who die in infancy I give spiritual 
eyes, and spiritual ears; but without culti- 
vation they hear not corporeal things nor 
see corporeal things. But to such spirits 
as have fulfilled an earth-life, I have given 
capacity to see and hear after death the 
matters of both worlds. Nevertheless 
there are many spirits in heaven who have 
not fulfilled either a spiritual or a cor- 
poreal life, and they can see but little and 
hear but little; for which reason I com- 
manded that they should be called drujas, 
signifying spirits of darkness. And I send 
My Gods and My Lords, saying to them: 
Go to the spirits of darkness, for they 
neither see nor hear heaven nor earth, and 
are wandering about indifferent even to 
their own nakedness. And ye shall create 
mirrors and lenses, and optical illusions 
and delusions, and provide games and en- 
tertainments for them, so that their under- 
standing may be opened up for the glory 
of My kingdoms. 

CHAPTER XXI. 

When the avalanza arrived at Hoche- 
dowa it was lowered to as to serve as an 



observatory, in order that those therein 
could witness what was going on, and it 
could be moved about from place to place. 
And they witnessed the heavenly tourna- 
ments and games, the boating and fishing 
and hunting, and all other entertainments 
representative of what these angels had 
been engaged at in mortal life. And it 
came to pass that many drujas were re- 
stored to memory of earth life, restored to 
seeing and hearing, and to know they had 
entered another world, illustrating to their 
dull senses that it was possible for them to 
learn to see and hear understandingly. But 
there were also within these regions hun- 
dreds of millions of angels void of form 
and expression. 

Jehovih had said: When a man hath 
fainted, thou shalt arouse him by calling 
his memory to things past. And when the 
druj in heaven hath ceased to know who 
he is, thou shalt show him symbols of 
things past and thus awaken him. 

Jehovih had also said: Behold, O man, 
thou art the chief glory of my creations. 
And to thee only, O man, have I given 
immortality. For the beasts of the field 
I made like a vessel that is full of water, 
and when the vessel is destroyed the water 
flows back to the ocean. I quickened 
them into life by mine own hand, but 
when I take away My hand they are gone 
back into dissolution. As a drop of water 
evaporates and is seen no more, so is the 
spirit of all the animals I created before 
the Light of My countenance except thee, 
O man, to whom I gave power for ever- 
lasting life. And as a man may take a 
drop of water and put it in a phial and 
keep it for a long time, so have I given to 
my exalted angels power to take the spirit 
of a fish or of an animal and reclothe it 
with the semblance of a body for a season. 
And yet it is only a subjective existence. 
And as a man letteth a stone out of his 
hand, and it falls to the ground, so when 
my angels let go their hands on My spir- 
itual animals their spirits fall into the sea 
of My body, and are seen no more. Even 
so, also, I created the trees, the grass, the 
moss and all vegetable things that grow 
on the Earth. 

Fragapatti also visited the Washa'wow'- 
wow, the great hunting fields, and the 
places of tournaments, the Se'ka'to'si, 



172 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



where thousands and tens of thousands of 
drujas were being amused and instructed 
and awakened to their condition and to 
their possibilities. And when Fragapatti 
and his hosts had seen the beauty and 
grandeur of this lowest of heavens, and 
made a record of the affairs, Yaton'te said: 

Now, O Fragapatti, have I shown thee 
the foundation of a great house, my king- 
dom, which is Jehovih' s also. I am at thy 
service to go whithersoever thou mayest 
desire. Then Fragapatti answered: I de- 
sire to descend beneath to Earth's surface, 
and survey the plains, and rivers and lakes, 
in the regions where the Father's King- 
dom will be founded. Let my mathemati- 
cians compute the time, and these things 
shall also be recorded in the etherean li- 
braries, for the benefit of the angels of 
that day. 

The mathematicians computed the 
time, and then Yo'tse'putu, the Chief, said: 
Eight thousand nine hundred years. 

So Fragapatti caused the avalanza to be 
lowered down to Earth's surface, and he 
coursed the land over, east and west, and 
north and south, and when he saw it was a 
fair country as to land and water, he said: 

Behold, the Wisdom of Jehovih in the 
foundation and plans for inhabiting and 
subduing Earth. And yet, eight thousand 
nine hundred years! O what innumerable 
millions on Earth will go down in dark- 
ness ere that day! Here the Light will 
fall! Here the beginning of the death of 
Seffas! Yet Thy hand, O Jehovih, is over 
all. 

CHAPTER XXII. 

Fragapatti sent messengers to Hapacha, 
God of Ipseogee, apprising him of the an- 
ticipated visit. So Hapacha hastily called 
in his Lords and captains, preparing a time 
of recreation and suitable reception and 
entertainments. And Hapacha arranged 
his hosts in this manner: First, one hun- 
dred thousand musicians, formed in eight 
parts of a circle. With each group he pro- 
vided one thousand marshals, and they 
stood in front of the musicians, with eight 
intervening spaces also. Next within he 
provided places for the messengers, of 
whom there were three hundred thousand. 
Then next came the asaphs, of whom 
there were one million; next came the 



ashars, of whom there were two million; 
next, the nurses and physicians. Then 
the teachers in factories and schools and 
colleges, and of all these there were four- 
teen million six hundred thousand.. Of the 
grade above the es'y ans there were twenty 
million, and of the second grade there were 
thirty million; but no es'yans were present. 

In the midst of the circle was the throne 
of Hapacha, now extended so as to ac- 
commodate his Lords. To the south of his 
throne were the seats of the captains; and 
in a crescent were his counselors, of whom 
there were one million. 

Hapacha having thus called them to- 
gether, and having explained to but few 
the purpose, now addressed all present, 
saying: 

By the Wisdom and Power of Jehovih I 
speak before you. Since our youth up we 
have been advised by the guardian angels, 
their Lords and God, to be firm in faith in 
Jehovih above all things. For it was de- 
clared to us, in the olden times, that there 
was a higher heaven and a lower heaven, 
and that through faith in the All Highest 
we should all ultimately ascend and dwell 
in His most Holy Kingdoms. Ye have 
been steady workers since your mortal 
lives were put away, raising up many for 
this kingdom, and causing them to rejoice 
in everlasting life. But as it has been prom- 
ised that the Gods above us would surely 
come and deliver all who were prepared 
for the next resurrection, ye have cher- 
ished hopes for wider fields of labor where 
ye may become more wise in Jehovih's 
Light. The time for that resurrection is 
near at hand for many of you. Our Fa- 
ther hath brought this heaven into a re- 
gion of light that ye may be prepared for 
still greater light beyond. And because of 
the new light that is with you many of the 
I'huan es'yans have deserted our nurseries 
and gone back to the earth, for they love 
the darkness on earth more than the light 
of heaven. My Lords have sent messen- 
gers to me from various parts of the earth, 
saying: As much as they have deserted 
your places in heaven, even so much have 
the es'yans returned to mortals in great 
numbers. And it hath come to pass that 
great manifestations of spirit presence are 
now common to mortals, men, women and 
children. Many of these es'yans have 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



173 



adopted the roving habits of drujas, deny- 
ing that there is any higher heaven, hon- 
estly believing they will have an opportun- 
ity to reincarnate themselves and dwell 
again in mortal form; knowing no higher 
heaven, and knowing no happiness except 
the indulgence of lust through mortals. 

Being armed in prophecy, your God 
called you to witness the words and pro- 
ceedings of Fragapatti, who is on his way 
hither, accompanied by Yaton'te, God of 
Yaton'te, creator of Hochedowa. For 
more than six hundred years have many of 
us labored in this field, and our harvests 
for Gau have been the most esteemed of 
all the resurrections contributed by the 
Lords of Earth. To comport with our dig- 
nity, I have commanded the builders of 
otevans to have in readiness, representing 
these harvests, a vessel for my Lords and 
their attendants, and my chief marshal, to 
go part way and meet our visitors, bearing 
the sign of the triangle, and of fruit and 
the altar. 

Hapacha then gave instructions in full; 
and presently the receiving hosts departed 
in the otevan, with music and rejoicing, 
being cheered by the hosts who remained 
to put the house of Hapacha in order. 

CHAPTER XXIII. 

Fragapatti had previously visited Ha- 
pacha, but told not who he was, except 
that he was God of Lunitzi, in etherea. 
Consequently, Hapacha, now knowing that 
Fragapatti was coming, mistrusted not 
that it was the God of Lunitzi, but expect- 
ed to see him coming in great pomp and 
glory. For he had heard of the wonders 
Fragapatti had already accomplished in 
the eastern heavens, particularly the break- 
ing up of the hells of Aoasu and the deliv- 
erance of the tortured inmates. But, with 
neither lights nor curtains, Fragapatti 
came to Ipseogee, with the receiving hosts 
within his vessel, anchoring near the 
throne of Hapacha. 

Presently Fragapatti, Yaton'te and 
Hoab came down out of the ship, with the 
marshals on the left, and the receiving hosts 
on the right. Hapacha's es'enaurs sang, 
Jehovih's Name, O ye Lords and Gods. 
The hosts of the avalanza joined in singing, 
with trumpets, harps and triangles, and 
great was the glory of their music. When 



Fragapatti approached the throne the 
music ceased. Hapacha made the ancient 
sign of Jehovih's name, and asked: Who 
cometh here? Fragapatti answered: A 
Faithist in Jehovih! And he gave the 
countersign. Then Hapacha said: In His 
Name, welcome, brother, and thy hosts 
also. May Jehovih's Love, Wisdom and 
Power be manifested through me and my 
people during your sojourn with us. 

Fragapatti said: Jehovih is All Wise. 
He fashions some men as suns, and the 
light of their souls extendeth to etherea. 
And He sends swift messengers from His 
most exalted heavens to course the vast 
fields in etherea at certain times; and they 
passing through both light and dark places 
scan the distant kingdoms where mortals 
and angels dwell, and by their great wisdom 
discern the brightest, best souls, and carry 
the record thereof to the Gods above. 
And when these Gods descend to the re- 
gions wherein these gems are set, they 
visit them. Thus standeth thy record, O 
Hapacha, in the higher heavens. And 
when the Father called me to visit the red 
star and her heavens, I looked over Jeho- 
vih's messengers' reports where was set thy 
name, radiant with love. So to thee I came 
unknown, and thy great worth and the 
amity of thy hosts won my love. I promis- 
ed that thou shouldst hear from me soon, 
and so behold, Fragapatti is before thee. 

Hapacha said: For this I praise Jeho- 
vih. Come thou, O Fragapatti, and honor 
my throne in the name of the Father. 
And come thou also, Yaton'te, and thou, 
Hoab. And they went and sat on the 
throne, and Fragapatti sat in the midst. 
Again the es-enaurs sang and played, and 
whilst they sang the light of the upper hea- 
vens began to envelop the throne. Then 
spake Fragapatti, saying: 

Because ye have been faithful from the 
first, ye are become the light of Earth and 
of this heaven; and as ye have maintained 
your altars and times of worship, there have 
been maintained in the upper heavens al- 
tars and times of worship in conjunction 
with you. Thus have ye been blessed in 
hearing the Voice through all the darkness 
which Earth and her heavens have passed. 

As Jehovih hath given voice betwixt 
mother and child, though they be distant 
from each other, so in like manner has he 



174 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



given voice to His kingdoms which are in 
sympathy in righteousness and love. As 
ye behold the light gathering about the 
throne, think not that I bring the light, 
nor that it is sent to me in person. There 
is a cord betwixt me and my etherean 
kingdoms, and I am one end thereof; the 
other end is my throne in etherea. When 
I sit in the midst of this throne, behold it 
is illumined by the light of the higher hea- 
vens. Think not that my heavens are the 
highest of all. The All Highest can never 
be attained. Nevertheless, my heavens are 
conected as with a cord to those above me, 
and they to still others above, and so on, 
forever, upward! The All Highest con- 
ceived of is called Jehovih; and no matter 
how far it descends, the Voice is still His 
Voice. 

Fragapatti ceased speaking, and a light, 
most brilliant like a sun, settled above his 
head. Many could not look upon it be- 
cause of its brightness. Presently, Jeho- 
vih's Voice spake out of the Light, saying: 

Rejoice, O Hapacha, in the name of thy 
Creator! Sing songs of delight, and let 
thy people hold up their heads. I have 
watched over thee and thy hosts. Ye have 
fulfilled the dawn of My Light. Yester- 
day I said: Sit ye here, stand ye here,, for 
to-morrow I come again. And this was 
My commandment for thousands and tens 
of thousands of years. But others remem- 
bered Me not. In the night they went down 
as a child that falleth asleep. And when I 
come on the morrow, behold, they had not 
awakened. And I roused them up and 
showed them My great Light. Again, I 
said to them: Three thousand years are 
as one day in My sight. Sit ye here, stand 
ye there; and remember Me. To-morrow 
I come again. But they went down in 
sleep. They remembered Me not, their 
Creator. 

But thou, O Hapacha, hast maintained 
the watch all night long. Thou art the 
first of Earth Gods who hath kept My 
kingdom safe in the lower heavens till the 
morrow come. Now I have come to de- 
liver thee and thy kingdom to Haraiti, 
whither thou shalt tarry till the close of 
dawn, when My Sons and Daughters shall 
bear thee and thy hosts upward to My 
emancipated worlds. 



The Voice ceased. Then spake Fraga- 
patti, saying: For three days I will tarry 
here. Two days shall be spent in recrea- 
tion, and on the third day thou shalt ap- 
point thy successor, and I will then speak 
again before thee and thy people. 

Hapacha then proclaimed two days of 
recreation, and the hosts of the avalanza 
mingled with the Ipseogee'ans, and great 
was the glory of those two days. 

CHAPTER XXIV. 

Hoab rejoiced not. He alone of all 
the people assembled was burdened in soul. 
He said: Jehovih, because I have seen 
that Thy Son Hapacha, one of Thy Gods 
in the lowest of heavens, has maintained 
his kingdom unto Thee till this dawn of 
light, I am rebuked. Thou gavest into my 
keeping a kingdom far higher than this, 
even Zeredho; and I went down as a child 
that falleth asleep. My kingdom forgot 
Thee; my people ceased to sing songs unto 
Thee. We buried ourselves in darkness. 
And thou hast chosen me to be the next 
God of Earth and her heavens. How shall 
I fulfill Thy commandments? How shall 
I know the way to choose Gods and Lords 
who will be steadfast and zealous? 

Fragapatti then said unto him: Through 
faith in Jehovih are all things accomplish- 
ed. Without faith in Him all things are 
uncertain. He who saith: I know Jeho- 
vih lives and reigneth, hath said wisely. 
But he who says: I go forth in Thy 
strength, O Jehovih, for I know that I 
shall accomplish, hath said much more. 
For his words maintain the power of the 
Father in Him. 

On the morning of the third day, Ha- 
pacha called the hosts from recreation to 
labor. The es'enaurs chanted a hymn of 
rejoicing, and then Hapacha said: 

To Thee, O Jehovih, are all things com- 
mitted, even as from Thee they came forth. 
Thy Voice is upon all men, but at times 
they hear Thee not. Thine eye is observant 
of all men. To teach men these simple 
things is to make Gods of them. To teach 
them to find Thee, to know Thee, to real- 
ize Thy Ever Presence and to become one 
with Thee, this is the labor of Thy Gods 
and Lords. In Thy name have I raised up 
one who is to succeed me, in this, Thy 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



175 



kingdom. From Thy Light shall Thy Ori- 
an Chief weave a crown for him, and with 
mine own hands will I crown him. 

The marshals now brought forward 
Penoto, of Caracas, highly learned in dis- 
cipline, and when he stood before the 
throne of God, Fragapatti arose and said: 
Without a keynote, a number of instru- 
ments cannot be attuned to harmony. 
Many people, either angels or mortals, be- 
coming as a unit, are powerful over the 
elements surrounding them, but if such 
people disbelieve in an All Highest Per- 
son, they cannot harmonize, because each 
one is his own self esteemed all highest. 
They are without power, without unison, 
and without sacrifice, accomplishing little 
good on earth or in heaven. 

Think not that darkness belongs only to 
the earth, for there are those who rise to 
the second resurrection, and then fall into 
unbelief, and then the first resurrection. 
And some of them even fall into hell be- 
lieving that evil and destruction is good; 
and yet others become drujas engrossed in 
the affairs of mortals, and finally they be- 
come fetals and vampires on mortals. 

Whoever hath attained the height of his 
own ideal, is on the precipice of hell; but 
he who, finding the God of his forefathers 
too small for himself, inventeth one much 
higher, is a great benefactor. A fool can 
ridicule the ancient Person; his delight is 
to pull down; but a wise man furnisheth a 
greater All Person. To pull down the All 
Person, is to pull down His people. To 
try to make a non-appreciable Person out 
of Jehovih is to make one's self the oppo- 
site of a creator. To learn to create and 
to invent; to learn to congregate and to 
make, is to travel on the right road. To 
learn to pull down, to scatter, to annul, to 
disintegrate, to set things apart from one 
another, to find evil instead of good, to 
find folly instead of wisdom, to expose the 
ignorance of others instead of finding wis- 
dom in them— all these follow the first in- 
ception of disbelief in the All Person. 

And since, from disintegration of the 
compact betwixt the Creator and His chil- 
dren, the cord of communication is cut off 
with the exalted kingdoms in etherea, they 
have indeed double grounds for disbelief; 
nor can they comprehend how others can 
be believers in an All Person, much less to 



have faith in Him. For a community be- 
cometh One Person; a kingdom in etherea 
becometh One Person; a kingdom in the 
lower heavens becometh One Person; a 
kingdom on earth becometh One Person; 
each and every kingdom being a single 
figurehead; and as many of those kingdoms 
as are united, become One Person also, 
being a single figurehead of many parts, 
which is the perfection of each and every 
individual. 

Hence, as a single individual can cut 
himself off from Jehovih; so can a com- 
munity, or a kingdom, and so go down to 
destruction. The strongest, best man in 
the community is he who laboreth most to 
perfect the unity, that is, the Person of the 
community; the strongest man in the king- 
dom is he who laboreth most to perfect 
the Person of the kingdom; the strongest 
man in heaven is he who laboreth most to 
perfect the All Person of heaven. The 
weakest of men is the opposite of these. 
He laboreth to show there is no All Per- 
son in anything; verily, he is already falling 
away from the Father. Yea, he accuseth 
himself, for he saith: I neither see nor hear 
an All Person, nor believe I in one. 

It was said of old: First, testimony; sec- 
ond, belief; third, faith; and fourth, works; 
but I declare unto you that with the ex- 
panse of knowledge testimony must be 
strengthened. For in the olden times, an- 
gels and men could be commanded to be- 
lieve and they believed. Herein have 
many of the Lords and Gods of the lower 
heavens erred; for they furnished not to 
those beneath them the necessary testi- 
mony comporting with the advanced 
knowledge in heaven or on earth. A God 
shall devise food for meditation, because 
angels, as well as mortals, without an ad- 
vanced teacher, are as well off with none 
at all. 

It was said of old that a God taught the 
people on one of the stars to believe Je- 
hovih lived in a straw, and they rose in 
wisdom, harmony and unity. Then after- 
ward, another God came and taught them 
there was no Jehovih, because, forsooth, 
He could not live in a straw; and the people 
fell into disbelief, inharmony and disunion. 
Which, then, of these, was the wiser God? 
Yet I declare unto you, they were both 
necessary. For there are times when with- 



176 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



out a habitation and a figure, the Great 
Spirit cannot be taught to either angels or 
mortals. The labor of the Gods is to lead 
the people upward, step by step, until they 
learn to be Gods and Goddesses themselves. 

On this world, mortals were first taught 
through stone and wooden idols; and after- 
wards by engraved images. In some of 
the mixed tribes it will be necessary to 
teach them Jehovih incarnated in mortal 
form, and by sympathy for his sufferings, 
teach them how to follow his spirit up to 
heaven. But all these subterfuges shall be 
set aside in the kosmon era. This heaven, 
more than any other heaven on Earth, will 
be esteemed by the etherean kingdoms; for 
beneath you on this part of Earth, will mor- 
tals first espouse the Father's kingdom. 

Therefore, let your labor be first of all 
to sow the seed of belief in an All Person,, 
the Great Spirit. As ye now sow, and 
build Jehovih's kingdom in your heaven, 
so, in the coming of the kosmon era, will 
the same teaching take root in the souls of 
mortals. Nor shall ye, under any circum- 
stances, permit Gods, Lords or Saviors to 
be established as worshipful beings, either 
in these heavens or on this land. For this 
land is dedicated to Jehovih for the over- 
throw of all idols, of Gods, Lords, Saviors, 
and of everything that is worshipped save 
Jehovih, the Great Spirit. Neither shall 
any of these idols be established with effect 
in these heavens or on this land. But be 
ye most circumspect to establish Jehovih, 
the All Person, in the souls of angels and 
mortals. 

Fragapatti ceased, but signalled for Ha- 
pacha to ordain Penoto, God of Ipseogee. 
Hapacha rose up, saying: Penoto, Son of 
Jehovih. Thou hast been chosen to be 
God of Ipseogee for six hundred years. 
Thou hast been favored with much travel- 
ing in heaven; and for thy benefit, many 
swift messengers from the emancipated 
worlds have explained to thee the domin- 
ions of the Great Chiefs. He through 
whose fields this world is now traveling, 
hath stood up before thee. He hath spok- 
en to thee and thy people. Heed thou his 
words and thou shalt be one with his king- 
doms in wisdom and power. And at the 
end of six hundred years, thou and thy 
harvest shall be called for by the etherean 
hosts. Be thou ready for them! And erst 



thou depart thou shalt raise up one suffi- 
cient to take thy place, and thou shalt be- 
stow him. 

Penoto said: Thy will and Jehovih's 
be done. That which is given me to do 
will I do with all my wisdom and strength, 
so help me, O Jehovih. 

Hapacha said: By virtue of Thy Love, 
Wisdom and Power, O Jehovih, vested in 
me, do I ordain this Thy son, God of Ip- 
seogee, for the period of six hundred years. 
Be Thou with him, O Jehovih, and may he 
and his works glorify Thee forever. Amen! 

Penoto said: Which I accept and cove- 
nant with Thee, O Jehovih, for Thy glory 
forever. Amen. 

The es'enaurs now sang: Thou Light 
and Person, Approved and Sung on High, 
Jehovih. Our God Hapacha. Thou Hast 
Called Him. Welcome, Penoto. Thou 
alone, Jehovih, remainest forever. Glory, 
glory, be to Thee, O Thou Creator. 

The light gathered brilliantly over Frag- 
apatti's head, and when the music ceased, 
the Voice of Jehovih spake out of the 
Light, saying: 

In the first days I blew My breath upon 
the lands of Earth, and man became a liv- 
ing soul. Then, in the second time, I 
moved My hand upon Earth, and man 
went forth in power. Thus near hath My 
Voice approached Earth. Be ye steadfast 
in My commandments. The time shall 
surely come when My Voice shall be heard 
by mortals on Earth. 

The Voice ceased, and then Fragapatti 
took the light in his hands, as one would 
take fine flax, and turning it about wove a 
most brilliant crown of a reddish hue. He 
said: 

Crown of Thy crown, O Jehovih, have 
I woven for Thy Son, God of Ipseogee. 
And he handed it to Hapacha, who said: 
And in Thy name, O Father, I crown him, 
second God of Ipseogee, for six hundred 
years. Be Thou with him, O Father. 
Amen. 

CHAPTER XXV. 

At the close of the fourth day, Fraga- 
patti commanded his hosts to embark in 
the avalanza; and the marshals conducted 
them in, taking first, the sons and daugh- 
ters of Ipseogee, being sixty million; next 
the Zererho'ans, ten million; and then 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



177 



Fragapatti's etherean attendants, five mill- 
ion. When those were aboard, Fragapatti, 
Hoab, Yaton'te and Hapacha, rose up, and 
after making the sign of the setting sun, 
went down and sat at the foot of the 
throne. God, who was Penoto, stepped 
down and took Fragapatti's hand, saying: 
Arise, O Chief. The Father calleth. Frag- 
apatti rose up and stood aside. Then God 
raised Yaton'te and he stood aside, and 
then Hoab and he stood aside. And now 
came the greatest trial of all. God took 
Hapacha' s hand, saying: Arise, O God, 
Great Jehovih calleth thee! Go thy way 
and His. But they both burst into tears, 
and fell into each other's arms. Hapacha 
said: O Father! Penoto said: His will be 
done. And now the light gathered bril- 
liantly over the scene. Fragapatti moved 
forward, then Yaton'te, then Hoab, and 
next Hapacha. 

Penoto resumed the throne. The es'- 
enaurs chanted, and the light of the higher 
heavens descended over all the place, mak- 
ing the close of the scene like a sweet 
dream. Fragapatti and his hosts were 
gone. 

Like a bee that is laden with honey, 
flying from a field of flowers to its home, 
so returned Fragapatti with his avalanza to 
Haraiti, swiftly speeding through the vault 
of heaven, a shooting star in Jehovih's 
hand. Athrava, God of Haraiti and assist- 
ant to Fragapatti, knew that the avalanza 
was coming, and that Hapacha and his 
hosts were aboard, and he provided a glor- 
ious reception for them. So for the space 
of a thousand miles he caused two rows of 
pillars of fire to be erected, so that the ava- 
lanza should pass between them; and near 
the pillars were stationed trumpeters and 
harpists, one million, divided into one hun- 
dred groups. And they were so arranged, 
that when the avalanza passed, they could 
come aboard. 

Now more than one hundred and fifty 
millions of the spirits who had been rescu- 
ed from torture and madness in the hells 
of Aoasu had been restored to conscious- 
ness during the absence of Fragapatti. And 
Athrava had them clothed in gaudy appar- 
el, and they were bearers of perfumes, flow- 
ers and torches, as presents for the I'hin 
hosts of Hapacha. And the lights were 
lowered at the place of landing, to make it 



acceptable to those newly raised who were 
aboard. 

Athrava said: As for Mouru, within 
the walls of light it shall be rated seven; 
but when Fragapatti hath ascended the 
throne it shall be raised to nine. And in 
those days, nine in Haraiti was fifty per 
cent, of the capacity of endurance in the 
plateau. 

Jehovih had said: If they raise the light, 
it will be more acceptable to My etherean 
hosts, for they have dwelt a long time near 
the earth, and are thirsting for etherean 
light. But yet consider ye, here are thou- 
sands of millions of atmosphereans who 
cannot endure the etherean light but delight 
in a lower per cent. See to it then that 
the walls of light protect My hosts on one 
side, but raise ye the grade to nine within. 

Athrava said: There shall be flights of 
stairs leading over the walls of Mouru, 
and they shall be white and illumined on 
that day, which shall be sufficient for divid- 
ing the people according to the light suit- 
ed to them. The I'hins with Hapacha will 
go over the walls, for they entered their 
corporeal cities in the same way; besides, 
they are capable of enduring the light; but 
the I'huans with Hapacha will desire to re- 
main without. For them prepare ye a 
place of delight and rest. 

But in regard to the ethereans Athrava 
gave no orders, for they were capable of 
perceiving all necessary things without in- 
struction. 

CHAPTER XXVI. 

When Fragapatti entered the avenue of 
fire where Athrava had stationed the mu- 
sicians, with his avalanza, so great was the 
.delight of his hosts aboard they broke all 
bounds of propriety, and they shouted and 
sang with the trumpeters with the most 
exalted enthusiasm, becoming entranced 
with the enchanting scene about them, and 
seeing visions of etherea far above them. 
For Jehovih created man with seasons of 
clearness far in advance of his growth, 
which having realized, he returneth to his 
normal condition to prepare himself consti- 
tutionally. 

Along the road on either side, were mot- 
toes peculiar to the hosts of Hapacha, and 
to mortals of Guatama. When Hapacha 
saw these, he said: How is it possible? 



178 



CYCLE OF FBAGAPATTI 



Whence derived these Gods this informa- 
tion? But the light came to his own soul, 
saying: The wise and good sayings of 
men below, are borne by Jehovih's swift 
messengers to realms above. Hoab stood 
near by, and heard Hapacha's remark; and 
he said: 

How can men and spirits be inspired 
to wise and good sayings? Who had 
thought to erect such sign boards on the 
road to All Light! And yet what darker 
deeds are done when the soul of man find- 
eth curses and evil words to vent his aw- 
ful sins, and walls himself around with hor- 
rid imprecations, to face in after time and 
be appalled at the havoc of his own deadly 
weapons. How few, indeed, comprehend 
the direful thrust of hateful words, but 
which are placarded on the signboards of 
heaven, as his fruit sent to market! The 
poison dealt out of his mouth to his broth- 
er man! A man throweth a spear, deadly, 
and it falleth on the earth and lieth there; 
but words and sayings are more potent, 
scoring deep in the soul of things. Fair 
indeed is it with thee, O Hapacha, and 
with thy hosts also, with yonder pure scroll 
to enter Haraiti. 

As the ship passed the lights, the ether- 
ean musicians came aboard, being anxious 
to meet Hapacha and his hosts, especially 
the I'hins, and to congratulate them on be- 
ing the first harvest from the lowest hea- 
ven at the end of a cycle. There were just 
twice as many as Sethantes had prepared 
in the first dawn on Earth. Fragapatti call- 
ed the swift messengers belonging to the 
roads of Gon, in etherea, and he said unto 
them: Go ye to Sethantes, whose fields lie 
in the Roads of Gon, and say unto him: 
Greeting, in the name of Jehovih. The. 
red star, Earth, hath reached Obsod and 
Goomatchala, home of Fragapatti, who 
sendeth love and joy on behalf of sixty 
million, first harvest of ha'k, grade sixty- 
five. Of these messengers, four hundred 
departed, leaving a reserve of eight hun- 
dred, who continued on the avalanza. The 
spirits who were arrayed in gaudy attire, 
withdrew a little from the landing, fearing 
the light. The ship drew near the walls 
and was made fast, and two million mar- 
shals of Mouru came forward as an escort 
to conduct all who chose over the ascend- 
ing stairs. And so great was the faith of 



Hapacha's hosts, that over fifty million of 
them passed within the sea of fire, singing: 
Glory be to Thee, O Jehovih. Creator of 
Worlds. Seeing this great faith in them, 
Athrava commanded red and blue lights, 
to favor them, and there was not one of 
the whole number that turned from the 
light. And now many of them beheld for 
the first time the glory and power of Gods 
and Goddesses. Mouru was illuminated on 
every part. The structure of the temple, 
its extent and magnificent conception, with 
its hundred of thousands of mirrors and 
lenses, its transparent and opaque crystals, 
translucent and opaque circles and arches, 
hundreds of millions, which when viewed 
from any one place was unlike when viewed 
from another, as if each position were 
striving to outdo the other in beauty and 
perfection. So that a person could walk 
for a thousand years in the temple, and 
every moment see, as it were, a new place 
of surpassing grandeur. And so wonder- 
fully was it arranged that the faces of one 
thousand million people could be seen from 
any place where a person might stand, and 
all these people appeared to constitute a 
part of the building, being as jewel stones 
created by Jehovih for the ornamentation 
of the celestial abodes of His Sons and 
Daughters. 

Hoab, always quick to speak, said: O 
that angels and mortals would strive to 
make of themselves such jewels as these. 
Hapacha spake not, being overwhelmed 
with the beauty and magnificence of the 
scene. 

Yaton'te said: When thou art on the 
throne Fragapatti, I will leave for the king- 
dom of Yaton'te. Here then, I will take 
my leave. Fragapatti shook hands with 
him, saying: Jehovih be with thee. So 
Yaton'te remained where he was, but Hoab 
and Hapacha continued on with Fragapat- 
ti. All eyes were turned to Hapacha, 
whose persistence in faith in Jehovih had 
won the lower heavens to wisdom and 
love. And as they moved toward the 
throne, great Athrava rose up, smiling, 
holding out his hands to receive them. 
Next, and back of Athrava, were the five 
Goddesses, Ethro, of Uche and Rok; Guis- 
saya, of Hemitza, of the valley of M'boid, 
in etherea; Si'tissaya, of Woh'tabak, the 
one time home of Fuevitiv; Ctevi, of Nu, 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



179 



Porte'Auga; and Rinava, of the swamps 
of Tholiji, in South Suyarc of Roads, near 
Zuh'ta and Hitch'ow, in the south etherean 
vault of Obsod. 

And the Goddesses also rose up with 
extended hands; and now, because of the 
brilliancy of their presence, the throne be- 
came a scene of hallowed light, and threads 
thereof extended to all the Council mem- 
bers, and by these were radiated outward 
so that every person in the Temple of Je- 
hovih was connected with the throne, 
which made every spoken word plain to 
all. 

Athrava said: In Jehovih's name, wel- 
come, O Fragapatti. And to thy hosts, 
welcome also. The Goddesses repeated the 
same words, and they were echoed by the 
entire audience. Fragapatti said: In Thy 
name, O Jehovih, am I delivered to my 
loves. Be Thou with us, O Father, that 
we may glorify Thee. Receive ye, O my 
people, Hapacha, Son of Jehovih, who rose 
up and stood in the dark all night long, in 
faith in Jehovih. Behold, I have delivered 
him and his hosts in dawn. 

And now there appeared, rising like a 
new sun, Jehovih's Light beyond the 
throne, reddish tinged, emblem of the 
Western Light, in honor of Hapacha. 

Then spake Jehovih out of the light, 
saying: With My breath create I alive the 
Earth-born child; with My hand quicken I 
the newborn spirit; and with My Light il- 
lumine I the soul of My Faithist. Behold 
I dwell in the All Highest place, and in the 
lowest of created things; whoever findeth 
Me, I find also; whoever proclaimeth Me, 
I proclaim in return. Hapacha, My Son, 
Savior of men! Of My Light shalt thou 
be crowned. 

The Voice ceased, and now Fragapatti 
advanced to the midst of the throne, and 
took of the light and fashioned a crown, 
and placed it on Hapacha's head, saying: 
Crown of Thy crown, O Jehovih, crown I 
Thy Son . In Thy Light shall he be wise 
and powerful, with Love to all Thy created 
beings, henceforth, forever. 

The Goddesses then received them, and 
after due ceremonies they all took their 
seats, Fragapatti in the midst of the throne. 
Athrava resigned at once, during the stay 
of Fragapatti. The es'enaurs now chanted: 
Glory Be to Thee, O All Light; the Per- 



son of Every Kingdom, High and Low; 
Who Hath Brought Our Brothers and Sis- 
ters Home. 

By natural impulse, Hapacha's hosts, 
fifty million, rose up and responded, sing- 
ing: To Thee, O Jehovih, How Shall Our 
Souls Find Words? Thy Sons' and Daugh- 
ters' Love, How Can We Recompense? 
Make us Light and Clear, O Father! 
Spotless Before Them and Thee! 

But the anthems were long and sung 
with brilliancy, rejoicing and responding, 
millions to millions. When the music 
ceased, Fragapatti said: With the close of 
dawn of dan, these hosts shall be received 
as Brides and Bridegrooms of Jehovih, 
and ascend with us to the regions of Goo- 
matchala, in etherea. The apportioners 
will therefore divide them into groups in 
Haraiti; with etherean teachers to prepare 
them. That this may be accomplished, I 
proclaim one day's recreation, to assemble 
on the next day in order 

CHAPTER XXVII. 

When they were called to order, Fraga- 
patti said: For the cenvenience of My 
hosts, the light shall now be raised two de- 
grees, in which case it will be well to per- 
mit the hosts of Hapacha to retire to the 
fields of Hukaira, in Haraiti, where Ath- 
rava hath already a place and teachers for 
them. 

Accordingly the conductors now re- 
moved Hapacha's hosts, all except one 
million who resolved to endure the light. 
The es'enaurs chanted whilst these ar- 
rangements were being carried out, and 
when they were accomplished the music 
ceased. 

The chief marshal said: Swift messsen- 
gers, who are waiting without, salute Je- 
hovih's throne, and his God, and pray an 
audience. Fragapatti said: Whence come 
they? And what is the nature of their bus- 
iness? 

The marshal said: From the Aoasu'an 
fields of Howts. Their business is of the 
Osivi knots. 

Fragapatti said: On the sign of Emuts 
admit them, greeting from God in Jeho- 
vih's name. 

The marshal withdrew and returned 
with one thousand swift messengers of 



180 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



whom Adeline was Goddess. She advanc- 
ed to the left of the throne. 

Fragapatti said: Goddess Arieune, 
Greeting to Thee, in Jehovih's name! Pro- 
ceed thou. 

Arieune said: Greeting in love to thee, 
Fragapatti, and to all thy hosts. I hasten- 
ed hither from the fields of Howts, section 
twelve, on the one-time plateau and place 
of Hored, where are a thousand million in 
a knot. This I reported to the Lord of Jaf- 
feth, Ah'oan, whose forces are all employ- 
ed, and he sent me hither. 

Fragapatti said: It is well. Thou art 
dismissed. Hoab, canst thou untie the 
knot? Hoab said: I have faith to try. 
To which Fragapatti replied: Athrava will 
go with thee, but do thou the labor. 
Choose, therefore, thy hosts from my eth- 
ereans, and have a vessel built sufficiently 
large so that if thou findest it advisable to 
bring them away, thou canst do so. Re- 
tire, then, with the captain of the files, and 
make thy selections, and in the meantime 
give commands for the vessel to be built 
and put in readiness. 

Hoab said: With Jehovih's help I will 
deliver them. And he saluted, and with 
the captain of the files he withdrew and 
made his selections, choosing five million 
in all, of whom half were physicians and 
nurses. In the meantime he had the proper 
workmen build a vessel of sufficient capac- 
ity and strength, as advised by Fragapatti; 
and in seven days' time everything was 
completed, and Hoab commanded his 
hosts to enter the ship, and he and Athra- 
va embarked; and were conducted by the 
Goddess Arieune, in her arrow ship, to the 
place of the knot. 

CHAPTER XXVIII. 

The Goddess Arieune gauged the speed 
of her arrow ship to suit that of Hoab's 
vessel; so onward together they sped in a 
direct line, propelled as a rocket by con- 
stant emissions from the stern, the mater- 
ial being manufactured by the crew and 
commanders, who are skilled in wielding 
Jehovih's elements. As mortals find 
means to traverse the ocean and to raise a 
balloon, so do high-raised angels build 
and propel mightier vessels through the 
firmament. And when the ethereans, high 
raised in the most subtle spheres, send their 



ships coursing downward in the denser 
strata of a corporeal world, their ready 
workmen take in ballast, and turn the fans, 
and reverse the whirling screws to match 
the space and course of travel. And men 
learn this trade, having rank and grade ac- 
cording to their proficiency; many of them 
serving apprenticeships of thousands of 
years, becoming so skilled in wielding the 
elements, and in the knowledge of the de- 
grees of density, that thousands of millions 
of miles of roadways in heaven are as a 
well-learned book to them. And thus, con- 
versant with Jehovih's wide domains, they 
are eagerly sought after, especially in emer- 
gent cases, or on journeys of millions of 
miles; for so well they know the require- 
ments, the places of delight, the dangers of 
vortices and of eddies and whirlpools, that 
when a God saith: Take me hither, or 
yonder, they know the nearest way and the 
power required. For as Jehovih hath made 
icebergs on the corporeal ocean, danger- 
ous to corporeal ships; and heavy currents 
of wind; and currents in the ocean, so are 
there in etherea currents and densities 
which a well-skilled God can take advan- 
tage of, be is a slow trip of pleasure, or a 
swift one on urgent business to suffering 
angels or mortals. And be it God or God- 
dess, dispatched by a higher Council, to a 
distant place quickly, he or she must be al- 
ready acquainted with navigators sufficient 
to know whom to choose; and likewise, 
understand the matter well enough to help 
if required. For oft the navigators have 
not swift messengers to pilot them; and a 
short journey of fifty thousand miles may 
require as much skill as a million, and es- 
pecially in descending to a corporeal world. 

Hoab knew, and he managed well. Fol- 
lowing close on the arrow's trail till they 
neared the ruined plateau, and amidst the 
broken currents Arieune dropped along- 
side, perceiving Hoab's less wieldly vessel. 
and made fast. She said to Hoab: 

Behold, we are near the place. Then 
Haob asked: How foundest thou a knot 
in such a wasted country? Arieune answer- 
ed him: 

When Jehovih created woman, He gave 
to her two chief attributes, curiosity and 
solicitude for others. So, passing here, 
surveying the place where the first heavenly 
kingdom was, I remembered it had been 



CYCLE OF FBAGAPATTI 



181 



said that Aph left some island places where 
once a colony in heaven had been built, 
and I halted to examine it. A moan and 
terrible sound greeted me. I heard the 
Osivi knots, as I had oft heard others be- 
fore. We halted and made fast, and pres- 
ently went about searching led by the sad, 
sad noise, until we came to the great 
mound, the knot, a thousand million drujas 
bound in a heap; wailing, muffled, moan- 
ing, as if all the heap of them were in the 
throes of death, but could not die. Being 
myself powerless to overcome such fearful 
odds, I made note of the bearing of the re- 
gions where I should find the nearest God; 
and so having measured the knot, I set 
sail as thou hast heard. 

Hoab said: Every day I behold Thy 
wisdom, O Jehovih! In a new light thy 
wondrous judgment riseth up before me. 
Who but Thee, O Father, had seen the 
fruitage of curiosity made perfect in Thy 
Daughters? From the little bud seen in 
mortal form to the scanning of Thy hea- 
vens. 

As thus Hoab discoursed, they arrived 
at a suitable halting place, where they 
made their vessels fast, and then hurried 
to the knot. Without loss of time, Hoab 
walled the knot around with low fire, leav- 
ing a gateway to the east, where he placed 
a thousand sentinels. One million of this 
army he stationed outside the walls, and 
these were divided into groups of selectors, 
guardsmen, physicians, nurses and bearers, 
and manufacturers of fire and water. The 
selectors were provided with rods of fire 
and water, and blinds. 

Then Hoab stationed another millon be- 
twixt the knot and the gateway, and these 
were stationed in four rows, each two rows 
facing, and but two paces apart; so that 
betwixt the rows it was like a walled alley- 
way. And the other three million Hoab 
caused to surround the knot on every 
side. Each and every one of these was 
provided with a fire lamp, which they held 
in the right hand. And when all things 
were thus in readiness, Hoab commanded 
the attack to begin. And at once the at- 
tackers thrust their fire lamps in the face 
of the druj nearest by, and seizing them 
with the other hand pulled them away. So 
great is the fear of the drujas that at times 
they will not relinquish their grip at sight 



of the lamp, but often require to be nearly 
burned and stifled with the light before 
they release their hold. 

A knot is a mass of millions and mill- 
ions of spirits who becoming panic-strick- 
en, fall upon their chief, or leader, who 
becomes powerless in their grip, and is 
quickly rolled up on the midst of the knot. 

And when the deliverers thus begin at 
the exterior of the knot, peeling off the 
crazed and moaning spirits, they hurl them 
backward, where they are caught by the 
seconds, who in turn hurl them into the 
alley ways, where they are again thrust for- 
ward till past the gate in the wall of fire. 
From the time, therefore, that the druj 
receiveth the thrust of the first lamp in his 
face, he is not allowed to linger, but is 
whirled suddenly from one to another so 
quickly he cannot fasten to any person or 
thing. For were they to fasten on even the 
deliverers, first one and then another, soon 
a second knot would result. Thus to untie 
a knot of a thousand million crazed angels 
is not only a dangerous proceeding, but a 
feat of unusual grandeur to be undertaken 
by only five million ethereans. 

To provide against accident, Hoab ap- 
pointed Athrava to take charge of the de- 
livered after they were beyond the walls; 
for Athrava had received thousands of 
years' practice in such matters. So he di- 
vided and arranged the drujas into groups, 
placing guards with fire rods over them; 
and in some cases taking the groups away 
and walling them around with fire also. 

Now by the time five hundred million 
of the knot were released, some of the ex- 
ternal delivered groups began to tie them- 
selves in knots. And when Athrava saw 
this, he said to Hoab: Behold, they are 
becoming too numerous for my hosts. I 
have not sufficient guardsmen. Hoab said: 
Then I will cease a while, and instead of 
delivering, come and assist thee. Thus 
Hoab labored with those without, untying 
the small knots and arranging them in 
safer ways, placing a greater number of 
guards over them. This done, the es'- 
enaurs struck up lively music, starting 
dancings and marchings; for such is the 
routine of the restoring process practiced 
by Gods. Then come the nurses with 
cheerful words, with mirth and gayety, fol- 
lowing one diversion with another in rapid 



182 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



succession. To the raving maniacs, and to 
the stupid, and to the hopeless blind, the 
physicians now turned their attention. 

Again Hoab and his army fell upon the 
knot, pulling the external ones away and 
hurling them out, but not so rapidly, hav- 
ing fewer deliverers, for he had bequeath- 
ed an extra million to Athrava, outside the 
walls. And after another three hundred 
million were delivered, Hoab ceased for a 
time, and joined with Athrava to assist 
and divide and group them in the same way 
as before. And he bequeathed another 
million of his army to Athrava, and then 
again resumed the attack on the knot, and 
thus continued till he reached the core of 
the knot, having untied the whole thou- 
sand million drujas, gradually lessening his 
own army and enlarging that of Athrava. 

And when Hoab came to the core of the 
knot, behold he found Oibe, the false God, 
who falsely styled himself Thor, the ether- 
ean. And in the midst of the knot they 
had jewels of rare value, and stolen crowns 
and stolen symbols, and rods, holy water, 
urns, incense, and a broken wheel of Je- 
hovih, a broken triangle of the Gods; and 
in fact a sufficiency of things whereof one 
might write a book in the description. Suf- 
fice it to say, a false God and his kingdom 
had collapsed and he fell, crushed in the 
glory of his throne. And there were with 
him seven false Lords, who were also 
crushed in the terrible fall. 

Oibe and his Lords, from their confine- 
ment in the knot, were also crazed and wild 
with fear, screaming and crying with all 
their strength, even as were all the others, 
like drunkards long debauched, delirious 
and fearful of imaginary horrors. Or as 
one's hand, long compressed, becometh 
numb, and when pressure is taken away it 
still seemeth to be bound. So would not 
Oibe and his Lords believe they were free, 
but still cried and called for help. 

At this time, there came from Ah'oan, 
God of Jafteth, a messenger whose name 
was Turbe, with forty companions and five 
hundred apprentices. Turbe was an atmos- 
pherean, three hundred years of age, 
Turbe said: Greeting from Ah'oan in Je- 
hovih's name. To whom shall I speak; to 
whose honor credit this deliverance, save 
Jehovih's? 



Athrava said: To Hoab, a Zeredho'an 
disciple of Fragapatti, who is sojourning in 
Mouru, capital of Haraiti. And Athrava 
further asked Turbe his name, whence he 
came, and especially if he knew about this 
knot before, and the history of its cause? 
To which Turbe replied: 

From Ah'oan this I have learned, that 
some four hundred years ago, one of the 
sub-Gods named Oibe, because of his mod- 
esty and birdlike fleetness, was promoted 
by Samati, who is now commissioned mas- 
ter of the I'huans by Fragapatti. This, 
whom Hoab hath delivered is Oibe, the 
one-time sub-God of honorable purposes. 
His kingdom prospered for two hundred 
years, and his name and fame spread 
throughout all these heavens, and even 
down to mortals, who were inspired by his 
admiring spirits to make images of birds 
and dedicate them to Oibe. He became 
vain of the flattery, and losing faith in Je- 
hovih finally came out in unbelief, saying 
there was no All Highest, save as each and 
every God chose to exalt himself. Within 
his dominions, which numbered nearly a 
thousand million angels, were a score or 
more of Lords under him; to the wisest of 
whom he began to preach his views, look- 
ing to personal laudation and glory. In 
the course of a score of years, the matter 
culminated in Oibe and a few of his favored 
Lords proclaiming a new kingdom, styled, 
The All Highest Kingdom in The All 
Highest Heaven. And the title he assum- 
ed was, Thor, the Only Begotten Son of 
All Light. Thor, the All Light Personated. 
Thor the Personal Son of Mi, the Virgin 
Universe. 

Thus Oibe turned away from the true 
God and his kingdoms; and he immediate- 
ly walled his kingdom around with a stand- 
ing army; promoting seven of his most 
efficient devotees as Lords; and others as 
generals and captains. And at once he sat 
about enlarging and enriching his throne 
and his capital, which he called Osivi, and 
known as Howts on the official charts. 

In the course of one hundred years his 
kingdom became a place of two thousand 
million souls. His chief city, Osivi, was 
the richest and most gaudy city that had 
ever been in these heavens. The streets 
were paved with precious stones. The pal- 
aces for himself, his Lords, and his mar- 



CYCLE OF FRAQAPATTI 



183 



shals and generals, were built of the most 
costly jewels with pillars, arches and cham- 
bers of the most elaborate workmanship, 
and of the most costly material. 

Oibe became a tyrant, and with the ex- 
ception of his Lords and a few favored 
friends, none were permitted to approach 
his throne but by crawling on their bellies, 
and even under guard. Nor were they per- 
mitted to raise their eyes upon him except 
at a very great distance. And all his sub- 
jects were his slaves in fact, though under 
progressive discipline. These slaves were 
sent far away into atmospherea, or else 
down to the earth, to gather tribute for the 
glory of Oibe and his favorites; nor did 
these slaves mistrust but they were working 
for Jehovih, believing that he lived in the 
capital Osivi. At first Oibe educated and 
otherwise improved his slaves; but finding 
them less obedient in consequence of 
knowledge, he finally destroyed all the 
heavenly schools and colleges, and resolv- 
ed to keep his subjects forever ignorant. 
Consequently the wiser of his subjects de- 
serted him, and his angels were without 
knowledge, knowing nothing except that 
they had to work for Thor forever. In 
addition to ignorance, Oibe kept his sub- 
jects forever in fear of himself, forever 
threatening them with terrible punish- 
ments if they ceased to pray to him as the 
only Personified All Light. And in the 
course of time, his people forgot all aspira- 
tion for any other heaven or any other God. 
Many of them were deputized to dwell 
with mortals as guardian spirits, persuad- 
ing mortals to worship Thor and Ibis, 
threatening them with being turned into 
serpents and toads after death if they obey- 
ed not these injunctions. 

Thus ruled Thor the false, for four hun- 
dred years in Osivi. Neither was it possi- 
ble for Samati to send an army of sufficient 
strength to overcome such a kingdom. But 
a change finally came. A light descended 
from the higher heavens six generations 
ago; and according to the legends of old, 
it was ominous that the Gods of higher 
worlds would intercede. 

So Samati taking advantage of this, sent 
emissaries to Oibe, and solicited him to 
give over his evil ways and re-establish Je- 
hovih. Thor, the false, sent back word 
saying: When I was a child I was taught 



to fear Jehovih, and I feared Him. After 
long experience I have discovered there is 
nothing to fear in all the worlds. If there 
be any Jehovih, He is without form or per- 
son or sense. I fear Him not. I revere 
Him not. My heaven is good enough for 
me and my Lords. As for my subjects, let 
no man, nor God, nor Lord, meddle with 
them. 

Samati, who was the lawful God of all 
these heavens, and of Earth, thus perceived 
no way to reach Thor's slaves, for the slaves 
were too ignorant to desire anything save 
Thor. Nevertheless, he sent word the sec- 
ond time to Oibe, saying: Thy kingdom 
is even now destitute of intelligent people 
sufficient to protect thee in case of panic. 
If a comet, or any sudden light, or the 
passage of an avalanza through thy domin- 
ions should take place, thou wouldst surely 
find thyself overthrown in a knot. Thy 
subjects look upon thee as the All High- 
est; they will surely rush upon thee. 

Oibe sent the messengers back with an 
insulting answer. Thus the matter stood 
until after Ah'oan's appointment as God of 
Jaffeth and her heavens, which at once cut 
off Oibe's emissaries to mortals, and con- 
fined him within his own kingdom. At 
this time Samati was commissioned to es- 
tablish the worship of Jehovih amongst 
mortals, and he communicated Oibe's po- 
sition to Ah'oan. Ah'oan sent embassa- 
dors to Thor, the false, beseeching him in 
the same manner to give up his personali- 
ty, and return with his kingdom to Jeho- 
vih, promising him the best of assistance: 
To this, Thor the false replied, by the mes- 
sengers, saying: 

Ah'oan, thou usurper! If thou desirest 
favors of me, thou shalt approach me as all 
Gods and angels do, by crawling on thy 
belly before me. Encroach thou not on 
My Most High Kingdom, or I will banish 
thee back to thy miscreant regions with 
stripes and curses. 

Ah'oan was surprised, but perceived 
that till trouble came upon Oibe nothing 
could be done for him. So, the time came; 
Jehovih suffered him to go the full period 
of self glory. Thus Oibe fell. 

Turbe ceased, and Athrava said: O Je- 
hovih, when will man cease to fall? Thou 
hast proclaimed thyself in all places, high 
and low. Thy Gods and Lords and count- 



184 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



less angels have proclaimed Thee! Thou 
alone art the password to all the universe. 
Thy name hath a thousand exalted devices 
to win the souls of mortals and angels 
from darkness to light, and yet they turn 
away from Thee, Thou Creator of suns and 
stars and countless etherean worlds. And 
they set up themselves as an object of wor- 
ship. O the smallness of Gods and men. 
^0 the vanity of Thy little children. 

Thou hast said to mortals: Go not into 
the marshes, for there is fever; build not 
large cities, for there is sin; go not after 
lust for there is death. But they go in 
headlong and they are buried and dead. 
To those who are risen in heaven Thou 
hast said: Remember the lessons of earth, 
lest ye fall! Remember the fate of self- 
-conceit, lest ye be scourged. Remember 
the king and queen, how they become 
bound in heaven, lest ye also become 
bound. But they will not heed. Vain self 
riseth up in the soul; they behold no other 
God but themselves in whom they acknowl- 
edge wisdom. 

CHAPTER XXIX. 

Hoab heard the story of Turbe, and he 
said unto him: Since I have heard these 
things, I am resolved to bind Thor, the 
false, and his Lords and send them with 
thee to Ah'oan. Because Thor insulted 
Ah'oan, it would be a just judgment for 
Ah'oan to restore him. My physicians 
shall bind them, that they do no harm in 
their madness, and I will have them put 
aboard. 

And when this had been accomplished 
and they were ready to start, Hoab said to 
Turbe: Give greeting to Ah'oan in the 
name of Jehovih; and say to him that ac- 
cording to the laws of these heavens, a 
false God or Lord, who hath led the people 
away from Jehovih, shall after his deliver- 
ance, be made to teach the truth to his 
deceived subjects. Neither shall he be 
promoted to any other labor until the low- 
est of his subjects have been raised up. 
Accordingly, after Ah'oan's companions 
have restored Oibe and his Lords to sound- 
ness of mind, he and his Lords shall be 
again bequeathed with their own king- 
doms. In the meantime I will in this same 
plateau begin the establishment of a new 



kingdom in Jehovih's name with these 
crazed drujas. 

Turbe and his companions then re-en- 
tered their boat and set sail at once for 
Ah'oan's kingdom; Thor, the false, and his 
Lords, wailing and crying with fear, know- 
ing nothing else. 

Hoab now turned his attention to the 
hosts of panic-stricken drujas, who were 
constantly forming themselves in knots, 
and yet being as rapidly severed by the 
ethereans. To Athrava, he said: How 
more helpless is a deranged spirit than a 
mortal. At one time they fly from us; at 
another they run together, or upon us, like 
molten gum, and we cannot keep them off. 

Athrava said: Behold the wisdom of 
the Father in creating man in a corporeal 
body. What a glorious anchorage for a 
young, a weak or a deranged spirit. What 
a home a corporeal body is. How better 
we could manage these crazed ones were 
they thus provided. 

Hoab said: Which showeth us the way 
we must proceed to restore them. Since 
we cannot create corporeal bodies for 
them, the Father hath given us power to 
provide for them subjectively. 

Thus Hoab and Athrava proceded. First 
walling the place around with fire, so none 
of the drujas could escape, and then divid- 
ing them into thousands of groups, making 
subjective bodies for them, to which they 
bound themselves willingly, and which pre- 
vented them from fastening to one another. 
And whilst they were thus provided tem- 
porarily by their teachers, and governors 
and nurses, many of them imagined them- 
selves to be kings and queens and high 
priests, and even Lords and Gods. For 
more than a hundred days, Hoab and Ath- 
rava labored in the above manner; and the 
phyisicians and nurses and es'enaurs la- 
bored to restore the minds of the people; 
and had them well nigh all restored and 
disciplined when messengers came from 
Fragapatti, saying: 

Behold the dawn of dan is passing swift- 
ly, and I must yet visit the Lord Gods in 
the different heavens of Earth. It is there- 
fore my decree that Athrava return to 
Mouru and resume the throne; and that 
Hoab return also, and join me as my stu- 
dent and companion on my journeys. Send 
these, my commandments, to Ah'oan, 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



185 



greeting, in my name, and he will provide 
a Lord to rule over the delivered knot of 
Osivi. 

So Hoab and Athrava were relieved by 
a Lord appointed by Ah'oan, and whose 
name was Su'kah'witchow, an atmospher- 
ean pupil of Samati, of four hundred years, 
and of great resolution and proficiency. So 
Hoab provided Su'kah'witchow with a 
throne, and left four million teachers, 
nurses and physicians with him. And with 
the other million Hoab and Athrava de- 
parted for Mouru, in Haraiti. 

Fragapatti, having heard of the success 
of Hoab in delivering the knot, determined 
to honor him on his reception at Mouru. 
Accordingly, Fragapatti sent heralds out 
into Haraiti, proclaiming a day of recrea- 
tion, and inviting as may as chose to come 
to Mouru to receive Hoab. The proper 
officers provided musicians, flags, banners 
and fireworks, suitable for the enjoyment of 
hundreds of millions of the inhabitants of 
Haraita. Others provided one thousand 
reception boats to go and meet Hoab's 
ships. 

Fragapatti afterward said in regard to 
this matter: Hoab was to be the next God 
of Earth, and whatsoever would win the 
love, admiration and awe of his unlearned 
subjects would contribute to their resurrec- 
tion. 

CHAPTER XXX. 

So for one day there was great rejoicing 
in Mouru; and when it was ended, and the 
people retired to their respective places, 
Fragapatti said to Athrava: Come thou and 
resume Jehovih's throne. As for myself, I 
will go now and establish another habita- 
tion in Zeredho, and visit all the Lord 
Gods of Earth. And when I have complet- 
ed these labors, it will be near the end of 
the dawn of dan. See to it, therefore, that 
all who wish to prepare for the third resur- 
rection be duly notified. 

And now, when Fragapatti had risen up 
from the throne, swift messengers were 
announced from Sethantes, the inhabiter of 
Earth. The marshals were commanded to 
admit them. Presently the swift messen- 
gers came in, greeting in Jehovih's name. 
They said: Sethantes sends love to Fraga- 
patti. In this resurrection of dawn Seth- 
antes will visit Mouru. And he will also 



bring with him Onesyi, deliverer of the 
Brides and Bridegrooms of the first har- 
vest of Earth. 

When the message had been delivered, 
there was great rejoicing in the capital. 
Fragapatti thanked the messengers in Je- 
hovih's name, and they withdrew. Pres- 
ently, Fragapatti, Hoab and Hapacha, de- 
parted out of the capital, and when they 
reached the avalanza, the marshals had the 
accompanying hosts assembled, ten mill- 
ion, and they entered the ship amidst music 
and rejoicings. They started direct to the 
kingdom of Yima, Lord God of Shem and 
her heavens. Yima had been notified of 
their coming, and had had a piedmazr made 
in order to go and meet them. The pied- 
mazr was sufficient to carry ten thousand 
musicians, thirty thousand rowers, and two 
hundred thousand travelers; and such were 
the numbers who embarked on her to meet 
Fragapatti. 

Three years had now elapsed since 
Yima set out to establish Jehovih's king- 
dom in the heavens of Shem, and except 
through messengers little was known in 
Mouru of Yima's labors. Fragapatti had 
said of him: Yima liveth with the Voice; 
he canot err. 

In the seventh diaphragm of the east 
Apie, the vessels met, and Fragapatti open- 
ed the lower division of the avalanza, and 
took in Yima's boat and crew and passen- 
gers, amidst music and rejoicings. And, 
after due ceremonies, Fragapatti caused the 
avalanza to proceed, and conducted by 
Leaps, one of Yima's messengers, and they 
reached Astoreth, the capital of Yima's 
kingdom in atmospherea, first grade, and 
resting upon the earth. 

CHAPTER XXXI. 

After Yima's appointment by Fragapat- 
ti, he had come to these regions; and find- 
ing great darkness upon both spirits and 
mortals, he besought Jehovih in regard to 
the cause and cure thereof. 

The Voice of Jehovih came to Yima, 
saying: Whether spirits or mortals, they 
seek rather to obey their own self desires 
than My commandments. Behold, I sent 
them Apollo, and he gave them intercourse 
betwixt the two worlds, angels and mor- 
tals. And for a season they held up their 
heads and remembersd Me and My king- 



186 



CYCLE OF FEAGAPATTI 



doms. But presently they turned away 
from Me, and built to their own glory. I 
had shown them that by industry and 
perseverance they could attain to knowl- 
edge and power. But because mortals dis- 
covered that prophecy could come from 
the spirits of the dead, they ceased to per- 
fect themselves, and grew up in idleness. 
The angels loved not to labor for achieve- 
ments, being contented with the lowest. 
And they likewise fell in darkness, forget- 
tin Me and My higher places above. 

I called out to My Son, Osire, saying: 
Go thou down to Earth and her heavens, 
and build them up in My name. Wall 
them apart that there can be no promiscu- 
ous communion betwixt the two worlds. 

And Osire came and fulfilled My com- 
mandments; and the spirits that infested 
mortals, he drove away, and colonized 
them, cutting them off from the earth. 
And for a season, mortals prospered under 
My dominion, and they sought to improve 
the talents I created withal. But again 
they confounded My judgments and per- 
verted My laws. Every man on the earth 
hath a philosophy of his own; every spirit 
in these heavens hath a philosophy of his 
own. And there is no uniformity between 
any of them. Hear Me, then, My Son; 
thou shalt not teach as Osire did, nor yet 
as Apollo, but pursue a mean betwixt the 
two. Thou shalt select them permitting cer- 
tain spirits to return to mortals, and per- 
mitting certain mortals to attain su'is and 
sar'gis, and to see and commune with spir- 
its, making the process of communication 
a secret amongst mortals, and thus shut out 
the drujas of heaven. Behold, My Son, 
Samati, will come this way; labor thou with 
him and Zarathustra. Into God's hands 
have I given My decrees; he shall build on 
the earth. Build thou in heaven. As he 
buildeth for mortals, build thou for the 
spirits; and keep Thou open the doorway 
to My holy places in the heavens above. 

Jehovih's Voice also instructed Yima, 
saying: 

Go thou from place to place in these 
heavens and prove thy power, for the fool 
saith: What canst thou do that I cannot? 
When he sees the power that comes from 
My hand, he openeth his ears and eyes. 

Mortals have said: It is good to be 
good, but it is not practicable. They have 



said: It is wise to be wise, but wisdom 
runneth in a thousand roadways; every man 
for himself. The angels of these regions 
have said: It is good for us to unite into 
kingdoms; to have Gods and Lords; but 
who can unite us? Shall we sell our liberty 
to one person? And they will not unite; 
they dwell in inharmony. The profit of the 
one is the injury of others; they are barren 
of united good. One kingdom may have 
many good men and many good women, 
but be no good as a kingdom. I measure 
not the individuals, but the entire house- 
hold. I judge the virtue of a kingdom by 
the harvest it delivers unto me. When a 
kingdom cannot retain its own members, it 
is falling away from Me. The uprightness 
of its few is as nothing in My sight. The 
secret of the power of a kingdom lieth in 
its capacity to obey My commandments. 

CHAPTER XXXII. 

For a hundred days, Yima went through 
the lower heavens, displaying the mira- 
cles of the upper heavens; and his hosts 
who traveled with him enlisted pupils, and 
collected the spirits of young children. 
And in a hundred days he had many mill- 
ions of spirits, mostly helpless wanderers. 
With these he repaireth to Astoreth, and 
made ready to found his kingdom. 

Jehovih spake to him, saying: Fear not, 
My Son, because of the helplessness of thy 
subjects. He who would start a new king- 
dom is wise in choosing those who have no 
hobbies. Whosoever goeth forth in My 
name, I will be with him. 

Yima inquired of Jehovih who should 
be appointed Assistant God, and the Voice 
answered: Thulae. So Yima anointed 
Thulae; and he made Habal chief marshal 
of the capital. 

Again the Voice of Jehovih came to 
Yima, saying: Thou shalt appoint unto 
Shem one hundred Lords, and they shall 
have dominion over mortals. I will estab- 
lish temples to my Lords and Gods through 
My Son, Zarathustra, and thou shalt so 
provide thy heavenly kingdom, that Thy 
Lords shall inhabit the temples, commun- 
ing with the rab'bahs, who shall be called 
God-irs; but the communion betwixt spirits 
and mortals shall be known only to God-irs 
and priests. But mortals shall be left to 
believe that these fathers have attained to 



CYCLE OF FRACAPATTI 



187 



spirit communion by great purity and wis- 
dom. Likewise, when drujas manifest to 
mortals, it shall not be countenanced but as 
a mark of evil, raised up against truth. 
And when thou hast established thy king- 
dom, thou shalt cut off the supplies of the 
drujas, so they will become borrowers from 
thy people. In this manner, they will in 
time consent to labor. 

Yima then appointed one hundred 
Lords, who became the roots of the tree of 
heaven. The Aoasuan Lords were: 

Ithwa, Yaztas, Micros, Jube, Zarust, 
Horn, Paoris, Vadeve, Niasha, Cope, 
Drhon. 

The Thestasias Lords were: Kashvre, 
Tusht, Yain, Amesh and Amesha; Armait, 
Wai'iv, Vahois, Vstavia and Comek. 

The general Lords were called Ashem, 
meaning with voice; that is to say, Ashem- 
vohu, Lords in chief, given for the king- 
doms of the Sun, in the land of Shem. 
They were: Shnaota, Zathias, Mutu, Aoirio, 
Kaeshas, Cter'ay, Shakya, Thraetem, Gah- 
naetobirischae, Habarshya, Pai-tis'gomya, 
Huiyus, Hakdodt, Anerana, Tibalath, Ke- 
var, Darunasya, Hors, Maidoyes-hemo, 
Runnas, Gayomoratischi, Ba'ahraya, Zar- 
tushta, Kai'boryawich'wich'toe'benyas and 
Cpitama. And Yima made these twenty- 
five Lords controllers of the Voice, with 
mortals, to take the place of Samati after 
the death and ascension of Zarathustra, for 
which reason they were called the Ashem- 
vohu. 

The Lords of farmers and herdsmen 
were: Gaomah, Hoshag, Tamur, Jamshed, 
Freden, Minochihr-bani and Hus. 

The Lords of seafaring men were : Thae- 
tas, Mirh-jan, Nyas, Khaftras, Thivia, 
Agreft, Ardus'lor, Tanafar, Avoitas, Mar- 
ganesiachta, Hoakastanya and Vartuan. 

The Lordesses of births and mothers, 
the Hotche'che, were: Kaviti, Way'huts, 
Howd, Anechorhaite, Juveas, Wisseta, Ho- 
paeny, Ctnevirchow, Aivipohu, Cadhan, 
Hucrova, Dion, Balkwoh and Gamosyi. 

The Lords of buildings were: Iratha- 
ma, Haira'thracna, Heidas, Hutu, Coy'- 
gaga, Haira'-Wahti, Vivi'seeon, Muta'- 
hagga, Kaoyas, Macyo, Aims, Hodo, Trus- 
ivi, Verecopagga and Suyi. 

The Lords of time keeping who had 
dominion of the change of watch were: Co- 
purasastras, Vaitimohu and Howitchwak. 



Yima sent his Lords to their several 
places, and every Lord took with him a 
thousand attendant angels. Yima said to 
them before they departed: Stir the people 
up in your several places; and wherever ye 
find kings or queens or generals surround- 
ed by spirits that urge them on in their 
affairs, remove those spirits, leaving the 
mortals destitute of inspiration, and their 
kingdoms and armies will become disor- 
ganized and helpless. And whenever Sa- 
mati and Zarathustra come to a city, go ye 
also, laboring with them. And when Zara- 
thustra holdeth up his hands and saith: O 
Father, Light of Thy Light; gather ye of 
the substance round about, and shield him 
with a wall of fire. And if Zarathustra say: 
O Father, Ormazd, give Thy children food, 
then shall ye supply them fish and fruit. 
And if a king or captain raise a hand 
against Zarathustra, gather ye about him 
and shield him. And if a man draw a sword 
against Zarathustra, catch ye the blade 
and break it to pieces. 

Jehovih spake to Yima, saying: The 
time will come when the present mortal 
kingdoms shall fall. But the followers of 
Zarathustra, who will succeed them under 
Zarathustra, must be protected, as Zara- 
thustra is protected during dawn. For 
which reason thy Lords shall raise up oth- 
er Lords to take their places after the as- 
cent of this dawn. And the All Light and 
All Truth shall come to mortals through 
the priests who shall succeed Zarathustra. 
But as for kings of great cities, who will 
not accept My Light, they shall go down 
in darkness, and their kingdoms shall fall. 
Yima having established his Lords, now 
gave his attention to the heavenly king- 
doms of hada. 

CHAPTER XXXIII. 

Jehovih said to Yima: Thou shalt sep- 
arate the spirits who have some light from 
those wholly in darkness. Build thou, 
therefore, a throne and a plateau sufficient 
for three thousand million souls; and be- 
cause there are more females than males, 
thou shalt call the place of thy throne As- 
toreth. And when thou hast provided a 
house for thy Council, thou shalt send 
forth selectors, who shall bring unto thee 
as many as choose to come; and these 
shall be the foundation of thy kingdom. 



188 



CYCLE OF FBAGAPATTI 



Yima proceeded as commanded by the 
Father, and presently he had congregated 
around about Astoreth a sufficient number 
to establish places of amusement, places 
of worship and places of learning. Again, 
the Voice came to Yima, saying: 

Because thy kingdom is attractive, thou 
art flooded with idlers, who are of no 
profit to any one. To keep them away 
thou shalt wall thy kingdom around with 
pillars of fire. I created man so he will 
seek aught that is hidden, and if thou 
makest thy labors seclusive they will seek 
them. And when they come to thee thou 
shalt make a bargain with them for right- 
eous behavior erst thou feedest them. 
And when thou hast thus gathered in all 
who come in this way thou wilt have only 
half the present number. But those who 
are left will be without judgment, and thou 
shalt take them and bestow them in colo- 
nies and rank them. The lowest of all 
shall be the first rank; those who come 
after the pillars of fire are built shall be 
the second rank; and those who come 
with the selectors shall be called the third 
rank. 

And thy ashars shall drive all spirits 
away from mortals except such as are ap- 
pointed by thee or Thy Lords. For above 
all things, thou shalt seek to become con- 
troller over mortals, to the end that they 
become Faithists in Me. 

Yima then divided the spirits of heaven 
according to the commandment of the Cre- 
ator. After that he took possession of the 
wandering spirits of darkness, whether 
they were on Earth or in heaven, and he 
had them taken into places prepared for 
them. And he provided them with physi- 
cians, nurses and teachers, and they were 
made to understand that they were dead as 
to their earth bodies, and that they must 
give up the Earth. After this, Yima estab- 
lished places of learning in heaven, and 
places of labor, teaching the angels to 
clothe and feed themselves by their own 
industry. 

Again the Voice of Jehovih came to 
Yima, saying: Behold, My Son, the lower 
heaven hath reached Spe'oke. It is, there- 
fore, the time in which angels of the first 
grade be taught to build heavenly man- 
sions. 



Yima commanded the teachers and the 
superintendents of factories to prohibit the 
spirits from returning to mortals, save by 
permission. Yima said: It is wiser to in- 
spire spirits to rise in heaven after death 
than to have mortals drawing the angels 
down to the Earth. And My Lords on 
the Earth shall labor to this end also. 

So Yima taught new inspirations, both 
in heaven and on the Earth, which were 
that the spirits of the dead should build 
homes in heaven for their kindred, and 
that mortals should be taught that there 
were mansions in heaven for their souls 
after death. 

Yima said: Mortals becoming founded 
in this belief, will not so readily become 
wandering spirits after death. 

Whilst Yima was thus building in hea- 
ven, his Lords with their attendant spirits, 
were manifesting on the Earth, as had 
never been before since the foundation of 
this world. The temples of the stars were 
broken and thrown down by the spirits; 
the iron gates of the cities were taken off 
and carried into the forests; the palaces 
of kings and queens were unroofed, and 
the stones of the walls of the palaces were 
hurled from their places; even to the foun- 
dation, one stone was not left upon an- 
other; and these things were done by the 
spirits of heaven. Men, women and chil- 
dren were carried in the air by the angels, 
unharmed. The household goods were 
carried out, and the food of the tables 
were stripped off, even as mortals sat down 
to feast, and they were made to behold the 
food going away; with their own eyes 
mortals beheld these things. And they 
were made to see visions and to 
dream dreams of prophecy, and to have 
unusual powers. And in many places the 
spirits took on sar'gis, and walked about 
amongst mortals, being seen and felt; and 
they talked audibly, explaining to mor- 
tals the dominion of Yima and his Lords. 

In all things that Yima and his hosts 
did in heaven, his Lords worked in har- 
mony with him in their labor on the earth. 
Nevertheless, there were also vagrant spir- 
its on earth who belonged not to the 
kingdoms of heaven, but who made mani- 
festations on their own account; and they 
were given to lying, and to flattery, and to 
all manner of evil. Yima, little by little, 






CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTT 



189 



removed these evil spirits, and took them 
away to his colonies. 

Such, then, were Yima's labors when 
Fragapatti came to see him, and in honor 
of the occasion Yima had proclaimed rec- 
reation in Astoreth, and invited his Lords 
and captains and others to be present and 
take part in a season of enjoyment. 

CHAPTER XXXIV. 

On the arrival of the avalanza, the es'- 
enaurs of Astoreth, and the trumpeters 
of the colonies, sang a hymn in which the 
hosts aboard the vessels joined; and when 
they ceased, Thulae, assistant God of As- 
toreth, commanded the marshals to re- 
ceive the hosts, foremost of whom were 
Yima and his attendants, preceded by his 
traveling marshals and harpists, the latter 
being five thousand females led by We'- 
aytris, Goddess of Foes'ana, in etherea. 
After these ten thousand marshals of 
Fragapatti; then followed the swift mes- 
sengers, ten thousand; then Fragapatti 
with Yaton'te on the left and Hoab on the 
right; next in order came the musicians, 
and then the hosts in general. 

Yima ascended the throne at once, but 
Fragapatti and his hosts halted within the 
circuit of the altar. Beyond these were the 
guards of the lights, and outside of these 
were the Crescent Members of the Coun- 
cil. 

Yima said: In the name of Jehovih, I 
welcome thee, O Fragapatti, Chief of Ob- 
sod and Goomatchala, to the throne of 
God! In His wisdom and power I would 
have thee honor Astoreth by taking posses- 
sion in Jehovih's Name. 

Without replying, Fragapatti walked to 
the throne, saluting on the sign of high 
noon, which Yima answered in the setting 
sun. Yima stood aside, and when Fraga- 
patti ascended and stood in front of the 
throne, and in the center, he said: 

Into Thy possession, O Jehovih, re- 
ceive Thou this, Thy throne. Scarcely 
had Fragapatti spoken, when a Voice 
spake out of the Light saying: 

I made Earth wide, and filled it" with 
many things; and I gave man a corporeal 
body as a foundation that he might attain 
to the mastery of land and water, and as 
an abiding place for the assistance of his 
own soul. 



And I created atmospherea wider than 
Earth, and filled it with all manner of spir- 
itual things, and with the substance of the 
plateau; but I gave talents to the spirits of 
the dead with which to attain the mastery 
of all things in atmospherea. 

Whoever hath attained to these things 
is like a traveling sun. My Light is upon 
him. He prepareth the place, and My 
Voice cometh out of the Light thereof. 
Let My Sons and Daughters assemble. 
Where they are gathered together in My 
name, there am I also. My hand is upon 
them. My Power becometh one with 
them, and My Voice is possible in their 
midst. The Voice ceased. 

There were many present who had not 
previously heard the Voice of All Light, 
and because of the brilliancy they were 
blinded for a time, but recovered presently. 
Fragapatti then said: Hoab and Yaton'te, 
come ye and sit on the throne. And they 
did so; and in the same time the es'enaurs 
chanted, Hail to the Great Jehovih's 
Voice! His Sons and Daughters of Thou- 
sands of Years, are Returned Once More 
to Their Native Star, to Proclaim His 
Boundless Glory! 

Fragapatti said: In Jehovih's name, I 
proclaim a day of recreation, to resume 
labor at the sound of the trumpet in the 
east. And now the hosts mingled together, 
being buoyant with cheerfulness. And 
during the recreation, millions of ethereans 
went out into the plateau, visiting the 
places of learning, the factories and hospi- 
tals, and such places as belong to the lower 
heavens. 

On the next day at the call of the trum- 
pet, the people resumed their places, and 
when the music ceased, Fragapatti said: 
To thee, O Turbe, will I speak in the name 
of Jehovih. Thou art chosen by the Fa- 
ther to be assistant to Yima, Jehovih's 
Son, during this dawn, which is near its 
end, and after that thou shalt be Lord of 
these heavens and of the earth beneath for 
two hundred years. Because thou art wise 
and good Jehovih hath raised thee up, 
and great is thy glory. That thou mayest 
have strength and power, thou shalt in thy 
reign be called Yima also; for the time 
hath now come on Earth when mortals 
must learn to know the Lords and Gods 
who rule over them. 



190 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



During the next two hundred years will 
Earth be traveling in my Orian fields, Goo- 
matchala, and thou shalt be one with me in 
thy dominions. I will send to thee whatso- 
ever thou shalt require at my hand. Thou 
shalt therefore, keep thy place in order; 
and if thou needest a'ji, I will send it; if 
thou needest dan, I will send it. 

Be less concerned about the spirits in 
thy heavens than about mortals. Mortals 
must have sufficient dan, that they become 
not as beasts. And thou shalt make a re- 
port every eleven years, and my messen- 
gers shalt deliver it to me. And I will 
bring the elements of Goomatchala to bear 
upon thy labor profitably to the Father. 

Be thou also careful of too much leni- 
ency towards the spirits in the first resur- 
rection. Do not allow them to abide with 
mortals as teachers. Remember thou 
that mortals so love their dead kindred, 
that they would even deprive them of hea- 
venly education rather than deny them- 
selves of the pleasure of having them with 
them. Remember, also, that the spirits of 
the recent dead, who are entered as es'- 
yans so love their mortal kindred, that they 
would seek no higher heaven than to lin- 
ger on the earth. Which habit groweth 
upon them, so that in two or three gener- 
ations they become drujas, worthless to 
themselves, knowing little of earth and less 
of heaven. Be thou firm, therefore, in 
holding dominion over the es'yans, permit- 
ting them only to return to mortals under 
guard; and especially preventing them 
teaching other than the Ormazdian relig- 
ion. Then thou shalt be circumspect in 
Astoreth; remembering that it is the part 
of a God to provide his kingdom for the 
development of all the talents Jehovih hath 
created withal. For thou shalt so commin- 
gle labor and recreation, rest and learning, 
that each shall be of equal attraction. 

And whether thy commandments be for 
angels or for mortals, thou shalt, first and 
last, inspire them to faith in the Creator, 
and to follow the little star of light He hath 
given to every soul. Fragapatti ceased. 

Jehovih said: I have drawn My cres- 
cent and My altar. Whoever would hear 
My Voice, and hear My commandments, 
let them hearken to the forms and ceremo- 
nies that shape the soul of things. I am 
Order; I am Statliness without severity; I 



am Love without passion; I am Wisdom 
by suggestion, and without dictation; I am 
the most silent, but most powerful! I am 
the least seen, but always present when 
asked for. 

And now, since the people knew Frag- 
apatti was about to depart, the proper offi- 
cers arranged them so that all could pass 
in front of the throne to receive his bless- 
ing. The es'enaurs sang, and the proces- 
sion began. The lights of the Council were 
lowered and Fragapatti lowering his lights, 
came down and stood at the foot of the 
throne, covered with light drapery, which 
fell down to his feet. His hands he held 
upward, and waving them gently, he cre- 
ated drapery, prefume, and wreaths of 
flowers, and presented something to every 
person who passed, of whom there were 
more than a thousand million. And when 
the entire company had passed, Fragapatti 
sat down at the foot of the throne. Then 
came down Yima and took his hand, say- 
ing: Son of Jehovih, arise and go thy 
way, and Jehovih be with thee. So Fraga- 
patti rose up and departed, and Hoab, Ya- 
ton'te, Yima and Thulae with him; Yima 
leaving Hi'etra, Goddess of Me'loo, on the 
throne of Astoreth. So they entered the 
avalanza, and, with music and rejoicing, 
departed on their journey. And Yima con- 
ducted them throughout his dominions, 
both in heaven and on earth. Fragapatti 
dwelt for many days with Yima and Thu- 
lae; and after he had inspected their la- 
bors, and his recorders completed their re- 
cord, which was to be taken afterward to 
etherea, and deposited in the libraries of 
Fragapatti's dominions, Yima made his 
adieu and discharged his piedmazr, and de- 
parted for Astoreth, where he arrived in 
due season. But Fragapatti proceeded to 
the dominion of Ah'oan, Lord God of Jaf- 
feth and her heavens. 



CHAPTER XXXV. 

The Voice of the Creator was with Ah'- 
oan from the time of his landing in these 
lower heavens, and Ah'oan chose a Coun- 
cil of ten thousand from his hosts, and they 
sat in a Council for light; and the Voice 
directed them to build a capital and a 
throne, and call the plateau thereof Sang'- 
hi, which he did. And when it was com- 
pleted. Jehovih said to Ah'oan: Thou are 






CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



191 



My Lord and My God; the labor of thy 
hand shall endure on the earth and in hea- 
ven. I will dwell in whatsoever thou 
buildest. Make thyself an otevan, and go 
about and inspect all things in thy domin- 
ions, making a record of the same, which 
shall be deposited in the libraries of hea- 
ven, that angels and mortals may read 
them in after ages. Ah'oan, preparing, 
therefore, a place of record where the fol- 
lowing reports were deposited, built an 
otevan and traveled as commanded: 

These heavens are without order or or- 
ganization, save one kingdom, ruled over 
by Oibe, who falsely styleth himself Thor, 
the Only Begotten Son of Jehovih. The 
spirits of these heavens are mostly of the 
first resurrection; nevertheless, there are 
millions of them who believe they are not 
dead; and for the greater part, these are 
in chaos, still lingering on battlefields. In 
many places there are spirits who set up 
colonies, trying to provide themselves with 
homes and clothing, and to found heaven- 
ly abodes; but they are forever overrun 
and pillaged by drujas. 

With the mortals of Jaffeth, there are 
more than two thousand million angels, 
who know not how to get away from the 
earth. Of these, millions are fetals, making 
themselves as twin spirits to mortals. These 
spirits oft show themselves to mortals, and 
are believed to be doubles; but the spirits 
thus bound know not who they are, or 
whence they came; neither can they go 
away from the mortals to whom they are 
bound, and upon whom they live. As for 
the mortals of Jaffeth, they have cities of 
warriors, large and fierce. This region of 
Earth hath been in a'ji thirteen hundred 
years. 

Now when Ah'oan had thus discovered 
the condition of things, he returned to 
Sang'hi, and sat in Council, and Jehovih 
said to Ah'oan: Thou shalt appoint forty 
Lords to dwell on the earth; and to each 
Lord thou shalt give ten thousand assist- 
ants. And these Lords shall go down to 
the earth, and drive away the drujas, and 
take possession of the palaces of kings and 
queens, and of the temples of the stars; 
and then obtain control over the captains 
and generals of armies and blind their 
judgment and lead them astray, so that 
they will be powerless in war and destruc- 



tion. And when Samati, God of Zarathus- 
tra, travels in Jaffeth, thy Lords shall go 
with him with a sufficient number of an- 
gels to accomplish successfully all that 
Zarathustra professeth in My name. And 
thy Lords shall shield Zarathustra that no 
harm may come to him, and when enemies 
pursue him, thy Lords shall lead them as- 
tray or detain them and thus enable Zara- 
thustra to escape. For in this dawn My 
word shall be established on the earth to 
perish no more forever. And when thou 
hast thus established Thy Lords, giving 
them seventy colonies, thou shalt choose 
one from amongst the atmosphereans to be 
thy assistant God, who shall sit on the 
throne of Sang'hi during thy absence. And 
thou, and thy Holy Council, shall instruct 
thy assistant God in such manner that, 
when this dawn is ended, he shall become 
God in thy place, in My name, for the suc- 
ceeding two hundred years. Ah'oan ap- 
pointed the forty Lords, also an assistant 
as commanded, and these were the names 
of the Lords appointed: 

First, to have control over the worship 
of Jehovih on earth: The, Seung-bin, Go- 
magit, Ben-hong, She-ang, Bog-wi, Ah- 
tdong, Mwing-wi, Ah-tchook, Gonk-boy, 
Yuk-hoh, and Ah-wotch. 

Second, to have control over the palaces 
of kings and queens; and temples: Mina, 
Ah-chaung, Ahyot, Yowgong, Ohonto, 
Yongwe, and Ahma. 

Third, to have control over armies and 
kingdoms: Kear-ak-a, Geeouh-young, Bi, 
Gwan-gouk, Gee-ooh-young, Sam-sin, and 
Deth. 

Fourth, to have control over seafarers: 
Shopgee, Agan-ha, Rax and Lo. 

Fifth, to have control over mothers and 
births: Songheng, Someconc, Yahiti, Og- 
ne-kawas, and Hoah'ava. 

Sixth, to have control over marriages: 
First, the loo'is in general, and then: Ah- 
sam, Oanis, Yotsam, Iivitgom and Sap- 
sang. 

So Ah'oan sent his Lords with their 
assistants to their several places. And im- 
mediately afterwards he began the coloniza- 
tion of the angels in his heavens. And in 
one year he had raised up from Jaffeth 
more than a thousand million, and prepar- 
ed them with houses, hospitals, nurseries 
and factories, and all such things and 



192 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



places as are required in hada. In the sec- 
ond year he delivered another thousand 
million, more than half of whom had to be 
taken away from the earth by force. And 
these he also provided with teachers and 
overseers in like manner. So by the time 
Samati, God of Zarathustra, was prepared 
to travel in Jaffeth, visiting the kings and 
queens, the Lords of Ah'oan had so far 
banished the drujas that they were power- 
less to prevent the decrees of Jehovih. 
And when Zarathustra went into Jaffeth, 
the Lords of heaven were with him, and 
God of the worship of Jehovih, was with 
him, and the kings and queens of earth 
were powerless before him. And when 
Zarathustra went to a city, and, being in- 
spired by God, and said: Fall down ye 
walls! the angels of heaven rent the walls 
and they fell. And when Zarathustra said: 
Come forth, ye spirits of the dead, the 
Lords seized the drujas and held them up 
so that mortals could see them. And when 
Zarathustra said: O Ormazd, give thy 
children food! the angels, having previous- 
ly provided fish and fruit, let it fall upon the 
people. And thus did Ah'oan's domin- 
ions extend down to mortals ; thus became 
the word of Zarathustra Jehovih's word to 
mortals. 

And now Fragapatti, Chief over all, 
was coming to inspect the labors of the 
Lord God Ah'oan, and of Samati. Ah'oan 
had sent commands to his Lords, and to 
their assistants, to return to Sang'hi, and 
remain three days in recreation. And Ah'- 
oan commanded the captains of the colo- 
nies of heaven to come, and to bring with 
them as many of their pupils and subjects 
as possible. And when Fragapatti's avalan- 
za came to Sang'hi, there were assembled 
upward of two thousand million souls to 
witness the pageantry which Ah'oan had 
provided. 

CHAPTER XXXVI. 

Never in these heavens had there been 
such pageantry, and display as when Frag- 
apatti's avalanza entered Sang'hi; never so 
many musicians distributed to lend effect 
to a procession. Of this matter, Ah'oan 
said: By the pageantry and the music 
were my hosts of delivered durjas made to 
realize the glory of the upper heavens; by 



the glory of those three days recreation 
did I shut out the attractions of the lower 
world. My people were entranced with de- 
light; they were as if born into the king- 
dom of heaven. But the greatest glory' 
of all. was when Fragapatti honored the 
throne of Sang'hi. Jehovih sent a light 
like a sun upon the place; and the Voice 
spake from the light, so that all the multi- 
tude saw the Light and heard the words 
of Jehovih. And when Fragapatti rose up 
and stood in the midst of the throne, the 
light was so brilliant that millions of the 
people fell down before its glory. But the 
lights were then lowered to suit the newly- 
born in heaven, and the people of etherea 
mingled with the atmosphereans explain- 
ing and inspiring them with the magnitude 
and glory of the higher heavens. After the 
recreation, and when the multitude were in 
order Fragapatti spake from Jehovih's 
throne, first, to Es'pacia, assistant Goddess 
to Ah'oan, who was to succeed him after 
dawn. To her he said: Es'pacia, Daugh- 
ter of Jehovih, hear thou my words: I am 
one with Jehovih, and in His name salute 
thee. Behold, from this time forth, Jeho- 
vih's word shall dwell with mortals. It 
shall become anchored to the earth, never 
to depart; though it may be mutilated and 
perverted, yet His hand is over it, and it 
shall not fail. As a mother delighteth in 
the first spoken words of her child, so 
shall we all take delight that Jehovih's 
word hath become engrafted on the earth. 
Before this time, the word was with the 
I'hin tribe, but be locked up in secret. 
It could not be maintained on earth, 
except by locking it up in secret, with 
a people prepared as seed for deliv- 
ering all the races of men. But 
now the word is delivered openly to mor- 
tals. If the spirits of the lower heavens 
know not Jehovih's word, they can be 
hereafter taken down to the earth and 
there taught His commandments. Prior 
to this time, the angels of these lower 
heavens had no anchorage of light; they 
constantly fell in darkness and pulled mor- 
tals down with them. Behold, the word 
of Light is now engraved through Jeho- 
vih's Sons, Samati and Zarathustra; it can- 
not be lost. Thou hast been chosen first 
Goddess of these heavens, and Lordess of 
this division of Earth, to maintain the light 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



193 



of this dawn, to angels and mortals. To 
all the priests and cities of Zarathustra, 
thou shalt appoint the wisest of thy angel 
hosts, to protect them. But to such mor- 
tals as seek to destroy the Zarathustrians, 
thou shalt lend no assistance but leave 
them without protection; and maintain thy 
hosts in the temples of worship whilst they 
worship the Great Spirit. Throughout 
Jaffeth thou shalt inspire mortals to hang 
the wheel of the altar in country places, 
by the roadsides. And when mortals pass 
the places, they shall turn the wheel in re- 
membrance of the Creator. And thou shalt 
station at each one of these altars, angel 
sentinels, who shall have messengers to thy 
throne. And when a mortal passeth a 
wheel and turneth it, and is afflicted with 
sickness, thou shalt send angels to heal 
him. But if he turn not the wheel in re- 
membrance of Jehovih, and yet be afflicted 
with sickness, thy sentinels shall not send 
to thee, nor shalt thou send angels to heal 
him. Nevertheless, the wheel and the altar 
shall cause men to think; and if, after a 
disbeliever hath passed the wheel without 
turning it, and he be afflicted with sick- 
ness, and he repenteth, and when returning 
turneth the wheel, then shalt thou send to 
him in haste and heal him, that he may 
proclaim abroad what the Creator hath 
done for him. 

For as much as thou carriest out these 
decrees of All Light, so shalt thou remain 
united with my heavens above, which are 
united with those still above. And wherein 
thou shalt lack in power or wisdom, ask 
thou Jehovih, and I will answer thee in 
His name. 

Fragapatti then spoke to the Council, 
and afterwards walked down to the foot of 
the throne, where the marshals had pro- 
vided a place for the people to pass before 
him, even as they had done in Astoreth. 
Accordingly when the musicians began 
singing and playing, the people marched 
before him, and by the waving of his hands 
he created drapery, flowers and wreaths, 
and gave to all the people something, al- 
though there passed before him two thou- 
said million angels. 

CHAPTER XXXVII. 

So Fragapatti departed, and sailed for 
Hi-rom, the heavenly kingdom of E'chad, 



Lord God of Arabin'ya and its heavens. 
E'chad had also the Voice of Jehovih with 
him. After his appointment to this divi- 
sion of earth and heaven, Jehovih com- 
manded him, even as He had Ah'oan, to 
make an otevan and visit all the paces, 
and make a record, before he established 
his kingdom. And these things E'chad 
did, taking thirty thousand companions 
with him, who were surveyors, inspectors, 
recorders and enumerators, and of such or- 
der as are required in preliminary examin- 
ations of the earth and lower heavens. Be- 
sides these, he had also his hosts of musi- 
cians, his heralds and messengers. He 
spent forty days in this labor, and then the 
record was completed, of which E'chad 
had two copies made, one for his own 
kingdom in etherea and one for the hea- 
ven he was about to found. In these rec- 
ords, the numerators estimated one thou- 
sand million eight hundred thousand spir- 
its, wandering about, mostly on the earth, 
many of them falling into forgetfulness 
and dissolution. Many of them had forgot- 
ten who they were, and had no remem- 
brance of once having lived mortal lives. 
Millions and millions of them had forgot- 
ten their speech, and were dumb. Millions 
of them lived with mortals as fetals and 
familiars, depending upon the spiritual 
part of the food mortals ate and drank for 
their own existence. And yet other mil- 
lions of them pursued evil for evil's sake, 
inspiring mortals to war for the delight of 
seeing them destroy one another, and of 
persuading mortals to suicide, and to all 
manner of wickedness. 

In the region of Gavies there were four 
hells, in which there were sixty million 
souls in torments, tormenting one anothei 
with perpetual horrors, especially males 
and females doing what is even unlawful 
to mention. And these tormentors would 
bring in es'yans, fresh from the earth life, 
and cast them into their hells for these 
wicked purposes. For even as mortals de- 
light in vengeance, so can the talent grow 
until its feast lieth in the fruit of hell; nei- 
ther desire such spirits to have even their 
own torments lessened; nor could they of 
themselves escape were they to try. 

E'chad would fain have rushed in and 
delivered these hells, but Jehovih said unto 
him: Go thou first and establish Hi-rom, 



194 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



with suitable habitations, and then return 
and deliver these hells, and thou shalt have 
places for them. So E'chad established Hi- 
rom, and appointed the Holy Council of 
one hundred thousand men and women. 
Sa-ac he made chief marshal; and he ap- 
pointed Geth'ya his assistant God. Jeho- 
vih said to him: Sixty Lords shalt thou 
appoint to thy division of Earth; and they 
shall dwell in the principal cities of Arabin'- 
ya, and have dominion over mortals. And 
each and every Lord shall have ten thou- 
sand ashars to do their commands. 

The following are the names of the 
Lords appointed by the Lord God for 
Arabin'ya: First, to have dominion over 
the worship of Jehovih on earth : Tsdasag, 
Bachar'Raab, Nathan, Neshu, Dath, She- 
phat, Gaon-ay, Cha'ya and Zeker. 

Second, the loo'is, special masters of 
generations: Achuzeh, Chata, Galah, Day'- 
yan, Aphsi, Ishah, Basar and Goi. 

Third, for destroying evil cities; and for 
protecting good ones, and for building 
new ones: Atsil, Sherngoth, Matshebah, 
Achime, Amos, Ahio, Yat-gaab, Zer, How- 
dawitch, Beodi, Machal, Yay'-baoth, Am- 
man, Fakir, Cephets, Bachre and Hiv-iv. 

Fourth, to abide on earth with rab'- 
bahs, and shield them in danger: Macha- 
veh, Emul, Ashshaph, Alcmosum, Lai- 
awotch, Trivi-yab, Herivir, Beli-gib, Bar- 
at'ay, Shav'ya, Tir and Bowd-wahtal. 

Fifth, to inspire to inventions: Kartum- 
mim, Moses, Beged, Chakasat, Mih-gad, 
Jagri, Hen-di, Sru, Amothes and Benguda. 

Sixth, to have control over altars and 
temples: Atman, Kril and Anach. 

In addition to these the Lord God ap- 
pointed censors of Hi-rom and her colonies 
in heaven; and the ashars appointed over 
mortals as guardians were directed to 
which colony to take their es'yans, where 
were stationed the asaphs, the receivers. 

As soon as E'chad had these matters 
completed, he descended into the four 
hells with his otevan, taking three million 
angels to help him deliver them. And when 
he arrived at the place, the power and 
light of Jehovih was upon him. And he 
and his hosts of angels surrounded the 
four hells. 

Fire of Thy Fire, O Jehovih! he cried. 
Give me here walls of fire to inclose these 
suffering hells! And there fell from the 



firmament above sheets of fire, walling the 
places around in such brilliant and suffo- 
cating flames that not one of the inhabit- 
ants could escape. And E'chad and his 
hosts attacked them right and left, raising 
pillars and walls of fire blinding to the dru- 
jas. Thus they marched through and 
through the four hells until the inhabitants 
were fallen prostrate before them, crying 
out. And of all the naked men and women, 
only the recent victims were ashamed. 

E'chad commanded: Now deliver those 
who are ashamed, making a place beyond 
the walls of fire; wall ye the place around 
and then clothe and feed them. 

So E'chad's hosts delivered those who 
were ashamed. Again E'chad called out: 
Begin now in sections and deliver the oth- 
ers into prisons, surrounded by fire, suffo- 
cating, so they cannot escape. And let not 
the light cease to fall upon them that will 
not be clothed. Better is it that they lay 
prostrate than to display themselves na- 
kedly. But as soon as they will accept and 
wear clothes, and cease cursing, deliver 
ye them into genial lights. 

For six days and nights E'chad labored 
in delivering the four hells." And there 
were amongst these drujas three and a half 
million in chaos, spirits who had lost their 
minds by the torments that other spirits 
had bestowed upon them. These E'chad 
had placed in his otevan, and sent to Hi- 
rom, to be treated by the physicians. But 
E'chad and many of his hosts remained 
with the groups of the delivered, further 
preparing them for resurrection. And now 
E'chad had them inspected, and he fur- 
ther searched the records of the earth to 
establish the origin of these hells, and as 
to who they were; and this is the substance 
of their history: 

In the lower country of Arabin'ya, there 
had been a tribe of I'huans of hundreds of 
years, who had attained to thirty cities, 
chief of which was Os'nu, which was the 
capital over all the rest. Os'nu was ruled 
over by Che-muts, a king of great wisdom 
and power in his youth; but after subju- 
gating all the large cities of Arabin'ya, he 
became a tyrant and a man of wickedness. 
Being learned in the earth, moon, and 
stars, he drew to his palace other men, and 
not a few women, of great learning, and to- 
gether they resolved upon obtaining from 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



195 



the Thins, the sacred people, the secrets of 
their miracles and religion. Up to this 
time, all the people in the world respected 
the Thins, neither denied them in anything. 
Che-muts, the tyrant, said: Because 
from our youth we have been taught to 
revere the I'hins, we have become super- 
stitious regarding them. Now it is evi- 
dent that they have some other means of 
prophecy that consulting the stars. It is 
my command, therefore, that the different 
cities of I'hins be seized, and the people 
put to death, offering succor only to such 
as reveal their secrets. With their gifts 
of miracles and power of prophecy, I can 
march successfully against Par'si'e, Jaffeth 
and Shem, and I shall become king of all 
the world. And ye that help me in this 
matter, instead of merely having cities 
to rule over, as ye now have, shall have 
kingdoms with many cities. 

The learned men acceded to this, and 
shortly after the king's people fell upon the 
I'hins, pulled down their flimsy walls, put- 
ting them to flight, or slaying them out- 
right, offering no salvation save they would 
reveal their secrets, and give themselves 
up to marriage with the I'huans. Hab- 
bak, a chief rab'bah of the I'hins, went to 
see the king and expostulate. He said 
unto Che-muts: Behold, my people are 
older than this county. Our wisdom Com- 
eth not as other men's, but through mar- 
riage. How canst thou obtain the secrets 
of the womb? Besides this, we are sworn 
before our birth, by our fathers and moth- 
ers to secrecy in our religion. Thou de- 
sirest us to intermarry with thy people. I 
foresee thy aims. Thou hopest for the gift 
of prophecy, which if given to evil men 
would give them all power. But know 
thou, O king, he that desires prophecy for 
such purpose can never obtain it. Prophecy 
cometh by the other road. If my people 
intermarry with thine, it is simply the loss 
of mine. If thou hadst our passwords and 
our signs, they would avail thee nothing, 
being born as thou art. According to our 
number, we pay thee thy just tribute. I 
pray thee, then, to change thy decrees, and 
allow my people to remain as they have 
for thousands of years. 

Che-muts, the king, said: Why call ye 
yourselves I'hins? Hab-bak said: Be- 
cause we are Faithists in One Great Spirit. 



The king asked: What is the secret name 
of the Great Spirit? Hab-bak said: I can 
only repeat that name under certain rules; 
otherwise, I will lose my power of prophe- 
cy. Besides, if thou knew the name, it 
would be useless to utter it. To whomso- 
ever uttereth His name not in faith, it is 
void. Whoever uttereth His name for 
earthly gain or earthly glory, uttereth in 
vain also. Of what value, then, would the 
name be to thee, even if I violated mine 
own oath and revealed it to thee? 

The king mocked him, and had him 
seized and taken to the lion's den, of 
which all kings and rich people in those 
days, had one or more, as a place for cast- 
ing in their disobedient servants. And 
when Hab-bak was at the lions' den, the 
king again offered to save him if he would 
reveal even the name of the Great Spirit, 
hoping that by its utterance he could also 
heal the sick, restore the blind and deaf, 
and prophesy. Hab-bak said: Thou may- 
est cast me in, and I be devoured, suffer 
me beforehand, to prophesy concerning 
thee and thy kingdom. Yea, I will prophe- 
sy concerning myself. Hear thon, then, 
my words: 

Thou hast sought to destroy my peo- 
ple, who are, compared to thine, only as 
one little finger to a man's whole arm. In 
Os'nu, thou hast hundreds of thousands of 
people, and in other cities tens of thou- 
sands; so many that one man in his whole 
lifetime could not number them. Yet, as 
to my people, what are they? Not more 
than ten thousand, all told. Hear thou my 
words, not one thousand of my people 
canst thou destroy. Neither will my peo- 
ple raise a hand in self defense. But thou 
wilt cast me into the lions' den and I will 
be devoured. , And this little hat without a 
brim, will come out of the lions' den, and 
it will be a mighty power for thousands of 
years. It will be red with my blood shed 
because I am faithful to the Great Spirit in 
my oath. And it will be restored to my 
people, and it shall be called the Scarlet 
Hat! And in the day that it is carried in 
the streets of Os'nu, thou wilt be slain by 
thine own people. 

The king laughed, saying: A prophecy 
often causeth fools to carry it out. With 
that, he gave the executioners the sign, and 
they pushed Hab-bak on the trap, and cast 



196 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



him into the den, where there were thirty- 
lions. And they devoured him. And his 
hat was colored red with blood; and some 
of the people who were superstitious in 
regard to the I'hins, procured the hat and 
went about repeating the prophecy of Hab- 
bak, and the multitude were anxious for 
some pretext to justify themselves in de- 
stroying the tyrant. So, presently the city 
was in riot, and the people fell upon the 
king and slew him, and also the learned 
men and women who were his counselors 
and subsidiaries. 

In the libraries of heaven it is recorded 
as follows: Because of the cruelty of Che- 
muts, king of Os'nu, on earth; thousands 
and tens of thousands of people had been 
put to death; and because they died in an- 
ger, and because of the injustice, their 
souls went into torment in hada, and they 
came and incensed the king to greater 
wickedness, in order to have him slain. 
And it came to pass that Che-muts, chief 
king of Arabin'ya, was slain by his own 
people, and the king's counselors were 
slain with him. And when their spirits 
were delivered from their mortal bodies, 
the drujas went in and beat them. And 
when it became known in hada that there 
was a newly started hell, other spirits 
brought their victims there and cast them 
in. And the drujas went around about the 
earth, in Arabin'ya, finding whomsoever 
they hated, bringing their spirits into hell, 
beating them and otherwise punishing 
them, until these four hells became the 
habitation of sixty million souls. 

CHAPTER XXXVIII. 

When E'chad had discovered the histo- 
ry of these hells, he searched and found 
the king's spirit, and also the counselors, 
but alas they knew nothing, but were more 
like one in a troublesome nightmare, from 
which there is no awakening. 

But E'chad appointed physicians and 
nurses for them, and it was three days be- 
fore they began to awaken, but yet at the 
time of Fragapatti's visit they were not 
sufficiently restored to know who they 
were or, if knowing one moment, would 
forget in the next. Yet it was not many 
days after the deliverance of the Hells that 
E'chad had the inhabitants removed to Hi- 
rom and the colonies thereof. 



E'chad having been informed by her- 
alds that Fragapatti was coming, sent 
word to his Lords, generals, captains, and 
superintendents of schools, factories, and 
hospitals, to come to Hi-rom and enjoy 
three days' recreation, bringing as many 
atmosphereans as they could with them. 
So when Fragapatti came, and the hosts 
of E'chad, there was great rejoicing for the 
space of three days; during which time 
Fragapatti visited all the places and labors 
of E'chad, having records made thereof, 
to take with him to etherea at the end of 
dawn. Now at the end of the three days' 
recreation, the trumpet in the east called 
the Council and hosts to order. Fragapat- 
ti sat in the midst of the throne, E'chad 
next him, and then Hoab and Yaton'te, 
and then Thulae and Es'pacia and Geth'ya, 
and others of lesser rank. A light imme- 
diately gathered above the throne, but this 
time deep scarlet, with white border. 
Fragapatti said: Thy Voice, O Jehovih, 
be upon these people. Whereupon, the es'- 
enaurs chanted a hymn, after which the 
Voice of Jehovih spake out of the light, 
saying: 

Whosoever raiseth up My children, do 
I raise up with Mine own hand. To whom- 
soever uttereth My words in wisdom and 
truth, do I speak from My judgment seat. 
Because ye have come down from your ex- 
alted kingdoms in the upper heavens, and 
raised up the drujas of these heavens, so 
come I from My All Highest Holy Place 
to raise you up. As ye have prepared to 
found My word with mortals, so prepare I 
here in Hi-rom a place of delight. Was I 
not with the I'hins since the creation of 
man on Earth? And wherein they have 
been faithful unto Me have I come in 
great security. The world rose up against 
My chosen and sought to destroy them, 
but they failed. And when they cast My 
faithful servant into the lions' den, he 
would not violate his oath, even though he 
suffered death. And I stretched forth My 
hand and took his hat, red with blood, out 
of the lions' den; and I gave power unto 
the hat. And into the far-off country of 
Jaffeth will I take the title of King of the 
Sun, and bestow it upon Ya'seang, and nei- 
ther Arabin'ya nor Par'si'e shall endure in 
holiness. Behold, I give you a new sign, 
in addition to the triangle, and it shall be 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



197 



the sign of Hi-rom from this time forth, 
signifying faith even unto death. 

The Voice ceased, and Fragapatti turn- 
ed to the red light, and stretched forth his 
hand and took thereof, saying: Of Thy 
scarlet, O Jehovih! Give unto Thy servant 
a Hi-rom, as an emblem of this heaven. 
And he fashioned it into a hat without a 
brim, and laid it on the throne. Presently 
a swift messenger from without, desired 
admittance before Fragapatti, and he was 
permitted to come. He said: 

Greeting to thee, O Fragapatti, Son of 
Jehovih! And by the love of Eoch, God 
of Tshi, of Ude, grade six, am I sent before 
thee in Jehovih's name. Behold, one Hab- 
bak, is without, who was the wearer of Hi- 
rom. 

Fragapatti said: Admit him, and bid 
him approach the throne of God. The 
swift messenger retired, and presently re- 
turned, bringing in Hab-bak, faithful unto 
death. And he went up to the throne, and 
Fragapatti took the scarlet hat, saying: 
Second only to Jehovih's crown, with Hi- 
rom, cover I thy head in the name of the 
Creator. And he placed it on Hab-bak's 
head, and the light of it was so great that 
only ethereans could look upon it. 

Then Hab-bak said: By this, Thy Pow- 
er, O Jehovih, will I go now and deliver 
unto everlasting light the soul of him who 
slew me. And I will restore his council 
also. For they will remember the scarlet 
hat, and it will be as an anchorage for 
their crazed minds to rest upon. So Hab- 
bak saluted on the sign of the triangle and 
departed. 

And now was come the time of depart- 
ure for Fragapatti and his hosts. So he in- 
structed Geth-ya, and bade him travel with 
him. Then Fragapatti instructed the Coun- 
cil, which was after the manner of his in- 
struction to the preceding Councils. And 
then he descended to the foot of the throne, 
and the marshals caused the people to 
march before him. And Fragapatti creat- 
ed flowers, drapery and ornaments, and 
gave to every one something as they 
passed, though there were more than a 
hundred million souls. And when they 
had all passed, and resumed the places as- 
signed them, Fragapatti sat down at the 
foot of the throne in ancient custom, and 
E'chad descended, taking his hand, and he 



said unto him: Arise, O Chief, Thou Son 
of the Most High, and go thy way. 

Fragapatti rose up and, followed by the 
Gods and Goddesses officiating, they all 
went into the avalanza and departed, going 
to the kingdom of Gir-ak-shi, Lord God 
over Heleste and her heavens. 

CHAPTER XXXIX. 

When Gir-ak-shi arrived at this division 
of Earth, the Voice of Jehovih came to 
him, saying: My Lord, hear thou the 
Voice of thy Creator. I have no I'hins 
left in thy division of Earth. The I'huans 
have degenerated by marrying with the 
Druks. And thou art come to this, My 
farm, when it is grown up full of weeds 
and thistles. Look about thy division, and 
thou shalt find no loo'is, nor ashars of any 
avail to righteousness. Consider then, 
what shall be done, that both mortals and 
spirits may be made to know Me and My 
kingdoms. 

Gir-ak-shi found the mortals of Heleste 
to be barbarians, many of them naked, or 
clothed with the skins of animals to keep 
them warm in winter. Some of them bur- 
rowed in the ground, and some lived in 
houses made of bark, leaves and grass. 
And their food was mostly fish and flesh. 
Their cities were numerous but small, and 
every city spake a different language. 
Their weapons of war were clubs,, spears, 
bows and arrows. They had nekher iron 
nor copper, and used stone for cutting. 

Gir-ak-shi said: What incentive can I 
give such people that will raise them up? 

Gir-ak-shi then surveyed his; heavens, 
but alas, there were no kingdoms, no or- 
ganizations. As mortals lived and died, so 
their spirits continued around about in the 
same places. 

Gir-ak-shi said: What incentive can I 
give such angels that will raise them up? 
If I tell the mortals to till the soil and 
make clothes of flax and wool, my words 
will be interpreted as folly, or as implying 
hardships. If I tell the angels there are 
higher heavens, more beautiful, my words 
will be disbelieved. If I say that all growth 
depends upon exercise and labor, they will 
decline to grow. Have I not seen rich 
men and women in other countries whom I 
told that in order to rise they must learn 
to labor, and they heeded me not? 



198 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



Jehovih said to Gir-ak-shi: Thou hast 
more than a thousand million drujas in thy 
department. The mountains, valleys and 
forests are filled with them, roving about. 
As thou wouldst entrap birds by rich bait, 
so shalt thou gather together all of these 
drujas thou canst. But as to mortals thou 
shalt bring famines into certain places, and 
thus drive them to observe the Unseen 
Cause of things. 

Gir-ak-shi called together his hosts, 
millions and millions. He said unto them: 
Form ye in sacred circles, hundreds of 
thousands, and go to the places I will point 
out, and invoke the higher heavens in 
Jehovih's name. Cast ye a famine here, 
and a blight in the animals of the forest. 
Into the water cast ye umbrae, that the 
fish may die. Make mortals stop and con- 
sider. 

Let the angels go then, and find the 
most prophetic amongst mortals, and 
make them prophesy concerning the fam- 
ines and the blight. Make ye their proph- 
ets objects of worship; then I can rule the 
inhabitants of the earth through the proph- 
ets. 

Concerning the angels, Gir-ak-shi said: 
Five heavenly places will I build for the 
drujas. One shall be called Monk, one 
Acha, one Troy, one Be-yome and one 
Hellen. And I will select five Lords to 
rule in my heavenly divisions: Ki-liope, 
Lord of Monk; I'tius, Lord of Acha; Foe- 
be, Lordess of Troy; Liriyi, Lordess of 
Be-yome, and Co'ye, Lord of Hellen. And 
ye shall make them places of feasting and 
sporting for one whole year; nothing that 
can be done to make them attractive for 
drujas shall be left undone. 

Into five divisions, half a million each, 
shall my hosts be selected and apportioned. 
Whose mission shall be to go around about 
throughout Heleste and bring in drujas to 
my five heavenly places. And I will build 
a plateau in these mountains, the Aguaadi- 
ca, with a Council of half a million. Let 
my Lords stand aside, and I will apportion 
to each of them their attendants. By the 
star-lights that fall upon them shall they 
be known and come forth. 

The Lords stod aside, in different 
places, whilst Gir-ak-shi selected the three 
million. After that he proceded according 
to the Voice of Jehovih, and conducted his 



hosts to the places Jehovih commanded. 
And after they were all placed, Gir-ak-shi, 
chose his own Council, and built a plateau 
and a throne to Jehovih on Mount Aguaa- 
dica and when he considered the wisdom 
of the manner Jehovih had directed him to 
thus law a foundation for so great a work, 
he soliloquized, saying: O Jehovih, will 
these drujas ever understand the manner of 
Thine armies? Will these mortals ever un- 
derstand the proceedings of Thy Lords 
and Gods? 

For one year the hosts entertained and 
fed and clothed the drujas sumptuously, 
and they won them away from the earth; 
won them to the kingdoms prepared for 
them. And then Gir-ak-shi commanded 
the founding of schools, factories and hos- 
pitals in heaven; and he appointed ashars 
and asaphs, and began the resurrection 
through his Lords. And when the fourth 
year arrived he had colonized in his hea- 
ven nearly all the drujas, giving them suffi- 
cient recreation to restrain them from re- 
turning to the earth. 

For a long time prior to Fragapatti's 
coming he had it proclaimed, giving invi- 
tations to them to be present. This he 
communicated to Fragapatti through mes- 
sengers. So, Fragapatti knowing the grade 
of the place determined to come in gaudy 
colors, and with sufficient music, very loud, 
and for the manifestation of power. Gir- 
ak-shi had his people attire themselves in 
the greatest gaudy colors; for by such man- 
ifestation do the unlearned judge of the 
glory and possibilities of high heaven. So, 
when Fragapatti's avalanza descended from 
above it was like a sea of fire, decorated in 
thousands of ways with banners, flags, cur- 
tains, and all other ornaments that would 
serve to convey the idea of greatness to the 
minds of the es'y an s- And Gir-ak-shi had 
also decorated his place, kingdom and 
throne, Aguaadica, in the most extravagant 
splendor. And he and his Lords, and his 
captains and generals, and his Holy Coun- 
cil were arrayed majestically. In addition 
to these things Gir-ak-shi had provided a 
feast, which was to succeed the ceremonies; 
and after the feast there were to be divers 
entertainments. But of these matters, who 
knoweth the thought of Jehovih! How 
hath He not provided to bring the dark 
soul to understanding! 



CYCLE OF FEAGAPATTT 



199 



Gir-ak-shi said: To teach mortal teach- 
ers how to teach the barbarian, O Jehovih ! 
To teach cold owe to impart warm mirth, 
O Jehovih! Shall they build a prison and 
decorate the convict in fine clothes, and bid 
him take his ease, beholding the virtuous 
working for him, O Jehovih! Will they 
ever learn Thy power of resurrection! 

CHAPTER XL. 

Fragapatti, and his hosts remained thir- 
ty days with Gir-ak-shi and great was the 
enjoyment of the people; and then Fraga- 
patti departed, going to the kingdoms of 
Uropa, first Goddess of a barbarian division 
on Earth. The Voice of Jehovih had been 
with her from the first, but there were but 
few corporeans in her division, and only six 
hundred million angels, mostly drujas. 
Nevertheless, Jehovih said unto Uropa: 
Thou shalt found here a kingdom in My 
name and it shall become mighty in heaven 
and on earth. 

Uropa said: What is the best way, O 
Jehovih? Jehovih answered, saying: As 
for the drujas, thy knowledge is sufficient; 
but as for the corporeans, behold, they 
have neither copper nor iron. Send to 
Arabin'ya five hundred of thy hosts of 
ashars who are well skilled in the art of 
inspiring mortals; and thou shalt cause 
fifty men who are skilled in mining and 
working copper and iron to migrate into 
thy lands. And thy ashars shall inspire 
them to find the ore, and to work the same, 
and they shall use the metal they procure 
for making tools and implements. 

So Uropa sent angels to Arabin'ya, and 
they inspired fifty men to go to Urooa, 
and find iron and copper, and work it. And 
in four years there had gone out of Arabin'- 
ya not less than twenty thousand men. And 
the ashars inspired them to marry with the 
Druks and half-breed I'huans, and in this 
way a new people was born into Uropa's 
division. 

In Zeigl, Uropa built her heavenly 
kingdom and founded the City of Oitch. 
In her holy Council were five hundred 
thousand angels; and she had also fifty 
thousand captains, and two million ashars 
consisting of both ethereans and atmos- 
phereans. Her heavenly kingdom was 
built in the same manner as Gir-ak-shi's. 
And in four years she had rescued nearly 



all the drujas in these regions of atmos- 
pherea. So when Fragapatti came to see 
her, she provided entertainments after the 
same manner as did Gir-ak-shi, having all 
her hosts present. 

After this Fragapatti visited Kow-anea 
and his heavenly kingdoms, and also his 
earth divisions. Next Fragapatti visited 
M'wing'mi and his heavenly kingdoms 
and earth divisions. Next he visited Ots'- 
hata, and his places, and then Soofwa. 
With all these Lords and Gods Fragapatti 
spent many days, examining and recording 
all the labor done; and he spake before 
them all, so that his voice was heard by 
nearly all the people of the lower heavens. 
And so great was the work accomplished 
by Fragapatti with any one of these Lords 
or Gods, that were a complete history 
written thereof it would require the whole 
of a mortal man's lifetime to read it. Nor 
is possible with earth language to describe 
the beauty and glory of any one of these 
recreations in his travels. 

CHAPTER XLI. 

The close of dawn was near at hand. 
Fragapatti returned to Mouru, the heaven- 
ly kingdom of Haraiti, in atmospherea, 
richly stored with knowledge of Earth and 
her heavens. The capital was illuminated, 
and the decorum of the higher heavens pre- 
vailed. Already there were assembled 
more than four million angels prepared for 
the third resurrection. Fragapatti notified 
his Lord Gods, and his Lords and Samati 
of the day and hour when he should ac- 
complish the resurrection. And then Frag- 
apatti called his swift etherean messengers 
and spake to them thus: The dawn of dan 
is near the close. The Brides and Bride- 
grooms of Jehovih will number ten thou- 
sand million souls. Two divisions will I 
make of grades fifty-five and seventy, for 
the forests and plains of Goomatchala. 
This ye shall communicate to Hoseis, God- 
dess of Alawatcha on the road of Affolkis- 
tan, saluting in Jehovih's name, and of 
His Son, Fragapatti, Chief. 

The swift messengers saluted, and then 
departed. Next he called the messengers 
for the kingdoms below, and of these mes- 
sengers there were twenty thousand, di- 
vided into twelve groups, who had been 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



previously apportioned to certain divisions 
of heaven and earth. 

To them Fragapatti said: Inform the 
Lord God of each division, and the Lords 
and officers under them to anoint their 
successors; put their kingdoms in order 
and appear at the throne of Mouru; to pro- 
vide such ships and such vessels as are 
suitable, and bring as visitors from their 
kingdoms and most holy places, as many 
atmosphereans as desire to come, that they 
may witness the ceremonies and the ascent 
of Jehovih's Sons and Daughters, for the 
resurrection of my hosts is at hand. 

And these commandments were carried 
unto all the divisions of the corporeal 
Earth and her heavens. Fragapatti then 
said unto Athrava: Thou shalt receive the 
Brides and Bridegrooms. As for myself, I 
will go down to the earth and receive God 
and Zarathustra, and they shall be borne 
in my ship to this place, and thence to 
etherea. 

In all places on earth and in heaven, the 
spirit inhabitants were stirred to the ut- 
most. In Haraiti, there were already more 
than four thousand colonies, and every one 
had thousands and thousands eligible to 
the third resurrection, who would depart in 
the coming ascension. Of these there were 
persons of every occupation, and they were 
perfect in their order, belonging to groups 
and series of grouos. And now the cap- 
tains and generals were re-organizing them 
into phalanxes; and the Gods again organ- 
izing the phalanxes into kingdoms. Zered- 
ho sent four hundred million souls to Har- 
aiti. The Lord Gods were arranging their 
groups in their several divisions, to be fur- 
ther organized after arriving at Mouru, 
from whence the ascension would take 
place. Some of these had a thousand mill- 
ion of their own resurrection, including 
those whom they had previously sent to 
Haraiti. 

Fragapatti sent special messengers to 
God, Samati, to learn the day appointed for 
Zarathustra's death; and he further alloted 
to Zarathustra three days in hada, in which 
to preach to mortals by the inspiration of 
God, and appointed the fourth day as the 
time of his ascension from the earth. 

And when all these matters had been ar- 
ranged, Fragapatti ordered the assembling 
in sacred circle of the Holy Council, Sons 



and Daughters of the Most High. The 
lights were raised, and only Gods and God- 
desses could remain near the throne of Je- 
hovih. Fragapatti commanded Hoab to 
stand in the midst of the circle, facing the 
judgment seat. 

Hear the words of thy Creator, O 
Hoab. With Mine own spirit quickened I 
thee into life. From thy youth up I have 
followed thee day by day, with a woman's 
tenderness. When thou didst try to run 
away from Me/ I followed after. I called 
My Son, high raised in My everlasting 
kingdoms, and I said unto him: O My 
Son, run thou quickly, for Hoab, My well 
beloved, is turning away from Me. Go 
thou and recover him; for he is My chosen. 
He shall be My God of the red star; her 
heavens shall bow down before him. I 
will raise him up and appoint him with My 
holy fire; his countenance shall shine like 
a sun. And Fragapatti, My Son, overtook 
thee in thy flight; with great cunning he 
captured thee unto My labors. And thou 
hast raised up thy voice and glorified Me; 
thine arms have been bared to the harvest; 
thy fruit is a song of glory. 

Have I not given thee experience in all 
things? I made thee to walk to the preci- 
pice of hell and fall not. The darkness of 
everlasting death I made to encompass 
thee; in the hour of thy despair I came and 
raised thee up. Have I not great profit in 
thee, My Son? My countless millions cry 
out in all places; they behold Me not; they 
know not of Me and My heavenly places. 
Like a troubled sea that knoweth no rest, 
the voices of mortals and angels cry out 
forever: There is no light! Wherefore, 
then, was I not wise in thee, O Hoab? 
I made thee of strong limb, and with arms 
reaching far; thy judgment I fashioned for 
the great multitudes. 

I say to the young bird with feathers: 
Fly! And it goeth away. I say to man: 
Go forth in My name! But he looks 
around. Again I say to him: Go forth! 
But he turneth to his neighbor for his opin- 
ion. Again I speak, calling: Come to me! 
But he standeth wondering. Again I say: 
Come! But he answers: By and by. 
Again I say: Come! He replies: I have 
not all light! And yet I call, and he saith: 
Alas, there is nothing! And he goeth 
down in darkness. He curses Me and ac- 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATT1 



201 



cuseth Me of errors! He preacheth My 
shortness, and by his words cutteth him- 
self off from Me. In the foul smelling 
place of darkness, My holy angels cannot 
come. But I have provided a savior for 
those who are in darkness; and My shield 
is upon them. 

Thou shalt wear the triangle of the red 
star. Two hundred years thou shalt hold 
dominion over Earth and her heavens. In 
My name speak, O Hoab! 

Then spake Hoab, saying: Thy Voice 
is upon Me, O Father! My limbs are 
weak; my hands tremble like an old man 
that is palsied. Behold I have sought in 
vain to find anything perfect in me. I am 
as a trumpet that is bruised and split. 
There is no harmony or power within Me. 
Thou first gavest me a wife and sons and 
daughters to rule over and to raise up for 
Thy glory, but I failed utterly. My wife 
saw not with my ears, nor heard with my 
ears, nor judged with my judgment. We 
were like two instruments broken and out 
of tune. As for my sons, they went astray, 
like sheep without a herdsman; my advice 
was as weak to them as the shadow of a 
tree. And my daughters went away from 
my love, and chose young men in prefer- 
ence. Then I cried out unto thee, saying: 
O Jehovih, why gavest Thou me a king- 
dom? Behold, it is scattered and gone! 
Then I went down into the grave in sor- 
row. But Thy hand raised up my soul in 
heaven; and thou gavest me another king- 
dom. But my people would not see through 
my eyes, and my ears and my judgment 
were not wrong. And I turned about like 
one who is lost in a forest, and shutteth 
his eyes as to the direction of the sun, go- 
ing by the sound of a multitude of tongues. 
And my kingdom drew a boundary around 
itself, and shut out all light. And Thy Son 
came and delivered me and my people. 

Behold, I was as weak as a child. In 
my weakness Thy light came upon me. 
Never more shall I desire others to see 
through my eyes, or hear through my 
ears, or judge by my judgment. Thou hast 
healed me of my infirmity, O Jehovih. 
Only by one Eye can things be seen; by 
one Ear can things be heard; by one Judg- 
ment can things be judged. 

O Jehovih, thou hast said: Go forth in 
My name! I will go. Thou hast said: 



Thou shalt have dominion over Earth and 
her heavens! This will I accomplish also, 
by Thy Light and Power, O Jehovih! 

Then spake Jehovih through Fragapatti, 
saying: Accept Earth, O Hoab, My Son! 
My God! It is thine to keep and to rule 
over! Accept atmospherea, O Hoab, My 
Son, My God! It is thine to keep and rule 
over. 

Hoab said: I will be Thy Son, O Je- 
hovih! I will be Thy God, O Jehovih! 
From Thee I accept Earth to keep and to 
rule over! From Thee I accept Earth's 
heavens, to keep and to rule over! 

Again Jehovih spake through Fragapat- 
ti saying: What thou doest henceforth do 
thou in My name, for it is of Me. 

Hoab said: What I do henceforth do I 
in Thy name, O Jehovih! For I know it 
is Thee that doeth all glorious things. 

Jehovih spake through Fragapatti, say- 
ing: W T ith Mine Own hands weave I a 
crown for thee, My Son, My God of the 
red star! I place it on thy head for the 
glory of My kingdoms, which are endless 
in number and full of holiness! Wear thou 
My Crown, for it is with Wisdom and Pow- 
er! 

Then Fragapatti's hands were waved 
about by the Great Spirit, and a crown was 
woven and placed on Hoab's head, and it 
was brilliant and white, and studded with 
countless gems, millions. 

Hoab said: Crown from Thy hand, O 
Father! I accept it and wear it, emblem 
of Thy kingdoms, endless in number and 
full of holiness. I know Thou wilt ever be 
with me in Wisdom and Power! I will 
glorify Thee forever! My kingdoms shall 
glorify Thee forever! 

The chief marshal now conducted Hoab 
to the throne of Jehovih, and Hoab sat in 
the midst of the throne. In the meantime, 
the es'enaurs chanted a hymn of glory. 
Hoab then said: Fragapatti, Son of Jeho- 
vih, Orian Chief, come thou and honor my 
throne in the name of the Father. Then 
Fragapatti went to the throne and sat 
thereon. Next Hoab called up Athrava, 
then Hapacha, and then other Gods and 
Goddesses. Then Fragapatti said: 

Behold, the time of the death of Zara- 
thustra hath come. Abide ye here, and I 
will go quickly down to the earth and re- 



202 



CYCLE OF FBAGAPATTI 



ceive God and Zarathustra, and the hosts 
of God and his Lords. 

So Fragapatti departed, and sailed swift- 
ly down to Par'si'e, on the earth, and came 
to the place of meeting the morning of the 
fourth day after Zarathustra's death. For 
three days and nights his spirit had been 
preaching to the Faithists, explaining the 
kingdoms of Jehovih. So Fragapatti called 
unto God, saying: Behold, my Son, thy 
labor is done. In thee have I great de- 
light. Behold, my ship lieth by the river; 
my lights are raised for the everlasting 
thrones! God (Samati) said: That which 
Thou didst put upon me I have done! Be- 
hold, here standeth my son, Zarathustra. 

Zarathustra was then taking leave of his 
corporeal friends, for his soul was fast be- 
coming illuminated. He had looked up and 
beheld the ship of All Light, and he knew 
now the Voice of the Father. 

So Fragapatti went and took Zarathus- 
tra in his arms, saying: Come, my beloved. 
Thy home is yonder! So they went into 
the ship of fire and ascended to Mouru. 

CHAPTER XLII. 

And now the Lord Gods, and Lords 
and Gods, began to arrive in Mouru. The 
marshals, and their officers and workmen, 
had enlarged the landing places for the 
hosts of ships; receivers had been appoint- 
ed and allotted to their various places. 
Heralds and messengers had been provided 
with places of announcement; and lines of 
intercommunion had been laid, so that the 
words of heralds and messengers could be 
heard by all the millions in waiting. 

First came Ardi'atta, from Zeredho 
and Haraiti, Goddess over the spirits that 
had been delivered out of the hells of Aoa- 
su by Fragapatti and Hoab. And with her, 
her successor, Gaipon, manager of the 
hosts. Ardi'atti brought one thousand 
three hundred million souls in her ship, 
mostly visitors who have been delivered 
out of hell. Besides these, were twenty 
million raised to the degree of the third 
resurrection, clothed as Brides and Bride- 
grooms of Jehovih. These latter were the 
harvest of Ardi'atta, and in her charge. 
The receivers of her ship stationed it in its 
place, and then the receivers of her hosts 
conducted them to their places. 



And now came E'chad, Lord God of 
Arabin'ya, in his ship, with more than four 
thousand million souls, half of whom were 
Brides and Bridegrooms. His ship was 
received by the proper officers, and sta- 
tioned in its pace; and his hosts received 
by the proper persons, and conducted to 
their respective places. E'chad entered 
the south wing of the capital, with the 
Brides and Bridegrooms, and his successor 
was with the visiting hosts. When E'chad 
entered and stood before the throne, Frag- 
apatti saluted him on the sign Jehovih's 
Rest, and E'chad answered in The Glory of 
the Evening! 

Before the hosts of E'chad were landed 
and placed, there came Ots-ha-ta, Lord of 
North Oce'ya, with his successor, in a ship 
with thirty million, of whom two million 
were Brides and Bridegrooms. His ship 
was received and stationed in its place; 
and his hosts received and assigned to their 
places. 

Next came Kow'anea, God of South 
Guatama, with his successor, bringing sev- 
en hundred million souls, of whom sixty 
million were Brides and Bridegrooms. 
They were received by the proper officers 
and assigned to their places. 

Immediately afterwards, Yaton'te came, 
with his successor and his hosts. Yaton'- 
te's ship was the most beautiful of all that 
had yet arrived. His hosts were four thou- 
sand million souls; but of Brides and Bride- 
grooms he had but thirty million. Him 
Fragapatti saluted on the sign of the Star 
of the West, and Yaton'te answered in the 
sign of the Golden Circle! He and his 
hosts were then assigned their places. 

Now came M'wing'mi, God of South 
Oce'ya, and his little ship was laden with 
four hundred million souls, and he had 
three million Brides and Bridegrooms. 
His ship was received and stationed in its 
place, and his hosts received and stationed 
in their places. 

Next came Soo'fwa, God of Japan and 
her heavens. His was the most brilliant 
of all the ships, and he had three thousand 
five hundred million souls aboard, of whom 
two hundred million were Brides and 
Bridegrooms. His ship was received and 
stationed, and his hosts also; and when he 
entered before the throne, Fragapatti sa- 
luted him on the sign of Before the An- 



CYCLE OF FEAGAPATTI 



203 



cients! And Soo'fwa answered him in the 
sign of Little Star! 

And now came Uropa, most loved of all, 
Goddess of the barbarians. Her ship was 
the swiftest and best trimmed, and she 
brought one thousand million souls, of 
whom she had eighty million Brides and 
Bridegrooms as her harvest. When she 
entered before the throne of Jehovih, lead- 
ing her Brides and Bridegrooms, Fragapat- 
ti saluted on the sign, Persistent Fire! 
And Uropa answered him in the sign, Je- 
hovih's Trust! 

Now came great Ah'oan, Lord God of 
Jaffeth and her heavens. His ship was the 
largest of all, and he brought five thousand 
million souls, of whom nearly two> thou- 
sand million were Brides and Bridegrooms. 
When he came before Jehovih's throne, 
Fragapatti saluted him on the sign, The 
Power of Love! Ah'oan answered him in 
the sign, Everlasting Life! 

And now the ship of Gir-ak-shi came in, 
bringing a thousand million souls, of whom 
eighty million were Brides and Bride- 
grooms. 

Besides these, there were seventy-six 
other Gods, from departments of the grand 
divisions of the heavens, bringing some 
five million souls and some even twenty 
million. And there were Lords of islands, 
and Lords of small places on the earth, 
who had also come in small ships, bringing 
some five and some ten million souls. 
And all these Gods and Lords had Brides 
and Bridegrooms according to the place 
and number and condition whence they 
came. And they were all received and sta- 
tioned in their proper places. Thus there 
came to Mouru about thirty thousand mill- 
ion atmosphereans; and of these there were 
ten thousand eight hundred million prepar- 
ed as Brides and Bridegrooms unto the 
Great Spirit. Besides these, there were the 
hosts of Fragapatti, the ethereans, ten mill- 
ion, mostly Gods and Goddesses, and these 
formed the inner sacred circle of the Holy 
Council. Next to these were their succes- 
sors, ten million, who were to be the Holy 
Council of Mouru after the ascension. And 
outside of these were stationed the Lord 
Gods and their attendants, behind whom 
stood the successors, the Gods and Lords, 
with their attendants; and yet behind them, 
their visiting hosts. And occupying places 



amongst them all, the musicians, marshals, 
messengers, swift messengers, and heralds, 
were assigned their respective places. But 
so vast was the multitude of angels, and 
so great the glory, that one might look 
thereon all day and not even see the mill- 
ionth part; nor is it possible for corporeal 
words to convey but a crude picture of the 
magnificent scene. 

CHAPTER XLIII. 

God, Samati, said: In my hands gavest 
Thc?a the red star and her heavens, O Je- 
hovih! As an emblem of trust, and of the 
first, second and third resurrections. Thy 
Sons bestowed upon me the triangle. Be- 
hold, the time of my reign hath come to an 
end. Thou callest me to a higher world, 
with Thy holy harvest. But Thou hast 
raised up Thy Son, Hoab, who is of great 
wisdom and power in Thee. He shall be 
Thy God and Thy Son in the places I have 
been. To him, in Thy name, O Father, I 
bestow the triangle, symbol of Thee and of 
Thy created worlds. By my parting with it 
is the end of this dawn recorded. By 
Hoab's reception of it is his dominion be- 
gun. 

God then took off the triangle and hung 
it on Hoab's neck, saying: I salute thee, 
God of Earth. Immediately the es'enaurs 
chanted, Hail to Thee, O God, Son of Je- 
hovih! 

Now during the time of the arrival of 
the hosts of Gods and Lords and their res- 
urrection, there were to be seen, high in the 
firmament, above, two stars, like twins, de- 
scending. These were the avalanzas of Ho- 
seis, Goddess of Alatatcha, coming to' re- 
ceive the Brides and Bridegrooms of Je- 
hovih, to take them to the etherean realms 
prepared for them by the Orians of the 
higher heavens. Her avalanza was de- 
scending by the road of Affolkistan, and 
coming swiftly. Now between the glory 
of these lights, and the ceremonies in Mou- 
ru, the awe and grandeur on every side 
were overwhelming — the es'enaurs, the 
singers and the far-off trumpeters. There 
stood the great multitude of Brides and 
Bridegrooms, arrayed in white, like a vast 
sea of white, more than ten thousand mill- 
ion! 

The ships, like twin stars, grew and 
grew in size, till like two suns descending, 



204 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATT1 



they seemed as wide as the borders of Har- 
aiti! And whilst the multitude gazed and 
watched, Fragapatti rose up in his place 
on the! throne and called out, saying: 

Behold, the time hath now arrived for 
the brotherhood of Gods and Lords to be 
bestowed upon Earth and her heavens. As 
Earth is divided into many sections, so 
have I bequeathed to Earth many Lords, 
to hold dominion over mortals! And yet 
over all of these have I chosen and appoint- 
ed one God. For in this manner were the 
first heavenly kingdoms of the red star 
founded by Sethantes, Son of Jehovih. In 
the history that followed since his day, it 
has transpired that first one Lord and then 
another, lost power in his kingdom, and 
finally even the Gods were powerless to 
rule angels and mortals to righteousness. 
That ye may henceforth be strong, like 
the heavenly kingdoms on other worlds, 
I now decree Diva, in the name of Jeho- 
vih. And God and his Lord Gods, and his 
Gods and Lords of divisions, shall com- 
prise the Diva, and the members thereof 
shall be both male and female. And Hoab, 
who is God, high raised from Zeredho, 
shall be over all the rest and his title in the 
Diva shall be Div. Nevertheless, the name 
Div shall be used by all the members of 
Diva, when abiding in their several do- 
minions. But no other person, except 
Hoab, neither on earth nor in heaven, 
shall be entitled to the rank of Div. 

And the Diva shall meet in this capi- 
tal of Mouru thrice every earth year, to 
render reports unto one another of the 
matters of their several dominions; and 
when the meetings take place, each and 
every Lord and God, and Lordess and 
Goddess of Earth and her heavens, shall 
be present and fulfill these my command- 
ments. And when the members are as- 
sembled Hoab only shall have the title of 
Div; and the members shall salute him as 
Div, Son of All Light. The meetings of 
Diva shall be private; nor shall any person 
be present in Diva, save the novices who 
may be in preparation to become Lords 
and Gods by succession, and the novices 
shall not be entitled to speak in Diva. And 
each member of Diva shall render reports 
of his department, as to whether in need of 
assistance, or his capacity to provide emi- 
grants to other plateaux, and such report 



shall be made in person before Div; and 
when all the reports have been reviewed, 
Div shall render judgment thereon, giving 
to or exacting from any one or more of the 
dominions, according to the Voice of Je- 
hovih upon him. 

And the judgments of Div, Son of All 
Light, shall be called Divan law, from 
which there shall be no appeal. And the 
Lords and Gods shall carry these decrees 
down to mortals in their several domin- 
ions, rendering them unto the God-irs on 
earth, whereby mortals through the Rab'- 
bah, shall receive communion from the 
All Light. 

In the time of the assembling of Diva, 
swift messengers shall be in waiting, and 
immediately after laws have been made, 
such swift messengers shall depart from 
Mouru to the etherean kingdoms, in the 
roadway of Earth and her heavens, and ren- 
der the same unto the nearest Orian Chief, 
or other etherean God, Son of Jehovih. 

To the end, therefore, that my com- 
mandments shall be in the name of Jeho- 
vih, let God and Lord Gods, and Gods and 
Lords, and Goddesses and Lordesses, ap- 
proach the Father's throne, that I may be- 
stow them according to the rites and cere- 
monies of the Gods of other corporeal 
and atmospherean worlds. 

The marshals now conducted all of 
them before the throne except Hoab. First, 
Thulae, then Es'pecia, then Geth'ya, and so 
on, until the hosts of the dominions were 
before Fragapatti. And then God (Hoab) 
rose up and faced toward the west. Frag- 
apatti said: 

In Thy name, O All Light, do I cre- 
ate a Diva unto Earth and her heavens; 
and this, Thy God, I anoint as Div, with 
power to him to anoint his successor in 
like manner. May Thy Voice and Judg- 
ment be with him forever. And these Thy 
Lord Gods, and these Thy Gods and Thy 
Lords, and these Thy Goddesses and Thy 
Lordesses, do I anoint as members of Di- 
va; and to each and all of them give I 
power in Thy name to appoint successors 
after them for Thy allotted seasons. May 
Thy Wisdom and Power be with them 
forever. Amen. 

God said: In Thy Name, O All Light, 
do I accept the Diva. And on behalf of 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



205 



my Gods and Lords, proclaim Thy Divan 
Power unto heaven and earth. 

The others responded: We will fulfill 
thy decrees, O All Light, now and hence- 
forth, forever. Be Thou with us in wis- 
dom and strength for Thy glory! 

Fragapatti then extended his hand up- 
ward, saying: (Inqua git s'ang, of Thy In- 
qua git s'ang, O All Light) Dominion 
within dominion, give me of Thy symbol, 
O Jehovih! 

And there came out of the light before 
the throne a substance, and Fragapatti 
seized it and formed therefrom, first, a 
hollow ball, and within a bail and a trian- 
gle; and he said unto them: 

Behold, O Jehovih, Thou didst call me 
from my high place in heaven, saying: Go 
thou unto the red star, Earth; her soil is 
wet with human blood! Her heavens are 
dead; My harvest is nothing. And I came 
and delivered Thy words to mortals, and 
washed Earth clean. And I gathered to- 
gether Thy lost children in the lower hea- 
vens, and have raised them up with power. 
Whereof, in token of Thy Light that was 
within me, have I become one within Thy 
labors, and I have raised up Gods and 
Lords in Thee also; that one perfect thing 
may be within another, after the manner of 
Thy created worlds, this, Thy Holy sign, 
do I bequeath unto them, to be theirs and 
their successors' forever! 

So Fragapatti bestowed the Lords and 
Gods, and his labors were finished. 

In the meantime, the sun ships of Hose- 
is drew near and landed, both to the south 
and west of Mouru, and so mighty and full 
of grandeur were they, the thousands of 
millions looking on were breathless in awe 
and wonder. Then the marshals of Hoseis' 
hosts, of whom there were thirty million 
aboard, descended out of the ship. And 
they spread a frowas from the ship even to 
Jehovih's throne, and Hoseis alighted from 
the ship and walked forward on the frowas, 
and Fragapatti and his hosts went and re- 
ceived her, and conducted her to the throne. 

And now, after due ceremonies betwixt 
the Gods and Goddesses, Athrava rose up 
and said: To Thee, O Hoseis, Goddess of 
Alawatcha, in the name of Jehovih, do I 
bestow the Brides and Bridegrooms of 
Earth and her heavens. They are the har- 
vest of Samati, God of the division of 



Haniostu, his Lords and Gods through the 
Orian Chief, Fragapatti, for Jehovih's 
emancipated heavens! 

Hoseis said: Brides and Bridegrooms 
of Jehovih, in His name, receive I you, to 
deliver unto the All Highest Worlds. 

And then Hoseis and Athrava proceeded 
in the ceremonies in the usual way, and 
were responded to by the ten thousand 
million Brides and Bridegrooms. When 
the ceremonies were finished, the time of 
the ascension was at hand. So Fragapatti 
and Hoseis, accompanied by their Gods 
and Lords, went down to the foot of the 
throne and sat down, and God, who had 
been Hoab, sat alone in the midst of the 
throne. The es'enaurs then sang a hymn 
on The March of Jehovih's Worlds! When 
it was concluded, God went down and took 
Fragapatti's hands, saying: Arise, O Son, 
and thou, O Daughter of Jehovih! Fraga- 
patti and Hoseis rose up, and then all the 
Gods and Lords rose up. Then Hoab, 
God, fell into Fragapatti's arms, and when 
they had embraced, God withdrew and re- 
turned to the throne. Fragapatti saluted 
him on the sign, Faithist, and God an- 
swered him in the sign, Forever! Where- 
upon, the hosts followed after Fragapatti 
and Hoseis and entered the great avalan- 
zas. 

Fragapatti gave his own avalanza to 
Athrava and his attendants, and they took 
from the magnet and made it rotary also. 
And when they were all aboard, Hoseis 
commanded the ascension, and the mighty 
fire ships rose up, turning and rising. 
Fragapatti created flowers and drapery, 
and cast overboard sufficient, so that all the 
twenty million remaining had every one 
some memento. In a little while the resur- 
rection was complete. The sun ships rose 
higher and higher, passing Earth's vortex 
and entering etherea, going to the king- 
doms prepared for them by the high raised 
Sons and Daughters of Jehovih. 

CHAPTER XLIV. 

As commanded by Fragapatti, the Diva 
met thrice every year in Mouru, and Div 
decreed laws and government unto mortals 
and angels after the manner herein describ- 
ed; and because the sessions of the Diva 
were long the members reclined on divans. 



206 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



Div decreed: To establish birth rites 
with mortals; to teach mortals when their 
children were born to consecrate them to 
Diva under a rod with water, after the 
manner es'yans were baptized in heaven; 
with rites, ceremonies and words according 
to the Divan law. 

Div decreed: In the time of the bap- 
tism of mortal children the Lords shall ap- 
point ashars unto such children to keep 
them in the way of the Almighty. The 
ashars shall assemble in the house of a 
Zarathustrian at the time of the birth of a 
child, and they shall baptize the child with 
a rod, sprinkling water on its head, and by 
inspiration and otherwise induce the mor- 
tals to go through the same ceremony, 
having a rab'bah to perform with a rod 
which has been dipped in water. And the 
father or mother shall say: I bestow this, 
my child, to be a good Zarathustrian, ac- 
cording to the Divan law. 

Div decreed: A baptized child showeth 
it hath sprung from Zarathustrians, and 
hath inherent in it high possibilities. And 
if it die in infancy it shall not be received 
with the children of Druks in heaven, but 
in such place as will enable the parents 
after death to visit it with delight. 

Div decreed: To establish wedding rites 
and ceremonies, with words and proces- 
sions, in order to bind firmly monogamic 
marriages, according to the Divan law. 

Div decreed: In time of marriages, my 
Lords shall appoint new ashars unto man 
and wife, whose duties are to minister unto 
them as a small kingdom for the glory of 
Jehovih. 

Div decreed: They shall be married by 
the rab'bah with kin and friends present. 
The rab'bah shall say: Ormazd hath unit- 
ed you forever. Live ye in peace and love 
on earth, and ye shall dwell together in a 
heavenly place of delight after death. What 
Ormazd hath joined, no man can separate 
forever. 

And the bride and bridegroom shall say: 
I bestow myself to this my mate, a good 
Zarathustrian, according to the Divan law. 

Div decreed: To establish death rites 
and ceremonies, with words according to 
the Divan law. 

Div decreed: These are the sacred 
words in the confession previous to death: 
I confess, with repentance, I, a good Zara- 



thustrian, unto Thee, O Ormazd; and to 
the Lords of the heavenly hosts of Diva. 

Div decreed: In the birth rites, in the 
marriage rites, and in the funeral rites, re- 
cording angels of the Lord shall be pres- 
ent, and afterward report these things to 
my kingdom in heaven. 

Div decreed: All such mortals as carry 
out these rites and ceremonies, shall be 
called Zarathustrians. 

CHAPTER XLV. 

Div decreed: If a man be not too 
weak, he shall confess to the Lord with 
repentance. But if he be too weak to utter 
words, then shall the rab'bah confess him 
by holding the right hand whilst he saith 
the sacred words. And whilst this is being 
done, the ashars shall provide a sufficient 
number of spirits to receive the newborn, 
and bring him to the place in heaven that 
hath been previously selected for him. 

Div decreed: The child of a Zarathus- 
trian being to young to speak, shall not 
make confession, even through the rab'bah. 
The rab'bah shall say: O Thou, Master 
Light! Behold, my child is dead! Receive 
Thou its little, tender spirit! Take it to 
Thy heavenly places of delight! 

And the ashars shall take the young es'- 
yan to a place suited to it, and deliver it to 
the asaphs; and the asaphs shall examine 
it, and if it require fetal, they shall provide 
it in heaven if possible. But if it be too 
young, then the asaphs, with a sufficient 
guard, shall take it back to its mortal 
mother, or its mortal father, or to its broth- 
er or sister, or other near kin, or to whom- 
soever the asaphs shall find most advisable. 
And the spirit child shall be put to bed 
every night with such mortal as the asaphs 
shall have selected, that its spirit may draw 
sustenance sufficient to grow unto everlast- 
ing life. But the asaphs who have it in 
charge shall bring it away in the morning 
to its place in heaven. And in no case 
shall a spirit child be left to fetal with a 
contentious woman, nor with a drunken 
mortal man. 

Div decreed: If the es'yan be a Zara- 
thustrian, his spirit shall not be allowed to 
remain longer than three days and three 
nights about his mortal kindred. And 
then he shall be taken to his place in hea- 






CYCLE OF FRAQAPATTI 



207 



ven, and given into the keeping of the 
asaphs. 

Div decreed: Whilst the mortal rab'- 
bah is reciting prayers after death, in the 
morning, at noon and at sunset, the ashars 
shall assemble in the same house with the 
newborn spirit, and join in the singing and 
praying, for it will restore him and help 
him to realize what hath taken place. 

Div decreed: If the es'yan be a Zara- 
thustrian, and his kin in heaven be drujas, 
he shall not be taken to the heaven where 
they are; nor shall his kin be permitted to 
see him for thirty days. But after thirty 
days, in his own place in heaven, his kin, 
if drujas, may be permitted to see him, but 
only under guard. 

Div decreed: If the es'yan be a Zara- 
thustrian, and his kin in heaven belong to 
the organic heavens, then shall he be taken 
to them, and his abiding place shall be with 
them for a season. 

Div decreed: The same law shall apply 
in the case of a Zarathustrian woman as 
with a man. 

Div propounded: If a Zarathustrian be 
dead, and his spirit many years in a place 
of heavenly delight, and then his mortal 
wife die, and she be not a Zarathustrian, 
what shall be done with her? The members 
of the Diva all spake thereon, and then Div 
decreed: 

The spirit of such a woman shall not 
be taken to the place of her husband. For 
thirty days she shall be kept in a place 
suitable for her. After that she may visit 
her husband under guard; but until she ac- 
cept the Ormazdian law, she shall not 
dwell with her husband in heaven, nor with 
her children in heaven. And if she have 
mortal children she shall not be permitted 
to see them except under guard. 

Div decreed: The same law shall apply 
in the case of a Zarathustrian woman in 
heaven whose husband was not a Zara- 
thustrian; for he is bound by the same 
law, and shall be kept separate from his 
wife in heaven until he accept the Ormaz- 
dian religion. 

Div asked: If a Zarathustrian man have 
a wife who is not a Zarathustrian, and she 
have an untimely birth, whether by acci- 
dent or abortion, what shall be done with 
the spirit of the child? All the members of 
Diva spake thereon, and then Div decreed: 



Such child's spirit shall not be brought 
to heaven for a season, but shall be fetaled 
on its natural mother or father, day and 
night, until the full nine months are com- 
pleted, and then it shall be delivered with 
due ceremonies to the asaphs. After that 
it shall be fetaled according to the Divan 
law for the spirits of Zarathustrian infants. 

CHAPTER XLVI. 

Div decreed: If a Zarathustrian attain 
to maturity before he die, his spirit shall 
be es'yan two years. And during this 
time he shall be attended by not less than 
two asaphs when he goeth away from his 
heavenly home; and the asaphs shall teach 
him the mode of travel, the manner of 
knowing localities, both on earth and in 
the first resurrection. And they shall teach 
him the varieties and kinds of food suited 
to the highest and best education of a spir- 
it. And when he travels with his compan- 
ions in his own heavenly group, the asaphs 
of the group shall go along with him and 
them. And during these two years he' shall 
be provided from the stores in heaven with 
food and clothes, and he shall not labor to 
provide himself with anything. 

Div decreed: At the end of the two 
years the asaphs shall deliver him, and such 
of his group as are prepared, into the de- 
partment of first instruction, and his name 
shall be entered in the library of that de- 
partment as entered apprentice in the first 
resurrection. Here his first lessons shall 
be as to making clothes and providing food 
for himself and others. And he shall be 
entitled to participate in the recreations of 
the entered apprentice, such as music, 
dancing, marching, painting and other arts. 

Div decreed: Not less than two years 
shall he serve as entered apprentice, and 
longer if his proficiency be not sufficient 
for advancement. But when he is advanc- 
ed, he shall no longer be entered appren- 
tice, but a craftsman. And he shall be tak- 
en to a place suitable where his labor will 
contribute to the heavenly kingdoms. And 
his recreations shall entitle him to instruc- 
tion in both corporeal and es'sean knowl- 
edge. As a craftsman he shall serve seven 
years. 

Div decreed: The craftsman's examina- 
tion being completed, he shall then return 
to labor in the nurseries in heaven, becom- 



208 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



ing assistant to the asaphs. And during this 
period he shall report himself at the roll 
call. And his teachers shall take him 
down to mortals and teach him how to see 
and hear corporeal things. And they shall 
also explain to him fetalism and the obses- 
sion of mortals by drujas, that he may un- 
derstand the cause of lying, stealing, tat- 
tling, conspiracies and murders amongst 
mortals. 

Div decreed: After he hath served three 
years as nurse assistant to the asaphs, he 
shall be promoted to the hospitals in hea- 
ven, as assistant to the physicians. And 
they shall teach him the restoration of spir- 
its in chaos, crazy spirits, deformed spirits, 
sick spirits, and spirits afflicted with foul 
smells who cannot clean themselves, and 
the spirits of women who produced abor- 
tion on themselves or allowed it to be 
done, and of monomaniacs, and all manner 
of diseased spirits. And the physicians 
shall take him with them when they go 
down to mortals to remove fetals, and he 
shall learn how they are severed safely to 
both. And they shall take him to the bat- 
tlefields, where mortals slay one another, 
whose spirits are in chaos or still fighting, 
and he shall assist in bringing them away 
from the corporeal place; and also learn 
how to restore them, and where to deliver 
them when restored. And if there be knots 
in any region near at hand, the physicians 
shall take him down to the same, and show 
him how they are mastered and delivered. 
And if there be any hells near at hand, the 
physicians shall take him thither and teach 
him how they are delivered and the people 
restored. For ten years shall he serve as 
assistant to the physicians. 

Div decreed: Having fulfilled the part 
of assistant physician, he shall be promoted 
to the full rank of nurse. And in that de- 
partment he shall serve ten years, which 
completeth his education in the nurseries, 
and he shall be emancipated therefrom, and 
all the nurseries in the lower heaven shall 
be free and open to him, and he shall go to 
whatever one he desires except when spe- 
cially commanded for a certain work by his 
Lord, or the God of his division. 

Div decreed: Having passed a satisfac- 
tory examination by his Lord, he shall be 
promoted to the full rank of physician. 
And in that department he shall serve fifty 



years, and then he shall be emancipated 
therefrom. And all the hospitals in the 
lower heaven shall be open to him, and he 
shall choose which of them he desires as 
his place of labor, unless otherwise required 
by his Lord, or the God of his division. 

Div decreed: He shall now pass an ex- 
amination by his Lord, and if he prove 
himself in a knowledge of the structure of 
both the corporeal and spiritual man, he 
shall be registered as entered factor, and he 
shall serve twelve years in forming and 
making fabrics for raiment, and other use- 
ful and ornamental purposes. 

Div decreed: Then his labor shall be 
gathering and transporting food for twelve 
years. 

Div decreed: Then for twelve years his 
labor shall be the wielding of large bodies 
and carrying the same long distances. 

Div decreed: He shall now enter the 
school of creation as an apprentice, learn- 
ing how to create. Thirty years shall he 
serve therein. 

Div decreed: Then he shall serve twelve 
years in learning Uz. 

Div decreed: He shall now be eman- 
cipated from the factories and all such 
places shall be free and open to him, ex- 
cept when otherwise required by his Lord 
or the God of his division. 

Div decreed: He shall now enter col- 
lege, and serve according to his talents 
from five to forty years; learning measur- 
ing distances, rotations, velocities, magnets, 
corporeal and es'sean; currents of vortices; 
roadways in vortices; how to measure vor- 
tices by their spiral force; how to find the 
center and periphery of vortices. 

Div decreed: He shall now enter archi- 
tecture as an apprentice, and learn the 
building of heavenly mansions and cities; 
and he shall serve eight years, and then, if 
proficient, be promoted to build judgment 
seats and thrones, and serve sixteen years. 

Div decreed: He shall now be eligible 
to the school of light and darkness, and 
learn the relative power and attraction and 
repulsion belonging to each; and his edu- 
cation here shall embrace practice and ex- 
periment; and he shall serve seventy years 
for the full course. After which, if he be 
proficient in creating light and darkness, 
he shall be emancipated from the colleges 
and schools, and all such places shall be 



CYCLE OF FRAGAFATTI 



209 



free and open to him, except when other- 
wise required by his Lord, or the God of 
his division. 

Div decreed: He shall now serve twen- 
ty-four years in building and propelling 
heavenly boats and small ships. 

Div decreed: He shall now travel fifty 
years in atmospherea and on the earth, and 
on the oceans of the earth. 

Div decreed: This shall complete the 
primary education in the first resurrection. 

CHAPTER XLVII. 

Div asked: After the spirit of a Zara- 
thustrian has completed his primary edu- 
cation, what shall he do then? All the 
members spake on this subject, and then 
Div decreed as follows: 

He shall serve two hundred years as an 
apprenticed loo'is. He shall become pro- 
ficient in the knowledge of the procreation 
of mortals, learning to prophesy what the 
offspring will be according to the parent- 
age; to discern how the es of a mortal gov- 
erneth the flesh as to good or evil; how the 
es of a mortal controlleth the sex and uti- 
mate size, health and strength of the off- 
spring. 

To learn which, the loo'is shall take 
him to thousands of mortals, and he shall 
make a record of what he has under ob- 
servation and when such mortals have chil- 
dren born, he shall make a record thereof; 
and he shall observe the character of the 
birth, and the foundation of the child, to- 
gether with what conditions surrounded 
the mother of the child. And he shall fol- 
low the child until it has grown up, mar- 
ried and begotten a child or children; and 
so on, to the sixth generation. 

Div decreed: After he hath served two 
hundred years he shall be examined by his 
Lord, and if found proficient in prophesy- 
ing to the sixth generation, he shall be en- 
tered as an ashar, on a list of four twelves 
for every moon's change. But the forty- 
eight ashars shall not have charge of more 
than one hundred and ninety-two mortals, 
unless otherwise specially allotted by the 
Lord or God in dominion. 

For four generations, or one hundred 
and thirty-three years, shall he serve as an 
ashar. And he shall learn to have domin- 
ion over his mortal wards day and night 
without making his presence known to 



them. To accomplish which he shall be- 
gin with his wards in their first infancy; re- 
maining with them whilst they sleep, talk- 
ing to the spirit of the mortal, teaching and 
persuading. 

Div decreed: Having served the full 
term as ashar, he shall be entitled to exam- 
ination by his Lord. But herein beginneth 
a new form of examination, which is that 
the examination pertains to his wards, as 
to what kind of fruit he hath sent to hea- 
ven, the grade of his es'yans being the 
standard. 

Div decreed: Having passed the exam- 
ination as ashar, he shall now be entered 
as asaph, where he shall serve thirty-six 
years. Here again his examination shall 
not be of himself, but of the harvest of his 
department 

Div decreed: His examination being 
complete, he shall now receive emancipa- 
tion from all preceding departments and 
decrees; and he shall have his choice in 
ali places he hath passed, unless otherwise 
specially detailed by the Lord or God of 
his division. 

Div decreed: He shall now be entitled 
to enter the school of the primary soul. 
His first lessons shall be in colors and 
sounds, both of corpor and es. First, be- 
ginning with gray of not more than three 
combinations; and when he hath mastered 
these, he shall have four, five, then ten, 
then a hundred and so on, until when any 
combination of colors is placed before him, 
he can instantly perceive every color, 
shade, and tint, and the apparent velocity 
of light, and its actinic force emanating 
And he shall pursue this study until he can 
create is es the counterpart of anything in 
corpor, or create in corpor the counterpart 
of anything in es. 

And for sounds, he shall proceed in the 
same way; first, learning a combination of 
three, so that when his teacher produces 
any three sounds together, he can hear 
them and determine the exact velocity of 
wave. Then he shall begin with four notes, 
then five, then ten, then a hundred, and 
even a thousand, which though made in 
the same instant, he shall detect every one, 
and the velocity and force of each. 

Div decreed: He shall now begin the 
practice of combining and creating color 
by sounds, and sounds by colors, both in 



210 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



corpor and es. His teachers shall make 
explosions with and without light, and by 
his eye and ear only shall he be able to de- 
termine with what elements the explosions 
were made. 

Div decreed: He shall go far away 
from the explosions, and when the waves 
come to him, even though he heareth not 
the explosion, he shall be able to deter- 
mine by the waves, of what substance the 
explosion was made, and whether in light 
or darkness. And if in light, what colors 
were manifested. 

Div decreed: He shall now receive in- 
struction in the sounds of conversation. 
First, his teacher shall cause him to. hear 
two people conversing at the same time, 
missing nothing that is said; then three, 
four, five, then ten, then a hundred, and 
then a thousand, but no greater number 
in this department. 

Div decreed: He shall now analyze the 
waves of voice, wherein he can hear the 
sounds thereof. His teacher shall station 
him in a certain place and cause him to 
read the waves of sound that come to him, 
so that he knoweth not only the words 
spoken, but the kind of persons speaking or 
singing. 

Div decreed: His teacher shall now 
cause him to read the waves of sound em- 
ating from two persons talking at the same 
time, whom he cannot hear, and he shall 
understand not only the words spoken, but 
the kind of persons speaking. Then he 
shall read the waves in the same way for 
three persons, then four, then ten, then a 
hundred, and even a thousand. 

Div decreed: Then he shall be taken to 
a distance from a battlefield where mortals 
are in deadly conflict, but he shall not be 
sufficiently near to hear the sounds; and 
when the waves come to him, he shall 
read them and know the number of men in 
battle, the kind of weapons in use, and the 
cause of the contention. 

Div decreed: He shall now be promot- 
ed to be a messenger between Lords, and 
between the Lords and God. 

Div decreed: For one hundred years 
shall he serve as messenger, and at the end 
of that time his Lords and God shall ren- 
der his record, and promote him to be 
marshal. And now he shall be emancipat- 
ed from all preceding departments and de- 



crees to choose whatsoever he will, except 
when specially required by his Lord or 
God. 

Div decreed: For two hundred years 
he shall serve as marshal, and under as 
many as forty Lords and sub-Gods, and in 
as many as twenty heavenly kingdoms. 

Div decreed: He shall now be promot- 
ed to Lord, and have dominion over a city 
or nation of mortals, and over the spirits 
belonging to that city or nation. 

CHAPTER XLVIII. 

Div propounded: If a man be not a 
Zarathustran, and he die, what shall be 
done with him? All the members spake 
and then Div decreed: 

Inasmuch as he accepted not the Zara- 
thustrian law whilst a mortal, he is unsuit- 
ed to the highest exalted places in heaven. 
His education shall not run to the Lord- 
head nor to the God-head, for all official 
preference shall be to the Zarathustrian. 
He shall not be a column in the Father's 
building, nor of the arch-stones of great 
strength, but he shall stand as a plain 
brick in the wall. 

Div said: I am not created God merely 
to serve my time and there an end. But I 
am to look far ahead as to who shall be 
Lords and Gods over Earth and her atmos- 
pherea. 

Div propounded: What then shall be 
the course of a spirit who was not a Zara- 
thustrian, and after the members had spo- 
ken, Div decreed: 

He shall be delivered to the asaphs, who 
shall enter him in the nurseries as an es'- 
yan, where he shall remain six years, 
learning elementary powers and expres- 
sions. 

Div decreed: He shall then be appren- 
ticed in manufacturing and general labor, 
where he shall serve twelve years, unless 
previously instructed in these things whilst 
a mortal. 

Div decreed: He shall now enter a 
school and learn surveying and measuring 
without instruments, and determining 
what kind of emanations rise from the 
earth, their altitude and density; and he 
shall learn exploration; and enumeration 
in both corpor and es; the building of 
piedmazrs and otevans; the constructing of 
arrow ships, and all other vessels used in 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



211 



the heavens to carry things from place to 
place. And he shall serve thirty years in 
these things. 

Div decreed: He shall now be promoted 
to restoring, nursing and caring for the 
drujas who are being rescued by the cap- 
tains, generals and Lords, in which ser- 
vice he shall serve for thirty years. 

Div decreed: Whatsoever service he 
did in mortal life in any of these things, 
shall stand to his credit two-fold in heaven. 

Div decreed: If he now acknowledge 
and practice faith in the Great Spirit, Jeho- 
vih, he shall be promoted to the college of 
creation, and taught to create light and 
darkness. After this he shall be taught to 
sar'gis flowers, trees and clothes, and to 
take elementary lessons in music and ora- 
tory, in which branches he shall serve fifty 
years. And then, he shall be entitled to 
examination, and if he can withstand the 
third grade of light, he shall be ranked 
Bridegroom to Jehovih. 

Div decreed: If he does not yet com- 
prehend faith in the All Person, he shall 
be granted freedom to all the places where 
hath served, and he shall be emancipated 
from all Lords and Gods, and from all la- 
bor and education, and honorably dis- 
charged, to pursue whatever he desires in 
heaven or earth. Nor shall the Lords nor 
Gods take more notice of him than due 
respect and honor. 

Div decreed: Because of the latter class 
rise the false Gods and false Lords, who oft 
set up kingdoms of their own in atmos- 
pherea, they shall not rise above the sec- 
ond resurrection. 

The Voice of Jehovih came to Div, 
saying: Without false Gods and false 
Lords, the lowest drujas would never be 
put to work. They who cannot be risen by 
persuasion, may be aroused by less scrupu- 
lous masters, who make slaves of them. 



CHAPTER XLIX. 

The Voice of Jehovih came to Div say- 
ing: That My Lords and My Gods may 
not err, thou shalt promulgate the founda- 
tion of the Divan law. Div perceived, and 
decreed: 



This is the foundation of Divan law: 
The decrees of God and his sub-Gods, 
Lord Gods and Lords. 

A kingdom in heaven riseth or falleth 
by Divan law. A kingdom or nation on 
the earth riseth or falleth by Divan law. 
The virtuous are rewarded and exalted by 
Divan law; the wicked are cast into trials 
by the Divan law. Those who are one with 
the Divan law, are free from the law; but 
those who reject me and my kingdoms are 
bound by Divan law. 

But this is not Divan law: Man to be 
created; to live a time on the earth, then 
die and enter heaven. These are done by 
the Ever Presence of the All Light, the 
Creator. 

This is Divan law: To assist man out 
of darkness into light; to give security to 
the helpless; to raise the souls of men to 
everlasting light; to minister unto the 
needy; to deliver them that are in pain; to 
teach man to desist laboring for himself; 
and to teach him to labor for others. 

But this is not Divan law: For seed to 
grow; for a tree to grow; for the spider to 
weave its web. These are done by the 
Ever Living Presence of the All Master. 

This is Divan law: To regulate the af- 
fairs of angels and mortals, for their ulti- 
mate resurrection; to lay the foundation 
for harmony in community; to gather to- 
gether the inharmonious and put them in 
tune. 

But this is not Divan law: To provide 
the earth with life, or to hold it in its 
place; to build the place of the higher or 
lower heavens; or provide corpor or to 
provide es. These things are done by the 
Ever Presence of the Creator, and shaped 
and molded by His hand through the 
Chiefs of the higher heavens. 

This is Divan law: To bring together 
in marriage wisely for the child's sake, 
and for the joy of all. 

But this is not Divan law: To give de- 
sire to marriage, or desire from marriage. 
These are from the All Person, the Master 
Light. 

This is Divan law: When a man walk- 
eth along, to take him by the hand and 
bend him to the right or left. 

But this is not Divan law: For the 
' man to go forth. This he doeth by the 
Ever Presence of Jehovih, the Ormazd. 



212 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



A carpenter buildeth a house, but he 
built not the logs nor the stone. The Diva 
buildeth kingdoms in heaven and on earth, 
and shapeth them for usefulness and beau- 
ty; and when they are old and useless the 
Diva abandoneth them, and they fall to 
pieces. Nevertheless Ormazd provideth 
the wherewithal for the whole. 

Div decreed: My Lords shall promul- 
gate the foundation of Divan law on earth 
and in heaven, so that mortals shall not 
worship Divan law. 



darkness quibble on the husks, but discern 
not the fruit within. 

Jehovih spake to Div saying: Man 
buildeth a house and it perisheth. Suc- 
ceeding generations must also build, other- 
wise the art of building would perish. Bet- 
ter that the building perish than the art of 
building. I created all men to labor and 
to learn. What less requireth My Gods 
and angels? Because language melteth 
away My Lords and ashars have constant 
employment. 



CHAPTER L. 

In the sixth session of Diva, Div de- 
creed: 

The Divan law shall be the higher law; 
and ye shall give to mortals a law copied 
after it, and the mortal law shall be called 
the lower law. 

One of the members of Diva asked: If 
a mortal judge sit in judgment between cer- 
tain men, by which law shall he judge? On 
this subject the members spake at great 
length, and Div decreed: 

He cannot discern the higher law but 
dimly; the lower law he can read plainly 
in a book. He shall therefore judge by the 
lower, but by the highest interpretation. 

Div said: The priests of the Zarathus- 
trians who have carried the alms-bowl, and 
lived in all things pure, being celibates 
and serving Ormazd only by going about 
doing good, have the higher law, the Divan 
law, and they shall judge by it. 

Nevertheless trouble cometh not into 
the world by those who strive to do right, 
but by those who evade. The time shall 
come when the judge shall not interpret 
according to the higher law, but he will 
strive to hide justice in a corner, using 
words to conceal his own perversion. It 
is by such men and such angels that hea- 
ven and earth will be blighted in time to 
come. 

For as through Zarathustra, Jehovih's 
Word hath been established on the earth; 
and since words themselves perish and are 
supplemented by new words, the time shall 
come when the higher law will fail, as a 
house on sand. For there are no words that 
are everlasting, and that are understood by 
all men alike. Words themselves are but 
as husks that surround the corn. Men in 



CHAPTER LI. 

Div propounded: A man and woman 
in mortal life were as Druks, being filthy 
and idle, begging from day to day, and yet 
they had born to them many children. And 
the children were also lazy and worthless, 
being beggars also. Now in course of 
time the man and woman die, and in time 
after, the children also, and none of them 
are yet entered into the first resurrection 
in heaven, being beggars still and dwelling 
around their old haunts. What shall be 
done with them? The Lords all spake on 
this subject, and then Div decreed the first 
Divan law to rule the Druk: 

Such spirits shall be reported by the 
ashars to the Lord, and the Lord shall send 
a captain with a sufficient army to bring 
them away from the earth, and enter them 
in a colony for such purpose. 

Div decreed the second Divan to rule 
the Druk: For thirty days such drujas 
shall be clothed and fed. If by this time 
they manifest no inclination to labor but 
are still lazy, they shall be removed to a re- 
gion where food can only be obtained by 
exertion." 

Div decreed the third Divan law to rule 
the Druk: This law shall also apply to 
mortals. Through the ashars shall they be 
inspired to migrate to cold and unproduc- 
tive regions. 

Div said: Herein hast Thou wisely 
planned, O Jehovih! For all Thy places 
in heaven and on earth shall be subdued 
and made to glorify Thee! 

CHAPTER LII. 

The Diva enacted many acts after the 
maner herein related, and the number was 
so great that all the spirits in heaven and 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



213 



mortals on the earth, were far-planned, 
from their birth until they became Brides 
and Bridegrooms in heaven. 

Copies of these Divan laws were given 
to mortals through the Lords and ashars, 
either by inspiration or by words spoken 
in sar'gis. And in Jaffeth, Shem and Ar- 
abin'ya mortal kings decreed mortal laws 
based on the Divan laws. 

And heaven and earth became as one 
country, with one king, who was God; 
and his word ruled over all. And the 
Lords' kingdoms prospered, and the king- 
doms of the sub-Gods and Goddesses. And 
there were rites and ceremonies, and rec- 
reations, and games, and pageantry on the 
earth and in heaven, so great that one 
might write a thousand books thereon, and 
not have told the tenth part. 

So after God had reigned one hundred 
and ninety years, he descended from his 
heavenly place, and went about in all the 
Lords' dominions, and the sub-Gods' do- 
minions in the lower heavens, that he 
might rejoice before Jehovih for the great 
works he had done. And in all these hea- 
venly places there was great rejoicing be- 
fore God; and the es'enaurs made and sang 
songs of rejoicing; and the trumpeters and 
harpists proclaimed the glory of Jehovih's 
Presence. 

And God had the people numbered, that 
the Gods of the etherean worlds might send 
in dan for the great resurrection; and the 
xiumber of Brides and Bridegrooms to Je- 
hovih was found to be sixteen thousand 
million. 

Then God directed his fire-ship to run 
close to the earth, that he might survey 
mortals and their kingdoms. And he vis- 
ited all the great nations -of the earth,, to 
the south and north, east and west. And 
now his soul cried out in great sorrow be- 
cause the great peoples of the earth were 
turning celibates! 

And the Voice of Jehovih came to him, 
saying: Hoab, My Son, why sorrowest 
thou? And God answered saying: Be- 
hold, the earth is not peopled over; the 
plains and mountains are not subdued; the 
wilderness is filled with beasts of prey; the 
Zarathustrians are running into the same 
line as the Thins; they kill nothing; they 
live for the soul only; and since they have 



learned the bondage of the lower heavens 
they will not marry and beget offspring. 

Then Jehovih spake to God, saying: 
Call not down a'ji nor ji'ay, My Son! Fear 
not! In ten years, behold, I will bring 
Earth into dan, and thou shalt bring thy 
harvest into My emancipated worlds. 

So God sorrowed no more. And on his 
return to Mouru in the following sessions 
of Diva, there were passed one hundred 
and eight supplemental Divan laws. And 
so great was the power of the Zarathustrian 
religion on the earth that war ceased, and 
the tribes and nations dwelt together in 
peace. The people ceased to build large 
cities, and ceased striving for the things of 
earth. But they learned little except rites 
and ceremonies, prayers and hymns of 
praise to Ormazd, and to His Gods and 
Lords, and to Zarathustra, the All Pure. 

So Jehovih brought Earth into the re- 
gions of dan, and sent seven ships, and de- 
livered God and his harvest of sixteen 
thousand million angels, into places of de- 
light, the Nirvanian fields of Niscrossawot- 
cha, in etherea. 

Thus ended the dominion of Hoab on 
Earth, whose greatness had never been sur- 
passed. 

CHAPTER LIII. 

Then God bewailed the state of Earth, 
because man ceased to love anything 
thereon. His whole mind and heart were 
set upon heavenly things, and the earth 
was becoming like a neglected farm grown 
up with weeds and briers. So Jehovih an- 
swered God's prayers, saying: Behold, I 
will bring darkness upon Earth from 
every side. See to it then, My Son, for not 
only will man desire of the earth, but the 
angels in thy high heavenly places will for- 
sake them, and go down to the earth. 

And so it was; Jehovih brought ji'ay 
upon Earth, and it was in a state of dark- 
ness for four hundred years, and the sun 
shone not, but was like a red ball of fire, 
and corporeal things were without lights 
and shadows. And men's minds and hearts 
took after the nature of the corporeal 
world, losing sight of Ormazd and His 
heavenly promises, and they bethought 
them of the desires of earth, and of the 
pleasures of the flesh-life. Now during 
ji'ay there fell perpetual atmospherean 



214 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



substance on the earth, of which the nature 
and kind of which the earth is made, but 
much more rarefied. 

And the plateau of Haraiti and Zeredho 
were driven down to the earth and near 
the earth; and the belt of meteoris was 
moved nearer by thousands of miles, and 
meteoric stones fell in many places upon 
the earth, like a rain shower, but burning 
hot, and with suffocating smell. And the 
affairs of mortals were changed; they built 
new cities, and became great hunters, ap- 
plying the wisdom of their forefathers to 
the matters of the earth. And the heavenly 
places of delight were broken up and de- 
scended to the earth; and the angels were 
cast upon the earth, turning away from 
faith in Ormazd, seeking joy in the affairs 
of earth. And God and his Lords were 
powerless unto righteous works, either with 
mortals or angels. But man and woman 
became prolific, and they grew large, and 
full of resolution and power. 

The Voice of Jehovih spake to God, 
saying: Maintain thou thy kingdom; and 
thy Gods and thy Lords under thee shall 
also maintain their kingdoms. Nor suffer 
thou My people to be discouraged with My 
works. Because I have sent darkness upon 
Earth to benefit mortals in mortality, so 
have I also given My heavenly hosts les- 
sons in My es worlds. Nor shall they call 
this a judgment upon them, nor say that I 
do these things in anger, nor as punish- 
ment, nor for benefit of one to the injury 
of others. Because thou wert guided by 
My voice and My commandments in be- 
stowing the Divan law, behold the strength 
and wisdom of thy pupils! For inasmuch 
as they learn to master the elements I cre- 
ated in atmospherea, so will they become 
triumphant in My etherean worlds. 

God perceived, and he and his Lords 
and sub-Gods fortified their kingdoms on 
every side, and provided assistance to their 
colleges, factories, hospitals and places of 
education, in order to maintain the angels 
who had sought resurrection. Neverthe- 
less, many angels believed a new or- 
der of light was coming on Earth, 
wherein Earth would become the all high- 
est abode for angels and Gods. Others 
having lived two or three hundred years in 
atmospherea, and never having been in eth- 
erea, began to disbelieve in the higher hea- 



vens, and finally to disbelieve in Jehovih, 
also. 

And in two hundred years later, God 
and his Lords lost influence and power 
with both angels and mortals. And the 
latter took to war, and the angels who had 
ministered unto them became wanderers 
and adventurers, without organization, and 
cared neither for truth nor wisdom, but 
flattered mortals for their own glory. And 
the kings and queens of the earth built 
temples for their familiar spirits, who as- 
sumed the ancient names of Gods and 
Lords. 

Now, when the next dan was near at 
hand, God enumerated his upraised hosts, 
and there were prepared as Brides and 
Bridegrooms for Jehovih's higher heavens 
twelve thousand million. And because it 
was less than the number of his predeces- 
sor, he cried out unto Jehovih, bewailing 
his weakness. And Jehovih answered him, 
saying: Bewail not, My Son! Thou hast 
done a great work. Neither ask thou that 
thou mayest remain another dan, for the 
next will not be so fair a harvest. So God 
grieved no more, but bestowed his king- 
dom on his successor; and his Lords did 
likewise, and so did his sub-Gods and all 
other persons having proteges. And God 
called together the Brides and Bride- 
grooms; and Jehovih sent down from eth- 
erea five great ships of fire, and "delivered 
God and his hosts into the emancipated 
worlds. 

CHAPTER LIV. 

In the twelve hundredth year after Frag- 
apatti, in the east colony of Haraiti, one 
Ctusk, a former Lord of Jehovih's host, re- 
nounced Jehovih, the Creator, and falsely 
proclaimed himself Ahura, the All Master; 
and he took with him three Lords of grade 
eighty-eight, and one thousand six hun- 
dred students of eight hundred years' res- 
urrection, none of whom were less than 
grade sixty, and were sufficient to pass as 
Brides and Bridegrooms. And these stu- 
dents took with them thirty-six thousand 
teachers, factors, and physicians, and 
nurses, all of whom were upward of grade 
forty. 

And Ahura appropriated to himself one 
colony of one hundred and ten million an- 
gels, together with the colleges, schools, 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATT1 



215 



factories, and all things belonging therein. 
And the three Lords took their kingdoms, 
and by annexation made them part of Ahu- 
ra's kingdom. Now these three Lords' 
kingdoms comprised the largest habitable 
places of mortals in Vind'yu and Jaffeth, 
and the greatest heavenly places of angels 
in the first resurrection. And Ahura divid- 
ed up the regions he thus obtained, mak- 
ing confederate heavenly kingdoms, suffi- 
cient in number to give place of dominion 
to all his Lords and Gods, and to make 
sub-Gods out of all the one thousand six 
hundred students. And after that, Ahura 
numbered his people, and there were in his 
heavens more than three thousand million 
souls! 

God sent messengers to Ctusk, who had 
assumed the name, Ahura'Mazda, admon- 
ishing and inquiring: My Lord, whom I 
have loved, who by mine own hand was 
crowned in the name of Jehovih, why hast 
thou deserted the Father's kingdoms? 
Wherein hast thou had cause to complain 
against Jehovih? Wherein, against me, thy 
God? O my son, my Lord, say not thou 
hast gone so far thou canst not return! 
What canst thou ask of me that I will not 
grant unto thee? Nay, even judge thou 
me, and if thou desirest all the heavens 
and earth in my place, I will abdicate unto 
thee, and become thy lowest servant, or 
whatsoever thou wilt put upon me. 

Ahura returned this answer: Because 
I have nothing against thee, I have alien- 
ated myself and my kingdom from thee. I 
desire not thy kingdom, nor even mine 
own. Behold, I looked upon thee, and 
thou wert pure and holy. I looked upon 
the kingdoms of heaven, and the kingdoms 
of earth, and they were impure and unholy. 
Then came certain brother Lords to me, 
most wise Lords, and they said: A less 
pure God, a less holy God, would be more 
efficient. So, I was persuaded to my 
course. 

God replied to this, saying: Behold, we 
have a Diva! Why spakest thou not thus 
before me, face to face? And thy three 
great Lords were also Divas; and they 
were silent on the matter likewise. The 
Div would have decreed whatever was 
wise. Because I saw not thy thoughts, nor 
thy Lords; ye have heaped shame upon me. 
How shall I send my record to etherea? 



Shall I say: Behold, certain Lords con- 
sulted clandestinely, and then concluded to 
overthrow the Creator? And they have 
gone and set up a kingdom of their own, 
calling it the All Highest? 

Hear me yet, and I will endeavor to 
speak wisely unto thee. Thy messengers 
notified me some days since that thou 
hadst repudiated Jehovih, saying: There is 
no All Highest Person; I can make myself 
high as the highest! And thereupon thy 
messenger gave me a map, saying: Behold 
thou, here are the boundaries of the king- 
dom of Ahura'Mazda, the All Sufficient 
High God! I looked over the map, and 
beheld its great extent; and I said: He is 
a great God that can rule over all that! 
For I knew thee and thy education, which 
is as great as any Lord's in atmospherea. 
And thou knowest thou canst not control 
even a plateau! Canst thou raise thine 
hand and stay the a'ji, or the ji'ay, or the 
nebulas? Scarce canst thou change a sin- 
gle current of wind; nor canst thou cast a 
drouth on any land. And yet thou know- 
est there are Gods who can do these 
things by a motion of one finger! How 
darest thou, then, proclaim thyself an All 
Sufficient High God? 

But I will not rebuke the, for I desire 
thy love and thy help. I would win thee 
by any sacrifice I can make. Behold, there 
is great darkness in heaven and on earth. 
Wherein I may be short, I will rebuke my- 
self in after ages. I pray thee, then, return 
to me, and make exactions upon me and 
my kingdoms. With thy loss, behold, the 
Diva is broken up. With thy dismember- 
ment of heavens, others will follow. Alas, 
I will not look upon even that which my 
soul seeth. I plead for thy love and for 
thy assistance. Nevertheless, if the All 
Highest Light, for the All Best Good, 
showeth thee that thou art right, come not 
to me! I know the Great Spirit will sus- 
tain me, even though my soul is well nigh 
crushed to pieces to the loss of so fair a 
love. 

To this Ahura replied: How came the 
thought to me to do as I did, if it be not 
the wisest, best course? 

God replied: Because of the long reign 
of ji'ay, thou wert inoculated with dark- 
ness; even as a mortal, on a rainy day, los- 
eth his patience to be wise. 



216 



CYCLE OF FBAGAPATT1 



Then Ahura sent the following message: 
I have been patient in mine answers; but 
now I will speak plainly. First of all, thou 
art All Pure, and Most Wise, above all 
other Gods. For more than two hundred 
years I have been a faithful Lord unto thee 
and thy kingdoms. At first the Great 
Light came to thee, and a voice came out 
of the light! Then I feared, and was awe- 
stricken. Because I believed thee so near 
the Creator, thine every word and act were 
to me worshipful. At last I rebuked my- 
self, saying to myself: Fool! Givest thou 
worship to man born of woman? Remem- 
ber thy Creator only. 

But the times changed; ji'ay fell upon 
heaven and earth. Our glorious kingdoms 
were cast down by the great darkness. 
Then I reasoned, saying to myself: Behold, 
when we were in light, Jehovih's Voice 
spake unto us. When the darkness came, 
the Voice came not. We sat in the Diva, 
in the altar circle, praying for light from 
the Father, but it came not. And I said: 
More we need the Voice in darkness than 
in light. For a hundred years we saw not 
the light of the Voice, nor heard the Voice 
speak. Thou hast said thou heardst it in 
thy soul! Who is there in heaven or earth 
that cannot say as much? In my soul I no 
longer believe there is an All Person. 
There are great Gods, a thousand times 
greater than I; but there is the end! Yea, 
some of those great Gods may have cast 
the ji'ay upon us. But that is not my mat- 
ter. There is room for thee and thy peo- 
ple; here is room for me and my people. 

Jehovih spake to God, saying: Answer 
thou not Ahura more. Behold, I will in- 
terpret him to thee: He will even yet per- 
suade angels and mortals that it was he 
who inspired Zarathustra. But he seeth it 
not himself. Permit him, therefore, to go 
his way; neither take sorrow to thy soul. 
Have I not, from the lowest to the high- 
est, given unto all men even that which 
they desired? Behold, I can use even bad 
men in the far future! 

Ahura will strive to walk upright for a 
long time, but because he hath cut Me off, 
he will also cut himself off in time to come. 
Behold, a mortal man striveth for riches 
honorably, and when he is rich, his riches 
cut him off from Me by the ruin he casteth 
upon his competitors. Nor can he extri- 



cate himself. Even so will it be with 
Ahura: His kingdom and his sub-king- 
doms, and his multitude of officers will 
cause him to enslave hundreds of millions 
of drujas, and they will draw him into a 
vortex from which he cannot escape. 

So God answered Ahura no more; but 
neveretheless, his heart was full of sorrow. 
Now, when the time of the meeting of 
Diva came, God foresaw that not more 
than one-half of them would be present, 
and he feared the questions that might 
come up. But Jehovih said unto him: Fear 
not, My Son; for even though many more 
leave thee, yet shalt thou preserve the Diva 
to the end of this cycle. 

So it came to pass that Jehovih stilled 
the tongues of all the Gods and Lords of 
the Diva in reference to Ahura, even as if 
they had never known him. And Ahura 
sent quizzers to different Gods and Lords 
afterward, to learn what action the Diva 
had taken in his case. But when he was 
told that he had not been mentioned, he 
becamed angered, and he swore an oath 
than he would build the largest of all hea- 
venly kingdoms. 

Because of the great darkness on hea- 
ven and earth, God sent hope and promise 
into all the kigndoms, urging his Lords 
and his sub-Gods to maintain faith, not 
only in themselves, but within the hearts of 
their respective inhabitants. Now, from 
the time of the secession of Ahura to the 
next dan would be three hundred years, 
and God knew this, though the multitudes 
in heaven and earth knew it not. And God 
commanded great recreations and extensive 
labors in order to prevent further dismem- 
berment. But in the course of a hundred 
years many were carried away by the ex- 
travagant stories told about Ahura's king- 
doms being places of great delight, and of 
ease and idleness. 

Ahura's Lords said unto him: Thou 
shalt adorn thy kingdom; thy throne and 
thy capital, Ctusk, shall be the largest and 
most ornamental of all places in the uni- 
verse; and our sub-kingdoms shall be 
places of great delight. And Ahura was 
persuaded, and began self-glorification, and 
his Lords with him. And in another hun- 
dred years Ahura had withdrawn and an- 
nexed unto himself in heaven the following 
provinces, with their sub-Gods: Etyisiv, 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



217 



with seventy million souls; Howwak, with 
one hundred million souls; Hyn, with 
twenty million souls; D'nayotto, with 
eighty million souls; Erefrovish, with one 
hundred and ninety million souls; the 
whole of the kingdom of Gir-ak-shi, six 
hundred million souls; the whole of the 
kingdom of Soo'fwa, with eight hundred 
million souls. And all of these confederat- 
ed in the lower heavens, making the king- 
dom of Ctusk, with Ahura as Mazda in 
Chief, the central kingdom. 

The Diva was by this reduced to seven 
members, but these remained faithful. And 
God kept up the standard of resurrection 
for yet one hundred years more. And then 
Jehovih sent a region of dan to Earth, and 
the Most High heavenly hosts descended 
in fire-ships and took God and his harvest 
up to etherea. And with all the misfor- 
tune that befell God and his Lords, there 
were, nevertheless, six thousand million 
Brides and Bridegrooms to Jehovih raised 
up to the higher heavens. 

Now, when the etherean hosts came for 
the resurrection, knowing the darkness 
upon the lower heaven and the earth, they 
sent otevans, with heralds and trumpeters 
around the world proclaiming the resurrec- 
tion at hand, and asking all who chose, to 
repair to Mouru, in Haraiti. And the 
word was whispered throughout Ahura's 
kingdom: What! Then, of a truth, there 
must be higher heavens than this! Alas, 
had we been faithful till now, we had been 
Brides and Bridegrooms! So potent was 
this disaffection for Ahura, that five of his 
Lords broke membership, and re-affiliated 
with God and his kingdoms. And thus 
matters stood when God's successor came 
to the throne. 

CHAPTER LV. 

The next dan was five hundred years, 
and God and his heavenly kingdoms pros- 
pered before Jehovih. But as to the Lord's 
kingdoms on earth, and as to mortal king- 
doms and empires, not much light was 
manifested in them. 

Ahura, who had thus falsely taken, and 
was known by, the name of Ahura'Mazda, 
established Lords to rule over mortals. 
And these Lords were in direct opposition 
to God's Lords; for the latter taught the 
higher heavens and the All Person, Jeho- 



vih, or Ormazd, according to the language 
of mortals. But Ahura's Lords taught only 
one heavenly kingdom, which was Ahura's, 
called Ctusk, the All Holy Highest Hea- 
ven. 

God's Lords inspired mortals to ever- 
lasting resurrection; Ahura's Lords in- 
spired mortals to Ahura's kingdom, and 
there the end. And since mortals had 
built temples for their rab'bahs, who were 
gifted with su'is, the spirits congregated in 
the temples, and oft appeared in sar'gis, 
teaching openly their several doctrines. 
And the ashars that labored for Ahura ex- 
tolled the glory and the delight of Ctusk. 
and the wonderful majesty and power of 
Ahura. But the ashars of God's hosts in- 
spired and taught of the Unapproachable 
Great Spirit. 

For five hundred years were God's 
hosts confronted with this opposition; and 
mortals became divided into two great 
classes of worshippers, especially in Vind'- 
yu. And just before God's successor came 
into dominion, he propounded the matter 
in Diva; whereupon all the members spake 
at great length. 

Div decreed: Whatsoever is worship- 
ped, having comprehensible form or figure, 
is an idol. He that worshippeth an idol, 
whether of stone or wood, or whether it 
be a man or an angel, sinneth against the 
Creator. This was given unto all of God's 
Lords, and by them to the ashars, and 
commanded to be taught to mortals by in- 
spiration and otherwise. 

When the time of dan came there were 
seven thousand million Brides and Bride- 
grooms raised up to Jehovih's emancipated 
worlds, and the succeeding God and Lords 
came into dominion under more favorable 
auspices, but which were not to continue 
long. The Diva had extended to fourteen 
members; and God's Lords had succeeded 
in securing kingdoms in the principal parts 
of Jaffeth, Vind'yu and Arabin'ya. On the 
other hand, the emissaries of Ahura, the 
false, had been most active in extending 
the kingdom of their idol. Ahura was 
most cunning with the last Divan act: In- 
stead of interdicting it, he altered it, so it 
read as follows: Whatsoever is worship- 
ped having comprehensible form or figure, 
is an idol. He that worshippeth an idol, 
whether of stone or wood, or whether it 



218 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATT1 



be a man or an angel, sinneth against the 
All Highest, who is personated in Ahura'- 
Mazda, the Holy Begotten Son of all cre- 
ated creations! 

Then Ahura, determined to found a 
second heaven, decreeing to his emissaries 
as follows: Behold Gir-ak-shi, the heaven- 
ly region belonging above the lands of He- 
leste! Thither will I build a new heaven, 
greater than all other heavens, save Ctusk. 
And when Gir-ak-shi is well founded, I 
will people it with many millions of mighty 
angels. And my hosts shall descend to the 
corporeal earth; to the lands of Par'si'e, 
and Arabin'ya, and they shall obsess mor- 
tals day and night, and inspire them to go 
to Heleste, where they shall build great 
cities and kingdoms unto me and my hosts. 

And when these things are fulfilled, be- 
hold, I will send my hosts to Uropa, and 
build there also heavenly kingdoms and 
mortal kingdoms; and when these are es- 
tablished, behold, I will send into other 
countries, one after another, until my hea- 
venly kingdoms embrace all places, and 
until all the earth is mine. For I will be 
God over all, and ye that labor with me 
shall be my Lords and sub-Gods forever. 
And my kingdoms and your kingdoms shall 
be bestowed with glories and ornaments, 
the like of which has never yet been. 
Neither shall the Gods of other worlds 
come against me or mine to carry away my 
people. They shall no longer flatter them, 
calling them Brides and Bridegrooms to 
Jehovih, a thing none can see or compre- 
hend. 

So Ahura and his emissaries went to 
work to carry out these decrees, and in 
two hundred years they had inspired the 
Parsi'e'ans and the Arabin'yans to emigrate 
by tens of thousands to the land of Heleste, 
which was inhabited by Druks and wander- 
ers, full of wickedness. Ahura inspired his 
immigrants to fall upon the native Druks, 
and destroy them. Wherein had come to 
pass that which Jehovih spake in Mouru, 
saying: They who cannot be risen by per- 
suasion may be aroused by less scrupulous 
masters. For whilst Ahura's hosts were 
slaying the Druks of Heleste by tens of 
thousands, God's heavenly hosts were re- 
ceiving their spirits and conducting them 
away to other atmospherean regions. 



These, then, were the divisions of mor- 
tals on earth at this time: First, the Thins, 
who were the original Faithists. And they 
were capable of prophecies and miracles 
to such an extent that all other people call- 
ed them the sacred people. Neither did the 
great warriors of other nations and peoples 
molest them. The I'hins lived secluded 
and separate from all other people. Nev- 
ertheless, they were the seed of everlasting 
life on Earth, and the foundation for rais- 
ing up prophets and seers unto other peo- 
ples. Even as the mother of Zarathustra 
was of the I'hins, so was it with all men 
and women born into the world with su'is 
and sar'gis. For being near Jehovih, they 
had faith in Him, and Him only. The sec- 
ond race, equally ancient, was the Druks, 
the barbarian hordes, incapable of inspira- 
tion, save for their stomachs' sake. And 
though they were told a thousand times: 
Behold, ye have a spiritual body! they un- 
derstood not, cared not, and forgot it a 
moment after. And though it were said to 
them: Behold, there is a Great Spirit! they 
heard it not, nor understood, nor heeded 
the words. The third race was the Ihuans, 
born betwixt the I'hins and the Druks. To 
this race, in its early days, a commandment 
was given by God not to marry with the 
Druks, and they had maintained that law 
amongst themselves by the sign of cir- 
cumcision. This, then, was the first begin- 
ning of persecution against Faithists in 
Jehovih. 

When Ahura usurped his heavenly king- 
dom, and appointed guardian angels over 
mortals, he determined to leave nothing 
undone in order to overthrow the doctrine 
of Jehovih, the All Person. So he decreed 
as follows: Since, by the mark of the cir- 
cumcision, they have pride in being Faith- 
ists, I will not have circumcision. After 
the third generation whosoever hath this 
mark upon him is my enemy. He shall be 
pursued, and no profit shall fall to his lot. 
Suffer not little children to be maimed for 
my sake; rather let them be circumcised in 
heart. 

And Ahura put no restriction upon his 
mortal followers marrying, and it came to 
pass that those Druks not slain in He- 
leste married with the worshippers of 
Ahura. And about this same period of 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



219 






time Jehovih brought Earth into a light 
region for two hundred years. And when 
the Diva was in session, Jehovih's Voice 
spake to Div, saying: Let My Sons be 
not cast down because of the sins of Ahura; 
rather be wise and appropriate from his 
wickedness that which will be good in the 
end. For as it was not lawful for My peo- 
ple to marry with the Druks, behold, 
Ahura hath made a law on his own account 
against circumcision, and it shall come to 
pass that by their sins even Druks shall 
be raised up to learn of Me and My king- 
doms. 

And it came to pass that a fourth race 
rose up in the world, and it was mongrel, 
being dark and short and less noble. The 
I'huans were red, and brown, tall and ma- 
jestic; the I'hins small, white, and yellow. 
And Jehovih put these marks upon His 
peoples that the races might be read in 
thousands of years. Ahura perceived this. 
One of his Lords said unto him: Thou 
Ahura, soughtest to disprove Jehovih in 
this. Ahura said: 

Behold, there are two senses to all men, 
the es and the corpor. When one is in 
abeyance the other acteth. This is su'is. 
Call together thy companions, and find a 
remedy; for I will prove all things in heav- 
en and Earth. 

For fifty years Ahura and his hosts 
tried by other means to have born into the 
world a great prophet and seer, but failed. 
Ahura said: I know the way of the loo'is; 
They decoy the Thin men to go with the 
I'huan damsels. But I have sworn there is 
no Jehovih; how, then, shall I go to the 
sacred people? And, after all, such a 
prophet might prove treacherous to my 
kingdom. So Ahura commanded his emis- 
saries to weigh the matter for another 
fifty years, and then to solve the problem. 

So Ahura's emissaries inspired thous- 
ands of experiments to be made, whereby a 
prophet or seer could be made amongst 
the mongrels. And Jehovih suffered them 
to discover that by pressing down the 
front brain of infants they could be made 
capable of su'is. And infants were 
strapped on boards, and another board 
strapped on the forehead to press the head 
flat; and every day the headboard was 
strapped on anew, tighter and tighter, un- 
til the forehead, which holdeth the corpo- 



real judgment, was pressed flat, and the 
judgment of the brain driven up into 
light-perceiving regions at the top of the 
head. 

Ahura thus raised up prophets and . 
seers, and they were willing instruments in 
his hands. And he sent into all the divis- 
ions of the Earth tens of thousands of 
angels, teaching this to mortals, thus lay- 
ing down the foundation for his grand 
scheme of reducing heaven and Earth into 
his own kingdoms. 

Jehovih spake in the Diva, saying: 
Even this permit ye. The Druks will heed 
more what one of their own people saith 
as a seer, than if the same thing were said 
a hundred times over by an I'hin. 

CHAPTER LVI. 

The next resurrection was six thousand 
million souls, and God and his Lords and 
his sub-Gods had maintained the Diva, 
and maintained all the orders of heaven 
and the divisions and kingdoms, except 
what had confederated with Ahura and 
his kingdoms. And God and his Lords 
had preserved their colleges, schools, fac- 
tories, hospitals and nurseries, and their 
standard in the temples with mortals. And 
of mortals who remained Faithists, the 
I'hins and Lords and ashars held com- 
mand for the glory of Jehovih. But of 
the mongrels, who were multiplying fast 
on Earth, Ahura, his Lords and ashars 
held command. 

But alas for the grade of Ahura's host 
in heaven! In less than one thousand 
years he had abolished his colleges and 
schools, save what pertained to acquiring 
a knowledge of Earth and atmospherea. 
He taught not his people to look higher 
for other worlds, and herein he began the 
work which was in after time to be his 
own downfall. 

Jehovih had said: Whoever provideth 
not a philosophy for the endless acquisi- 
tion of knowledge, dammeth up the run- 
ning waters I have made. Suffer Ahura 
to teach what he will; the time will come 
when he will be obliged to find an outlet 
for My created beings. And rather than 
acknowledge Me in My Person, he will 
profess to send souls back to earth to be 
re-incarnated. 



220 



CYCLE OF FBAGAPATTI 



Ahura's heavenly kingdoms numbered 
more than six thousand million souls, and 
half of them were little better than drujas, 
being slaves to certain masters, doing 
• whatsoever they were bidden without 
knowing, or desiring to know, the reason 
therefor. 

As yet there were six hundred years to 
pass before another dawn of dan, in which 
God, his Lords and their people had faith 
that Jehovih's hosts would come from on 
high to help deliver heaven and Earth 
out of darkness. On the other hand, 
Ahura, although having been taught the 
cycles in his early education, spread the 
word abroad in heaven and Earth that 
there were no cycles; that, as things are, 
they had been, and would continue to be. 

So, as much as God's hosts prophesied 
a coming light, Ahura and his hosts 
prophesied that nothing of the kind would 
come. Ahura, moreover, sent the follow- 
ing order to his Lords, to be taught in 
heaven and earth, to wit: Am I not he 
who inspired Zarathustra, the All Pure? 
Spake I not to him, face to face? Are not 
all created things mine own? Who, then, 
knoweth but that I will light up the world 
again? Behold, I am the Personation of 
Ormzad, Who was Voidance, but now is 
me, Ahura' Mazda. In me only is life and 
death and resurrection. Whosoever call- 
eth: Ahura'Mazda, Ahura'Mazda! is mine, 
and within my keeping. Suffer not thy 
judgment to be warped by prophets who 
hope for impossible things. 

In the sixth dan and the eightieth year, 
Ahura's numberless heavenly kingdoms 
began to be disturbed by his sub-Gods' 
lack of advancement, and so, sixty of them 
congregated together and appealed to 
Ahura, saying: 

In reverence to thee, O thou All High- 
est God! Many hundreds of years have we 
served thee. And we have paid thee trib- 
ute whenever thou hast required it of us. 
We have helped to adorn thy capital, 
Ctusk; with diamonds and pearls we have 
laid thy streets. Thy mansions have we 
built with .precious gems. And as to thy 
throne, what one of us is there but hath 
contributed to glorify it before thee? Yea, 
in all things have we been most loyal and 
tributary to thee. Nor are we unmindful 
of our own wisdom. We remember thy 



arguments of old. Thou didst say to thy 
God: Behold, thou hast long promised 
we should be raised to more exalted king- 
doms, but, behold, two hundred years 
have elapsed, and there is no advancement. 
This thou didst use as an argument for se- 
ceding from thy God's kingdoms. Behold, 
now we have served thee and thy king- 
doms more than a thousand years. We 
come to thee to know wherein we can now 
serve thee that thou mayest exalt us into 
kingdoms commensurate with our wisdom 
and power? 

To this Ahura replied, saying: Most 
humble and well-meaning Lords and sub- 
Gods, why came ye not before me, face to 
face? Why have ye consorted in private? 
Was not my capital, and my throne, the 
proper place for your argument? Had ye 
suggested anything whereby advancement 
was possible unto you, I had answered 
your demands. 

But his Lords and sub-Gods came not 
before him, but sent this answer, to wit: 
As thou promised us advancement pro- 
vided we served thee, so promised we our 
ashars, and our marshals and captains. 
Now they come to us, saying: For hun- 
dreds of years have we served: Give us 
preferment. But we have nothing to give. 
Think not, O God, that we are unwise, or 
that we hunger and come begging; or that 
diadems, or gems, or costly thrones, would 
satisfy us. We know what thou hast to 
give — promises! We know every corner 
of thy vast kingdom, and that all places 
are full, and that thou canst not exalt us. 
Wherefore, then, should we have spoken 
before the throrie in Ctusk? Would not 
our voices but breed mischief amongst 
thy other Gods and Lords? Rather let us 
err ourselves, than that we should injure 
thee and thy kingdoms. Hear us then, O 
Ahura'Mazda: 

Whence the desire for endless advance- 
ment if this heaven be all? If a little 
knowledge giveth power, wherein is not 
great knowledge desirable? We have 
destroyed our great colleges, saying: 
Higher than we, ye must not go! Remem- 
ber thou, O Ahura, we were students un- 
der the Faithist's God and Lords when 
thou secedest; and thou saidst unto us: 
Behold the long training of your course; 
a curriculum of a thousand years! Come 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



221 



with me; I will give you kingdoms at 
once! So we came to thee, and we were 
suddenly puffed up with great pride. Be- 
hold now, we look abroad, and the same 
stars shine upon us. We have not visited 
them. We know not how to go so far. 
The countless etherean worlds lay far be- 
yond ours. We are told that they are hab- 
itable. We know not. We have no knowl- 
edge enabling us to get away from these 
heavens; save, indeed, back to the filthy 
Earth. 

To this Ahura replied, saying: It is 
plain to me ye are beside yourselves. This 
heaven is good enough. If there be higher 
heavens, let them come or stay. I go not 
to them. But, in truth, with your present 
convictions, I would be an unwise God 
not to grant you dismissal from my king- 
doms. 

This ended the matter, and the sixty 
sub-Gods then deliberated on their course, 
and finally sent to God, in Mouru, the fol- 
lowing address: In reverence to thee, 
God of the Faithists in Jehovih: We have 
had sub-kingdoms, and know our rank is 
beneath thine. But we are reaching out- 
ward and onward; to thee we submit our 
cause. First, then, there are sixty of us, 
of the rank of sub-Gods, and we hold seven 
hundred million subjects. Disaffection 
hath risen betwixt ourselves and Ahura'- 
Mazda, from whom we are alienated. But 
shall we unite our hosts into a new king- 
dom of our own, or affiliate with some 
mighty God, that is our question? What 
preferment canst thou give unto us if we 
turn our subjects over to thee? 

God answered them, saying: Brothers, 
hear me patiently, and consider my words. 
First, then I am not God of the Faithists, 
nor of any other people, but God of the lo- 
cality which was assigned me by the Fath- 
er, through His Son. Neither can ye give 
your subjects unto me; for by my service 
to Jehovih I can have nothing, and, least 
of all, my brothers and sisters. 

In the next place, I can give you no 
preferment; I have nothing, neither to 
give nor to sell. Wherein the Father giv- 
eth me wisdom and power, I impart them 
unto others. Besides, until ye have also 
learned to know that ye have nothing, nei- 
ther subjects nor jewels, also desiring 
nothing, save wisdom and strength to im- 



part to others, how hope ye to gain ad- 
mittance into my places of learning? 

And lastly, since ye have kingdoms of 
your own already, raise ye them up, and 
thus prove unto me your just merit. 

To this the confederated Gods replied: 
What meanest thou? That Gods and an- 
gels must labor for others than them- 
selves forever, and receive nothing there- 
for? 

God answered them: Even so; save 
and except ye shall receive an abundance 
of happiness, and it will endure forever! 

Here the matter ended for two years; 
and the sub-Gods, understood not the 
plan of Jehovih's kingdoms. But their 
kingdoms were out of sorts, having no 
head; and hundreds of thousands of their 
subjects were deserting them and return- 
ing down to the corporeal Earth, becom- 
ing wanderers and drujas. Finally the 
sub-Gods again appealed to God in Mou- 
ru, inquiring: 

Is not God a God, whether he be for 
another or for himself? Behold, we have 
helped to build up Ahura; he is a mighty 
God! If we affiliate with thee, we will la- 
bor to build thee up also. Yea, we will 
adorn thy throne and thy great heavenly 
city. But since we have been sub-Gods 
we desire not to enter thy service as 
menials and servants. What, then, shall 
we do, that both thou and ourselves may 
have honor and glory? 

God answered them, saying: Ye can- 
not serve me; I have no servants. Serve 
ye Jehovih only. Behold, we are all broth- 
ers, being sons of the same Great Spirit. 
As for building me up, sufficient is it for 
me that He who created me will build me 
up according to my just deserts. As for 
adorning my throne, ye can only bring 
substance to it from the lower kingdoms, 
which I desire not. Why will ye adorn 
the heavenly city of Mouru? Behold, it 
is but a resting place on the great journey 
to the kingdoms of endless light. In a few 
hundred years, at most, not only I but my 
hosts will rise from this place to return 
not to it forever. 

And lastly, to be a self-God, as is Ahu- 
ra, is to own all things possible, and hold 
on thereto; to be a God as I am, is to own 
nothing, and to retain nothing; but to be 
forever giving away all one receiveth. 



222 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



Said I not to you before: Begin with your 
own hosts and exalt them. Inasmuch as 
ye asked for subjects, behold, the Father 
gave unto you. Think not that he will suf- 
fer ye now to cast them aside or barter 
them off. Nor shall ye suffer them to be- 
come wanderers, nor to return back to the 
Earth as drujas. As much as ye raise up 
the kingdoms that have been intrusted to 
you, so will ye also be raised up. 

Nevertheless, if ye desire to affiliate 
with Jehovih's kingdoms, the way is open 
unto you; and your first labor would be, 
to gather together all your own hosts, and 
to labor amongst them, teaching them wis- 
dom, strength and individuality equal to 
yourselves; and when the lowest of them 
all is so risen, then can ye enter the king- 
doms of the Father. As ye have had the 
profit of your subjects for hundreds of 
years, return ye now unto them service 
for service. Jehovih is Justice! 

The sub-Gods made no answer to this 
for a while, but Jehovih moved upon their 
hearts, and they perceived wisdom and 
justice, and they repented, bitterly be- 
wailing the loss of the thousand years in 
which they had espoused kingdoms. But 
they had neither power nor learning suf- 
ficient to extricate themselves; so they pe- 
titioned God for more light. Whereupon, 
God affiliated them, and appointed Vishnu 
Lord unto them and their hosts. 

And Vishnu took three hundred thous- 
and laborers, and went with them to Mai- 
traias, a heavenly place to the west of Vind'- 
ias, a heavenly place to the west of Vind'- 
yu, and there established a Lordly divis- 
ion, with messengers in connection with 
Mouru, in Haraiti. And Vishnu sent his 
captains with sufficient forces, under com- 
mand of the sub-Gods, to arrest such as 
had become wandering spirits, or had re- 
turned to the Earth as drujas. And whilst 
these were on this duty, Vishnu organized 
his Lord-dom, and this was the first Lord- 
dom established in heaven, as the lowest 
kingdoms had heretofore been on the 
Earth and with mortals. 

Jehovih's Voice had spoken to God in 
Diva, saying: Behold, the time is Coming 
when the sub-kingdoms of Ahura, the 
false, will begin to revolt. And they have 
thousands of millions of slaves who will 
strive to go back to the Earth to dwell 



with mortals. They dwell in darkness, 
and thou shalt not suffer them to regain 
the Earth, lest the races of men go down 
in darkness, even as before the submersion 
of Pan. For which reason, thou shalt es- 
tablish a Lord-dom, and raise a sufficient 
army to shield the inhabitants of the 
earth. And thou shalt make Vishnu thy 
Lord in My behalf. 

When it was known in Ctusk, the heav- 
enly place of Ahura, that sixty sub-Gods, 
with their hosts, had affiliated with Jeho- 
vih's kingdoms, general disobedience to 
Ahura was manifested by the remaining 
sub-Gods, of whom there were yet more 
than eight hundred, who had within their 
dominions upward of two thousand mil- 
lion angels, all slaves, with knowledge of 
no other heavenly place than the small pre- 
cinct where they had been kept in drudg- 
ery hundreds of years. 

The Voice of Jehovih came to God, 
saying: My Son, take advantage of the 
seed of disaffection in Ahura's kingdom. 
Send thou an otevan of great power 
throughout the heavenly kingdoms. And 
thou shalt put trumpeters in the otevan, 
and they shall prophesy the dawn of dan 
within two hundred years. 

God perceived, and he had his workmen 
build an otevan of great power; and he 
provided trumpeters, and sent them forth, 
saying to them: Ten years shall ye travel 
in the heavenly places around about the 
whole earth, prophesying. In less than 
two hundred years Jehovih's etherean 
hosts are coming. Prepare ye for the res- 
urrection; His kingdoms are open for the 
weary; His Lords and Gods will give you 
rest! 

Ahura summoned his council of false 
Gods, hoping they might invent a remedy 
to counteract so great a prophecy. And he 
and his Council sat forty days and forty 
nights in their heavenly capital; but there 
was no high light amongst them, merely 
each one giving his opinion. But at the 
end of forty days Ahura resolved upon the 
following method, to send a prophecy of 
his own. Accordingly, he had an otevan 
built, and sent trumpeters forth with these 
words, to wit: 

I, Ahura'Mazda, Only Son of the All 
Nothing Presence, personated in my Very- 
Self, proclaim from my All Highest Heav- 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



223 



enly Judgment Seat! Hear my words, O 
ye Gods, and tremble! Hear me, O ye 
angels, and fall down! Hear me, O mor- 
tals, and bow down to my decrees. Be- 
hold, I sent my fire-ship, prophesying that 
in less than two hundred years I would 
come in a dawn of dan! But ye obeyed 
not; ye were defiant before me! Then I 
swore an oath against all the world! Ye 
shall know my power! Then I came down 
out of my holy, high heaven; and I am al- 
ready come. Now is the dawn of dan! I 
send my trumpeters first; after them come 
my lashers and enchainers, whose captain 
is Daevas, whose God is Anra'mainyus. I 
will have mine, and I will give Druks and 
drujas by thousands and tens of thous- 
ands over to everlasting torments. 

Ahura's Gods had become acquainted 
with him, during the hundreds and hun- 
dreds of years, and they no longer trem- 
bled at his commandments. In their 
hearts they knew he could not do what 
he professed; they knew his prophecies 
were vain boastings. Yea, his very trum- 
peters believed not what they proclaimed. 

CHAPTER LVII. 

In the one hundred and eightieth year 
preceding the dawn of dan; that is, two 
thousand nine hundred and twenty years 
after Fragapatti and Zarathustra, Jehovih 
sent swift messengers with six thousand 
etherean loo'is from the Nirvanian fields of 
Chen'gotha in etherea. And the swift 
messengers brought the following message 
to God of Earth: 

Greeting to thee, God of the red star 
and her heavens, in the name of Jehovih! 
By the love and wisdom of Cpenta-armij, 
Nirvanian Goddess of Haot-saiti, we speak 
in the Father's name. Peace and joy be 
unto thee, O God, and to thy sub-Gods 
and Lords, and Lord Gods and Goddesses. 
One hundred and eighty years of darkness 
will now come upon thy kingdoms. And 
then the darkness will go away, and dawn 
will be in the place thereof. And in the 
time of the great darkness, behold, the na- 
tions of the earth will go down. But the 
light of the Father's Presence will not be 
destroyed. A little seed shall endure 
amongst mortals. That that seed may be 
propitious to the labor of thy Goddess, 
who will come in that day, she sendeth 



herewith two thousand etherean loo'is for 
Vind'yu; two thousand for Jaffeth, and 
two thousand for Arabin'ya. And thy God- 
dess decreeth that thou shalt appoint unto 
these loo'is one of thy Gods, high raised, 
and he shall go with them, and his labor 
shall be with them. And the business of 
this, thy God, and of these, my loo'is, 
shall be to raise up heirs and followers, 
who shall be grown to maturity when I 
come. For through these that they raise 
up will I deliver the Father's chosen out of 
the afflictions that will be upon them in 
that day. 

To this God replied: In the name of Je- 
hovih, greeting and love unto Cpenta-ar- 
mij, Goddess of Haot-saiti. I receive thy 
loo'is with joy, and I appoint unto them 
my favored God, Yima, God of a thousand 
years' tuition, namesake of Yima, son of 
Vivanho, the sweet singer. 

So the swift messengers, with due cere- 
monies, left the six thousand etherean loo'- 
is and then departed. And God sent mes- 
sengers to Yima, commanding him to come 
to Mouru at once, deputing his assistant 
God to take his place and retain it until 
dawn. So Yima appeared presently before 
the throne of God, and the latter instructed 
him in all that had been commanded from 
on high. And Yima sent word to his for- 
mer kingdom for a thousand of his attend- 
ants, and they came also. Meanwhile, 
Yima conferred with the loo'is, who ex- 
plained to him all that they required. And 
after this they provided a piedmazr, and 
descended to the earth, to Jaffeth and 
Vind'yu and Arabin'ya. 

And Yima stationed his piedmazr mid- 
way betwixt the three countries, in the first 
plateau above the clouds, and called the 
place Hored, in honor of the first heaven- 
ly kingdom on the earth. And when he 
had founded his place and named it, he 
sent word to God, Jehovih's Son, who gave 
him five hundred messengers, mostly col- 
lege students. And God gave them, to re- 
turn, heine currents, so the ethereans could 
be supplied with regimen of their own or- 
der. 

Yima made the watches twenty-four 
hours, changing at sunrise every morning, 
and arranged so that one-half was on watch 
and the other half remained as relief watch. 
And he called in all ashars from the regions 



224 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



of mortals where he designed labor; and 
when they had assembled in Hored, he thus 
addressed them, saying: 

Behold, it is yet one hundred and eighty 
years till the dawn of dan. At that time 
Cpenta-armij, Goddess of Haot-saiti, situ- 
ated in the Nirvanian fields of Chen-gotha, 
will come in the Father's name, and with 
wisdom and power! But until that time, 
great darkness will be in heaven and earth, 
especially in these regions. And it shall 
come to pass that the worshippers of Ahu- 
ra'-Mazda, will triumph in these lands. 
They will build great cities and kingdoms, 
and they will rule over the I'huans to great 
injury. But the Druks will be redeemed to 
everlasting life during this period; for the 
mongrels will wed with them, and their 
progeny will be capable of receiving light, 
even in mortality. But these mongrels 
will be great savages, nevertheless, and 
there will be cannibals over all these three 
great lands. And they that are slain in bat- 
tle will be cut up and put in vessels with 
salt, and their flesh will be thus preserved 
for food. 

But because the I'huans, who are Zara- 
thustrians, will not war, they will be en- 
slaved by the mongrels, except those who 
escape to the forests. And betwixt celibacy 
and torments, the Zarathustrians will have 
great suffering and bondage, and many of 
them will be discouraged and lose faith in 
the Creator. . But that their seed may 
be preserved and delivered out of 
bondage, ye shall raise up many who are 
capable of su'is; and in the time of dawn 
they shall be rescued from their enemies. 
Behold, here are present etherean loo'is 
who will go with you throughout these 
lands and survey the people, and provide 
also for such great lights as shall lead the 
people. 

After Yima thus instructed the ashars in 
a general way, he handed them over to the 
loo'is, who divided them into companies of 
thousands, and each loo'is had one com- 
pany of ashars. And when this was com- 
pleted they departed out of Hored, going 
to their several places. 

In eleven days thereafter, behold, a'ji 
began to fall on heaven and earth. The 
belt of meteoris gave up its stones, and 
showers of them rained down on the earth, 
and the sun became as a red ball of fire, 



and remained so for one hundred and six- 
ty-six years. And the peoples of Arabin'ya 
and Vind'yu and Jaffeth fell from holiness; 
the Zarathustrians gave up celibacy by 
hundreds of thousands, and married, and 
begot children in great numbers; many 
women giving birth to twenty, and some 
even to five and twenty children. And 
some men were the fathers of seventy 
children, and not a few even of a hundred. 
And the Zarathustrians, even the Faith- 
ists with the mark of circumcision, went 
and married with the mongrels, and they 
with the Druks, so that the foundations of 
caste were broken -up. So great was the 
power of a'ji that even the I'hins oft broke 
their vows and lived clandestinely with the 
world's people, begetting offspring in great 
numbers, not eligible to enter their sacred 
cities. And yet mortals saw not the a'ji; 
they saw their cities and temples, as it 
were, sinking in the ground; but they sank 
not; it was the a'ji falling and condensing. 

Jehovih had said: Whatsoever I give 
that feedeth corpor, inspireth man to cor- 
por; whatsoever I give that feedeth the es, 
inspireth man to es. And in the days of a'ji, 
neither angels nor men can inspire mortals 
with spiritual things, only they that are or- 
ganically grown in spirit can withstand. 

CHAPTER LVIII. 

Jehovih said: When a'ji cometh near a 
dawn of dan, let My loo'is be swift in duty; 
far-seeing in the races of men. I not only 
break up the old foundations of temples 
and cities in those days, but the foundations 
of the abuse of the caste of men. My 
Voice is upon the races of men. To-day I 
say: Preserve ye the caste of men: marry 
ye thus and so, every one to their own line. 
To-morrow I say: I will have no caste, for 
the races are becoming impoverished in 
blood; marry here, marry there! And I 
give them a'ji, and their desires break all 
bounds, and I raise them up giants and 
strong limbed. 

But in those days My loo'is shall fly 
swiftly and with great power, that a seed 
may be preserved unto Me and My king- 
doms. I come not for one race alone; but 
unto all men; as by My spirit created I 
them all alive, so is My hand over them to 
all eternity. And when the shower of a'ji 
is over, I send My high-raised Gods and 



CYCLE OF FRAG AP ATT I 



225 



Goddesses to gather together My flocks, 
and to proclaim unto them anew My Wis- 
dom and Power. And those that have been 
selected and preserved by My loo'is are the 
foundations of My new order. 

Ahura took advantage of the age of 
darkness to sow disbelief in Jehovih broad- 
cast over earth and heaven, and to gather 
in his harvest for the glory of his own 
kingdom. And when war and murder and 
lust were thus reigning on earth, Ahura 
decreed to his Lords, and they again to 
his ashars, and they again to mortals: That 
all that was required of any man or wo- 
man was not celibacy, nor carrying of the 
alms-bowl, nor any sacrifice whatever; but 
by saying prayers to Ahura'Mazda, and to 
his Lords, and to praise them was 
all sufficient; that on the third day 
after death they would ascend and 
dwell in Ahura's paradise. Nevertheless, 
such was not truth, for Ahura's emissaries 
caught the newborn spirits, and made slaves 
of them, commanding them to gather regi- 
men and substance for the glory of Ahura's 
heavenly kingdoms. 

In the fortieth year before dawn, the 
Voice of the Father came to God, saying: 
Mouru is becoming uninhabitable; Haraiti 
shall be moved into the earth; Zeredho 
shall be no more. Go not to Ahura with 
this prophecy; he hath denied My Voice; 
he will not hear. But I will take the foun- 
dations of Ctusk from under him, and it 
shall go down into earth. But thou, O 
God, My Son, I forewarn; for thy king- 
doms and thy upraised sons and daugh- 
ters shall be preserved through the dark- 
ness. They shall become My Brides and 
Bridegrooms; I will prepare a place for 
them in great glory. Call together the 
Diva, and I will speak before them, and My 
Voice shall be proclaimed throughout all 
these heavens, save in the heavens of Ahu- 
ra, where My Voice shall not be proclaim- 
ed. 

So God called the Diva, and they sat in 
the sacred circle, and the light, like a sun, 
gathered above God's head, saying: Come 
up above Haraiti; behold, I have broken 
up meteoris; I have fashioned a new pla- 
teau in the firmament above; whereon are 
all things plentiful for heavenly kingdoms. 
Come hither with thy Lord Gods, and with 
thy Lords, and I will show thee. And 



when thou hast seen, thou shalt possess 
the place and begin its inhabitation, taking 
thither thy hosts of thousands of millions. 

When the Light ceased speaking, it rose 
upward, and Div and Diva rose also and 
followed after; and thus Jehovih led them 
to the plateau; and it was called Craoshivi; 
and God and his sub-Gods possessed the 
place, and laid the foundation for inhabita- 
tion; and after that he and his Lords and 
Gods returned and counseled on the man- 
ner of removal. 

At this time there were four thousand 
million Faithists belonging to God's king- 
doms, most wise and upright, full of pur- 
ity and good works. But God and his 
Lords, and Lord Gods, had not sufficient 
power to remove so many angels, especial- 
ly as many of them were yet below grade 
fifty, and hence inclined downward more 
than upward. So, after due counsel, God 
decreed to build an avalanza capable of 
two hundred thousand, and to begin with 
the highest grades. 

God foresaw of his own wisdom that 
he should render unto Vishnu and his 
Lord-dom a sufficient force to protect the 
mortals of Vind'yu and Jaffeth and Ara- 
bin'ya, which were soon to be flooded by 
the hosts of Ahura being cast down on the 
earth. Accordingly, he sent for Vishnu, 
and when Vishnu was before the throne of 
God, the latter told him all the words Je- 
hovih had said in regard to Ahura and his 
kingdoms, to be precipitated to the earth; 
and told him about the new plateau, Crao- 
shivi, whither the Light had conducted 
them. And he further commanded Vishnu 
to return again to his own place, Maitraias, 
and survey the dominions, and estimate 
what force he should require in order to 
protect the mortals of those three earth 
divisions. 

Vishnu replied: As to the latter part 
of thy commandment, O God, I have al- 
ready accomplished. For I feared these 
things might come to pass, and I provided 
accordingly. The number I will require of 
and above grade eighty will be six hundred 
million! For I must have at least one an- 
gel for each mortal. 

God answered him, saying: Thou shalt 
have eight hundred million! Whereupon, 
Vishnu returned to his own place, Maitrai- 
as. God immediately sent forth selectors 



226 



CYCLE OF FBAGAPATTI 



with power; and they went into all the 
colleges at;d factories, and other places of 
Jehovih's kingdoms, and selected out the 
eight hundred million angels required by- 
Vishnu, and God sent them to Maitraias as 
soon as possible. Of the six hundred 
million angels taken to Maitraias, who had 
been subjects to Ahura's sub-Gods, besides 
a hundred million that had strayed off, be- 
coming wanderers and drujas, Vishnu 
found thirty million above grade fifty, and 
these he* appropriated at once, to work in 
concert with the sub-Gods in building 
schools, colleges, factories, and all such 
places required for the elevation of spirits. 
When he had thus established order, he 
called together the sub-Gods and said 
unto them: 

Think not that I am about to leave you; 
I am not about to leave you. But ye are 
not mine to keep; nor are ye hosts of 
mine. Ye asked for them in the first 
place, and Jehovih gave them to you. I 
have restored order; the time is now come 
when one of you must be chief captain 
over all the rest, and he shall apportion 
you according to his highest light. Choose 
ye, therefore, your captain, and I will give 
him a judgment seat and badge of office, 
and ye together shall comprise a Council. 
For I will make this a kingdom when the 
majority hath passed grade fifty. 

The sub-Gods deliberated for eight 
days, but, perceiving the responsibility of 
leadership, not one of them would accept 
the place. So they came before Vishnu, 
saying: We pray thee, release us, and 
raise thou up another person, and he shall 
be our captain. 

Vishnu said: A certain man and wo- 
man married, and they prayed Jehovih for 
offspring, and he answered their prayer, 
and they had many children. And now, 
when they beheld their responsibility to the 
children, they said unto the Great Spirit: 
We pray Thee, give the responsibility to 
some other persons. What think ye of 
them? 

Now I say unto you, Jehovih heard 
their first prayer, but not the second. If I 
serve Jehovih, how, then, shall I answer 
your prayers and appoint another person 
in your stead? It is a wise man that rush- 
eth not into leadership and responsibility; 
but he is a good man, indeed, who, having 



gotten in, saith: Now will I go ahead in 
Jehovih's wisdom and power with all my 
might. The Gods who are above us come 
to such a man and help him! Go ye, then, 
once more into Council, and appoint a 
chief captain. 

Hardly had Vishnu said this, when the 
sub-Gods perceived what was meant by 
the higher light, and the whole sixty held 
up their hands, saying: I will serve Thee, 
O Jehovih! Give me whatsoever Thou 
wilt! 

With that, Vishnu commanded them to 
appoint the one with the highest grade. 
This they did, and it fell upon Subdga; 
and accordingly, Subdga was made captain 
in chief of Maitraias, with rank sixty on 
the first list. So Vishnu created a judg- 
ment seat for Subdga and gave him a 
badge of office. And the other sub-Gods 
were made captains of divisions, and num- 
bered according to their assignment, and 
none of them were humiliated before their 
former subjects, but became trainers and 
disciplinarians in new fields of labor. And 
their former subjects were no longer call- 
ed subjects, but hosts, and they were lib- 
erated in all things, except liberty to re- 
turn to mortals. 

Hardly had Vishnu these matters set- 
tled, when the hosts, eight hundred mill- 
ion, came as the guard and shields of mor- 
tals. These Vishnu organized, making 
Maitraias the central throne over them; 
and he divided them into companies of 
one million, and gave to each company 
one marshal and one thousand messengers. 
And the marshals again subdivided their 
hosts into thousands, and numbered them, 
and to each thousand he gave one master, 
with his quota of messengers. 

Next, Vishnu divided the three great 
countries, Vind'yii, Jaffeth and Arabinya, 
into as many parts as he had appointed 
marshals; and the lands were mapped out, 
cities and towns and country places, and 
each marshal was assigned his place. And 
there was made a record of these things, 
with the maps and divisions, and the names 
of the marshals and masters; and it was 
registered in the libraries of heaven. So 
Vishnu's hosts were sent to their places 
and commanded to give daily reports of 
their labors, which were to be carried by 
the messengers to Vishnu. 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATT1 



227 



CHAPTER LIX. 

In Mouru, God and his officers were 
using all their strength and wisdom to pro- 
vide for the removal of his hosts to Crao- 
shivi. The demand for builders, survey- 
ors and carriers, with power, was so great 
that God determined to send trumpeters 
through the kingdoms of Ahura, the false, 
asking for volunteers. For this purpose 
he sent twelve otevans in different direc- 
tions, some even going through the city of 
Ctusk, Ahura's capital, and they proclaimed 
aloud what they wanted. And it came to 
pass that in less than one year the otevans 
gathered out of Ahura's kingdoms seven- 
million angels capable of grade seventy, 
who were able to fill the places required. 

This was the most damaging blow of all 
to Ahura's kingdoms, for he thus lost the 
wisest and most powerful of his people. 
And this news went like fire before the 
wind. His sub-Gods began to revolt 
against him, claiming their own kingdoms. 
Many of them openly preached in their 
heavenly places against him, accusing him 
of falsehood and of being a mere pretend- 
er, with little power. 

Nevertheless, he had great power in the 
name Ahura'Mazda, for he was believed in 
heaven, to be the same God, even I'hua'- 
Mazda, that inspired Zarathustra. And 
mortals also, living and dying in this be- 
lief, could not be convinced otherwise. 
And when their spirits left their mortal 
bodies, Ahura's angels took them to the 
heavenly city of Ctusk, where they beheld 
its glory, shining and magnificent. And 
they took them in sight of Ahura's throne, 
but not near it, and they were obliged to 
crawl on their bellies a long distance even 
for this purpose. 

And the throne was kept radiant with 
perpetual fire. Then they were made to 
re-crawl their way back again, until out 
of the city. After that it was said unto 
them: Behold, we have shown thee Ahu- 
ra'Mazda's heavenly city and the glory of 
his throne. Himself thou canst not behold 
till thou hast performed the service which 
is required of all souls entering heaven. 
Nor canst thou come again to this city, 
most brilliant, majestic, till thou hast 
served under thy Lords and masters thy 
allotted time. After that thou shalt come 



here and dwell in peace and rest and hap- 
piness forever! 

And these spirits knew not otherwise, 
nor would they believe, if told; and they 
thus willingly made slaves of themselves 
hundreds of years, carrying provender, or 
doing drudgery to certain masters who 
were again serving the Lords and the sub- 
Gods, going through the same rites and 
ceremonies in heaven as they were accus- 
tomed to on earth. 

But Jehovih provideth for all things, 
wiser than the wisest Gods. He created 
His creations with a door on every side, 
full of glory and freedom. And out of the 
substance of earth and atmospherea con- 
joined, He created the animal and vegeta- 
ble kingdoms. And the trees of the earth, 
and the flesh of animals he created out of 
the elements of these two — earth and at- 
mospherea. 

And Jehovih created them that in death 
the corporeal elements should revert to 
the respective places where they belong. 
And in the death of a vegetable or of an 
animal, when the atmospherean part fleth 
upward, it carries with it a small part of 
the dust of the earth. Thus the earth giv- 
eth away of its substance into atmospher- 
ea, and in course of time, the fields become 
barren and produce not, and animals be- 
come barren and cease to propagate and 
their species go out of existence. 

And Jehovih created man subject to 
the same forces, and when Earth is in this 
period of giving off man loses his desire 
for the earth, and crieth out for the light 
of heaven. This giving off period lasts for 
hundreds of years. Then cometh a time 
for Earth to receive, and for hundreds of 
years the atmosphere becomes surcharged 
with substance from the regions far away, 
and when it is thus receiving it is called 
the time of a'ji, because that which falleth 
is a'ji. When a'ji cometh upon the earth, 
the drujas come also. The days of the 
darkness of earth are their delight; their 
harvest is in the rich falling a'ji; it suiteth 
their laziness and their inclination to live 
in idleness. They become in those days 
like an over-fed animal; and to their mas- 
ters, the false Gods, they become worth- 
less, for they derive their sustenance with- 
out labor. A'ji is their delight; but they 
are also like a foolish man drinking wine 



228 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



with delight, who continueth till his de- 
light turneth to madness. So the dm- 
jas feast and disobey their masters; and 
then they become boisterous and unruly, 
full of disorder and evil intent, defiant, be- 
lieving themselves to be Gods and God- 
desses. Like a beggar with a pocket full 
of money, who lacketh discipline, and de- 
termineth to glut his passions to the fill, 
so it is with the drujas in the time of a'ji. 

Thus Ahura counted without Jehovih; 
in his heart he had conceived great power 
in his kingdom; but the long a'ji told upon 
his heavenly places seriously. His sub- 
Gods no longer paid him tribute, to sup- 
port in ease and glory his five million her- 
alds, his five million musicians, his five 
million ceremonious paraders, giving and 
providing for them constantly new cos- 
tumes and new palaces and new decora- 
tions. So, first one and then another of 
his sub-Gods revolted; and Ahura was 
powerless to enforce obedience, for so 
dense was a'ji that whomsoever Ahura 
sent forth only reveled in sumptuous feast- 
ings. And it came to pass that, af- 
ter a'ji set in, over six hundred of Ahu- 
ra's sub-Gods had dissolved all connection 
with him; and of the two hundred yet re- 
maining, who were situated close about 
Ctusk, Ahura's heavenly place, not ten of 
them could be relied upon in emergency. 

At this time Ahura resolved upon re- 
gaining his lost dominions, and it was like 
a man having lost heavily at the games, 
resolving to win or lose all. Accordingly, 
Ahura set his workmen to building parade 
ships, fifty thousand. He said unto his re- 
maining sub-Gods: Behold, I will tra- 
verse the heavens in such magnificence and 
glory that all angels and mortals shall fall 
down and worship me. And surely, too, 
this time of a'ji must come to an end; and 
in that day I will remember those that 
have been faithful to me. And I will also 
remember, with a curse, those who have 
been unfaithful to me. 

For fourteen years the workmen were 
building Ahura's fleet, and yet they had 
built but thirty thousand ships. For so 
great was the desertion of his skilled men 
that failure met him on all sides. But 
with these thirty thousand ships Ahura 
determined to travel throughout all the at- 
mospherean heavens. Accordingly, he 



called together his heralds, five million; his 
musicians, five million; his masters of cere- 
monies, five million; his masters of rites, 
five million; his marshals, ten million; his 
captains, twenty million; his generals, 
three million; his Lords, one million, and 
of his sub-Gods, one hundred and fifty, 
with their attendants, twenty "million; his 
bearers of trophies, ten million; his light- 
makers, ten million; his waterers, ten mill- 
ion; his torch-bearers, five million; his 
body-guard, thirty million. Besides these 
there were the bearers of banners, the pro- 
claimed, the road-makers, the surveyors, 
the directors, and so on, more than fifty 
million. And yet the traveling hosts, one 
hundred million, and waiters for them, 
one hundred million. In all there were 
upward of four hundred million spirits 
that went within the thirty thousand ships, 
and the ships were not full. 

And the ships traveled in the form of a 
pyramid, but not touching one another, 
and yet fastened together. And the base 
of the pyramid was four hundred miles 
wide every way, and four hundred miles 
high. And the belt of light around about 
the pyramid was a thousand miles in diam- 
eter every way; and it was ballasted to run 
within fifty miles of the earth's surface. 

Thus set out Ahura for a whole year's 
cruise in atmospherea; and wherever he 
went he proclaimed himself thus: Ahura'- 
Mazda, the Creator! The Only Begotten 
Son of the Unknowable! Behold, I come; 
I, the Creator! I have come to judge hea- 
ven and earth! Whoever is for me I will 
raise up to Nirvana; whoever is against 
me I will cast into hell. 

The pyramid reflected light in its trav- 
el; and Ahura's emissaries on earth used 
this as a testimony that all things were 
about to come to an end; the earth to be 
cast out, and heaven and hell to be filled 
up with spirits, each to its place, according 
to its obedience or disobedience to Ahura'- 
Mazda. On the other hand, Ahura's re- 
volted sub-Gods laughed at him; and, as 
for the over-fed and debauched drujas, 
they mocked at him. So it came to pass 
that when Ahura visited his revolted sub- 
Gods in their kingdoms, in stead of re- 
gaining their allegiance, he was sent on his 
way with hisses and groans. And yet 
never since Earth and her heavens were, 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



229 



had there been such great show and pa- 
geantry. 

Before Ahura had visited half the king- 
doms in atmospherea he foresaw the futil- 
ity of his project; the probable downfall of 
his own mighty kingdoms began to break 
in on his heart. Enthusiasm for his name 
was on the wane, and all his magnificence 
had failed to restore him to what he had 
been. 

Now, whilst he was absent from Ctusk, 
the capital of his kingdoms, he had deput- 
ed Fravaitiwagga to reign in his stead, 
and to maintain the order and glory of his 
throne. Fravaitiwagga was a deserter 
from God's Haienne colony in Haraiti, 
where he had been educated two hundred 
years, and was expert in primary surveys, 
and buildings, but impatient for advance- 
ment beyond his capacity. He had now 
been with Ahura three hundred years, 
learning little, but feasting and frolicking, 
being a great flatterer of Ahura, and given 
to long speeches and flowery words. 

Whilst Fravaitiwagga was on the 
throne, and after the departure of Ahura 
on his excursion, there came to him one 
Ootgowski, a deserter from Hestir.ai in 
Zeredho, who had been in Ahura's ser- 
vice a hundred and fifty years, but banished 
from his heavenly place by Ahura on ac- 
count of gluttony and drunkenness, since 
which time he had been a wandering spirit, 
dwelling sometimes in one kingdom and 
then in another, and oft visiting the earth 
and gaining access to the oracles, and even 
to mortal priests, where he represented 
himself, sometimes as Ahura'Mazda, some- 
times as God, sometimes a favorite Lord, 
sometimes Fragapatti, and Thor, and 
Osire, and, in fact, any name he chose, is- 
suing decrees and commandments to mor- 
tals, then going away to return no more. 

Ootgowski came to Fravaitiwagga, and 
he said unto him: Greeting to thee, O 
God, in the name of Ahura'Mazda! Be- 
hold, I am sent to thee in great haste by 
our Creator, Ahura; who commandeth thy 
presence in the province of Veatsagh, 
where is holden a mighty Council with 
Ahura's re-affiliated sub-Gods. What pre- 
ferment Ahura'Mazda hath fashioned for 
thee I know not. To this Fravaitiwagga 
answered as followeth, to-wit: 



Who art thou, and from what king- 
dom? And above all, why art thou come 
without heralds and attendants? To this 
Ootgowski answered, saying: Behold me! 
Knowest thou not me? I am Haaron, God 
of Sutuyotha! Who else could come so 
quickly? W T ho else but I runneth fearless- 
ly unattended betwixt the kingdoms of the 
Gods? 

Fravaitiwagga had been drunk many 
days, and was so dazed with the pretentious 
Ootgowski that he took for granted that 
he was indeed Haaron, a great friend to 
Ahura. Fravaitiwagga called his Council 
together and appointed Semmes to be a 
God in his stead; and so Fravaitiwagga de- 
parted in an arrow-ship, with messengers, 
for Veatsagh, which lie in an entirely dif- 
ferent direction to where Ahura was trav- 
eling. Semmes, the deputized God of 
Ctusk, was faithful to his office for four 
days, and then proclaimed recreation until 
the trumpet call from the throne. And in 
this interval the debauchee, Ootgowski, 
obtained access to the floor of the inner 
chamber, and induced Semmes to accom- 
pany him, carrying off all the costly gems 
and jewels of the throne! And when with- 
out the capital, they embarked with their 
plunder in an arrow-ship to some unknown 
region. 

For many days the members of the 
Council waited for the trumpet call, but 
not hearing it, resolved to learn the cause. 
And after diligent search, not finding Sem- 
mes, but discovering that the throne had 
been plundered of its valuables, they were 
thrown into great confusion. In two days 
after this the throne was destroyed, the 
Council divided and gone, and the heaven- 
ly city of Ctusk turned to riot and plunder. 
And there were in Ctusk and near about, 
upward of four thousand million angels 
with no God, nor leader, nor any head 
whatsoever. Thus it came to pass that Je- 
hovih took the throne from Ahura, as had 
been prophecied. 

And whilst this was going on, Ahura 
was away with his pyramid fleet, being 
discomfited wherever he went. But in two 
hundred and twelve days after his depart- 
ure on his journey, messengers came to 
him and told him what had happened in 
Ctusk. Ahura gave orders to sail at 



230 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATT1 



once for his capital; which was done, and 
his pyramid fleet hastened with all possible 
speed. Suffice it, in a few days he was 
back in Ctusk, a witness to the rioting and 
plundering going on. But the majesty 
and splendor of his fleet quieted the peo- 
ple, and restored order for the time being; 
nevertheless he was without a throne and 
without a Council. 

CHAPTER LX. 

During the fall of a'ji, God decreed to 
his Lord Gods, to his Gods and Lords, 
and Goddesses, as follows: As ye have 
gathered of the rising atmospherean part 
of the living earth-substance, so shall ye 
now turn for your regimen above. It is in 
heaven now like unto the waters of the 
earth. When it raineth not, mortals go to 
the well and fetch up water out of the 
earth; but when it does rain, they go not 
to the well for water, but set out vessels, 
and the rain filleth them. So, in the times 
of dan, our hosts bring their regimen up 
from the earth. Wherein ye have many 
employed as laborers. Behold now, a'ji 
will rain down upon us sufficient and more 
than sufficient regimen for one hundred 
and eighty years. Suffer not, therefore, 
your laborers to fall into idleness, for this 
will lead to mischief. But immediately put 
them to other occupations; allow them to 
have no spare time. 

The mathematicians discovered there 
would fall no a'ji in Yaton'te, nor on the 
lands of Guatama. So, God sent from 
several divisions in the heavens laborers 
for those regions. 

Two heavenly kingdoms, Gir-ak-shi 
and Soo'fwa, of Heleste, and Japan, griev- 
ed God more than all the rest. For these 
had become strongholds for Ahura, who 
had pursued the warfare on earth till in 
those two great divisions all the Zarathus- 
trians had been put to death. And the 
mortal kings of those countries had issued 
laws commanding all people to be put to 
death who professed the Great Spirit, Or- 
mazd. And the law had been carried out 
effectually. 

So God bewailed Soo'fwa with lamen- 
tations. He said: O Japan, my beloved, 
down stricken! How can I restore to thee 
mortal seed? Thou art afar; no man on 
thy soil heareth the Creator's voice! How 



can I carry her; she lieth down with cold 
feet. Whilst God lamented, the voice of 
the Father came to him, saying: Hear Me 
in My wisdom, O My Son. I will not suf- 
fer Ahura to go thither. Withdraw thy 
guards from the evilest of men. Suffer 
him to go his way. Ahura shall be brought 
home before he visiteth Soo'fwa and Gir- 
ak-shi. 

God perceived; and he sent messengers 
to the guard over Ootgowski, saying to 
them: When ye come to the guard, even 
to the captains, ask permission to speak to 
Ootgowski. And the captain will permit. 
Whereupon, ye shall say to Ootgowski: 
My son, thou earnest hither, saying: Put 
a guard over me, for I am obsessed of Sa- 
tan. And God appointed a guard over 
thee. In this day, behold, God sendeth to 
thee, saying: I will no longer guard Oot- 
gowski. For his glory he shall enter the 
kingdoms of Jehovih and become a work- 
er for righteousness' sake. 

When the messengers had said this 
much to Ootgowski, the latter said unto 
them: God is wise; I volunteered to have 
myself put under guard, but I am tired 
thereof. Say to God, his Lords and sub- 
Gods, I will come to Jehovih's kingdoms 
and work, for righteousness' sake. But 
yet a little while I desire rest and travel. 
So Ootgowski was granted freedom pur- 
posely, and of his own accord he went and 
destroyed the foundations of Ahura's 
throne, as hath been told. And Ahura 
thus hastened home without completing 
the travel of the heavens. 

Jehovih said: Let them call the Cre- 
ator Ahura'Mazda, and call Ahura'Mazda 
the Creator. Since He hath not shown 
Himself in a ship, or in the figure of a 
man, behold, thy inspirers shall teach His 
Ever Presence. 

God perceived, and a record of the 
name was made and entered in the librar- 
ies of heaven. And God looked abroad and 
saw that the same thing was even so in 
Gir-ak-shi and Heleste. And God entered 
this also in the libraries of heaven. And 
the reading thereof, translated, is as fol- 
loweth: In the land of Heleste, the high- 
est, most sacred name of the Great Spirit, 
the Creator, was decreed by God to be 
Mazda; and the same thing is decreed of 
Japan. 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



231 



Hence it was known from that time 
forth that the origin of the word Master, 
as applied to the Creator, sprang from 
those two countries only, and no other di- 
vision of the earth. Of this matter God 
said: In thousands of years this word 
shall be testimony to mortals of the war 
in heaven of this day, which reached not 
to the heavens of these two lands. 

So God had no footing in Japan nor in 
Heleste, nor had he sufficient power to es- 
tablish a God or Lord in either country, 
or in the heavens belonging to them. And 
when Diva assembled, God propounded 
this matter, on which the fourteen mem- 
bers spake at length. And then Div de- 
creed: To the swift messengers in at- 
tendance, and through them to the ether- 
ean Goddess, Cpenta-armij, deploring of 
Diva in Jehovih's name: Two heavenly 
kingdoms and two corporeal divisions have 
walled themselves about in idolatry. A'ji 
hath yet six years, and dawn twenty-six. 

In thirty days thereafter the star-ship, 
Gee'onea, from Haot-saiti, in etherea, 
made its appearance in the heavens above, 
first observed on the borders of the bridge 
of Chinvat. God sent immediately a swift- 
rising Ometr to meet the star-ship and 
conduct it to Craoshivi, whither he had 
gone with one of his transports, with two 
hundred million, well selected, to found 
a new city in heaven. In three days' time 
the star-ship landed in Craoshivi with one 
million laborers provided to endure till 
the coming dawn. 

After due salutations, Os, chief captain 
of the ethereans, said unto God: In Jeho- 
vih's name am I come to possess the hea- 
venly places, Soo'fwa and Gir-ak-shi, and 
their lands, Japan and Heleste. This work 
must be accomplished before dawn; be- 
fore the coming of Cpenta-armij. Send 
thou, therefore, thy messengers who know 
the places, that I may conduct my hosts 
thither to labor. 

God then gave messengers to Os, and 
the latter departed and went to the king- 
doms named; and it so happened, by the 
wisdom of Jehovih, that this took place at 
the same time that Ahura had returned 
and found his capital and throne demolish- 
ed. Hence Ahura was powerless to inter- 
fere with the labor of Os and his hosts. 
So Os divided his forces and possessed 



both Soo'fwa and Gir-ak-shi, together with 
the divisions of the earth belonging there- 
unto. And Os possessed the corporeal 
temples of worship, and the places of the 
oracles, and all places for consulting spir- 
its. And he taught not the name of Je- 
hovih, nor of the Great Spirit, nor of the 
Father; for none of these would be receiv- 
ed. But this he taught; thus he extolled; 
thus inspired of the Mazda, the Creator; 
of the Voice that spake to Zarathustra, the 
All Pure. To goodness and good works; 
to self-denial and love; to justice and 
truth; of mercy and obedience to the all 
highest light in the soul. 

CHAPTER LXI. 

But even Gods fail at times. For by 
failures do all persons learn there are 
higher powers. Only Jehovih never fail- 
eth. In the last month of the last year of 
a'ji, even whilst God, Jehovih's Son, and 
his Lord Gods, and his Lords and sub- 
Gods, were proud of heart that they should 
carry Earth and her heavens through safe- 
ly, they met sore trials. 

A comet came within Earth's vortex, 
and was drawn in, even as a floating drift 
is drawn within a whirlpool in a river. 
The substance of the comet was condensed, 
and fell on the earth in mist, and dust and 
ashes. And the earth, and the heavens 
above the earth, were in darkness twelve 
days, and the darkness was so great that 
a man could not see his hand before him. 

And during those days of darkness 
there were more than four score hells 
founded within Ahura's heavenly regions, 
and he was walled about by more than 
three thousand million angels; pilfered 
and stripped of all he had. And his re- 
maining sub-Gods were also bound in hell 
and robbed of all they had. And present- 
ly the angels ran for the spirits of the 
kings and queens who had been tyrants on 
earth, and they caught them, and brought 
them and cast them into hell also, taking 
vengeance on them with stripes and foul 
smells. And hundreds of thousands of 
spirits went and gathered foul smells and 
cast them into hell, and surrounded the 
hells on every side with foul gases, so that 
none could escape. So desperate became 
the madness upon them, that even the tor- 
mentors rushed in, making a frolic of mad- 



232 



CYCLE OF FBAGAPATTI 



ness. And whosoever had ever had an en- 
emy on earth now ran and caught 
him in hada and brought him; and 
they took and cast him into the tor- 
ments of hell And those who had 
been slaves hundreds of years to Ahura 
and his Gods, now caught every one they 
could lay hands on, and dragged them into 
hell. 

As soon as God's messengers came and 
told him what happened, God sent all his 
available forces to overthrow the place if 
possible. Vishnu, full of hope and cour- 
age, sent one-half of his forces to God's 
assistance, thereby risking the guardian- 
ship of the three great mortal kingdoms, 
Vind'yu, Jaffeth and Arabin'ya. And God 
sent messengers to the heavenly kingdoms 
of North and South Guatama, saying to 
the Gods of those places: Behold, Ahura, 
the false, is involved in torments; his hosts 
are upon him; three thousand million! 
Send all above grade seventy at once. To 
Uropa he sent also, saying the same thing, 
and adding thereto: Alas, my little wis- 
dom in sending off a thousand million of 
mine own hosts to Craoshivi at such a 
time! 

Craoshivi was the new plateau, difficult 
of access, and it was scarcely possible to 
recall his hosts in the time required. And 
God summoned the Diva, that they might 
sit for the Father's Voice; and the mem- 
bers came and sat in the usual way, and 
Jehovih spake unto God, saying: 

Peace be unto thee, My Son! Neither 
regret thou that thou sent thy most exalt- 
ed hosts to Craoshivi. Did I not lead thee 
thither? And I said unto thee: Possess 
this place, and send thou thy hosts hither. 
Neither grieve thou because I sent the 
nebulae and the darkness of that time. Is 
it more to thee to behold these things, 
than for mortals to witness the spring 
floods that wash away the summer's com- 
ing harvest? 

To learn to provide against contingen- 
cies, this is wisdom. Yet not All Wisdom 
is in man's heart, nor yet with My Gods. 
How canst thou perceive how it is with 
Ahura's soul, whether this hell be good or 
evil unto him in the end? If thou behold 
My sudden power, how much more must 
not Ahura feel it? Yet thou shalt deliver 
him out of hell; by thy hosts shall he and 



his sub-Gods be delivered. But far great- 
er shall be the torments of his own soul, 
than what his drujas can heap upon him. 
Then God inquired of Jehovih, saying: 
What is the most perfect way, to deliver 
Ahura and his subjects out of hell? 

Jehovih answered him, saying: Whom 
he hath despised, send; whom he hath ill- 
treated, send; whom he hath humbled, 
send. And when thy Lords and Gods are 
come to the place, let these, his abused 
enemies, take the hand of thy Lord or thy 
God, and they shall call out to Me in the 
name, Ormazd, the which name Ahura 
hath tried to destroy for the glory of his 
own. And at the sound of the name, Or- 
mazd, thy hosts shall cast burning light 
into the faces of the drujas, and thus scat- 
ter them away till Ahura be released; and 
he shall witness that he hath been released 
through the name, Ormazd. 

God sent E'chad, and Ah'oan, to de- 
liver Ahura out of hell, and they labored 
four years in accomplishing it, and then 
Ahura was free, and his hosts were divid- 
ed into groups of tens of thousands, and 
hundreds of thousands; and God appoint- 
ed gene-als and captains over them — all 
except eight hundred million drujas that 
escaped from hell and through the guards' 
fires, and descended back to the earth, to 
torment and deceive mortals. 

So Vishnu failed in some degree to save 
the nations of the earth from the approach 
of evil spirits. Jehovih spake to Vishnu, 
comforting, saying: Because thou hast 
helped to deliver Ahura, thou shalt not 
take sorrow to thy heart. What are eight 
hundred million to thee? So Vishnu 
grieved no more. 

Now, during the time of the deliverance 
of Ahura, no less than six knots had been 
tied in hell, and in one of these Ahura 
and his sub-Gods had bcome bound, so 
there was no escape for them. But the 
outer and extreme knots were untied 
first, and as fast as the delirious spirits 
were rescued, they were carried without 
and beyond the fire-walls and placed un- 
der guard. Thus in sections was Ahura's 
hell cast out; and when the deliverers 
came to Ahura and his confederates they 
were all, save Ahura, in a state of chaos, 
frenzied with fear. But Ahura was not be- 
side himself, though in serious fright. Ah'- 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



233 



oan, Lord of Jaffeth, spake to him, saying: 
In the name of God, and of Ormazd, I 
have delivered thee. How is it with thee? 

Ahura said: I am done! I am nothing! 
One God alone can do nothing. Do with 
me whatsoever thou wilt. I am thy ser- 
vant. 

Ah'oan said: Nay, be thou servant to 
none save Ormazd, thy creator. His 
name is the watch-word and the power 
in all the high heavens. By His name 
thou shalt become one among Godly com- 
panions. 

Ahura said: But thou must torment 
me first! Ah'oan said: Wherefore? My 
work is not to cast down but to lift up. 
So it is with all of Ormazd's Gods. Be- 
hold thou here, even thy sub-Gods, and 
such as thou hast in times past evilly used! 
See, they hold up their hands in prayer 
to Ormazd for thee! And is not the way 
of knowing angels and mortals, whether 
they be of the Creator? If they pull down, 
they are not His. If they slander or tor- 
ment, or speak evil of one another, or 
give pain, they are not His. How, then, 
shall I not do good for thee and restore 
thee to thy kingdom? 

Ahura said: Give me anything, but 
give me not my kingdom again; for of all 
torments this is the worst. Ah'oan said: 
Wouldst thou evilly treat them that had 
been thy subjects? If so, thou art not of 
the everlasting resurrection. 

Ahura said: Nay, I would see them 
not forever! I would hear them not, 
know them not forever. If, therefore, 
thou wilt do me good instead of evil, I 
pray thee take me afar off and alone, that 
I may meditate forever on the horrors I 
have passed through. 

Ah'oan said: Hear me now, once for 
all, and I speak in the name of the Great 
Spirit, Ormazd: Because thou hast 
served thyself and compelled others to 
serve thee for nearly two thousand years, 
thou hast become blind to the Ormazdian 
law, which is: That thine own peace and 
happiness can only come by making res- 
toration to thy servants, and by lifting up 
those whom thou hast cast down. How 
can I deliver thee away from them? I 
may take away thy person, but I cannot 
deliver thy memory. No man can be de- 
livered from himself. One way only is 



open for thee under the Ormazdian law; 
which is, that thou shalt take thy king- 
dom again, and deliver it unto righteous- 
ness, intelligence and good works. Serv- 
ing Ormazd by doing good unto them 
whom the Creator gave thee. Many of 
them have served thee more than a thous- 
and years,; wouldst thou now cast them 
off without recompense? 

Ahura said: Thou art just, O Ormazd! 
I perceive the wisdom of Thy Gods, and 
the bondage of man. Take me, O Ah'oan, 
put me in a way to carry out this great 
light. 

Ah'oan said: Hear thou thy sentence, 
in the name of Ormazd, the Creator; 
thou shalt be taken to a place of safety, 
which E'chad shall select; and thither shall 
thy most exalted people be taken, and put 
to work and to school, and in nurseries 
and hospitals; and thou shalt go about 
amongst them, teaching and encouraging 
them in industry and righteousness, for 
Ormazd's sake. And when thou hast cer- 
tain ones disciplined in this way, thou 
shalt receive another installment of thy 
people, and they shall be disciplined in 
the same way. And then another install- 
ment, and so on, until thou hast all thy 
kingdom. 

And that thou shalt be successful, 
these, my Lords, and generals, and cap- 
tains, shall go with thee and labor with 
thee and thy hosts. - And thou and thy 
people shall have no ornaments; and your 
raiment shall be light gray, alike and like, 
teachers and pupils, save when especially 
ordered otherwise by God and his depu- 
ties. 

And when thou and the majority of 
thy hosts have risen above grade fifty, 
thou shalt be crowned in the name of Or- 
mazd, and thy kingdoms shall have a 
throne, and thou shalt be one amongst 
the united hosts of the higher heavens. 
Till then, go thou to thy labors diligently, 
and may Ormazd abide with thee in wis- 
dom and power. 

Ahura said: Thou art just, O Ormazd. 
I will henceforth, forever, serve Thee with 
all my wisdom and strength! 

And then E'chad and his attendants 
led the way, and the marshals and gener- 
als and captains brought Ahura's hosts, 
the first installment, and they went to a 



234 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



place called Ailkin, a heavenly place cap- 
able of seven thousand million, and there 
they founded the new colony for Ahura. 
But Ah'oan and his hosts continued their 
labors in delivering the hells, until they 
delivered the four score, and placed all 
the spirits under guard and discipline. 

CHAPTER LXII. 

Thus the cycle of Fragapatti drew to a 
close, being three thousand one hundred 
years. And at this time there were but 
few people on earth or in heaven, even 
Druks and drujas, but were capable of ev- 
erlasting life. 

Jehovih spake to God, saying: Now 
shalt thou enumerate the inhabitants of 
earth and heaven, as to all that I have 
created capable of everlasting life; and of 
My harvests since the habitation of Earth, 
when man first walked upright. And their 
numbers shall be entered in the libraries 
of heaven, to remain forever. 

So God called together a Council of 
mathematicians, and they numbered mor- 
tals and angels, and recorded their num- 
ber in the libraries of heaven. 

In Fragapatti's cycle were born ninety- 
two thousand million mortals on the 
earth. Of these ninety per cent, were 
born to everlasting life. Ten per cent, 
went into dissolution, as a drop of water 
evaporates before the sun and is seen no 
more. 

In Osire's cycle, ninety-one thousand 
million. Of these eighty-seven per cent, 
were born to everlasting life. Thirteen 
per cent, went into dissolution and were 
seen no more. 

In Thor's cycle, eighty-eight thousand 
million. Of these eighty-five per cent, 
were born to everlasting life, and fifteen 
per cent, to dissolution. 

In Apollo's cycle, eighty thousand 
million. Of these seventy-two per cent, 
were born to everlasting life. 

In Sue's cycle, eighty-seven thousand 
million. Of these sixty-two per cent, 
were born to everlasting life, and thirty- 
eight per cent, went into dissolution. 

In Aph' cycle, sixty-six thousand mil- 
ino. Of these fifty-four per cent, were 
born to everlasting life, and forty-six per 
cent, went into dissolution. 



In Neph's cycle, before the submer- 
sion of Pan, one hundred and twenty-four 
thousand million. Of these twenty-one 
per cent, were born to everlasting life, and 
seventy-nine per cent, went into dissolu- 
tion. 

And this comprised one-sixth of the 
people that had been created alive on the 
earth since man walked upright; that is 
three thousand seven hundred sixty-eight 
thousand million. But in the early days 
of man only a small percentage were born 
to everlasting life; and, first of all, only 
one per cent. 

And God gave thanks unto Jehovih, 
the Creator, because all the races of men 
on earth were now capable of everlasting 
life. 

Of the hells and knots springing out 
of hada since the days of Wan, this was 
the proportion: 

In the cycle of Fragapatti, two hun- 
dred and seventy-six hells, of average dur- 
ation, thirty years. Involved in these 
hells, two thousand million angels. Six- 
ty-four knots, of average duration, two 
years. Involved in these knots, one 
thousand million angels. 

In the cycle of Osire, three hundred 
and eighty-nine hells, of average duration, 
four hundred years. Involved in these 
hells, seven thousand million. Two hun- 
dred and twelve knots, of average durat- 
ion, three years. Involved in these knots, 
three thousand million. 

In the cycle of Thor, five hundred and 
ninety-one hells, of average duration, six 
hundred years. Involved in these hells, 
nine thousand million angels. Four hun- 
dred and thirty-six knots, of average dura- 
tion, six years. Involved in these knots, 
four thousand million angels. 

In Apollo's cycle, seven hundred and 
forty two hells, of average duration, eight 
hundred years. Involved in these hells, 
ten thousand million angels. Six hundred 
and four knots, of average duration, 
twelve years. Involved in these knots, 
five thousand million. 

In Sue's cycle, twelve hundred and 
seventy-three hells, of average duration, 
one thousand years. Involved in these 
hells, thirteen thousand million angels. 
One thousand and five knots, of average 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



235 



duration, thirty years. Involved in these 
knots, eight thousand million. 

In Aph's cycle, three thousand five 
hundred hells, of average duration, two 
thousand years. Involved in these hells, 
twenty-eight thonsand million angels. Two 
thousand knots, of average duration, fifty 
years. Involved in these knots, twenty- 
five thousand million. 

And these were the numbers of spirits 
cast into hell and into knots, from the 
submersion of Pan to the end of the cycle 
of Fragapatti; but at the dawn of each and 
every cycle, both the hells and the knots 
were delivered by the etherean Gods. 
Save in Fragapatti's cycle, when they 
were almost entirely delivered by the at- 
mospherean God. 

Prior to the submersion of Pan, com- 
monly called the flood, more than half the 
people entering the es world went into 
hell and into knots. And in all ages of 
the world there have been thousands and 
millions of spirits who delight in hell for 
certain seasons, even as is manifested in 
mortals who delight in debauchery, and 
vengeance, and war. Nor is a hell widely . 
different, as regards the spirit, from what 
war is amongst mortals. And as mortals 
of this day glorify themselves and their 
generals and captains for the magnitude 
of their havoc in war, so in the olden 
times, in atmospherea, there were such 
great boastings and laudations for such as 
inflicted the greatest torments and hor- 
rors in hell. 

And as mortals of the Druk order oft 
leave their evil ways for a season, and be- 
come upright and virtuous, loving decen- 



cy and righteousness, and then break faith 
and indulge in a season of debauchery, 
so in the es world has it been with mill- 
ions and thousands of millions of angels. 
In one day the teachers and physicians 
were rejoicing before Jehovih because of 
the steadfastness of their wards to right- 
eousness; and in the next day were left to 
deplore the loss of hundreds and thous- 
ands who had broken faith and gone off 
for indulgence's sake in some of the hells. 
And these had to be rescued, persuaded, 
threatened and coaxed back again and 
again to the nurseries and hospitals, or to 
the factories and colleges. Neither know- 
eth any one, save Jehovih, the labor and 
fretting and anxiety that were undergone 
by the teachers and physicians, and Lords 
and Gods, who had such drujas in charge. 
For even as it is beholden on earth that 
men of great learning and high estate oft 
fall, becoming lower than the beasts of 
the field, so in heaven were there hun- 
dreds of thousands, and even millions, oft 
high raised in the grades, that would 
stumble and fall into the lowest of hells, 
and even into the knots. 

Now, up to the last, God and his Lords 
maintained the Diva; and mortals some- 
what understood the matter, that there 
were certain laws in heaven that ruled over 
mortal kingdoms and empires. So that 
the words Div and Diva, and Divan laws, 
began to be realized as a concerted power 
in heaven greater than man's power. 

So Jehovih brought Earth and her 
heavens into another dawn of dan, in the 
arc of Spe'ta, in the Nirvanian roads of 
Salkwatka, in etherea. 




LORDS' RECORD FOR DAWN OK DAN 



CHAPTER I. 

In the beginning of the cycle of Fraga- 
patti, Samati, God of Earth, and her hea- 
vens, was assigned the labor of establish- 
ing the worship of Jehovih upon the earth 
amongst the I'huans. Mortal men had 
turned from their Creator and delighted 
in war. In order to thus establish the 
worship of Jehovih on earth, it had be- 
come necessary to raise up a mortal capa- 
ble of the Voice. 

In those days when an army captured 
a large city, slaying the people, they car- 
ried back the spoil to So-qi, king of Oas, 
capital of Par'si'e, and received rewards 
according to the amount of plunder. The 
wars were between the different nations 
of I'huans. The sacred people, the I'hins, 
had nothing for which they could be plun- 
dered; so they were unmolested. 

The I'hin prophet had said: Whoso- 
ever layeth up treasures in this world, 
shall find no peace! But ye have built so 
great a city that ye believe nothing can 
break it down. Now thou shalt see, O 
king, thy city shall prove the weakest of 
cities. There shall be raised up one man 
amongst the I'hins; and Oas, the mighty 
city, shall fall before his hand. 

I'hua'Mazda, God of Earth, sent cer- 
tain loo'is to look around, and afterward 
he called them and asked what they saw. 
They said: Work! Work! I'hua'Mazda 
said: Work it shall be. Go ye, holy mas- 
ters of generations, down to mortals close 
around about the city of Oas. And search 
ye out the seed of the I'hin race, and by 
inspiration lead them to the fairest daugh- 
ters of I'hua, in the City of Oas; and they 
shall be tempted, and a quickened fruit 
shall ripen in the city, sons and daughters. 
Again go ye to the I'hins and by inspira- 
tion bring others and have them tempted 
by the improved fruit. And yet again re- 
peat this method, and in the sixth genera- 
tion ye shall raise up a son having the 
gifts of su'is and sar'gis, and ye shall call 
him Zarathustra. 



The loo'is went and accomplished what 
had been commanded by God. And the 
child's mother's name was Too'che, and 
the father's name was Lo'ab. Too'che 
was su'is-born herself, and was obsessed 
by Sa'moan, an angel, before she conceiv- 
ed, and during the time of maternity not 
allowed to wake from her unconscious 
trance. And by the loo'is, her soul was oft 
taken to heaven to behold its glories, and 
then to return and inhabit her own body. 
Thus, the child was born in light, and 
on the day of its birth the obsession fled, 
and Too'che proclaimed within the city 
that no man was father to the child, but 
that she conceived from the All Light, so 
believing, because unconscious in gesta- 
tion. 

The learned men cast the horoscope, 
but found nothing in the stars to alarm the 
kings, or worthy of credence to the maid- 
en's story. 

The loo'is went before God, saying: 
Behold, a child is born capable of All 
Light. Then spake God, saying: I will 
come. Go ye and lead the way. 

CHAPTER II. 

When yet the child, Zarathustra, nursed, 
I'hua'Mazda spake through the child whilst 
its own spirit slept. Then again came the 
learned men, chief of whom was Asha, son 
of Zista, learned in a thousand stars and all 
living creatures, and in the bones of ani- 
mals no longer living. So Asha spake to 
Too'che, saying: Can thy suckling talk? 
Whereupon God answered him, saying: 
Not the child, but I, I'hua'Mazda. Think 
not, O man, these small lips utter words 
prompted by this child's soul. I am come 
to stay the cruel hand of war; to make 
man know there is an Unseen Master! 
Behold, this child hath no sex! It is an 
iesu, a passionless birth! 

To which Asha said: Can it be this wo- 
man hath a man hidden under her cloak, 
and hopes to evade the just punishment 
of the king? O, thou harlot! Thou told- 
est a shameful tale of conception without a 



CYCLE OF FRACAPATTI 



LORDS' RECORD 



237 



man! Thy lies are now added to others to 
make good the first. Out of the city, 
wretch, or thou shalt be stoned to death, 
and thy child with thee! 

Too'che made no answer, save with a 
flood of tears. Then spake I'hua'Mazda, 
saying: Hold thy hand on these lips, and 
perceive how I gesticulate with these lit- 
tle hands. Yea, take thou the little form 
in thine own arms. 

Then Asha feared, but fain would hide 
his fear, and so ,took the child, whilst 
I'hua'Mazda spake, saying: O man, that 
thou couldst behold the spirit and would 
temper thy judgment down to patience and 
wisdom! 

Asha said: If it be truth thou art the 
Mazda of the I'huan race, why hast thou 
come in so questionable weakness? What 
can a child do? Wieldest thou a sword 
with these little hands? I had hoped to 
see a God come in strength, and in majes- 
ty. 

I'hua'Mazda said: My wisdom is not 
man's wisdom; my weapons, not arrows 
and sharp swords! What is great in man's 
judgment is as nothing to me; what is as 
nothing to man, I will make great, for I 
shall overturn this mighty city. Because 
I am come in peace and love, the city shall 
be divided, man against man, and bloody 
war run riot in this walled kingdom. 

Asha said: To what end art thou come? 
For if it betrue that thou art a God born 
in this questionable shape, thou hast some 
motive more than to overthrow the city. 
I charge thee, then, most precious youth, 
tell me what thy purpose is, that justice 
may be done. 

I'hua'Mazda said: The cities of man 
are as nothing in my sight; I come to 
teach man of other worlds, and that the 
souls of the righteous shall live forever, I 
come to deliver man from darkness into 
everlasting light. 

Asha said: Thy words are wisdom, or 
else my sudden surprise hath unfitted my 
judgment. I will go now, that I may re- 
flect on this wonder. To-morrow I will 
come again. Keep this matter quietly. 
For if it be known that I, of so high es- 
tate, have talked in temperance on spirit- 
ual things, I will be doomed to death. 



CHAPTER III. 

When Asha had gone, I'hua'Mazda 
spake to Too'che, saying: Take thou thy 
child away and hide thyself lest the king 
have thee and thy child put to death. 
So Too'che departed with her child, and 
hid in another part of the city. 

Now Asha went direct to So-qi, the 
king, and related what had transpired. 
When he had finished the king said: Ac- 
cording to the histories of the ancients, 
when a God appeared amongst mortals, 
there were signs and miracles. Thou hast 
told me only words. Go, therefore, again 
to the child and say: The king desireth a 
miracle. 

Asha returned the next day, but the 
woman and child were gone and not one 
of the neighbors knew whither. Asha said: 
If I go before the king with this story, he 
will have me slain as an inventor of lies. 
So he returned not to the king. 

But where Too'che and her child 
dwelt, there came a maker of songs, by 
name Choe'jon, and he spake to the moth- 
er, saying: Where is the child? She an- 
swered: He sleepeth in the rack of hay; 
I will' bring him. So she brought the 
child from its bed of straw, and sticking 
to its mantle were straws that had no 
roots. 

I'hua'Mazda spake through the child, 
saying: I came to thee, O Choe'jon; I 
brought thee hither, for thou shalt frame 
songs about this babe. Choe'jon was 
frightened, but nevertheless he said: Can 
this be true, in this enlightened age? A 
miracle! Shall I talk to thee, O child? 
Then I'hua'Mazda said: Behold, thou 
speakest not to the child, but to I'hua'- 
Mazda. Take these straws to thy writing 
box and plant them in new earth, and in 
one day they shall grow and bear ripe 
wheat. So Choejon departed and planted 
the straws, and in one day, they grew 
and bore ripe wheat. 

Choe'jon had sung his songs before the 
king, and so had permission of the court; 
and he went and told the king of the mir- 
acle. The king said: The philosopher, 
Asha, told me about this child, and I sent 
him for a miracle, but he returneth not. 
Thou hast come and said: Behold, a mir- 
acle! What value is a miracle save to 



238 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



LORDS' RECORD 



those who witness it? Shall thy king ac- 
cept a thing in belief only? Go, therefore, 
again to the child and bring it before me, 
that I may see with mine own eyes. 

Choe'jon returned to the place, but 
behold, mother and child were gone; nei- 
ther knew the neighbors whither. But 
she was concealed in another part of the 
city. And now there came before her one 
Os'shan, who was weeping because of the 
apparent death of his son. To him I'hua'- 
Mazda spake, saying: Weep not, O man; 
I have healed thy son and also given sight 
to thy daughter. 

Os'shan trembled at such words coming 
from the lips of a child, and he ran home, 
finding of a truth his son was healed, and 
his daughter restored to sight. In his joy 
he returned to the place, but mother and 
child were gone. Os'shan was hostler to 
the king, and capable of audience, and so 
he went and told the king of his good 
fortune. 

The king said: Asha, the philosopher, 
told me a fine story of this child, but when 
I sent him for information he returned 
not. Then came Choe'jon, the maker of 
songs, telling me what he had witnessed. 
I sent him to have mother and child 
brought before me, but he returned not. 
Now thou comest with a miracle, such as 
were told in the dark ages. Go thou, there- 
fore, and search the city over till thou 
findest this wonder and bring it before 
me. 

On the next day another man, the 
king's brother's son, came before the 
king, saying: This day I have seen such 
a wonder as would have been marvelous 
in the days of angels and Gods. Behold, 
a little child hath spoken such words of 
philosophy to me as to make me tremble. 
And yet, O king, thou knowest I am no 
coward. My house is hung with a hundred 
scalps. And this child already proclaim- 
ed Zarathustra in communion with God, 
I'hua'Mazda? To me it said: Why killest 
thou the sons and daughters of thy God? 
Think not that thy multitude of scalps are 
a glory before heaven. Behold, I am 
stronger with my little finger than So-qi, 
thy king. 

So-qi, the king, said: It is enough! 
Save this mother and child be brought at 
once before me, that I may behold the 



truth of these wonders, every male child 
in Oas shall be cast into fire! The king's 
brother's wife was with child, and the son's 
wife was with child, and they foresaw that 
the decree of the king touched them close- 
ly; so there went forth many searching for 
Too'che and Zarathustra. But I'hua'- 
Madza, directed the mother to go beyond 
the gates, and led her far into the Forest 
of Goats, where the tribes of Listians 
lived. I'hua'Mazda talked to the mother, 
saying: Twenty years shalt thou tarry in 
the forest, fearing naught, for thy God will 
provide for thee. And when thy son shall 
be larger and stronger than other men, be- 
hold, thy God will manifest for the re- 
demption of the races of men who are 
hunted and slain for the glory of the 
kings. 

So it came about that the mother and 
her son dwelt in the Forest of Goats until 
Zarathustra was a large man and of ma- 
ture years, and his size was equal to three 
ordinary men; nor could any number of 
men lay him on his back. 

CHAPTER IV. 

When So-qi, the king, issued the de- 
cree to have Zarathustra found and 
brought before him, otherwise all the male 
infants of Oas to be slain, the Lords sent 
travail on the king's wife and on the 
king's daughter, wife of Asha, the philos- 
opher, and the two women gave birth that 
same day to two sons, a month before 
their time, but nevertheless unto life and 
strength and beauty. Now, according to 
the laws of Oas, a king could not change 
his own decrees, for he had assumed the 
position of infallibility, whereupon he had 
doomed to death his own son and kin. 
Accordingly, after search had been made 
in vain to find Zarathustra, the king re- 
pented of his decree, but knew no way to 
justify a change of commandment. Asha, 
hearing of this, came out of concealment, 
saying to himself: Now will I go to the 
king and hold him to his dreree, even de- 
manding that he slay me also. 

So Asha came before So-qi, and after 
saluting, said: O king, I have- heard of 
thy strait, and am come to thee that I may 
counsel thee. 

The king was angered, and he said: 
Asha, thou earnest before me relating a 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



LORDS' RECORD 



239 



marvelous story regarding an infant son 
of a virgin who said she never knew man. 
Now, according to the laws of the City of 
the Sun, any man stating for truth that 
which he cannot prove, is already adjudg- 
ed to death. Shall not the law be fulfilled, 
because, forsooth, thou art near me in 
blood? 

Asha said: Most assuredly, O king, 
the laws must be carried out. Are they 
not the all highest? For it followeth that 
man being the all highest, his laws, above 
all else, must never be set aside. Therefore, 
thou shalt have me slain. Think not I 
am come before thee to plead an excuse in 
order to save myself; rather let all men 
perish than that the king's decrees go 
amiss. 

The king said: Thou art wise, O Asha. 
The laws cannot err, for they are the 
standard by which to judge all else. And 
he who hath risen to be king standeth by 
nature the infallible highest of all things. 
History hath proven this. But yet hear 
me, thou who hast wisdom from the move- 
ments of the sun and moon and stars; the 
king, being the all highest, how can he be 
bound? Cannot he decree new decrees 
forever? 

Asha said: I will not deceive thee, O 
king. I know thou art arguing not for 
me, but for thine own infant son, and for 
thy daughter's infant son. Neither have I 
come before thee in prowess, though I 
love life. But here is the matter: If thou 
change one law, thou admittest that all 
laws made by man may also, need chang- 
ing; which is to say, that wisdom is folly. 
How, then, shall the judge judge any man 
by the laws? Is it not setting up error in 
order to find truth? 

The king said: Thou reasonest well. 
Methought this morning, in my walk in 
the market gardens, when the soldiers 
were spreading the scalps of their enemies 
in the sun to dry, whether or not, in ages 
to come, the weaker nations and tribes 
of men might not attempt to justify their 
right to life. And were the kings to admit 
the fallibility of their decrees and laws, no 
man can foresee the end; for even slaves, 
servants and women will rise up against 
the laws, and claim their right to life. 
Wherein, then, would the world be large 
enough for all the people? Yet, wherefore, 



O Asha, cometh this heartache of mine 
against killing mine own son? 

Asha said: What are thy sympathies, 
O king? If thou wert to justify the es- 
cape of thy child's life for sympathy, would 
not my wife and my children justify their 
sympathy in desiring me to live? Nay, 
sympathy is the enemy of law and jus- 
tice. It is the evil in our natures that 
crieth out for evil. The laws must be 
maintained; the decrees must be maintain- 
ed; the king's word must be maintained. 
No man must suffer his judgment to go 
higher than the law, or the decrees of the 
king. This is the City of the Sun. If this 
city repudiate its own laws, what will not 
the tributary cities do? Will not they also 
begin to disrespect the laws, or say: Per- 
haps the laws are in error? This will come 
to anarchy. To one purpose only can a 
great kingdom be maintained. To divide 
the purposes and judgment of men is to 
scatter the glory of our civil liberty. Was 
it not disrespect of the laws, combined 
with superstition, that caused the nations 
of ancients to perish? 

The king said: What shall I do, O 
Asha? My son hath smiled in my face! 

Asha said: Thou shalt send me and thy 
son and thy daughter's son, and all male 
infants to the slaughter pen, and have us 
all beheaded and cast into the fire. Other- 
wise, it will come true what the infant 
Zarathustra hath said: Behold, my hand 
shall smite the city of Oas, and it shall fall 
as a heap of straw. Think not, O king, I 
am superstitious and fear such threats; but 
this I perceive; suffer the laws to be im- 
peached, and every man in Oas will set up 
to interpret the laws to be wrong and him- 
self right. And thy officers will rebel 
against thee on all sides, and the glory of 
thy kingdom will perish. 

CHAPTER V. 

So after the city had been searched for 
thirty days, and the mother and child not 
found, the king appointed a day for the 
slaughter according to his former decree, 
and there were ninety thousand male in- 
fants adjudged to death, the king's son 
among the rest. Whilst these matters 
were maturing, the Lord went to Choe'- 
jon, and inspired him to make songs about 
Zarathustra, the infant that was stronger 



240 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



LORDS' RECORI 



than a king. And also songs about the 
decree of death to the ninety thousand 
infant sons of Oas. And the beauty of the 
songs, together with the nature of these 
proceedings, caused the songs to be sung 
in the streets day and night; and the 
songs approved in satire of the horrors, 
so the king could not prevent the singing. 

When the day arrived for the slaughter 
of the male infants, not more than a thou- 
sand mothers appeared at the place of ex- 
ecution with their infants, upward of eigh- 
ty-nine thousand mothers having risen the 
night previous and departed out of the 
gates. 

When the king, who had set apart the 
day as a holiday, arrived at the place of 
execution, and finding only a thousand in- 
fants present, he inquired the reason there- 
for, and having been told, he said: Can it 
be that mothers love their offspring more 
than they respect the decrees of the king? 
Asha was standing near, haying stripped 
himself ready for execution, and he an- 
swered the king, saying: 

Because they love their offspring, is it 
not the love of the flesh? And doth not 
the law stand above all flesh? In this mat- 
ter, then, because they have evaded the 
law, they have also adjudged themselves to 
death. 

Then came Betraj, the king's wife, 
bringing the infant. Betraj said: Here 
is thy son, O king, ready for the sacri- 
fice! Asha reasonest well; there must be 
an All Highest which never erreth! The 
same is the law of the king! Take thou 
thy flesh and blood and prove thy decrees! 
What! Why hesitate? If thou swerve 
from thy purpose, then shalt thou open the 
door for all men to find an excuse against 
the law. Doth not the sun blight a har- 
vest when he will? Yea, and strike dead 
our most beloved? Art thou not descend- 
ed from the Sun Gods? Who will obey 
the laws, if thou, thyself, do not? 

The king said: Behold, it is yet early 
morn. Let the officers go bring all who 
have escaped beyond the walls, and both 
mothers and children shall be put to death. 
Let the proceedings be suspended till then. 

Now there had congregated a vast mul- 
titude, anxious to witness the slaughter; 
and when the king suspended matters, 
there were up cries of disappointment. 



And many said: When a matter toucheth 
the king, he is a coward. The king re- 
turned to his palace, leaving Asha stand- 
ing stripped for the execution. And the 
multitude cried out: More is Asha like 
a king than So-qi! Let us make him king! 
We will not have a sheep for a king. And 
none could stay them, or be heard above 
their noise; and they ran after the king 
and slew him with stones, and they made 
Asha King of the Sun; and there was not 
one infant slain according to the decrees. 

God said: Think not, O man, that 
things happened without a cause, or that 
all things are left to chance. In my 
works I go beforehand and plan the way, 
even more carefully than a captain layeth 
siege to a city. Before Zarathustra was 
born I sent ashars to inspire followers. 
Think not that Asha made his own argu- 
ments; but by virtue of the presence of my 
ashars, he spake and behaved according to 
my commandments without knowing it. 
And even so was it with the king's wife; 
my angels also inspired her to speak be- 
fore the king. And those who fled out of 
the city were inspired by my hosts of an- 
gels. Yet with the king's decree I had no 
part, for I foresaw he would do this of his 
own will. And with the multitude in slay- 
ing the king, I had no part, for I foresaw 
they would do this of their own account. 
Neither would the multitude hear my 
voice, though I had spoken to every man's 
soul; for in them the tetracts were the as- 
cendant power. The multitude slew the 
king because he had gone so far from me 
he heeded me not. And I made Asha king, 
because he came so near me my power 
was with him through my ashars. 

CHAPTER VI. 

Now during the childhood of Zarathus- 
tra, God manifested no more through him; 
but he sent Ejah, one of his Lords, to be 
with Zarathustra, day and night. And 
Ejah taught the infant wisdom in all 
things. When Zarathustra was yet a child, 
the Lord began to manifest through him, 
giving signs and miracles and prophecy 
before the Listians who lived in the Forest 
of Goats. This forest was of the width of 
forty days' journey for a man in all direc- 
tions except the east, and in all that region 
there were no houses, the inhabitants liv- 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATT1 



LORDS' RECORD 



241 



ing in tents made of bark and skins. The 
Lord inspired Zarathustra to teach them to 
build houses, and tame the goats and to 
live in cities; the chief center of their hab- 
itations being on the river Apherteon and 
its tributaries. 

And it was from these inhabitants that 
sprang in after years the migrants called 
Fonece'ans, signifying out of the moun- 
tains. These people were I'huans, but be- 
cause of the cruelties of the Par'si'e'an 
kings they had fled and lived in the for- 
ests. 

The Lord said to Zarathustra: Behold 
the people who fly from the kings! I have 
made them kings over goats and the 
beasts of the fields. And from this time 
forth the Listians styled themselves shep- 
herd kings. And Zarathustra taught them 
that man should have dominion over the 
beasts of the forests, but that no man 
should have dominion over his neighbor. 
Consequently, every man of the Listians 
styled himself a king, and every woman 
styled herself a queen. 

Again, the Lord said to Zarathustra: 
Go thou, my son, whither I will lead thee, 
and thou shalt find a people sacred to the 
Great Spirit. So Zarathustra wandered 
beyond the Forest of Goats, and came to 
Hara'woetchij, to the south of the moun- 
tains of Oe-tahla, where were three large 
cities and twelve small ones, inhabited by 
I 'hins. Now the Lord had been with the 
Thins and foretold of Zarathustra coming. 
The Lord said to the high priest: Thou 
shalt allow Zarathustra to come within the 
walls of the cities for he is pure. 

So Zarathustra went in, and in the 
time of worship before the altar, the Lord 
appeared in a great light and commanded 
the high priest, saying: Behold, I have 
brought my son to thee. Him shalt thou 
anoint as a priest according to the I'hin 
laws; and thou shalt teach him the rites 
and ceremonies of the ancients. Accord- 
ingly Zarathustra was made a priest and 
was otherwise accepted as an I'hin, and be- 
stowed under the rod with water and 
with fire. And he also taught the sacred 
words, and the art of writing and making 
tablets; and of weaving cloth from flax and 
making clothes. Zarathustra remained 
with the I'hins seven years, fasting and 
praying, and singing and dancing before 



the Lord. And then the Lord commanded 
him to return through the Forest of Goats, 
which he did, teaching the Listians wher- 
ever he halted for a rest. 

At the end of another seven years the 
Lord said to Zarathustra: Behold, the 
dawn of light is come! Thou shalt leave 
thy mother with thy people, and I will lead 
thee to the city of thy birth. Zarathustra 
said: Tell me, O Lord, of the city of my 
birth. The Lord said: It is a great city, 
but it shall fall before thy hand; for I'hua'- 
Mazda hath turned his favor away from its 
kings. 

CHAPTER VII. 

In two days' journey Zarathustra came 
to Oas, and entered into the city, and he 
brought no provender with him. Now it 
was a law of Oas, that all strangers com- 
ing into the city, should bring provender 
as a testimony of fidelity to the laws and 
to the king. So, when he came to the 
inner gate, the keeper asked him for pro- 
vender; but Zarathustra answered him, 
saying: Naked I came into the world, 
and Ormazd asketh me not for provender. 
Is thy king greater than thy Creator? 

The keeper said: I know not thy words. 
Shall a servant explain laws? To which 
Zarathustra said: Thou art wise; neither 
shalt thou suffer for disobedience in let- 
ting me pass. The Lord will give thee 
food. When he had spoken thus there fell 
at the feet of the keeper an abundance of 
fruit, and the keeper feared, but stood 
aside, and allowed Zarathustra to pass in. 

The keeper not only told the people 
of the miracle, but told the king also. 
This was Asha, who had reigned since the 
death of So-qi, and no sooner did he hear 
of the miracle than he remembered the 
person whom he had seen in infancy. 
Asha, the king, sent officers at once to find 
Zarathustra, and bring him before the 
court. But the Lord knowing these 
things, inspired Zarathustra to go to the 
king; and accordingly he went himself be- 
fore the officers had returned. 

The king said: Who art thou, and for 
what purpose hast thou come before the 
king? 

Then spake I'hua'Mazda through Zara- 
thustra, saying: I am I'hua'Mazda, God 
of the I'huans. He through whom I 



242 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



LORDS' RECORD 



speak is Zarathustra, whom thou sawest in 
his mother's arms. I have come before 
thee, O king, for two reasons: Thou hast 
sent for me; and I desire to use thee. The 
king said: Speak further, stranger, that I 
may approve of thy words. 

In the time of So-qi, said I'hua'Mazda, 
I made thee king of Oas, and from that 
day to this, my ashars have been with thee 
and heard thee oft praying privately for 
information of the infant thou sawest, for 
the question resteth heavily on thy judg- 
ment whether or no man be immortal. 
Sit thou with me this night privily, and I 
will show thee So-qi's spirit. 

Asha said: Thou wert to smite the 
city and it would fall. Behold, it standeth! 
Yet I desire not to stand in my own light. 

Zarathustra spake to him saying: Fear 
not, O king, for this philosophy. As thou 
wouldst bend a straw, so do the Gods 
wield the nations of the earth. The city 
will fall ere six years pass, and thou shalt 
be reduced to beggary, and yet thou shalt 
be happier than now. 

CHAPTER VIII. 

When night came, the king sat privily 
with Zarathustra; and I'hua'Mazda cast a 
light on the wall, and the spirit of So-qi 
came and appeared before Asha. So-qi 
said: Knowest thou who I am? And 
Asha said: Yea, So-qi. So-qi said: True, 
O king, the soul is immortal! And then it 
disappeared. 

Asha said: It seemeth to be So-qi. 
And yet, if it were he, would he not have 
called me Asha, instead of, O king? Then 
spake Zarathustra, saying: Call thou for 
some other spirit. Asha said: Allow the 
spirit of my wife to appear. 

Again the light appeared, and the spirit 
of Asha's wife inhabited it, and he saw her. 
Asha said: It is, indeed, like my wife! 
And then she disappeared. Asha said: 
Had it been my wife, she would have spok- 
en. 

Zarathustra said: Call thou for another 
spirit. Asha called for Choe'jon, the 
songster, who looked like no other man. 
And Choe'jon also appeared, and sang one 
of the songs about the slaughter of the 
infants. Asha said: It was like Choe'jon, 
but had it been him he surely would have 
mentioned the miracle. 



Then Zarathustra said: Call for anoth- 
er spirit. And Asha called and another 
appeared; and thus it continued until twen- 
ty of the spirits of the dead had shown 
themselves, and talked with him face to 
face, and every one had related things 
pertinent to themselves. 

Then spake Zarathustra, saying: To- 
morrow night shalt thou sit with me again. 
Now, on the next night, twenty other 
spirits of the dead appeared and spake 
face to face with the king. But yet he be- 
lieved not. Then spake I'hua'Mazda, say- 
ing: 

What will satisfy thee, O man? For I 
declare unto thee that spirit is not prova- 
ble by corpor, nor corpor by spirit. These 
are two different things; one groweth by 
aggregating, and the other by dissemina- 
tion. As by darkness light is known, and 
by light darkness known, similarly diverse 
are corpor and spirit known. Thy genera- 
tions, O king, have long been bred in un- 
belief in spirit, and unbelief is so entailed 
upon thee that evidence is worthless before 
thee. Who thinkest thou I am? 

Asha said: Zarathustra. Then Zara- 
thustra asked him: Who thinkest thou I 
am? Again Asha said: Zarathustra. To 
which I'hua'Mazda said: 

Because thou seest with thine eyes this 
corporeal body, and hearest with thine 
ears this corporeal voice, so dost thy cor- 
poreal judgment find answer. But I de- 
clare to thee, O king, that there is a spir- 
itual judgment as well as a corporeal judg- 
ment. There is a spiritual man within all 
men, which never dies. The spiritual man 
which is within, is the only one that can 
distinguish spiritual things; it is the only 
one that can recognize the spirits of the 
dead. 

Then Asha said: How shall I prove 
there be not some element belonging to 
the personally, that is a mirror, to repro- 
duce a semblance of whatsoever is within 
thy thoughts? 

I'hua'Mazda said: What would that 
profit thee, if proven? And what would it 
profit thee if not proven? Hear me, then, 
for this is wisdom: There are millions of 
spirits in heaven who are in the same 
doubt as thou art now in, not knowing 
that they are dead; especially those slain 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATT1 



LORDS' RECORD 



243 



in war, and those dying in unbelief in spirit 
life. 

Asha said: Who, then, sayest thou, 
thou art. 

I'hua'Mazda said: First, there is Or- 
mazd, the Creator, Who is over all and 
within all, Whose Person is the Whole. 
Then there are the unseen worlds in the 
firmament; then this world, and the stars 
and sun and moon. Then mortals, and the 
spirits of the dead. 

Because the spirits of the dead know 
not the higher heavens, Ormazd, the All 
Master, sendeth His exalted angels down 
to the earth as masters and teachers, hav- 
ing captains and high captains that their 
labor may be done orderly. The highest 
captain is called I'hua'Mazda. Know 
then, O king, that I, who speak, have thee 
and thy city and country in my keeping. 
I have come to stay man's bloody hand. 
And through Zarathustra I will reveal the 
laws of Ormazd, and they shall stand 
above all other laws. Because thou art the 
most skilled of men, I made thee king. 
Because thou hast seen that man must 
have an All Highest, I have come to thee. 
Yea, from thy youth up, and during thy 
long life, I have spoken to thy soul, say- 
ing: Asha, find thou the. All Highest! 
Asha, thou shalt have a strange labor be- 
fore thou diest! Asha, thou who hast at- 
tained to the measurement of the stars, 
shalt find the Power behind the stars! 

Asha said: Enough! Enough! O 
stranger! Thou turnest my head with 
wonders. I scarcely know if I am living 
or dead, because of the mastery of thy 
wisdom. Alas, my kindred are dead; my 
friends are fools! I have none to tell 
these wonders to. All thy days shalt thou 
live in my palace, and whatsoever thou de- 
mandest shall be granted unto thee. 

I'hua'Mazda said: Till I come again to 
thee, O king, keep thine own counsel. For 
the present I must return to the forest. 
Give, me, therefore, of thy choicest ink and 
brushes and writing cloth, and send thou 
two servants with me. 

Asha said: Permit me to be one of thy 
servants, and I will abdicate my throne. 

I'hua'Mazda said: I shall need thee 
where thou art. 

Thus ended the interview with the king; 
and the next day Zarathustra returned to 



the forest to write the Zarathustrian, 
I'hua'-Mazdian, and Ormazdian laws. 

CHAPTER IX. 

Zarathustra said: Interpret to me, O 
Holy One! 

I'hua'Mazda said: Zarathustra, All 
Pure! I will interpret; write thou. 

These, then, are the Ormazdian laws; 
the I'hua'Mazdian laws; the Zarathustrian 
laws: 

First, Ormazd was, and He created all 
created things. He was All. He is All. 

The All must have a name; and here I 
make a circle with cross lines and a leaf 
intersected, and thou shalt call it Ormazd, 
the All Master. 

Then I'hua'Mazda made a square, and 
painted four dark corners in it, and called 
them Anra'mainyus, the Uh'druk, the oppo- 
site to All Truth, All Light and All Good. 
And there stood within the corners of evil, 
the name of Ormazd, and it was light 
whilst the corners were black. I'hua'Maz- 
da said to Zarathustra: This symbol rep- 
resents the created creation. Hence, the 
name of the complete symbol is Fate, from 
which there is no escape. 

Zarthustra inquired of I'hua'Mazda, 
saying: Is evil, evil? Is good, good? 

I'hua'Mazda said: Evil is evil to man, 
but evil is not evil to Ormazd. Good is 
good to man, but good is not good to Or- 
mazd. Only two conditions are before 
Ormazd: Not evil, nor good; but ripe and 
unripe! To Ormazd, that which man call- 
eth evil, is unripe; to Ormazd, that which 
man calleth good, is ripe. But so that 
man be not confounded, thou shalt call 
unripe, evil; and ripe, good. Without green 
fruit, none could be ripe. Without evil, 
none could be good. Ormazd created all 
creations with all things to fill their own 
place. 

Zarathustra inquired of I'hua'Mazda: 
How many words are there that can be 
written? 

Then answered I'hua'Mazda, saying: 
Ten times ten thousand thousand are all 
the words that can be written. 

Then Zarathustra said: Write me down 
all the words, and explain their meaning 
to me, that I may go before the world 
teaching All Truth, that men be no longer 
in darkness. 



244 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



LORDS' RECORD 



Then I'hua'Mazda wrote thousands of 
words and explained the meaning of all 
he wrote. 

Then I'hua'Mazda revealed the secrets 
of heaven and earth to him, and command- 
ed him to write them in a book, which he 
did; and this was the first sacred book, the 
Ormazdian law; the Zarathustrian law; the 
I'hua'Mazdian law. 

CHAPTER X. 

I'hua'Mazda said: Ormazd created a 
good creation. First, the land and water 
and firm things. Out of the unseen and 
void created He them. Second, the hea- 
venly lights; and the heat and the cold. 
Third, all living animals, and fish and 
birds. Fourth, man and woman. 

Then spake Ormazd through his son, 
Vivanho, saying: Speech! Voice! Words! 
And man and women were the only talk- 
ing animals created in all the world. 

Ormazd also created Aura'mainjus, 
with seven heads. The names of the heads 
were: Vanity, tattling, worthlessness, ly- 
ing, incurable wickedness, evil intentions 
for evil, and king and leader for self sake. 

Ormazd also created association, by 
words bringing men together. 

Ormazd created habitations, and dwell- 
ing places for the spirits of the dead. And 
Ormazd created sustenance for the spirits 
of the dead, haoma. He created the boon 
of rest for the weary. He created sweet- 
smelling and rich growing pastures. And 
Ormazd created combination, which is 
strength. Then power to receive knowl- 
edge. 

Ormazd shall be King, and thou shall 
acknowledge no other. He shall be thy 
All Highest love forever and above all 
other loves. 

Thou shalt not bow down in reverence 
to any except Ormazd, the Creator. 

Thou shalt covenant thyself to thy Cre- 
ator every day, and teach thy children to 
do likewise. 

Thou shalt keep holy the four moon's 
days, for they are the change of watch of 
the angels over men. 

Thou shalt not kill what thy Creator 
created alive. 

Thou shalt love thy father next to thy 
Creator, and obey his voice, and honor thy 



mother, because she brought thee forth 
by the will of thy Creator. 

Thou shalt not suffer thy desires to 
lead thee after woman. 

Thou shalt not be vain, for nothing is 
thine. 

Thou shalt not speak untruth.' 

Thou shalt not talk of thy neighbor be- 
hind his back, for Ormazd heareth thee, 
and the angels will go tell thy neighbor's 
soul what thou hast said. 

Thou shalt not be idle or lazy, or thy 
flesh will become weak and bear down thy 
soul. 

Thou shalt not envy, nor harbor hatred 
against any man nor woman nor child. 

Thou shalt not reprove any man nor 
woman for their evil, for they are the Cre- 
ator's. 

Thou shalt reprove thine own child, 
and teach him the right way. 

Thou shalt not lie with thy wife during 
pregnancy. 

Thou shalt not take to wife any of thy 
kin nearer than the fifth generation. 

Thou shalt not take to wife a woman 
of unclean habits. 

Thou shalt not commit the self-habit. 

Thou shalt not desire of thy neighbor 
more than thou wouldst give. 

Thou shalt fast one day of the fourth 
moon all thy life; nothing but water shall 
enter thy mouth. 

One whole year of thy life thou shalt 
dwell with the poor, live with the poor, 
sleep with the poor, begging for alms for 
the poor. 

CHAPTER XI. 

I'hua'Mazda said unto Zarathustra: 
Three castes have I made; the first are the 
I'hins, sacred above all other people, be- 
cause they keep my commandments; sec- 
ond, the I'huans, more powerful than oth- 
er people, because by them I will subdue 
the earth; and third, the Druks, the people 
of darkness and who are without power to 
learn. 

I'hua'Mazda said to Zarathustra: Re- 
member the caste of men; keep thy blood 
in the place I created thee; nor shalt thou 
marry but in the caste I created thee. 

I'hua'Mazda said: A thousand castes 
I created amongst the I'huans: The king, 
the doctor, the magician, the priest, the 



CYCLE OF FEAGAPATTI — — 



245 



farmer, the bearer of burdens, the messen- 
ger, swift-footed, and for all other occu- 
pations. Each and all within their own 
castes; nor shall they marry but in their 
own caste. 

After Zarathustra wrote all the com- 
mandments down, I 'hua'Mazda stooped 
down and kissed the book, which was 
made of cloth, saying: This is my holy 
book. Take it, O Zarathustra, thou All 
Pure, and go thou forth into the world, 
teaching and explaining it. 

Then Zarathustra kissed the book, say- 
ing: This is thy holy book, O I 'hua'- 
Mazda. I take it; and I will go into all 
the world, teaching it, and explaining it. 

Thus was completed the first sacred, 
holy book for mortals. And Zarathustra 
rose up from his writing, tall and hand- 
some, inquiring of I'hua'Mazda, saying: 
Whither shall I go first, O master? 

Then answered I'hua'Mazda, saying: 
Take my holy book, the Ormazdian law, 
the Zarathustrian law, first to Asha, king 
of the I'huans, king of Oas, the City of 
the Sun. Him I have prepared for thee 
and thy work before the day of thy birth. 

Then Zarathustra went forth, strong in 
faith; and he came to Asha, the king. 
And the king- said unto him: Thou hast 
tarried so long! Behold, I have cast the 
horoscope a thousand times. I have proved 
all the stars in heaven and named them, 
and made maps of them. And I have 
measured the power of one star over anoth- 
er star; and the powers of the stars on 
this world, and the powers of the sun and 
moon. I have sent into the great cities of 
the east, to men of great learning; and to 
the south and west, to men of great learn- 
ing. And then I sent to the kings of Jaf- 
feth and of Shem; to Baugh-ghan-ghad; to 
Bing-thah; and to the great city of Huug- 
sin, where the great philosopher, Ah- 
tdong, liveth. And from all of these I 
have obtained great wisdom. 

Hear me, then, O Zarathustra; I will 
speak to thee as if thy philosophy were 
true; but yet I believe it not: First, then, 
in all the stars there is nothing but lies; 
neither mattereth it not if a man be born 
under this star or that star! I am old 
now and haye observed thousands of men, 
even kings and queens, as to whether the 
stars rule over them, and I declare unto 



thee that the philosophy of the stars is 
nothing but lies. Yea, I have searched in 
mine own self, and I find I am often do- 
ing things contrary to my first intentions; 
but as to the cause, I know not. 

This also have I discovered: there is 
one kind of causes that lie with individu- 
als; and there is another kind of causes 
that lie with kings and kingdoms ; but, yet, 
I perceive that each and every mart is 
bound in his own channel by something 
stronger than himself. To find the cause 
of this, I have searched to the extent of 
all the stars in the firmament, but found 
not the truth. Now I ask thee, in the 
name of thy God, if thou canst prove this 
matter to thy king? 

Then answered Zarathustra, saying: 
Through my hand hath I'hua'Mazda writ- 
ten a most holy book, explaining many 
philosophies. This book have I brought 
unto thee, according to the commandments 
of my God. Read thou it. 

Then the king took the book and read 
it; and on the next day Zarathustra 
came before the king. The king said: 
Thy book saith thus and so, but it 
proveth little. Thy God asserteth he 
hath done thus and so, and that 
he created thus and so. First of all, then, 
I know not if there be a God; second, if 
there be a God, I know not that he com- 
eth to thee; and, third, if he come to thee, 
and he be a just God, why cometh he not 
to me? And yet, after all, for I doubt not 
thy wisdom will give sufficient answers to 
these questions, if it be true there are 
Gods unseen that rule over us, and spirits 
of the dead that come to us, persuading 
our souls unconsciously to ourselves, 
what mattereth whether we try or not, to 
obtain truth and wisdom? Shall not all 
things be left to the spirits of Gods and 
Lords? Knowest thou not that the an- 
cients believed these things? And yet 
what of the ancients? Were they not in 
darkness, and addicted to horrid rites 
and ceremonies, and murders, and savage- 
ry? With our wisdom of disbelief in their 
religions, have we not attained to great 
cities and empires? Behold our thous- 
ands and tens of thousands of large cities! 
And do they not all have just reason to 
be proud? For there is not one city but 
that its walls and gates are adorned with 



246 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



LORDS' RECORD 



thousands of the skeletons and the skulls 
of serpents and lions, and the scalps of 
Druks. 

Then spake I'hua'Mazda to the king, 
through Zarathustra, saying: Hear thy 
God, O king, and be considerate of my 
words. There are two births unto all 
men; the first is from the mother's womb, 
and the second is from the corporeal 
body. Prior to the first birth, the will 
and power of the child is nothing as to 
shaping its own destiny. But prior to the 
spiritual birth, which is the mortal death, 
the man hath much to do as to shaping 
his future destiny in the next world. I 
declare unto thee, O king, that the cor- 
poreal man is, therefore, but half accom- 
plished as to his real life. He is but half 
his own master; but half the controller 
of his place and behavior in the mortal 
world; nevertheless, he is the first half, 
the first chooser. Think not that spirits 
and Gods rule men as if they were slaves 
or toys; for another power also lieth over 
man, which is neither spirits nor Gods 
nor stars, nor moon nor sun; but the cor- 
poreal surroundings that feed his earthly 
desires. 

This is the Ormazdian law: Not the 
corporeal stars, or corporeal earth, or cor- 
poreal man, ruleth over the spirit; but 
the subtle, the unseen to mortals, is the 
cause and ruler of all things. 

Asha said: O that I could believe this! 
O that I knew this were true! O that the 
unseen worlds could be opened up to my 
understanding! For I perceive there is 
more power and virtue in thy philosophy 
than in my decrees. But touching thy 
book, O Zarathustra, answer thou me 
this: Whom do the people in the world 
belong to, if not to me, the Sun King? 
Are not the people mine? 

I'hua'Mazda said: All belong to Or- 
mazd. Is it not here taught that man 
shall acknowledge obedience and worship 
to Ormazd only? 

Asha said: I so perceive. Answer me 
this, O Zarathustra: To disown the king 
and the king's decrees; will not this bring 
anarchy? For will not the rulers declare 
thy doctrine robbeth them of subjects? To 
which I'hua'Mazda permitted Zarathustra 
to reply. He said: 



Is it not hard for a man not to have 
the privilege to choose his own master? 
Behold, they are now impressed into war; 
yea, thou keepest standing armies, trained 
in the labor of death. And this for the 
glory of the Sun Kingdom. Now hear 
me, O king, for I am now speaking on 
my own accord, and no God is speaking 
through me. And I declare unto thee, I 
have attained power to go in spirit into 
the unseen worlds and behold with mine 
own eyes how it is with the spirits of the 
dead. And I declare unto thee there are 
great torments for the wicked. I have 
seen them in hell, with walls of fire going 
up around them day and night; suffocating 
fires of brimstone, from which they cannot 
escape. And those slain in war, both those 
that are for the king and those against 
the king, are equally cast into ceaseless 
torments, and even kings and queens with 
them, where all are wailing and cursing; 
and in their madness, doing wickedly unto 
others with all their might. 

The king said: If it be that thou canst 
go into heaven and hell, it must be true 
thou canst go to places on the corporeal 
earth the same way. Prove thou this to 
me, and I will believe all thou hast said. 

Then Zarathustra said: Tell me whith- 
er I shall go, that I may convince thee, O 
king? 

Asha said: Go thou to the tower of 
the horoscope and find the words on the 
calendar. 

Then spake I'hua'Mazda, saying: Have 
I not said I am I'hua'Mazda: and Zara- 
thustra has said he is Zarathustra. But 
this thou canst not see. Behold, thou shalt 
witness now thine own craft. Here return- 
eth Zarathustra. 

Then spake Zarathustra, saying: Thou 
saidst to me: Go to the tower of the horo- 
scope and find me the words of the calen- 
dar. Lo, I have been there, and already 
returned before thee. These, then, are 
the words of the calendar: To-ka, Seis, 
ctvai tnong, biang loo-singooh wotchich; 
an porh, an oot, an dhi, an git. 

Asha said: This is true. But how 
shall I determine that thou gatheredst not 
the calendar from my heart? For I had 
the knowledge in my heart since sunrise. 
Then answered Zarathustra, saying: Try 
me once again; yea, thou shalt ask me for 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI «*«.. — 



247 



some toy of thine, and I will go and pro- 
cure it. 

Asha said: Behold, when I was a boy 
I let fall into the river, betwixt the cliffs, 
at the outer wall, a golden case; go, thou, 
and bring it. 

Then spake I'hua'Mazda: Two condi- 
tions belong to all men, belief and unbe- 
lief. They are as seeds, planted in the soul 
of man whilst he is yet in his mother's 
womb; and when he is born into the 
world, they begin to grow within him. If 
man favor one only, it will grow at the 
expense of the other. Because of unbelief 
in man, he searched after truth and knowl- 
ledge; but because of belief in man, he 
findeth happiness; but the latter may lead 
to stupidity, and the former to cruelty. 
It is a wise man, therefore, that keepeth 
these two talents evenly balanced. 

Now whilst I'hua'Mazda spake, the 
long-lost golden case fell at the king's 
feet, and it was dripping with water. The 
king examined it, and then exclaimed: 
This is true. And yet, if there be spirits 
and Gods, how shall I determine which 
one brought this? May it not have been 
an evil spirit as well as a good one? 

Then spake I'hua'Mazda, saying: Have 
I not said, I will show thee thine own 
craft in finding some other reason than 
the right one? 

Asha said: O ye Gods, cannot ye heal 
me of my unbelief? My judgment show- 
eth me I am diseased in heart. O that 
my mother had been a believing woman 
before I was born! Tell me, O Zarathus- 
tra, or I'hua'Mazda, whoever thou art, for 
I perceive thou art not like any man under 
the sun, tell me what I shall do, that I 
may become thy servant? 

I'hua'Mazda said: On the morrow at 
sunrise I will come to thee again, with 
Zarathustra, and I will tell thee many 
things. 

CHAPTER XII. 

When the time had come, on the mor- 
row, the king said: I have not slept. All 
night I was as one burnt with a fever; for 
thy wondrous words and miracles have 
well nigh turned my judgment upside 
down. 

I'hua'Mazda said: Because a man can- 
not understand a thing, shall he cry out, 



Miracle! Now I declare I have done no 
miracle; nor hath Zarathustra. Yet to 
mortals these things are miracles! If so, 
is not man a miracle to himself? Is not 
procreation a miracle? This, then, I have 
found, O Asha, what man is not accus- 
tomed to, he calleth a miracle; after he 
hath seen a matter frequently, he calleth it 
a natural law. What man hast thou found 
that comprehendeth the first cause of any- 
thing under the sun? Why, then, shall a 
man waste his time in unprofitable re- 
search? Is it not wiser that man labor to 
raise his fellow-men out of misery and 
darkness, than to gratify his own personal 
desire for great learning? 

The king said: Thou reasonest well. 
And yet, what learned good man hast thou 
found who will not say: Yea, to do good 
is a pretty philosophy! And there endeth 
his aspiration. What, then, can I say, or 
what canst thou say, that the words will 
not be barren of fruit? 

I'hua'Mazda said: Thou art this day 
king of all the world; nor is there any 
other kingdom but payeth thee tribute. 
Whatsoever thou desirest is as a law unto 
all other kingdoms. For that reason am 
I come unto thee. Yea, thou wert born 
to this end. Hear, then, the voice of thy 
God, and thou shalt do that which is good 
for thy soul and good for all other peo- 
ple. 

Asha said: Almost am I tempted to 
accede to thy wishes ere thou hast re- 
vealed; but yet hear thou the voice of thy 
king; what matters it to me about the 
good of other people? Even if it be prov- 
en that great men have souls that live af- 
ter death, it is not yet proven that the 
Druks have souls also. If they have souls, 
then heaven must be a stupid place in- 
deed. For thou hast not shown me that 
man obtaineth wisdom by dying, nor is it 
reasonable that he should do so. Rather 
tell me, O Zarathustra, how I may get rid 
of the world; for of what use is life at 
most? 

I'hua'Mazda said: Because thou rejoic- 
est not in thy life, thou provest that thy 
philosophy is deficient, and not that the 
world is. For I will yet prove to thee that 
thou art overflowing with happiness. To 
believe the things I reveal and have faith 
therein, is to become happy. Then the 



248 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



LORDS' RECORD 



king answered him, saying: To believe, 
there is the matter. I declare unto thee, 
there is not a grain of belief in my heart. 
How, then, can it grow? 

I'hua'Mazda said: He who can say, I 
can think of an All Highest, hath the seed 
of everlasting life in him. He who liveth 
the all highest he can; he who thinketh of 
the All Highest; he who talketh to the All 
Highest; he who tries to perceive from 
the standpoint of the All Highest, quickly 
transcendeth belief and becometh a very 
God in faith. He becometh master of him- 
self, and feedeth himself with happiness, 
even as men feed themselves with bread. 

Asha said: What wouldst thou have me 
do? To which I'hua'Mazda said: With 
the people thou hast greater authority 
than a God, greater than miracles. Thy 
decrees are all powerful. Thou shalt have 
copies of this book written on stone and 
cloth, one copy for every sub-kingdom in 
thy dominions. And thou shalt send it to 
them with a sword and a serpent, saying 
to them: Receive ye this book, for it is a 
Holy Book, the All Highest Law, the 
I'hua'Mazdian law, the Zarathustrian law, 
the Ormazdian law. And it shall be a 
rule and guide unto you and your king- 
dom forever. And every king in the 
Kingdom of the Sun shall serve one year 
in living with the poor, carrying the alms- 
bowl for sacrifices unto Ormazd. 

And when thou hast sent this decree 
forth into all the world, thou shalt thyself 
give up thy kingdom; and thou shalt give 
to the poor all thy gold and silver, and all 
thy treasures whatsoever, having nothing 
left unto thyself but the clothes that cover 
thee. And thou shalt go and live with the 
poor, carrying the alms-bowl thyself in the 
streets of Oas. And of the food thou gath- 
erest in the bowl, thou shalt give the 
choicest parts to the poor. But the poorest 
of all that is in the bowl shall be thy por- 
tion. At the end of one year thou shalt 
go about preaching the Ormazdian law, 
commanding the cessation of war and the 
abandonment of evil, and the acceptance of 
righteousness. 

The king said: What canst thou promise 
me if I do all these things? Then I'hua'- 
Mazda allowed Zarathustra to answer him: 
He said, Nothing! Did the Creator ask 
this, before He made the world? If thou 



desireth to approach thy Creator, do thou 
like unto Him. Nor is it my place, nor the 
angels' place, nor the place of God, to 
promise thee anything. Thou art not my 
servant; and thou shalt serve only the 
Master, All Light. And as I have taught 
thee, so shalt thou go and teach others, ex- 
plaining the Ormazdian law. 

Asha said: Do the Gods in heaven 
give rewards for good works and sacri- 
fices done on earth? Zarathustra said: He 
that doeth good works and maketh sacri- 
fices unto Ormazd hath his reward. For 
it is by this means that the soul of man 
becometh strong in the first and second 
resurrections in the next world. 

Asha said: To be with thee, O Zara- 
thustra, and feast on the wisdom of thy 
words, I would make any sacrifice. W T ilt 
thou go with me amongst the poor? 

I'hua'Mazda said: Nay, thou shalt go 
alone. And for company thou shalt pray 
to thy Creator, and make songs of praise 
unto Him, nor think no more of thyself 
than as if thou wert dead. 

The king said: It is said of madmen 
that they think they are not mad. How, 
then, am I to know but I am mad? Will 
not the world so adjudge me if I obey thy 
commandments? And cannot the world 
judge me better than I can judge myself? 
It was said of the ancients that Sudga ob- 
sessed old men and weak-hearted women; 
and it was for that reason Osiris came and 
slew him. If there be Gods in heaven, as 
thou sayst, mayst not thou have come to 
slay Osiris? 

I'hua'Mazda said: Thou are a great 
multiplier of arguments; but in all thy 
speech I have seen nothing that planneth 
the resurrection of men from darkness 
into light. And is not this the All Highest 
that man should aim at? 

Asha said: I am done. Thy judgment 
is greater than mine. All thou hast com- 
manded of me I will do. From this time 
forth I will serve only Ormazd, the Cre- 
ator. Thy God, O Zarathustra, shall be 
my God. Thy ways shall be my ways. 
Henceforth I will argue forever on the 
side of the Creator. And touching all 
matters, I will first ask myself what I shall 
say that would be like thy God would say 
it; and what I shall do that will fulfill the 
Ormazdian law. 



CYCLE OF FEAGAPATTI «»».■ -««. 



249 



CHAPTER XIII. 

Asha then issued the following decree: 
Asha, King of Oas, the City of the 
Sun, King of the Sun, ruler over the whole 
corporeal world, owner and possessor of 
all mortals, men, women and children, 
commander of all flesh, descended from 
the Sun Gods thousands of years, and 
whose forefathers were the fathers of all 
living creatures, Highest of men, and by 
whose good grace the inhabitants of the 
earth are permitted to live, and whose de- 
crees are the standard of all things, Mak- 
er of Justice and Maker of Truth, and 
whom none dare question, and on whose 
word the sun and moon and stars bow 
down, greeting: 

To the kings and queens of the east 
and west, north and south, over all the 
cities in the world, rulers in the temples 
of the stars, slayers of dragons, slayers of 
lions, slayers of tigers, and of men and of 
women and of children and serpents, hon- 
ored in the golgothas, and by millions of 
cowering slaves, owners of thousands of 
wives, and whose boats sail in lakes of 
mortal blood, and whose crowns are hon- 
ored by ten thousand men slain every 
year, sworn on the flesh of the thigh 
whose words are life and death; and most 
obedient to the Sun King, I command: 

First, that there is an Ormazd, Creator, 
All Person! Whose Soul is in all the 
world, and in all things in the firmament 
above; Who is Father; Who is the Light 
of Light, Creator of darkness and men, 
Who is forever The Going Forth; Who is 
the Cause of causes; larger than all things 
seen and unseen; the Power of all power. 

Second, I 'hua'Mazda, His Son. Pure 
and All Holy; Master of Men; Essence of 
Ormazd revealed in Word; Savior of Men; 
Holder of the keys of heaven; through 
whose help the souls of men can rise to 
Nirvana, the High Heaven. 

Third, Zarathustra, A man, All Pure, 
and born wise, being one with I'hua'Maz- 
da, who is one with Ormazd. Of Whom 
The Word says: He doeth without miracle. 
The raising of the dead; healing the 
sick by the laying on of hands; 
whose word of command bringeth 
forth ripe wheat, full grown, in a day; 
and doing all things that the ancients ac- 



credited to the Gods as miracles, but 
which the Ormazdian law showeth to be 
Natural Law to any one who is All Pure, 
and who draweth power from Ormazd, the 
Creator, and His holy angels. 

Fourth, A Book, holy and sacred, re- 
vealed by I'hua'Mazda to Zarathustra, the 
All Pure; and written on stone and cloth, 
revealing All Wisdom, which is called the 
I'hua'Mazdian law, the Ormazdian law, 
the Zarathustrian law, which is the All 
Highest Law in All the world, approved 
by Asha, the king of kings! 

Ten thousand learned scribes in my 
command have written a copy of The Holy 
Book, and I herewith command, I, King 
of the Sun: That this book shall be the 
All Highest law in all my sub-kingdoms, 
and that all my kings shall believe it and 
command the same of their subjects. Nor 
shall any man stand up against this, my 
decree, and live; nor shall any man alter 
one word or sign in this Holy Book; nor 
disbelieve one word it containeth. And 
my kings and sub-kings; and my queens 
and sub-queens, shall obey all the com- 
mandments, even as I obey them; nor 
shall any man, or woman, or child, ques- 
tion these things, as to whether they be 
the All Highest, or whether there be error 
in whatsoever cometh from my hand; for 
by my decree they are made All Truth! 
For I was raised up by Ormazd, for this 
purpose; and not one in the whole world 
hath power like unto me. And ye, to 
whom these holy words come, shall make 
oath on a serpent and a sword to obey 
these, my commandments, now and for- 
ever. 

Asha sent ofhcers to carry the books 
he had made to the kings and queens in 
the east and west, north and south; and 
those whom he sent were men of great 
learning, and of the highest caste; and 
they took with them serpents and swords, 
and gave them as commanded, exacting an 
oath from all who received them. 

CHAPTER XIV. 

When Asha, the king, had thus com- 
pleted the labor of making the books, and 
of sending them as commanded by Ihua'- 
Mazda, he sent for Zarathustra. for fur- 
ther counsel as to how he should abdicate 
the throne according to the Highest Light. 



250 



CYCLE OF FBAGAPATTI 



LORDS' RECORD 



And when I'hua'Mazda was before him, 
even before Zarathustra had yet come, 
Asha, said: Here cometh that quickened 
thought again! Behold, I sent for Zara- 
thustra in order to ask certain questions, 
and lo, my heart answereth me! Yea, I 
have nothing to do with what is not mine 
own! Now, whilst he thus framed his 
own answer, Zarathustra came and said 
unto him: Thou desirest to counsel in 
regard to abdicating thy throne? Behold 
thou, I'hua'Mazda hath been to thee even 
now, saying: What hast thou to do with 
that which is not thine own! 

Asha said: I have heretofore said: 
That which speaketh to my heart, what is 
it? Now according to thy wisdom, that 
that speaketh to ^ny heart is I'hua'Mazda! 
How shall one know it to be so? Zarathus- 
tra said: If a man ask the All Light, in ref- 
erence to his own affairs, and for his own 
concerns, then receiveth he an answer from 
the tetracts; but if he ask the All Light in 
reference to what he shall do for others, 
to render the highest good unto them, then 
is the answer from I'hua'Mazda. I de- 
clare unto thee, O Asha, he is a dark man 
indeed to whom the Creator speaketh not 
every day. 

Asha said: What, then, shall I do in a 
matter like this? As yet, all the world 
belongs to me. Presently I shall deliver 
it to itself; shall I not provide a ruler for 
them? 

Zarathustra said: Why, then, thou wilt 
be bound to give them one as good and as 
wise as thyself, otherwise thou wilt cheat 
them! Furthermore, doth not the Ormaz- 
dian law say: Thou shalt not have any 
king but thy Creator? 

Asha said: I so perceive. What then, 
shall I go away saying nothing? 

Then answered I'hua'Mazda, saying: 
Thou shalt do more than this; for thou 
shalt give liberty to all men, and proclaim 
unto them, commanding that they shall 
obey the doctrines of the Holy Book, serv- 
ing no master but the Creator. And when 
the people are completely broken up by 
thy decree, thou shalt go away, leaving thy 
throne and thy capital to whatsoever may 
come to them. 

Asha said: I perceive. That which 
hath been given me to do, I will do. Be- 
hold, I will bestow freedom on all the 



world; and with my alms-bowl go about 
begging. Heaven must be just, and it is 
right that I should have the experience of 
the poor as well as of the rich. How else 
would I ever become sufficiently wise to 
be a God in heaven? Yet one thing, O 
Zarathustra, and I will ask thee no more 
questions; thou hast said I must pray to 
Ormazd: Now, behold, I never prayed in 
my life? Who will teach me to pray? 

I'hua'Mazda said: Let thy lips utter 
thy holiest desires, and let thy soul seek 
constantly for new expressions magnifying 
the wisdom, love and power of Ormazd, 
the Creator. Neither shalt thou take a 
thought in regard to rules of prayer; the 
rules are for the unlearned. He who in- 
venteth a new prayer to Ormazd every day 
of his life hath done wisely indeed. For 
the glory of prayer is the strengthening of 
one's own soul to perceive the Higher 
Light. Prayer is not given in order to 
change the decrees of Ormazd, but to 
change one's self for the better. 

Asha said: If a man think a prayer, and 
use no words, is it well with him? 

I'hua'Mazda said: It is well with him; 
but it is better to add words also. It is 
well for Ormazd to think a universe, but 
better to create it. To begin to learn cre- 
ating, thou shalt use spoken words; the 
perfection of creating is to have the words 
bear fruit. He who omitteth words of 
prayer will in time omit prayer also, and 
his soul tendeth to barrenness. 

A vain man saith: I have no need to 
pray; Ormazd knoweth my soul! Why, 
then, shall not the field say: I shall pro- 
duce no harvest, because Ormazd knoweth 
my capacity! I declare unto thee, O Asha, 
the secret of all spiritual growth lieth in 
giving out the spirit: He who would 
grow in wisdom, must give out wisdom; 
he who would grow in love, must give out 
love; he who would grow in power of spir- 
it, must give out power of spirit. Bethink 
thee, then; if thou prayest silently, thy 
power goeth weakly to thy audience; but 
if thou prayest with words openly, thou 
givest to thine audience of thy fruit; and, 
for this glory, Ormazd provideth thee 
abundantly. When thou shalt go with thy 
bowl to feed the feeble, old, helpless, and 
blind, thou shalt teach them prayer and 
confessions; and thou shalt absolve them 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI «-o«d.. r E cor D 



251 



that are depressed because of their sins, 
that they may rejoice in their lives. 

CHAPTER XV. 

So Asha gave up all he had on earth, 
and went and lived with the poor, carry- 
ing the alms-bowl for one year, preaching 
to and praying for the poor. And it came 
to pass that at the end of the year he had 
thousands of followers. And he built al- 
tars for them, teaching them to worship 
the Creator; to restore the mark of circum- 
cision; to be upright before men; to labor 
for the helpless and distressed, and to do 
not to any man that which they desired 
not to be done unto themselves. 

And these people took the name of 
Zarathustrians, in contradistinction from 
the Par'si'e'ans. Nevertheless, they were 
the I'huan race, and the Ghans. And be- 
cause of their religion, they could not own 
property, neither houses, nor lands, nor 
cattle, nor beasts of burden. Many of 
them gave themselves into servitude to 
the Par'si'e'ans, but many of them lived on 
the contributions brought by converts who 
had had great possessions. 

When Asha abdicated the throne, there 
were many aspirants to his place, and the 
Council of the Sun was puzzled to know 
whom to select, that peace might reign in 
Oas; but they finally made Hi'ya'tseing 
king, because he was a great warrior, hav- 
ing bestowed to the city's Walls and gates 
more than ten thousand skulls. Hi'ya'- 
tseing assumed the titles of his predeces- 
sors, chief of which were King of the Sun, 
King of Kings, and King of Oas, the cen- 
tral city of all the world; and sent his- 
proclamations to the chief cities of Jaffeth, 
and Shem and Ham, commanding that 
certain presents be sent to him every year, 
amongst which were thousands of slaves. 

Hi'ya'tseing was a man of great learn- 
ing, and had traveled far and near, and he 
knew the people and the lands of the 
earth, and he knew the different products 
of the different lands, and the number of 
peoples in the great cities of the world, 
and the number of warriors belonging to 
the different -sub-kings under him. Besides 
these things he knew the stars and thefir 
places, and the groups of cows and horses, 



and bulls, and bears, and lions, and fishes, 
and serpents, even as they had been taught 
in the Hyartien period amongst the an- 
cients. 

Hi'ya'tseing said: The Fete hath made 
me king of all the world; hence, it is right 
that I am a king. He said: It is evident 
because Asha abdicated the throne, that 
man must have a religion. Because I 
know all rites and ceremonies of the 
ancients, I will give man a religion on 
my own account. Because Asha com- 
manded the Zarathustrian religion unto 
the far-off kingdoms, then are Asha and 
Zarathustra my enemies. Let my officers 
arrest Asha and Zarathustra and bring 
them before me. I will make an example 
of them. 

And on the day that Asha was arrest- 
ed, behold, the year of his carrying the 
alms-bowl was ended. Asha and Hi'ya'- 
tseing had known each other for many 
years. When Asha was before the king, 
he said: I have nothing in all the world; 
why, then, hast thou arrested me? The 
king said: Because thou gavest away thy 
possessions, thou art the most dangerous 
of men. I have decreed thee to be put to 
death. Art thou prepared? 

Asha said: Yea, O king. And yet, 
because of our long acquaintance, I ask of 
thee one boon, which is, that I may be put 
to death according to the Panic rites which 
were before the flood. And if, perchance, 
it be proven to thee there is a God with 
power to release me, and he so doeth it, 
then shall not thy hand be raised against 
me? The king said: Thy boon is granted. 

Accordingly, a wheel of uh'ga was 
built, and Asha was bound upon it, the 
king having appointed a guard to watch 
him till he should die. But because of the 
king's fear that the test might be tamper- 
ed with, he caused the yogernot to be set 
up in his private piazza, with the uh'ga 
facing the Gate of Lions, so that his pri- 
vate attendants might also watch. 

Great was the wailing and crying of the 
people when it was known that Asha had 
been decreed to death. The city of Oas 
became as a house of mourning and mad- 
ness, and it was divided against itself, some 
for Asha and some for the king. 



252 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



LORDS' RECORD 



Because Asha was old, and thus is view 
of the king all day, the king repented, but 
he had no power under the laws to set 
aside his own decree. And when the sun 
went down, the king went before Asha, 
saying: Behold, thou hast been six hours 
on the wheel, and yet thy God hath not 
come to release thee. If thou wilt, there- 
fore, slay thyself with a sword, I will have 
thee taken down. 

Asha said: I declare unto thee, O king, 
I have no pain. Whether it be my mad- 
ness; or whether it be the Gods favor me, 
what mattereth it, since I suffer not? Nor 
have I a right to slay myself, since I cre- 
ated myself not alive. Moreover, if it be 
the will of my Creator, Ormazd, that I die 
on the wheel, then it is just. If it be not 
His will, then will He release me. There- 
fore, O king, I am content. 

The king said: This indifference com- 
eth of madness. And thy madness hath 
affected the City of the Sun. Have thy 
way, then, and die! 

The king returned to his palace, but 
on the next morning he came again, mak- 
ing the same proposal, and receiving sim- 
ilar answers. And at night he came again, 
repeating his offer, and again being re- 
fused, determined to come no more. 

Now on the night of the third day, 
Asha felt the power of I'hua'Mazda coming 
upon him, and he said unto the guard: 
Behold, this night I shall be released! See 
to it, therefore, as to whether the thongs 
are well fastened. For, if it so turn out 
that the Father release me, then will ye 
stand before the king accused of conniv- 
ing at my release. Accordingly, the guard 
re-examined the fastenings, and sent word 
to the king of what Asha had said. And 
the king replied: Nay, if he be released, 
then will I know of a truth there is a God; 
neither shall one man of my guardsmen 
stand accused. 

This they told to Asha, and Asha said: 
I say unto you, not only one shall stand 
accused, but all of you. And there were 
of them one hundred, being two watches of 
fifty each; but it being the change of watch, 
they all heard, and they laughed in deri- 
sion. And behold, in that same moment 
of time, the thongs fell off, and I'hua'Maz- 
da delivered Asha down from the uh'ga. 
And the spirit of I 'hua'Mazda was in 



Asha, nor was Asha himself, although con- 
scious of the things done through him. 

I'hua'Mazda said: Go ye and say to 
the king: Behold, Asha is delivered by 
the power of his God. Then the guards- 
men said: It is not morning; the king 
sleepeth. 

I'hua'Mazda said: I say unto you, the 
king sleepeth not, but is joyful with drink- 
ing wine with his courtiers. They went, 
then, and told the king, finding, of a truth, 
he slept not. And the king commanded 
them to bring Asha before him, which 
they did. 

Hi'ya'tseing said: What profit have 
my guardsmen in releasing this old man? 
Behold, it hath been said that thou, Asha, 
hadst gold and silver hidden away. I know 
now of a truth thou hast bribed these 
guardsmen to set thee free. For which 
reason, every man of these guardsmen shall 
be put to death, and their skulls mounted 
on the walls of Oas, and their skins tanned 
for leather. Away with them, ye mar- 
shals; bind them till the rising sun, and at 
that hour hew off their heads, as I have 
decreed. And now as for thee, thou old 
hypocrite and destroyer of liberty! What 
sayest thou? 

Asha said: According to thy promise I 
should now be free. There was no stipu- 
lation in thy decree that I should not 
bribe thy guardsmen. Behold, then, my 
wisdom! Have I not revealed to thee that 
thou canst not trust any man? 

The king said: Thou art the wisest of 
men. I had hoped to hear thee say thy 
God released thee, and I had here twelve 
swordsmen to hew off thy head. But be- 
'cause, thou hast shown me great craft 
thou shalt live for a season, but only on 
condition that thou shalt leave Oas and 
never return. 

Then spake I'hua'Mazda through Asha, 
saying: Thou hast decreed the guardsmen 
to death at sunrise! Now I declare unto 
thee, O king, not one of them shall die as 
thou hast decreed. But I, I'hua'Mazda. 
will deliver them. Think not that I am 
Asha; I am not Asha, but a spirit, the God 
of the I'huans. Neither will I spirit away 
thy guardsmen by a miracle, but by natural 
nleans, and will I show thee that I am 
mightier through faith in my Creator than 
all kings. 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



LORDS' RECORD 



253 



The king said: It cannot be that there 
are Gods or spirits. Is man's judgment 
nothing? These things were suited to the 
dark ages. They affrighted men to jus- 
tice., and so served a purpose. But in this 
enlightened age man shall know justice 
and wisdom of himself. 

Whilst the king yet spake, I'hua'Mazda 
caused the attending spirits to assume 
mortal form by the curtains of Arizzi, back 
of the king, and they made a noise, so that 
the king turned to look, and he saw them. 
He feared, not knowing but they were 
evil persons concealed, and he said: Rob- 
bers! murderers! And he drew his sword 
and thrust at them; but they vanished! He 
said: 

Verily thou art a devil, O Asha! And 
he thrust his sword at Asha, but it fell 
from the handle. He said: Ye Fetes! 
Kill him! kill him! And whilst he was 
thus puzzled, Asha walked forth out of the 
palace, nor would the king's guards lay 
hands on him. 

CHAPTER XVI. 

When Asha went away from the king's 
palace, Zarathustra met him, and they 
went together to the prison where the 
guardsmen were confined, prior to the ex- 
ecution on the morrow at sunrise; and 
there came four hundred of the converts 
of Asha, and, when they stood around 
the prison, Zarathustra said unto them: 

Stand ye in the crescent of the living 
altar, for the power of Ormazd is upon me, 
and I will deliver this prison! And the 
keeper of the prison, and also his attend- 
ants, woke up, and came with spears, say- 
ing: Disperse! disperse! Or, by the King 
of the Sun, ye shall die! 

Zarathustra said: Art thou greater 
than I'hua'Mazda? Thrust, then, thy 
spear against my breast. The keeper did 
so, saying: Thy size is nothing to me, 
thou boaster! But lo, the shaft was broken 
in a thousand pieces, neither touched trie 
blade against his garments. Seeing which, 
the other spearsmen feared, and Zarathus- 
tra walked up to them and took their 
spears from them. And the Zarathustri- 
ans stood in the form of a living altar, 
and Zarathustra laid his hands against the 
front wall of the prison, saying: In thy 
wisdom and power, O Ormazd, deliver 



thou this prison! And, behold, the front 
wall opened as a door openeth, and the 
prisoners came out unharmed. 

Zarathustra said': On the morrow the 
king will decree to death every Faithist 
within the city. Go ye, therefore, while it 
is yet night, and command all my people 
to rise at once and depart out of the city, 
and I will lead them to a place of safety. 
So that same night the Faithists lied be- 
yond the walls. 

And it came to pass that on the next 
day, when the king heard what had trans- 
pired in regard to the prison, he decreed 
to death every Zarathustrian found within 
the city, even as prophesied by Zarathus- 
tra. But they were already gone, and 
there were of them four thousand six hun- 
dred and thirty, men, women and children. 

CHAPTER XVII. 

I'hua'Mazda spake to Zarathustra, say- 
ing: Explain these things to my people, 
for they shall not dwell in darkness nor in 
fear. Zarathustra said: What shall I tell 
them, O I'hua'Mazda? 

I'hua'Mazda said: My people are unit- 
ed; my people are delivered out of the evil 
city. To themselves, of themselves, and by 
themselves, have I delivered them, as a 
separate people. I found an easy way to 
unite them; I went not by a dark road. 
This is no miracle, but the manifestation 
of Faith in the All Light. Take them fur- 
ther away from Oas; far away in the for- 
est. And since Asha is an old man, and 
learned above all other men, he shall be 
the rab'bah over them. 

But as for thee, O Zarathustra, thou 
art young and strong. Thou shalt choose 
fifty men from amongst my people, well 
learned and strong, full of vigor. And they 
shall be thy companions; and thou shalt 
visit the large cities of Jaffeth and Shem 
and Ham. For four years shalt thou trav- 
el, delivering the Zarathustrian law; but 
at the end of that time thou shalt return to 
Oas, and to this people, my first chosen. 
And after, Asha shall go with thee to Oas, 
and thou shalt raise thy hand against the 
city, and it shall fall. 

Zarathustra then explained these things 
to the people, and thereafter took them to 
the valley of Yan'she, by the river Witch'- 
owitch ; and he divided them into three 



254 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



LORDS' RECORD 



large cities and four small ones, after the 
manner of the Thins. And he appointed 
rab'bahs, and made Asha chief rab'bah over 
all the others. 

And Zarathustra chose fifty men, well 
learned, and vigorous; and they departed, 
to establish the Zarathustrian law in the 
cities of the east and south. I'hua'Mazda 
led them forth, speaking to Zarathustra, 
telling him whither to go, and directing 
him in the nearest roads, over the moun- 
tains and plains, and across the rivers, 
And wheresoever they went, I'hua'Mazda 
provided them with beasts of burden, and 
beasts to ride on, converting their owners 
to the Ormazdian law, who gave them all 
things required. 

The first large city Zarathustra came 
to was Tse'gow, on the plains of Jo'ab, 
high walled with wood and stone; and 
when he came to the gate thereof the keep- 
er demanded his name and business, speak- 
ing in another language, and Zarathustra 
understod him not. Then came I'hua'- 
Mazda, answering the keeper in his own 
tongue, saying: 

I am a servant of the Creator, Ormazd; 
I come to prove immortal life before the 
king. Send, then, to thy king, and he will 
admit me and my people. So the keeper 
sent to the king, who commanded that 
Zarathustra come before him. And when 
he and his attendants were thus before the 
king, the king said: Art thou he of whom 
the King of the Sun hath spoken? And 
what is thy business with me? Thy king, 
even the king of kings, is mad. Then an- 
swered I'hua'Mazda, saying: 

Zarathustra, of whom the Sun king 
spake, is before thee. I am here to prove 
to thee many things pertaining to what is 
written in the holy book. But ere I 
utter many words, I pray thee, that thy 
son, Ha'sing, and thy wife, Hi'ti'us, and 
thy daughters, Peutu, Zoo, He'in and Za- 
bee, be also present. 

The king said: How knowest thou the 
names of my people? And I'hua'Mazda 
said: Here stand familiar spirits, and they 
speak to me. Chief amongst them is Ay'- 
ay, thy grandfather, who slew himself; and 
next to him are thy kinspeople in spirit, 
Noa, Wess, Lut, Gan'ce, Mith'ce, Nim'- 
och, Wo'huin, Ruks and Pa'stctie. 



The king was concerned, for many of 
these had been slain in wars, nor knew he 
how Zarathustra discovered their names. 
So he sent for his wife and son and daugh 
ters, and they all went into an inner cham- 
ber, Zarathustra with them. I'hua'Mazda 
spake to the king, saying: 

Think not that Asha is mad because 
he hath given up all he had and gone to 
live with the poor. The Gods call all men 
mad who do otherwise, especially rich 
men, and kings, and rulers. For such men 
set value on things that they cannot retain 
but during mortal life at most. Asha set- 
teth value on that which will last forever. 
I would that all men would do as Asha 
hath done. Because of unbelief in the 
Great Spirit, man hath set himself up as 
the All Highest, and his trade hath be- 
come war and destruction. I came not to 
persuade thee to give away thy kingdom 
nor thy riches, nor yet for any glory or 
profit to myself. I speak for the hosts be- 
ing slain, tribe against tribe, city against 
city; I speak for the millions of spirits in 
darkness, who dwell on the battlefields. 

I'hua'Mazda thus gained the attention 
of the king, and, meanwhile, the angels 
who accompanied him took on semblance 
of mortals; and presently, the king and his 
family looked about and saw them, and 
were frightened; and the king drew his 
sword, saying: Who have entered thus, 
uncalled! But as he advanced, behold, 
the spirits disappeared. The king was 
amazed, I'hua'Mazda continued speaking: 

Concern thyself not because the spirits 
show themselves; neither call thou these 
appearances miracles. Spirits are always 
present; but because they thus clothed 
themselves with the semblance of corpor- 
eal parts, thou hast for the first time seen 
them. Whilst thou wast quiet, they came; 
with thy sudden passion they disappeared. 

The king said: Will they come again? 
Then answered I'hua'Mazda, saying: Since 
thy wife and thy daughters are frightened, 
why should they appear again? Yet hear 
thou me, O king! Since thy youth up 
thou hast been prepared for this. Thy wife 
is half-breed with the I'hins, the sacred 
people. The I'hins were preserved by the 
Gods to this end, for they are as the lea- 
ven, prepared for the resurrection of all the 
races of men. Because of this great vir- 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



LORDS' RECORD 



255 



tue in thy wife, the spirits of the dead can 
show themselves before thee. 

Whilst I'hua'Mazda thus spake, the 
angels again assumed sar'gis, and there 
were present several spirits whose mortal 
lives had been cut short by the king's own 
sword. Chief of these was Awetakeytha, 
one time king of the city of Tse'gow. 

The sar'gis spake to the king, saying: 
Think not that I am dead, O king! I am 
not dead, save in the corporeal part. As 
by thy sword thou didst cut me off, so by 
the sword shalt thou be pierced through. 
Next spake Too'Sain, another sar'gis, say- 
ing: Till thou art dead, O king, and thy 
soul cast into hell, I will not cease to tor- 
ment thee! Next spake Ghon, another 
sar'gis, saying: Before yesterday I brought 
venom from rotten flesh, and inoculated 
thee in the breath of thy mouth! Thou 
shalt cough blood and foul-smelling cor- 
ruption! Next spake Owd, saying: I am 
come from the land of the dead, O king, 
with the torments of hell for thee! Then 
spake We'Seay, a sar'gis, saying: I am 
thy first wife; why slewest thou me? Was 
not the world wide enough? 

Thus the spirits continued to speak, 
permitted by I'hua'Mazda to manifest their 
evil desires and passions in their own way; 
nor did one spirit appear who had a single 
good word of cheer for the king. Then 
the king spake, saying: 

Go away, spirits, or devils! I will see 
no more! And, with that, he swung his 
sword about fiercely; but when he quieted 
a little, I'hua'Mazda spake to him, saying: 

I declare unto thee, O king, heaven is 
filled with the spirits of the dead, and be- 
cause they were slain by thee, they lie in 
wait for thy spirit, when thou shalt die. 
Think not that by slaying a man thou art 
rid of him; only the corporeal part is with- 
in thy power. The soul never dieth. Or- 
mazd is just. Whom thou hast injured, 
thou shalt restore. 

The king said: If a man be a bad man, 
and I kill him, is it not a great good? 
I'hua'Mazda said: To kill him is a great 
evil. Thou shouldst convert him to good. 
The king said: But if he belong to me? 
Then I'hua'Mazda said: No man belong- 
eth to thee. The same Creator created all 
men; and they belong to Him. 



The king said: But I have possession of 
them. They are mine. If thy Creator is 
stronger than I, let Him take them. 

I'hua'Mazda said: To take them from 
thee would be no honor: but for thee to de- 
liver them is thine own honor. 

Now whilst the king's mind was thus 
engaged, the angels cut loose the tapestry 
about the walls, and let it fall to the floor, 
and with great confusion, the queen and 
her daughters rose up and fled. 

The king was angered, and thrust his 
sword at Zarathustra; but it broke into a 
hundred pieces, and yet no part touched 
Zarathustra. 

I'hua'Mazda said: Save thou repent 
of thy evil ways, I will withdraw my holy 
angels from this house, and thou shalt 
bear witness that ere the morning sun ap- 
pears, this palace shall not be left stand- 
ing. 

But the king was hardened. So, when 
I'hua'Mazda perceived there was no re- 
pentance in the king, he withdrew the 
Lord and his ashars, abandoning the pal- 
ace to evil spirits, but he sent guardian 
angels to inspire the queen and her daugh- 
ters to flee from the house that night, and 
they so fled. And the spirits of darkness 
went to the king's enemies and inspired 
them to go against the palace; and they 
so went, and destroyed it. 

The next day, Zarathustra went about 
in the city, which was in great tumult, 
and I'hua'Mazda spake through him to the 
people. And in one day he received more 
than a thousand followers; and when the 
king saw this, he decreed Zarathustra to 
death, offering a reward to whomsoever 
would slay him. The next day he preach- 
ed again before the people, and received 
great addition to his followers; and then 
the king ordered his soldiers, of whom 
there were ten thousand, to fall upon Zara- 
thustra and his people, and destroy them. 
But I'hua'Mazda had prophesied this to 
his adherents beforehand, and had advised 
them to flee. And many escaped before 
morning; but there were also many who 
were still within the walls when the sol- 
diers came upon them. 

Zarathustra stretched his hand up- 
ward, saying: Fire of Thy Fire, O Fa- 
ther! Give me here a wall of fire! And 
there rose up a wall of fire betwixt them 



256 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



LORDS' RECORD 



and the soldiers; and the latter, seeing this, 
turned and fled, crying out; Shri! shri! — 
signifying spirit. 

Thus Zarathustra led them out of the 
city, and not one man or woman or child 
was injured. But it came to pass that the 
deeds done through Zarathustra were 
greatly exaggerated in relating them, so 
that people who had not yet seen him be- 
lieved the world was about to come to an 
end. Thus the king lost all discipline over 
the city; and the people lived without law 
or order; robbing one another, or de- 
stroying whatever stood before them. 

CHAPTER XVIII. 

Zarathustra called his fifty companions 
before him and I 'hua'Mazda said: Because 
these people are delivered from the ty- 
rant, they will become his enemies. A 
people long oppressed, love vengeance. 
This would thwart the Ormazdian law. 
Take them, therefore, away from the city, 
and divide them into groups, and I will 
send angels, capable of interpreting lan- 
guages. 

Behold, a God cometh not to ac- 
complish at random. Nor cometh he 
to one man only, in order to over- 
throw the evil of a whole world. 
My angels have been with you since the 
day of your birth and ye are a part of my 
army. After ye have divided these people, 
and conducted them into forests: ye shall 
begin to speak with new tongues, and these 
people will understand you. And ye shall 
build altars of worship to Ormazd, teach- 
ing these people songs and prayers and 
dancing, explaining to them the Ormaz- 
dian law. 

So, those who fled from the anarchy 
of the city, were led away, half a day's 
journey, and there encamped. And the 
companions of Zarathustra, who were 
called Inquas, were entranced, and com- 
prehended the language of the people, and 
could talk with them understandingly. So 
they built altars to Ormazd, and taught 
the people worship, and caused them to 
take an oath not to kill any man or wo- 
man or child, nor beast, nor bird; nor any 
animal created alive. And they bound 
them on the oath taken under the thigh, 
to eat only fruit and nuts and roots and 
bread, according to the Ormazdian law. 



And they divided them into families of tens 
and families of hundreds, and of a thou- 
sand, giving them one rab'bah for each, 
according to the Zarathustrian law. 

But Zarathustra returned into the city, 
and I 'hua'Mazda clothed him about with 
fire, at night, and with clouds in the day- 
light, so that the people could behold his 
power, and no man dare raise a hand 
against him. Then he commanded the 
people to gather together all the skulls 
on the walls, and the scalps that were 
hung about the houses and on the poles; 
and they were taken away and burned. 
And he disbanded the soldiers; and thus, 
the king was rendered helpless and left to 
stroll about, cursing. 

And Zarathustra advised the people to 
go out of the city and live; and they went 
forth by thousands, beginning new lives. 
After that, Zarathustra left the place; and 
at once it was filled with drujas, and they 
went to the Druks and inspired them to 
fire and plunder. And the great city of 
Tse'gow, with all its temples, and towers, 
and palaces, was quickly reduced to a heap 
of ashes. 

Zarathustra went before hundreds of 
thousands of the people, speaking by the 
voice of I'hua'Mazda. He said: I hear cer- 
tain ones saying: Whoever setteth value 
on earthly things, above heavenly things, 
it is good for him to have fire and de- 
struction. All things come of the Father, 
Ormazd, or by His permission. When He 
withdraweth His hand from a wicked city, 
evil spirits rush in. Others have said: 
Who are evil spirits? Why doth not Or- 
mazd destroy them? I say unto you, evil 
spirits are both yourselves and the dead. 
Whom ye have slain in passion, still live 
to torment you in spirit. Ye had their 
skulls hung on the gates and wails; your 
temples of science were portaled with the 
scalps of your enemies. The spirits of 
these people still live, though their bodies 
be dead, and they obsess you to deeds of 
wickedness. This is the Ormazdian law; 
when a man is dead, ye shall either burn 
the body, or bury it in the ground, that the 
spirit be not troubled. But ye bound them 
in spirit; to those who were slain, Tse'gow 
was an everlasting reminder of their own 
destruction and defeat. These spirits 
have gained ten-fold more than ye have 



CYCLE OF FEAGAPATTT 



LORDS' RECORD 



257 



lost by the fire; for now the Gods can de- 
liver them in heaven. For which reasons, 
I declare unto you that it is a great good 
that Tse'gow is destroyed. The world is 
large; the lands are very wide. Kill no 
man, woman, nor child. They are Or- 
mazd's. Neither shall ye build large cities; 
they are a curse on the face of the earth. 
Neither shall ye live alone, for such be- 
come bound to self; but dwell in families 
of tens and hundreds and thousands. Hath 
not the Father given you an example in 
the I'hins? They kill not, nor take that 
which is another's; nor are given to lust, 
nor war, nor quarreling. 

Where is the king's wife, Hi'ti'us? 
Where is Ha'sing, the prince? And the 
princesses, Peutu, and Zoo, and He'in, 
and Zabee? The multitude answered: 
They are gone! 

I'hua'Mazda said: I say unto you, 
they were gone, but they are returning. 
Presently they will be here. They shall 
speak before you. 

Presently the king's wife and son and 
daughters, came. Hi'ti'us said: Behold, 
Tse'gow is burned. Who hath seen the 
king? He'in and Zabee, the princesses, 
were very young girls, and they cried for 
their father. He had slain himself, cutting 
his bowels across with his sword. 

I'hua'Mazda spake through Zarathus- 
tra, saying: Come thou, Hi'ti'us, and 
and stand on the rocks so that all can see, 
and bring thy children. She came and 
stood beside Zarathustra. And now the 
Voice said: Let these bear witness 
whether the dead do not live in spirit? 

Hi'ti'us said: With my own eyes have 
I seen the spirits of the dead; with my own 
ears, heard them talk. My children shall 
hold up their hands if these things be true. 
The children held up their hands. Again 
Hi'ti'us said: Where is my husband, the 
king? 

Whilst they were yet standing on the 
rocks, the spirit of the king rose up before 
all the people, and He'in and Zabee cried 
out: Here is my father! Then spake I'hua'- 
Mazda, saying to the spirit of the king: 
Knowest thou that thou art dead? The 
spirit of the king spake loud, so that all 
could hear him; he said: No, I am not 
dead, but I have done a foolish thing, I 
cut my bowels across. 



Then Hi'ti'us said: I fear, indeed, the 
king is dead, and this is his spirit. He 
looks strangely! I'hua'Mazda said: There 
is no cut. Thy belly is unharmed. But 
the spirit persisted, saying: I thrust my 
hands in the hole, and yet thou sayest, 
there is no wound! Thou art mad! I re- 
member thee; it was thee who broughtest 
back these phantom enemies to torture 
me! I'hua'Mazda said: What enemies 
seest thou? The spirit answered: All I 
ever slew; a thousand or more! Away, ye 
tormentors! Ye mockers! I will thrust 
you through. The spirit of the king then 
stamped and raved, for he saw the spirits 
of the dead; but the audience saw them not, 
though they saw him, for he was in sar'gis 
form. 

I'hua'Mazda said: I say unto the, O 
king, thou art dead. Couldst thou but 
awaken to this fact, thou wouldst rise in 
spirit. Neither canst thou be delivered till 
these, thy enemies, are also delivered. 
Then answered the spirit of the king, say- 
ing: I banish thee from the city of Tse'- 
gow! Nor shalt thou ever return, under 
penalty of death! 

I'hua'Mazda said: I tell thee, O king, 
the city of Tse'gow is destroyed. There is 
not one house standing! The spirit of the 
king answered, saying: Thou tormentest 
me! Thou madman! Thou assertest lies 
in the face of facts! Begone, wretch! O 
that my belly were not cut across; I would 
at thee with vengeance! 

I'hua'Mazda withdrew the sar'gis, and 
the king could not be seen; nevertheless, 
his spirit continued cursing and raging all 
the same. The queen, Hi'ti'us, compre- 
hended the matter fully, and her heart was 
heavy with sorrow. 

Then I'hua'Mazda said to her: Re- 
member the faith of thy forefathers, the 
I'hins. Be thou strong in the Ormazdian 
law, and these sorrows will pass away. 
Nor is there anything in heaven or earth 
can satisfy the soul that is short before the 
law. To her that can say, I live the all 
highest, is happy indeed, and her happi- 
ness hath a sure foundation. And 
whosoever perceiving the dead are 
in torments, let them pray for them, sing- 
ing anthems unto the Father. Intercede 
ye with the All Light, to bestow them with 
peace. Think not that because of your 



258 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



LORDS' RECORD 



prayers the All Light runneth with haoma. 
to feed the spirits of the dead. But this 
I declare unto you, that, by peace and joy 
in your devotions to the Father, the spir- 
its who are present are thus reclaimed to 
virtue and exaltation. These things will 
I yet show unto you; be steadfast and 
hopeful in Faith, and, when the evening 
hath come, I will again call up the spirits 
of the dead before you. 

CHAPTER XIX. 

Because of the destruction of Tse'gow, 
there were hundreds of thousands of peo- 
ple rendered homeless and destitute, and 
groups were surging about in all places, 
crying out for food, or for some needful 
thing. I'hua'Mazda said to Zarathustra: 
The ill-fortune of mortals is the good for- 
tune of the righteous Gods; but the good 
fortune of mortals is the glory of evil 
Gods. Think not that because Tse'gow is 
burned, and the people hungry, the Voice 
of the Father is out of place. Now is the 
time they will give ear. By the loss of 
earthly treasures, the soul seeketh for that 
which will endure forever. Go thou, 
therefore, and I will go with thee; and 
criers shall be sent out, calling the people 
to the valley of Tsoak'ya this night. 

When night came, Zarathustra went 
before the people, and there were tens of 
thousands of them. I'hua'Mazda spake to 
them, explaining the Ormazdian law. 
When he was done speaking, he took Hi'- 
ti'us, the king's widow, her children, and 
forty others, and made a crescent of them; 
and he stood betwixt the horns thereof. 
And to his left and right were many of his 
companions. Thus prepared, Zarathustra 
sang a song, such as the I'hins had taught 
him in his youth. And the drujas were 
ushered into the crescent, taking on sar'- 
gis, the king amongst the number. And 
the spirit of the king was softened, for 
they sang peace to his soul and joy for- 
ever; and presently he awoke from his 
madness, and realized he was dead; and 
he rejoiced in Zarathustra, and applauded 
him before all the people. And the spirits 
of darkness who were with him did like- 
wise. 

Zarathustra said: Ye shall not worship 
any man born of woman, nor call him sa- 
cred. One only, who is Ormazd, the Cre- 



ator, is Master over all the world. Hear 
ye now my voice unto Him! 

Zarathustra stretched his arms upward, 
full of energy, and I'hua'Mazda spake 
through him, saying: Light of Light, O 
Father, hear Thou Thy Son! With Thy 
Almighty hand bless these faithful suffer- 
ers! Scarcely had these words been spok- 
en when there fell from the air above, fish 
and fruit and grains and roots, and all 
things good to eat, more than sufficient to 
feed the famished people for three days; 
although there were more than thirty 
thousand of them. 

And all this while the sar'gis of the 
king looked on, and beheld what had been 
done; and he cried out with a loud voice: 
Blessed art Thou, O Ormazd! O that I 
had known Thee! O that I had sought to 
find Thee! Hi'ti'us, my wife! And my 
blessed babes! Swear ye to the king, ye 
will proclaim the I'hua'Mazdian law, for- 
ever! Swear it! Give me joy! 

Then Hi'ti'us and the children held up 
their hands as directed by I'hua'Mazda, 
swearing a solemn oath to maintain the 
love of Ormazd and the Zarathustrian law, 
forever. After these, there came thou- 
sands and thousands of others, who also 
swore in the same way. I'hua'Mazda 
then took away the sar'gis, and the spirits 
could not be seen by mortals. 

CHAPTER XX. 

Again on the next day Zarathustra ap- 
peared before the multitude, and I'hua'- 
Mazda spake through him, saying: I 
came not in an age of darkness, but of 
light and knowledge. I am not here to 
proclaim miracles; I serve the Father, 
Whose Son I am. In heaven there are 
two kinds of spirits; those who serve 
the earth and those who serve the Father. 
If ye serve the earth ye shall be ministered 
unto by the spirits of the lower heavens, 
who are bound to the earth. If ye serve 
the Father, ye are ministered unto by the 
spirits of the higher heavens. 

Because ye were united in prayer last 
night to the Father, His holy angels 
brought ye food. His harvests are over all 
the earth; His fields are broad. It is not 
just that He also gather it and bring it to 
you. To be just to Him, go ye and bring 
forth out of the rich earth whatsoever 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



LORDS' RECORD 



259 



ye need, rejoicing in Him. Cease warring; 
kill not anything He created alive, that 
walks on the ground or flies in the air. 
And no flesh save fish, which is cold in 
life, shall enter your mouths. 

In the morning, when ye first awake, 
pray to the Creator, Ormazd, after 
this manner: Glory be to Thee, Thou 
All Light! Because thou hast created me 
alive; I will strive with all my might to 
be upright before Thee; I have faith Thou 
hast created me wisely; and I know Thou 
wilt show me the right way. Make my 
eyes sharper to see into my own soul 
than into all else in the world, I will dis- 
cover its dark spots and wash them clean. 
Seal Thou up my eyes from the sins of 
others, but magnify their goodness unto 
me, that I may be ashamed of my unwor- 
thiness before Thee. This day will I run 
quickly to the distressed and helpless, and 
give them joy by some deed or word. Seal 
up my tongue against slandering any man, 
woman or child. Whosoever Thou 
feedest me with, is sufficient for the day; 
complaint shall not escape from my mouth. 
Quicken me all day, O Ormazd, with this, 
my prayer, that I may become a glory in 
Thy works. Amen! 

I'hua'Mazda said: Remember, that to 
utter words of prayer, but to practice not, 
is of little value. He that is true to his 
light is strong in soul; to be false to one's 
light is to put out the eyes and stop up the 
ears. He that would rise in heaven, let 
him begin to rise on earth. The resurrec- 
tion lieth in following the All Highest 
Light one already hath. He that doeth 
not this, is a fool to ask the Father to raise 
him up. Hell fire is his boundary in the 
next world. Because Ormazd gave away 
Himself, He created all things. By sac- 
rifice for the elevation of others doth a man 
begin to approach Ormazd. This is resur- 
rection in fact. 

CHAPTER XXI. 

I'hua'Mazda called together those who 
swore allegiance to the Zarathustrian law; 
and he separated them from the others, 
and there were in ten days thirty thousand 
professed followers. Nevertheless, I'hua'- 
Mazda spake to Zarathustra, saying: Of 
all these, only one in ten will remain long 
in faith. And to establish the tenth firmly 



is more valuable than to have ten times as 
many who understand not what they pro- 
fess. 

Zarathustra asked: How can a tenth be 
made firm? 

I'hua'Mazda said: Long ago I told 
thee to go and live with the I'hins. 

Zarathustra said: I understand. I 
learned the Wheel of Ormazd from the 
I'hins. 

Then said I'hua'Mazda: Make thou a 
Wheel of Ormazd. 

Zarathustra made a wheel, and hung it 
slanting, facing the sun at high noon. 
Then I'hua'Mazda explained to the peo- 
ple, saying: This is a symbol of the name 
of the Creator, Ormazd. Put it in the 
place betwixt the horns of the crescent, for 
it is sacred. Let the Faithists go with me, 
and I will explain. 

They carried it to the meeting-place 
and faced it in the same direction. And 
when the people stood in a circle around 
it, I'hua'Mazda said: The name of this 
place shall be Harel, and the name of the 
wheel shall be the Wheel of the Altar. 
Behold, then, ye have already sworn an 
oath under the thigh, in the custom of 
your forefathers, but ye shall now renew 
your oath on the Wheel of the Altar of Or- 
mazd, and His Holy Book. 

I'hua'Mazda then administered the oath 
unto many, wherein they covenanted to 
turn from evil and strive to do good; and 
each and every one turned the wheel once 
round, as a witness before the Father. 
When they had all covenanted, I'hua'- 
Mazda said: Ye shall make many wheels, 
and carry them along the roadways, and 
wherever one road crosseth another ye 
shall place a Wheel of the Altar; and ye 
shall dedicate the wheel to the Creator. 
And whoever passeth that way shall halt 
and remember his Creator; and he shall re- 
new his covenant, to turn from evil and 
strive to do good; and in testimony be- 
fore the Father, he shall turn the wheel 
once round. 

Thus was established the sacred wheel 
of the altar amongst the I'huan race. 

I'hua'Mazda spake to Zarathustra, say- 
ing: What is the most potent thing in ev- 
ery creature? Zarathustra said: The eye is 
the most potent. The eye is the most to be 
feared; the most desirable. The eye of man 



260 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



LORDS RECORD 



can go away from man; his hand cannot 
go way from him, nor his foot. Man's eye 
can reach the mountains; to the clouds, 
the moon, the sun and the stars. 

I'hua'Mazda said: If the eye of man 
is the most potent, what follows? 

Zarathustra said: The eye of Ormazd 
is His most potent power over man. 

So, Zarathustra made a picture of an 
eye, and placed it over the altar. Where- 
upon I'hua'Mazda made the people cov- 
enant anew, but this time with the I'hua'- 
Mazdian law, the Ormazdian law. Where- 
in they said: I know Thine eye is upon 
me night and day; nothing is hidden from 
Thy sight, O Ormazd! And I'hua'Mazda 
commanded them to place a picture of an 
eye over the altars in all places of worship. 

Then came the first night of the new 
moon, and Zarathustra went into the place 
of worship; and a great multitude also 
came in. So I'hua'Mazda said: This is 
mas night for the spirits of the dead. That 
the widow, Hi'ti'us, may have joy this 
night, I will sing and pray for the spirit 
of the king. And, afterward, for all spirits 
who are in darkness. When they sang 
and prayed, the spirit of the king came in 
sar'gis, and talked to Hi'ti'us, and to oth- 
ers. And, after that, the spirit of the king 
prayed and sang with I'hua'Mazda. Thus 
was established the first night of the new 
moon as mas night for the spirits of the 
dead, and it was demonstrated before the 
living. 

I'hua'Mazda taught through Zarathus- 
tra for forty days and nights; teaching the 
Zarathustrian law, the Ormazdian law. 
And thousands and thousands of people 
were converted unto righteousness; and 
these were called disciples of Zazathustra. 

Zarathustra inquired of I'hua'Mazda 
what was the best, most potent thing for 
the generations of men. Then answered 
I'hua'Mazda, saying: The best, most po- 
tent thing for the generations of men is 
to teach the very young child the ever 
presence of the All Potent Eye, which sees 
into the body of mortals, and into the soul. 

Zarathustra inquired concerning very 
young children: Then I'hua'Mazda an- 
swered, saying: In three days and five 
days and seven days the rite of circumcision 
for the males, and piercing the ears for the 



females. And, when they are old enough, 
they shall be consecrated on the wheel. 

Zarathustra said: To consecrate, what 
is that? Then answered I'hua'Mazda: To 
profess the All Highest, the Creator, Or- 
mazd. And from that time forth the 
young child shall pray to Ormazd every 
night before going to sleep, and pray 
every morning as soon as awake to Or- 
mazd, renewing its covenant and acknowl- 
edging the presence of the All Potent Eye. 

Zarathustra inquired concerning chil- 
dren who were not thus provided. I'hua'- 
Mazda answered: If they die, they 
fall into the care of drujas and be- 
come drujas themselves; but if they live, 
they will grow up liars and Druks, killing 
and stealing. 

Zarathustra inquired concerning a con- 
secrated child, if it die? Then I'hua'- 
Mazda answered: If a consecrated child 
die, its spirit is received in heaven by the 
angels of Ormazd, and taken to a place of 
delight. 

When these things were explained to 
the disciples, the mothers brought their 
children before Zarathustra; and I'hua'- 
Mazda consecrated them on the altar, and 
they were baptized with water and fire, 
and given names by the rab'bah. 

CHAPTER XXII. 

Zarathustra, inquired concerning pro- 
tection against imposters. To which I'hu- 
a'-Mazda answered, saying: Prove all 
things on the altar. If a man come before 
the people saying: Behold, I am a prophet! 
and he teach strange doctrines, he shall be 
tied on the wheel with his face toward the 
sun at high noon. And if he be a true 
prophet, the spirits who dwell by the altar 
will set him free. But, if he be not releas- 
ed on the third night, the wheel shall be 
carried out into the forest and stood up 
by the bushes. And if he be an impostor, 
the wild beasts will come and devour his 
flesh. Zarathustra inquired concerning the 
wheel afterward. I'hua'Mazda said: When 
an impostor hath perished on the wheel, 
behold, the wheel shall be no longer used 
as before. But the disciples shall cut away 
the rim of the wheel, and cast it away, for 
it is useless. 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI «>„■.. RECORD 



261 



Zarathustra inquired concerning the 
government. To which I'hua'Mazda re- 
plied, saying: To thy disciples there is no 
need of government, save to do the Will 
of Ormazd. But no people are all pure; 
no people are all wise. Two kinds of gov- 
ernments created the Creator; the first is 
His Own, the Government of Ormazd; the 
second is the government of mortals. 

Zarathustra inquired if government did 
not abridge liberty. I'hua'Mazda said: The 
Ormazdian government giveth liberty; so 
far as man's government partaketh after 
the Ormazdian government, it giveth lib- 
erty also. 

Zarathustra inquired: What is the 
best man's government? To which I'hua'- 
Mazda replied: This is the best, most po- 
tent government: First, there shall not be 
more than two thousand people, so that 
they can know one another; and no city 
shall be larger than that. 

The wisest, best man shall be the high 
rab'bah; but the families of tens and fam- 
ilies of hundreds within the city shall have 
each, one rab'bah, being the wisest, best 
man. These rab'bahs shall be the govern- 
ment of the city. They shall have a gov- 
ernment house, and it shall be the place of 
decrees. 

Zarathustra said: How shall they 
make decrees, that the decrees pervert not 
liberty? I'hua'Mazda said: Ask not this, 
O man! He who crieth out constantly for 
his liberty is a selfish man, he is a Druk. 
Save a man be willing to sacrifice his lib- 
erty somewhat, for the public good, he. is 
unworthy before Ormazd. To find the 
amount of sacrifice, this is the business of 
the decrees. 

Zarathustra said: How, then, shall the 
rab'bah proceed? I'hua'Mazda said: When 
they are seated, the chief rab'bah shall an- 
nounce the subject; neither shall any other 
rab'bah announce the subject. But if a 
rab'bah have a subject, he shall state it 
beforehand to the chief rab'bah. After the 
subject is announced, then shall all the 
rab'bahs speak on the subject; but they 
shall not speak against one another; but 
each one declaring his highest light. When 
they have all spoken, then shall the chief 
rab'bah speak his highest light, which 
he gathereth from the others in the first 
place, but which is afterward illuminated 



by the Light of Ormazd, and this shall be 
the decree. 

Zarathustra inquired concerning the 
laws betwixt cities. I'hua'Mazda spake to 
Zarathustra, explaining the Ormazdian 
law. He said: A city is a family of one. 
A small village is a family of one; for 
which reason is a city called Ir. And every 
city shall have one God-ir, who shall be 
the best and wisest man. The God-irs 
shall meet in council to consider what is 
good for all the cities jointly. For some 
cities are situated for flax and wool, some 
for iron, and some for copper, and some 
for ships. 

Zarathustra inquired concerning the 
Council of God-irs. I'hua'Mazda answer- 
ed him, saying. The God-irs shall choose 
the best and wisest man amongst them, 
and he shall be called God-ir Chief. And 
he shall sit in the east in the Council 
chamber, and he shall present the sub- 
jects, after they have been told to him by 
the other God-irs. And when he hath pre- 
sented a subject, all the members shall 
speak upon it. 

And after they have all spoken, then 
the God-ir Chief shall speak, and his 
words shall be the decree, which shall be 
called the Zarathustrian law, because the 
All Light dwelleth with the Chief, and he 
cannot err. This is the Ormazdian law, 
the I'hua'Mazdian law, the Zarathustrian 
law. 

Zarathustra said: Of a walled city, 
what is the Ormazdian law? I'hua'Mazda 
answered, saying: To the I'hins, walled 
cities, to protect them from beasts and ser- 
pents; to I'huans, cities without walls. 
To the cities of the Druks, walls. This is 
the kingdom of I'hua'Mazda; they that 
have faith, why shall they build walls? 
They shall not hoard up gold and silver; 
none will rob them. After Zarathustra, 
two people will live. One shall be the 
people of this world; the other shall be 
the people of Ormazd. The former shall 
strive for earthly things; the latter for 
spiritual things. And there shall be no af- 
finity betwixt these two people. From this 
time forth, the Zarathustrian people, all ex- 
cept the little I'hins, who have faith in 
the Father, shall not have walled cities. 
But this world's people, having no faith in 
the Father, shall have faith in stone walls; 



262 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



LORDS' RECORD 



whereby ye may know which are righteous 
in my sight. 

Zarathustra inquired concerning the 
smallest of cities. I'hua'Mazda answered 
him, saying: The smallest city is a man 
and his wife and children. And even as 
the people in a large city are one with one 
another, so shall a man and his wife and 
children be one with one another. 

And as a large city must have a head 
father, so shall a small one. Whatsoever 
hath no head is nothing. 

Zarathustra said: In the government of 
a large city, the fathers speak on a sub- 
ject, and after them, the head father de- 
creeth. 

I'hua'Mazda said: Even so shall it be 
in a family of husband and wife. The wife 
shall speak first, and the children next, if 
old enough; and after that the father shall 
decree. That which is a good law for a 
large city, is good for a small one. As the 
kingdoms in heaven are governed, so shall 
be the kingdoms of earth. 

Zarathustra inquired concerning a bad 
husband and a good wife, and a bad wife 
and a good husband? I'hua'Mazda spake 
to Zarathustra, the All Pure, saying: Who 
knoweth what is good and what is bad? 
Are not all men to give themselves as a 
sacrifice to the Father, and all women also? 
If a good woman is not willing to sacrifice 
herself to a bad husband, after having 
sworn to Ormazd, then she is not good, 
but a lover of herself. A good woman hath 
no self to serve. Because she findeth her 
husband bad, shall she also be bad? Is it 
not good for her in the place Ormazd pro- 
vided? Shall she set up her judgment 
against the Father's? There be men of 
evil, and of passion, who abuse their wives. 
Knoweth not every damsel this? For this 
reason, if she commit herself to her hus- 
band in the name of the Father, He heareth 
her. And He establisheth His Kingdom 
in her house. And that man and that wo- 
man have no longer themselves to consult 
as to their desires; for if the Father desir- 
eth her to leave her husband, or the hus- 
band to leave the wife, He taketh one of 
them to heaven. Think not that He chang- 
eth as the wind, or boweth Himself to 
please the caprice of man or woman. 
Rather let the good wife, with a bad hus- 
band, say to Ormazd: 



Because I was vain, Thou hast rebuked 
me, O Father. Because I sought to change 
my condition, Thou hast shown me I 
knew not what was good for me. Yea, 
thou hast shown me the folly of my judg- 
ment before Thee, and I will profit in turn- 
ing to Thy Will. I will not more open my 
mouth in complaint. Though I be scourg- 
ed with stripes, and made ashamed of my 
household, yet will I glorify Thee. The 
city Thou hast founded in me, will I be- 
gin at the foundation, and build up as a 
holy city, in Thy name. 

And she shall say to her husband, who 
beateth her: Because the Father gaveth 
thee to me, I will rejoice and sing in thy 
praise. Before I sleep at night, I will ask 
His blessing upon thee, and in the early 
morning, and at high noon. Though thou 
mayest hate me, yet will I do so great good 
works for thee, thou shalt love me. 
Though thou mayest kill me, yet will I go 
to heaven and build a house for thee. 

CHAPTER XXIII. 

When Zarathustra had divided the peo- 
ple, leading his followers away into suita- 
ble places, he looked back with compas- 
sion, and he said to I'hua'Mazda: What 
of them who will not accept the Ormaz- 
dian law? I'hua'Mazda answered him, 
saying: Behold, thy arms are full! Let 
the dead have dominion with the dead. 
Not only this generation, but many that 
come after thee, will be unable to accept 
the Ormazdian law. 

Zarathustra apportioned his people into 
cities and villages and families, but over 
the whole of them he appointed Yus'avak, 
one of his companions who came with him 
from Oas, as Chief. And when Yus'avak 
was established as Chief, Zarathustra and 
his companions traveled further, until they 
came to the city of Ne'ki'ro, kingdom of 
Aboatha, king of twelve generations 
through his forefathers, whose title was, 
Aboatha, Son of Uzza, Son of Nimrod, 
Son of the House of Tus'iang, who was 
descended from before the world was! 

Ne'ki'ro was a walled city, but the 
Zarathustrians gained entrance without 
paying tribute, because the law thus fa- 
vored strangers. Aboatha, in his youth, 
had traveled amongst the Par'si'e'ans, and 
knew the language; and when Zarathustra 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI to**.. BECOBO 



26 S 



was before him, speaking in the Oas'an 
tongue, the king inquired his business, 
and how long he purposed staying, stat- 
ing moreover, that he had received the 
tablets of the Ormazdian law, with the in • 
terpretations, from the king of the Sun, 
Asha; and that he had desired to see Zara- 
thustra. 

Zarathustra said: I came to establish 
the Ormazdian law. In the name of the 
All Light will I blunt the edge of the 
sword and the spear. I have come in the 
person of I'hua'Mazda, and until I . have 
fulfilled the commandments upon me, I 
shall tarry within thy city. 

The king said: My city is not large; I 
have more scalps and skulls, for the size 
of my city, than any other king in the 
world. But know thou, O man, I am a 
philosopher. Many of my people are also 
learned people. Hear thou me, then, if 
thou hast a greater philosophy than I have, 
I will not only bequeath to thee the public 
skulls and scalps, to be thy treasures for- 
ever, but I will also give my skull and 
scalp into thy hand, as the most valuable 
treasure in the Jaffeth'ean empire. 

Zarathustra said: Though thou settest 
great value on skulls and scalps, because 
they are the product of labor, yet they are 
of no value to me, nor Ormazd. Neither 
have I any philosophy for thee. To ac- 
cept His will; to be servant unto Him, 
by doing good unto others, comprise the 
whole of the law, by which all men may be 
made to rejoice in their creation. 

The king said: Think not that I am as 
other men. I am not as other men. In 
the first beginning of all things, there were 
Seven and Nine things. I was one of 
them. By division, we created all there is 
in heaven and earth. Seven thousand and 
seven millions, and nine thousand and nine 
millions of times, have I divided myself. 
One-seventh and one-ninth of all there are 
of created things is my very self. Tell me, 
then, hast thou as great a philosophy as 
this? 

Zarathustra said: O the folly of men 
before Thee, O Ormazd! They run after 
that which flattereth self, seeing their fel- 
lows going down in death, and they raise 
not their hands to lift them up! I tell 
thee, O king, thy poorest slave that bring- 
eth out of the earth food for two men, 



hath a greater philosophy than thine! He 
that can rule over his own self-conceit, 
that speaketh not of himself, giveth a bet- 
ter philosophy of himself than thou hast. 
He who hath not yet risen from his moth- 
er's breast, hath more treasures to give 
than thou hast obtained with all thy phil- 
osophy. Ere three days have passed by, 
the city's skulls and scalps will be burned 
to dust. Nor will thy philosophy avail thee 
to stay the hand of I'hua'Mazda. 

.The king said: Proposest thou with 
this handful of men to battle with my 
army? Zarathustra said: I have spoken. 
There is no value in discoursing with any 
man who hath an opinion to establish, nor 
is man's opinion of value to raise up the 
souls of men. Bring thou, therefore, thy 
army, and command them to fall upon me 
and mine! 

The king said: Thou hast no weapons; 
think not that I battle with men who use 
their tongues, like women! 

Zarathustra said: Why boastest thou? 
Thy soldiers will turn and flee when thou 
bringest them against me! 

The king turned away then, and or- 
dered his officers to bring soldiers, and 
despatch Zarathustra and his companions, 
and to hang their skulls and scalps on the 
walls. Zarathustra and his companions 
went into the king's garden and formed in 
an altar. When the sun had set, and even- 
ing came, the king's soldiers, more than 
ten thousand, came upon them. 

I'hua'Mazda had great power, because 
of the faith of Zarathustra, and he spake 
with a loud voice, saying: Light of Thy 
Light, O Ormazd! Build me here a wall 
of fire! And behold, there fell from hea- 
ven curtains of fire, till a great wall stood 
betwixt the two peoples; nor would one 
soldier throw a spear or sling a stone; and 
many of them broke and fled. 

When the king saw the power of Zara- 
thustra, he feared for his kingdom; and 
not deciding at once what course to pur- 
sue, he went into his palace. Then came 
Zarathustra and his companions out of the 
garden, but the light extended up above 
Zarathustra's head like a pillar of fire. 
I'hua'Mazda spake to some who were near- 
est, saying: 

Run quickly and call the soldiers back, 
saying to them they shall be my soldiers, 



264 



CYCLE OF FEAGAPATT1 



LORDS' RECORD 



and I will give them the weapons of the 
Creator. So, the messengers ran, and 
brought many of them back. I'hua'Mazda 
commanded them to gather the skulls 
and scalps from the city walls, and from 
the gates, and go and burn them, and the 
soldiers did these things. 

The next day after they were consumed, 
I'hua'Mazda began to preach, explaining 
the Ormazdian law; and he received many 
followers. The king had tried by all means 
to gather his soldiers together, but no one 
obeyed him. After that Zarathustra went 
to him, saying: If thou art one-seventh 
and one-ninth of all things, who thinkest 
thou I am? 

The king said: They say thou art a 
very Creator! But, as to my opinion, 
thou art only a magician. Thou canst not 
do anything real; for which reason, I 
hoped thou wouldst come before me. 
Know, then, thy end hath come! With 
that, the king struck at Zarathustra; but 
the king's sword was broken into pieces, 
and of non-effect. 

The king had two trained chetahs, 
large as the largest lions, and he ordered 
them to be unloosed and set upon Zara- 
thustra. And it was done; but, lo, the che- 
tahs came and licked his hands. But the 
king was hardened, and would not believe. 
I'hua'Mazda called the king to come near, 
and he came. 

He said unto the king: I am not thine 
enemy, but the enemy of evil; I come not 
to take thy kingdom. In a few days I 
shall leave this place. So, thy kingdom 
would be worthless to me. And yet I come 
to establish another kingdom, which is the 
Father's. I come to overthrow sin and 
wickedness, and to build up that which is 
good. And in so doing, it shall be known 
amongst men that the soul is immortal. 
Rather would I see thee and thy people 
alive and full pf joy, than to see them dead. 
Thou hast said thou understandest the 
Ormazdian law; perceiving there is also 
a king's law. 

The king's laws are for the earth- world; 
to punish the wicked and reward the val- 
orous; the Ormazdian law is for the Zara- 
thustrians, who need no kings. Thy sub- 
jects are for war and plunder; but the sub- 
jects of the Great Spirit are for doing good, 
and in love and mercy. And have I not 



shown thee that the Ormazdian laws are 
the stronger of the two? Yea, a hundred- 
fold. It is wiser for thee to espouse the 
stronger law. Thou hast gathered certain 
treasures, boasting of thy treasures' value. 
Because thou hast made a law of exchange 
for skulls and scalps, thou makest them 
valuable! Because a man bringeth a skull 
to thee, thou givest him bread. Now I de- 
clare unto thee, values consist not in the 
rate of exchange betwixt men. Shall a 
man gather a heap of stones, and say: Be- 
hold, they are valuable! Or iron, or gold, 
or copper, and say: Behold, they are val- 
uable! A piece of bread is valuable, or 
flax, or wool. Because man hath set value 
on things not valuable, he buildeth in false- 
hood and death. The man who hath the 
most All Light, hath the greatest valua- 
bles. For by the Light of the Father all 
righteous things can be obtained easily. 

Whilst I'hua'Mazda was yet speaking, 
the spirit of Zarathustra went abroad, and, 
with ten thousand other spirits, brought 
fish and fruit, and let them fall around 
about the place. The people ran and gath- 
ered them up for food. The king made no 
reply at first, for he was encompassed 
about with evil spirits, who were angered 
with I'hua'Mazda and his proceedings. 
Presently the king said: 

Because I am transcended by thee, it is 
no longer useful for me to live. With 
that, he cut his body across, and fell dead. 
And Zarathustra commanded that the 
king's body be laid straight for three days; 
and it was done; and there came thousands 
of people to look upon the king, and wit- 
ness that he was dead. And they saw of 
a truth that the bowels were gushed out of 
the wound, and that there was no breath 
in him. 

So I'hua'Mazda allowed the spirit of the 
king to live three days in torments, and 
then he called his disciples around him, 
saying: Now will I raise the king to life, 
and it shall be testimony in Jaffeth. And 
Zarathustra pushed the bowels back into 
the body, and drew the place shut, saying: 
In Thy name, O Ormazd, heal I this man's 
body, as a testimony of Thy Wisdom and 
Power! And when Zarathustra had drawn 
his hand over the wound twice, it was 
healed. And then Zarathustra said: O Fa- 
ther, as by Thy spirit Thou didst quicken 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI ">«.. -««.. 



265 



into life this, Thy child, in his mother's 
womb, restore Thou him to life! 

And the king was healed, and restored 
to life before the people; and he awoke 
and looked about, and then rose up. He 
said: I was dead and in hell, and I saw 
millions of the dead, and they were in hell 
also. And there went up around about 
them fires of burning brimstone, and none 
could escape. 

CHAPTER XXIV. 

When the king was restored, he was as 
another man, having su'is, and believing 
in the immortality of the spirit; and he ask- 
ed Zarathustra what now he should do 
that he might escape the fires of hell after 
death. 

I'hua'Mazda spake through Zarathustra, 
saying: Think not what thou canst do to 
escape hell fire, for that would be laboring 
for self. Think what thou canst do to save 
others. For which reason thou shalt prac- 
tice the Ormazdian law. One year thou 
shalt dwell with the poor, carrying the 
alms-bowl, according to the Zarathustrian 
law. After that thou shalt preach the 
I'hua'Mazdian law, of the denial of self 
for the good of the city, teaching the turn- 
ing away from earthly things, and striving 
for spiritual things, having faith in Or- 
mazd. 

The king said: All these things can I 
do, yet one thing I cannot do, which is 
having faith in Ormazd. If He be a Per- 
son, and created all the creation, is He not 
the foundation of evil as well as good? 
If He heretofore created evil, or by in- 
competence suffered it to enter into crea- 
tion, may He not do so in after time, even 
after death? 

Phua'Mazda said: When a potter hath 
a pot half made, sayest thou it is an evil 
pot? Nay, verily, but that it is not yet 
completed. Even so are all men, created 
by Ormazd. Those who are good are 
completed, but those who are evil are un- 
finished work. But the Creator also gave 
to man knowledge, that he might see him- 
self in the unfinished state, and the Creator 
gave to man power and judgment, that 
man might turn to and help complete him- 
self, thereby sharing the glory of his crea- 
tion. The man that doeth all this has al- 
ready escaped hell fire. 



The king inquired concerning animals, 
to which I'hua'Mazda answered, saying: 
Animals are of the earth creation, and are 
completed in the place of their dwelling. 
Neither hath any animal aspiration to 
make itself better or wiser, that it may 
contribute to the creation. And some men 
have no more aspiration than an animal 
serving the flesh only. Only the torments 
of hell can stir them up. 

When I'hua'Mazda explained the Or- 
mazdian law, the quarter of which is not 
here related, the king comprehended, 
whereupon he took vows on the altar, and 
under the eye, according to the Zarathus- 
trian law. So when those people were re- 
stored, Zarathustra left one of his travel- 
ing companions with them, as God-ir in 
Chief, and Zarathustra departed, taking 
his other companions with him. 

Whereof it is recorded in the libraries 
of heaven, showing that the next city king- 
dom was likewise delivered, and the peo- 
ple became Zarathustrians. And again 
Zarathustra departed, and came to another 
city, which was overthrown and delivered 
also. Until it came to pass that Zarathus- 
tra overthrew and delivered twenty and 
four cities and kingdoms in Jaffeth. 

And after that he departed to the up- 
per lands of Shem, where he also over- 
threw and delivered many cities and king- 
doms, establishing the Zarathustrian law. 
For two whole years he labored in Shem; 
and so great was the power of Ormazd 
upon Zarathustra that all the cities and 
kingdoms of Shem threw of the bondage 
of the Sun Kingdom of Par'si'e. 

After that Zarathustra traveled toward 
Ham, which was called Arabin'ya. But in 
those countries Zarathustra had not so 
great success, because the people were not 
learned in books, nor in the stars, nor tab- 
lets. Nevertheless, Zarathustra delivered 
many cities. So I'hua'Mazda said to Zara- 
thustra: Return, now, to thine own coun- 
try; and thou shalt overthrow yet seven 
cities and seven great kingdoms; and after 
that thou shalt return to Oas, and it shall 
fall before thy hand, and the prophecies 
made in thy childhood shall be fulfilled. 

So Zarathustra returned to Par'si'e and 
went to the seven great cities and king- 
doms, and overthrew them; and many of 
them were destroyed utterly by fire and by 



266 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



LORDS' RECORD 



war; but Zarathustra delivered the faithful 
and established the Zarathustrian law with 
all of them. 

Asha had continued with the Zarathus- 
trians; but in consequence of the persecu- 
tions of the kings of Oas, they had been 
obliged to retire further into the forests 
and plains and unsettled regions, where 
roved the Listians, the wild people. To 
these the Zarathustrians were friends, and 
the Listians came in great numbers, and 
dwelt near about the Zarathustrians. After 
Zarathustra had completed his travels, he 
returned to the Forest of Goats, in the 
first place, to meet his followers, and to 
rejoice with them for the great light I'hua'- 
Mazda had bestowed upon them. So, 
when Zarathustra returned to them, there 
was great rejoicing; and there were pres- 
ent Zarathustra's mother, and many of the 
Listians who knew him in his childhood. 
After many days of rest and rejoicing, 
I'hua'Mazda came to Zarathustra, saying: 
Behold, the time hath now come to go 
against the city of thy birth. Take Asha 
with thee, and I will cause Oas to fall be- 
fore thy hand. Accordingly, Zarathustra 
took Asha and returned to the gates of 
Oas; but he was known at once; and when 
he demanded admittance, he was refused, 
because the king had previously decreed 
his banishment and death, there being@an 
offer of reward to whomsoever would de- 
stroy him and bring his skull to the king. 

CHAPTER XXV. 

In those days, Pon'yah was king of 
Oas, and, by title, King of the Sun; King 
of the middle of the world; King of 
Kings; Mightiest of mortals; Owner of all 
human flesh; Ruler of the earth, and Mas- 
ter of Life and Death! 

For nearly four years had Zarathustra 
been absent, and the effect of his preach- 
ing in foreign lands had been to cut off the 
paying of tribute to the City of the Sun. 
For which reason, Pon'yah, king of Oas, 
had sworn an oath under his own thigh to 
pursue Zarathustra, and have him slain. 
Accordingly, the king had equipped many 
different armies and sent them in search of 
Zarathustra; but I'hua'Mazda led Zarathus- 
tra in a different way or sent spirits to in- 



spire the soldiers to go another way. Con- 
sequently, none of the armies sent to cap- 
ture Zarathustra ever found him. When 
he was heard of in one city, and the sol- 
diers came to that city, he was gone. And 
so it continued, until now Zarathustra 
had returned to the very gates of Oas. 
Because Zarathustra was the largest man 
in the world, he was easily known; and 
from a description he would be easily rec- 
ognized by those who had never seen him 
before. 

The keeper of the gate, whose name 
was Zhoo'das, thought to obtain the re- 
ward, and hit upon the following plan, say- 
ing to Zarathustra: I know thee; thou art 
Zarathustra, who art banished under pen- 
alty of death. I have no right to admit 
thee within the city, nor have I a desire to 
witness thy sure death. But if thou wilt 
secrete thyself, till the change of watch, 
when I am absent on the king's reports, 
thou mayst take thine own risk. But if I 
admit thee, I will also be put to death. 

Zarathustra said: As for myself, I 
fear not; but I would not have thee put to 
death on my account. Where, then, can 
I secrete myself, till the change of watch? 
Zhoo'das, the keeper of the gate, said: 
Within the chamber of the wall. Go thou, 
and thy friend with thee. 

So Zarathustra went into the chamber 
of the wall, and Asha went with him. And 
now, when they were concealed, Zhoo'das 
called his wife and said unto her: Be thou 
here, walking back and forth, that they 
who are concealed will think it is I. And 
I will run quickly to the guards, and they 
shall come and seize Zarathustra, for 
whom the reward is offered. 

And the keeper's wife came and walked 
back and forth; and the keeper ran quickly 
and brought the guards, one thousand 
men, with spears and swords and war 
clubs and slings and bows and arrows, and 
they surrounded the place of the chamber 
on all sides. And then spake Zhoo'das 
ironically, saying: Come forth, Zarathus- 
tra, now is the change of watch! 

And Zarathustra and Asha came forth 
and beheld what was done. Zarathustra 
said to Asha: The Light is upon me. Go 
thou with me. No harm shall come to 
thee. But the time has come when the 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI «■- ««« 



267 



prophecies made in my youth shall be ful- 
filled. 

CHAPTER XXVI. 

So Zarathustra fell into the power of 
the Sun King; and the soldiers caused him 
and Asha to march in their midst to the 
place of the skulls. And there came forth 
thousands of people to witness the proceed- 
ings; for at this time there were many who 
were in sympathy with Zarathustra, as well 
as many against him. And in order to stay 
the multitude, the captain of the army 
called out many soldiers in addition to 
those who made the arrest. Others ran to 
the king's palace, carrying the news of his 
arrest, and the place he had been taken to. 
The king^said to the heralds: Though 
this man shall die, it is fit that proper judg- 
ment be rendered against him, as an exam- 
ple before all men. Go, therefore, to the 
executioners, and command them to bring 
Zarathustra into my presence, that I may 
adjudge him to death according to law. 

This was done, and Zarathustra was 
brought before the king, who accosted 
him, saying: 

By thy behavior thou art accused be- 
fore thy king, and I adjudge thee to death. 
But that thou mayst be as an example be- 
fore the world, I will render my judgments 
before the heralds, who shall proclaim my 
words unto all who desire to witness thy 
death. 

First, then, thou wert ordered for ar- 
rest by my predecessor, and thou did not 
deliver thyself up to my soldiers; neither 
could they find thee. For which thou art 
adjudged to death. 

Second. Without permission from the 
King of the Sun, thou hast traveled in for- 
eign lands, sowing seeds of disallegiance 
against the Central Kingdom. For which 
thou art adjudged to death. 

Third. The King of Kings offered a 
ransom for thy head, and the king's sol- 
diers were disappointed in finding thee. 
For which thou art adjudged to death. 

Fourth. In thy youth thou didst threat- 
ed to overthrow the city of Oas, the City 
of the Sun, and failed to make thy word 
good, thereby being a teacher of lies. For 
which thou art adjudged to death. 

Fifth. Thou hast cut off the foreign 
tribute to the rightful Owner of the whole 



world! For which thou art adjudged to 
death. 

Sixth. Thou hast revived the doctrines 
of the dark ages, teaching of spirits and 
Gods, which things cannot exist, because 
they are contrary to nature, and contrary 
to the laws of the King of the world! For 
which thou art adjudged to death. 

Seventh. Thou hast taught that there 
is an unseen Creator greater than thy 
king; which is contrary to reason. For 
which thou art adjudged to death. 

Eighth. Thou returnedst to Oas not 
openly, but as a thief, and hid thyself in a 
chamber of the wall. For which thou art 
adjudged to death in the manner of 
thieves, which is the most ignoble of all 
deaths. 

Therefore, I command the executioners 
to take thee to the den of thieves and cast 
thee therein; and on the morrow, at high 
noon, thou shalt be hung up by thy feet 
along with the thieves where thou shalt be 
left hanging till thou art dead. 

That my judgment may appease thy 
best friends, what sayest thou against my 
decrees? 

Zarathustra said: All the charges thou 
hast made against me are true this day; 
but ere to-morrow's setting sun I will have 
disproved some of them. To-day thy king- 
dom is large; in two days I will be dead, 
and thou wilt be dead; and this great city 
will be destroyed. Yea, the Temple of the 
Sun will be rent in twain, and fall as a 
heap of rubbish. 

The king laughed in derision, and then 
spake to Asha, saying: Thou art an old 
fool. Go thy way. So Asha was liberated, 
and Zarathustra was taken to the den of 
thieves and cast therein. And the den of 
thieves was surrounded by the dens of lions 
that belonged to the king's gardens. And 
a bridge passed over, and, when the pris- 
oners were within, the bridge was with- 
drawn. And no prisoner could escape but 
would fall a prey to the lions, which were 
fed on the flesh of the persons executed ac- 
cording to law. 

CHAPTER XXVII. 

During the night, Pon'yah, King of the 
Sun, bethought him that perhaps he might 
obtain the secrets of Zarathustra, as re- 
gards his powers with uz, and he sent him 



268 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATT1 



LORDS' RECORD 



the following message, to-wit: If thou 
wilt reveal the secrets of thy power to thy 
king, thy life shall be spared; and if thou 
wilt prostrate thyself before the King of 
Kings, saying: There is none higher! thou 
shalt have five cities to rule over all thy 
days. To which Zarathustra sent back the 
following reply, to-wit: 

Zarathustra hath no secrets to reveal; 
neither desireth he five cities, nor one city, 
to rule over. To-morrow I shall die, and 
on the following night thou also shalt die. 
And yet, erst thou diest, thou shalt see the 
temple of the stars rent in twain and fall 
down; and the city of Oas shall fall and 
rise no more; and Ya'seang, in Jaffeth, 
shall become King of the Sun, and his dy- 
nasty shall stand thousands of years. 

The king was surprised at such an an- 
swer, and so angeerd that he smote the 
messenger with his sling, and he fell dead, 
and the king ordered his body to be cast 
into the den of lions. It was near the 
middle of the night when the body was 
brought, and Zarathustra, being tall, saw- 
above the wall, and he called out, saying: 
Cast not the body into the dens with the 
lions; for I will call him to life in the 
name of Ormazd. And the men laid the 
body down by the outer wall, and Zarathus- 
tra said: He that is standing by the body 
shall lay his hand upon it. And the man 
laid his hand on the flesh of the man's 
body betwixt the neck and the back, and 
Zarathustra said: The words I say, say 
thou also: Life of Thy Life, O Ormazd! 
Restore Thou this, Thy son, to life! 

And behold, the man awoke to 
life, and opened his eyes, and presently 
rose up; and Zarathustra bade him depart 
out of the city. Now the arrest and con- 
demnation of Zarathustra had caused thou- 
sands of people to assemble around about 
the prison; and they beheld the man re- 
stored to life; and some of them went with 
him out of the city. And all night, after 
that, Zarathustra healed the sick, and re- 
stored the blind and deaf, by calling over 
the walls in the name of the Father. When 
it was near sunrise, the next morning, the 
place of the executions was crowded with 
spectators. Many of the Zarathustrians 
believed that Zarathustra would liberate 
himself by the power upon him; and on 
the other hand, the king's people, especial- 



ly the learned, desired to realize his execu- 
tion, for they denounced him as an impos- 
tor. The latter said: If he be the Master 
of the I'huans, let him prove his powers 
whilst he is hanging by the feet. 

It was the law of Oas to keep twelve 
executioners, representing twelve moons, 
and at sunrise every morning they put to 
death whomsoever had been adjudged to 
death the previous day. Now, there were 
in prison with Zarathustra two thieves, 
condemned to the same ignoble death. 
And they were weeping and moaning! 
Zarathustra said to them: Weep not, nor 
moan, but rather rejoice. He Who gave 
you life is still with you. He will provide 
another and better home for your souls. 
Behold, I weep not, nor moan. They who 
put us to death know not what they do. 
Rather should the multitude pity them 
than us. Ye shall this day escape from the 
tyranny of Oas. 

Zarathustra preached till high noon, 
and when the light fell on the top of the 
temple (of the stars) the twelve execution- 
ers entered the prison and bound the pris- 
oners' hands together behind their backs; 
then with another rope they tied the feet, 
bringing the rope up the back of the legs 
and passing it betwixt the arms; and they 
carried the end of the ripe up over a beam 
and down again; and the executioners seiz- 
ed the rope and pulled upon it. And they 
swung the bodies of the victims high above 
the walls and made fast, leaving them 
hanging there. 

Thus was Zarathustra hung betwixt two 
thieves; and whilst he was yet alive a bolt 
of light fell upon the temple of the stars, 
and it fell to the round. And when the 
dust rose it was as a cloud that magnified 
itself, till the air of the whole city was 
choking; and there came another bolt of 
light, and behold, the walls of the 
city fell down, and Zooh'das perished in 
the chamber of the wall. 

The multitude ran for the king; and 
when they brought him out of the palace, 
another bolt of light fell on the palace, 
and it was crumbled into dust. The king 
called to his guards, but they obeyed him 
not, but fled; and so, the multitude slew 
the king. The learned men then went 
down to the place of executions, and Zara- 
thustra was not yet dead; but the two 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



LORDS' RECORD 



269 



thieves were dead. And Zarathustra said 
unto the learned men: Now will I give 
up my body, and behold, ye shall say I am 
dead. Let the executioners then take down 
my body and cast it into the lions' den, 
and ye shall witness that they will not eat 
of my flesh. And some shall say: Behold, 
the lions are not hungry. Thereupon shall 
ye cast in the bodies of the two thieves, 
and lo, the lions will fall upon them and 
eat their flesh. 

Then shall the learned men say: Be- 
hold Zarathustra's virtue lay in different 
flesh. Now I declare unto you, these things 
are not of the flesh, but of the spirit. For 
angels shall gather about my body and 
prevent the lions from tearing my flesh. 
Of which matter ye shall prove before the 
multitude; for in the time the lions are 
devouring the flesh of the thieves, the an- 
gels will go away from my body, and, be- 
hold, the lions will return and eat of my 
flesh also. Whereby it shall be proved to 
you that even lions, the most savage of 
beasts, have spiritual sight, and are gov- 
erned by the unseen world. 

When Zarathustra had thus spoken to 
the learned men, he spake to the Father, 
saying: Receive Thou my soul, O Or- 
mazd! And his spirit departed out of his 
body. So they cast the body into 
one of the dens, wherein were seven- 
teen lions, but they fled from the body. 
Then the executioners cast in the bodies of 
the thieves, and behold, the lions fell upon 
them instantly. And when the angels 
went away from Zarathustra's body, the 
lions returned to it and ate also. And the 
keepers turned in other lions, and all the 
flesh was eaten. And the multitude ran 
and brought the body of Zhoo'das and 
cast it in, and the lions ate it also. And 
next they cast in the king's body, and the 
lions ate of it, and were appeased of their 
hunger. 

Now when it was night, some of the 
Zarathustrians gathered together at a 
neighbor's house; and Asha was present, 
and they formed a living altar in order to 
pray for the soul of Zarathustra, and for 
the two thieves, and for Zhoo'das, and, 
lastly, for the king. And now, came the 
learned men, saying: Why have ye not, 
during all these years, notified us of these 



things? Behold, Zarathustra is dead! 
Asha said: 

Have I not carried the alms-bowl pub- 
licly, proclaiming them from day to day? 
And the learned people said: Pity, old 
Asha! A knave hath dethroned his rea- 
son! Now I declare unto you, it is the 
same now as in the olden time; the learned 
men are farther away from the Father 
than are those devouring lions. Ye look 
into the corporeal world for light, and 
truth, and power, but are blind to the 
spirit, which underlieth all things. I de- 
clare unto you, whether it be heat or light, 
or disease, that floateth in the air, or 
growth that cometh out of the air, in all 
things it is the unseen that ruleth over the 
seen. And more powerful than heat and 
light, and life and death, is Ormazd, the 
Person of all things. Till ye have learned 
this, I can explain nothing that ye can 
comprehend. And yet, to know this, is 
the beginning of the foundation of ever- 
lasting happiness. 

Whilst Asha was thus speaking, behold, 
the soul of Zarathustra came and stood be- 
fore them, and he was arrayed in the sem- 
blance of his own flesh, and in his own 
clothes. And he spake, saying: Fear not; 
I am the same that was with you and was 
hanged and died, whose flesh was devoured 
by the lions; I am Zarathustra! Marvel 
not that I have the semblance of a corpor- 
eal body, for its substance is holden to- 
gether by the power of my spirit. Neither 
is this a miracle, for the spirits of the liv- 
ing hold in the same way, each its own 
corporeal body. As iron attracteth iron, the 
spirit may learn to attract from the air a 
corporeal body of its like and measure. 

Then inquired one who was present: 
Where are the two thieves? To which 
Zarathustra said: As steam riseth from 
boiling water, without shape or form, so 
are their spirits this hour. For this reason 
was I sent into the world by the Father. 
Let him who would become controller of 
his own spirit unto everlasting life, learn 
the Ormazdian law, seeking to grow in 
spirit, instead of living for the things of 
this world. Behold, there are here present 
Lords of the Hosts of Heaven, who are 
Sons and Daughters of the Most High Or- 
mazd, the Creator. They will now gather 



270 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 



LORDS' RECORD 



together and reclothe the thieves, and 
show you of what like they are. Present- 
ly the two drujas, the thieves who were 
hanged with Zarathustra, stood before the 
people in sar'gis, and they raved, and 
cursed, and moaned; but they were blind 
and dumb as to the place. Then Asha in- 
quired of them, as to who they were and 
what they wanted, but they only cursed 
him, and added that they were to be 
hanged. 

Asha said: Behold, ye are already 
dead, and your spirits risen from the earth! 
To which they replied by curses against 
the king. And now the Lords of heaven 
brought the spirit of the king, but he knew 
not that he was dead, and he cursed also; 
whereupon the spirits of the thieves fell 
upon him with evil intent, and all the peo- 
ple beheld these things. But the Lords 
of heaven took away the sar'gis, and the 
drujas could not be seen more by mortals. 

Zarathustra said: As on the earth they 
were angered and dumb, they cling to the 
earth. For which reason ye shall sing an- 
thems and pray for them three mornings 
at sunrise; three high-noons, and three 
evenings at sunset. Do ye this also, hence- 
forth, forever, for three days, for all your 
kindred who die, or who are slain. 

And ye shall utter only words of love 
for the dead; for whosoever uttereth 
curses for the dead, bringeth drujas upon 
himself. In your love and forgiveness do 
ye raise them out of the torments of hell. 
And inasmuch as ye raise up others, so 
doth Ormazd raise up your own souls. 

One who was present asked how long 
a spirit lingered around about? To which 
Zarathustra said: Some for three days, 
some for a year, some for a hundred years, 
and some for a thousand years! Until 
they have wisdom and strength to get 
away. But after three days ye shall no 
longer desire the spirit of the dead to re- 
main with you; rather shall ye say to 
Ormazd: Deal Thou with him and with 
us in Thine Own way, O Father; we are 
content. Better is it for the spirits that 
ye remember them high up in paradise; 
for these thoughts will enable you to rise 
after ye are dead. 

Remember that All Light answereth 
everything in heaven and earth after its 
own manner: If ye kill, ye are answered 



in torments sooner or later: If ye utter 
falsehood, ye are answered in falsehood: 
If ye curse, ye will be cursed in return: If 
ye hate, ye will be hated: If ye seclude 
yourselves, ye will be excluded: If ye 
keep evil company in this world, ye will 
be bound in evil company in heaven: As 
ye seek to become a leader of men, remem- 
ber that they whom ye rule over will be 
your burden in heaven: If ye teach not, 
ye shall not be taught: If ye lift not oth- 
ers up, none will lift you up. 

CHAPTER XXVIII. 

On the following evening, when the 
Zarathustrians were assembled for prayer 
and singing, the soul of Zarathustra again 
appeared before them in sar'gis, teaching 
the Word of Ormazd. He said: 

Two people there are on earth; the one 
is engrossed in the affairs of earth; the 
other in the affairs of heaven. Better is it 
for ye to be of the latter. The fool will 
say: If all people are engrossed with the 
affairs of heaven, then who will provide on 
earth? Such is the argument of all Druks. 
Fear not, therefore, for the earth people 
becoming short of votaries. 

So also will it be said of celibacy. The 
Druks will say: If all people become celi- 
bates, then will the race of man terminate. 
Wherefore, I say again unto you, fear not, 
for there will be plenty left who are full of 
passion, and are less mindful of the king- 
doms of heaven. 

Let all who can, live for the Higher 
Light; the lower will ever be supplied suf- 
ficiently. 

Even as ye find two peoples on earth, 
so also do two peoples exist in heaven. 
The one followeth the Highest Light, and 
ever riseth toward the highest heavens. 
The other followeth the affairs of earth, 
and riseth not, and hence is called druj. 
The latter engageth in quarrels amongst 
mortals, inspiring them to evil and low 
designs. 

One present asked: How shall we 
know one another, whether we be of hea- 
ven or of earth? Then Zarathustra an- 
swered, saying: Seek to know thyself; 
thou art not thy neighbor's keeper. Search 
thine own soul a hundred times every day, 
to know if thou practicest the All Highest 
light. Neither shalt thou find excuses for 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI -«.„ E cop B 2 71 



thy shortness; nor reflect overmuch on 
past errors, but use them as inspiration to 
perfect thyself henceforward. 

Another one present asked: How of 
thieves, and falsifiers, and murderers? 
Zarathustra said: The man who serveth 
himself only is worse than any of these; 
there is no resurrection for him. But if a 
man cease his evil way, and practice vir- 
tue, he is on the right road. 

A falsifier is like one with a clean 
gown on, that goeth about casting filth 
upon it; he soileth his own spirit. 

A thief is worse than an overburdened 
beast; he carrieth his stolen goods not 
only in this world, but in heaven, to the 
end of his memory. 

A murderer is like a naked man who is 
ashamed, and cannot hide from the multi- 
tude. When he is in heaven, his memory 
of the deed writeth in human blood a stain 
on his soul, which all others see. 

Another one asked: According to the 
I'hua'Mazdian law, the highest, best men 
forsake the world, laboring to raise up the 
poor and ignorant, reciting prayers and 
anthems; taking no part in the affairs of 
people who are engrossed in the matters 
of earth; who, then, shall be the govern- 
ment of the wicked? To which Zarathus- 
tra answered, saying: 

When there are not sufficient men and 
women for such purpose, there will be no 
wicked to govern. With all thy preach- 
ing that the highest, best man will not de- 
sire to be a leader of men, nor a king, nor 
a governor, yet there will be plenty left 
who will fill these places, even though 
they beheld the walls of hell opened up to 
receive them. 

Another one asked: If the Zarathus- 
trians separate, and live by themselves, 
what will be their power to do good 
amongst the evil? To which Zarathustra 
said: 

As the highest heavens send Lords and 
masters down to mortals, so shall the Zara- 
thustrians send emissaries amongst the 
wicked, preaching the truth, and citing 
the example of the Zarathustrian cities 
(communities). 

For above all philosophy that man may 
preach, practice holdeth the highest place, 
and is most potent. Therefore, practice 
the Ormazdian law toward one another in 



all things. Avoid men of opinion; men of 
learning who have pride therein; men of 
argument; men who quibble for proofs in 
unprovable things; men who wish to be 
known as wise men; men who deny; men 
that can see defects in everything, and 
have nothing good to offer in place thereof. 

Shun the disbelieving man, for he is 
diseased, and may inoculate thee; the flat- 
terer, for he is purchasing thee; a woman, 
for woman's sake; or a man, for man's 
sake; company, for company's sake; for 
all these imply that the Creator is less in 
thy sight, and not so well loved. 

One asked concerning spirits. To which 
Zarathustra said: For the affairs of earth, 
consult the spirits of the earth, the dru- 
jas; for the affairs of everlasting resurrec- 
tion, consult thy Creator, and His holy 
spirits will answer thee in His name. And 
to whichever thou hast made thyself com- 
panion, there will be thy abiding place af- 
ter death. 

See to it that thou becomest not in- 
veigled by drujas, for spirits can assume 
any name and form; but weigh their 
words, whether they be wise, and accord- 
ing to the Ormazdian law. If they teach 
not the highest heavens, consider them by 
their words. To flatter thee, they will pro- 
fess to remember thee in another life; and 
to please thee, say thou wert a king, and 
has lived many lives on the earth. 

But to rise up, away from the earth, 
and from the lower heavens also; it was 
for bestowing this word unto men that I 
was sent into the world. It is to teach 
you to know the Father's upper heavens, 
and the way to reach them, that His words 
were given unto men. 

As it was in the olden time, so will it 
be again ere another generation pass away. 
Drujas will teach that the spirits of the 
dead go into trees and flowers, and inhab- 
it them; and into swine, and cattle, and 
birds, and into woman, and are born over 
again in mortal form. Argue not with 
them; their philosophy concerneth not 
thee. Whether they be in darkness or in 
light judge thou by the glory and beauty 
of the heavens where they live. If their 
words are of the earth, they belong to the 
earth; if they are servants to false Gods 
or false Lords, they will preach him whom 
they serve. But these matters are nothing 



272 



CYCLE OF FRAGAPATT1 



LORDS' RECORD 



to thee; for thou shalt serve the All High- 
est, the Creator. 

And in regard to the heaven whither 
thou wouldst ascend after death, magnify 
it with all thy ingenuity unto the All High- 
est Perfection. People it with thy highest 
ideals for thy companions. Then see to it 
that thou makest thyself a fit companion 
for them also. If thou do this with all 
thy wisdom and strength, all the days of 
thy life, the Father will be with thee, and 
thou shalt be a glory in His works. 

For three days and nights, after his res- 
urrection from death, Zarathustra thus 
preached to his followers, and Asha wrote 
down the substance of his words, and they 
were preserved unto the generation 5 of 
Faithists from that time forth. And these 
words were called the Ormazdian law, the 
I'hua'Mazdian law, the Zarathustrian law. 
And these were the first heavenly words 
given to mortals on tablets, skins and 
cloth, except such words as were given in 
secret to the tribes of I'hins, of which the 
different nations oi the earth knew no- 
thing. 

On the morning of the fourth day, 
when the disciples sat in crescent, which 
was called the living altar, Zarathustra 
came again in sar'gis. He said: 



Behold, the time hath come for me to 
rise out of hada, where I have dwelt for 
three days. The Gods who were with me 
all my life are gathered together here, and 
there are millions of them. Just near the 
river yonder standeth the boundary line 
of a heavenly ship of light. It is wider 
and higher than the eye can see! A million 
angels are singing in that ship ! And there 
are Great Gods and Great Lords in it; so 
bright mine eyes can scarce look upon 
them. They are all Sons and Daughters 
of Ormazd. 

The drujas are all run away now. Their 
foolish gabble is hushed. It is as if another 
world had come alongside, so majestic 
that this one was lost. High above, yon- 
der, something like a sun illumines the 
ship of fire. I know it is he who hath 
come for me. I go now. Whither I go I 
will build for you all. And thou, O Asha; 
the Gods have thrown a mantle of light 
over thee! A chain of light reacheth from 
thee to Ormazd! 

Asha was overcome, and would fain 
have gone to Zarathustra; but the latter 
said: Stand thou, that I may kiss thee! 
So Zarathustra kissed Asha, and disap- 
peared. 




CHAPTER I. 

Jehovih spake to Cpenta-armij, Goddess 
of Haot-saiti, in Nirvana, in the arc of 
Spe-ta, Commander of the South fields of 
Abarom, in the Orian Plains of Bilotho- 
witchieun, of a reign of two hundred thou- 
sand years; Surveyor for Otaias, ten thou- 
sand years; Leader of the Oixan, seventy 
thousand years; Captain of Geliyas' road- 
ways, in the forest of Lugga, twenty thou- 
sand years; Founder and Ruler of Isaas, 
thirty thousand years; Trencher of the 
Haigusets swamps, four thousand years; 
Goddess of Nor, Goddess of Eunigi, God- 
dess of Poutu, each ten thousand years, 
saying: 

My Daughter, behold, the red star and 
her heavens come thy way. She will be in 
thy dominions for a space of four years 
and thirty-two days, which time it will 
take her to cross the arc of Spe-ta. Open 
thou thy fields in Abarom, and give her 
forty years' indulgence. 

Cpenta-armij answered, saying: I see 
the red star, Earth, O Jehovih! Like a 
wandering ship in a wide ocean she cometh 
through my fields, the young Earth, travel- 
ing on, carefully, in the roads of Salkwatka. 
Hath she so soon, but little more than sixty 
thousand years, overcome her enduring 
knots and torturing hells? 

In Thy Wisdom and Power, O Jehovih, 
I will go in person to this corporeal 
world, and encourage her God and Lords 
for the excellent labor done. 

Jehovih said: Call thy Council, and pro- 
claim from My throne the Feast of the Arc 
of Spe-ta. Then Cpenta-armij called her 
High Council, a hundred millions, Sons 
and Daughters of Jehovih, and she ascend- 
ed to her place in the midst of the throne 
of the Great Spirit. 

And there were present: Obed, God of 
Oise, in Embrahk; Gavaini, Goddess of Ip- 
thor of the Solastis Plains; Ab, First 
Shriever of Riv-Seing; Holon-ho, God of 
Loo-Gam; Raisi, Goddess of Esdras; 



Wishtse, God of Zuth, in Ronega; and all 
these Gods and Goddesses were above a 
hundred thousand years raised in etherean 
realms, and knew Earth before inhabited 
by man. 

On a visit to Cpenta-armij were: Owks, 
Orian Chief of Maiter-lan, fifty thousand 
years, Marshal of Wiski-loo, thirty thou- 
sand years, God of Tunsin, in the Tarps 
Roads, ninety thousand years; and See- 
wah-Gon, Chieftainess of the Orian arc of 
Su-los, two hundred thousand years, Mis- 
tress of Aftong, in the Plains of Bel, three 
hundred thousand years, Pilotess of Lu- 
wow-lu, one hundred thousand years, God- 
dess of Eune, in the Mountain of Gem- 
king; and Ha-o-ha, Founder of Ogee, of 
Siam, of Wick-a-wick, and the twelve Nir- 
vanian Old-tse, in Lo-owtz, Eli-hagam, to- 
gether with their traveling hosts, each five 
million. 

Cpenta-armij said: For Thy glory, O Je- 
hovih, I proclaim the Feast of the Arc of 
Spe-ta. And these, my visiting hosts, shall 
enjoy the four years' deliverance of the red 
star and her heavens! 

Then responded Owks, and then See- 
wah-Gon, then Ha-o-ha, speaking at great 
length, and rejoicing for the invitation. 
And they related many adventures on oth- 
er stars in the time of the arc of deliver- 
ance, the arc of Spe-ta, and with what 
Gods and Goddesses they journeyed, and 
with what Chiefs and Chieftainesses. 

So Cpenta-armij spake to her chief mar- 
shal, saying: Send thou heralds to the 
builders, and order me an airavagna capa- 
ble of five hundred million, and of speed, 
grade sixty. After this thou shalt select from 
my attendants one hundred million, and 
after that three hundred million of the 
Egisi. 

With these, and with my visitors, I will 
start for the red star in twenty days. The 
proper officers attended to these things, and 
whilst they were moving about, behold, the 
red star, Earth, rose up in the far-off 
place, the roadway, and the es'enaurs saw 
it, and they chanted. 



274 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



What is yonder? The red star, Jeho- 
viii! She rideth round the sun, two hun- 
dred and seventy million miles. 

Around about her, close; what is that 
filled with angels, thousands of millions! 
It is her atmosphere, traveling with her. 
That little red star is a world, O Father! 
And the thousands of millions of angels, 
why do they stay in such heavens, O Je- 
hovih! 

Then the trumpeters afar off answered: 
She that spinneth round the sun is the red 
star, Earth, a new world, a generator of 
the souls of men. The Gods have called 
her, but she will not hear. Her atmos- 
phere is full of angels struggling for the 
earth. But Thy hand is upon them, O Je- 
hovih! Thy trumpeters will line the roads 
of Salkwatka. 

Then sang the es'enaurs: How lovely 
are Thy works, O Jehovih! Too lovely are 
Thy places, O Jehovih! Too lovely is the 
red star, Earth, O Jehovih! Thy chil- 
dren love it while in mortal form; after 
death too much they love it, O Jehovih! 

The pipers answer for Jehovih from the 
Wide East: O so little to love, made I 
Earth, the red star. I gave her poisoned 
weeds and vines and grasses; millions of 
death-dealing serpents. Then I created 
poisoned marshes and terrible fevers. In 
sore travail, and full of misery created I 
man on Earth, that he should turn and 
look upward for a holier place. 

Then sang the es'enaurs: Too lovely 
createdst Thou Thy atmospherean heavens, 
O Jehovih! Thy bounden heavens that 
travel with the red star, Earth. The 
spirits raised up from the mortal earth find 
too much to love in Thy lower heavens, O 
Jehovih! 

The pipers again answered for Jehovih: 
My lower heavens created I full of dark- 
ness and evil possibilities. A place for 
madness created I it; a place for lying and 
deceit; full of hell and torments. To drive 
man upward; to blow My breath upon him, 
to lift him up, as one lighteth the fire by 
blowing. 

Cpenta-armij spake from Jehovih's 
throne, saying: What is the deliverance of 
man? Is it from his mother's womb? Is it 
from his corporeal body? Is it from the 
corporeal world and her atmosphere? 
Three births hath the Father given unto all 



men. In the first, man hath nothing to do, 
as to his shaping or time in his mother's 
womb. In the second he hath a little more 
to do as to directing his course during his 
mortal life; but for the third, for the higher 
heavens, he must work for his own deliver- 
ance. 

Cpenta-armij said: Three kinds of earth 
deliverance for man created the Creator: 
First from his mother's womb, coming cry- 
ing, blank and helpless; second, from the 
tetracts, serious and full of fear; third, 
from the enemies of the Great Spirit. This 
is the Feast of Spe-ta. 

CHAPTER II. 

Cpenta-armij said: I looked afar, and 
saw Earth and her heavens traveling on. 
I listened to the voice of mortals! A mer- 
chant counted over his gains; he said: This 
is heaven! A drunkard quaffed a cup of 
poison; he said: This is heaven! A wanton 
said: This is heaven! A general, red with 
blood, counted the badges on his breast; he 
said: This is heaven! A tyrant, rich in toil- 
ing slaves, said: This is heaven! Then a 
vast multitude, all smeared with the blood 
of war, pointed to a field of mortals slain, 
and said: This is heaven! A farmer stretch- 
ed wide his arms toward his great posses- 
sions, uncultivated; he said: This is heaven! 
A little child with a toy said: This is hea- 
ven! 

Then spake Jehovih, saying: None of 
these canst thou convince to the contrary. 
They are not ready for deliverance. 

I listened to the voice of the spirits, the 
angels traveling with Earth. A wanderer, 
going about, with nothing to do, said: This 
is heaven! An obsessor of mortals 
said: This is heaven! The fairies, 
the butterfly angels, the triflers, that 
forever look in crystal waters to behold 
their own forms, said: This is heaven! The 
rollicking, deceiving angels, who went and 
inspired mortals to falsehood; these angels 
said: This is heaven! Vampire angels, that 
nestle in the atmosphere of mortals, largely 
living on their substance, said: This is hea- 
ven! Evil angels obsessing mortals for 
murder's sake, to make mortals burn 
houses and torture helpless creatures, said: 
This is heaven! 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



275 



Then spake Jehovih, saying: None of 
these canst thou convince to the contrary. 
They are not ready for deliverance. 

Again I listened to the sounds coming 
from the far-off earth. And I heard the 
prayers of mortals. The king prayed for 
his kingdom and for himself. The general 
prayed for success in war. The merchant 
for great gains; the tyrant for great au- 
thority. 

Jehovih said: Only the earth can an- 
swer such prayers. 

I listened again for the prayers of 
mortals; they had great afflictions, dire dis- 
eases, and famines, and wars; the mer- 
chants were bankrupt, and there was great 
suffering, and they prayed for deliverance. 

Jehovih said: Shouldst thou deliver 
them they would return to their old, evil 
habits. I say unto thee, the merchant shall 
be bankrupt; the king shall fail; the general 
be overthrown; the healthy shall be sick 
for a season. Save they know- My power, 
they cannot learn; save they feel affliction, 
they will not help one another. Shall a 
man say: O Jehovih, come Thou and heal 
the sick? Shall he not first of all recognize 
My will and know My power? 

To give money to the drunkard, what 
good is that? To give wealth and earthly 
prosperity to them that acknowledge not 
Me, is to set them against Me. To give 
healing to the fevered, is to teach them that 
I have no power in the unseen air. Answer 
not thou the prayers of these. 

I listened once more to the prayers of 
mortals. And they were such as lived ac- 
cording to their higher light; they purified 
the flesh by pure food, and by bathing 
every day; and they went about doing good 
constantly, hoarding up neither clothes, nor 
silver, nor gold, nor anything earthly. And 
they purified their thoughts by putting 
away the evil tongue, and the evil eye, and 
evil ear; and many of them were bound by 
the kings, and the tyrants, and the laws of 
mortals; and some of them were sick. And 
they prayed, saying: Great is my affliction, 

Jehovih. I know that in Thy sight I am 
justly punished. 

But hear Thou my prayer, O Father! 
Make me strong, that I may carry heavy 
burdens for the weary; give me liberty, that 

1 may go about helping the poor forever. 



Give me wisdom, that I may uncover Thy 
glories before men. 

Jehovih said: Go thou, My Daughter, 
and deliver them. They are ready for de- 
liverance! Answer thou the prayers of 
such. 

Then I called my hosts together, five 
hundred millions, in the Nirvanian hea- 
vens in Haot-saiti, in etherea, the highest 
heaven. And we entered into the airavag- 
na, as swelling high on every side, the 
music of millions cheered us on. Upward, 
high up shone the glimmering red star, 
toward which now our steersman pointed 
our ship, and thitherward turned our buoy- 
ant souls, saluting our starters with a hap- 
py good-by! 

Arise! Arise! By my vested power in 
Thee, O Jehovih, shall the elements fall 
before my will! Arise; onward! To the 
red star, speed on! Airavagna, upward, 
on! 

Thus spake Cpenta-armij, her voice mel- 
low and sweet, but so tuned to the spheres 
it could be heard the breadth of a world. 
And Jehovih, with Whose power and 
will she had learned to be as one, by long 
experience and studying submission to His 
will, lent a willing ear and a strong hand. 
Out shot the flames, the buoyant force 
manufactured by less skilled workmen 
learning the trade of Gods, where whirled 
the million screws of fire, propelling, till 
the mighty ship reeled, and turned, and 
rose from its foundation, with all its joyous 
hosts aboard, shouting loud, and singing 
praise to Him who ruleth over all. Then 
turning round and round, slowly, the great 
airavagna began her course in the roadway 
of Salkwatka, in etherea, toward the red 
star, the young Earth. 

Nearing first the Oixanian Spars of 
Ochesu, where were gathered near the 
road ten million spectators to see the God- 
dess pass in her ship; and their banners 
waved, and their music burst forth; who 
were answered by the airavagna's cheer- 
ing hosts and sailing streamers. She halt- 
ed, to salute in honor, the Goddess Yuetis- 
iv, and then ascended a thousand miles. 

Again onward, turning the breadth of 
the road, a million miles, to the right, to 
salute Vultanya, Goddess of the swamps of 
Ailassasak, where stood by the portico of 



276 



CYCLE OF CPEJSTA-ABM1J 



her heavenly palace seventy million pupils, 
in their thousandth year of tuition, to re- 
ceive the passing- blessing of the Orian 
Chieftainess, Cpenta-armij. And blither, 
but a halt, as it were a nod, and downward 
on their heads Cpenta-armij sent a shower 
of newly-created flowers from the sphere 
above, and in turn heard their chorus rise 
joyfully, in as many million words of love 
and admiration. 

Still onward, upward sped the airavagna, 
her hosts viewing the scenes on every side, 
the richest part and most glorious 
places of Salkwatka. Where the ether- 
ean worlds, rich in the glitter of swamps 
shining on the countless rainbow arches 
and crystal pyramids, afford an extensive 
view of the new Orian boundaries of Ote- 
son's broad kingdoms. Here course the 
thousands of excursionists from the meas- 
ureless regions of the Huan lights, where 
are to be seen a million varieties of fire- 
ships, of sizes from ten miles across to the 
breadth of a world, in unceasing travel, in 
tens of thousands of directions. 

By music alone, some their ships pro- 
pelled, the vibratory chords affording pow- 
er sufficient in such high-skilled hands, and 
the tunes changing according to the re- 
gions traversed. Others, even by colors 
made in the waves of sound, went forward, 
carrying millions of angels, every one at- 
tuned so perfectly that his very presence 
lent power and beauty to the monarch ves- 
sel. And downward and upward, and east 
and west, and north and south, and of every 
angle and course; such were the traveling 
regions of Wellagowthiij, in the etherean 
fields of Oteson. 

And of the million ships, with their tens 
of thousands of millions of spirits, the 
great Goddess, Cpenta-armij, could turn 
her well-learned eyes on any one, and 
know its home regions, and from what 
Orian pastures sailed; or perhaps Nirvan- 
ian rivers! And her visiting friends, 
Owks, and See-wah-Gon, and Ha-o-ha, 
stood by her side, reading the coursing 
fleets, and relating to one another who they 
were, and the great Chiefs aboard, with 
whom thousands of years ago they had 
been together taming some rambling star 
and quieting its disturbed vortex, or per- 
haps surveying a roadway many millions 
of miles through an a'ji'an forest. 



And coming then to the Crossings, near 
Bilothowitchieun, where was a small colo- 
ny, ninety million etherean weavers, super- 
intended by Cpenta-armij 's ward, Hoewu- 
el, God of two thousand years, who knew 
she was coming has way, and had lighted 
the roadway a hundred thousand miles in 
honor thereof, she turned the airavagna 
and cast the streamers and banners, salut- 
ing. Here again Cpenta-armij sent down 
to her beloved sons and daughters, for ev- 
ery one, flowers and keepsakes; and on 
every flower was written the history and 
mission to Earth and her heavens. And 
then again the airavagna upward rose and 
sped on. 

Thus in Jehovih's wide universe went 
forth the Chieftainess, Cpenta-armij, 
toward the red star; passing through 
ten thousand varieties of etherean 
worlds and roadways in the ji'ay'an fields 
and forests of high heaven, seeing millions 
of etherean ships going hither and thither, 
every one knowing its own mission and 
field of labor, whilst the highest raised 
Gods and Goddesses could exchange cour- 
tesies with the fiery vehicles, and speak 
them, to know whither bent, and for what 
purpose. 

Then rising high; here on a level lieth 
Earth. At Chinvat, just beyond the sweep 
of the moon, Cpenta-armij halted to view 
the rolling Earth, her land and water; and 
her atmospherean heavens, the sojourning 
place of the newly dead, and of such as 
have not aspired to rise to holier heavens. 

Then Cpenta-armij ordered the aira- 
vagna to take a downward course, steer- 
ing straight toward the habitable earth. 
Slowly now, turning slowly, and descend- 
ing; viewing all the regions on every side 
in the great vortex, she spies the plateau 
Craoshivi, the place of God, new founded. 
And Cpenta-armij, stretching forth her 
slender hand, itself like a stream of fire, 
she crieth out: Behold my anchorage! 
Here bring my ship and make fast, where 
riseth now the voices of my weary God 
and his Lords, of me so long expectant. 
In Thy wisdom and power, O Jehovih, I 
will raise them up! 

CHAPTER III. 

Jehovih spake to God, ruler of Earth 
and atmospherea, saying: Well done, 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



277 



O My Son! The beginning of the end of 
thy trials is at hand. I have spoken in the 
highest heavens, in My etherean worlds; in 
the gardens of Haot-saiti, near the arc of 
Spe-ta, to My Daughter, who hath attained 
to be One with Me, a Nirvanian in the re- 
gions of Chen-gotha, the holy Cpenta- 
armij. 

Her ship, an airavagna, with five hun- 
dred million etherean deliverers on board, 
hath started on the road Salkwatka, swiftly 
bound to thy regions, to thy new plateau, 
Craoshivi. 

Send thou word to Yima to come, and 
to Vishnu, and to Os, each to come in 
rank, attended by ten million, grade above 
seventy, with es'enaurs, and marshals, and 
captains, and generals, to come to Crao- 
shivi. 

And send £hou invitations to thy Diva 
to come, and to thy sub-Gods, and to thy 
Lord Gods, and to thy Lords, in all the di- 
visions of heaven and the divisions of the 
earth; and to bring of their people all 
above grade fifty. And to thy marshals 
give thou a list of all who will be with 
thee in Craoshivi on that day. And thy 
marshals shall apportion and divide and 
arrange all thy hosts thus assembled in 
Croashivi, according to grade, approaching 
thy throne in four lines, east and west and 
north and south, and thy throne shall be 
the extreme east. 

And in the centre of the cross shall thy 
marshal provide space sufficient for the 
hosts of Cpenta-armij to land her airavag- 
na, and to disembark. But at the extreme 
boundary of the lines of thy hosts thou 
shalt draw a circle, and thither shall thy 
light makers erect pillars of light,. making 
the circle as a wall of light; and, as the 
diameter of the circle is to the distance 
down to the earth's surface, so a tenth 
thereof shalt thou make as the summit of 
the apex of the canopy of thy capital 
chamber, for the Holy Council of thy God- 
dess. Cpenta-armij. 

God said: Thy will be done, O Jehovih! 
And thereupon God sent word by his mes- 
sengers, as commanded by the Great Spirit; 
sent invitations to all the Gods and Lords 
of heaven and earth, commanding them to 
come to Craoshivi. 

And the Lord Gods, and Gods and 
Lords, thus notified, appointed substitutes 



to rule in their places. And they made ote- 
vans, every one suitable to the number of 
angels he was to take with him, and they 
embarked and rose up from their several 
places in atmospherea and the earth, and. 
being guided in their courses by such ex- 
perts as had learned the way, they came to 
Craoshivi, where they were received by the 
chief marshal of God and his officers, and 
allotted their several places, according to 
their respective grades. But as the plateau 
was above grade fifty in Earth's vortex, 
so there were no angels of less grade than 
fifty amongst all the hosts assembled. 

And Jehovih commanded God to num- 
ber the angels thus assembled in Craoshivi, 
and there were seven thousand nine hun- 
dred and seventy-five million eight hun- 
dred thousand, officers and all. 

And the day and the hour of their as- 
sembling, when they were numbered, was 
the self same time that Cpenta-armij's fire- 
ship arrived at Chinvat, when her light 
burst in full view to the hosts of God in 
Craoshivi. And they all beheld her com- 
ing; saw the manner in which a Chieftain- 
ess cometh to the lower heavens. And be- 
cause of the great glory before them, they 
burst forth in a song of praise to Jehovih, 
the seven thousand million. 

Jehovih spake to God, saying: Ascend 
thy throne, My Son, and allot the Council 
and thy officers to their place, for quickly 
now, behold, My Daughter will descend. 
And when she cometh, My Voice will be 
with her for the years and the days of the 
dawn of dan. 

So God caused his Council and his mar- 
shal and his Diva to take their places and 
be in readiness for the emancipated Sons 
and Daughters. And presently the descend- 
ing star grew brighter and larger, larger 
and brighter, till like a sun she shone 
abroad over all the plateau of Craoshivi. 

In awe stood the Gods at sight of the 
sublime spectacle; for the light of the aira- 
vagna was brilliant, and unlike all the lights 
of the lower heavens, and new to nearly all 
the people. 

Nearer and nearer descended the ship of 
light, till soon the music of her hosts de- 
scended down to those beneath, who, awe- 
stricken and buoyant with delight, burst 
forth, entranced with the glory thereof, 



278 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



singing, by the force of Jehovih's light 
upon them, the same glorious anthem. 

And now the marshals cleared the way, 
for close at hand came the airavagna, over 
the bows of which Cpenta-armij shone like 
a central sun, and her visiting hosts, 
Owks and Ha-o-ha and See-wah-Gon, 
with her; and but for Cpenta-armij holding 
out her taper hand, the hosts below would 
not have known which of the four great 
lights Jehovih had sent. Presently the cur- 
tains swept across the high pyramid of the 
capital, and then the transparent blankets 
and crystal frame-work; and now the an- 
chors were let down, three hundred thou- 
sand; lower and lower, slowly came the 
mighty ship, till her screen-work, from 
which the anchors hung, touched the very 
floors of the capital; and, all radiant with 
holiness, before God and his hosts stood 
the ethereans, the glory of the most high 
heavens. 

The attendants then quickly spread the 
homa; the masters of arches opened the 
floor and sides of the airavagna, and there, 
seated or standing, was ready the central 
part of the etherean Council chamber. 
Then came forth the Chieftainess, Cpenta- 
armij, accompanied by Owks and Ha-o-ha 
and See-wah-Gon and arriving before the 
throne stood, waiting for the salutation 
and the sign. 

God, still sitting on his throne, said: 
Daughter of Jehovih, Chieftainess of Haot- 
saiti, in the name of the Father! And 
hereupon he gave the sign Arc of Spe-ta! 
Cpenta-armij and her three companions sa- 
luted in the Sign of the Circuit! Which 
was the highest compliment any God of 
Earth had ever received. 

Cpenta-armij said: By Jehovih's com- 
mand am I before thee, O God. In Love 
and Wisdom and Power am I come. Be- 
hold, my Voice is His Voice, Creator of 
Worlds! 

God said: My throne is founded in Je- 
hovih's name. Come thou and honor it, 
and bring thy most high Gods and God- 
desses with thee. 

They went forward then, and all the 
Gods and Goddesses, and Lords and Lord- 
esses stood up, saluting by shaking hands; 
and then Cpenta-armij went and sat in the 
midst of the throne. Meanwhile, the 
es'enaurs chanted a hymn of thanksgiving. 



Cpenta-armij, being controlled by the 
Voice of Jehovih, said: For joy created I 
man and woman; for seasons of labor and 
seasons of recreation. Be ye mirthful be- 
fore Me, and jubilant toward one another, 
in remembrance of My creations. And 
when I call you to labor, behold, Mv hand 
will move upon you for the furtherance of 
My kingdoms in their resurrections. 

Hereupon the multitude descended 
from their places of stateliness, and com- 
mingled together joyfully. And those who 
were on the throne came down and min- 
gled with the multitude, saluting and re- 
joicing. 

CHAPTER IV. 

For two whole days Cpenta-armij left 
the people in recration, but on the third she 
ascended the throne; and even in 
that same moment of time, a light 
spread abroad over all the place, so that the 
people comprehended indeed what was 
meant by Jehovih's hand being upon them. 
And they all resumed their places, where- 
upon Jehovih spake through Cpenta-armij, 
saying: 

Whom I brought with Me from Haot- 
saiti shall be My Council during dawn; but 
the portals shall remain open on every side. 

Who are not of My Council are not 
bound unto these, My labors, and the same 
shall go and come as they choose, remem- 
bering the call of their respective Gods. 

For know ye all, that whoever aspireth 
to Me shall come to Me. Ye being above 
grade fifty are already more to Me and for 
Me than against Me or from Me, and in 
equal degree are cast upon your own re- 
sponsibility. For such is the light of My 
kingdoms, from the first to the highest: To 
the child, no responsibility; to grade twen- 
ty-five, one-quarter; to fifty, one-half; to 
seventy-five, three-quarters; but to the 
emancipated in My etherean realms, re- 
sponsibility not only to self but to all who 
are beneath. 

Wherein My highest worlds are respon- 
sible for the lowest, being bound unto one 
another through Me for the resurrection of 
all. 

In this day am I come to deliver My 
Gods down to the earth, to walk on the 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



279 



earth with mortals, raising them up in My 
name. 

They who shall be raised up in Me; even 
though still of the earth, shall be holden 
alike responsible for all who are beneath 
them; for with My light and power before 
them, and doing in My name, they that are 
beneath them will hold them, not only on 
the earth, but in heaven, for their labors 
and words. 

The Voice departed, and then Cpenta- 
armij spake in her own behalf, saying: 
Once around the earth and heaven will I 
now travel, seeing with mine own eyes 
and hearing with mine own ears, even as is 
commanded of me by the Father; that I 
may know of mine own knowledge the 
condition of mortals and of the spirits who 
dwell both with them and in the lowest hea- 
vens. He who is still your God shall abide 
with you, and on this throne, until I re- 
turn. 

Cpenta-armij then descended and sat at 
the foot of the throne, and Owks and Ha- 
o-ha and See-wah-Gon with her, whereup- 
on God went down and took her hand, say- 
ing: Arise, O Goddess, and go thy way. 
And then he raised up the other three in 
the same way, and they saluted and stood 
aside. Now, as soon as God raised them 
up, the All Light settled upon him, and 
he again ascended the throne and sat in the 
midst. Then spake Cpenta-armij, saying 
to God: . 

Jehovih hath commanded the raising of 
a voice in four divisions of the earth; what 
is thy light, O God? God said: 

In Jaffeth I have raised up a man named 
Po, an I'huan of the I 'hin side, of grade 
ninety-live. In Arabin'ya I have raised up 
a man named Abram, an I'huan of the I'hin 
side, of grade ninety-five. In Vind'yii I 
have raised up a man named Brahma, an 
I'huan of the I'hin side, of grade ninety- 
nine. In Guatama I have raised up a man 
named Eawahtah, an I'huan of the I'hin 
side, of grade ninety-five. 

The loo'is who have accomplished this 
labor are still with their wards, but are ap- 
prised of thy coming. Behold, I send with 
thee messengers who will answer thy com- 
mands. 

Hereupon, Cpenta-armij, with her hosts, 
departed, and entered on otevan which God 
had had previously prepared for her; and 



she took with her one million attendants, 
going straight down to the earth. And 
first of all to visit mortals and mortal king- 
doms, kings and queens, temples and ora- 
cles, and then to see Po and Abram and 
Brahma and Eawahtah, all of whom were 
sufficiently illumed to see her and to know 
she was the Person of the All Voice. 

Next after these she visited all the hea- 
venly kingdoms belonging to the earth, go- 
ing first to the heavenly kingdom belong- 
ing to Japan; thence to Ah'oan, of Jaffeth; 
thence to E'chad, and so on until she saw 
them all. 

After that Cpenta-armij returned to 
Craoshivi, making a circuit sufficient to 
examine all the plateaux below the belt me- 
teoris.* 

Now the whole time Cpenta-armij had 
been gone was thirty and two days. Whilst 
she had been absent, God extended the re- 
ceiving grounds of Craoshivi twelve thou- 
sand miles in breadth toward the south, 
and founded sixty colonies. For even now 
were, and would be, for the four years to 
come, ships arriving daily with hundreds of 
thousands of angels who were being pre- 
pared for the degree of Brides and Bride- 
grooms to Jehovih, ready for the third res- 
urrection. 

Messengers had arrived in Craoshivi 
daily from Cpenta-armij, so that God knew 
when she would return. And accordingly 
he had prepared all things in readiness, 
and she was received in the name of the 
Father, in due ceremony. 

And Cpenta-armij ascended the throne 
of God and sat in the midst, and a light like 
a sun settled around about her. Her com- 
panions, Gods and Goddesses, now sat not 
near her, though on the throne to the right 
and left. Whilst they were taking their re- 
spective places, the es'enaurs were chanting 
anthems, and the awe and majesty of the 
scene were magnified to the utmost. 

CHAPTER V. 

When the light fell full upon Cpenta- 
armij, the Voice of Jehovih spake through 
her, saying: 

In thee whom I made God over 
Earth and her heavens I am well pleased; 
by My hand hast thou raised them up; 
through thee have I maintained the Diva 
even unto this day. 



280 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



Thou shalt have honor in My exalted 
heavens because thou art the first in Spe-ta; 
but thou shalt crown thy glory by descend- 
ing to the earth and walking with mortals 
for the term of four years, even with My 
Son, Brahma. And when thy time is com- 
pleted, I will come and deliver thee and 
Brahma. 

In My name shalt thou raise thy voice 
and establish Me amongst men; and I will 
be with thee in wisdom and power. Take 
thy attendants and proceed to thy labor; in 
whatsoever thou desirest of Me, call, and I 
will answer, for I have messengers who 
shall labor betwixt us. 

God then saluted, and withdrew. Next 
came Yima, and to him Jehovih spake, 
saying: 

Being one with God, thou shalt labor 
even as he laboreth; and thou shalt descend 
to the earth, even to My corporeal Son, Po, 
who hath been prepared in My name, and 
with him shalt thou walk the earth four 
years. And thou shalt speak in My name, 
establishing Me amongst mortals, to the 
end that My chosen shall be delivered into 
My kingdoms. For thou shalt lead them 
away from the mortal kings, and teach 
them to know Me as their only King. 

Take, then, thy attendants and go to 
thy labor, and at the end of four years I 
will appoint a successor to thee, and I will 
deliver thee into My etherean kingdoms. 

Yima then saluted and stood aside. Next 
came Vishnu, renowned for his labor in 
Vind'yu and her heavens. To him Jehovih 
said: 

Being one with God, thou shalt with him 
fulfill the completion of the Spe-ta in My 
name. To which end thou shalt descend 
to the corporeal earth, even Arabin'ya, and 
dwell thereon for the period of four years, 
with My corporeal Son, Abram. With 
Abram shalt thou walk and sojourn day 
and night, speaking and laboring in Me as 
fully as My very Self. And thou shalt de- 
liver My chosen away from the kings' peo- 
ples, teaching them to have no king but 
Me, their Creator. To Abram shalt thou 
reveal My name, Jehovih, and establish it 
in secret, with due rites and ceremonies. 
And at the end of four years I will appoint 
a successor to thee; and thee will I deliver 
into My emancipated worlds. Take, then, 
thy attendants and depart to thy labor, and 



I will be with thee in wisdom and power. 
Vishnu then saluted and stood aside. 

Next came Os, sent by the etherean 
regions of Haot-saiti to deliver the king- 
doms of Japan and Heleste and their hea- 
vens, but who was now relieved by the 
Divan successor. To Os Jehovih spake, 
saying: 

In honor of thy volunteering in the 
days of darkness for the relief of God and 
his kingdoms, I now create thee God of the 
first Spe-ta of the red star, and crown thee 
with Mine Own hand. 

And, lo and behold, even with these 
spoken words, a light descended in the 
form of a crown and settled upon his head. 
Thereupon Jehovih said: In which I have 
made thee a lawful Div with corporeal 
power. 

And thou shalt descend to the corporeal 
earth, even to Guatama, and walk with My 
Son Eawahtah, whom the loo'is have pre- 
pared for My Voice, for the term of four 
years, sojourning with him day and night, 
gathering together the remnants of My lost 
tribes, and establishing them in faith of the 
Great Spirit, in the name, Egoquim, suita- 
ble to the language I have created for 
them. 

And at the end of four years I will ap- 
point a successor to thee; and thee I will 
restore into My etherean worlds. Take, 
then, thy attendants and depart to thy labor, 
and I will be with thee in wisdom and 
power. 

Then Os saluted and stood aside, and 
the Voice departed; then Cpenta-armij, on 
her own account, said: This hour, even 
now, I dissolve the Diva with honor and 
glory unto them. The kingdoms ye ruled 
over shall be my kingdoms during dawn; 
in the Father's name I assume them and 
their affairs. Peace and love and wisdom 
and power be with you all, amen. 

The four inspiring Gods then departed, 
and in the outer circuit of Craoshivi they 
had in waiting, which their attendants had 
prepared beforehand, each one an otevan 
fully equipped and ready, into which they 
embarked, with their attendants, fifty thou- 
sand each. The musicians then saluted 
them, even as they moved off, severally, in 
direct lines for the earth. 

Cpenta-armij then lowered the light a 
little, and her three visiting companions, 
Owks, Ha-o-ha and See-wah-Gon, sat near 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



281 



her on the throne, even before her etherean 
Council, five hundred million. 

Cpenta-armij said: I have visited the 
earth and her heavens, even her heavens on 
her very surface. By the power vested in 
me, I release from duty all Lords and Gods, 
and sub-Gods, and sub-Lords, on the earth 
and in the heavens of the earth. This my 
messengers will communicate to them, 
commanding them, in my love and wis- 
dom, which are one with the Father, to 
come at once to Craoshivi, that I may hon- 
or them and apportion them for the third 
resurrection, which will occur in four 
years. • 

To the Lord-dom, Maitraias, founded 
by Vishnu, I appoint and allot Yugsaesu 
Lord, with thirty million of my etherean 
hosts, to be chosen by himself. Let Yugsa- 
esu come before me! Yugsaesu then came 
before Jehovih's throne, and Cpenta-armij 
said unto him: Repair thou unto Maitrai- 
as, taking thy hosts with thee. And when 
thou art come to the place, possess it in Je- 
hovih's name, and order it after the manner 
of a Lord-dom, providing sub-kingdoms 
unto thy place as may be required. 

And thou shalt have dominion over all 
angels that are already with the plateau 
of Maitraias, or such as may be hereafter 
sent to thee from the other heavenly divi- 
sions and from the earth. And thou shalt 
provide thy kingdom unto the service of 
the Father, chiefly to prevent angels return- 
ing to the earth to obsess and pollute mor- 
tals. For thou shalt find hundreds of mill- 
ions of them who> have no aspiration but 
destruction. Many of them were slain in 
wars on the earth, and are still seeking 
vengeance, and if escaping to the earth, 
obsess mortals to burn cities, and to mur- 
der, and to all manner of wickedness. 

Thy labor, O Lord, is not to reform 
them or teach them, for I shall appoint and 
allot others to that end; but thou shalt la- 
bor wholly and entirely to prevent the re- 
turn of Maitraisans to mortals. And that 
thou shalt be strong before them, thou 
canst draw from all other heavenly king- 
doms, which I shall found, a sufficient 
guard to enforce my commandments. 

For four years shalt thou labor in this 
matter, and thou shalt also raise up one 
with thy Lord-dom, to be thy successor af- 
ter thee. Take, then, thy hosts and go to 



thy labors, and the Father will be with thee 
in wisdom and power. 

Yugsaesu then made his selections from 
Cpenta-armij's hosts, and they came and 
passed before Jehovih's throne, saluting, 
and then withdrew and went into a ship 
which had, likewise, been prepared for them 
by the proper persons; and, having saluted 
with music, they departed, Yugsaesu and 
his hosts, rejoicing. 

Again Cpenta-armij spake, saying: Be- 
hold, the time is now come upon the earth 
when I will divide and allot unto each of its 
several great divisions heavenly kingdoms 
accordingly. 

To Japan, because she is a remnant of 
the submerged continent, I establish a hea- 
venly kingdom, and it shall be called Suasu. 

To Jaffeth, because she has preserved 
much of the first language, I establish a 
heavenly kingdom, and it shall be called 
Hi-jee-tse. 

To Vind'yti, because she is the most ad- 
vanced in holiness of all the earth, I estab- 
lish a heavenly kingdom, and it shall be 
called Vri-mij. 

To Arabin'ya, because she is the foun- 
dation of Jehovih's migratory hosts who 
shall go forth around the earth, I establish 
a heavenly kingdom, and it shall be called 
Paradise. 

To Heleste, because she was rescued 
from darkness by Os in time to meet this 
arc, I establish a heavenly kingdom, and it 
shall be called Spe-ta. 

To Uropa, because she was first founded 
by a woman, I establish a heavenly king- 
dom, and it shall be called Himmel. 

To South Guatama, because she is the 
least inhabited of all the great divisions of 
the earth, I establish a heavenly kingdom, 
and it shall be called Ahden. 

To North Guatama, because she is the 
ground on which the circumscribing of the 
earth by the different nations shall take 
place, where the revelations of heaven and 
earth shall be made to man, I establish a 
heavenly kingdom, and it shall be called 
Kosmon. 

To all the South Islands, I establish a 
heavenly kingdom, and it shall be called 
Flue. 

To all the North Islands, I establish a 
heavenly kingdom, and it shall be called 
Sin-Yot. 



282 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



Hereupon the light of Jehovih over- 
spread Cpenta-armij, and His voice spake 
through her, saying: To My ten heavenly 
kingdoms which I have made through My 
Daughter, behold, I choose ten Lords, and 
My ten Lords shall go to the kingdoms I 
apportion unto them. In My name shall 
My Lords build unto Me ten heavenly 
places of delight, for the spirits of the dead 
that rise up from the earth. 

And My Lords shall establish in My 
kingdoms places of learning and places of 
labor; places for the sick and helpless an- 
gels that rise up from the earth, that My 
Lords shall raise them up, to know Me and 
the glory of the worlds I have created for 
them; inspiring them to perfect themselves 
in wisdom and purity and power, that they 
may arise and inherit My etherean heavens. 

And My Lords shall appoint ashars unto 
mortals at the time of their corporeal birth; 
and the said ashars shall be appointed in 
watch and watch, that they may relieve one 
another, having a time of labor and a time 
of rest. And My Lords shall so appoint 
My ashars that each and every ashar shall 
have a hundred changes of labor with a 
hundred different mortals, in order to learn 
all the varieties of men and women I have 
created. And the number of ashars shall 
be equal to the number of mortals dwelling 
on the earth. 

And My Lords shall appoint asaphs to 
reside in heaven, sufficient in number to re- 
ceive the spirits of all who die on the earth, 
which they shall receive from the ashars in 
My name. And the asaphs shall take such 
angels, thus received, and place them in the 
regions My Lords shall have prepared for 
them, where there shall be sufficient teach- 
ers and nurses and physicians in My hea- 
venly places to administer unto them. 

And My Lords shall provide discipline 
to the spirits thus received, who shall be 
trained according to the Divan law which I 
established through My Gods, which shall 
extend beyond the es'yan even to the thir- 
tieth grade. 

And My Lords shall provide for them 
that have attained to the thirtieth grade to 
be sent in suitable ships to this place, Crao- 
shivi, and deliver them to My Daughter, 
Cpenta-armij, and to her successor, God or 
Goddess, who shall have dominion over the 
whole earth and her heavens. 



For behold, it is the nature of man on 
the earth to go after earthly things instead 
of heavenly; and it is the nature of the 
es'yan to strive for the earth instead of My 
higher heavens. Be ye guarded, therefore, 
to lay a foundation to prevent angels and 
mortals from going downward; to provide 
inspiration to make them desire to ascend 
to My holy regions. 

The Voice now departed, and Cpenta- 
armij spake of her own account in Jeho- 
vih's name, saying: 

Whomsoever I call, let them come be- 
fore Jehovih's throne, for they shall be the 
Lords whom I shall anoint for the heavenly 
kingdoms I have established: 

Le-tzoo, Lord of Suasu, a heavenly 
place over Japan. 

Oe-wah, Lord of Hi-jee-tse, a heavenly 
place over Jaffeth. 

Loo-gam, Lord of Vri-mij, a heavenly 
place over Vind'yu. 

Ha-kappa, Lord of Paradise, a heavenly 
place over Arabin'ya. 

Jes-Sie, Lordess of Spe-ta, a heavenly 
place over Heleste. 

Yo-han, Lord of Himmel, a heavenly 
place over Uropa. 

Hinot-tse, Lordess of Ahden, a heavenly 
place over South Guatama. 

Ami, Lordess of Kosmon, a heavenly 
place over North Guatama. 

Horam, Lord of Flue, a heavenly 
place over the Southern Islands. 

Puetse, Lordess of Sin-Yot, a heavenly 
place over the Northern Islands. 

All the angels named came before 
Cpenta-armij when called, and they now 
stood abreast Jehovih's throne, whereupon 
the All Light overspread the place, and the 
Father's Voice spake through Cpenta- 
armij, saying: 

Ye are My Lords and Lordesses, by Me 
raised up and allotted your places. For 
four years shall ye labor, even to the end of 
this dawn; and ye shall provide successors 
to take your places after you. And herein 
lies your greatest glory and Mine. For 
they that succeed you shall hold dominion 
two hundred years. And they in turn shall 
provide successors after them, and so on, 
for these successions shall continue till the 
arc of Bon. 

With Mine own hand weave I crowns, 
and crown you severally for My kingdoms! 






CYCLE OF CPENTA-ABMIJ 



283 



When these words were spoken, the 
now fast gathering light, of a variety of col- 
ors, took the shape of ten separate crowns, 
and descended on the heads of the Lords 
and Lordesses. The Voice ceased, but 
Cpenta-armij spake on her own account, in 
Jehovih's name, saying: 

My Lords and Lordesses, go to your 
labors in the love, wisdom and power of 
the Father, and He will be with you; and 
ye shall be a glory in His kingdoms. 
Choose ye, therefore, each and every one 
ten million of my hosts, who shall go with 
you to your places, to be afterward ex- 
changed or divided, as I may direct. That 
ye may choose in order, he who was first 
appointed shall choose first; the second 
next, and so on until ye have all chosen. 

All these Lords and Lordesses were of 
the Higher Light, and knew beforehand, 
and had in like manner already chosen 
their attendants, so that at a given signal 
the multitudes thus chosen rose up and 
came before the throne, forming ten groups 
of ten million each. And they at once 
formed in line and passed before Jehovih's 
throne, saluting in the sign, Birth of Spe-ta 
on the earth, and Cpenta-armij answered in 
the sign, Jehovih and the lower heavens. 

Cpenta-armij said: For the glory of this 
scene,. I bequeath a day of rest, that my 
hosts may witness the departure of the 
fleets of Jehovih's Lords and Lordesses. 
At once the hosts joined in a mighty chorus 
of thanksgiving and praise; and they went 
without and saw the ships laden with the 
joyous crews; saw them set their great fleet 
in motion; sang and shouted to them in Je- 
hovihs' love, for the glory of His high hea- 
vens. 

CHAPTER VI. 

In the beginning of the second year of 
Cpenta-armij in Craoshivi, messengers 
came before Jehovih's throne, saluting, and 
greeting from Ctusk, who now lived under 
the name, Ahura, and submitted the follow- 
ing communication, to-wit: 

Ctusk, who hath become Ahura, a ser- 
vant of Jehovih, and is now God of Ailkin 
by just judgment of Jehovih, desireth audi- 
ence with the Most High-Raised Cpenta- 
armij, Daughter of the Great Spirit. 

To this Cpenta-armij answered: Greet- 
ing, in love to my brother Ahura. By the 



Grace and Power of Jehovih, come and see 
me, bringing thy attendants. Now, after 
the lapse of a few days, Ahura came to 
Craoshivi, attended by one million, escort- 
ed by music, and proclaimed according to 
the discipline of the higher heavens, with 
heralds and trumpeters. And Cpenta- 
armij 's hosts received Ahura and conduct- 
ed him and his hosts within the capital 
chamber; and Ahura went before Jehovih's 
throne, saluting on the sign, Second pla- 
teau, and Cpenta-armij answered in Nirvan- 
ian Road, Salkwatka.. She said: 

In the name of the Great Spirit, Whose 
Daughter I am, I welcome thee in love 
and high esteem. I know all thy past rec- 
ord, and look upon thee as the founda- 
tion of one of Jehovih's brightest suns. 
Long have I desired that thou shouldst pe- 
tition to come, to see me, and greet thee 
in the Father's name. 

Ahura said: O thou Most High Chief- 
tainess, of hundreds of thousands of years, 
how can I stand before thee? I know thou 
hast seen many truants in thy day, and 
watched their course thousands of years. 
Thou canst see before me all that awaiteth 
me and mine; the past and the future are 
as an open book before thee. That I have 
stood before thee and looked upon thee, I 
am blessed above all things since the day of 
my birth. 

Behold, the hand of the Great Spirit 
hath appeared before me; I comprehend the 
only road that leadeth on to everlasting 
resurrections; I know that the One All Per- 
son must ever stand as the key-note for 
angels and mortals. Without Him, a man 
is as a ship without a rudder; the seas 
around about him drive him to ruin in the 
end. Blessed is he who hath had the ex- 
perience of this in an early day of his life. 
Nervous and full of fear is he who hath 
been tried two thousand years ! 

Then spake Cpenta-armij, saying: I per- 
ceive thy desires, O Ahura! I understand 
why thou art before me. Thy wisdom is 
great indeed. Thou perceivest that thy pla- 
teau is in the second removal from the 
earth. Thou fearest that some of thy hosts 
will forsake Jehovih, and usurp kingdoms 
of their own, even as thou didst in time 
past. Thou desirest me to raise thy plateau 
farther away from the corporeal earth. 



284 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



Ahura said: If it be Jehovih's will, even 
for this purpose am I come before thee! 

Now came a great light, bright, like a 
sun, and settled over the throne, envelop- 
ing the Goddess, Cpenta-armij, and Jeho- 
vih's Voice spake out of the light to Ahura, 
saying: 

My Son, My Son, why hast thou so lit- 
tle faith! Behold, I am with thee even as 
with this, My Daughter. All thou lackest 
is faith. Go thou back to thy plateau and 
raise thou it thyself. My Daughter shall 
come to thee, and show thee, and thou shalt 
not fail. To have faith in Me is to be one 
with Me; to lack faith in Me is to be far 
removed from Me. 

Ahura said: O Jehovih, teach Thou me 
how to begin to have faith. To find the 
beginning, there is my stumbling block! 

Jehovih said: By trying Me, there is the 
beginning. By learning to know thine own 
power in Me; and to know My power in 
thee; that is the sum of all power and wis- 
dom. By the lack of faith in Me, man set- 
teth up himself; by the lack of faith in Me, 
the self-assuming Gods built kingdoms for 
themselves. 

The failure of man is proof of My pow- 
er; the failure of all kingdoms is proof of 
the lack of faith in Me, whereby My power 
is manifested over them. First, after the 
abjuring of self, cometh the constant mani- 
festation of power through faith, the exam- 
ple of which holdeth the multitude to Me 
and My works. 

Inasmuch as thou hast suffered fear in 
thy soul for a relapse in thy kingdom, thou 
hast opened the door for disaster. Have I 
not proved this on earth? — wherein the 
faith of a captain leadeth his soldiers on to 
victory, and his lack of faith breaketh them 
down in weakness. Think not, O Ahura, 
that My examples are less with My Gods. 

If, therefore, My Daughter should come 
to thy kingdom and raise it up, behold, she 
would lessen thy hosts' faith in thee. For 
which reason thou shalt return to Ailkin, 
and proclaim to thy people that thou wilt 
raise thy plateau. And though millions of 
them will consider it a vanity, and beyond 
thy power, behold, I will provide unto thee 
that thou shalt not fail. 

Ahura said: I perceive Thy Wisdom, O 
Jehovih! That which Thou hast put upon 
me, I know I shall accomplish through 



Thee. The Voice departed, and Cpenta- 
armij spake on her own account, saying: 
Thou shalt proclaim a day for this great 
work; and thou shalt send invitations to me 
and my hosts, and to my Gods and Lords, 
Goddesses and Lordesses. Send thou, 
therefore, thy surveyors and inspectors, 
and determine whither thou wouldst raise 
thy plateau, and thou shalt be provided 
from my hosts whatever assistance thou 
mayest need. 

Ahura then saluted, and he and his 
hosts departed without the capital chamber, 
where they rested awhile in recreation with 
the etherean hosts, and then they entered 
their ship and departed, and returned to 
Ailkin. After which Ahura appointed the 
day for the resurrection, and sent messen- 
gers throughout atmospherea, proclaiming 
what he would do, inviting Gods and 
Lords, with their attendants, to come and 
spend the day with him. 

Jehovih spake to Cpenta-armij, saying: 
Send thou thy mathematicians to estimate 
the grade of Ahura's plateau; and send thy 
surveyors to the place he hath chosen, that 
thy hosts may know the power required; 
and provide thou from thine own hosts, 
privily, suitable stationers that Ahura shall 
not fail. For, in time to come, Ahura shall 
be one of My greatest Gods. 

CHAPTER VII. 

Ahura, immediately on his return to his 
kingdom, set about accomplishing this 
great labor. 

Now there were with Ahura many who 
had been sub-Gods and captains and gen- 
erals under him whilst he was in rebellion 
against Jehovih and His kingdoms; and 
when they heard of the proclamation they 
said within their souls: What, is it possible 
Ahura is at his old games? For they knew 
not his concert with the kingdoms above, 
and so believed not in his power. 

Jehovih moved upon Ahura, and in- 
duced him to send numerators and graders 
throughout his kingdom, to take the meas- 
ure of those who had faith, and of those 
who had no faith; and of those who had 
neither faith nor doubt. And these 
Ahura graded and numbered, so when the 
time came he should know where to place 
them. Then he numbered the unlearned 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



285 



and dumb; and then the enthusiastic; and 
he graded them and arranged them also. 

When he had this much accomplished, 
there came to him one Anuhasaj, a former 
sub-God, and he said to Ahura, privily: I 
love thee, Ahura, and for that reason come 
before thee. Thou shalt meet only failure 
and disaster in thy undertaking. How 
many times, in thy mighty kingdom of 
Ctusk, didst the All High fail to come to 
thee? 

Ahura said: Because of thy love I re- 
joice in thee; but because of thy lack of 
faith I deplore thee. How long will it be 
before angels and mortals understand the 
Father and His kingdoms? Behold, in the 
days of Ctusk I labored not for Jehovih, 
but for myself and my exaltation, and for 
the exaltation of my kingdom for mine own 
ends. Hence the All High came not to an- 
swer my prayers. Now, in this matter, I 
am doing that which is not for me, nor for 
my kingdom for mine own sake, but for 
the Father's sake only. And I know He 
will not fail me. 

Anuhasaj said: Hath it not been from 
the time of the ancients till now, that cer- 
tain ones say that by prayer and faith all 
things are possible, assuring us, moreover, 
that by such are all things accomplished on 
earth and in heaven? And yet, who hath 
not witnessed more failure than success? 
I do not desire to discourage thee, O Ahu- 
ra, but I know so well the lack of faith on 
the part of all men, and that to get one's 
self weaned away from self is the weakest 
talent in the soul. And, for which reason, 
too, it is ultimately the greatest glory. But 
this would seem to me expedient: To have 
Cpenta-armij and her hosts do this resur- 
rection for thee. 

Ahura said: Even thine every thought 
have I already fulfilled. And through the 
Chieftainess came the Father's Voice, com- 
manding me to do this resurrection on 
mine own account. 

To this Anuhasaj made no reply, but in 
his soul he was not free from the tetracts, 
being jealous that Ahura had advanced him 
in obtaining the Father's commands. But 
Ahura perceived it not, and he said unto 
Anuhasaj : The hosts of Ailkin have been 
numbered, and there are four thousand five 
hundred million. And within the grades 
above es'yan there are one hundred and 



seventy thousand schools, two hundred and 
thirty thousand colleges, four hundred 
thousand factories, and two hundred thou- 
sand hospitals. 

Behold, on the day of resurrection I 
shall have the Han-od-wotcha recreation 
for my hosts. Let this, then, be thy labor, 
to have the matter proclaimed throughout 
Ailkin. Anuhasaj said: By Jehovih's leave 
and thine, I am satisfied. 

Thus ended the matter, and Ahura re- 
membered, afterward, that Anuhasaj had 
not answered positive acceptance, and so 
x\hura feared, and, to make doubly sure, 
called Evasan, and committed the same 
charge to him. 

Now when the time came, Anuhasaj 
fulfilled not his part, but Evasan did; and 
Evasan, moreover, came to Ahura, bring- 
ing answers from all the departments. 

In the morning of the day of the resur- 
rection, Ahura sent for Anuhasaj and in- 
quired concerning the matter. Anuhasaj 
said: Nay. I issued not thy proclamation 
nor thy invitation; for I reasoned on the 
matter, saying to myself: If the resurrection 
be a failure, then would it indeed be better 
that the ignorant know not of it. 

Ahura said: To do well one's part, is 
this not the highest? Anuhasaj said: It 
is the highest. Even so have I done that 
which seemed the highest in mine own 
sight. 

Ahura said: The resurrection was not 
for thee nor for me, but for the hosts. 
For thou hadst previously admitted that the 
resurrection of this plateau was the high- 
est, best thing to be done. Because it 
seemed impracticable in thy sight, thou 
were not justified in withholding thy hand. 
Thou shouldst have striven to accomplish 
that which was for the universal good, not 
even whispering thy distrust to any one. 
Then, had it failed, thine own soul had been 
clear. For which reason Jehovih came to 
me, and I was admonished to depute Ev- 
asan in thy stead, and he hath fulfilled my 
commands. 

Anuhasaj made no reply, but went 
away in displeasure, and for the present 
the matter was dismissed. 

Ahura had sent invitations to the Lords 
of all the divisions of the earth, asking 
them to come, bringing their attendants 



286 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



with them. Of these the following came, 
to wit: Oe-wah, Lord of Hi-jee-tse; Ha- 
Kappa, Lord of Paradise; Loo-gam, Lord 
of Vri-mij; Jes-Sie, Lordess of Spe-ta; 
Ami, Lordess of Kosmon; Horam, Lord 
of Flue; and Puetse, Lordess of Sin-Yot, 
each bringing one million attendants, be- 
sides hundreds of thousands of visitors of 
lower grade. 

Cpenta-armij, with her visitors, Owks, 
and See-wah-Gon, and Ha-o-ha, and five 
million attendants, and five and thirty mill- 
ion visitors, from Craoshivi, came in an 
avalanza made for the purpose. 

The place of removal which Ahura had 
decided to inherit was in the second belt 
below meteoris, known in atmospherea at 
that time as Vara-pishanaha, which laid 
above the land of Vind'yii, a heavenly 
place, uninhabited. From Ailkin to Vara- 
pishanaha was fourteen hours in grade 
twenty-five, which was the average of 
Ahura's hosts; but its enlargement in the 
upper belt would be as fifteen to nine. 

Cpenta-armij and her hosts were the 
first to arrive in Ahura's dominion; for she 
had determined that nothing should lead 
to failure in Ahura's enterprise. Through 
her advice Ahura stationed water-bearers 
the entire distance of travel, lest, in the ex- 
citement, the drujas might run into knots 
or riot. For such is the nature of dark- 
ness, both on earth and in the lower hea- 
vens: the low delight to dwell in a city, or 
near a place of filth, if companionable, 
rather than go to a place of isolation where 
improvement is possible. 

Jehovih had said to Ahura: Suffer not 
thy drujas to know thou wilt remove them 
so far from the earth; confide thou only 
with the wise in reference to thy destiny. 
Cpenta-armij had said to Ahura: Provide 
thy drujas a holiday in parade, with rites 
and ceremonies. And Ahura perceived 
how the matter had to be, and he appor- 
tioned eighty million of his hosts to pro- 
vide parades, rites and ceremonies for the 
drujas of his hosts, and of these drujas, 
ranking below grade five, there were one 
thousand two hundred million, being such 
angels as knew not the left hand from the 
right, nor could remember to count five 
from one day to the next. And yet the 
next thousand million, rating below grade 



twelve, knew so little more, they were 
scarcely wiser than beasts in the field. 

Cpenta-armij, seeing these, exclaimed: 
O Jehovih, how long must Ahura labor 
with these in order to raise them to grade 
ninety-nine! O that they who set them- 
selves up as Gods knew what lay before 
them! O that leaders of men knew! O 
that mortal kings and queens knew the 
bondage that they lay down for themselves! 
What a work in the lower heavens for 
them before they can ascend! And yet, O 
Jehovih, Thou art just. Some one must 
labor with these unfortunates. It is well 
that man aspireth to be king, and Lord and 
God. 

CHAPTER VIII. 

When they were assembled for the resur- 
rection of the thousands of millions, Cpen- 
ta-armij went and stood at the right hand 
of Ahura, and next to her stood Owks; and 
on the left hand stood See-wah-Gon and 
Ha-o-ha, and the Voice of Jehovih fell 
upon Ahura, saying: Extend My lines to 
the four corners of the world; give into 
Mv labor the highest grades. 

Acco- dingly, the marshals drew the line 
on the plateau, and the hosts of etherea 
stood equally toward every corner, arrang- 
ed in phalanxes of ten million, each having 
the form of a quarter of a circle; leaving the 
lines of power from center to circumfer- 
ence, and the distance thereof was equal to 
the width of Vind'yu on the corporeal 
earth. And the centre of the plateau was 
high raised, so that Ahura stood on the 
highest place, which laid near the Capital 
of the Council. 

Now it so happened that the jealous 
Anuhasaj stood twelfth on the east line, 
being the thirteenth from Ahura's left hand. 
Cpenta-armij said to Ahura: Behold, the 
line is shattered. Ahura said: I feel no- 
thing; how sayest thou, The line is shat- 
tered? She answered him, saying: He who 
doeth Jehovih's work must deal as Jehovih 
dealeth. Only those who are in concert 
with thee must labor with thee. Otherwise 
thy best endeavors will be thwarted. Ahu- 
ra said: 

O thou far-perceiving Goddess! In my 
much love and sympathy I admitted Anu- 
hasaj to the lines. He hath been my best 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



287 



friend. Cpenta-armij said: Thou shalt 
know but One Friend, Jehovih. 

Ahura perceived, and he now felt the 
shattered place, and he sent his chief mar- 
shal to Anuhasaj to bring him from the 
rank. And when Anuhasaj was before 
Ahura, the latter said unto him: Because 
thou servest thyself, thou shalt stand not in 
line; behold, there is but One to serve, 
even Jehovih. Anuhasaj said: A joy upon 
thee and thy scheme. Because thou art 
powerless, thou hast singled me out as an 
excuse before these Gods and Goddesses! 

Ahura made no answer, but spake be- 
fore Jehovih, saying: Give me strength for 
Thy Children's sake, O Father! Behold, I 
have cut loose the foundations of Ailkin; 
with high-extending cords I have bound 
her to Vara-pishanaha. By virtue of Thy 
power in me I will raise her up. In Thy 
name, let my hosts in will command: 
Arise! Upward! Onward! O Ailkin! 
Arise! upward! onward! O Ailkin! Arise! 
upward! onward! O Ailkin! 

With the third enunciation, which came 
from the thousands of millions in concert, 
behold, the plateau moved from her found- 
ation; turned a little, then slowly, upward 
arose. Loud shouted all the inhabitants of 
that heaven; with their own universal will 
the Great Spirit stretched forth His hand 
and raised up the heavenly continent. 
Even as with His hand He toucheth a cor- 
poreal continent and sendeth it beneath the 
ocean, so raiseth He His heavenly places 
toward His emancipated worlds. Yea, be- 
cause of His Spirit upon His people they 
desire it risen; with them and Him, All is 
One. 

And now, the Gods, with unbroken will, 
held their places as it were a day for the 
corporeal earth, and not a God or Goddess 
from the single purpose in thought strayed 
a moment of time and no distracting 
thought intervening; for such is the will 
and mastery of Gods over their own 
thoughts. Even then, to keep up the con- 
certed force joyously, those who had the 
drujas in charge set the games and tourna- 
ments going, with racing and music, such 
as should leave not one idle moment for all 
the hosts of Ailkin, nearly five thousand 
million. 

Upward and onward rose the great pla- 
teau, making straight course for Vara-pish- 



anaha. Ahura stood in the eyes of the un- 
learned populace as the greatest and most 
masterly of all the Gods. One alone, even 
Anuhasaj, stood awhile transfixed with dis- 
appointment and chagrin, even hoping 
some mishap to Jehovih's proceedings. 
And, finally, he went wandering about, sore 
and out of sorts with all righteousness. 

Thus was raised the heavenly place, and 
no longer called Ailkin, but Vara-pishana- 
ha, home of Ahura and his hosts. And 
now, when they were securely established 
in the place, and the Gods and Goddesses 
broke from line, they all came greeting to 
Ahura. And, even in the same moment of 
time, a messenger came from God, who 
was with Brahma on the corporeal earth, 
bringing to Cpenta-armij the following 
commandment, to-wit: 

In Jehovih's name, give thou a throne 
and crown to Ahura for me, and in my 
name. I promised him thus! 

The light came upon Cpenta-armij, and 
Jehovih spake through her, saying: Behold 
the work of My hand, O Ahura, My Son! 
In the substance of heaven fashion I thee a 
throne and high-raised capital. And with 
Mine own hands weave thee a crown. 
From this time forth thou shalt be My 
God, and I will abide with me. 

Whilst the words were being spoken, 
the throne rose up before Cpenta-armij's 
hand, and a high-raised capital came and 
stood over and about the throne. And 
there descended from the heavens above 
bows of light and color, which in Cpenta- 
armij's fingers were shaped and woven into 
a crown, which alighted on Ahura's head. 
And there went up from the hosts a uni- 
versal shout of praise and thanksgiving. 
Then broke in the trumpeters, seven mill- 
ion, and after they played a while, the 
es'enaurs chanted, The Concerted Hosts of 
Jehovih! 

Thus was founded Jehovih's heavenly 
kingdom, Vara-pishanaha; thus established 
Ahura his dominions where rebellion and 
secession were cut off forever. And Cpenta- 
armij gave to Ahura a thousand messen- 
gers, and opened a roadway to Craoshivi. 
Ahura ascended his throne, and the Gods 
and Goddesses saluted him, God of Vara- 
pishanaha, and they and their attendants 
departed to their several places. 



288 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



CHAPTER IX. 

In the third year of dawn Jehovih 
spake to Cpenta-armij, saying: Gather to- 
gether the officers of thy traveling hosts, 
and take with thee thy companions, and go 
and visit all the Lords and Lordesses of 
the earth, of thy appointing. And let thy 
recorders make their accounts of the af- 
fairs of the earth and her heavenly king- 
doms, that they may be taken to, and en- 
tered in, the libraries of the Nirvanian 
kingdoms. 

Also thou shalt set thy collectors of 
Brides and Bridegrooms to work in Crao- 
shivi; and give to thy collectors otevans, 
that they may also visit thy Lords' king- 
doms and collect all the angels prepared 
for the next resurrection, and bring them 
to Craoshivi, where they shall be classified. 
For in the coming resurrection thou shalt 
provide twelve avalanzas, and those who 
are raised to the etherean heavens thou 
shalt cause to be divided according to their 
grade and rate, and have them delivered 
into regions suitable to their advancement. 

During the time prior to this, the 
Lords had contributed largely to Craoshivi, 
and already there were upward of twenty 
thousand million angels capable of taking 
the third resurrection. The departure of 
Cpenta-armij on this visit was important, 
for it involved the selection of the next suc- 
ceeding God of earth and heaven, who 
should sit on the throne during her ab- 
sence. At this time, the reigning God was 
with Brahma on earth. To him Cpenta-ar- 
mij sent messengers, acquainting him with 
the commandments of Jehovih. 

God answered through his messengers, 
saying: Greeting, in the name of Jehovih, 
to Cpenta-armij, His Daughter, Chieftain- 
ess! The reigning God deputeth thee, O 
Goddess, to make the selection in his 
stead, to be crowned at the termination of 
dawn. And now, accordingly, Cpenta- 
armij sent forth her examiners, to search 
after the highest, best, most learned of all 
that had been raised up of the earth, capa- 
ble of the God-head. For sixty days her 
examiners were at work, and on the sixti- 
eth day, in the evening, they had completed 
the search. And it fell upon Thale of Pe- 
ola, of corporeal birth, five thousand years. 

Thale, a tiller of the soil in corpor, born 
in spirit in Yueson, ninety years; five years 



in es'yan; thirty years in factories; in the. 
nurseries, ninety years; in the colleges, one 
hundred and eighty years; projector, sev- 
enty years; surveyor, sixty-five years; 
measurer, two hundred years; entered an 
etherean airavagna, and traveled seven hun- 
dred years; returned to the lower heavens 
of the earth and was Lord in six succes- 
sions for each of the chief earth divisions 
twelve hundred years; was called by Ona- 
vissa, Goddess of Ni-yi-ag-ag-ha to clear 
the roads of Chenshaya, beyond Chinvat, 
where he labored six hundred years. Re- 
turned again to earth and her heavens, and 
served as captain and general four hundred 
years; served as marshal seven hundred 
years, under four different Gods and 
Lords; and the balance of the time traveled 
as messenger and swift messenger. Of the 
rates in a thousand, he was nine hundred 
and ninety-nine. And he knew the whole 
Earth and her capabilities; could read a 
thousand million voices at the same time, 
and interpret them and answer them, and 
had even created plateaux. He knew the 
atmospherean heavens, habitable and unin- 
habitable; the roadways; the oceans and 
nebulous regions; knew the ascending and 
descending ethe; knew the power in the 
different rings of Earth's vortex; knew 
the c-vork-um, and its times and places. 

Cpenta-armij sent a delegation of one 
million angels to wait on Thale and bring 
him before the throne at Craoshivi, send- 
ing them in her private otevan, and under 
the guardianship of her chief marshal, with 
this commandment: 

Thale, of Peola, greeting to thee, in the 
name of Jehovih, Who commandeth thy 
immediate presence at the throne in Crao- 
shivi. Of all the honored in these hea- 
vens, thou standest first on the list, and art 
appointed by our Father the next succeed- 
ing God, through His Daughter, Chieftain- 
ess of Haot-saiti. In my stead thou shalt 
sit on the throne whilst I complete my 
labor in dawn; after which thou shalt be 
crowned, of Earth and her heavens, Je- 
hovih's God! 

Cpenta-armij knew Thale, for he had 
sojourned in Otaias, in etherea, three hun- 
dred years, where she had been Surveyor 
ten thousand years. So when he came 
before Jehovih's throne, Cpenta-armij was 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



289 



rejoiced to meet him in person; neverthe- 
less, she first saluted in rank, saying: 

My brother, welcome in the Father's 
name, and joy be unto thee. Jehovih hath 
called thee to this throne; thou shalt be 
one of the pillars of His everlasting- tem- 
ples. What I put upon thee in the Father's 
name, thou shalt consider from Him. 

Thale said: Before Thee, O Jehovih, I 
bow to Thy decrees, which come through 
Thy High-Raised Daughter, Chieftainess 
of Haot-saiti. I accept whatsoever is given 
me to do, that will raise up man to rejoice 
in his creation. By virtue of Thy power 
in me, O Jehovih, I know I shall not fail. 
May Thy Light be upon me! 

Cpenta-armij now raised the light to 
the highest atmospherean grade, and said 
unto Thale: Approach Jehovih's throne, O 
my brother, and hold up thy hands to- 
ward Hign Noon, as the symbol of the 
highest light, for as the sun is to Earth 
and atmospherea, so is Jehovih to the soul 
of man and to the etherean worlds. 

Thale stepped to the foot of the throne, 
and the marshal stood beside him. The 
whole Council were seated, and sweet mu- 
sic rose from the es'enaurs, and added to 
the solemn scene. Thale then faced the 
place of High Noon in the temple and held 
up his hands, saying: I am in Thy service, 
O Jehovih! 

Jehovih spake out of the light over 
Cpenta-armij 's head, saying: Thale, My 
Son, thou art My God, and thou shalt 
have dominion over Earth and her hea- 
vens for two hundred years. Whatsoever 
thou shalt do shalt be of Me. Thy word 
shall be My word; thy labor My labor. 
And thou shalt have Lords and kingdoms, 
and all manner of heavenly places; and all 
of them shall be My places through thee. 

And at the expiration of thy service, 
thou shalt raise up a successor to thee, 
who shall be worthy of thee and Me. And 
he shall have dominion for Me and in 
My places; and likewise raise up a suc- 
cessor to come after him, and so on until 
the next dawn of dan. Be thou joyful in 
dominion; My worlds are places of delight, 
mirth, peace, love, righteousness, and good 
works. 

The Voice ceased, and then Cpenta-ar- 
mij spake on her own account, saying: He 
who will crown thee will come at the end 



of dawn; till then thou shalt hold dominion 
in the Red Hat. Approach the Judgment 
Seat, my brother, and I will give to thee in 
Jehovih's name. With that, Cpenta-armij 
gathered from the colored rays of light a 
substance light as ethe, and made a red 
hat and put it on Thale's head. 

Thale then sat down on the throne. 
Thereupon Cpenta-armij said: Council of 
Jehovih, hear my voice. A new God have 
I raised up unto my labor. And thou, O 
God, hear my voice. A new dominion 
have I given into thy keeping. 

For one year I shall now visit my Lords 
and Lordesses in the first plateaux of 
Earth, for it is a part of my labor for the 
Father. And when I shall have finished 
with them, I shall return to my present 
reigning God of Earth, who is with 
Brahma, and I will deliver him and Brah- 
ma, and return again to this kingdom, 
whence the etherean resurrection will take 
place. 

Provide ye accordingly in all things, 
even as I would were I here; and number 
the Brides and Bridegrooms one hundred 
and sixty days in advance, and send swift 
messengers to etherea, to the Nirvanian 
fields and forests in Chan-us-hoag, and 
thence through Salkwatka to Haot-saiti, in 
the etherean fields of Abarom, finding six 
regions, suitable for grades from sixty to 
ninety. And ye shall send greeting to my 
sister, Chue-in-ista, Goddess of Oambuyu, 
asking her to deliver us. 

Thus saying, Cpenta-armij, and Owks, 
and See-wah-Gon, and Ha-o-ha took leave, 
and in their own proper way departed out 
of Craoshivi, and in the airavagna de- 
scended to the lowest plateau, and so visit- 
ed the Lords of the lower kingdoms. 

CHAPTER X. 

The Lords and Lordesses gave not 
much labor to Cpenta-armij; for they had 
long been high-raised Gods and Goddesses 
in other worlds, and knew their parts well. 
But to each heavenly place Cpenta-armij 
sent her heralds in advance, and the Lords 
and Lordesses in turn sent receiving es- 
corts to meet the airavagna. And when 
the Chieftainess arrived, she was asked in 
the usual manner to honor the throne, and 
she thus sat on all the thrones, ruling in 
person, and in her presence the Voice 



290 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ABMIJ 



of Jehovih spake in the Light before the 
assembled Council of the Hosts, and it was 
thus fulfilled in the Arc of Spe-ta that the 
Voice had circumscribed the whole Earth. 

And when Cpenta-armij was about to 
depart from each heavenly place, she al- 
ways descended to the foot of the throne of 
the Lord, and sat thereon; and the Lord 
went down and took her hand, saying: 
Arise, O Goddess, and go thy way; the 
Father calleth thee! And then would she 
arise and depart to another Lord or Lord- 
ess, in like manner. 

Cpenta-armij took with her three thou- 
sand angel scribes and recorders; three 
thousand artists; and three thousand geol- 
ogists and mineralogists. 

Jehovih had said to Cpenta-armij : Thou 
shalt make reports of the land and water 
and air of the earth; and of all the living 
thereon and therein, with pictures thereof; 
two copies shalt thou make; and when the 
end of dawn is come, thou shalt take the 
two copies with thee in thy ascension to 
My etherean worlds. One copy shalt thou 
put on record in the library of Haot-saiti, 
and the other copy shalt thou send to the 
Hyperiis Council of the United Chiefs and 
Chieftainesses, for their deliberations. 

For the Hyperiis Council shall deter- 
mine from this, thy report, what is good 
for Earth; as to whether she shall be 
changed in her course, or broken up and 
divided; or whether she needeth a'ji or 
dan; and they shall send out road-makers 
to that end, or send vortices against her 
vortex, to break it or rule over it, accord- 
ing to My light upon them. 

Besides these, Cpenta-armij had a thou- 
sand recorders, whose business it was to 
prepare reports of the Lords' kingdoms, 
and of the factories, colleges, nurseries, 
hospitals, the hells, if any, and knots, if 
any; to record the grade and number of 
spirits in each heavenly place; to record 
the earthly kingdoms, and kings and 
queens and their subjects, their occupa- 
tions and grades, and their rate of corporeal 
life age. To record the percentage of fa- 
miliar spirits with mortals; the fetals, the 
drujas; as well as the ashars and asaphs; 
and the temples and oracles in use by mor- 
tals; the altars and places of worship. To 
record the number of Thins still inhabiting 



the earth; the number of pure I'huans, 
who worshiped only one Great Spirit; the 
Druk order, who always have idols or sav- 
iors, and are given to war. 

One full moon of four quarters remain- 
ed Cpenta-armij with each one of the Lords 
of Earth; and then she departed, going 
into all the habitable places on the earth, 
and in the heavens that rested on the earth. 
In ten moons she had completed her labor 
with the Lords of the first resurrection; 
had witnessed the manner in which the 
Lords sent away the upraised to Craoshivi, 
to enter the second resurrection. And her 
scribes and recorders had completed their 
labor also. 

And now the Chieftainess sent her aira- 
vagna back to Craoshivi, with her visitors, 
Owks, See-wah-Gon and Ha-o-ha. But 
for herself she had a piedmazr built; and, 
taking ten thousand attendants, besides the 
workers of the boat, she descended on to 
the very earth, to visit the four Gods, in 
the four great divisions of the earth; with 
Eawahtah; with Brahma; with Abram, and 
with Po. With each of these she spent 
twelve days, and then she departed and 
went to Maitraias, the heavenly place, the 
only Lord-dom of Earth, where ruled 
Yug-sae-su, with thirty million. Here she 
remained twelve days also; and the inhab- 
itants gave a tournament and festival. 

After this Cpenta-armij departed for 
Craoshivi, for the end of dawn was near at 
hand. 

CHAPTER XI. 

In the Council of Craoshivi the Voice of 
Jehovih came to Cpenta-armij, saying: Be- 
hold, the red star neareth the fields of Ab- 
arom; Great Oteson hath filled the sinks 
and slues of Yoswakak; thousands of mill- 
ions of My Sons and Daughters behold the 
Feast of Spe-ta. 

Hear thou thy Creator, O Cpenta-ar- 
mij! For thou shalt spread broad the ta- 
ble of My hosts; such as hath never 
been before in Haot-saiti. And thou shalt 
send for Obed, God of Oise; Gavaini, God- 
dess of Ipthor; Ab, Shriever of Riv-Seing; 
Raisi, Goddess of Esdras; Wish-tse, God 
of Zuth; Harava, God on Yon-yon; Vraga- 
piet, Goddess of Zoe; and Loo-chung, God 
of Ata-bonaswitchahaha. And thou shalt 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



291 



send for the Gods and Goddesses of the 
Plains of Cnoe-Chang; and for the Gods 
and Goddesses of the Chi-ha-wogo Roads; 
and for all the Gods and Goddesses in their 
own Nirvanian fields; and for the Great 
Chief, Shoo-lo, of the Roads of Jinihassij, 
and for all the Gods and Goddesses in his 
dominions in My etherean worlds. 

And yet thou shalt remember of thine 
own knowledge many Gods and God- 
desses; and thou shalt charge thy com- 
panions, Owks, and See-wah-Gon, and Ha- 
o-ha, to sit in Council with thee, that ye 
may remember such Chiefs and Chieftain- 
esses, Shrievers, Gods and Goddesses, 
whose company may be delightful: 

And thou shalt command them in My 
name to meet in the Feast of Spe-ta, for it 
is the first in this, My new world. Make 
way for them; make place for them, O My 
Daughter! Make wide the roadways in My 
lower heaven; make My Holy Feast glor- 
ious. 

Cpenta-armij said: Too wide are the 
dans of Earth; too far apart and cumber- 
some, O Father! More than twenty-four 
thousand million will be my harvest unto 
thee, O Jehovih! Great is Thy wisdom in 
Spe-ta; the time for the beginning of quar- 
ter ascensions, fifty years. 

Thy Gods and Goddesses, O Jehovih, 
and Thy Chiefs and Chieftainesses, will 
bind up these loose heavens into whole- 
some discipline. I will send my swift mes- 
sengers into Thy far-off etherean worlds, 
and bring Thy Sons and Daughters to Thy 
Feast. 

Cpenta-armij sent off into the wide hea- 
vens, high beyond Earth's heavens, invi- 
tations to tens of thousands of high-raised 
Sons and Daughters of the Great Spirit. 
Then she called her surveyors and table- 
makers before Jehovih's throne, and said 
unto them: 

The end of dawn is near at hand; I will 
give a feast, a very great feast. Go ye and 
survey the ground from Craoshivi to the 
Lakes of Oochi-loo, in etherea, and for 
the length thereof make ye a width in the 
form of Fete; and the road of the Fete 
shall be sufficient for the passage of twelve 
avalanzas abreast; and the depth of the 
Fete shall be as from the surface of the 
earth unto Chinvat. Within twelve sios of 
Abarom, and of the height of the circuit 



of Bilothowitchieun shall ye carry the bor- 
der flames; and the flames shall be of dou- 
ble currents, going and coming, that the 
food of the feast may be brought from any 
region suited to the high-raised grades. 

And the arc of the feast shall encompass 
the whole Earth, and extend outward and 
downward to the belt of Craoshivi, and 
then downward in two lines, east and west; 
and the downward lines shall be like the 
feet of a compass, one stationary and the 
other movable. And the light that ex- 
tendeth from the arc down the movable line 
shall rest on the delivered hosts. of Abram, 
and it shall bear upon his people, that they 
may hereafter draw Light direct from the 
Father's throne in Craoshivi; and it shall 
move westward and be as an inheritance of 
Jehovih's light upon His corporeal sons 
and daughters. 

But the line that standeth in the east 
shall be a base line and center, whither 
shall descend the Father's light upon the 
delivered sons and daughters of the hosts 
of Brahma and Po. And because of the 
arc of Spe-ta upon them, they shall remain 
in their own divisions of the earth. 

And for the deliverance of the harvests 
of each quarter, the high-raised foot of the 
arc shall stand to the four quarters, east, 
west, north and south. 

Jehovih then spake through Cpenta- 
armij, saying: For I will illume the feet 
thereof, and My new world, Earth and 
her heavens, shall rest in the light of My 
Roads forever. That no man, having My 
examples before him, can misunderstand 
Me. 

Behold, only one lesson a day is given 
to a child; and to a youth, two lessons a 
day; and to a mature man, many lessons a 
day; so, in the early creation of man, I 
give few lessons; then in the youthful age 
of the race, many more lessons; but when 
the race hath attained to full manhood, 
behold, I place My light at their feet, that 
they may receive My lessons every day. 

In one time I send the angels 
to lead man up to a knowledge of Me 
and My places; but when man hath attain- 
eded to think for himself, I set up My arc 
of Spe-ta; and it is as a candle in the firma- 
ment of heaven, wherefrom My Light fall- 
eth upon the soul of My people, without 
any interpreter, save Mine Own Voice. 



292 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



For which reason, when one of My 
worlds hath attained to Spe-ta, I come to 
deliver them from kings, and queens, and 
priests, and angels, and it is as the maturity 
of a son in his father's house, when he in- 
viteth his neighbors and spreadeth a feast. 

Open wide thy places, O Cpenta-ar- 
mij! A great joy is upon My etherean 
worlds; My high-raised Sons and Daugh- 
ters shall have great glory in Earth and 
her heavens. Behold, I have proclaimed 
Myself in the words of mortals; four high- 
raised sons have learned to know their 
Father in heaven. 



CHAPTER XII. 

Cpenta-armij said: Who cannot un- 
derstand Thy models, O Jehovih! Thou 
hast sh ,wn to mortals the food of the 
flesh, a: i the source of the substance of 
the blood. As a symbol before them of 
Thy es'sean worlds and Thy es'sean peo- 
ples, Thou hast created Thy corporean 
members; to receive and to impart, but this 
is not all. Thou createdst poison, to show 
man that anything which receiveth not, 
and imparteth not, is death. 

Most wisely, O Father, hast Thou pro- 
vided the degrees of sustenance unto ail 
Thy creations: To the corporean, corpor- 
eal food; to the atmospherean, atmospheric 
food; to the etherean, ethe'ic food. Wide 
will I spread my tables, O Jehovih. Thy 
Gods and Goddesses, and Thy high-raised 
Chieftains, shall sit at the Feast of Spe-ta. 

The Chieftainess sent swift messengers 
into the regions of etherean worlds, near 
the Roadway of the Great Serpent, five 
hundred thousand swift messengers. Down 
to the atmospherean regions she sent mes- 
sengers to the Gods and Lords, her labor- 
ers, ten thousand messengers. To her in- 
vited guests she provided each one million 
attendants. 

Next Cpenta-armij sent fifty thousand 
arrow-ship makers in the regions of Cvent- 
agma, in the etherean Itis, to prepare cere- 
monial salvers and connecting rods, so that 
all the thousands of millions, being united, 
could hear the Voice of Jehovih from her 
throne, movable, in her airavagna. Twelve 
counterparts to these she sent down to the 
lowest heavenly regions, so the All Light 
should pierce the corporeal Earth. 



And now, when her well-skilled work- 
men, of tens of thousands of years' experi- 
ence, had saluted and gone to their re- 
spective labors, the Chieftainess spake be- 
fore the Council, saying: Because of my 
arc upon Earth and her heavens, the 
Light of our Father will forever remain 
with mortals and in the hadan fields. But, 
behold, even as a young man, coming to 
maturity, goeth away on his own account, 
in great hope and self-conceit of his pow- 
ers, to meet many misfortunes and great 
darkness, so will it be with Earth and 
her heavens after Spe-ta. Because I plant 
my arc in these heavens, and say to the 
Gods thereof, Ye are free! behold, there 
shall rise numerous false Gods of great 
power. And as a young man going forth 
is puffed up with conceit, so will the at- 
mospherean Gods believe they know all 
things, and so bring great darkness and 
misery upon their kingdoms and upon 
themselves. 

But the Light of my arc shall stand; 
shall grow like a small seed planted; and in 
time to come, both angels and mortals 
shall understand that there is but One All 
Light, a very centre, to W r hom all Gods 
are but as small diadems. As a young man 
of the earth must have experience of his 
own to realize his own shortness, so must 
even the Gods of these lower heavens be 
left to run with a loose rein, for the glory 
of Jehovih, and for themselves in final de- 
liverance. For which reason, hereafter the 
bondage of the discipline of the God and 
his Lords shall be as nothing. Only hells 
and knots shall they longer cast out with 
fire and water; only by persuasion, and the 
example of practice, shall they hold do- 
minion in their respective places. 

As in the early days, a king ruleth with 
a rod and with tyrannical laws; and as, in 
a riper age, the king and his armies give 
way to a power vested in the people, so 
shall my arc be the giving of the lower 
heavens, and the earth beneath, into the 
keeping of themselves. But my arc, which 
is the foundation of the Father's upper 
kingdoms within the lower heavens, shall 
stand forever. 

I go now on my journey down to the 
earth, in my airavagna, to receive and de- 
liver my four Gods, Os, and Vishnu, Yima, 
and Ela-elia, God in Chief. 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



293 



Thus sajdng, Cpenta-armij descended to 
the foot of Jehovih's throne, and the Light 
fell upon Thale, and he rose up from the 
throne and descended, taking her hand, 
saying: Arise, O Goddess, and hear thou 
the Voice of thy Father, Creator and 
Ruler! Behold, thy labor on Earth and 
her heavens is near the end; and because 
of thy steadfastness, I am honored in thee, 
My Daughter. 

Whilst thou art delivering My Gods, 
behold, I will be with thee, and whatsoever 
thou desireth of Me I will give unto thee. 
My Sons and Daughters shall receive the 
visiting hosts from the high heavens, and 
allot them places in the feast; and My Sons 
and Daughters shall receive and adorn My 
Brides and Bridegrooms; and My trumpet- 
ers shall proclaim Me in My works, from 
the surface of the earth to the farthest 
places in Salkwatka. Yea, My Light- 
makers shall plant the staff of My holy 
fire in the throne of Craoshivi, and the foot 
thereof shall pierce Earth in the land of 
Vind'yu, to receive and deliver My Earth 
Son, Brahma. 

Cpenta-armij stood aside, and then said: 
To ye, my loved companions, Owks, and 
See-wah-Gon, and Ha-o-ha, when the staff 
of the Father's Light hath descended to 
Earth, come ye then to me quickly in my 
arrow-ship of fire, for it shall be a signal 
betwixt us that in that hour I will raise up 
my Gods from the corporeal Earth; and I 
will open the earth and bring forth the 
bodies of my son, Brahma, and his wife, 
Yu-tiv, whose youngest son holdeth the 
leaven of the Osirian law. And I will 
have there assembled the hosts of my ten 
Lords, and I will deliver into their hands 
and for their successors, the fulfillment of 
the Divan laws. 

Her companions responded: In Jeho- 
vih's love, wisdom and power, we will be 
there. 

CHAPTER XIII. 

The Light of Jehovih now spread over 
Haot-saiti and lined the Road of Salkwat- 
ka, in etherea, extending from the Orian 
Banks of Loo-che-wan to the Oixinian 
Spars of Ochesu. The Cross Roads, Chi- 
ea-wha-chong, and the plains of Sha-tu- 
matz, were as seas and worlds of crystal 



fire. And in the piercing light, the old- 
time Gods, of millions of years agone, 
sped forth in awful majesty, in answer to 
the prayers of Cpenta-armij. 

And there rose over Earth and her 
heavens, farther than Chinvat, a trident arc, 
broad as a world, of shimmering light, 
the countless rays of ethe, as mortals see 
the glimmering air in a summer's day: but 
the ethe was of every color, hue and tint, 
reflective and brilliant, the clear soul of 
things separate, the very breath of Jehovih. 
It was the beginning of the form of the arc 
of Spe-ta, the deliverance of Earth and 
her heavens into a new condition; to be- 
stow it upon itself, ratified by the ceremony 
of a festival for the Gods and Goddesses of 
hundreds of millions of miles in that re- 
gion of etherea. 

Msanwhile, their high-raised compan- 
ion, Cpenca-armij, known and loved in 
hundreds of etherean worlds, was down on 
the low earth, laying the corner-stone for 
Jehovih's everlasting kingdom, whereon 
should fall, presently, from out the arc of 
Spe-ta, a shaft of fire. 

And, touched by the hand of Immortal 
Light, was Brahma, long trained to look 
toward Jehovih; for his angel wife rose 
upward, leading his vision toward a realm 
amongst the Gods and Goddesses, whom 
he beheld in countless numbers receiving 
her most royally. Thus gazing on the glor- 
ious scene, the great man in soul came 
forth, leaving his corporeal part stretched 
on the ground. And Cpenta-armij and 
God received the spirit of Brahma, and he 
held his place in the sacred circle with 
mortals three days. 

Then, on the fourth day, the Chieftainess 
signalled her swift messengers; and they 
touched the currents along, till they ran 
high beyond Earth's vortex, where the 
stationed Gods of etherea fastened on the 
ethe'ic wave, extending to the great arc 
over all. 

It was the signal for the shaft of light; 
and when the signal shot upward, and 
the shaft of light began to pierce 
Earth's vortex, making way for Craoshivi, 
it was also the signal for Owks, See- 
wah-Gon, and Ha-o-ha, to fly instantly for 
their arrow-ship and make all speed for 
Cpenta-armij ; which they did, even as a 
flash of light darteth forth, guides and di- 



294 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



rectors of Jehovih's flame to the grave of 
Brahma and Yu-tiv. 

And down fell the bolt of light, piercing 
the new disturbed ground, rich with mortal 
tears; and as a breath of wind would 
move a heap of feathers, so did the light, 
by the wave of Cpenta-armij's hand, blow 
the earth away, and lift up the buried forms 
of two dead lovers, Brahma and Yu-tiv, 
and marched them before the mortal audi- 
ence, newly animated, and lovingly, hand 
in hand, triumphant over death. 

Then great Brahma, now quickened in 
Cpenta-armij's arms spake from Jeho- 
vih's throne, a few words, to the 
loving sons and mortal concourse, then 
took final leave. Cpenta-armij seized the 
folds of the shaft of light, as a mortal 
would the ropes and canvas of a toy ship, 
and wrapping the earthly part of Brahma 
and Yu-tiv about securely, wheeled in 
line her own ship and gathered in the 
etherean current from high heavens. 

Then raising her hand, the known sig- 
nal to the great workers in the trident arc 
above, the exchanging currents of the 
traveling flame began, and now raised up 
the whole etherean hosts and the bodies of 
Brahma and Yu-tiv, which had not as- 
cended a mile before they were etherealiz- 
ed, scattered and gone, and the souls of 
the two sweet loves in cognizance and fel- 
lowship with the millions of Jehovih's Sons 
and Daughters now swiftly made way for 
Craoshivi. 

Cpenta-armij's work was done. In the 
arc of light and companionship of her 
compeers, the feast was open, and the thou- 
sands of millions in rapport sat along the 
series of tables, hundreds of millions of 
miles, to relish food brought from more 
than a thousand worlds. 

Meanwhile, God, to finish his labors, re- 
sumed his throne in Craoshivi, just in time 
to receive the twelve avalanzas sent from 
Yuckowts' factories, in Abarom, in etherea, 
to receive the four-and-twenty thousand 
million Brides and Bridegrooms in Jeho- 
vih's name, who were to take the degree of 
third resurrection and be raised beyond 
Earth's vortex and emancipated in the 
etherean realms of Haot-saiti. 

Chue-in-ista, Goddess of Oambuyu, 
chief commandress of the fleet, having 



been apprised of the number of initiates, 
had prepared twelve thousand rings, a 
thousand for each avalanza; and the fleet 
in turn was , in a ring, and the ring ex- 
tended sufficiently wide to encircle the 
holy capital and throne in Craoshivi, so 
that when it had descended to its place, 
God and his officers, and the Holy Council 
of Earth and heaven, now thirty million 
members, were in the centre of the audi- 
ence. On every side, far as the eye could 
see, stood the Brides and Bridegrooms of 
Jehovih, arrayed in spotless white, fearless 
before the Light and ceremonies. 

When the fleet landed, Chue-in-ista, the 
commandress, came forth from the east, 
facing God on the throne. She said: Thy 
voice, O God, hath called the name of Je- 
hovih. Behold, I am His Daughter, sent 
by Him to know thy will and Holy De- 
sires? 

God said: Behold, I am His Son! Thou 
art my Sister! Hear me, then, in our Fa- 
ther's name. I have here a harvest of four 
and twenty thousand million angels 
brought up out of Earth, pure and holy, 
for Jehovih's emancipated kingdoms. 

Chue-in-ista said: In His name let them 
answer before me, that I may witness their 
wisdom and power sufficient to dwell in 
All Purity. My Father and I are one; my 
hosts have crossed the Nirvanian pastures; 
they no longer feed on substance rising 
from below, but on the Light emanating 
from etherean realms above. 

God said: I know Thou hast provided 
me, O Jehovih! 

Then here responded the hosts of Brides 
and Bridegrooms, saying: By Faith I 
know I am safe in Thy kingdoms, O Jeho- 
vih. Take me to Thy emancipated worlds; 
give me scope and power and wisdom for 
greater works. 

Then followed the full ceremony of the 
third resurrection in the usual way( which 
was witnessed by Cpenta-armij and other 
Chieftainesses and Chiefs above, who were 
at the feast of the arc of Spe-ta) ; and when 
God said: O Jehovih, give me crowns 
for Thy Sons and Daughters, Brides and 
Bridegrooms for Thy etherean worlds! 
There were cast down by Cpenta-armij and 
her hosts, four and twenty thousand million 
crowns; and they alighted on Jehovih's 
Brides' and Bridegrooms' heads. 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



295 



And now God turned to Thale, who was 
to be his successor for the next two hun- 
dred years. God said: In Jehovih's name, 
to thee I bestow the crown of Earth and 
her heavens. And to thee also do I be- 
queath the triangle, symbol of the Gods of 
Earth, and the inqua, and the trident, sym- 
bolical of the arc of Spe-ta; and emblem of 
resurrection. 

Thereupon, he who had been God laid 
the crown and jewels on Thale, saying: 
Hail, O God of Earth! 

Thale said: In Thy name, O Jehovih, 
will I be God of Earth and her heavens till 
the next dan! Be Thou with me, O Fa- 
ther! 

Thus ended the ceremonies: He who 
had been God descended to the foot of the 
throne and sat down; and then God, who 
had been Thale, came down and took his 
hand, saying: Arise, O God, and go thy 
way. And he rose up and prepared to de- 
part, for now had the ceremonies lasted one 
full day. Cpenta-armij signalled the 
hosts for the close of the festival, 
and with her airavagna passed over 
and above the fleet, and gave Chue-in-ista, 
the commandress, the sign, whereupon the 
ascent began. The tens of thousands of 
millions of angels entered their respective 
places. The music of the es'enaurs and of 
the trumpeters sounded, and resounded, to 
the distance of a hundred worlds. 

Upward rose the fleets; downward fell 
the showers of flowers and perfumes to 
those left behind. Higher and higher the 
great world of lights; higher and higher, 
till soon they passed beyond Earth's vor- 
tex and disappeared. 

CHAPTER XIV. 



Lords and Lordesses in the lower king- 
doms of these My heavens. Neither 
shall it be dark during thy reign; and thy 
labor shall be productive of a great har- 
vest for My etherean worlds. For which 
reason thou shalt prepare to reap every 
fifty years. And for each reaping, behold, 
My daughter Cpenta-armij will send to 
thee ships of deliverance for all thou may- 
est have prepared as Brides and Bride- 
grooms. 

And behold, I give a new law unto thee; 
which is, that thou shalt cause thy Lords 
to deliver unto thee for thy kingdoms all 
whom they have raised to grade fifty, in 
advance of thy reapings, in divisions of 
time like unto thine. And thou shalt call 
together to thy capital thy Lords from all 
the divisions of the earth, once every reap- 
ing; and ye shall sit in Council of Div for 
seven days each time, and ye shall consti- 
tute My Holy Eleven; nor shall the Div 
be larger or smaller than eleven during its 
life-time. And the Div shall make laws 
relating to the affairs of each of the hea- 
venly places, to make them harmonious, 
one with another, and these shall be called 
Divan Laws. 

God inquired concerning the light and 
darkness of the cycle. Jehovih said: The 
first division shall rate seventy; the sec- 
ond, sixty; the third, fifty; the fourth, forty; 
the fifth, thirty; and the sixth, twenty. 

God inquired concerning the Lord of 
the Lord-dom of Maitraias. Jehovih an- 
swered him, saying: Because he is not a 
teacher, he shall not be eligible to the rank 
of Div. But he shall have the benefit of all 
the decrees, and all the kingdoms of My 
other Lords; for he is the earth's body- 
guard, and a beneficent unto them. 



Jehovih spake to God on the throne, in 
Craoshivi, saying: These are My divisions 
in the cycle of My Daughter, Cpenta-ar- 
mij: Two hundred years; four hundred 
years; five hundred years; three hundred 
years; four hundred years, and six hun- 
dred years; after which I shall send dawn. 
Five successors shalt thou have, and their 
reign shall be be according to the divisions 
I have made. Forty years' indulgence in 
a great light have I allotted to thee, My 
Son; so thou shalt perfect all the orders of 



CHAPTER XV. 

When the Diva were assembled, God 
propounded the duties of the Lord-dom. 
On which the members spake at length, 
and then God decreed: 

First: The Lord God of Maitrias shall 
not have, from this time forth forever, per- 
mission to use violent force, neither by fire 
nor water, except in hells or knots. 

Second: By the Arc of Spe-ta: By the 
decree of the Most High: The Lord God 



296 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



of Maitraias is bound by the same rule as 
the Lords of the lowest heavens; whose 
walls and pillars of fire are abolished, save 
on special ocasions; whose respective king- 
doms are open and free for all spirits above 
the es'yan grade. 

Third: The Lord God of Maitraias' 
times and successors shall be the same as 
the Diva: The stations of the hosts of the 
Lord God shall be according to the hea- 
venly realms of the Lords, with Maitraias 
as the Lord-dom in chief. 

Fourth: The hosts of the Lord God 
shall be distinguished from ashars and 
asaphs by the name Mishm, but of a single 
one the name shall be Mishm-ah. And 
their leaders shall be called captains and 
generals. 

Fifth: The labor of the Lord God shall 
be to prevent drujas returning to the earth 
to dwell with corporeans; to capture dru- 
jas on the earth and carry them off to the 
nearest Lord's heavenly place, and there 
deliver them. Force by violence being 
abolished, the mishm shall devise strata- 
gems, by games and tournaments, or oth- 
erwise persuasively. 

Sixth: The mishm shall not arrest fe- 
tals, nor infants, nor the wards of ashars, 
nor spirits in chaos on battle-fields; for 
these labors belong to the Lords and their 
hosts. 

Seventh: Where there are companies 
of millions of drujas, and the Lord God 
hath not a sufficient number of mishm, the 
Lord God shall summon the nearest Lord 
for help, and it shall be given unto him. 

Eighth: In no case shall it be the la- 
bor of the Lord God to teach the captured 
drujas, nor to house them, nor to provide 
them with schools, nor factories, nor hos- 
pitals, nor nurseries, for these labors are the 
Lord's, to whom the Lord God of Maitraias 
shall deliver them. 

Ninth: To prevent the establishing of 
heavenly kingdoms by self-constituted 
Lords and Gods, otherwise false Lords and 
false Gods; the Lord God of the Lord-dom 
of Maitraias shall be the central head, in 
conjunction with all the Lords of the low- 
est heavens; and his voice will be the rule 
and guide as to the manner of such labor. 

Tenth: The Lord God shall have one 



hundred thousand messengers; and he shall 
determine their stations and routes of 
travel. 

CHAPTER XVI. 

In God's heavenly place, Craoshivi, Je- 
hovih said: For My chosen on the earth, 
of Abram, and Po, and Brahma, and Ea- 
wahtah, provide thou in Craoshivi- for 
they shall not tarry in the lowest heavens. 
And for the infants of My chosen, who 
die in infancy, suffer them not to be en- 
gulfed in hada, but bring them also to the 
place of My God. 

The Diva then decreed: Lines of road- 
ways from the earth up to the kingdom of 
God for such transport; and appointed of- 
ficers and laborers to prevent the spirits of 
God's chosen from falling into the hands 
of the drujas, and to bring them to Crao- 
shivi. The Diva said: On the third day 
after the death of a mortal, his spirit shall 
be borne to the home of God. And it was 
so. 

The Diva decreed: The labor of the 
Lords of all the divisions of hada and of the 
earth shall be with the undelivered sons and 
daughters of the earth and her heavens; but 
in no case shall they labor more with the 
Faithists; for the Faithists, mortals and 
spirits, come under the higher law, which is 
of Jehovih, through His Son, God of Crao- 
shivi. 

And herefrom rose the saying: The be- 
lievers go to God, but the unbelievers go 
to his Lords; they that live the higher law 
on earth escape hada. 

Now it came to pass in course of time 
that some corporeans, who belonged not 
to the societies of Faithists of any of the 
tribes of Jehovih's chosen, became believ- 
ers in the All Person, and that to live by 
the All Highest light was the fulfilment of 
the Divan law. And they joined not the 
Faithists, nor followed the rites and cere- 
monies. God propounded this in Diva: 
Where shall the spirits of such be deliv- 
ered? Behold, even on the earth they have 
delivered themselves away from the Druks; 
shall we now permit them to fall into the 
kingdoms of mixed company in hada? 

To have faith in One Great Person, the 
Ever Present; Creator and Ruler, is 
well; but to have such faith, and yet not 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



297 



committing one's self to an association of 
brethren of like faith, proveth such lack of 
discipline as requireth beginning at the 
fifth grade in the es'sean world. 

Upon this the Diva decreed: A separ- 
ate kingdom shall be prepared for those 
who profess faith in Jehovih, but are with- 
out practice. 

The name for the kingdom shall be 
Me-de, and its place shall be in the first 
plateau above the earth. 

CHAPTER XVII. 

Jehovih spake to God, saying: When 
thou hast founded Me-de thou shalt make 
Me-de-ci laws; and thou shalt send thy 
surveyors down to hada and to the eaith 
also, and they shall choose a heavenly place 
for thy new kingdom. And thither shalt 
thou go and create a plateau and holy place 
and capital, and provide a throne for it. 
And when thou hast completed thy work 
thou shalt call to the throne a sub-God. 
who shall rule in the place with love, wis- 
dom and power, in My name. But since 
many of My chosen forget Me ani so 
apostate themselves, thy sub-God shall 
also receive their spirits, and his kingdom 
shall be their kingdom till they are \ urged 
of their sins. 

God spake in the Council of Cr; ! oshivi, 
relating what Jehovih had said t y him, 
and the Council then ratified the cot,imand- 
ments of Jehovih. And there was selected 
one A-chung-le, and made sub-God of Me- 
de, with the title Anubi, signifying media- 
tor, and judge of grades. 

God said: Anubi shall have a badge, 
and a pair of scales; with mine own hands 
will I invest him. 

And, accordingly, the place, the king- 
dom, the person, and the badge of office, 
were duly established by God under the 
commandment of Jehovih through his 
kingdom of Craoshivi. And the term of 
office was made to correspond with God's 
and his Lords'. Thus was put upon the 
throne in the heavenly place, Me-de, Anu- 
bi, who had been A-chung-le, an angel of 
a thousand years in the colleges of Jeho- 
vih, most wise and full of love, and indus- 
trious withal. 



Again Jehovih spake to God, saying: 
From this time forth My colleges shall be 
in Craoshivi; from this time forth My 
schools and primaries shall be in the king- 
doms of My Lords. The Diva afterward 
made this another section of the Divan 
law. 

So God and his Lords removed all his 
colleges and places of great learning to 
Craoshivi; but the schools and primary 
educationals were left in the dominions of 
the Lords, their heavenly places. 

Now, during the dawn of dan, four 
etherean Gods had sojourned on the earth, 
walking with four mortals, namely: With 
Po, of Jaffeth; Abram, of Arabin'ya; Brah- 
ma, of Vind'yu, and Eawahtah, of Guata- 
ma. And the four Gods preached through 
these four men, explaining Jehovih and 
His kingdoms; and the angels of Jehovih 
inspired many followers unto them. For 
four years these Gods dwelt on the earth, 
and then ascended into the upper heavens. 

Jehovih spake to God concerning the 
matter, saying: For four years I bestowed 
My light in Person on the corporeal- 
earth, and then I departed; For which 
reason I left four substitutes, Lords of 
heaven, on the earth, with My four peoples 
whom I delivered. And I commanded 
these My substitutes to abide upon the 
earth for forty years, in order to indulge 
My chosen. Provide thou unto them; for 
My substitutes are ethereans; and thou 
shalt have their places filled by atmospher- 
eans from the highest grades. 

The Diva then made a section of the 
Divan law, providing for the four who 
stood highest in the grades in Craoshivi to 
take the places, to dwell with the Faithists 
in the names of the Great Spirit; and the 
names given were: To Jaffeth, Te-in; to 
Aarabin'ya, Jehovih; to Vind'yu, Ormazd; 
to Guatama, Egoquim; according to the 
languages, and to the capabilities of mortals 
to pronounce words. 

The Diva then made another section of 
the Di\an law, which was the title to be 
given to the four angels thus provided to 
bestow the Voice of Jehovih on mortals, 
and the title was O-yra. 

The Divan law provided that each O-yra 
should have ten thousand attendants; an- 



298 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



gels from above the eightieth grade, from 
the colleges of Craoshivi, and their attend- 
ants were to sojourn on the earth with the 
Faithists as inspiring spirits and protect- 
ors; and made the term of office for the 
O-yra eleven years each; and the same for 
their attendants. 

The Divan law explained the duties of 
the O-yra and their attendants, which were: 
that the O-yra should reside with the chief 
rab'bah or high priest, and be his inspirer; 
being with him day and night; and by vir- 
tue of his presence make the chief rab'bah 
know the voice of the All Highest. And 
the attendants first in rank were to dwell in 
the same way with the ordinary rab'bah, 
and for the same purpose. And the other 
attendants were to dwell with the multi- 
tude in like manner and for the same pur- 
pose. And each O-yra was to have a 
heavenly place in the mortal temple, where 
he could meet his attendants in Council 
in reference to the Faithists and their af- 
fairs. 

The Divan law made the O-yra and his 
attendants the heavenly kingdom for the 
ashars of the Lords who dwelt with mor- 
tals. 

The Divan law provided for the O-yra 
to increase the number of his attendants, 
according to the increase of the number of 
Faithists in each of the four divisions of 
the earth. 

Such, then, were the chief of the Divan 
laws made in heaven in the cycle of Cpen- 
ta-armij, during the first two hundred years. 
And all the kingdoms of atmospherea were 
established and officered; and all the people 
in these heavens became organic as soon as 
passing the es'yan age. Nor was there any 
dissatisfaction amongst any of the Gods or 
Lords, or other officers, or in any of the 
colleges, or hospitals; and never since the 
foundation of this world had there been 
such prosperity in the resurrections of the 
inhabitants of heaven. 

CHAPTER XVIII. 

And the harmony of heaven reigned on 
earth; war ceased amongst men on all the 
divisions of the earth. And man began to 
esteem wisdom, truth, virtue, and in- 
dustry. The inspiration of the angels set 
man to imitating the affairs of heaven. He 



built schools and colleges, nurseries and 
hospitals; and factories for silk, linen and 
cotton cloth; and for making paper, glass, 
and leather; and for smelting iron, copper, 
silver and gold. 

Three great peoples sprang up on the 
earth within two hundred years; in Jaffeth, 
in Vind'yu, and in Arabin'ya; and a fourth 
great people were overspreading Heleste 
in every quarter. And the kings of Heleste 
were sending emigrants by thousands and 
thousands into Europa. 

The Lords sent ashars of great wisdom 
to dwell with mortals, to teach them by in- 
spiration in regard to all knowledge; to 
teach them to spin and weave finely; to 
teach them the seasons, the times of the 
earth, and moon,. sun, and stars; to observe 
them with lenses, as had been the case in 
the cycle of Osiris, but was lost on the 
earth. The spirits of thousands of years 
previous were brought back to the earth, 
to reveal to mortals the lost arts and sci- 
ences. By night and by day these angels 
remained in the presence of mortals, and 
spake unto the souls of men, and made 
them understand. 

And the Lord God of Maitraias restrain- 
ed the drujas of heaven from coming back 
to afflict mortals or lead them astray. 
He guarded the earth around on all 
sides, so that, in heaven, the Lords and 
the Divan hosts, in mirth, styled him The 
Savior of Men! 

Jehovih rebuked them, saying to God: 
Thev that sow in mirth oft reap in sor- 
row. But even the Lords, with all their 
wisdom, saw not what was in store for 
their successors. 

The O-yra, the four angels with their 
thousands of assistant angel hosts, dwelt on 
the earth, with the Faithists; inspired them 
in peace, and rites, and ceremonies; inspir- 
ed them in prayers, and psalms, and sacred 
dances; dwelt with them day and night; 
talked to their spirits when they slept; led 
them by inspiration to happy marriages, 
that they might beget offspring capable of 
the Voice. And in each of the four coun- 
tries the Faithists became as bands of 
brothers and sisters. And there came to 
them from the kings' peoples tens of thou- 
sands, and joined them, living as Faithists, 
casting their wealth into the rab'bahs' 
hands, for the benefit of the poor. 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



299 



In two hundred years there were in Jaf- 
feth three million Faithists. In Arabin'ya 
there were two million Faithists. In Vind'- 
yu there were four million Faithists. In 
Guatama there were one milion Faithists. 
But the Faithists were mostly poor people, 
and inhabited many far-apart regions. But 
the kings' peoples were rich, and had large 
cities, an abundance of elephants, horses, 
camels, asses, and cheetahs. 

The Faithists had little learning as to 
books and instruments for measuring the 
stars, and moon, and sun; they derived 
their knowledge from the angels of the 
Lords. The Faithists' knowledge pertain- 
ed mostly to perfecting the soul; but the 
knowledge of the kings' people pertained 
mostly to earthly matters, and to the grat- 
ification of self. 

CHAPTER XIX. 

The Anubi's labor on earth was to win 
the disaffected of the kings' peoples into 
association; and as far as possible to bring 
them to the rites of the Faithists. Anubi 
sent tens of thousands of angels into all the 
regions of the earth. By inspiration and 
otherwise these angels established the rites 
of Anubi. By these rites even kings were 
converted to the full ceremonies of the 
brethren. And by the same means were 
the Mai-chung, of Jaffeth, made into Faith- 
ists; and by the same rites were the Efhns, 
of Vind'yu, converted into Faithists, adopt- 
ing all the rites and ceremonies of Emetha- 
chavah afterward. 

And it came to pass in course of time 
that there were no suffering poor in all the 
world. The Faithists had gathered them 
all up and made brethren of them; and the 
contributions to the Faithists by the kings' 
peoples rendered all the people comforta- 
ble. 

For the degree of Anubi any one (who 
desired to learn heavenly things) was eligi- 
ble. The rites and ceremonies were in dark 
chambers; and the angels of heaven, clothed 
in sar'gis, took part therein. And the an- 
gels taught mortals by the voice the mys- 
teries of spirit communion; how to sit in 
circles and crescents; taught the four dark 
corners, and the four bright sides; taught 
them how to ascertain from what grade 
in heaven the spirits came; how to keep off 
evil spirits; how to attract righteous spirits; 



taught them how to develop in su'is and 
sar'gis; the application of lotions to the 
skin that would make poundings and rap- 
pings. 

The second degree taught the people of 
the Great Spirit and His secret names; 
taught them His high holy heavens, where 
all is rest and happiness forever. Whoever 
took the second degree had to live one year 
with the poorest of the poor, going about 
soliciting alms, reserving only the poorest 
of things for himself. And if he found a 
person naked he must take off his clothes 
and give them to that person. Men and 
women alike served the same conditions. 

The third degree taught the dominions 
of God and the Lords, and the place of 
their abiding, and their respective labors in 
heaven. And the members must learn the 
names of the God or Gods, Lord or Lords, 
and the Divan laws; the words of saluta- 
tion; the anthems; the prayers; the praise; 
the positions of utterance; the orders of 
marching, and to write sacred names. 

The fourth degree taught the arrange- 
ment of the heavens; the places of the sun 
and stars and moon; the places and grades 
of the unseen worlds; the localities of the 
lower and higher heavens and the places and 
dominions of false Lords and false Gods; 
the places in hada, and of hells and knots; 
of familiar spirits, and also of fetals, both 
harmless and the destructive vampires, that 
live on mortals and in swine and cattle, 
that induce mortals to eat flesh food for 
that purpose; the key to the place of the 
north star; the position of the earth's vor- 
tex; the vortices that move the corporeal 
worlds, and hold them in place; and the 
rules for building temples and pyramids, 
with their spirit chambers. 

Besides this there was the fifth degree, 
which reached the secret of life in the flesh; 
to enter the prophetic state; to esti- 
mate numbers without counting; to find 
propoi^tions and distances without meas- 
uring; to forecast the time of things; 
to find the weight of things without 
weighing; to find the power of the 
capstan before it is made, and of the 
lever and screw; to find the friction of 
things before they were moved, in order to 
know the power required. The fifth de- 
gree was called the degree of prophecy; 



300 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-AEMIJ 



and the place of initiation was called the 
college of prophecy. 

In this degree the angels came in sar'- 
gis and taught these things orally, and mor- 
tals initiated thus learned them. But no 
one could take the fifth degree without hav- 
ing become proficient in all the four pre- 
ceding degrees, and without the recom- 
mendation of the rab'bah who had charge 
of the college. And such was the wisdom 
of God that only Faithists could receive the 
degrees, save the first degree; and, there- 
fore, the greatest knowledge of the earth 
was kept in secret with the Faithists. And 
the kings' people, even the richest and 
most powerful, were beholden to the sons 
and daughters of the Faithists. To build 
a palace or a temple, or an aqueduct or 
canal, or a ship or any great affair, the 
kings and the kings' people were obliged 
to employ Faithists of the fifth degree to 
superintend the work. 

CHAPTER XX. 

Jehovih spake to God in Craoshivi, his 
heavenly place, saying: Behold, I have 
given great light to Earth and her hea- 
vens hundreds of years; and My Gods and 
Lords are becoming conceited in their own 
power and wisdom to rule in heavenly 
places. Now I will try them for a season, 
by sending them a'ji'an darkness; for My 
Gods and Lords must learn to master the 
elements I have created in the firmament. 

So Jehovih brought Earth and her 
heavens into a dark region for a season. 

Anuhasaj, a one-time sub-God under 
Ahura, the false, was cast into hell, and 
then delivered out of hell, whereupon ne 
repented, and became a Faithist in heaven; 
serving many years in holy works in Ailkin, 
a heavenly place of great wisdom. And it 
came to pass that Ailkin was raised into a 
new heavenly place, called Varapishanaha; 
and in the removing, behold, Ahura order- 
ed Anuhasaj from the line because of his 
inharmony. And Anuhasaj allowed him- 
self to become angered. 

Satan said unto Anuhasaj: Who art 
thou, that one of less wisdom ordereth 
thee? Anuhasaj said: Alas, I am a fool, 
and without will to assert myself. For 
many years Anuhasaj became a wandering 
spirit in heaven, going froia kingdom to 
kingdom, doing nothing; and at times de- 



scending to the earth, observing the king- 
doms of the earth. 

Satan came again to him and said: Go 
thou to Ahura, who offended the, in pres- 
ence of the Chieftainess, Cpenta-armij, 
and say to him: O God, I crave thy for- 
giveness. Thou wert right, and I was 
wrong. I have repented most bitterly. 
Now I come to thee, with faith in Jehovih. 
Him will I serve forever. Turn me not off, 
O Ahura; remember thine own one-time 
shortness; and the high Gods above thee 
accepted thee. 

Ahura will delight in thee and take thee 
at thy word. And thou shalt enter Vara- 
pinshanaha, asking for the lowest of places; 
practicing humility in all thy behavior. 
But be thou fruitful in making acquaint- 
ances with such as shall serve thee after- 
ward. And whether it be fifty years, or a 
hundred, or two hundred, bide thou thy 
time. But the time shall surely come 
when thou shalt be exalted; and thou shalt 
solicit and accept a place in the dominions 
of the Lord God in the Lord-dom of hea- 
ven and earth, Maitraias. And whether 
it be one hundred years more, or two hun- 
dred years, it mattereth not to thee, but 
thou shalt finally attain to the Lord-dom. 
and be duly installed and crowned Lord 
God of heaven and earth And when thou 
art thus exalted thou shalt seek to have 
appointed such Lords to the ten divisions 
of earth as are thine own special friends. 
And it shall come to pass that the whole 
Earth and her heavens shall be thine, and 
thy title shall be Lord God, and all people 
on earth and in heaven shall be thy ser- 
vants. 

And it came to pass in course of 
another hundred years, Anuhasaj was 
promoted on the staff of the Lord God, 
the guardian, where he served the Lord 
God one hundred and seventy years. So 
the Lord God named Anuhasaj for his 
successor. 

So God came from Craoshivi and 
crowned Anuhasaj Lord God of heaven 
and earth; with great pageantry and dis- 
play, God gave him a throne and placed 
him upon it. And from this time forth An- 
uhasaj was known and saluted as Lord 
God, which is the first rank below God. 

The Lord God said unto himself: Who 
first shall I bring into my favor? Satan 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



301 



said: Thou shalt first bring into thy favor, 
Anubi, Master of the Scales of Heaven, and 
when thou hast trained him to thy liking, 
thou shalt call him Thy Son and Savior of 
Men! 

The Lord God then questioned: Who 
next shall I bring into my favor? Satan 
said: Thou shalt next bring into thy favor 
the ten Lords of the heavenly kingdoms 
of the earth. And when thou hast them to 
thy liking, thou shalt exalt the chief one of 
them to be above the rest; and him that 
thou exaltest thou shalt call Osiris, for it 
is a name loved on earth and in heaven. 

Thou shalt re-establish thy Lord-dom 
and call it Hored, and it shall be the cen- 
tral kingdom of all the heavens belong- 
ing to Earth. And Anubi shall send the 
spirits of his department to thy heavens; 
and Osiris and all the other Lords shall 
send the spirits of their departments to thy 
kingdom. And in no case shall any more 
spirits be sent to Craoshivi; for all people 
in heaven and earth shall be taught that 
thy kingdom is the All Highest Place; and 
that thou art the All Highest God, even 
the Creator of all things; and all angels 
and mortals shall be thy servants. 

Then went the Lord God to work ear- 
nestly, but slowly and surely. The Lords 
of all the divisions of the earth were his 
special friends, and such as would 
willingly do his bidding. And they were 
learned and of high grade of heavenly ex- 
perience of more than a thousand years. 
And the Lord God told no one in heaven 
or on the earth of his designs; gave no 
sign or token of his behavior that would 
make messengers or swift messengers look 
at him to read him; and he passed for the 
meekest and holiest of Gods. 

But the time came at last for which the 
Lord God had labored hundreds of years; 
and he gave a festival in his heavenly 
place, inviting the Lords and captains and 
generals and marshals, whom he knew 
would willingly do his bidding. And they 
came even as the Lord God had planned, 
and it was a l4me of great joy. And when 
the feast was ended, the Lord God spake 
before them, as one moved in sorrow to 
do a solemn duty for the sake of Jehovih. 

The Lord God said: O my brothers, 
hear the words of your Lord God! Behold, 
I have charge of the Lord-dom of heaven 



and earth, I am as a guardian that stand- 
eth by a corn-field to see the corn grow 
unmolested. My experience is not of a 
year, nor of a hundred years, but of thou- 
sands of years. 

In Jehovih's name, I speak before you; 
for the love I bear for the souls of men and 
angels. I belong not to the Diva as do ye 
Lords; my voice findeth vent in the full- 
ness of the Father in me. Who is here 
that hath not seen great decline, during the 
last hundred years, in these heavens, in the 
faith of angels in the All Person? Speak, 
then, O ye Lords; and if ye have hearts for 
more energetic service for the Father and 
His kingdoms, now let your tongues have 
iull liberty, as becometh Gods. 

Anubi said: Thou art wise, O Lord 
God. God of Craoshivi layeth the blame 
on a'ji. 

Then spake Hi-kas, whose heavenly 
place was over Jaffeth; he said: My Lord 
God and my Lords, before your wisdom I 
bow. I am but as a child in heaven, little 
more than a thousand years. My tongue 
should be silent before you, my long ex- 
perienced Lords. Hear me though in my 
little wisdom, and pity me for it. 

To the east or west, or north, or south, 
all things grow, in heaven and on the 
earth; I have seen no greater wisdom than 
this. One thing groweth not, the Diva. 
Behold, the Diva made laws hundreds of 
years ago, and they were wise laws in the 
time they were made. Ye and I, all of us, 
are bound by the old Divan laws. The 
laws have not grown. Gods older than I 
am, and Lords also, tell us that the All 
Light is a Person and hath Voice; and 
moreover that long ago He spake to high- 
raised Gods, saying: These things shall be 
thus and so. 

I appeal to your judgment, O my Lord 
God and my Lords, was that not a wise 
doctrine for the ancients? For on this au- 
thority angels and mortals fell down and 
worshipped Him they saw not. And they 
were obedient to the will of their mas- 
ters and teachers on this self-esserted au- 
thority of a Person no one had seen! 
Which is to say: It is wiser to worship 
Him we know not, and cannot compre- 
hend, and is therefore as nothing before 
us, than to hearken to the words of most 
wise Gods and Lords. If to worship that 



302 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



which we are ignorant of is the highest of 
worship, then the fool is the greatest of 
worshippers. For he is ignorant of all 
things. And by virtue of this reason, he 
who is the wisest must be the poorest of 
worshippers. And of a truth, is it not so, 
both in heaven and on earth? 

With the acquisition of knowledge, 
they all put away the Unknowable; the ig- 
norant are devout worshippers. Shall we 
hold our tongues, saying: Wh-ce, wh-ce! 
The ignorant must not hear the truth; the 
whole truth. To do this, are we not hypo- 
crites? Some have come to us from far-off 
regions, saying there are more delightful 
heavens, much higher! Why, then, shall 
we not all run away and leave this? My 
Lord God, and my Lords, these heavens 
are good enough, if improved. The earth 
is good enough, if improved. We want 
larger kingdoms and more adorned thrones 
in our heavens and on the earth. 

Next spake Che-le-mung, whose hea- 
venly kingdom was over Arabin'ya. He 
said: My Lord hath spoken soul words. 
With knowledge, what more need angels or 
mortals? What value to them is it to say: 
Beware! The Unseen heareth and seeth? 
Or, halt and consider the Divan laws? My 
Lord God, for the wisest and best and 
most honest to assume dominion, this I 
have not seen. Thy kingdom should be the 
largest and most adorned of all kingdoms. 
And thou shouldst have, to labor with thee, 
Lords with kingdoms greater than all Crao- 
shivi. Cannot our Gods and our Lords 
make these heavens the greatest of all re- 
gions in the universe? Shall we and our 
people forever run off to etherea in search 
of higher heavens? And not improve our 
own? To exalt a place by going away from 
it, who hath seen this done? 

Arc-wotchissij spake next: his heavenly 
kingdom was over Vind'yu. He said: O 
that I had not struggled so long to put 
away wisdom like this! All that hath been 
spoken I have understood. But I curbed 
my soul; I thought I was alone in such 
reason. Now, so suddenly, I have not 
words well schooled. I speak little, lest I 
trip myself. It is the joy of my life to lis- 
ten to such wise arguments. Another time 
I will say more. 

After him spake Baal, whose heavenly 
kingdom was over Heleste and the south 



end of Jaffeth to the sea, a young Lord of 
great promise. He said:, How shall one 
of my inexperience speak before such Gods 
as are here! But because ye have touched 
upon a matter dear to my soul, my words 
will forth. I have seen all these heavens, 
and even Craoshivi, waning for hundreds of 
years. Our kingdoms are like old women, 
resigned to routine, living, but dead. W T e 
have the same rites and ceremonies as the 
ancients; parades and salutations and an- 
thems sung for thousands of years; and to 
whom? A figure-head that is void of shape 
and person and sense. Who is here that 
hath not deserved honor more than such 
a being? My Lord God hath labored two 
thousand years! I have seen him in Vara- 
pishanaha for more than a hundred years, 
stooped to the vilest labor, over bad-smell- 
ing drujas, teaching them, washing them! 

The Lord God should have a kingdom 
wide as Earth, and a million attendants 
to do him honorable parade. And when he 
goeth forth he should have hundreds of 
thousands of heralds and trumpeters to 
proclaim he is coming. We need wider 
fields and more pomp and glory in our hea- 
vens; and kingdoms with great capital cit- 
ies, and thrones arrayed in splendor. . 

Then rose Ashtaroth, assistant to Baal, 
and Lordess of the East Wing of his hea- 
venly place. She said: Here are other 
Lordesses, who can speak wisely. As for 
me, my words are few. The ancients have 
taught us to be plain in all things. And 
we have made our heavens like orchards 
stript of leaves and blossoms. As fast as 
angels are made bright and useful, they 
are persuaded to become Brides and 
Bridegrooms to Jehovih, and fly off to re- 
mote worlds. Our own beloved Earth, that 
brought us forth, together with her hea- 
vens, are thus forever stript of the most 
valuable fruitage and ornament. 

We all know that atmospherea is ex- 
tensive enough to contain all the angels 
Earth will bring forth in millions of 
years! I appeal to thee, my Lord God, and 
to ye, most wise Lords, are not these 
Brides and Bridegrooms hoodwinked by 
the tales of the etherean Gods? And by 
the parade and pageantry of the marriage 
"ceremony? And by the fire-ships, and 
pomp and splendor of the marshals, and 
trumpeters, and music, and the high-raised 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



303 



Gods? Behold, we have here one who can 
invent all these glories, even our Lord 
God. He should have such a heavenly 
place of splendor that the Brides and Bride- 
grooms would fly to him instead of the far- 
off heavens. 

After this manner spake the Lords and 
Lordesses, and when they had all spoken, 
there rose up Anuhasaj, now lawfully 
anointed Lord God. He said: 

CHAPTER XXI. 

Most wise Lords, in your words ye have 
done me great honor. There let the matter 
end. I perceive what any one can under- 
stand, which is that the center of the hea- 
vens should be here. Why should the 
heirs of Earth and atmospherea be car- 
ried off to other heavens? Sufficient it is 
for us that we cultivate our own. I am not 
competent for so great a work. Rather shall 
ye choose from amongst yourselves the 
highest, best, wise man, and make him your 
God. I will be his servant to do whatso- 
ever he putteth upon me. I have traveled 
far, and took the measure of many worlds. 
I declare unto you there are no glories in 
the far-off worlds, but can be built 
up in these heavens, and even on the very 
earth. 

Hear me then and judge ye, not for my 
fitness, but for my unfitness, and so dismiss 
me save to make me your servant. Send 
not off the highest raised angels, but make 
these heavens suitable unto them. Make 
this kingdom the All Highest heavenly 
kingdom; and make your God the highest 
of all Gods, even the Creator. Him shall 
ye surround with a capital city, a heavenly 
place paved with diamonds and most pre- 
cious gems. And his throne shall be the 
most exalted of all glories. To which 
none can approach, save by crawling on 
their bellies. Yea, such majesty shall sur- 
round your God as becometh a Creator: 
and such newly-invented rites and ceremo- 
nies, dazzling beyond anything in all the 
worlds ! 

The rights and ceremonies should be car- 
ried to the highest perfection. Without 
rites and ceremonies a people are as a dead 
people; they are as an army without disci- 
pline. In fact, discipline is void without the 
formalities of rites and ceremonies. To not 
have these is to have every one do for self, 



which is the dissolution of all union. Baal 
hath spoken wisely on this; we need new 
rites and ceremonies, adapted to the high- 
est grades. We shall no longer bow to a 
God we know not, a scattered substance 
wide as the universe! 

Because ye have spoken, I am pleased. 
Because ye have come to my feast, I am 
delighted. To be with one's own loves, 
what joy is greater than this? It hath been 
said, man shall love all alike; but I say 
unto you that that is impossible. We have 
our preferences, and we delight to come to- 
gether. Who shall say us nay? 

And yet, my Lords and Lordesses, shall 
we not deliberate on these things? And 
council with our best loves upon it; for 
such is the construction of the mind that it 
oft seeth better through others' eyes. And, 
above all, shall we not mature the subject 
to know if in our own souls we are sincere, 
doing all things for the good of heaven and 
earth, and not for ourselves. Ye know 
how Ahura's kingdom prospered until he 
began to work for his own glory, but from 
his errors learn to avoid similar ones. 

And now, since the time of the feast is 
ended, and our respective kingdoms waiting 
us, I declare the assembly dissolved. Arise, 
then, my Lords and Lordesses, and go your 
ways. And whatsoever ye may desire to 
communicate to me on this matter, do ye 
even so through messengers, which ye al- 
ready have. 

CHAPTER XXII. 

Satan went to all the Lords and Lord- 
esses in hada, and said unto each and every 
one: Thine shall be exaltation without la- 
bor; because thou art wise, others shall 
serve thee; and great shall be thy glory. 
As thou hast witnessed the rites and cere- 
monies, in Craoshivi, of the high-raised 
Gods, even so shall it be with thee. Be- 
hold, the heavens of Earth shall become 
the brightest and most glorious of all hea- 
vens. Be thou patient, enduring anything, 
for thou shalt surely, in time to come, be 
second to none, the highest of Gods! And 
thy name shall be sung in the ceremonies, 
and shall be honored even in the far-off 
heavens. It shall be said of thee, thou art 
amongst the youngest of Gods, that by 
thine own self-will mastered all things so 
suddenly that even the oldest of Gods 



304 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



stood appalled at thy daring. Be thou pa- 
tient, and seeming most humble, and bide 
thou thy time; thou wert born to be a 
leader even amongst Gods. Be secret; dis- 
closing naught. 

Satan said to Anuhasaj, the Lord God: 
Be thou dignified, and by thy much-pre- 
fessed love, like a father unto all the oth- 
ers. And it shall come to pass that they 
will thrust these great dominions upon 
thee. Now whilst these matters were with 
these Lords, behold, in far-off Craoshivi 
Jehovih spake to God on the throne, before 
the Council of Jehovih's Son, saying: Be- 
cause I indulged thy Lords and Lordesses 
in prosperous places, they are becoming 
forgetful of Me. For so I created man, in 
prosperity he idolizeth himself. He saith: 
Behold me! What great things I can do: 
Yea, I am wise; I perceive the nothingness 
of the Creator! And he buildeth to his 
own ruin. I created life and death all 
around him, that he might learn My power 
ere he quitteth the earth. And hada I made 
wide, with a place of ascent and a place of 
descent. Upward I placed My holy lights, 
saying: Come! Downward, I made dark- 
ness, saying: Beware! hell lieth thither! 
But they plunge into misery headlong. 

God said: What have they done, O Je- 
hovih? Jehovih said: They are con- 
spiring together to rebel against the 
manner of My everlasting kingdoms. Sum- 
mon thou the Diva before thee, and bid 
them speak outright as to what they de- 
sire. 

God sent messengers into all the divi- 
sions of the lowest heavens, to the king- 
doms of Jehovih's Lords and Lordesses, 
as the Father had commanded, summoning 
them to Craoshivi. 

Satan spake to Anuhasaj, the plotter of 
the mischief, saying: Lest God in Crao- 
shivi get wind of this matter, and so set at 
naught thy long-laid plans, send thou to 
him, saying: Greeting, in love to thee, Son 
of Jehovih, God of Earth and her heavens. 
From the light before me I am resolved to 
resign the Lord-dom. Search, therefore, 
and provide one in my place. 

Satan continued to Anuhasaj : Send 
thou to thy Lords and Lordesses, saying: 
Greeting in love to thee, Lord of Jehovih. 
I foresee that many will desire me to take 
the place of God of Earth and her hea- 



vens. Seek thou to relieve me of this, and 
choose one less radical, that thou mayest 
the more fully indorse him. Behold, I am 
about to resign the Lord-dom, and desire 
to see thee. 

The Lords and Lordesses received the 
two communications at the same time; and 
they severally laid the matter before their 
Holy Councils; and great was the excite- 
ment therein. That which had been planned 
to be in secret was thus made public in all 
hada in a day, before thousands of 
millions! At once the Lords and Lord- 
esses hastened to Anuhasaj 's capital; and 
they were each attended by ten thousand 
attendants. Now when they were assem- 
bled, perceiving that God in Craoshivi 
knew of the matter, they were by their own 
shame further incited to disobey the Divan 
summons, and at once proceed to found a 
consolidated kingdom, with Anuhasaj at 
the head. Anuhasaj pretended that he de- 
sired not the Godhead, and only agreed to 
serve provided they installed him with oaths 
of fidelity. So, after a session of three days, 
Anuhasaj was elected and enthroned in 
Hored, a new heavenly place, and crowned 
Our God of Earth and her heavens, the 
Very Lord God. Thus he became a false 
God. But they crowned him not with the 
true crown, for that was with God in Crao- 
shivi; but they made one, creating it in the 
sacred circle. But since he could not be 
crowned by those beneath him, they were 
in a quandary how to proceed. 

Then satan spake to Anuhasaj, saying: 
Command them to lie on their bellies in 
token of submission to thee, and say to 
them: Lay the crown at my feet, and I 
will stand with my head bare; and when ye 
have prostrated yourselves, I will com- 
mand the crown in my own name to rise 
up and lie on my head; and if it so rise, 
then know ye of a truth our work is the 
highest, best work. 

Anuhasaj then repeated this to the 
Lords and Lordesses, and they laid 
down on their bellies, each being anxious 
to show fidelity, in hope of exaltation. And 
when they were down and saw not, Anu- 
hasaj, having not power in Light, said: 
Crown of these most holy, wise Lords and 
Lordesses of heaven and earth, arise thou 
and lie on the head of him who shall have 
dominion on earth and in these heavens! 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



305 



And thereupon he stooped down slyly 
and with his own hand raised it up and 
crowned himself, and commanded the 
Lords to rise up. And behold, some 
of the Lords and Lordesses said they saw 
with the second sight of the soul, and that 
the crown rose of its own accord, being 
under the will of the circle! And they clap- 
ped their hands, saying: All Hail, Our 
God! All Hail, Our God! All Hail, Our 
God! Proclaiming him in the east and 
west and north and south. 

He responded: The Lord, your God, 
reigneth! Peace be unto you. Behold, the 
heavens and earth are mine; be ye stead- 
fast unto me, and ye shall be glorified in my 
name. Ye that have been Lords and Lord- 
esses shall be Gods and Goddesses, with 
great power and with mighty kingdoms. 
As I foresaw this, so have I provided for 
you beforehand. In this very time and 
place will I crown you and apportion you 
with great glory. Yet think not that this 
is the last; it is but the first, and temporary 
until the new heavens are founded with 
broader boundaries. 

CHAPTER XXIIL 

Anuhasaj said: I, the Lord, your God, 
being the All Highest, through your choice, 
decree, for sake of harmony and concert in 
our .labors, the establishment of a De'yiis. 
As the Craoshivians have had a Diva, so 
will I have a De'yiis. And by virtue of 
mine own authority I proclaim ye, my 
Lords and Lordesses, as the holy members 
thereof. 

As the Diva hath been taught in these 
heavens, so also be the De'yus, whereof I 
assume the chief head. As the Diva had 
laws, so also shall our De'yus; and they 
shall be promulgated on the earth, and 
taught to mortals as the laws of De'yus. 
Therefore by my own voice I dissolve the 
Diva of heaven; and it shall not be from 
this time forth forever. And whosoever of 
ye being members thereof, shall this day 
resign the Diva, and send word to the 
ruler of Craoshivi, for his benefit, and for 
his kingdom's benefit. 

And the ruler of Craoshivi shall con- 
tinue in his own place and kingdom; for it 
is his. And the ruler of Vara-pishanaha, 
called Ahura, shall continue in his own 
place and kingdom, for it is his. 



First, then I take unto myself Anubi, 
the Lord loved by you all, and he shall be 
my associate, and his title shall be Master 
of the Scales of Heaven, for he shall de- 
termine the grades of the spirits and send 
them to their respective departments. On 
earth his title shall be Savior of Men, Son 
of De'yus. 

Second, thou, Hi-kas, shalt be Ruler 
over Jafreth and its heavenly kingdom: and 
thy title shall be Te-in, and of the first 
rank of God of the Earth. 

Third, thou, Wotchissij, shall be ruler 
over Vind'yu and her heavenly kingdom, 
and thy title shall be Sudga, and of the first 
rank of God of the Earth. 

Fourth* thou, Che-le-mung, shalt be 
ruler over Arabin'ya and her heavenly 
kingdom, and thy title shall be Osiris, and 
of the first rank of God of the Earth. 

Fifth, thou, Baal, shalt be ruler over 
Heleste and her heavenly kingdom, and 
thy title shall be Baal, and of the first 
rank of God of the Earth. 

Sixth, thou, Ashtaroth, shalt be ruler 
over Par'si'e, and its heavenly kingdom, 
and thy title shall be Ashtaroth, of the first 
rank of Goddess of the Earth. 

Seventh, thou, Fo-ebe, shalt he ruler 
over Uropa and her heavenly kingdom, 
and thy title shall be Fo-ebe, and of the 
first rank of Goddess of the Earth. 

Eighth, thou Ho-jab, shall be ruler over 
Japan and her heavenly kingdom; and thy 
title snail be Ho-jab and of the first rank 
of God of the earth. 

After that the false God made appoint- 
ments for the other divisions of the earth 
and their heavenly places, and after that he 
said unto them: 

All my Gods and Goddesses shall have 
thrones in their places, and holy councils 
and attendants as becometh Gods of the 
first rank. And every one shall have a 
capital city, with subsidiaries according to 
the number and place of their spirits and 
mortal subjects. And every God and God- 
dess shall manage his or her own kingdom 
in his or her own way; but every one shall 
nevertheless be tributary to my kingdom, 
according to the exactions I put upon him 
or them. That ye may resign the Diva, 
and choose your assistants, before being 
crowned, I declare a day of recreation, to 
assemble at the trumpeter's call. 



306 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



Hereupon the hosts relaxed from duty 
and made their resignations of the Diva, 
and sent them with messengers to God in 
Craoshivi, but not one of them mentioned 
the new state of affairs resolved upon. On 
the next day, at the trumpeter's call, they 
assembled again; and Anuhasaj said unto 
them: Come ye with me, and I will show 
you the place of Hored and its boundaries; 
for it shall not be my kingdom alone, but 
yours also, for my kingdom shall be the 
kingdom of your kingdoms. 

And they entered an otevan, and, com- 
ing in the fourth belt below meteoris, in 
the sign of the twelfth arc of Chinvat; and 
Anuhasaj said: From this time forth this 
belt shall be called Hored, and it shall be 
my place forever. It shall be the central 
kingdom of all Earth's heavens. 

And the multitude said: Hail, Kingdom 
of Hored, the holy hill, place of the Most 
High God! And it was known thereafter 
as the belt of Hored, hill of God. It was 
a three-quarters belt, and the base thereof 
was ten thousand miles from the earth, and 
the summit was fifteen thousand miles 
high; habitable within and without. And 
its ascending rank in the grades was twen- 
ty, that is, it was easily habitable by spirits 
that had attained to that grade; being 
above the grade of infants and drujas, and 
above the region of hells and knots, save 
in cases of great panic. Now, from the 
first place of Hored, where Anuhasaj 
crowned himself, which was the eastern 
base of the hill, to the place for his capital 
city, he made a roadway and called it Loo- 
hored, and it was the only opened roadway 
to the kingdoms below. So it came to 
pass Anuhasaj had two capital cities; and 
the first was called the City of the Gate of 
Heaven, that is, Anubi; and the other was 
called the Place of Everlasting Rest, that 
is, Sanc-tu. 

Anuhasaj said to Anubi: Behold, the 
City of the Gate of Heaven shall be thy 
place. And thou shalt determine the rate 
of all souls who desire to enter the Place 
of Everlasting Rest. Thou shalt be judge 
over them. And whosoever is not for me 
shall not enter, but shall be cast into the 
kingdoms of hada. And those that are for 
me, thou shalt send unto me. And thou 
shalt have a Holy Council of one hundred 
thousand; and of examiners thou shalt 



have one million. And thy capital shall 
be guarded on every side but one, with pil- 
lars of fire, so that none can pass but by 
the Gate of Heaven. And of guardsmen 
thou shalt have seven millions, divided into 
seven watches, one for each day. Of mes- 
sengers betwixt thy place and mine, thou 
shalt have ten thousand; but betwixt thee 
and the Gods and Goddesses of the lower 
kingdoms, thou shalt have five hundred 
thousand. But, of thine own choice, shall 
be the number of es'enaurs, trumpeters and 
marshals, and thy attendants also. And 
all Gods and Goddesses coming to me, or 
sending messengers to my holy place, shall 
come through thy city, even through the 
Gate of Heaven; and they shall come ac- 
cording to certain rites and ceremonies 
which I shall give unto thee. Come, there- 
fore, and receive thy crown. 

Thus was crowned Anubi; and after 
him were crowned the other Gods and 
Goddesses; and Anuhasaj bequeathed to 
each one his own kingdom, according to 
the custom of the ancients. And when 
these matters were completed, he again 
spake before them, saying: Behold, the ex- 
ample I have made before you; even before 
I provided myself for mine own kingdom I 
have given unto every one all things re- 
quried. It is meet and proper, therefore, 
that ye contribute unto me and my place 
workmen and materials, that I may build 
in great glory also. For, as I am exalted, 
and my kingdom made glorious, so have ye 
whereof to preach gloriously to your inhab- 
itants of the place in store for them. 

Thus Anuhasaj placed the Gods and God- 
desses under obligations to himself, and 
they acquiesced in his proceedings, saying: 
Nay, we will not only contribute men and 
women for this purpose, but we will labor 
with our own hands for the space of twen- 
ty days, helping to build the capital city, 
and to open roads, in all directions. 

CHAPTER XXIV. 

Anuhasaj never established the De'yiis 
as projected at first, but took the name 
De'yus upon himself, and became known in 
the heavens by that name. When he had 
thus established Hored in its entirety, he 
gave a feast to the Gods and Goddesses; 
and after it was ended, previous to their 
departure, he spake before them, saying: 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



307 



The time of duty is now upon you, and 
upon me, the Lord your God, also. Be ye 
then solicitous of these things I speak of, 
that in the everlasting times we may be 
brethren, and there shall be no other Gods, 
but ourselves forever. Behold, I have 
given into your hands to manage your own 
kingdoms in your way; for which reason I 
can no longer say, do ye this, or do ye 
thus and so, for my affairs are in mine own 
kingdom. But wherein I have wisdom I 
freely impart, and the choice is yours, 
whether ye will follow my advice or other- 
wise, for ye are of equal rank with me. 
And, moreover, my kingdom is dependent 
upon you, and not yours upon mine. Hear 
ye then my words as if I were but one in 
a Council with wise Gods: 

To overturn Jehovih and His domin- 
ions on the earth and in these heavens will 
be your first labor. And whenever corpor- 
eans embrace Him, calling themselves 
Faithists in the Great Spirit, or Faithists 
in Jehovih, of Faithists in Ormazd, or by 
any other name signifying the All Light, 
or Unseen, or Person or Ever Presence, ye 
shall pursue them, and destroy them off 
the face of the earth. To do which ye shall 
use the oracles, or prophets and seers, or 
magicians, or inspiration; and ye shall set 
the kings and queens of the earth to war 
upon them, and spare them not, man, wo- 
man or child. 

And of spirits of the dead who fall into 
your respective kingdoms, being Faithists, 
bring them before Anubi and his hosts, 
and he shall send them into regions of 
darkness, saying to them: Behold, ye have 
your Jehovih! And Anubi shall place 
guards over them, and they shall not know 
where to go, but will cry out in their dark- 
ness. Whereupon they shall be sworn 
into servitude in Hored to the Lord your 
God forever, and become slaves within your 
kingdoms. 

And ye shall teach both mortals and 
spirits that Hored is the All Highest hea- 
ven, and that it is the place of the All 
Highest God, even De'yus. For them to 
attain which, ye shall exact servitude of 
them in your heavens accordingly as ye 
may desire. 

In the rites and ceremonies, both in 
your heavens and on the earth, shall ye en- 
force the exchanging of words signifying 



Great Spirit to words signifying Lord God r 
who is of the form and size of a man, de- 
claring of a truth that I sit on my throne 
in judgment of the world, for it is mine, 
and ye are one with me. And all songs 
of praise shall be changed; and prayers and 
beseechings to your God, instead of Jeho- 
vih, or Ormazd, or the Great Spirit. For 
both mortals and angels shall be made to 
know that he is my enemy, leading my peo- 
ple astray. And as to the prophets and 
seers on the earth, who will persist in 
preaching or singing to the Great Spirit, 
ye shall incite torture and punishment and 
death unto him. And whether I be De'- 
yus, or God, or the Lord God, or the All 
Perfect, me only shall they worship, for- 
ever. And my place, Hored, shall be the 
sacred hill of God, forever! And none shall 
approach me but by crawling on their bel- 
lies; for I will so exalt my lights that none 
can stand before me. 

When the Lord God had finished his 
discourse, the other Gods responded in 
love and adoration. Thus ended the feast, 
and, according to the rites in other hea- 
vens, the Gods and Goddesses went and 
sat at the foot of the throne, and De'yus 
came down and took them by the hand, one 
at a time, and raised them up, saying: 
Arise, O God, and in my name, and wis- 
dom, and power, go thy way. 

CHAPTER XXV. 

Swift messengers coursing the heavens, 
from far-off etherean worlds, bound for 
destinations remote, passed over the re- 
gions of Hored; and the high-raised travel- 
ers felt the discordant plots of satan's Lord 
God and his hosts, thus bent to overthrow 
the Great Spirit's happy world. And so 
they sent word to Cpenta-armij, through 
whose fields the solar serpent moved along. 
And her Most High Council, one with the 
Creator, cast about to know the cause and 
treatment of the dastardly outrage. 

Then spake Jehovih to His Daughter, 
Chieftainess, saying: The Lord God was 
duly honored in My name, and swore be- 
fore Me to serve faithfully, forever, by his 
highest light. Hold thou him to his pur- 
pose, and bind him in the world he hath 
assumed to rule for his own glory. And 
to his fellow-Gods, conspirators against 
Me, Who brought them into being, give 



308 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J 



thou them full sway to destroy My wor- 
shippers. Let them raise the name of their 
God, and bait mortal kings and queens to 
glut themselves in the havoc of My chosen, 
the Faithists. 

Earth neareth her greatest corpor- 
eal growth, and these self-assuming Gods 
shall build monuments through their mor- 
tal emissaries, in the greatest divisions of 
the earth; temples and pyramids, and ora- 
cle-palaces, which shall stand thousands of 
years as testimony of the audacity of 
Gods and Saviors. To honor whom, the 
Lord God hath sworn to make angels and 
men suppliant slaves in heaven and earth. 
For I will use the corporeal temples and 
pyramids they shall build on the earth 
at the expense of My chosen, as testimony, 
in coming ages, of the oppression in the 
hadan-heavenly kingdoms of these self- 
Gods. Till which time I cannot teach mor- 
tals of the vanity of the lower heavens, 
save in the deserted ruins of their molder- 
ing monuments. For in kosmon, mortals 
shall know that even as the earth hath been 
a place of foolish sacrifice to persons born 
of woman, so were My heavens debauched 
in that day by similar oppression and cru- 
elty. 

Let him who is falsely crowned Osiris, 
build in the Osirian field, and him who is 
proclaimed De'yus, build in the hadan field, 
for the time shall come when these testi- 
monies shall be required in the sum of 
earth and heaven. For I will show them 
that without an All Highest Person there 
is no resurrection for angels or men. Of 
which they that are slaughtered, ten thou- 
sand million, and bound by the Lord God, 
shall swear, in kosmon, the fall of all things 
save Me. 

Down to the lower heavens, to God in 
Craoshivi, sent Cpenta-armij swift mes- 
sengers, with the words of Jehovih, com- 
forting to God and his hosts, as to the 
wide plans on which the Father layeth the 
destinies of worlds. And God received 
them, and now comprehended why, alas, 
his Diva came not, nor answered his call 
but by resigning. 

But God, the true ruler of heaven and 
earth, now saw how the prosperity of the 
indulged heaven had made bad men out of 
most holy Gods, even as prosperity on the 
earth closeth up man's eyes against his 



Creator, making himself an egotist in self, 
and vociferous as to Jehovih's shortcom- 
ings, according to man's views. And God 
remembered how he had prayed for the 
continuation of the light in heaven, which 
Jehovih granted him; and he repented now, 
saying: 

O Jehovih, why said I not: Thy will 
be done; let darkness come! Had I not 
seen on the earth how night must follow 
day, and winter follow summer; that I 
must need pray for endless light in a hea- 
ven where Thy sons and daughters are as 
yet but babes in the time and course of 
worlds? Mine own judgment should have 
shown me that seasons of darkness should 
follow seasons of light in Thy lower hea- 
vens. For, then, had these half-tried Lords 
and Gods stopped to consider ere they 
rushed into so mad a scheme. 

God called together the Holy Council 
in Craoshivi, and told them of the words of 
the Creator, through His High-Raised 
Daughter. Then the Council spake, all 
who chose, and the thirty milions listened. 
And, meanwhile, messengers fresh from 
Hored, the seat of rebellion, came in, 
bringing full news to Craoshivi of the pro- 
ceedings of the Lord God, alias De'yus, 
and his self-Gods and Goddesses. When 
the full particulars had been related, and the 
Council had spoken upon it, then the light 
of Jehovih came upon God, and God said: 

In the name of our Father, I will speak 
to these Gods and Lords and acquaint 
them with Jehovih's words. Yea, I will 
entreat them to return even as they were. 

Then God, overwhelmed by the terrible 
adversity of the heavens intrusted to his 
keeping, as in a small degree the captain 
of a merchant's ship, far out at sea, meet- 
ing with a mishap of broken masts, stript 
to the hulk, and rudder gone, powerless to 
save, feeleth the burning shame of incom- 
petence before mariners, so God, before 
the High-Raised Chiefs of the etherean 
worlds, must helplessly view his shattered 
kingdoms. With great sorrow God sent 
word to De'yus and his Gods, of Jehovih's 
warning; and he pleaded for them to re- 
turn, as a father pleadeth to a wayward 
son. Off went the messengers swiftly; and 
God, even though long schooled to ad- 
verse trials and suspensions, burned with 
impatience for his messengers to return, 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



309 



hoping that his sweet pleadings might yet 
reverse the scenes. 

Then came back the messengers, empty 
handed! Not one of the truant Gods had 
deigned to answer them. And God wept, 
scarce believing his messengers, that so 
great an insult could be heaped upon him, 
who had done nothing whereof any one 
could complain. Then Jehovih came and 
spake to God, saying: Weep not, My Son! 
He who followeth his highest light from 
day to day, great is his glory; and in what- 
soever he loseth he shall regain a thou- 
sand-fold. Behold, I will bring love to 
thee that thou knowest not of: Remember 
thou, as this season is upon Earth and 
her heavens, even so do I send a season 
like unto it upon all My worlds. 

CHAPTER XXVI. 

In course of time, word came to Ahura, 
in Vara-pishanaha, of the proceedings of 
the Lord God, now styled De'yus, and of 
the revolt of all the lowest heavens in one 
fell swoop. And Ahura remembered his 
own shortcomings, thousands of years ago, 
and the terrible bondage that came upon 
him in the end. And he knew De'yus, 
who had been a sub-God under him hun- 
dreds of years, the same Anuhasaj, who 
had tried to break the lines in the arc 
of Spe-ta, in the resurrection of Ailkin. So 
Ahura prayed to Jehovih, before the Holy 
Council in Vara-pishanaha, to know what 
he should say or do in the matter, or if 
nothing at all. Jehovih answered him, say- 
ing: 

My Son, thou art no longer a child. 
Address thou the Lord God, or not ad- 
dress him, as seemeth fit in thine own eyes. 
Behold, I suffered thee to try the same 
road, that thou mightest understand Me 
and My kingdoms. 

Thereupon Ahura determined to send 
word to De'yus, in his own name, and in 
his own way. This, then, is what he sent: 

To Anuhasaj, my one-time sub-God, 
greeting to thee in justice and wisdom. 
Wert thou inexperienced I would treat 
thee with respect. But thou knowest thou 
art false. And because thou art false, thou 
shalt reap in falsehood. Behold, the day 
shall come when thy Gods will desert 
thee; for such is the tree thou hast planted 
in thy kingdoms. This rule holdeth on 



earth and in all the heavens. Can that 
which is unborn, restrain its own birth? 
Or that which is not quickened into life, 
restrain the Creator's hand? So also is it 
of him that soweth for self; he shall reap 
a harvest of selfs. And thy Gods will be 
for themselves, and thy marshals, and all 
thy hosts; every one pulling in an opposite 
way. 

Not suddenly will these things come 
upon thee; for thou shalt have a mighty 
kingdom and great honor and glory, such 
as no other God before thee hath had in 
these heavens. And thy people shall be 
jealous to serve thee, striving with all their 
might to outdo one another in worshipful 
obedience to thee. And thy name, even 
the names of De'yus and Lord God, shall 
be worshipped for a season, on the earth 
above all names that have ever been given 
in falsehood. And yet the time shall come 
that thy names shall be cast out of earth 
and heaven. Even the deeds which thou 
shalt do will be the means of making thy 
names execrable. 

Think not, O my Lord God, that thou 
wilt deal righteously, and keep thyself holy. 
Behold, I, too, was a revolted God that sat 
up a kingdom for mine own glory. And, 
in the time of the beginning thereof, I was 
most resolute to practice righteousness in 
all things. But the surroundings over- 
came me; for as I was allied to self, so 
selfish officers under me beset me on all 
occasions, and I was forced to find new 
places and new glories for them, or, by 
their grumbling, they would sow my fields 
with mutiny. I was powerless in the great 
kingdom I built up. Thou knowest the re- 
sult. Thinkest thou the larger thy king- 
dom, the greater will be thy power to avert 
thy fall? My experience was the opposite 
of this. 

I admonish thee in wisdom and justice; 
I know thou art doing these things not for 
the raising up of the fruit of the earth, 
but for thine own aggrandizement and 
glory. And I say unto thee, the time will 
surely come when thy Gods will do the 
same things against thee. And in that 
time the wise and learned and truthful will 
fly from thee, but the drujas and slaves 
will not leave thee; but thou shalt be en- 
vironed with them, and cast into hell. 
Thou shalt heap misery upon millions of 



310 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



thy subjects, but thou shalt not escape the 
hand of justice: Thou shalt reimburse 
them every one. Thou hast cast thy net 
in shoal water; thine own feet shall be tan- 
gled in the meshes thereof. 

Behold, I, too, once craved a great 
heavenly kingdom; now I weep day and 
night because I have it. And thou, too, 
shalt experience the time of scalding 
tears, to be rid of that which thou cravest 
now. Yet, how else shall the dumb be rais- 
ed in heaven? Who else shall minister to 
the wandering spirits that overspread the 
earth? And the evil drujas? And the lust- 
ers, and foul-smelling? Shall I say to thee: 
Go on, thou self-presuming Lord God, the 
Great Spirit hath a rod for thee! Yea, He 
answereth the ambition of men and Gods 
sooner or later; in a way they think not of, 
He bringeth them up with a short turn. 

Thou art like a man desirous of great 
bulk, that shutteth up the pores of the skin 
of his flesh; thou seekest to shut up the 
course of the heavens that riseth out of 
the earth, upward forever. And as the one 
choketh up with a foul smell, and dieth, 
so shall it be with thy kingdom. Behold, 
the way of everlasting light is outward, on- 
ward, away from the corporeal worlds; 
but the way of darkness is toward the 
earth. Sayest thou the spirits of the dead 
shall not rise away from the earth? And 
in their ignorance of the higher heavens, 
become guides to mortals! Behold, thou 
hast traveled far; and thou struttest about, 
saying: It is enough; I, the Lord God, 
have traveled in the far-off heavens; stay 
ye at home, and work for me forever, that 
I may be glorified! 

Wilt thou say: I, the Lord God, I, De'- 
yus, am the only Son of the Void! Behold, 
my kingdom lieth in a little corner! Come 
and worship me, the Lord God, and ye 
shall see me on my throne! 

Or wilt thou say: The impersonal 
space, senselessness, by accident fructified 
itself in corporeal substance, and became 
me, the Lord God, in size of a full-grown 
man, and then I created all the creations! 
Wherefore let men and angels fall down 
and worship the man, De'yus, who dwell- 
eth in Hored, a ripple in the lowest hea- 
vens! 

I profess not to love thee, Anuhasaj, 
but justice toward them beneath thee. For 



thou shalt hoodwink mortals, and even an- 
gels of little experience, to believe thou wert 
the very Creator; but thy Gods know thee 
as to who thou art, and the Gods above 
thee know also. All thy days at most have 
been but two thousand and seven hundred 
years! And the time shall come upon thee 
that thou shalt be forced by thine own fault 
to assert thou wert the very Creator, 
Whose worlds have run thousands of mill- 
ions of years! Who can carry so great a 
falsehood as this! And not carrying it, it 
shall fall down on thee and on thy people, 
and take root and spread abroad till thy 
place and thy Gods' places are the founda- 
tions of nothing but lies. For the rule 
holdeth in all places, high and low, that 
according to the seed sown so shall be the 
harvest, whether good or bad. Nor can any 
man or God alter this rule, or bend it to 
the right or left. 

If it be Jehovih's will that some one 
shall make the name of God, and Lord 
God, and De'yus, execrable on earth and 
in heaven, it may be well that thou hast put 
thyself into the yoke to that end. Yet I 
would not have thee so, could I prevent it. 

Thou wert one time my sub-God, and I 
remember thee well; thou wert young and 
full of promise. My judgment spake to 
me of thee, saying: A sub-God, to be 
proud of for thousands of years! But my 
judgment was not Jehovih's. My love for 
thee was early nipped in the bud. For thou 
wert forever talking of thyself. Thou 
madest thy neighbor Gods sick by forever 
relating thy experiences and thy prophe- 
cies as to what thou wouldst do. And 
when Jehovih encompassed me about in 
mine own evil, thou didst tantalize me be- 
cause I had not followed thy advice. Now 
I repeat unto the, I could not follow any 
one's advice. And thou, too, shalt be en- 
vironed about, and be unable to follow any 
one's advice. For such is the bondage of 
the Godhead, save we cut ourselves loose, 
making Jehovih the Head and Front, and 
ourselves His servants. For the God 
should not only be the greatest in his 
kingdom, but the most menial servant of 
his people; forever throwing off responsi- 
bility, and forever urging his subjects not 
to idolize him, but Jehovih! Forever 
showing them that their God is nothing 
more than themselves; that they must 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-AEMIJ 



311 



stand alone, and become, not slaves to 
their God, but independent beings full of 
manliness, having faith in the Great Spirit 
only. By which the God bindeth not him- 
self nor his people; giving full sway to the 
love of liberty in every soul, but in tender- 
ness and love that harmonize with Jeho- 
vih's proceedings. 

Now when thou earnest back to me after 
I was delivered out of hell, and my king- 
doms raised to Vara-pishanaha, thou didst 
profess to understand these things, and of 
a truth, to love this philosophy. And thou 
didst pray fervently to Jehovih, repenting 
of thy former ways, taking part in the 
rites and ceremonies. Then I opened by 
heart to thee. My much love for thee, as 
when I first knew thee, returned upon me a 
thousand fold. In joy and in tears I fell 
upon thee, and I praised Jehovih that He 
had sent me so sweet a love. In each oth- 
er's arms we repented and we swore our 
mutual love forever, then we saw the way 
of Jehovih clear, and He made us strong 
and wise, full of rejoicing. 

And we fell to, hand in hand, laboring 
with drujas, dark and most foul, teaching 
them day and night, forever repeating to 
their stupid minds. And when we were 
both well nigh exhausted thousands of 
times, and we withdrew for a short time, 
we rested in each other's arms! Then 
we reasoned and philosophised on the 
plans and glories of Jehovih's works; 
hopefully watching signs of prog- 
ress in our wards. O the glory of those 
days! O the richness of thy wisdom and 
love to me in those days of darkness! For 
a hundred years we toiled thus, and I was 
blessed, and my people were blessed by 
thee, thou star of our love. Then we raised 
them up, my wards, four thousand millions, 
were lifted a small way up out of darkness, 
and our far-off Goddess, Atcheni, needed 
one who was great, like unto thee, to travel 
in other regions. And I parted with thee. 
My soul was as if divided in twain. For 
hundreds of years thou traveledst and be- 
came rich in knowledge; but not to return 
to me, to my bursting heart! What more 
can I say? Thou art in thy place, and I 
am in mine; but Jehovih is with Wisdom, 
Love, Truth and Fidelity, for these are 
His abiding places. 



CHAPTER XXVII. 

De'yus replied not to Ahura, God of 
Vara-pishanaha, but sent the messenger 
away without a word. And satan came 
again to De'yus, saying: Send word to 
thy Gods to be firm, for this day hath 
Ahura and the God of Craoshivi beset 
them to return to Jehovih's worship. 

De'yus feared nevertheless, so he pon- 
dered deeply as to what was the best 
thing he could do. Satan said: O Lord 
God, this is the best thing thou canst 
do: For all the Divan laws destroyed, 
make thou De'yus laws instead. Why shalt 
thou follow in the footsteps of the ancients? 

The Lord God said: Yea, yea! I will 
not be bound by the laws of the ancients, 
but I will have laws of mine own, and they 
shall be called the Laws of the Lord God. 

Satan said: These, then, shall be thy 
words, O Lord God, which shall be the 
laws of De'yus, to wit: 

I, the Lord God, have made self-preser- 
vation the first law. 

Thou shalt love the Lord thy God with 
all thy soul, thy heart and mind. Him only 
shalt thou worship now, henecforth and 
forever. 

Thou shalt not worship Jehovih; He is 
void; He is nothing. Nor shalt thou wor- 
ship any idol of anything, on the earth or 
in the heavens of the earth. Whoever wor- 
shippeth anything save me, the Lord God, 
shall be put to death. 

Behold, I am a God of justice and 
truth; I am a God of anger; vengeance is 
mine. I have a gate at the hill of Hored; 
my guardians are cherubims and seraphims, 
with flaming swords. Whosoever raiseth 
his arm against me shall be destroyed. 

Whosoever putteth the mark of the cir- 
cumcision on a male child shall be put to 
death. 

Neither shall any man do evil for evil's 
sake; nor by violence oppress any man, 
woman or child. 

Whoever exalteth me on earth, him 
will I exalt in heaven. Whoever over- 
throweth other Gods, save the Lord God, 
who is the De'yus of heaven and earth, him 
will I exalt in heaven. 

Now it came to pass that these decrees 
of the false God were established on the 
earth. And the name of De'yus became 



312 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ABMIJ 



paramount to all other Gods in Vind'yu 
and eastern Par'si'e; and the name Te-in, 
in JafFeth, and the name Lord God, in Ar- 
abinya. And these peoples had now a new 
sacred book given to them. And yet all 
of these names represented one angel only, 
Anuhasaj, a one-time mortal. 

Prior to this the Faithists on earth were 
taught non-resistance; to ignore leadership; 
to return good for evil, and to dwell to- 
gether as brethren. But now, because of 
the decrees of Anuhasaj, alias De'yus, 
Faithists were led astray, becoming war- 
riors, and aspiring to become kings and 
rulers. Nevertheless, many of them still 
called themselves by names signifying 
Faithists, but changing their belief from the 
Great Spirit to a God in shape and figure 
of a man, with attributes like a mortal. 
And mortals in these countries made im- 
ages of cherubims and seraphims, having 
flaming swords; and images of Anubi hold- 
ing a pair of scales. 

In addition to these earthly decrees, An- 
uhasaj, alias the Lord God, made heavenly 
decrees betwixt his own kingdom and the 
kingdoms of his Gods. The chief decrees 
were: That, .for the first one hundred 
years, all angels borne up out of the earth 
shall fall into their respective divisions, 
and shall belong as subjects to my Gods, 
to be appropriated by them in their own 
way. That after the hundredth year, my 
Gods shall deliver to me one-tenth of their 
subjects of the highest grades. 

De'yus made two hundred laws in ref- 
erence to the kingdoms of his Gods, as to 
their boundaries and ornamentation, pro- 
viding great pageantry and countless num- 
bers of heralds, staff-bearers, musicians, 
and players of oratory, besides innumera- 
ble servants and decorators, so that the pa- 
geantry might be in great splendor. When 
he had completed these forms and system 
of government, he sent an invitation to 
his Gods to again feast with him, that they 
might ratify his laws and receive them. 
And the laws of De'yus were ratified and 
accepted by the Gods; and they went away 
rejoicing, returning to their respective 
kingdoms, where they fell to work at once 
to provide themselves in their glory. 

CHAPTER XXVIIL 

Thus was established the Confederacy of 
Selfs; that is, the false Lord God, and his 



false Gods, were as many kingdoms united 
into one; yet every God was secretly 
sworn unto himself, for his own glory. 
From the time of the beginning of the re- 
volt until it was completed as a confederacy 
was sixty and four days, and the number of 
inhabitants in these heavens at that time 
was eight thousand million, men, women 
and children. And they were well ordered, 
in nurseries, and hospitals, and schools, 
and colleges, and factories, and in building 
ships, and in surveying and in road-mak- 
ing, and all such other occupations as be- 
long to the lower heavens. Four thousand 
million of these were presently sent to 
Hored, to De'yus. 

De'yus at once set about the work laid 
out, and issued a decree commanding the 
destruction of all otevans and other vessels 
plying to the upper plateau, Craoshivi; and 
commanding the seizing and destroying of 
fire-ships or other vessels that might come 
from the upper regions down to the lower. 
De'yus said: My people shall not ascend 
to other heavens. I have made the earth 
and this heaven sufficient unto all happi- 
ness and glory. Whosoever buildeth a 
vessel, saying: I will ascend; or if he say 
not, but my judges discover him, he shall 
be cast into the hadan region, prepared for 
him. And if a man or a woman preach in 
my heavens, and say: Behold, there is a 
higher heaven, that person shall be cast 
into hell, as my son judgeth. 

And I, De'yus, command the locking 
up of all the books in the libraries of my 
heavens that in any way teach of Jehovih 
or Ormazd, or of heavenly kingdoms above 
mine or greater. For I, the Lord God, 
will have but one kingdom, and I will draw 
all people into it to abide with me forever. 
And my Gods, and my marshals, and gen- 
erals and captains, shall take their hosts 
and go around about the regions of Hored, 
and make a clean roadway, and cut off all 
connection with the outer kingdoms. And 
they shall place in the roadway around my 
heavens a standing army, sufficient to guard 
my kingdom and my Gods' kingdoms for- 
ever. And no man-angel, nor woman-an- 
gel, shall pass outward beyond my roadway 
forever. 

These things were carried out, save as 
to the libraries. But there were destroyed 
four thousand otevans and other ascend- 
ing ships; and of the places for manufac- 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



313 



turing ships for the outer heavens there 
were destroyed more than seven hundred. 
And there were thus thrown out of employ- 
ment seven hundred million, men and wo- 
men! And many of these were compelled 
to go to Hored, where they were assorted 
as to grade, and put to work, beautifying 
the capital and Council house and palace 
of the Lord God, the false. Others were 
impressed into the standing army, being 
allotted seasons and years. 

After the outward extreme of hada was 
thus secured in every way, De'yus turned 
to the interior. He said: Now will I hide 
such text-books in my heavenly places, 
as relate to higher kingdoms and to Jeho- 
vih; for from this time forth He is my 
enemy and I am His. Upon my own self 
have I sworn it; the name of Jehovih and 
of Ormazd shall be destroyed in heaven 
and earth; and my name, De'yus, even the 
Lord God, shall stand above all else. 

For sixty days, the armies of destruc- 
tion traversed the lowest heavens, high 
and low, far and near; and they hid away 
many of the records, and books, and maps, 
relating to the higher atmospherea and to 
the etherean worlds beyond; and in sixty 
days the work of destruction was complete 
in these heavens, and there was nothing 
left within sight to prove or to teach the 
higher heavens, or of Jehovih, or Or- 
mazd. 

The Lord God, the false, said: Let my 
name and my place, even Hored, be re- 
placed instead of those destroyed, for I 
will make the name De'yus to rule in one- 
half of the world, and the name Lord God 
to rule in the other half. The inhabitants 
of heaven and earth shall know where to 
find me, and shall behold my person, and 
witness the strength of my hand. Yea, 
they shall know my pleasure and ny dis- 
pleasure, and serve me in fear and trem- 
bling. 

And the books in the schools and col- 
leges of these heavens were thus made to 
rate De'yus, and the Lord God as the All 
Highest, Most Sacred, Most Holy. When 
these things were established thus far, De'- 
yus gave a great feast, and brought into 
his companionship all the valorous fight- 
ers and destroyers that had proved them- 
selves great in fulfilling his command- 
ments. In the meantime, the laborers and 



officers in charge had extended and beau- 
tified the palace and capital of the Lord 
God in Hored beyond anything ever seen 
in these heavens. So that at the time of 
this feast, the place was already one of 
magnificence and glory. And the order, 
and temper, and discipline of the officers, 
and servants, more than one million, who 
had charge of preparing and conducting 
the feast, were so great that the assembled 
Gods and great generals, and governors, 
and marshals, and captains, for a long 
while, did nothing but ejaculate applause 
and astonishment. 

Besides these, De'yus had provided re- 
ceiving hosts, fifty thousand, and of es'- 
enaurs and trumpeters half a million, and 
proclaiming heralds one hundred thousand; 
and the latter, when conducting the dis- 
tinguished visitors into the presence of 
De'yus, proclaimed them, amidst the ap- 
plause of the Council, such honor surpass- 
ing anything that any of them had ever 
witnessed. 

The substance of the feast, being above 
grade twenty, which was above the animal 
region, was, consequently, of vegetable 
and fruit es'pa from the earth, previously 
brought by trained shippers and workers, 
for this especial occasion. But there was 
no es'pa of flesh or fish present on the ta- 
bles; but an abundance of the es'pa of 
wine, and this was called su-be. 

The walls of the chamber of the feast 
were ornamented with sprays of colored 
fire, and from the floor of the chamber 
there rose upward innumerable fountains 
of perfume, which were also es'pa brought 
up from the earth, and forced up in the 
fountains by more than one million ser- 
vants, impressed into service from the re- 
gions of shippers, which had been destroy- 
ed previously. 

At the feast, with the Lord God and his 
Gods, there were in all one thousand, two 
hundred guests; and the feast lasted one 
whole day, and the Gods and guests ate 
and drank to their hearts' content, and 
there were not a few who felt the intoxica- 
tion of the rich su-be. When the feast 
was ended, De'yus, through his marshals, 
signified that he would speak before them; 
and when quiet was restored, he said: 

With greater joy hath any one in a mat- 
ter than to make others happy! Because 



314 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



ye served me, doing my commandments, 
behold, I have served you. My feast hath 
been your feast; my substance have I given 
unto you, that ye may rejoice in the glory 
I have received from your hands. Yet 
think not that the Lord, your God, so end- 
eth this proceeding: I will not so end it. 
I have commanded you here that I may 
honor those that deserve honor from me, 
your God. My Gods have also great ex- 
altation in the labor ye have done in my 
heavens, for my heavens are their hea- 
vens, and yours also. Because ye have 
destroyed the ascension, the most worth- 
less and foolish of things, and cleared away 
the rubbish of my heavens, ye have also 
prepared a place for endless glory for 
yourselves. For which reason, and in jus- 
tice to you, I have appointed this time to 
promote you all, according to your great 
achievements. Nor shall ye fall back on 
my promotion, resting in ease; for I have 
a greater labor for you, as well as greater 
honor and glory. 

Behold, I have commanded the earth 
and her dominions; and ye, my Gods, shall 
subjugate her to my name and power. 
And ye that have proved yourselves most 
valiant in heaven shall be their chosen offi- 
cers to go down to the earth in my name, 
with millions of my heavenly soldiers, to 
plan and fix the way of mortals unto my 
hand. As ye have cast out the names of 
Jehovih and Ormazd in heaven, even so 
shall ye cast them out on the earth. 

Remember ye, I am a God of anger; I 
have declared was against all ungodliness 
on the earth. Whoever worshippeth the 
Great Spirit under the name Jehovih, or 
Ormazd, shall be put to death, both men 
and women. Only little children shall ye 
spare, and of them shall ye make slaves 
and eunuchs and whatsoever else that shall 
profit my kingdoms. Whether they have 
an idol of stone, or of wood, or of gold, or 
of copper, they shall be destroyed. Neither 
shall it save them to make an idol of the 
Unseen; for such is even more offensive 
in my sight than the others. Nor will I 
leave alive one Faithist on the face of the 
earth. To accomplish which, my Gods 
shall select ye who are of my feast; accord- 
ing to their rank shall they choose; and 
when ye are thus divided and selected, ye 
shall receive badges from my hand, and re- 



pair with my Gods to the places and ser- 
vice they desire. And when ye are come 
down to the earth, ye shall possess your- 
selves of the oracles and places of worship, 
driving hence all other angels, and Gods, 
and Lords, and familiars. And when mor- 
tals come to consult the spirits ye shall 
answer them in your own way in order to 
carry out my commandments. 

And when ye find prophets and seers, 
who accomplish by the Unseen, who have 
with them spirits belonging to the king- 
dom of Craoshivi, ye shall drive away such 
spirits and obsess the prophet or seer in 
your own way. But if ye cannot drive 
hence the Ormazdian angel, then shall ye 
go to the depths of hell in hada and bring 
a thousand spirits of darkness, who are 
foul and well skilled in torment, and ye 
shall cast them upon that prophet until he 
is mad. But if it so happen that the proph- 
et or seer be so protected that spirits of 
darkness cannot reach him, then shall ye 
send evil spirits in advance of him to the 
place he frequenteth, and they shall inoc- 
ulate the place with virus that shall poison 
him to death. But if a prophet of Jehovih 
repent and renounce the Great Spirit, and 
accept De'yus, or the Lord God, then shall 
ye drive all evil away from him, and put a 
guard around about him, for he shall be 
my subject in time to come. 

And whether ye reach a king of the 
earth by means of the oracles, or through 
prophets and seers, or by obsession, it mat- 
tereth not; but ye shall come to him by 
some means, either when he lieth asleep or 
is awake, and ye shall inspire him with the 
doctrines and the love of the Lord your 
God. And he shall rise up in great war, 
and pursue all people who do not profess 
De'yiis, or the Lord your God; for he shall 
be as an instrument in your hands to do my 
will. 

When De'yus ceased speaking, the Gods 
immediately made their selections, and the 
generals and captains were thus allotted 
to new places. And now the attendants 
carried away the tables of the feast, and 
the Gods, each with his captains and gen- 
erals, faced toward De'yus, and formed 
twelve rows; whereupon De'yus conferred 
badges, as previously promised. De'yus 
then departed to the Council chamber, and 
took his seat on the throne. The guests, 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



315 



and Gods, and Councilors, entered the 
south gate, and went and stood in the 
midst of the floor of the chamber; where- 
upon the Lord God saluted them, Warriors 
of God, and they answered in the Sign of 
Taurus, signifying, to enforce righteous- 
ness, for the image of a bull was one of 
the signs above the throne. 

These, then, are the names of the Gods 
and Goddesses, with their generals and 
captains, that were empowered in heaven 
to go down to the earth to subjugate it 
unto the Lord God, the false: 

The Gods and Goddesses were; Anubi; 
Hikas, now called Te-in; Wotchissij, now 
called Sudga; Che-le-mung, now called 
Osiris; Baal, Ashtaroth, Fo-ebe, Hes-loo, 
He-loo, Orion, Hebe and Valish. 

Their generals were: Hoin, Oo-da, Jah, 
Knowteth, June, Pluton-ya, Loo-Chaing, 
Wah-ka, Posee-ya-don, Dosh-to, Eurga- 
roth, Neuf, Apollo-ya, Suts, Karusa, My- 
ion, Hefa-yis-tie, Petoris, Ban, Ho-jou-ya, 
Mung-jo, Ura-na, Oke-ya-nos, Egupt, Hi- 
ram, T'cro-no, Ares, Yube, Feh-tus, Don, 
Dan, Ali-jah, Sol, Sa-mern, Thu-wowtch, 
Hua-ya, Afro-dite, Han, Weel, Haing-le, 
Wang-le, Ar-ti-mis, Ga-song-ya, Lowthar, 
Pu, Tochin-woh-to-gow, Ben, Aaron, Nair- 
wiche, Gai-ya, Te-sin, Argo, Hadar, Atstsil, 
E-shong, Daridat, Udan, Nadar, Bog-wi, 
She-ug-ga, Brihat, Zeman, Asrig, Oyeb, 
Chan-lwang, Sishi, Jegat, At-ye-na and 
Dyu. 

Their captains were: Penbu, Josh, Yam- 
yam, Holee-tsu, Yoth, Gamba, Said, Drat- 
ta, Yupe-set, Wag, Mar, Luth, Mak-ka, 
Chutz, Hi-rack-to, Vazenno, Hasuck, 
Truth, Maidyar, Pathemaydn, Kop, Cpen- 
ta-mainyas, Try-sti-ya, Peter, Houab, Van- 
aiti, Craosha, Visper, Seam, Plow-ya, Yact- 
ta-roth, Abua, Zoatha, Kacan-cat, Hovain, 
Myazd-Loo, Haur, Abel, Openista, Isaah, 
Potonas, Kiro, Wishka-dore, Urvash, Ash- 
esnoga, Cavo, Kalamala-hoodon, Lutz- 
rom, Wab, Daeri, Kus, Tsoo-man-go and 
Le-W T iang. 

Besides these, there were one thousand 
officers of lower rank; and now, when they 
were sealed as to rank, place and allot- 
ment, they withdrew; and De'yus gave a 
day of recreation that the Gods with their 
officers might make the selections from the 
multitude, for their private soldiers. And 
in one day's time the armies were made up, 



three thousand million angels, and they 
departed down to the earth to destroy the 
Faithists and the names Jehovih and Or- 
mazd, and establish De'yus, otherwise 
the Lord God, the false. 

CHAPTER XXIX. 

God, in Craoshivi, bewailed heaven and 
earth. He said: Great Jehovih, how I 
have failed in Thy kingdom! Behold, Thou 
gavest into my keeping Earth and her 
heavens, and they have gone astray! 

Jehovih said: Behold the plan of My 
government; which is, to come against 
nothing in heaven or earth; to seize noth- 
ing by the head and turn it round by vio- 
lence to go the other way. Though I am 
the power that created them, and am the 
Ever Present that moveth them along, I 
gave to them to be Gods, with liberty to 
find their own direction. 

I created many trees in My garden, the 
greatest of which is the tree of happiness. 
And I called out unto all the living to come 
and dwell in the shade of that tree, and 
partake of its fruits and its perfumes. But 
they run after prickers and they scourge 
themselves; and then, alas, they fall to 
cursing Me, and accusing Me of shortness 
in My government. I confined them in 
their mother's womb for a season, showing 
them there is a time for all things. But 
they run forward hurriedly, desiring speedy 
happiness and wisdom, without halting to 
observe My glories by the road-side. 

I said unto them: Even as I have given 
liberty unto all My people, so shall ye not 
impress into your service your brothers 
and sisters. But the self-assuming Gods 
make slaves of their fellows; they build 
roads round about, and station armies of 
soldiers to prevent My newborn from com- 
ing to My most glorious kingdoms. They 
go down to the earth and inspire kings and 
queens, and rich men, to do the same 
things. And they portion out to their ser- 
vants, saying to them: Serve ye me, and 
I will do for you. They little think that 
their servants will become as thorns, and 
stones, and chains, and spears against them 
in the far future. They build up a justice 
of their own, saying: As much as my ser- 
vants labor for me, so will I render unto 
them. But I have said unto them that no 



316 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



man shall serve another but for love, which 
shall be his only recompense. 

The king and the queen of the earth, 
and the rich man, shut their own eyes 
against Me, thinking by that means I can- 
not see them; they flatter themselves that 
in heaven they will give the slip to their 
servants. But I sowed a seed of bondage 
in My garden, and I said: Whosoever 
bindeth another, shall himself be bound. 
And behold, when they are risen in hea- 
ven, their servants and their soldiers come 
upon chem; their memory is as a troubled 
dream that will not away from them. Nev- 
ertheless, with these great examples before 
them, still there are angels in hada that 
have not profited therein. For they say 
unto themselves: I will build a great king- 
dom in heaven; I will become the might- 
iest of Gods; millions of angels shall serve 
me; I will shut out the Great Spirit and 
His far-off heavens; I will wall my place 
around with an army of soldiers, and with 
fire and water. 

As a libertine stealeth an unsuspicious 
damsel to abuse her; and, in time, she wak- 
eth up to the matter but to curse him, so 
do the false Gods steal upon the inhabit- 
ants of My places and carry them into 
bondage. But the light of My understand- 
ing dwelleth in the souls of My little ones; 
it waiteth for the spring sun; and it will 
spring up and grow into a mighty tree to 
accuse these Gods. 

God inquired concerning warfare? Je- 
hovih said: I answer all things by good. 
To the good at heart, I give good thoughts, 
desires and holy observations. To the per- 
verse of heart I hold up My glories and the 
beneficence of virtue and peaceful under- 
standing. To them that practice charity 
and good works unto others, laboring not 
for self, I give the highest delight. Though 
they be pricked in the flesh with poverty 
and wicked persecutions, yet their souls are 
as the waters of a smooth-running river. 
Amongst them that practice evil, and de- 
struction, and war, I send emissaries of 
benevolence and healing, who have plente- 
ous words of pity. These are My arrows, 
and spears, and war-clubs, O God: Pity, 
gentle words, and the example of tender- 
ness. Soon or late, these shall triumph 
over all things in heaven and earth. 



Behold, these wars in hada and on the 
earth will continue more than a thousand 
years. And the inhabitants will go down in 
darkness, even to the lowest darkness. For 
which reason, thou and thy successors 
shall provide not hastily, as if the matter 
were to change with the wind. But thou 
shalt organize a new army of deliverers for 
My Faithists, and it shall have two 
branches, one for the earth and one for 
hada. And the business of thy army shall 
be to rescue My people from them that 
seek to destroy them. And as to the spir- 
its of the dead who were Faithists on the 
earth, provide thou means of transporta- 
tion and bring them to thy new kingdom, 
which thou shalt call At-ce-wan, where 
thou shalt provide a sub-God, and officers, 
and attendants, hundreds of millions. And 
in At-ce-waq, thou shalt provide the sub- 
God all such places and nurseries, hospi- 
tals, factories, schools, colleges and such 
other houses and places of instructions re- 
quired, in the kingdoms of My Lords in 
hada. 

And when thou hast this matter in good 
working order, thou shalt speak before thy 
Holy Council"; in My name shalt thou say 
to them: Two hundred thousand hath Je- 
hovih called; by Him am I commanded to 
find them; and they shall be wise and 
strong and without fear. For they shall 
be angel-preachers in Jehovih's name to go 
down to Hored, the place of De'yiis, the 
Lord God the false, and to the kingdoms 
of his Gods; and their labor shall be to 
preach and proclaim the Father and His 
glories in the etherean worlds. And my 
preachers shall not say one word against 
the Lord God nor his Gods; but rather the 
other way; by majesty of Jehovih's love, 
be loving towards them and their officers 
and subjects. For by this means shall thy 
preachers have peaceful dwellings in these 
warring kingdoms; and thus their voices 
shall have great weight. For the greatest 
wisdom of a great diplomatist is not to be 
too opposite or too vehement, but concil- 
iating. 

And thy preachers shall travel constant- 
ly in the lowest kingdoms, teaching and 
explaining My boundless worlds, sowing 
the seed of aspiration with the wise and 
with the ignorant, and especially with the 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



317 



enslaved. And to as many as become con- 
verted, and desire to ascend to Craoshivi, 
thou shalt say: Go ye to the border of your 
kingdom, whither the Father's laborers 
have a ship to take ye to His kingdom. 
But thy preachers shall not go with them 
to excite suspicion or hate, but continue on 
preaching and inciting the slaves to ascend 
to higher and holier heavens. 

Then God, of Craoshivi, fell to work to 
carry out the commandments of Jehovih. 
And his Council labored with him. At-ce- 
wan was established and Yotse-hagah was 
n c-de the sub-God, with a Holy Council of 
one hundred thousand angels, with a thou- 
sand attendants, with fifty thousand mes- 
sengers. He was provided with a capital, 
and throne, and with ship-makers and 
builders of mansions, one million angels. 
After that God and the Council of Crao- 
shivi organized all the armies as command- 
ed by Jehovih. And there were in these 
armies, all told, seventeen hundred million 
two hundred and eight thousand five hun- 
dred and sixty, all of whom were above 
grade fifty, and some as high as ninety. 

And it so turned out that these organ- 
izations were completed and in working or- 
der two days prior to De'yus and his 
hosts beginning their war on the earth. 
But the Faithist angels were distributed 
mostly in hada and the regions above. So 
that whilst De'yus' hosts of three thousand 
million were gone down to the earth, there 
were of Faithist angels for the same place 
but four hundred thousand, save the ashars 
who were in regular service. 

CHAPTER XXX. 

De'yus was no slow hand; not a dull 
God. He had two thousand seven hundred 
years' experience, and his soul quick and 
strong in mighty works. He rushed not in 
without first measuring the way, most de- 
liberately and in great wisdom. At first he 
felt his way along, to humor the populace, 
doing as if by proxy Jehovih's commands, 
till safely fell into his dominion and power 
his flattered Gods and officers, then boldly 
launching forth: I, the Lord God, com- 
mand? The very audaciousness of which 
unbalanced his friends' judgment, and made 
them believe for a fact that De'yus was the 
foremost and greatest, mighty God. To do 
whose will, and reverently applaud his 



name, was the surest road to home laurels. 
To win great majesty to himself, and 
after having sworn to havoc the whole 
earth in order to establish the name De'- 
yus, and Lord God, he called to his side 
his five chief friends: the Gods, Hikas. 
falsely named Te-in; Wotchissij, falsely 
named Sudga; Che-le-mung, falsely named 
Osiris; Baal, and Ashtaroth. And thus in 
dignity De'yus spake to them: 

It is well, my Gods, ye stand about and 
see the battles; but let your generals and 
high captains go forth and mingle in the 
bloody work. In your kingdoms be con- 
stantly upraising your magnificence, and in 
times sallying forth to the earth valiantly, 
as when kings and queens and prophets are 
to win a victory, or be plunged into mortal 
death, to show how your august presence 
turned the tide of battle. Then hie ye back 
in dignity to your thrones, leaving your 
officers and inspiring hosts to go on in the 
game of mortal tragedy. 

Then spake Osiris, the false, saying: 
To exalt thy name, O De'yus', thou Lord 
God; and to persuade mortals that thou, of 
all created beings can stand in Hored, and 
by thy will control the victory to whomso- 
ever applaudeth thee and praiseth thy 
name, be thou to me the bond of my sol- 
emn oath, so will I lose or win battles 
on the earth accordingly as they shall 
honor thee and despise the Great Spirit, 
or any other God or Lord. 

Then Te-in, the false, said: To 
keep mortals in constant war for a thou- 
sand years; to teach them that battles are 
won or lost according to the loudest call 
and praise to thee, O De'yus, under thy 
thigh will I be as an oath renewed from 
everlasting to everlasting. 

Sudga, the false, said: By all my parts, 
to shape the arms and legs of the unborn 
in comeliness, shall my legions drum into 
the ears of enciente women a thousand 
years, swearing them to thy name, O De'- 
yus; or, if refusing, to curse with crooked- 
ness all their progeny. And when these 
mothers sleep, my legions shall find their 
souls in their dreams, and give them de- 
light or torment, accordingly as they, when 
awake, applaud thee, my most mighty 
Lord God. 

Baal said: To overturn the oracles of 
Jehovih, and to make the prophets and 



318 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



seers receive and announce thy name, O 
De'yus, thou Lord God of heaven and 
earth, have I already sworn more than ten 
thousand oaths. 

Ashtaroth said: The work of my legions 
shall be to deal death to thy enemies, O 
De'yus. To them that raise the name Je- 
hovih, or Ormazd, or Great Spirit, my le- 
gions shall carry foul smells into their 
noses whilst they sleep. And for thy ene- 
mies, who may win a battle against thy 
people, my legions shall carry inoculation 
from the rotten dead; in the air shall they 
carry the virus to the breath of them that 
will not bow down to the name, Lord God! 

De'yus answered them, saying: So 
spoken, so shall these things be; I, the 
Lord your God, command. Send forth 
your generals and high captains thus de- 
creed; to each and every one sufficient 
armies to carry out these, our high re- 
solves. Into three great armies shall my 
legions be divided for the earth battles: 
one to Jaffeth, one to Vind'yu, and one to 
Arabin'ya and the regions lying west and 
north. Of the latter, thou, Osiris, shalt have 
chief command; and thou, Baal, and thou, 
Ashtaroth, ye twain, so linked in love and 
one purpose, shall be the earth managers 
to Osiris' will. For your efficient service, 
behold, I have given you these high-raised 
generals and captains: Jah, Pluton-yah, 
Apollo-ya, Petoris, Hi-ram, T'cro-no, 
Egupt, Ares, Yube, Ali-jah, Afro-dite, Ar- 
ti-mis, Ben, Aa-ron, Argo, Atstsil, Nadar 
and Oyeb, besides Peter, Yact-ta-roth, 
Haur, Abel, Said, Josh and Wab, who shall 
be the conquering spirits to play on both 
sides in battles, urging stubborn mortals on 
to religious feud till both sides fall in death, 
or till one, to me and my Gods, boweth 
down in fear and reverence. And they shall 
sing their names in mortals ears day and 
night, and teach them to live in praise of 
the Lord, your God, the De'yus of heaven 
and earth, and to be most daring in the 
overthrow of Jehovih, most hated of Gods. 

To thee, Te-in, another third of my le- 
gions is committed, to deal with the land 
of giants, Jaffeth, and urge them on in the 
same way, to greatness or to death, doing 
honor and reverence to me and my king- 
doms. High raised are thy generals: Wah- 
ka, Ho-jou-ya, Oke-ya-nos, Thu-wowtch, 
Haing-le, Tochin-woh-to-gow, and Eurga- 



roth, besides Yam-yam, Hi-rack-to and 
Kancan-cat, Isaah, Lutz-rom and Le- 
Wiang, and others of high grade and 
power. 

And to thee, O Sudga, in like manner 
have I given another third of my legions to 
play battles with mortals for a thousand 
years. Like Osiris and Te-in, to set mor- 
tals up in war, and move them one way 
and then another, and thus plunge them 
into each other's bloody arms and death. 
That they may learn to know of a truth 
that they are but machines and playthings 
in the hands of angels and Gods; that they 
are worked like clay in a potter's hand, 
till they cry out: Enough! I will bow my 
head to God, who is Lord over all, great 
De'yus. Yea, more, I will fight for him 
and drink even my brother's blood, if De'- 
yus but prosper me and mine in slaying 
Faithists, fool-worshippers of Ormazd, the 
Unseen and Scattered Wind. To him, in 
likeness of a man, with head and legs, and 
arms in boundary and size of a man, sitting 
on a throne in Hored; to him, the great 
Lord God, will I ever bow in reverence. 
And thou, O Sudga, shalt play war in 
Vind'yu, with the most numerous, highest 
learned people of the earth. For which 
purpose thou shalt have these, my high- 
raised generals and captains: Asij, Gaeya, 
Naiswichi, Samen, Yube, Sol, Mung-jo, 
Don, Hefa-yis-tie, Lowtha, Daridrat, 
Udan, Brihat, Bogir, Eshong, Weel, Van- 
aiti, Plowya, Vazista, Kiro, Cpenista, Vis- 
per, Cpenta-mainyas and Urvasta, and 
many others, most determined to rescue 
the earth from the dominion of far-off 
Gods. 

De'yus continued: Go forth, ye Gods. 
And as fast as mortals fall in battle, gather 
the spirits of the dead into groups, not suf- 
fering them for pity's sake to lie in chaos, 
but bring them to your kingdoms in easy 
riding ships. And when thus housed, apply 
your physicians and nurses diligently, to re- 
store them to their senses and new condi- 
tion; and when they wake up in heaven, 
beholding the great glory of your thrones 
and kingdoms, initiate them by solemn rites 
and ceremonies to sworn servitude to your- 
selves and to me, your Lord God, to in- 
herit such bounteous kingdoms. And ye 
shall thus despoil those of earth to make 
them know my power and yours, so shall 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



319 



ye pursue those newly arrived in heaven to 
make them swear solemnly against Jeho- 
vih, the Great Spirit; the Ormazd, and 
against all others Gods, but if they stub- 
bornly refuse, though in heaven, even as 
they did on earth, take them before my 
son, Anubi, who shall further examine 
them; and if they still refuse, Anubi with 
his strong guard, and brands of fire, shall 
send them down in hell. 

I, the Lord God, have spoken; my com- 
mandments are gone forth in heaven and 
earth; whosoever praiseth and glorifieth 
me, with everlasting service for the exalt- 
ation and glory of my kingdoms, shall en- 
ter into everlasting happiness; but whoso- 
ever will not bow down to me shall be 
cast into everlasting torments. 

CHAPTER XXXI. 

Now sallied forth the captains gener- 
als, and well-disciplined hosts of hada, the 
angels of De'yus, bent on independence to 
the earth and heaven from all other rulers 
save the Lord God, and to establish him 
forever. Foremost of the three mighty di- 
visions was Osiris' army, of more than a 
thousand million angels, going boldly forth 
to cover the great lands of the earth, Ara- 
bin'ya, Par'si'e, and Heleste. 

In the front, dashing madly on, was 
Baal, and next him, his assistant Goddess, 
Ashtaroth, followed by their first attend- 
ants and high exalted officers. Some of 
whom displayed great maps of mortal cit- 
ies and cultured lands, where the peaceful 
worshippers of Jehovih dwelt, hundreds of 
thousands. And the lists of altars and 
temples to the Great Spirit, where the 
righteous came daily and deposited their 
earnings and products as sacrifices for 
benefit of the weak and helpless. And the 
wide fields, where toilers brought out of 
the earth, religiously, wheat, and flax, 
and cotton, and barley, as gifts from the 
Great Spirit. And the canals, filled with 
boats, carrying produce, and fruit, and 
cloth, in interchange, one district with an- 
other. And the mounds and tree-temples 
of the I'hins, the sacred people, small, 
white and yellow; the forefathers and fore- 
mothers of the great I'huan race, the half- 
breeds, betwixt the brown burrowers in the 
earth and the I'hins. Over these maps, 
and charts, and lists, the generals and cap- 



tains discoursed as they descended to the 
rolling earth; most learnedly laying plans 
to overturn Jehovih's method, and build 
up De'yus, the God of Hored. 

Osiris himself, to display such dignity 
as becometh a great God , halted in his 
heavenly place, and now head-quarters of 
the belligerents. And so rested on his 
throne, with his tens of thousands of mes- 
sengers ready to answer his summons and 
bear his will to the remotest parts of his 
mighty army, and to bring him back news 
in return of the nature of the proceedings. 
And betwixt Osiris' and De'yus' thrones 
another long line of messengers extended, 
a thousand angels, high raised and reso- 
lute, suitable to travel in the everchanging 
atmospherean belts of great velocity. 

Beside Baal, on the downward course to 
the earth, but a little behind him, woman- 
like, was Ashtaroth, with her thousand at- 
tendants, all accoutered to show their high 
esteem for their warring Goddess. By the 
oft-changing wave of her hand, her part 
of the army had learned to know her will, 
and most zealously observe her commands. 

And now, on every side, farther than 
the eye could see, the thousand millions 
rushed on, some in boats, some in ships 
and otevans, and others in single groups, 
descending. As one can imagine an earth- 
ly kite sufficient to carry its holder high up 
in the wind, so, reversed, and single-hand- 
ed, hundreds of thousands flew toward the 
earth by ballast flags, the most daring of 
angels. Toward the earth they came as if 
on a frolic, full of jokes and loud boasting, 
sworn and swearing to forever clear the 
earth of Jehovih's worshippers. Many of 
them, long trained in schools and colleges 
and factories, in heaven, only too glad for 
a change of scenes and labor, and all prom- 
ised by their superiors that now they were 
to take their first lessons in becoming Gods 
and Goddesses. Of whom thousands and 
thousands hoped for some daring deed, in 
order to gain sudden promotion. 

To the east and west, and north and 
south, Baal and Ashtaroth spread out their 
armies, wide as the three great lands they 
had sworn to subdue unto the Lord God, 
who, of woman born, was the most pre- 
suming son the earth had yet brought forth. 
And to alight on the earth, to flood the 
temples and altars with so great an abun- 



320 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



dance of spirits as would drive Jehovih's 
ashars into disastrous confusion, and van- 
quish them, was the theme and project. 
To be foremost in so great a work was the 
temptation of promotion, which caused 
them on every side to strive with their ut- 
most speed and power. 

Which Jehovih foresaw, and so spake 
to -God in Craoshivi, warning him; 
whereof due observance of the danger had 
been communicated by messengers to the 
managing angels in the altars and temples 
of worship. And these again, through the 
rab'bahs and the oracles, had spread abroad 
amongst mortals the threatened dangers, 
cautioning them. Thus Jehovih's angels 
fortified themselves, through the faith of 
mortals, and held on, bringing together 
their scanty numbers, knowing well that by 
Jehovih's law they must not resist by arms, 
but only through words and good example, 
high-toned by faith in the Father over all. 

Down, down, down on these, on every 
side came the destroying hosts, the thou- 
sand million; with oaths and loud clamor 
rushing for the altars and temples; flying 
suddenly to the holy arcs; in hundreds of 
thousands of places, shouting: 

Avaunt this arc! Avaunt this altar! 
Avaunt this temple! Ye Jehovihian usurp- 
ers, begone! In the name of the Lord our 
God! We command! 

But alas, for them, every arc, and altar, 
and temple to Jehovih was invincible. 
There stood His angels, so strong in faith, 
unmoved and majestic, that even the as- 
sailing spirits halted, overawed. And as 
they stood a moment, contemplating 
whence came so great majesty, to be in 
such common place, the Jehovihians made 
this reply: 

To none we bow in adoration but Great 
Jehovih! Whose Very Self contributed to 
make us what we are, His servants in do- 
ing good unto others, with all our wisdom 
and strength. In Him we stand to shield 
his helpless ones by virtuous peace and 
love harmonious. Wherefore, then, come 
ye in arrogance, demanding our wards to 
service of your God, born of woman? 

The Osirians said: Fly, O sycophants! 
Ye that bow down in fear and trembling to 
One hollow as the wind, and Personless. 
Too long have earth and heaven been ca- 
joled by far-off foreign Gods, who come 



hither to win subjects for their kingdoms' 
glory, by that pitiful tale of an Ever Pres- 
ent Over All, Whom none have seen nor 
known. Begone! Give us these earthly 
anchorages! To build earth and heaven, 
in unit, to be ruled by Gods whom we 
know and reverence! 

The Jehovihians said: Is this your only 
power? By threats and commands? O 
harmless words, in mockery of truthful 
Gods! No good works nor promises, save 
to exalt the self of earth and hada, and 
glorify your masters, born only equal with 
yourselves. Why not rush in and carry us 
off, ye that are a thousand to one, and by 
your deeds prove the great source whence 
ye draw your power? 

The Osirians said: To give ye a chance 
of liberty, to save ye from the Savior's 
judgment, Anubi, who shall cast ye into 
hell, we hoped to find your willing depart- 
ure in peace. Behold, ye, then, we will 
wall this altar around and shut off the at- 
tendant ashars with mortals, and flood the 
place with drujas, to obsess them to total 
madness. If, then ye love your wards, as 
ye profess, abandon all to us, for the glory 
of De'yus, whose son is Osiris, our com- 
manding God. 

The Jehovihians said: Words! words! 
words! At first no explanation, and only 
your command. Now, forsooth, an argu- 
ment! And presently ye will withdraw, 
deceived in what your commanding Gods 
told you would result. We tell you we will 
not hence, save by command of our su- 
periors, Jehovih's highly raised to prece- 
dence. 

The Osirians said: For which reason, 
behold our Lord God, who was honored in 
the title through Jehovih's hand; whom ye 
should obey according to your oaths. 

The Jehovihians said: Till such time 
the Lord God put aside Jehovih, we were 
his; but when for his self-glory ne denied 
his Creator, his false position freed us from 
our obligations. To obey him now, would 
make us false to Jehovih, and torever weak- 
en us in reaching the Nirvanian kingdoms. 

But now the clamoring angels, Osirians, 
in the background crowded forward men- 
acingly, and the tide rose to the highest 
pitch. The morning sun was dawning in 
the east, a most wonderful assistant to Je- 
hovih's sons in time of battle; and their 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



321 



messengers brought from the fields and 
country plaecs many ashars who had been 
on watch all night with sleeping mortals. 
The Osirians saw them coming; knew the 
turn, one way or another, was at hand! 
But by the audacity of the Jehovihians, 
one to a thousand, were kept looking on 
in wonder till the sun's rays pierced their 
weapons and melted them in their hands. 
First one and then another of the Osir- 
ians, then tens and hundreds and thou- 
sands, turned away or looked about, dis- 
comfited, like a host of rioters attempting 
to assault a few well-trained soldiers, and, 
becoming affrighted, turn and flee harm- 
lessly. So Jehovih's sons and daughters 
won the victory in the first assault, save in 
rare instances, one in a hundred, where the 
Osirians triumphed and got possession. 

CHAPTER XXXII. 

And over all the lands, east and west 
and north and south, of Arabin'ya and 
Par'si'e, and Heleste, stood the discomfit- 
ed Osirian angels, in groups, tens of thou- 
sands, unseen by mortals, and considering 
how best to proceed to overthrow Jehovih 
and His worshippers. Meantime, messen- 
gers and map-makers bore the disastrous 
news to Osiris, who in turn sent word on 
up to De'yiis, the self-Lord God, who now, 
through Osiris, his most favorite God of 
power, sent these commands: 

When night is on and mortals sleep, my 
hosts shall fall upon the ashars, the guard- 
ian angels, and drive them hence, obsess- 
ing every man, and woman and child, in 
these great divisions of the earth. What 
care I for the altars and temples and ora- 
cles and arcs? Possess ye the mortals be- 
fore the morrow's morning sun. Hear ye 
the command of De'yus, the Lord your 
God, through his high-raised son, Osiris! 

And the well-stationed messengers plied 
all day long to the near and remote parts 
of the assaulting armies, giving De'yus' 
commands. And ere the sun went down, 
the whole thousand million knew their 
work, and were wheeled into line, to march 
with the falling darkness, and pounce fur- 
iously upon the ashars of Jehovih. 

But the true God, in Craoshivi, had 
been warned by Jehovih's Voice of the 
course of events, and he had sent his mes- 
sengers with all speed down to the earth to 



warn them of the enemy's designs that 
night; which they acomplished none too 
soon, for, already, when they had com- 
pleted their most exhaustive work, the sun 
had dropped below the western horizon. 

So, at the midnight hour, the terrible 
approach began on all sides; and to each 
and every guardian spirit there came ene- 
mies, in tens, and hundreds, and thousands, 
shouting: Begone, thou Jehovihian fooll 
The Lord our God and his son, Osiris, 
command! Away from thy sleeping mor- 
tal ward, or by the voice of God we will 
cast thee, bound, at Anubi's feet, food for 
hell! Begone! 

Each Jehovihian answered; To Great 
Jehovih I am sworn! Though ye bind me 
and cast me into hell, by the Great Spir- 
it's hand I will free myself and come here 
again and teach his sacred name. And re- 
peat forever my peaceful mission to raise 
up this heir of Jehovih! 

Again the threatening adversaries 
stormed, and wondered whilst they storm- 
ed, that one alone stood so boldly in face 
of such great odds and flew not away at 
once. And every ashar laid his hand on 
the sleeping mortal in his charge, for by 
this his power was multiplied a thousand- 
fold, and raising up his other hand, thus 
addressed the All Highest: By Thy Wis- 
dom and Power, O Jehovih, circumscribe 
Thou this, Thy sleeping heir, that whoso- 
ever toucheth the mortal part shall cut him- 
self off from Thy everlasting kingdoms ! 

And, with the words, a circle of light 
fell about the place, bewildering to the as- 
saulters, who, having once halted, opened 
the way to their own cowardice to recoil 
within them, a most valiant warrior against 
unrighteous deeds. Whereupon, a war of 
words and arguments ensued, till again the 
morning sun rose upon the almost harm- 
less assault, and left the Osirians discom- 
fited and ashamed. 

Though not in all places, for in some 
extremes they waited not for words but 
rushed in and laid hands on the mortals, 
gaining power sufficient to hurl clubs, and 
stones, boards, stools and even tables 
about the house, and so roused, wide 
awake, the mortal occupants. Who, seeing 
things tumble about by some unseen pow- 
er, were quickly up and frightened past 
composure. Some hurried on to the rab'- 



322 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



bahs, some to the oracles and temples, to 
inquire about the trouble betwixt the ruling 
Gods. And in these few places, when once 
De'yus' spirit-soldiers gained possession, 
they fastened on in thousands, even quar- 
reling as to who had most honor in the 
hellish work. And yet not one of the ash- 
ars in all the lands was seized or borne 
away. 

And now, in the time of the rising sun, 
the messengers of the Lord God flew hast- 
ily to Osiris' kingdom, where he sat on his 
throne, expecting news of an overwhelm- 
ing victory. And when they told him of 
the most pitiful failure, save in so small a 
degree, Osiris raved and swore: By my 
soul, I swear an everlasting curse, but I 
will fill all the hells in hada with these 
fool-hardy ashars! Yea, even though I 
go down to the earth in person, and with 
Baal and Ashtaroth go from house to 
house throughout the world! 

Osiris again sent word to De'yus, who 
was of vast experience, and not so hasty; a 
wiser God, and better acquainted with the 
tides in mortal energy to serve Jehovih. 
So De'yus sent back word to this effect: 
To rest the soldiers three days, that the 
surveyors might measure the stature of 
mortal faith, and so make the third attack 
more successful. And with these words 
concluded: 

Because of the long spiritual peace 
amongst mortals, there must be many 
grown to intellectual disbelief in an All 
Highest. For groveling down in the earth 
to measure the rocks, and to study the hab- 
its of worms and bugs, for generations, 
their seed hath brought forth many skep- 
tics, believing nothing of spiritual kind, but 
rating high their own judgment. With 
these, for lack of faith in Jehovih, the ash- 
ars are powerless to ward off my soldiers. 
Mark them out in every city and in all the 
country places, and again at midhour of the 
night, fall upon them, crowding^ away Je- 
hovih's ashars. Besides these, find the 
ignorant and superstitious amongst mor- 
tals, who are lazy and of lustful desires, for 
by their habits the ashars have little power 
in their presence. Mark these also, and, at 
midnight, fall upon them and possess them. 

And go ye amongst the rich, whose sons 
and daughters are raised in idleness and 
pleasure; whose thoughts seldom rise to 



heaven: for with them the ashars are also 
weak to protect them, who are most excel- 
led: subjects to spirits fond of sporting 
pleasures. Mark ye them also, and at mid- 
pleasures. And such as still flatten the 
head, and are dull in judgment. Mark ye 
them also, and at midnight fall upon them, 
driving hence the ashars. 

Abandon ye the altars and arcs and 
temples and oracles, and all the strongest, 
most zealous Faithists, for the present. 

Thus prepared, Osiris and Baal and 
Ashtaroth, for the third assault on Jeho- 
vih's angels and mortals. And their mill- 
ions of groups were kept in constant drill, 
ready for the work. The first fire and flush 
of boasting was already gone from them, 
save of a few, and the serious aspect of a 
long war stared them in the face. 

CHAPTER XXXIII. 

Thus laid the three great countries, Ara- 
bin'ya, Par'si'e and Heleste, of which Par'- 
si'e was mightiest, peopled with very gi- 
ants; lofty-bearing men and women, of red, 
copper colored; and with an abundance of 
long black hair; high in the nose and cheek 
bones; with determined jaws, and eyes to 
charm and command; mostly full-blooded 
Ihuans, half-breeds betwixt the I'hins and 
the burrowers in the ground, the brown 
people, dull and stupid. The Par'si'e'ans 
were a proud race, built up in great come- 
liness by the God Apollo, whose high-rais- 
ed office was to fashion the breeds of mor- 
tals into noble forms. Foremost in all the 
world was Par'si'e in all great deeds, and in 
men of learning, and in ancient wars. It 
was here great Zarathustra was born and 
raised for Jehovih's Voice and corporeal 
words. Here the first great City of the 
Sun was built; Oas, whose kings aspired 
to rule all the world; and great riches 
amongst men were here first tolerated by 
the Gods. 

A strip of Par'si'e'an land cut betwixt 
Jaffeth and Vind'yu, and extended to the 
sea in the far east; but the great body laid 
to the west, covering the Afeutian Moun- 
tains, still plentiful in lions and tigers and 
great serpents. In these mountains came 
the I'huan hunters to catch lions and tigers 
to fight in the games, where men oft, un- 
armed, went into the arena, and fought 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



323 



them with their naked hands, choking them 
to death before applauding multitudes. 
From these mountains the hunters supplied 
the private dens of kings and queens with 
lions, whose duty was to devour thieves 
and other prisoners, according to mortal 
law. 

And oft these traveling hunters dwelt 
with the sacred little people in the wilder- 
ness, the I'hins, whom Jehovih had taught 
to charm even the great serpents and sav- 
age lions and tigers to be their friends and 
worshippers. And herefrom sprang a peo- 
ple called Listians, who, living mostly in 
the forests, went naked, to whom the 
I'hins taught the secret of charming and sa- 
cred hand power, who worshipped Jeho- 
vih, owning no man nor God as master, for 
which the Great Spirit named them Shep- 
herd Kings, for they ruled over flocks of 
goats, which supplied them with milk, and 
butter, and cheese, and wool for cloth for 
crotch-clothes, the only covering they 
wore. 

These Shepherd Kings, the Listians, 
lived in peace, wandering about, making 
trinkets, which they oft exchanged with 
the inhabitants of cities and the agricul- 
tural regions. One-fourth of the people of 
Par'si'e were Listians, who were well 
guarded by Jehovih's angels. And these 
were such as De'yus meant to obsess for 
future use in terrible wars, but the other 
three-fourths lived in the fertile regions of 
Par'si'e, the lands of which were rich in 
yielding ample harvests. The cities were 
filled with mills, and factories, and colleges, 
and common schools, free for all people to 
come and learn; and altars, and temples of 
worship, and oracle structures, made with- 
out windows, so Jehovih's angels could 
come in sar'gis and teach His Holy Doc- 
trines. Besides which were temples and 
observatories for studying the stars, which 
were mapped out and named. And next to 
these were the Houses of Philosophy, in 
all the cities; where great learned men un- 
dertook to inquire into the things of 
earth, to learn the character and property 
thereof. And whether of fish, or worm, 
stone or ores, iron, silver, gold, or copper, 
they had learned to read its worth and na- 
ture. And of things dead, no longer liv- 
ing on the earth, and of strange stones, and 
of skins and bones of animals, their houses 



were well filled, for benefit of students and 
visitors. It was these that De'yus meant to 
have his armies possess, body and soul, 
for his own glory, knowing that by their 
researches in such matters for many gen- 
erations they had strayed away from Jeho- 
vih. For such is the rule pertaining to all 
children begotten on the earth. If the fa- 
ther and mother be on the downward road 
in unbelief, the child will be more so; but 
if on the upward way, to glorify an All 
Highest, the child will be holier and wiser 
than its parents. 

In olden times the Gods had inspired 
the Par'si'e'ans to migrate toward the west 
and inhabit the lands of Heleste, also a 
country of giants, but less given to rites 
and ceremonies; and they carried with them 
three languages: the Panic, of Jaffeth, the 
Vedic, of Vind'yu, and the Par'si'e'an; and 
because they used the same sounds, mostly, 
but different written characters, a confused 
language sprang out of these, and was call- 
ed Fonece, and the people thus speaking 
were called Foneceans. Hence, Fonece is 
the first and oldest of mortal-made lan- 
guages; and this was styled in heaven the 
period of emancipation of mortals from the 
dictatorship of angels in regard to written 
signs and characters and words. Jehovih 
had said: In that respect man on earth hath 
advanced enough to stand alone; and it 
was so, for, from that time to this, neither 
Jehovih nor his angels have given any new 
language or written characters to mortals. 
And all languages that have come from that 
time onward, are but combinations and 
branches, and amalgamations and malform- 
ations of what existed then on the earth. 

The Helestians were rich in agriculture, 
and in herds of cattle and goats, both wool 
goats and hair goats; for it was in this 
country that the angels first taught man 
how to breed the goats for hair or wool, 
according as he desired. And these people 
were also mostly worshippers of Jehovih, 
and had many altars and temples; dwelling 
in peace, and loving righteousness. 

Arabin'ya had four kinds of people with- 
in her regions; the I'huans, the Listians, 
the I'hins, and the brown burrowers in 
the ground, with long noses and projecting 
mouths, very strong, whose grip of the 
hands could break a horse's leg. The 
brown people, though harmless, were na- 



324 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ABM1J 



ked, living mostly on fish, worms, bugs and 
roots; and they inhabited the regions of the 
great river, Tua. Over these people, to sub- 
due them and destroy them, Osiris allotted 
his great angel general, Egupt, servant of 
De'yus. Egupt called the region of his al- 
lotment after himself, Egupt. In the 
time of Abraham this country was 
called South Arabin'ya; but when, in after 
years, the great scholars entered the rec- 
ords in the kings' libraries, the later names 
were used, being written in the Fonecean 
language and not Eguptian, which was the 
language of the unlearned. 

But the chief part of all the people in 
Arabin'ya were I'huans, of color and size 
and figure like the Par'si'e'ans; being also 
the offspring of the I'hins and the brown 
earth-burrowers, from whom they inherited 
corporeal greatness, even as from the I'hins 
they inherited holiness of spirit. And the 
flat heads had mostlv disappeared from Ar- 
abin'ya. 

And here were thousands of cities, great 
and small, even as in Par'si'e and Heleste, 
and they had colleges and houses of Phil- 
osophy, even like Par'si'e, besides thou- 
sands of public libraries, which supplied 
books freely to the poor, who came here to 
be taught in the sciences, and in the arts 
of painting, engraving and sculpture, and 
in astronomy, and mathematics, chemistry, 
minerals, and assaying. But the Listians 
were the only people who dealt in charms 
and the secrets of taming serpents and 
beasts by virtue of the hand, and by cur- 
ious scents, prepared secretly. And the 
Listians maintained the fifth rite in the res- 
urrection, whereby, on the fifth day after 
death, the soul of the dead appeared in 
mortal semblance to his living people, and 
advised them lovingly, after which he as- 
cended in their burning incense going to 
Tehovih! 

Of such, then, were the people over 
whom the Lord God named De'yus had set 
his thousand million, to subdue for 
his own glory. And thus it came to pass, 
Jehovih spake in Craoshivi, saying: The 
time shall come when angels and mortals 
shall know of a truth that the Lord God is 
a false God, and a vain-glorious usurper. 
For I will leave one race of I'huans on the 
earth, in Guatama, even till the era of kos- 
mon. And men and angels shall see and 



understand that man of himself never in- 
venteth a God in figure of a man born of 
woman. And that only through the inspir- 
ation of My enemies, who build kingdoms 
in hada for their own glory, hath any peo- 
ple ever fallen from My estate to worship 
a God in image of man. 

CHAPTER XXXIV. 

And now came the third assault of Osir- 
is' legions of angels, innired to desperate 
madness by the harangues of their gen- 
erals and captains. And every mortal was 
marked out, and his degree of faith in the 
Great Spirit known, so the destroyers knew 
well where to strike effectively. At mid- 
night again came the Osirians, rushing on, 
and by force of numbers laid their hands 
on many mortals, millions! Held fast, 
and hurled missiles furiously about the 
sleeping apartments, to rouse from sleep 
their mortal victims, who, to wake and 
see no cause for the whirling stools and ta- 
bles, and the terrible noises and blows in 
every corner of their houses, sprang up af- 
frighted, and at a loss to know what to 
do. In many places the angels of De'yus 
spake audibly in the dark, saying: There 
is but one God, even the Lord your God, 
great De'yus, on the throne of Hored. 
Bow down in reverence before him, or de- 
struction and death shall be your doom' 

The Osirian angels, gloating in their 
much success, now filled every house, 
where they had fastened on, and made all 
such places head-quarters for their cap- 
tains and generals and thousands and tens 
of thousands of angel servants, who were 
proud and boastful, most hilarious, making 
hideous noises about the house walls. In 
many instances the ashars were crowded 
off; for because of the small faith and little 
spirituality in the mortals captured, their 
power was weak. 

But not in all cases had the Osirians 
won, but were in hundreds of thousands of 
families overcome or baffled till the rising 
sun, which drove them off, leaving the Je- 
hovihians still victorious. But sufficient 
was the glory unto Osiris and his legions, 
wherefrom messengers were sent to De'yus 
speedily, with most exaggerated tales of 
the victories won. 

In Par'si'e there fell this night twelve 
hundred thousand men, women and child- 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



325 



ren into the clutches of the hosts of De'yus, 
the Lord God. the false. In Arabin'ya the 
fallen victims numbered two million; and 
in Heleste one million and a half! But not 
yet had the captured mortals realized what 
had happened; they only knew frantic 
noises, and flying missiles disturbed them 
all night long. Many rushed forth to the 
oracles and altars to learn the cause, and 
to know if, in truth, the angels of heaven 
were at war; if Gods had come, as had been 
told in the old legends, to afflict mortals. 
The learned acknowledged not the cause 
to be angels, but sought for cracks in the 
wood, or concealed persons, or animals, 
failing in which excited their disbelieving 
souls so they proclaimed each special won- 
der, a hundred times magnified. 

Th unlearned believed in the angels 
thus suddenly come upon them; and culti- 
vated their coming, and hearkened to their 
words, to put away Jehovih and accept 
De'yus: for otherwise, after death, their 
souls would be weighed by Anubi, and, for 
lack of faith in the Lord God, instead of 
Jehovih. cast into everlasting hell. And 
such mortals, willing tools to follow spirits' 
advice instead of Jehovih's light within 
their own souls, were led through the 
Anubian ceremonies, but malformed by 
substituting words to glorify De'yus, and 
Osiris, his so-called son. 

But the philosophers searched deeper, 
to find if, of a truth, the soul were immor- 
tal: and if it be a very truth that the souls 
of the dead come thus back, setting at de- 
fiance nature's laws, as they called the com- 
mon things around about them? What, 
then, were the sum and substance of the 
created worlds, and ultimate end, the all 
highest place for man? Which the Os- 
irian angels answered, explaining that the 
first heavenly place was hada, wherein were 
many hells; and that the all highest hea- 
ven was Hored, where the Lord God sat 
on his throne in great glory. And around 
him on every side were thousands of mill- 
ions of angels who had attained to ever- 
lasting peace, with nothing more to do but 
to bow and sing praises unto their God 
forever! 

CHAPTER XXXV. 

Not many more days passed, till Osiris 
called together his legions and gave them 



four days' recreation and a great feast. 
And after the feast was over, he thus spake 
from his temporary throne on Mount Ag- 
ho'aden. that is, a place in the sky over the 
earth mountains of Aghogan, in Par'si'e; 
complimenting them, saying: 

In the light and power of life and death 
I speak! Greeting, in Deyus' name, high- 
est of Gods! In his love, to glorify you all 
for your great victory, this feast was spread, 
and my voice upraised in your praise. 

First, to thee, Baal, wise and powerful 
amongst Gods, for thy great energy and 
glorious success, do I bestow the Sign of 
the Sacred Bird, Iboi, to be thine forever. 
And next, to thee. Ashtaroth, the God- 
dess that never tireth, or is without a strat- 
agem, for thy glorious success I bestow 
thee with the circle and the true cross, to 
be thine forever. 

To thee, Hermes, most unflinching of 
generals, second in rank to Lord, for thy 
victories won, I bestow the Inqua. 

To thee, Apollo-ya, I bequeath a bow 
and arrow, for thou shalt break the bonds 
of the creed of circumcision, and tempt 
mortals to wed by no law but by the im- 
pulse of the heart. For as the Faithists 
have been bound by their sign to marry 
not outside their own people, so shalt thou 
teach the opposite; for by the cross of 
the breeds of men, they shall be broken 
off from Jehovih. 

To thee, Posee-ya-don, I bestow a mod- 
el ship, for thou shalt have dominion over 
sea-faring men in all these divisions of the 
world. 

To thee, He-fa-yis-tie, I bestow a forge 
and tongs, for thy dominion over mortals 
shall be with the workers of metals and 
weapons of war. To thee, Pluton-ya, I 
bestow a torch and brand of fire, for thou 
shalt rule over mortals for the destruction 
of cities and houses, to whomsoever will 
not bow down to De'yus as the highest 
God. 

To thee, Urana, queen of the es'enaurs, 
the very stars of my armies, I bestow a 
quill and staff, for thou shalt have dominion 
over the songs of the earth, inspiring mor- 
tals to sing praises unto the Lord our God. 
After this manner Osiris went through 
the list, bestowing and assigning medals, 
and signs, and symbols, and emblems upon 
the generals and the captains, and exalting 



326 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



many of the privates for daring deeds done, 
and for victories. And then Osiris allotted 
to the generals and captains tens of thou- 
sands of angels especially adapted to their 
respective work; and he placed Baal and 
Ashtaroth as chiefs over them. Next Osir- 
is organized a new division of angels, an 
army of one hundred million, distributed 
into one hundred parts, and called this 
army See-loo-gan, signifying angels who 
travel about amongst mortals in systematic 
order, to measure them as to how best 
they can be used for the glory of the hea- 
venly kingdoms; and to possess them, or 
hand them over to be obsessed, as may be 
deemed profitable. 

hX Pluton-ya's request, Osiris made his 
selection for him, and then further explain- 
ed, saying: To thee, all privilege in thy 
line. If thou find fire not well suited to 
destroy a city, even though thousands of 
mortals be obsessed at the same time to fire 
it, thou shalt command thy army to car- 
ry virus and inoculate mortals unto death; 
or to fill the city with epidemic air, well 
poisoned, throwing mortals into fevers so 
they shall die. For in all cases, whether 
Baal or Ashtaroth, or any of thy superior 
officers, say to thee: Destroy thou that city, 
or this city, or that family, or this family, 
or that man, or this man; thou shalt so fall 
upon the man or place as commanded, and 
accomplish it. 

And now, with due ceremonies, and 
with excellent music, the assemblage was 
commanded back to the earth to resume 
work. And Osiris' messengers bore the 
news to De'yus, well exaggerated, extolling 
the fidelity of Osiris to the highest. From 
this time forth no masterly raids were made 
by the Osirians, but they improved the 
well-adapted times to give to mortals an 
abundance of wonders in angel manifesta- 
tions; which bait mortals caught at ea- 
gerly. And they were, for the most part, 
easily persuaded to follow angel advice, and 
so fell to work and built temples, and es- 
tablished oracles of their own; obliterating 
the doctrine of the Great Spirit, and substi- 
tuting the words: The Lord God, and De'- 
yus, and Anubi, his holy Son and Savior 
and Judge of the world; and Osiris, God's 
commanding Lord of the earth. And mor- 
tals traveled about throughout all regions, 
preaching and explaining spirit commun- 



ion, and establishing the Anubian rites and 
ceremonies, but never using the names 
Great Spirit or Jehovih, save but to deride 
and accurse. The rites taught virtue, and 
love, and truth, and the acquisition of 
knowledge, but taught not peace, but war, 
which was maintained to be justifiable if 
done for the glory of the Lord, or for the 
Lord God, or for the Son, the Savior, An- 
ubi, whose sign was a pair of scales, and 
who was sometimes called Judge, and 
Keeper of the Gate that led to the upper 
heaven, Hored. Wherefore it came to pass 
that the mortal adherents of Osiris began 
to war on the Faithists and take their pos- 
sessions. And inasmuch as the Faithists, 
by their pledges to Jehovih, dared not re- 
sist by weapons of death, but only by walls 
around their cities, and by stratagems, and 
by running away, the Osirians had easy 
victories in most instances. 

In ten years the Osirians began to build 
great cities, after the manner of the an- 
cients ; and to gather in their plunder taken 
from the Faithists. And Osiris, and Baal, 
and Ashtaroth, through their angel hosts, 
chose from amongst mortals the largest 
and strongest, most warlike, and by means 
of the oracles declared them kings and 
queens, and instructed them in building pal- 
aces and having thrones after the manner of 
Lords and Gods. And directed mortals 
how to make themselves powerful by or- 
ganization and obedience to the kings and 
queens, who were recognized as adopted 
sons and daughters of the Lord God. 

Now it came to pass, in course of time, 
that in consequence of the great abundance 
of angel manifestations, mortals sought by 
this means to obtain knowledge of heaven 
and earth, and especially in regard to the 
end of man. And the Osirian hosts, being 
the only angels engaged in the matter of 
establishing De'yus, answered them, say- 
ing: The life and the end of man are to 
glorify God, who is Lord of heaven and 
earth. 

And the mortals pressed the matter fur- 
ther, asking: Who is God? What are the 
worlds? Whence came all things? How 
were the Creation and the Creator? 

For an answer to these questions, Osiris 
sent messengers to the Lord God in Ho- 
red; whereupon De'yus called a Council of 
his Gods and Lords, to meet in Hored, to 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



327 



solve the matter, that a uniform answer 
might be given unto all the divisions of 
the earth. In the meantime, and before 
the Council assembled, satan spake to De'- 
yus, saying: If thou admit a Creator save 
thyself, thou art undone. For is this not 
the point whereon hang the power and do- 
minion ofjehovih? The Lord God said: 
Behold, the Great Spirit signifieth every- 
where. But I am only as a man, small 
compared to the size of the worlds! 

Satan said: It mattereth not; thou shalt 
say thou wert the Creator of heaven and 
earth. De'yus sa id: But this is not truth? 
How, then, shall I say, I created heaven 
and earth? Satan said: When Osiris hath 
come before thee, say thou to him: Whom 
hast thou found amongst mortals to be 
the greatest and wisest, best su'is? 
And when he telleth thee, say thou 
to him: Osiris, my son, him thou sayest 
is the greatest su'is shalt thou inspire in 
person. And thou shalt cause him to write 
answers to the questions of mortals, that 
the learned and the ignorant alike may 
know me and my kingdoms. Behold, be- 
fore my time both heaven and earth were 
void as to a Godhead, save to the servants 
of Jehovih. In this respect, thou shalt per- 
suade thy seers to know I created them 
from voidance unto mine own glory. 

CHAPTER XXXVI. 

Anuhasaj, alias the Lord God, had said 
to Te-in, the false, to whom he gave in 
charge Jaffeth and her heavenly places: In 
the self same time that Osiris and his hosts 
fall upon his divisions of the earth, even in 
that day and hour shalt thou and thy hosts 
fall upon Jaffeth, possessing the temples 
and altars, and places of oracles, where they 
serve the Great Spirit under the name Or- 
mazd, and thou shalt subdue them to me 
under the name Joss, who is and ever shall 
be Ho-Joss of heaven and earth. 

So Te-in, the false, with his thousand 
million warriors sped forth, downward, to 
the earth, wide spread his army, to cover 
the whole of Jaffeth, in hope to capture it 
suddenly. And, even as Osiris plunged 
into the temples and oracle-houses, and 
about the altars, in the dead of night, to 
drive away Jehovih's guardian angels, so, 
like him, and even worse, Te-in was baf- 



fled and repulsed, and saw the morning 
sun arise upon his shame in total failure. 
And then he, too, with his mighty legions, 
went stalking about all day long on the 
earth, waiting for the next night's assault 
on sleeping mortals, and to receive new or- 
ders from the Lord God, as to the next 
proceeding. 

Then came the second night, and Te-in 
went in, with his army, furious because of 
the last night's cowardly failure. And to 
the sleeping mortals, men, women and 
children, hied them with oaths and loud 
boastings, threatening Jehovih's angels 
with the tortures .of hell if they did not in- 
stantly resign all unto Ho-Joss, the all 
highest ruler, dweller in Hored. But 
faithful stood the Jehovihians; laid their 
hands on the sleeping mortals, and became 
all powerful against the terrible odds, and 
held them in abeyance again, till the sun 
arose and scattered Te-in's hosts, ashamed 
and sulky, in most pitiful defeat. Which 
news Te-in now, most painfully, sent to 
his commanding God. 

To him, even as to Osiris, De'yus sent 
word to next attack the houses of the men 
of learning, the unbelievers; the ignorant 
and the superstitious; to abandon, for the 
present, the arcs, and temples, and oracle- 
houses, and the Faithists, firmly sworn. 
De'yus said: Send thou thy numerators 
and mathematicians; and measure and 
mark all mortals in Jaffeth, as to their vul- 
nerable points, and map their localities; 
and when thou hast completed this work, 
set apart another night for an attack upon 
them. And thy hosts shall fall not upon 
the Faithists who are firm in the Great 
Spirit, Ormazd, but upon the weak and 
disbelieving, the skeptical and much learn- 
ed philosophers, who are weak in spirit, 
and thou shalt not fail. 

So Te-in enummerated the Jaffeth'eans 
as commanded, marking them as to their 
vulnerable points, whether in disbelief in 
spirit, or if given to lust, or to hasty pas- 
sions, or to telling lies, or to stealing, or 
to murder, or to hypocrisy, or to desire for 
leadership. And before the time of battle, 
Te-in knew the grade of every mortal in 
Jaffeth. And he called his generals and 
captains before him in his heavenly place, 
Che-su-gow, over the Chesian Mountains, 



328 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



twenty miles high, showing them the lists 
and maps. 

Take these, he said, and distribute them 
before my mighty armies, and ere to-mor- 
row night they shall learn every mortal's 
place and quality; and in the night my le- 
gions shall rush upon the places, laying 
hands on the sleeping mortals, thus gaining 
power; and they shall hurl missiles, with 
terrible noises, through the houses of the 
sleepers, and so arouse them to awake and 
behold the war of heaven carried to their 
homes. 

The generals and captains took the lists 
and maps, and had millions of copies made 
of them, and then sent them into all the re- 
gions of De'yus' militants; and besides sent 
proclaimers, millions and millions, with 
terrible oaths against the Great Spirit, but 
who extolled the munificence of De'yus 
to the utmost; appealing to their love of 
independence, and to their power to cast off 
all other rulers forever, save Ho-Joss. 

And now, when the night of battle 
came, the infuriated angel warriors of Te- 
in marched in lines, millions strong, toward 
the sleeping mortals. Spread broad their 
great armies, covering the land of Jaffeth 
from east to west and from north to south. 
Over Flang'e'loe, the City of the Sun, were 
sent thirty million of Te-in's warring an- 
gels, sworn to subjugate the people of 
great learning, alive or dead, and scatter 
the angels of Jehovih, or bind them and 
cast them into hell. Over the city of Pen 
Goo were Te-in's hosts, twenty million; 
and over the cities of Tsee, and Wung, and 
Ha-tzo, and Ne King, and Zoo Wun, each 
twenty milion of Te-in's angels of war. 

Besides these there were millions and 
millions stationed over the great valley of 
Wan, and in the mountains of So Jon. In 
the plains of Wow Gan were stationed sev- 
enty million. Five million were allotted 
to each of the following cities, to wit: Sum 
Cone, Ah-gee, Ah-sin, Chang ha, Gee 
Ooh-young, Gwan Gouk, Na'tji, Yuk Hoh, 
Ah-Tosh, Ah Koan, Chaung, Shon, Nu- 
Kingdo, Ghi Sam, Seung, Chog, Doth, 
Jawh, Bing-tah, Gha, Haih, Huug, Wing- 
tze, Ni Am, Ah Sam and Zow-lin. In the 
mountains of Witch How Loo were sta- 
tioned eighty million. On the borders of 
the sea, for sea-faring men, and for their 



wives and children, were one hundred and 
ninety million of Te-in's angel soldiers, 
ready for the assault. Besides these were 
tens of thousands of smaller armies, sta- 
tioned in the small cities and country 
places waiting for the signal to attack. 

Now, in this age, Jaffeth had attained 
to great wisdom in many things, save in 
war, in which the people were as babes. 
More than half her people were Faithis.ts, 
followers of Po, worshippers of the Great 
Spirit. And they practiced peace and dwelt 
in communities. Many of the cities were 
composed of families of tens, and hun- 
dreds, and thousands, but nowhere more 
than two thousand. And the city families 
were after this manner: The manufactur- 
ers of woolen cloth, one family; of linen 
cloth, another; of silken cloth, another; of 
leather, another; of paper, another; of 
transportation, another; and so on, till 
all departments were full; and of these 
combinations were provinces of fifty thou- 
sand, and a hundred thousand, and two 
hundred thousand inhabitants. And in the 
country places there were small cities, 
whose people tilled the soil and gathered 
the fruits of the earth, and they exchanged 
goods with the manufacturers who dwelt 
in large cities. 

The government was by priests, one for 
each communion family, and the priests 
who were called Wa-shon, were the receiv- 
ers and distributers of goods, and they min- 
istered in the temples and at the altars of 
worship in the name of the Great Spirit, 
Ormazd, sometimes called Po-e-tain, and 
sometimes Eolin, and by other names 
also. Besides the schools and colleges 
there were Houses of Philosophy, and 
Houses of Prophecy, and Houses of As- 
tronomy, thousands and thousands. 

The Jaffeth'eans were large, being I'hu- 
ans, with one degree more of the brown 
people's blood in them than the Par'siV- 
ans. Nor in all the world was there, at that 
time, so strong a people, and clean and 
jovial, high aspiring, with great gentleness. 
And because the land was tilled and made 
to bloom on every side, the angels of hea- 
ven named it the Flowery Kingdom; and 
because the people reveled in song, poetry, 
and oratory, they were called Lambs of the 
Great Spirit in the Flush of Spring Time. 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ABMIJ 



329 



And these things were well known to 
De'yus, and to Te-in, the false, and to hun- 
dreds of millions of the assaulting angels, 
sworn to subdue them to Ho-Joss or to 
everlasting destruction. But because of 
the power of Jehovih with the most faith- 
ful of the Faithists, the arcs and temoles 
of worship had stood unharmed by the Sa- 
tanic raid. Equally so the Te-ins failed to 
overpower the Great Spirit's guardian an- 
gels. So now, after due preparation, the 
time came for another assault, this time 
upon the mortals having the least faith in 
Jehovih. 

On the other hand, the true God, Son 
of Jehovih, sent word from his throne in 
Craoshivi to the guardian angels dwelling 
with these mortals, so unmindful of the 
Father's care. He said: Come defeat, or 
disaster, or terrible darkness, overpowering 
your utmost strength, still struggle ye, in 
the name of Jehovih. The true Faithist 
knoweth nothing impracticable, but doeth 
his utmost for his highest light, though 
failure stare him in the face. For once dis- 
trust or weakness entereth the human soul, 
the man slideth backward down the hill of 
faith; whilst he who will not consider re- 
sults, save to serve Jehovih right on, fail 
or not, riseth, even though his project fail. 

With this and no other word from Je- 
hovih, the Faithists stood about their weak 
and helpless wards on the low earth, wait- 
ing for the thousand million angels of Te- 
ins. But not in any lengthened suspense, 
for when the sun stood with the widest part 
of the earth between, the midnight hour, 
the militants came rushing on, with oaths 
most hideous, and by their dense flood of 
numbers reached the sleeping mortals and 
laid hands on them. Then, with joy run to 
madness because of triumph, sent hurling 
round about appurtenances in the dwell- 
ings. And, in many places, with audible 
speech thus held forth in the dark to the 
affrighted mortals: 

From Sanc-tu I come, to lay in the dust 
every mortal born that will not down in 
reverence to Ho-Joss, ruler of worlds. 
Give ear, O man; the anger of heaven's 
Creator is let loose upon a disobedient 
race! 

And then, to give semblance of truth 
to the words, the angel intruders let fly 
such knocks and poundings that they 



moved many a house on its foundation^ 
and rous.ed the mortals, panic-stricken, to 
find the cause, or to hasten quickly to re- 
pentance and prayers. 

But not all was their victory; for the 
Jehovihians firmly held the power in hun- 
dreds of thousands of places. And yet the 
Te-in's hosts had a wonderful victory. 

Te-in quickly sent word to De'yus, ex- 
ulting, and exaggerating the victories won. 
And in turn, De'yus congratulated him and 
his army, his thousand million, who, now 
anchored on the earth, and with mortals,, 
frolicked about in all regions. 

And in Jaffeth, in course of time, the 
same questions arose as in Arabin'ya; ques- 
tions from mortals to the spirits; as to the 
destination of the soul of man; as to the or- 
igin of things;. as to the heavenly places? 
And Te-in in turn sent word on up to De'- 
yus, in Hored, as to what answer should be 
given. It was thus, that he, too, was sum- 
moned to Sanc-tu, in Hored, to meet with. 
Osiris, and Baal, and Ashtaroth, and Sud- 
ga, subduer of Vind'yu. 

CHAPTER XXXVII. 

Sudga, the false, sent by De'yus to- 
overturn the Great Spirit's dominion in 
Vind'yu, and to establish the highest hea- 
venly place, Hored, was wiser than Osir- 
is or Te-in in his wicked work. For he 
did not permit his army, his thousand mill- 
ion to rush on for the places of worship 
and for the oracle-houses. But most delib- 
erately halted his forces in Haroyu, the 
lowest heavenly place over the mountains 
of Vivrat, in Vind'yu, three miles high and 
broad as the earth, and a commanding sit- 
uation. Whence, in a sure way, he sent 
his measurers on ahead down to the earth, 
to measure mortals, as to their weakness- 
and strength in faith in Jehovih, and other 
rulers, heavenly; to map them and mark 
to number them. 

Great was the peace and beauty and 
glory of Vind'yu in that day. Her rivers 
and canals coursed the country over, and 
her industrious sons and daughters, two 
hundred million, were, in the eyes of the 
angels, the pride and glory of the earth. 
Hundreds of thousands of her people were 
prophets and seers. And so abundant was 
spiritual light amongst the people, that 
even those who learned but one language 



330 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



could understand and speak with people 
from remote parts; words and sentences 
they had never learned; even when first 
meeting them. Like the inhabitants of Jaf- 
feth, as to government and industry, most- 
ly by the exchange of goods, and not by 
buying and selling, lived the Vind'yuans. 

Sudga said to his generals and captains: 
Only by confounding the languages of 
these people can they be broken up and 
subdued. Behold, they are becoming as 
Gods; knowing and understanding in ad- 
vance of the words spoken. Fall ye upon 
them, and possess them, and obsess them, 
all who are easily captured. Get ye a foot- 
hold here and there in the first place; and 
in their commerce cripple them. It is a 
strong city that maketh all kinds of goods; 
it is a weak - 1 ace indeed that dependeth on 
another, which is far off. Such people are 
•easily tripped up. Behold, I will teach these 
people that I am the only militant before 
whom every knee shall bow; or, failing to 
win them thus, I will set city against city, 
and country place against country place; all 
against one another, for which their super- 
abundant languages will furnish excellent 
material. 

Sudga opened the door at night for his 
hosts to fall on the weakest of mortals, 
as to faith in Ormazd, Who had become 
as a stale story to hundreds of thousands of 
men and women. In Vind'yu had women 
risen in knowledge, higher than the high- 
est of women in other parts of the world. 
In the Houses of Philosophy and Houses 
of Science women were foremost, as to 
men, and skeptical as to the Ormazdian 
power. 

On rushed Sudga's legions; and even as 
Osiris and Te-in won in the third assault, 
so Sudga won in the first. And he, too, 
sent word to De'yus, and exaggerated be- 
yond all bounds of truth, as to his vic- 
tories. Nevertheless, his hosts were suf- 
ficiently anchored on the earth to claim 
an everlasting: victory for De'yus and to es- 
tablish his name. 

And here, also, after a few years, the 
questions came from mortals, asking thus: 
Behold, ye cut off the heavens of the an- 
cients, the Nirvanian regions beyond Chin- 
vat. Ye teach us that De'yus is the All 
High Ruler. What, then, is the all high- 
est for man? How came the worlds? 



Whence came man? How was the creation 
created? To answer which Sudga sent to 
De'yus for instructions. And De'yus sent 
to Sudga, even as to the other Gods, an in- 
vitation to meet in Hored, to hear the 
words of the Lord God, to learn his com- 
mands. 

Thus went the five great warrior Gods 
before De'yus, taking with them each his 
ten thousand attendants, besides thousands 
of trumpeters. De'yus had a good feast 
prepared for them; and had sent receivers 
forth to meet them and conduct them to 
Sanc-tu in great splendor. 

CHAPTER XXXVIII. 

Great was the pomp and parade and 
glory, in Hored, when De'yus' victorous 
Gods and their companions and attend- 
ants came in answer to his summons. The 
trumpeters of Hored were stationed along 
more than a thousand miles on the heaven- 
ly roadways, and in turn the trumpeters and 
heralds of the visiting Gods extended in 
advance of the Gods themselves an equally 
great distance. All the way were the roads 
lined with flags and banners, and millions 
of spectators, who had formerly been in 
schools and colleges in heaven, but were 
now emancipated from the restrictions of 
self-improvement, and used as applauders, 
to sing and shout praises to De'yus for his 
own glory. 

The table of the feast was private and in 
secret, and only prepared for the Gods and 
their close companions, one hundred all 
told, but the serving host numbered more 
than one thousand souls. 

Whilst at the feast, De'yus said to Osir- 
is: Speak thou of thy exploits, and of Baal 
and Ashtaroth and their valorous legions. 

Then Osiris explained the nature of the 
earth countries, and of the battles and in- 
cidents, well exaggerating to the last re- 
sult. After Osiris had finished his story, 
De'yus said to Te-in: Speak thou of thy 
exploits and of thy generals and captains, 
and of thy valorous legions. 

Whereupon, Te-in displayed the maps 
of the earth regions where he had been, and 
his battles, and final success, also much ex- 
aggerated. And now, after he had finished 
his story, De'yus said to Sudga: Speak 
thou of thy generals and captains and thy 
valorous legions. 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J 



331 



Then Sudga explained the earth region 
where he had fought and won, extolling 
his generals and captains, and his hosts, 
well exaggerated also. When they had all 
finished their hilarious acounts, and ap- 
plauded one another in sufficient zeal, in 
that same time the feast of eating and 
drinking was ended. Whereupon De'yus 
stood up and said: 

I new declare the feast ended. Let the 
tables be removed. Behold, I will speak 
from the throne, in private, before my five 
Gods only, save mine own marshals. But 
unto all others I declare a time of recrea- 
tion and sport, to be called again to duty 
when I have finished with my Gods, of 
which my marshals will inform the trum- 
peters, who shall sound the call. 

Speedily, now, the attendants took away 
the tables; and the hosts all withdrew, leav- 
ing only the Gods and De'yus and his mar- 
shals. Whereupon De'yus ascended the 
throne, and then spake, saying: 

I, the Lord your God, who am De'yus 
of heaven and earth, declare unto you, my 
Gods and earth rulers, in mine own name, 
and with love abounding: To declare my 
doctrines and creations, that all the earth 
may be subdued alike unto me and mine 
forever. To surpass not mine own age in 
my doctrines, nor to explain my axioms. 
But to surpass the understanding of mor- 
tals sufficiently unto their knowledge of 
earthly things, and so appease their curios- 
ity, as to the questions they put to ye, my 
Gods. 

Neither will I bind myself as Ahura 
did; for I will not explain who I am, save 
that man is in mine own-likeness; nor when 
the beginning of things was. This heaven 
I created; and ye also bear witness that I 
have established the earth in me, through 
your valorous deeds. 

I, who am your God, look not to mat- 
ters of a day, or a year; my times are as 
one time, for from this time forth forever 
this heaven and the earth are mine, time 
without end. In which ye behold days and 
years and the generations of men on the 
earth pass rapidly. Who, then, shall think 
seriously of the inhabitants that now are 
yours and mine? Behold, the earth is 
fruitful; a thousand years are but as one 
day; and there shall spring up out of the 
earth thousands of millions of souls new- 



born. For them are my answers shaped, 
more than for such as now are. 

In the beginning I created this heaven 
and the earth unto mine own name and 
glory. For they were void and without 
order; darkness was upon them. Where- 
upon I moved upon them, saying: Let 
there be light; and there was light. And 
I drew a line betwixt darkness and light 
for they had worshipped the void instead 
of me. Whereupon I declare this the morn- 
ing and evening of the first day. And I 
have divided those that were void, and es- 
tablished my firmament betwixt them, even 
as land betwixt water and water. And my 
firmament is heaven, and I have made it to 
be over such as were void, like water. And 
this was the morning and evening of 
the second day. 

CHAPTER XXXIX. 

Osiris, being commanded of God to 
speak, said: Give us one day, O De'yus, 
that we may digest this matter. Thereupon 
De'yus gave them one day; and on the 
next day, when they were assembled, the 
Gods ratified every word De'yus had 
spoken. 

Again De'yus spake, saying: And I saw 
that the earth was good and that heaven 
might reign thereon. And I saw that the 
earth brought forth grass, trees, fruit and 
seeds, everything after its own kind; and 
I said: Behold, they are good. Neither 
attributed I evil unto anything on the 
earth, or in the waters, or in the air above. 
But I separated the light from darkness; 
this was the substance of my creation. And 
this was the morning and evening of the 
third day. 

Again Osiris asked for a day, that the. 
Gods might weigh the words of the Lord 
God. And God gave them a day; and when 
they were again assembled, De'yus said: 

Let there be Gods in the firmament 
above the earth; and they shall separate 
the darkness from the light of the earth 
that man may know me and my kingdoms. 
And my Gods shall teach signs and seasons 
and days and years, forever, unto the sons 
of men. And I made myself to rule the 
light of the world; but Osiris I made to 
rule the darkness of the world, which is 
the earth, my footstool. And this was the 
morning and evening of the fourth day. 



332 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



Again De'yus gave the Gods one day, 
to weigh the matter of his words, and to 
ratify them, which they did. 

Again De'yus said: Let the waters of 
the earth bring forth abundantly the mov- 
ing creatures that live; and let the fowl 
fly above the earth in the air of the firraa 
ment. For they are good. Let them be 
fruitful and multiply, every living, creature, 
and fill the earth, and the waters of the 
earth, and the air above the earth, every 
creature after its own kind. Wherefore my 
blessing is upon them. And this was the 
morning and evening of the fifth daj'. 

And De'yus gave his Gods a day to 
weigh his words and ratify them, which 
they did. 

And then De'yus said: And now, my 
Gods, let us make man in our own fashion; 
and in likeness of ourselves, let them have 
dominion also, but over the fish in the 
waters, and the fowl in the air, and over 
the cattle, and over the earth, and over 
every living creature upon the earth. And 
this was the morning and evening of the 
sixth day. 

And ye shall go to them and say to 
mortals : 

In our own likeness are ye created, male 
and female, and God's blessing is upon you. 
Be ye fruitful, and multiply, and replenish 
the earth and subdue it; and have dominion 
over the earth, and the fishes, and fowl, 
and every living creature on the earth, for 
they are yours forever! And behold, ye 
have every herb, and seed, and fruit, which 
is on the face of the earth, and the roots 
that grow in the earth, and they shall be 
your food. But of whatsoever hath breath- 
ed the breath of life man shall not eat. 

Again De'yus gave the Gods a day of 
rest, in order to weigh the matter and rati- 
fy it. 

And again De'yus spake, saying: The 
Lord your God said unto thee, Osiris; and 
to thee, Te-in; and to thee, Sudga: Search 
thou amongst mortals for one high in su'is, 
for when I announce my doctrines, thou 
shalt go to such mortal and cause him to 
write my words, saying: Such are the 
words of the Lord, thy God. In answer to 
which I bid ye all now speak before me. 

Osiris said: According to thy com- 
mandments have I searched and have 
found Thoth the highest man in su-is, and 
he dwelleth in Arabin'ya. 



Then spake Te-in, saying: In like man- 
ner, also searched I, and found Hong, in 
my division of the earth, the highest man 
in su'is, and he dwelleth in Ho'e Sin. 

Then answered Sudga, saying: Even 
so have I accomplished in Vind'yu, and I 
have found one Anj-rajan. 

De'yus said: To these mortals go ye 
and give my doctrines in your own ways; 
according to the languages of mortals, and 
their capacity to understand. Neither bind 
I you to my exact words, nor limit you, 
save that what I have spoken shall be the 
foundation. Thus, then, endeth the feast; 
and behold, it is the seventh day; for which 
reason I sanctify it and declare it a day 
of recreation. 

CHAPTER XL. 

On the following day the Gods depart- 
ed, with due ceremonies, after the manner 
they came, and returned to their kingdoms, 
and thence down to the earth, each one to 
his own division. And each of the three 
Gods -went to his own chosen mortal who 
had power to see and hear spiritual things. 
And the Gods possessed them by their 
presence, and inspired them to write the 
words of De'yus, word for word; and they 
were so written, alike and like, in the three 
great divisions of the earth. And copies of 
them were made and filed in the libraries, 
and in the houses of philosophy of mortals. 

But when these matters were thus en- 
tered, in answer to the queries of mortals, 
as to the origin of man and his destiny, 
they were not deemed sufficient by the' 
learned men. Many of them said: The 
Lord God hath evaded our questions. 

Then satan came to each of the three 
Gods who had the matter in charge, and 
he said unto them: Consult with one an- 
other as, to what shall be done. So Osiris 
sent messengers to Te-in and to Sudga, 
asking them to come to Agho'aden, his 
heavenly place, for consultation. And, in 
due course of time, Te-in and Sudga came 
to Osiris, to his throne, where they were 
received in great honor and glory. And 
presently Osiris' marshals cleared the place, 
so the interview was private, for even the 
marshals stood afar off. 

Osiris said: What shall we do without 
a Creator in fact? I know not if my judg- 
ment be beside itself, for it is said they 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



333 



that lose their reason are the last to dis- 
cover it. The time was when De'yus, our 
much-loved Lord God, said: Whilst ye 
labor on earth for me and my kingdoms, 
behold, I will reciprocate in all things. 
Neither shall ye ask for aught but it shall 
be granted unto you. 

Hear me then, O my brothers, in my 
complaint; mortals have asked us, to know 
the origin or man, and his destination; and 
to know the cause of good and evil. These 
things I submitted unto our Lord God, in 
Hored, to learn his will and decree. There- 
upon he sent messengers to me announcing 
a feast, on which occasion he would an- 
swer the questions of mortals satisfactorily. 
Ye and I went to the feast, and De'yus 
hath furnished us with something, which is 
nothing. For mortals can also perceive 
that what the Lord God hath said leaves 
their questions still unanswered. De'yus is 
my friend, and I desire not to press him 
further on the subject; and so I have called 
you, to learn of you how ye managed the 
same issues? 

Te-in said: Before our heavenly king- 
doms were confederated, Anuhasaj pro- 
fessed that he would announce himself the 
head and front of all created creations. 
Shall we say his courage is less? And so 
excuse him? 

Sudga said: When he should have said: 
I created man in mine own image, behold, 
he hath weakly said: Let us make man! Is 
it not clear, then, that he shirketh from the 
responsibility, and desireth ourselves com- 
mingled in the pitiful story? Hear me, 
then, my brothers; I am asked how I have 
answered the issues with mine own division, 
and say unto you, I have been in the same 
quandary, and have not answered at all. 

Te-in said: Neither have I. But that 
we may be justified in so doing, behold, 
the Lord God said unto us: I bind you 
not to my words, nor limit you, save that 
what I have spoken shall be the founda- 
tion. Now, it is clear, that if we admit 
that sin is in the world, we must find a 
way to justify the Lord God, whose ser- 
vants we are. If he be not justified, then 
is sin justified. For mortals perceive good 
and evil understandingly; but to justify a 
good God for permitting evil is not an easy 
matter. For in the breath we praise him, 
we must praise his works, of which sin is 



apparent; and in the same breath that we 
condemn sin, how shall we glorify De'yus? 
For have we not proclaimed him the foun- 
dation of all things; the head and front, 
before the creation was created? Was not 
this our battle-cry to urge our angel war- 
riors on to overthrow Jehovih? And hath 
not our loud-praised Lord God said: Let 
us make man! A child should have more 
courage than this! 

Sudga said: It is plain we all under- 
stand these issues, and perceive, also, what 
is required of us. For since De'yus hath 
left us liberty to add to his doctrines, ac- 
cording to our own judgment, is it not 
well that we agree upon a doctrine, even 
as De'yus professed prior to the confeder- 
acy? And thus give it to mortals? 

Osiris said: This is wisdom, O my 
brothers. To make our Lord God the 
Creator, we must account unto him all 
things, both good and evil. Wherefore we 
shall give two masters to man, the one be- 
ing the serpent, the earth, the lowest in- 
spirer; and the other the voice of our Lord 
God. 

Sudga said: My brother hath spoken 
wisely. And yet, is the term two masters 
the wisest term? For in declaring the Lord 
God the highest, we must make him master 
over the earth also. 

Te-in said: Why shall we not adopt 
the Eolin of the ancients, substituting 
the words Lord God? And make a com- 
mandment over man, forbidding him 
hearkening to the serpent, lest he be led 
away from the Lord God, and throw the 
cause of sin upon man, for violating the 
Lord God's commandment. 

Osiris said: Most wisely spoken, my 
brothers. For by accusing man, through 
the serpent, we clear the Lord God. 

CHAPTER XLI. 

On the following day the three false 
Gods, Osiris and Te-in and Sudga, wrote 
their account, each one in his own way. 
And when they were read, Orisis' stood 
clearer than either of the others'; but nev- 
ertheless, Te-in's and Sudga's had much 
merit. So it came to pass that Osiris' ac- 
count was adopted, with interpolations 
from the others'. This, then, is the com- 
pleted report: 



334 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



These are the times of earth and heaven 
when created; the time the Lord God cre- 
ated them. And the Lord God formed man 
out of the dust of the earth, and quickened 
him through his nostrils with the breath 
of life, and man became a living creature. 

And God caused mists to rise up from 
the waters, and spread over the earth, and 
rain upon it. And he caused trees and 
herbs to grow up out of the ground; every- 
thing that is pleasant for the sight and 
good for food. Thus out of the ground 
the Lord God caused man to come forth, 
being of the earth, of the land of Sepe'a. 

To dress the land and keep it pleasant, 
the Lord God commanded man, saying: 
This shall be thy labor, in which thou shalt 
be perfected unto everlasting life. Of all 
things in the land of Sepe'a mayst thou 
freely take and enjoy. 

And man prospered on the earth for a 
long season; and he was naked and not 
ashamed. And God planted the tree of 
knowledge in the land of Sepe'a, and he 
said unto man: This tree have I planted; 
partake thou not of it, for it pertaineth to 
life and death. 

And God called the name of the first 
man A'su. And the Lord God caused man 
to name all things on the earth, and in the 
waters, and in the air above the earth, and 
whatsoever man called every living crea- 
ture, that was the name thereof. 

And the Lord God caused A'su to fall 
into a trance; and an angel of heaven came 
and stood by his side. And the Lord God 
drew from the flesh, and from the bones, 
and from the blood of A'su, and thus 
made woman, and brought her unto A'su. 

And the Lord God repeated his com- 
mandment unto woman, saying: Thou shalt 
sojourn for a season on the earth, and 
cleave unto A'su, for he is thy husband, 
and thou art his wife; and thou shalt par- 
take of all things on the face of the earth, 
save of the tree of life, which is both good 
and evil, for in the day thou eatest thereof 
thou shalt surely die. 

But the serpent, the earth, said unto 
the woman: I say unto thee, in the day 
thou eatest thereof thou shalt have thine 
eyes opened, and shalt become as a God- 
dess, creating offspring. 

And the woman was more easily per- 
suaded than man, for she had confidence in 



the serpent; and they partook of the fruit 
thereof; and, of a truth, their eyes were 
opened, and they beheld their nakedness. 

And presently they heard the Lord God 
walking in Sepe'a, and they hid them- 
selves in the bushes. And the Lord God 
said: Where art thou, A'su? And A'su 
said: Because we heard thee walking, we 
hid ourselves, for we were naked. 

The Lord God said: Who told thee 
thou wert naked? Hast thou eaten of the 
tree whereof I told thee thou shouldst not 
eat? A'su said: The woman thou gavest 
me to be with me, led me, saying: Behold, 
it is good fruit; and we ate thereof. 

The Lord God said: Woman, what 
hast thou done? And the woman answered 
saying: The serpent beguiled me. And the 
Lord God said unto the serpent: Because 
thou hast done this, thou art accursed, and 
thou shalt not rise up from the earth, but 
return to dust whence thou earnest. 

Unto the woman the Lord God said: 
Because thou hast conceived, thou shalt 
have great sorrow; in sorrow bring forth 
children; thy desire shall be to thy hus- 
band, and he shall rule over thee. And I 
will put enmity betwixt the serpent and 
thine offspring; and the flesh shall call one 
way, which is unto earth, but the soul of 
man shall call unto me, the Lord God. 
And though the serpent bite, yet man shall 
bruise him, and subdue him. 

And God taught man to make coats of 
skins and be clothed. And the Lord God 
said: Lest man partake further, becoming 
of one of us, he shall go out of Sepe'a, 
where I created him. So he drove man 
our of Sepe'a backward, and gave him cher- 
ubims to hold him on every side, to pre- 
serve unto man the tree of life, that man 
might not only fulfill the spirit, but the 
flesh also. 

When Osiris had gone thus far, Sudga 
interposed, saying: If we say, Becoming 
one of us, will not man say: Behold, there 
are more Gods than the Lord God? 

Te-in said: Because De'yus said: Let 
us make man, shall we not use us in this 
instance? 

Osiris said: Hear me, my brothers, yet 
further; for I have previously found a way 
out. For I have divided the Lord from 
God; that is to say: 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



335 



And the Lord God said: Because man 
hath learned good and evil, I am as twain 
unto him, for I am Lord of the earth and 
God of heaven. And that which is on the 
earth is the Lord's, and that which is in 
heaven is God's. 

And A'su called his wife's name We-it, 
for she was the fountain of all men. And 
We-it brought forth a son, Cain, saying: 
I have begotten a son from the Lord. And 
she brought forth another son, Abel. And 
the first-born was begotten in darkness, 
but the second in the light of the Lord. 
And the Lord had more respect unto the 
second, Abel, than unto the first, Cain. 

In course of time Cain brought of the 
fruit of the ground and offered it unto the 
Lord. And Abel brought for the Lord, as 
his offerings, the firstlings of his flocks. 
And Cain perceived that the Lord had 
more respect for his brother, and Cain was 
wroth, and his countenance fell. 

And the Lord said unto Cain: Why- 
art thou jealous? If thou doest well, shalt 
thou not be accepted? And if thou doest 
not well, sin lieth at thy door. 

But Cain would not be reconciled be- 
cause of the darkness in him, and when he 
and his brother were walking in the fields, 
Cain turned upon Abel and slew him. 

God said: Behold, darkness is between 
men; the son begotten in darkness falleth 
upon him begotten in the light. And it 
shall come to pass on the earth from this 
time forth that the righteous shall be per- 
secuted by the unrighteous. 

And the Lord said unto Cain: Where 
is Abel, thy brother? And he said: I 
know not. Am I my brother's keeper? 
The Lord said: The voice of thy brother's 
blood crieth out unto me from the ground: 
Now art thou accursed from the earth, for 
it hath opened to receive thy brother's 
blood from thy hand. In my sight thou 
shalt be a fugitive and a vagabond upon the 
earth. And because thou hast shed blood, 
blood shall not cease to flow from thy sons 
and daughters forever. 

Cain said: O Lord, my punishment is 
greater than I can bear. For I am become 
the first foundation of all the wars on the 
earth; for thou hast hid thy face from me; 
and it shall come to pass that every one 
that findeth of me in them shall be slain 
also. 



And the Lord said unto Cain: Whoso- 
ever slayeth thee or thine, vengeance shall 
be upon him seven-fold. And the Lord 
wrote upon Cain's forehead the word 
Asugsahiben, signifying, Blood for sake of 
self, a mark, lest any finding him might kill 
him. 

And from this time forth Cain lost the 
voice of the Lord, because he went off into 
darkness. And Cain took a wife and begot 
heirs, and they were called Cainites, and 
the heirs after them were called the tribe 
of Cainites, which survived him nine hun- 
dred and ten years, after which they were 
divided into six and twenty tribes. 

And We-it bore another son, Seth, in 
place of Abel, whom Cain slew. And after 
these came the generations of men, good 
and evil. And the Lord God said: Behold, 
I created man without sin, and I gave him 
warning, that he might remain holy on the 
face of the earth. But woman hearkened 
not to my counsel, but to the serpent, and 
sin came into the world. Therefore shall 
woman bring forth in pain all the genera- 
tions of the earth. 

Thus it was that the Lord God created 
man; in the likeness of God created he him. 
And the sons of Cain were called tribes, 
even unto this day, but the sons of the 
righteous were called sons of God; where- 
fore it was said of old: Behold the tribes of 
earth and the sons of heaven. And the 
Lord said: Shall I not accord to myself to 
choose what I will? For this right I gave 
to man also. And from that time after 
the sons of God were called' God's chosen. 
And it came to pass that man multiplied 
on the face of the earth; and the tribes 
were mightier than the sons of the Lord 
God, and the wickedness of man became 
great in the earth, and the desires of his 
heart were evil continually. 

And the Lord God repented that he had 
made man on the earth, and it grieved him 
at his heart. And the Lord God said: I 
will destroy man whom I have created; 
nor will I spare beast nor creeping thing in 
the place I gave. Behold, I will bring a 
flood of waters upon the lands of the earth, 
and I will destroy all flesh wherein is the 
breath of life. But my covenant is with 
my chosen, who shall not be destroyed by 
the flood of waters. 



336 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMId 



And God's sens in Noe took with them 
pairs of the living, of beasts and birds, ac- 
cording to the commandments of God, to 
keep the seed alive on the earth. And when 
the earth was six hundred years in Noe, 
the flood of waters was come upon the 
earth. And for forty days and forty nights 
the rains fell, and the fountains of the sea 
came up on the lands of the earth. And 
man and beast alike, that drew the breath 
of life, died, for the land was no more. 

But the heirs of Noe suffered not; and 
the ships of the arc, whither the Lord had 
concealed them, rode upon the waters. 
And God made a wind to pass over the 
earth; and the fountains of the deep were 
stopped, and the rain of heaven restrained, 
and the ships of the arc borne upon dry 
land. 

And the Lord God said: Behold, I will 
build a new earth and a new heaven. For 
these, my sons, have proven their faith in 
me. Neither will I again destroy the tribes 
of men because their hearts are set on evil. 
And the Lord God swore an oath by the 
bow of the arc, saying: This is the token 
of the covenant which I have established 
between me and all flesh that is upon the 
earth. And by the sons of Noe was the 
whole earth overspread, and the Lord 
blessed the earth, and said: Every moving 
thing that liveth shall be meat for man; 
even as the green herb I have given. But 
flesh with the life thereof, which is the 
blood thereof, shall man not eat. 

For surely your blood of your lives will 
I require; of every beast will I require it; 
at the hand of every man's brother will I 
require the life of man that feedeth on liv- 
ing flesh and blood. And whosoever shed- 
deth man's blood, by man shall his blood 
be shed; for in my image made I man. 
And ye, be ye fruitful, and multiply, and 
bring forth abundantly in the earth, and 
inhabit it, for it is yours for perpetual gen- 
erations. 

Thus ended the words of Osiris. Te-in 
said: Because of flesh and blood, thou art 
wise, my brother. Sudga said: Hereon 
hangeth the glory of our enterprise. For 
man being less restrained than in the Divan 
laws, will accept the new readily. 

After this, Osiris prepared a book of 
generations of men on earth; and these 
were the substance of the doctrines of De'- 



yus and his Gods. And Osiris and Te-in 
and Sudga departed, and came down to the 
earth, to their mortal wards, and inspired 
their wards to write then.: in mortal words, 
according to the languages in the places 
where they lived. And they were so writ- 
ten by these seers; and copies of them were 
made and put on file in the libraries of the 
records of the kings and queens of earth, 
in Arabin'ya, Jafreth and Shem. 

CHAPTER XLII. 

Now, after the three false Gods, Osiris 
and Te-in and Sudga, had revealed these 
things to mortals, they sent messengers 
to De'yus, praying audience with him, that 
they might disclose to him what they had 
done. De'yus, therefore, appointed a time 
of meeting, and the Gods came before him 
and made their report. After which De'yus 
said: 

In all ye have done I acquiesce; neither 
have ye said aught that I would not have 
said, save that I desired not to laud myself 
with mine own mouth. And thus ended 
the matter, as to how mortals were taught 
to worship the names Lord and God, and 
Lord God, and Joss, and Ho-Joss, and De'- 
yus, and Deity, and Dyaus, and Zeus, and 
various other names, according to the lan- 
guages of the people of Jaffeth, Vind'yu, 
Arabin'ya, Par'si'e, and Heleste. And 
thousands of millions of angels of De'yus 
and his Gods, who were sent down to mor- 
tals, inspired them and taught them the 
same things through seers, prophets, and 
magicians, and through other people also, 
by dreams and visions. 

And mortals were taught the secret of 
spiritually going out of their own corporeal 
bodies, and returning safely; and in this 
state they were taken subjectively to the 
kingdom of De'yus, where they beheld him 
even as a man, sitting on a throne; and 
they saw the great glory of the kingdom, 
and beheld the worshippers, millions of 
them, glorifying De'yus, the false Lord 
God. And these persons became preachers 
on the earth; enthusiastically stirring men 
up on every hand to draw the sword, spear 
and sling to go forth in battle, to overthrow 
the doctrine of the Great Spirit and estab- 
lish De'yus. And it came to pass that they 
thus accomplished the will of De'yus in all 
these divisions of the earth. The Jehovih- 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



337 



ians, being non-resistant, were powerless 
before them. Kings and queens on the 
earth accepted these doctrines, and they 
marshaled their armies in all directions to 
establish De'yus, who had said unto them: 
As much as ye exalt me and my kingdoms, 
so will I exalt you. As I behold, ye are 
become wise and powerful to rule over 
many on the earth, so will I give unto you 
large kingdoms in heaven. 

And the false Lord God and his false 
Gods prospered in earth and heaven, as to 
themselves and their kingdoms, nine hun- 
dred years, and at this time the Faithists 
of the earth were reduced to a small frac- 
tion of people, mostly hid away, as sheep 
from wolves. But in nine hundred and fifty 
years, behold, the worshippers of the Lord 
God, the false, began to quarrel and fight 
amongst themselves. Even as by blood 
they had established him, so by blood were 
the kings and queens of the earth over- 
throwing one another. 

Because of the warfare, schools, and col- 
leges, and houses of philosophy were 
wasted away; the factories for spinning and 
weaving were destroyed and the lands not 
tilled. 

And now of the heavenly kingdoms of 
De'yus and his Gods, this is what occurred: 
They had accumulated twenty-eight thou- 
sand million spirits, all of whom were ser- 
vants to De'yus and his Gods. For the 
most part they were below ten, whilst three 
thousand million were below grade five, 
which is helplessness. 

Jehovih had so made man and angels 
that, whosoever had learned to abnegate 
self and to labor more for others than 
themselves, was already above grade fifty, 
and his ascension should be perpetual 
thereafter; whilst they that were below 
grade fifty, who had not put away self, 
should incline downward, toward the earth. 
Wherein it had come to pass that the false 
Lord God and his false Gods were bur- 
dened with their kingdoms. And though 
they were adorned to the utmost, having 
vast cities for their heavenly capitals, with 
millions of attendants, and millions of mu- 
sicians, who were forever inventing new 
and wonderful music, and playing and sing- 
ing, millions and millions in concert, with 
millions of trumpeters, near and far off, to 
fashion echoes beautiful to the ear; and 



though they had decorators forever invent- 
ing and changing their thousands of mill- 
ions of flags and banners, and the orna- 
ments for the pageantry; though they had 
thousands of heavenly cities, built with hea- 
venly precious stones, and gems of splen- 
dor, and with roadways and streets paved 
with heavenly diamonds and pearls; and 
though they had tournaments, heavenly, 
and games, rites and ceremonies, prostra- 
tions and salutations without end, with 
great ships, heavenly, capable of coursing 
atmospherea in journeys and excursions, 
ships to carry hundreds of millions of an- 
gels, whose chief occupation was to sing 
and chant the glory, power and dominion 
of De'yus and his Gods; yea, though a 
large book could not contain a description 
of the thousandth part of their wonderful 
glory, yet each and every God began to see 
coining danger. 

Jehovih had said: Two precipices have 
I left open for testing man's strength, and 
they are: great prosperity and great ad- 
versity. 

And satan counseled them in the guise 
of a good friend. First, he said to 
De'yus: Thou greatest of Gods! Who 
is like unto thee? Thou hast routed 
Jehovih and His hosts in heaven and 
earth; they are as a remnant skulking 
away. I will not only praise thee for what 
thou hast accomplished, but I will chide 
thee for thy failings. Thou art too honest 
for thine own good; too pure for thine own 
benefit; too unsuspecting as regards thy 
Gods. Being thyself honest, thou hast 
easily attributed honesty unto others, and 
they have taken advantage of thee. In 
the first thou saidst to thy Gods: 
Maintain ye your schools, colleges, 
and factories, and otherwise prepare the 
spirits of the dead unto resurrection. And 
as fast as they arrive at grade thirty, send 
ye them to my kingdom, that Hored may 
be glorified forever. But thy Gods 
used the angels as slaves, to build 
up the glory of their own kingdoms. They 
have allowed their heavenly places of edu- 
cation, for the most part, to be scattered 
and gone. Neither have they inspired mor- 
tals to instruction, as I warned thee at the 
first. And mortals have thrown aside their 
schools and colleges, and their places of 
art, and have become riotous, and given to 



338 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J 



gross living, and there is no resurrection in 
them. Which matters show thee that, soon 
or late, all the spirits of the earth will be 
of no grade at all, but as fetals and vam- 
pires to live on mortals. 

De'yus said: Why are mortals become 
gross livers? Satan answered him, saying: 
Behold, in thine own revelation to mortals 
thou saidst to them: Partake not of fish, 
nor flesh, nor blood, for food, nor of any- 
thing that breatheth the breath of life. 
And now, behold, what came to pass: Thy 
three Gods, whom thou hadst elevated and 
trusted, fell to and made other revelations, 
wherein they said: Partake of fish and 
flesh; for they desired to please mortals. 
And lo, it hath come to pass that man not 
only warreth for thee, but he warreth to the 
right and left, for it is in his blood, after 
the manner of beasts that feed on flesh. 
Thy Gods had no right to give this law 
unto man without first consulting thee, to 
know thy will and pleasure. 

De'yus said: Alas, it is true. What 
shall I do? Satan said: Thou shalt call 
thy Gods before thee and chide them in 
thine own way, and command them to go 
down to mortals and re-establish learning 
and industry, instead of war. 

De'yus said: Even so shall they come 
and receive my reprimand. They shall 
know of a truth that I am the Lord their 
God. 

Satan spake to the other false Gods, 
saying unto each: 

O thou wisest of Gods, who shouldst 
in fact be at the all highest God- 
head in heaven, because of thy great wis- 
dom and integrity. When thou puttest 
forth thine hand to do a thing, it is 
done; for thou wert born into life dif- 
ferent from all others, and for the highest 
of glories. And because of thy greatness, 
behold, all the Gods of heaven are jealous 
of thee and fear thee, all of which thou 
knowest of thine own knowledge. Now, 
whilst I accord this unto thee, I will also 
chide thee for thy shortness: For, because 
thou art honest thyself, thou believest the 
same of others; wherefore thou art cheated 
and ill-used on all hands. In the first place, 
thou didst send thy highest grades to the 
Lord God, to be his; yea, thou hast robbed 
thine own kingdom of its finest and best 
subjects for the glory of De'yus. And who 



is De'yus more than thou? Is he not a 
coward? for he feared to give his own doc- 
trines to mortals; but he abridged his 
words till they were worthless. And thou 
and thy fellow-Gods made his doctrines up 
in full for him! Yet thou servest him as if 
he were thy superior. 

The false Gods said: Alas, it is true, 
with all my wisdom I have acted like a 
fool. Because I was too honest and pure 
for De'yus and his Gods, they have taken 
advantage of me. What shall I do? 

Satan said: I told thee at the first, that 
the time should come when thou shouldst 
rise to be higher than all other Gods. Be- 
hold the time is near at hand when thou 
shalt strike the blow. Thou shalt not only 
have thine own kingdom, but the kingdoms 
of thy companion Gods; and even De'yus 
shall be tributary unto thee and thine. 

The false Gods said: What shall I do? 
And satan answered, saying: De'yus will 
scent the danger to his kingdom, and he 
will summon his Gods for consultation. Be 
thou ready with thine answer unto him and 
them; not hastily, for such is the manner 
of the weak; but most deliberately, in high 
holiness of purpose, for the good of mor- 
tals and spirits. 

Thus alike and like spake satan unto all 
the false Gods; and they nursed the planted 
seed; held it in the light and shade to see 
it grow, until it became the very giant of 
each one's understanding. 

CHAPTER XLIII. 

In course of time De'yus called the 
meeting of his Gods in Hored, and Osiris 
and Sudga came; and great were the pa- 
geantry and show that day; and the pomp 
and glory and splendor of Sanc-tu; with 
thousands of milions of trained slaves, with 
their dashing officers of high rank. For at 
this time it was nearly seven hundred years 
since even generals and high captains could 
come into the presence of the Lord God, 
the false, save by crawling on their bellies, 
even for miles. 

And in and around about the heavenly 
house of the capital were erected fifty thou- 
sand pillars of fire, kept forever going by 
the labor of his slaves, some of whom stood 
in their tracks laboring at one thing for 
more than a hundred years, without change 
of watch, or rest, being threatened with 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-AEMIJ 



339 



hell, and being too impotent to believe oth- 
erwise. None could walk upright to the 
throne of De'yus save his high Council, his 
high marshals, and his Gods, and Anubi. 
And none else were permitted to look upon 
him, under penalty of being cast into hell. 

At first his Gods came to feast with him 
once a year for more than a hundred years; 
after that, for awhile, once in six years; 
and afterward, only once in fifty or a hun- 
dred years; and then only by special com- 
mand. 

So it came to pass that the coming of 
De'yus' Gods was an occasion of rejoicing 
and glory to upward of twelve thousand 
million inhabitants of the kingdom of De'- 
yus. For, far and near, they were extra 
clothed and fed, and granted freedom for 
the time being. 

On the last occasion referred to, the 
Gods were received by hundreds of mill- 
ions, called the receiving hosts, in fire- 
ships of great size and brilliancy, and thus 
conducted up to the roadways of the court, 
nearer than which the receiving hosts dared 
not approach. There the Gods were met 
by De'yus' high Council and high marshals, 
and with them entered the area and walked 
up to the high arch of the capital, which led 
into the place of the throne of De'yus. 
When inside of the Arch, the Council and 
marshals parted on either side, and, with 
the head bowed, chanted an anthem of 
praise to De'yus. The Gods also bowed 
with respect and friendship, and walked in 
the midst directly toward the throne. 

When they were near at hand, the vice- 
Gods, on either side of De'yus, rose up, 
saying: In the name of the Lord God of 
the heavens of the earth, who come here, 
upright, and as Gods? 

The Gods responded: Behold, we are 
sons of the Lord God, great De'yus, and of 
a truth are we Gods ! We demand audience 
with our Godhead, for the glory of our 
kingdoms and his. 

De'yus said: Peace, O my vice-Gods! 
I do recognize these, my brother Gods. 
Greeting, in the name of heaven and earth. » 

The Gods responded: Greeting unto 
thee, O Lord God, mightiest of Gods. In 
thy mighty name, De'yus, we salute thee 
worshipfully, to know thy will and pleas- 
ure, that we may serve thee in wisdom, and 
power, and love. 



De'yus said: Welcome, O ye Gods; the 
freedom of Sanc-tu is at your hands. Be- 
hold, 1 will clear my place, that we may 
consult together privily for the good of an- 
gels and mortals. 

Thereupon De'yus gave a signal for all 
his officers and attendants to retire beyond 
the Arch, which they did. And now 
that the ceremony of reception was over, 
De'yus came down from his throne and 
greeted the Gods cordially by clasping 
hands, after which they all sat down on 
the foot seats of the throne; and there were 
present De'yus, and Osiris, and Sudga, 
and no others within hearing; for Te-in had 
not come. 

And for a while they talked together 
like long-separated friends; and lo and be- 
hold, the satan that was within each one of 
them began to fail him in regard to re- 
proving the others. For even the smoth- 
ered seed of love which the Great Spirit 
had given them began to swell up, as if 
about to burst forth a mighty power. So 
the time passed on, and none dared ap- 
proach the subject of his soul's resolu- 
tion. Till at last, De'yus, the most schooled 
in satan's cause, put an end to their old- 
time stories and trivial conversation; he 
said: 

So much have I loved you both, and 
am now moved by your august presence, 
that with all my majesty and power I am 
weaker than a young child: who will un- 
concernedly reprove its own father. Or 
more I am like an old man that, in the ab- 
sence of his child, findeth cause to quarrel 
with it; but on seeing it return, breaketh 
down utterly, and turneth from his previous 
grieving to an outburst of manifest love. 

Osiris said: What can move thee to 
this seriousness, O De'yus? For even as 
thou hast spoken, so hast thou uttered the 
sentiment that has long lain on my heart. 
But which now, in reverence to thee and 
thy great kingdoms, causeth me to melt 
down like snow in a summer's sun. Pray 
thee, go on! 

Sudga said: As I live, ye twain, so far 
my superiors as before whom I am nothing, 
have spoken the very sentiment of my soul. 
Pray ye twain, go on; for so great is my 
love unto you, your most extravagant wish 
shall be answered by me, though I labor a 
thousand years to accomplish it. 



340 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



Thereupon De'yus sweetly told his tale, 
even as satan had taught him. And then 
he bade Osiris speak his mind, and also 
Sudga speak his; whkh they did, even as 
satan had taught them their parts. When 
they had finished, De'yus, much surprised 
by their pitiful tales, even as the others 
were at his, thus spake: 

My Gods, how much easier it is to find 
fault with these affairs than to find a rem- 
edy. I have seen such as find fault with 
their neighbors, the kingdom, or the 
ancients, and yet they accomplished 
the same faults themselves. We all do 
know that one of the complaints we had 
against the old Divan laws was their bond- 
age over the Lords and their dominions. 
Whereupon, when we confederated, it was 
to give independence to each and every 
Lord to rule his own heaven and division 
of the earth in his own way. And this was 
granted unto all my Lords and unto me and 
my kingdom likewise. And behold where 
it hath harvested! In the fullness of my 
soul I gave you certain doctrines to give 
unto mortals, chief of which was to make 
my names worshipful on the earth. But I 
bound you not, saying: Do ye this, and 
no more. But I said unto you: Here is 
the substance of the foundations of my 
doctrines. Go ye unto mortals and teach 
them these things, adding or abridging ac- 
cording to your own wisdom. And this 
ye accomplished, and added thereunto the 
temptation to mortals to become carnivor- 
ous, whereby the grades have fallen woe- 
fully. And now ye find fault with me for 
exacting a certain number of slaves annu- 
ally of a certain grade; complaining that 
your own kingdoms are becoming flooded 
with drujas. 

Osiris said: Hear me, O Lord my God, 
for I have labored for thee and thy king- 
dom many a hundred years. Nor are my 
words in passion, but well considered; 
wherein, therefore, if I err, I ask no ex- 
cuse on account of hastiness. First, then, 
that our confederacy was founded to make 
a mighty kingdom, heavenly, having do- 
minion over mortals on the whole earth; 
of which kingdom thou wert to be the 
chief and greatest glory, and ourselves 
the second. To all of which our songs to 
this day bear testimony but as for songs or 



testimonies in the libraries of heaven, that 
our confederacy was founded chiefly to get 
rid of the Divan laws, I have not seen nor 
heard of one. 

Sudga said: What I have done is done. 
I was commanded to a division of the earth, 
to subdue it unto De'yus, and I have so 
accomplished it. I have listened to your 
complaints, but neither hath offered a rem- 
edy. Ye twain are higher in rank and wis- 
dom than I; when ye have spoken to the 
purpose I will also speak. Fon my part, I 
am thankful there are no Divan laws to 
bind me. 

De'yus said: The remedy lieth in over- 
turning the cause of the falls in the grades. 
For the sake of glorifying themselves, my 
Gods have suffered places of learning and 
industry to fall to pieces, both in heaven 
and earth. There be such as give glory 
unto charity, and unto rites and ceremo- 
nies; but I say unto you, my Gods, Indus- 
try and Learning stand higher than charity 
or rites and ceremonies; especially so stand- 
eth industry that yieldeth profitable sup- 
port. 

Osiris said: Where, O Lord my God, 
lieth the difference betwixt that which is 
written or spoken? In thy opening words 
thou hast even now reiterated the bondage 
of the Divan laws over the Lords. And in 
the next breath thou sayest: I command 
you to re-establish the places of learning 
and industry. 

Sudga said: Are not written laws less 
arbitrary than spoken ones? for we see 
them beforehand, and are not, therefore, 
shocked by the sudden audacity. 

De'yus said: In either case is it not true 
that the highest in power and mightiest in 
the plans and arrangement of his king- 
doms must either take jibes and insults 
from his inferiors, whom he hath lifted up 
and made what they are, or otherwise fall 
broken-hearted on the loss of their love 
and worship? For on all hands we behold, 
alas, beneficiaries are apt to turn like ven- 
omous serpents, and strike, even though 
.the blow would send themselves into de- 
struction. 

Osiris said: That is most especially true, 
O De'yus, where the highest kingdoms 
owe their glory and greatness to those that 
have been subsidiary and built them up. 
None are so slow to see their danger as 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



341 



they that are exposed to it. There be such 
who, holding high places, if but their slaves 
knew who they were and how deceived, 
would bind them in knots and cast them 
into hell. 

Sudga said: But in such cases is it not 
better, O my wise brothers, that the high- 
est who have been raised up by the toil and 
industry of others, that labored to have 
them glorified, turn from their own glory 
and selfish ends, and divide up their ill- 
gotten kingdoms, and bestir themselves 
by sending assistants to those that have 
them in their power? 

De'yus said: Most wisely spoken, both 
my Gods. But how shall we teach apes 
and monkeys to know their masters? They 
crook their tails and squeal, imagining 
themselves great monarchs. Whereas, were 
they cut off from their masters, they would 
come to grief most ignominiously, or be 
the foremost plunged into torments. 

Osiris said: Thou wisest of Gods, is it 
not most strange, wonderful, how better we 
can see others' shortness than our own? 
Nor are we much quicker to find a way to 
save them, which we oft could do were they 
not self-conceited fools, than to guard our 
arms, so that when they show the least 
sign to do us wrong, we inwardly swear 
within our souls to hurl them into hell. 

Sudga said: O my loves, it is a sad re- 
flection, when we survey mighty king- 
doms at their quarrels, knowing that, if 
either dare raise a hand to destroy, we our- 
selves hold the key whereby they can be, 
both, stript of their highest subjects and 
their greatest glories, and left in the ruins 
of their own evil. But the wise bide their 
time, and oft are fortified when others 
know not of it. 

De'yus said: My most wise Gods, ye 
have spoken great wisdom. I will weigh 
your words and be governed accordingly. 
For your most holy visit I am honored 
above all I deserve. 

Osiris said: Words cannot express my 
reverence for thy spoken words, O De'yus. 

Sudga said: I am bowed with sorrow 
to leave the place of so much wisdom, love 
and power. 

And now Osiris and Sudga stepped 
backward four paces each, but separate 
from each other, with their heads still 
bowed. By a signal, the vice-Gods re-en- 



tered and stood beside the Gods, and then 
all, with heads bowed, raised their hands 
and saluted in the sign Central Sun. De'- 
yus answered them on the sign Music of 
the Satellites. 

Slowly now, and with measured step, to 
low sweet music, backward, the Gods and 
vice-Gods crossed the area and passed the 
Arch, where the vice-Gods left them and 
returned within. But the Gods were now 
met by the high Council and high marshals 
and conducted to the entrance gate, where 
they left them, and they were received, 
Osiris and Sudga, by their hosts and recon- 
ducted to their ships, with great pomp and 
honor, and they at once set sail for their 
own heavenly kingdoms. Now, in this 
whole proceeding, the Gods were all sur- 
prised that Te-in came not, nor, by messen- 
ger or otherwise, answered the summons; 
nor could one of them imagine the cause. 

CHAPTER XLIV. 

Te-in, whose heavenly kingdom contain- 
ed three thousand million angels, being in- 
formed when Osiris and Sudga were gone 
to Hored, satan said to him: Now is thy 
time, call thy Council together; proclaim 
thyself God of heaven and earth, mighty in 
all regions, the Central Kingdom of the 
Eternal Heavens! Choose from amongst 
thy Council the highest grades, and make 
them Lords under thee. Jaffeth must 
be subdued to one nation of peo- 
ple, and this shall be thy footstool, 
and thy heavenly kingdom's head- 
quarters. After which thy Lords shall 
proceed to the lands of Par'si'e, and Ara- 
bin'ya, and inspire the inhabitants thereof 
to another central kingdom, and when mor- 
tals are thus subdued to limited numbers, 
thou shalt have but few to deal with in or- 
der to make thyself God of the whole earth. 

So on the day of De'yus' meeting with 
Osiris and Sudga, Te-in severed the bonds 
betwixt his heavenly kingdom and all 
others, and he chose twelve of his highest 
grade in the Holy Council, and made them 
Lords of the earth; but he allotted no por- 
tion of the earth to any one alone. He 
said: I will not give them kingdoms; this 
is the strongest way; to keep everything 
in one's own hands. 

Te-in, then, through his Lords, whom 
he sent down to the earth, made Kan Kwan 



342 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-AEMIJ 



mortal king of Jaffeth, with the title, King 
of the World, and Sun, and Moon, and 
Stars! And the Lords caused Kan Kwan 
to build an oke'spe, where he could re- 
ceive the commandments of Te-in, the hol- 
iest, all highest ruler of heaven, as to what 
he should do in order to subdue the earth 
unto himself. 

Te-in said: And, my Lords, say ye to 
Kan Kwan when the earth is subdued unto 
himself: Behold, I will also come down 
and dwell in the temples he buildeth for 
my Lords. And when the king goeth forth 
and subdueth a place unto himself, he shall 
immediately build a worshipful temple and 
dedicate it to me and my Lords, whose 
names ye shall give alike and like in all 
places. For I will not confuse mortals 
with a. multiplicity of heavenly Lords. And 
the king shall show unto the people that 
there is but one High Ruler in heaven, 
whether he be called Joss or Ho-Joss, or 
Te-in, or Po-tein, and that I am the Per- 
son. But in no case shall the king suffer 
the worshippers of the Great Spirit to re- 
main alive upon the earth. 

My Lords, take with you, each, one 
million angels, strong and cunning in war; 
twelve million are sufficient; for ye shall 
not scatter them about, but keep close in 
the neighborhood of war and of the king. 
As when a fire -burnetii, beginning from a 
spark and spreading outward till a city is 
consumed, so be ye concentrated and po- 
tent. This is the whole art of war. And 
whilst mortals sleep, your angels shall come 
upon them and give them dreams and vis- 
ions of glorious success, make them see 
themselves in the heat of battle, rushing 
through the jaws of death unscathed, whilst 
their manly arms slay about them on every 
side their enemies by the score in flowing 
blood. For when these mortals awake and 
remember their dreams, they will be well 
whetted for the valorous work. But as 
to those that are to be conquered, let your 
angels go to them whilst they sleep, and 
give them dreams and visions of horrid 
deaths; make them see the heat of battle 
and themselves overpowered on every 
hand, and, pierced with sword and spear, 
they fall, dying in great agony. For when 
such mortals wake up and remember their 
dreams, they are half conquered already. 

My Lords, ye shall inspire the king to 



be merciful and gentle; and when his sol- 
diers come to a place to subdue it, they 
shall send truce-men before them, inquir- 
nig: Who say ye, shall be the ruler? And 
if the people answer: We are Kan Kwan's 
slaves, they shall not be slain. Te-in said: 

My Lords, amongst mortals, what is 
righteousness? Now one Lord said: Rites 
and ceremonies. Another said: To wor- 
ship thee, O Te-in. Another said: To fol- 
low the doctrines of the ancients. Another 
said: To purify one's self. Another said: 
To do good with all one's might. Anoth- 
er said: To practice truth. Another said: 
To harm no man. 

Te-in said: Not one of you knoweth 
righteousness. Behold how you stand: The 
doctrines of the ancients were their own, 
and they are as dead. To put on a dead 
man's clothes, will they make the wearer 
like the dead was? 

Rites and ceremonies are what show- 
men train their horses with, to run or leap, 
or lie down, to please their masters. 

To purify one's self! What is that? 
A mortal man's body cannot be purified, 
for it is rotten at best. 

To do good with all one's might! Who 
knoweth the meaning of that? To cut off 
a crushed foot to save a man's life: Give 
him pain in the cutting, even whilst he is 
suffering. Then it is well that some men's 
heads be cut off for their own good. Yea, 
even nations extirpated. Let him that 
doeth, then, do with all his might. See 
ye not that in this, that before one attempt- 
eth to do good, he is his own judge, judg- 
ing by his own judgment? 

To practice Truth! What is that? The 
Jehovihians say: Jehovih is All Truth. 
But Jehovih is nothing, scattered as the 
wind. Then truth is nothing. Wlio hath 
found a man but saith: To see as I see, is 
to see the truth; to see as thou seest, is to 
see falsely? A man told lies knowingly, 
and practiced them; and he was all truth to 
himself, for he. was a liar. Therefore, he 
practiced truth. 

To worship me is unrighteousness in 
stead of righteousness. To worship Joss is 
unrighteousness; to worship the nonde- 
script, Jehovih, is unrighteousness, and to 
worship Po is unrighteousness also. Be- 
hold this matter: The large trees in the 
forest were smothering out the small ones; 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J 



343 



and the small ones said: We praise you, 
giant oaks, for the many blessings we have 
received; be merciful unto us! The large 
trees laughed at them, and they died. Is 
this not Jehovih? Is this' not the Gods? 
For all mortals, at best, are but as un- 
hatched eggs; and when they are dead, 
their souls are as hatched chickens, for the 
Gods to play with, and to use in their own 
way. 

Teach ye this to mortals; and tell them, 
moreover, to choose what God they will; 
and if it be me, then I will labor for them; 
if it be not me, then am I against them. 
This, then, is righteousness: Reciprocity 
betwixt Gods and mortals; reciprocity be- 
twixt mortals themselves; to war for opin- 
ion's sake in order to develop steadfast- 
ness; to help the helpless; to feed and 
clothe the stranger, and to worship the fa- 
ther and mother. 

CHAPTER XLV. 

Te-in's Lords and their angels departed 
out of Che-su-gow, Te-in's heavenly place, 
and descended to the earth on their mis- 
sion; and this is what came of it: 

Kan Kwan was the son of Kwan Ho, a 
flat-head; but Kan Kwan came of the con- 
verts to the Brahmin priests, and so had 
not his head flattened. But because su'is 
and sar'gis had long been in their family 
they descended to Kwan all the same. And 
he could see and hear the angels and their 
Lords; hear all the words spoken to him, 
a most excellent thing in a king, when 
drujas are restrained from observing him. 
The Lords guarded Kan Kwan on every 
side, day and night, and Kwan being stu- 
pid, because of the flat heads of his par- 
ents, he was well suited to carry out all 
that was commanded of him. So he at once 
announced himself with all his titles, and 
sent heralds hither and thither to proclaim 
him and let all peoples and kings know 
that he was coming to subdue them unto 
himself. 

Kwan issued this decree: Kan Kwan, 
king of the world, and of the sun, and 
moon, and stars, I command! I, son of 
the sun, son of Te-in, behold! There is 
but one ruler in heaven, Te-in! There shall 
be but one on earth, Kan Kwan. ' Bow 
your heads down! I come! Choose ye: 
to bow down, or to die. One or the other 



shall be. When the world is subdued to 
me, I will war no more! 

In those days there were many great 
kings in Jaffeth, and their kingdoms were 
in many places far apart. Betwixt them, in 
a sparse region, in the Valley of Lun, lay 
the city of Ow Tswe, and this was the small 
kingdom of Kan Kwan, known for a thou- 
said years. When other kings heard of 
Kwan's proclamation they laughed. And 
this is the vanity of mortals, for they heed 
not the power of the Gods over them. 

So Kwan started with an army of four 
thousand soldiers, men and women, with 
spears, axes, scythes, swords and slings, 
and bows and arrows; and he marched 
against Tzeyot, a city of a hundred thou- 
sand people; and here ruled king Cha Ung 
Chin, with twenty thousand soldiers. Cha 
Ung Chin laughed. He said to his cap- 
tain: Send a thousand women soldiers 
and kill Kwan and his army; they are mad 
and know not what war is. 

The captain went forth to battle, but he 
took beside the thousand women soldiers 
a thousand men soldiers. But behold, 
Kwan and his soldiers knew no drill, 
but they ran forward so strangely that their 
enemies knew not how to fight them, and 
they fled in fear, save the captain and a 
hundred women, who were instantly put to 
death. But not one of Kwan's army was 
killed. 

Cha Ung Chin was angry, and he sent 
ten thousand soldiers against Kwan's rag- 
ged army; and when the battle was begun, 
the angels cast clouds before the hosts of 
Cha Ung Chin, and they thought they he- 
held hundreds of thousands of soldiers 
coming upon them, and they turned and 
fled also, save five hundred, who were cap- 
tured and instantly slain, men and women. 

Cha Ung Chin said: It is time now I 
go myself. My laziness has cost me dear. 
On the morrow I will lead thirty thousand 
pressed men and women, and make it a 
day of sport to slaughter Kwan's army. So 
the king sent his marshals to select and 
summon his soldiers during the night. 
Many were too frightened to sleep; and 
those that slept had such visions and 
dreams that when they awoke they were as 
persons nearly dead. 

Cha Ung Chin, next morning, sallied 
forth out of the city to battle, going before 



344 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



his army. When he saw the pitiful army 
of Kwan, he said: Of a truth, the world is 
going mad! That such fools have courage 
is because they know not what a battle is. 
With that he rushed forward, faster and 
faster, calling to his soldiers. But they 
stretched out in a line, after him, for they 
trembled from head to foot, remembering 
their dreams. Presently Kwan and his 
army started for them, not with orderly 
commands, but screaming and howling. 
Cha Ung Chin's soldiers took panic, broke 
ranks and fled in all directions, save one 
thousand, including King Cha Ung Chin, 
who were captured and instantly slain. 

And on the same day Kan Kwan went 
and possessed the city, Tzeyot, command- 
ing obedience and allegiance of the people. 
And on the following day he set twenty 
thousand men to work building a temple 
to Te-in, pulling down other edifices for 
the material thereof. Nor had Kwan a 
learned man in all his army; but the Lords 
with him showed him how to build the 
temple, east and west and north and south, 
and how to make the archways and the pil- 
lars to support the roof; and the sacred 
chambers and altars of sacrifice. Of brick 
and mortar and wood built he it, and when 
it was completed it was large enough for 
twelve thousand people to do sacrifice in. 
And it was, from first to last, forty days in 
building. 

Besides this, Kwan put another ten 
thousand men and women to clearing 
houses and walls away, and making new 
streets in many ways; so that at the time of 
the first sacrifice the city of Tzeyot looked 
not like itself; and Kwan give it a new 
name, Lu An, and commanded all the peo- 
ple to call it by that name, or suffer death. 

Kan Kwan made the people go and do 
sacrifice to Te-in in the temple every morn- 
ing; enforced a day of rest for each quarter 
of the moon; enforced worship on the part 
of children to their fathers and mothers, 
the father taking first rank. 

Then Kwan made them pray for those 
who were slain in battle. And these are 
the words he commanded them: Te-in! 
Father of Life and Death! Who feedeth on 
suns and stars! Whose refuse is mortals. 
In thy praise I bow my head. For thy 
glory I lie on my belly before thy altar. I 
am the filthiest of things; my breath and 



my flesh and my blood are rotten. Death 
would be sweet to me if thou or thy sol- 
diers would slay me. For my soul would 
come to thee to be thy slave forever. 

Behold, my brothers and sisters who 
fought against thee are dead, and I glorify 
thee because thereof. We have buried their 
carcasses deep in the ground, good enough 
for them. But their spirits are lost and 
wild on the battle-field, howling about. O 
Te-in, Father, send thy spirits from Che- 
su-gow, thy heavenly place, to them, to 
help them out of darkness. And we will 
ever praise thee, our mightiest, all highest 
ruler! 

When they made the sacrifice they laid 
down on their bellies, certain ones prompt- 
ing them with the words which Kwan re- 
ceived from the Lords. 

After this; Kwan appointed them a gov- 
ernor, Ding Jow, who was the first gov- 
ernor of a province in Jaffeth. For as a 
Lord is to a God, so is a governor to a 
king. And this was the first of that order 
established by the Gods of hada. 

Jehovih had said: Independent king- 
doms shall not exist side by side; nor shall 
one be tributary to another; but there shall 
be one whole, and the lesser shall be parts 
thereof, not over nor under them, but as 
helpmates. The wicked will not see this 
now; but their own wickedness will bring 
it about in time to come.- 

CHAPTER XLVI. 

Kan Kwan again went forth to conquer 
and subdue, going to the southward, to 
Ho-tze, a large city having five tributary 
cities, ruled over by Oo-long, a king with 
two hundred wives and thirty thousand sol- 
diers, men and women, well disciplined. 

Kwan's army was now seven thousand 
strong, but without discipline; and with no 
head save himself. And on his march 
through the country he compelled the farm- 
ers to embrace the Te-in religion, under 
penalty of death. Now when he had come 
near Ho-tze, he sent an order for the king 
to surrender, even after the manner as at 
the city he had already conquered. 

Oo-long laughed when told of the kind 
of company that had come against him, 
and he sent only women soldiers, eight 
thousand, to give him battle. When the 
armies were near together, the Lords said 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



345 



to Kwan: Send thou a truce, and beseech 
thine enemy to surrender under penalty of 
death; for the angels of Te-in will deliver 
them into thy hand, and not one shall die. 

A truce was sent, and the whole of Oo- 
long's army surrendered and made oaths 
of allegiance to Kwan, and not one was 
slain. 

Oo-long, when informed of it, said: 
Now will I go with all my army and slay 
this ragged king and all his people, and 
also my eight thousand who have surren- 
dered. So he marched to battle with twen- 
ty-two thousand soldiers. Kwan's army 
was scattered about the fields. Oo-long 
said to his captain: Go, thou, tell this fool- 
ish king to set his army in line of battle; I 
desire not to take advantage of a flock of 
sheep. 

The captain started to go, but ere he 
reached the place, he fell down in a swoon, 
for the angels overpowered him. The 
king saw his captain fall, and he cried out 
to his army: It is enough! My army have 
never seen such fools, and know not how 
to battle with them. Come, I will lead! 

At that, he rushed on, followed by his 
thousands. Instantly, Kwan's army set up 
their screams and howls, and ran forward 
in every direction; and Oo-long's 
army broke and fled, save one thou- 
sand two hundred who were captured, Oo- 
long amongst them; and they were instant- 
ly slain. But of Kwan's army only one 
man was killed. 

The Lords sent messengers to Te-in in 
his heavenly place, informing him of 
Kwan's success. Te-in returned this com- 
mandment: In what has been done I am 
well pleased; but suffer not your mortal 
king, Kan Kwan, to win so easily hereaf- 
ter; but let him have losses, that he may 
not forget me and my Lords and my hosts 
of angels. Place ye him in straits, and 
cause him to pray unto me; and his army 
shall pray also. And when they have thus 
sacrificed, deliver him and his army from 
their straits, and make him victorious for 
a season. 

Kwan entered the city of Ho-tsze with- 
out further opposition, and possessed him- 
self of it. At once he caused thirty thou- 
sand laborers to fall to work building a 
temple to Te-in. Another twenty thousand 
he caused to pull down houses and make 



other streets, more beautiful. In twenty- 
eight days the temple and the streets were 
completed; and on the twenty-ninth day 
the sacrifices commenced, and all the people 
were obliged to swear allegiance to Kwan 
and to Te-in, or be slain. And on the first 
day there were slain four thousand men 
and women worshippers of different Gods, 
but for the main part the Great Spirit, who 
would not take the oath. After that, none 
refused, and so Kwan gave the city a new 
name, Tue Shon; and he appointed So'- 
wo'tse governor, and commanded the trib- 
utary cities to come under the yoke. 

After that, Kan Kwan went forward 
again to conquer and subdue; and the 
Lords of heaven and their twelve million 
angels went with him and in advance of 
him, preparing the way. And the news of 
his success was spread abroad amongst 
mortals also, well exaggerated; so that the 
inhabitants of cities far and near feared 
him. The Lords suffered Kwan to con- 
quer and subdue yet three other large 
cities without loss to his army; and 
Kwan began to think it was himself 
that possessed the power, and not Te-in. 

The next city, Che-gau, was a small one, 
of fifty thousand inhabitants. Kwan in- 
quired not of Te-in through the Lords as 
to how to make the attack, but went on his 
own judgment. Now there ruled over the 
city a woman, Lon Gwie, a tyrant little 
loved, and she had but four thousand sol- 
diers, and Kwan had seven thousand. 

Kwan, arriving near, demanded the 
place; but the queen answered him not 
with words; but had her soldiers in am- 
bush, and thus fell upon Kwan's army, and 
put one-half of them to death; and yet the 
queen suffered small loss. Kwan, not find- 
ing his Lords with him, fled, and his re- 
maining army with him. But the Lords 
urged the queen to pursue him, and she 
again fell upon them and slew another 
half, and crippled hundreds more. But 
the queen suffered small loss. 

The Lords then spake to Kwan, where 
he had escaped, and said unto him: Be- 
cause thou wert vain and remembered 
not me, who am thy heavenly ruler, Te-in, 
I have labored to show thee that of thyself 
thou art nothing. Then Kwan prayed to 
Te-in, saying: Most mighty ruler of hea- 
ven and earth, thou hast justly punished 



346 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



me. I pray thee, now, with good repent- 
ance, in the bitterness of my shame. What 
shall I do, O Te-in? I am far from home, 
in a strange country, and my army is well- 
nigh destroyed. All nations are against 
me; a sheep is safer in a forest with wolves 
than I am in these regions. 

The Lord said unto Kwan: Now that 
thou hast repented, behold I, Te-in, will 
show thee my power. For thou shalt 
gather together the remnant of thy army 
and turn about and destroy the queen and 
her army, or put them to flight and possess 
the city. 

Kwan, on the next morning, being in- 
spired by his Lords, prepared for battle, 
though he had but seven hundred men. 
On the other hand the Lords and their an- 
gels appeared in the dreams and visions of 
the queen's army, saying to them: The 
queen is deceived and led away into a trap. 
Kwan will be joined in the morning by 
fifty thousand men. Prepare therefore, to 
die to-morrow. 

On the morrow, then, on the queen's 
side, the soldiers related their fearful 
dreams to one another; and hardly had 
they finished when Kwan's army 
came upon them. And the angels, more 
than fifty thousand, took on sar'gis, seem- 
ing even like mortals. At sight of this, 
the queen's army were so frightened they 
could not flee, save a few, but nearly the 
whole army surrendered, throwing away 
their arms and lying down. Kwan and his 
army fell upon them and slew them, more 
than four thousand, who were rendered 
powerless by the angel hosts with them. 
Kwan then went into the city, doing as pre- 
viously in other cities, establishing himself 
and Te-in. 

Such, then, was the manner of Te-in, 
the false, of establishing himself in JafTeth. 

CHAPTER XLVII. 

Sudga, the false God of Vind'yu and her 
heavens, whose heavenly kingdom con- 
tained more than three thousand million 
angels, on his way home from Hored, said 
to himself: Two things I am resolved 
upon: to proclaim myself Creator and 
Ruler of Heaven and Earth; and to change 
the name of my heavenly place and call it 
Ahl-burj, the Mountain of the Clouds. 



Satan spoke to Sudga, saying: Thou 
all highest God. In the land of 
Vind'yu, down on the earth; and in the 
heavens above the land of Vind'yu; what 
God hath labored like unto thee? Thou 
didst establish De'yus, for nearly a thou- 
sand years in these regions. Thou possess- 
est by right that name, and thou shalt call 
thyself Dyaus and Sudga; and thy heavenly 
place shall also be Hored, because, for- 
sooth, it is also a heavenly mountain. 

And so Sudga at once fell to work 
moving his capital and throne, and 
to founding his new place. And 
he also chose twelve Lords, saying to 
himself, after the manner of Te-in: Though 
I will have twelve Lords to rule over mor- 
tals, yet will I not give to any one of them 
a certain division of the earth for himself. 

And when Sudga was thus founded in 
his new heavenly place he called his Lords 
about him and said unto them: Go ye 
down to mortals, to T-loyovogna, who hath 
a small kingdom in the valley of Hachchi- 
satij, in Vind'yu, for I will make him king 
of all the earth, even as I am ruler of hea- 
ven. And by obsessions and otherwise ye 
shall lead him forth to conquer and subdue. 
Precede ye him in his journeyings, and 
cause mortals to fear him, that they be 
easily overcome. Twelve million angels I 
allot to you as your army, nor shall ye 
return into my presence until ye have made 
made T-loyovogna king of Vind-yu. After 
that I shall bestow you according to merit. 

The twelve Lords, with their twelve 
million angels of war, departed for the 
earth, and came to Varaja, the city where 
lived and ruled T-loyovogna, and they cov- 
ered the regions even beyond the 
Valley of Hachchisatij. T-loyovogna 
was the son of Hucrava, who was the son 
of Han Cyavarat, who was the son of Aipi- 
vohu, sacred in su'is to the Gods and Lords 
of heaven. So T-loyovogna talked with 
Sudga's chief Lord, who said unto him: 
Behold, thou shalt proclaim thyself king 
of all the world; for I and the hosts of 
heaven are with thee. 

T-loyovogna said: Alas, mine is the 
weakest of kingdoms; I have not a thou- 
sand soldiers. Other kings will laugh at 
me. But the Lord answered him, saying: 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



347 



What are mortal kings in the hands of Dy- 
aus, he who was Sudga? I say unto the 
nations of the earth: Go down! and they 
fall. I say: Rise ye up! and they rise. 
Man looketh to stone and clay and water 
for great power; but I that am unseen am 
greater than all the lands and the waters of 
the earth, for I rule over them, and over 
heaven also. I will have but one king on 
the earth; and as I rule the angels of hea- 
ven, even so shalt thou rule mortals, and es- 
tablish thee and me forever! For thy heirs, 
and their heirs after them, shall have do- 
minion over every kingdom and country in 
the world. 

T-loyovogna said: I fear thee, O Dy- 
aus; I know thy power. But how can a 
king go to war without soldiers? Or an 
army without arms? The Lord answered 
him: Send thy proclamation unto kings 
far and near, commanding them to bow 
down unto thee. And presently I will 
come unto thee and lead thee forth, and 
thou shalt conquer and subdue them, and 
not a hair of thy head shall be harmed. 

T-loyovogna did as commanded; and 
some days after his proclamation had been 
sent unto the nearest kings, all of whom 
knew him well, he mustered his army of 
seven hundred men and one hundred wo- 
men. And they that had neither spear, nor 
sword, nor scythe, nor bow and arrows, 
took clubs, and clappers, and pans, to make 
noise with, and others took lanterns. 

The first city they approached was Ab- 
tuib, ruled over by Azhis, who had an army 
of four thousand men and one thousand 
women. When near the place, T-loyovog- 
na sent his demand for the surrender of the 
city. Azhis answered him not, but said 
unto his army: Go ye and surround yon- 
der fool, and destroy him and his army. 

Now, behold, the night came on, very 
dark, ere the attack was made. And the 
Lord said unto T-loyovogna: Command 
thy soldiers to light their lamps. T-loyo- 
vogna said: I fear, O Lord; for will not 
lamps expose us unto death? But the 
Lord said: Light the lamps! So when the 
lamps were lighted the enemy began to 
march as if to surround them, some going 
one way and some the other. And the 
Lord's angels made lights also, to the left 
and to the right, so that the enemy, in or- 
der to surround the lights, kept extending 



in two lines, away from each other. Pres- 
ently, they judged by the lights that there 
were tens of thousands of soldiers come 
against them. Suddenly, now, T-loyovog- 
na's army sounded their pans and kettles, 
and set up furious howls and screams; and 
in the same time the angels of heaven cast 
stars of light in the midst of Azhis' army, 
and they became panic-stricken and fled in 
all directions, save three hundred who were 
captured and put to death. Then T-loyo- 
vogna sent one hundred men into the city 
and captured Azhis and slew him. After 
this, T-loyovogna entered the city and de- 
clared the place his. 

And whilst it was yet night, thousands 
and thousands of the people came and 
prostrated themselves before T-loyovogna, 
swearing allegiance. And in the morning 
of the next day he proclaimed himself king; 
and he impressed thirty thousand men to 
build a temple to Dyaus; and yet other 
twenty thousand to change the streets, and 
otherwise beautify the place. In forty days 
the temple was completed, and was large 
enough for eight thousand souls to do sac- 
rifice in at one time. T-loyovogna com- 
pelled the people to prostrate themselves 
on their bellies and pray to Dyaus, whose 
home was in Ahl-burj, a high heavenly 
place, a mountain above the mountains. 

After this T-loyovogna changed the 
name of the city to Savazata, signifying, 
first fire-place; and he appointed to rule 
over it Vistaqpa, to be governor, with right 
to bequeath it to his son after him. For 
Sudga had said: To concentrate power, 
this is the greatest. There shall be but one 
heavenly ruler, and his Lords shall be his 
helpmates. Even so shall there be but one 
king, and his governors shall be his help- 
mates in the same manner. 

T-loyovogna then marched forward, to 
conquer and subdue another city; which he 
accomplished also, and changed the name, 
appointed a governor, making all the peo- 
ple swear allegiance to himself as king, and 
to Sudga, the Dyaus, as heavenly ruler, cre- 
ator of worlds. 

In this way, even after the same manner 
as Kan Kwan in Jaffeth, did T-loyovogna 
proceed in Vind'yii, from city to city, con- 
quering and subduing. For the Gods, Te- 
in and Sudga, had oft conferred together on 



348 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



this subject previously, and had long ex- 
perience in manipulating mortals in their 
games of life and death, nor did mortals 
mistrust the power above them. 

CHAPTER XLVIII. 

At this time the heavenly kingdoms of 
Baal and Ashtaroth contained more than 
twelve thousand million angels. 

When Osiris, the false God of Arabin'- 
ya and her heavens, left De'yus in Hored, 
satan spake to him, saying: Osiris, 
thou art a fool! Thou deservest to be 
ground to dust! Behold thy wisdom and 
power, and yet thou cringest to thy infer- 
iors on every side. Wert thou not made 
as well; and withal, as masterly in making 
others to bow to thy will and decrees? 
What more is required for Gods or men, 
than to make slaves of others, to do him 
honor and reverence? 

Then Osiris said: O that I had 
struck out from the first for my- 
self! But I will amend my time. When 
I am in my heavenly place I will send to 
the earth to my laboring Gods, Baal and 
Ashtaroth, to come to me, and I will make 
our three kingdoms into one, and mine 
shall be chief. And I will offer emoluments 
to the best, highest grades in Hored, there- 
by drawing from De'yus his best fruits and 
flowers, and I will send to him some two 
or three thousand million of my super- 
abundant drujas. 

Accordingly, when Osiris arrived at 
Agho'aden, his heavenly place, he sent 
messengers down to the earth to Baal and 
Ashtaroth, summoning them at once to his 
presence. And they came, being attended, 
each, with ten thousand companions, be- 
sides heralds, musicians and trumpeters. 
Osiris had made great preparation for 
them. His receiving hosts, one million, 
were newly adorned for the occasion. The 
roadway, for three hundred miles, was il- 
lumed with pillars of fire. The Holy Coun- 
cil, half a million, were in extra session. 
The laborers, four thousand million, were 
granted a day of rest. So that when Baal 
and Ashtaroth entered the heavenly capi- 
tal, it was a magnificent scene, and as if in 
fact Osiris, the false, was a mighty God. 

Great were the ceremonies and saluta- 



tions between the Gods, as also with the 
generals, captains, marshals and others; to 
describe which a whole book might be 
written and yet not mention one-half. Af- 
ter the reception, Osiris proclaimed an ex- 
tra day of recreation to Agho'aden, and in 
the meantime he and Baal and Ashtaroth 
retired to a private chamber beyond the 
throne, to the east, to consult on the mat- 
ters cf heaven and earth. 

Osiris said: My brother and sister, ye 
are my loves; the worlds are all vain else! 
De'yus is the most selfish of Gods, and un- 
reasonable. He said to me: Thou shouldst 
keep up the grades! Now, behold ye, his 
own grades are broken down. As I and 
other Gods send him contributions in sub- 
jects, so remain such subjects; no more 
education for them in Hored. Then he 
complaineth and assumeth to dictate. And 
this for De'yus' glory. Not a word for 
lifting angels or mortals up out of dark- 
ness. 

Baal said: A most unreasonable God. 
Saidst thou not to him: O that I had the 
power and means thou hast! What great 
good I would do! 

Ashtaroth said: This I have found be- 
fore, the greater power a God hath, the less 
he doeth for others' good. As for my 
part, what good can I do? I have scarce 
two thousand million slaves, all told! O 
that I had a kingdom like De'yus! But 
what proposest thou, O Osiris, thou far- 
seeing God? 

Baal further said: Ashtaroth, thou wise 
Goddess, thou hast expressed mine own 
soul. My kingdom is but little larger than 
thine. I am a very helpless God indeed. 
But once I reach De'yus' means, my soul's 
delight will be to fill all the heavens full of 
schools and hospitals! But speak thou, 
Osiris, whatsoever thou hast resolved is 
wise. As for myself I have been two thou- 
sand years trying to put myself in good po- 
sition first, so I could help others. 

Osiris said: To cut loose from De'yus; 
this is wisdom. To send drujas into De'- 
yus' kingdom, is greater wisdom. To es- 
tablish Agho'aden as the all highest hea- 
venly kingdom, with myself at the God- 
head, and ye twain to be my sole Gods of 
the earth, is the greatest wisdom. 

Baal said: As I swear, thou hast spoken 
at last what I have for five hundred years 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



349 



hoped to hear thee say. To thee am I 
sworn forever. Put thou upon me whatso- 
ever thou wilt. 

Ashtaroth said: Now am I blessed 
above all Goddesses. What I have heard 
thee speak is what I would have spoken. 

Osiris said: It is enough, then, this 
I proclaim, and on our crossed hands we 
swear: Agho'aden, All Highest Heaven! 
Osiris, Son of the All Central Lights! The 
Most High God! His only Son, Baal, 
Ruler of the Corporeal Earth! His only 
Daughter, Ashtaroth, Ruler of the Corpor- 
eal Earth! Fidelity and Union forever! 

Thus they swore themselves into the 
Godhead. And on the next day Osiris 
sent messengers to De'yus, in his heavenly 
place, informing him of what had been 
done, and adding thereto: But thou, De - 
yus, I cut thee off from these earth regions. 
Get thy supplies whither thou canst. Ad- 
versity doth a proud soul some good. 

CHAPTER XLIX. 

Osiris said to Baal and Ashtaroth: Go 
ye down to the earth and subdue it; and 
your first labor shall be in Arabin'ya, and 
Par'si'e, and Heleste; after that ye shall 
fall upon remote parts and subdue them 
unto ourselves also. But go ye not as other 
Gods, to destroy mortals, for we want them 
to propagate and make subjects for us. Nor 
pursue ye them, tribe against tribe, putting 
them to death if they worship not Osiris 
or Baal or Ashtaroth. Nay, not even the 
worshippers of the Great Spirit, except 
those whose spirits we cannot catch at time 
of death; them destroy. But suffer mortals 
to worship as they may, and if they worship 
the Creator, say unto them: It is well. 
If they worship Ahura, say: It is well. If 
De'yus: Yea, it is well; for all of these are 
but one person, who is Osiris, whose high 
heavenly place is Agho'aden. Thus teach 
them. 

This also shall ye do: Re-establish 
places of learning, teaching the Osirian 
law; <~ause to be rebuilt, houses of philos- 
ophy, oracles and temples; and in all such 
places where mortals come to consult the 
spirits, provide ye spirits who shall 
answer through the oracles for benefit of 
our dominions. It was ourselves that gave 
the name Lord God to the Arabin'yans; it 



was ourselves that gave the name De'yus 
to Par'si'e and Heleste. Let us not waste 
ourselves undoing what hath been done, 
but appropriate it to ourselves. 

Such, then, was the basis on which these 
three Gods set out to establish heaven and 
earth. Osiris gave to Baal and Ashtaroth, 
in addition to their own kingdoms, twelve 
Lords each, to labor with them in the 
earth department; and every Lord was al- 
lotted one million spirit soldiers, to be 
under the Lord's jurisdiction. 

With this, Baal and Ashtaroth returned 
to their heavenly kingdoms on the earth, 
and at once set about their labors. First, 
by inspiring mortal kings and queens, who, 
being thus inspired, impressed tens of thou- 
sands and hundreds of thousands of their 
subject to do the building. And in seven 
years' time there were built in Parsi'e and 
Arabin'ya four thousand altars for the sa- 
cred dances; seven thousand temples of 
sacrifice, four hundred and seventy oracle 
temples, and thirty-one sar'gis temples, 
where the Lords took on corporeal forms 
and talked and reasoned with mortals; es- 
pecially on the stars and moon and on the 
earth; teaching the philosophers the four 
motions of the earth; axial, oscillaic, or- 
bitic and vorkum; the plan of the hissa- 
gow, and the cycles of the earth; the cycles 
of the sun, and the cycle of the sun's sun; 
the north star-belt therein, and the vortices 
that move them all. 

And the inhabitants of Arabin'ya and 
Par'si'e and Heleste began again to pros- 
per, and became mighty. But after many 
years, behold, Baal and Ashtaroth rebelled 
against Osiris, and seceded from him. 
And this was the end of the heavenly 
confederacy founded by De'yus. As for 
the far-off Gods in other divisions of the 
earth, they seceded at the time Osiris and 
Te-in and Sudga did. And from this time 
on, no more spirits were sent to the Lord 
God, the false, the author of the name De'- 
yus. 

When Baal and Ashtaroth seceded from 
Osiris and resumed their own kingdoms, 
behold, in all the divisions of the earth, ev- 
ery God was for himself and his own king- 
dom. But between Osiris and Baal and 
Ashtaroth a triangular war ensued in refer- 
ence to the boundaries and divisions of the 
land of the earth. 



350 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



Now, therefore, the self-Gods had be- 
come the beginning of a new order of do- 
minion in heaven and earth, every one in 
his own way. 

CHAPTER L. 

After the meeting between De'yiis and 
Osiris and Sudga, when De'yiis was left 
alone, he thus reasoned: Since Sudga and 
Osiris have thus left me uncivilly amidst a 
most disgusting quarrel, it must follow 
that on their arrival home they will secede, 
taking their kingdoms with them. Well, 
it will be well; I will the more warmly bind 
my fellowship to Te-in, and we twain shall 
overthrow Sudga and Osiris, and take all 
their spoils. 

Whilst De'yiis thus soliloquized, mes- 
sengers came from Che-su-gow, Te-in's 
heavenly place, bringing this word: Greet- 
ing to thee, our Lord God: Te-in hath se- 
ceded, and taken both his heavenly and his 
corporeal diminions unto himself. With an 
army of two hundred million angel war- 
riors he is walling his heavenly kingdom 
around on every side; none can pass or re- 
pass without his permission. 

Before De'yiis recovered from his sur- 
prise, behold, other messengers came from 
Sudga's heavenly place, saying: Greeting 
to thee, our Lord God: Sudga hath seced- 
ed, taking with him his heavenly kingdom 
and his earth dominions, Vind'yu! With 
an army of two hundred million angel 
warriors he is walling his heavenly king- 
dom around on every side; none can pass 
or repass without his permission! De'yus 
said: So alike and like! Then these ras- 
cal Gods had this planned beforehand! 

Presently other messengers arrived, say- 
ing: Greeting to thee, our one-time Lord 
God of heaven and earth! Osiris and Baal 
and Ashtaroth have seceded, taking their 
heavenly kingdoms and their mortal do- 
minions with them. I, Osiris have spoken. 
Thy higher grades I will draw unto myself; 
my lower grades I will banish unto thee! 

De'yus said: Well, it is well. I will 
now make stronger the other heavenly di- 
visions unto me; and the earth divisions, 
too long neglected by me; Uropa, Guata- 
ma, North and South, and their heavenly 
places. But whilst he thus soliloquized, 



behold, messengers arrived from these 
places, also announcing their secession in 
like manner. Then De'yus was silent for 
a long while, considering. But satan came 
to him, saying: 

Darkness cometh unto all the great, for 
by this the light is made to shine brighter. 
Now, since all access to the corporeal 
earth is cut off, and since all thy supplies 
for food and raiment must come up from 
the earth, it followeth that thou shalt 
lower Hored, thy heavenly place, nearer to 
the face of the earth. The which accom- 
plished, thou shalt send ten thousand mill- 
ion of thy warrior angels against these re- 
bellious Gods and despoil them of their 
dominions, and cast them into hell, and 
repossess thou the whole earth. 

De'yus said: It is true! My way is 
clear. These rascally Gods know not how 
foolishly they have exposed themselves. 
Hored is wide enough to cover them up. 
And by fire will I chase the drujas upon 
them, ten thousand million strong; flood 
them with such foulness that their king- 
doms will go to pieces under them and suf- 
focate them in the horrid stench. 

De'yus then called together his vice- 
Gods, and his Holy Council, and his high- 
est raised officers; and he related to them 
what had occurred, and his plans ahead. 
But that he might the better deliberate and 
gain their acquiescence, he granted a day 
of recreation, to meet on the following day 
at the trumpet call. ' But on the 
day of recreation, no less than seven 
hundred million of his highest grades left 
him and Hored, and descended to the hea- 
venly kingdoms of his former Gods, some 
to one and some to another, whilst a few 
of them descended to the earth to found 
small kingdoms of their own. Danger was 
already staring De'yus in the face. 

Accordingly, he at once chose his offi- 
cers, and set them to work, but owing to 
their lack of knowledge in such matters, 
only a small section was bound and lowered 
at one time, at which rate a hundred years 
would be required to accomplish the work. 
Hereat, De'yus' heart began to fail him. 
The prophecies of the higher Gods, that he 
and his kingdoms would be ultimately 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



351 



broken up and cast into hell, began to show 
signs of realization fearful to contemplate. 

De'yiis had no time for war, but must 
now use every stratagem in his power to 
prevent dismemberment in his own king- 
dom. In these straits a good fortune came 
to him in a ji'ay'an harvest falling in all the 
atmospherean heavens, compressing and 
falling, so that his lowest grades were pro- 
vided with sustenance from above, and they 
were pacified. 

Jehovih had spoken to Cpenta-armij, in 
her far-off etherean worlds, saying: Be- 
hold, Earth, she entereth now the ji'ay'- 
an fields of Tu'e'vraga, in My high roads, 
Loo-sutsk. A little while will I feed the 
self-Gods of the lower heavens, and lead 
them on to know My power. 

CHAPTER LI. 

Jehovih spake to God, His Son, in Cra- 
oshivi, saying: Prepare thou, for the fall 
of ji'ay in atmospherea. Earth and her 
heavens enter Loo-sutsk, seventy years in 
the rates of seven hundred; forty years in 
five hundred; twenty years in a'ji! Be thou 
advised; for Craoshivi shall fall to thirty, 
and Hored be buried in the earth. Call 
thou My Son, Ahura, and reveal My 
words! 

So God, in Craoshivi, advised his High 
Council, and also sent messengers in haste 
to Vara-pishanaha, to Ahura, and ac- 
quainted him. After this God propounded 
in Council. What can Craoshivi do for 
Anuhasaj ? Thereupon the members spake 
at great length, more than a thousand of 
them. 

So God decreed: A commission to wait 
on Anuhasaj and inform him of his dan- 
ger, and offer to succor and save him. 
This is the message thus sent: 

To thee, O Anuhasaj, greeting in Jeho- 
vih's name, and by our love assured. Thou 
art adjudged to be in perilous condition. 
Behold, one hundred and thirty years' 
pressure will fall on the heavens of 
Earth; Craoshivi will go down to the 
depths of hada. Reach up thy hands, and 
I will come and save thee and thy kingdom. 
Wilt thou withdraw thine armies and per- 
mit the resurrection of thy lowest grades? 

Anuhasaj answered in these words: 



Who art thou that thus assaileth my peace- 
ful kingdom? Thou pretended son of the 
Void Nothingness? Call thou on me as 
becometh one with thy small kingdom, and 
if thou need help for thyself, or for thy pau- 
pers, I will give unto thee! 

Thereupon God returned this answer: 
Be thou patient with me, O brother: If it 
be that I am proved to be in darkness, and 
thou in the light, I will make thee ample 
amends. If on the other hand I be in the 
light, and thou in darkness, I will say 
naught that would wound thee. If thou 
wilt apply thyself diligently to solve the 
place of Earth and her heavens thou wilt 
find in truth the coming pressure whereof 
I told thee. Think not that my words are 
spoken at random, but try them by proph- 
ecy and by mathematics. 

As to the coming danger, it is an easy 
matter to estimate. A thousand years ago, 
when thou first established thyself and thy 
heaven, Hored possessed an average grade 
above fifty. And there were four 
thousand million of them. In two hundred 
years thou hadst six thousand million, and 
the grade was raised to sixty-five. In the 
next two hundred years the number was 
nearly doubled, but the grade had fallen to 
forty. And two hundred years later the 
inhabitants had nearly doubled again, but 
the grade had fallen to twenty-eight. In 
the next two hundred years, the increase 
in numbers was at the same rate as the de- 
crease in the grade. 

Now behold, thy twenty-eight thousand 
million, more than half of whom are in 
Hored, are below grade ten. And when 
thou didst first possess Hored, a ten grade 
could not survive thereon. Think not that 
some accidental thing will raise so great a 
weight. Look into this matter, as to what 
thou hast done! Thou hast persuaded thy 
hosts not to look up to Jehovih and His 
kingdoms, and lo, they incline downward 
to the earth. Yea, they have already filled 
the earth with war and destruction. 

Thou shalt not hope to throw these 
things on thy Gods, for they will turn 
against thee and accuse thee. At present 
they are content to found kingdoms of their 
own. But they will also come to an end. 
Because they have seceded from thee, let 
it be evidence that all the highest grades 
will follow in the same way. 



352 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J 



As for Craoshivi, her lowest grades are 
above fifty, and therefore self-sustaining; 
her highest grades are ninety-nine and her 
average eighty-eight. And hundreds of 
millions of these are such as my Lords 
have rescued from thy bondage; others, 
such Faithists on the earth as thy false 
Gods put to death for refusing to bow to 
thee. And have they not proved it is bet- 
ter to suffer death than to renounce faith 
in Jehovih? Otherwise they had now been 
within the company of thy slaves, toiling 
in darkness. Yea, my kingdom is made up 
of those that were despised and abused; 
and of those that thy Gods slew in war, 
chaotic and mad. For my asaphs followed 
thy cruel wars and gathered in the spirits 
of the slain, whom thou wouldst not have. 
Thou callest them poor still. Why, so they 
are; they are washed white as snow; and 
because they have been taught to keep on 
casting aside all accumulation, save knowl- 
edge and goodness of heart, in which they 
are rich indeed. 

They would come to thee now in pity 
to take thy people by the hand and deliver 
them away from thee and darkness. And if 
thy slaves be not delivered away from thee, 
they will surely, soon or late, turn upon 
thee and cast thee into hell. I pray thee, 
therefore, assume thou conversion to Je- 
hovih, and cast thy kingdom upon Him 
whilst thou may. For I have the power 
and the means to deliver thee and thy 
slaves. Yea, I will give thee a new name, 
and hide thee away, that they cannot find 
thee. And thou shalt be one with me in 
my holy place. Thus the matter remained. 

CHAPTER LII. 

In Vara-pishanaha Ahura had now toil- 
ed nearly two thousand years with his peo- 
ple, who for a great part had been drujas, 
but were now high in the grades. More 
than two thousand million of them had 
been raised into light; becoming Brides 
and Bridegrooms to Jehovih, and had been 
delivered into the etherean worlds. 

But Ahura suffered not his dominions 
to be depleted, but did after the manner of 
God in Craoshivi, and sent down to hada 
and to the earth and gathered in, both the 
fallen angels of De'yus and his false Gods, 
and also the chaotic and foul-smelling spir- 
its, wild and frenzied; and Ahura had 



them brought to Vara-pishanaha and 
there sorted, and nursed and restored and 
put to school and to factories, and taught 
and developed; hundreds of millions of 
them becoming bright, wise and of great 
love and power. 

God sent to Ahura, saying: Greeting to 
thee in the name of Jehovih: Because of 
the coming darkness which will soon press 
upon atmospherea from every quarter, and 
the trials that will be put upon Gods and 
angels, let us unite our heavenly kingdoms! 
Let us bring our plateaux together, and 
thy kingdom shall be my kingdom, and 
mine shall be thine; and one of us shall be 
manager in heaven, and the other shall de- 
scend to hada and to the earth during the 
great darkness. 

To this Ahura replied: Greeting to 
thee, God of Earth and her heavens, and 
with love and most high reverence. There 
is wisdom in thy design. I will do whatso- 
ever thou demandest, to fulfill this great 
work. 

So God, of Craoshivi, and Ahura, 
brought their forces to bear on their re- 
spective plateaux, to unite them. And their 
places were two thousand miles apart, to 
the northeast and southwest; and Vara- 
pishanaha was seven thousand miles below 
Craoshivi. 

Now the coming pressure would drive 
them both down near the earth's surface; 
to steer Vara-pishanaha to the northeast- 
ward, and to steer Craoshivi to the south- 
westward, would bring one over the other; 
and to lower the grade of Craoshivi would 
bring the twain in contact. And the in- 
habitants of both dominions were so high 
in power and wisdom that their presence 
was higher than the place they inhabited. 
So that the element of the plateaux was all 
that was required to be moved. 

To find the power required, and to ar- 
range the ranks for the proceding, God 
appointed officers and set them to work, 
and the officers reported back that the work 
could be completed in twelve years. And 
Ahura united with God; and there were en- 
gaged in this labor three thousand million 
angels. And they made a bridge betwixt 
the two plateaux, and it was completed 
during the first year; and it so connected 
them that millions of angels could pass and 
repass whilst the work was going on. 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



353 



Yet God's labors and Ahura's labors is 
receiving the spirits of the earth, of the 
Faithists, and of others from the regions of 
hada, ceased not. Their thousands of 
otevans sailed the heavens in every 
direction, gathering in the unfortunate. 
And now that the self-Gods in hada had 
quarreled amongst themselves and separ- 
ated, De'yus' blockade was broken. His 
mighty standing army against Jeho- 
vih's believers had melted away; and 
the otevans sped hither and yonder 
unmolested. And they gathered in 
many a thousand; yea, tens of thousands, 
of De'yus' highest raised angels. The 
lowest would not come, they had been 
taught to hate with vengeance Jehovih and 
His worshippers; to look upon all ills as 
from Jehovih; to look upon all good de- 
lights and blessings as the gifts of De'yus, 
the Lord their God. 

Suffice it to say, in twelve years 
the great heavens, Craoshivi and Vara-pish- 
anaha, were united and become as one 
place. And there was a time of rejoicing 
and delight; great recreation and commun- 
ion; great rites and ceremonies, and wor- 
shipping and rejoicing before Jehovih. Al- 
ready was the pressure of ji'ay upon the 
heavens and the earth. Hored was fast 
falling toward the earth; De'yus' highest 
raised had already gone; his kingdom was 
becoming a kingdom of fools and idlers, a 
most dangerous class when once want and 
starvation come upon them. 

De'yus, still stubborn, and, withal, hop- 
ing for a change from some cause he saw 
not, had now no longer time to quarrel 
with his truant Gods, but from day to day, 
liour to hour, was kept on a strain to avert 
the threatened doom. 

Meanwhile, the false Gods, his own 
■one-time pupils, were now heaping into his 
distracted kingdom millions and millions of 
drujas, who had been taught on earth that 
.all that was required of them was to call on 
the Savior, Anubi, and the Lord God, and 
that when they died they would go straight 
to glory to dwell on the holy hill of the 
Lord God. And these poor creatures the 
self-Gods now applauded, helping them on, 
saying: Yea, go on; your Savior, Anubi, 
will open the gate and pass you in. Hence- 
forth, forever, ye shall do nothing but bow 
to De'yus. 



And these spirits of darkness, like idi- 
ots, were bowing all the time, day and 
night, doing nothing but bowing, and say- 
ing: Blessed Anubi! He can save me! 
Glory to the Lord our God! Then they 
would begin again: Blessed Anubi! My 
Savior! Glory be to De'yus! For this 
was all they knew; neither would they hear 
nor see else; they were as wild people; 
with outbursting eyes, looking for Anubi; 
looking for De'yus; but bowing incessant- 
ly in all directions; millions of them, tens 
of millions. 

Anubi gave up his olace in conse- 
quence, and in fear of them; and his hea- 
venly city was like a house without a keep- 
er, where throngs go in and out, around 
about, forever shouting: O my blessed 
Savior, Anubi! Glory be to the Lord God. 
But Anubi was with the false Lord God, 
striving to help him find some means of 
escape or safety. 

CHAPTER LIII. 

Darker and darker, the hadan fields 
palled before the touch of Jehovih's hand, 
to try the self-assumed Lord God and his 
heavenly works. As if an epoch new and 
terrible had come to one so audacious, 
who foremost in heaven and earth had 
sought to banish the worship and the name 
of the Great Spirit from mortals, and give 
them instead a heavenly ruler in the image 
of man. 

For before this, all nations knew the 
office of Gods and Lords, and reverenced 
them as Jehovih's high officers, raised up 
spirits of the dead, wise and powerful. But 
now, in five great divisions of the earth, 
satan's hadan chief had bound mortals to 
his name, with threatened penalties, and 
even death, for mentioning Jehovih's name. 
And, to put them to the test, made oaths 
on burning flesh, that whoso would not 
eat thereof should die. For this was the 
criterion before the courts that they who 
refused fish and flesh food, or would not 
pollute the body by intoxicating drinks 
and noxious smoke, were possessed of Je- 
hovihian worship, and so deserved torture 
and death. 

So the names of Lord and God, and 
Lord God, and De'yus, had now become for 
a thousand years fixed in mortals' minds 
as the Creator, a large man sitting on a 



354 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



throne in Hored, his heavenly seat, watched 
and guarded by his son, Anubi, keeper of 
the scales, and of the gate to heaven. To 
make a plausible story of which, the an- 
gels, through oracles, and magicians, and 
priests, and prophets, proclaimed that: In 
the beginning God created the heavens and 
the earth, and all things therein and. there- 
on. And he was tired, and rested; and, as 
if creation was a completed work, left cer- 
tain laws to run the wonderful machine 
whilst he sat afar off, looking on; smiling 
at the pranks of mortals, and their failure 
to understand him, with a devil and a hor- 
rid fire to torture their souls, if they sang 
not in praise of this compounded, false 
Lord God. 

Thus turned he, their false God, the 
voice of mortals from Him Who is Ever 
Present, Whose speech hath every soul 
heard, Whose Presence moveth all things 
in heaven and earth! The false God turned 
them to sing and pray to himself, so he 
should clutch and bind their souls in end- 
less slavery; untaught, half fed; as drudges, 
to bring into his capital, provender and 
building stones to glorify him forever. 

Over Jaffeth, far and wide, this traitor 
to Jehovih had sealed in stone, and papy- 
rus, and wood, and sacred cloth, his name, 
Ho-Joss, to suit the Panic voice; as whilst 
in Vind'yu he made them engrave it Dy- 
aus, to fit the Vedic tongue; and thence 
in Fonece to suit the higher-spirited race, 
Adonia-Egad, and go over to Heleste, and, 
in less distinct Greece, whisper Zeus, 
saying: These words are watchwords 
to gain Anubi's ear, and turn the 
scales for endless paradise, saying: Go ye, 
engrave my names; and, in mortal librar- 
ies, register my great exploit, of how I cre- 
ated the world. And make me spotless 
pure, letting sin into the races of men by 
Osiris' cunning tale of We-it's weakness by 
fault of the earth. For I am not come 
like Jehovih's captains, spirits sent to rule 
men for a season, but a very God of blood 
and bones, who once, in terrible anger, 
flooded the earth to drown my disobedient 
sons and daughters. Make ye them to 
tremble and draw long breath when my 
name is spoken, or, by mine own soul, I 
will hurl heaven and earth into the endless 
chaos! 



Pressing downward ji'ay came, slowly 
and surely, the very motion spake as a 
million tongues, serious, awful. For many 
of the hosts of De'yiis were deserting him 
on all sides. As one in a small way 
may see on a sinking ship, how the expert 
swimmers, with strong arms, leap into the 
water boldly and swim for the far-off shore, 
whilst the helpless, in frantic rage, cluster 
fast upon the distracted officers, hindering 
them from doing good. • So began the 
tumult in the fast decending plateau, Ho- 
red, which was increased a hundred-fold 
by the flood of drujas cast upon De'yus' 
kingdom by his own traitorous false Gods. 

De'yiis' generals and captains first tried 
music to hold the forty thousand million 
to peace and order; but the es'enaurs them- 
selves took fright, and fled by the million, 
flying down to the earth to Osiris', or Te- 
in's, or Sudga's kingdoms, and over-flood- 
ing mortals with ghostly revelries. Next, 
by parades, and rites, and great proces- 
sions, did De'yiis' officers seek to divert 
the panic-stricken millions. 

Thus for years this maddened God with 
wonderful strength of will almost held his 
own, inventing tens of thousands of strata- 
gems. But at last, in the downward 
course, Hored touched upon the corporeal 
earth; and suddenly, as if startled by the 
shock, the frantic millions screamed, and 
then, alas, all order died. 

The doors of hell were opened! The 
maddened mob broke loose to pillage or to 
destroy De'yus' throne and capital, with 
all their splendor. And then rushed 
in the fault-finders, shouting: Thou lying 
God, but like a man, who art thou? And 
thou, Anubi, deceiving judge! A thou- 
sand horrible deaths to thee! 

But the unlearned drujas knew not 
who was rank or officer, God or judge, but 
seized the pale and trembling De'yus and 
Anubi, and more than a million officers, 
overpowered them, by ten million to one, 
pressed on by the foul-smelling crowd. 
And now, with blows and kicks and cuffs, 
on every side began the awful fray. Till 
stretched as wide as the Earth, the count- 
less millions were plunged into hell. Here- 
upon, to right and left, was now an un- 
ceasing combat, and all the hosts of the 
Lord God were sworn for vengeance 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMU 



355 



against any one they came against. Then 
came the torturers, casting into hells most 
offensive smells and suffocating gases, 
crammed in the nose and mouth of their 
victims. No more were De'yiis and Anubi 
seen, but swallowed up in measureless 
darkness where every soul sought nothing 
good, but labored hard to give unto others 
excruciating tortures for vengeance sake. 

CHAPTER LIV. 

God in Craoshivi prayed Jehovih what 
he should do to release De'yus and Anubi; 
Jehovih answered, saying: My Son, thou 
shalt first labor for them that desire; who- 
so courteth darkness deserveth not thy 
hand. I have proclaimed from since the 
olden time, warning to them that put Me 
away; but in their self-conceit they denied 
My person and power. Wert thou, this 
day, to deliver from hell De'yus and Anu- 
bi, and their thousands of millions of self- 
torturing slaves, they would but use their 
deliverance to mock My creation, saying: 
It lasted not; it was but a breath of wind. 
In four hundred years I will bring 
Earth into another dawn of light. Till then, 
let De'yus and Anubi and their hosts take 
their course. 

God inquired concerning Osiris and Te- 
in and Sudga, and Jehovih answered him, 
saying: Sufficient unto them is the light 
they have received. Suffer them also to 
take their course, for they also shall be- 
come involved in hells of their own build- 
ing. But be thou attentive to My Chosen, 
the Faithists, in all parts of heaven and 
earth; not suffering one of them to fall 
into the hells of My enemies. 

God acquainted Ahura with Jehovih's 
words; then Ahura prayed to Jehovih, 
saying: O Father, grant Thou to me that 
I may go to Osiris, and to Te-in, and to 
Sudga, to plead Thy cause. Behold, De'- 
yus is locked up in hell; even high-raised 
Gods would not find it safe to go to him. 

Jehovih said: Why, O Ahura, desirest 
thou to go to Osiris and to Te-in and to 
Sudga? Knowest thou not, how difficult 
it is to alter the mind of a mortal man; 
and yet these self-Gods are ten-fold more 
stubborn! 

Ahura said: I know, I cannot change 
them; to break this matter of conceit, and 



all learned men are liable to fall therein, 
none but Thou, O Jehovih, hast power. 
But these self-Gods were long ago my 
most loved friends; behold, I will go to 
them as a father would to a son, and plead 
with them. Jehovih gave permission to 
Ahura to visit them, the three great self- 
Gods. 

So Ahura fitted out an otevan, and with 
ten thousand attendants, and one thousand 
heralds, and with five thousand musicians, 
besides the officers of the fire-ship, set 
sail for Che-su-gow, Te-in's heavenly 
place, over Jaffeth. And when he arrived 
near the place he halted and sent his her- 
alds ahead to inquire if he could have au- 
dience with Te-in. 

Te-in received the heralds cordially, 
and being informed of their object, sent 
back this word: Te-in, the most high ruler 
of heaven and earth, sendeth greeting to 
Ahura, commanding his presence, but for- 
bidding Ahura and his hosts from speak- 
ing to any soul in Che-su-gow save Te-in. 

Ahura received this insulting message 
with composure, and then proceeded and 
entered the capital city, the heavenly place 
of Te-in, where he was met by one million 
slaves, arrayed in the most gorgeous man- 
ner. These conducted him and his at- 
tendants to the arena, where Ahura was 
received by the marshals, who brought 
him to the throne, leaving the attendants 
in the arena. Here Te-in saluted on the 
sign of Taurus, and Ahura answered in the 
sign of Friendship. 

Te-in signalled privacy, and so all oth- 
ers fell back, leaving Ahura and Te-in 
alone. Te-in said: Come thou and sit 
beside me on the throne. Ahura said: Be- 
cause thou hast not forgotten me I am re- 
joiced. And he went up and sat on the 
throne. 

Te-in said: Because thou art my friend 
I love thee; because thou art beside me I 
am rejoiced. It is more than a thousand 
years since mine eyes have beholden thee. 
Tell me, Ahura, how is it with thyself and 
thy kingdom? 

Ahura said: As for myself I am hap- 
py; for the greater part, my kingdom is 
happy also. My trials have been severe 
and long enduring. But of my four thou- 
sand million, more than half of them are 



356 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



delivered beyond atmospherea, high rais- 
ed; and of the others they grade from fifty 
to ninety. 

Te-in said: And for more than two 
thousand years' toil, what hast thou gained 
hy striving to raise up these drujas? Ahu- 
ra said: This only, O Te-in, peace and re- 
joicing in my soul. 

Te-in said: Hereupon hang two phil- 
osophies: One seeketh peace and rejoic- 
ing by laboring with the lowest of the 
low; the other, by leading the highest of 
the high. As for me, the latter suiteth me 
better than the former. I tell thee, Ahura, 
all things come of the will; if we will our- 
selves to shut out horrid sights and com- 
plainings, such as the poor druk and the 
druj indulge in, we have joy in a higher 
heaven. To me it is thus; sympathy is our 
most damnable enemy, for it bindeth us to 
the wretched and miserable. To put 
away sympathy is to begin to be a great 
master over others, to make them sub- 
servient to our wills. 

Ahura said: Is it not a good thing to 
help the wretched? Te-in answered: To 
help them is like drinking nectar; to make 
one's senses buoyant for the time being, 
that is all. They relapse and are less res- 
olute that before, and depend on being 
helped again. For which reason he who 
helpeth the wretched doth wrong them 
-woefully. To make them know their 
places, this is the highest. For have not 
■even the Gods to submit to their places? 
To learn to be happy with one's place and 
condition is great wisdom. Herein have 
thousands of Gods fallen; they helped up 
the poor and wretched; as one may, in 
sympathy to serpents, take them into his 
house and pity them. They immediately 
turn and bite their helpers. But speak 
thou, O Ahura; for I have respect to thy 
words. 

Ahura said: If a man plant an acorn 
in a flower-pot, and it take root and grow, 
one of two things must follow: the growth 
must be provided against or the pot will 
burst. Even thus draweth, from the 
sources around about, the lowest druj in 
heaven. None of the Gods can bind him 
forever. Alas, he will grow. All our 
bondage over them cannot prevent the 
soul, soon or late, taking root and grow- 



ing. How, then, can we be Gods over 
them forever? 

Te-in said: Thou art a God over them; 
I am a God over them. Where is the dif- 
ference? 

Ahura said: I am not in mine own 
name; though I am God over them, yet I 
am not God over them. For I teach them 
they shall not worship me, but Jehovih. I 
train them that I may raise them away 
from me. Neither do my people serve me, 
but serve the Great Spirit. Thou teachest 
thy drujas that thou art the all highest, 
and that they shall be contented to serve 
thee everlastingly. Thou dost limit them 
to the compass of thy kingdom. I do not 
limit my subjects, but teach them that their 
progression is forever onward, upward. 

Te-in said: How do we not know but 
the time will come unto them, and they 
shall say: Alas, I was taught in error. 
They told me there was a Great Spirit, a 
Person comprising all things, but I have 
found Him not. Will they not then revolt 
also? Was not this the cause of De'yus' 
fall? He had searched the heavens to the 
extreme, but found not Jehovih. Then he 
returned, and possessed himself of heaven 
and earth. Although he failed, and is cast 
into hell, it is plain that his sympathy for 
drujas caused his fall. From his errors, I 
hope to guard myself; for I shall show no 
sympathy for the poor or wretched; neither 
will I permit education on earth or in hea- 
ven, save to my Lords or marshals. When 
a mortal city pleaseth me not, I will send 
spirits of darkness to flood it unto destruc- 
tion. Yea, they shall incite mortals to 
fire the place, and to riot and death. Thus 
will I keep the drujas of heaven forever 
busy playing games with mortals, and in 
bringing provender and diadems to for- 
ever glorify my heavenly kingdom. 

Ahura said: Where in all the world 
hath a self-God stood and not fallen? 

Te-in said: Thou mayest ask of mor- 
tals: Where is a kingdom or a nation 
that stood, and hath not fallen? Yet thou 
perceivest nations continue to try to found 
themselves everlastingly. But they are 
leveled in time. Things spring up and 
grow, and then fall into dissolution. Will 
it not be so with ourselves in the far fu- 
ture? Will we not become one with the 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



357 



ever-changing elements, and as nothing, 
and wasted away? 

Ahura said: One might say of man 
and spirits: There were some seeds plant- 
ed; and many of them rotted and returned 
to earth; but others took root and grew 
and became large trees. But yet, is it not 
true also of the trees that they have a time? 
For they die, and fall down, and rot, and 
also return to earth. Admit this to be 
true, O Te-in, and that the time may 
come when thou and I shall pass out of 
being, doth it not follow that for the time 
we live we should contribute all we can to 
make others happy? 

Te-in said: If by so doing it will ren- 
der ourselves happy, with no danger to 
our kingdoms, then yea, verily. For 
which reason are we not forced back after 
all to the position that we shall labor for 
our own happiness, without regard to oth- 
ers? One man delighteth in art, another 
in philosophy, another in helping the poor 
and wretched; another in eating and 
drinking, and another in ruling over oth- 
ers; shall not they all have enjoyment in 
the way of their desires? Shalt thou say to 
him that delighteth in eating and drinking: 
Stop thou; come and delight thyself help- 
ing the wretched! 

Ahura said: This I have seen; the in- 
telligent and clean have more delight than 
do the stupid and filthy; the rich more en- 
joyment than the poor. As for ourselves, 
we delight more in seeing the delighted 
than in seeing the wretched. More do we 
delight to see a child smile than to hear it 
cry; but there be such that delight more 
to make a child cry than to see it smile; 
but such persons are evil and take delight 
in evil. Shall we, then, indulge them in 
their means of delight? Or is there not a 
limit, as when we say: All men have a 
right to that which delighteth themselves, 
provided it mar not the delight of others? 

Te-in said: Thou hast reasoned well. 
We shall delight ourselves only in such 
ways as do not mar the delight of others. 

Whereupon Ahura said: Then I am 
not delighted with the manner of thy king- 
dom; and thou shouldst not practice what 
giveth me pain. Because thou hast re- 
solved to educate not mortals nor angels, 



thou hast raised a hideous wall in the face 
of the Gods. 

Te-in said: This also wilt thou admit: 
That as we desire to delight ourselves we 
should look for the things that delight us, 
turn away from things that delight us not. 
Therefore, let not the Gods turn their 
faces this way, but to their own affairs. 

Ahura said: Thou art wise, O Te-in. 
But this I have found; that something 
within us groweth, that will not down nor 
turn aside. In the beginning of life we 
look to ourselves, which the nature of the 
young; but when we grow, we take a wife, 
and we delight to see her delighted; then 
cometh offspring, and we delight to see 
them delighted. After this, we delight to 
see our neighbors delighted; and then the 
state, and then the whole kingdom. This 
delight to be delighted groweth within us; 
and when we become Gods we delight no 
longer in the delight of a few only, but we 
expand unto many kingdoms. As for my- 
self, I first delighted in the delight of Vara- 
pishanaha; but now I delight to see other 
Gods and other kingdoms delighted. For 
that, I have come to thee. I fear thy fate. 
I love thee. I love all thy people, good 
and bad. Behold, -this I have found, that 
it is an easier matter to allow a river to 
run its course than to dam it up; to dam 
up a river, and not have it overflow or 
break the dam, this I have not found. The 
course of the spirit of man is growth; it 
goeth onward like a running river. When 
thou shuttest up the mouth, saying: Thus 
far and no farther! I fear for thee. I tried 
this matter once; I was flooded; the dam 
was broken. I see thee shutting out knowl- 
edge from mortals and angels; but I tell 
thee, O Te-in, the time will come when 
the channel will be too broad for thee. 

Te-in said: How shall I answer such 
great wisdom? Where find a God like 
unto thee. O Ahura? And yet, behold, the 
Lord God, Anuhasaj, toiled with thee hun- 
dreds of years, and learned all these things; 
yea, he traveled in the far-off heavens, 
where there are Gods and kingdoms which 
have been for millions of years. And he 
came back and renounced the Great Per- 
son, Jehovih. He said: All things are not 
a harmonious whole; but a jumble; a dis- 
ordered mass, playing catch as catch can. 



358 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-AEMIJ 



Ahura said: And what hath befallen 
liim? And is here not a great argument? 
For we behold in all times, conditions and 
places, in heaven and on earth, wherever 
people assume doctrines like unto his, they 
tbegin to go down into hell. They flourish 
a little while, but only as a summer plant, 
to yield in the winter's blast. This I have 
seen for a long time coming against these 
heavens, even thine, that, as darkness 
crushed De'yiis, S o will thy heavenly do- 
minions soon or late fall, and in the shock 
and fray thou wilt suffer a fate like unto 
De'yus. 

Te-in said: For thy wise words, O 
Ahura, I am thy servant. I will consider 
thy argument, and remember thee with 
love. In a thousand years from now I 
may be. wiser; and I may have my kingdom 
so built up that it will be an argument 
stronger than words. 

Hereupon the two Gods brought their 
argument to a close, and Te-in signalled 
his vice-Gods and marshals, and they 
■came; and when Ahura and Te-in had sa- 
luted each other, Ahura was conducted 
away from the place of the throne, and af- 
ter that beyond the capital. The vice-Gods 
and marshals delivered bim to his own at- 
tendants, and with them he embarked in 
his otevan, and set sail for Sudga's hea- 
venly kingdom, over the land of Vind'yu. 

CHAPTER LV. 

Sudga, after assuming a heaven unto 
himself, moved it over the Nua Mountains 
and called it Hridat, in which place he had 
eight thousand million angel slaves, after 
the same manner as Te-in's. Sudga's cap- 
ital city, Sowachissa, his highest heavenly 
seat, was modeled after the fashion of 
Sanc-tu, De'yus' heavenly place in Hored, 
at the time of its greatest magnificence. 

The capital house of Sudga was made 
of precious stones and gems, the work of 
thousands of millions of angels for many 
years. And when Hored was pillaged, 
prior to De'yus being cast into hell, mill- 
ions of its most precious ornaments were 
stolen and brought to Hridat. The streets 
of Hridat were paved with precious stones; 
and an arena surrounded the palace on 
every side, set with crystals of every shade 
and color, and of every conceivable man- 



ner of workmanship. On the borders of 
the arena stood five hundred million senti- 
nels, arrayed in splendor such as only 
Gods had looked upon. Inside the line 
of sentinels were one million pillars of 
fire, kept brilliant day and night, by the 
toil of five hundred million slaves. Inside 
the line of the pillars of fire were one mill- 
ion marshals, so arrayed in splendor one 
could scarce look upon them. These were 
watch and watch, with two other groups 
of one million each, and they stood watch 
eight hours each. 

None but the vice-Gods and the high 
marshals could cross the arena to the pal- 
ace, walking, but must crawl on their bel- 
lies, and for every length crawled, they 
must kiss the pavement and recite an an- 
them of praise to Sudga, who now took 
both names, Sudga and Dyaus. Neither 
must any one repeat the same anthem 
twice, but it must be a new anthem for 
each and every length of the person. For 
a tall person, a thousand lengths were re- 
quired, from the line of marshals to the 
palace, a thousand anthems. So that only 
the few, as compared to his millions, ever 
laid eyes on the throne of Sudga. And 
after they so beheld him on the throne, 
for they were only permitted to gaze upon 
him but once, and that at a great distance, 
and amidst such a sea of fire they scarce 
could see him, then they must re-crawl 
back again to the place of beginning, again 
reciting another thousand anthems. Which 
made Sudga almost inaccessible, and per- 
mitted only such as were favored to even 
look upon him, which with the ignorant is 
a great power. 

When Ahura came to the capital and 
sent word to Sudga who he was, praying 
audience, Sudga gave orders to admit him, 
commanding Ahura to walk upright into 
his presence, along with the vice-Gods. 
Accordingly, in this manner Ahura came 
before Sudga, and saluted in Love and Es- 
teem, answered by Sudga in Friendship of 
Old. The latter at once commanded pri- 
vacy, and so all others withdrew, and Ahu- 
ra and Sudga went up and sat on the 
throne. 

Sudga said: Because thou hast come to 
see me I am overflowing with joy. Be- 
cause I know thou hast come to admonish 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



359 



me for my philosophy and the manner of 
my dominions, I respect thee. Because 
thou didst once try to found a kingdom of 
thine own, and failed, I sympathize with 
thee; but because thou went back on 
thyself and accepted Jehovih, and so was 
rescued from thy peril, I commiserate 
thee. 

Ahura said: To hear thy gifted tongue 
once more is my great joy. To know that 
no misfortune was in store for thee and 
thy kingdom would give me great delight. 
Because I love thee, and the people of thy 
mighty, heavenly kingdom, I have come 
to admonish thee and plead for Jehovih's 
sake. As for myself, I have found that to 
cast all my cares on Him, and then turn in 
and work hard for others, these two things 
give me the greatest happiness. 

Sudga said: Can a brave man justly 
cast his -cares upon another? Was not 
thyself given to thyself for thyself? If so, 
thou desirest none to work for thee? If 
so, how hast thou a right to work for oth- 
ers? If thou prevent them working out 
their own destiny, wrongest not thou 
them? Moreover, thou sayest: To cast 
thy cares on Jehovih, and to work hard 
for others, these two give thee the great- 
est happiness. Therefore, art thou not 
selfish to work for thine own happiness? 
For is not this what I am doing for myself 
in my own way? 

Ahura said: Grant all thy arguments, 
O Sudga, where shall we find the meas- 
ure of righteous works but in the sum of 
great results? For you or me to be hap- 
py, that is little; for a millions angels to 
be happy, that is little. But when we put 
two kingdoms alongside, and they be the 
same size, and have the same number of 
inhabitants, is it not just that we weigh 
them in their whole measure to find which 
of the two kingdoms hath the greater 
number of happy souls? Would not this 
be a better method of arriving at the high- 
est philosophy? 

Sudga said: Yea, that would be higher 
than logic, higher than reason. That 
would be the foundation of a sound the- 
ory. 

Ahura said: And have we not found, 
both in heaven and earth, that all king- 
doms that are overthrown have the cause 
of their fall in the unhappiness and disaf- 



fection of the ignorant. As soon as the 
masses begin to be in unrest, the rulers 
apply vigorous measures to repress them, 
but it is only adding fuel to the fire; it 
deadens it for a while, but only to have it 
burst forth more violently afterward. 

Sudga said: Thou reasonest well, O 
Ahura; go on. 

Ahura said: How, then, shall we de- 
termine the happiness of two kingdoms, 
in order to determine which hath the 
greater happiness? Are not revolts evi- 
dence of unhappiness? Hear me, then, O 
Sudga; where, in all the Jehovihian heav- 
ens, hath there ever been a revolt? And on 
Earth, where have the Jehovians, the 
Faithists, rebelled against their rulers? 
Behold, in the far-off etherean heavens, the 
Nirvanian fields, hath never been any God 
or Chief environed in tortures. As for 
my own kingdom, my people will not re- 
bel against me, nor need I fortify myself 
against disaster. 

Sudga said: Thou art wise, O Ahura. 
The only way to judge a kingdom's hap- 
piness is by the peace and contentment 
and civility of its people toward one an- 
other, and by the confidence betwixt the 
ruler and the ruled. He who hath to 
guard himself liveth on the eve of the de- 
struction of his kingdom and himself. And 
yet, O Ahura, remember this: The Jeho- 
vihians of heaven and Earth are high raised 
ere they become such; any one can be a 
ruler for them, for they know righteous- 
ness. But I have to deal with Druks and 
drujas. How, then, canst thou compare 
my kingdom with the Nirvanian king- 
doms? 

Ahura said: Alas, O Sudga, I fear my 
arguments are void before thee. Thou 
showest me that the line betwixe selfish- 
ness and unselfishness is finer than a spi- 
der's web. Even Gods cannot distinguish 
it. And yet, behold, there was a time 
when I said: I will be a mighty God, and 
bow not to the Unknown that brought me 
into being. For this I labored long and 
hard; the responsibility of my kingdom 
finally encroached upon my happiness. 
Long after that I put away all responsibil- 
ity, and made myself a servant to Jehovih. 
Then a new happiness came upon me, even 
when I had nothing that was mine in heav- 



360 



CYCLE OF CPEJSTA-ARM1J 



en and Earth. It is within my members as 
a new tree of delight. This it is that I would 
tell thee of, but I cannot explain it. It baf- 
fles words, even as a description of the 
Great Spirit is void because of His won- 
drous majesty. Such is the joy of His ser- 
vice that even Gods and angels cannot de- 
scribe it. With its growth we look famine 
in the face and weep not; we see falling 
ji'ay and fear not; with the ebb and flow of 
the tide of Jehovih's works we float as one 
with Him, with a comprehensive joy. 

Sudga said: To hear thy voice is joy 
to me; to not hear thee is great sorrow. 
Behold, I will consider thy words of wis- 
dom. In thy far-off place I will come in 
remembrance and love to thee. 

Thus ended the interview, and Sudga 
signalled his vice-Gods and high marshal 
to come; whereat he saluted Ahura in the 
sign of Craft, and Ahura answered him in 
the sign, Passage of Time. 

And then Ahura, betwixt the vice-Gods, 
led by the high marshal, departed, passed 
beyond the arena, where the vice-Gods and 
high marshal gave him into the charge of 
the marshal hosts, who conducted him be- 
yond the line of sentinels, where Ahura 
joined his own attendants and went with 
them into his otevan, and set sail for 
Agho'aden, Osiris' heavenly place, which 
had been over Par'si'e, but was now moved 
over Arabin'ya. 

CHAPTER LVI. 

At this time Osiris' heavenly kingdom 
numbered thirteen thousand million an- 
gels, good and bad. And it was the largest 
heavenly kingdom ever established on 
Earth. It was built after the manner of 
Sudga's; that is, modeled after Sanc-tu, in 
Hored, but more magnificent than Sudga's 
kingdom, and far larger. The arena-way 
was five thousand lengths of a man across; 
so that approaching visitors to the throne 
must crawl two thousand lengths in order 
to approach the throne. And they also 
had to repeat an anthem of praise, or a 
prayer, for every length crawled, going and 
coming. And they were, like at Sud- 
ga's, permitted to approach only to within 
a long distance from Osiris; whilst the ar- 
ray of lights around him were so dazzling 
that scarcely any could look upon him. 



And they that thus approached were so 
reverential that their minds magnified 
Osiris' glorious appearance so much, they 
verily believed they had looked into the 
Creator's face, and saw, of a truth, man 
was of his image and likeness. And thou- 
sands, and even millions, that thus crawled 
to look upon him, afterward went about 
in heaven preaching Osiris as the verita- 
ble All highest creator of heaven and 
Earth. 

Osiris made his Godhead to consist of 
three persons: first, himself, as The Foun- 
tain of the Universe, whose name was Un- 
speakable; second, Baal, His Only Begot- 
ten Son, into whose keeping he had assign- 
ed Earth and all mortals thereon; and, 
third, Ashtaroth, His Virgin Daughter, 
into whose keeping he had assigned life 
and death, or rather the power of beget- 
ting and the power to cause death with 
mortals. 

Osiris was the most cunning of all the 
self-Gods; for thus he appropriated the tri- 
angle of the Faithists; thus appropriated 
the names and powers of the Lord God, 
the false (now in hell), for only through 
Baal and Ashtaroth could any mortal or 
spirit ever attain to approach the arena of 
the throne in Agho'aden. And here again 
they had to pass the high sentinel, Egupt, 
before they were entitled to the right to 
crawl on their bellies over the sacred pave- 
ment, the way to the heavenly place. 

Only the vice-Gods of Osiris and his 
chief marshal could walk upright to the 
capital palace, and they with heads bowed 
low. And when Osiris was informed of 
Ahura's coming he sent word that he 
should come upright, with head erect, but 
veiled from head to foot. To this Ahura 
gladly consented; and, being thus veiled 
by Egupt and handed over to the vice- 
Gods and the chief marshal, he walked up- 
right till he came to the high arch of the 
palace; here they halted, and Ahura sa- 
luted on the sign, Old Time Love, and 
Osiris answered in the sign, Joy in Hea- 
ven. Whereupon Ahura left the vice-Gods 
and walked near the throne, and Osiris 
came down, and they embraced in each 
other's arms, not having seen each other 
for more than a thousand years. Osiris 
signalled the vice-Gods and chief marshal 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



361 



to fall back, and they did so, and they as- 
cended the throne and sat thereon, pri- 
vately. 

Osiris said: This is a great joy! To 
meet one's loves, is not this greater, after 
all, than all the pomp and glory of the 
Gods? 

Ahura said: True; but who is wise 
enough to live to enjoy so cheap a glory? 
We run afar off; we build up mighty king- 
doms, and our places are replete with 
great magnificence; in search after what? 
Whilst that which doth cost nothing, love, 
the greatest good of all in heaven and 
Earth, we leave out in the cold. More de- 
light have I to again look upon thy buoy- 
ant face, and hear the music of thy voice, 
than I ever had in my heavenly kingdom 
of seven thousand million angels. 

Osiris said: Is it not so with all Gods, 
and with mortal kings and queens? They 
boast of the extent and power of their 
countless millions; and yet they have not 
more to love them than would match in 
numbers their fingers' ends, whom they can 
take into their arms in the fullness of reci- 
procity. What, then, are pomp and glory? 
Are not kings and queens of Earth but 
watch-dogs, to guard the flesh and bones 
of other mortals? And are not the Gods 
equally base in their trade of ruling over 
foul-smelling drujas? 

Ahura said: It is so. But whence is 
this great desire to rule over others; to 
lead them; to be applauded; and to revel 
in the toil of the millions? Would it not 
be wise for the Gods who understand this, 
to resign their mighty kingdoms and go 
along with their loves to feast in the great 
expanse of the universe? 

Osiris said: True, O Ahura. But who 
hath power to do this? Certainly not the 
Gods. And is it not so with mortals? 
For thousands of years, have they not been 
told: Except ye give up your earthly king- 
doms, and give up your riches, ye cannot 
rise in heaven. But, behold, the rich man 
cannot give up his riches; the king can- 
not give up his kingdom. They are weak 
indeed! As well expect an unhatched bird 
to fly. Yet such souls become but slaves in 
our dominions. This do I perceive also, 
of mine own kingdom, I cannot give it 
up; because, forsooth, I cannot get the de- 
sire to give it up, although my judgment 



saith it would be the highest, best thing for 
me. 

Ahura said: Are not great possessions- 
like unto dissipation? I have seen mortals 
who admit the highest, best thing to do is 
to live the highest, best one knoweth, and 
straightway go off and pollute the body by 
eating flesh and drinking wine. They also 
know the right way, but to attain to the 
desire to put in practice what one knoweth 
to be the highest, they have not reached. 

Osiris said: Yea, all this is dissipation. 
And if a man give away what he hath, is 
not that also dissipation? Can it be true,. 
O Ahura, that even as we manipulate mor- 
tals, to drive them to war or to make them 
play peace, to make them destroy their 
kingdoms and build up others by our an- 
gel amies, which they know not of, that 
we ourselves are ruled over by the Gods in 
the etherean heavens? 

Ahura said: It seemeth to me thus, 
Osiris: That the etherean Gods above us 
rule us, but not in the same way, but by 
their absence from us when we do unjust- 
ly, and by their presence when we do 
righteously. We rule over mortals by di- 
rect action upon them, shaping their des- 
tinies by our heavenly wills, and they are 
often cognizant of our angel servants be- 
ing with them. But when we cannot ap- 
propriate a mortal to do our wills, we 
withdraw our angels and suffer him to fall 
into the hands of drujas. Not that the 
Gods above us, O Osiris, send evils upon 
us; but that we foster evils within our own 
kingdoms which take root, like thorns 
and nettles in a neglected field, and they 
grow and environ us. Even this I have 
seen in thy heavens in the far future. It 
will come upon thee, O Osiris, and with 
all thy wisdom and strength thou wilt 
meet the same fate as De'yiis, and be cast 
into hell. 

Osiris said: Were I to judge by all the 
self-Gods who have been before me, I 
should assent unto thy wise judgment. 
But hear thou me, O Ahura, for mine is 
not like any other heavenly kingdom, nor 
formed for mine own glory only. This, 
then, is that that I will accomplish: 

I will cast out sin from amongst mor- 
tals, and all manner of wickedness; and I 
will give them a heavenly kingdom on 



.362 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



Earth. They shall war no more, nor deal 
unjustly with one another; nor have suf- 
fering, nor immature deaths, nor famines, 
:nor sickness, but peace, love, righteous- 
mess, good works and nobleness. For I 
will go down to them in person in time to 
•come; and I will take with me angels high 
raised, and appoint them unto mortals, 
:and give them corporeal bodies for their 
pleasure, and they shall be the teachers of 
man on Earth. And man shall put away 
all selfishness, deceit, lust, and lying; and 
the races of man shall be taught how to 
.beget offspring in purity and wisdom. 
And in that day I will take back the dru- 
jas of heaven and engraft them on mortals 
and re-raise them up with understanding. 
Wherefore, O Ahura, though I fortify 
myself in all this, am I not laboring in the 
right way? 

Ahura said: It seemeth to me a dan- 
gerous proceeding. I would compare thy 
plan to that of a teacher who took his pu- 
pil into a place of vice to teach him virtue. 

Osiris said: It hath been so said; but 
I will cast the higher love down into the 
"lower. 

Ahura said: Why, so thou canst; but, 
alas, it will remain down, and forever grov- 
el on the earth. I have seen a sweet maid- 
en wed to a vicious husband, and she lifted 
him not up, but he pulled her down. Will 
it not be so with the higher love, when 
'thou weddest it to the earth? Behold 
the manner of the oracles! We appoint 
high-raised angels to answer the questions 
of mortals, to lead them up to virtue and 
wisdom; but, alas, mortals come not to the 
oracles to learn these things, but to learn 
wickedness, and war, and earthly gain. 
Will it not be so with thy kingdom found- 
ed on Earth? Instead of helping mortals 
up, mortals will pull down the angels to 
answer them in their most sinful desires 
and curiosity. 

Osiris said: Thou hast great reason on 
thy side, and facts withal to sustain thee. 
Yet forget not, O Ahura, I shall have a 
temple built of stone on earth, and a 
chamber where I can come and command 
the kingdom through the mortal king. 

Ahura said: Behold, my mission is 
fruitless. I have now visited my three 
loves, Te-in, and Sudga, and thee. And I 
cannot turn one. In this I have great sor- 



row; for I fear the time may come when 
great darkness will be upon you all. 

Osiris said: I will consider .thy wise 
words, O Ahura. And though thou now 
goest from me, my love will follow thee. 

Hereupon Osiris signalled the chief 
marshal and the vice-Gods, and they came. 
Then Osiris and Ahura embraced each 
other and departed, both saluting in the 
sign, Love Forever. Ahura retired even 
as he came, but backward, the vice-Gods 
on either side and the marshall leading the 
way. After they crossed the arena Ahura 
was delivered to Egupt, and the chief mar- 
shal, and the vice-Gods returned to Osiris. 

Egupt passed Ahura on to his own at- 
tendants, who conducted him to his fire- 
ship, wherein they embarked and set sail 
for his own heavenly place, Vara-pishana- 
ha. 

CHAPTER LVII. 

Jehovih permitted the self-Gods to 
prosper for more than four hundred years; 
and Te-in, Sudga, and Osiris became the 
mightiest Gods that ever ruled on the 
earth. 

Te-in had two vice-Gods, Noe Jon 
and Wang-tse-Yot. Next, chief high mar- 
shal, Kolotzka, and under him thirty thou- 
sand marshals. Chief general, Ha-e Giang, 
and under him one hundred thousand gen- 
erals and high captains. Of these, twenty 
thousand were allotted to the dominion of 
mortals in Jafreth; the others served in 
heaven, mostly about the throne of Te-in. 
Chiefly distinguished on Earth were Te- 
in's fourteen chief generals: Kacan-cat, 
Yam-yam, Tochin-woh, Ho-jon-yo, Wah- 
ka, Oke-ya-nos, Haing-le, Lutz-rom, Le- 
Wiang, Thu-wowtch, Eurga-roth, I-sa-ah, 
To Gow and Ah Shung. These generals 
were divided into two parts, seven each; 
and they were allotted equally, of the 
twenty thousand rank generals deputed to 
Earth; and these again were allotted each 
thirty thousand angel warriors. 

Te-in had said to these fourteen chief 
generals: When ye come to the earth, 
and, finding two cities near together, both 
of which worship other Gods than me, ye 
shall divide yourselves into two parts; and 
one army shall go to one mortal city and 
the other to the other, and by inspiration 
and otherwise ye shall bring the cities to 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



363 



-war against each other, until both are 
broken down, or destroyed. After which 
ye shall inspire another city, that wor- 
shipped me, to come and possess both of 
those that are destroyed. Better is it to 
make our enemies kill each other than to 
kill them ourselves. 

And such was the mode of warfare by 
Te-in that all the land of Jaffeth was sub- 
dued unto himself in less than a hundred 
years, except a million Faithists, scat- 
tered here and there; and the Listians 
who were in the mountains and 
wildernesses. And great and costly tem- 
ples were built in all the cities of Jaft'eth, 
and dedicated to Te-in, Creator and Ruler 
of Heaven and Earth. 

Now, as to the worshippers of Joss and 
Ho-Joss, they were not converted but sub- 
dued, and they worshipped their God in 
secret, and made rites and ceremonies 
whereby they might know one another 
and the better escape persecution. Many 
of these were rites after the manner of 
the ancient rite of Baugh-ghan-ghad. 

Of the great cities destroyed in these 
wars were: Hong We, Chow Go and 
Sheing-tdo. For Hong We the wars last- 
ed twenty years; and there were slain 
within the city five hundred thousand men, 
women and children. The wars of Chow 
Go lasted forty years, and within her walls 
were slain three hundred thousand men, 
women and children. For Sheing-tdo the 
wars lasted twenty-five years, and there 
were slain within her walls three hundred 
thousand men, women and children. 

In the destruction of Hong We there 
were consigned to ashes four hundred 
bouses of philosophy; two thousand four 
hundred colleges, and twelve thousand 
public schools. All of which had been 
made glorious in the reign of Hong, the 
king of the city. Because he worshipped 
Ho-Joss, his great city was destroyed. 

In Chow Go there were destroyed six 
hundred houses of philosophy and two 
hundred colleges of Great Learning. Here 
was the Temple of Jonk, which was dedi- 
cated to the worship of Joss, and which, in 
building, required twenty thousand men 
twelve years. It had two thousand pillars 
of Awana stone, polished; and at the blood 
altar it had twelve thousand skulls, of 
which the great king Bak Ho was slaugh- 



terer in the name of Ho-Joss. The throne 
of worship for the king was set with dia- 
monds and pearls; and it had a thousand 
candlesticks of gold and silver. And the 
fine silk drapery and fine wool drapery 
within the temple were sufficient, if spread 
out, for five hundred thousand men to lie 
down upon. And the drapery was painted 
and embroidered with pictures of battles 
and wars; and of scenes in heaven. For the 
ornamentation of which drapery twenty 
thousand men and women had labored for 
forty years. All of which were destroyed, 
together with all the great city and all its 
riches and magnificence. 

Sheing-tdo was a city of fashion and 
splendor, inhabited by the richest men in 
the world. She had a temple called Cha- 
oke-king, dedicated to learning, but in 
fact appropriated to the display of wealth 
and pageantry. It was round, with a high 
projecting roof, the eaves of which rested 
on ten thousand pillars of polished stone. 
There were four hundred doorways to en- 
ter the temple; but, within each doorway, 
one came against the square columns of 
precious stones that supported the roof 
inside; and to either side of the columns 
were passageways that led into the four 
hundred chambers within. In the center 
of the temple, artificial stalactites, twenty 
thousand, hung from the roof; these were 
made of silk and wool and fine linen and 
painted, and of colors so bright that mor- 
tal eye could scarce look upon them, and 
they were as ice with the sun shining 
thereon, forming rainbows in every direc- 
tion. Here came kings and queens and 
governors of great learning; for here 
were deposited copies of the greatest 
books in all the world. 

Besides the temple of Cha-oke-king, 
there were seven great temples built to 
Joss, either of which was large enough for 
ten thousand men to do sacrifice in at one 
time. For five and twenty years the peo- 
ple of Sheing-tdo fought to save their 
great city from destruction, but it fell, 
was destroyed by king Bingh, and all the 
temples with it. 

Next to these were the following great 
cities that were destroyed: Gwoo-gee, 
which had one hundred houses of philoso- 
pry and forty colleges for great learning; 



364 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J 



one temple, with eight hundred polished 
pillars and two thousand arches; thirty 
temples of wheat and corn sacrifice; one 
storehouse, where wes stored food for one 
hundred thousand people in case of fam- 
ine, sufficient for eight years; and all these, 
and the libraries of the records of the Gods 
and Lords of earth, and all such things 
within the city were burnt to ashes. 

The city of Young-ooh, of two hun- 
dred thousand inhabitants, which had sev- 
enty houses of philosophy, and thirty-five 
colleges of great learning, besides many 
schools; one . Temple of the Stars, where 
lectures were given daily to the people to 
teach them the names and places of the 
stars and their wondrous size and motion; 
forty temples of sacrifice, seven of which 
were large enough to hold all the inhabit- 
ants of Young-ooh, the great city. By 
king Shaing it was laid in ashes, and no- 
thing but heaps of stone remained to tell 
where the city had been. 

The city, Gwan-she, which had thirty 
houses of philosophy, and seventy temples 
of sacrifice, two Temples of the Stars ded- 
icated to Joss; eighty-five colleges of Great 
Learning, and also a feed-house, stored 
sufficiently to feed the city seven years; 
and there were two hundred thousand in- 
habitants within the city walls. Twelve 
years the people of this city fought against 
the incited plunderers, the warriors under 
the God Te-in, but were conquered at last, 
and their city laid low. 

And the great cities, Ghi, and Owan, 
and Chong, and Goon, and Ca-On and 
Jong-wong, and Sow, and Wowtch-gan, 
and Sem-Sin, and Gee, and Tiang, and 
Choe, and Doth, and Ah-mai, and Cone 
Shu, and Guh, and Haingtsgay, and Ghi- 
oo-yeng, and Boy-gonk, all of which had 
houses of philosophy and colleges of great 
learning, and public schools, and temples 
of sacrifice, ana feed-houses, and hundreds 
of thousands of inhabitants. And all these 
cities were destroyed, and only heaps of 
stones left to show where they had been. 

Besides these, there were more than 
two thousand cities of less prominence 
destroyed. And yet, of villages and small 
cities, so great were they number destroy- 
ed, that no man ever counted them. 



City against city; king against king; 
man against man; for the inhabitants of 
Jaffeth were obsessed to madness and war 
and destruction; almost without cause 
would they fall upon one another to de- 
stroy; for so had Te-in sent his hundreds 
of millions of warring angels to inspire 
mortals to destroy all knowledge, and in- 
struction, and learning, and philosophy,, 
and to destroy all trace of all other Gods, 
and Lords, that he alone might reign su- 
preme. And these angels taught mortals- 
how to make explosive powder, and guns 
to shoot with, more deadly than the bow 
and arrow; and taught the secret of under- 
mining a city and blowing it up. 

So the fair land of Jaffeth, with its wis- 
dom and great learning, became as a dis- 
tracted and broken-up country. In all di- 
rections the bones of mortals were scatter- 
ed over the lands; nor could the land be 
tilled without digging amongst the skulls. 
and bones of the great giant race of I'hu- 
ans that once had peopled it. And of 
those who were not destroyed, one might 
say: They were a poor, half-starved, sick- 
ly breed, discouraged and helpless, badly 
whipped. 

And the spirits of the dead were on all 
the battlefields, lighting up the dark nights 
by their spirit fires, and in the morning 
and the twilight of the evening they could 
be seen by hundreds and thousands, walk- 
ing about, shy and wild! But an abun- 
dance of familiar spirits dwelt with mor- 
tals; took on sar'gis forms, and ate and 
drank with them, and even did things of 
which it is unlawful to mention. 

Thus was Jaffeth won to the God Te-in. 

CHAPTER LVIII. 

Two vice-Gods had Sudga, Brihat and 
Visvasrij. Next to these, Sudga's heaven- 
ly chief marshal, Atma, who had four thou- 
sand marshals under him, and equally di- 
vided amongst them to command, one 
thousand million heavenly warring angels. 
Atma had authority over thirty thousand 
generals and captains, to whom were al- 
lotted two thousand million angels. Chief 
of the heavenly generals were: Shahara, 
Vasyam, Suchchi, Dev, Nasakij, Tvara, 
Watka, Shan, Dorh, Hudhup, Nikish, Ha- 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



365 



jara, Hwassggarom, Viji, Yatamas, Brah- 
ma, Goska, Fulowski, M'Duhitri, Yaya- 
mich-ma, Hijavar, Duth, Lob-yam, Hi- 
gup and Vowiska. And these falsely as- 
sumed the names of the ancient Gods and 
.Lords of thousands of years before. 

Sudga had said to them: That my 
name may be magnified before the new- 
born in heaven, ye shall also magnify your 
own names by taking the names of Gods 
and Lords who are revered in heaven and 
Earth, for all things are free unto you. 
But unto none others do I give privilege 
to choose the names of the ancients. 

Sudga then made the following his Pri- 
vate Council: Plow-ya, Vazista, Kiro, 
Cpenista, Visper, E-shong, Bog-wi, Low- 
tha, Brihat, Gai-ya, Sa-mern, Nais-wiche, 
Yube, Sol, Don, Mung-jo Urvash, Cpenta- 
mainyus and Vanaiti; and to each of them 
ten thousand attendants. 

Then Sudga made two great captains, 
Varsa arid Baktu, and he said unto them: 
Two thousand million angels have I al- 
lotted to go down to the earth, to the land 
of Vind'yu, to subdue mortals and have 
dominion over them permanently, and I di- 
vide the two thousand million betwixt ye 
twain. But all other angels shall remain in 
my heavenly kingdom and work for me, 
and embellish it, and beautify my heaven- 
ly cities, especially my holy capital. 

Now, when ye twain are permanent on 
Earth, and secured in the temples and ora- 
cles, ye shall survey all the lands of Vind'- 
yu, and the cities, large and small, and all 
the people therein. And, behold, all men 
shall be subdued unto my two names, 
Sudga and Dyaus; and when a city stand- 
eth, wherein the people worship any other 
Gods or Lords, that city shall ye destroy, 
and all the people therein. City against 
city shall it be, man against man; for as I 
am the highest God of heaven, so will I be 
the God of Earth, and its Lord. And ye 
twain, in finding two cities to be destroyed, 
shall divide, one going with his angel war- 
riors to one city, and the other to the oth- 
er city; and ye shall inspire them against 
each other unto death; and when they are 
laid low, ye shall bring into the place, to 
inhabit it, my worshippers. 

Thus descended to the earth the two de- 
stroying captain Gods, Varsa and Baktu, 
with their two thousand million angel war- 



riors. And they spread out over the 
land of Vind'yu, where were many king- 
doms and thousands of cities; and they 
came to mortals asleep or awake, and in- 
spired them to havoc and destruction, for 
Sudga's sake. And there were laid in ru- 
ins, in twelve years, four thousand cities. 
And chief of these were Yadom, Watcha- 
da, Cvalaka, Hoce-te, Hlumivi, Ctdar and 
Yigam, each of which contained more than 
one million souls, and some of them two 
million. 

In all of these there were places of 
great learning, and schools and temples of 
sacrifice. In Ctdar the roof of the temple 
was made of silver and copper and gold; 
and it had one thousand columns of pol- 
ished stone, and five hundred pillars to 
support the roof. The walls were covered 
with tapestry, painted with written words 
and histories of heaven and Earth, and of 
the Gods and Lords and Saviors of the 
ancients. Within the temple were seven 
altars of sacrifice, and four thousand ba- 
sins of holy water for baptismal rites. 
Within the walls of the temple were niches 
for five hundred priests, for the confession 
of sins, and for receiving the money and 
cloth and fruits of the earth, contributed 
by the penitent for the remission of their 
sins. Through the central passage within 
the temple drove the king in his golden 
chariot, when he came for sacrifice; and 
the floor of this passage was laid with sil- 
ver and gold. 

In the center of the temple floor was a 
basin filled with water, and the size of the 
basin was equal to twenty lengths of a man. 
In the middle of the basin was a fountain 
throwing up water. And on the east and 
west and north and south sides of the ba- 
sin were four pillars of polished stone, 
with stairs within them; and the tops of 
these pillars were connected by beams of 
inlaid wood of many colors, polished fine- 
ly, which were called the Holy Arch of 
Sudga. On the summit of the arch 
was a small house called the Voice of the 
Oracle, for here sat the king's interpreter 
of heaven and Earth, the reader of visions. 
And the spirits of the dead appeared in the 
spray of the fountain, sometimes as stars 
of light and sometimes in their own forms 
and features, and were witnessed by the 
multitude. 



366 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



Within each of the five hundred pillars 
was a sacred chamber, for benefit of the 
priests communing with angels. In the 
east pillar was an opening from top to bot- 
tom, a slatway so the multitude could see 
through the pillar, which was hollow its 
entire height. This was occupied by the 
king's high priest or priestess, as the case 
might be, and this person had attained to 
adeptship, so that the angels could carry 
him up and down within the pillar, even to 
the top thereof, which was equal to fifty 
lengths of a man. And the multitude thus 
beheld him ascending and descending. 
In the west pillar was the library of the 
temple, which contained a history of its 
important events for a period of eight 
hundred years; of the priest and high 
priests, and of the kings of the city. 

Next to the Temple, which was called 
Tryista, stood the House of Learning, 
were congregated the wise men and wo- 
men, skilled in philosophy, music, astron- 
omy and mineralogy. The House was 
made of polished stone and wood interlock- 
ed, and in front with one hundred and for- 
ty columns of polished stone and wood. 
Within the house were the skins and bones 
of thousands of creatures, ancient and 
modern, which were classified and named; 
and with these were books of philosophy 
and history, all of which were free to the 
public one day in seven. 

Next to the House of Learning was the 
Temple of Death, dedicated to all kinds of 
battles, battles betwixt lions and men, ti- 
gers and men, and betwixt lions and tigers, 
and elephants, and betwixt man and man. 
And so great was the Temple of Death that 
its seats could accommodate three hun- 
dred thousand men, women and children. 
The temple was circular, and without a 
roof over the arena. 

But the greatest of all buildings in 
Ctdar was the king's palace, commonly 
called Temple of the Sun. This was also 
made of polished stone, and on the four 
sides had eight hundred columns of pol- 
ished stone; and next to the columns were 
fifty pillars, on every side connected by 
arches twelve lengths high, whereon rested 
a roof of wood and stone; and yet on this 
was surmounted another row of four hun- 
dred columns of polished wood, inlaid with 
silver and gold, and these were connected 



on the top by other arches ten lengths 
high, and on these another roof, and on the 
top of this a dome covered with gold and 
silver and copper. From the arena to the 
dome its height was twenty-eight lengths. 
To enter the temple from the west was a. 
chariot roadway, so that the king and his 
visitors could drive up into the arena of 
the palace in their chariots. But as for the 
interior of the king's palace, a whole book 
might be written in the description there- 
of, and yet not tell half its richness and 
beauty and magnificence. 

Besides these great buildings there were 
four hundred and fifty Temples of Dark- 
ness, dedicated to the spirits of the dead. 
These were without any opening save the 
door; and when the communers were with- 
in, and the door shut, they were without 
light. In the midst of these temples, spirits 
and mortals congregated, and the spirits 
taught mortals the art of magic; of making 
seeds grow into trees and flowers; of pro- 
ducing serpents, trees and flowers; of 
carrying things through the air; casting 
sweet perfumes and casting foul smells; of 
casting virus to one's enemy, and inoculat- 
ing him with poison unto death; of finding, 
things lost; of bringing money to the poor, 
and flowers and food to the sick; of enter- 
ing the dead sleep, and of becoming uncon- 
scious to pain by force of the will. Nor 
could any man or woman attain to be a 
priest in the Temple of Tryista until he 
mastered all the degrees in the Temples 
of Darkness. 

The angels of Sudga decided to destroy 
this city; and, accordingly, they inspired a 
war betwixt it and the city of Yadom, 
which was second unto it in magnificence,, 
and possessed of temples and palaces like 
unto it also. Yea, but to describe one of 
these great cities was to describe the other,, 
as to mortal glory. For seven hundred 
years had these cities enjoyed peace with 
each other, half a day's journey apart, on 
the great river, Euvisij, in the Valley of 
Rajawichta. 

And the captain God, Varsa, chose one 
city, and the captain God, Baktu, chose the 
other city; and each of them took from 
their thousand million angel warriors a suf- 
ficient number, and inspired the two great 
cities unto everlasting destruction. Even 
as mortals turn savage beasts into an arena, 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



367 



to witness them tear and flay each other, 
even so sat these captain Gods in their 
heavenly chariots, witnessing the two great 
cities in mortal combat. And when one 
had too much advantage, the angel hosts 
would turn the tide, or let them rest a 
while; then urge them to it again, holding 
the game in such even balance as would 
insure the greatest possible havoc to both. 

Eight years these battles lasted; and 
hundreds of thousands of men, women and 
children were slain; and when thus the 
great cities were reduced, the Gods let 
loose The Band of Death, whose angel of- 
fice was to carry poison virus from the rot- 
ten dead and inoculate the breath of the 
living; and then in desperate madness 
make mortals fire their cities, to keep them 
from falling into other hands. And in 
eight years these great cities, with their 
mighty temples, were turned to ruin and 
to dust; and of the people left, only the ig- 
norant few, starving, helpless wanderers, 
could tell the tale of what had been. 

Sudga had said: All knowledge 
amongst mortals is inimical to the Gods in 
heaven; therefore I will destroy all knowl- 
edge on Earth. And this was the same doc- 
trine maintained by Te-in, God of Jaffeth. 

In such manner proceeded the captain 
Gods of Sudga over all the land of Vind'- 
yu, laying low all kingdoms, and cities, 
and places of sacrifice, and places of learn- 
ing. And in one hundred years the mighty 
people of Vind'yu were reduced to beg- 
gary, and to scattered tribes of wanderers. 
The great canals were destroyed, and the 
upper and lower country became places of 
famine and barrenness. And in the valleys 
and on the mountains, in the abandoned 
fields and in the wildernesses, lay the bones 
and skulls of millions of the human dead. 
And lions and tigers came and prowled 
about in the ruined walls of the fallen tem- 
ples and palaces. Nor were there left in 
all the land a single library, or book, or 
the art of making books, or anything to 
show what the great history had been. 

Thus perished the Vedic language, the 
language of song and of poetry, and of 
great oratory, except where the few Faith- 
ists, who had escaped through all these 
wars, had preserved it in a small degree, 



and still in secret worshipped the Great. 
Spirit. 

CHAPTER LIX. 

Osiris, the false, on setting up a hea- 
venly kingdom of his own, and dominion, 
over Arabin'ya, Par'si'e, and Heleste, said:: 
Let Te-in and Sudga pursue their course 
in destroying; mine shall be in the oppo- 
site way. Three kinds of bad people I 
have found in heaven and Earth: They that 
are forever finding fault with, and pulling 
down, what others have built up; they are 
most crafty in argument to find the flaws 
in others, the inconsistencies, errors and 
shortness; but there is nothing in them to 
build up anything in heaven or Earth 
The next bad man is he who findeth fault,, 
not only with all that hath ever been, but. 
with all propositions designed for a new 
state of affairs. He is as worthless as the 
shaft of a spear without a head. The third 
bad man I found is he who, seeing the 
faults and errors of others, harpeth not 
upon them, but plungeth into work with 
something new and bold, involving him- 
self and others in disaster. And these 
three have the great multitude, the world, 
to take care of! I alone am capable of de- 
stroying and building up. 

The non-resistance of the Faithists. 
hath ever made them dependent on the 
mercy of their neighbors, in heaven and 
Earth. They must be destroyed, and their 
doctrines also. In destroying their doc- 
trines, I must give something in the place. 
I have labored to put away Jehovih and es- 
tablish the Lord God; now to put away the 
latter and establish myself as myself would 
take me hundreds of years. Better, then, 
is it, that since De'yus is cast into hell, I 
take the names, Lord God, and De'yus, 
and Creator, and all such as are acceptable 
in heaven and Earth. Neither will I rob 
them of their rites and ceremonies, but so 
add thereunto, that, by the superior glory, 
they will accept mine. Nor will I abridge 
mortals of their learning; but, on the con- 
trary, be most exacting and high in aspira- 
tion; for by this will I win the approval of 
the wise and learned. Mortals love idols; 
therefore L will give them idols. Male and 
female will I give unto them. 



«368 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



Osiris then called Baal, Ashtaroth and 
Egupt into his heavenly Council chamber, 
and said unto them: Two idols shall ye 
inspire mortals to build unto me; and one 
shall be the figure of a male horse, with a 
man's head and chest and arms, and he 
shall point upward, signifying, heavenly 
rest; and the other shall be the figure of a 
mare, with the head and breasts and arms 
•of a woman. And she shall hold a bow and 
arrow before her, and behind her a sword 
-and a rose, signifying, for righteousness' 
sake. And the male idol shall be called 
Osiris, and the female, Isis. 

For wherein I assert myself creator of 
all the living, I must show unto men that I 
.am male and female. Which of a truth is 
the fountain of all that is in heaven and 
Earth, wherein Projection and Reception 
are the sum of all philosophy. In which ye 
shall teach that to go forth is Osiris, and to 
rest in meekness is Isis; for which the an- 
cients used the bull and the lamb. 

For I was a globe, boundless as to size, 
and swift as to motion. And I put forth a 
-wing for flying, and a hand for labor, by 
which are all things conquered and sub- 
dued. And beneath the wing I set the 
Lamb of Peace, as a sign of the flight ot 
the defenceless; but under the hand I set 
the head of a bull, as the sign of my do- 
minion. 

And I made heaven and earth with 
wings flying forth, bearing the serpent and 
the sun. Square with the world, and cir- 
cumscribed, have I made all things, good 
and powerful. And in man's hand I placed 
the key to unlock the mysteries of the firm- 
ament of heaven, and the power, wisdom, 
riches, and glory of the earth. Into his 
hand I place a club, to slay the lion, or to 
subdue him. For I am like unto man, hav- 
ing created him in mine own image, and 
dominion over all the inhabitants I created 
on Earth. 

I am the light, and the life, and the 
death. Out of myself made I all that live 
or have lived. The sun in the firmament 
I set up as a symbol of my power. The 
stars, and the moon, and things that speak 
not, and know not, are the works of my 
hand.. Without me nothing is, nor was, 
nor ever shall be. 

Whoso goeth forth warring for the 
right is for me, and I am with him. With 



warriors I am a god of war; with the peace- 
ful I am a lamb of peace. To do, is of me; 
to not do, is not of me, but of death. An 
eye for an eye, a tooth for a tooth, blood 
for blood, mercy for mercy; but force unto 
all things, with will to conquer, for in these 
am I manifest unto men. For in the be- 
ginning I created the world of mine own 
force; and this is my testimony, justifying 
force even with violence when the greater 
good cometh to the greater number. Here- 
on hangeth my law; in which any man 
can understand that had the Faithists 
fought for righteousness, they would have 
long since mastered the world and subdued 
it unto their God. What, then, is the strat- 
agem of Gods, save by some means to re- 
duce men and angels unto oneness in all 
things? 

When Osiris had thus addressed the 
three Gods, he waited for them to speak. 
Baal said: This is a foundation; we have 
never had a foundation for men nor angels. 
Ashtaroth said: This is a head and front 
to lead the world. Egupt said: The wis- 
dom of the Faithists was in having a di- 
rect course. 

Osiris said: Then will I revise the doc- 
trines of earth and heaven. I will not say 
this is for De'yus, nor the Lord, nor God, 
nor Osiris, nor Apollo, nor any other God. 
But I will give that which all save Jehovih- 
ians can accept. For I will allot unto God 
all things, not defining which God, or 
what God, but God only; the rest will I 
manage in Agho 'aden, my heavenly king- 
dom. 

Go ye, therefore, to mortals, and revise 
the things of De'yus unto God; and if 
mortals question of the oracles to know 
who God is, say ye: He is Osiris, to the 
Osirians; Apollo, to the Apollonians; Isis, 
to the Isisians; he is the Creator, the mas- 
tor, the all, out of whom were crated all 
things; he who created man in his own im- 
age; who dwelleth on a throne in heaven. 

But if they question further, asking if 
he is the ever present, answer them: Nay. 
And if they say: Is he Jehovih, the Great 
Spirit? answer them, Nay. For I will not 
allow one Faithist to dwell alive on the 
face of Earth. 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



369 



CHAPTER LX. 

In Haikwad, in Par'si'e, dwelt king Lu- 
thag, a man of great wisdom and kingly 
power. His capital city, Sowruts, lay on 
the border of Fonecea, and had twelve trib- 
utary cities, each city being ruled over by 
a king. And great drouth came upon the 
regions ruled by Luthag; and, being a king 
of benevolence, he sent inspectors far and 
near, to find a country of water and good 
soil. But alas, they found not what was 
desired. 

Luthag consulted the oracles, and be- 
hold, the angel, Egupt, came and answered 
the king, saying: Send thou thy seer and 
I will lead him. So the king sent for his 
high seer, and told him the words of the 
oracle. The seer said: Wherever thy God 
touches thee, suffer me to touch also, and 
perhaps I can hear thy God speak. 

The seer touched the king in the place, 
and at once Egupt spake to him, and he 
heard. So the angel Egupt led the seer 
into the land of Egupt, which at that time 
was called South Arabin'ya. The seer 
knew not the country, and he asked the 
angel. The angel said: Behold, the land 
of Egupt. Thus was named that land. 

The seer found the land fertile and well 
watered; and he returned to Par'si'e and in- 
formed the king. Thereupon the king 
commanded his people to migrate to 
Egupt. And they so went, in the first 
year fifty thousand, and in the second year 
one hundred thousand; and for many years 
afterward an equal number. 

These things occurred in the seven hun- 
dredth year of the reign of De'yus in Hor- 
ed. And in the space of two hundred years 
more, behold, the land of Egupt was peo- 
pled over with millions of people; for the 
drouth and famines in countries around 
about drove them hither. 

Luthag sent his son to govern the land 
of Egupt, and he made it tributary to the 
kingdom of Sowruts. The son's name was 
Haxax; and when he was old and died, he 
left the governorship of Egupt to his son, 
Bakal, who broke the allegiance with Par'- 
si'e and established all of Egupt as an in- 
dependent kingdom. Bakal's son, Goth, 
succeeded him; and Goth enriched his 
kingdom with great cities and temples, and 
places of learning, and founded games and 
tournaments. Goth's daughter, Rabec, 



succeeded him; and was the first queen of 
Egupt. Rabec still further enriched the 
great land with cities and places of learn- 
ing. Thus stood the country at the time 
De'yus was overthrown in his heavenly 
kingdom. 

And now for seventy years the Gods, 
Osiris, Baal, and Ashtaroth, and Egupt, 
had not much power with mortals. And 
during this short period, the shepherd 
kings migrated into Egupt in vast num- 
bers; and, in sympathy with these, and of 
kindred faith, were the followers of Abra- 
ham, the Faithists, who also migrated rap- 
idly into Egupt. Meantime the kingdom 
had passed from Rabec to her oldest son, 
Hwan; and to his oldest son, Naman; and 
to his oldest son, Sev; and to his daughter, 
Arma; and to her oldest son, Hotha; and 
to his oldest son, Rowtsag. And here 
stood the matter when Osiris resolved to 
revise the records of mortals and angels as 
regardeth the history of creation by God; 
which he did according to his own decrees, 
which were as hereinbefore stated. 

So it came to pass that through the or- 
acles, king Rowtsag bestowed upon the li- 
braries of Egupt the history of the crea- 
tion of heaven and Earth, with the origin 
of sin, and the creation of man, the first of 
whom was thence called Adam, in- 
stead of A'su, adopting the Par'si'e'an word 
instead of the Vedic. And these records 
were the same from which Ezra, three 
thousand years afterward, made selec- 
tions, and erroneously attributed them 
to be the doctrines of the Faithists, 
who were called Iz'Zerlites. And the rec- 
ords of the Faithists were not kept, nor 
permitted in the state records, but kept 
amongst the Faithists themselves, for they 
were outlawed then, because they would not 
adopt the Saviors and Gods of the state. 

Rowtsag's son, Hi-ram, succeeded 
him; and Thammas, his son, succeeded Hi- 
ram. Thammas was a seer and prophet, 
and could see the Gods and talk with them 
understandingly. Thammas was succeeded 
by his daughter, Hannah; and she was suc- 
ceeded by Hojax, who was the builder of 
the Temple of Osiris, commonly called the 
Great Pyramid. In honor of the prophet 
of De'yus, the first mortal servant of Osir- 
is, whose name was Thoth, Hojax named 
himself, Thothma, meaning, God-Thoth; 



370 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



for Osiris told Hojax: Thou art the very 
Thoth re-incarnated; and behold, thou shalt 
be God of Earth. 

Thothma could hear the Gods and talk 
with them understandingly. And to him, 
Osiris, through his angel servant God, 
Egupt, gave especial care from his youth 
up. At the age of sixteen years, Thothma 
passed the examination in the house of 
philosophy, and in astronomy and miner- 
alogy. At seventeen he passed The Build- 
er's School and the Histories of the Thou- 
sand Gods. At eighteen he was admitted 
as an Adept in Life and Death, having 
power to attain the dormant state; and to 
see without his mortal eyes, and to hear 
without his mortal ears. At nineteen, he as- 
cended the throne, it being the time of the 
death of his father and mother. For be- 
cause Osiris desired to use Thothma, he 
sent his destroying angels, and they inoc- 
ulated the breath of Hannah and her hus- 
band, and they died by poison in the lungs. 

Osiris, through his servant God, Egupt, 
thus spake to Thothma, saying: My son, 
my son! Thothma said: I hear thee, O 
God; what wouldst thou? Osiris said: 
Provide thou a dark chamber and I will 
come to thee. Thothma provided a dark 
chamber, and then Osiris through his ser- 
vant God, came to him, saying: 

Thou hast great wisdom, but thou for- 
gettest thy promise! Thothma said: In 
what, O God? Osiris said: When thou 
wert in heaven, thou saidst: Now will I 
go down to Earth and re-incarnate myself, 
and prove everlasting life in the flesh. 
For many years Osiris had told this same 
thing to Thothma until he believed faithful- 
ly he had so been in heaven, and returned, 
and re-incarnated himself for such purpose. 
And he answered Osiris, saying: Like a 
dream it so seemeth to me, even as thou 
sayest. 

Osiris asked Thothma what was the 
greatest of all things. Thothma said: 
There are but two things, corporeal and 
spiritual. 

Osiris said: True. What then is wis- 
dom? Thothma said: To acquire great 
corporeal knowledge in the first place; and 
in the second, to acquire spiritual knowl- 
edge. But tell me, thou God of wisdom, 
how can a man attain the highest spiritual 
knowledge? 



Osiris said: To come and dwell in hea- 
ven and see for one's self. Thothma said: 
How long shall a man sojourn in heaven in 
order to learn its wisdom? Osiris said: 
One day; a hundred days; a thousand years, 
a million years, according to the man. 
Thothma said: If one could leave the 
corporeal part for a hundred days and trav- 
el in heaven for a hundred days, would it 
profit him? Osiris said: To do that is to 
master death. Behold, thou hast already 
attained to power of the dormant state. To 
control the course of the spirit; that is the 
next lesson. 

Thothma said: Behold, O God, I have 
attained to the power of the dormant state, 
even as the magicians who submit to be 
buried for ninety days. Yea, and I go 
hence in spirit, and see many things, but 
my soul is like a breath of wind, and goeth 
at random. 

Osiris said: Provide thou me a tem- 
ple, and I will come and teach thee. 
Thothma said: How to keep the body so 
long, that it be not damaged, that is the 
question? The magicians who have been 
buried long, and being dug up and resusci- 
tated, find their bodies so damaged that 
they die soon after. 

Osiris said: Thou shalt build a Tem- 
ple of Astronomy, and dedicate it unto 
Osiris, Savior of men and angels, God of 
heaven and Earth. And it shall be built 
square with the world, east and west, and 
north and south. And the observing line 
shall be with the apex of the Hidan vor- 
tex, which lieth in the median line of the 
variation of the north star. In the form of 
a pyramid shalt thou build it; measure for 
measure, will I show thee every part. 

And thou shalt provide such thickness 
of walls that no sound, heat, nor cold, can 
enter therein; and yet thou shalt provide 
chambers therein, suitable for thyself and 
for thy chiefs, and thy friends, who are 
also adepts. For I have also provided 
Earth unto heaven, and heaven unto Earth; 
and my angels shall come and dwell for a 
season on Earth; and my earth-born shall 
go and dwell for a season in heaven; yea, 
they shall come to me on my throne and 
behold the glories I have prepared for 
them. 

Nor shall my temple be exclusive, but 
open unto all who will pursue the philoso- 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



371 



phies of earth and heaven. For which rea- 
son thou shalt build it with the sun, moon 
and stars; and it shall be a testimony unto 
the nations of Earth that thou art the high- 
est of all mortals, and first founder of ev- 
erlasting life in the flesh. For as the an- 
gels of heaven can return to Earth and 
take upon themselves corporeal bodies for 
a season, so shalt thou master thine own 
flesh to keep it as thou wilt. For this is 
the end and glory for which I created man 
on Earth. 

CHAPTER LXI. 

Osiris then instructed king Thothma to 
drive out of the land of Egupt all the 
Faithists, especially the shepherd kings, 
who could not be made slaves of. Thoth- 
ma impressed an army of two hundred 
thousand warriors, and drove off the shep- 
herd kings, putting to death more than 
three hundred thousand of them. And 
from the Faithists he took all their posses- 
sions, such as houses and lands, and suffer- 
ed them not to hold any mortal thing in 
possession; neither permitting them to till 
the soil, save as servants, nor to engage 
in any other labor save as servants. And 
there went out of the land of Egupt, to es- 
cape the tyranny of Thothma, three mill- 
ion Faithists, including the shepherd kings, 
the unlearned. And in regard to the Faith- 
ists who remained in the land of Egupt, 
Osiris, through king Thothma, made the 
following laws, to-wit: 

Thou shalt not possess any land, nor 
house, nor ox, nor any beast of burden, 
nor cow, nor calf, nor shall thy people 
possess an altar of worship, nor temple, nor 
place of sacred dance. But a servant and 
a servant of servants shalt thou be all the 
days of thy life. But in thy sleeping place 
and in the sleeping place of thy family thou 
shalt do worship in thine own way, nor 
shall any man molest thee therein. 

Thou shalt not profess openly thy doc- 
trines under penalty of thy blood and thy 
flesh; nor shalt thou teach more in the 
schools or colleges; nor shall thy children 
receive great learning. And of thy arts, 
of measuring and working numbers, thou 
shalt not keep them secret longer, or thy 
blood be upon thee. And if thou sayest: 
Behold, the Great Spirit; or Jehovih, the 
Ever Present, thou shalt suffer death, and 



thy wife and thy children with thee. And 
if a man query, to try thee, asking: Who 
created the world? thou shalt answer: Be- 
hold, God! And if he further ask: Think- 
est thou the Creator is Ever Present? thou 
shalt say: Nay, but as a man that hath fin- 
ished his labor, he sitteth on his throne in 
heaven. And if he further ask thee: Where 
is God? thou shalt answer: On the Moun- 
tain Hored, in heaven. And if he still fur- 
ther ask thee: Is the Ever Present a Per- 
son? thou shalt say: Nay, the Ever Pres- 
ent is void like the wind; there is but one 
ruler in heaven and Earth, even Osiris, 
who is Lord the God, Savior of Men. 

Who doeth not these things shall 
be put to death; whoso boweth not unto 
Thothma, my earthly ruler, shall not live, 
saith God. 

These laws were entered in the libraries 
of Egupt, and also proclaimed publicly by 
the scribes and seers. And yet with these 
restrictions upon them there remained in 
the land of Egupt more than two million 
Faithists. And it came to pass that Thoth- 
ma began the building of the Temple of 
Osiris, and he impressed two hundred thou- 
sand men and women in the building there- 
of, of which number more than one-half 
were Faithists. And these laborers were 
divided into groups of twelves and twenty- 
fours and forty-eights and so on, and each 
group had a captain; but for series of 
groups of one thousand seven hundred 
and twenty-eight men and women, there 
were generals, and for every six generals 
there was one marshal, and for every twelve 
generals one chief, and these chiefs were of 
the Privy Council of the king. 

And the king allotted to every chief a 
separate work; some to dig canals, some to 
quarry stone, and some to hew the stones; 
some to build boats, some to provide roll- 
ers, and others timbers, and yet others, 
capstans. 

Two places the surveyors found stone 
with which to build the temple, one was 
above the banks of the great river, Egon r 
at the foot of Mount Hazeka, and the other 
was across the Plains of Neuf, in the Moun- 
tains of Aokaba. From the headwaters of 
Egon a canal was made to Aokaba, and 
thence by locks descended to the Plains of 
Neuf, and thence to Gakir, the place chosen 
by the king for the temple to be built. 



372 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



And as for the logs used in building, 
they were brought down the waters of 
Egon, even from the forests of Gambotha 
and Rugzak. These logs were tied togeth- 
er and floated on the water to the place re- 
quired, where, by means of capstans, they 
were drawn out of the water ready for use. 

As for the stones of the temple they 
were hewn in the region of the quarries. 
And when properly dressed, were placed 
on slides by capstans, and then, by cap- 
stans, let down the mountain sides, to the 
water, whereon they were to float to the 
place required for them. 

The floats were made of boards sawed 
by men skilled in the work, and were of 
sufficient length and width to carry the 
burden designed. And at the bottom of 
the floats were rollers, gudgeoned at the 
ends. Now when a stone was let down 
from the place of its hewing on to the float, 
it was ready to be carried to its destina- 
tion. And when the float thus arrived near 
Gakir, ropes, made of hemp and flax, were 
fastened to the float, and, by means of cap- 
stans on the land, the float was drawn up 
an inclined plane out of the water, the roll- 
ers of the float answering as wheels. 

When all things were in readiness for 
building the temple, the king himself, be- 
ing learned in all philosophies, proceeded 
to lay the foundation, and to give instruc- 
tion as to the manner of building it. These 
were the instruments used by the king and 
his workmen: The gau, the length, the 
square, the compass, and the plumb and 
line. Nor were there any other instruments 
of measure or observation used in the en- 
tire building of the temple. And, as to 
the measure called a length, it was the av- 
erage length of a man, after trying one 
thousand men. This was divided into 
twelve parts, and these parts again into 
twelve parts, and so on. 

After the first part of the temple was 
laid,' the builders of the inclined plane be- 
gan to build it also, but it was built of 
logs. And when it was raised a little, an- 
other layer of the temple was built. Then 
again the inclined plane was built higher, 
and another layer of the temple was built; 
and so on, the inclined plane, which was 
of wood, was built up even the same as was 
the temple. 



The width of the inclined plane was 
the same as the width of the temple, but 
the whole length of the inclined plane was 
four hundred and forty lengths. Up this 
inclined plane the floats, with the stones 
thereon, were drawn by means of capstans, 
and by men and women pulling also. 

For four and twenty years was Thoth- 
ma building the temple; and then it was 
completed. But it required another half a 
year to take away the inclined plane used 
in building it. After that it stood free and 
clear, the greatest building that had ever 
been built on Earth or ever would be. 

Such, then, was Thothma's Temple of 
Osiris, the Great Pyramid. 

Jehovih had said: Suffer them to build 
this, for the time of the building is midway 
betwixt the ends of Earth; yea, now is 
the extreme of Earth's corporeal growth; 
so let it stand as a monument of the 
greatest corporeal aspiration of man. 
For from this time forth man shall seek 
not to build hmself everlastingly on the 
earth, but in heaven. And these things 
shall be testimony that in the corporeal 
age of Earth man was of like aspiration, 
and in the spiritual age of man in an oppo- 
site condition of corporeal surroundings; 
for by Earth I prove what was; and by 
man prove what Earth was and is at cer- 
tain periods of time. 

CHAPTER LXII. 

When the temple was completed, and 
the king and his four high priests entered 
into the Holy Chamber, the false Osiris, 
through his servant God, Egupt, came in 
sar'gis, and spake unto the king, saying: 
Here am I, O king! 

Thothma said: My labor is well rec- 
ompensed. That thou hast come to me, 
O Lord my God, I am blessed. Osiris 
said: Keep holy my chambers; suffer no 
man, nor woman, nor child, that dwelleth 
on the face of Earth, to know the myster- 
ies of these, my holies, save and except 
my adepts. Here layeth the key of ever- 
lasting life. 

Thothma said: How sayest thou, the 
key of everlasting life? Osiris said: Here- 
in is that which is of good and evil, as I 
commanded thy forefathers; to eat whereof 
man shall become as Gods, and live for- 
ever. For this is the triumph of man over 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



373 



death, even for which I created him on 
Earth. 

Thothma said: Shall only we five know 
these things? Osiris said: Nay, verily; 
else the light of my kingdom would not 
be full. Behold, thou, how I built the 
temple! Was it not in the keeping of 
adepts? So, then, as I have given unto 
thee to know my kingdom, thou shalt give 
unto others, not suffering these lights to 
come, save through my commandments. 

Now in the second month after the tem- 
ple was completed, Thothma, the king, 
having put the affairs of his kingdom in 
order, went into the Holy Chamber, and 
thence ascended into the Chamber of Life 
and Death, leaving the four chief priests 
in the Holy Chamber. And Thothma cast 
himself in death by swallowing his tongue. 
Whereupon the priests closed the entrance 
and sealed the king within. 

Osiris, through his servant God, Egupt, 
said unto the priests: One alone shall re- 
main; in quarter-watch shall ye dwell with- 
in the Holy Chamber, and I will remain 
also. And the priests cast lots, and divided 
the watch in six hours each, unto every 
day. And Osiris sent Baal to the spirit of 
Thothma, and took him to Agho'aden, 
Osiris' heavenly place, showing unto the 
spirit the glory of the throne, saying: Be- 
hold the God of Gods. 

Thothma said: It is a great glory; lo, 
mine eyes are blinded by the light of the 
Lord my God. After this, Baal took the 
spirit of Thothma into a thousand heavenly 
places in Osiris' kingdom, and showed him 
the glory thereof. 

Thothma said unto Baal: Thou angel 
of God, thou hast shown me of a truth, 
God is in the image of man. Nor is there 
any but one God, who ruleth over all. 

Baal said: How sayest thou, then; who 
is God? Thothma said: How sayest thou? 
For behold, his glory was so great I could 
not look upon him. 

Then answered Baal, saying: Only an- 
gels and mortals; these are the sum of all 
things. He, thou hast looked upon, was 
even as thou art; a one-time mortal on a 
far-off star-world. He attained unto the 
Godhead, to create a world unto himself, 
even as thou, who art an adept, canst cre- 
ate flowers and plants and serpents. Thus 
he came into the void regions of space and 



created Earth and her heavens, and they 
belong to him, for they are his. And in 
like manner is every star-world, created 
and ruled by a God like unto thy God, who 
is Lord of all. 

Thothma said: O that all people knew 
these things! O that I may remember them 
when I am returned to Earth. 

Baal said: More than this shalt thou 
remember; for I will now take thee to the 
hells of the idolaters and the Jehovihians. 
Baal then took the soul of Thothma to the 
hells of De'yus, and showed him the hor- 
rors thereof. But he took him not to the 
regions of God, in Craoshivi. 

Now when Thothma had traveled in 
heaven for thirty days, Baal brought his 
spirit back to the Chamber of Death, and 
showed him how to regain his corporeal 
part, which he did. And then Baal sig- 
nalled unto Egupt, and the latter spake to 
the priest on watch, saying: Behold, Thoth- 
ma hath returned; go and bring thy broth- 
er, and deliver him into the Holy Cham- 
ber. 

And when they came they unloosed the 
sealing stones and delivered the king into 
the Holy Chamber, and he was awake from 
his trance, and remembered all he had 
seen in heaven, which he related to the 
high priests who were with him. And both 
Baal and Egupt came in sar'gis and talked 
in the Holy Chamber with Thothma and 
the priests. For one day the king remained 
in the Holy Chamber, that his spirit be 
reconciled to the flesh; and on the next day 
he and the priests came forth out of the 
temple and sealed the door thereof, and 
placed the king's guard in charge, that no 
man or woman might molest the place. 
Now Thothma had been in the death trance 
forty days. 

The three angels, Egupt, Baal and Ash- 
taroth, came into the altar in the king's 
palace that night, and showed themselves to 
the college students who had attained 
adept. Baal spake orally before them, di- 
recting his words to the king, saying: Be- 
hold, I am the angel of God thy Lord, 
whom thou hast beholden in heaven; I am 
the same who traveled in heaven with thee. 
What I speak, I say in the name of the 
Lord our God, whose servant I am. On 
the morrow shall thy high priests draw 
lots, and one of them shall enter the Cham- 



374 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



ber of Holies, in the Osirian Temple, and 
do even as thou hast. And after him, be- 
hold, another of the high priests shall do 
likewise; and so on, until the four have 
had thy experience. 

And it came to pass that the four priests 
in turn cast themselves in death, and vis- 
ited Osiris' heavenly kingdoms, and also 
many of the hells of De'yus, being led in 
spirit by Baal or Ashtaroth, Egupt being 
the guardian God of the temple. 

When they had thus accumulated the 
same knowledge of heaven and Earth, the 
five of them were of one mind as to at- 
taining life everlasting in the corporeal 
body. Osiris said: Behold, I will bring 
many back who are already dead; and they 
shall call unto their embalmed bodies and 
wake them up and inhabit them. Go ye, 
then, to the root of the matter, and pre- 
pare my people, for I will come in person 
and inhabit the temple ye have built; and 
my heavenly kingdom shall descend even 
to the earth. Prepare ye the Column of 
the Stars! 

Thothma built a column to the east line 
of the slat, seven lengths, and the height 
was thirty-six lengths; of wood and stone 
built he it, with an opening from the bot- 
tom to the top, and the width of the open- 
ing was six lengths. In the walls thereof 
was a winding stairway, and there were 
windows looking out to the east and west 
and north and south, that the stars from 
every quarter might be observed. On the 
summit of the column were dwelling-places 
for the seers and mathematicians with 
places for the measuring instruments and 
lenses. When this was completed, Thoth- 
ma built of wood and stone an external 
wall across the slat of the temple; and with- 
in this wall were stairs also, and these led 
to the top of the pyramid. This wall was 
also provided with windows, that the north- 
ern stars might be observed. 

Thothma made an observing column for 
the sun, and it was provided with lenses of 
all colors, so that adepts standing at the 
base of the pyramid could see the sun at 
every hour of the day, and distinguish the 
spots and their changes. A gau was set 
within each of the angles of observation, 
that the relative position of the sun with 
northern stars could be determined every 
day. 



By these two columns, therefore, Thoth- 
ma and his mathematicians measured the 
sun and moon and stars, as to the distances 
and sizes thereof. And Osiris comanded 
the king to send into the far-off lands of 
Earth his wisest mathematicians, to ob- 
serve the winds of heaven, and the drouth 
upon Earth; and the abundance of the yield 
of the earth in different regions, in differ- 
ent years and seasons; and to observe fam- 
ines and pestilences, and all manner of oc- 
currences on the face of Earth. He said un- 
to the king: When thy mathematicians are 
returned to thee with their accumulated 
wisdom, thou, or thy successor, shall exam- 
ine the sun and the stars and moon, as com- 
pared to the things whereof the mathemati- 
cians shall relate, one year with another; 
and three years with another three years, 
and five with five, and seven with seven, 
and so on for hundreds of years, and thou- 
sands of years. 

And when thou hast taken in the term 
of three thousand three hundred years, and 
compared the sun and moon and stars, 
as relate to the occurrences of Earth, thou 
shalt have the key of prophecy for three 
thousand three hundred years ahead. And 
thou shalt say of this land and of that 
land; and of this people and of that peo- 
ple, how it will be with them, and thou 
shalt not err. 

Thothma, the king, called together his 
mathematicians, and, according to their 
grade, chose from amongst them twelve 
hundred. These he divided into groups of 
one hundred each; and he gave them a suf- 
ficient number of attendants; and he sent 
them to all parts of the world, al- 
lotting to them sixteen years each for ob- 
servation, according to the commandments. 
And they took with them all kinds of in- 
struments to measure with besides scribes 
to make the records of such matters as 
came before them. And they wene through- 
out Arabin'ya, and Vind'yu, and Jaffeth, 
and Par'si'e, and Heleste, and Uropa, even 
across to the western sea; and to the south 
extreme of Arabin'ya, and to the great 
kingdoms in the interior, and to the north 
of Heleste and Par'si'e, and Jaffeth, to the 
regions of everlasting snow. 

And in sixteen and seventeen years they 
returned, save some who died on the jour- 
neys. And most wonderful was the knowl- 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



375 



edge these mathematicians gained. In 
some countries they found philosophers 
who had the knowledge required even at 
their tongues' end. Thothma received 
them in great pomp and glory, and award- 
ed all of them with great riches. 

And Thothma had these things rewrit- 
ten and condensed into books, and named 
them books of great learning, and they 
were deposited within the south chamber 
.of the pyramid, where never harm could 
come to them. 

And Thothma made it a law, that other 
mathematicians should travel over the 
same regions for every sixteen years and 
make like observations; and after them, 
yet other mathematicians to succeed them, 
and so on for three thousand three hundred 
years. And accordingly, a new expedition 
started forth. Now during the absence of 
the first mathematicians, Thothma and his 
philosophers observed the sun and moon 
and stars every day, and a record was made 
thereof, as to their places and movements, 
and as to the earth in the regions fo Thoth- 
ma's home kingdom. And these observa- 
tions were reduced to tablets and maos, and 
a record made of them in the Par'si'e'an 
language, which was the language of the 
learned. For the Eguptian language of 
that day was spoken mostly by the un- 
learned, and was mixed with the Fone- 
cean. 

After the mathematicians returned. 
Thothma and his philosophers examined 
the whole matter as compared with the 
maps and tablets of the heavens, and the 
facts deduced therefrom were written in a 
separate book and called The Philosophies 
of God and His Son Thothma, King of 
Earth. Copies of this book were made and 
sent into the lands of Arabin'ya, Vind'yii, 
Jaffeth, and Par'si'e, and Heleste, and Uro- 
pa, to the priests of God, but the original 
book was filed in the Holy Chamber, in 
the Temple of Osiris. 

Thothma applied himself to impart wis- 
dom unto all men. And during his reign 
he built in the land of Egupt seventy-seven 
colleges of Great Learning, twelve colleges 
of prophecy, two hundred houses of philos- 
ophy, seven adepteries, and three thousand 
free schools, and four thousand houses of 
sacrifice unto Osiris, Savior of all men. 
Three hundred and forty obelisks to God, 



thirty triumphal arches to De'yus, four 
thousand oan-nus to the Creator, and these 
were mounted on pedestals of polished 
stone, and stood at the street corners. 

And there were graduated to the rank 
of adept during Thothma's reign more 
than four thousand men and three hundred 
women, all capable of the death trance, and 
of going about in spirit. And of these over 
seven hundred were permitted within thir- 
ty years to test the death cast of the holy 
chamber in the pyramid. And their spirits 
were conducted into Osiris's heavenly re- 
gions, and sojourned there for many days, 
and returned to their bodies unharmed. 
Because of the position of the chambers, 
there was no action upon their bodies 
whilst in the trance. 

Thus did Thothma prove himself to be 
one of the wisest and greatest men that 
ever dwelt on the face of Earth. He be- 
lieved all things the Gods told him, be- 
lieved he was Thoth re-incarnated, and be- 
lieved he would never die as to the flesh. 
The false Osiris, through his servant God, 
Egupt, had said to Thothma: This is the 
manner of heaven and Earth, as regardeth 
man: All men are re-incarnated over and 
over until perfected to immortal flesh; and 
in that day man hath so perfected his adep- 
tism he can remain on Earth or ascend to 
heaven, even when he desireth. Hence of 
all knowledge, adeptism is the greatest. 

Thothma asked if there were any new 
creations. Satan prompted Osiris, who 
said: Nay; thy spirit is old as Earth. At 
first it was small and round, like a grain 
of mustard, only it was spirit. And the 
multitude of these seeds comprise the All 
Unseen. When one of them taketh root 
in gestation, then is the beginning. And it 
is born into the world a frog, or an ass, or 
worm, or lion, or small creeping thing; 
and it liveth its time and it dieth. And 
the spirit hieth back into another womb, 
and it is born forth a man low as to knowl- 
edge, evil as to life. And he liveth a time 
and dieth again; but again the spirit hieth 
back to another womb, and it is born forth 
again, another man, but wiser as to knowl- 
edge, and less evil as to life. And this 
continueth to hundreds of generations and 
to thousands. But he who hath attained 
adeptship hath it in his power to call forth 



376 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



out of the earth his own corporeality: he 
needeth no longer to go through the flesh 
of others. 

Thothma was wise even in his belief; 
for when he was growing old, and behold- 
ing his flesh sunken, and his eyes growing 
hollow and dim, and his hands getting with- 
ered, he inquired of the Gods, saying: I 
know thou hast taught me truth, O God. 
I am weak before thee, as to judgment, 
and curious in my vanity. Osiris said: 
Speak thou, O king! 

Thothma said: By all the force of my 
will; and by my great learning, I cannot 
stay the withering of the flesh. If, there- 
fore, I already dry up like a mummy, above 
the power of my will, how will it be with 
me when I am further emaciated? 

Satan prompted Osiris to answer the 
king, and so he said: Until thou art even 
more emaciated thou canst not understand 
the power of thine own soul. 

• With this the king was reconciled, and 
even at the time he was tottering on his 
last legs he began to build a new palace, 
saying: After I have changed this flesh into 
immortal flesh, hither will I come and 
dwell forever. And I shall be surrounded 
by adepts, wise and faultless. And this 
shall be the first colony of the kind I will 
build on Earth. But afterward I will build 
many colonies of like kind; more and more 
of them, until I have all Earth redeemed to 
immortal flesh. For of such shall be my 
kingdom, and all men and all women on 
Earth shall own me Lord of all. 

Nevertheless, with all Thothma's wis- 
dom, and the wisdom of his Gods, he fell 
on a stone and died suddenly on the day he 
was one hundred years old. 

CHAPTER LXIII. 

When Thothma was quite dead the 
priests carried his body into the temple, 
fully believing his spirit would return from 
heaven and transform the body from cor- 
ruptible into incorruptible flesh to live for- 
ever. And they laid the corpse in the 
place previously designated by the Gods, 
and sealed it up according to the commands 
of the false Osiris, Savior of men. 

Osiris had said: Whoso believeth in 
me, him will I save unto everlasting life, 
and though he lose his body, yet again shall 
he find it, and the corruptible flesh shall be 



changed in the twinkling of an eye, and 
become incorruptible unto life everlasting, 
with the spirit that abideth therein. 

On the fifth day the priests opened the 
chamber, for according to the Laws of 
Miracles, on that day, the spirit should ac- 
complish the feat; but behold, it came 
not and the body still lay cold and 
dead. But the Gods came in sar'gis and 
said unto the priests: Seal ye up the body 
for other five days. And the priests did as 
commanded; and after that they examined 
it again, but life had not returned. Again 
they were commanded to seal it up for 
other five days, which they did, but life 
returned not. 

Houaka, who was now the high priest, 
inquired of Osiris concerning the matter. 
And Osiris, through his servant God, 
Egupt, answered him, saying: Go bring 
a young man who is warm in the blood, 
which is life in the flesh, and he shall be 
the seventh son of an adept, and know how 
to cast himself in death. 

The priests brought Xaian, who, was in 
his twenty-fourth year, and when he came 
into the Holy Chamber he was bid to cast 
himself in death for the benefit of the king's 
soul. And Xaian thus cast himself, and he 
was sealed in the chamber of death for five 
days along with the king's corpse. And in 
five days the priests brought both bodies 
into the Holy Chamber, according to in- 
structions. And Osiris came and com- 
manded them to stand around the bod- 
ies, and when they had done so, the 
angels from Osiris' kingdom came and 
spirited away the body of the king, and 
they brought back the spirit of Xaian to 
inhabit the body of Xaian, and put it in 
possession thereof, making believe it was 
the spirit of Thothma returned. 

Houaka said to the Gods: Where is 
the body of Thothma? Hath it been trans- 
formed? And the Gods answered: It 
hath gone to heaven, and will return after 
many days. But as to the spirit of the 
king, behold, he is with thee. And the 
priests spoke to Xaian. believing it was 
Thothma. And after three days they came 
forth out of the temple and recrowned 
Xaian, Thothma the Second, and they 
proclaimed it abroad that these things 
were true, although they knew to the con- 
trary. 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



377 



As to the spirit of Thothma, at the time 
of death, it was taken to Agho'aden and 
put amongst the servants of Osiris' hea- 
venly kingdom, and thus enslaved. So 
Xaian became king of Egupt. 

Now, as regardeth the false Gods, Osi- 
ris and his confederates, they never tried 
to reincarnate the spirit of Thothma, but 
because of the virtues and the wisdom of 
Thothma, they used him for the benefit of 
Osiris' heavenly kingdom, and to estab- 
lish Osiris everlastingly on the earth as 
the all highest God. 

As to the kingdoms of the land of 
Egupt, which succeeded Thothma for 
hundreds and hundreds of years, the 
Eguptians were the most learned peo- 
ple in the world, and especially in a 
knowledge of the stars, and the sun and 
moon, and in adeptism and miracles. But 
woe came unto them; the land became 
flooded with hundreds of millions of dru- 
jas; and as to the people of Egupt, the 
chief desire was to be able to return in 
spirit after death and dwell with mortals. 

These spirits lost all sight of any 
higher heavens than to dwell on the 
earth; they knew no other. And they 
watched about when children were born, 
and obsessed them, driving hence the nat- 
ural spirit, and growing up in the new 
body of the newborn, calling themselves 
re-incarnated; and these drujas professed 
that when they had previously lived on 
Earth they were great kings, or queens, or 
philosophers. 

And they taught as their master, Osiris, 
the false, did: That there was no higher 
heaven that here on Earth, and that man 
must be re-incarnated over and over until 
the flesh become immortal. Not all of 
these spirits drove hence the natural spirit; 
but many merely engrafted themselves on 
the same body; and, whilst such persons 
lived, these spirits lived with them and 
dwelt with them day and night; not know- 
ing more than their mortal companion. 
And when such person died, behold, the 
druja went and engrafted itself on another 
child, and lived and dwelt with it in the 
same way; and thus continuing, generation 
after generation. 

And because of these indulgences many 
of the spirits came in sar'gis in the fami- 
lies of the Eguptians; eating and drinking 



with them corporeally; yea, and even do- 
ing things whereof no man may speak, 
whereby dire disease seized upon the flesh 
of mortals; and their blood and their flesh 
became inhabited with vermin. The peo- 
ple became idlers and vagrants; the lands 
were not tilled, and the places of learning 
became deserted ruins. 

CHAPTER LXIV. 

■m 

In Par'si'e and Heleste, also under the 
dominion of Osiris, Baal and Ashtaroth, 
because of the persecutions of Faith- 
ists, and shepherd kings, the Listians, 
these people fled into Par'si'e and Heleste 
for hundreds of years, and they built cities 
and established kingdoms. And none of 
these accepted the Lord, or God, or De'- 
yus, but for the most part worshipped the 
Great Spirit. Nevertheless, they were not 
Faithists in purity; for they engaged in 
war and lived not in communities, with 
rab'bahs as rulers, but dwelt together after 
the manner of warriors. 

To Baal and Ashtaroth was committed 
the duty of subjugating these people unto 
Osiris, Savior of mortals. So Baal and 
Ashtaroth, finding them stubborn in the 
worship of the Great Spirit, finally resolved 
to make them destroy one another, after 
the same manner as Te-in, in Jaffeth, and 
Sudga, in Vind'yu; and they asked Osiris 
for armies of warring angels for that pur- 
pose. Osiris gave them the following 
great angel generals and high captains: 

Jah, Apollon-ya, Petoris, Pluton-ya, Hi- 
ram, Ben, Yube, Ali-jah, Ares, Sa'wang, 
T'crono, Afro-dite, Argo, Oyeb, Nadar, 
Abel, Said, Ar-te-mis, Yac-ta-roth, Wab, 
Josh and Haur; and besides these there 
were the following deserters from Te-in 
and Sudga: Clue, Jon, I-sa-ah, Yam- 
yam, Luth, Bar, Hote, Ki-dom, Athe- 
na, Hira, Oke-ya-nos, Hermes, Posee-ya- 
don, Ura-na, Hace, T'sodus, Rac-Rom, 
Mi-kak, Tol, Taes, Wo-wouski, Sur, Ala- 
jax and Hesmoin. 

And Baal and Ashtaroth cast lots for 
each of the above generals and captains, 
and they were divided equally be- 
tween them. And Osiris gave to Baal 
and Ashtaroth, each, five hundred 
million warring angels. And thus 
armed, they descended to the earth, to the 



378 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-AEMIJ 



objectionable regions, of Par'si'e and He- 
leste. In those days these great divisions 
of the earth were divided into many na- 
tions and kingdoms. And a kingdom was 
not measured according to the land, but 
according to the number of cities that paid 
tribute to the central city; though some 
kingdoms had but one city. 

These, then, are some of the largest 
cities that Baal and Ashtaroth determined 
to destroy, to-wit: Su-yan, with five trib- 
utary cities; Lakao, with two tributaries; 
Haugun, with eight tributaries; Waas, 
with three; Lowga, with six; Tol, with six; 
Sun, with five; Tos, with four; Troy, with 
six; Abed, with two; Athena, with twelve; 
Hess, with four; Ituna, with twelve; Fado, 
with ten; Tuns, with seven; and Wa'ke'at, 
with seven. And besides these there were 
many large cities without any tributary 
cities, which were also doomed to everlast- 
ing destruction. 

The first great cities thus turned to 
war on each other were Haugun and Low- 
ga; Ashtaroth choosing Haugun and Baal 
choosing Lowga. These two cities were 
both of more than four hundred years' 
standing, and contained each a half mill- 
ion inhabitants, besides their tributary 
cities. Tojak was king of Haugun; he 
was the son of Soma, who was the son of 
Atyis, the necromancer. And of Lowga, 
Turwea was king; he was the son of Diah, 
son of Bawn, the philosopher. 

When Baal and Ashtaroth, with their 
armies from heaven, came near to these 
cities, they halted and built a temporary 
kingdom in the mountains of Zoe. 

Baal said to Ashtaroth: Behold, thou 
hast had the choice of cities, give thou me 
the first assault? Ashtaroth said: On thine 
own terms shall these battles be, and I will 
beat thee. To it, then; set on Lowga. 

Baal went to Turwea in his dreams and 
told him his son was waylaid by the peo- 
ple of Haugun, and, moreover, that Tojak 
had determined to come upon him and pos- 
sess the city. When Turwea awoke, he 
was troubled about his dream, and he in- 
quired of the oracle concerning the mat- 
ter. Ashtaroth had possession of the ora- 
cle, and she answered the king, saying: 
Thou art a seed of the Faithists, why fear- 
est thou for a dream? Have a caution of 
thy dreams; tell not thy son, for this day 



he goeth on the hunt, and thy words might 
bring about that which otherwise might 
not be. The king went his way, but Ash- 
taroth sent inspiring spirits to the king, 
saying: To caution thy son, that would be 
wisdom. And the king went out and cau- 
tioned his son. 

Ashtaroth then went to Tojak's wife, 
and gave her a dream that the Prince of 
Lowga went On a hunt, to all appearances, 
but came near Haugun for a very different 
matter, which was no less than the slay- 
ing of herself and husband. The queen 
awoke suddenly, and in fear, and told the 
king her dream. Tojak said: Foolish wo- 
man; it was but the fault of thy diseased 
blood, which, coursing the heart, gave 
thee a foolish dream. Tojak dismissed the 
matter. On the next day, the angels kept 
inspiring the queen to send her servants to 
the place of her dreams, to which she ac- 
ceded; and her servants were armed with 
spears, and instructed to kill whomsoever 
came in their way, as if by accident. 

Thus it came to pass that Turwea's son 
was slain. Turwea inquired of the oracle, 
and was answered by Ashtaroth, saying: 
Why comest thou to me for comfort; is 
not thy son dead by thine own fault? I 
said unto thee: Mention not the matter of 
thy dream to thy son, for oft it happeneth 
that telling of a thing bringeth it to pass. 

Turwea said: I am justly rebuked, O 
Apollon-ya! But tell me, thou that know- 
est all things, since one part of my dream 
hath come true, may not the other part, 
and of a truth, Tojak come to possess my 
kingdom? Ashtaroth said: If I tell thee, 
thou wilt tattle, and do nothing in 
thine own defence. Turwea then made 
oath to obey the oracle; whereupon she 
commanded him to inarch with all his 
army against Tojak, and suddenly demand 
satisfaction in ten thousand lives, to bal- 
ance the loss of the prince. 

This ended Ashtaroth's part with the 
city of Lowga; and now she went to Hau- 
gun, whilst Baal took charge of Lowga, 
sending his legions of angels to the people 
of Lowga, to inspire them with madness 
because their prince was slain. 

Ashtaroth, on her part, now assumed 
control of the oracle in Haugun, and sent 
her warring angels to the people of the 
city, advising them of the justice of slay- 






CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J 



379 



ing the prince, because he was come, not 
on a hunt, but to slay the king and queen. 
And Ashtaroth, further, told the king, To- 
jak: Try thou me as to my truthfulness: 
Behold, in two days the warriors of Tur- 
wea will be at thy city's gates; be thou 
ready for them and drive them hence, or 
lo, thy city will be reduced to dust and 
ashes. 

Of course the prophecy of Ashtaroth 
came true, and Tojak now believed he was 
in the protection of the Gods. The queen 
said unto him : I commanded my servants 
to slay the prince, for the Gods showed it 
to me that only by this could thy life and 
mine be preserved. The king, Tojak, jus- 
tified the queen, saying: Thou hast been 
the preserver of my life and thine. 

Baal, God of Lowga, thus marched the 
mortal armies against the city of Haugun, 
whilst Ashtaroth marched the armies of 
the latter place to battle against them. And 
thus, as mortals play a game with sticks 
and pegs, so played this God and Goddess 
a game with the mortals of these two 
great cities; played give and take to see 
the battles lost or won; and they used their 
legions of angels to inspire the mortals on, 
or to make them at times turn and flee. 
And whilst the Gods rested, amusing 
themselves by feasting and by talking over 
the sport of mortal death, the two great 
cities would also gain a little rest, but only 
to renew the bloody work. 

For four years the Gods and angels 
kept these two mortal cities at war; and 
though they lay a day's journey apart, all 
the way was strewn with the bones of the 
slain. And in four years they were reduc- 
ed to dust and ashes; and as to the people 
of the last year, for the most part, they 
were inoculated with the poisoned air of 
the dead, and they died also. And yet it 
came to pass, Baal beat Ashtaroth in the 
battle of death, for he caused all his people 
to be slain, whilst yet a few of Ashtaroth's 
remained. 

Thus did Baal and Ashtaroth pursue 
the other great cities of Par'si'e and He- 
leste. And the time of the destruction of 
any two or three cities varied from two 
years to ten years. For the destruction of 
Athena and Troy it required twelve years. 
And for the destruction of Ituna and Fado 
it required eleven years. Betwixt Su-gun 



and Lakao it required two years to bring 
them to war. Betwixt Athena and Troy it 
required three years to bring them to war. 
Two hundred vampires, angels of lust, 
were set upon a prince of Troy, and in des- 
peration he was driven to kidnap an Athe- 
nian princess, who was led to exposure by 
Baal's angel hosts. In this great battle 
Ashtaroth won the game, having succeded 
in having the whole of the Trojans de- 
stroyed. 

In the war between Tos and Sun, which 
lasted nine years, it was an even game, for 
both cities were entirely destroyed and all 
the people in them, and also their tribu- 
tary cities as well. But the city of Tol 
was destroyed within itself, for there was 
no city near enough to war upon it. The 
angels brought virus from the dead of oth- 
er regions, and inoculated the breath of the 
people of Tol, and their flesh festered, and 
they died without war. 

The whole time of destruction was one 
hundred and six years; and after that Par'- 
si'e and Heleste were wasted and desert, 
and wild beasts coursed the country far 
and near. 

Osiris had said: I will make the land 
of Egupt the greatest country in the world; 
I will have the place of my dominion near 
at hand. Satan had said to Osiris: If 
thou destroy not Par'si'e and Heleste, be- 
hold, Baal and Ashtaroth will rebel 
against thee, choosing these lands for 
their own kingdoms. 

CHAPTER LXV. 

Jehovih had said: I created man blank, 
as to good and evil, and gave him liberty: 
And I gave liberty also to the spirits of the 
dead. But these spirits set themselves up 
as Gods; and to glorify themselves used 
mortals in their own way. For they found 
that mortals could be turned to good or 
evil, to war or to peace, to virtue or to 
lust, according to the inspiration of the 
angels watching over them. But in this 
I provided a remedy also, and without 
abridging their liberty, which was, that the 
Gods, in contention for mortal souls, 
should fall out and ultimately destroy their 
own heavenly kingdoms, wherefrom angels 
and mortals should escape from bondage. 

And this was so. Te-in and Sudga and 
Osiris, even whilst their wars and machina- 



380 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J 



tions were going on with mortals, were 
scheming for mastery in hada, each to 
overthrow the others, and involve them in 
ruin. And it thus came to pass that a tri- 
angular war ensued in these two heavens, 
in which upward of ten thousand million 
warring angels were engaged hundreds of 
years. For, as mortals engage in corporeal 
warfare, so do angels engage in es'sean 
warfare. For though they cannot kill one 
another, they can bind and enslave and 
cast one another into hells, and surround 
them with never-ending fire, so they can- 
not escape. And the warring Gods send 
their armies forth to make captives of 
their enemies, who, when seized, are ei- 
ther made subjects of, or else cast into tor- 
ments. And these armies of warring an- 
gels, hundreds of millions strong, go into 
the kingdom of another God, and into 
suburban districts, carrying hence the sub- 
jects, with all their acquisitions. And yet 
at times these raiding armies venture too 
far, and are themselves captured and cast 
into torments. So that Gods in hada wall 
their kingdoms round with standing ar- 
mies, even as they have taught mortals to 
defend themselves. And their enemies 
seek to invent means to break these ar- 
mies through, and go in and plunder and 
destroy. 

In times of which madness no voice 
from Jehovih's angels can gain an attentive 
ear amongst them; even the same as when 
mortal kings are at war, for one to say to 
them: Behold, Jehovih is All Peace! They 
will even curse Jehovih and peace, so do 
the fighting angels threaten and curse if 
one of Jehovih's holy ones interpose in 
peace and love. 

As like a burning fever or canker worm 
that needeth run its course, before a heal- 
ing balm availeth good, so Jehovih permit- 
teth the Gods to pursue their reign, till 
helpless, they fall, environed in the harvest 
they sowed. For a time cometh to every 
man and woman born, on earth or in hea- 
ven, when sore disaster, if nothing else, 
will cast him helpless in agony, to make 
him own the Mighty Power Who created 
him; and make him supplicate in pity for 
some helping hand to lead him safely to 
the All Person's pleading Voice. Then he 
is ready to listen; to turn from Gods, and 
Lords, and Saviors, and Sons who profess 



to save; and to stand upright before the 
Father, and learn to know Him, and will- 
ingly learn peace, love, reason and truth. 

Jehovih hath said: In every soul I 
made a door, and in this My Light shineth. 
Herein My Voice speaketh; but they turn 
away, and go after them that speak to the 
external ear; a serpent biteth them, and 
they are cast in poison and in death! 

Man on Earth hath said: I will not 
heed Thy still small voice, O Jehovih, 
which speaketh to the soul; I will obey the 
king, that leads on to war, and with loud 
noises and violent oaths pursueth death- 
dealing as a virtuous trade. Not Thou, O 
Jehovih, shall be my master, but the 
king, who hath great pageantry. Behold, 
I will stand in his great armies, or be led 
on to death, even as the king willeth me; 
for he is my Savior and my defence. His 
Gods shall be my Gods; his Lords my 
Lords; his Savior my Savior; by blood 
and heroic butcheries will I prove my loy- 
alty. And even so have thousands of mill- 
ions of angels in hada said: Not the still 
small voice of my soul will I obey; but 
yonder gaudy God, whose sacredness is so 
great none can approach him but by crawl- 
ing on their bellies! He shall be my Lord 
and Savior; his battles shall be my battles; 
to feed the hells of hada with his enemies 
shall be my trade. 

Even to them that choose darkness and 
evil have I given liberty, also; for they 
shall learn by experience, in time to come, 
that all these guides and leaders, be they 
kings, or Gods, or Lords, or Saviors, are 
but snares, from whom, soon or late, they 
must turn in order to rise out of the hells 
they have built for others. For, because 
they put Me afar off, or denied My Per- 
son, or called Me Void like the wind, I 
cut them not off; but they cut themselves 
off from Me, and thus fell into torments. 

For I am as near to the corporean as to 
the es'sean; let them, then, disown their 
kings and Gods, and whomsoever hath a 
kingdom to glorify; and they shall es- 
pouse Me, for I am Ever Present. For 
this, all people shall do, either on earth or 
in heaven. My kingdoms are not by vio- 
lence or by war, but by liberty to every 
soul; and whoso practiceth peace, love, and 
liberty unto others, are My chosen. They 
are on the way of everlasting resurrection. 






CYCLE OF CPENTA-AP^LIJ 



381 



CHAPTER LXVI. 

About the time Baal and Ashtaroth 
had destroyed the inhabitants of Earth in 
Par'si'e and Heleste, they applied to Osir- 
is, demanding promotion to separate king- 
doms of their own. They said: 

Thou knowest of a truth that for sake 
of confederacy we merged our own king- 
doms into thine; to make thee powerful 
against the wars of Te-in and Sudga in 
heaven. And to do thy will we have laid 
desolate the mortal kingdoms of Par'si'e 
and Heleste. For which things thou didst 
promise us in the start we should have 
great kingdoms in heaven. 

Now behold, heaven is but one vast 
scene of war! And this also do we per- 
ceive, that the mighty contests are without 
any prospect of an end. As these heavenly 
wars raged hundreds of years ago, even so 
do they this day. Yea, the heavenly forces 
are becoming less disciplined and less scru- 
pulous from year to year. By evidence of 
which it is plain that thy heavens, and Te- 
in's, and Sudga's, will soon or late be cast 
into interminable hells. To prevent which, 
we ask of thee, our God, to give us each a 
section to ourselves, and we will subdue 
the places and govern them in our own 
way. 

Osiris answered them, saying: Of all 
the Gods, who but I hath done a hand's 
turn to raise mortal subjects to a higher 
plane? Te-in's course was destruction; so 
was Sudga's. And by much importuning 
ye twain persuaded me to have the mortals 
of Par'si'e and Heleste destroyed. And 
now, in the time when most of all we 
should be united, ye importune me to have 
my great kingdom disrupted and divided. 
Peaceive ye not that we have the balance 
of power in our favor? And also, that if 
in these troublesome times ye espouse new 
kingdoms, we will all be at the mercy of 
Te-in and Sudga. For which reason I be- 
seech you both to postpone the matter till 
we have driven our enemies from our 
doors. Let us be faithful to the confeder- 
acy. 

Now in this affair Baal and Ashtaroth 
came not to Osiris in person, but sent 
messengers, as if they were ashamed of 
their own proposal. And yet, on the other 
hand, Osiris invited them not to his king- 
dom. 



Ashtaroth said to Baal: See what Osir- 
is hath done! He taketh us for children; 
giving us sweet promises if we will but 
keep right on serving him. I tell thee, 
Baal, thou mayest serve Osiris; but from 
this time forth I am none of his! Behold, 
I will mark, out a kingdom of mine own, 
and I will establish it and rule it in mine 
own way. Moreover I will send word to 
Te-in and Sudga; and if Osiris oppose me, 
they shall know his vulnerable points. 

Baal said: Even so will I; and I will 
establish a kingdom alongside of thine, 
and if our enemies attack us we can the 
better defend ourselves. 

So said, so done. And Baal marked 
out for his heavenly kingdom over Heleste 
and northwestern Arabin'ya; and Ashta- 
roth marked out for her heavenly kingdom 
over Par'si'e and northeastern Arabin'ya. 
And the twain no sooner chose their gen- 
erals and captains, and founded their hea- 
venly thrones, than they sent word to Osir- 
is and to Te-in and to Sudga. 

A general dismemberment of these 
mighty kingdoms took place. In Osiris' 
heaven there revolted one Kabbath, who 
took the name Thammas. He was a gen- 
eral, whom tens of thousands of angel offi- 
cers delighted to serve. He marked out 
his heavenly place over western Egupt, 
and established his throne and officers, and 
had himself proclaimed to mortals through 
the oracles as The Only Son of the Great 
Spirit, The Savior of Men. Teos-judas 
also revolted from Osiris, and established 
a heavenly kingdom over South Arabin'ya. 
Besides these there were: Marcus, Delos, 
Acta, Hebron, De-bora, Julta, Wab, Thais, 
and D'nor, great generals and captains in 
Osiris' heavenly kingdom, all of whom re- 
volted and began setting up heavenly 
kingdoms of their own. 

And in Sudga's heavenly kingdom 
more than one thousand generals and cap- 
tains revolted and began to establish hea- 
venly kingdoms of their own. Of these 
the most prominent were: Judsa, Vishnu, 
Eorata, Chrisna, Histaga, Vivaulias, Hiras, 
Haroyu, Ahhoma, V'ractu and Tivirassa. 

And in Te-in's heavenly kingdom more 
than eight hundred generals and captains 
revolted, and established kingdoms of their 
own. Of these the most powerful were: 
Chong, Ho-Tain, Dyut, Cow, Ghan. Su- 



382 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



Lep, Djhi, Hiss, Me Lee, Wang, Hop-jee 
and Kaab. 

And all the revolted ones called them- 
selves Gods or Lords or Saviors, and en- 
deavored to establish an earthly habita- 
tion as well. And all of them took with 
them millions and millions and tens of 
millions of angel followers; and some of 
them had more than a hundred million 
subjects to start with. 

So anarchy began to reign in hada. 
Order was broken down; warfare was di- 
vided in a thousand ways, and neither an- 
gels nor Gods could more discover what 
this war or that war was about, save to in- 
flict torments on others. And so great 
was the conflict that over more than half 
of Earth all the lowest heaven was but one 
continuous succession of knots and hells. 
To inflict pain and disorder and destruction 
was the work of twenty thousand million 
angels in darkness. 

And now, alas, over all the earth where 
war had raged hundreds of years, were 
thousands of millions of spirits in chaos, 
not knowing in fact they were in the spirit 
world, but still battling against all who 
came along, to the left and to the right, be- 
fore and behind, screaming, bawling with 
madness, striking out in madness, in un- 
ceasing agony, in an unending nightmare 
of madness. 

And from the mighty hosts of darkness, 
the drujas, now pestering the people 
on Earth, were hundreds of millions 
of familiars taking to fetalism! Vam- 
pire* spirits who suck the blood and 
flesh of mortals till the brain and heart 
are wild and mad! Till the mortal is 
driven to nameless deeds of horrors, des- 
perate with the foul obsession. Spirits 
who bring poison and horrid smells to af- 
flict mortals with; spirits who delight to 
feed on the flesh of mortals which is cor- 
rupted with scabs and running sores. Spir- 
its that teach re-incarnation and lust as the 
highest, most exalted heaven. 

And now the mighty hosts of Anuhasaj, 
alias De'yus, the Lord God, the false, 
broke in on every side, and spread here 
and there for foulness and for fuel to feed 
their thousands of hells. And these in re- 
membrance of Osiris' hated name and 
treachery went for his great kingdom, fol- 
lowed by thousands of millions of angels, 



desperate with long-continued slavery, 
roused for deeds of vengeance. Forth into 
his capital Agho'aden, they rushed, beat- 
ing down the pillars of fire and high arch- 
ways and rushing into the throne of Osiris, 
seized him and his vice-Gods and high 
marshals and dragged them off and cast 
them into foul-smelling hells, hideous with 
the wail and roar of maniacs and tantaliz- 
ing drujas, and. with kicks and blows and 
poundings covered them up in foul dark- 
ness, heaped deep and smothering in suf- 
focating gases. 

Then off ran other legions for Te-in 
and his high officers, and to pillage his 
kingdom also. And him and them they 
seized and bore off in triumph to equally 
horrid hells. And then others for great 
Sudga ran, even more desperate for ven- 
geance' sake; and him they also caught, 
despoiling his mighty kingdom, and cast 
him into hell. 

And for many of the lesser Gods they 
ran, and broke them down utterly, and cast 
them into hells. Only two Gods of the 
past days in those regions escaped, Baal 
and Ashtaroth, who fled to save themselves 
for a more opportune season to carry out 
their wicked schemes. 

Of the self-Gods of Uropa, and North 
and South Guatama, little need be said. 
They established weak heavenly kingdoms 
and succeeded in inciting mortals to war, 
but to no great destruction. Their hea- 
venly kingdoms were for the most part 
failures; their thrones were poor and dilap- 
idated almost from the start. Of these 
great divisions of the earth mortals were 
too scattered and few to be profitable for 
false Gods. In Guatama they had not 
forgotten the lessons of I'tura, the false 
God who had ruined their forefathers. 
They were wary, and for the most part 
preserved their allegiance to the Great 
Spirit. 

CHAPTER LXVII. 

By the pressure of ji'ay, Craoshivi had 
descended near the earth, and some places 
bordered upon it. Darkness had over- 
spread the land of Earth in some regions 
for seven hundred years, so that the sun 
shone not, save as a red ball of fire. And 
nebula fell in many places to a depth of 
three lengths, so that even the places of 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



383 



the great cities of Earth, which had been 
destroyed, were covered up, and it was like 
a new country. Which was beneficial to 
Jehovih's angels, in assisting them to de- 
liver hosts of the chaotic spirits, whose 
mortal part fell in dread war. For such 
was the labor of the true God in Craoshivi, 
Son of Jehovih, and of his hosts of uprais- 
ed angels. To gather in from every quar- 
ter of Earth and her heavens the fallen vic- 
tims of the self-Gods; to restore them to 
reason and to happier and holier scenes; 
and to teach them righteousness and good 
works. 

Jehovih had said to God, His Son: Be- 
cause one man cannot lift up the whole 
world he shall not grieve, nor cease doing 
what he can. For his glory lieth in exert- 
ing himself to the full. Because the self- 
Gods have come against thee, they are 
against Me also; because they have es- 
poused to be Creators, and thus proclaimed 
themselves for their own glory, they shall 
have their fill. Before these times, the 
false Gods were content to proclaim their 
own names; but lo and behold, they have 
made the Lord God as the Creator, and set 
him up as a man, on a throne, to worship 
him! 

And Te-in, and Sudga, and Osiris! 
All of woman born, and knowing My 
breath upon them. Sufficient is it for thee, 
My Son, to gather in the afflicted and dis- 
tressed, and restore them and deliver them 
in light and truth. Keep thou thy schools 
and colleges in heaven; and thy nurseries 
and hospitals, and factories, and thy fleets 
of swift-flying otevans and airavagnas. 
And send thou thy faithful volunteers, and 
make the afflicted to rejoice and hold up 
their heads in great joy. But to them that 
will not hear; and to them that curse thee 
and Me, seeking to destroy for their own 
glory, be thou silent. My hand is upon 
them. My ji'ay'an shower covereth Earth 
and heaven. In their own game shall they 
cast themselves in darkness and destruc- 
tion. 

And all the while the self-Gods were at 
their evil deeds, the Faithists, Jehovih's 
angels, worshippers of the Ever Present, 



All Person, coursed the heavens along in 
their fire-ships, calling in the persecuted 
children of Jehovih. Calling loud and 
cheerfully through the heavens of the evil 
Gods, and over the kingdoms of the earth; 
calling in these words: 

Come! Come! The Father's kingdom 
is free! Come! Come! In peace and qui- 
etness thou shalt be thine own master! 
Behold, the Father's places rise higher and 
higher! Not downward, to the lower king- 
doms, nor to the earth, nor to re-incar- 
nation, the invented tale of drujas; but up- 
ward to wisdom, goodness, love and hap- 
piness. Because ye have put away the All 
Person, ye have fallen in the mire; ye have 
closed your eyes to yonder higher heaven. 
Come, O ye that are in bondage! Cut loose 
from all! Fly to Him Who brought ye 
forth to life! Disown the world! And 
self! And all the Gods and Saviors! 
Lords and kings! Be Jehovih's! Sworn to 
peace and love! To good works and right- 
eousness! Come! Come! Our otevans 
are free! Our airavagnas full of comfort. 
O come and be our loves! Be fellows, one 
with Jehovih. ' 

And they gathered in millions and thou- 
sands of millions! For hundreds and hun- 
dreds of years they labored in the dis- 
tracted regions of hada; toiled and toiled 
till wearied and prostrate, tens of thou- 
sands of times; then rested a while, invigor- 
ated for more energetic work. 

But not alone nor unseen, these toiling 
millions, hundreds of millions of Jehovih's 
angels, faithful Sons and Daughters. For 
the labor built up their own spirits to be as 
very Gods and Goddesses in noble endur- 
ance. Which was written in their fair 
faces, so the high-raised messengers of far- 
off heavens, traveling past, beheld Jeho- 
vih's soul in them. And so bore the news 
to other worlds of the darkness of Earth 
and her evil Gods, and of the faithful, 
struggling hosts of Jehovih in their uphill 
work. 

And now Earth and her heavens crossed 
the boundaries of the ji'ay'an forests, and 
rolled slowly towards the homes and do- 
minions of other etherean Gods. 



LORDS' RECORD FOR DAWN OR DAN 



CHAPTER I. 
HISTORY OF PO. 

For the four divisions of the earth Je- 
hovih gave four Sons of holy light and 
power for the voice of God and his Lords: 
Po, of Jaffeth; Abram, of Arabin'ya; 
Brahma, of Vind'yu, and Eawahtah, of 
Guatama, whose records are everlasting on 
the earth, which are testimony that these 
men were raised up by Jehovih for His 
Own glory, and for the deliverance of men. 

These are the generations of the line of 
Light from the time of Zarathustra: Shu 
Sa, Gwan, Loo, Sam, Dhi Jo, Wee, 
Him, Gow, See, Wing, He Wen, Tse 
Kong, Lam Ne, Moo Yow Tine, Luts, 
Hime, Mai Se, Hong, Ghee, Wan Ghee, 
Tse Loo, succeeding one another. 

All the foregoing were seers and proph- 
ets of God having the Voice from their 
youth up, and were each in turn a shield 
and guardian unto the chosen of God. 

God said: With Tse Loo, behold, the 
Voice was lost. But I called aloud on the 
face of the earth, and my Light spread 
abroad. And there came a woman of Che 
Song, named Ha-se, an I'hin, through 
whom the Voice was regained. Ha-se had 
seven sons and seven daughters, all of 
whom heard the Voice, and saw the Light. 
And God divided the fourteen sons and 
daughters, one from another, and sent them 
in different ways. 

These, then, are the tribes that sprung 
of them: King, Si, Gwe, Loo, Hi-Gah, 
Hi-se-Gua, Yo, Ha Fung, Ne, Hi Lam, 
Se'ing, Yuth Lo, Jon, Ying'e and Ho Lun 
Gow. From the line of Ha Fung sprang 
Enamjo and Ze'zoo, half I'hin. From 
Ying'e sprang No'e and Yu Laim: also 
Yu'tse and He-ah. And God commanded 
the He-ahns to dwell towards the south, 
and they so dwelt. 

From the line of King descended the 
We Yah-Ho; and they lived towards the 
north and made fellowship with the Foe- 
Sim, who were I'huans by blood, and also 



followers of the Zarathustrian law under 
the name Sa Sin, having rab'bahs whom 
they called bah. From the tribes of Foe- 
Sim sprang Han; and from We Yah-ho 
sprang Hi and Te-Wing'e; both of which 
tribes had the Light and the Voice. 

And all the north regions of Jaffeth 
dwelt in peace and happiness. And God 
looked upon them and blessed them in all 
things. Nevertheless, it came to pass that 
the tribes of Han forgot the commandments 
of God; and Le Han, a mighty chieftain, 
rose up amongst them, and re-established 
the Osirian doctrines; that corporeal 
knowledge should stand higher than the 
Ormazdian law. 

Han usurped the central throne of Jaf- 
feth, calling himself, Han, King of the Sun. 
And so Han gave himself up to getting 
knowledge, and to enforcing knowledge 
upon the people. Han issued the following 
decree: Han, King of the Sun! Behold, 
there is one sun and his satellites. There 
shall be but one kingdom, with satellites. 
Behold me, I am the sun king! I will 
put away all other doctrines and learning. 
Let all the world bow down to me! 

Han was asked: Shall a man not wor- 
ship the Unseen? He answered: Better is 
it to worship a stone, which thou canst see. 
Worship not in words, but in works; 
worship not in prayer, but in doing right- 
eously. What is prayer but crying to one's 
own weakness? If there be an Unseen 
Light, He will do His own way. What is 
the use of praying to Him? Rites and cer- 
emonies to Him are the expression of folly. 
Rites and ceremonies to our forefathers 
are excusable. If their souls continue to 
exist, the rites and ceremonies may give 
them good pleasure. 

So, Han abolished the worship of Je- 
hovih and His God and Lords. God look- 
ed down from his holy hill in heaven, and 
he said: It is well; let Han have domin- 
ion. Behold, Han enraptureth the multi- 
tude with his new doctrines, remembering 
not that these doctrines were tried thou- 
sands of years before. 

God prophesied through his prophet 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ ">«».. „ co « 



385 



Zewing'e, saying: Hear me, O Han, and 
all ye people of the whole world. I prophe- 
cy by the Voice and Light; I know my 
words are true words: By words the soul 
is bent; by not praying to the Unseen, the 
Unseen will be forgotten. By the abolition 
of rites and ceremonies to the Gods, the 
Gods will be forgotten. Man will rise up 
in self-conceit against his Creator, saying: 
Behold me; I am the highest of all things; 
my judgment is the greatest of all wisdom. 
And the tribes of men will aspire to estab- 
lish opinions as fundamental doctrines. 
War and destruction will come upon the 
nations! 

Han would not heed the prophecy of 
God. Han established what was called The 
First Han Dynasty, and it overspread the 
land of Jaffeth from centre to circumfer- 
ence. And there came of the laws of Han 
great persecution against the Faithists, the 
worshippers of Jehovih. 

Han said: Try them by the food they 
eat; and whoso refuseth to eat fish or flesh 
shall suffer death. Neither shall any man 
nor woman have favor in the courts, who 
holdeth sacred the life of a cow, or a horse, 
or dog, or any other animal on the face of 
the earth, or in the waters, or in the air 
above the earth. 

So the Faithists, the followers of the 
Zarathustrian law, were outlawed, and were 
tortured and put to death on every hand. 
And it had come true as prophesied by Ze- 
wing'e. 

God said: Behold, they have not only 
forgotten the Creator and denied His Per- 
son in words, but in behavior also. For 
they no longer hold sacred anything He 
created alive, even man. 

CHAPTER II. 

From Ze-wing'e, God raised up proph- 
ets for seven generations. Ze-wing'e be- 
gat Do Tse, who begat Yin, who begat Hi 
Ne, who begat Lan Se'ang, who begat Dhi 
Hsotch'e, who begat Ho Lon, who begat 
Po, who was an iesu in birth. When Po 
was yet very young, the voice of God came 
to him, saying: Be steadfast in the doc- 
trines of thy forefathers, eating neither fish 
nor flesh. Thy God will protect thee, and 
thou shalt gather together the scattered 
tribes of Zarathustrians, the Faithists, and 
re-establish them in this great land. 



In those days many of the Zarathustri- 
ans were celibates; and the king saw his 
people being reduced by war, and he made 
a law against celibacy, commanding all 
men to marry, and all women to bring forth 
children, or be put to death. When Po was 
grown up, God said to him: Behold, thou 
canst not fulfill the law, for thou art iesu- 
born. But I will bring thee a wife like 
unto thee, who is also barren, but ye twain 
shall be blessed with three children, and 
thou shalt call them Wan-ge, To-ghan and 
Tse Loo. 

And it came to pass that a woman of 
Hong Ge, with three adopted children, es- 
caped from the tyranny of Dhi'Wan, flee- 
ing to the southern tribes of Hi See Gua 
and Yo, and Gwan Gooh; and, with her, 
Po wed, and he named his wife Ah T'dowh 
Jee. Po was twenty years old when he 
married, and he went with his wife and 
three children to the country of Heng'a 
Di, which name signified border land, and 
he labored at scutching flax and hemp. 

And God came to Po, saying: What is 
the extent of thy fidelity to the All High- 
est Light? 

Po said: I will obey Him in all things. 

God said: Wouldst thou sacrifice thy 
three sons, if commanded by thy Creator? 

Po said: They are the Creator's, not 
mine. How dare I sacrifice that which is 
another's? 

God said: Thou art wise; thou knowest 
the Ormazdian law. 

Then Po asked: Who art thou? Who 
is this that cometh upon me silently, ask- 
ing questions? 

God said: Go thou, visit Hi Seiang, the 
philosopher, and question him. 

Hi Seiang was governor of the south 
province of Heng'a Di, and was, withal, a 
man of great learning. Po came to him 
and questioned him, saying: What is this 
that asketh us questions? Why do we 
question and answer ourselves all day 
long? 

Hi Seiang answered: Are we not two 
selfs? Do we not discourse within our- 
selves like two selfs? 

Po said: Which, sayest thou, is the 
superior self, that which questioneth within 



386 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J 



LORDS' RECORD 



us forever, or that which is forever answer- 
ing? 

The governor said: That which asketh 
questions must be the superior self. Po 
said: Who is it? Hi Seiang said: It is 
nothing, it is something. 

Po answered him, saying: It appeareth 
to me, these two selfs are two different 
persons; one belongeth to the flesh, the 
other to the Creator. Because this ques- 
tioning self is the same one that seeth and 
heareth Gods and angels. 

Hi Seiang said: What sayest thou? 
God and angels? 

Po replied: God and angels. To which 
the governor took exception, saying: Dost 
thou too defy the law? 

Po said: What I see I see, what I hear 
I hear. Something external to ourselves 
made us, and ruleth over us. 

The governor asked: Have we not rid 
the world of superstition? Why dealest 
thou with doctrines that were in the dark 
ages? I tell thee there are two things only 
in all the universe; the unseen firmament, 
and the corporeal worlds that float there- 
in. Their action and reaction on each oth- 
er produce what we call life, which is but 
an effervescence that cometh and goeth, 
and there is the end. The laws are right. 
Han hath done a good thing in abolishing 
the doctrines of the ancients. 

Whilst they were yet talking, God sent 
a blaze of fire into a bush standing near 
by, and a voice spake out of the flame, say- 
ing: Who, then, sayest thou I am? For 
verily I am! 

The governor saw the light, and beheld 
that the bush was not burnt; and he also 
heard the voice. Hi Seiang said to Po: Be- 
hold, thou comest to me, knowing I am a 
philosopher, and thou hast cast a spell in 
the bush, like a magician. I am master of 
a thousand books, and am registered as a 
man of great learning. Thou hast offended 
me: 

Po said: Why accusest thou me? For 
is it not just for me to accuse thee of cast- 
ing the spell? I cast it not. 

Again did God appear and speak, say- 
ing: Accuse thou not this, my son, Po. 
Thou shalt labor with him. Behold, I give 
into thy keeping the country of Feh; for 
even this hour hath died Moo Gwon. The 



tribes of Ghan shall be gathered together 
in Feh and Heng'a Di. 

Hi Seiang, the governor, was astonish- 
ed at the words of the Light; and he sent 
a servant, to ascertain if Moo Gwon was 
dead; (the distance being a day's journey 
each way) and he found it to be true. 

Hi Seiang, the governor, sent for Ah 
Sin to come and investigate the nature of 
Po. So, when the three were together, 
God wrote in the sand the word Te-in, and 
it was as if a flame of fire pierced the 
ground. Po said: From this time forth 
Te-in shall be the name of the tribes who 
have faith in the Creator only. Because He 
alone hath written it. 

Ah Sin said: How canst thou distin- 
guish betwixt that which is written by the 
spirits of the dead, and that which is writ- 
ten by the Creator? 

Po said: Light cometh in light; dark- 
ness cometh in darkness. 

Hi Seiang asked: Sayest thou, thou 
canst see the angels and the Gods? 

Po said: I see the angels, but the Gods 
I cannot see. Angels are like ourselves; 
but the Gods are as a flame of fire. 

Now, whilst they were thus discoursing, 
a light in the form of a triangle came and 
rested on Po's head, and the word Te-in 
was inscribed on the sides of the triangle. 
The governor said: What signifieth this? 
And Po, being under the influence of the 
light of God, said: 

Call me Te-in; I am the Father (rab'- 
bah) over all the living. I write in the 
sand, and speak in the mouths of my seers 
and prophets. He that ye call Po is my 
Son, begotten for the deliverance of my 
chosen out of the bondage of Han and his 
satellites. Behold, my people are impris- 
oned and tortured; persecuted and abused. 
And ye twain have kingdoms taxed for the 
glory of Han in his unrighteous work. 
Provide ye also triangles, and espouse me, 
and I will deliver your kingdoms also. 

Hi Seiang and Ah Sin both desired 
some pretext to throw off the yoke of the 
Han dynasty, and now lent willing ears to 
the instruction of Po and the Voice. Ac- 
cordingly, the learned men of these prov- 
inces were called together, to learn of God, 
through Po, the mysteries of earth and hea- 
ven, and especially as to the great mon- 
archy. When these Councils were assem- 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ «>— ■ -obo 



387 



bled, God cast his light upon Po, and they 
all saw it. And the words Po spake were 
called Vede'or. Word by word learned 
they wisdom of God, repeating them over 
and over, which was called Learning by the 
Mouth, being in contradistinction from 
learning by books and tablets. 

God said: Great trials will come upon 
my people. The kings will seek to destroy 
the doctrines of Te-in. For which reason 
ye shall not write nor engrave my words 
until the coming of Kosmon. 

CHAPTER III. 

These, then, are the sacred laws given 
through Po, by God. 

Seek to bring forth heirs that will be a 
glory to thy Creator. Marry not because 
of the impulse of the flesh, but consider 
thine own spirit and the spirit of thy 
spouse. Shut not up thyself in celibacy, 
but multiply and adorn the earth. 

Thy Creator provided milk for the in- 
fant; but with the coming of the teeth, 
thou shalt provide for their service also. 
Feed thou him according to the Ormazd- 
ian law. To make him a warrior, give 
thou him fish and flesh. To make him pa- 
tient and strong, with docility, remember 
the camel and the ox, feeding on the herbs 
that grow on the earth. 

Ne-gwon asked: Was not celibacy the 
highest of all laws? Is it not so now? 

God said: There are times for all things. 
In the days of Zarathrustra celibacy was 
the first of laws. In those days man was 
not ready for these laws. Yet thou shalt 
not call the one law higher than the other. 
The fullness of earth knowledge requireth 
marriage, yet the bondage after death 
holdeth the spirit of man for six genera- 
tions to his own heirs. By celibacy, a 
man's soul is not bound after death by the 
love he beareth his children to lingec about 
the earth, and he may ascend quickly into 
paradise. The man or woman that is weak, 
or deformed, or blind, or deaf, or with run- 
ning sores, and he who is iesu, shall not 
marry, nor bring forth heirs. Nor shall 
he who is ieus, take sorrow to his soul; for 
this is the testimony of the Father that his 
race is' emancipated from the earth. 

Teachers in public shall be celi- 
bates; children, who decide that they will 
become teachers, or priests, or priestesses, 



shall take vows of celibacy. For such per- 
sons are married to the Great Spirit; and 
they shall be as Gods and Goddesses, 
knowing no more love to one person than 
another. 

Remember that they who marry, are 
chosen by Ormazd to raise up offspring 
for the glory of heaven and earth; and they 
shall dwell together in peace, love and har- 
mony. 

Thou shalt not marry but once; neither 
shalt thou look after any other partner all 
the days of thy life. The husband shall be 
the master of the house; but when he is not 
present, the wife shall be master. 

Thy sons at the age of eleven years, 
and daughters at the age of nine years, 
shall begin to learn maxims. And at that 
same time they shall be consecrated to the 
Creator and committed to His service. 

The wise shall rule over the foolish, but 
to raise them up. 

The rich shall apportion their riches 
for the benefit of the city. The poor shall 
reverence the rich and take council from 
them. 

Behold, I have given many gifts unto 
my people: the woman to give suck; the 
very strong man to carry burdens; the wise 
man to oversee the city; the learned man 
to explain the ancients; the prophet to hear 
my voice; the magician to hear the voice 
of angels; the physician to heal the sick; 
every several one gave I good gifts. Thou 
shalt not covet another mans' gifts, but be 
wise in discovering thine own, and using 
them for the benefit of the city. Neither 
shalt thau covet another man's riches, nor 
anything that is his. What more is a rich 
man than a watch-dog? Behold, it is his 
matter, whether he fulfilleth my command- 
ments. According to every man's gifts do 
I require of him, as to what he can do 1 for 
the people of his city. To the poor man, 
my exactions are lighter than a straw. 

For the ignorant man, and for the very 
young child, I provided the wise and the 
rich as Gods to raise them up. As they 
minister unto them, so do I bless them for 
their labor. What they do corporeally for 
the resurrection of those beneath them, so 
do I answer them in spirit in my resurres- 
tions in the heavens. 



388 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



LORDS' RECORD 



Seven castes have I made for my chos- 
en: The first are the prophets; the second, 
such as have the highest genealogy; the 
third, the rab'bahs and priests; the fourth, 
the spe-e-su; the fifth, physicians; the sixth, 
the rich, and seventh, the very poor. Each 
and every caste shall remain by itself; all 
of them are worthy before me, and are 
equally my children. 

Thou shalt not kill, for food to eat, 
anything that breathes the breath of life. 

Thou shalt love to search for thy Cre- 
ator in all things on the earth, in the earth, 
in the waters, and in the air above the 
earth. 

Thou shalt love to search for all that is 
good in thy neighbor; but to excuse all the 
evil that is in him. 

Thou shalt keep sacred the days of thy 
God, and cause all thy people to rejoice 
in the delightful creations of thy Creator. 

Thou shalt obey the prophet of thy 
God; and be obedient to the rab'bah of the 
city. Next to these, thou shalt honor thy 
father and thy mother, and pay reverence 
to thy grandfather and grandmother. 

In the temple of thy God, remember 
that all men are alike; for even as death 
layeth the high and the low alike, so stand 
my people in the house I have built. 

Thou shalt respect the opinions of all 
men; for even thyself may be in error. 

Thou shalt speak but little of thyself or 
anything that is thine; for all others have a 
history also. 

Thou shalt make thyself compatible 
unto others in all righteousness. 

To re-instate the Zarathustrian law, the 
largest city shall not exceed two thousand 
souls; and the smallest shall be ten fami- 
lies. Save they are celibates, in which case 
a city may be as small as eight souls, hav- 
ing one rab'bah or priest. The best, high- 
est learned men, who shall be a celibate, 
shall be the priest and ruler of the city; 
and the sins of the people of the city shall 
be upon his head. But if it be a large city, 
he may choose one, or as many as six 
priests, to rule with him; and in that case 
the sins of the city shall be upon them 

When a matter cometh up, the priest 
shall call whom he will to speak thereon; 
and when they have spoken, he shall de- 
cree by his highest light, and that shall be 
the law without repeal, save by himself. 



It shall be lawful for the governor, who 
is the chief priest, prior to death, to repeal 
all his laws; so that his successor shall 
make new laws. For no man shall be 
bound after death by his own laws, in 
which case he could not come back and re- 
peal them. But as regardeth the laws a 
governor or chief priest maketh whilst he 
ruleth over a city, and over all persons 
whom he hath ruled during his life-time, 
he shall be responsible for them, both in 
this world and the next. For if a priest or 
governor maketh a law of darkness, and his 
people live by that law, their souls will be 
in darkness in the next world through his 
fault, and he shall answer to them in the 
next world for what he hath done in this. 

Wherein the manufacture of copper or 
iron, or other things, requires more than 
two thousand people, there shall be another 
city, with five breadths of the first city be- 
tween them. And the government of the 
second city shall be like unto the govern- 
ment of the first. But in no case shall 
there be more than four cities near about 
in the same country. 

Ye shall neither hire nor be hired; nei- 
they amongst yourselves nor with the 
kings' peoples. Nor shall ye have servants 
nor masters, for ( all shall be alike servants 
to Ormazd only. 

Sin-wah inquired: Was it not taught in 
the Zarathustrian age to respect the caste 
of men according to the number of their 
servants? And whether, according to the 
descent of men, they were born of parents 
who had risen above servitude for many 
generations? God said: The old law was 
for the olden time. It was a good law to 
improve the breed of men for special 
trades and learning. And that law hath 
fulfilled its purpose. The physician hath 
found great cures; and he knoweth all the 
parts of the flesh and the blood. The min- 
er knoweth the different kinds of stone, and 
the metals in them, and how to extract 
them. The farmer knoweth grounds and 
the yield thereof, and what they will best 
bring forth. The spinner and weaver have 
found the best of fibres for paper and for 
cloth. And so hath it come to pass in all 
departments; by the Zarathustrian 'law of 
caste have they perfected these things suf- 
ficient unto the requirement of man. For 
which reason ye shall teach all things unto 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ ">-.■ «"" 



389 



all; and they shall work with their own 
hands at all industries; remembering that 
the highest and most perfect man is he 
that can do all things. 

Jon-Le inquired. Since a man dieth in 
a few years at most, why shall he strive to 
learn things that pertain to the earth? 

God said: All learning is as a gymnasi- 
um to the spirit. Knowledge is the strength 
of the soul. Ye shall teach all things unto 
your sons and daughters, perfecting them 
in the talents created withal. First, to use- 
ful labors; second, to learning; third, to 
music and art, sculpture and painting; 
fourth, to mining; and fifth, to perfection. 
And ye shall intersperse labor and learning 
with recreation, not only in rites and cere- 
monies, but in harmless games, as in danc- 
ing, racing and playing, old and young. 
Cultivating joyous hearts, for these are 
outspoken words of glory to the Great 
Spirit. 

Every governor, and priest, and rab'- 
bah, shall provide for a successor; by the 
light of the All Highest shall they be 
chosen. 

CHAPTER IV. 

Hi Seiang became converted to the doc- 
trines of Po as taught by God, who was 
called Te-in in those days in that country. 
Ah Sin and Hi Seiang and Tse Gow en- 
tered into compact to throw off the domin- 
ion of Han, and so notified him. Han 
thereupon declared war against them. And 
he pursued them cruelly, laying waste a 
great country. Po and his followers were 
thus driven toward the south; and on their 
way they gathered up the Faithists of the 
tribes of He-ah. 

Now it came to pass that Han's success 
in war was so great that he concentrated 
not his armies, but caused them to scatter 
in different ways. And behold, he went 
so far that the barbarians fell upon his ar- 
mies and destroyed them. And Han per- 
ished by the blow of a barbarian woman. 

In the fourth year of the inspiration of 
Po, he returned and possessed the coun- 
tries of Feh, Heng'a Di and Se Lov, and 
he reinstated Ah Sin and Hi Seiang as 
governors. Hi Seiang called a council of 
thirteen kingdoms of Jaffeth, and after 
seventy days' deliberation Hi Seiang was 
made ruler over Jaffeth, receiving the title, 



King of the Sun. And he established the 
doctrines of Po by law, changing the name 
of All Light, to Te-in, signifying God. 
And he stopped all persecution against the 
Faithists; and he prohibited idol worship. 

And Po traveled east and west, north 
and south; teaching and displaying mirac- 
ulous things. And God was with him at 
all times and places. Gathering together 
the chosen; explaining and practicing the 
commandments of God (Te-in). And man 
ceased to worship all idols and Gods ami 
saviors; worshipping the Creator only. 

CHAPTER V. 
HISTORY OF ABRAM. 

Out of the hosts of Par'si'e, who were 
of the people of Shem, who were since the 
submersion of Pan, came Abram, a man 
chosen by God, in the arc of Spe-ta, for 
the deliverance of the Faithists of Arabin'- 
ya. 

These, then, are the generations of the 
line whence came Abram, that is to say: 
Of Shem and the seventy tribes, first going 
forth beyond the mountains of Owatchab- 
habal, Tur who settled in Par'si'e, and his 
descendants Raf-bak, and his descendants 
Goe, and his descendants Wawa, and his 
descendants Sadr. In Sadr the line was 
lost, but through his daughter Bar-bar re- 
gained through the I'hins in the land of 
the Goats, where the Listians lived, having 
fled from the tyranny of the kings of Oas. 

From Bar-bar was descended Egount, 
from him Dir, from him Wow-sha, from 
him He-lial, from him Rac-ca. And here 
the line ran by female heirs, beginning in 
Rac-ca's daughter, Hess, from whom was 
descended Gil-gil, from whom was de- 
scended Thussa, from whom was descend- 
ed She, from whom was descended seven 
generations in su'is; and it was lost in We- 
ta-koo, but regained again through Thin 
seed, and appeared in Re-both, and again 
su'is extended through these generations: 
Arfaxad, Sala, Eber, Prleg, Roo, Sa-rug, 
Nahor and Terah; but in Terah the line was 
lost, but regained by I'hin seed, from whom 
sprang Geth, from whom sprang Gus, from 
whom sprang Ra-bak, from whom sprang 
Ya-shem, and by I'hin seed sprang Ti-lot, 
and by I'hin seed Shi-ar, and by I'hin seed 
Shir-ra, from whom descended Na-hor the 
second, from whom sprang Abram. 



390 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



LORDS' RECORD 



Abram was of pure blood, an I'huan; 
and the light of su'is had been with his 
forefathers and foremothers since the flood, 
and he was large and red, like new copper, 
and had black hair and long beard, fierce 
to look upon; but his soul was gentle as a 
woman's. Abram could see without eyes 
and hear without ears, knowing things by 
the light of God which dwelt in him. 
Wherefore God chose Abram to gather to- 
gether the Faithists in Arabin'ya and the 
adjacent countries, even as he had appoint- 
ed Po in Jaffeth. 

In those days there were great kings 
and men of great learning, and they had 
books of learning and instruments for 
measuring things far and near. Abram 
knew of these things, for he had been a ser- 
vant in a king's family where learned men 
and women congregated. And so, know- 
ing the power of God was upon him, he 
ran away in his youth, and lived amongst 
the Listians, who made baskets and trink- 
ets in the forests, which they sold to the 
kings' peoples. 

And God spake to Abram, saying: Fear 
not for men of learning; neither grieve 
thou for the learning in books. When they 
are forgotten, thy words and thy labors will 
overspread the world. 

And God lived with Abram, teaching 
him and working miracles through him. 
And it so happened that the Listians in 
their rambles, selling wares, told the slaves 
of the kings about the wonders of Abram. 
And the slaves fled from bondage and 
went into the wilderness in search of 
Abram. And when they came before him, 
he spake unto them, day by day, as they 
came, saying: 

Why have ye come? I called you not! 
And when they could not answer, Abram 
said unto them: God brought you. Man 
of himself doeth nothing. Search, then, 
the records of your generations; for ye are 
descended from the Faithists of old. 

And they searched, and found not one 
had come but was descended from before 
the time of Zarathustra. 

Abram said: Think not that God cometh 
to one man alone; when he provideth a 
voice he also provideth ears and hearts. 
Because ye have been faithful unto him, he 
calleth you to deliverance from your ene- 
mies, who are God's enemies also. 



CHAPTER VI. 

When there had come to Abram in She- 
a-do-wan four thousand five hundred souls, 
God spake to Abram, saying: Come, now; 
I will lead thee and thy people into anoth- 
er country. 

God led Abram away from He-sa, his 
native place, where he was a maker of 
baskets, and took him to the ancient land 
of Ham, which had been devastated by 
Druks, before the flood, as the name signi- 
fieth; whereafter God surnamed him Abra- 
ham, and made him chief rab'bah over the 
Faithists of Arabin'ya. 

So Abram led his people thence and 
came into Lower Howd-Lutz. And it came 
to pass that in the next year after they de- 
parted out of She-a-do-wan a famine came 
upon the land, and the enemies of God 
were cut off, and could not pursue Abram 
and his people. God said: Because they 
have not raised up one out of the sons of 
Ham, thy name shall be, henceforth, Abra- 
Ham, and it shall be testimony in thou- 
sands of years of my records in the libra- 
ries of heaven. After this it was that 
Abram was called Abraham, and he built 
altars of worship and altars of sacrifice, ac- 
cording to the commandments of God. 

Now it came to pass in the early days of 
Abraham, he told his brothers that the 
light and power of God were with him; 
and, though others believed in Abraham, 
yet Lot, Abram's brother, and Lot, 
Abram's nephew, believed not in Abraham, 
saying of him: He was born naturally, 
and is wise of his own judgment. 

God said to Abraham: Behold, it is an 
easy matter to commune with spirits, but 
to judge righteously of them is not so 
easy. For which reason thou and thy wife, 
and one hundred picked men, shall go and 
visit Sodom and Gomorrah in the valley 
of Siddim, where Lot lives. 

And Abraham and his people went as 
commanded by God, and visited the cities 
of Sodom and Gomorrah; and God spake 
privily to Abraham, saying: I will destroy 
these cities, for they are as hells for evil 
spirits; but Lot shall escape for thy sake. 

And when they came to Sodom, behold, 
angels walked amongst the people, and the 
people knew they were angels, but cared 
not for them. And there were laws made 
by Bera, king of Sodom, regarding the be- 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ w- "«»» 



391 



havior betwixt angels and men. And Abra- 
ham, being pressed by the presence of God, 
said unto his people: Behold, there are an- 
gels that love to dwell in lust, and to par- 
take with mortals; to eat with them; to lie 
down with them, and to partake in all un- 
godly pleasures. 

God, through his angels, rained down 
fire and brimstone on Sodom and Gomor- 
rah, and they were burnt and destroyed. 
Lot, the elder, escaped, and went and lived 
in a cave. 

Now, after Abraham and his people 
were returned to Jireh, his camp, and it 
was night, God said to Abraham: Be thou 
steadfast, and show thy people that they 
may understand my words. 

And whilst they were yet praying before 
the altar, God withdrew from Abraham, 
and suffered the evil angels, who had fol- 
lowed them from Sodom and Gomorrah, 
to draw near about the altar. And one of 
the angels clothed in a great light, with a 
crown, and with sparkling gems, appeared, 
so all the multitude of people could look 
upon him. 

Abraham said: Who art thou? And 
the spirit said: I am thy God, ruler of hea- 
ven and earth! Abraham said: I am thy 
servant; what wouldst thou? And the spirit 
said: Thou shalt take thine only son, 
Isaac, and thy hosts who were with thee at 
Sodom and Gomorrah, and go with me 
whither I will lead thee, for I have a great 
work for thee. 

Abraham said: Whatsoever thou puttest 
upon me to do, that will I do. 

So in the morning Abraham and his son 
Isaac, and the hosts who had been with 
Abraham to Sodom and Gomorrah, as- 
sembled together. And Abraham spake, 
saying: Whither, O God? The spirit an- 
swered, saying: Take sticks and a fire- 
brand and come thou to the summit of 
yonder hill, for thou shalt restore the rites 
of burnt offerings. So Abraham told what 
God had said, and they started, and Isaac 
carried the bundle of willows, such as 
basket-makers use, saying: This will light 
the large pieces; but what wilt thou burn 
for an offering, O father? And Abraham 
said: God will provide. 

And when they ascended to the place 
Abraham gathered logs and heaped them 
up, and Isaac placed the willows. 



Then spake the spirit, saying: What 
shall a man love above all things in the 
world? And Abraham said: His Creator. 
And the spirit said: For which reason thou 
shalt offer thine only son, Isaac, as a burnt 
offering. And it shall be testimony before 
thy people that thou wilt obey God even 
to the sacrifice of thine own flesh and kin. 

Abraham said: Show me that thou art 
God, that I may not err; for I have been 
commanded not to kill. 

And the spirit departed away from 
Abraham, perceiving that he knew the 
higher law. Anl Isaac was grieved at 
heart, for he desired to witness what a sac- 
rifice was. And the people, seeing a ram 
near at hand, went and caught it, and 
slaughtered it, and sprinkled the blood on 
the sacrifice, and they lighted the fire and 
roasted the flesh, and took it and gave it 
to the poor. 

And Abraham called the place Jehovih- 
Jireh, and they returned to the camp; and 
Abraham, being moved of God, spake be- 
fore the people. 

CHAPTER VII. 

Abraham said: This testimony declare 
I unto you, whereof witnesses are of your 
own brethren, that even the chosen of God 
can be deceived by evil angels; for they 
can take any name and form; and, having 
no fear of God before them, declare false- 
hood for truth and darkness for light. 
And, as ye have seen, the evilest of cities, 
even as the purest, may be the abiding 
place of angels. For which reason ye shall 
not seek signs and miracles, for these may 
be of evil spirits, even to the showing of 
their bodies and of conversing learnedly. 
It is not in the power of man to know by 
words and signs, or by oaths or promises, 
what is truth. 

One thing hath the Father created with- 
al, which is His Own Light. Wherefore 
be ye believing toward men and angels; 
and wherein they teach ye according to 
the Father, which is life unto all, and happi- 
ness unto all, they are holy. If man or an- 
gel say: Visit the sick, and administer to 
the distressed, follow his advice, for it is of 
the Father. But if man or angel say: Do 
thou thus, and thou shalt have profit, or 
glory, or applause, obey him not, for he ad- 



392 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



LORDS' RECORD 



viseth for thyself and not for the brother- 
hood of men. He is not of God. For spir- 
its will come in disguise of your fathers 
and mothers who are dead, professing love 
and profit to you. Believe them not, save 
they teach you to sacrifice self for the good 
of others. 

The wicked in heart, having profited in 
herds, and in gold and silver, say: Behold, 
God hath blessed me! But I say unto 
you, they are cursed, and not of God. 
Has he gathered you here together be- 
cause ye were rich? Ye were slaves, and in 
poverty; sick, and in bondage. And he 
came and delivered you. Be ye like unto 
him, and he will abide with you. If a 
man come, saying: Behold, this is my coat; 
give it to me! Thou shalt say: Prove thy- 
self as to who thou art. But if a man 
come to thee, saying: Thy herd has gone 
astray; thou shalt not say to him: Prove 
thyself as to who thou art. But go thou, 
and see after thy herd. If. a spirit say: Be- 
hold, I am thy father, say to him: It is 
well; what wouldst thou? And when he an- 
swereth thee, consider if his words be of 
God. And if his words be not of God, 
which are for the glory of the Creator, 
thou shalt challenge him to prove himself. 

As God is captain of heaven and earth 
unto all righteous souls, so is there a satan 
who is captain over evil spirits. And inas- 
much as the kings' peoples have not faith 
in the Father, their souls fall a prey to sa- 
tan and his hosts. 

Let not any man flatter himself, saying: 
Behold, I have joined the Faithists; my 
soul shall escape hell. For in that day and 
hour God may be putting him to the test, 
to see if his heart be for good works and 
holiness. For as ye profess God, ye are 
doubly bound to practice godliness in your 
behavior towards men and angels. 

CHAPTER VIII. 

When Lot the younger escaped out of 
Sodom, he halted in a small city called 
Ben-ah, and tarried there whilst Sodom 
and Gomorrah were being consumed with 
fire; and because he was saved, he called 
the place Zoar, because he was a worship- 
per of the doctrines of Zarathustra, who 
was called in the Fonecean language Zoa- 
raastra. And the place was called Zoar for 



more than a thousand years. When Lot 
departed out of Zoar, there went with him 
two tribes, and there were born of the 
house of Lot, offspring to the two tribes 
who accompanied him, and these became 
the nations in after years known as Moab- 
ites and Ammonites, who were of the Fo- 
neceans, as their names show, and they 
followed the doctrines of Zarathustra. 

In former years God appeared to Abra- 
ham in a dream, and said unto Abraham: 
Thou shalt be a father to many peoples. 

When Abraham awoke he told Sarai, 
his wife, and she was troubled, being bar- 
ren, and she prayed God for Abraham's 
sake. Now it happened that Hagar, 
Sarai's maid, had a son, and called his 
name Ishmael; and Sarai was jealous of 
Hagar, and abused her during pregnancy. 
And God spake to Abraham, saying: 
Because of the hatred betwixt thy women, 
Hagars' son will be as a wild man; his hand 
shall be against every man, and every man 
shall be against him. 

Abraham said: How, O God? And God 
said: I told thee thou shouldst be a father 
to many peoples, and thou told Sarai, thy 
wife. Now Sarai became vain in her di- 
sires for offspring, and, in her eagerness, 
she opened the door of thy house to satan, 
and hence this matter is upon thee. Go, 
therefore, my son, and reconcile thy wo- 
men. And Abraham told Sarai what God 
had said. And Sarai inquired of Abraham, 
saying: Before God, tell me is Ishmael 
thy son? And God shall judge betwixt us. 
Abraham said: Teach me, O God, to an- 
swer Sarai, that I may reconcile them. And 
God said: Behold, thy Creator is the Fa- 
ther of all the living. 

And when Abraham told Sarai God's 
words, she cried in sorrow and repentance, 
saying: Thou art wise, O God! For what 
matter is it to me, since I know that Ish- 
mael is thy son, and Hagar is thy daugh 
ter? 

And Sarai went to Hagar and said: O 
my sister, I have sinned before God. I saw 
thy son, and knew the Creator gave him, 
but I turned against mine own soul, ?nd 
loved not thy treasure. 

Hagar said: Saidst thy God that Abra- 
ham was father to my child? And Sarai 
said: Nay, O Hagar. Hagar said: Nei- 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



.OROS' RECORD 



393 



ther said I thy husband was Ishma^'s fa- 
ther. 

So they were reconciled, and W right 
of the beginning of Abraham's nations, 
Ishmael was Abraham's son be^re God, 
but not in the flesh. 

Sarai had a son, and he was called Is- 
aac, because he was born of Sarai after she 
had passed the time of child-bearing. And 
when Hagar beheld that Sarai bore a son, 
Hagar became jealous for Ishmael's sake, 
and she wept before Abraham. Hagar said: 

I am an Arabin'yan woman, and I left 
my people for thee. Behold, I am not fa- 
vored of thy God. Abraham said: Have I 
not been as a father *o thee ana thy son? 
Yea, when all peopl° reviled thee because 
thou hadst a child in maidenhood, laying it 
on me, I denied thee not, nor justified my- 
self before the kings' people, suffering 
these things for God's sake, and thine, and 
thy child's. Complain not, then, against 
my house, no* my wife, nor my son, Isaac; 
all things are of the Creator. 

And Hagar was pacified for a season, 
but afterward returned to grief and jeal- 
ousy, and finally resolved to depart away 
from Abraham's house. Then said Abra- 
ham to Hagar: The matter lieth with thee. 
And I give thee, according to the custom 
of the Arabin'yans, a jug with water, and 
bread and blankets. So Hagar persisted, 
and Abraham provided her, and she de- 
parted, taking Ishmael with her, and she 
went into Par-an and dwelt there. 

In those days Arabin'ya was divided 
into many kingdoms, some having one city 
and some two, and some as many as six 
cities. And they were constantly at war 
one with another, and the victors always 
changed the names of the kingdoms. The 
largest and most powerful always called it- 
self the Sun Kingdom, after the manner of 
the Par'si'e'ans. In the Sun Kingdom 
dwelt men and women of learning, and 
they had tablets and books and maps relat- 
ing to heaven and earth, which books, 
maps and tablets were kept in a library, 
the summit of which building was used as 
an oracle for consulting with the spirits, 
called Lords of heaven. For which pur- 
pose, a man or woman, whose head had 
been flattened in infancy, sat by a table 
covered with sand, whereon the spirits 



wrote with the finger. And the person so 
communing with the spirits was called 
^E'jin in the South Arabin'yan language, 
and was in rank next to the Sun King. 
Now, no matter what wars took place, the 
library, the temple of the oracle and the 
^E'jin were sacred, and never suffered harm 
even betwixt enemies. 

The kings kept scribes whose business 
was to write and to translate, and to keep 
the records of the kingdom. Besides these, 
there were gatherers of news, who held the 
second rank of scribes. Now when Abra- 
ham and his people came into Arabin'ya, 
the matter was entered in the records of 
the different kingdoms, with especial ref- 
erence to Abraham's professing to hear the 
voice of God, for he had not a flat head, 
and moreover, had good judgment of his 
own, quite unlike the iE'jins in the tem- 
ples. But because Abraham gave no coun- 
sel as to war or to earthly gain, he was not 
favored by any of the kings, and suffered 
to go his way unmolested. 

When Sodom and Gomorrah were de- 
stroyed, the kings' people heaped the blame 
of it upon Abraham's head, and there rose 
up enemies against Abraham in those re- 
gions. And they also accused him of at- 
tempting to burn his son Isaac as a sacri- 
fice to his God, after the manner of the 
heathen of old. And they accused Abra- 
ham of being the father of Ishmael, by his 
servant-maid, and of driving Hagar and 
Ishmael away to Par-an after he tired of 
her. And these accusations, and many 
more of like wickedness, were heard of by 
the news gatherers, the scribes, and they 
wrote them down, and their records were 
entered in the libraries of the kings of 
Arabin'ya. 

Abraham perceived these matters, and 
he wept before God, saying: Alas, O God, 
would that I had great learning and could 
write my record truthfully before men! 
God answered him, saying: 

Thy faith being in Jehovih, it is well 
with thee. In thousands of years, one Ezra 
shall send his scribes into these countries 
to gather news, even as do the kings of this 
day. And his scribes shall translate from 
these records, with all their errors and 
falsehoods, and Ezra shall publish the mat- 
ter as the history of The Deliverance. 



394 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



LORDS' RECORD 



Abraham hearing this of God, bowed 
down his head and wept, saying: Thy will 
be done! And God comforted him, say- 
ing: The God of heaven and earth will 
come afterward and render the records of 
thy life, which are not dead, but of life 
everlasting. Since, then, thy people shall 
be honored by even that which shall come 
from their enemies, how much greater will 
be their glory when God of heaven speak- 
eth for thee and them! 

CHAPTER IX. 

Abraham inquired of God concerning 
the peoples of the kings and of the Faith- 
ists. And God said: Whomsoever I lead 
to thee shall be thine; thou shalt henceforth 
be father to all men and women and chil- 
dren that are thine. And they shall be thy 
family. But all other peoples shall not be 
thine; nor shalt thou be to them a father 
nor a prophet. Neither shalt thou make 
laws for the kings' peoples; nor laws be- 
twixt thy people and them. Of thine own 
people shalt thou be, and for thine own 
people shalt thou be forever. Nor shall 
thy people have anything in common with 
the kings' peoples, nor any other peo- 
ples with them; nor enter into treaties, 
nor alliances with them in any way what- 
soever. Both thy labor and the labor of 
thy people are for Jehovih. through thy 
God. 

But touching the intercourse betwixt 
thine and the kings' peoples, be circum- 
spect to the value of a fraction in buying 
and selling, to give the full value. Neither 
suffer my chosen to accept presents, or 
otherwise to become obligated to other 
peoples, for it is the law of God. For it 
shall not be said by the kings' peoples: Be- 
hold, I made them! For I say unto thee, 
neither kings nor rich men make the peo- 
ple of thy God. 

Whosoever would give thee gifts, let 
liim quit his people and come and dwell 
with my people in person and spirit. I 
cannot be put off with money and with 
gifts, like a peevish child or a wanton wo- 
man. Shall a man say: Here are gifts 
for thy God, he is a good enough God! 
But as for my soul it is too good to give 
to thee or thy God. 



Neither shalt thou suffer thy people to 
marry with the kings' peoples, for the same 
reason. But whosoever will marry my 
daughters, let him come and dwell, first, 
with my people, proving that he hath for- 
saken all the idolatrous gods for Jehovih's 
sake. It shall be the same of thy sons; if 
they desire strange damsels for wives, they 
shall first bring them to dwell one year 
pmongst my chosen. 

Abraham inquired concerning govern- 
ment. And God said unto Abraham: To 
each people to dwell together in peace, 
order, harmony and love; being disciplined 
to these, what more is required? Govern- 
ment belongeth to the kings' peoples. 

Abraham said: O God, teach thou me, 
for I am as one in the dark cellar groping 
about. Behold, my people are unlearned. 

God said: Who is learned? I say unto 
thee, he who knoweth the stars and the 
rocks, and mountains and valleys, and all 
that is living and dead, and the tongues of 
the ancients, but knoweth not the Creator, 
is unlearned. But he that knoweth the Cre- 
ator is learned indeed. Better is it that thy 
people dwell in tents and under trees; and 
their children roll on the ground, and die 
not, but grow strong in person and in spirit 
for the glory of the Creator, than to dwell 
as the kings' peoples, in magnificent cities, 
and in lust and death. Before thy God, 
thy people are a most learned people. 

Abraham inquired of God concern- 
ing servitude. And God answered him, 
saying: There is but one Master, even Je- 
hovih; thy people shall be His servants 
only. But all people have loves; a damsel 
saith to her lover: I will be thy servant, 
and he marrieth her. A man saith to an- 
other: Thy judgment is greater than mine; 
I will be thy servant. And the man taketh 
him in love to work for him. Therefore, 
for convenience' sake, thou mayest say, 
master and servant. Nevertheless, my 
chosen shall not, in fact, have either mas- 
ters or servants; for the one shall not have 
authority over the other but by love and 
free consent. 

Abraham asked concerning the products 
of labor. God said unto Abraham: Even 
as I have said of servants and masters, so 
also is it of the productions that come out 
of the earth. Nothing belongeth to any 
man, for all things are Mine, saith the Cre- 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



LORDS' RECORD 



395 



ator. Nevertheless, for convenience' sake, 
thou mayest say: This is his product, or 
that is such a one's product. But still he 
holdeth it only by his Creator's consent. 

Let all men render unto the Creator His 
creations, for they are Jehovih's. 

After that, Abraham said: Some men 
grow flax, and some wool, and some corn; 
but the seasons bring forth not alike unto 
all. Others spin and weave; and others 
make butter and cheese. And yet this hap- 
peneth also: One man is strong, another 
weak; one riseth with the sun and toileth all 
day; another sitteth on the bank, .fishing. 
Now when the products are brought in, 
there are no two that are equal. 

And God said: Every man's matter is 
betwixt him and his Creator. According 
to diligence and industry He rewardeth 
them in the end. He that perceiveth this, 
knoweth his heavenly Father; he that per- 
ceiveth it not, dwelleth in darkness. 

Abraham said: Shall the lazy be re- 
buked, and they that shirk be upbraided? 
And God said: Nay. -Let all thy peo- 
ple bring their products and cast them be- 
fore thee, saying: This is my sacrifice 
unto Jehovih; distribute thou it. And if 
some bring not anything, neither rebuke 
them nor pity them; they are the sons and 
daughters of thy God. And if some deco- 
rate themselves with fine raiment, or jew- 
els, censure them not; thy God searcheth 
their hearts. 

Abraham asked concerning lands. God 
said: Consider thy God. Did I go to the 
king and to the rich man and say: Give 
thou me thy sons and daughters? Nay, but 
I went to them that were despised by the 
rich, and by the king, and I said: Come 
ye! And they came. And when thou wert 
come hither, did I say: Take thou the 
king's lands, or the rich man's? Nay, but 
I led thee to that which was neglected and 
waste in the eyes of the kings' peoples, and 
I said: This is thy inheritance. Sufficient 
is it for thee and thy people to buy burying- 
places for the dead, which shall not be dis- 
turbed. But of all other lands, neither buv 
nor sell. 

And after thy people have improved a 
place, and a king cometh against thee, say- 
ing: Either by purchase or by battle, I will 
have this land; thou shalt say: Nay, nei- 
ther by purchase nor by battle, shalt thou 



inherit that which is the Creator's; but if 
thou desirest the land, then will I give it 
thee without money and without battle. 

And it shall come to pass upon my 
chosen that they shall be driven from place 
to place, whither I will lead them; and they 
shall make the waste lands to bloom like 
gardens, and the deserts to yield ample har- 
vests; for they shall dig wells, and till the 
soil, and prove unto the nations of the 
earth the glory of my works. And they 
shall be cut down and driven away, and 
scattered, but I will come and gather them 
together. Their places shall be inherited 
by idolaters and worshippers of strange 
gods, who will build mighty temples. But 
my people shall not build in stone, nor 
wood, nor iron, that shall endure; for they 
shall go from place to place, proclaiming 
me and my works; but where they have 
been, there shall be nothing left on the 
earth to show their labors. 

But when I have taken them across all 
the earth, and they are scattered as dust 
before the wind, and no man can say: Here 
is a nation of the children of Abraham, lo, 
I will raise up my voice for them. And in 
that day temples of stone and mortar of 
the idolaters will still be standing. But a 
voice shall go up from the whole earth, 
even from the far-off nations of the earth, 
saying: Who laid the foundations of the 
temple of Jehovih! Who were the sons 
and daughters of Abraham! 

CHAPTER X. 

When Abraham's wife was getting old, 
her ears were opened to hear the voice of 
God. And God said unto her: Concern- 
ing thy son, Isaac, hear thou thy God, 
the God of Abraham: My labors are not 
for a day, nor without judgment. Behold, 
in the land of Es-seth, the place of thy hus- 
band in his youth, have I built for many 
generations concerning the seed of my peo- 
ple. For which reason thy son Isaac shall 
take a wife that shall inherit my voice. 
Before the time of thy husband's father's 
father, I sent my angel from heaven, say- 
ing: Go thou and raise up an heir to 
hear my voice, for I will dwell for a season 
with the children of men. And my angel 
fulfilled his part, and I have come and talk- 
ed with thee and with thy husband face to 
face. And even in like manner can I talk 



196 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



LORDS' RECORD 



to thy son, Isaac, and he can hear me also. 
And Isaac shall raise up heirs to my voice 
through his wife, to whom he is not known 
in this day. 

Sarai told Abraham what God had said 
to her; and so Abraham and Sarai went to 
the altar which Abraham had built, and 
they prayed alone; and God came and 
spake, saying: What would ye? 

And Abraham said: Concerning our 
son Isaac's wife? And God said: Because 
of the blessing of Sarai, thy wife, who hath 
been upright all her days, I will give her 
comfort in her old age. Send thy servant 
to the land of thy fathers, and I will send 
my angel with thy servant, and he shall 
come to a maiden who shall be Isaac's 
wife. 

So, Abraham called his servant, who 
was overseer over his goods, and he said 
to him: Equip thyself with camels and 
asses, and with servants, and with jewels I 
will give thee, and go thou to Syria, the 
land of my fathers, and bring a damsel 
hither, who shall be Isaac's wife. 

The overseer said unto Abraham: Alas 
me! How shall, thy servant choose a wife 
for thy son? Or, if choosing, how shall 
he induce her to come so far? Abraham 
said: That which God hath commanded 
of me, I have told thee, save that God 
saith: My angel shall go with thy servant, 
and he shall not err. 

So the servant of Abraham, in fear and 
trembling, equipped himself with ten cam- 
els and twenty asses, and with thirty ser- 
vants, taking presents and goods, and de- 
parted, and the journey occupied two and 
twenty days. And all the while the over- 
seer reasoned upon what he should say, 
for he had misgivings that he was on a 
fool's errand. Nevertheless, he prayed to 
God that he might do his own part wisely. 
So when he came near Abraham's father's 
people, the angel of God spake in his heart, 
saying: She that cometh with a pitcher on 
her head shall be Isaac's wife. Say thou to 
her: Wilt thou give me a drink? And 
she will say: I will give thee a drink, and 
also draw water for thy servants, and for 
thy camels. 

And the overseer looked, but saw no 
damsel, and he marveled; but presently he 
saw many damsels, one of whom had a 
pitcher on her head; and his heart failed 



him till she came near, and he said: Give 
me a drink? And she gave him a drink 
and said unto him: Thou art a stranger; 
pray thee, I will water thy camels and give 
drink unto thy servants. 

And so she gave as she said: and when 
she had finished, the overseer said unto 
her: Who art thou? And she answered 
him, and he perceived she was Isaac's 
niece by Abraham's father's second wife, 
but of no blood kin. And then she asked 
the overseer who he was and whence he 
came; and he told her, even from Abra- 
ham, whose servant he was. So she invited 
him to her people's house, and she ran 
ahead with joy to tell who had come so far, 
bringing word from Abraham. 

Now when the camels and asses had 
been fed, and straw spread for the travelers 
to lie upon, and when repast was spread for 
them to eat, the overseer rose up, perceiv- 
ing the way of God, and he said: Till I 
have spoken, eat not, but hear ye the words 
of God. So he related the object of his 
visit as commanded by God, and in refer- 
ence to the angel of God, and the words 
that came to him. And when he had finish- 
ed, the power of God came upon the dam- 
sel, whose name was Rebecca, and she 
rose up and spake, saying: Isaac shall be 
my husband, and I shall be his wife, for I 
know this matter is of God! 

So, accordingly, after some days, Re- 
becca departed from her people, and by 
her faith in God came to Abraham's home, 
and Isaac took her to wife, and Sarai re- 
joiced before God because of the light of 
his kingdom through Abraham's heirs. 

And God said unto Abraham: Divide 
thou thy people into families of tens, and 
families of hundreds, and families of thou- 
sands, and give to each family one rab'bah, 
and yet to all of them together one chief 
rab'bah. And make thou thy will, and ap- 
point thy son Isaac and his heirs by his 
wife Rebecca to be thy successor, that my 
voice may remain with my chosen. 

And Abraham made his will and did in 
all things as God commanded; and he fur- 
ther made the rab'bahs officers in the rites 
of Emethachavah, and communicated to 
them the sacred name of the Creator, and 
the plans of the upper and lower heavens, 
the dominion of God and the dominion of 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ «*«.. «««-» 397 



satan, which were kept secret with the rab'- 
bah. 

God said: Behold, there is a time to 
clear up all things, present and past: Were 
Abraham father to Hagar's son, Ishmael, 
and had he been true to the law of sacri- 
fice amongst the heathen, then, Ishmael, 
being first-born, would have been chosen 
for the burnt offering. 

CHAPTER XI. 
HISTORY OF BRAHMA. 

These are the races of Brahma: Gons, 
Shone, Gamma, This, Ram, Zerl, Mex, 
Shriv, Vat, Eun and Delta, each a thousand 
years. Of Gamma and Delta, in the upper 
country (Wa-wa-o-gan), were born Gu-sem 
and Hagu by Gamma, and by Delta, Yots, 
Rammu, Borgl, Otesiv and Riv. Gamma 
was of the fourth descent of Git-ow; and 
Delta the third descent of E'wangga, — 
I'hins from the land of Jaffeth. 

The ascending caste of light in the lower 
country (Ho-jon-da-tivi) was by Ram, 
first; then Zerl, I'hin migrants from the 
land of Ham; then Shriv, then Vat, then 
Gons and Eun, the half-breed Druks; then 
Shone, and then This. 

The Zarathustrians who survived the 
darkness of the cycle of Fragapatti were: 

Zarathustra from the races of Shone and 
This; and of Zarathustra, Haman; of Ha- 
inan, Wonchakaka, who begat Zoar, who 
begat Theo, who begat Andassah, who be- 
gat Mur, who begat Romsat; these were 
tribes of the Zarathustrian order, who re- 
jected idols, Lords, Gods, Saviors, kings, 
queens and all other rulers on the earth, 
or in the heavens above the earth, save Or- 
mazd, the Creator, and in Him had faith 
that to do righteously, and practice good 
works, made the nearest perfect man. The 
Light by the Voice was lost in the sixth 
hundredth year after Zarathustra, but re- 
gained in Romsat by the I'hins, whence 
came the tribe Lojon, who begat Thone- 
galahogreif, who begat Subinij, and from 
him to Wowthutchisubinij, which were 
forty-four generations, and the Voice al- 
ways came to the chief rab'bah. 

In Chusa-king the Voice was lost, but 
again restored by the I'hins, whose heirs 
were called Wah-sin-chung, who begat 
Avar, who begat Irigavagna, who begat 



Ben-haoma, from whom was descended 
thirty generations, the chief rab'bah of 
whom could hear the Voice. Ben-haoma 
numbered the Faithists of his day, and 
there were of them four thousand, men, 
women and children, and all other nations 
and tribes in Vind'yu were idolaters. 

Through the descendants of Romsat the 
Voice was again regained by the I'hins, 
through a tribe called Shiriviyata, who be- 
gat Them-saga, who begat Friavamarga- 
lum, who wed with the I'hins and begat 
Thace, who begat with the I'hins Anu, 
who begat with the I'hins Maha, who be- 
gat with the I'hins Brahma, who had both 
voice and power from the Father. And he 
was called Brahma because of his great 
wisdom. 

The angels of Ormazd had prophesied, 
saying: Out of thy seed shall come one 
called Brahma, who shall have su'is with 
power. Things that were revealed in Zara- 
thustra have been lost, but shall be recov- 
ered in Brahma. 

Romsat had prophesied, moreover: 
With the coming, of Brahma is the end of 
the I'hin race in Shem (Vind'yu). 

Brahma said: Have all men stars? Be- 
hold, since my childhood up, I have had a 
star above my forehead. 

No man could answer Brahma. They 
said: Brahma is foolish, with all his wis- 
dom. 

Brahma asked the star: Who art thou? 

God said: I am thy star; I am the light 
of the second heavens. 

Brahma asked: What is thy name, O 
star, thou mysterious light? God said: 
Call me Ormazd; I am the same light that 
spoke to Zarathustra in the olden time. 

Brahma asked: Who art thou, O Or- 
mazd, thou voice of light? God said: With 
one only shalt thou commune, thy Creator. 
One only shalt thou worship, He who 
created thee alive. 

Brahma said: Why hast thou taken up 
thy abode above my head? God said: At- 
tain thou to be one with thy Creator, in 
wisdom, and goodness, and purity, and 
thou shalt answer thine own questions. 

Then Brahma applied to the rab'bah, 
the Zarathustrian priests, and he learned 
abnegation of self, and the rites and cere- 
monies of the ancients. 



398 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



LORDS' RECORD 



When Brahma was grown up, God said 
to him: Arise, my son, and I will lead 
thee into another country, where thou 
shalt marry, and settle down for a long 
season. 

Brahma said: Peaceful have been my 
slumbers, and joyous my wakeful hours all 
my life. I have made labor a pleasure, and 
I give all I have to the poor, doing thy 
commandments with all my wisdom and 
strength. From my youth up I killed not 
any living creature of thine that walks on 
the earth, or swimmeth in the waters, or 
flieth in the air. Neither ate I of anything 
that had ever breathed the breath of life; 
and I have been most abstemious in plain 
food and water only, according to the Zar- 
athustrian law. Hear Thou me, O Or- 
mazd; for I will break my soul unto Thee, 
and hold nothing back. Ormazd said: It 
is well. 

Brahma said: Woe is me, if my soul 
turneth toward woman! Was I not wed to 
Thee, O Ormazd? Was I not Thy Bride- 
groom from my youth up? Why, then, 
protectest not Thou me unto Thyself? Or- 
mazd said: In times past I raised up many 
an iesu, and they, were without flesh de- 
sires all their days. Such men could not 
perpetuate the earth; they were good for 
their day. Zarathustra was an ie-su. My 
Light is now for them that can perpetuate. 
All things are possible in my hands. Grieve 
not, nor smother out any talent I created 
unto the pure in flesh. 

Brahma said: If I have a woman, O 
Ormazd, may I not lose my love for Thee? 
Ormazd said: By faith in Me thou shalt 
triumph by the road I marked out for thee 
since before thou wert born. Arise, then, 
O Brahma, and follow thy star. I will lead 
thee. 

Brahma said: Can there be another 
way than by celibacy? Can a married man 
serve Ormazd? 

So Brahma traveled, and came into the 
country of Etchoyosin, where lay the 
mountains of Talavitcha, under King Tya- 
ma, who had enforced the Zarathustrian re- 
ligion with sword and spear, and with 
chains and death, being himself sole inter- 
preter. When Brahma came to Au'watcha, 
he halted to inquire the way to the high 
priest's house, that he might be absolved 
for twenty days in Tyama's kingdom, ac- 



cording to law, paying the price as appor- 
tioned for strangers. 

In answer to his summons, there came 
to the gate, the damsel Yu-tiv, fairest of 
women, draped, also, to go before the 
priest for confession. Brahma inquired of 
her concerning the priest and the tax. Yu- 
tiv informed him, and, moreover, said: I 
am going hither, and shall delight to lead 
thee to the place. 

So Brahma went with Yu-tiv, and when 
they were gone a little way she said unto 
him: Whence earnest thou, and what is thy 
mission? Perhaps I may serve thee. Be- 
hold, I see a star above thy head I 
Brahma said: Seest thou a star? Now I 
say unto thee, there is an old legend that 
the pure in heart, looking upward, oft see 
their own paroda, and think it belongeth to 
another. Yu-tiv reassured Brahma she saw 
a star, whereupon Brahma took heart and 
said: 

Yea, I have a star, and the Voice of Or- 
mazd cometh to me at times. For some 
years I strove to be a priest, for I saw the 
wickedness of the world, and, moreover, 
the tyranny and tortures of the ha'ko, 
and my soul cried out for the op- 
pressed who had faith in the Great Spirit 
more than in the priests. And Ormazd 
came to me and said. Brahma, My son, 
forsake thy studies, and take thy broad-axe 
and go and hew logs. Behold, I will come 
to thee some time, and thou shalt bless the 
earth. So I gave up my studies and be- 
came a hewer of wood, living abstemiously 
day and night, and praying and striving 
with all my soul and with all my strength 
to purge myself of all earthly thoughts. 
So I grew, as thou beholdest, to be a large 
man of great strength. But, alas, evil 
overtook me; my soul desired a woman. 
And I cried out unto Ormazd, saying: 
Why hast Thou put this matter upon Thy 
son? Lo, I strove to be wedded to Thee 
only; I shut my eyes to all the earth, but 
Thou hast suffered me to fall. Rescue 
Thou me, I pray. 

Then spake Ormazd to me. saying: Be- 
hold, I have revealed My word through 
such as have no earth desires; but that time 
is past. I will now prove unto the nations 
of the earth that I have power in directing 
the flesh, that heirs may be born unto Me. 
Arise, therefore, and go whither I will lead 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ «*-o. «cob B 



399 



thee, for thou shalt take a wife and raise 
up seven sons, and I will deliver My people 
unto liberty. 

So I rose up and walked after the light 
of my star; thus far have I come, but how 
much farther I must go I know not; but I 
will go to the end of the earth if Ormazd 
require it of me. 

Yu-tiv said: I pity thee, O man! One 
so holy should never with woman wed. To 
win such a man's love, the best of women 
would forget her God! To bear thee one 
child, instead of seven, a woman would 
cleave the earth in twain. It would be like 
peopling the world with Gods and God- 
desses. O promise me, stranger, thou wilt 
turn from such unholy desires. I know 
not what moveth me past all modesty thus 
to speak to thee, but before Ormazd, Cre- 
ator of heaven and earth, erst thou earnest 
to my father's gate a voice spake in mine 
ear, saying: Quickly, thou, put on thy 
robes for confession, and hasten to the 
priest. I tell thee, O man, to save thee, 
the angels of Ormazd came to me. It is 
true that two can see more than one. 

Brahma said: Who art thou, woman? 
Yu-tiv said: A weaver of mats; no more. 
My father liveth in yonder thatch; my 
mother's soul ascended to heaven, giving 
me birth. She was of the I'hins. From 
place to place my father and I have been 
driven; all the ills of earth are written on 
my soul. And the rudeness of men; the 
light-heartedness of women! By day and 
by night my soul crieth out for the miseries 
of the earth. O the sins of the earth! O 
the death of little infants! O the trials of 
the poor! O the suffering of the sick! O 
the anguish of the imprisoned! O stranger, 
stranger, stranger! People not this world 
more! Let us turn our souls upward; to 
Nirvana; to the regions of endless paradise! 
To the voices of angels and Gods! To wis- 
dom that erreth not; to music never dis- 
cordant! To love that never separateth! 
Never! 

Brahma said: Now I beseech Thee, O 
Ormazd, that I may never marry! But be- 
cause Thou hast raised up here so fair a 
woman, and withal so wise, give me leave 
that I may dwell near at hand! 

Then spake Ormazd, out of the midst 
of the voices of their stars, saying: Hold up 



thy hand, O man! Hold up thy hand, O 
woman! And they held up their hands, 
and Ormazd said. I am the Father, and ye 
are My children. That I may have joy, 
dwell ye near together. 

Now after this, Brahma and she pro- 
ceeded to the priest's house and made their 
sacrifices, and returned and came to Yu- 
tiv's father's house, and the father's name 
was Ali-egan-is, called Ali. And Yu-tiv 
told her father all that had happened, but 
Brahma said little. Ali said: What the All 
Light doeth is well done. My house is 
ample. Brahma shall sojourn as long as 
he desireth. 

Brahma said: Of mine own accord I 
am not master of many words. When it 
pleaseth Ormazd to speak with me, I will 
raise my voice. Then Yu-tiv spread mats 
and provided food, and set it before Brah- 
ma, and he ate; and after that they said 
prayers according to the laws of the king, 
and then retired to sleep. 

When morning came, Brahma and Yu- 
tiv rose early, and came and spake togeth- 
er, in joy greeting, and they were moved 
to shake hands, though such a proceeding 
was not according to the fashion of the 
country, save betwixt relatives. And it 
came to pass that there were much togeth- 
er during the day, and in the evening they 
walked together, but touched not one the 
other. Now on the second day, when they 
walked together, they held hands. And on 
the third day they joined arms. And on 
the fourth day they kissed each other. And 
after that they were only separated at night 
when they slept But it came to pass that 
they were so delighted with each other that 
they sat up nearly all night, so as not to be 
separate. And all the while they neglected 
not their devotion to Ormazd; but finally 
they sat up all night, sleeping not, save in 
each other's arms. 

Yu-tiv said: Since we sit up all night, 
it is wiser to sit on mats than on stools. 
Brahma said: It is wiser. So they pro- 
vided mats, half raised and half spread 
down, for a season, and finally laid the mats 
full length and laid down together. 

But Brahma followed his trade in that 
country, and it came to pass they had a 
son born to them, and his name was Whe- 
ish; and in time another son, and his name 



400 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



LORDS RECORD 



was Vus, and then Git-un, and Vede, and 
Oos, and Sa-it. 

Now after they lived together as man 
and wife, the voice of Ormazd came not to 
Brahma; though the angel of Ormazd re- 
mained, and at times talked to both Brah- 
ma and Yu-tiv, his wife. Now during all 
the time, until after the birth of the sixth 
son, Yu-tiv had faith in Ormazd, and was 
a Faithist, in her whole heart. But during 
all these years she had only communion 
with the angels, and withal had suffered 
many hardships in common with Brahma. 
And their love abated not, and Yu-tiv be- 
lieved in her husband, and encouraged his 
aspirations. He had said to her ten thou- 
sand times: I know Ormazd will come; 
through me will He deliver the Faithists 
out of bondage. And she believed in him; 
and believed these things would come to 
pass, and believed her sons would have the 
Voice of the Creator with them also. But 
after the birth of the sixth child, Yu-tiv lost 
faith in the Father! She said: All my life 
I have been in error. There is no All Per- 
son. There is no Voice, save the spirits of 
the dead, and they know little more of 
heaven than we. The Creator is dumb, 
like the wind; His voice is like the 
wind, it speaketh nothing. And after 
that, she ceased to use the name Or- 
mazd, or Father, but said, Eolin, after the 
manner of the ancients. And Brahma 
ceased more to speak in presence of Yu-tiv 
of the coming of Ormazd to himself; and 
he also adopted the name Eolin, signify- 
ing, like the wind, void of shape or person. 
Whilst this state of unbelief was upon them, 
they had another child born to them, and 
they called his name Hog, signifying, Fact, 
or without inspiration; an animal that root- 
eth in the ground. 

Yu-tiv weaned Hog when he was three 
years old, and, on the day following, the 
voice of God came to Brahma, saying: 
Brahma! Brahma! And Brahma said: 
Here am I, O Eolin. And the Father said: 
Be thou faithful another eighteen years! 
I shall be with thee to the end! 

Brahma was so delighted, he ran home 
and told Yu-tiv, but she rejoiced not; she 
made no answer. Silently she looked up- 
ward for a long while, and then she said: 
Eighteen years! Hog will be twenty-one. 
And thou and I will be old. 



CHAPTER XII. 

For eighteen years more Ormazd spake 
not to Brahma, but Brahma remained 
faithful, and Yu-tiv was full of hope. But 
when the time was fulfilled in Ormazd's 
own way, He came with renewed light, 
which was on the twenty-first birthday of 
Hog. Whilst Brahma and his family were 
seated on mats, eating breakfast at sunrise, 
lo, a light, as of a sun, came within the hut, 
and passed over Brahma's head, and then 
disappeared. And out of the void, in the 
space above their heads, came these words: 
From this time forth the twenty-first birth- 
day shall be the time of maturity for man. 
Be ye watchful for the Voice of Ormazd; 
He is Ever Present! 

And all of them saw the light and 
heard the words, save Hog, and Hog, hav- 
ing been begotten in unbelief, neither saw 
the light nor heard the voice. And when 
they all had exclaimed: Behold the light! 
Hear that voice! — Hog thus spake before 
them: For many a year ye have prophe- 
sied this should come to pass when I 
should reach my twenty-first birthday. For 
the love ye all bear me, I know ye would 
not put a joke upon me; but I am serious- 
ly grieved that ye say: Behold the light, 
and hear the voice! For I say unto you, 
these things are not in reason, and cannot 
be so. But in much hope and faith, all of 
which ye have cultivated for years, ye al- 
low your imaginings to stand for realities. 

Now whilst Hog thus spake, the light 
came again and stood over Brahma's head 
whilst one might count twenty; and the 
Voice said: Blessed art thou, O Brahma; 
blessed thou, O Yu-tiv! These things had 
to be fulfilled. I preach not by reason 
alone, but provide living examples! 

Again all of them saw and heard the 
manifestation of Ormazd, save Hog, and 
he saw not, and heard not the words of 
the Spirit. Hog said: Have I not eyes 
good as the best? Show me a hair that I 
cannot see; let fall a mite that I cannot 
hear. Then Whe-ish, the first-born, an- 
swered him, saying: 

First, my brother, I greet the with my 
love, for thou art the fairest and best of 
all the great sons of this God and 
Goddess, our father and mother. And I 
appeal to thee in thy great wisdom, how 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



LORDS' RECORD 



401 



have we all imagined the same light at the 
same time and place? And greater yet, 
how have we imagined the same spoken 
words? Hog replied: 

How can my answers cope with one 
who hath wisdom like unto thee, O my 
brother? Thou hast confounded me; but 
yet I understand not wherein thou, and ye, 
my most loving brothers, can see and hear 
things that I cannot. Have we not all the 
same parts, so like unto one another that 
our neighbors scarce distinguish us? And 
above all, we are all the same fruit from a 
father and mother, the holiest and wisest 
of created beings. 

Now spake Yu-tiv, saying: I am before 
Thy judgment, O Ormazd! That which 
I have done, I have done! Deal Thou with 
me for my great unbelief; I have sinned 
against heaven and earth. Even whilst 
Thou quickened into life within my 
womb this star of everlasting light, lo, I 
put out his eyes and stopped his ears 
against Thee. The unbelief of my soul 
penetrated the walls of my womb and shap- 
ed the fruit of my holy husband into a man 
of darkness. O Ormazd, why was Thy 
daughter born! 

Hog said: O thou Goddess, mother! 
Weep not, but rejoice for the glory of my 
birth. That thou and my holy father, a 
very God amongst men, brought me into 
life, my soul is boundless in rejoicing. I de- 
clare unto thee, O mother, I am not in 
darkness, nor am I blind and deaf. If 
there be another world, what mattereth it 
to me? The glories of this one are bound- 
less. And if there be a Great Light and a 
Voice, what are they to me! Thou hast so 
filled my every vein of blood with thy 
warm love, and with the sweet love of 
these, my holy brothers, and with the wis- 
dom of my father, God of men, that I know 
nothing but to rejoice and to invent praises 
and thanks to you all, with all my wisdom 
and strength. 

And now the Light gathered within the 
soul of Brahma, and he was as one with the 
Father. Ormazd, the Creator, then spake 
through Brahma, saying: I created the 
earth not to be despised, but that it 
should be the glory of man. This 
was the Zarathustrian law, but, for 
sake of profit, and bondage, and evil, 
they have perverted My doctrines and 



bound up My peoples. They profess Me, 
even Ormazd; but they have turned My 
commandments and My doctrines upside 
down. I came through Zarathustra and de- 
livered them that called on Me in faith; 
and they became My chosen for a season; 
but they permitted evil to usurp their hearts 
they squandered My substance in building 
temples and providing a superabundance of 
priests and priestesses. They raised up the 
sword and spear for Me; by blood and 
death they established kingdoms and called 
them by My name, Ormazd! The spirit 
of My Voice they put aside; but the words 
they retained, and added earthly meaning 
thereto. Whereby they proclaim darkness 
for light, and light for darkness. And the 
poor and distressed that worship Me in 
truth and in spirit have learned to hate the 
words established. For which reason they 
are persecuted, and bound, and taxed, and 
despitefully used. 

Yea, they that would kill not because 
of their natural love to Me and My created 
sons and daughters, they impress into ser- 
vice of war, taking them from their kin- 
dred, saying to them: Come away from 
peace and kill! Be thou a slayer of men; 
be a soldier of death for the glory of the 
king. I commanded them, in the olden 
time, to kill not at all. My words were 
plain, but the kings commanded the priests 
to interpret My words whereby war might 
be justified. 

I commanded them against taking that 
which was another's. My words were 
plain. But the kings commanded the 
priests to interpret the meaning, so the 
kings could exact tribute for their own 
glory. And so they levy wheresoever and 
whensoever they will, saying: For the de- 
fence of the king and the country! Thus 
have they perverted My commandments 
from beginning to end. But I declare unto 
you, that in My sight, to kill one man, I 
will hold him accountable who doeth it; 
and ten times accountable . if he kill ten 
men, and a hundred times for a hundred. 
They shall not hide death and murder from 
My sight by the word war. Neither shall 
they excuse stealing by levying tax for the 
king or the country's protection. For by 
their own evil, hath it come to pass that 
they talk about protection. Have I made 



402 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



LORDS' RECORD 



a law that one king or one country shall 
protect itself against another- Seest not 
any man that these doctrines come of the 
flesh and not of the spirit? 

They profess to be Faithists in Me. 
But straightway they go and build forti- 
fications of earth, and stone, and wood. 
And they that know Me in spirit and truth, 
perceiving I am wrongly interpreted for 
evil's sake, being such as rebel in their 
souls against these iniquities, they seize 
and impress for their lifetime as slaves, or, 
if refusing, they kill them. And they that 
work such wickedness say: Behold, we 
have the Zarathustrian law, the I'hua'Maz- 
dian law, the Ormazdian law; ours is the 
holy, the revealed word. Let no man raise 
up his voice against these truths, or he 
shall surely be put to death! 

I said: Behold, I will go and de- 
liver them that have faith in Me in spirit 
and truth. And I went over the lands of 
the earth, but I found no man in whom 
My light could shine. And I called My 
holy masters of generations, My angels 
high raised in heaven, and I said unto 
them: Come ye and dwell on the earth 
many generations, and by inspiration raise 
ye up one in whom My light shall shine, 
for I will surely deliver My people. 

Now I declare unto you who are assem- 
bled, the time is at hand, and ye are all so 
many parts in My work. Even through 
My angels named ye these sons; according 
to their names, so will I establish My king- 
dom. Suffer, therefore, Vede to write 
down the words I have spoken, for lo, 
he hath learning and memory provided to 
that end. Be ye watchful, when I come 
again! 

Jehovih (Ormazd) ceased, and Brahma 
woke as from a trance, though he had 
heard all that was said. So Vede remem- 
bered the spoken words, every one, and he 
wrote them down on cloth prepared for 
that purpose. And this was the beginning 
of a new name of a people on the earth, 
though they were Faithists in fact, and no- 
thing but Faithists; but they were called 
by their neighbors sometimes Vedans and 
sometimes Brahmins. 



CHAPTER XIII. 

The next morning, at sunrise, Jehovih 
spake again, through Brahma, saying: 
As I prepared a way for My Voice, 
be ye wise in laboring to show this 
light unto all peoples. Neither take ye 
sorrow to your souls for the latest born, 
even Hog; for he is also in my keeping, 
and his wisdom shall be the glory of the 
earth. For is not all fact interpreted by 
each and every man from the light of his 
own standing place? Wherein error com- 
eth into the world by the darkness of men, 
in not perceiving rightly the things I have 
created. Behold, one man seeth the forest 
with reference to its value in logs; another 
for splints for mats; another for shade to 
lie in; another for its solitude; and they all 
alike see by what dwelleth in them, but 
they see through their own several win- 
dows. Consider, then, the injustice of 
man that saith: Ye shall see as I see; hear 
as I hear; or who saith: This I have 
proven for a truth, and that for an un- 
truth; or who saith: Behold, we are many 
witnesses, and we attest. 

Whilst Jehovih was thus speaking, an 
angel appeared and stood in the doorway 
of the hut, and all save Hog looked and 
saw the angel, and witnessed the color of 
the angel's hair and eyes, and the clothes 
he wore. And they pointed, saying in a 
whisper: Behold, an angel of heaven! 

Then spake Jehovih, illustrating, say- 
ing: Whilst yet no one hath spoken, let 
one at a time privily describe to Hog the 
appearance of My angel in the doorway. 

Accordingly, they all, save Brahma, told 
Hog all that pertained to the angel, and 
they accorded one with another. And Je- 
hovih said: Speak thou, My Son, Hog. 
Hog said: To whom shall I speak? For, 
be Thou my very father, or, of a truth, the 
Creator, I know not. God said: Who say- 
est thou the Creator is? Hog said: Even 
as the wind; the great void; without per- 
son, or shape, or sense. 

God said unto him: For which reason 
I say unto thee, because of the unbelief of 
thy father and thy mother, whilst thou 
wert in thy mothers' womb, thou art as 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



LORDS' RECORD 



403 



thou art. This have they attested unto thee 
thousands of times since thou wert weaned. 
And they have also attested to thee as of- 
ten, that during the bringing forth of thy 
brothers, they were in the fullness of faith 
in Ormazd. Thou wert born of the 
earth, and can only see with earthly 
eyes, and hear with earthly ears, and can 
reason only with earthly reason. Hog said: 
Then of a truth I shall go down to earth 
and there shall be no more of me; but 
these, my sweet brothers, and this Goddess 
and this God, my very father and mother, 
shall inherit everlasting life? 

God said: I would place two eggs be- 
fore thee, with the birds within them near- 
ly hatched; now with one thou shalt or>en 
the shell a little, and the young bird seeth 
out; the other thou shalt leave closed. Say- 
est thou one bird will have much advantage 
over the other when they are hatched? Or 
that one shall not live, because, forsooth, 
it saw not through the shell? Such, then 
is thy way to everlasting life. Of thy 
darkness I will make light that will reach 
unto millions. Thy sacrifice is the sacri- 
fice of a very God amongst Gods. 

Hog said: Because of thy great wis- 
dom, I fear to speak in thy presence. But 
thy words come out of his mouth who is 
the sweetest and holiest of created beings. 
Therefore I take courage in mine argument. 
Now, behold, they have all described 
the angel in the door; alike and like have 
they described it in all particulars. And 
the wisdom of thy words goeth to the bot- 
tom of things, not like the words of man, 
but faultlessly. Thou hast made me to be- 
hold I am bound as with iron hoops, and 
must go that way all my days. Against 
this I complain not; for I perceive it is not 
within my judgment to know even myself, 
as to what is good for me. This, however, 
thou hast shown me. I was molded as 
I am; I am as I am. If I have faults, 
they are not my faults. Neither are they 
of my father or my mother; for the cause 
of their unbelief at that time lay not with 
themselves, but with thee. 

God said: Thy words shall Vede also 
write down; the glory and wisdom of the 
earth shall come out of thy mouth. The 
manner of my edifice shall be shown unto 



the inhabitants of the earth. Thou hast 
seen the king's temple and how he buildeth 
it. For the fine posts he sendeth his best 
hewers into the forest, and they choose the 
straightest and strongest trees, and fell 
them and hew them, and polish and en- 
grave them, and the posts are set up in the 
front as strength and ornament. But as to 
the walls of the temple, the king calleth not 
the best hewers, but the choppers, and they 
also go into the forest to bring logs, not 
the straightest and handsomest, but what- 
soever their axes come upon. And their 
timbers are put in the walls with mortar 
and withes. And the temple is completed 
to the king's will. 

Jehovih said: Of such is My hea- 
venly edifice; I send not winter to please 
one man, nor summer; nor the rain. I 
consider in what way I shall induce men 
to raise up one another, and to be consider- 
ate. Through Me, thy father and thy 
mother and thy brethren, and all Faithists 
that follow these, My doctrines, shall 
learn to consider the unbelief of mortals, 
and the impossibility of one man seeing 
through another man's eyes. For as I have 
raised you up a house in love, one to an- 
other, so will I show the wisdom of disbe- 
lief, and its necessity on the earth. 

The foremost of all lessons is that all 
men shall have liberty; and no man's judg- 
ment be binding on another's; for all do 
not see alike, nor can they understand alike. 
That ye shall be alike considerate to them 
that see not My light, or My Person, even 
as to those who are born in su'is; for they 
are the same flesh and blood, and their 
spirits they have even from the same Cre- 
ator. 

For the evidence of the past and of 
the present is before you, that men en- 
deavor to enforce their doctrines by saying: 
Behold the Word of Ormazd! Thus hath 
He spoken! and I am His priest! Bow 
down your heads! 

Whereas, man shall not bow down, but 
hold up his head and rejoice. They that 
seek to enforce Me are My enemies. 

Nor have I said of this man or that: 
Hear ye him, for he is Truth. Shall the 
Creator make one greater than Himself, 
and thus cut Himself off? And yet the 



404 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J 



LORDS' RECORD 



kings and the priests of this day assume 
this in I'hua's name. And the mothers and 
fathers of many have become discouraged 
because of their great hardships; and they 
bring forth heirs that have eyes but see 
not, ears but hear not. 

God said: In the days of Zarathustra, 
I came to deliver them that had faith but 
were in bondage; to-day I am come to 
prove three worlds unto men, and to teach 
them how they shall bring forth heirs with 
eyes to see, and with ears to hear spiritual 
things, with liberty unto all men: First, of 
the earth and its fullness; second, the in- 
termediate world of spirits, where all shall 
sojourn for a season; and, third, the- Nir- 
vanian worlds beyond Chinvat, where lieth 
unending paradise for the pure and wise. 

CHAPTER XIV. 

On the next morning, at sunrise, God 
spake again to Brahma, saying: Consider 
the fruit of the earth, and the pasturage in 
the fields. The male and the female feed 
on the same grass; the one yieldeth milk, 
the other is for the yoke; neither can any 
man change these creations. 

What man shall say to another: Feed 
thou on this; or on that? But they take 
of them that are born in darkness, and raise 
up priests! The food for the flesh, or even 
fasting, cannot bring su'is. The air warm- 
eth the earth; not the earth the air. The 
spirit enlighteneth the corporeal part, and 
not the corporeal part the spirit. Light is 
the freedom of all; to know this is the be- 
ginning of wisdom. Nevertheless, without 
suffering, some that are bound would not 
know they are bound, or, if knowing, 
would not desire freedom. 

At this time, Hog, the youngest born, 
was greatly moved, whereupon God bade 
him speak. 

Hog said: O that I could believe these 
things! O that 1 could see! O that I could 
hear! O the misery of my darkness! O 
the horrors of the suspense of not knowing 
a matter! Bitter is my soul, and full of 
anguish! O the madness of this hour upon 
me! Wherein, O Wisdom, forgottest Thou 
the time of my begetting, to let me spring 
up as an offensive weed in such a garden 
of paradise! 



And he bowed his head and wept; and 
then spake Yu-tiv, his mother, that brought 
him forth. She said: I perceive Thy light, 
O Father, but I cannot bear it. Thou didst 
unlock my members to bring forth these 
seven Gods! Never woman on the whole 
earth brought forth so rich a harvest; but 
yet my soul is tortured to the very centre! 
O that the light of my soul could be trans- 
ferred to this God of men! And she also 
wept. 

Now spake Sa-it, saying: Next nearest 
am I to thee, O my sweet brother, Hog. 
No love lieth so fondly to thee as mine. 
And as to thee, Yu-tiv, my Goddess moth- 
er, thou hast most wisely named me Abun- 
dant. For in our love hath Ormazd pro- 
vided us equal to the highest of Gods. Be- 
cause I have witnessed that this purest and 
best of brothers cannot see spiritually, my 
soul is mellowed toward all the world. Yea, 
my outstretched arms shall receive the 
darkest of men, and my soul shall go up in 
praise of Ormazd forever! 

Oos spake next; he said: Most wisely 
am I named Space; for it hath pleased Or- 
mazd to show me the breadth of His Crea- 
tions. What belief or what unbelief is 
there that He hath not provided a glory 
for! Because my sweet brother, Hog, 
has been thus blessed with darkness, he 
shall be guardian unto me in earthly wis- 
dom all my days. In my faith I know it is 
well with him; yet in my love I would that 
he could see as we all see! 

Then spake Git-un, whose name signi- 
fied Time. He said: Behold, I am the 
fourth born, and, as it were, in the middle. 
Whose love is so delightfully hedged about 
as mine! Who so surrounded by the 
Light of heaven and earth! At one end 
behold my father, God of men; the very 
voice of heaven and earth; interpreter of 
the Creator's words! At the other end, 
the best, sweetest brother ever created on 
the earth, with all the wisdom of men and 
angels. O the glory of this hour! O the 
delight to be with these Gods, and with 
I'u-tiv, Goddess of women! 

Then Vus, the second born, spake. He 
said: Wherein shall I glorify Thee, O Or- 
mazd, and not glorify myself! I am full to 
overflowing with delight for the love of 
these, my brothers, and father, very Godsl 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



LORDS' RECORD 



405 



But for Yu-tiv I have more than love. I 
preceive through my own sweet mother 
how the different castes of men are made! 
O mother, how nearly a righteous woman 
dwelleth with the Creator! 

Whe-ish said: To rank one's thoughts 
and desires ever high; would not this de- 
liver the world? 

Vede said: To know the truth and ever 
speak it in love and kindness, would not 
this deliver the world and establish Or- 
mazd? 

Now woke Brahma from his trance, and 
he spake, saying: To find the Father; to 
know Him; to reveal Him; these are all, 
and for His glory only. 

Now again spake God, saying: Wiser 
than all the rest is Brahma. Who of ye all 
hath not spoken of himself or herself? 
Who hath uttered a word of praise or of 
thanks, and left out self? Judge ye, then, 
what is required of men that my spirit may 
find utterance through their lips. 

Then the Voice departed for that day; 
and the angel of God appeared in the door, 
so that all save Hog could see him. The 
angel said: That ye may see the spirits 
of the intermediate world, come ye at 
midnight and sit in the sacred circle in the 
grove of Ebon. We will appear in sar'- 
gis. 

Hog heard not the angel, but the oth- 
ers told him what the angel said. Accord- 
ingly, at midnight they sat in circle in the 
grove of Ebon. 

CHAPTER XV. 

And the angel of God appeared in the 
midst of the circle, in sar'gis, and talked 
with them face to face. And Hog said 
unto the angel: Of a truth, I know thou 
art not mortal, and yet thou hast the sem- 
blance of flesh, and limbs, and arms, and a 
very body, and art clothed withal and thy 
clothes are like mortal clothes. Now I tell 
thee face to face, I believe thou art no an- 
gel of the dead, but a very reflected self- 
substance, produced out of the substance 
of my father. How sayest thou? The an- 
gel answered, saying: 

Mortal words cannot convince thee; 
neither the words of a spirit. Behold, I 



will show thee a friend of thine who is 
dead. With that, the angel showed the 
spirit of Hog's friend who was dead, and 
the man's name was Aara-acta; and so Hog 
said unto him: Thou art a very counter- 
part of him I knew. What is thy name? 
The spirit answered: Aara-acta! I tell 
thee, O Hog, these things are true. I 
am the spirit of thy friend; yea, I am that 
very friend. Hog said: Where dwellest 
thou? Where hast thou been? Art thou 
happy? Hast thou visited all the heavens? 

The spirit answered him, saying: I 
dwell on the earth even as before death; 
I am happy; the glory of my pres- 
ent world surpasseth the earth. I 
have not visited the highest heavens. I 
am only as yet in the first resurrection. 
Up above us there are heavens where all 
the people are Gods and Goddesses. I 
cannot go there; they are too white. The 
spirit then disappeared, and Hog said: 

What I have seen I have seen; what I 
have heard I have heard. Yet I believe 
not that I have seen a spirit nor heard one. 
A spirit must in reason be thin and subtle 
and airlike. 

Then spake the angel of God, saying: 
How shall I please this man, O Ormazd? 
This day I showed myself in the door of 
the hut, thin and subtle and airlike, and he 
saw me not, nor heard me. Who can find 
a way to open this man's soul to Thy Wis- 
dom, O Ormazd? 

Now spake Yu-tiv: Great is the glory 
of Thy angel, O Ormazd! Heavenly are 
the spirits of the dead. Welcome, O ye 
angels of heaven! Then spake Whe-ish, 
saying: Even the lowest of heavens hath 
great glory! O the delight to dwell in 
such a paradise! Then Vus spake, saying: 
Such wisdom and truth! What are Thy 
kingdoms, O Father, when even the first 
heaven hath such glory. Git-un said: Be- 
cause I have lived to behold these things, 
I will proclaim Thy wonders, O Ormazd, 
as long as I live! Vede said: Truth is 
Thy mightiest work, O Ormazd! Oos said: 
How wisely hast Thou framed Thy worlds, 
O Ormazd! Even Thy lowest of angels 
are the delight of my soul! Next spake 
Sa-it; he said: Give us of Thy abundance, 
O Ormazd. Open wide the gates of the 



406 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



LORD'S RECORD 



lower heavens. I will take Thy angels to 
my arms and rejoice forever! Brahma then 
came out of his trance, though he had 
heard and seen all. He said: Whoever 
cometh that can make me better, and show 
me how most to benefit Thy world, him, O 
Ormazd, send Thou unto me. 

And lo, first of all, Brahma was answer- 
ed! A light, bright as a sun, stood in the 
midst of the cricle, and it was higher than 
the clouds, and displayed a staff on which 
was a banner of gold and silver; and on 
the banner, stars clustered to spell the 
words, Love, Wisdom and Power! 

Presently 'the scene changed, and the 
angel of God said: He that spake last 
(Brahma) hath been answered first, be- 
cause his words reached to the Fountain 
Head. Wheresoever ye send your prayers, 
there are ye answered. To which end I will 
now open the gates of the lower heavens, 
and ye shall witness what ye may. 

The angel withdrew the lights, so 
that great darkness might be upon 
the circle. Presently, Yu-tiv started 
as if affrighted somewhat. Then Vus 
sprang up, saying: What was that? And 
then another started, till presently all but 
Brahma and Hog were wild and startled, 
whispering: What do mine eyes behold! 
O that foul smell! O that vulgar touch! 
And then one screamed; and another, and 
another, until all broke and fled, screaming 
and crying out in fear and distress; flying 
in the darkness of the grove, frantic; almost 
dead with fear! 

Hog ran not; saw nothing to fear; 
heard nothing to dread; felt nothing to 
make him ashamed. And his father, Brah- 
ma, ran not, nor was afraid, and the twain 
called to the rest, pleaded, coaxed and call- 
ed in vain; could not stop them; could not 
find them in the darkness. They returned 
to the hut, Brahma and Hog saw the 
torches burning brightly, and came in and 
found Yu-tiv and her sons huddled togeth- 
er in each other's arms, white and pale as 
death. 

Hog asked the reason. Yu-tiv said: 

Sh , are they gone? Sh , keep them 

away! Then spake Vus, saying: O my 
brother, ask not what we saw! Ask not 



what we felt, and what felt us! These 
things would not be lawful to mention! 
Say no more, in heaven's name! The air 
of heaven is full of drujas. 

Now spake Vede, saying: Alas, O my 
father, I dropped the holy book, the Veda 
I am writing. In my fright I let it fall. 
It is not sized yet, and should it rain ere 
morning, the holy words will be lost! And 
not for a thousand worlds would I go back 
to the grove this night. Oos said: Nor I, 
for a thousand worlds! Whe-ish said: For 
all the gold and silver in the world I 
would not go there this night. So they all 
spake save Hog, and with all the love they 
bore for Ormazd's words, nothing doubt- 
ing they were His very words, not one 
would venture amongst the evil spirits they 
had seen, to recover the book. 

Then spake Brahma, saying: For many 
generations Ormazd hath labored for this; 
I will go myself; I know He will protect 
me at all times and in all places. And 
Brahma rose up to depart; but then spake 
Hog, saying: Nay, father; thou art old; 
I am fresh and young, and I know there 
are no spirits but in the imagination of 
men. I will go alone! Nor will I bear a 
lantern nor a torch; nor will I whistle nor 
sing. I will confront all the evil spirits of 
hell and their captains. I will recover that 
book this night though I scrape every leaf 
from Ebon grove! And mark ye, too, I 
will return unscathed; nor will I see nor 
hear a spirit whilst I am gone. So, Hog 
and Brahma only were fearless 

With that Hog departed, and after a 
while he returned, rejoicing, bringing the 
book; and he said: I neither saw nor 
heard a spirit, and I declare unto you-that 
none of you saw nor heard them, for there 
are none. By the extreme bent of your 
minds, these imaginings seem real. And 
as to the great Light, with the words Love, 
Wisdom and Power, which I also saw, I 
say unto you, it is some emanation from 
this, our holy and most loved father. How 
oft have we heard him use those same 
words! And as to those figures that talk- 
ed, and had the semblance of men and 
women, even to their garments, I say unto 
you all, they emanate from the same source, 
even from our father, Brahma. 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-AEMIJ 



407 



Now spake Yu-tiv, saying: O happy- 
unbelief, my son! O that I had been born 
as thou! O that I had never seen such 
sights as I saw this night! Then said Oos: 
O happy brother, our youngest born! 
Would that I were like unto thee! O the 
vulgarity of those hands that came upon 
me this night! Vus said: O that I had 
never known the unseen world! O that I 
had been born in darkness like unto thee, 
our most favored brother! 

After that manner they all spake de- 
ploringly of their gift of su'is; and when 
they had thus spoken, the angel of God 
spake through Brahma, saying: Whilst it 
is yet night, I speak. With the dawn, at 
sunrise, is the Father's Voice. Hear me, 
then, briefly, expecting not much wisdom, 
for I am not long born in heaven: 

Two great men created the Creator, the 
Faithist and the unbeliever; the one who 
hath passed through the trials of the flesh, 
and attained to the Father's Voice; for in 
becoming one with the Father, he no long- 
er standeth in fear of anything in heaven 
or earth. The glory of constant resurrec- 
tion is before him forever. All men who 
have not attained to this may be likened 
unto a man going up a slippery hillside, 
who oft riseth high, but suddenly slideth 
low. They glorify themselves for their own 
light and wisdom and good gifts, rejoicing 
for self-sake for the glories that have fallen 
upon them. But they are cowards. 

Nevertheless, the Creator created a 
great man amongst these; and such is the 
unbelieving man. He hath neither gold 
nor silver, nor house nor land; and he is 
without spiritual sight or spiritual hearing; 
but his glory is in understanding his own 
understanding. He it is that subdueth the 
forest, and tameth the beasts of the field to 
man's service. He goeth alone in the dark, 
fearing naught. He followeth not the 
course of any man, but searcheth for him- 
self; the priest cannot make him believe, 
nor can the angels of heaven; none can 
subdue his judgment. He beholdeth the 
glory of the earth and of manhood. He 
calleth to the multitude, saying: Why per- 
mit ye others, even priests, to think for 
you? Arise, O thou, and be a man! Arise, 
O thou, and be a woman! 



He inspireth of the earth and for the 
earth; through his arm are tyrants and evil 
kings overthrown. Through him are doc- 
trines and religions sifted to the bottom, 
and the falsehood and evil in them cast 
aside. Yea, who but Ormazd could have 
created so great a man as the unbeliever? 

And these two men, the Faithist and 
the unbeliever, do mostly all the good that 
is done in the world; the one laboreth at 
the top of the hill, calling upward; the 
other laboreth at the bottom of the hill, 
pushing upward. 

CHAPTER XVI. 

On the next morning, at sunrise, Or- 
mazd spake again through Brahma, and 
Vede wrote down the words; and on the 
succeeding morning, in like manner; and 
so continued for forty days; and in forty 
days, behold, the Veda was completed; the 
holy words of Brahma were written. 

God said to Brahma: Go, now, and 

preach my gospel unto whomsoever will 

hear; proclaiming liberty to all who will 

follow thee. I will be with thee to the end. 
And thou shalt take Yu-tiv, thy wife, and 

all thy sons with thee, even Hog, the 
youngest born. 

So Brahma went forth preaching by 
day, and exhibiting the spirits of the dead 
by night. But to the chosen he spake at 
dawn, in the early morning, the time the 
All Light was upon him. And his sons also 
preached and explained; and Yu-tiv ex- 
plained to all women how it was with her 
when pregnant with her sons. Only Hog 
preached not; neither opened he his mouth 
before the populace as to his unbelief. In 
his soul he said: These things may be 
true, and if they be true, it is well. If 
they be not true, still the believing of them, 
by the populace, worketh righteousness 
and goodness. With all my philosophy, I 
cannot move the multitude to righteous- 
ness. But my father maketh them as a 
flock of sheep; they cease from evil, and 
they practice good fellowship. Therefore, 
I will stand by my father to the end. 

When Brahma came near a city, he 
halted outside the walls, that according to 
law the kings could not stay his voice. 



408 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 



LORDS' RECORD 



And the multitude came out of the city to 
hear him, and many returned not; but re- 
mained with Brahma and his sons in their 
camp. And when Brahma moved to an- 
other city they went with him. And in a 
little while the hosts of Brahma were as an 
army of thousands. And not a few of them 
were men and women of wealth, and they 
cast their treasures at Brahma's feet, say- 
ing: Take thou this trash, and give me of 
everlasting life instead. But men of learn- 
ing came not to Brahma; neither came the 
priests, nor kings, nor magicians, nor con- 
suiters of oracles. 

God said: Take thy hosts and establish 
them in families of tens, and of twenties, 
and of hundreds, and of thousands, and 
give thou a head father unto each and 
every family. And thy people shall be a 
people unto themselves, having nothing in 
common with the kings' peoples. Behold, 
my angel will go with thee, and show the 
waste lands, such as the kings' peoples de- 
sire not; and thou and thy people shall pos- 
sess the lands and dwell together in love 
and wisdom, doing good to one another. 

So Brahma did as commanded, and he 
so established the families in the mountains 
and valleys of Roam, and his people dwelt 
there, in all six thousand eight hundred 
and twenty, men, women and children. 
And there came to Brahma a certain cap- 
tain-general of the army of King Syaytha- 
ha, of the West Kingdom of Vind'yu, 
wherein lay the city of Gowschamgamram- 
mus, of a million inhabitants, and he said 
unto Brahma: 

In the name of the king, mightiest of 
men, Syaythaha, am I before thee, O Brah- 
ma. Behold, the king sendeth thee gold, 
silver and copper, saying: Brahma is good! 
Brahma shall give me the blessing of hea- 
ven! 

Brahma answered the captain-general, 
saying: Brahma saluteth the king, might- 
iest of men, Syaythaha, in the name of Or- 
mazd, the Creator, in love and in these 
wise words, that come to the soul of Brah- 
ma. Brahma sendeth the king's servant, 
even the captain-general, back to the king, 
with his gold, silver and copper, saying: 
Deal thou with thy Creator and not with 
men! The Great Spirit holdeth all bless- 



ings in His own hands. Give Him thy 
treasures ! 

The captain-general departed and re- 
turned with his gold, silver and copper to 
the king, and told the king Brahma's 
words. The king was pleased with the wis- 
dom of Brahma, but withal felt rebuked 
and sore at heart. So Ormazd suffered sa- 
tan to possess the king for a season; and 
the king resolved to destroy Brahma and 
all his people. And he commanded the 
captain-general to assemble together fifty 
thousand men, with arms, ready for battle. 
And when they were thus prepared, and 
started on their journey, which would re- 
quire seven days, the king bethought him 
to inquire of the oracle as to his best mode 
of success. 

Now the angel of God had taken pos- 
session of the oracle, and yet the magi 
knew it not, nor did Syaythaha. So the 
king came before the sand table, and the 
spirit wrote these words: He who hath be- 
come one with Ormazd is mightier than an 
army. Take off thy crown, O king, might- 
iest of men, and thy golden robes, and all 
that is fine and fair to look upon, and 
clothe thyself in the poorest of garments, 
even as a Druk that wandereth about. But 
thy crown and thy costly robes, and thy 
raiment, fine and fair to look upon, put 
upon thy body servant. And ye twain shall 
go in advance of the army, even before 
Brahma. And thou shalt witness that the 
man who professeth to labor for the poor 
will fall upon his belly before the man of 
riches and power. And behold, O king, 
thou shalt feel justified in destroying him 
that falleth before the crown and robes, 
knowing he is a hypocrite. 

The king was pleased with this, and he 
fulfilled all that was commanded of the 
oracle; and when he came near Brahma's 
camp, a man came before the king's ser- 
vant, saying: Behold, O king, command 
me as thou wilt! And he prostrated him- 
self on the ground before the king's ser- 
vant. Whereupon the king, dressed as a 
Druk, came to him and said: Who art 
thou? And the man answered: Begone, 
beggar! My matter is with the king! 

The king ordered the man to be seized 
and taken away and put to death; and the 
advance guard fell upon the man and slew 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ ^o.. r.coho 409 



him with war clubs. And when the man 
was quite dead, Brahma came, and neither 
the king, nor any of his advance guard, 
knew him. And Vus and Whe-ish were 
with their father, and the three came and 
stood by the dead man. Brahma then took 
the king's hand, saying: Thou that art 
in the garb of a Druk come hither, for thou 
hast flesh and blood unto holiness. Lay 
thou one hand on the dead man; put thine 
other hand on my head, for I will prove 
Ormazd before thine eyes. Behold, thou 
who hast tried to kill Brahma, killed an- 
other person! 

And when the king's hands were placed, 
Brahma stood by the head of the dead man, 
and his two sons by the heart; and Brahma 
said: In Thy name, O Ormazd, and by 
Thy power in me, return thou to life, O 
man! And arise! Arise! Arise! 

And behold, the man was brought to 
life, and rose up and stood before the mul- 
titude. 

The king trembled with fear, and the 
guard stood back, amazed. And, as for the 
servant arrayed in the king's garb, he cast 
aside the crown and robes, and fled into the 
forest. 

Brahma said unto the king: Here stand- 
eth the angel of Ormazd, and the angel 
saith thou art the king in disguise, and, 
moreover, that he, the angel, advised thee 
to come here for this purpose, saying to 
thee in the oracle: He that hath become 
one with Ormazd is mightier than an army! 

The king said: This is true. I swear 
before Thee, O Ormazd, henceforth I will 
wear such garments as these I have on, 
and my life shall be given to Thy service. 
Let who will take my kingdom and all I 
called mine. 

So Syaythaha joined Brahma's hosts; 
and with Syaythaha came his brothers and 
their sons and daughters. And, those that 
came, cast into a heap whatsoever goods or 
moneys they had, and the head fathers of 
the families divided and distributed the 
same according to their best wisdom. And 
Brahma's people, by commandment of 
Brahma, called themselves not Brahmins, 
but Vedans. 

In those days the language of the kings 



of Vind'yu, and of the men of learning, 
was All-ao, signifying, Out of All that is 
Good. But the Vedans were the unlearn- 
ed, and their language was imperfect, and 
of many meanings for every spoken and 
written word. And God foresaw the lia- 
bility to corruption of the Brahmin relig- 
ion, and he spake to Brahma, saying: Be- 
hold, I have given thee seven sons, six of 
light and one of darkness. Thy six sons 
of light shall establish each one a school 
amongst my chosen, and teach my scrip- 
tures by word of mouth. And all that 
henceforth become rab'bahs shall be capa- 
ble of repeating every word of the Veda by 
heart. And, in after ages, if the plates and 
the books of my holy religion are destroy- 
ed by war, it mattereth not. The sub- 
stance of thy labors shall live. 

Then did Brahma's sons as commanded, 
each and every one becoming a teacher. 
And again God spake to Brahma, saying: 
Arise, and go where my angel will lead 
thee, taking thy wife and thy son, Hog, 
with thee. And thou shalt travel yet two 
years from place to place, and then return 
thither, for thy labor will be completed. 

CHAPTER XVII. 

The place thus founded by Brahma was 
called Haraoyo, and his people, at this 
time, extended to seven cities and thirty 
villages, and possessed all the country of 
Roam, which had been uninhabited hun- 
dreds of years. And the Vedans cultivated 
the lands, living on fruits, roots, and on 
bread made of wheat grown in the fields; 
but they ate neither fish nor flesh, nor any- 
thing that had breathed the breath of life. 

Brahma and his wife, Yu-tiv, and his 
youngest son, Hog, departed from Hara- 
oyo, accompanied by seven disciples, and 
went forth under the direction of the an- 
gels of Ormazd, to preach and explain the 
Veda, carrying one book with them. And 
they went first to the northeast, through 
the kingdoms of Haomsut, and Ali-oud, 
and Zeth, and Wowtichiri; thence westerly 
to Hatiqactra, where the tyrant, Azhi-Aven, 
had built a temple of skulls, after the man- 
ner of the ancients. Azhi kept six dens of 
lions, for devouring his condemned slaves. 
So, because of oppression, the kingdom of 
Azhi was profitable unto Ormazd. From 



410 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ ««o.. -«•« 



Hatiqactra Brahma obtained three thou- 
sand followers. And when Brahma had 
seven thousand followers, the angel of God 
directed him to the plains of Cpenta-ar- 
maiti. And here he established his people, 
dividing them into families and villages, 
and appointing rab'bahs unto them. And 
Cpenta-armaiti became known over all the 
world. 

After this the angel directed Brahma to 
go to the southwest, through the king- 
doms of H'spor and Vaetaeyo, and Aram- 
ya, and thence to Dacyama, to the city of 
H'trysti, where Ormazd had a host of one 
thousand already inspired to join Brahma. 
And now the angel directed Brahma to 
^ake his hosts to the mountains of T'cara- 
rativirwoh, and establish them; which he 
did. And behold, the time of Yu-tiv and of 
Brahma was near an end, for they were 
grown quite old. 

The angel said to Brahma: Great hath 
been thy labor. Very great Yu-tiv's! Where 
in all the world is such a woman? From 
the day thou first beheld her! For the 
glory of thy sons! And in her age to fol- 
low thee, walking so far! Behold, O Brah- 
ma! Yu-tiv is weakening fast. Rise up 
and take her back to Haraoyo! The moun- 
tains of Roam are calling her! And thy 
faithful son, Hog, strong and tall. Take 
him back with his mother. Haraoyo is 
calling. 

Brahma went and looked at Yu-tiv, and 
his soul spake within him, saying: O Or- 
mazd, have I not forgotten her in Thee, 
the mother of my sons? O her proud 
young soul when first I saw her! Alas, I 
see she is tottering and feeble Brahma 
went nearer to Yu-tiv and she spake to 
him, saying: O Brahma, thou God 
of men! I know not if my eyes are 
turning dim. But O, I have seen so 
strange a sight, even toward the high sun. 
It was myself I saw, rising, going upward! 
The earth going downward! Then I called: 

Ormazd! Not alone! Behold, my God 
is yonder! Let me back to Brahma! Then 

1 thought the Creator brought me back 
and said: Go thou quickly and see thy 
godly sons in Haraoyo, for thy time hath 
come! 



Brahma said: My angel saith: Go thou 
back to Haraoyo, thy labor is nearly fin- 
ished. For this reason I came to thee. It 
is well, therefore, for us that we return, 
taking Hog with us. 

So Brahma, and Yu-tiv, and Hog, with 
five remaining disciples, departed for Har- 
aoyo, which lay three days' journey for a 
man to walk, and they knew not how Yu- 
tiv would go, for she was worn to the last 
step, and, above all, her shoes were worn 
out, and she had only pieces of cloth to 
her feet. And whilst they were deliberat- 
ing having only gone a short distance, 
Hog perceived, going in another direction, 
a score of soldiers, mounted on horses, and 
they were leading a number of spare horses 
with them. Then the soul of Hog spake 
within him, saying: 

Behold, my father hath made many con- 
verts in his day, made good men out of bad 
ones. And he hath ever refused money, 
and gifts, and presents. Now, whatever 
justice liveth I know not; but many of the 
rascals who became followers of my father 
were conscience-stricken with ill-gotten 
gains, and, finding that my father would 
not receive their stuff, they tried me, and 
behold, my pockets are full of gold and dia- 
monds. In truth, it may have been a very 
devil prompted me; but I am supposed not 
to know the higher light, but to know the 
lower. Of myself and for myself I want 
not these things. If they belong to Or- 
mazd, it followeth I should not keep them. 
Therefore, if I give of gold or diamonds to 
those soldiers, they will give me a horse 
for my angel mother to ride on. Who 
knoweth but by the way of these soldiers 
is the nearest road for this gold to find its 
way to Ormazd? 

So Hog went away and purchased a 
horse, and brought it to his mother, say- 
ing: Behold, a man giveth thee a present 
in the name of Ormazd, but forbiddeth thee 
to retain it save to ride to Haraoyo, whith- 
er thou shalt sell it and give the money to 
the poor. 

Yu-tiv said: A good man he was, and 
wise, for only on his own conditions could 
I have accepted the horse. Accordingly, 
Yu-tiv was mounted on the horse, and they 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ «».■ ««.» 



411 



proceeded on their way, going slowly, for 
Brahma was also near the end. And after 
seven days they arrived at Haraoyo, where 
they were received by Brahma's sons, and 
by all the multitude of disciples. But ow- 
ing to Yu-tiv's deep love for her sons, 
and being worn out withal, and having wit- 
nessed the glory of righteous works fulfill- 
ed through her husband and her sons, the 
strain was too much for her corporeal 
parts. And they brought straw and stretch- 
ed her along, and a bundle of straw under 
her head. Then she spake, saying: 

First to Thee, O Ormazd, my blessing, 
because Thou createdst me alive, to enjoy 
Thy glories. Next, O Brahma! My hus- 
band, my blessing on thee. God of men! 
Thou hast taught me the fullness of earth 
and heaven! O the glory of having been 
thy wife! 

Then she called Whe-ish and said: O 
my son, my first-born! My blessing on 
thee. Because I have watched thee from 
the hour of conception, I have had the 
wisdom of creation demonstrated before 
me. O the joy when first mine eyes beheld 
thee; I am going now, to prepare a place 
in heaven for thee! 

And, after that, Yu-tiv blessed all her 
sons, and coming to Hog she said: My 
blessing on thee, O my latest born, God 
of men! To all my other sons I have told 
my love, but to thee my soul overfloweth, 
I am as a dumb woman. Thou hast been a 
very God in all thy ways, and believest not 
in Ormazd; nor in heaven nor angels! For 
which reason I look upon thee as the high- 
est of all creations. Thou art good for 
goodness' sake; wise for wisdom's sake; 
happy in finding a way to master all un- 
happiness! 

And these were Yu-tiv's last words; she 
shut her eyes. She was dead! So they 
took her body, and robed it in white, and 
on the fourth day buried her in the forest 
of Roam. 

CHAPTER XVIII. 

On the day of Yu-tiv's death, Brahma 
said: Sing no. songs; pray in silence only. 
Let her soul be in quiet with Ormazd. On 
the second day Braham said: Pray in 
whispers, praise in whispers, the best, good 
deeds of the dead. On the third day Brah- 



ma said: Burst forth a song of praise to 
Ormazd; extol the virtues of the dead. On 
the fourth day Brahma said: In song and 
in prayer bid the dead arise and go onward,, 
upward! 

Thus they put Yu-tiv in the ground on 
the fourth day; and then they went and sat 
in the sacred circle and sang and prayed 
for her soul to go on to Nirvana. And 
when they had finished, a light came down 
the midst of the circle, and an angel in, 
white appeared. It was Yu-tiv; the spirit 
of Yu-tiv in the glory of Ormazd, the Cre- 
ator! 

Then spake the angel Yu-tiv, saying: 
Out from the head of the corporeal body 
the spirit is born; and angels stand around;, 
on a spirit blanket receive they the spirit of 
the dead. One day, in quiet, they keep the 
spirit, teaching it to reconcile and under- 
stand. On the second day, the spirit hear- 
eth the prayers of the earth-people coming 
upward; and on the third day, the spirit 
understandeth death and birth of spirit. 
And on the fourth day, when ye sang: O' 
Goddess, arise from the dead! The Father 
calleth thee from on high! Arise, O God- 
dess, and go thy way! Then was my spirit, 
free from the earth; resting in the arms of 
Gods and Goddesses, who had come from, 
on high to receive me. Thus, O my belov- 
ed, on the third day is the first resurrec- 
tion; and, to the holy, the second resurrec- 
tion beginneth on the fifth day. After the 
fifth day call ye me not back again! My 
labor lieth yonder! I must build houses 
for you all. Thus Ormazd sendeth me on. 
before! If it be His will for me to return, 
to you at times, I will return. His will, 
above all; this is the greatest wisdom. 

Whe-ish, her first-born, asked: What 
of the angels of the intermediate world, O 1 
mother? Then answered his angel mother, 
saying: They were shown to us in Eboni 
grove! Alas, some of them do not begin 
the resurrection for a thousand years! 

Then came the angel Yu-tiv over, near 
Hog, her latest born, whom she loved so 
well. She said: Canst thou see me, my 
son? Hog answered: Nay, I see only a 
glimmering light faintly: I hear a voice,, 
but it soundeth not like my mother's voice. 
Yet, if it be that there is a soul that liveth 
after death, and if of a truth, thou art the 
very spirit and soul of her who brought me- 



412 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-AEMIJ ^ ««•« 



forth, be thou not unhappy because of my 
unbelief. As for myself, I am happy be- 
cause thou broughtest me forth in unbelief; 
neither would I of my own will be any oth- 
er way. Whether our eyes be blue or 
black, or whether we are tall or short, or 
whether we are believers or disbelievers, 
even as we are created, and to fill our place 
in doing good unto others with all our wis- 
dom and strength, is this not glory enough? 

Yu-tiv said: O thou wisest of men! In 
the day thou art born in heaven, thou shalt 
not linger long in the intermediate world, 
but be crowned a very God indeed! Here 
endeth my labors with the earth, O ye, my 
beloved! An otevan waiteth by the way 
for me to ascend; the Gods and Goddesses 
are calling me! Farewell, my beloved! 
Farewell! 

And now the music of heaven descend- 
ed, and even whilst the mortals sang, the 
very gates of heaven opened, and the an- 
gel Yu-tiv rose upward in a sea of fire! 
But behold, the love of great Brahma was 
too much for him! His eyes raised up- 
ward after the ascending light, and his 
soul burst within him. He fell down and 
stretched himself on the cold earth! He, 
too, was dead. 

Then burst the mighty hearts of Brah- 
ma's sons. The whole earth shook with 
the wail of Gods. The wind, the air above 
the earth, stood still, and the forest of 
Roam shuddered as if the earth were rent 
in twain. Then wailed the sons and daugh- 
ters of Haraoyo. Though no man uttered 
it yet all knew that great Brahma was 
dead. 

CHAPTER XIX. 

The angel of God came in the sacred 
circle and stood in the midst. He said: 
Greeting, in the name of Ormazd! In His 
name I speak before you. First, then, who 
of all that was dearest to Brahma, he or 
she, shall arise! 

And behold, there arose every man, 
woman and child, more than ten thou- 
said. The angel said: By the side of 
Yu-tiv shall ye, his most beloved, bury his 
body. On the third day after his death, 
even at the hour of his death, shall ye bury 
him. And around about the grave shall ye 
sit thrice a day, morning, noon and night, 



for one hour, singing and praying for the 
soul of Brahma, for two days. And behold, 
on the evening of the second day ye shall 
behold the graves of both Brahma and Yu- 
tiv opened, and their very bodies will come 
forth, and Brahma shall speak with you 
face to face. The angel then disappeared. 

And the people did as commanded; and 
they sat watching around the graves in a 
circle, at a distance of ten paces therefrom. 
And the brothers favored Hog above all 
the rest, that he might be converted. And 
accordingly, in the evening of the sec- 
ond day, when the sun had been two hours 
set, there descended into the midst of the 
circle a light, bright as the sun, so that the 
multitude held their hands before their 
eyes; and so bright was the light that 
the graves were burst open. And in the 
space of a moment of time, the light was 
lowered so all could look therein; and, 
behold, Brahma and Yu-tiv, arm in 
arm, stood in the midst of the circle, even 
with their flesh and bones and their burial 
robes. 

Brahma said: Have ye faith in the Cre- 
ator; with Him are all things possible. He 
is the All Master of all things. Accept 
ye not, forever, any God, or Lord, or Sav- 
ior, or priest or king, but Him, the ever- 
lasting All One. Practicing good works 
unto all men; abjuring self in all things; 
and Ormazd will dwell with you and in you 
forever. 

Then Brahma and Yu-tiv came near 
Hog, that he might see clearly. Hog said: 
Art thou truly Brahma, my father; and 
thou, too, Yu-tiv, my mother? Yu-tiv 
spake not, but Brahma said: I am thy fa- 
ther, even Brahma. To practice the high- 
est light a man hath; this is all that is re- 
quired of any man. 

Hog said: Of a truth it is my father! 
Of a truth it is my mother! 

Brahma said: We are blessed! This 
is the first belief: to believe in the spirit 
surviving the corporeal body; the second 
belief is to learn the All Person. After 
this cometh faith. 

Hog said: Thou hast proven the first, 
but as to the All Person, I cannot under- 
stand. 

Brahma said: As I and thy mother 
have revealed ourselves to thee, and so 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ "*°" «co, D 413 



proven ourselves, so in due season will 
Ormazd reveal Himself unto thee. 

And this was the end. Brahma and 
Yu-tiv rose up in the sea of fire, smiling 
and waving their hands in love to those be- 
neath, higher and higher, till they disap- 
peared in the sky. Then went the people, 
and witnessed that the graves were open 
and the bodies gone. They filled up the 
places, and set a post inscribed: Tomb of 
Brahma and Yu-tiv, God and Goddess. 

CHAPTER XX. 
HISTORY OF EAWAHTAH. 

In Guatama, in the Middle Kingdom, 
by the sea of So-ci-a-pan, came down from 
heaven, Gitchee, the Creator, the World- 
Maker, Manito! With silence, speaking in 
the soul of things. He said: Speak, O 
earth! Have eyes, O earth! Have ears, 
O earth! Behold Me, your Maker! 

The earth answered Him, not with 
words, boasting, but raised up man! 

Man said: Here I am, O Gitchee! The 
Creator looked and beheld the Thins of 
Guatama standing before Him, the lit- 
tle people, white and yellow. Gitchee 
said: Because thou hast answered me 
in faith, O earth, thy ong'wee (talking 
animals) shall be called I'hin. Thus was 
named the first talkers; men with mouths 
for words; ears for words. 

Then Gitchee called the I'hins to- 
gether, and said they were good; even 
the handsomest of all created creations. 
And he commanded them to marry, male 
and female, and beget heirs. 

And they obeyed Gitchee's commands; 
but the dumb earth cast clouds upward, and 
blinded the ways of the I'hins, and they 
strayed away from the mounds, and came 
to black Druks, which speak not; have no 
words; being dumb like the black mud of 
the earth where they burrowed. In the 
darkness of the earth the I'hins mingled 
with the Druks, and behold, a second born 
speaking animal stood upon the earth, tall, 
and red, and strong, swift and handsome. 
Gitchee said: 

I blame thee not, O I'hin! I saw the 
darkness; saw thy straits! But never more 
shalt thou dwell with Druks, nor with this 
new race, those with faces like new 



copper. Call then I'hua; for they shall be 
protectors over my chosen, the I'hins, for- 
ever. The I'hua shall drive away the 
baugh and mieu and great serpents, and all 
man-slaying beasts; for I will make mighty 
nations out of the seed of the I'huans. 

The first I'huan's name was O-e-du, and 
his wife's name was Uh-na; and they be- 
gat Owena and Dan and Shu-sa, but they 
had no more heirs. At a time soon after, 
the second man, whose name was Ka-ka- 
wooh, and whose wife's name was Wees, 
begat Somma, and Pan-ah, and Kac-ak, 
and Ku-bak, and Jessom. And these were 
the first tribes of I'huans in the land of 
Guatama (after the flood), and they dwelt 
together, marrying and begetting offspring,, 
dwelling in peace. And the I'hins taught 
them in all things, so they became an hon- 
or on the earth and a glory unto the Crea- 
tor; but they were mixed so together that 
one tribe had no preference over another. 
So they were called the tribe of Oedukka- 
kaooh, of the middle kingdom, Waneopan- 
ganosah. 

In the valley of Owak, by the river Ho- 
e-jon-wan Gitchee created another tribe 
called Bak-Haw-ugh, and to the north of 
them, in the mountains Meiu-how-an-go- 
to-bah; and their tribes commingled, and 
Gitchee named them Bakhawughmeouhow- 
augotobah. 

Jesson, son of Rakaooh, married We- 
pon, daughter of Bakhawughmeiuhowan- 
gotobah, and they begat Sto-gil-bak, and 
he begat Kom, and he begat See, and she 
married Ban, son of the tribe Rakaooh, 
and Ban's first-born son's name was La- 
ban-a-see. And Labanasee was born in 
su'is of the second order, and could hear 
the voice of the Great Spirit. And the 
Voice remained with Labanasee during 
his life-time, which was one hundred 
and twenty and five years, when he 
died. And the Voice descended to Le- 
banasee's son, Hootlabanasee, who lived 
one hundred and one years, and he died, 
and the Voice descended to his son, Hata- 
panagooshhootlabanasee; and thence to his 
son after him, named Arapanseekasoodat- 
ivhatapanagoosshhootlabanasee. 

Thus were represented the eighteen 
tribes of Gitchee's chosen amongst the 
heirs to the Voice. 



414 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ABMIJ 



LORDS' RECORD 



Gitchee said unto Ara: Arise and go 
forth; my hand will guide thee. So Ara 
rose up and departed by the hand of the 
Creator, and came to the valley of Owg, 
broad and sweet-smelling, full of health- 
giving food and air and water. And there 
came with Ara into Owg one thousand 
men, women and children; and they built 
a city and called it Eftspan, signifying place 
of beauty. And these took the name of the 
tribe of Ara, which name survived one 
thousand seven hundred and fifty years. 
And their people were tens of thousands. 

After the tribe of Ara lost the Voice, 
there was raised up Sho-shone, of the 
tribes of Sto-gil-bak. And Gitchee raised 
His hand before Sho-shone and pointed the 
way, and Sho-shone departed out of the 
country of Tabachoozehbakkankan and 
came to Owg, and took to wife Hisam, 
daughter of Ooeguffanauha, and they begat 
E-a-ron-a-ki-mutz, a son of great beauty 
and strength, a swift runner. And the 
voice of Gitchee-Manito came to Earon- 
akimutz and remained with him during his 
natural life-time, which was ninety years. 
And to his son, Fassawanhootaganganea- 
ronakimutz, and thence to his son, Monag- 
oamyazazhufassawan-hootaganganearonak- 
imutz. 

And Monag inhabited the regions of 
the plains of Yiteauazow, and his people 
became mighty in cities and agriculture. 
For four thousand years the Voice of the 
All Father remained with the regular suc- 
cession of the heirs of Monag, but their 
names and their cities' names became so 
long that no man could speak them or write 
them. 

So Gitchee raised up Honga, son of Ab, 
of the tribe of Oedu, of the land of the Mid- 
dle Kingdom. And Honga went into the 
mountains of Ghiee, sloping to the east. 

Gitchee spake to Honga, saying: 
Thou shalt take Oebe for thy wife; out of 
thy seed will I raise up a greater tribe than 
all other tribes; and thy first-born son shall 
have thy name; and thy son's son shall be 
called Honga also; and thy sons' sons' son, 
and so on forever. For I am wearied with 
the burden of names; thy Great Creator 
hath spoken. 

Then asked Honga, saying: What if I 
have no son, but only daughters? Or if 



my son or my son's son, have only daugh- 
ters? 

Gitchee answered: The first daughter. 
So, in course of time, Honga married 
and begat heirs; and the Voice of 
the Great Spirit remained with the 
tribes of Honga, and it came to pass 
that he who heard the Voice, who 
was always the chief prophet for the tribe, 
was called Honga; but the people them- 
selves were called ong'wee. 

And the generations of Honga were 
called — first Honga; second Honga; third 
Honga; and so on. And this was the be- 
ginning of the counting of time in Guata- 
ma. Neither knew any man the number of 
generations before the time of Honga the 
first. And the land became full of cities, 
from the east to the west, and from the 
north to the south, and the people dwelt in 
peace, tribe with tribe. 

In those days the kings and learned 
men devoted their lives to building ca- 
nals and finding places and roadways for 
them, and herein laid the great glory and 
honor of men at that time. And Gitchee 
perceiving the virtue and wisdom of 
men, sent his angels to teach man 
canal - making; to teach man to com- 
pound clay with lime and sand, to hold 
water; to teach man to find the gau, the 
level, and the force of water. The angels 
also taught man to make pots and ket- 
tles; to burn the clay in suitable shapes; to 
find copper ore and silver ore, and gold 
and lead for the floors of the oracle cham- 
bers, clean and white shining, suitable for 
angels. And they taught man how to 
soften copper like dough; how to harden 
copper like flint rock, for axes and mat- 
tocks for building canals; taught man how 
to work the ore in the fire and melt it; and 
how to make lead into sheets, like cloth. 
Taught man to till the soil and grow wheat 
and corn; taught the women how to grind 
it and make bread. Taught the hunters 
how to slay the lion and the tiger and the 
mastodon, the Hogawatha, the Rooting 
Animal of Wisdom. 

CHAPTER XXI. 

These, then, were the principal kings of 
that day: Lanoughl, king of Eboostakgan, 
a city of tens of thousands, in the valley of 
Aragaiyistan. Lanoughl was the son of 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ to™., -co.. 415 



Toogaoogahaha, who was the son of Evil- 
phraiganakukuwonpan, who was the son of 
Oyoyughstuhaipwehaha, who built the canal 
(oseowa) of Papaeunugheutowa, which ex- 
extended from the sea of Hoola'hoola'pan 
to the plains of Aigonquehanelachahoba, 
near the sea of Sociapan, where dwelt Heo- 
thahoga, king of kings, whose temple was 
roofed with copper and silver. Of ten 
thousand boats was the canal, ex- 
tending along, carrying copper and silver 
from the north regions to the cities of the 
valley of Hapembapanpan, and to the cities 
of the mountains of Oaramgallachacha, and 
to Ghiee, home of Honga the first, the 
mightiest of red men. 

Next in power to Lanoughl was Tee- 
see-gam-ba-o-rakaxax, king of the city of 
Chusanimbapan, in the plains of Erezehoe- 
gammas, with twelve tributary cities ex- 
tending along the river Akaistaazachahaus- 
tomakmak, to the mountains of Nefsaida- 
wowotchachaeengamma. 

And the third king in power was Chia- 

wassaibakanaizhoo, of the city of Inuistaha- 

. hahacromcromahoesuthaha, and to him 

were tributary seven and twenty cities and 

their kings. 

Chiawassaibakanalszhoo was the son of 
Tenehamgameralhucksukhaistomaipowwas- 
saa, who was son of Thusaiganganenosata- 
makka, who built the great east canal, the 
Oseowagallaxacola, in the rich valley of 
Tiedaswonoghassie, and through the land 
of Seganoegaly alyuciahomaahomhom , 
where dwelt the large men and women, the 
Ongewahapackaka-ganganecolabazkoaxax. 

The fourth great king of Guatama was 
Hooagalomarakkadanapanwowwow, king 
of the city of Itussakegollahamganseocola- 
bah, which had seventeen tributary cities 
of tens of thousands of people. And his 
kingdom extended from sea to sea in the 
Middle Kingdom. Here was the temple of 
Gilofif, with a thousand collumns of pol- 
ished mahognay, and with a dome of cop- 
per and silver. And within Giloff dwelt 
the Osheowena, the oracle of the Creator, 
for two thousand years. 

The fifth great king was Penambatta, 
king of the city of Liscararzakyatasagan- 
gan, on the High Heogula Ophat, with 
thirty tributary cities of tens of thousands 
of inhabitants. Here was situate the school 



and college of great learning, the Ahazaho- 
hoputan, where were taught tens of thou- 
sands of students. Penambatta was learn- 
ed, and had traveled far, devoting his life 
to imparting knowledge. He had six thou- 
sand attendants, besides six hundred and 
forty officers. 

The sixth great king was Hoajab, son 
of Teutsangtusicgammoo ghsapanpan, 
founder of the kilns of Wooboohakhak. 
Hoajab's capital city was Farejonkahomah, 
with thirty-three tributary cities, of tens of 
thousands of inhabitants, of the plains of 
He'gow. 

The seventh great king was Hiroughs- 
kahogamorghtabakbak, and his capital city 
was Hoesughsoosiamcholabonganeobanzh- 
ohahhah, situate in the plains of Messogo- 
wanchoola, and extending eastward to the 
mountains of Gonzhoowassicmachababdo- 
huyapiasondrythoajaj, including the valleys 
of the river Onepagassathalalanganchoo- 
choo, even to the sea, Poerthawowitcheo- 
thunacalclachaxzhloschistacombia. He had 
forty and seven tributary cities of tens of 
thousands of inhabitants. 

Betwixt the great kings and their capi- 
tals were a thousand canals, crossing the 
country in every way, from east to west 
and from north to south, so that the seas 
of the north were connected with the seas 
of the south. In kanoos the people trav- 
eled and carried the productions of the land 
in every way. Besides the canals men- 
tioned, there were seven other great canals, 
named after the kings who built them, and 
they extended across the plains in many 
directions, but chiefly east and west. These 
were : Oosgaloomaigovolobanazhooegollo- 
pan, and Halagazhapanpanegoochoo, and 
Fillioistagovonchobiassoso, and Anetiabo- 
lalachooesanggomacoaloabonbakkak, and 
Ehabadangonzhooeportalicha-boggasa-me- 
gticheepapa, and Onepapollagassayamgan- 
shuniatedo egonachoogangitiavatoosom- 
chooibalgadgad, and Hachooaolagobwotch- 
achabakaraxexganhammazhooelapanpan. 

Besides all these inhabited regions there 
lay another country to the far west, fifty 
days' journey, the land of Goeshallobok, a 
place of sand and salt, and hot, boiling wa- 
ters. And this region was a twenty days' 
journey broad, east and west, and fifty 
days' journey north and south. 



416 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J - RDS . BE co RB 



In the High North lay the kingdom of 
Olegalla, the land of giants, the place of 
yellow rocks and high spouting waters. 
Olegalla it was who gave away his king- 
dom, the great city of Powafuchawowitch- 
ahavagganeabba, with the four and twenty 
tributary cities spread along the valley of 
Anemoosagoochakakfuela; gave his king- 
dom to his queen Minneganekashaka, with 
the yellow hair, long, hanging down. And 
the queen built temples, two hundred and 
seventy, and two adjacent to the spouting 
waters, where her people went every morn- 
ing at sunrise, singing praise to Gitchee, 
Manito, the Creator. 

South of Olegalla lay the kingdom of 
Onewagga, around about the sea of Chusa- 
mangaobe-hassahgana-wowitchee, in the 
valley of Mauegobah, meaning, Con- 
secrated Place of the Voice, a kingdom of 
forty cities. Here reigned for twenty gen- 
erations the line of kings called Wineoh- 
gushhagusha, most holy and wise, full of 
manliness and strong limbed. On the east- 
ward of the lake lay the Woohootaughnee, 
the ground of games and tournaments, 
where came tens of thousands every au- 
tumn to exhibit their strength, carrying 
horses and oxen, and running and leaping, 
running races with the trained aegamma. 
And to the strongest and swiftest, the king 
gave prizes of handsome damsels, with 
straight limbs and shapely necks, proud, 
who loved to be awarded handsome, 
mighty husbands. Next south lay the king- 
dom of Himallawowoaganapapa, rich in le- 
gends of the people who lived here before 
the flood; a kingdom of seventy cities and 
six great canals coursing east and west, 
and north and south, from the Ghiee Moun- 
tain, in the east, to the west mountain, the 
Yublahahcolaesavaganawakka, the place of 
the king of bears, the Eeughohabakax. 
And to the south, to the Middle Kingdom, 
on the deserts of Geobiathaganeganewoh- 
woh, where the rivers empty not into the 
sea, but sink in the sand, the Sonagalla- 
kaxax, creating prickly Thuazhoogallak- 
hoomma, shaped like a pear. 

CHAPTER XXII. 

Then came the God of evil, Itura, sow- 
ing evil in the temples and on the altars. 
Yea, with a false tongue and cunning came 
he, before the prophets, stealing their eyes 



away, stealing their ears away; holding up 
his hand, saying: It is the Great Spirit's 
hand. 

And I'tura obsessed the nations and 
tribes of men to worship him; infatuating 
them with the stories of far-off countries, 
and the glory of kings and queens. And he 
set on foot a war of plunder; brought ten 
thousand times ten thousand evil spirits 
to aid and abet mortals in war. And I'tura, 
the God of evil, taught mortals to flatten 
the head, to make prophets for him, and 
behold, the land of Guatama became a land 
of seers and prophets and conjurers, seek- 
ing evil for the sake of evil; consulting the 
spirits of the dead for war and for earthly 
glory in blood and death. 

And the fair land of Guatama was over- 
spread with human blood. Fell war spread 
along throughout all the mighty kingdoms; 
kingdom against kingdom; city against 
city; man against man. And the holy tem- 
ples were pulled down or burnt; and the 
canals broken and wasted; the cities burnt 
and the fields laid desolate. Neither grew 
there any grain; the grinding mills of the 
women were silent, like the dead stretched 
over all the fields! Into the forest, afar off, 
fled the women with the children, hungry, 
weeping, starving. And the cities went 
down; the nations went down; the tribes of 
men were broken up; only remnants here 
and there remained. And where had been 
great and mighty peoples, lay only heaps of 
ruins, past the power of man to rebuild. 

Then looked down from the highest 
heaven, the Creator, the Great Spirit; saw 
the work of desolation; saw I'tura at his 
bloody work. And the Great Spirit cried 
out with a loud voice, so that earth and 
heaven shook with the power of His voice; 
sifted all things, as a woman sifteth meal. 
And He found one grain of corn not 
ground by the God of evil, found Honga! 
The tribes so fast sworn to the Great Spirit 
that the evil Gods' and evil spirits' words 
rolled off and took no hold on them. The 
Great Spirit saw the tribes of Honga, they 
that stuck most to the I'hins, the sacred 
little people, white and yellow, oft marry- 
ing with them, thus preserving heirs to 
the Voice. And He called loud and long. 

Honga! Honga! Honga! The Crea- 
tor would not be put off with silence; called 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-AEMIJ 



LORDS' RECORD 



417 



again: Honga! Honga! Honga! Again 
He called: Honga! Honga! Honga! 

In the first call, I'tura and his evil hosts 
ran away. In His second call, it was like 
spring-time, after heavy winter. And in 
the third call, it was like budding summer. 
And there came up a sprout of the seed of 
Honga, an I'huan; taller than any other 
man with a bright shining face like copper; 
shining as if all the destroyed temples glis- 
tened in his broad head. 

And he spake, saying: Here, O Great 
Spirit, here am I! And the Great Spirit 
said: Who art thou, My Son? And he an- 
swered: I am Son of the Creator. Then 
asked the Great Spirit: Of what tribe? 
And he answered: My genealogy is of the 
spirit. Of the I'hin my mother; of the 
I'huan, my father. 

Then said the Creator: For which rea- 
son I name thee Eawahtah, spirit and flesh 
even balanced, best of men. Come thou 
with Me; walk along with Me; thou shalt 
re-instate the tribes of men; deliver them 
out of darkness. 

Eawahtah said: I am Thy servant, O 
Great Spirit. What shall I call Thee, that 
the tribes of men be no longer distrustful? 
Then answered the Creator: Call Me after 
the wind, O Eawahtah! 

Eawahtah said: How after the wind? 
The Great Spirit said: Come with Me, My 
Son. Then Eawahtah walked along and 
came to a place where the wind blew in the 
leaves. 

The Creator said: Tell Me, My Son, 
what saith the wind in the leaves? And an- 
swered Eawahtah: E! Then the Creator 
took Eawahtah to the big sea water, and 
asked: What saith the wind in the water, 
My Son? And Eawahtah answered: Go! 
Then took the Creator Eawahtah to the 
high crags, the rocks above the clouds, 
piercing, where the wind whistled; and He 
said: What saith the wind, My Son? And 
Eawahtah answered: Quim! 

And the Great Spirit said: Call Me 
Egoquim, O My Son. I am the earth and 
all that is in the earth and on the earth, 
and all the stars and moon and sun; they 
all My. members. And the air above 
the earth, the Atontea, is another mem- 
ber of My Person. And higher yet; in 
the high place above the air, is the ethe, 
the great penetrator; and that is also a 



member of My Person. I am every- 
where, far and near; all things thine eye 
seeth; all things thine ear heareth are 
of Me and in Me. Behold the flowers 
of the field; I color them. Behold the 
ant and the honeybee; I lead them; the 
bird I teach how to build. 

Man alone is stubborn, setting up ways 
of his own. O that he could learn to be 
one with Me! To move and labor with 
Me! Then spake Eawahtah, saying: Holy 
Egoquim! I will go and teach man, give 
him Thy words; make him understand. 

Egoquim said: For that labor called I 
thee forth, made thee tall and handsome, 
with strong limbs and broad shoulders. 
Come, then, My Son, I will go with thee; 
into all the lands; amongst all the scat- 
tered tribes; thy voice shall be My Voice. 
So near thee will I stand, when thou open- 
est thy mouth to speak, fear not, I will give 
thee words; thou shalt not err. 

CHAPTER XXVII. 

Eawahtah inquired: What shall I say; 
how teach the sons and daughters of men? 

Egoquim answered Eawahtah, saying: 

One Great Person, even Egoquim, Cre- 
ator and Ruler over all in heaven and on 
earth. Him shalt thou have and no 
God, nor Lord, nor idol, nor man, nor an- 
gel, to worship, forever! Him shalt thou 
love above all things in heaven above, or 
on the earth, or in the waters of the earth! 
And thou shalt teach Him to thy children, 
and command them to teach Him to their 
children, and so on forever! And thou 
shalt forswear all Gods, and Lords, 
and idols, to worship them not forever! 
And the same to thy children, and to 
their children after them, forever! 

And thou shalt deal unto all men, and 
women and children, as justly and kindly 
as to thine own mother, out of whose 
breast thou wert fed when thou wert help- 
less and of no strength. Teaching this to 
thy children, and to their children after 
them, forever! 

And to the sick and helpless; to the 
stranger and the man that cometh afar; to 
the widow who is destitute; to the child 
that hath no father; thou shalt be both fa- 



418 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ f«.. r CC oro 



ther and mother to them; and take them 
into thy house and feed them; and give 
them skins and cloth to wear; and if they 
be lost thou shalt go with them and show 
them the way. Commanding these things 
unto thy children, and to their children 
after them, forever! 

And thou shalt not tell lies; nor speak 
falsely against any man, nor woman, nor 
child; nor break thy word of promise, even 
though death come upon thee to induce 
thee otherwise. Unchangeable as the set- 
ting and rising sun shall be the word of thy 
mouth! And thou shalt command this to 
thy children, and to their children after 
them, forever! 

And thou shalt not take and possess 
that which is another's; nor suffer thy chil- 
dren to do so, nor their children after them, 
forever. 

And thou shalt respect the times of wo- 
man; and when she is bearing unto thee, 
thou shalt not lie with her; nor give her 
heavy labor, nor angry words, nor fret her; 
but be obedient to her, doing whatsoever 
she asketh thee to do, for it is her time, 
and she is thy queen. Teaching this to thy 
young men and to thy young women, and 
to theirs that come after them, forever; for 
their young are begotten of Me, and I will 
have them shapely, and strong, and brave! 

Thou shalt labor six days, but on the 
seventh, the moon's day, thou shalt not 
labor, nor hunt, nor fish, but go to 
the altar of thy Creator and dance and 
sing before Me; and sit in silence to hear 
my words, which I speak into the souls of 
men, and of women and children. Teach- 
ing this to thy children, and to their chil- 
dren that come after them, forever. 

Thou shalt restore the rites and cere- 
monies of Choe-pan and Annubia-pan but 
thou shalt not flatten the head to drive 
the judgment of the brain away to the 
prophetic regions. Teaching these things 
to thy children, and to their children after 
them, forever! 

Then rose up Eawahtah, Son of Ego- 
quim, saying: I am Thy servant! Lead 
thou me, for I am going in Thy name, even 
to the end of the world! 



When thus spake Eawahtah, Son of the 
Great Spirit, a Light came over him, daz- 
zling, brilliant, lighting the way, showing 
him the way. And so great was the spirit 
on Eawahtah, that when he came to the 
river, he rose up like an angel, sailed over 
and landed safely on the other side. Nei- 
ther knew he whither he was going; knew 
not the places of the scattered, destroyed 
peoples. 

And the angels of Egoquim went before 
him; went into the forests and valleys, 
calling to the souls of the suffering, starv- 
ing, dying, saying to them in their despair: 
Egoquim, the Mighty, is coming! His 
Son! Behold him! He holdeth the keys of 
Hochedcwa, the heavenly hunting ground. 
Come forth from your hiding! Come forth, 
O My beloved! It is your Heavenly Fa- 
ther calling. And the women heard! The 
little children, with sore, bleeding feet! 
The proud, brave men gave ear! They 
said: Why do we fight? Why do we de- 
stroy? It was a wicked God! He called 
himself the Savior, — the wicked monster, 
I'tura! 

Then came Eawahtah; came first to the 
kingdom of Took-shein, and to his queen, 
Che-guh, in the land, Anagoomahaha, the 
flat-heads. Told them all the words of the 
Great Spirit, Egoquim. 

Then spake Took-shein, saying: To me 
the Great Spirit hath spoken; told me all 
the words thou hast. I know all thou hast 
said is true. Then spake Che-guh, saying: 
To me spake Gitchee, the Great Spirit. 
True are all thy words, O Eawahtah. By 
thee will all the scattered tribes be gathered 
together. Many tribes will there be of the 
red man. 

Then spake Eawahtah, saying to his 
good host and hostess: Your place shall 
be the centre: from your place I will 
extend outward, always bringing in fol- 
lowers. Whilst thus they talked, a Light 
came above them. Look, said Took-shein: 
It is the hand of Egoquim! Look, said 
Che-guh: It is the Voice of Gitchee! 
Then spake Eawahtah: It is a ship of fire 
coming down from heaven! I hear the 
voice of the angel of Egoquim, the Mighty! 

Then Eawahtah went and stood betwixt 
Took-shein and Che-guh, holding their 



CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J ^- BE coro 41 g 



hands, so the Voice of Egoquim could 
speak plainly. 

Then spake Egoquim, saying, speaking 
out of the ship of fire: Yea, My beloved! 
I am with you! Behold, My worlds are 
wide and many. When My back is turned, 
evil Gods come to steal My children; tell 
them lies to win them; tell them they are 
My Sons come to save them! Hard is the 
fate of those that worship them; but 
they are Mine. I look around at times; 
I set the evil Gods flying. Be of strong 
heart, O My beloved! Many races will 
come and go on these lands. But the red 
man shall possess it; inhabit it far and near. 
Then shall come another evil God, to flay 
and destroy My sons, and daughters, to 
cover all the lands over with pure blood. 
Then will I come again and rout the evil 
God, raise up My sons and daughters, full 
of glory. From far over the water will I 
bring their kindred, who worship none 
born of woman; a wise speaking people. 
A people that war not; who kill not the 
weaker nations. I will come in the Tenon- 
achi, and the Hoochiquis; My hand shall 
reach around the earth in that day. I will 
chase away all Gods and Saviors born of 
woman. Only the Great Spirit shall all 
men worship. 

Go forth, My son; build wide My foun- 
dation; in this land will I found My earth- 
ly kingdom. 

Then upward rose the ship of heaven; 
and Eawahtah buckled on his traveling 



slippers; bade good-by to Too-shein; filled 
his pockets with the bread of Che-guh; 
kissed her hand good-by, and started. For 
many years traveled Eawahtah, over all 
the regions of Guatama; teaching, gather- 
ing together, swearing the people ever af- 
ter to be firm to the Great Spirit; made 
them swear solemn oaths that never more 
would they listen to any save the Cre- 
ator; made them swear they would never 
be caught by another cunning Savior, like 
I'tura, whose people delight in war. 

Into villages gathered Eawahtah the 
frightened tribes, and taught them writing 
and engraving; taught them the secret 
name of the Great Spirit, Egoquim; and 
explained to them the moon, how to keep 
the seventh day for worship. 

The Creator saw the great work of Ea- 
wahtah; saw the people gathered together 
in tens of thousands of places. Then spake 
the Creator to Eawahtah, saying: 

Forty mighty nations shalt thou found, 
O My son; and every nation shall be an in- 
dependent nation; but all the nations shall 
be united into a brotherhood of nations, as 
one mighty people, and that one shall be 
called O-pah-E-go-quim. Build thou a 
model for them, O Eawahtah. 

Then Eawahtah made the nations; unit- 
ed them into one mighty people, and called 
them the nations of Opahegoquim. And 
they planted the country over with corn- 
fields, and dwelt in peace. 



Cycle of Lika 



CHAPTER I. 

In the far-off etherean worlds spake the 
Voice of Jehovih, saying: Lika, My Son! 
Behold the red- star, Earth. She cometh 
thy way; she mergeth dark and soiled from 
the forests of ji'ay, in the swamps of Bonas- 
sah. She will cross thy etherean fields, Ta- 
kuspe, Opel, and Wedojain, dripping with 
the odor and dross of the ji'ay'an swamps. 
Go thou to her, and wash clean her soil 
and her atmospherean heavens. 

Lika said: I will go to the red 
star, Earth, O Father! I will deliver her 
into purity and faith. Thy chosen shall be 
delivered from bondage; Thy God made 
triumphant on Earth and in her heavens. 

Lika called to his high Council, in his 
etherean kingdom, Vetta'puissa, in the 
Plains of Peo'ya, off the Road of Ahtogo- 
nassas, at the high Arc of Bon, made light 
by the holy angels of tens of thousands of 
years; and he said: 

Behold the red star, Earth; the Voice of 
Jehovih came to me, saying: Go thou to 
her, O My Son, and wash clean her soil 
and her atmospherean heavens. And I said: 
I will go, O Father! I will deliver her 
into purity and faith. 

Five hundred million etherean hosts 
will I take with me. For five years and 
forty days will I and my hosts sojourn on 
the red star and in her heavens. Her God 
shall be restored and delivered in Jehovih's 
name. According to the rank of harvest 
of the gardens of Honyon, so shall my 
marshals choose and record my hosts. 

Then spake the historians of the ether- 
ean libraries of the Vorkman Road, where 
had traveled Earth for tens of thousands of 
years. And they detailed the affairs of 
Earth for many cycles past; made plain be- 
fore the Gods assembled all the history of 
Earth and her heavens. 

Then Lika sent swift messengers off to 
Earth and her heavens; in arrow-ships of 
fire they sped forth, twenty thousand, well 
skilled in coursing the etherean heavens 



and penetrating the atmospherean vortices 
of traveling stars; to obtain the details of 
her God and her false Gods; her Lords and 
false Lords; her hadas and her hells; to 
scan her libraries and hastily return to Vet- 
ta'puissa, to lay the matters before the 
high Council and Lika, the Nirvaniaft 
Chief. 

Lika sprang from the corporeal star 
Atos, which traverseth the roads, Yatas- 
ko-owen, of the south circuit of Thoese, 
the vortex of another far-off sun, and was 
raised to etherea in the cycle of Sai-kah, 
one hundred and twenty-five thousand 
years, by Meth-ya, Goddess of Ori-iyi, af- 
terward Chieftainess of Yeuna-gamaya. 
And Lika rose to be God of Avalassak four 
thousand years; God of Kemma, six thou- 
sand years; Inspector of Judas' etherean 
roads at the a'ji'an swamps of Hennassit, 
fifteen thousand years; Surveyor of Iwalt, 
two thousand years; Surveyor of the Wa- 
cha excursion, four thousand years; Re- 
corder of Hitte-somat, eight thousand 
years; Deliverer of Habian vortices, twen- 
ty-six thousand years; Measurer of densi- 
ties in Ablank, one thousand years; Re- 
corder of the Ratiotyivi, two thousand 
years; God of the Home Plains of Cteve- 
rezed, twelve thousand years; Chief of 
Mah-ha-dewin, twenty thousand years; and 
Chief of Vetta'puissa, twenty-five thousand 
years. 

Lika had for his high Council thirty 
thousand Chieftains and Chieftainesses, of 
grades of more than a hundred thousand 
years in the etherean worlds; five hundred 
thousand of the rank of Inspectors; seven 
million of the rank of Gods and Goddesses; 
and of the rank of Lords and Lordesses, 
more than half a thousand million. 

Of the Rapon hosts there were seven 
Chiefs and nine Chieftainesses, who were 
Lika's private companions. First, Reb- 
sad, Chief of Sotissav, forty thousand 
years; Sufristor of Sheleves, sixty thou- 
sand years; Marshal of Zele'axi, twenty 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



421 



thousand years; Master of Bassaion, sev- 
enty thousand years; and he passed twen- 
ty thousand year on the journey of Loo- 
soit-ta-vragenea, besides thousands of oth- 
er journeys of less duration. 

Next to Rebsad was Yanodi, ( Chieftain- 
ess of Ure, seventy thousand years; Chief- 
tainess of the Roads of Sallatamya, seven- 
ty thousand years; Marshaless of Petan- 
asa, forty thousand years; Goddess of the 
ji'ay'an forest of Loo-loo-woh-ga, sixty- 
five thousand years; besides Goddess of 
Mor, Goddess of Chichigennahsmmah, 
Goddess of El, and of Raumba, and of 
Zee. 

Next to Yanodi was Thazid, Goddess 
of Zoleth, Mistress of Yith-kad, Chief- 
tainess of Hagu, Chieftainess of De'baur, 
and of Hachull, and of the Roads of Olea- 
skivedho, besides Goddess of more than 
one hundred etherean worlds. 

Then came Thoso, Chief of Kassarah 
and Dassamatz, ninety thousand years; 
God of Saxax, seven thousand years; God 
of Chennesa, God of Hoxora, God of Fi- 
ben, God of Hotab, each six thousand 
years; surveyor of the Lymthian Roads, 
twelve thousand years; marker of meteors, 
two thousand years; Fireman of Thostus 
on the Ibien excursion, thirty thousand 
years. 

Next to Thoso came Miente, Chieftain- 
ess of Gawl and Sanabtis, in whose domin- 
ions the star T-lemos was uzated, when 
Gai-loo opened the Road of Enjxiustus 
for the Nizaigi vortices of Messak; Chief- 
tainess of Lam-Goo and Kud, Goddess of 
Itzi, Goddess of Ashem and of the Baxgor 
Wing, Goddess of the Duik Swamps, and 
Lordess of Sus and Havrij ; in all one hun- 
dred and seven thousand years. 

Chema-jius stood next; she was Chief- 
tainess of Hors-ad and Tu and Okadad, 
Goddess of Asthy, and Hid, and Sheau- 
gus, and Jagri, Surveyor of Arvat and the 
Vadhuan Roads; surveyor of Anchas; sur- 
veyor of the Han Mountains in the ether- 
ean Uuj of Drij-Lee; in all two hundred 
and sixty thousand years. 

Next stood Murdhana, Chieftainess of 
D'hup and Hen-Dhi, Chieftainess of Hap- 
pa and Hirish, surveyor of Sepher and 
Daka, Inspector of Anachu, and Zadon, 
and Edau, and Medtisha, and Roth; in all 
ninety thousand years. 



Oshor stood next: Chief of Out-si 
and of Yotek, and of Samoan, and of Yad- 
akha, maker of the Bridge of Weasitee, 
Marshal of the Honlaguoth expedition, 
and, besides these places, God of seven 
etherean worlds; in all one hundred and 
twelve thousand years. 

Next came Yihoha, Chief of Shung- 
how and Agon, Chief of Neo-sin, God of 
Izeaha, and Kaon, and Ahsow, and Una, 
and Yuk-Hoh, and Ahgoon. He was also 
the builder of the Raxon etherean arches; 
in all ninety thousand years. 

Hisin was next: Chief of the Kionas 
Belt, where Yagota, the Orian Chief, 
walled the Plains of Maga, the Nirvanian 
home of the delivered hells of Mina half a 
million years before. Hisin was here called 
Creator of Wit, because of establishing his 
Chieftaincy on the ruins of hell. He was 
also Chief of Mamsa and Jauap, God of 
Gah, and of Darah, the region of fountain 
flowers; in all ninety thousand years. 

Bowen was next: Chief of Apaha, for- 
merly the Farms of Lung-wan and Srid, 
Chief of Vadhua, and of the Valleys of 
Nasquam, where a million years before the 
Chief of Chaksa disrupted the Atmospher- 
ean Sakri, and liberated from its four thou- 
sand hells more than thirty thousand mill- 
ion angel slaves in chaos. Bowen had also 
served as God of Amaan, and Havat, and 
Shedo, and Pivan; and as measurer of Pra- 
cha and Xeri, and Asthus, surveyor of 
Ulam, and Sheyom, and Chozeh, and Zad- 
ark; in all eighty thousand years. 

Gwan Goo was next: She was Chief- 
tainess of Andol, the place of the one-time 
apex of the Karowgan vortex, where was 
formed the star Ogitas and sent on its 
course by Aclon-guin, Orian Chief of 
Shegoweasa. This vortex, when first 
formed by Aclon-guin, was three hundred 
thousand million miles long and was com- 
etary thirty thousand years in Aclon-guin's 
hands. Gwan Goo was also Chieftainess of 
Ahsa-thah and Waegon; Goddess of Anoa, 
and of Howgil, and of Zahaive; in all one 
hundred and thirty thousand years. 

Geehoogan was next: Chieftainess of 
Sumatri in the By-roads of Yotargis, Chief- 
tainess of the four etherean worlds, Yoni, 
Ogh, Theum and Wachwakags; surveyor 
of Unshin, Zarihea and Keanteri; inspec- 
tress of Saguiz, and Hagimal, and Hafha, 



422 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



and Borax, and Rab, and Shor-loo; in all 
eighty thousand years. 

Next stood Bachne-isij, Chief of Ya- 
halom, where the Gein Maker, Tarmoth, 
cleared the Forests of the a'ji'an Haloth, 
in making a roadway for Havalad's group 
of Shemasian corporeal stars, in which la- 
bor he engaged ninety thousand million 
Nirvanians for four thousand years, and 
the distance of the road was more than 
one hundred thousand million miles. Bach- 
ne-isij was Chief of Agwan, and Shoe-nas- 
tus, and Hador, and Ad; God of Vach, 
and of Kuja, and Rai, and Kathab, and 
Cynab, and Buhd, and Abbir; measurer of 
the mountains of the etherean worlds, Vij- 
hath, and Hakan, and Dis; measurer of the 
arches in the etherean world Niksh; con- 
structor of the Plains in the Nirvanian 
world Chom; in all .one hundred and thir- 
ty thousand years. 

Rehemg was next: Chieftainess of Ot- 
askaka, commonly called World of Shin- 
ing Waters, a great visiting place in Nir- 
vana; she was Goddess of Theasapalas and 
Timax, weigher of Sultzhowtcih in the 
Ofel Plains; in all one hundred thousand 
years. 

Then stood Antosiv, Goddess of Munn, 
renowned because she was of two hundred 
and sixty thousand years, and had declin- 
ed exaltation above the rank of Goddess. 

CHAPTER II. 

Far and wide, spread the words of Li- 
ka, over the Plains of Poeya, where 
traveled Earth and her heavens. Far off, 
toward the northern group of twinkling 
stars, gazed the etherean millions; rose the 
voice of millions: Where is the red star? 
Where lieth Earth and her troubled hea- 
vens? Is not this the young star, a satel- 
lite that traveleth with the hidan sun? 
What is the angle and course of this little, 
traveling world, that our eyes may feast 
on the road where soon our Chief will send 
Jehovih's redeeming ships? 

Then they pointed, surmising, by the 
red-like color and tedious motion, which 
was Earth, one of the small gems that Je- 
hovih had placed in the measureless firma- 
ment. And they gazed thereon, speaking 
with souls of delight: Great art Thou, O 



Jehovih, to build so wide. To stud the 
etherean woi^ds with gems like these; to 
provide a place for the souls of men to 
germinate. Surely her people, the sons 
and daughters of the red star, must behold 
etherea; must realize the difference betwixt 
a short corporeal life and this endless par- 
adise. Can it be that they have, in their 
small heavens, unscrupulous false Lords 
and false Gods who set themselves up to 
be worshipped as creators, whom mortals 
name with bated breath? And have they, 
too, a host of Saviors, who profess to have 
the key to all the roads that lead into this 
great expanse, the etherean worlds? Some 
excuse mortals have who are brought forth 
to life on the central suns, to be stubborn 
in their egotism of their Lords and Saviors 
and Gods; but on one so small like Earth, 
how can it be? 

Then came back Lika's swift messen- 
gers in their arrow-ships; messengers at- 
tained to be very Gods in wisdom, and in 
swiftness. And they quickly told the tale, 
about their visit to the red star and her 
heavens; told how the God of Earth, Son 
of Jehovih, had struggled on, but had been 
outmatched by all odds by self-Gods and 
self-Lords, who had plunged thousands of 
millions of hapless souls into torturing 
hells. And this news Lika spread abroad 
in his etherean dominions, which only need- 
ed to be told once, for every sympathetic 
soul by his shocked appearance told it to 
others, which spread instantly to thousands 
of millions of high-raised ethereans. And 
when Lika said: Five hundred million an- 
gels shall go with me to the troubled 
Earth and her heavens; in short time the 
volunteers were ready to be enrolled on the 
list. 

Then Lika inquired more fully of the 
swift messengers, and they answered him, 
saying: Earth hath passed her corporeal 
maturity, and mortals have set up a prya- 
mid to mark the time thereof. The days 
of the highest, greatest audacity of the 
self-Gods are past, and are memorized by 
the pyramid also; for in that self-same 
time, they taught mortals to worship the 
God as the Lord and the Savior, instead of 
the Great Spirit, Jehovih. But darkness 
is upon the self-Gods, and they are bound 
in hells; and spirits are also bound in hells. 
Behold, this is the first dawn of dan on 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



423 



Earth since she passed the limit of her 
greatest corporeality. 

CHAPTER III. 

Lika said to his chief marshal: Enroll 
thou my hosts, five hundred million, and 
appoint unto them captains and generals, 
and grade them and apportion them. Be- 
side these give me one million singers, 
one million trumpeters, one million attend- 
ants, one million heralds, one million mes- 
sengers and one million recorders and wait- 
ers. 

Lika called his chief builder and said 
unto him: Build me a fire-ship, an aira- 
vagna, with capacity for a thousand mill- 
ion; and provide thou the ship with offi- 
cers and workmen sufficient. Consult thou 
with my mathematicians as to the distance 
to the red star, and as to the densities 
through which the ship shall pass, and as 
to the power required, and the time of 
the journey, and provide thou all things 
sufficient therefor. 

Then Lika spake to the high Council, 
saying: For the time of my absence my 
vice-Chief, Heih-Woo, shall hold my place. 
Touching matters whereof ye desire my 
voice before I go, speak ye! 

Atunzi said: Behold, O Lika, the star, 
Yatis, headeth towards the a'ji'an Forests 
of Actawa, and she hath not passed the 
esparan age! Lika said: To clear the 
forest Actawa I appoint Eashivi, Goddess, 
with three thousand million laborers. 
Eashivi, how sayest thou? Eashivi said: 
Thanks to Jehovih and to thee, O Lika. 
I will at once choose my laborers and pro- 
ceed to make the road. 

Wan Tu'y said: Erst thy return, O 
Lika, the Hapsa-ogan vortex will cross the 
south Fields of Vetta'puissa. She hath 
twenty thousand million souls in grades of 
sixty and seventy. Lika said: To her as- 
sistance for three years I appoint Tici-king, 
God, with fifty million for his hosts. How 
sayest thou, Tici-king? Tici-king said: 
By the love of Jehovih, I rejoice in this 
labor. In sufficient time will I prepare my 
hosts and accomplish what thou hast given 
into my keeping. 

Wothalowsit said: In four years the 
hosts of E'win will return from the double 
stars, Eleb and Wis, with their harvest of 
forty thousand million angels. How shall 



they be apportioned? Lika said: To 
Bonassah, six thousand million; to Opel, 
two thousand million; to Wedojain, five 
thousand million; to Feuben Roads, seven 
thousand million; to Zekel, four thousand 
million; to Huron, three thousand million; 
to Poe-ga, six thousand million; to Yulit, 
one thousand million, and to Zulava, four 
thousand million; and I appoint Misata, 
Goddess, to provide the places in these 
several heavens for them, and to have 
charge of their selection and allotment. 
And I give to her five million angels for 
her laboring hosts. How sayest thou, 
Misata? Misata said: It is Jehovih's gift; 
I am rejoiced. I will prepare myself and 
my hosts. 

Ching Huen said: Behold the star- 
world, Esatas, in her se'muan age will 
cross the Roads of Veh-yuis in three years 
hence! Lika answered Ching Huen, say- 
ing: To cross these roads of light in her 
se'muan age would blight her power to 
bring forth animal life sufficient unto her 
wide continents. The trail must be filled 
with se'muan forests to preserve her ges- 
tative season. To this labor I appoint 
Ieolakak, God of Esatas' se'muan forests 
in the Roads of Veh-yuis, four thousand 
years. And I allot to Ieolakak six thou- 
sand million laborers. How sayest thou, 
Ieolakak? He answered: This is a great 
labor; by the wisdom and power of Jehovih, 
I will accomplish it. 

Veaga-indras said: In two years the 
fleets of Leogastrivins will return from 
their voyage of four thousand years, bring- 
ing two thousand million guests from the 
Iniggihuas regions. Who shall provide 
for their reception? Lika said: Yeanops- 
tan, with ten million hosts. How sayest 
thou? Yeanopstan said: A most wel- 
come labor, O Lika. 

Hiss-Joso said: The Arches of Ras- 
sittissa, the etherean world of Yungtsze's 
Plains, are to be cast in four years. Lika 
said: To Suttuz six million arches, and to 
Iviji four million arches, and to each of 
them one hundred million laborers. How 
say ye? Then spake Suttuz and Iviji say- 
ing: By the help of Jehovih the labor will 
be accomplished. 

Sachcha said: The star- world, Neto, will 
in two years hence pass through the 



424 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



south Fields of Takuspe. Lika said: 
This will be great labor, and I appoint 
Urassus, with Salas, to accomplish it. And 
I give to them three years, with four thou- 
sand million laborers. How say ye? Then 
answered Urassus and Salas saying: With 
fear and trembling we rejoice at this great 
work. By Jehovih's wisdom and power, 
we shall accomplish it. 

After this manner Lika made more 
than a thousand appointments to be ac- 
complished ere he returned from Earth 
and her heavens; but ordinary matters he 
left with his vice-Chief, Heih-Woo, and to 
the high Council, and select ten million. 

Jehovih had said: Even as I provided 
a little labor unto mortals to develop the 
talents I created withal, so in like manner 
provided I greater labor unto the high- 
risen inhabitants in My etherean worlds. 
For which reason let My children learn 
the secret of harmonious and united labor 
with one another. I gave labor to man 
not as a hardship, but as a means of great 
rejoicing. And the talents I gave in cor- 
por, I gave not to die in corpor, but to 
continue on forever. As I gave talent for 
corporeal mathematics, and talent for cor- 
poreal buildings, even a talent for all 
things on corporeal worlds; even so I pro- 
vided I in My etherean worlds for the 
same talents, but spiritually. Wherein 
man on the corporeal world, judging the 
adaptability of talent to corporeal things, 
may comprehend the nature of the labors 
I provided in My exalted heavens for the 
same talents. Neither let any man fear 
that his talents may become too exalted 
for the work I have provided; for until 
he hath created a firmament, and created 
suns and stars to fill it, he hath not half 
fulfilled his destiny. 

CHAPTER IV. 

Jehovih spake in the light of the throne 
of Kairksak, in Vetta'puissa, saying: Lika, 
My Son! This is My road and My jour- 
ney. With thee and thy hosts My Voice 
shall travel with power; on Earth will I 
lay my foundation, in spirit and word. Thy 
companion Chiefs and Chieftainesses shall 
go with thee; they shall help deliver the 
inhabitants of Earth and her heavens. My 
enemies have marked their labors in tem- 



ples and pyramids. Because their hearts 
rose not up to Me they descended into 
stone, the most dead of all things. They 
have carried the inhabitants of Earth down 
to darkness and death. Suffer their monu- 
ments to stand as testimonies of them that 
hated Me, that denied Me, that believed 
not in Me, the All Person. 

My building shall be the most subtle of 
all things, the spirit of Mine own body. 
Verily shall it be a monument within the 
souls of My chosen. Nor will it go away 
again in darkness, but it shall encompass 
the whole earth. For thou shalt find My 
chosen a scattered people, persecuted and 
enslaved, the most despised of all the races 
of men. But I will show My power with 
them; I will raise them up; the things I 
do through them, and the words I speak 
through them, shall become mighty. Their 
words shall be treasured forever; and none 
can match them in wisdom of speech, or in 
the craft of good works. 

But the learned men of all other peo- 
ples shall be forgotten; their wisdom shall 
be like the wind that bloweth away. The 
self-Gods and self-Lords that led them 
astray shall be as a serpent that biteth it- 
self unto death. Yea, as long as their 
pyramids and temples stand, their own 
falsehoods shall stare them in the face. 
They have bound themselves in their own 
bulwarks; they shall yet be My laborers, 
thousands of years, to undo the evil they 
sowed on Earth. Nor shall they look down 
from heaven and behold with joy their 
temples and pyramids; but as one behold- 
eth a coal of fire burning in the flesh, so 
shall their edifices cry out unto them for- 
ever: Thou False One! And it shall 
be to them a burning fire that will not die 
out. And their great learning, even of the 
stars a<id the sun and moon, and of all 
the things of Earth, and in the waters, shall 
pass away and be remembered not amongst 
men. Yea, the names of their men of 
great learning shall go down, with none 
to remember them on Earth. And in time, 
long after, the nations of peoples will for- 
get them and their wisdom, and even pity 
them, and say of them: What a foolish 
people! 

But My chosen, who are their slaves, 
and are as nothing in the world, shall 
speak, and their words shall not be forgot- 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



425 



ten; shall write, and their books will be a 
new foundation in the world. Because My 
hand will be upon them, My wisdom shall 
come forth out of their mouths. And this 
shall be testimony in the ages to come, 
as to what manner of knowledge endureth 
forever. For as the buildings of Earth re- 
main on Earth, and the spirits of them 
that incline to Earth rise not up, so have I 
bound corpor in corpor; but as I planted 
the quickened spirit of man in man for 
spiritual knowledge, so shall spiritual 
knowledge look upward for an everlasting 
resurrection. 

Lika asked: O Thou All Highest, Je- 
hovih, what are the preparations of Thy 
Gods? Wherein shall my hand be strong 
on Earth? Jehovih answered, saying: For 
six generations past hath My God prepared 
unto thee and thy hosts. My Voice was 
with My God, and I said unto him: My 
Son, behold, the time cometh in six gener- 
ations, when I will bring Earth into an- 
other dawn of dan. And in that day 
will I bring My Son, Lika, from 
My etherean worlds; and he shall 
come with a mighty host of ethereans with 
great power. Go thou, My Son, down to 
Earth, and with thy loo'is raise up an heir 
unto thy voice. In the three great divis- 
ions of Earth provide thou three servants 
to do My will. 

So, My Son, God of Craoshivi, hath 
raised up unto thee, O Lika, three men, 
Capilya, and Chine, and Moses, the fruit 
of the sixth generation in the lands of 
their fathers; and they are of the Faithists 
in Me, holy men and wise. To these shalt 
thou send the Gods of their forefathers, 
even they who were beaten away by the 
Gods of evil. And Capilya shall deliver 
the Faithists of Vind'yu, and Chine shall 
deliver the Faithists of Jaffeth, and Moses 
shall deliver the Faithists of Egupt. And 
this, also, shalt thou put upon Moses and 
his people: He shall lead his people west- 
ward, until they circumscribe the Earth. 
Three thousand four hundred years shalt 
thou allot to them to complete the jour- 
ney. And wherever they go, they shall 
establish My name, Jehovih; they shall 
lead all people away from all Gods, to be- 
lieve in the Great Spirit, Who I am. 



And when they have carried My name 
to the west coast of Guatama, and estab- 
ished Me, behold, I will bring Earth into 
kosmon; and My angels shall descend upon 
the earth in every quarter with great pow- 
er. And it shall come to pass that the 
Faithists of the children of Moses shall 
find the Faithists of the children of Chine 
and the Faithists of the children of Capilya. 
And all these people shall cry out in that 
day: No God, no Lord, no Savior! For 
My hand will be upon them, and their 
words shall be My words. But they will 
proclaim Me, the Great Spirit, the Ever 
Present, Jehovih. And they shall become 
the power of the world; and shall establish 
peace and put away war, leading all peo- 
ples in the way of peace, love and right- 
eousness. 

CHAPTER V. 

Vetta'puissa, in Lika's etherean regions, 
made glorious by Jehovih's light, and by 
His purified Sons and Daughters, whose 
heavenly mansions matched unto their 
great perfection, was now quickened with 
great joy. The trained hosts of Jehovih's 
Son, Lika, knowing he was to take recrea- 
tion by a journey to the red star, Earth, to 
deliver her unto holiness and love, pro- 
vided music and heralds and trumpeters, 
to claim their reverence and rejoicing. 

The fire-ship, the airavagna, now adorn- 
ed in splendor, was brought into its place, 
and the vast hosts for the journey entered 
into it. A roadway was preserved for Lika 
and his companion Chiefs and Chieftain- 
esses. First to lead, of the Rapon hosts, 
were the Chieftainesses, Yanodi and Tha- 
zid, and they walked arm in arm. Next 
after them came Lika, alone. Next came 
Rebsad and Thoso, arm in arm. Next 
came Miente and Hors-ad, arm in arm. 
Then came Chama-jius and Murdhana, 
arm in arm. Then Oshor and Yihoha, arm 
in arm. Then Gwan Goo and Geehoogan, 
and after them Rehemb and Antosiv. Loud 
swelled the music as the Chiefs marched 
forth; more than a thousand million in con- 
certed song to Jehovih; and echoed by the 
far-off trumpeters. And when the Chiefs 
entered the ship, followed by the ship's 
laborers and firemen, all was motionless 
till the music ceased. 



426 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



Lika walked upon the High Arch, and 
stretching up his hands to Jehovih, said: I 
go forth in Thy name and love, wisdom 
and power, O Jehovih! 

Arise, O palace of the firmament; by 
the power of Jehovih that dwelleth in me, 
upward! onward! arise! 

And now the laborers and firemen stood 
to their places. A moment more, and the 
airavagna rose from its foundation, steered 
toward the red star, and moved forth over 
the Fields of Vetta'puissa. A hundred 
thousand banners and flags floated and 
waved from every side on the great ship of 
heaven, and was answered by more than 
ten hundred thousand more in the hands 
of the hosts below. The es'enaurs of the 
ship struck up a quickened march, joined 
by the millions beneath, whilst the great 
multitudes waved their hands and shouted 
in prolonged applause. Thus went forth 
Lika, Son of Jehovih, to the red star. 
Earth. 

CHAPTER VI. 

As Lika in his ship sped on, coursing 
the Fields of Sonasat, and Hatar, and 
Yaax, in the etherean world, Chen-a- 
goetha, rich in light in these regions, on 
the Yong-We Road, and now traversed by 
hundreds of vessels coursing hither and 
yon, Jehovih's light descended on the 
High Arch, in the midst of the Rapons; 
and the Voice of Jehovih spake out of the 
light, saying: 

As I taught corporeans to build ships 
to traverse corporeal seas, so have I taught 
ethereans to build vessels to course My 
etherean seas. As I bound the corporean 
that he could not rise up in the air above 
corpor, save by a vessel, so created I My 
heavens for the spirits of men, that by 
vessels they might course My firmament. 
For the little knowledge I gave to corpor- 
eans I made as a type of knowledge which 
is everlasting. And this is the bondage I 
created unto all places on Earth and in her 
heavens, making all men understand the 
power of association. I created wide seas 
on the corporeal Earth, that man should 
perceive that one man alone could not 
cross over; nor in a small boat, with any 
profit. Neither created I My heavens 
in the firmament that one angel could 
go alone on long journeys, becom- 



ing isolated and powerless. But I provid- 
ed them that they could not escape asso- 
ciation; yea, I created the firmament that 
they must congregate together and go. 
And they fill My seas in heaven and Earth 
with their great ships; with wants that 
could not be satisfied in one place created 
I man. For I drive him forth on strange 
errands and on missions of profit and love; 
for I will store him with a knowledge of 
My works. 

CHAPTER VII. 

Onward sped Lika in his airavagna, 
with his eight hundred million; through 
the sea of Enea-Wassa, the etherean realm 
of Haog-sa-uben; shining like a meteor in 
its flight, the ship of fire of eight hundred 
million. On every side, the Jehovihian 
worshippers' vessels, tens of thousands, 
coursing as many ways, some fast, on mis- 
sions of quickened labor; some slow, as 
traveling school-ships, exploring the great 
expanse and glorious richness of Jehovih's 
provided worlds, always ready for the 
new born; each and all the ships as stud- 
ded gems in the etherean sea, moving 
brilliantly into kaleidoscopic views, ever 
changing the boundless scene with sur- 
passing wonders. And all of these, by 
signs and signals, the story of their place 
and mission revealing to the high-raised 
etherean souls, ships and men, as quick- 
ened living books of fire, radiant with the 
Father's light and history of worlds. 

On Lika's ship, as on all the others, 
every soul, hundreds of millions, enraptured, 
stood in awe and admiration of the ever- 
changing scenes; some in silence, absorb- 
ed in thought; some posing with upraised 
hands; some ejaculating gleefully; and 
some in high reverence to Jehovih, utter- 
ing everlasting praise; every soul its full 
bent, being the full ripe fruit of the diversi- 
fied talents as they first shone forth in cor- 
poreal life. 

Onward sped Lika's airavagna now in 
the Roads of Nopita, now in the a'ji'an 
Forest of Quion, most rich in adamantine 
substances, arches, stalactites and stalag- 
mites, and in forming and dissolving 
scenes, a forest, a very background in the 
etherean worlds for the over-brilliant crys- 
tal regions of light. And here, too, the 
tens of thousands of ships of Jehovih's 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



427 



chosen; and on either side the great road- 
way lay the Fields of Anutiv, inhabited by 
countless millions of etherean kingdoms. 
Along the road for hundreds of thousands 
of miles, stretched up the hands of millions 
and millions of souls, waving banners and 
flags to their favored ships, going to some 
native star, from which Jehovih brought 
them forth. 

Then changed the course of Lika's air- 
avagna, by his commands sent through the 
comet Yo-to-gactra, a new condensing 
world, already with a head of fire four 
thousand miles broad; a very ball of melted 
corpor, whirling like the spindle of a fill- 
ing spool, winding unto itself the wide ex- 
tending nebulae. Here were coursing along, 
hundreds of thousands of school-ships, 
with students and visitors to view the 
scenes, most grand in rolling on, now 
round, now broken, now outstretched, this 
ball of liquid fire, whirling in the vortex, 
thirty million miles long. To balance 
against which vortex many of the ships 
tossed and rolled, dangerously, had they 
not been in skilled hands; and, as they 
were, causing millions of the students on 
many a ship to fear and tremble, perceiving 
how helpless they were compared to the 
Gods who had them in charge. 

Not long did Lika loiter to view the 
scenes, or to indulge his eight hundred 
million, but stood his course again for the 
red star, Earth; coursing the Faussette 
Mountains, where the God, Vrilla-Gabon, 
built the Echosinit kingdom, whose capi- 
tal was Exastras, the place where the Niu- 
an Gods assembled to witness the first 
starting forth of Earth. Here, halting a 
while, and adown went Lika's recorders, to 
gather from the Exastras libraries Earth's 
early history and the grade of her creation; 
a copy of which obtained, the recorders 
hastily returned, when onward again sped 
the airavagna, now making course across 
the Plains of Zed, in the midst of which 
lay the great sea Oblowochisi, four million 
miles across, and this also studded over 
with thousands of etherean ships. And 
now across to Rikkas, the place of the 
Goddess, Enenfachtus, with her seven 
thousand million etherean souls, whereup- 
on Lika and his hosts cast down millions 
of wreaths and tokens, and the while, the 
music of the two spheres mingled together 



in Jehovih's praise. Here, across, the dis- 
ance was three million miles. 

Now, all the while before, the red star 
stood upward, inclining upward, 'but here 
in horizontal line began to stand, gleaming 
in more effulgent flame. And in the 
course, where Lika's airavagna should go, 
the Goddess, Enenfachtus, had previously 
upraised a thousand pillars of fire to honor 
him and his company; which great respect 
Lika and his hosts answered with holy 
salutations. 

After this, came the ji'ay'an Forests of 
Hogobed, three million miles across. 
Here stood the Province of Arathactean, 
where dwelt the God, Yew-Sin, with thirty 
thousand million newly-raised Brides and 
Bridegrooms from the star Kagados. 
Over these regions Lika sped swiftly, and 
then to the open sea, Amatapan, on the 
Vashuan Roads. 

Then a sail of two million miles, in the 
uninhabited regions of Samma, when he 
reached Chinvat. And, halting not, but 
now coursing on a downward plane, made 
straight toward the swift-rolling Earth, 
whose speed was three-quarters of a mill- 
ion miles a day. Through the high-float- 
ing plateaux of atmospherea came Lika 
with his fire-ship, large as a continent. 

CHAPTER VIII. 

On the uninhabited, plateau, Theovrah- 
kistan, rich, and broad as Earth, high 
above the lands of Jaffeth, and Vind'yti, 
and Arabin'ya, alighted Lika in his aira- 
vagna, with his eight hundred million. 
Here he made fast his fire-ship, and forth 
came his hosts to found a heavenly king- 
dom. Lika said: 

I hear Thy voice, O Jehovih; Thy 
hand is upon me; in Thy Wisdom and 
Power will I build the foundations of Thy 
kingdom in these heavens. 

Jehovih said: Call forth thy Rapon 
hosts, thy companion Chiefs; build thy 
throne broad for them and thee. And 
shape thou the area of the capital and 
stand thy high Council, the chosen million, 
to the four quarters of the heavens of 
Earth. 

The legions then built a heavenly place 
unto Jehovih, and called it Yogannaqac- 
tra, home of Lika and his eight hundred 
million. 



428 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



Jehovih spake out of the light which 
Lika built, saying: Lika, My Son, thou 
shalt build all things new on Earth and in 
the heavens of Earth, even as if nothing 
had ever been. Send thou thy messengers 
in an otevan to the broken-down region of 
My beloved, God of Craoshivi, and bring 
him and his thousand attendants unto thy 
place. 

Thereupon an otevan was sent off, well 
officered, and in due time it returned, 
bringing God to Yogannaqactra, where he 
was received with great joy, and greeted 
in Jehovih's name. 

Lika said: Speak thou, O God, for I am 
come to deliver these heavens into Jeho- 
vih's dominion. What are the light and 
darkness of the heavens and the earth that 
have been intrusted to thy keeping, in Je- 
hovih's name? 

God said: Alas, how can I speak? Be- 
hold, my kingdoms are scattered and gone; 
I have nowhere pride in anything I have 
done in heaven and earth. An exceeding 
great darkness came upon my people, for 
a thousand and five hundred years! Thy 
servants have been overpowered, helpless 
and tossed as chaff before the wind. 

Lika said: How many Gods? How 
many dans of darkness? Whither are gone 
my true Gods? 

God said: Four Gods have risen to ethe- 
rea with their hosts, heart-broken. Four 
dans have come and gone; so weak and 
small, like a breath of air, for the darkness 
brushed them away. In Savak-haben, in 
etherea, sojourn thy Gods. 

Jehovih's light fell upon the throne, and 
His Voice came out of the light, saying: 
Send thou, O My Son, Lika, to Savak- 
haben, four arrow-ships, with a hundred 
thousand attendants for My true Gods, 
and bring them to Yogonnaqactra. 

Lika then sent four arrow-ships with 
his swift messengers and a hundred thou- 
sand attendants, to bring back the four 
disconcerted Gods. 

God said: Thousands of millions of 
angels of darkness flood the hadan regions; 
and as many grovel about on the low earth. 
De'yus, the false Lord God, is cast into 
hell, a hell so wide that none can approach 
his place of torment. Te-in, the false God, 
the Joss, is also cast into hell; and so is 
Sudga, the false Dyaus; and so are all the 



false Gods that encompassed the earth 
around; their kingdoms are in anarchy. 
The names Lord, and God, and Dyaus, 
and De'yus, and Zeus, and Joss, and Ho- 
Joss, and many others, have become wor- 
shipful on Earth! Not only labored the 
traitors to put away the Great Spirit, but 
to establish themselves as men-Gods capa- 
ble of creating; yea, the veritable Creator 
of heaven and Earth! 

Lika said: Hear thou, then, the Voice 
of Jehovih! Because they have put Me 
aside and assumed to be Creators under the 
name God, and De'yus, I will magnify the 
Person of God and De'yus in men's under- 
standing. Nor from this time forth on the 
earth, for three thousand years, shall man 
be confined to the one name, Jehovih, or 
Eolin, or Eloih, but worship God, or Lord, 
or De'yus, or Zeus, or Dyaus, or Joss, or 
Ho-Joss. For since these men have cast 
themselves into hells, behold, the spirits 
of the risen shall not find them nor their 
kingdoms. And thou shalt magnify unto 
mortals that all names worshipful belong 
to the Ever Present, whose Person is the 
spirit and substance of all things. And 
if they inquire of thee: Who is Dyaus? or, 
Who is God? or, Who is Joss? thou shalt 
say: Hath He not said: Behold, I am the 
Creator of heaven and Earth! and I say 
unto you, He is the Ever Present, the All 
Highest Ideal. 

But this bondage shall come upon 
them: To reap the harvest they have sown. 
Because one hath said: Build thou a pyra- 
mid, and thy God will come and abide 
therein, even as a man dwelleth in a house; 
he shall be bound while the pryamid stand- 
eth. And another hath said: Behold, thy 
God is in the image of a man, and he sit- 
teth on a throne in heaven; he shall be 
bound while this belief surviveth on Earth. 

Because they have sown a falsehood on 
Earth, the harvest is theirs. And until 
they have reaped their whole harvest they 
shall not rise into My etherean worlds. 

CHAPTER IX. 

When the four Gods, Sons of Jehovih, 
who had been discomfited in the lower hea- 
vens by De'yus and his fellow false Gods, 
came, the light of Jehovih came again on 
Lika's throne. Jehovih said: 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



429 



I permit not evil to triumph over good 
but for short seasons; and, soon or late, 
My righteous Sons and Daughters rise up 
and rejoice in their trials which I allowed 
to come upon them. Let not men or an- 
gels say, because this or that happeneth: 
Lo, Jehovih sleepeth at his post! or: Lo,Je- 
hovih is the author of evil, or is impotent 
to avert it. My times are not as the times 
of men or angels; nor am I within the judg- 
ment of men as to what is evil or good. 
When the wealth of the rich man is stolen, 
do not mortals say: Poor man, Jehovih 
hath afflicted him! For they judge Me 
by what they consider afflictions. But 
they behold not that I look to the soul of 
man as to what is good for him. And when 
the assassin hath struck the king unto 
death, behold, they say: How hath a good 
Creator done this? For they consider not 
*the nation nor the problem of anything 
but for the day thereof; nor consider they 
what I do for the souls of many nations, 
by one small act. 

For all people in heaven and earth are 
Mine own; they are as trees in My orchard, 
and I prune them not for the life of the 
branches, but for benefit of the whole or- 
chard, and for the harvest that cometh af- 
ter. I created life, and I take away life; in 
Mine own way do I with Mine own. I 
send night to follow the day; clouds to in- 
terchange with the sunshine. And even so 
do I give times of dan to My atmospherean 
heavens, to be followed by seasons of dark- 
ness. By these changes do mortals and 
angels and Gods learn to battle with and 
overcome the elements of My worlds. 

The Gods said: We weep before Thee, 
O Jehovih. Long and hard we labored our 
allotted seasons; we were helpless wit- 
nesses to the great darkness that came 
upon the inhabitants of heaven and earth. 
Lika said: To you five Gods, who have 
toiled in the darkness of Earth and her 
heavens, I restore your old time names for 
the season of dawn, after which I will raise 
you all up, with your kingdoms restored to 
the full, and ye shall be heirs in my Nir- 
vanian heavens, in peace and rest. 

CHAPTER X. 

The five Gods' names were Ane, Jek, 
Lay, Oal and Yith. Lika said unto them: 
Ye have been heretofore crowned as Gods; 



come ye to the foot of Jehovih's throne, 
for I will crown you anew. 

When they came to the place designat- 
ed, Lika continued: Take my crown upon 
thy head, and speak thou in Jehovih's name 
in that labor which I put upon thee. 

And thereupon Lika crowned them 
with a band on the head, inscribed, Inane, 
Injek, Inlay, Inoal and Inyith, Panic 
names designating their rank and the age 
of the Earth in which these things came 
to pass. 

Lika said: To each and every one I 
give of my etherean hosts ten million labor- 
ers for the period of dawn. And these are 
the labors I allot unto you: To Inane, to 
go down to the earth, to the land of Vind'- 
yu, and be inspirer unto my mortal son, 
Capilya, and his followers. To Inlay, 
to go down to the earth, to the land of 
Jaffeth, and be inspirer to my son, Chine, 
and his followers. To Inoal, to go down 
to the earth to the land of Egupt, and be 
inspirer to my son, Moses, and his follow- 
ers. And ye three shall restore the Faith- 
ists in these great divisions of the earth 
unto liberty and safety. And thou, Inoal, 
shalt deliver Moses and the Faithists out 
of Egupt, and shape their course west- 
ward; for they shall circumscribe the earth, 
and complete it by the time of kosmon. 

To Injek, to go down to the earth, to 
Par'si'e and Heleste, and provide those 
peoples to liberate the slaves who are 
Faithists, whom thou shalt inspire to mi- 
grate to Moses and his people. To Inyith, 
to go down to the earth, to Jaffeth and 
Vind'yu and Arabin'ya, to inspire the scat- 
tered Faithists in those lands to come to- 
gether, to the great lights, Capilya and 
Chine and Moses. 

And ye shall take with you of my hosts, 
whom I brought from etherea, and labor 
ye together as one man. And when dawn 
hath ended, ye shall repair hither, and be 
raised up into my Nirvanian kingdoms. 
Nevertheless, ye shall not leave Jehovih's 
chosen alone, but provide angel successors 
unto them. And herein I give you a new 
law unto all my angel hosts who shall here- 
after dwell with the Faithists on the earth, 
which is, that successors shall always be 
provided by the retiring hosts ere they 
have departed; for the Faithists shall not 



430 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



more be left alone for a long season. The 
five Gods then said: In Thy name and 
wisdom and power, O Jehovih, we go 
forth in joy to fulfill Thy commandments. 
Because we lost Earth Thou hast given it 
into our hands to redeem it and glorify 
Thee!' 

And thereupon Lika proclaimed a day 
of recreation, so the hosts could be select- 
ed, the fifty million, to which labor the 
marshals fell to, helping the chosen. Dur- 
ing the creation, the atmosphereans ex- 
plained to the ethereans how laid the lands 
of the earth and the heavens thereunto be- 
longing. And then, after a season of pray- 
er and singing, and a season of dancing, 
the recreation was brought to a close. 

After labor was resumed, the chosen 
five, with their hosts, saluted before the 
throne of Jehovih, and then withdrew and 
went to vessels which had been previously 
prepared for them, and embarked, and de- 
parted for the earth. 

Jehovih spake to Lika, saying: Appoint 
thou other servants unto Me for the other 
great divisions of the earth, and for the 
islands in the oceans of the earth; and give 
unto them each ten million of My servants 
which thou broughtest from Nirvana. And 
they shall go down amongst mortals, and 
by inspiration and otherwise collect to- 
gether in groups the scattered Faithists 
who worship Me. And thy servants shall 
also provide successors to come after them, 
to abide with mortals, making the seasons 
of watch short unto them that they shall 
not be weary thereof. 

Then Lika appointed T'chow, N'yalc, 
Gitchee, Guelf, Ali and Siwah, and allot- 
ted them to different divisions of the earth, 
and he gave them each ten million of the 
hosts were brought from the Orian worlds. 
And these were selected after the same 
manner as the previous ones; and they also 
saluted and departed for the earth. 

Again Jehovih spake in the light of the 
throne, saying: Because many are risen in 
wisdom and truth, I will have Theovrah- 
kistan for My holy place unto them; and it 
shall be the region for My Brides and 
Bridegrooms at the resurrection of dawn. 
But at the end thereof it shall be divided 
and subdivided that none may find the 
place of My standing. For it hath come 
to pass, that man on the earth learning the 



name of one fo My heavens glorifieth it, 
and aspireth to rise to it, but to rise 
to no other heaven. Because My true 
Gods taught man of Hored in the early 
days, man desired Hored. Whereupon 
Mine enemies, the false Gods, each one 
cried out: Behold, my heavenly place is 
Hored! I am the All Heavenly ruler! 
Come hither to me! For, by this means, 
the name I gave in truth, was usurped 
and made as a snare to enslave My earth- 
born. 

And I will not more give to mortals a 
name of any of My heavenly places; nor 
shall they be taught of any heavens save 
the higher and the lower heavens, which 
shall designate My etherean and My at- 
mospherean heavens. And by these terms 
shall man on the earth be fortified against 
the stratagems of false heavenly rulers. 
And man shall perceive that when angels- 
or men or Gods or Saviors say: Come ye 
unto me, and I will give you of my heaven- 
ly kingdom! that they are false, and but 
tyrants to enslave My people. But if they 
say: Go ye, serve the Great Spirit, and not 
me, for I am only a man as thou art! then 
shall it be known that they are of My Nir- 
vanian hosts. And if they say: Come ye 
to this heaven or that heaven, for with me 
only is delight, it shall be testimony against 
them. But if they say: Verily, Jehovih is 
with thee; cultivate thyself within Him, 
and thou shalt find delight in all worlds, 
then shall it be testimony they are from 
My emancipated heavens. 

Lika said: Seventy new kingdoms 
shall ye found in the lowest heaven, where 
ye shall begin again with schools and col- 
leges and factories, teaching the spirits of 
the dead the requirements for resurrection. 
Two hundred million of my Orian angels 
shall be allotted to these seventy heavenly 
places, and during dawn it shall be their 
work to carry out these commandments. 
And they shall provide for successors after 
them, who shall continue for another sea- 
son; and they shall provide yet other suc- 
cessors, and so on, even till the coming of 
the kosmon era. 

Lika then selected the two hundred mill- 
ion angels, and divided them into seventy 
groups and companies around about the 
earth, in the lowest heaven, and after they 
were duly officered and organized, they sa- 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



431 



luted before the throne of Jehovih and de- 
parted to their several places. 

Then came the voice of Jehovih to 
Lika, saying: Behold, of thy five hundred 
million, are still left one hundred and sev- 
enty and five million. This, then, is the 
work thou shalt put upon them: They shall 
begin at one end of hada and go to the oth- 
er, delivering all the hells of the false Gods 
as they go; untying the knots thereof and 
providing passage for the drujas into one 
great plateau. For as the false Gods began 
in confederacy I will bring them back into 
confederacy, even all of them that are cast 
into hell. And thou shalt officer them 
safely; and when they are thus established, 
behold, thou and thy Rapon hosts shall go 
and raise them up and deliver them into the 
a'ji'an Forest of Turpeset, where they 
shall be habitated and begin a new life of 
righteousness and love. 

And Anuhasaj, once-crowned Lord 
God, shall be over them; and Osiris and 
Sudga and Te-in and all the other confed- 
erated Gods shall be under him; for even 
as these Gods labored to cast Me out, be- 
hold, I give unto them their harvest. 

Then Lika commissioned the one hun- 
dred and seventy-five million ethereans, 
and officered them, and sent them into 
the hadan regions of the earth to deliver 
the hells thereof. 

Jehovih said to Lika: The rest of thy 
eight hundred million shall remain in The- 
ovrahkistan, for the labor here is sufficient 
for them. And so they remained. 

CHAPTER XII. 

The Rapon hosts desired to see Ahura, 
and so Lika sent an arrow-ship, with one 
hundred thousand angels, properly offi- 
cered, to Vara-pishanaha, to Ahura, pray- 
ing him to come on a visit for ten days, 
bringing his ten thousand attendants with 
him. And it thus came to pass that Ahura 
came to Theovrahkistan, where he was 
most honorably received and saluted under 
the Sign Morning of Jehovih's Light, and 
he in turn answered in the Sign My Words 
shall serve His Sons and Daughters! 

Accordingly, Lika came down from the 
throne and greeted Ahura, saying to him: 
Come thou, then, and stand in the midst 
of the throne, that thy voice may delight 
the Holy Council. 



So Ahura ascended the throne, along 
with Lika, and when the latter sat down, 
then Ahura walked to the midst and saluted 
the Holy Council with the Sign Fire and 
Water, and he spake, saying: 

Because Thou, O Jehovih, hast called 
me in the sign of the Morning of Thy 
Light, behold, I am risen up before Thee, 
to speak to Thy Sons and Daughters. But 
how shall I clear myself, O Father! I am 
as one who had a hidden skeleton, and the 
place of concealment broken down. Be- 
cause I was by Thee created alive in the 
world, why should I not have forever glori- 
fied Thee? This have I asked myself all 
the days of my life; but Thou troublest not 
to answer me in my curiosity. 

When I was young in life, lo, I cried 
out unto Thee, complaining because Thou 
madest me not wise. I said: Behold, 
thou createdst all the animals on the face 
of the earth to know more than I in the 
day of birth. Yea, I knew not where to 
find suck, nor could I rise up on my feet, 
but laid as I was laid down by my nurse. 
Even to the lambs and the calves and the 
young colts, Thou gavest greater wisdom 
and strength than Thou gavest Thy ser- 
vant. 

I said: Why, then, shall I glorify Thee 
or sing songs in Thy praise? Why shall I 
pray unto Thee; Thy ways are unalterable 
and Thy Voice answereth me not. Thou 
art void as the wind; Thou are neither Per- 
son, nor Wisdom, nor Ignorance. And as 
for Thy servants, who say they hear Thy 
Voice, behold, they are mad! I said: How 
can a man hear Thee? It is the reflection 
of himself he heareth. How can a man see 
Thee? It is the reflection of himself he 
seeth. 

And Thou sufferedst me to become 
strong, as to strength, and wise as to self, 
even as I had called unto Thee in my 
vanity. Yea, I prided myself in myself; 
and as to Thee, I sought to disprove Thee 
on all hands. And the worthlessness of 
prayer unto Thee I showed up as a great 
vanity. Yea, I craved wisdom for sake of 
showing Thou wert neither wise nor good. 
And to this end Thou also gavest unto me. 
And I became conceited in hiding my con- 
ceit, even from mine own understanding, 
that I might carry all points. 

I pointed to the fool, saying: Behold, 
Jehovih's son! I pointed to the desert 



432 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



place, saying: Behold, Jehovih's fruitful 
earth! To the mountain which is rocks 
and barren, saying: Behold, how Jehovih 
hath finished His work! And of the evil 
man, who murdereth his brother, I said: 
Jehovih, good in one thing, good in all! 

But I knew not the hand that was upon 
me; Thou wert answering my prayer ev- 
ery day. Yea, I ventured to judge Thee 
and Thy works, O Jehovih ! And the craft 
of my speech won applause; by flattery I 
was puffed up. And I deemed my judg- 
ment the right one; and whoso saw not as 
I saw, I condemned or pitied; yea, I craved 
great speech that I might show them up in 
their folly. And in this Thou also an- 
sweredst me by giving freely; and my 
words were reckoned great words and 
wise. And I was quoted and praised far 
and near. Yea, and I practiced good works 
that I might show unto others that, even in 
such like, a belief in Thee was vanity and 
a waste of judgment. 

Yea, I craved means and great treas- 
ures that I might render good unto others, 
in order that mine own philosophy might 
seem the highest of the high. And even in 
this Thou renderedst unto me great treas- 
ures and ample means; and by my good 
works done unto others I was applauded 
as a great and good God above all others. 
I craved a heavenly kingdom that I might 
prove my great wisdom and power unto 
thousands of millions; for I pitied them 
that I thought foolishly dwelt in darkness 
in regard to Thee. And even yet Thou, O 
Jehovih, didst not cut me off; but gavest 
me a great kingdom of seven thousand 
million! 

And I taught them my philosophy, that 
there was nothing above them; that Thou, 
O Jehovih, sawest not, heardst not, an- 
sweredst not. Yea, I made my will all- 
powerful that I might cut them off from 
Thee. But alas for me. I was like the 
sylph of old who stole into the musical in- 
struments and put them out of tune. My 
kingdom was divided into seven thousand 
million philosophers, every one mad in his 
own conceit, and in a different way. There 
was no harmony amongst them. Yea, 
they were a kingdom of growlers and 
cursers! I had carried away the tuning 
fork, for I had cast Thee out, O Jehovih! 
Mine own philosophy had done it all. 



Because I set myself up as the All 
Highest, Thou didst indulge me; and I be- 
came the highest God of my people. Yea, 
they cast their plaudits on me at first, but 
afterward all their ills and curses. Neither 
could I satisfy them in anything in heaven 
or earth; nor could I turn them off from 
me, for I had bound them unto me by my 
great promises. I became as one in a 
cloud, because of the great trouble upon 
me and the fear withal. And yet Thou, O 
Jehovih, didst not forget me; but sent 
Thy Gods' words unto me, imploring me 
what to do, that I might be delivered in 
season. But how could I hear thee, O Je- 
hovih, or hearken unto Thy Gods? Be- 
hold, my pride had swallowed me up, I 
was encompassed on every side. Because 
I had denied Thee before I must deny Thee 
still. 

And then greater darkness came upon 
me; Thy light was obstructed by the walls 
I had built up against Thee! Then came 
the crash, as if heaven and earth were rent 
asunder! I was cast into the chasm; my 
kingdom was upon me! The leadership 
and vanity I had sown had cast me into 
hell! I was in death, but could not die! 
A knot was bound upon me; foul-smelling 
slaves were clinched upon me, millions of 
them, tens of millions; and the shafts of 
their curses pierced my soul; I was as one 
lacerated and bound in salt; choked and 
suffocated with foul gases. 

But yet, Thou, O Jehovih, didst not de- 
sert me; but did hold my judgment from 
flying away into chaos. And Thy Voice 
came to me in the time of my tortures; 
came as the argument of the Most High! 
It was like myself that spake to myself, say- 
ing: He that forever casteth away all 
things, can never be bound in hell; he that 
craveth and holdeth fast, is already laying 
the foundation for torments. 

And I cried out unto Thee, O Jehovih, 
saying: O that I had possessed nothing! 
Neither talents, nor craft, nor philosophy. 
That I had told these wretches to go to 
Thee, O Jehovih! O that I had told them, 
Thou alone couldst bless them, or supply 
them! But I sought to lead them, and lo, 
they are upon me! O that I could be freed 
from them. That I could turn about in an 
opposite way from my former years; hav- 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



433 



ing nothing, craving nothing, but a right 
to serve Thee, O My Father! 

Thou didst send Thy Gods into the 
depths of hell, and they delivered me. 
And I made oath unto Thee, O Jehovih, to 
serve Thee forever. And Thou gavest me 
labor, and I bowed myself down to labor 
for Thy drujas, with all my wisdom and 
strength forever! And Thy hand came 
upon me and gave me great power; pow- 
er even over mine own soul to create hap- 
py thoughts. 

Why should I not praise Thee, O my 
Father? Thou gavest me liberty in all 
my ways, and didst answer me according 
to my desires. Neither once hast Thou 
turned away from me nor afflicted me; 
but because of mine own vanity I cut my- 
self off from Thee. Yea, Thou hast shown 
me that to glorify Thee is the foundation 
of the highest happiness; to sing to Thee 
is the greatest delight; to praise Thee is 
the highest wisdom. 

Hereat Ahura halted in his speech a 
while, and, still standing in the midst of 
the throne, burst into tears. Presently he 
said: 

Anuhasaj was my good friend. He it 
was who since took the name De'yus, and, 
afterward, proclaimed himself the Creator! 
I weep in pity for him. He is in hell now. 
He was my best friend in the time of my 
darkness. And after I was delivered out 
of hell, he came and labored with me, full 
of repentance and love. Oft we rested in 
each other's arms. Afterward, he traveled 
far and near in Thy great heavens, O Je- 
hovih. 

And when he returned to Earth's 
heavens he came not to see me. And I 
was broken hearted because of my great 
love for him. Then he founded his heaven- 
ly place and called it Hored. And I called 
out to Thee, O Jehovih, as to what mes- 
sage I should send him, for I foresaw his 
kingdom would be broken up and himself 
ultimately cast into hell. And Thou gavest 
me liberty to send him a message 
in mine own way. And in the an- 
guish of my broken heart I sent him a 
message, saying, in substance: I have no 
longer any love for thee! And I chid him 
and upbraided him because he came not 
to see me, to gratify my burning love. 
And I foretold him the great darkness and 
the hell that would come upon him, even 



as they now are. Now do I repent, O Je- 
hovih, that I sent him such a message! 
For near two thpusand years my message 
hath been to me as if I swallowed a living 
coal of fire! 

Ahura ceased. Lika spake, saying: Be- 
cause thou hast pleaded for De'yus, thou 
hast turned the etherean hosts to him. To 
thee I allot the restoration of De'yus, 
alias Anuhasaj. My hosts will in the prop- 
er time take thee to the hell where he is 
bound, and thou shalt be the first to re- 
ceive him. 

Lika then proclaimed a day of recrea- 
tion, for there were millions of ethereans 
who desired to meet Ahura and greet him. 
with love and praise. 

CHAPTER XIII. 

Lika spake before the Rapon hosts, 
saying: Behold, the hosts of laborers are 
allotted to their places. Let us go about, 
and examine Earth and her heavens. 
It is proper that my surveyors measure 
her land and water, together with all the 
living thereon and therein, and especially 
as to every man and woman and child, and 
the time of maturity unto them, and the 
years of the generations of men. 

And man that is brought forth out of 
the earth shall be numbered; and the grade 
of his understanding measured; and the 
nature of his desires and aspirations shall 
be ascertained; which reports shall be cop- 
ied and sent into the Orian kingdoms, for 
the deliberations of the Chiefs, that they 
may determine as to the requirements of 
Earth, and as to the nature in which her 
roadway shall be strewn with either light 
or darkness for the ultimate perfection of 
her soul harvests. 

And the heavens of Earth shall be 
measured, as to the spirits of the dead, and 
their grades shall be made out, together 
with their desires and aspirations; the 
lengths of the times of their bondage to 
the earth, and the places of their habita- 
tion, and the nature of their supplies. And 
a copy of such record shall be made and 
also sent to the Orian Chiefs, that they 
may determine as to necessary changes 
therein and thereof. 

During which time of my absence from 
Theovrahkistan, I appoint Havralogissasa 
as vice-Go.ddess in my place. How sayest 



434 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



thou, Havralogissasa? She said: Jehovih's 
will and thine be done. I am rejoiced. 

Lika then called Havralogissasa to the 
throne, and commissioned her vice-God- 
dess of Theovrahkistan. And after this 
Lika gave instructions as to extending 
the capital, Yogannaqactra, and enlarging 
the places for reception of the higher 
grades; all of which were duly provided 
with the persons to carry out the com- 
mands. 

And now Lika spake to Ahura, saying: 
Behold, thou shalt return to thy kingdom, 
Vara-pishanaha, for when I come hither 
on my journey, I will resurrect thy hosts 
as Brides and Bridegrooms to the etherean 
kingdoms. Thy labor is well done; thy 
glory is the glory of thousands of millions! 
May the love, wisdom and power of Jeho- 
vih be with the, now and forever! 

Thereupon Ahura saluted, and was in 
turn saluted, when he advanced and met 
the marshals, who conducted him hence, 
to the arrow-ship, where he embarked and 
departed. 

CHAPTER XIV. 

In due time Lika's otevan was complet- 
ed, and he, with the Rapon hosts, besides 
one million hosts in attendance, to make 
necessary surveys and records, entered into 
the ship and departed for his two years' 
cruise around Earth and her heavens. 

This, then, is a synopsis of the atmos- 
pherean heavens at that time: In 
the hells of Hored, with Anuhasaj, alias 
De'yus, forty thousand million angels. In 
the hells of Te-in, eight thousand million; 
in the hells of Sudga, twelve thousand mill- 
ion; in the hells of Osiris, seventeen thou- 
sand million. In the smaller hells in other 
parts of hada, there were in all fourteen 
thousand million angels. 

These ninety-one thousand million were 
not all bound in their respective hells; up- 
ward of thirty thousand of them surged 
about, from one hell to another, often in 
groups of a thousand million. And these 
groups, at times, descended to the earth, 
fastening upon mortals, even casting large 
cities and nations in death. Because they 
carried the foulness of their hells with 
them, they impregnated the air with poi- 
son, so that mortals were swept off by the 
million. And these were called plagues. 

Now, behold, there were millions of an- 



gels in those days who knew no other life, 
but to continue engrafting themselves on 
mortals. And, when one mortal died, they 
went and engrafted themselves on another. 
These were the fruit of the teaching of the 
false Gods, who had put away the All 
Highest, Jehovih. They could not be per- 
suaded that etherea was filled with habit- 
able worlds. And they professed that they 
had been re-incarnated many times; and 
that, previously, they had been great kings 
or philosophers. Some of them remember- 
ed the ji'ay'an period of a thousand years, 
and, so, hoped to regain their natural bod- 
ies and dwell again on the earth, and for- 
ever. Hence was founded the story that 
every thousand years a new incarnation 
would come to the spirits of the dead. 

In Par'si'e and Heleste there were hab- 
ited with mortals one thousand million da- 
mons, and twelve hundred million evil spir- 
its; in Vind'yu there were eleven hundred 
million drujas, and one thousand million 
evil spirits. In Egupt there were inhabited 
with mortals seven hundred million en- 
grafters, who, for the most part, held the 
spirits of their victims in abeyance all their 
natural lives. In Jaffeth there were habited 
with mortals more than fifteen hundred 
million drujas and evil spirits, besides 
four hundred million vampires. So that in 
these three great divisions of the earth, 
Vind'yu, and Jaffeth, and Arabin'ya, there 
were habited upward of ten thousand mill- 
ion spirits who had not attained to any res- 
urrection. 

Besides all the foregoing there were 
thousands of millions of spirits in chaos, 
being such as had been slain in wars. Of 
these chaotic spirits there were in Par'si'e 
and Heleste a thousand million; and in 
Jaffeth two thousand million; and in Vind'- 
yu two thousand million. But in Egupt 
there were not half a million, all told. So 
that, in atmospherea, at the time of Lika, 
there were upward of one hundred and 
twenty-five thousand million angels, who 
had no knowledge of or belief in any high- 
er heaven. 

To offset this great darkness, there 
were of believers in,- and laborers for Je- 
hovih and his emancipated kingdoms, only 
four thousand million, and many of these 
not above grade fifty. And these were 
members of Craoshivi and Vara-pishanaha. 
Two thousand million of them were ashars, 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



435 



laboring with the Faithist mortals of 
Egupt, Jaffeth and Vind'yu. 

CHAPTER XV. 

After Lika had numbered all the mor- 
tals on the earth, and all the angels in the 
heavens of the earth, and beheld the great 
darkness thereof, he visited Hoa-yusta, 
and found it a good plateau, capable of all 
grades up to sixty. And Lika possessed 
the place and consecrated it to Jehovih; 
and he left thereon three hundred thou- 
sand Gods and Goddesses, who were of 
his etherean host. And after this he re- 
turned to Gessica, chief God, for the de- 
liverance of the hells of De'yiis, and Te-in, 
and Sudga, and Lika instructed him. 

Gessica had the vessels constructed 
with walls of fire around the margins, to 
prevent the drujas escaping. And there 
were built in all four hundred vessels, each 
capable of carrying one hundred million 
drujas. 

The manner of driving the drujas into 
them was by leaving part of the fire-wall 
open, and by fire-brands in the ethereans' 
hands cutting off sections of drujas from 
the hells. In this way the ethereans drove 
the drujas into the vessels, whereupon the 
doorway in the wall of the ship was closed. 
And then the workers of the ship put it 
under way and carried them up to Hao- 
yusta, where the Gods and Goddesses re- 
ceived them, placing the drujas in pens, 
walled with fire, where they could be 
treated and restored to reason, after which 
they were to be liberated in installments, 
according to their safety. In the first year 
Gessica delivered from the hells of hada 
five thousand million drujas; but in the sec- 
ond year he delivered thirty-five thousand 
million; and in the third year, sixteen thou- 
sand million. After this the work went 
slowly on, for the balance of the hells 
were mostly in knots, some of them hun- 
dreds of millions. And these had to be de- 
livered individually, requiring great labor, 
wisdom and dexterity. 

In the fifth month of the fourth year, 
Anuhasaj, alias De'yus, was delivered out 
of the great knot of hell, in which there 
had been eight hundred million bound for 
more than four hundred years. After the 
manner in which Fragapatti delivered 
knots, even so did Gessica and his hosts 



wth brands of fire. When it was known 
in which place Anuhasaj was tied, and 
when it was half delivered, Gessica sent for 
Ahura to come and have the honor of re- 
leasing Anuhasaj. And to this end Ahura 
labored on the knot fifty-five days. 

But Anuhasaj was bereft of all judg- 
ment, crying out, unceasingly: I am not 
God! I am not the Lord! I am not De'- 
yus! He was wild, crazed with fear and 
torments, frenzied, and in agony. Which 
Ahura, his friend, beheld; and Ahura 
caught him in his arms. Ahura called unto 
him: Anuhasaj! O my beloved! Know- 
est thou not me? Behold me! I am Ahu- 
ra! 

But, alas, Anuhasaj knew him not; pull- 
ed away, tried to escape in fear; his pro- 
truding eyes seeing not; his ears hearing 
not. And he kept forever uttering: Let 
me go, I am not the Lord God, nor De'- 
yus! I am Anuhasaj! Then broke the 
good heart of Ahura, and he wept. 

Then they held Anuhasaj and carried 
him away into the ship, and Ahura helped 
to carry him. Then the ship rose up and 
sailed to Hao-yusta. And they took Anu- 
hasaj to a hospital prepared for maniacs, 
and stretched him on his back and held 
him. Then called Ahura to the Gods and 
Goddesses to come and help him; and they 
came and seated themselves in the sacred 
circle. 

And Ahura said: Light of Thy Light, 
Jehovih! Thou who first quickened him 
into being, O deliver Thou him! 

A light, like a small star, gathered be- 
fore Anuhasaj 's face, and this was the first 
thing his fixed eyes had yet seen. Then 
Ahura and the Gods and Goddesses sang 
sweetly: Behold Me! Behold Me! I am 
with thee! I am never away from thee! 
Thou art Mine now, and forever shall be! 
Look upon Me! I am in all things! No- 
thing is, nor was, nor ever shall be without 
Me! Hear My Love! I am thy Creator! 
Only for love, and for love only, created I 
thee, My beloved. 

Anuhasaj gave a long gasp and relaxed 
his mighty will, then fell into a swoon, all 
limp and helpless. Still the Gods stood by 
him, waiting, watching whilst he slept a 
while. And then, by signals to the es'- 
enaurs, Ahura caused other music to stea' 
upon the scene, to be answered by the dis- 



436 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



tant trumpeters. For ? the space of seven 
days Anuhasaj slept; and all the while the 
great Gods and Goddesses relaxed not 
their wills nor steadfast positions. And at 
the end of the seventh day Anuhasaj began 
to sing in his swoon, like one weak and 
out of breath, but half awake! 

How could I deny Thee, O Jehovih! 
Was not the evidence of mine own life be- 
fore me? I raised up my voice against 
my Creator! I plucked Him out of my 
soul; from all people in heaven and earth 
I dispersed Him. But they that applauded 
me turned against me! Even as I had turn- 
ed against Thee, Thou All Person! In my 
vanity I owned not that I was in Thee nor 
of Thee, O Jehovih! O that I had per- 
ceived I was going farther and farther 
away; that I had known the road of life 
and death! 

I see Thy judgment upon me, O Jeho- 
vih! I hear Thy just decree: Whilst the 
name of God or Lord or Savior is wor- 
shipped on the earth I shall labor with the 
drujas of heaven and the Druks of earth! 
A most righteous judgment, O Jehovih! 
Whilst I am in hell or in heaven, in hada 
or on the earth, will I pursue all peoples, 
mortals and angels, till I cast out the wor- 
ship of a God and of a Lord and of a Sav- 
ior. And Thou alone, Thou Great Spirit, 
Ever Present Person, Everlasting and Al- 
mighty, Thou shalt be All in All. 

Again Anuhasaj went off in a swoon 
for the space of three days, and yet the 
Gods and Goddesses ceased not their fixed 
places. And again was the music resumed 
till Anuhasaj awoke and again chanted in 
Jehovih's praise. And again he relapsed 
and again awoke and beheld first of all 
Ahura. Steadily and wildly he gazed 
thereon, until his eyes were clouded into a 
swoon. Another day the Gods watched 
him, and sang for him; moved not from the 
sacred circle of Jehovih. 

Then Anuhasaj awoke, saying: Who 
was it taught me to love? Ahura! Who 
first proclaimed Jehovih unto mine ear? 
Ahura! Who was the last to plead Jehovih? 
Ahura! Who most of all that live labored 
for me? Ahura! I broke thy heart, O 
Ahura! I was mad, O I was mad, Ahura! 
Because of thy love, Ahura, thou praised 
me; I was vainglorious and unworthy of 
thee, O my beloved. Thy vision hath 
raised up before me, Ahura. Second to 



Jehovih, O my love? O that thou knew- 
est I am here, penitent and heart-broken! 
I know thou wouldst fly to me, Ahura. 
Thou alone do I know, who would never 
desert me, sweet Ahura. 

Then again Anuhasaj relapsed into a 
swoon, breathless, like one that is dead. 
Ahura sang: Behold me! I am Ahura. 
I am come to thee from afar, O Anuhasaj. 
Awake and behold thy love, my love. My 
heart is broken for thee, Anuhasaj. A 
thousand years I have wept for thee. O 
that thou couldst awake to know me. 

Anuhasaj looked up and beheld Ahura. 
The latter kept on singing: It is not a 
dream, Anuhasaj. Thy Ahura is here. Be- 
hold me! I am he. Break the spell, O An- 
uhasaj. By Jehovih's power put forth thy 
soul. Ahura is here. . 

Again Anuhasaj relapsed, but not to 
swoon; merely closed his eyes and sang: 
Blessed art Thou, O Jehovih! Thou hast 
given me a sweet vision! Thou hast shown 
me the face of my love, Ahura! His sweet 
voice fell upon mine ear! I am blessed, O 
Jehovih! Even these hells hast thou bless- 
ed, O Jehovih! The darkness of endless 
death is made light by Thine Almighty 
touch. Thou alone shalt be my song for- 
ever. Thou alone my theme of delight. 
Jehovih forever! Jehovih forever and for- 
ever! 

Then Ahura, seeing the spell was bro- 
ken, said: Arise, O Anuhasaj. I will 
sing with thee. Behold Ahura, thy love is 
before thee. This is no vision. Come thou 
to the arms of thy love. And he raised An- 
uhasaj up, and he awoke fully, but trem- 
bling and weak, and knew understand- 
ing^.. 

CHAPTER XVI. 

In the same time that Anuhasaj was 
delivered out of hell, so was Anubi, and 
from the self-same knot. And he was car- 
ried on the same calyos to Hao-yusta, the 
same heavenly place. And he was also in 
chaos, knowing nothing, only screaming: 
I am not Anubi. I am not the Savior. I 
am plain Chesota! 

And he also saw not and heard not, but 
was wild, desiring to fly away. And they 
held him fast, and, after the same manner 
they delivered Anuhasaj to reason, they 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



437 



also delivered Chesota. And when both 
of them were well restored to sound rea- 
son, though still timorous, Ahura took 
them in his own otevan and carried them 
to Theovrahkistan, before Lika, for judg- 
ment. And great was the time when they 
came; and especially the desire of the in- 
habitants to look upon Anuhasaj, the most 
audacious God that had ever dwelt on the 
earth or in her heavens, and, withal, the 
much-loved friend of Ahura. 

When they came before the throne of 
Jehovih and duly saluted, Lika said: 
Whence come ye and for what purpose, O 
my beloved? 

Ahura said: Hell hath delivered up the 
bound. My friends are before thee. Then 
Lika said: In Jehovih's name, welcome. 
Whatsoever the Father putteth into your 
souls, that utter ye and be assured of His 
love, wisdom and power. 

Anuhasaj said: That I am delivered 
out of hell it is well; that I was delivered 
into hell it was well likewise. Give thou 
me Jehovih's judgment. My purpose be- 
fore thee, is to register my vows unto Je- 
hovih, that my record and thy just judg- 
ment may be carried to the heavens above. 
Like said: My judgment upon thee, Anu- 
hasaj, is that thou shalt judge thyself! An- 
uhasaj said: Most righteous judgment, O 
Jehovih! But knowest thou not Jehovih's 
voice? 

Lika said: Thou asked for a great 
heavenly kingdom. Behold, Jehovih gave 
it thee. As soon as order is restored, thou 
shalt have thy kingdom again. Anuhasaj 
said: I want it not. 

Lika said: Thou shalt not say, I want 
this or that; but say thou wilt do what- 
soever Jehovih hath given into thy hands. 
When thou hast raised up thy whole king- 
dom, behold, thou wilt also be raised up. 
Anuhasaj said: Alas me, this is also just. 
Show me the way. I will henceforth labor 
for the thousands of millions who were my 
kingdom. 

Lika now bade Chesota speak. He said: 

I called myself Master of the Scales 
and Savior of Men. Whoever called 
on me, worshipping me and De'yiis, alias 
the Lord God, I accepted; whoever wor- 
shipped me not, nor De'yus, nor the Lord 
God, I cast into hell, saying: Depart 
from me, ye cursed, into everlasting tor- 



ments. What, then, O Lika, shall be my 
judgment? For, behold, I cast a thousand 
million into torments. 

Lika said: Judge thyself. Chesota said: 
Alas, the pains I gave can never be called 
back and undone. Have I, then, no hope? 

Lika said: Whom thou hast pained, go 
thou to, and by thy good deeds hereafter 
done to them, so win their love that they 
will call thee blessed! When all of them 
have accepted thee, behold, it shall be well 
with thee. 

Chesota said: O endless task! And 
yet, it is just. Teach me, then, O Lika, 
how to carry out this great judgment. 

Lika then asked for Anuhasaj to come 
forward and be crowned; and when he ap- 
proached the foot of the throne Lika came 
down and said: Anuhasaj, Son of Jeho- 
vih, God of Hao-yaista, thee I crown in 
Jehovih's name, u;ito His service forever. 
Be Thou with him, O Jehovih, is wisdom, 
love and power. 

Anuhasaj said: Into Thy service, O Je- 
hovih, I commit myself forever! Give me 
of Thy love and wisdom and power that I 
may glorify Thee and Thy kingdoms. 

Lika stretched up his hand, saying: 
Light of Thy light, crown of Thy crown, O 
Jehovih! And the light was formed in his 
hand, and a crown came out of the light, 
and Lika placed it on Aanhasaj's head. 
The latter then sat down on the foot of the 
throne, and Lika took his hand, saying: 
Arise, O God, and go thy way, and the 
Father be with thee! 

Thereupon Anuhasaj and Chesota sa- 
luted and stood aside. And then Ahura 
saluted and stood aside also; whereupon 
Lika granted a day of recreation, during 
which time the visiting Gods departed for 
Hao-yusta. 

CHAPTER XVII. 

To accomplish the resurrection of 
Vara-pishanaha, Lika had previously 
sent swift messengers to Ye'a-Goo, 
Goddess of Ha'mistos, in etherea, to 
bring an avalanza capable of six thousand 
million Brides and Bridegrooms for the 
mid-harvest. Accordingly, at the time Lika 
and his Rapon hosts were visiting Ahura, 
the Goddess, Ye'a-Goo, came down in her 
avalanza, fully equipped. Her avalanza 
was egg-shaped and veiled without, and 



438 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



was seven miles high and five miles wide, 
every way, habitable throughout. On the 
outer surface, but under the veil, were 
twelve thousand porches with banisters. 
The propelling vortices were within the 
center, and the workmen were within the 
summit. On the lowest porch were five 
hundred thousand es'enaurs, and on the 
highest porch one thousand trumpeters. 
Ye'a-Goo's compartment, and the place of 
the Holy Council, were in the midst; and 
her throne faced to the north, like Earth's 
vortex. 

Ahura said to Lika, Son of Jehovih: 
My Brides and Bridegrooms I give to 
thee; honor thou this dissolving kingdom 
by performing the marriage ceremony. 
Lika said: Thy will and Jehovih's be 
done. Thus it was it arranged, and the 
twain, together with the Rapon hosts, as- 
cended the throne and sat thereon. 

Ahura had previously provided his 
hosts, in all four and a half thousand mill- 
ion Brides and Bridegrooms, and arrayed 
them in white, so that they anxiously 
awaited the coming of Ye'a-Goo, and were 
on the lookout to see her magnificent ship 
descending. A place of anchorage had 
also been previously made, together with 
accommodation for the spectators, of 
whom there were fifteen hundred million, 
being adopted wanderers, rescued from the 
various hells during the past hundred 
years. The Brides and Bridegrooms were 
arranged in semi-circles facing the throne, 
leaving a place for the avalanza, but 
above them, so that when Ye'a-Goo de- 
scended from her ship, she would be in the 
midst. 

While the ship's workmen were anchor- 
ing, Ye'a-Goo and her Holy Council de- 
scended to the platform, and saluted the 
Gods and Goddesses on the throne in the 
sign, The Glory of the Father, and Lika 
and the others answered under the sign, 
The Abandonment of Self! 

Ye'a-Goo said: In Jehovih's name am 
I come to answer the call of His Son, to 
deliver the emancipated Sons and Daugh- 
ters. Like said: Behold, O Daughter of 
Jehovih, the Brides and Bridegrooms are 
before thee. To thee I give them in Je- 
hovih's name! 

Ye'a-Goo said: My beloved, know ye 
the resurrection of the most high heavens? 



Response: Reveal, O Goddess; our 
faith is strong. 

Thereupon Ye'a-Goo instructed them, 
and then followed the usual ceremonies, 
concluding with these words: 

Jehovih's voice: To be My Brides and 
Bridegrooms forever? 

Response: To be Thy Brides and 
Bridegrooms forever, O Jehovih! To la- 
bor for Thee, and to be mouthpieces for 
Thy commandments, and to be Thy ex- 
pression forever! And to be in concert 
with Thy most high Gods for the resurrec- 
tion of mortals and angels. 

Jehovih: Whom I receive as Mine for- 
ever! To be one with Me in My king- 
doms; for which glory I accept you as My 
Sons and Daughters, Brides and Bride- 
grooms forever! 

Response: And be Thy Sons and 
Daughters ! To be one with Thee forever, 
Thou Most High, Jehovih! 

Ye'a-Goo said: Behold the crowns the 
Father bestoweth upon His loves, to be 
theirs forever. Hereat the Rapon Chiefs, 
with Lika, gathered of the curtains of 
light and wove crowns and cast them 
forth, thousands of millions, and the pow- 
er of the Great Spirit bore them upon the 
heads of the Brides and Bridegrooms. 

Response: Crown of Thy Crown, O 
Jehovih! Glory be to Thee, Creator of 
Worlds! 

Ye'a-Goo: The Father's ship hath 
come for His chosen. Walk ye in and re- 
joice, for ye are His harvest. Gods and 
Goddesses are waiting for you, as a wo- 
man waiteth for her first-born. They will 
receive you with joy and love. Yea, they 
are crying out unto me: Daughter of Je- 
hovih, why tarriest thou so long? 

Lika now saluted the Brides and 
Bridegrooms, and said: Arise, O my be- 
loved, and go your ways, the Father call- 
eth. 

The Brides and Bridegrooms saluted, 
saying: Alas, we have not paid out teach- 
er Ahura. And every one plucked from 
the rays of Jehovih's light a flower of love, 
and cast it at Ahura's feet, saying: Most 
blessed of Gods, love of my love; Jehovih 
be with thee! 

Ahura responded not; only burst into 
tears. And now, whilst the Brides and 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



439 



Bridegrooms were going into the ship, 
Ye'a-Goo came along the platform, accom- 
panied by the chief marshal, and his staff, 
and these were followed by Ye'a-Goo's 
high Council. The Rapon Chiefs rose up 
and received them, and they all sat on Je- 
hovih's throne in relaxation and fellow- 
ship. 

Thus ended the ceremony. The music 
of the two worlds now commenced: Ye'a- 
Goo and her hosts embarked, and she 
gave the word Arise! and lo, the great av- 
alanza started from its foundation, amidst 
a universal shout of applause from the 
four thousand million. Higher and higher 
rose the ship of fire, toward the bridge 
Chinvat, out into the etherean heavens. 

CHAPTER XVIII. 

After the judgment of Anuhasaj and 
Chesota at Theovrahkistan, Ahura asked 
Lika for assistance to remove the remain- 
der of Vara-pishanaha to Hao-yusta, which 
Lika granted, allotting ten million of his 
etherean hosts to accomplish • it. With 
these Ahura, Anuhasaj and Chesota ac- 
complished the removal. 

In not many days after this, Sudga was 
delivered from the hells of Auprag, of 
which event Ahura had been previously in- 
formed, as to the time thereof, and he ac- 
cordingly went to Auprag, to be in readi- 
ness to receive Sudga, and help restore him 
if required. 

Sudga, on his delivery from the knot, 
where there had been thirty million bound, 
was bereft of reason, but not gentle like 
Anuhasaj, but fierce, battling right and 
left, a very maddened maniac that neither 
saw nor heard, but raved and cursed with 
all his strength, choked up with madness. 
For all the curses of his broken-down 
kingdom recoiled upon himself; the 
curses of his thousands of millions 
of slaves were piercing his soul from every 
quarter. But they held him fast and car- 
ried him into the ship, which sailed for 
Hao-yusta, whither he was landed in the 
same condition. Ahura was with him, 
and Ahura caused a circle of deliverance 
to assemble and labor for his restoration. 
And it required thirty days and nights to 
bring him around, so he could even see 
and hear; but as for his judgment it was 



yet a hundred days more before it mani- 
fested. 

So Ahura could not wait longer with 
him, but returned to the hells where Te-in 
was bound, the mountains of Ak-a- 
loo-ganuz. But herein was Ahura 
also disappointed, for Te-in was neither 
frightened nor wild nor mad; but limpid, 
helpless as water and without knowledge, 
more than a vessel of water. His energies 
had all been exhausted, and in a dead 
swoon he lay in the heart of a knot. Him 
they also carried to Hao-yusta, and Ahura 
provided for his restoration. 

But yet, ere Te-in awoke from his stu- 
por, Ahura departed for Osiris, who was 
bound in the hells of Prayogotha. Osiris 
had been in hell now for more than a hun- 
dred years, and in a knot for fifty years. 
When the false Osiris was delivered he was 
deranged, but preaching Jehovih, calling 
everybody Jehovih, and everything Jeho- 
vih. Him they also carried to Hao-yusta 
and provided restoration for him. And 
Ahura went thither also to assist with all 
his wisdom and strength. 

Thus were delivered all the self-Gods 
who had rebelled against Jehovih and es- 
tablished the great confederacy, of which 
not one vestige was now left. But of all 
the angels delivered out of the hells and 
knots not one in ten was of sound judg- 
ment, whilst more than half of them were 
only drujas at best. 

Thus was founded the new kingdom of 
Hao-yusta, but yet in charge of the ether- 
eans, who were to commit it to Anuhasaj 
and his one-time confederates, for their 
deliverance. It came to pass in course of 
time that Sudga, Te-in and Osiris were 
restored to reason, and in this matter 
Anuhasaj, Ahura and Chesota were 
constant workers. And when they were all 
restored, they in turn fell to, to restore 
others, to which labor they were commit- 
ted till the close of dawn. 

Osiris, Te-in and Sudga all desired 
to go before Lika, to be adjudged and sen- 
tenced; and they all sentenced themselves, 
which was granted unto them. On this 
occasion Osiris said: 

Thy lessons are near at hand, O Jeho- 
vih. But who will learn them? Mortals 
go insane, because they have not learned 
to throw their cares upon Thee. To throw 



440 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



government upon Thee, O Jehovih, this 
is wisdom! To cast riches and king- 
doms into Thy lap; to own nothing; to 
have nothing; this is the sum of the 
highest happiness? Whoso doeth this will 
battle against no man for anything in hea- 
ven or earth. But he who doeth otherwise 
will soon or late descend into hell. For 
what is hell but the opposite of bliss? 
What is battling against others, but sow- 
ing the seed of anarchy in one's own soul? 
To battle against others is to gain the 
lower, by sacrificing the higher, of which 
latter Thou, O Jehovih, art the summit. 

To go against Thee, O Father, is to go 
against one's fellows; to go against one fel- 
lows is to go against Thee. And who 
can go against Thee but will soon or late 
evolve his own fall? Thou hast given to 
mortal kings and queens, and shown them 
that soon or late their kingdoms will fall 
to pieces. And yet Lords and Gods, see- 
ing these things, will not believe. Every 
one, in his own conceit, imagineth his par- 
ticular kingdom will be governed more 
wisely than all his predecessors. And yet 
his also falleth. 

Now will I turn to find thee, O Jeho- 
vih, and the search shall be everlasting. 
Kingdoms are nothing to me; all posses- 
sions, save wisdom and love, are but van- 
ity and vexation. I know Thou art above 
all else, and yet Thou hast given Thyself 
all away, so that none can look upon Thy 
face. Verily hast Thou hid Thyself away; 
to be like unto Thee is to hide away the 
self of one's self; and that which remaineth 
will be Thy mouthpiece and Thy hand. 

Then spake Sudga unto Jehovih, say- 
ing: Why was I puffed up, seeing that I 
created not even mine own self? Neither 
had I anything in earth or heaven to use 
or to work with, but the substance was 
made already. Yea, I leapt into Thy gar- 
den which Thou hadst planted. I raised up 
my voice against Thee; because Thou wert. 
too Holy for my gross senses to behold, I 
condemned Thee. I wanted Thee gross, 
that I could look upon Thee; that I could 
walk around Thee, and behold Thy stature. 
I saw that all men were like unto me in 
this. Therefore I made a figurehead of my- 
self; I said unto Thy children: Behold me! 
And at first they were pleased, because 
they imagined they had found a Creator 



they could measure. But Thine eye was 
upon me. Thy hand pointed the way and 
the manner of my iniquity. And they 
searched me out and found I was but a 
man, like unto themselves. Wherefore 
they condemned me. 

The fool acknowledgeth no person save 
he can grapple therewith, and find the 
arms, and the length thereof, and the feet 
and their standing place. How vain I was 
in this, O Jehovih! He that professed Thy 
Person I denounced as a fool; because I 
saw not Thy completeness Thou didst per- 
mit me to pursue my vanity. Because I 
had acknowledged not Thy Person I 
was forced to make man the All Highest; 
and this drove me to make myself the all 
highest man. But Thou earnest not against 
me to turn me from mine iniquity, but 
gavest me full play to do my utmost. 

On all sides hast Thou encompassed 
Thy creation with liberty. Even Thine 
enemy Thou hast not restrained. He stand- 
eth in public, saying: Jehovih, I deny 
Thee. If Thou art mightier than I, strike 
me down.** Behold, I deny Thee and Thy 
Person! Thou Void Nothingness! Thou 
fool Creator, with Thy half-created world. 
Thou Who hast created sin! And created 
misery! Thou Father of evil! O Thou 
dumb Nothing. Yea, even to him hast 
Thou given free speech; and he buildeth 
up his own soul in his own way. And for 
a season he is the delight of the Druk and 
the druj; yea, they fasten upon him, and 
he gaineth a multitude of evil ones, divid- 
ed one against another, but the seed of his 
curses taketh root in them, and he be- 
cometh encompassed with foulness and 
bondage. 

To find harmony in Thee, O Jehovih; 
to measure the Goodness of Thee; to re- 
joice in one's joys; to treasure Thy best 
gifts; to laud Thy love; to love Thee be- 
cause Thou hast given me power to love, 
and things to love; to rejoice in Thy fruits 
and flowers and all perfected things; to 
dwell forever upon Thy glories and the 
magnitude of Thy creation; to sing praises 
to Thee for harmony wherever found; to 
love to comprehend all good things; to 
find the good that is in all men and wo- 
men; to rejoice in delights; to teach others 
to rejoice, and to search after all perfected 
beauties, goodness, righteousness and love; 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



441 



these shall be my service unto Thee, my 
everlasting Father. 

To seek not to find imperfections; to 
seek not to find inharmonies; to seek not 
to find evil; to seek not to find ugliness; 
to seek not to find evil in others, nor their 
darkness nor shortcomings; to seek not to 
prove imperfections in Thy works, O Jeho- 
vih; to find 'no fault with Thee; to com- 
plain not against Thee; to complain not 
for trials nor for hardships, nor for the 
evil others inflict upon me; to quibble not, 
because I can not comprehend Thy vast- 
ness; to quibble not for myself; to speak 
not evilly against anything Thou hast cre- 
ated; O make Thou me strong and wise 
forever. 

Te-in spake to Jehovih, saying: Where- 
in is the limit of experience, O Jehovih! 
And how short have I not been before 
Thee, My Father! Behold, I had learned 
all philosophies; I had been taught for a 
long season in the right way, but I rebelled 
against Thee, my Creator. I had been 
taught to hoard not up anything; to own 
nothing; to desire nothing, but wisdom and 
love. And Thy teachers, O Jehovih, show- 
ed me the evidence of thousands of great 
rulers, and every one of them had come 
to evil and destruction. Why then, O Fa- 
ther, was I not wise in the evidence before 
me? But I rose up against all this testi- 
mony, and I fashioned a mighty kingdom. 
Yea, Thou didst permit me to try in mine 
own way to the full. 

I went not by peace but by war; I 
raised me up standing armies and great 
warriors without limit; by force I estab- 
lished myself, but only as a tree that grow- 
eth up and is cut down. But what was I 
in Thy great universe, O Jehovih? What 
was my experience but the repetition of 
others who had been before me? 

Now will I be wise; most cautious in 
my wisdom, and slow to proceed. But 
how can I make my experience profitable 
unto others? Thou hast stood me afar off; 
whoso heareth me will say: Ah, had I 
tried it I had succeeded better. Thou 
dost allow each one to go in and try, but 
they all fail. Yea, they reiterate their fail- 
ure; but where is the profit of this experi- 
ence unto others? How can I ever reach 
them, O Jehovih! What profit have I more 
than a mortal that dwelleth on the earth? 



Have not the angels testified for thousands 
of years that the rich man was crippling 
his own soul, and that the king and queen 
were binding themselves with chains for 
the habitation of hell? But they will not 
heed; every one hopeth he at least will find 
a way for escape; to gain prestige over oth- 
ers; to be a leader; to have servants; to be 
idle; to live at ease; to have great posses- 
sions; to revel in luxuries: Are not these 
more powerful than experience; greater in 
the eyes of the ignorant than all the wis- 
dom of earth and heaven? 

Thou hast wisely shaped Thy creatures, 
O Father! Thou makest great servants of 
us in a way we know not of. Behold, I de- 
sired a mighty kingdom in heaven, and 
Thou gavest one into my hand. Yea, I 
flattered myself with my success; I laughed 
at the Gods who had been before my time. 
How things are changed now, O Jehovih! 
Thou hast made me a servant of servants; 
yea, by mine own hand have I bound my- 
self. Have I not heard mortals say: 

that I had a kingdom to rule over! O 
that I had great riches, how good I would 
be! And because Thou deniest them for 
their own good, they complain against 
Thee. Who shall answer for the vanity of 
men and angels! They have not patience 
with Thee, Who created them alive and 
knowest what is best. 

One saith: Yonder is a great king, 
why doeth he not a great good? Or, yon- 
der is a rich man, why doeth he not a great 
good also? O that I were in their places, 
what a great good I would do. How shall 

1 show them, O Father, that to strive to 
be a king is to go away from doing good; 
that to strive to be a rich man is to deny 
goodness? Yea, by the very act of posses- 
sion is he testimony the opposite way. For 
he that is good giveth all; even as Thou 
gavest all and so made all things. And the 
greater the possession the greater the 
bondage. Who hath so small a responsibil- 
ity as he who hath nothing? This is the 
sum of wisdom, O Jehovih; and all men 
and all angels soon or late will acknowl- 
edge it. 

Better hast Thou made it for the ser- 
vant than for the master; better for the 
poor than the rich; and these things will 
also come to their understanding in course 
of time. But how can I, O Father, make 
them to know wisdom without experience, 



442 



CYCLE OF LTKA 



to accept the testimony of others' tortures 
in hell? Behold, Thou gavest me great 
learning when I was of the earth; and 
when in hada great advantages to attain 
to deep wisdom; but, after all, I was caught 
in a snare of my own setting. How much, 
then, O Father, must I expect of the mul- 
titude? Happy is he who hath nothing, 
and desireth only wisdom and love. To 
cultivate such a garden, what a harvest 
will ripen out unto him. 

When the three had thus spoken before 
the throne and before the high Council, 
Ahura stood aside and spake also. He said: 

CHAPTER XIX. 

O that I could sing Thee a song of de- 
light, Thou All Highest. Or find the 
words to make plain Thy marvelous ways. 
But Thou hast limited me as a shadow, 
of which Thou art the substance. Thy 
causes are deep and of long times; my 
judgment less than a breath of air; I re- 
solve and reason and devise, but all is 
nothing before Thee. To-day my soul is 
buoyed up with great rejoicing; Thou hast 
sent me my loves. I would bind them with 
sweet words; their wisdom would I feasr 
upon forever. In Thy great mercy, Je- 
hovih, Thou hast showed me a world of 
delight. How can I repay Thee, or Thy 
countless millions make to understand the 
way of rejoicing. 

O that I could show them the secret 
way of bliss; or turn them in the direction 
of the All Highest! Could they be the 
Within; to know the delight of that which 
proceedeth outward. O that I could make 
them understand; to look upward instead of 
downward; to look inward instead of out- 
ward. How Thou followest up Thy way- 
ward children; Thy truants that strive to 
go away from Thee. 

They wander away off, and Thou giv- 
est the slack of the leading line unto them. 
They go as if around a circle, and come to 
the place of beginning at last. O that I 
could prevail upon them in the start; that 
I could save them the first journey of the 
•circle. O that they would go slowly and 
with Thee always, Jehovih! 

But thou enrichest them with Thy 
bounteous fields; they travel far and are 
footsore and weary; and the twain causes 
are as a new book of songs. O that ex- 



perience may never die! And Thy crea- 
tions never cease to have adventurous Sons 
and Daughters! 

O that I could understand Thy Great- 
ness, or find in the darkness the light that 
glorifieth Thy countenance. I drink deep 
of mine own folly, and mine eyes wander 
about because of the darkness. I come 
upon Thy pathway and burst forth with a 
song of delight. Yea, I rejoice for the 
darkness I' have passed through; in this 
am I more buoyant in my love to Thee, 
my Creator. 

How can I make all Thy people to sing 
songs unto Thee; or teach them to harp 
not forever on the dark side of things? I 
have seen the tree of hell they planted in 
their own souls, and the way they cultivate 
it. They know not what is meant by sing- 
ing praises unto Thee, and of Thy growth 
in them. Why will they interpret me by 
words, or realize not that I sing because of 
the exuberance of the soul? O that I could 
inspire them to talk good of all things; to 
dwell rather on the beauties Thou hast 
made, instead of the ills and horrors around 
them. Can they never understand what it 
is to sow the seed of the tree of endless de- 
light? 

O that I could call them unto Thee, 
Jehovih! Or that I could lift their aspira- 
tion up from the shadows of death. I 
would follow them into Thy two great 
gardens which Thou hast created; that 
which is unripe, where they go and curse 
Thee; and that which is ripe, where I have 
found Thee full of love. Because I said: 
Sing unto Him forever; pray to Him with 
great rejoicing, they interpret me to mean 
words uttered as a mocking-bird. Yea, 
they grumble forever. 

To find Thee, O Jehovih; to glorify the 
good that cometh along, this is the salva- 
tion of the world. Of this my songs shall 
never end; without a shadow of darkness 
Thou wilt tune my voice forever. I will 
sing and dance before Thee; the germ of 
happiness in my soul will I nurse as Thy 
holiest gift. For of all the trees which 
Thou hast planted in the soul of men and 
angels, this is the most glorious; for it is 
the perfection of Thy Voice, which singeth 
in all Thy. living creatures. 

When Ahura had finished, then spake 
Lika, for the Voice of Jehovih was upon 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



443 



him. He said: Many leaders have I cre- 
ated for Earth and her heavens; but not 
one have I created with power to make a 
leader of himself. My hand is upon them- 
that I choose; with wisdom and power 
raise I them up from the beginning. To 
a people on the earth I give a king; to the 
inhabitants of My heavens give I Lords 
and Gods. Because ye have tried the full- 
ness of self, and raised up mighty realms in 
heaven, but to come to naught before My 
hand, ye are as a new power in these hea- 
vens. 

As by the name Jehovih, I have main- 
tained the Faithists in earth and heaven, so 
shall ye rule over My enemies, in righteous- 
ness and love and good works, by the names 
Lord and God, which they shall worship 
until the coming of the next dawn. But I 
will come in that day and deliver you and 
them, and there shall be no more Lord or 
God worshipped upon Earth or in the 
heavens thereof. Grieve not that ye have 
had great kingdoms, and been overthrown, 
and cast into torments; for ye have been so 
prepared in My works, that I might reach 
them that are not of the flesh and blood of 
My Faithists. And inasmuch as ye have 
gone to the farthest limit of glory and of 
the darkness of hell, so will I give unto 
you wisdom, love and power accordingly. 
To make ready for the kosmon era, I want 
not a few, but thousands of millions in 
heaven and earth, to inspire such as live in 
darkness. 

As I delivered you, so shall ye deliver 
them; because they will accurse themselves 
with war and with standing armies for the 
sake of earthly glory unto their rulers, ye 
shall encompass them about, and break 
them up, and deliver them into My king- 
doms, which are peace and love. As ye 
have been delivered out of hell, so shall ye 
deliver the kings and queens of the earth 
out of the kingdoms wherein they will un- 
knowingly bind themselves in condemna- 
tion before Me. They shall be made to un- 
derstand that, whoso assumeth a kingdom, 
shall not rule it unto his own glory with- 
out reaping the fruits of hell. 
When the king goeth forth, he shall not 
be afraid he will be cut down; nor shall his 
marshals stand about him to protect him, 
for My Person shall shield him, and his 
people will shout with great joy when his 



steps draw nigh. To serve Me is not in 
prayer only, or in rites and ceremonies, 
but in stretching forth the hand to do good 
unto others with all of one's might. 

Because ye have proved that force and 
violence only establish for a day, and are 
not of Me, so shall ye make them under- 
stand that whoso useth force and violence 
or armies to sustain himself is not of Me, 
but is My enemy, and is on the way to 
destruction. Whoso being a king, or a 
general, or a captain, and in war, either of- 
fensive or defensive, professing to serve Me 
by rites and ceremonies and praises, is a 
mocker of Me and My kingdoms; yea, a 
blasphemer in My sight; he provideth the 
way of his own torments. These are My 
creations; to answer force with force, vio- 
lence with violence, mockery with mock- 
ery; alike and like as seed is sown, so shall 
the harvest come unto the sowers. Nei- 
ther shall evil and darkness and misery 
cease on the earth till I have disbanded the 
dealers in death; by My own hand will I 
liberate the nations of the earth; their ar- 
mies shall go away, like the winter's snow 
in sun of summer. To which end ye shall 
be My workers, with wisdom, love and 
power. 

CHAPTER XX. 

During the fourth year of dawn, the 
Voice of Jehovih came to Lika, saying: 
My Son, thou shalt provide thyself an ar- 
my sufficient, and thou shalt take away 
from the earth all angels below the first 
resurrection, save such fetals as are under 
the dominion of My heavenly rulers. And 
thou shalt provide them separate regions 
in My lower heavens, whence they can not 
return to mortals. And thou shalt appoint 
rulers and teachers over them, to deliver 
them out of madness and evil and stupor. 
Of thy etherean hosts shalt thou appoint 
teachers and rulers for this purpose; but at 
the end of dawn they shall deliver their 
places to atmosphereans selected from 
Theovrahkistan. From this time forth My 
atmosphereans shall begin to help one an- 
other, not depending for all teachers to 
come from My etherean heavens. 

Lika then called up At'yesonitus and 
told him of Jehovih's words, and further 
added: To thee do I therefore allot this 
labor. And I give unto thee twelve gen- 



4M 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



erals, for the different regions of the earth; 
and unto each of the twelve I allot five 
million ethereans, whom thou canst draw 
from the armies that were engaged in de- 
livering the hells and knots. 

At'yesonitus said: In Jehovih's will and 
thine, I am pleased. I will divide up the 
regions of the earth amongst the twelve 
generals, and give unto each one of them 
the five million, according to thy com- 
mandments. 

At'yesonitus then sent officers out into 
different regions in atmospherea to select 
the sixty million deliverers, commanding 
them to report in Theovrahkistan, in the 
Valley of Tish, his heavenly place, whither 
he took the twelve generals that Lika had 
assigned him. 

Lika gave to At'yesonitus a list of the 
spirits to be thus taken away from mor- 
tals; showing him the regions of the earth 
where they were most numerous. At'ye- 
sonitus then ordered the ship-builders to 
provide him twelve thousand fire-boats, 
with bulwarks of fire, and with gateways. 

In the meantime Lika sent Yussamis 
with four hundred geographers and math- 
ematicians and surveyors to find the neces- 
sary plateau to which At'yesonitus could 
send his captured hosts. Yussamis then 
founded the six heavenly plateaux known 
as the Ugsadisspe, a name signifying the 
Heaven of the Destroying Serpents. 

These, then were the six heavens of 
Ugsadisspe: Tewallawalla, over Ara- 
bin'ya, one thuosand two hundred miles 
high; Setee'song, over Vind'yu, one thou- 
sand miles high; Go'e'dhi, over Jaffeth, 
one thousand one hundred miles high; El- 
lapube, over Uropa, one thousand miles 
high; Apak, over North and South Guat- 
ama, six hundred miles high, and border- 
ing on Yaton'te, the subjective heaven of 
the ancients, which was now being re-es- 
tablished by Kaparos; and Fue, over Chi- 
huahi, nine thousand miles high. 

Yussamis provided these heavens with 
no roadways, in order to prevent the de- 
livered spirits flocking together, in which 
case they might run into anarchy. And, 
accordingly, appointed unto each of these 
heavens one ruler of the rank primal God, 
selecting them from the etherean hosts, 
but empowering them to bestow their 
thrones on successors at the end of dawn, 
giving terms of office not less than two 



hundred years, but subject to the limiting 
power of God of Theovrahkistan. 

Lika gave four thousand messengers to 
At'yesonitus, and twelve thousand messen- 
gers to Yussamis, to whom he also gave 
sixty million laborers. But each of them 
provided their own heralds, musicians, 
marshals and captains in their own way. 
Now, therefore, At'yesonitus and Yussa- 
mis, receiving their armies of laborers, fell 
to work, the former to delivering, and the 
latter to receiving the drujas of the earth. 
And Yussamis put his hosts to building 
houses and hospitals, heavenly places, and 
to founding cities and provinces through 
the primal Gods under him. 

CHAPTER XXI. 

Jehovih spake to Lika, saying: These 
are My ways; reveal thou Me unto them. 
They that know Me not, shall be made to 
know Me; My labors shall rise up before 
them, and their understanding shall be 
opened. They shall know what I mean 
when I say I will destroy or I will build 
up. I have heard man in his vanity, that 
judgeth Me. His eyes are on the earth 
only, and in houses and riches. Because I 
take them away from him, he complaineth 
against Me. 

I gave man an example in his own 
child that delighteth in sweets, and idleness 
and vain pleasures. Man taketh these 
from his child, saying: Behold, they are 
not good for thee, save in temperance! 
Wherein have I injured thee, O man? 
Wherein destroyed I aught that contribut- 
ed to thy spirit? Wherein have I suffered 
destruction to come upon thee, whilst thou 
followedst My commandments? Why shalt 
thou complain because I laid great cities 
in ashes? Sawest thou the millions of dru- 
jas thou wert holding down in darkness by 
thy evil habits? 

I am not in anger, nor pull 1 down, nor 
burn I up any place in a passion. As thou 
goest forth to destroy a row of houses to 
stay a great conflagration, shall the people 
murmur? For thy hand is stretched forth 
to do a good work for the whole city. 

My heavens are magnified cities, and 
when a mortal wing offendeth, behold, I 
clip it short. They are all Mine; and none 
can question My authority with Mine own. 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



445 



which I wield for the resurrection of the 
whole. 

Thou hast wept because of the destruc- 
tion of the books of great learning of the 
ancients; but thou knowest not thine own 
words. Saw I not, O man, that thou 
wouldst never wean thyself from the doc- 
trines of the dark ages if the books of 
great learning were not destroyed! In all 
ages of the world thou hast been bound to 
the ancients; thou art forever searching 
backward for wisdom; and to the angels of 
the dead who pretend to be ancients. I 
behold the latter, and that they are drujas. 
I send wise angels down to them to deliver 
them out of darknesss. And they come 
and bear the drujas away from thee, for 
thine own good and theirs. My wise an- 
gels suffer mortals to burn up the books 
of the ancients; for I command them to 
make thee open thine understanding to the 
living present. 

Jehovih spake to At'yesonitus, and 
through him to the twelve Gods of deliver- 
ance, saying: Go forth, My son, in wis- 
dom and power. Thy labor requireth great 
strength and stratagems. For thou shalt 
find the drujas fast bound to mortals and 
to mortal habitations. As a drowning man 
clingeth to a log, so cling the drujas to 
mortals. As a delirious man, mad with 
drunkenness, flieth in fear from his best 
friends, so will the drujas fly from thee, 
and thy hosts who shall attempt to de- 
liver them. They will inspire their mortals 
to dread an innovation of the ancient doc- 
trines. Yea, the twain, not knowing it, 
will bind themselves together with great 
tenacity. 

But thou shalt deliver them apart nev- 
ertheless; by stratagem, or persuasion, or 
with a strong hand. And when thou hast 
them separate, thou shalt surround the dru- 
jas with flames of fire, and carry them off 
to the boats, which are bulwarked with 
fire. And thou shalt deliver them in the 
places My Son, Yussamis, hath ready pre- 
pared for them. 

Thou shalt not only deliver the drujas, 
but cause mortals to hate them. Mortal 
kings shall issue edicts against magicians 
and prophets and seers and priests; and 
the consultation of spirits shall come to 
an end. And man on the earth shall turn 
to his own soul, which is My light within 



him, and he shall cultivate it and learn to 
think for himself. 

At'yesonitus prepared a record to give 
to mortals, and it was by inspiration so 
given. And the nature of the record was 
to teach mortals to be guarded against 
drujas, and know who was afflicted with 
them. This is said record, as it standeth 
in the libraries of heaven: 

The man that saith: I pity my neigh- 
bors, they are surrounded with drujas! 

The man that saith: Fools only believe 
in obsession! 

The man that saith: There is no All 
Person! 

The man that saith: My way is wis- 
dom; thine is wicked! 

The man that saith: Let no one dictate 
to me! I will have nothing but liberty to 
the uttermost! 

The man that saith: As the priest 
thinketh, so do I! 

The man that saith: The ancients were 
wiser than we! 

The man that saith: Whoso seeth not 
as I do is a heathen! 

The man that saith: Whoso worship- 
ped not my God is wicked! 

The man that saith: Wisdom is book- 
learning! 

The man that saith: There is no wis- 
dom in books! 

The man that saith: My book is sa- 
cred; it containeth the sum of all revela- 
tion and inspiration! 

The man that saith: There is no inspir- 
ation, nor words thereof! 

The followers of the ancients only. 

He who will have nothing to do with 
the ancients. 

He who ignoreth rites and ceremonies 
and prayers. 

He who dependeth on rites and ceremo- 
nies and prayers. 

Whoso denieth the Ever Present Per- 
son. 

Whoso followeth the counsel of angels 
or men. 

Whoso will not learn from the counsel 
of men and angels. 

Whoso feeleth prayers and confessions 
to be good for others, but not necessary 
for himself. Or saith: I will lead and su- 
pervise; be thou my servant. 



446 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



Or saith: Behold my rights! Or: Be- 
hold my earnings. Or: Behold my pos- 
sessions! 

Or talketh of himself and his experi- 
ences. Or tattleth of others. Or judgeth 
his brother, or criticiseth him. 

The self-righteous, who saith: Behold, 
me, I am holy! 

Or who desireth not new light, or saith: 
The old is good enough! 

Whoso laboreth for himself only. 

Whoso laboreth not for others in his 
wisdom and strength. 

That seeketh his own ease. 

That considereth not others' welfare 
more than his own. 

The hypocrite preaching one way and 
practicing another. 

That speaketh not openly his doctrines, 
lest his words profit not his earthly means 
and associations. 

At'yesonitus said: For these are all as 
much under the bondage of drujas as is 
the drunkard, or harlot, or murderer. And 
after death their spirits float into the same 
hada of darkness. 

CHAPTER XXII. 

When At'yesonitus' generals and their 
hosts went through Vind'yu and Jaffeth 
and Arabin'ya, they concerted with the 
Gods who had in charge the inspiration of 
Capilya, Moses and Chine. And not only 
did the angel generals remove the drujas 
from mortals, but inspired mortal kings 
and queens in those great divisions of the 
earth to issue edicts against magicians and 
priests who consulted with spirits. 

Jehovih had said: It shall be a testi- 
mony in the latter days unto the inhabit- 
ants of the earth of My proceedings; not 
with one division of the earth only, but 
with all places. For they shall in after 
years search history and find that in the 
same era in these three great divisions of 
the earth the kings and queens issued 
edicts against spirit communion. And this 
fact shall be testimony of My arc of Bon; 
wherein man shall understand that I come 
not in one corner of the earth only, and to 
one people only; but that I have them all 
in My charge, as a Father that knoweth 
his own children. 

Neither give I unto them the same as- 
pirations; for one I send westward to cir- 



cumscribe the earth; one I build up with a 
multitude of languages, and a multitude of 
Gods; and the third one I build up without 
any God save Myself. And they shall un- 
derstand that where there are many lan- 
guages there are many Gods worshipped; 
where there is one language, there is only 
One worshipped, even Me, the Great 
Spirit. For in kosmon I will bring them 
together; and these diversities shall be as. 
a key to unlock the doctrines and lan- 
guages of times and seasons long past. 

Man living away from other men be- 
cometh conceited in himself, deploring the 
darkness of others, and great nations be- 
come conceited of themselves and of their 
doctrines. Each one of the great peoples 
saying: Behold yonder barbarians! I was. 
chosen in His especial care. Those others 
are only heathens, and have not been wor- 
thy of the Great Spirit's concern. 

But in this day I plant the seed of My 
testimony, which shall come up and blos- 
som and bear fruit in three thousand years. 

At'yesonitus and his generals, with their 
millions of angel hosts, extended east and 
west and north and south, around all the 
earth, in all divisions thereof, into every 
nook and corner. Day and night, At'yeson- 
itus and his armies labored, ceased not nor 
rested, but in good method went right on, 
filling all the lowest place of heaven with 
their transport boats of fire. And the boats, 
sped hither and yonder without ceasing, 
loaded in their ascent with the screaming, 
frightened drujas, all under guard, and 
duly preserved against accident or harm 
by the wise angels over them. 

Some drujas were easily captured and 
carried away; some weak, helpless and 
harmless; but hundreds of millions of 
them mad, and most desperate; some evil,, 
fearful in desperate oaths, and foul talk,. 
and dangerous withal. But others were, 
most pitiful in their love to linger with 
their mortal kindred; mothers, whose 
children dwelt on the earth; and children, 
spirits, whose mothers dwelt on the 
earth. To separate them and carry away 
such drujas was a most heart-rending task,, 
requiring God-like souls to accomplish it. : 

Jehovih had said: As a mortal mother 
will cling to the mortal body of her dead 
child, till her friends must tear them apart,, 
whilst all who look on are broken- 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



447 



hearted because of her love, even such is 
the bond betwixt the spirit of the dead and 
the mortal yet left behind. But when My 
wise angels look upon them, and perceive 
they are carrying each other down in 
darkness, then shall they be torn asunder; 
and the spirit shall be taken away and pro- 
vided for ultimate resurrection, and only 
permitted to visit the mortal kin under due 
guardianship. 

On the battlefields of the earth were 
hundreds of millions of spirits in chaos, 
still fighting imaginary battles, not know- 
ing their bodies were dead; knowing 
naught but to curse and fight; roving over 
the battlefields, and would not away, save 
by capture and being carried ofT. Thus did 
At'yesonitus and his mighty hosts clear 
the earth. But of their great labors and 
wonderful adventures a thousand books 
might be written. 

And yet not much less were the labors 
and adventures of Yussamis in Ugsadisspe 
and her six heavenly places, where his 
etherean hosts labored unceasingly, prepar- 
ing places, and keepers, and nurses, and 
physicians, and teachers for the delivered 
drujas, the thousands of millions. 

Jehovih said unto Yussamis: Thou 
shalt assort the drujas; the peaceful to 
themselves; the dumb to themselves; the 
mad, chaotic, and all other of My afflicted 
ones; providing sections and places for 
them. And teachers and nurses and phys- 
icians; for they shall be delivered out of 
darkness also. Yea, every one of them 
shall become as a star of glory in heaven. 

And Yussamis and his Gods developed 
the six heavens of Ugsadisspe; established 
places for the tens of millions of drujas; 
and provided order and discipline, and al- 
tars of worship, and schools, and colleges, 
and factories, and all things whatsoever 
required in a primary heaven. 

CHAPTER XXIII. 

Jehovih spake to Lika, saying: Behold, 
the end of dawn draWeth near; go thou 
once more around about Earth and her 
heavens, and examine into the labor of thy 
Gods. And thou shalt take with the thy 
Rapon hosts, and a sufficient number of 
heralds and attendants, and such musicians 
and messengers as thou desirest. And 
when thou art come to Yaton'te, My sub- 



jective heaven, thou shalt halt a while 
with Kaparos, and re-establish it in great- 
er holiness and efficiency. For this is Mine 
only subjective heaven in the regions of the 
red star. 

Behold, the spirits of those that die in 
infancy call out to Me, saying: Tell us, 
O Thou Creator, how is it with the earth? 
How is it with mortals who dwell on the 
earth? What do they toil at? Have they 
schools and hospitals and factories, like 
unto ours? Have mortals mishaps and 
trials? And have they roadways, and 
oceans of water on the hard earth? How 
can these things be, O Jehovih? Why is 
it that mortals cannot go down into the 
earth and into the bottoms of their oceans, 
even as we do in the heavens? 

How didst Thou create us alive in the 
earth? What was the place like? Why do 
mortals carry around with them such earth- 
houses? Cannot they go in them and out 
of them at pleasure? What do mortals 
mean, O Jehovih, by mortal life and mor- 
tal death? Doth the clay and stone and 
water they dwell in have life and death? 

Shall every one retain his own body? 
How do the earth bodies grow? Do they 
eat clay and stone? And water? Where 
do they get their blood? And do they eat 
hair, that they may have earth hair? Why 
is it that they bring not up their bodies 
with them when they are dead? Wear they 
clothes over the spirit body only, or over 
the earth body also? 

Great are Thy works, O Jehovih! Take 
me to Yaton'te, Thy great subjective hea- 
ven. We would learn by figures in panto- 
mime the illustrations of the earth. We 
would learn by Thy panoramic heaven what 
mortals do? How they live and what their 
schools are like? How they have contrived 
to teach the corporeal senses by corporeal 
things? How their boats are made and 
propelled; how their vehicles travel along 
upon the solid earth. 

For which reason, O Lika, thou shalt 
see to it that Yaton'te be perfected unto 
this instruction, as welLas to arouse from 
stupor the spirits of the dead who desire 
not to rise up from the earth. 

Lika told the Rapon hosts Jehovih's 
words; and he also gave command to his 
chief marshal to provide the necessary ote- 
van with officers, heralds, musucians and 



448 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



messengers. Accordingly, as soon as all 
things were in readiness, Lika committed 
the throne of Jehovih, in Theovrahkistan, 
to his vice-Goddess, and Lika and the Ra- 
pons, with their attendant hosts, departed 
on their journey. 

Now, since the time of Lika in the pla- 
teau of Theovrahkistan, it had become 
habited by thousands of millions of angels, 
and they were high in the grades. So that 
the officers of selection were already pre- 
paring them by the millions for Brides and 
Bridegrooms to Jehovih. And there were 
thousands of heavenly cities besides Yo- 
gannaqactra, which were now in beauty, 
gaiety, refinement and delight, with music 
and rites and ceremonies most magnificent. 
Then there were officers over these offi- 
cers, whose place it was to sort and ar- 
range the inhabitants of cities; and others 
over these for each one hundred and for- 
ty-four cities; and yet another over these 
officers, and he was called Marshal of 
Theovrahkistan. And he was of the same 
rank as the marshals of the hosts of Lika, 
conferring with the Marshal in Chief of Je- 
hovih's throne. 

CHAPTER XXIV. 

Jehovih said to Lika: Finish thy visit 
and thy inspection, My Son, in all the 
places of hada on the earth, leaving the 
land of Jaffeth to the last. And thou shalt 
go thither, at the time of Chine's resur- 
rection, and descend with thy ship and 
take him up from the earth. And shalt 
bring him with the to Yogannaqactra, 
where he shall remain the few days that 
dawn remaineth; and when thy hosts as- 
cend to etherea thou shalt take Chine with 
thee and make thy home his home until 
such time as he may be taught the ways 
and powers of the higher haevens. For 
since his corporeal life is a sacrifice for the 
resurrection of men, he shall receive espe- 
cial care and assistance in heaven. 

Lika had been previously informed by 
the God of Chine as to the time Chine 
would die, his body burnt, and the ashes 
scattered to the four winds; and the re- 
gathering up of a corporeal form of Chine, 
and the seven days' duration thereof. So 
Lika shaped the course of his otevan, ac- 
cording to the instruction of his messen- 
gers, who had been appointed for that pur- 



pose, so that he should reach the field <in 
time to raise up Chine before the multi- 
tude. 

The God of Chine had prophesied to 
mortals through his ward that a fire-ship 
would descend from heaven on a given 
day, and take Chine up to heaven. Ac- 
cordingly a great multitude of mortals were 
assembled in the field, where they cast the 
ashes of the dead, watching for the heaven- 
ly ship. 

Of which matters Lika had been previ- 
ously informed by his messengers; and 
Lika had in turn informed the God of 
Chine the time he would appear with the 
ship, that he might cause Chine to walk in 
the midst of the field and so be caught up. 
And all these matters were carried out in 
the hands of these great Gods. 

And Lika caused the fire of the ship to 
be made visible to mortals. And the size 
of the ship was ten times larger than the 
field of the dead, so that when the people 
beheld the light of the ship they feared and 
trembled, and many of them fell down be- 
wailing that the world was coming to an 
end. And God caused Chine to walk out 
in the field, and Lika sent down a whirl- 
wind and took him up into the ship, in 
presence of tens of thousands of mortals 
assembled. And Lika bore his course now 
for Yogannaqactra, for the end of the 
dawn of Bon was at hand. 

CHAPTER XXV. 

Lika sent messengers to all his Gods 
and Lords, to install their successors, and 
to bestow them; after which the Gods and 
Lords were to report in Theovrahkistan 
ready for the cyclic resurrection. And he 
commanded them to bring their etherean 
hosts with them, save such as chose to 
volunteer to remain until the next dan, two 
hundred years. 

Lika had previously sent word by his 
siwft messengers to etherea, to Lissa, God- 
dess of Teannakak, in etherea, next to 
Howgil. And he said unto Lissa: My res- 
urrection will be eight links, each one equal 
to eight thousand million Brides and 
Bridegrooms. Send thou a cowppon to 
deliver them. 

Lissa sent word back to Lika, saying: 
O Jehovih, I am delighted with the com- 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



mand of Thy Son, Chief of Vetta'puissa! I 
will deliver the chain of cowppon. 

Then Lissa gave her commands in Te- 
annakak, to have her builders construct 
the cowppon; and she also set her officers 
to work selecting such hosts as she would 
need for her great undertaking. For she 
had been notified in sufficient time; for it 
was a matter of great magnitude even in 
etherean realms. And so perfectly were 
Lissa's commands carried out, that every- 
thing was completed at the appointed time. 
And then she embarked with her hosts for 
the red star, Earth, with her thousand mill- 
ion; on her long journey, twenty thousand 
million miles! 

Jehovih had said: Carry far My Brides 
and Bridegrooms; make them know the 
magnificence of the heavens I have created. 
House them not together in a small cor- 
ner. Let them feast their souls on the 
splendors of My great heavens! 

In the meantime Lika and his hosts in 
Theovrahkistan were getting ready for the 
ceremonies and for the ascension. The 
Gods, with their hosts, were now coming 
in from every quarter of the lower heavens, 
bringing in their harvests and quartering 
them in the places allotted by the mar- 
shals. 

Most conspicuous and beloved of all 
was Ahura. Next to him were the five 
true Gods: Inane, Injek, Inlay, Inoal and 
Inyith, with their heavenly hosts restored 
to them; for it was through these five 
Gods that the three mortals, Capilya, 
Moses and Chine, had delivered the Faith- 
ists of Vind'yu, Jaffeth and Arabin'ya. 
These five Gods had in five years changed 
the mortal dominions and laws of Vind'yu 
and Jaffeth, and sent four million Faithists 
on a westward journey round the earth; 
and had firmly established the All One in 
the four great divisions of the earth, and 
had delivered from bondage all the Faith- 
ists on the face of the earth. 

Great also was the work accomplished 
by At'yesonitus, and by Yusammis; and by 
the Gods that had delivered the hells and 
the knots; and by many others. So good 
and great were the works of them all, that 
a history of any one of them in the five 
years' labor would make a book that a man 
could not read in a lifetime. And they had 
left successors to carry out what they had 



founded; so that all the lower heavens 
were in order, system and discipline, such 
as had not been for two thousand years. 

The drujas of the earth were removed 
away from mortals; the battlefields of the 
earth were cleared of the chaotic spirits 
slain in wars. So that the whole Earth and 
her heavens were delivered into a new con- 
dition, in the way and form of Jehovih's 
light. And this was the deliverance of the 
arc of Bon. 

Then descended Lissa with her chain of 
cowppon; with her ships fo fire stretched 
wide as Earth. And the hosts of Theo- 
vrahkistan, the Brides and Bridegrooms, 
sixty-four thousand million Sons and 
Daughters of Jehovih, stood, waiting, 
watching, nervous, but filled with inex- 
pressible delight. And they saw the cowp- 
pon coming; knew the mission of the 
mighty Goddess, Lissa, Daughter of Jeho- 
vih! 

Arrayed in spotless white, the sixty- 
four thousand million stood; the exalted 
affianced of Great Jehovih! 

Nearer and nearer came the mighty sea 
of etherean fire; and nearer, till it landed 
at the plateau of Theovrahkistan. Then 
came forth Lissa, saluting; and, being an- 
swered by great Lika, Jehovih's Son, pro- 
ceeded before Jehovih's throne. Then Lis- 
sa demanded in the usual form, why she 
had been summoned in Jehovih's name. 
Lika answered in the usual form: To be- 
stow Jehovih's affianced Sons and Daugh- 
ters. 

After this, each of the five Gods of 
Earth took their hosts and bequeathed 
them to Jehovih, through Lissa, His 
Daughter. 

But so great and grand were the cere- 
monies that mortal words cannot describe 
them. And as for the awe and magnifi- 
cence, together with the music, could they 
be described to mortals, understandingly, 
they scarce could live, because of the en- 
chantment. 

But there is a time, and an end 
to all such matters; and so there was 
to the labor of Lika, Son of Jehovih. The 
hosts were wed, and they marched aboard 
the great etherean ships, the cowppon. 
Lika and his hosts went into his own aira- 



450 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



vagna. And, as it were, with a thread of 
light, he made fast to the cowppon, and 
gave the word, the command to go. Then 
rose up the mighty seas of fire, the eight- 
linked cowppon and the airavagna! Slow- 
ly, steadily moving onward, upward, high- 
er and higher, faster and faster, and still 
higher. And thus departed Lika with his 
thousands of millions of upraised Sons and 
Daughters of Jehovih. And thus ended the 
dawn of the arc of Bon. 

CHAPTER XXVI. 

This is the labor of God after the dawn 
of the cycle of Lika: 

God crowned four thousand four hun- 
dred Lords, and titled them Lords of the 
Heavenly Hosts. And God allotted to each 
one of them one hundred messengers and 
fifty heralds, and gave them authority to 
provide their own attendants in their own 
way. 

God said: When ye are within your 
own kingdoms, ye shall appoint representa- 
tives unto my throne. And there shall be 
of such representative Lords one for every 
four hundred Lords of the Hosts. And 
the representative Lords shall be speakers 
for the kigndoms that appoint them, and 
have power on important occasions to sum- 
mon to my throne all their constituent 
Lords. And the representative Lords shall 
be known in heaven and entered in the li- 
braries thereof as the Holy Eleven, for 
they are symbolical of the seasons of the 
earth. 

Therefore the Lords of the Hosts elect- 
ed their Holy Eleven, and God anointed 
them, and their names were entered in the 
libraries of heaven. These then are their 
names: Likar, Lakesh, Yopes Leo,, Vad- 
huan, Ah Cho, Zahawee, Eezen, Khan, 
Zedna, Yutemis and Ardolfus. And God 
gave authority to the Holy Eleven to speak 
before the throne, after the manner of the 
Councils of the higher heavens. So, the 
Lords of the Hosts departed to their sev- 
eral kingdoms. But the Holy Eleven were 
duly installed and took their places in front 
of the throne of God. 

CHAPTER XXVII. 

And God appointed two thousand su- 
pervisors unto each of the Holy Eleven; 
and eight thousand eight hundred captains 



of roads, and said to them: Go ye and 
build roadways between all the heavenly 
kingdoms in atmospherea. And I gave 
unto you two thousand million laborers, to 
be divided between you, according to the 
distances and places of the roads. And 
God gave authority to Toyvrahghah to ex- 
amine the records and make the appor- 
tionment of officers and laborers on the 
roads, and he thus accomplished these 
things. God said: My heavens shall be 
divided into eleven parts, one unto each 
of the Holy Eleven, The said eleven di- 
visions were accomplished and thus named: 
Sinyativi, Horak, Damaya, Ad' dam, Ho- 
sea, Harivya, Sinisyo, Amset, Godessa, 
Itero and Aroqu. 

Damaya, Ad'dam and Hosea comprised 
all the lowest hadan regions; and these 
three divisions extended around the earth, 
and were twelve miles high. 

Sinyativi, Horak and Amset comprised 
the next grade of heavenly kingdoms out- 
ward from the earth, and were one thou- 
sand miles high, more or less. 

Godessa and Itero were the next grade 
of heavenly kingdoms outward from the 
earth, and were two thousand miles high. 
Harivya was next, and was outward from 
the earth two thousand five hundred miles. 
And next after this was Aroqu, which was 
three thousand miles above the earth. 
And yet there were thousands of plateaux 
still further away from the earth, and with- 
in her vortex, but -uninhabited. As for 
Aroqu and Harivya, they were inhabited 
mostly by angels of the highest atmospher- 
ean grades. 

God said: From this time forth all es'- 
yans shall be maintained within the first 
sphere of hada, within the regions of Dam- 
aya and Ad'dam and Hosea. And as they 
rise in wisdom and strength, they shall ad- 
vance in place as well as grade, going in 
the direction of Harivya and Aroqu, from 
which all resurrections for the etherean 
worlds shall take place. 

And God caused the boundaries of Ad'- 
dam and Hosea to embrace the eastern 
continents of Earth; but Damaya embrac- 
ed the western. 

To the Lords of the Hosts, God had 
said: The great love that mortals have 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



451 



for their kindred who are dead, is like a 
cord forever pulling their souls back to 
earth. Neither do mortals understand my 
heavens, and that the soul of man should 
rise upward. They cry out unto me contin- 
ually: O God, send thou back to me the 
spirit of my kin! And they do not under- 
stand that their prayers are in opposition 
to the resurrection of spirits of the dead. 
And likewise doth the es'yan cry out to 
me: O God, take me back to my mortal 
kin! For he also comprehendeth not the 
resurrection, but in the gratification of his 
love would linger forever on the earth. 
Suffer ye not mortals to commune with the 
spirits of the dead. 

And the Lords carried out the com- 
mandment of God. 

CHAPTER XXVIII. 

At the time the roadways of Earth's 
heavens were completed, which was in the 
three hundred and ninetieth year of the 
cycle of Lika, this was the standing there- 
of: 

There had ascended, as Brides and 
Bridegrooms, for etherea, thirty-six thou- 
sand millions; nearly one-half of whom 
were from the kigndoms of Anuhasaj and 
his sub-Gods. And now inhabiting the 
five spheres, forty-eight thousand million 
spirits. In the first sphere, or hada, in 
which there were two thousand four hun- 
dred heavenly kingdoms, the grades were 
from one to seven. 

In the second sphere, which ranked first 
resurrection in those days, the grades were 
from seven to fifteen. In these regions 
there were ten thousand heavenly king- 
doms. 

In the third sphere the grades were 
from fifteen to thirty. In these regions 
there were four thousand heavenly king- 
doms. And including the kingdoms of 
Anuhasaj, five thousand more kingdoms. 

In the fourth sphere, the grades were 
from thirty to sixty, and there were one 
thousand five hundred heavenly kingdoms 
in these regions. 

In the fifth sphere, the grades were 
from sixty to ninety-nine, and here were 
one thousand heavenly kingdoms. 

And yet, not included in these, were the 
kingdoms of Yaton'te, the subjective 



heaven, a visiting place, and with but 
a small fixed population, but whose 
visitors and students and teachers num- 
bered three thousand million angels, 
graded from one to ninety-nine. But 
many of these belonged in other hea- 
venly kingdoms. Such then were the in- 
habitants of the bound heavens. And they 
numbered, all told, forty-eight times more 
people than the mortal inhabitants of the 
earth. But in those days not many women 
on the earth committed abortions; neither 
died so many very young children; so that 
the fetals sent back to inhabit mortals num- 
bered, all told, only two hundred and thir- 
ty million. Whilst of vampire spirits, of 
both classes, such as inhabit gormandizers, 
gluttons, drunkards, and harlots, absorb- 
ing their spiritual sustenance, and thus 
making them breeders of infidels; and such 
as live on the atmospherean part of mortal 
food, thus causing their mortal victims to 
emaciate and to become insane), there 
were, all told, not more than forty-six 
million. Besides these, there were thirty- 
one million lusters, who feed on the se- 
cret vices of mortals; who were being for- 
ever pursued from place to place by ash- 
ars, and often captured and carried away 
to heavenly kingdoms; but would often es- 
cape and flee back to mortals. Yet, with 
all these fetals, and vampires and lusters 
included, nev^r before had Earth remained 
so long in so pure a state. 

When the roadways were completed, 
God proclaimed seven days' recreation in 
all the kingdoms of heaven, in order that 
the inhabitants should sing and dance and 
render praise unto Jehovih for the great 
works that had been accomplished. And 
on the last of the seven days, Toyvraghah 
assigned the roads over to God, and named 
them Roads of Paradise. Whereupon God 
crowned Toyvraghah, Primal God of the 
Roads of Paradise, of twelve hundred thou- 
sand miles. 

God said: After the manner of the gov- 
ernment of the etherean heavens do I these 
things. And as the kingdoms and spheres 
of my heavens are situated, within and 
without, with their roadways and heavenly 
canals, forming one great kingdom with 
many parts, it shall be a type of the king- 
doms in etherea, which are thousands of 
times larger. 



452 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



CHAPTER XXIX. 

Jehovih said: I gave to man legs and 
feet to walk; arms and hands to work, 
eyes to see, and ears to hear; and, withal, 
the capacity to reflect and comprehend and 
understand. I gave none of these capaci- 
ties to man to lie dormant or to be useless. 
Neither can any man advance to My high- 
est kingdoms if crippled, or weak, or un- 
cultivated, in all or in part of these talents 
I have given him. But he shall be perfect- 
ed in all particulars before he is capacitated 
for companionship with my exalted ones. 

God said: It mattereth little what kind 
of work a man doeth; for one may till the 
soil, and thus train his hands and arms to 
full development; and another may weave, 
or spin, or forge iron, and also attain full 
development. It is not the kind of labor, 
but the develpoment that comes of useful 
practice, which maketh talent to stand 
upright in heaven as a glory to the Crea- 
tor. 

For there are servants on earth, who 
neither read nor write, that are better de- 
veloped in their talents and members than 
many of the rich, and kings and philoso- 
phers. And when they die and enter my 
heavenly places, the ranks and caste in my 
kingdoms seem to them to be upside-down. 
The rich man, or the king, or the pleader, 
or priest, or the philosopher, may be as a 
helpless child, whilst he wfto was a ser- 
vant on earth may be as a very God over 
them to lift them up. Neither is the pref- 
erence to the rich, nor the poor, nor to the 
philosopher, nor the fool; for any of these 
may be as dwarfs in some talent or part, 
whilst also any of these may be a most 
perfect man in spirit. 

So, God established, through his high- 
raised officers, schools and colleges and 
factories, heavenly, adapted to the spirits 
of the dead even as similar places are es- 
tablished on the earth for mortals. 

CHAPTER XXX. 

Aside from the orderly kingdoms of 
God, there were seven false kingdoms in 
hada, ruled over by false Gods and false 
Goddesses. Chief of these were Baal, with 
four thousand million angel slaves; the 
false Yima, with four thousand million an- 
gel slaves; Ashtaroth, false Goddess, with 



three thousand million angel slaves; So- 
donius, Goddess, with two million angel 
slaves, and then came Fue-Sin, Hrivatza. 
Beside these there were six hundred false 
Lords and Lordesses, who had occupied 
the mortal temples of worship, and the or- 
acle temples. But the latter were driven 
away from mortals by command of God, 
that they might be induced to seek resur- 
rection. God foresaw that the travel of 
Earth would cause her to pass through an 
a'ji'an forest of four hundred years, and 
that darkness would be upon the lower 
heavens. And God sent down to the 
earth angel inspectors, numerators and re- 
corders to prepare the record of mortals 
for the libraries of heaven. And there 
were of inspectors, four hundred angels; 
of numerators, twelve thousand; and grad- 
ers, ninety thousand; and of bearers, six 
hundred thousand. Besides these were the 
messengers, heralds and musicians, of 
whom there were sixty thousand. Such 
was the army sent down to the earth ac- 
cording to God's command. And they 
were in charge of Toyvraghah and Yulis 
and Hagonte and Rufus. 

And God called the great mathemati- 
cians, Yahimus, Menres, Fargawitha, How- 
itchkal, Jemima, Jordan, Molakka, Kos- 
situs, Makkas and Agebon; and God said 
unto them: The time of the fall of a'ji on 
Earth is at hand. Compute ye the regions 
of the earth where it will fall most; and 
having determined, go ye to the mortal 
prophets who are su'is, and cause them 
to prophesy unto the inhabitants of the 
earth. 

The mathematicians saluted and depart- 
ed for the earth, as commanded. Now 
when the time of darkness was near at 
hand, God commanded his Holy Coun- 
cil and his heavenly kingdoms to 
pray to Jehovih for the space of one day, 
for wisdom and strength. In answer to 
their prayers, there came a swift messen- 
ger from Lika, Orian Chief, Son of Jeho- 
vih; he came from Takuspe, in the ether- 
ean worlds, in an etherean arrow-ship, 
with thirty thousand. His name was, Yo- 
taportas, God of Eriasa, in the plains of 
Woo'-Sin. And when he had come be- 
fore the throne of God, duly saluting, he 
said: 

In Jehovih's name I come, greeting by 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



453 



His Son, Lika. God said: In Jehovih's 
name I am blessed by thy presence, God of 
Eriasa, Nirvanian Host. What wouldst 
thou? 

Yotaportas said: By command of Je- 
hovih, through His exalted Son, thou shalt 
withdraw thine emissaries from the king- 
doms of Baal and Ashtaroth, and from all 
kingdoms on the earth, whose mortals pay 
obedience to false Gods. A'ji of four hun- 
dred years will fall upon Earth and her 
heavens. It is so decreed and provided by 
the Holy Etherean Dispensers of roads in 
Vragapathon. Of which matters I am sent 
to thee that thou mayest be duly provided 
for. The time is also now at hand when the 
I'hins will cease to dwell on the earth. 
The darkness which is necessary to Earth 
will be too much for them. The heavens 
that have heretofore received their spirits 
shall be dissolved, and the plateaux thereof 
removed to the outer rim of Earth's vor- 
tex. 

The Lords' reports showed there were 
at this time on the earth two million three 
hundred thousand I'hins. Of these, seven 
hundred thousand inhabited Egupt and 
western Arabin'ya; two hundred thousand 
inhabited Chine'ya, the Jaffeth of the an- 
cients; and the balance, for the most part, 
inhabited North Guatama and toward 
Hon'ya-pan. Such, then, were all that re- 
mained of a people that once covered the 
whole earth. 

God declared a day of recreation in hon- 
or of Yotaportas; and the angels of hea- 
ven had great rejoicing. And on the day 
following, Yotaportas, with his hosts, de- 
parted for Eriasa, in etherea. 

CHAPTER XXXI. 

Toyvraghah, Hagonte, Yulis and Ru- 
fus, with their hosts, returned from their 
voyage to the earth, and brought records 
of the standing of mortals in all the tribes 
and nations of the earth, and of their num- 
bers, and their grades and generations, and 
of the Faithists in all the different regions 
of the earth, and of idolaters, and of all 
matters pertaining to mortals, and these 
records were filed in the libraries of hea- 
en, and a copy of them sent to the ether- 
ean regions in the roadway of Earth and 
her heavens. 



Of Faithists, there were thirty-one mill- 
ion three hundred thousand. In Chine'- 
ya, thirteen million seven hundred thou 
sand; in Vind'yu three million three hun- 
dred thousand; in western Arabin'ya, 
six million two hundred thousand, and 
in North Guatama, eight million one 
hundred thousand. And of all the rest erf 
the inhabitants of the earth, there were 
eleven hundred million. Of these, upward 
of ninety-seven per cent, were capable of 
everlasting life. The Faithists of Chine'ya: 
Though they maintained the rites and cer- 
emonies of the ancients, lived not wholly 
as a separate people, save in a few places. 
But they were the head and front of learn- 
ing and of teaching all the applied arts 
and industries. Whilst the idolaters of Joss 
and Te-in and Po were less learned. 

God said of Chine'ya: Whoso shapeth 
the education of a people will ultimately 
found them in their own doctrines. The 
Faithists will make these people a great 
people. Nevertheless great wars are near 
at hand here. The idolaters, being war- 
riors, will suffer most; and the Faithists, 
who practice peace, will greatly gain upon 
them. 

The Faithists of Vind'yu lived in fami- 
ilies and small colonies; they practiced the 
rites and ceremonies; nor were there any 
laws against them, as in the olden times. 
But because of the many languages in this 
country, all peoples were afflicted. God 
said: No people can advance much whilst 
they have many languages. 

The Faithists of western Arabin'ya, 
who, for the most part, called themselves 
Israelites, two branches still remained; 
those who lived under the oral law, and 
those who lived under the written law. 
The latter were called Leviticans. The Le- 
viticans were not scrupulous as regardeth 
war and the preservation of their seed. 
And in consequence of their sins they 
brought great shame upon the Faithists in 
general. And the Leviticans' examples 
were evil, and they gained in numbers fast- 
er than the Oralites. The Leviticans wor- 
shipped the Great Spirit under the names, 
Lord and God. As for the Oralites, so 
called 'because their doctrines and teach- 
ings were secret and only taught orally, 
they were non-resistants, and owned no- 
thing, giving all things to the rab'bah for 



454 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



the public good. Their practice was love 
and harmony; doing righteously in all 
things, and trusting to Jehovih, Whom 
they worshipped under the name E-O-lh. 
All the prophets and seers were born of 
the Oralists. And so great was the spirit- 
ual power of the Oralites, that during all 
these hundreds of years the Faithists, six 
million, had lived without king or govern- 
or, being a multitude of communities. 

The Faithists of Guatama were little 
learned, but were peaceful and industrious. 
And they comprised all the inhabitants, ex- 
cept the I'hins, in all the land. And they 
also lived without kings or governors. 
And every city was ruled over by a rab'- 
bah, and a group of cities by a chief 
rab'bah. And the tribes were made into 
states, with chief rab'bahs as representa- 
tives, and these states were united into a 
great government called, The Algonquin. 
And all the governments were made and 
maintained for the benefit of tribes that 
might suffer by famines or fevers. And 
yet there was not amongst all these mill- 
ions of people one tyrant or dictator. 

CHAPTER XXXII. 

And now came Earth and her heavens 
into the a'ji'an forest of Aghanodis, and 
the pressure was upon all sides of Earth's 
vortex. And the heavenly kingdoms were 
stirred up; and the nations of the earth 
were in trial. 

In the great city of Paradise, heavenly 
seat of God, were the multitudes of angels, 
the thousands of millions made to look up- 
ward, outward, to know the Almighty. 
As a'ji driveth the weak angels out of hea- 
ven to seek a lower field, so doth it on 
earth drive polluted nations to war and to 
avarice and to death.. When the second 
shower of a dozen years had fallen, mor- 
tals in many nations on the earth rushed 
into war. And even the Faithists began to 
clamor for kings and standing armies, with 
great captains and generals, to lead them on 
to mortal dominion. The Israelites made 
a mortal king, and by their behavior, said: 
Rather man than Jehovih. Behold, we 
will have the Lord with us to fight our 
battles! And Baal, God of the idolaters, 
heard and saw, and gloried in the course; 
and he hastened to the scene with millions 
of his angel slaves to inspire the Israelites 



to glory in the Lord and God, whom he 
assumed to be. And millions of the Israel- 
ites fell beneath his power and became his 
spirit slaves. The others, still steadfast 
in the secret oral rites, remained true to 
the secret name and Person, Jehovih, 
Which Ashtaroth saw; and, for the first 
time, after two thousand years' friendship 
to Baal, she became jealous and filled with 
vengeful wrath. She said: I see now 
how this traitorous God hath planned to 
beat me in the regions west of Heleste and 
Uropa. By the flesh of my thighs am I 
sworn, this thing shall not be! I will send 
a hundred million warring angels down to 
Babvlon, Tyre, Yedmon and Luce, and in- 
spire their mortal kings to make war on 
the westward cities, the strongholds of 
Baal. And as to impoverished Egupt, I 
will send thither mortal armies sufficient 
to destroy everything in the land thereof. 
Yea, I will send my legions also amongst 
the Israelites, and inspire them that I, Ash- 
taroth, am the only true Lord and true 
God. I will divide them up as a broken 
bundle of straw, and cast them to the four 
winds of heaven. On the other hand, Baal 
said: Because of my success, I know Ash- 
taroth will be jealous and full of anger; 
therefore, I will place a standing army be- 
twixt her heavens and mine; and if she 
but dare to molest me, I will send my mill- 
ions against her heavens and despoil her 
utterly, that she may be cast in hen! 

CHAPTER XXXIII. 

God, through his Holy Council, in Par- 
adise, now decreed: 

To the Faithists of Arabin'ya, Ebenee- 
zer captain, with five million angels as a 
protecting host. To the Faithists of 
Chine'ya, Luiwitha, captain, with ten mill- 
ion angels as a protecting host. To the 
Faithists of Vind'yii, Li Chong, captain, 
with eight million angels as a protecting 
host. To the Faithists of Guatama, Manito 
captain, with ten million angels as a pro- 
tecting host. And to each of the captains 
I give authority to draw additional armies 
from the Lords who hold dominions in the 
regions where they may be. 

But it so happened that the lowest hea- 
venly plateaux were also engaged in wars. 
And in less than a hundred years of a'ji 
many of the Lords were without kingdoms, 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



455 



and, with a few chosen friends, became in- 
voluntary wandering spirits, scattered 
about in all the heavens of the earth, or 
upon the earth. God saw this, and through 
his messengers he said unto them: Having 
lost your kingdoms, why will you lose 
yourselves? Is it not better that ye fall to, 
in the remaining kingdoms and by your 
steadfastness help to maintain faith in Je- 
hovih in the hearts of the less learned? 

But satan gained access to their souls, 
saying to each of them: Thou, who hast 
been Lord of the hosts of heaven! Thou, 
take a place like a common laborer! Thou 
wouldst be laughed at! The non-resistant 
policy is good enough in times and places 
of peace. But now is war. And war can 
only be overcome by war. 

CHAPTER XXXIV. 

And there came to Paradise, of Lords 
and high officers, whose heavenly places 
had fallen, different companies of tens and 
twenties and even hundreds, from various 
heavenly regions around the earth, and 
having secured audience before God and 
his Holy Council, they said: Since we 
have been faithful in all things, and duti- 
ful servants to Jehovih, what have we 
gained? Our kingdoms and high places 
have fallen to pieces from no fault of our 
own. Yea, our angels have gone off into 
anarchy. Where, then, is the justice of 
Jehovih? 

God said unto them: Of what profit is 
discussion? If ye fail in one way, try an- 
other; and in no case seek ye to justify 
yourselves before Jehovih. He is Judge! 
There are already hells that have been 
standing for years. Is it not wiser that ye 
join together, and go and deliver them? 
Behold, Jehovih hath furnished us road- 
ways beforehand; and His Voice came to 
us prophesying that this darkness would 
come upon us. And ye were advised, and 
had sufficient time to provide for the worst. 
Go ye forth, then, not complaining, but re- 
joicing, and in Jehovih's name doing with 
all your wisdom and strength, regardless 
of favor. 

Thus they came, group after group, for 
years, before God; but were forever re- 
buked by the Light of Jehovih, and they 
went away, but not to work righteously, 
but to sympathize with one another, and to 



complain against God and against the 
Holy Council of Paradise. In groups 
they assembled in places of their own, and 
began to philosophize on the ways of hea- 
ven and earth. And every one was sworn 
within himself to do no evil thing, but to 
find some more respectable way of serving 
Jehovih, than by going amongst the ignor- 
ant and depraved. And they became habit- 
uated in their meetings, in three places in 
hada: in Haractu, over Vind'yu, in Eta- 
shong, over Chine'ya, and in Hapsendi, 
over Egupt. And these became like great 
heavenly cities, because of the congregat- 
ing of the angels of heaven, which con- 
tinued for many years. 

Finally, they resolved to organize each 
one of these three places with a distinct 
head, and to unite three heads as one con- 
federacy; and the whole to be dedicated to 
the service of Jehovih. Thus was founded 
the Confederacy of the Holy Ghost. And 
by acclamation, three angels were raised 
to the three capitals, namely: Kabalac- 
tes, of Haractu; Ennochissa, of Eta-shong; 
and Looeamong, of Hapsendi. And each 
and every one of the three took the title, 
Son of the Holy Ghost. These three had 
all been Lords, and were high in grade. 

Ennochissa selected seven angels, and 
gave them the rank of Lord, namely: 
Haptu, Vazista, Mira, Erasigi, Adamon, 
Amesh and Cacpa. 

Kabalactes selected seven angels, and 
gave them the rank of Lord, namely: Li 
Wan, Amatar, Wenates, Howickam, Shong 
Tsee, Massaqactus and Enniscabab. 

Looeamong selected seven angels, and 
gave them the rank of Lord, namely: Pe- 
tubusetta, Aodi, Monulithens, Miriam, 
Zestes and Abarothmes. 

Such, then, was the established confed- 
eracy, which was to play so great a part 
in the history of heaven and earth. And it 
differed from all other confederacies, be- 
cause its members all professed to serve 
Jehovih. And it required of all its people 
an oath of allegiance to Jehovih, but un- 
der the name, Holy Ghost. 

And God admonished them, saying: 
Though ye be wise in your own conceit, 
yet shall ye fail. For, having denied His 
Person, then will ye yourselves become the 
Person in the understanding of the multi- 



456 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



tude. And herein will ye, soon or late, 
come to grief. But, nevertheless, the con- 
federacy heeded not the words of God. 
And God was grieved at heart. 

CHAPTER XXXV. 

God said: Behold, three conditions are 
now within the heavens of the earth: An- 
archy by the false Gods and their slaves, 
the confederacy of the Holy Ghost, and 
the Faithists in Jehovih. Now, therefore, 
let my chief loo'is come before me, and 
hear the decree of God. 

When the chief loo'is had come before 
the throne, God said unto him: Know, 
then, O Thoanactus, thou shalt go down 
to the earth, to the land of Chine'ya, and by 
inspiration bring forth a birth, capable of 
the Voice, but not capable of su'is. 
And thou shalt accomplish this service so 
that he shall be born into the mortal world 
at the time a'ji ceaseth to fall upon that 
land. And thou shalt provide him with 
great learning and great adversity and 
great experience withal. For he shall es- 
tablish the fundamental doctrines of the 
nations of Chine'ya. For his followers 
shall become the most numerous and 
peaceful inhabitants on the face of the 
earth. 

And as thou preparest for his birth by 
thy mastery over the generations of mor- 
tals, so shalt thou, through these, thy 
hosts, raise up such as shall become disci- 
ples. For however great a man thou 
mightest raise up, it is wisdom to have also 
born into the mortal world, at the same 
era, such hosts of philosophers as shall 
follow him, and indorse his doctrines. For 
by this means the establishment of Jehovih 
and His light amongst mortals shall extend 
the whole length and breadth of that land. 

Thoanactus said: Jehovih's will and 
thine be done. This is a most welcome la- 
bor, O God. And I know, the voice of my 
hosts are with me. 

God said: In Jehovih's name, thee I 
crown, Chief of the Hosts of Loo'is, for 
the land of Chine'ya, for the birth of an 
heir for the Voice of the Great Spirit. 

Thoanactus was then crowned, and his 
hosts were provided with badges by God, 
for they were filed before the throne, and 
hosts saluted, and departed with due cere- 



mony. Such, then, was God's labor for 
having born into the mortal world, after 
many generations, one who was called 
Ka'yu. 

CHAPTER XXXVI. 

Again God called before his throne a 
million loo'is, and appointed Etchessa 
chief over them, saying: Thou, O Etches- 
sa, shalt go down to the earth, to the land 
of Vind'yu, taking these hosts with thee. 
And thou shalt establish a heavenly place, 
which shall be thy headquarters. Behold. 
I have given thee many generations in 
which to bring forth a mortal heir capable 
of the Voice. Survey thou, then, the gen- 
erations of Faithists in that land. 

He, whom thou shalt bring forth for 
this purpose, shall be of some royal fam- 
ily, a prince of high estate. I shall prove 
through him, that for love of righteousness, 
and to serve Jehovih, he will forsake his 
kingdom and family and friends, and all 
earthly things and desires, and make him- 
self as a poor man, dwelling with the poor, 
laboring with them, teaching them, and in- 
structing them. For, because of the idola- 
tries amongst these people they are 
bound in caste; and he, whom I will 
teach through, shall prove unto the 
world that the service of Jehovih requireth 
of all men, that Jehovih shall stand upper- 
most, even above kind and caste. In the 
example of which willing sacrifice, man 
shall be taught, that all the evils of the 
earth can be overcome. 

And thou shalt provide unto this man 
many disciples, and roadways for him to 
travel, and places to preach; and provide 
followers unto him, to go about with him. 
For without these, his preaching and prac- 
tice would be of little avail. See to it, 
then, that there may be born in the world 
a sufficient number, to be disciples and fol- 
lowers of his doctrines, that he may be a 
power in the world for re-establishing the 
Faithists in the Great Spirit. And thou 
shalt so provide these births, that they will 
be of the same period of time. 

Etchessa said: In Jehovih's name I am 
thy servant, with rejoicing. And I answer 
thee also for these my hosts, that this is a 
joy unto them, for Jehovih's glory. 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



457 



God said: To which end I crown thee, 
Chief of Loo'is, for the land of Vind'yii! 
And God crowned Etchessa; and he gave 
badges to the other loo'is. And thereafter 
Etchessa and his hosts filed past the throne 
of God, duly saluting, and they also depart- 
ed, going to the earth, to the land of Vind'- 
yu. Thus were the loo'is empowered of 
God, to bring into the world the heir, Sa- 
kaya. 

CHAPTER XXXVII. 

Hamonastas, one of the chief marshals 
of God, and for the heavenly city of Para- 
dise, came before the throne, duly saluting, 
and saying: O God, Son of Jehovih, I 
would speak before thee! God said: Speak 
thou, my son. 

Hamonastas said: There standeth with- 
out the city of Paradise, beyond the pil- 
lars of fire, and in company with thy high- 
raised captains, one Nu-ghan, delivered 
from one of the hells of Hassa, over Egupt, 
and he crieth out continually: O God, Son 
of Jehovih! Deliver me! Deliver thou 
me! O Moses! Moses! Moses! 

He is distracted, continually using the 
same words over and over, without ceas- 
ing. Now, behold, the nurses and physi- 
cians have tried all remedies they can in- 
vent, but failed utterly to break the spell 
upon him. For seventy days they have la- 
bored, and, as a last resort, they have 
brought him hither, that they might learn 
from thee. 

God said: Nu-ghan! Is this not one of 
the Pharaohs, who took up arms against 
the Faithists of Egupt? Return thou, Ha- 
monastas, to the keepers of this man, and 
cause him to be blindfolded, that he may 
endure the light of the throne; after which 
thou and his keepers shall bring him before 
me. 

Hamonastas saluted and departed, and 
after a time, returned with the keepers and 
with Nu-ghan, who was crying out unceas- 
ingly. And now, when he was before the 
throne of God, God said to him: Behold 
me, I am God, Son of Jehovih; what 
wouldst thou? 

But the man heeded not what God said, 
but kept crying out as before. Whereupon 
God said unto the keepers: Remove ye 
the blinds a little, that the light may come 
upon him. And they removed the blinds 



a little; but, behold, the light made him 
more distracted than before. And when 
God saw his deplorable suffering, he in- 
quired of his keepers, how long the man 
had been in hell, and they said: Seventy 
and six years, and in a knot, three years! 

God said: I know that this is Phara- 
oh, who persecuted the Faithists. Take him 
again without the walls, and there retain 
him. I will send one of my swift messen- 
gers to Lika, in etherea, who knoweth the 
abiding place of Moses. Perhaps Moses 
put a curse upon him! If so, only Moses 
can deliver him. 

And the keepers took the spirit, Nu- 
ghan, without the city, as commanded by 
God. And God sent Haeroponitis, sister 
of Raban, a swift messenger, in an arrow- 
ship of fire, to the etherean worlds, to Gus- 
sawanitcha, to Lika's sojourning place at 
that time, commanding her to lay the mat- 
ter before the Orian Chief, Lika. 

Haeroponitis, upon her return to the 
lower heavens, reported: I came before Je- 
hovih's throne, whereon sat Lika, and I 
told him the story of Nu-ghan. Where- 
upon Lika, Son of Jehovih, said: Let my 
reporters of destinations go find Moses; 
and if it be that Moses put a judgment on 
Nu-ghan, then must Moses return to the 
lower heavens, and deliver him. The jus- 
tice of Jehovih reacheth to all time and 
place. 

Whereupon I saluted before the throne 
of Jehovih, and in company with the re- 
porters of destinations, started forth again 
in the etherean realms, and after passing 
through seven worlds, and upward of three 
hundred Nirvanian kingdoms, we entered 
the plains of Sapeas, where are situated 
the colleges and schools of Embassies, be- 
longing to the Ghiturpsan board of Ritivi- 
us. And here we found Moses! 

Moses no sooner looked upon us, hav- 
ing been told that he was inquired after, 
than he prophesied the cause. He said: 
Alas me! Because thou hast come for me, 
thou hast awakened in me that which slept 
all these hundreds of years. Yea, it is true, 
I put a curse upon Pharaoh; for I said 
unto him: Thou shalt yet call upon me to 
deliver thee out of torments. 

Instead of this, I should have forgiven 
him. O Jehovih! I have sinned before 
Thee! And Thou hast searched me out 
after all these years, and brought the mat- 



458 



CYCLE OF L1KA 



ter home to me. Thou art just, O Thou 
Almighty! In Thy name and by Thy wis- 
dom and power will I return to the lower 
heavens, and take in charge the man and 
people I adjudged! 

And Moses wept; and he gave command 
to the builders to provide him at once with 
a suitable boat of great fleetness. And then 
Moses procured thirty thousand volunteers 
to go with him. And when all things were 
in readiness, Moses took leave of his com- 
panions, and he and his hosts entered his 
fire-boat, and presently our two vessels 
were under way, as if in a race, for the red 
star, Earth. And, after some days, we ar- 
rived in the heavens of Earth, even at the 
city of Paradise, the abiding place of God. 

When it was known in Paradise, that 
Moses was coming, great joy was mani- 
fested, for God and the Holy Eleven and 
the Holy Council, all desired to see Moses. 
And God commanded the full board of 
marshals and also the musicians to go with- 
out the capital, and meet Moses, and es- 
cort him before the throne. And they ac- 
complished these things; and Moses came 
before the throne of God, saluting in the 
sign, Judgment of Time! And God an- 
swered him under the sign, Thy Labor is 
our Joy and Glory! 

And God said: In Jehovih's name, O 
Moses, come thou, and honor my throne. 

And Moses went up, and sat on the 
throne, on the right hand of God. And 
Moses said unto the Holy Council and to 
the Holy Eleven: Your God shall be my 
God. In his love and dominion am I cast 
by Jehovih's will, to deliver those that have 
suffered from me and my words. 

God said: Shall we not have a day of 
recreation first? Moses said: Nay; till I 
have delivered Nu-ghan, there can be no 
peace. Send, therefore, thy marshals to 
the keepers of this man, and bring him be- 
fore the throne. 

And now again, after awhile, Nu-ghan 
was brought in, all muffled up, to keep the 
light from hurting him. And he was still 
crying out: O God, Son of Jehovih! O 
Moses! Moses! Moses! 

And when Moses beheld this, he was 
well nigh overcome by the pitiful scene. 
And Moses brushed away his tears, and rose 
up, raising his hands to Jehovih, saying: 
Light of Thy Light, O Jehovih! Power of 



Thy Power, O Jehovih! Deliver Thou 
him, whom I accursed! Put his griefs and 
sonows upon me, that hath sinned against 
him! 

A mantle of yellow light, cloud-like, 
descended upon Moses, as he stood trans- 
fixed before Jehovih. All the place was 
still as death! The blinds and muffles on 
Nu-ghan fell off, and he stood silent and 
motionless, gazing with fixed awe upon the 
holy scene, and upon Moses on the throne 
of God! 

The spirit of Jehovih moved upon the 
holy place, and the musicians felt the pow- 
er. It was the light of one who was migh- 
ty, from the etherean worlds! Gently, 
then, the music of ten thousand voices fell 
upon the holy audience. First mild, as if 
far off, then louder and louder, as if com- 
ing near, till soon the words of the an- 
them proclaimed Jehovih's praise. 

Nu-ghan turned not his eyes from the 
glory of Moses and the etherean mantle, 
for he knew Moses, even as it were but 
yesterday they parted in Egupt, on the 
earth. Slowly, now, Moses lowered his 
upstretched arms, and his hands were bril- 
liant, like yellow fire. And Moses said: 
solemnly: All praise to Thee, Jehovih! 
Thou art just, Thou Almighty Creator! 

Nu-ghan added: For through Him is 
all deliverance, worlds without end. In 
Thy praise will I sing forever, O Jehovih. 
Thou, Most High God of Moses, my De- 
liverer! Make me strong, O Jehovih, that 
I can look upon him, whom I persecuted 
and abused. 

Then Moses looked upon Nu-ghan, and 
said: These things had to be. Thou wert 
the last of the pyramidal age of man, and 
I the first founder of the migration of the 
righteous. All things are done by Jehovih, 
in His own way and time. 

As, by my curse upon thee and thy peo- 
ple, have I been bound to come back to de- 
liver thee and them; so, by thy curse 
against Israel, shalt thou now return down 
to earth, and labor to raise up Israel. For 
Israel hath fallen from communities, and 
hath taken to kings, after the manner of 
the heathen and the idolater. Her people 
are divided and broken Up, and many of 
them have become worshippers of the false 
Gods, Baal and Ashtaroth. Yea, they are 
forgetful of my commandments of peace 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



459 






and love, and have taken to war and to 
earthly aggrandizement. 

And thou shalt take with thee ten 
thousand angels of the exalted grades, and 
go down to the earth, to the habitations of 
the Israelites; and, by inspiration, thou and 
thy hosts shall select and inspire such of 
the Israelites as are within reach of inspira- 
tion, and thou shalt take them away from 
all other of their people, and from the hea- 
then and idolatrous tribes. And thOu and 
thy hosts shall abide with these mortals, 
re-establishing them in peace and non-re- 
sistance, after the manner of the doctrines 
in the es'sean worlds. And thou shalt call 
them, Es'eans, that they may be distin- 
guished from all other peoples. 

Nu-ghan said: Thy decree is most just, 

Moses, and I know of a truth thy words 
are Jehovih's. I pray thee, how long shall 
this labor last? 

Moses said: Some hundreds of years! 
Until thou hast raised a light sufficient un- 
to Jehovih, that peace and love and the 
doctrine of good for evil be again re-es- 
tablished from the blood of the Israelites. 
And when thou hast perfected the genera- 
tions of the Es'eans, thou shalt have sent to 
thee from the throne of God certain loo'is, 
and they will labor with thee until an Is- 
raelite is born into the mortal world capa- 
ble of the Father's Voice. 

Nu-ghan said: Hear me now in my 
plea, O Moses, thou, Son of the Most 
High: When I died and entered heaven, 

1 found my kingdom in heaven waiting 
for me. And they were miserable, being 
beggars, slaves and idiots, because of the 
slavery I had put upon them in the earth- 
life. And I could not escape them, or put 
them aside. If I went away objectively, 
then subjectively I remembered them, and 
was drawn back to them. Yea, I was like 
a young colt that first being haltered, pull- 
eth away, but faileth; then pulleth again, 
and faileth, and so on, until he findeth he 
cannot escape, then tamely submits, even 
so was I bound to my kingdom, and oblig- 
ed in the end to yield and become a slave 
unto them, to provide for them. For I 
had so despoiled them of their talents, they 
were as helpless as infants; and many of 
them wicked in the extreme. 



Nevertheless, I accepted that which I 
could not escape; I toiled with them hun- 
dreds of years, restoring them as well as I 
could. And in time a ray of happiness 
came to me, in the hope that in hundreds 
of years to come I should find my way out. 
But, alas! darkness came upon my already 
dark heaven. My evil ones, such as I had 
slaughtered on earth, came upon me for 
vengeance' sake. Anarchy overflooded 
me and my people. They became very 
demons of madness, and they seized me, 
and bound me, and bruised me and suffo- 
cated me with horrid smells. Millions of 
them! And their curses pierced me like 
poisoned arrows. Long I fought them; 
and I cried out unto thee and to Jehovih! 
But, alas! I was in hell. None could hear 
my prayers. For days and months and 
years I held out, but only to experience 
new and more terrible horrors! How long 
this woe was upon me, I know not. I only 
remember, that my soul sickened within 
me; and I felt a sinking and a fainting, 
like an endless death, that could not extin- 
guish me. To me it seemed ten thousand 
ages! 

Suddenly I find myself here! Distract- 
ed before thee, thou holy Son of the Great 
Spirit! Whence came I? What hath oc- 
curred? Or is this but a spell of delirious 
dream? And will I relapse again into yon- 
der terrible nightmare of horrors? How 
can I go hence, that mine old kingdom 
come not upon me? Do they not wait 
hereabout somewhere? To seize me again, 
for renewed torments? O teach thou me, 
Moses! How can I fulfill thy righteous 
judgment? And not be entrapped again, 
and, perhaps, forever! 

Moses said: I will give thee a new 
name, and I will clothe thee in garments 
of mine own making, so they will rather 
flee from thee, than come to thee. 

And Moses gathered up of the yellow 
cloud-like mantle, and made a mantle, and 
clothed Nu-ghan; and he named him, II- 
laes, signifying, Servant of Light. And af- 
ter that, he was provided with ten thou- 
sand co-laborers, assisted by Gafonaya, and 
sent back to the earth, on his mission. 
And God appointed one hundred messen- 
gers unto Illaes, that word might be 
transmitted every month to Paradise. 



460 



CYCLE OF L1KA 



CHAPTER XXXVIII. 

God proclaimed a day of recreation in 
Paradise, that the inhabitants might meet 
Moses and his hosts, and rejoice therewith. 
And great was that day in Paradise. On 
the following day, Moses departed for the 
Eguptian people, who had been in hell with 
Nu-ghan, going to the place of deliverance. 
And there were of these spirits eleven mil- 
lion four hundred thousand. And Moses 
conferred with the inspectors as to places, 
and having decided on a convenient re- 
gion, Elaban, he ordered their removal 
thither. And Moses went with them to El- 
aban, an isolated region on the Aratesaian 
plateau, and remained with them one hun- 
dred and twelve days, establishing them 
with nurseries, hospitals and factories; and 
he appointed officers for them, to every 
group and series, going amongst them in 
person and ministering to tens of thou- 
sands of them, and providing them places 
•of worship. 

After that, Moses appointed Salesmon 
over them. Thereafter, Moses departed, 
and returned to Paradise, where he remain- 
ed two days more, and then took leave, 
and departed for his own heavenly place 
in Nirvania. But ere he departed, he said: 
When the a'ji'an forest is past and gone, 
and it be Jehovih's will, I shall return 
again to look after my hosts. 

And now was God's attention directed 
"to the Faithists of western Arabin'ya, 
where the God Baal had gained ac- 
cess and power; having affiliated with 
one Dagon, a false God, located in those 
regions, who maintained six earthly oracle- 
houses and a small heavenly kingdom of 
bis own. And it came to pass, that the 
Hebrews were a divided people. A small 
minority of them still worshipped Jehovih, 
having colleges of prophecy and places of 
learning. But the great majority of them 
were worshippers of the Lord and God, be- 
lieving the Great Spirit was only a large 
man in heaven, after the manner of Baal, 
or Dagon, or Ashtaroth, or any other God! 
God said of them: Though they pre- 
tend to be of many kinds, I see but two: 
Those who worship the Ever Present, Je- 
hovih; and those who are drifting into 
heathenism. Mine eyes behold the true 
Faithists with colleges and with books of 
learning; but, as for the others, they are 



becoming consulters of the oracles, the 
same as the heathens. How can they re- 
main a united people? The Gods of one 
city and temple teach one doctrine, and the 
Gods of another place teach another doc- 
trine. 

God had previously sent to Ebeneezer 
one Jerub, with ten thousand assistant an- 
gel strategists, to be with the Faithists. 
Jerub now asked for another ten thousand, 
and God sent them to him. And God said 
unto Jerub: 

A war will* presently result between 
Baal, Ashtaroth, Dagon and Haughak; 
and these Gods will not only war in hea- 
ven, but they will carry their battles down 
to mortals. And the Israelites will not 
only forsake their ancient doctrine of 
peace, but will become great warriors, both 
against other nations and peoples, and 
against one another. 

Take thou heed, O Jerub, and whilst 
Baal and Ashtaroth are in conflict and neg- 
lectful of the temples and oracles, possess 
thou them. Better is it, that these false 
Gods win unto themselves as dutiful sub- 
jects, five angels, than one mortal. Guard 
thou well all the colleges of prophecy 
against the emissaries of these false Gods. 
And see to it, that the worshippers of Je- 
hovih have born unto themselves a goodly 
number of prophets. 

CHAPTER XXXIX. 

There came to Paradise, Gods' heavenly 
place, one Taenas, a messenger from the 
chiefs of the so-called Holy Confederacy. 
God's chief marshal conducted him before 
God, and, being commanded to speak, he 
said: Greeting to thee, O God. In behalf 
of the Three Sons of the Holy Ghost I 
come before thee to proclaim their words. 
I have been instructed by them, what to 
say, and I declare unto thee, O God, my 
words are their words. 

First, that thou mayest hear us before 
we are adjudged; second, as thou claimest 
liberty to think and to speak for thyself, 
so do we all. And wherein error cometh 
of our proceedings, it is our own matter, 
and not thine. As thou sayest: Behold 
the All Person, so do not we say; but we 
say: Behold the all expanse; it is but a 
shadow, a ghost. And for convenience' 
sake, we name it, Holy Ghost. Is not this 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



461 



our privilege? Who can deny us? Hath 
one man rightful dominion over another? 
Or one captain, or one God? 

God said: Proceed. 

Taenas said: And if we be right, then 
shall we of our own selves judge what we 
will do. But if thou be right, and. there 
be an All Person, thou art then His servant 
to do His will. Are these points true? 

God said: It seemeth so. 

Taenas said: And liberty to both sides? 

God said: Yea. 

Taenas said: When I was a child, I 
was helped to walk; but now I am strong, 
I walk alone. Wherein then shall not my 
judgment also walk alone? 

God said: Proceed thou, and I will 
speak afterward. 

Taenas said: We have seen in ages 
past, that peace hath been forever pro- 
claimed by the followers of Jehovih; and 
that both on earth and in heaven such peo- 
ple become the sufferers and victims of ty- 
rants of earth and of false Gods in heaven. 
We propose war, in the name of the Holy 
Ghost, both on earth and in heaven. We 
can have no war with thee or thy people, 
on earth, or in heaven; for thou and thy 
people, angels and mortals, are all peace, 
warring not. Our wars can be only with 
warriors. I put the matter thus: Thou 
hast a virgin daughter, and a villain as- 
sail her; thy doctrine is, to rush in and 
take thy daughter away from him; our doc- 
trine is, to beat him away from her. 

We behold evil Gods and evil spirits, 
assailing virtuous people on earth and m 
heaven. We propose to fight them to de- 
struction, for righteousness' sake. More 
then are we to thy favor, O God, than 
against thee. We dip our hands in blood, 
for sake of peace and virtue, for sake of 
liberty and knowledge. We shall say to 
the man of earth: Thou shalt become 
learned! To the es'yan in heaven: Thou 
shalt not return to mortals, but remain in 
thy place, and become learned and virtu- 
ous. For which reason we come to thee, 
O God, that thou mayest know our founda- 
tion. 

God said: Who, then, sayest thou, 
men and angels shall worship? 

Taenas said: In this, we command them 
not. But we give them liberty to worship 
whomsoever they will. 



God said: Thou hast said: Our doc- 
trine is, to beat the villain away from the 
virgin; but what wilt thou, by thy example, 
teach? 

Taenas answered: That an assailant 
deserveth punishment. 

God said: And wilt thou say to the 
peaceful and virtuous: Take up arms, 
give your enemies torments? 
Taenas answered: Yea, verily. 
God said: And by what authority, if 
they inquire of thee? Taenas said: By au- 
thority of the Holy Ghost, and the Confed- 
eracy, and by the Son, that is, each and ev- 
ery Lord of the Confederacy. For we shall 
teach mortals and angels that all things are 
by law; and the word, law, shall take the 
place of the term, Great Spirit, or Jehovih. 
God said: Hear me, then, O Taenas, 
and in love bear my words to thy so-called 
Triune Confederacy, and to the high lead- 
ers, saying to them, thus saith God of Par- 
adise, Son of Jehovih, according to the 
light of this throne: 

Ye shall triumph for a long season on 
earth and in heaven; but not in the way 
ye suppose. For ye will be forced to pro- 
vide a worshipful head for mortals and an- 
gels. And it will come to pass, your three 
heavenly places will become known on 
earth and in heaven as the Triune Gods, or 
Trinity! And the people will worship an 
imaginary figure of three parts, Father, Son 
and Holy Ghost. And this will become 
their idol; and he will be accredited with 
love, anger, jealousy and favoritism, war 
and destruction. 

Because ye say: Give punishment to 
the wicked, ye open the door of all evil. 
For he, who hath a quarrel with his neigh- 
bor, will accuse him as deserving punish- 
ment. They, that are in darkness, and be- 
ing mighty, will fall upon the weak, and 
slay them. A quarrel will ensue in your 
three heavenly kingdoms, and ye will be- 
come as three false Gods. And since ye 
profess not the All Person, each of ye 
three Gods will be forced to announce 
himself as such. For the rule applieth to 
all men and to all angels, that they, who 
deny an All Highest Person in the Crea- 
tor, become establishers of idolatry unto 
themselves. 

Thou hast said: We shall leave mor- 
tals and angels to worship whom they will. 



462 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



Why, then, is it not well to worship Baal? 
And Dagon? And Ashtaroth? And yet, 
these Gods make slaves of their subjects, 
that worship them. 

Taenas said: Nay, they are evil Gods. 
We will deliver their slaves into freedom. 

God said: Who is master, and who is 
slave? Either on earth, or in heaven? Why 
not abolish your Triune Confederacy, lest 
ye rule over others? And you profess lib- 
erty, why not practice it? Because ye pro- 
claim liberty as your chief object, ye will 
entice the unlearned and the idle and lazy, 
for all these claim their weaknesses as the 
boon of liberty. 

It shall come to pass, in the far-distant 
future, your kingdoms will be made up of 
the lowest grades. And they will pull you 
all down from your present high resolves; 
and ye will become tyrants and evil Gods 
yourselves, and meet the fate of all your 
predecessors. 

Earth and her heavens thereof were 
given into my keeping, for the resurrection 
of all the inhabitants; but I have neither 
commission nor desire to accomplish do- 
minion by violence. As ye have with- 
drawn from my kingdoms, it is an act of 
your own. Even mine own grief at your 
secession showeth me, how short I am H 
comprehending Jehovih's ways. For I de- 
clare unto thee, O Taenas, and through 
thee to thy chiefs, that though your course 
seemeth evil in my sight, yet will it be 
proven in the distant future, that Jehovih 
will appropriate your labors to an ulti- 
mate good. 

Go thou, therefore, with my words to 
the chiefs of the Triunes: I part with you 
all, as a father parteth with a son who go- 
eth into a consuming fire. 

Taenas said: In reverence to thee, O 
God, I go to them, that pity thee for thy 
too peaceful ways. 

Thereupon, Taenas saluted in reverence, 
and departed, going his way. 

CHAPTER XL. 

God called up Erastes, chief of messen- 
gers, and he said unto him: Thou hast 
heard the words of thy God and of Taenas. 
Take therefore thirty thousand and four 
hundred messengers, that is, one for each 
and all of my remaining kingdoms, and go 
and proclaim the same unto them, that 



they, having due notice, may manage their 
affairs with wisdom and foresight. 

Erastes said: Jehovih's will and thine 
be done! And he saluted and withdrew, 
going to the place of the messengers, and 
choosing his hosts, instructed them in 
regard to the message. And he gave to 
each of them power to choose their officers, 
and to provide their own vessels of travel. 
And in not many days thereafter, they all 
departed. 

Now it came to pass, that the following 
kingdoms soon fell to pieces, and drifted 
into the Triune Confederacy, namely: Sho'- 
e'gan, and her twenty-eight sub-kingdoms, 
all in the hadan regions; Ghi'e'wan, and 
her forty-four heavenly hadan kingdoms; 
Haotus, with seven heavenly hadan king- 
doms, and five sub-kingdoms; Tuwahtal, 
and thirty kingdoms in the first resurrec- 
tion in the plateau of Theovrahkistan; Liv- 
ragga, and seventy-one heavenly sub-king- 
doms, of which thirty-eight were ready to 
enter the second resurrection; Jahkin and 
Mouru, with ninety-seven heavenly hadan 
kingdoms, of which eighty-seven were pro- 
moted to the second resurrection; Ganzoe, 
with four hundred hadan kingdoms, of 
which many were below the second resur- 
rection; Hapsu, with four heavenly king- 
doms of seventy million angels in the sec- 
ond resurrection; Iturba, with twelve hea- 
venly kingdoms of one hundred and four 
million angels in the second resurrection, 
half of whom were as high as fifty in' the 
grades; Wantawacha, with thirty heavenly 
kingdoms, with three hundred million an- 
gels in the second resurrection, three- 
fourths of whom were upward of grade 
fifty. Of the seven lower kingdoms of 
the second plateaux, there were eight hun- 
dred million angels of the first resurrection, 
who migrated from their provinces to the 
Triune regions, Amesha; and they destroy- 
ed the road behind them. 

When God saw the great secession of 
his heavenly kingdoms, and their allegiance 
to the Triunes, his soul was filled with sor- 
row. And the Voice of Jehovih came to 
him, saying: 

Why takest thou sorrow to thy soul 
for these things? Shall a God grieve, be- 
cause his burden is made lighter? Behold, 
in this day and hour the Gods and Lords 
of the Triune are rejoicing with great joy, 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



463 



"because of these accessions. Yea, they per- 
ceive not, what a load they are taking on 
their shoulders. But thou shalt send agents 
amongst the Triunes, especially into their 
capitals and their chief kingdoms. 

So, God appointed many agents, differ- 
ent from messengers, for they were to be 
under the command of none but God. God 
said unto them: Ye shall go to the places 
I appoint unto each one of you, as travel- 
ers and sojourners in your own way, and 
observe the doings of the Triunes, especial- 
ly the chiefs and leaders, Lords and Gods, 
and their teaching and government, and in 
your own good time depart out of the place 
and return hither and inform my Holy 
Council and my Holy Eleven. 

And the agents went forth as command- 
ed. 

CHAPTER XLI. 

The three heavenly kingdoms, Haractu, 
Eta-shong and Hapsendi, of the Triunes, 
were independent, but allianced for offence 
and defence against the evil Gods, Baal, 
Dagon, Shulleth, Ashtaroth and others, 
whose angel subjects were kept in slavery, 
and for evil purposes. Now, therefore, the 
Triunes jointly declared war, to the end 
that peace might be secured in these hea- 
vens. 

Nevertheless, each of the Triunes had 
charge of his own heavens and over such 
part of the earth as was covered by his 
heavens. For they had divided up and ap- 
propriated both, the earth and the heavens, 
into three parts, one to each of them. 

A triangular war was going on in hada 
and on earth betwixt the angel armies of 
Baal, Dagon and Ashtaroth, in which ten 
thousand million angels were engaged un- 
der them. Looeamong declared war against 
the whole of them, and impressed into his 
service eight thousand million angel war- 
riors. 

Ashtaroth, the most vengeful Goddess, 
had previously sent hundreds of millions of 
her warring angels down to the apostate 
Jews, to inspire them to wars and cruel- 
ties on one another, hoping to exterminate 
them, lest they become Baal's subjects. 
And yet other millions of warring angels 
had she sent to the Par'si'e'an cities, and to 
the Eguptian cities, Daskrath, Babylon 
-and Gonassah and Tyre and Romaxain 



and to the kings and queens of many other 
great cities, to inspire them to send forth 
armies to destroy, not only the worship- 
pers of Jehovih, but all people that worship- 
ped Baal, or Dagon, or any other God. 

Baal, on the other hand, had sent hun- 
dreds of millions of his warring angels 
down to the earth, to Heleste and the west 
regions, and to the Israelites as well, in- 
spiring mortals to war against the east 
kingdoms, especially Babylon and Das- 
krath, two mighty cities in the dominions 
of the Goddess Ashtaroth. 

And the armies of the mortals were 
moved forth by the armies of angels, whom 
they saw not; and war raged east and west 
and north and south. 

Looeamong, the Triune, said: I will 
spoil them both. I will send an army of 
warriors down to the middle kingdoms, to 
the great tyrant, Cyrus. I will possess the 
oracles and direct Cyrus to march against 
Par'si'e. He shall make an alliance with 
the Argos'yans. Hatchesan and Karsoka 
shall be my countries. And the cities of 
Hernia and Babylon and Nine'vah and Gas- 
sakad and Hannadan and Saluem shall bow 
down no more to Baal and Ashtaroth, for- 
ever. 

Belus shall be mine, and the cities and 
temples of Hina and Maroth and Hovan 
and Torres and Delfi; and the inhabitants 
of Phires and Sirhak and Macedon and- 
Thues, and the great oracle-houses of Myr- 
silus and Myrsus and Gyges and Can- 
dawles and Haerkus and Simon and Gam- 
ma and Fabiyan and Sulus and Craz'ya 
and Wakadya and P'hrid and Gemnae and 
Ma'zan and R'hodae. By force will I pos- 
sess them; yea, by force drive hence all 
other angels and Gods. And my warrior 
angels shall possess these temples, so that 
whoso cometh to consult the Gods shall 
receive mine own answers. I will drive 
mortals to war in mine own way, and to 
whatever place I determine to subdue or 
destroy. 

Equally menacing were the boasts of 
the false Goddess Ashtaroth; she had said: 
Whether I despoil heaven and earth, I 
care not. If I cannot possess them, I will 
destroy them, so that no God shall possess 
them. Into festering knots and hells will I 
cast tens of thousands of millions of angels, 
in case I do not succeed in winning all. 



464 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



I will send millions of warring angels 
down to Xerxes, the Par'si'e'an king, and 
to his kingdom, and they shall obsess ev- 
ery man, woman and child to desperate 
madness against the Argos'yans and the 
middle and west nations. I will lead Xer- 
xes forth with the mightiest army that has 
ever been on the earth. And they shall de- 
spoil all regions, whithersoever they march. 
For I will make Xerxes and all the Par'- 
si'e'ans believe, they are doing these things 
for their own prosperity and glory, and for 
despoiling their own enemies. 

And, after Xerxes hath despoiled and 
conquered all the earth regions, Baal and 
all other Gods shall be driven away from 
the oracles and temples. Xerxes shall is- 
sue a decree, abolishing all other Gods but 
me, Ashtaroth. And, when I am thus well 
anchored on the earth, I will turn my le- 
gions against this new upstart God, the 
Triune, Looeamong. And I will cast him 
into a hell, from which he shall not escape 
forever! 

So, Ashtaroth concentrated her hea- 
venly warriors into this great and desper- 
ate work. For she had been maturing her 
plans, even before Xerxes came to the 
throne of Par'si'e. And, since, in those 
days, the kings and rich men in all those 
countries consulted the oracles, in refer- 
ence to all important undertakings, it was 
1 not a difficult feat for Ashtaroth to obsess 
the millions of .Par'si'e'ans to carry out 
her project. 

Accordingly, Ashtaroth commanded her 
marshals to summon two thousand million 
angel warriors, men and women, for the 
work in hand. And when they came to 
Neabissa, a heavenly region to the north, 
over the earth-mountains Afflo'yagga, she 
caused Mateus, her chief orator, to prepare 
a speech in her behalf, and have it declaim- 
ed before the angel warriors. Mateus, a 
one-time Lord to Osiris, nine hundred 
years previous, now made the speech, and 
this is a synopsis: 

I, Goddess of all the heavens and of the 
whole earth. Behold me, Ashtaroth! The 
earth and her heavens are mine, saith Ash- 
taroth! I clove the sun in twain; for it is 
mine. I clove the pieces again; for they 
were mine. From these I made stars and 
the moon. But the great earth I made as 
my foot-stool; for it was mine, and ever 



shall be. I peopled it over with all the liv- 
ing; they were my creation. And ye also, 
are mine. 

I peopled the stars, and gave to the in- 
habitants thereof great delights. And the 
earth and my heavens were places of great 
delight. For I gave bountifully to all my 
children. But the inhabitants of the far-off 
stars quarreled because of an evil God,. 
Baal. And they cast him out. And he 
came here to despoil me and my heavenly 
places. Witness ye my beloved. I could 
destroy him with my little finger. But he 
is unworthy of your Goddess. To you I 
give the glory to capture him, and cast him 
into hell, and torture him forever. 

But lest other evil Gods take possession 
of his earthly places, they shall also be de- 
stroyed. Hear ye then the command of 
Ashtaroth, which is, that ye shall go down 
to the earth, and obsess and inspire the 
Par'si'e'ans to march forth and destroy all 
other people on the earth, beginning first 
with the stronghold of Baal, in Argos, 
where he hath many sub-Gods under him, 
where the Argos'yans, not knowing him,, 
call him, Zeus. And to whomsoever prov- 
eth valorous amongst my angel warriors, 
will I give great promotion and glory, and 
thousands and millions of slaves. For when 
Baal is overcome and cast into hell, ye 
shall take his angel slaves, and possess 
them yourselves, according to your valor- 
ous deeds. 

So it came to pass, that Xerxes and 
the people, the Par'si'e'ans, were moved 
to go forth and destroy the Argos'yans. 
And king Xerxes took two and a half 
million soldiers with him for his army. 
And so great was the inspiration and ob- 
session of Ashtaroth's angels, that they 
caused another two and a half million of 
Par'si'e'ans to go with Xerxes' soldiers. 
So that Xerxes' whole army was five mill- 
ion souls, which was the largest army that 
ever had been on earth. 

CHAPTER XLII. 

Baal, God of the Argos'yans, called to- 
gether two thousand million angel war- 
riors, and after properly officering them, 
caused them to assemble in Beth'hagas, a 
sub-kingdom of heaven over the Tillag 
mountains, to the north of Macedon, and 
he said unto them: 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



465 



Behold your Creator, who I am! By 
my breath upon the earth ye came forth. I 
am he, who was of old called, De'yus, Lord 
God of heaven and earth. All places are 
my places, all dominion is mine. My hea- 
vens gave I unto you for your inheritance 
forever. But an evil Goddess, Ashtaroth, 
hath come to despoil you. And she hath 
sworn upon her thighs to cast you into 
endless torments. 

Behold, I have sworn a new oath on the 
sun and moon and stars! Ye shall capture 
her. and cast her and all her angels into 
hell, to so abide forever. For I will clear 
the heavens and the earth, and they shall 
be clean and full of delight. Hear ye, 
then, the commandment of your God, Baal, 
ruler of heaven and earth: 

Ye shall go down to the earth, to the 
Argos'yans, and obsess them, man, wo- 
man and child, and inspire them to terri- 
ble deeds of blood, havoc and death against 
the Par'si'e'ans who are coming against 
them. And whilst ye are thus providing 
corporeal destruction for this evil Goddess, 
my heavenly hosts under Yaawochad, my 
Lord of Agansetha, shall attack her angel 
armies in every quarter of these heavens. 
And as fast as her drujas are captured, they 
shall be cast into the hells of Gotha, which 
I have prepared for them. And to all my 
valorous workers will I give great promo- 
tion and power. Ye shall have servants 
and slaves without number. 

Now, it came to pass, that many years 
of war and destruction ensued; but Baal's 
hosts were too powerful for Ashtaroth. 
And so Baal not only overcame her angel 
warriors on the earth, but in her heavenly 
capital also. And his legions rushed upon 
her, and captured her. Whereat her own 
angels turned against her, perceiving now 
that she was an impostor, and not the Cre- 
ator. And they bound her, and carried 
her and her Lords and Gods off to Too- 
semmes, a heavenly place of foul smells, in 
Gotha, and they built here a place of tor- 
ment for her and them, and cast them in. 
And they bought hither tens of thousands 
of her officers, and cast them in, and also 
the spirits of kings and queens and of gen- 
erals and captains who had been her devo- 
tees, who were slain in battle, and who 
were yet in chaos. Thus ended the career 
of Ashtaroth as a false Goddess. And 



there were thus cast into this hell, volun- 
tary and involuntary, two thousand million 
angels. 

As to mortals, Xerxes' mighty armies 
lived not to return to Par'si'e, but were 
scattered and destroyed. As to the Argos'- 
yans, they were a ruined people. And all 
those countries were covered over with the 
spirits of the dead, in chaos. For these 
wars had been going on for many, many 
years. 

CHAPTER XLIII. 

Kabalactes, Triune God of Vind'yu and 
her heavens, said: Since Vind'yu and her 
heavens are to be mine forever, I will take 
mine own time, and make a sure founda- 
tion. First, I will build me a heaven- 
ly city, Haractu, above the mountains of 
Yammalaga, twelve miles high, and the 
wings thereof shall spread out, broad as 
the land of Vind'yu. And I will build me 
a heavenly palace in Haractu, and adorn it 
in splendor; and it shall also have wings 
on every side; and the wings shall be the 
habitations for my officers, my select and 
Holy Council. 

And when Haractu is thus completed, I 
will send word into all the heavens of the 
earth, saying: Come and see Haractu, the 
heavenly seat of the Holy Ghost; the most 
glorious city of the Holy Confederacy of 
the Triune. 

And then shall my legion of angel war- 
riors go forth to battle in these my hea- 
vens; and they shall despoil all the false 
Lords and false Gods worshipped in Vind'- 
yu. One of two choices will I give 
unto them, to bow down in obedience to 
me and to the Triune and to the Holy 
Ghost, or to be cast into hell. One by one 
shall Gods and tyrants fall by my hand; I 
will destroy them utterly and forever. 

Kabalactes then organized his heavenly 
kingdom: appointing officers and appor- 
tioning his angels amongst them, accord- 
ing to the labor allotted to them. And he 
built the heavenly city, Haractu, and adorn- 
ed it in great splendor. And he provided 
hospitals for the sick and imbecile, and 
nurseries for es'yans, and factories for 
workmen, and schools and colleges for 
great learning. 

Look, he said, I have provided places 
for the poor, the sick, the unlearned, the 



466 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



helpless and the imbecile, even before I 
provided a palace for myself. There is a 
God for you. Behold, I am the servant of 
the Triune, the Father and the Holy Ghost. 
My doctrine is: To labor for others first, 
and for one's self afterward. And since you 
perceive that my doctrine is a holy doc- 
trine, ye shall establish it, come what may. 
For, although I am good, I am also power 
and majesty, in great anger to overcome 
evil, and establish righteousness and lib- 
erty. 

These, then, were the chiefs of Kaba- 
lactes' staff: Pedmon, Laer, Yodaava, Cra- 
osha, Varaga Sin Tse, Karapa, Haekiha, 
Yutobis, Lumbothia, Doravva, Etchwalac- 
tcha, Myrrhes, Sepia, Tidon, Onatuhu, 
Durhea, Indra, Kali, Hosanne, Wahtissa, 
Owella, Gur, Hiak, Cassavragga, How- 
gotha and Ithra. And as captains: Sara- 
ma, Janassa, Anatheia, Thodica and Jan- 
urs. But all the foregoing assumed many 
false names, both on earth and in heaven, 
so that no history could reveal who they 
were, or by their names distinguish where 
their dominions lay. 

Kabalactes had said unto his chiefs: Be- 
hold, mortals have many favorite names 
for worship. Go ye down to the earth, to 
Vind'yu, and possess the temples of spirit 
communion, the oracle-houses and what- 
ever places mortals come to worship in, 
and these places shall be yours. And to 
whatever Lord or God, mortals most in- 
cline to bow down, take ye the name of 
that Lord or God. For I give this law 
unto you, that ye shall possess the land of 
Vind'yu, not with new names, but with 
the old, but all unto one end, which is the 
establishing of the Triune God-head. 

Kabalactes then made Pedmon com- 
mander-in-chief over his angel warriors, 
and despatched them down to earth, to 
Vind'yu. 

After this, Kabalactes raised an army 
two thousand million angels to fight his 
heavenly battles. Over these he crowned 
Yettaba, Lord in chief. 

In addition to the heavenly attractions 
of war, Kabalactes raised an army of mu- 
sicians of half a million to each group. He 
also instituted times and places for tour- 
naments, processions and the display of 
great pageantry. 



He said: I will not only be powerful in 
might, but powerful in attractions, above 
all other Gods. 

Now, even as hath been told of the 
wars of Looeamong, even so, but in a dif- 
ferent place, were the terrible conflicts in 
the heavens of Kabalactes, which were also 
manifested on the mortals of Vind'yu. So 
in a few hundred years, that country was 
but a land of ruins, and over it, in every 
direction, were hundreds of millions of an- 
gels in chaos, being the spirits of those 
slain in the wars. 

Kabalactes said: Now will I clear away 
the ruins, and build my everlasting edifice 
on the earth. Behold, I will remodel the 
sacred books of mortals in mine own way. 

In these signs will .1 rebuild: The tri- 
angle, representing the three lights, the 
Son, the Father and the Holy Ghost. I 
will re-establish the tau, as the sign of my 
power. And because my heavens are The 
All Pure, the tau shall be white. The 
jaugernot shall be my roadmark. These 
signs shall be given unto my mortal sub- 
jects, to be theirs forever. And whoso ex- 
hibits my signs, shall know that they are 
my covenant which I have made unto mor- 
tals. 

Kabalactes then appointed twelve thou- 
sand four hundred and eighty-eight angels, 
to go down to Vind'yu, to re-write the sa- 
cred books of mortals. And he crowned 
Gaonaza chief of the inspiring host. 

To write the five great books, five mor- 
tals had been previously chosen from be- 
fore their birth, by the guardian angels 
appointed for the purpose. These men 
were: Harritza, to write the Avesta; 
Vraghettes, to write the Venddad; Roy- 
hoh, to write the Vispered; Yathavah, to 
write the Yacna; and Uzariah, to write the 
Khordavesta. 

The angels chosen by Kabalactes in hea- 
ven, were sent down to these mortals in in- 
fancy, to guard them from the time of 
their birth upward. And the angels were 
divided into watches, sufficient to keep 
away all other angels, to be with their mor- 
tal wards day and night, to converse with 
them in their dreams, to give them visions 
and good habits and virtue and truth and 
wisdom. And it came to pass that when 
these mortals were grown up, and the time 
came for their work, they were with their 



CYCLE OF L1KA 



467 



guardian spirits as one, knowing and com- 
prehending the voice of their master, Kab- 
alactes, whom they were inspired to call 
Ahura'Mazda, because this name was pleas- 
ing to mortals. 

Gaonaza, commander of the inspiring 
hosts, distributed the twelve lights of the 
throne, the angels in rapport with the five 
mortals, to each of them, save to Harritza, 
and to him he gave four. And now, when 
the writing was done, the following was 
the manner of inspiration: 

The writer was previously inspired to 
be at his post at dawn in the morning, and 
to have all things in readiness for writing 
half an hour before sunrise, and to write 
until sunrise. And the angels in rapport 
stood beside him, laying their hands upon 
him. Next to these angels stood another 
angel, with hands upon them; and, after 
that one, stood another, and so on, for one 
thousand angels in a line, extending in a 
direct line toward Haractu, the heavenly 
seat of Kabalactes. And from the extreme 
thousandth angel in line on, up to the hea- 
venly throne, were stretched three cords of 
es'sean light, even to the High Council, 
before whom spake the chief of the ten 
thousand, as previously instructed by Kab- 
alactes. And, as this chief spake in hea- 
ven, the es of his voice passed down to the 
mortal, who framed in earth-words that 
which was spoken in heaven. 

Thus were written the sacred books of 
Vind'yu. And copies of these books 
were written on cloth, paper and stone; 
and some of which were carried in 
different directions over Vind'yu. In 
eighty-seven years Kabalactes completed 
the sacred books, and disbanded the inspir- 
ing hosts. 

So far Kabalactes had destroyed nine 
million men, women and children in the 
wars. He had also destroyed four thou- 
sand heathen temples, and more than three 
hundred cities. And he suppressed over 
two hundred languages, and banished six 
thousand two hundred false Lords. He 
also commanded all languages to be here- 
after made out of Vedic, Yi-ha and Zend, 
from which Sanscrit descended. 



CHAPTER XLIV. 

Ennochissa, the Triune God of the hea- 
venly place, Eta-shong, over Chine'ya, said: 
According to the splendor of a kingdom, 
so is the ruler thereof glorified; this I have 
learned. Therefore Eta-shong shall surpass 
all other heavenly places. Thus spake he 
before his Lords. 

Vazista said: Thy Lords are of the 
same mind. As for Looeamong and Kab- 
alactes, they are more bent on the affairs 
of earth than of heaven. 

Ennochissa spent two hundred years in 
building and beautifying his heavenly city, 
Eta-shong, employing more than two 
thousand million slaves for that purpose. 
And, as to his heavenly palace, and the 
palace of his High Council, in grandeur 
and magnificence, the like had not been be- 
fore in any of the .lower heavens. 

The circuit of the columns of fire, of 
which there were one million, was equal 
to half the breadth of the land of Chine'ya. 
And the height and size of the palace were 
so great it could be seen at a distance 
of a thousand miles. In the front 
of his palace were four hundred thou- 
sand arches and pillars, and leading 
up to the foot of the throne, seventy 
steps, with a breadth of one thousand 
lengths. In front of the arches was an are- 
na, four thousand lengths across, and this 
was ornamented with one hundred thou- 
sand fountains of fire and water. Inter- 
spersed, here and there, on the walls and 
arches, were hanging gardens of flowers, 
and drapery of gold and silver. 

And as to the workmanship displayed, it 
was so fine that no language can convey 
an idea thereof to mortal understanding, 
except it be said that everything was rep- 
resented that is on the earth and in the 
heavens thereof. 

The officers of the palace, next in grade 
below the High Council, the Lords, mar- 
shals and recorders, were generals, cap- 
tains, inspectors, surveyors, receivers and 
builders, and these were all above grade 
ninety. There were maintained within the 
palace .arena half a million es'enaurs and 
trumpeters, four million fire and water 
servants, and three million bearers of bur- 



468 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



dens; and yet, beside these, there were six 
million caterers and servants. 

Only officers of rank could cross the 
arena, or approach the arches by walking 
upright; all others had to crawl on their 
bellies in approaching the throne, saying 
prayers the while. 

Now, although the other Triunes had 
great capitals and palaces, they were not 
to be compared with Ennochissa's. 

Thus labored this Triune, even to the 
neglect of his earthly dominions. And it 
came to pass that God, Jehovih's Son, in 
Paradise sowed the seed of faith in Chine'- 
ya in favor of the Creator; so that, by the 
end of two hundred years, nearly all the 
spirits of the dead went not to the Triune, 
but to God in Paradise. And God's angel 
missionaries went into this Triune's hea- 
venly kingdom, and won many converts to 
Jehovih. 

So that Ennochissa discovered that his 
heavenly kingdom was losing ground. 
Thereupon he resolved to enter the field of 
war, and to destroy all mortals in Chine'- 
ya that worshipped the Great Spirit. And 
he also resolved to drive out from his hea- 
vens all angels who believed in Jehovih, 
or who were missionaries unto the king- 
don of God in Paradise. 

Ennochissa was thus the first of the 
Triunes to declare war against Jehovih, 
which was exactly in opposition to his 
own professions, when the Confederacy 
was first formed. From this time on, En- 
nochissa was called by the Faithists in hea- 
ven, a false God. As yet. the other two 
Triunes had fought more for Jehovih than 
against Him. 

After this, both mortals and angels in 
Chine'ya knew no peace. And when no 
war existed betwixt any two or more cities 
or states, and the people were Jehovihians, 
Ennochissa, with his hundreds of millions 
of angel warriors, obsessed such mortals, 
and plunged them into war, to make them 
destroy one another. 

CHAPTER XLV. 

When the Triune Gods perceived the 
great work accomplished by God, Jehovih's 
Son, in Vind'yii and Chine'ya through Sa- 
kaya and Ka'yu, they were sorely troubled 
for the ultimate prospect of their own 
heavenly kingdoms. Ennochissa, Triune 



of Eta-shong, the heavenly kingdom over 
Chine'ya, sent an invitation to his two 
brother Triunes, to come to his heavenly 
city, to confer as to what should be done. 

Accordingly, Kabalactes and Looea- 
mong went to Eta-shong, where they were 
received in great grandeur, by one thou- 
sand million angels, and conducted to En- 
nochissa's heavenly capital and to his 
throne. After due salutations and ceremo- 
nies, the Triunes all took seats on the 
throne. Whereupon the High Council re- 
tired, leaving only the Lords-in-attendance 
and the chief marshals within the crescent 
of the throne. 

Ennochissa said: My brothers, peace 
be with you, because of my great joy for 
your presence. Behold, Chine'ya, my 
earthly kingdom, is being sapped in the 
foundation by the Ka'yu'an doctrines. 
What more will these people care for the 
Trinity? Jehovih is triumphant. 

Kabalactes said: As thou hast spoken 
of Chine'ya, so say I of Vind'yu: The doc- 
trine of the Trinity is being entirely de- 
stroyed by the Sakaya'yan doctrines. Our 
heavenly kingdoms will lose their base of 
supplies for subjects. Jehovih is trium- 
phant. 

Looeamong said: My brothers, it is 
not my place to point out the mistakes of 
others. But ye twain have built great hea- 
venly capitals and palaces. Your kingdoms 
are embellished, as these heavens never 
were before, with magnificent cities. 

Now, whilst ye were thus building, be- 
hold, I went with my legions down to the 
earth to war. I have not only overthrown 
many of the false Gods and Lords, but 
put the worshippers of Jehovih to death. 
Therefore, I have done little to beautify 
my heavenly kigndoms; but I rest above 
fear and apprehension. Nevertheless, what 
soever ye would that I can do, to assist 
you out of your dilemmas, that will I do. 

Now, after many suggestions and pro- 
posals, which were not accepted, Ennoch- 
issa said: As God in Paradise hath 
taken an earthly course to insure his suc- 
cess, why shall not we also? Behold, let 
us seek out a number of mortals also, and 
through them, establish our doctrines with 
mortals. 

Looeamong said: A most wise sugges- 
tion. 






CYCLE OF LIKA 



469 



Kabalactes said: This have I seen, since 
a long time, would be necessary to accom- 
plish. 

Thereupon a coalition was entered into 
by the three Triunes to give to mortals 
forty-nine Saviors, in order to establish the 
Trinity. Which labor should be accom- 
plished within two hundred years. And it 
was also stipulated, that the whole forty- 
nine Saviors should be put to death igno- 
miniously in order to win mortal sympa- 
thy. 

To accomplish this, the Triune Confed- 
eracy provided, that each kingdom should 
supply one million angels for the army of 
inspiration, and that the same doctrine 
should be enunciated through every Savior, 
raised up for the work. And, accordingly, 
the three million inspiring angels were se- 
lected, all being above grade eighty. 

For Looeamong's hosts, Thoth was 
made captain. For Kabalactes' hosts, Yima 
was made captain. For Ennochissa's 
hosts, Satree was made captain. 

Accordingly, these three, Thoth, Yima 
and Satree, with their three million, were 
sent down to the earth, to raise up 
amongst mortals the required Saviors. 
And there were thus given to the earth, in 
the space of less than two hundred years, 
forty-nine Saviors. Their names were: 
Rita, Gibbor, Gaal, Efrokin, Gargra, 
Thules, Etrus, Gadamon and Shofal; and 
Thules, of the house of Thules, Eterus, 
Gadamon and Shofal; and all of these were 
of Egupt. 

Of the land of Par'si'e, the following 
men: Adakus, Mithra, Bali, Malopesus, 
Gonsalk, Hebron, Belus, of the house of 
Belus, Megath, Yodman and Beels. 

Of Vind'yii, the following: Indra, Yuth, 
Sakai, Withoban, Aria, Devatat, Chrisna, 
Laracqu, Hagre, Anathia, Jannassa and 
Janeirus. 

Of Chine'ya, the following: Sam Sin, 
Ah Wah, Ah Chong, K'aou'foor, King 
Shu, Shaou and Chung Le. 

Of Heleste and Uropa, the following: 
Datur, Promethus, Quirnus, Iyo, Osseo 
and Yohannas. 

And all of these preached the doctrine 
of the Father, Son and Holy Ghost, and 
performed miracles. And the same angels 
inspired their enemies to put them to 
death. Some were boiled in oil, some were 



devoured by lions, and some nailed on the 
ugsa and left to perish. 

Now so far as the Triune doctrine af- 
fected mortals, it related chiefly to war. 
The confederate Gods had said: War for 
righteousness' sake is just. We go to the 
earth to put swords and spears in the 
hands of the innocent and upright, saying 
to them: Defend yourselves! Establish 
yourselves! There is no Ever Present All 
Person. All things were created out of the 
Holy Ghost. Depend upon yourselves. 
Rise up and be men, mighty to do the will 
of the Son, the Father and the Holy Ghost. 

CHAPTER XLVI. 

When God, Son of Jehovih, saw the 
work of the Triunes, he bewailed the ways 
of heaven. Jehovih said to him: Bewail 
not, My Son, nor grieve for what they 
have done. But make thou a record of 
their works; for mortals will preserve a his- 
tory of this period, which shall be called, 
the Era of Saviors. And it shall stand as 
the darkest era in the cycle of Lika. But 
it shall come to pass on the earth, that the 
Triunes will cut themselves off in a way 
they see not. For mortals will worship the 
Saviors. Whereupon the Triunes will be- 
come divided in their heavenly kingdoms. 

So God bewailed no more, but prepared 
a new army of a thousand million angels, 
to go down to the earth, to provide for re- 
ceiving the spirits of such as were to be 
slain in wars near at hand. 

Of these hosts, Eyodemus was given 
command, and he appointed the following 
officers to each hundred million, to go 
with him: Sogothwich, Yutempasa, Loo 
Wan, Thagaik, Maratha, Wein, Shuberth, 
Le Shong, Taivi and Duraya. 

Nor did they reach the earth any too 
soon, for war soon circled the whole earth 
and every nation and tribe and peo- 
ple were immured in bloody carnage. 
This period was practically the end of the 
good works of the Triune, but equally so 
the beginning of their mighty kingdoms in 
heaven, which were destined, ere long, to 
overshadow the whole earth. 

The war, they set on foot on earth, ex- 
tended into their own kingdoms. And these 
three Gods, the Triunes, saw, that only by 
might and desperate vigor, they could pre- 
serve their heavens from anarchy. Five 



470 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



of the sub-Gods of Kabalactes, of Vind'yu, 
revolted within his own kingdom, and set 
up places of their own. And they falsely 
assumed the names of the Saviors, who had 
been put to death in Vind'yu. 

Kabalactes summoned his remaining 
chief officers to Haractu, his heavenly city, 
before his throne. And when they were 
before him, he said unto them: 

This is the emergency of the Gods. My 
voice and my strong arm are raised up. 
Miscreants, whom I elevated to official po- 
sitions in heaven, have betrayed their trust. 
With their legions they have seceded, and 
set up kingdoms of their own. 

I have called you before me, that ye 
might jointly hear my decree, and obey. I 
will have order and harmony in my heaven. 
Neither shall there be but one God in my 
dominions, even myself. It is my will, 
therefore, that ye pursue these rebellious 
captains down to the earth, to their heaven- 
ly kingdoms, and despoil them utterly. 
And if need be, ye shall capture them and 
their chief leaders, and cast them into hell. 
For they shall understand that I am not a 
God of peace, like the Jehovihian Gods, 
but a God of war. 

For this purpose, I appoint Yima as my 
Holy Ambassador and Earth Warrior. 
And I give to him two thousand million 
warriors, that he may make quick work of 
my rebellious chiefs. My marshal shall se- 
lect, therefore, for thee, Yima, the two 
thousand million angel warriors; and thou 
shalt appoint thine own generals and cap- 
tains, and go at once down to the earth re- 
gions of these miscreants, and carry out my 
commandments. 

Yima and his hosts did as commanded, 
but not suddenly; for an angel war ensued 
which lasted forty-six years, before the 
five rebellious Gods were beaten from their 
strongholds. And, even then, they were 
not captured and cast into hell; but they 
escaped, taking half a million angel war- 
riors with them, and they migrated to 
Uropa, to the city of Roma, where they 
established themselves in security. Thus 
the deposed Vind'yu Gods became Gods of 
Roma. 

Immediately after Yima succeeded in 
clearing Vind'yu, Kabalactes summoned 
him again to Haractu, his heavenly seat, 
before his High Council. When he had 



thus come, Kabalactes spoke from the 
throne, saying: 

Because my wisdom hath triumphed in 
heaven and earth, I now take unto myself 
a new name, Budha. And from this day 
and hour I shall be called by no other name 
forever. And my heavenly place, my city 
and my heavens shall be known henceforth, 
forever, as Haractu, the Budhist heavenly 
kingdom, the All Highest Heaven of Hea- 
vens! 

Thou, Yima, shalt repair again to the 
earth with thy two thousand million war- 
ring angels, and establish me, as the Bud- 
ha. By fire and sword, by blood and death 
shalt thou establish my name on the earth. 
And thou shalt find a way to teach mortals, 
that I was Sakaya, and Sakaya was and is 
the Budha, Son of the Triune, Son of the 
Holy Ghost. 

Jehovih had said: Behold the time will 
come unto both Gods and men who deny 
My All Person, when they will espouse 
even falsehood for sake of their own selfish 
ends. 

Jehovih spake to God, saying: Behold, 
he commandeth himself to be called Budha. 
Now I say unto thee, suffer this also to be, 
neither accuse thou him before heaven or 
earth of his falsehood. Nay, but thou shalt 
also henceforth call him Budha, signifying 
All Knowledge, for it is his choice. 

So from this time after, Kabalactes was 
called Budha in heaven. And his angel 
hosts under Yima, who descended to the 
earth, inspired mortals, both through the 
oracles and by inspiration, to call Sa- 
kaya, Budha, and Budha, Sakaya. And in 
not many generations, mortals forgot that 
they were two persons; but they accredited 
all things of the spirit to Budha, and all 
things of the flesh to Sakaya, although the 
whole matter was false in fact. The follow- 
ers of Budha professed peace, but practiced 
war and conquest, setting out by blood and 
carnage and destruction to establish Bud- 
hism in Vind'yu. 

Jehovih said to God: Even this shalt 
thou permit them to do. For herein will 
they lay the foundation of the final over- 
throw of this false God, Budha. For they 
will put aside the Trinity of themselves, 
retaining Budha and the Holy Ghost. Yea, 
they will ultimately teach, that Budha is 
but a principle, and that the Holy Ghost is 
as nothing. 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



471 



CHAPTER XLVII. 

Not less were the trials of Ennochissa; 
for his sub-Gods also revolted, and many 
of them assumed the names of the Saviors 
he had given to Chine'ya. And he also 
sent an army of two thousand million an- 
gel warriors down to the earth to destroy 
them, and break them up, and if need be to 
capture them, and cast them in hell. 

Of these hosts, he made Ya'deth chief 
captain, giving him power to select his 
own captains and generals. And it came to 
pass, that a heavenly war ensued on the 
earth, in Chine'ya, betwixt the hosts of 
Ya'deth and the rebellious sub-Gods and 
their hosts, which lasted seventy years. 
And Ya'deth gained the victory, clearing 
away all the rebel angels of the sub-Gods, 
and putting them to flight. Four of these 
rebel Gods fled into Argos, to Athena, 
where they established themselves securely. 

Ennochissa now summoned Ya'deth and 
his victorious army to Eta-shong, his hea- 
venly kingdom. And when he was before 
the throne, Ennochissa said unto him: 

Thou hast beholden the machinations 
of my brother Triune God, Kabalactes, 
who hath falsely assumed the name, Bud- 
ha, and proclaimed himself the All Highest 
God, and his heaven the All Highest Hea- 
ven of Heavens. Two things do I decree, 
this day and hour: An army of angels, 
for the earth, of two thousand million; and 
thou, Ya'deth, shalt be their commander, 
to do my will. And another army of an- 
gel warriors, for my heavenly kingdom of 
Eta-shong, and for my kingdom of Da- 
maya, over Guatama. 

For my heavenly army, thou, Loo Wan, 
shalt be commander for Eta-shong; and 
thou, Birawotha, shalt be commander for 
Damaya. And to ye, I assign the 
care and protection of my kingdoms 
with your armies. And ye shall wall your 
places around and fortify me on every side 
with angel warriors. Yet, menace not the 
angels of Budha nor of Looeamong. Nev- 
ertheless, if they offend, or are disrespect- 
ful of me and my kingdoms, ye shall ar- 
rest them, and provide places of torture for 
them, and cast them in. 

But as for thee, Ya'deth, thou and thy 
hosts shall return again to the earth, to 
mortals, and establish me as Brahma, 
which shall be my name on earth and in 



heaven from this time forth forever. And 
thou shalt possess the oracles, and by all 
possible means establish me amongst mor- 
tals, as well in Vind'yu as in Chine'ya. And 
all v^ho profess Brahma hereafter, shall be 
my subjects on their entrance into heaven. 

And if it come to pass that Budha's 
mortal warriors fall upon the mortal Brah- 
mans, to destroy them, then shalt thou con- 
sider that Budha is my enemy. And thou 
and thy angel warriors shall obsess every 
Brahman to take up arms, and war to the 
death every aggressing Budha. For Bud- 
ha shall learn that I, Brahma, rule these 
heavens in mine own way. 

So the four thousand million warriors 
of Ennochissa (now falsely named Brah- 
ma), were selected, and apportioned and 
marched off to their several places in great 
pomp and glory. To describe even one of 
these armies, with their music and their 
implements of war, their manual and pro- 
cession, would require a large book. Then 
their vessels of war; their implements of 
fire and water; their banners and flags; and, 
above all, their enthusiasm. For many of 
them had been warriors in earth-life, and 
knew no other trade, and now exulted in 
the prospect of mortal blood and death. 

Of the sub-Gods of Vind'yu and Chine'- 
ya, Jehovih said: In time to come, 
man of the earth will look abroad over the 
earth and say: How came the Vind'yu 
Gods in Roma? How came the Chine'ya 
Gods in Athena? For, since they will not 
be able to answer their own questions, they 
will perceive, there must have been a hea- 
venly cause that mortals knew not of. 

For in time of My revelations, it will 
not be sufficient unto either heaven or 
earth to re-establish spiritual communion; 
but it shall also be shown unto them that 
there are kingdoms and principalities in 
heaven. And they are ruled over by both 
good and bad Gods. Moreover, they shall 
understand that of a truth whoso worship- 
ped Budha shall go to Budha to be his 
slaves; and whoso worshippeth Brahma 
shall go to Brahma, and be his slaves. I 
will make it plain to them that to worship 
a spirit, though he be a God, is but the giv- 
ing of their own souls into bondage. For 
they shall in that day understand that the 
Great Spirit, the Ever Present, is not an 
idol in the figure of a man, sitting on a 
throne. 



472 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



Moreover, spirits and mortals shall per- 
ceive that to deny My Person, will, soon or 
late, bring the doer into a trap from which 
he cannot escape. Give- then to Ennochis- 
sa the name Brahma, for it is his ckoice. 
And thou shalt perceive that the time will 
come, when he will seek to throw aside, 
even this name, and even his own person, 
in order to escape hell. 

Thus were established the two false 
Gods, Budha and Brahma. And at once 
there was a war in heaven, as well as on 
earth. And this was virtually the end of 
the schools and colleges in these heavens, 
and also the beginning of the breaking up 
of the factories and places of industry in 
the two kingdoms, Eta-shong and Haractu, 
in atmospherea. 

CHAPTER XLVIII. 

Chine'ya was so well established in the 
doctrines fo Chine and Ka'yu, that the peo- 
ple shunned war and idolatry. The Saviors 
had gained but little footing. And now, 
when the Gods sought to inspire the people 
to war, in order to establish themselves, 
Brahma and Budha, only the most barbar- 
ous regions could be influenced. 

Brahma, the false God, now perceiving 
the potency of Ka'yu's books, sent his an- 
gel warriors to inspire the Sun King, T'sin, 
to have all the books in Chine'ya destroy- 
ed, in order to reduce the empire to ig- 
norance. 

Brahma said: I will have all, or de- 
stroy all. My angels shall not let sleep in 
peace, any king or governor in all this 
land, until he engage in the work of thus 
destroying mine enemy, Learning. 

Accordingly, the Sun King, T'sin, is- 
sued a decree, commanding all the books 
and tablets of Chine'ya to be destroyed. 
And there were destroyed, in one year, 
more than five million books, and one mill- 
ion tablets of stone and copper; being the 
destruction of the books of the ancients, 
for upward of twenty thousand years. Be- 
sides these, there were destroyed many of 
the books of Ka'yu, but not all of them. 

In the meantime, the anti-war spirit of 
the people had cried out to the Creator: O 
Father, what shall we do to avert war, and 
to preserve the revelations of Thy holy 
ones of old? And Jehovih answered them, 



through God of Paradise, Jehovih's Son, 
saying: 

Build ye walls against the barbarians. 
And your walls shall stand as a testimony 
of what ye are willing to do, rather than 
engage in war, even for self-preservation. 
Because ye have faith in Me, I will be with 
you even unto the end. 

And so the Faithists of Chine'ya built 
stone walls, the greatest in all the world. 

Jehovih said: Behold the works of My 
chosen. As long as these walls stand, they 
shall be testimony of the struggle of My 
people, to maintain themselves, by means 
of peace instead of war. And the walls 
shall be monuments to the Faithists of 
this land, who have perished by the false 
Gods, Brahma and Budha. Yea, the testi- 
mony of these walls shall be stronger, in 
time to come, against Brahma and Budha, 
than though every stone were a sword and 
a spear. And the followers of My Son, 
Ka'yu, shall loathe them with pity and hate. 

Since these, My chosen people, have 
achieved the age of peace on earth, let 
them shut themselves in from the barbar- 
ians without, and they shall remain a se- 
cluded people till the coming of kosmon. 

In Vind'yu also, did the machinations 
of Budha and Brahma work sore mischief 
on mortals. In this country both of these 
false Gods decreed the destruction of all 
books and tablets, save such as looked fa- 
vorable to their own doctrines. And there 
were here destroyed more than two million 
books and one million tablets, of stone and 
copper. And the schools and colleges of 
the people were well nigh destroyed, the 
whole length and breadth of the land. And 
in both, Chine'ya and Vind'yu, there were 
slain in war, in order to establish the names 
of these Gods amongst mortals, more than 
one hundred and forty million peo- 
ple, men, women and children. By the 
angel warriors of these two Gods were 
mortals thus inspired in the work of de- 
struction. Not only against the Faithists 
were these Gods, but against each other 
also. And mortals were their victims, for 
the glory and exaltation of the two hea- 
venly kingdoms, Haractu and Eta-shong. 

CHAPTER XLIX. 

Looeamong said: Till I have Baal cast 
into hell, I will not cease the carnage of 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



473 



mortal blood. But Baal, the self-God of 
Heleste, called his mighty legions in hea- 
ven, and sent them down to the earth, re- 
doubled, to inspire mortals to bloody 
deeds. 

Baal said: Mine is an easy doctrine to 
understand. All mortals that worship not 
Baal shall be put to death. The worship- 
pers of the Trinity, the Father, Son and 
Holy Ghost, are my enemies. Such mor- 
tals shall die! Such angels shall go the 
way of hell. The Faithists, the worship- 
pers of Jehovih, are also my enemies. 
Such mortals shall be tortured and sawed 
in halves. Such angels shall be bound in 
knots in hell, and suffocated forever! I 
will have them know that Baal is the All 
Highest God of heaven and earth. 

Looeamong said: I come not to bring 
peace, but war! I come to set nation 
against nation, people against people, man 
against man. For righteousness' sake will 
I purify the earth with human blood. I 
will not have a half-way peace; I will de- 
stroy my enemies, east and west, north and 
south. By the Holy Ghost have I sworn 
it! And the kingdoms of Egupt, and of 
Media, of Armenia, and Phrygia, and Ar- 
gos, and Scythia and Noamedia, and of all 
the regions of Arabin'ya and the west, 
shall know no peace till I have destroyed 
the worship of all Gods but the Triunes. 
And there was no peace in any of those 
lands. Neither was there system to the 
warfare, looking to any important result. 

Jehovih hath said: Let this stand as a 
testimony unto coming generations. For 
they shall look back to these times, and be- 
hold, that the wars raged without purpose 
on the part of any king. And that mortals 
were but instruments in the hands of the 
angels, who ruled over them. And it shall 
be testimony unto them of what cometh 
upon peoples, who deny My Person. For 
they shall compare the peace and rejoicing 
of My people, whilst they had no king, but 
kept My commandments, with such as put 
Me away, and tried to make themselves 
strong in kings and standing armies. 

Baal now established two more heaven- 
ly kingdoms, one over Jerusalem, and one. 
above the Apennine mountains, off from 
Roma. And in the latter kingdom, which 
he called Arkoli, he made an alliance with 
the Vind'yu Gods that escaped from their 
own heavenly regions and fled to the mor- 



tal city, Roma. And near Athena, he 
founded a sub-kingdom of five hundred 
million angels, and made an alliance with 
the Gods that escaped from the Brahman 
kingdoms. 

Looeamong, the Triune God of the 
Holy Ghost, beheld, with fear and trem- 
bling, his formidable enemy, Baal. And so 
he determined to send to Budha for as- 
sistance. Thus he solicited: 

To the Triune, the Holy Budha, Son of 
the Holy Ghost, greeting in love and ma- 
jesty. By the power of the Triunes are we 
sworn to each other, to establish the Holy 
Ghost in heaven and earth. By which con- 
federacy are we three Gods powerful above 
all other Gods. Now behold, Baal, the 
most fiendish of all Gods, wageth war 
against our holy doctrines in all the regions 
of my heavenly kingdoms and on my do- 
minions of the earth also. But my forces 
in heaven and earth need reinforcement. 
And I come to thee, according to our orig- 
inal compact, asking for a thousand million 
angel warriors. 

By messengers Looeamong sent this 
appeal to Budha, who answered him: It 
is said that great trials are the making of 
angels and mortals. I need my hosts for 
mine own purposes. Nevertheless, if thou 
wilt cede Egupt to me, thou shalt have the 
army thou asketh for, for the space of one 
hundred years. 

Insulting as was this proposal, Looea- 
mong was obliged to accede to it, or to 
have his kingdom destroyed by Baal. Ac- 
cordingly, such an alliance was entered 
into; and so, Looeamong removed his 
heavenly city, Hapsendi, westward, and 
build it over Noamedia. And immediately 
thereafter, Budha established a heavenly 
kingdom in Egupt, and called it Ceionia, 
giving its management into the keeping of 
Thoth, the Bertian, an angel, so named, 
because he was cunning, like a fox. 

With these additional forces, Looea- 
mong now renewed the assault on Baal on 
every side, even more violently in his hea- 
venly places than on earth. And Looea- 
mong routed Baal from his heavenly king- 
dom, and from his sub-kingdoms also, but 
he did not capture him, or subdue him. 
And the angels of Looeamong obtained 
Jerusalem and Athena, besides two hundred 
small cities, with their oracle-houses and 
temples also. And Looeamong's angel 



4:74: 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



warriors took possession of them, so they 
could answer the oracles, the magicians 
and priests, in their own way. Baal still 
maintained an army of three thousand mill- 
ion angel warriors; and he established him- 
self in the city of Roma and Hieadas, but 
used most of his army as rambling maraud- 
ers. 

Now, when Looeamong beheld, that 
the other Triunes had taken new names 
falsely, and that they had gained power 
thereby, he resolved to adopt for himself 
the names, Lord God. Thoth, his chief 
warrior angel, righting against Baal, had 
said: Most Holy Triune, I must give mor- 
tals a name to fight for. The term, Holy 
Ghost, is not potent. 

So, Looeamong falsely assumed to be 
God, the Lord of heaven and earth. He 
said to Thoth: Go tell mortals I am the 
same, who wrought wonders for the Isra- 
elites. And, then the Israelites will fight 
for me. 

Thoth did this. And furthermore Looe- 
among inspired one Ezra, to gather all the 
records he could, to be proof of his labors 
for the Israelites. To accomplish this, 
Thoth employed seven hundred thousand 
angels, to be with Ezra and the numerous 
scribes whom Ezra employed. And by 
their inspiration seventy-two books were 
written and compiled, which were put on 
file in the king's library in Jerusalem, and 
these books were named by Ezra, The 
Holy Library. 

CHAPTER L. 

Then came Moses from his etherean 
realms to Paradise, accompanied by a suffi- 
cient host. The heavenly kingdoms of 
God were stirred from center to cir- 
cumference, when it was heralded 
abroad that Moses was coming. And Par- 
adise was like a new heavenly city, being 
acceded by an influx of more than a thou- 
sand million visitors for the occasion. And 
heralds and receivers and marshals and mu- 
sicians extended every way. A whole book 
might be written on the glory of the oc- 
casion, when that etherean ship descended 
from the higher heavens. Suffice it, Moses 
was received according to the custom of 
Gods. And God said to Moses: Come and 
honor my throne; and I will proclaim a file 
before the throne, to be followed by two 
days' recreation. 



Then Moses went up, and sat on the 
throne of God. And God proclaimed the 
file; whereupon hundreds of millions, thou- 
sands of millions, filed past the throne of 
God, that they might look upon Moses' 
face. And Moses stood up before them. 
Moses said: 

I remember standing on the earth whilst 
the hosts that came out of Egupt passed 
before me! Great Jehovih, what symbols 
of things Thou givest. And ever with a 
new thrill of joy to the soul. 

That was all he said; but so great was 
the love and glory in his face as he stood 
on the throne of God that every soul that 
passed said: Moses, blessed Son of Jeho- 
vih! 

And God granted two days' recreation, 
during which time the ethereans mingled 
with the atmosphereans in great delight. 
Afterwards, Moses, with his hosts went to 
Elaban, his colony of Eguptians, who were 
now raised high in the grades. And Moses 
had them removed to Aroqu, where they 
were duly prepared and adorned as Brides 
and Bridegrooms of Jehovih. And, after 
suitable preparation, Moses provided for 
their ascent to the Nirvanian fields of Met- 
apotamas, in etherea, sending them in 
charge of his own hosts. 

After that, Moses and his remaining 
hosts descended to the earth, to Arabin'- 
ya, to the tribes of Es'eans, which had 
been raised up by Illaes. And great was 
the meeting betwixt Illaes and Moses. The 
former broke down with emotion. He 
said: All praise to Thee, O Jehovih! Thou 
hast remembered me at last. 

Moses came to him, and said: I have 
come for thee, O Nu-ghan! I have a place 
prepared for thee and thy hosts in my 
etherean kingdoms! Thou hast done well! 

Then Moses and his hosts drew their 
otevan down to the angel camp, which was 
near the camp of the mortals, the Es'eans. 
Many of the Es'eans looked up and beheld 
the otevan. And Moses and Illaes went 
and stood before Joshu, and he saw them. 

Moses said unto him: My son! my son! 
The light of Eloih is upon thee. Israel, 
through thee, shall regain the All One. 

Thereupon, Moses and his hosts, to- 
gether with Illaes and his hosts, went into 
the otevan, and immediately took course 
for Paradise, God's heavenly seat, where 






CYCLE OF LIKA 



475 



they arrived in due season. And, after 
three days, they again entered the fire-ship, 
and took course for Moses' etherean 
realms. 

CHAPTER LI. 

Now, behold, Looeamong stood no 
longer upon the practice of righteousness, 
but upon might. Neither considered he 
more the resurrection of mortals or angels. 

The craft and wisdom of Baal baffled 
Looeamong, in both his heavenly battles 
and his battles for mortals. The whole of 
the countries of Egupt, Par'si'e, Heleste 
and Uropa were in war; and the heavens of 
these countries were also in war, with hun- 
dreds of hells within them. Looeamong 
fought no longer for the Trinity nor the 
Holy Ghost, but to save his heavenly king- 
dom, lest he be captured, and cast into 
hell. And even more desperately was Baal 
situated against him. 

In the meantime, the other two Triunes 
began to war against each other in their 
heavenly kingdoms, contending for boun- 
daries and subjects. 

Thoth sent the following message to 
Looeamong, to-wit: Greeting to thee, 
thou Most High Triune, in the name of the 
Holy Ghost. Wherein I am embarrassed, 
I pray thee, give me leniency. My suit 
is not without due deliberation and through 
prayers to the Holy Ghost. Long have I 
fought thy battles, and I have gained great 
power and authority in many kingdoms, in 
heaven and earth. 

But, behold, I labor against Gods who 
have the advantage of me. The Chine'ya 
rebel Gods and the Vind'yu rebel Gods, 
have taken upon themselves names 
I popular with mortals: Nestor, alias Puith; 
Neptune, alias Poseidon; Oileus, alias Pen- 
dre; Priam, alias Hogath; Phoebus, alias 
Onewakax, and Apollo; Pales, alias Shu- 
ganista; Pelides, alias Peleus; Saturn, alias 
Kronos; Thaleia, alias Musae; Thestor, 
alias Suko, Bayrith and Calchas; Thetis, 
alias Arama, Mi, Mara, Achill'ya and Ar- 
gos; Venus, alias Seinalt, Vishnu, Mira, 
Thor and Theo; Vulcan, alias Anawahah, 
Ir, Agni and Hefaste'yan; Calianessa, alias 
Vritta; Hecla, alias Jah, Tyronia and Nile- 
us; Nermertis, alias Itra, Prometh'ya, Ari 
and Mithra; Opsendes, alias Miletus, Brah- 
ma, Ishaka, Davetat, Sakaya and Moroto- 



tha; Pherna, alias Holasa, Iao, Crite and 
Thammus; Speio, alias Pelides, Hecla and 
Vulcan; Thor, alias Padua, Hermes, Be- 
lus, Hiroth and Yosammis; Thoa, alias 
Thor, Neptune, Orion, Aph and Thulis; 
Quiurnus, Vishnu, Ahambre, K'isna, Atys 
and Etus. 

And yet these are not all. For these 
Gods have no fear of the Holy Ghost, and 
they choose any name that will be flatter- 
ing to mortals. And the magicians and 
priests, and such others as have power to 
hear the voices of spirits, are led to be- 
lieve that they hear the very Gods whose 
names are given. This, then, is my misfor- 
tune, thou most Holy God of the Triune: 

I am commanded to give but one name, 
even the Holy Ghost, of the Father, to 
mortals. Or, whether my angel hosts 
speak to the oracles or to persons capable 
of hearing spirits, and say to them: Fight 
ye for the Holy Ghost, or fight ye for the 
Creative element, mortals heed us not. Or, 
they irreverently mock us, saying: What 
care we for a God that is but a ghost, a 
shadow, a creative element? Give us Gods 
that talk, and of themselves. We want no 
angels from the Holy Ghost. Bring your 
Gods, and let the oracles tell us what they 
say. 

Looeamong then sent messengers and a 
suitable escort to Jerusalem, on the earth, 
where Thoth was stationed at the time, 
with an angel host of warriors, command- 
ing his presence before his Holy Council 
in Hapsendi, Looeamong's heavenly city 
and kingdom. 

Now, after Thoth went thither, and they 
held a Council of many days, a disturbance 
arose in the Council in consequence of the 
heat of the debates. For the Gods of the 
Council, for the most part, said: What 
better are we than the Jehovihians? What 
greater power have we than the Jehovih- 
ians? Who can answer the philosophy of 
Thoth? It is a truth, mortals have never 
been satisfied with an angel from the 
Gods. They want the God himself. Was 
not this forever the weakness of the Jeho- 
vihians? Such angels could give no name 
that mortals knew, save they falsely as- 
sumed a name. Hence their weakness, 
compared to such angels as unscrupulous- 
ly assumed to be Gods. 



476 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



We all knew these things before our 
Confederacy was formed. Yea, one of 
the chief reasons for forming a confed- 
eracy in heaven was that we might more 
effectually overcome the power of evil spir- 
its over mortals. In that day, we said: 
The three persons, the Son, the Father and 
the Holy Ghost, would enable us to ap- 
pear in person and with authority unto 
mortals. But it hath now come to pass 
mortals desire a more definite God, one 
known to them. We cannot truthfully 
take the name of any God Thoth hath 
named; nor of any other God worshipped 
by mortals. 

Looeamong then drove hence from the 
palace his High Council, that he might 
have an opportunity to reason with himself, 
as to what he should do. 

Satan said to Looeamong: Behold, thy 
one-time brother Triunes have had great 
advantage of thee from the start. They 
had more populous kingdoms and subjects 
of higher grades. Nevertheless, wherein 
they have prospered thou shalt be wise. 
They also found it necessary to have a 
name, that mortals could call unto. And 
they took upon themselves the names, 
Brahma and Budha, both of which signify 
All Knowledge; and this hath satisfied mor- 
tals. 

Now, thou shalt choose the name, 
Kriste, which is the Ahamic word for All 
Knowledge also. In this, then, thou shalt 
have truth on thy side in heaven before thy 
High Council, and on earth thou shalt 
have a personal embodiment. 

CHAPTER LII. 

Thus, it came to pass as had been 
foretold by God, Jehovih's Son: The Tri- 
unes will all become false Gods, because 
they have denied the Almighty. 

God said: There is but One, who is All 
Knowledge. Whatsoever angel or God an- 
nounceth himself to be All Knowledge, is 
false in presence of Jehovih. 

Nevertheless, Looeamong had it pro- 
claimed in heaven and earth that he was 
The Kriste, which is the Ahamic expression 
for All Knowledge. Therefore, Looe- 
among was from this time forth a false 
God in heaven and on earth. 

And Looeamong commanded Thoth, 
his angel warrior in command of his earth- 



ly dominions, to raise up tribes of warriors 
amongst mortals. And, by the inspiration 
of Thoth, these warriors were induced to- 
call themselves Kriste'yans. 

Now, it came to pass, that from this 
time forth great success attended the wars 
of Looeamong for the glory of his heavenly 
kingdoms. And, for the space of three 
hundred years, Looeamong gradually gain- 
ed on Baal and his alliances, both on earth 
and in heaven. 

And Looeamong captured and cast out 
of his dominions more than seven hundred- 
false Gods and false Lords. And he broke 
up six hundred and eighty oracle-houses 
and temples, used for consulting the spirits,, 
who called themselves Gods, whose only 
service was to advise on war, conquest and 
destruction. So, that, even in Looeamong's 
falsity, he rendered a great service to Je- 
hovih, against whom he was doing battle. 

For three hundred years more, Looea- 
mong, with upward of six thousand million 
angel warriors, pursued war in heaven and 
on earth; and he had captured mostly all 
the earthly strongholds of other false Gods. 
Baal, however, still maintained himself in 
Roma, and as God of the Roman empire,, 
but under many names. 

Now, Looeamong, the false God, be- 
wailed the wars, and he also bewailed his 
own doctrines. 

Looeamong cried out in his despair, 
saying: To whom shall I pray, O thou 
Holy Ghost? Thou shadow, thou nothing, 
thou void? Shall I say: O thou all 
nothing? Thou inconceivable? Thou un- 
knowable? Thou all hidden? Or shall I 
say: O thou nature? Thou God of na- 
ture? Thou senseless? Thou scattered? 
Thou that hearest not? Thou that knowest 
not? Thou that seest not? Thou essence? 
Thou fountain, that is dumb? Thou acci- 
dent? Thou shapeless? Thou imperson? 
Thou shortness in all? That beguileth us 
to come hither, to find thee? Or to go 
hither to find thee? And find of a truth, 
that we find thee not? Yea, to under- 
stand that thou art the waste and desolate 
of all that is? 

And, as for the Father, which we three 
built up, is He not dead? A divided king- 
dom, with three astrayed sons? And every 
one for himself? O thou Brahma, thou hast 
a peaceful division. And thou, Budha, a 
place of great profit. 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



7 



But I, your equal, with an unprofitable 
division of these western heavens. Mine 
are warriors in heaven and on earth. 
Yours, peace and profit. How can I em- 
bellish Hapsendi, my heavenly seat? And 
make it a place of grandeur, like unto 
yours? Behold, my thousands of millions 
of angels are needed for warriors. How 
have I time to embellish my throne, and 
my heavenly city? No wonder, ye twain 
point the finger of mockery at me, for the 
poverty of my heavenly kingdom. 

Have I not been fighting battles with 
satan all these hundreds and hundreds of 
years? Did I not find heaven, even from 
the first a place of war? Shall these things 
continue forever? Whom shall I inquire 
of? Have I not declared, I am one with 
the Father, and one with the Holy Ghost? 

Why, then, shall I not look to myself? 
And is this not the sum of all? Every one 
for himself? Was not myself a self from 
the first? And to continue a self for itself 
forever? Henceforth, I go not down to 
send peace on earth; I go not to send 
peace, but a sword. I go to set man at var- 
iance against his brother and father, and 
woman against her sister and mother, and 
a daughter-in-law against her mother-in- 
law. I will make the foes of a man, they 
of his own household. 

He that loveth father or mother more 
than me, is not worthy of me; and he that 
loveth son or daughter more than me, is 
not worthy of me. And he that will not 
take up his sword and proclaim me, is not 
worthy of me. 

My signs shall be a sword, a skull and 
cross-bones, and a bull. My edicts shall 
be bulls; by these shall mine enemies be 
destroyed. Before me shall every knee 
bow down, and every tongue confess me, 
Lord of all. 

Behold, I will give them a book and a 
guide, whereby they shall know me; in 
blood will I seal them to the end of the 
world. 

CHAPTER LIII. 

Whilst Looeamong, the false God, was 
yet bewailing, behold, Thoth, his chief 
warrior God, came to him, saying: 

Alas, O master, thy followers have no 
king or queen on earth to protect them. 
Thy mortal Kriste'yan warriors, who drew 



the sword to establish thee, have been 
slaughtered in Cardalia, Cyprus, Aitina, 
Thessalonico, Dalmatia, Lacaonia, Napla, 
Selucia, Macedon, Galati and Scythia. 

In Thebes, six thousand Kriste'yan 
warriors were massacred by the armies of 
the emperor Maximus, inspired by Baal. 

In Eocla, the Gods Jupiter and Ira in- 
spired the king Hoethus to slaughter three 
thousand seven hundred Kriste'yan sol- 
diers. 

In Utica, the God Jupiter, with seven 
thousand angels, caused three hundred of 
thy soldiers to be burnt in a lime kiln. 

In Damascus, two thousand seven hun- 
dred of thy warriors were cut to pieces 
with the sword. And the only charge 
against them was that they were fighting 
for thee. Yea, their sacred bull was 
taken from them and roasted alive. And 
their bloody cross, which thou gavest them 
as a sign of the battle-cry, was broken and 
burnt. 

In Crete, one thousand eight hundred 
of thy warriors, who had served thee well 
in slaughtering pagans, were walled around 
with fire, and roasted alive. 

On the plains of Agatha, where thy sol- 
diers, three hundred and eighty of them, 
were returning with their booty, having 
done thee great service in destroying hea- 
then temples, they were set upon by the 
Gath'yans and destroyed, and for no other 
cause than that they served thee. 

Looeamong cried out: Enough! 
Enough, O Thoth! I, too, will have a 
mortal emperor. Descend thou again to 
the earth, to Hatuas, and inspire thou him 
to raise a mortal army of forty thousand 
men, and move upon Roma. Behold, I will 
prove myself before Hatuas, and he shall 
covenant unto me. Through him will I 
drive Baal out of Roma. And, as I make 
myself Kriste of heaven, so will I make 
Hatuas emperor of the whole earth. 

Thoth then descended to the earth, to 
Hatuas, who was a su'is, and could both 
see angels and hear them talk; and Thoth 
induced Hatuas to raise an army of forty 
thousand soldiers, and set out for con- 
quest. 

And when they had come to the plains 
of Agatha, even where the Kriste'yans had 
been massacred many years before, behold, 
Looeamong and his angel hosts appeared 



478 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



in the heavens, above Hatuas' army, so 
that all the soldiers thereof beheld the hea- 
venly visitors. And Looeamong showed 
unto Hatuas, in the air of heaven, a true 
cross, on which was written in letters of 
blood: Il'Kriste. 

Nevertheless, there was no man present 
who could read the inscription; and many 
were the conjectures thereon. In the even- 
ing, Looeamong descended to Hatuas, and 
said unto him: This is the interpretation 
of the sign and cross I showed thee: 

In this sign thou shalt conquer! 

And when thou arisest in the morning 
thou shalt cause to be made a cross, of 
most excellent workmanship; and thou 
shalt have it inscribed: The Kriste, our 
Lord, Son of the Holy Ghost. 

And this cross shalt thou cause to be 
carried at the head of thy army. And thy 
edicts shalt thou call bulls, and they shall 
be written with lamb's blood, in remem- 
brance of the sacrifice of the Jews in 
Egupt, through which sacrifice the Father 
in heaven delivered them. For I am Lord 
of heaven and earth. 

Accordingly, a cross was made, and 
highly decorated, and inscribed as com- 
manded, and Hatuas and his soldiers went 
forth with renewed courage. And so great 
was their zeal, that everything fell before 
them. 

And now, that Looeamong's angels had 
an anchorage on earth, they were in all 
respects the equals of the angels of the pa- 
gan Gods. So that, whilst Hatuas was vic- 
torious on earth, Gabriel, otherwise Thoth, 
was victorious in heaven. And in not many 
years, Looeamong, through Gabriel, cap- 
tured Baal and all the false Gods in all the 
regions far and near. And Gabriel took, 
along with the captured Gods, seven 
million six hundred thousand warring an- 
gels, and carried them all off to Maka- 
vishtu, in hada, and cast them into hell, 
where there were already more than ten 
millions who were in chaos and madness. 
And Gabriel had the place walled around 
with fire and noxious gases, so that none 
could escape. 

Such was the end of the earthly domin- 
ion of Baal, who had ruled over mortals 
for evil, for upward of three thuosand 
years. And, in fact, it was the final ter- 
mination of the earthly Gods that ruled 



over mortals through the oracles and pagan 
practices. 

Looeamong inspired Hatuas, the mortal 
emperor, to call together a council of wise 
men from all the kingdoms of Arabin'ya, 
Heleste, Par'si'e and Uropa, to select from 
all the religious doctrines in the world, 
that which was the wisest and best, that it 
might be established by kings, emperors 
and governors by the sword and spear, so 
there should never more be but one re- 
ligion. 

And, in course of time, there assembled 
a council of seventeen hundred and eighty- 
six learned men from all the regions 
named, and they placed themselves under 
the rules and presence of Hatuas. And he 
selected from them one hundred and forty- 
four speakers. As for the others, they were 
divided into groups of twelves, besides a 
goodly number being appointed scribes and 
translators. But many, having the appear- 
ance of Jews, were rejected altogether. 

Now, the council had brought with 
them, in all, two thousand two hundred 
and thirty-one books and legendary tales 
of Gods and Saviors and great men, to- 
gether with a record of the doctrines 
taught by them. Hatuas, being under the 
inspiration of Looeamong, through Gabri- 
el, alias Thoth, thus spake: 

Search ye these books, and whatsoever 
is good in them, that retain; but, whatso- 
ever is evil, that cast away. What is good 
in one book, unite ye with that which is 
good in another book. And whatsoever is 
thus brought together shall be called, The 
Book of Books. And it shall be the doc- 
trine of my people, which I will recommend 
unto all nations, that there shall be no more 
war for religion's sake. 

Thoth and his angel hosts formed a cir- 
cle around about the mortal council, a 
thousand angels deep on every side, and ex- 
tending upward densely for a long way, 
and thence, by a line of light, extending to 
Looeamong's throne, in Hapsendi, his hea- 
venly kingdom. By day and by night, 
Thoth and his hosts watched over the 
mortal council, overshadowing their every 
thought and word. 

For four years and seven months the 
council thus deliberated, and selected from 
the two thousand two hundred and thirty- 
one books and legendary tales. And, at 
the end of that time, there had been select- 



CYCLE OF L1KA 



479 



ed and combined much that was good and 
great, and worded so as to be well remem- 
bered by mortals. 

As yet, no God had been selected by the 
council, and so they balloted, in order to 
determine that matter. And the first bal- 
lot gave prominence to the following Gods: 
Jove, Jupiter, Salenus, Baal, Thor, Gade, 
Apollo, Juno, Aries, Taurus, Minerva, 
Rhets, Mithra, Theo, Fragapatti, Atys, 
Durga, Indra, Neptune, Vulcan, Kriste, 
Agni, Croesus, Pelides, Huit, Hermes, 
Thulis, Thammus, Eguptus, Iao, Aph, Sat- 
urn, Gitchens, Minos, Maximo, Hecla, and 
Phernes. Besides these, there were twen- 
ty-two other Gods and Goddesses, that re- 
ceived a small number of votes each. 

In seven days thereafter, another bal- 
lot was taken, and the number of Gods 
was reduced to twenty-seven; and in seven 
days thereafter, another ballot was taken, 
and the number of Gods was reduced to 
twenty-one. Thus was the number reduced 
each ballot, but slower and slower. Six 
days in the week were allotted to discuss 
the merits and demerits of the Gods. But 
many weeks elapsed toward the last, when 
the number was not reduced. 

For one year and five months the bal- 
loting lasted, and at that time the ballot 
rested nearly equal on five Gods, namely: 
Jove, Kriste, Mars, Crite and Siva. And 
here the ballot changed not for yet seven 
times more, which was seven weeks. 

Hatuas spake before the council, saying: 
Ours is a labor for all the nations of the 
earth, and for all time. I know the angels 
of heaven are with us in this matter. We 
have found five Gods, good and acceptable 
before the world. What say the council, 
that the angels give us a sign? For we all 
know the signs of these Gods. 

The council said: Well said, thou wisest 
of men! Such a God shall be ours, now 
and forever. 

And immediately, then and there, Loo- 
eamong and his angels gave a sign in fire, 
of a cross smeared with blood, and it rest- 
ed on a bull's horns. 

Whereupon Kriste was declared God 
and Lord of all the nations of the earth. 

And the council agreed thereto, unani- 
mously, and, moreover, to reject all other 
Gods. 



The next question was, what mortal 
representative should be chosen? 

The first ballot brought out the follow- 
ing men: Zarathustra, Thothma, Abra- 
ham, Brahma, Atys, Thammus, Joshu, Sa- 
kaya, Habron, Bali, Crite, Chrisna, Thulis, 
Wittoba and Speio. Besides these, there 
were included in the ballot, forty-six other 
men, who received a small number of bal- 
lots each. 

Now the Council of Nice balloted for 
twelve months as to what man heard the 
Voice? 

Hatuas said: The Gods will not let us 
choose any man. Now, therefore, hear me: 
Many of those chosen by the Gods have 
been iesu. Now, since we cannot make 
preference as to a man, let us say: The 
man, Iesu. 

Thereupon, the name, Iesu, was adopt- 
ed, and the sacred books were written ac- 
cordingly. 

CHAPER LIV. 

After Looeamong had cast out all other 
false Gods in his earthly dominions, he 
began enriching his heavenly home, em- 
ploying no less than seven thousand million 
angel slaves for that purpose. The place 
and extent of his heavenly capital was from 
Hasetus to Roma, and thence northward 
to the Aquarian Mountains. 

His palace was modeled after Ennochis- 
sa's, at Eta-shong, and of equal magnifi- 
cence. His greatest warriors were now 
exalted as Lords, generals, marshals, and 
so on. And he provided rites and ceremo- 
nies, and tournaments, and all manner of 
heavenly diversities. 

But he made the rules of entrance to 
his palace so rigid, that only his highest 
officers and visiting Gods could gain ac- 
cess to him. 

Now, for upward of a thousand years, 
the angel warrior, Gabriel, alias Thoth, 
had been to Looeamong, his most faithful 
sub-God. And Looeamong had promised 
Gabriel that, when he overthrew Baal, and 
cast him in hell, he would give to Gabriel 
a great heavenly kingdom, with an earthly 
base. 

Accordingly, Thoth applied for Jerusa- 
lem, and for the heavens thereunto belong- 
ing, and for one thousand million slaves. 
But Looeamong postponed the matter from 



480 



CYCLE OF L1KA 



time to time, for more than six hundred 
years. 

Thoth then sent this message to Looe- 
among, to-wit: By virtue of mine own 
worth before the Gods of heaven, I greet 
thee in peace and love. 

First, in remembrance of thy many 
promises to me, in which thou hast kept 
no part thereof. 

Second, that thou art not Kriste, which 
is All Knowledge, but a usurper and pre- 
tender. 

Third, that I made thee what thou art: 
and by mine own hand helped thee to cast 
out Baal and Ashtaroth, and all the Roma'- 
yan and .Argos'yan Gods. Of which mat- 
ters it is known in these three great hea- 
vens, thou didst promise me for more than 
seven hundred years, to give me a king- 
dom of a thousand million subjects. 

And, fourth, since thou art safely raised 
up above all Gods within these regions, 
thou hast affected to not know me. Yea, 
and in thy great heavenly recreations and 
tournaments and receptions, thou hast not 
commanded my presence, or in any way 
shown more remembrance of me than as if 
I were an es'yan. 

And fifth, thou didst long promise me 
that, if thou shouldst succeed in establish- 
ing a sub-kingdom on the earth, or in hada, 
thou wouldst hand the same over to me, 
to rank equal with thee in all things. But 
thou hast greedily kept both kingdoms to 
thyself, making either place thy residence, 
according to the times and seasons most 
propitious to thine own glory and ease. 

And, lastly, that thou sacrificest the lib- 
erty of thy subjects, making them thy la- 
borers to embellish thy kingdom, and mak- 
ing them little better than slaves, in forever 
parading in the ceremonies given in thy 
applause. 

These things have I often desired to see 
thee about; but thou ever pretended to be 
overrun with other matters, so as to put 
me off from my opportunity. Whereupon 
I have prayed to the Holy Ghost, for hun- 
dreds of years, to have my suit just and 
honorable and holy. 

But I shall search no further. Hundreds 
of millions of thy highest grades, who went 
down to the earth with me to fight thy bat- 
tles, and who know the justness of my 
cause, will, at a word from me, withdraw 



from thy kingdom, and join me in an en- 
terprise of mine own. I shall await patient- 
ly for thy reply. 

But Gabriel received no reply to his 
message. And so, in course of time, he 
called together ten thousand angel war- 
riors, and they assembled in a place called 
Kalla-Hored, the place of seven steps, in 
hada. Gabriel spake before them, saying: 

Here will I establish my kingdom of 
heaven, and forever. I will show this false 
Kriste, what I can do. Mark ye, the great 
power of a God is to establish a good foot- 
hold on the earth. The natural increase 
will soon populate a heavenly kingdom. 

I will raise me up a prophet and seer of 
mine own on the earth, and establish a 
new doctrine amongst mortals. Behold, I 
have a sword that will cut to pieces Looe- 
among's kingdom on earth. For, listen! 
In the old Eguptian libraries are books and 
tablets and manuscripts, that will show 
the perversity of the Constantine bible. 
Now, when I have established my prophet, 
I will cause mortal legions of Arabin'yans 
to possess these libraries, especially Alex- 
andria's. And I will raise up mortal schol- 
ars, who shall establish the truth of my 
prophet's doctrines, and the falsity oi this 
Kriste's doctrines; and I will thus overturn 
his earthly kingdom, and possess all these 
mortal regions myself to be mine forever! 

After that manner, the angel, Gabriel, 
boasted. And he made the ten thousand 
his High Council, and from amongst them 
he oppointed marshals, captains, generals, 
heralds and officers in general. And they 
built a throne in heaven unto Gabriel, and 
called it the Throne of Kalla-Hored; and 
he went and sat thereon, and then crowned 
himself, Gabriel, God of Heaven and Earth. 
And then he crowned ten Lords, to-wit: 
Ateiniv, Le Chung, Tudol, Raim, Hakaya, 
Wochorf, Yademis, Stu'born, Wolf and 
Gussak. And Gabriel thereafter commenc- 
ed the initiation of members to his king- 
dom. And there thus acceded to his hea- 
venly place upward of five hundred thou- 
sand angels every day, and this continued 
until Kalla-Hored contained more than 
eight hundred million angel subjects. Of 
these, certain selections were made, ac- 
cording to grade, who were appointed as 
officers over the rest; and immediately they 
were put to work, building heavenly man- 



CYCLE OF L1KA 



481 



sions, and constructing streets and roads, 
and all things required in an exalted hea- 
ven, and in the meantime Gabriel's palace 
and throne were extended and beautified 
beyond description. 

Gabriel knew the power of rites and cer- 
emonies, and he provided unto his heaven- 
ly kingdom accordingly, so that his people 
were kept in a constant strain of excite- 
ment, because of his wonderful inventions. 
So that millions and millions of them truly 
believed he was the veritable Creator of 
heaven and earth, thus in the form of an 
angel. Gabriel perceived this, and for these 
he provided places of trust and nearness to 
him, that his miraculous power might be 
the better strengthened with the unbeliev- 
ing. 

Now, the time came when Gabriel's 
kingdom was sufficiently established, and 
he began to provide for his great scheme 
to establish himself with mortals, that their 
spirits after death might be brought to his 
kingdom. For such is the order of Jeho- 
vih's creation, that whomsoever man wor- 
shipped whilst he is on earth, to that God 
will his spirit float after death; and with- 
out resistance become a dutiful slave, not 
knowing there be other Gods and other 
heavens. 

And Gabriel made Ateiniv Chief Lord 
of Lords to go down to the earth, and 
find a mortal capable of the required inspir- 
ation. And he gave to Atieniv to be his 
•co-laborers, Yademis, Stu'born and Wolf, 
and with them, at their call, three hundred 
million warrior angels. And with his host, 
Atieniv departed for the earth, for Arabin'- 
ya; and as he went forth he dropped of his 
hosts, at certain distances, groups of angels, 
which formed the line of light from Gabriel 
down to the earth. 

CHAPTER LV. 

Gabriel raised upon the earth one Mo- 
hammed, and inspired him through his an- 
gel hosts. And the angels inspired Mo- 
hammed to go once every month in the 
year into the cave of Hara; on which occa- 
sions, Gabriel came in person, and talked 
with Mohammed, who had su'is in great 
perfection. 

Twelve years in peace did Gabriel in- 
spire mortals through Mohammed. But, 
at the end of thirteen years, Mohammed 



attained to sufficient strength to draw the 
sword for Gabriel's doctrines. And Gabri- 
el, through inspiration, caused the Moham- 
medans to commemorate this as the be- 
ginning of his kingdom on earth. And 
they, therefore, consecrated the said period 
of time. And, on this first meeting of the 
faithful in Gabriel, Mohammed, being un- 
der inspiration, spake before the multitude, 
saying: 

There is but one God, and he is God. 
Heaven is his. The earth is the Lord's, 
through the angel, Gabriel. This is the 
sum and substance of all things. This was 
the doctrine of Abraham and of Moses, 
our forefathers. But evil men have invent- 
ed other Gods, which have no existence. 
They are idols, which exist only in super- 
stition and ignorance. 

Revere me not, nor call me wise. I 
am not wise; I have little learning. Knowl- 
edge cometh to me from the Unseen. My 
eyes are open, my ears are open. I see 
and hear spiritual things. The angels of 
heaven tell me things of wisdom. I do but 
repeat them. Therefore, I am not wise, 
nor great. I strive to be honest and up- 
right before God, but I am weaker that a 
child in these respects. Therefore, wor- 
ship not me, nor bow down before me. I 
am nothing. 

As I am an instrument in the hands of 
God, through his angel, Gabriel, so also 
were Abraham and Moses and many of the 
prophets. They could work miracles. I 
cannot. Therefore, I am the least of God's 
prophets. 

That ye may become exalted before 
God, I am sent into the world. Shall I 
reveal what Gabriel hath told me? Or do 
ye believe God is dead, or gone afar off? 
Believe ye, that he cannot raise up a proph- 
et in this day? Is God weak? Or hath he 
forgotten the world he created? 

Why hath this thing come at this time? 
No man can answer that. Gabriel saith: 
There is a false God in heaven, and he hath 
falsely called himself, Kriste. Gabriel 
saith, that he himself, Gabriel, provided the 
way for the gathering of the lost sheep of 
Israel, through an iesu. 

Brothers, I will tell you why I am chos- 
en of God: It is to circumvent the Kriste'- 
yans' idolatry from coming into Arabin'ya 
and the countries north and south and east. 



482 



CYCLE OF L1KA 



These countries were given by God to our 
forefathers, Abraham, Isaac and Jacob, and 
thence down to Moses, and thence down to 
us. 

There is but one God, and Gabriel is his 
angel of all the world. And God raiseth 
up a prophet from time to time, to bless 
his chosen people. He put this matter upon 
me; I know only to serve God. 

The Kriste'yans are merciless warriors. 
This false Kriste and his worshippers are 
working for the Romans, and not for sal- 
vation. Wherever they go, they destroy 
the libraries, and all manner of learning. 
Will ye submit, like slaves, to have them 
despoil you? Is there no Arabin'yan blood 
in your veins? 

When asked to state the Mohammedan 
doctrines, he said: To tell no lies; to not 
commit fornication; to preserve the cere- 
monies; to give to the poor freely; to ob- 
serve the sacred days; to aggress not; but 
to war for the innocent and oppressed; to 
maintain the liberty of the people; to steal 
not, and to deceive no man. 

Mohammed, being under inspiration of 
the God, Gabriel, and his angels, collected 
together thousands and tens of thousands 
of warriors, and went forth to conquer. 
And the angel hosts of Gabriel went forth 
with Mohammed's army, and inspired them 
to such degree that they were without fear 
or hesitation. And Gabriel's hosts of an- 
gels went into the armies that fought 
against Mohammed, and inspired them 
with fear and cowardice and panic. And 
wherever Mohammed went, there was 
sure victory, the like of which had not been 
for many centuries. 

Looeamong, the false Kriste, had pre- 
viously destroyed, for the most part, the 
Alexandrian library, having inspired a mor- 
tal priest, Coatulius, to do the work. And 
Looeamong, now perceiving the triumph 
of Mohammed, inspired three hundred 
monks and priests to go throughout He- 
leste and Arabin'ya, and destroy the ancient 
state records and libraries. 

Mohammed was shown this by Gabriel, 
and he used it as a battle-cry for his sol- 
diers. 

Looeamong now declared war in hea- 
ven against the false God, Gabriel; and, in 
not many years they both carried their war 



down to earth, contending for certain lo- 
calities on the earth. 

As for the other two false Gods, Kaba- 
lactes, alias Budha, and Ennochissa, alias 
Brahma, they had been at war against 
each other for over six hundred years. 
Now had these four false Gods possession 
of the whole earth, at least, wherever there 
were mortal kingdoms and empires. 

Now, in reference to the Faithists: In 
Chine'ya and Vind'yu, they were no longer 
identified with the kingdoms or govern- 
ments, but lived about in scattered families. 
In Arabin'ya, Heleste and Uropa, they were 
scattered in all directions. From the time 
of Joshu's death, in Jerusalem, they began 
to migrate, mostly toward the west. And 
there called themselves, Israelites and 
Jews. The Jews, so-called, were apostates 
in fact; eating flesh, and marrying with 
other peoples. 

Now, after the fall of the great empire, 
Egupt, her people migrated westward, hun- 
dreds of thousands of them, and they set- 
tled in western Uropa, where these people 
married with the aborigines. Their off- 
spring were called Druids, Picts, Gales, 
Wales, Galls, and Yohans, all of which are 
Eguptian names. Now, when the Faithists 
were moved by the inspiration of God to 
have no more kings, and to flee away from 
the Kriste'yan warriors, they came amongst 
the people above mentioned. The apostate 
Faithists married with them. 

God, Son of Jehovih, had said: Suffer 
the apostates to so marry, for here will I 
find a way to raise up disbelievers in the 
false Kriste; and they shall ultimately be- 
come believers in Jehovih only. For, inas- 
much as I have suffered them to become 
scattered, so will I appropriate them to 
quicken all the races of men to comprehend 
the All One. 

CHAPTER LVI. 

For five hundred years more, the wars 
lasted between the four false Gods, Looea- 
mong, Thoth, Ennochissa and Kabalactes. 
And then they came to terms, and ratified 
a division of the earth and her heavens into 
four great parts, with fixed boundaries. 
And it was stipulated by them, that the 
spirits of all mortals at time of death, 
should go to the heaven which reigned on 



CYCLE OF L1KA 



483 



the portion of the earth where they had 
lived. 

So comparative peace reigned in the 
heavens of the earth. And after this, there 
was nothing in common between them. 
Their respective heavens and their earth 
possessions were under each one in his 
own way. 

And they now worked earnestly to 
adorn and glorify their heavenly kingdoms, 
their cities, their palaces, and thrones. And 
each of them exalted their great war cap- 
tains who had fought so long for them, and 
they all had councils of millions and mill- 
ions; and marshals and heralds, and mas- 
ters of ceremonies, and musicians, hun- 
dreds of millions. 

And they all had thousands of millions 
of subjects; but as for themselves, they 
kept aloof from their people. The private 
palaces of these Gods, and their private 
heavenly seats of splendor were seclusive 
to themselves and their favorite Lords and 
high officers. 

And all angels else, who desired to see 
these Gods, were obliged to pass through 
rigid examinations, and solemnly bind 
themselves in oaths and castigations before 
they were permitted to pass the outer col- 
umns of fire. After this, they were per- 
mitted to walk on their knees to the second 
columns of fire. 

Here they were obliged to repeat a 
thousand prayers and a thousand anthems 
ere they could pass within. And now, 
when within the arena, they were obliged 
to crawl on their bellies; and, for every 
length crawled, they had to repeat seven 
new prayers. And it was a thousand 
lengths from the inner pillars of fire to the 
arches of the palace, especially of Kabalac- 
tes' and Looeamong's. Of these arches, 
there were three million three hundred and 
thirty-three thousand three hundred and 
thirty-three in number. And there were 
four marshals for each arch, and these four 
had two relief watches for each twenty-four 
hours. 

To pass the arches, another examination 
had to be undergone; and, after this, the 
person must again crawl on the belly till 
merging into the under arch, where stairs 
began, of which there were seven steps. 
On each of these steps he must lay one day, 
repeating prayers and praises to his God. 



On the upper step, however, he was not re- 
quired to pray, but might look in silence at 
the throne, on which, at times, his God 
came and sat, his Holy Council sitting to 
the west, facing the east, to the throne. 

From the place of the person on the up- 
per step to the throne, was five hundred 
lengths, nearer than which none were per- 
mitted to come, save by the God's special 
decree. And, if the God was not on his 
throne, and his Holy Council sitting, then 
the person must wait, not moving from his 
place, perhaps for a day or more. But, af- 
ter he had observed his God, he was not 
permitted to remain longer than to say 
seven prayers. After this he must return, 
and depart in the same way he came. 

Now, as to the throne and its brilliancy 
and grandeur, no mortal words can con- 
vey a knowledge thereof to mortal under- 
standing; for it was so vast, and withal 
adorned with elements not found on the 
earth. Thousands of millions of which 
gems had been captured from the dispos- 
sessed false Gods of centuries before. 

And equally astonishing and over- 
whelming were the seats and places and 
robes of the Holy Council, which also baf- 
fleth mortal words to convey an idea of. 
Only to look on, to be overcome with emo- 
tion, to remember what great effects can 
be accomplished by concentrated labor, and 
to feel the insignificance of isolation, one's 
wonder was swallowed up in silent awe 
before the scene. 

Such was the magnificence of each of 
the four heavenly places of the four false 
Gods, and not differing but little from one 
another. In order to obtain the privilege 
of thus going to look upon the throne and 
the God thereof, one had to first serve a 
hundred years in the labors of that hea- 
ven, and to have his record good during all 
this time. 

If, in the mortal life, a man had served 
his God, by preaching and praying, or by 
fighting battles for him, and had thus at- 
tained a good record, one hundred years' 
servitude in heaven entitled him to visit 
his God on the throne, at the distance 
named above. 

But if the mortal had been an enemy to 
the God during his earth-life, he could not 
attain to approach the throne in less than 
three hundred years' servitude. Which 



484 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



service consisted in laboring in building 
mansions, or in paving roads in heaven, or 
in bringing produce up from the earth, or 
in bringing up other atmospherean ele- 
ments for the gratification and glory of the 
God and his tens of millions of high offi- 
cers. 

So great and grand and far-reaching 
were these four kingdoms, that angels 
dwelt therein, hundreds of millions of 
them, never even hearing of any other hea- 
ven than the one they were in. 

Now, for the most part, the Brahmans 
of the earth, on entering the es world, went 
to the Brahman heavens, ruled over by the 
false Brahma. And the Budhists of the 
earth, on entering the es world, went to the 
Budhist heavens, ruled over by the false 
Budha. The Kriste'yans of earth, on en- 
tering the es world, went to the heavens of 
Looeamong, the false Kriste. The Mo- 
hammedans went to Gabriel's heavens. Nei- 
they would they admit they were bound, 
though they were slaves. Their priests 
and monks and bishops, archibishops and 
popes, marched in the processions of hea- 
ven, praying, singing, and even carrying 
burdens, hundreds of years, for the privi- 
lege of ultimately approaching the throne 
of Ennochissa, or Kabalactes, or Looea- 
mong, or Thoth, honestly believing they 
were to look upon the very Creator. 

Their minds were in bondage to so 
great an extent, that even after they had 
attained to view their God, at such a dis- 
tance and in such artificial splendor, they 
could not receive truth. And when an an- 
gel of Jehovih came to them, and said: Be-^- 
hold, this is only one heaven, of which 
there are millions; this heaven, with all its 
magnificence, is only one of the lowest 
of heavens; or, this God, with all his glory, 
is only one God, of which there are many; 
there are higher Gods than this; or, the 
All Highest God is not this, but One not 
in shape of man; they would not believe. 

These subjects would say: I want not 
your Jehovih! Behold, I can see my God; 
he is the Creative element personified. 
This is the all highest heaven; here is the 
place and person of the Lord! 

Man sinned not in this; neither sinned 
the angels of the heavens. The fault was 
with these false Gods. Because they had 
taught men that the Creator was in the im- 



age of a man, and sitting on a throne, be- 
hold, their subjects would not believe oth- 



CHAPTER LVII. 

God, in Paradise, sent the following ap- 
peal unto the four false Gods: 

In the name of Jehovih, greeting unto 
you. 

Wherein ye have copied after my ways, 
ye have gained dominion; but of what 
profit unto mortals or angels? 

Because ye knew that Jehovih's God 
appointed ashars unto mortals, ye have also 
appointed ashars unto them, though not 
for their resurrection, but to raise up mor- 
tals with faith in yourselves. Ye have thus 
built on the earth for the glory of your 
own kingdoms; for your ashars teach mor- 
tals not of eternal resurrection, but of at- 
taining unto your heavens only. 

Thus do your ashars prepare mortals to 
become slaves in your heavenly kingdoms, 
that they build unto your own personal 
glory. For ye take advantage of the in- 
fant mind, to bend it away from Jehovih, 
and away from eternal progress, that ye 
may inherit it as your dutiful subject. 

Wherever I send angels to inspire mor- 
tals to obtain education and knowledge, 
ye send contravening angels, and they in- 
cite mortals to destroy their own libraries 
and places of learning. 

Ye persuade mortals that the only good 
and necessary knowledge is contained in 
your sacred books; for ye desire to prevent 
mortals from knowing there are other hea- 
vens than your own, and other Gods than 
yourselves. 

When I have gathered together wander- 
ing and chaotic spirits, and provided ways 
for the resurrection, ye have sent angel 
emissaries to thwart my labors. 

Ye have provided wicked heavenly pas- 
times, and disgusting tournaments, within 
your heavenly places, in order to win sub- 
jects for your dominions. 

Ye provide excursions from your hea- 
venly places down to mortals, for your an- 
gels to witness battles between mortal war- 
riors, that these angels may satiate their 
own evil curiosity. Ye thus degrade your 
own angel subjects by causing them to re- 
joice in the havoc of mortal flesh and 
blood. 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



485 



Ye thus call away from my heavenly 
schools and colleges angels who had be- 
gun 1 resurrection, flattering yourselves that 
you are thus augmenting your heavenly 
kingdoms by additional subjects. 

On mortal battlefields, where there are 
hosts of chaotic angels, the spirits of the 
slain, I send my angels with heavenly 
ships to gather them up and restore them. 
But your emissaries come and destroy my 
ships for wickedness' sake, calling it glori- 
ous sport. 

Of these great evils ye have been noti- 
fied times and times again, but ye put not 
forth your hands to remedy them. 

Ye sell indulgences to your angels to 
engage in wicked practices; and ye suffer 
your ashars to inspire mortal priests to 
sell indulgences to their followers in the 
same way. Thus do ye compound sin. 

Ye profess to confess the sins of your 
angels in your heavens, exacting servitude 
of them as a purchase of your excuse. And 
your ashars inspire mortal priests to do 
the same things for their mortal followers, 
for stipulated prices in money. 

CHAPTER LVIII. 

A thousand years ago, the grades of 
your heavenly subjects were from thirty to 
fifty; now, they are fallen to fifteen. As 
have declined the grades of the angels in 
your heavens, even so have declined the 
grades of mortals within your dominions. 

Instead of well-tilled fields and good or- 
chards, ye have given them war, widows, 
orphans, paupers, debauchees, thieves and 
murderers. Instead of giving them good 
harvests, ye have given them famines and 
pestilences. For your ashars inspire the 
priests, and they in turn entice their follow- 
ers away from the fields, to come and dwell 
in the cities, where they can be conveni- 
ently absolved from neglect in not confess- 
ing you. 

Thus have ye set aside good works and 
instruction and the desire for knowledge, 
both within your heavenly kingdoms and 
on the earth; and, instead thereof, ye have 
given them rites and ceremonies, leading 
angels and mortals as if they were cattle 
for your markets. 

Instead of teaching angels and mortals 
to think for themselves, ye have prohibited 
them from thinking, except as your leaders 



think for them. Thus have ye thwarted, 
with all your might, the cultivations of the 
talents Jehovih created with all. 

Say not, that I, Jehovih's Son, desire 
subjects or worshippers; behold, I prohibit 
both angels and mortals from worshipping 
me, or anouncing me or my kingdoms, as 
the all highest. 

I teach them, One only is the All High- 
est, even Jehovih. I teach them, that I am 
but Jehovih's servant, working for the res- 
urrection of mortals and angels. I teach 
both angels and mortals, they shall not 
worship any one born of woman. 

And behold, my foot-prints cannot be 
mistaken. I raised up Zarathustra, Brah- 
man, Abraham, Moses, Po, Chine and Ca- 
pilya. Yet, not one of these, with all the 
wonders they accomplished, was worship- 
ped by his followers. 

Yet, who was greater than Moses? that 
stretched forth his hand, and said: Come! 
And four million people, in bondage, 
marched out of Egupt! Yet none worship- 
ped Moses. 

Behold the seventy colonies founded by 
Zarathustra, and yet they worshipped not 
him. 

Behold Chine, who named the empire, 
and turned three hundred million warriors 
to a people of peace. 

Behold, Capilya, who overturned the 
laws of thirteen kingdoms in Vind'yii, and 
gave peace and plenty to a hundred million. 
Yet, neither Chine nor Capilya were wor- 
shipped. 

But ye harp on the idle tales of obscure 
magicians, and teach mortals to worship 
them. Nevertheless, ye have caused to be 
preached, in your heavens, that I am a God 
like unto yourselves, working for mine own 
glory. 

Now, behold, I prepare my angel hosts 
in wisdom and virtue, that they may go 
away from me, and inherit the etherean 
heavens above. For this was my labor for 
which Jehovih, through His exalted Gods, 
made me God of Earth and her heavens. 

And I have sent thus away, as Brides 
and Bridegrooms to Jehovih, thousands of 
millions of angels, whom I had raised to 
grade ninety-nine. Yet, in all the time 
of your dominions ye have not raised one 
angel to the emancipated grades. 



486 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



Such as are wise within your dominions, 
tire of your pomp and splendor, and, in 
course of time, come to my heavens, and 
renounce all Lords and Gods, and betroth 
themselves to Jehovih only. And I give 
them places in my schools, colleges, hos- 
pitals and factories, and they become fit 
companions to Gods and Goddesses. Thus 
your kingdoms become depleted of the 
highest grades; and your heavenly king- 
doms and your earthly dominions have 
chiefly the ignorant and depraved as your 
idolaters. 

CHAPTER LIX. 

In Jehovih's name, greeting unto thee, 
Looeamong: Thou hadst a warrior angel, 
Thoth, who labored for thee more than a 
thousand years, in order to make thee un- 
der thy false names worshipful on earth. 
And thou didst promise Thoth, that when 
he overcame Dagon, Ashtaroth, Baal and 
other false Gods, thou wouldst give to him 
a heavenly sub-kingdom, with a thousand 
million subjects. And Thoth did thus ac- 
complish thy desire, but thou didst not give 
him anything. 

But thou didst further exact of him the 
destroying of idol worship amongst mor- 
tals, and the destroying of the oracle-tem- 
ples for consulting spirits, promising him, 
that when he had fulfilled these things, 
thou wouldst give unto him the promised 
heavenly kingdom. 

And Thoth accomplished these things 
also; but thou didst refuse again to fulfill 
thy promise. Whereby Thoth rebelled 
against thee, and set up his present heaven- 
ly dominions, inspiring his followers under 
the name of Mohammed. 

And now, since that day, thou hast tried 
to destroy him in heaven and on earth. 
But Thoth was anchored in earthly pos- 
sessions. 

And thou didst inspire mortals in west- 
ern Uropa to make crusades against Thoth, 
in order to possess Jerusalem and Te-theas, 
whereby millions of mortals were slain, 
and vast regions of country laid desolate. 
Behold, thou hadst pretended thou wert 
the all highest God, and yet thou wert 
unable to take a small earthly kingdom. 

Thou didst also inflict dire punishment 
and torturing of the flesh on Jehovih's 



worshippers and on infidels, against thy 
doctrines. With red-hot pincers pulled the 
flesh from the bones; or in boiling oil 
slowly dipped them; or from precipices 
hurled them; or in boxes lined with prick- 
ing spikes of iron bound them, thus to blot 
all knowledge and learning and opposition. 

In Es'pan and Itius, thou hast put to 
death more than seven million mortals. 
Nevertheless, these angels will come home 
to thee in after-time, with vengeance in 
their souls. Behold, thy false promises to 
Thoth are already visited upon thy king- 
doms. 

But, as for Thoth, how shall I judge 
thee, O Thoth? 

Because thou hast a vast heavenly king- 
dom, and withal art master on earth, of 
Jerusalem and Te-theas and Egupt and 
Punjaub, thou flatterest thyself thou art a 
great God. But thy heavenly kingdom 
hath become a place for lusters and foul- 
smelling spirits in the lowest grades. And 
thy heaven is surely and steadily declining 
in grade. 

Now, as to thee, Kabalactes, though 
hast destroyed a thousand mortal libraries, 
and put to death sixty million people, in 
order to establish thyself as Budha, still 
thou hast steadily declined in grade, and 
thy kingdoms with thee. 

Thou hast fashioned many sacred cities, 
and framed many tales as to who thou wert 
in mortal life. Thou hast falsely called thy- 
self Budha; and doubly false hast thou tak- 
en the name, Sakaya Muni. 

Thou hast tortured to death millions of 
mortals who rejected thee. And when my 
heavenly ships rescued their distracted and 
chaotic spirits, thou didst wantonly con- 
nive with thy drujas to despoil my ships, 
and cast these helpless spirits into dark- 
ness. Thou hast done these things for 
pastimes and diversities for thy falling hea- 
vens. 

And even so hath it been with thee, En- 
nochissa. Never had a Lord a fairer oppor- 
tunity in all Earth's heavens to do a 
good and great work, than fell into thy 
hands. But, behold how thou hast har- 
vested thy heavens! 

A thousand years ago, thy grades were 
from forty to sixty-five; and this day, they 
average but ten. It needeth no prophet to 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



487 



foretell that thy declension will lead to de- 
struction in the end. 

Now, lastly: O ye false Gods, ye de- 
ceivers and hypocrites, ye have divided 
Earth and her heavens thereof between 
yourselves, and re-confederated together 
for a balance of power. Ye have also per- 
suaded mortal kingdoms to divide the earth 
into sections and regions, and to clamor 
for a balance of power between different 
kingdoms. Ye have thus caused mortals 
to provide standing armies to protect them- 
selves, kingdom against kingdom, after 
the manner ye protect your own kingdoms 
in the heavens. 

Kriste'yans against Kriste'yans; Brah- 
mans against Brahmans; Budhists against 
Budhists; Mohammedans against Moham- 
medans; yet all of these four have ye ar- 
rayed against one another. In very like- 
ness of your heavens, have ye built on the 
earth. Ye have inspired mortals to keep, 
as standing armies, forty million soldiers. 

Ye have inspired mortals to build mili- 
tary schools and colleges, where the young 
may be trained in the art of war and de- 
struction. Ye have inspired mortals to 
build monuments to their generals and cap- 
tains, because of their courage to destroy. 

Ye have inspired the wickedest of mor- 
tals to believe that, if they would read your 
sacred books, and call on your names, ye 
would surely save them, and, after death, 
take them to the highest of heavens. And, 
yet, when they die, your hosts are not there 
to receive them. And when they call out 
for you, your emissaries kick them, and 
beat them. And they return with ven- 
geance, to afflict mortals. 

CHAPTER LX. 

When my angels taught man by inspir- 
ation that the earth was round instead of 
flat, ye sent spirits of darkness to inspire 
the death of my philosophers. Because, 
forsooth, my inspiration agreed not with 
the sacred books which ye compounded for 
your own glory. 

Ye have holden up your sacred books, 
and said: Here are rules and a sure guide 
to reach the all highest heavens! Knowing 
the while that your heavens were the low- 
est of the bound heavens of the earth. 

Now, behold, the same rules apply unto 
you as to the least of Jehovih's children. 



And whoso seeketh to glorify himself 
by his kingdoms, or by the magnificence 
of his possessions, taketh a burden upon 
his shoulders, that will, soon or late, fall 
upon him, and crush him. 

And whoso fortifieth himself by armies, 
whether in the heavens or on the earth, 
bindeth himself therewith for his ultimate 
sorrow. 

And whoso turneth away from Jehovih, 
and saith: I will go not after Him, nor 
search to find Him more; but I will build 
unto myself, planneth an edifice that will 
tumble down upon him in time to come. 

CHAPTER LXI. 

Ye say: Behold, we have scattered Je- 
hovih's Faithists into all the places of the 
earth; they are without a kingdom; they 
have not left one community to themselves 
on the whole earth! Think ye, Jehovih 
hath not appropriated them? 

Behold, it is true, ye have despoiled 
them, and scattered them abroad. Ye have 
hunted them down in Chine'ya, Vind'yii, 
Arabin'ya, Par'si'e, Heleste and Uropa. 

Ye have denied them the right to own 
lands, the right to follow their choice of 
avocations. Ye have denied them justice, 
and even a hearing, in courts of trial. 

And your accusation against them was: 
They worship not Gods born of woman. 

But behold the wisdom of Jehovih; be- 
cause ye thus dispossessed His people, and 
they were scattered abroad, they have sown 
the doctrine of the All One over all the 
earth and in the heavens thereof. They 
have been as a leaven, to work in the foun- 
dations of mighty kingdoms and empires. 

They have given learning unto all peo- 
ples, to show the magnificence of Jehovih's 
universe. Behold, inhabitants of the earth 
now look upward, and ask: May there not 
be other worlds? How long hath the earth 
been standing? Could the Creator of 
thousands of millions of worlds, which 
have stood for thousands of millions of 
years, be so young as any one of these pre- 
tended Gods? And descend to the earth, 
and do a work so imperfectly that only one 
small kingdom heard of him? 

As ye declare the Creator to be but a 
principle, a nonentity, without sense or 
unity or purpose, so shall mortals declare 
of you all. They will say: Behold, Brah- 



488 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



ma is not a person, but a principle; Budha 
is not a person, but a principle; Kriste is 
not a person, but a principle; God-Gabriel 
is not a person, but a principle. 

Because ye sought to confine the talents 
of mortals to your sacred books, your sa- 
cred books have become worthless before 
Jehovih. Mortals, as well as angels, will 
repudiate you and your books. Only Druks 
and drujas will be your followers. 

And thou, Thoth, shalt be the first to 
be cast down, and thy heavenly kingdoms 
with thee. 

And thou, Ennochissa, shalt be next, 
and thy heavenly kingdoms with thee. 

And thou, Kabalactes, shalt be third, 
and thy heavenly kingdoms with thee. 

And, last of all, thou, Looeamong, shalt 
go down, and thy heavenly kingdoms with 
thee. Nevertheless, thou shalt conquer all 
the earth, and trail it round with mortal 
blood. And, after that, thou shalt be hated 
above all other false Gods. 

CHAPTER LXII. 

The four false Gods replied: 

In the names of the Son, the Father 
and the Holy Ghost, greeting unto thee, 
God, Jehovih's Son. In confederation as- 
sembled, we reply unto thee, with patience 
and mercy. 

We set not up our kingdoms for self- 
glorification, but righteousness and good 
works. Behold, the firmament was over- 
cast with falling a'ji, and our former Lord- 
doms were broken up and gone. 

And we chose our several places in un- 
inhabited heavenly regions; therefore, we 
took nothing from thee. 

We admit the goodness of thy heart 
and the honesty of thy purpose, but we do 
not acknowledge thy wisdom a sufficient 
guide unto heavens like our own. The 
wise and exalted may rise in wisdom, pur- 
ity and power, by the policy of love and 
non-resistance and by the example of good 
works. But where such inhabitants, either 
on Earth, or in the heavens thereof, com- 
prise but a small percent, of the popula- 
tion, they become the victims of the lawless. 
And this is the reason thy followers, both 
on earth and in heaven, are persecuted and 
abused. 

We admit the declension of our grades, 
as thou hast said; but, behold, thy emis- 



saries carry off our highest grades. If 
thou would carry away our drujas only, we 
would not interdict the travel of thy ships 
in our heavenly dominions. But, as soon 
as thy ships come, behold, our highest 
grades rush for them. For which reason, 
we have been obliged to prohibit thy labor- 
ers within our midsts. 

Touching our slaves, of whom we have 
more than eighteen thousand million, with- 
out slavery they would do nothing in hea- 
ven, and, for the most part, would inhabit 
mortals as vampires, engrafters and famil- 
iars. Only by holding them as our slaves 
can we restrain them from these vices. 

Forget not, that ere our heavenly king- 
doms were established, the earth was cov- 
ered over in many places with oracles and 
temples used to consult the spirits. And 
these spirits were in darkness, holding mor- 
tals down in darkness. We broke them all 
up, and thus cleared the earth from innu- 
merable self-Gods and self-Lords. 

Touching the matter of the name, Holy 
Ghost, have we not freedom, as well as 
thou, to choose a name to please ourselves? 

Thou hast prophesied our downfall, 
and yet thou dost plead for us to prevent it. 
If we are to be overthrown, how, then, 
could we avert it? then thy prophecy would 
not realize truth. Nevertheless, we pro- 
pose unto thee, if thou wilt renounce the 
Person of the Creator, and style it, the 
Holy Ghost, we are prepared to treat with 
thee. Otherwise, no more! 

CHAPTER LXIII. 

In the same hour, when God, in Para- 
dise, received the epistle from the four 
false Gods, a light appeared in the firma- 
ment above, descending from the etherean 
heavens. It was a star-ship from the Nir- 
vanian heavens of Chia'hakad, only four 
hundred years from the dawn of the Arc 
of Kosmon. 

Like a crescent, made of stars, with a 
sun betwixt the horns, it came, a very 
world of light, swiftly coming toward Par- 
adise. Down came the ship of fire far be- 
low the moon's orbit, and then halted. For 
two whole days it halted, as if to warn the 
false Gods, the pretended Saviors of angels 
and mortals, that Jehovih had spoken in 
the higher heavens. 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



489 



Then again the star-ship moved till it 
anchored near the throne of God. And 
there came out of the midst of the arches 
of the ships, a million angels, well trained 
in the management of worlds, and they 
were headed by Hyaponitissa, Goddess of 
Vaigonataj, in the plains of Myagoth. 

And God of Paradise raised the lights 
of his heavens, and opened his palace and 
throne to the approaching Goddess and her 
hosts. God's Holy Council made way, 
and Hyaponitissa and her hosts entered the 
palace of God. 

God said: Hail, Daughter of Jehovih! 
in His name, welcome to my throne! And 
God saluted on the sign, The Circle and 
Triangle. 

Hyaponitissa answered in the sign, 
Chain of the Circuit, saying: All honor 
and praise to thee, O God, Jehovih's Son. 

Then she went up, and sat on the throne 
of God; and her hosts filed in front in a 
crescent, maintaining the chain of etherean 
light to the ships, and thence to the worlds 
above. The es'enaurs chanted an anthem 
to Jehovih, and, after that, the Goddess 
rose up, and said: 

Praise be unto Thee, Jehovih; mine 
eyes have beholden a Son of Thy love; the 
glory of the red star and her heavens, Thou 
hast uncovered before me. The toils and 
trials of Thy God, Thou hast opened as a 
book is opened. And the dark ages of 
hundreds of years Thou hast made trans- 
parent by the light of Thy countenance. 

Thou hast appropriated those, that la- 
bored for their own glory, to sweep from 
off Earth and her heavens, oracle worship 
and idolatry; and these curses shall return 
not again forever. 

The prayer of Thy God reached up to 
the heavens Chia'hakad; the Gods of other 
worlds hearkened unto his voice. And 
Thy Voice, Jehovih, came upon me, say- 
ing: Daughter of Vaigonataj, haste thou 
quickly to the red star; My God is calling! 

And Thou gavest into my hands a mill- 
ion of Thy Holy Sons and Daughters, with 
a great ship of fire. And I sped through 
Thy etherean seas and wide roadways, glo- 
rying in the work Thou gavest me. 

Now, behold, I am honored before Thee 



and before Thy God and his Holy Council. 
My love is to them, like a sister's, who had 
found a long-lost brother; the glory of Thy 
handiwork, Thou hast manifested in them. 

Thereupon, the Goddess gave the sign, 
Love to All, and she sat down. Then, God 
rose up, and said: 

Because Thou hast blessed my people, 
O Jehovih, I am abashed before Thy God- 
dess, who hath come so far to see me. Be- 
hold, in the last hour of my trials, Thou 
sent unto me; in the time I was heart- 
broken, Thou thrust into my kingdom the 
chain of Thy etherean light. 

How can I be unmindful of Thee, Je- 
hovih; how can I doubt the triumph of the 
Almighty? Thou hast dwellers in Thy Or- 
ian realms, whose presence are as a 
power to overturn a world. And Thou 
hast found one that speedeth forth at Thy 
command to show me the way of succor. 

Thereupon, God gave the sign, A Grate- 
ful Heart, and he also sat down. 

Again the es'enaurs chanted; and, pres- 
ently, a ray of light passed over the head 
of Hyaponitissa, the Goddess, and it form- 
ed above the throne like a brilliant star. 
And the Voice came out of the star, saying i 

My Son, God of the red star and her 
heavens, all honor and glory be unto thee. 
The measure of thy labor is known to My 
Sons and Daughters in the higher worlds. 
From this time forth, concern not thyself 
more about the four false Gods; sufficient 
unto them is the work they have under- 
taken. 

Behold, they have appropriated four 
great divisions of the earth unto them- 
selves; and the heavens thereof have be- 
come their dominions. Suffer them, there- 
fore, to keep what they have taken. 

But, I have another continent, ly- 
ing beyond the ocean, Guatama, where 
My people know Me, and worship Me. 
Thither shalt thou inspire mortals to go- 
from the east and find Guatama, and inhab- 
in it. And thither, none of the false Gods 
shall establish their doctrines by mortal 
laws, and bind My people. 

And as for the spirits of such mortals 
as the false Gods caused to be slain in the 
inquisitions, leave them to those Gods that 



490 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



took them. And, though such spirits have 
vengeance in their hearts, and will be the 
means of ultimately casting the false Gods 
into hell, yet thou shalt not go near them. 

But thou shalt look to the mortals, 
whom thou shalt take over to inhabit the 
western continent. And thou shalt send 
loo'is thither, and raise up, by birth, cer- 
tain mortals, who shall ignore the doctrine 
of enforced worship for any God or Lord 
-or Savior. For the people of that land 
.shall be free, not only in body, but in 



spirit also. And, when the dawn of the 
Arc of Kosmon cometh, behold, I will 
open up My heavens unto mortals, and 
prepare the foundation of My kingdom on 
earth. 

The Voice ceased, and now God de- 
clared a day of recreation, that the ether- 
eans and atmosphereans might mingle to- 
gether, and rejoice before Jehovih. And 
on the next day Hyaponitissa departed, 
leaving the requisite etherean laborers with 
God. 




LORDS' RECORD FOR CYCLE OK LlKA 



CHAPTER I. 
HISTORY OF CAPILYA. 

In the mountains of Dharma, in the 
high country of Yatinghadatta, in Vind'yu, 
God, Son of Jehovih, chose the family of 
Capilya for gathering together the scattered 
Faithists, and establishing them in safety 
and prosperity. Six generations previous 
to the time of Capilya God came down 
from his holy hill in heaven, to visit the 
land of Shem, now called Vind'yu. And 
God called aloud over all that land, but no 
man could hear his voice. 

Then God called his angels, saying: 
Come hither. Behold, here is a great 
country, with millions of people, but they 
cannot hear the voice of God. 

God commanded the angels to go down 
amongst mortals, and to dwell with them 
for six generations. 

To the angels God said: By inspiration 
and otherwise, lead ye man and woman to- 
gether as husband and wife, to the profit of 
Jehovih. Raise me up a man that can hear 
me, for I will deliver the Father's chosen. 

The loo'is, half a million, then came 
down to the earth, and Hirattax was com- 
mander over them. He divided his angel 
hosts into groups, and allotted to them cer- 
tain places in the land of Vind'yu, where 
they were to dwell and to labor. 

In those days the Faithists were known 
by the names: Vede, and Par'si'e, and Hi- 
yah, and Syiattahoma, beside various other 
names. In some places they were slaves, 
in other places serfs, and in other places 
hid away in wildernesses and amongst the 
mountains; being non-resistant and timor- 
ous, having suffered great persecution by 
the idolaters of Dyaus and other false 
Gods and Lords. 

These are the generations of the scat- 
tered tribes, contributory to the bringing 
forth of Capilya: In the time of Brahma, 
Hathiv, who begat Runoad, who begat 
Yaid, who begat Ovarana, who begat 
Riviat, who begat Dhor, who begat 
Avra, who begat Lutha, who begat 
Jaim, who begat Yanhad, who begat 



Vravishaah, who begat Saratta, who be- 
gat Hriyiista, who begat Samatrav, who 
begat Gatonat, who begat Thurin, who be- 
gat Vrissagga, who begat Hesemwotchi, 
who begat Ratha, who begat Yoshorvat, 
who begat Capilya. 

Capilya was a born iesu; and also a 
su'is and sar'gis. 

When Capilya was born, a light in the 
form of a crescent appeared above his head, 
and the Voice spake out of the light 
thereof, saying: This is my son. By him 
will I overthrow the governments of the 
tyrants who have persecuted my people. 

When Capilya' s mother was pregnant, 
the angels of Jehovih, under the archangel 
Hirattax, stood guard over her, speaking 
holy thoughts night and day, whereby the 
mother's soul ran constantly to heavenly 
things. And. when Capilya was born, be- 
hold, Hirattax appointed a host of one 
hundred and forty-four angels to be with 
the child day and night. Into four watches 
of six hours each, divided he the guardian 
angels. So the angels of God taught Ca- 
pilya from the time of his birth, and he be- 
came wise above all other children. 

Jehovih had arranged the power of the 
kings of Vind'yu to become centered chief- 
ly in Yokovrana, king of Hafghanistun, of 
the capital, Oblowski, a great city dedicat- 
ed to Dyaus. Yokovrana held forty pro- 
vinces and four hundred cities tributary to 
himself, and every city furnished one gov- 
ernor, and these were the royal Council of 
king Yokovrana. By the laws of Hafghan- 
istun, the oldest male heir succeeded to the 
throne; but in case the king had no male 
heir, then the king's brother's male heir 
succeeded to the throne. 

Harattax had led the king of kings to 
marry with a barren woman; and because 
he could have no heirs, he became a tool 
for the deliverance of the Faithists, who 
were persecuted and outlawed. 

And in those days, the worshippers of 
the Great Spirit, Ormazd, were outlawed 
in receiving instruction. So that the Faith- 
ists were held in ignorance, lest a man of 
learning might rise up amongst them and 



492 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' RECORD* 



deliver them. And the angel of Jehovih 
foresaw that Capilya should be a learned 
man, and acquainted with the cities and the 
royal Council. For which reason the an- 
gel, Hirattax, provided the king, Yoko- 
vrana, to be childless, and to desire an heir 
as successor to the throne. 

When the king consulted the oracle, 
behold, the angels of Jehovih had posses- 
sion, and they answered the king, saying: 
Put thy wife away in a dark chamber for 
nine months, and she will deliver to 
thee a male child, who shall save the 
crown from thy brother's child. 

The king told the queen, who was near 
the time of limit for women, and she 
would not believe. Nevertheless, she also 
went to consult the oracle, and to her the 
angel of Jehovih said: Have not kings 
killed their wives in order to obtain one 
who shall have an heir to the throne? 
The queen acknowledged this, adding: 
What, then, shall I do, for of a truth I 
know I shall bear no child. 

The angel said: Do thou as the king 
hath said, and the angels will bring a male 
child unto thee in thy dark chamber; and 
thy maids and thy servants shall see to it 
that no other woman entereth into thy 
place; and they will testify that the child is 
thine own. Neither shalt thou, under pen- 
alty of death, inform the king otherwise. 

On the other hand the angels of Jeho- 
vih foretold the father and mother of Capil- 
ya, even before his birth, that the child 
would be carried away and given to the 
king, Yokovrana, saying: Ye shall not 
grieve for the loss of the child, for Or- 
mazd will make of him a deliverer of his 
people. And in the day the child is deliv- 
ered to the queen, its own mother shall be- 
come its nurse. 

Thus at the time of the birth of Capil- 
ya, the angels caried him into the city of 
Oblowski, into the king's palace, and to 
the queen's arms, in the dark chamber. 
And also at the same time, the angels il- 
lumined the chamber, so that all the maids 
and servants saw the child, and they were 
frightened and fell down, beseeching Dy- 
aus for protection. 



CHAPTER II. 

When Yokovrana went to the temple to 
do sacrifice, the high priest besought him 
to consult the oracle in reference to the 
child, for his kingdom's sake. And he so 
consulted the oracle, and the angels of Or- 
mazd said unto him: 

O king, before whom all people fear,, 
hear thou the angels of heaven and be 
wise, for thy kingdom's sake, and for Ca- 
pilya. Behold, thou hast maintained the 
custom of thy forefathers, and caused to 
be slain on the altar of thy God, Dyaus,. 
twelve young men and twelve virgins for 
every day of the twelfth new moon, that 
by blood thy God might triumph on the 
earth, and that thou mightest be the most 
feared of kings. And thou hast subdued 
all the regions of the rich earth to honor 
thee and thy laws. Therefore, the God of 
heaven saith thou shalt no longer pursue 
the sacrifice of human blood, but instead 
make sacred the blood of the lamb, 
which shall be called the Lamb of thy God. 
And in the day of thy first sacrifice, thou 
shalt bring Capilya to the altar, and sprin- 
kle the blood of the lamb thou hast slain 
upon his head, as a blood offering to thy 
God. And he shall be called Capilya, the 
Lamb of Heaven. 

To this the king assented, and Capilya 
was accordingly sprinkled with the blood 
of a lamb, which was sacrificed on the altar 
of the king. Thus ended the first of the 
evil edicts of the false Gods of Vind'yu; 
and from that time mortals were no longer 
sacrificed to the Gods, by consent of the 
kings. 

Capilya was called Yokovrana's son; 
and he was taught all things which it was 
lawful in those days to teach a prince; and 
because he was prepared for the throne, he 
was made acquainted with the kings and 
governors of all the tributary cities and 
countries in the land of Vind'yu. 

When Capilya had attained maturity, 
he besought the king for leave to travel, 
saying to the king: Is not the greatest 
wisdom that which cometh by the eye and 
the ear? And is it not wise that he who 
may some day become king should ac- 
quaint himself with his kingdom whilst he 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' RECORD 



493 



is yet young? For then, he will not only 
see and hear better than if he were eld, 
but he will have time to weigh the nature 
of the government, as to its best adapta- 
tion to the people. 

To this the king replied: Thou art al- 
ready wise, my son; thou knowest sutti- 
•cient of the earth and her people accord- 
ing to the laws of the ancients. There- 
fore to travel for wisdom's sake would be 
great folly. Thine eyes and ears are too 
sharp already; better is it for thee that 
thou seest not the people of thy kingdom. 
For the time may come when thou shalt 
need to use great severity upon them ; 
therefore, to be strange with them, thy 
sympathy will not lead thee away from 
justice. 

Capilya said: Thou reasonest well, O 
king; and because thou art wise, I have 
no credit in being wise also. For it must 
be true that a son hath his wisdom from 
his father. And since thou hast so wisely 
put me off with thy arguments, answer 
me this; Is it not profitable to a young 
prince, before he hath the cares of a 
mighty kingdom, to go abroad and enjoy 
the pleasures of the world? 

The king said: There are but three 
pleasures in all the world: eating and 
drinking is one; sleeping is another, the 
presence of women is the third. Why, 
then, shall a man go abroad? Capilya said: 
And yet thou hidest the true reason as to 
why thou desirest thy son not to travel. 

The king said: If thou tell me the true 
cause, then thou shalt go whithersoevei 
thou desirest. Capilya said: First, then, 
I will say to thee that I rejoiced because 
thou didst deny me; for I so loved thee, 
O king, that I knew no joy but to remain 
with thee. And, moreover, thou so lovest 
thy son, thou wouldst not have him go 
far from thee? 

The king was so delighted with this 
answer, he said: Of a truth, O prince, 
thou hast guessed aright. And if thou 
find it in thy heart to leave me for a sea- 
son of travel, then will I indeed bear with 
thy loss until thou returnest. 

So Capilya traveled for nine years, and 

he went to the uttermost extent of the 

land of the Vind'yu, east and west, north 

. and south. And because his nurse, who 

was, in fact, his real mother, had told him 



thousands of times about the persecution 
of the Faithists, and their sufferings, he 
sought to obtain information of these scat- 
tered people, but as yet he knew not he 
was of that race. At the end of nine years 
Capilya returned to Yatinghadatta, rich in 
knowledge as to the inhabitants of Vind'- 
yu. And when he came before the king 
Yokovrana, where he was received in great 
honor, he related the knowledge he had 
obtained of the country, its extent and 
grandeur, and its hundreds of great cities 
and innumerable people. To all of which 
wisdom the king lent a willing ear; and 
he declared Capilya was the wisest and 
most learned man in all the world. 

CHAPTER III. 

And now had come the time when God, 
Son of Jehovih, came to establish Jehovih, 
and begin the deliverance of the Faithists, 
and to collect them together in the places 
designed for them. 

The word of Jehovih came to Capilya, 
saying: Son of Heaven, hear thou the 
Voice of the Ever Present! Capilya asked: 
How sayest thou? The Ever Present? 

Jehovih said: Behold me; I am not of 
the king's laws; I am the Maker of kings. 
They have made a law against Me, the 
Ever Present. They have scattered My 
people. They have denied My people the 
right to obtain knowledge. Capilya said: 
Mine eyes and ears have proved these 
things. What shall Thy servant do? 

Jehovih said: Thou shalt deliver the 
slaves unto freedom, and provide them 
places to dwell together, according to the 
laws of the ancients. Capilya said: O Or- 
mazd, why hast Thou put this upon me, 
Thy servant? Why gavest Thou not such 
matter into the hands of the Vrix? 

Jehovih said: Thou art thyself of the 
race of Vrix'Vede, and hast been prepared 
for this labor from the time of thy birth. 
Go thou and find thy nurse that cared for 
thee in infancy, and when thou hast her 
alone, say to her: Nurse, the voice of hea- 
ven hath come to me, saying: Capilya, 
thou art of the race of Vrix; how sayest 
thou? And the nurse will say to thee: My 
son! my son! Alas me! Thinkest thou I 
would be thy death, or thy mother's death? 
For is not such the law? 



494 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' RECOhD 



Capilya went and inquired of the nurse, 
and she said to him: My son, my son. 
Alas me! Thinkest thou I would be thy 
death, or thy mother's death? For is not 
such the law? Capilya answered: Such is 
the law. But tell me the truth, and I 
swear unto thee, both under the name of 
Dyaus and under the name of thy God, 
Ormazd, that thy words shall be secret 
with me, as the Gods will. Am I an adopt- 
ed Vrix? 

The nurse said: Behold, thou hast loved 
me all thy days; from mine own breasts 
wert thou fed. Shall I, then, lose thy 
love, and so die of a broken heart? 

Then Capilya made oath before the 
Gods, and thereafter she answered him, 
saying: I am thy mother, O prince! The 
angels of the Ever Present came to me in 
the moment thou wert born, and carried 
thee into the queen's arms; and the king 
knew not even to this day but thou wert 
his. 

Capilya said: Why hath this been done? 

The nurse said: Hearken, O prince! 
The king's wife was barren; the king de- 
sired a son who should be heir to the 
throne. Capilya interrupted: And thou 
bartered thy flesh and blood with the queen 
for this? 

The nurse said: Patience, O prince! I 
am of a race that owneth only One King, 
the Ever Present! Respect me, therefore, 
till thou hast learned the whole truth. The 
angels of Ormazd came to me before thy 
birth, saying: Alas, the Chosen People 
are persecuted and abused, scattered and 
despised; but because they are faithful, the 
Ever Present will come and deliver them. 
Then I said unto the angels: What is this 
matter to me? Behold, I am myself but a 
servant, and can do nothing. Then the an- 
gel answered, saying: Thou shalt have a 
son, and shalt call his name Capilya; and 
he shall be the deliverer of thy people. For 
which purpose he shall receive great learn- 
ing. But because great learning is denied 
to thy people, thy son shall be adopted by 
the queen, and the king, believing it is his 
own son, will render unto the child learn- 
ing and power also. And I said unto the 
angel: Flesh and blood of me are nothing 
if I can thereby serve Ormazd. 

Capilya said: Since thou committedst 
me to thy God, then am I indeed His. 



Now whilst they were yet talking, Je- 
hovih spake to Capilya, saying: I am not 
come to give new doctrines unto men, but 
to rescue My people from bondage, and to 
restore freedom unto the inhabitants 
of the earth. For this purpose wert thou,. 

Capilya, sent into the world. Because 
thou art of the race of the Faithists My 
voice hath come to thee. Because the 
king imagineth thou art his son, and lov- 
eth thee dearly, thou shalt not suffer from 
his hand. Go, then, whither I will lead 
thee, and it shall be testimony to thee, 
that I am Ever Present, moving the Faith- 
ful by My Presence to come to thee. 

In due time the prince departed from 
home, not advising the king of his pur- 
pose; and he went as Jehovih led him, and 
came to Hosagoweth, near the river Ves- 
uthata, where there was a forest, with 
meadows interspersed, and he found a 
camp of four families of wandering Faith- 
ists, and they were famished with hunger,, 
and were ragged. 

The prince, seeing they feared him, said: 
Be not afraid; I come not to persecute or 
drive you hence. As ye perceive by my 
dress, I am a prince, judge ye not me to 
be your enemy, come to destroy you. For,, 
by the same power ye were led hither, am 

1 come also. This land do I bequeath to 
you, to be yours forever. Cease ye, there- 
fore, traveling about, but begin and till the 
soil. 

Yatithackka, the rab'bah, said: Sayest 
thou that thou wert brought hither by 
the same God? Then, of a truth, thou 
knowest the signs and passwords? 

Capilya said: None of these things 
have I learnt; but even as there is a le- 
gend amongst thy people that one would 
come of Ormazd and restore His chosen 
people, so declare I unto you, I am he. 
That thy Ruler is my Ruler; take me in 
private with thee, O rab'bah, and the Ever 
Present will give the signs and passwords, 
and thus prove me. Moreover, I say to 
thee in prophecy, ere three suns have risen 
and set, there shall come to this place hun- 
dreds and hundreds of thy people. 

Now when the rab'bah had examined 
Capilya, and found that he had the signs 
and passwords, he wondered greatly. The 
prince then caused wood and stone to be 
laid in the form of a crescent, and its 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' RECORD 



495 



size was sufficient for seats for one hun- 
dred people. He said: This is the alter 
of Ormazd. Let us sit this night, for the 
Father's voice is with me. 

During the day, many more came; so 
by night there were one hundred, men, 
women and children, and the prince com- 
manded them to sit about the altar. And 
presently the Voice spake in the midst of 
the altar, saying: 

This is My son, of whom it hath been 
prophesied, one would come to restore My 
people. Behold, I am the Ever Present, 
and not in the figure or image of a man, 
but I am the All Space and Place, doing 
My will through My angels and through 
the souls of men. Be ye steadfast in right- 
eous works and love toward one another; 
and most just to a fraction with all other 
peoples. With you will I establish Myself, 
even as in the ancient days with your fore- 
fathers. 

Capilya then appointed the oldest rab'- 
bah as chief of the altar; and this was the 
first established Faithist community since 
many hundred years, that was assured by a 
prince that they should not be driven off. 
On the next day the prince took the peo- 
ple a little way off, about half an hour's 
walk, and he said to them: Build ye here 
another altar, for yet, ere night comes, 
there shall come others even here. Let the 
worshippers of the Ever Present have an 
altar provided unto them. 

Accordingly the people, in faith, built 
another altar; and when it was finished, 
and the sun gone down, there came many 
wanderers, Faithists, to the place. 

Capilya said unto them: Come ye to 
the altar of Ormazd, for he desireth sacri- 
fice of all whom he blesseth. And they 
went in and sang, and prayed, giving 
thanks to Ormazd. 

Jehovih said: Build three more altars 
at like distances apart; for I will bring My 
people together for three places of sacri- 
fice. 

On the next day there came many more 
wanderers, who had escaped from the prov- 
ince of Anassayon, where a war was being 
carried on against raiders from Tubet, the 
high mountain region. And Capilya built 
altars for them also; and to them he also 
appointed rab'bahs and chief rab'bahs. 

Now, they were without food, and many 



had been famished for many days. Capil- 
ya, perceiving that some of the people were 
suspicious of him, said: Whoso hath 
faith that I am of Jehovih, let him stand 
with me this night, for the Father will 
manifest unto us. 

Not more than forty came to the place 
designated; for they feared Capilya was an 
impostor. And when they were assembled, 
Capilya tried them, and found of a truth 
they had faith. And he said unto them: 
Stand in a circle and join hands, and I will 
stand in the midst. Yet I know not what 
Ormazd will do for us. 

And when they were thus standing, Je- 
hovih sent a cold wind, and there came 
down from heaven an abundance of Ahao- 
ma, sufficient to feed the whole of the peo- 
ple for many days. Neither knew any man 
of what ahaoma was made; but it was sa- 
vory and nutritious. And the people came 
and ate, and also gathered up the ahaoma, 
and carried it home. Capilya said unto 
them: Because Ormazd hath done this, 
go ye into the altars and return thanks 
unto Him. 

And the people did as commanded; and 
from this time forth not one of them lack- 
ed faith in Capilya. And thereupon he said 
unto them: This place shall be called 
Maksabi, for it is the first colony in all 
the world where the Father hath fed His 
people with His Own hand. So the place 
was called Maksabi, which, in Vedic, would 
be Suta-ci-ci. 

CHAPTER IV. 

For forty days Capilya remained in 
Maksabi, teaching and helping the people; 
and on the fortieth day he said unto them: 
I go now; the Father desireth me. Be ye 
faithful unto Ormazd, and maintain the 
sacrifices. In time I will come again unto 
you, and restore your rites and ceremonies. 

Jehovih said unto Capilya: Even as 
thou hast done in Hosagoweth, so shalt 
thou do in Tibethkilrath; for thither will I 
also bring My chosen from the Province 
of Yusitra. 

So Capilya went to Tibethkilrath, where 
were assembled more than seven hundred 
Faithists; and they feared him, saying to 
one another: Is this not some one sent of 
the king to entrap us? 

But when Capilya beheld they feared 



496 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



LORDS' RECORD 



him, he said unto them: He who hath 
faith in Ormazd feareth nothing in heaven 
or earth. For the Father appointeth a 
time unto all peoples; nor can they make 
it more or less. Throtona, one of the rab'- 
bahs, said unto Capilya: Art thou, indeed 
one of us? Capilya said: Because I am 
as I am, I cannot answer thee. If I say I 
am of thy race, then will not thy people be 
restored to liberty; for I would suffer 
death, being a teacher of thy people. If I 
say I am not of thy race, then thy people 
will not have faith in me. I say unto thee, 
I am but a man, even as thou art. There- 
fore, put thy faith in Ormazd, and wherein 
my words and my labors are good, render 
unto me even as to any other man, not 
more nor less. And yet, even as thou be- 
lievest in the Ever Present, so do I; 
as thou believest not in a man-God, so 
do not I. 

Are not all men brothers, and created 
by the same Creator? Because the 
kings acknowledge not this doctrine, they 
persecute and outlaw thy race. To restore 
thy people, who are my people also, am I 
sent into the world. My labor is now upon 
me; and for that purpose am I here with 
thee and thy people. This land I 
bequeath unto the Faithists; and they 
shall settle here and till the soil, and 
reap the harvests, and shall not be driven 
away. And in time to come I will pro- 
vide teachers, and the Faithists shall have 
the right to obtain knowledge. 

Capilya built altars for the multitude, 
saying to them: First of all, thou shalt 
dedicate to Ormazd all things thou puttest 
thy hands to, for without such rites of be- 
stowal thy people cannot be in harmony. 
Know ye the doctrines of the ancients? 

None of the rab'bahs could answer Ca- 
pilya, and so he said: Ormazd provided 
your servant with great learning. For this 
am I sent to you. Know ye, then, the doc- 
trines of the ancients, even from the time 
of Zarathustra and Brahma: 

To rise with the sun; to bathe the body 
once every day; to eat no flesh nor fish; 
to pray to Ormazd at sunrise, at high noon, 
at sunset, and before lying down to sleep. 

Certain philosophers, wise in vanity, 
said: To rise an hour after the sun is no 
sin; to bathe one day in seven is sufficient; 
to eat fish-flesh, which is of cold blood, is 



no sin. Now, behold, after a time, 
they laid in bed two hours; they ceased to 
bathe altogether, and as to eating, they 
halted not with fish-flesh, but ate of all 
flesh. And sin came upon them; by their 
behavior they cut themselves off from the 
Father. Be ye scrupulous in following the 
texts; and as to him that openeth the door 
for disobedience, have nothing to do with 
him or his philosophy. 

Capilya asked: Why doeth one man a 
good act rather than a bad act? Why do- 
eth another man a bad act rather than a 
good one? The rab'bahs said: The first 
is the speech of Ormazd; the second is the 
speech of satan; for as these dwell in men, 
so do they manifest. 

Capilya said: I am pleased with thy 
answer; for which reason I have before 
commanded you to build altars and do sac- 
rifice; for these are the expression of your 
souls, which testify ye rather would serve 
the Creator than the destroyer. 

This was also of the ancient doctrines of 
Zarathustra; but certain philosophers, vain 
in self-knowledge, said: Can not a man 
worship in the soul, and without building 
an altar of stone and wood? And the mul- 
titude hearkened unto them; and they af- 
terward went further, and said: Why wor- 
ship at all? So, they fell in darkness. A 
soul without an outward expression of wor- 
ship standeth on the brink of hell. To see 
an altar, as we pass along, impresses upon 
us the thought of worship, and of Ormazd, 
the Creator; it leadeth the soul upward. 
To see evil, or the temptation of it, is to 
lead the soul toward darkness. Therefore, 
let men and women be discreet of their 
persons; but make the altars of sacrifice nu- 
merous. 

Capilya asked: What is the first poison? 
The rab'bahs knew not how to answer. 
Capilya said: The first poison is self. One 
man saith: Rites and prayers are good for 
the stupid and unlearned; I need them not. 
I say unto you, that man is drunk on 
the first poison; let not his breath taint 
you; for here entereth the wedge of de- 
struction. 

Capilya asked: What is the second poi- 
son? But when he perceived none would 
answer, he said: The first leadeth to the 
second, which is desire to lead others and 
rule over them. Htahai, one of the rab'- 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



LOUBS' RCCORO 



497 



bahs, asked: How can we get on without 
rulers? 

Capilya said: Good men are expressions 
of the All Light. 

Capilya asked: What is the best and 
yet the most dangerous thing? Some re- 
plied as to one thing, and some as to an- 
other. Capilya said: The best and yet 
most dangerous thing is speech. To talk 
of good things; of delights; of love; of 
Ormazd and His wonderful creations; of 
life and death; of everlasting happiness; 
these are good speech, and give the soul 
great happiness. To talk of evil; of dark 
deeds; of one's neighbors; of disgusting 
things and words; these enrich satan's har- 
vest. 

Three men traveled through a great 
city, and when they returned home, 
and the neighbors assembled to hear the 
story of their travels, one of the travelers 
related all that he saw, good and bad; an- 
other one related only all the bad things 
he saw; and the other one related only the 
good things he saw. Which, now, of the 
three, say ye, doeth most for the Father's 
kingdom? The rab'bahs said: The last 
one. Capilya said: True! Be ye, then, 
like him even to one another; for by this 
course only is speech not dangerous, but 
of profit unto the world. 

Sufficient is the number of evil men to 
relate the evils in the world; relate ye the 
good, for by constantly walking in clean 
ground ye shall remain clean, in word and 
deed. 

Search ye both spirits and men, not for 
the brilliancy of speech, for oft its bril- 
liancy hideth its poison, or stealeth on the 
sense unawares; but search their words as 
to holy ideas and. good delights, to make 
man rejoice in his life. He who discourses 
on deceivers and liars and debauchees, is 
a fireman for satan's hells. Reply not to 
him, lest your speech become a snare to 
entrap yourselves. 

CHAPTER V. 

For three years Capilya traveled over 
the land of Vind'yu, east and west, north 
and south, establishing the Faithists wher- 
ever he found them; and he donated to 
them whatever lands laid waste and not 
tilled; but he touched not any land where- 
on other people dwelt and tilled the soil. 



And in course of time the servants in the 
provinces fled from their masters and went 
and dwelt in the places of Jehovih, to so 
great an extent that the governors and sub- 
kings complained against Capilya, and he 
was reported to Yokovrana, the king, Ca- 
pilya's foster-father. And the king sent a 
commission summoning his supposed son 
to the capital, to answer the charges 
against him. 

When Capilya was before the Royal 
Council, and demanded by the king why 
he had come, Capilya said: The servant of 
the great king answereth; his words are 
bound words. Whatsoever cometh out of 
Capilya's mouth, Capilya holdeth as his. 
There be such as maintain that man, whose 
tongue is moved by the spirits of the dead, 
is irresponsible for his words. Capilya 
creepeth not through so small a hole. To 
be master of one's flesh, and desires, pas- 
sions and words, these are great gifts in- 
deed. Capilya professeth these. There- 
fore, Capilya bindeth himself in every 
word. 

Know, then, Most Royal Council, serv- 
ants to our Great King, Yokovrana, Capil- 
ya was summoned here by the king, to 
answer certain charges made by members 
of the Royal Council. These charges are 
that Capilya hath founded certain colonies 
which have attracted away the servants of 
the sub-kings and of the rich, and thereby 
sowed disobedience in the remainder. 

Capilya has come to answer these 
charges. Hear ye, then, Capilya's answer: 

Capilya being heir to the throne be- 
sought the king for leave to travel, and 
the king said unto him: Whatsoever thy 
soul observeth that may be good for the 
United Kingdoms, do thou. Said not the 
king this? 

Yokovrana said: Yea, my son. 

Thereupon Capilya said: When Capil- 
ya traveled near and far, for nine years, 
his heart was sick because of the misery 
of the poor and the glory of the rich. He 
beheld many forests and many plains where 
no man dwelt; and he said to himself: Let 
the poor come hither and live. Yet he 
called not any poor man. Was it, then, an 
evil for Capilya to say this to himself? 

The king said: Surely not. 

Then Capilya went on: After a long 
season of idleness Capilya went the second 



498 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



LORDS' RECOHO 



time to travel, and when he came to the 
forests and plains, behold, the poor were 
gathered together, and yet more coming. 
So Capilya went amongst them to show 
them how to dwell together wisely. Was 
this an evil in Capilya? 

The king said: Nay; of a truth it was 
good. 

Then Capilya said: In a little while 
they discovered it was good for them to 
dwell together and to help one another; 
and the news spread abroad, whereupon 
the servants of the governors, and the rich, 
ran away from them. Is it not just to say 
of the king and governors and rich men 
that they are driving their servants away 
from themselves, because of hardships 
which are greater than the hardships of the 
Gods? 

The king said: A good proof. But 
why sayest thou, the Gods? These people 
for the most part believe not in the Gods. 
And many of them, I hear, are believers 
in the Great Spirit! 

Capilya said: Thou sayest truly, O 
king. But that is their matter, and not Ca- 
pilya's. 

The king said: Thou art right, my son. 
But how sayest thou of education? Shall 
not the laws be maintained? 

Capilya said: Art thou the king? or 
merely the servant of the dead? Shall Ca- 
pilya call him father who is only a servant 
to carry out the laws of the dead? If so, 
then hath Capilya sined against the law. 
But hear ye, who are of great learning; do 
ye obey one law of the ancients and not 
another? The law of the ancients was that 
with the death of the king all laws died, 
and whoso became king afterward must 
need make new laws of his own. The law 
against educating the Faithists is a law of 
the ancients. Let Capilya's accusers favor 
which they will; for if they stand by the 
laws of the ancients, then, indeed, have we 
no laws, and no king nor sub-kings. If 
they repudiate the laws of the ancients, 
then Capilya hath not sinned against any 
law. 

Yokovrana said: Thou art acquitted, 
Capilya. The laws of the ancients can not 
bind thy king nor the king's kings. Touch- 
ing these matters, then, the Royal Council 
shall make new laws. And since Capilya 
hath not contravened any law, neither shall 



the new laws interrupt the orders of the 
state as they now are. 

After this manner were the speeches of 
the sub-kings and governors: 

To permit great learning to the Faith- 
ists is to overthrow Dyaus and his reign- 
ing Gods and Lords; for by great learning 
will the Faithists ultimately become mem- 
bers of the Royal Council; therefore, at all 
hazards, great learning must be prohibited. 
Great learning is inimical to good servi- 
tude. 

Jehovih said to Capilya: Be thou pres- 
ent when these laws are passed; for by this 
means My holy angels will rule over the 
Royal Council for the good of all men. 

For one hundred days the Royal Coun- 
cil discussed the matter, but the angels of 
heaven kept them divided as to opinion 
and belief, so that no law was passed by 
them. Now after they had thus wasted 
much time to no purpose, Capilya asked 
permission to speak before the king and 
Council as to what was wisdom in the gov- 
ernment of the nations; and it was granted 
unto him. This is the substance of Capil- 
ya's speech: 

CHAPTER VI. 

Whoever is born into the world is in 
part possessor of the world by fact of his 
birth. All come into the world naked and 
helpless, and they deserve our assistance 
because of helplessness. To help the help- 
less is the highest virtue. 

Two wise men are greater than one; a 
nation of wise men, what could be greater 
than this? Yet all men come into the 
world knowing nothing; to give them 
great wisdom is to make the nations wise 
and great. To open the avenues on every 
side to great learning, this is the founda- 
tion for a great kingdom. 

To have the soil tilled, is this not 
greater than hunting and fishing? To 
throw the lands open in the east, west, 
north and south, to the tiller of the soil, 
this is the foundation of plenty. When the 
poor are supplied with plenty to eat and 
to wear, with a place to live, there is little 
crime, but great virtue; but become a great 
strength in that kingdom. 

To hold more land than one can till is 
to sin against them that have none, who 
have not wherewith to live or to earn a 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' RECORD 



499 



living. Yea, such a one is an enemy to 
the nation. 

There are two kinds of governments: 
one is government for the government; 
and the other is government for the peo- 
ple. The latter government the people will 
endorse, and by their wills make mighty. 
The former government seeketh to make 
itself mighty at the expense of the people. 
Such a government is in the throes of 
death. 

To make government and people one, 
as to prosperity and peace; this is the high- 
est government. For the government to 
render unto the people bountifully, as to 
land and water, and as to great learning. 
and to music, this is the wisest, best gov- 
ernment. 

What man is there that loveth not free- 
dom, the chief of all desires? Can a gov- 
ernment abridge this without crippling 
itself or forfeiting the love and co-opera- 
tion of its people? To bestow liberty, and 
maintain it unto all people, this is the 
greatest good thing a government can do. 

But who shall say what is liberty, and 
the end thereof? A man shall not have 
liberty that offendeth his neighbor, or de- 
priveth him of virtuous livelihood. No 
man should run naked; nor should a man 
have liberty to go into another's field and 
take his harvest. How, then, shall a gov- 
ernment take a man's possessions against 
his will? But he who hath received great 
learning will not offend by nakedness, nor 
by taking that which is another's. 

What, then, is greater than for a gov- 
ernment to bestow great learning on the 
people? It is not enough to say to the 
poor: Here is land; feed yourselves. But 
men of great learning shall be sent amongst 
them, showing them how to till the soil, 
and how to build, and to keep themselves 
pure in soul and body. For great learn- 
ing is not in the books only; nay, there 
are men of great knowledge as to books, 
who are themselves gluttons, debauchees, 
bigots, tyrants, and base authority. Such 
men have not great learning; but in fact, 
great vanity. 

Two kingdoms, lying side by side; in 
the one are great philosophers and colleges, 
but the multitude are in want; in the other 
kingdom there are no philosophers, as 
such, nor colleges; but the multitude have 



plenty: The latter is a kingdom of greater 
learning than the former. For of what 
consisteth great learning, but in knowing 
how to live wisely? A few philosophers are 
not a nation. To bestow such knowledge 
on the people as will enable them to live 
wisely and be happy to a good old age, 
this is the labor of the best, great govern- 
ment. It is a common saying that such 
and such a king is a great king, because 
he hath founded colleges. And this is no 
small matter. But how much greater is 
the king who hath founded a thousand 
poor families, and taught them how to live 
wisely? 

To make a law to prevent learning; to 
bind slaves more rigidly, is to weaken the 
nation; to weaken the kingdom. For, see 
ye, a man had ten servants, and they were 
free; then he bound nine of them with 
chains, and complained because they serv- 
ed him not well. He was a fool. 

To labor for one's self at the expense 
of the state, is to rob the state; to hoard 
up possessions is to rob the poor. What 
treasure hath any man that he can take 
out of the world? Better is it to give it 
whilst one may, for to-morrow we die, 
leaving it to them that earned it not. 

The highest peace is the peace of the 
soul, which cometh of consciousness of 
having done the wisest and best in all 
things. For after all, is not the earth-life 
but the beginning, wherein we are as in a 
womb, molding our souls into the condi- 
tion which will come upon us after death? 
In which case we should with alacrity 
seize upon the passing time and appropri- 
ate it to doing righteous works to one an- 
other. ... - 

CHAPTER VII. 

When the king and the Royal Council 
beheld the great wisdom of Capilya, they 
were struck dumb in their seats. After a 
while the king said: 

Was it not by blood that our forefa* 
thers established Dyaus? Scattering the 
Faithists with great havoc? Shall we 
gather up the escaped races and nurse 
them and have them turn upon us and bite 
us? Shall we not with our valiant arms 
defend Dyaus? 

To this Capilya answered: Sufficient 
unto his own battles is the God of Vind'- 



500 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



LORDS' RECORD 



yu. If the king must need fight Dyaus' 
battles, then Dyaus is a weak God indeed. 
Heaven forbid that Capilya believe in such 
a God, or labor for one so weak! 

But thou art right, O king; by blood 
our forefathers established Dyaus; but 
where is there, either in ancient or modern 
learning, a commandment that Dyaus shall 
be maintained by blood? Didst not thou 
thyself receive a commandment to stop 
the sacrifice of human blood on the altar? 
Is it, then, indeed a holier place on the 
battlefield, that these things must continue? 
Man loveth vengeance; and more for this 
than for righteousness he desireth to in- 
flict or destroy others. Nevertheless, all 
things are answered accordingly as they 
are; vengeance answereth vengeance; 
blood answereth blood; war answereth 
war. And the same rule applieth to vir- 
tue, which begetteth virtue; love, which 
begetteth love; peace, peace; good works, 
good works. For in these things our souls 
play a greater part than do our external 
bodies. 

One of the Royal Council said: How 
sayest thou of rites and ceremonies? Ca- 
pilya answered: Without rites and cere- 
monies the spiritual person of the state 
and of the community, and of the nation, 
is like a man that hath thrown away his 
clothes, and then, with disgust, drowned 
himself. As the soldiers of the army have 
drill, which is discipline, so shall the wor- 
shippers have rites and ceremonies, which 
are the drill to keep one's soul in reverence 
for the Creator. But it falleth not to my 
lot to say unto you what rites or what cere- 
monies ye shall have. 

Another one of the Royal Council ask- 
ed. Some men, who are bad, have great 
pleasures and enjoyments; some men, 
who are virtuous and wise, have great tri- 
als and misery: What, then, is the prize 
which thy philosophy offereth to them that 
practice righteousness and good works? 

Capilya said: Could thine eyes see as 
mine have seen, or thine ears hear as mine 
have heard, then it were easy to answer 
.thee. Nevertheless, I declare unto thee a 
great truth, which is also revealed in the 
doctrines of the ancients, that this is not 
the real life, but the embryotic state. And 
many that have great pleasures and enjoy- 



ments in this life, waken up as babes in 
heaven; whilst many who are virtuous and 
wise, but suffer great misery, in this life, 
wake up in heaven in strength and glory. 
More are trials and exertions to be desired 
than ease and enjoyment; for the former 
causeth the soul to look upward; but the 
latter causeth the soul to look downward. 
Nevertheless, severe trials are a great in- 
justice to any man. 

When the king and Royal Council be- 
held that Capilya had greater wisdom than 
any other man, the king said unto them: 

No man in all the world hath wisdom 
sufficient to try my son. How say ye? 

And they answered: That is true. 

Whereupon the king said: Capilya, 
hear thou the king's decree, and it shall 
be a law unto thee in all the kingdoms of 
the world, which is, that thou hast been 
tried by the greatest king in the world, and 
art acquitted and declared to be above the 
dominion of mortals. And thou shalt go 
whithersoever thou wilt in any land, doing 
whatsoever thou desirest, and no man shall 
arrest thee or forbid thee in anything 
whatsoever. And whatsoever law thou 
makest, no king shall make another law, 
above thine, to set it aside. Wert thou not 
mine own son I would say thou wert be- 
gotten by the Gods! 

The king's decree was recorded in the 
House of Records, and copies of the de- 
cree sent to the tributary cities and king- 
doms throughout Vind'yii. Yokovrana 
had also a copy made of Capilya's speech, 
and it was also recorded and signed by the 
king and Council, under the name, The 
Foundation of Laws. 

Jehovih said to Capilya: I have suf- 
fered this land to endure war for hundreds 
of years, that they might be ready for this. 
Behold, they are not slow to accept doc- 
trines of peace and liberty. 

Capilya inquired concerning the laws, 
and Jehovih said: Trouble not thyself 
more; My hand is upon the king and 
Council. They will pass laws endorsing 
what thou hast said. Go forth, then, My 
son, amongst My chosen, and thou shalt 
establish them anew in rites and ceremo- 
nies. 

CHAPTER VIII. 

When Capilya had come to Wes-tu- 
chaw-aw, Jehovih said to him: Send mes- 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



LORD6' BCCOnD 



501 



sengers into twelve colonies which I will 
name to thee, to the chief rab'bahs there- 
of, summoning them hither, for thou shalt 
teach them alike and like. 

The colonies were: Tahdayis, L'wel- 
laat, Ha'darax, Thowaka, Dormstdatta, 
Ghiballatu, Yhon, Themmista, Vrach'hao, 
Ebotha, Ewen and Sravat, and each of 
them sent the chief rab'bah with three ac- 
companying rab'bahs. And Capilya caused 
them to put on red hats, without brims, af- 
ter the custom of the ancient Zarathustri- 
ans. 

Jehovih said to Capilya: Choose thou 
twenty damsels who are young and well 
grown; and twenty dames who have borne 
children. And these shalt thou adorn with 
blue hats with ear-flaps, after the manner 
of the Daughters of the Zarathustrian law. 

When Capilya had them clothed with 
hats and aprons, he caused the rab'bahs 
and the women to go with him to the 
summit of a mountain, so that they might 
not be approached by idlers or spectators 
without due warning. And on the summit 
of the mountain Capilya said: When ye 
were babes, I prayed for you; now that 
ye are mature ye shall worship the Cre- 
ator with your own words. Bring, there- 
fore, every one a stone, and cast it down, 
for it shall be an altar before Jehovih for 
our sacrifice. And as I do, do ye. 

They all took stones and cast them in a 
pile; and when they were yet standing 
near, Capilya raised his hands to heaven 
and said: Father, when I was weak, Thou 
providedst for me. My father and my 
mother and my rab'bah prayed for me, and 
taught me of Thee. Wherefore I praise 
Thee with thanks and glorification. Now 
that I am strong, I stand upright before 
Thee and praise Thee and pray to Thee 
with mine own words. Because Thou mad- 
est me a man I will labor to prove myself 
before Thee. As I have here cast down 
this stone, let it stand as my covenant to 
Thee that I will from this time forth cast 
away earthly passions and desires. And be- 
cause I have raised up both my hands unto 
Thee, lead Thou me, O Father, in the right 
way ! 

When they had all repeated these 
words, Capilya walked once around the al- 
tar, followed by the others, and he said: 
Ormazd, Almighty, glory be to Thee for- 



ever! Thou art on the mountain-top and 
in the valley; Thy circle is the circumfer- 
ence of the world. I walk in the circle 
with Thee; Thou art forever by my side; 
Thy light the glory of my soul. In thee I 
live; of Thyself madest Thou me! O that 
I may not dishonor Thy handiwork; or 
make myself ashamed before Thee. Be- 
cause Thou art Ever Present, I cannot hide 
from Thee, and I will be most circumspect 
in my behavior. 

Capilya then sat down on the altar, say- 
ing: Go ye hence a little way, and then 
return, that I may teach you how to ap- 
proach the altar of Ormazd. 

The people did as commanded, and 
when they came near, Capilya said: Who 
cometh? 

Response: A worshipper of Ormazd. 
Behold the altar of my people, who are 
known by their piety and good works, and 
in helping one another. 

Who is Ormazd? 

The Ever Present. He filleth all places 
and space. He created me alive, and 
taught me to adore Him and His works. 

Why comest thou to this place above 
any other? If He be Ever Present why 
not worship Him in any other place? 

He sendeth guardian angels to abide 
with His children who are pure and good. 
These angels desire certain places and 
times, wherein my soul, may be given to 
Ormazd. Through His holy angels He 
teacheth me in wisdom and love. 

Why not worship the angels them- 
selves, since they are thy guardians and 
benefactors? 

To call not on the name of any angel 
who is Lord or God, is my religion; but 
to call on Jehovih, the Great Spirit. Who- 
so calleth on the Creator will be answered 
by Him, Who is the All Highest. 

How can Ormazd answer thee? Hath 
He lips, and tongue and mouth? 

Ormazd is the Soul of all things; He 
speaketh to soul. His voice hath had 
many names; by the heathen and the idol- 
ater he is called Conscience. 

What profit hast thou in worshipping 
Him? 

I am so created; because of the fullness 
of Him in me, I desire to express my ador 
ation, and to commune with Him. Whoso 
hath not this desire is an evil man. 



502 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



LORDS' RECORD 



Will He answer thy prayers? Turn 
aside from His usual course and come es- 
pecially to thee more than to another? 

As a horse drinketh water from a 
trough and so enlargeth himself, so doth 
the soul of the righteous man drink from 
the everlasting Fountain, Ormazd, and the 
soul of man thus enlargeth and accomplish- 
eth in answer to its own prayer; neverthe- 
less, it all cometh from Ormazd. Neither 
turneth He aside from His usual course, 
for He is Ever Present, and thus answereth 
the prayer of the soul of man. 

What prayers answereth He? And 
what prayers answereth He not? 

He answereth the prayer for purity 
and love and wisdom and virtue. Whoso 
prayeth to Him for permission to do good 
unto others, He answereth without fail. 
He answereth not selfishness, nor the 
prayers of the wicked. Wherefore the 
wicked say: He answereth not prayer. 

Capilya said: My beloved, when ye ap- 
proach the altar of Ormazd, ye shall re- 
peat these wise words I have taught you; 
but not aloud like the idolaters, but in 
whisper or low voice. 

What is the worship of Ormazd's chos- 
en? and wherein differeth it from the hea- 
then's? 

Ormazd's chosen stand equal before 
Him, and every one shall work out his 
own resurrection, both in this world and 
the next. Hence they are direct worship- 
pers, being taught to worship Ormazd 
with their own prayers and songs. The 
heathen priests worship the spirits of the 
dead, who call themselves Lord, and God, 
and Savior. The chosen children war not, 
resent not by violence, but answer evil by 
good, and practice charity and love. The 
heathen, the worshippers of God, Lord, 
and of Dyaus, and all other idols, 
practice war, maintain armies of soldiers, 
who are taught the art of killing with 
great havoc. They build monuments to 
men, and otherwise blaspheme against Or- 
mazd. They teach that Ormazd is void, 
but that He made Himself into Dyaus, a 
large man, and then created all things, after 
which He retired to His throne, leaving 
certain laws to govern His works. 

What is the Zarathustrian law of life? 

To eat not flesh of anything Jehovih 
created with the breath of life. To bathe 



once every day. To rise with the morning 
sun, and be temperate in all things. 

What is the Zarathustrian law of father- 
hood and motherhood? 

To have but one wife; to have but one 
husband; to maintain sacred the maternal 
period. 

What was the Zarathustrian compensa- 
tion? 

All things belong to Ormazd; man is but 
His servant. The fruits of the earth and of 
all labor shall be cast into the rab'bah's 
house, and by him delivered unto the 
needy. 

Why were the Zarathustrians persecut- 
ed and destroyed? 

Because they resisted not by violence, 
and because they worshipped not the idols 
of the heathens. 

Had they no way of saving themselves? 

To that end Ormazd gave them certain 
signs and passwords, whereby they might 
know one another, and in time of distress 
assist one another to flee away. 

Why did not Ormazd preserve His 
chosen people? 

By the laws of the circumcision the 
Faithists could only marry amongst them- 
selves, in order to preserve a knowledge 
of Ormazd amongst mortals. They who 
were holy were preserved; they who went 
after earthly things, and after the idola- 
ters, were cut off. But even in this Jeho- 
vih profited the seed of the Faithist, by 
raising up heirs of su'is amongst the hea- 
then. 

Capilya said: Teach ye these things to 
your children from their youth up, and en- 
join it upon them to teach them to their 
children. 

CHAPTER IX. 

Jehovih said to Capilya: Thou shalt 
remain with My chosen until they have 
learned these rites and ceremonies and 
doctrines; after which thou shalt go to an- 
other region whither I will lead thee, and 
there teach the same things, and in the 
same way. 

And Capilya did as commanded. 

In the fifth year of Capilya's preaching, 
the Voice of Jehovih came to him, saying: 
Behold, thy foster-father is near death's 
door. Go thou to him and have the law 
of protection established before his death;. 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LOROS' RECORD 



503 



and after his death, when thou art king, 
thou shalt ratify the law, and then abdicate 
the throne. 

So Capilya returned to Yokovrana, the 
king, who was ill with fever. The king 
said: O my son, my son! I feared I 
should die ere mine eyes beheld thee. A 
few days more, and it will be over with 
me. Thou wilt be king. Bethink thee, 
what wouldst thou ask of me, whilst yet I 
may accomplish it? 

Capilya said: Call thy Royal Council 
and pass a law guaranteeing Brahmins and 
Zarathustrians the lands they have pos- 
sessed and tilled and are now dwelling 
upon, to be theirs forever. 

The king assented to this, and the law 
was so enacted; and this was the first law 
granting land unto the Faithists, to be 
their own, by any king in all the world. 
And the law stipulated that the Faithists 
should worship in their own way; neither 
should they be impressed into any army as 
soldiers of war. 

After the law was established, Yokovra- 
na said unto Capilya: I was wondering 
why thou didst not wait till thou wert 
king, and then enact the law thyself, and it 
could not be set aside during thy lifetime? 
I will die soon, and the law will die with 
me. 

Capilya answered: I shall ratify thy law 
on the day I ascend the throne, which is 
binding, according to the rules of the an- 
cients. Had I waited until I was king, 
then I had been bound, according to my 
religion, which is that no one individual 
possesseth land, save what he tilleth, and 
then only by donation from the commun- 
ity in which he dwelleth, and only during 
his lifetime, after which it reverteth to the 
community. 

Yokovrana said: Thou art wise, O my 
son! What is it that thou understandest 
not? 

After the king rested a while, he said: 
Capilya, thou hast often said thou hast seen 
the angels of heaven: Who sayest thou 
they are? 

Capilya said: Persons who once inhab- 
ited this earth. Some of them once lived 
on other worlds. 

The king said: Since thou sayest so, it 
must be so. I thought, sometimes, they 
might be different beings that dwell in the 



air, and never dwelt here. Sayest thou, Ca- 
pilya, all souls are immortal? 

Capilya said: Not all inherit everlasting 
life. Even as the body goeth into destruc- 
tion, so can the spirit of a man dissolve 
out of being. The fruit of them that have 
attained to faith in everlasting life is safe; 
but for them that have fallen from faith in 
everlasting life, and from faith in the Cre- 
ator, I pity them and their heirs. 

The king said: Why do the oracles tell 
lies? They are the words of angels. 

Capilya said: If a man will not think 
for himself, examine for himself, the Cre- 
ator suffereth him to be the recipient of 
lies. He is a wise man who hath attained 
to disbelief in angels and men; for then he 
will turn to the Creator, Who is All Truth. 
This is the beginning of wisdom. Some 
fair men, with stunted souls, who look not 
about doing good in the world, require the 
serpent's fang in order to make them 
think. 

The king said: I have killed many 
men in my day; sayest thou I have sinned? 
Capilya said: Inquire thou of thy Creator. 
I am not thy judge, nor any man's. 

The king asked: If a man be killed 
and his soul live, then the killing amount- 
eth to little. We put away the body, but 
the soul may come back and retaliate. Is 
it not so? Capilya said: Yea, O king. 

The king reflected a while, and then he 
asked: My son, can the spirits of them we 
have slain catch us in heaven and injure 
us? Capilya said: Yea, O king. 

The king said: And they having been 
in heaven first would have the advantage 
in battle. And if they go in crowds and 
have a leader, they might do great hurt. 
Know thou, Capilya, I have a great secret 
for thy philosophy; which is: When death 
draweth near, we begin to shake in the 
soul as to what we have done all our lives. 
Sometimes I think of saying to Dyaus: 
Here, I will pray thee! But then I re- 
member I have no merchandise which he 
would accept. How strong we are in 
health and prosperity, and how weak in 
adversity and in death! Sayest thou pray- 
ers would make my case stand better in 
heaven ? 

Capilya said: I am not master in hea- 
ven; or if I were, my love to thee would 
shield thee from all darkness. 



504 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' RECORD 



The king said: The priest saith if I 
pay him money he can intercede with 
Dyaus and so secure me a high seat in 
heaven. I think he faisifieth, for Dyaus 
oweth him nothing. Two things I have 
found, even with my little wisdom; the 
caterer to the king and the caterer to Dy- 
aus make great pretences, but do but lit- 
tle as to their promises. These two men, 
O my son, beware of them. I owe my 
greatness more to this discretion than to 
wisdom. They are at the bottom of all the 
wars and evils in this world. They can 
deceive even the Gods, I am told. When 
thou art king, Capilya, put thy wisdom 
in this matter; spare them not; they are 
the curse of the world. I regret that I 
slew not more of them; my conscience 
pricketh me for this. 

Capilya said: Man's conscience being 
only part of the man, may it not err? Is 
not the conscience dependent for wisdom 
on other things? And after all, if we have 
done that which seemed the highest, best 
thing at the time, have we not fulfilled the 
law? 

The king said: It would seem so. Con- 
science must depend for its errors or its 
justice on the education it hath received. 
But may not conscience be a disease in the 
heart? To regret for not having done a 
thing; to regret for having done a thing, 
these are irreparable complainings. Who- 
ever can say beforehand, and yet not err, 
is wise indeed. I find that no man 
brought himself into the world; nor can he 
live but a short period at most. When 
we are young we dislike to die; but at my 
great age I desire not to live. Evidently 
He Who created us hath more mastery 
over us than we have over ourselves. 

Capilya said: That is true; man at the 
best hath not more than half mastery of 
himself. 

Yokovrana interrupted, saying: I in- 
terrupt thee, my son, because my time is 
short. I would ask thee what is the great- 
est consolation to a dying man? 

Capilya said: There are two consola- 
tions that are great to a dying man; one 
is to know that he left no heirs after him; 
and the other is, that he leaveth after him 
a noble son. 

The king said: Thou art wise, my son. 
I asked the priest in the oracle-house the 



same thing, and he said: For a dying man 
to have faith that his soul will enter para- 
dise. Thereupon I said to him: No hon- 
est man can have such faith; for such a 
fate would be cheating heaven with one's 
sins. Were I the Creator, I would break 
the necks of half the world. Still it may 
please a foolish dying man to tell him such 
a tale as regardeth his soul. Thou alone, 
my son, hath told me the greatest consola- 
tion to a dying man. My slaves may have 
faith that they will be kings, but they will 
wake up in their folly. A man may have 
faith that his soul will enter paradise, and 
he may wake up and find it was a mistake. 
Faith without a guarantee is folly. 

Capilya said: A man to know a thing 
of his own knowledge hath the greatest of 
all wisdom. To be as thou art, a philoso- 
pher in time of death, is evidence of a 
great soul. Few have attained to this. 

The king said: Before thee I am no- 
thing as to wisdom. Thou art a mystery 
to me. Thy mother, whom the doctors 
slew to put her out of her misery from 
long sickness, was not wise. And as to 
myself, I am only great, not wise. I can 
make men fear me; but thou knowest the 
secret of love, which is a great thing. Thy 
name, O Capilya, will be honored long af- 
ter mine is forgotten. Yet I am the great- 
est king in all the world. O thou, my 
most wonderful son! 

Capilya said: Because thou gavest me 
great learning and a father's kingly care, 
why should I not be an honor to thee, O 
king? When thou art in heaven and canst 
look upon me, I hope thou mayest not lose 
thy hope for me. 

The king said: It seemeth not wise to 
me that angels should see too closely their 
mortal kin, or else they would never rise 
up to higher heavens. The seers say hea- 
ven and angels are about us all the while. 
I think this is a lie, otherwise it would be 
more hell than heaven to them. 

After the king rested a while he said: 
I have been surmising what to say to thee,. 
for I feel the blood in my veins is nearly 
stopped. And this maketh me think more 
than ever that man at best is but a gaming 
ball for the Gods to play with. Who know- 
eth, perhaps even now they laugh in their 
sleeves as to how they have used me for 
some hellish game? O that man had some 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORD*' RCCORB 



505 



standpoint to judge things by! O that he 
had a measure and a foundation to stand 
upon! I have searched the spirits of the 
dead, and the Gods of the oracles, and they 
are lies, lies, lies! 

Capilya said: The small spark of light 
within our souls is right at the start; and if 
it be rightly cultivated it will grow bright- 
er and clearer every day. For is it not in 
the nature of all things to grow by cul- 
ture? 

(The king said: To rightly cultivate! 
There is the matter, O my son. To settle 
that point the world hath been washed all 
over with man's blood. Rightly! Who 
knoweth that word? O that mine enemies 
were mistaken, and that I was clear in 
perceiving what was right! 

Again he rested a while and then he 
said: I had hoped when death came on, 
I should get glimpses of what is in store 
for me; but even death is silent and dark 
and deceiving. My members weaken 
evenly. This showeth I was begotten of 
good blood. Hadst thou npt been my son 
I should know that my family race had 
run out, and, so, I should have ascended 
to the higher heavens. Now I may be 
obliged to dwell on the earth for a long 
season. As I understand myself now, with 
all thy wisdom and thy love, I had rather 
thou hadst been some other man's son. 
Then I could die easier and not care so 
much about leaving thee. I have no other 
kin. 

Capilya said: O king! Thou, hast rent 
my heart in twain! Of a truth I am not 
thy son! When thy wife laid in the dark 
chamber, the angels of heaven stole me 
and brought me thither. She who nursed 
me was my mother; and her husband was 
my father. I am a Brahmin of Zarathus- 
trian blood, a Faithist! 

The king said: Is this true? It can 
not be! Go call thy nurse! 

Capilya called in the nurse, and the 
king said to her: Ere I doom thee to 
death, I charge thee, is this thy son, and is 
thy husband his father? 

She answered him: I am sworn to Or- 
mazd, and can not answer thee. Therefore 
sentence me, for I have carried a great 
load many a year. Behold! An angel of 
heaven appeareth! 



And, lo, an angel appeared before the 
king, and they all saw the angel, which 
said: Capilya is not thy son, O king! 
And yet no sin hath been committed L 
Thereupon the angel vanished. 

The king said: Were this not a coun- 
terfeit made by the Gods, then it was my 
angel wife. So, Capilya! Must here end 
our love? The earth is going fast from me 
now! 

Capilya said: Our love will never diet 
For the good thou hast done for the Zara- 
thustrians, the Creator will provide 
thee a home suited to thy great soul. If 
thou hadst any faults, thou hast more than 
balanced them. 

The king beckoned for Capilya and the 
nurse to come to him, and then he said,, 
feebly: It seems to me I hear the Gods 
laughing! Keep ye up the joke! My 
brother's oldest son knoweth nothing of 
it! A kingdom is but a farce. Hold me 
up, Capilya. I would have mine eyes feast 
on the sky only, after having seen thy 
sweet face. 

Capilya lifted him up, and the king said 
to the nurse: I bless thee! Thou brought- 
est forth a good prop! O aden, aden! All 
is nothing! All is nothing! 

And the breath went out of him; he 
was dead. 

CHAPTER X. 

Jehovih said to Capilya: My chosen 
shall not have kings; I, Jehovih, am King. 
As through Zarathustra I gave the rab'- 
bahs and chief rab'bahs, so have I through 
thee; and their families are My families. 
Kings and kingdoms of men I give to the 
unrighteous; for they, perceiving not Me, 
for I am the higher law, shall have' that 
that they can perceive, which is the lower 
law. A kingdom is thrust upon thee;. 
what wilt thou? 

Capilya said: What shall I do, O Je- 
hovih? 

Jehovih answered, saying: Suffer thy- 
self to be proclaimed at home and in the 
provinces, after which thou shalt ratify the 
laws, and then abdicate, and the kingdom 
shall fall into other hands. 

Capilya was proclaimed, and thereaf- 
ter known as king Capilya, and he abdi- 
cated, and then Heloepesus became king r 
and he became obligated to Capilya, so 



506 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



LORDS' RCCORO 



that the latter, though not king, stood as 
a protector over the Faithists, even greater 
than Heloepesus, nor could any laws be 
enacted affecting the Faithists without the 
consent of Capilya. 

Jehovih had said: My people shall be 
a separate people; they shall live under 
My laws, for I am their King. 

Now the whole time, from Capilya's 
first beginning of the restoration of the 
Faithists, until establishing a protectorate 
-for them, was five years. After this Capil- 
ya traveled about, east and west, and north 
and south, collecting together the scatter- 
ed remnants of his people; and he estab- 
lished them in colonies, and taught them 
-not only rites and ceremonies, but taught 
the lost arts of tilling the soil and of mak- 
ing fabrics out of hemp and wool and silk; 
and he established schools and provided 
teachers for the people. 

Capilya said: The first virtue is to 
learn to find Jehovih in all things, and to 
love and glorify Him. 

The second virtue is Cleanliness; all 
people, old and young, shall bathe once a 
day. 

The third virtue is to eat no fish nor 
flesh, nor other unclean thing; for of what 
profit is it to bathe the outer part if one 
putteth filth within? 

The fourth virtue is Industry. Because 
the Father gave man neither feathers, nor 
hair nor wool; let it be testimony of His 
commandment that man shall clothe him- 
self. To clothe one's self, and to provide 
one's self with food; these are the enforced 
industry upon all people. In addition tr 
these, to labor for the helpless; to bathe 
them and feed them, and house them and 
clothe them; these are the volunteer indus- 
tries permitted by the Father that ye may 
prove your soul's worthiness before Him. 
Without industry no people can be vir- 
tuous. 

One of the rab'bahs asked him what 
Industry was? To this Capilya replied: To 
keep one's self in constant action to a prof- 
itable result. To rise before the sun and 
bathe and perform the religious rites by the 
time the sun riseth; and to labor thereafter 
not severely but pleasantly until sunset, 
this is Industry. The industrious man find- 
eth little time for satan's inspiration. 

The fifth virtue is of the same kind, 



which is Labor. There shall be no rich 
amongst you; but all shall labor. As ye 
develop your corporeal bodies unto 
strength by reasonable labor, so doth the 
act of labor develop the spirit of man to 
profitable growth for its habitation in hea- 
ven. For I declare unto you a great truth, 
which is, that the idle and the rich, who 
labor not with the corporeal body, are born 
into heaven helpless as babes. 

The sixth virtue, which is greater than 
all the rest, is Abnegation of one's self. 
Without Abnegation no man shall have 
peace of soul, either on earth or in heaven. 
Consider what thou doest, not that it shall 
profit thyself, but whether it will benefit 
others, even as if thou wert not one of 
them. Without the sixth virtue no family 
can dwell together in peace. 

The seventh virtue is Love. Consider 
when thou speakest whether thy words 
will promote love; if not, then speak not. 
And thou shalt have no enemies all the 
days of thy life. But if thou canst justly 
say a good thing of any man, be not silent; 
this is the secret to win many loves. 

The eighth virtue is Discretion, espe- 
cially in words. Consider well, and thou 
wouldst be surprised at the wisdom of thy 
neighbors. Discretion is a regulator; with- 
out it, man is like a tangled thread. 

The ninth virtue is System and Order. 
A weak man, with System and Order, do- 
eth more than a strong man without them. 

The tenth virtue is Observance. With 
Observance a man accepteth from the an- 
cients such things as have been proven to 
be good, such as rites and ceremonies. 
Without Observance a man beginneth back 
even with the earliest of the ancients, and 
thus casteth aside his profit in the world. 

The eleventh virtue is Discipline, the 
Discipline for the individual and the fam- 
ily. He who hath not Discipline is like a 
race-horse without a rider. A time to rise; 
a time to eat; a time to pray; a time to 
dance; a time to labor; these are good in 
any man; but the family that practiceth 
them in unison with one another hath Dis- 
cipline. 

The twelfth virtue is like unto it, and 
is Obedience. All good and great men are 
obedient. He that boasteth his disobedi- 
ence to discipline is a fool and a madman. 
Greater and better is the weak man of 
obedience than the strong man of defiance. 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



LORDS- RtCOHO 



507 



For the one promoteth the harmony of the 
family; but the other ruptureth it. 

Consider these twelve virtues; they are 
sufficient laws unto the whole world. Man 
may multiply books and laws forever, but 
they will not make the family, nor colony, 
nor state, happy, without the adoption of 
these twelve virtues. 

CHAPTER XI. 

Capilya said: Let thy life be thy preach- 
er. The behavior of one good man, even 
in a sparse country, is of more avail than a 
thousand preachers. The clamor of the 
tongue maketh speedy converts, but it 
changeth not the blood. They perform the 
rites and ceremonies, but their behavior is 
not of the twelve virtues. One community 
of a score of men and women, that dwell 
together in peace and love, doing good to- 
ward one another, is the manifestation of 
more wisdom than all the books in the 
world. 

A man that hath learned sympathy is 
better than the philosopher that will kick 
a cat or a dog. Great learning is not only 
in books; he who hath learned to harmon- 
ize with Ormazd hath great learning. 

Jehovih said: The doctrine of the idol- 
ater is war; but My Sons and Daughters 
practice peace, resisting not any man with 
weapons of death, saith Jehovih. My ser- 
mons are not in wordy professions, but in 
the souls of My people who practice My 
commandments. Ye have witnessed that 
Sudga's followers said: Behold, Sudga is 
our Lamb of Peace! And they were na- 
tions of warriors; they built monuments to 
glorify their greatest slayers of men. My 
people say little; profess little, as regard- 
■eth their virtues; but their practice is My 
Voice! 

Capilya said: Whatever should be the 
character of one man, so be the communi- 
ty and the state. Harmony is a man's soul 
is his greatest blessing; and so of the 
family, and of the state. Whoso will sacri- 
fice self-gratification for good of the family 
is the greatest, best one in the family. 

My Father in heaven, is thy Father 
also; all men and women are my brothers 
and sisters. To magnify one's soul so as 
to realize this brotherhood, is a great vir- 
tue. No matter what name He hath, there 
is, nevertheless, but One Creator; and all 



peoples are His children. Call thou Him 
what name thou wilt, I will not quarrel 
with thee. No man can prove this by war. 

At death the real life beginneth; mold 
thyself well whilst thy soul hath a good an- 
chor. The man learning to swim had bet- 
ter go in with corks, till he find the stroke; 
like this, thy Creator gave thee a corporeal 
body. Be not in haste to enter the unseen 
world; make sure that thou hast learned 
the stroke of the resurrection erst thou put- 
test aside thy flesh and bones. 

Religion is the learning of music in a 
community, in which the rab'bah is the 
key-note. Music is of two kinds: sounds 
and assimilation. Dumb instruments may 
make sound-music; but assimilation com- 
eth to the real matter of putting one's be- 
havior into harmony with the community. 

Good works! Who knoweth the mean- 
ing of these words? King Yokovrana 
judged the good works of a man by the 
number of bad man he had slain. When 
alms-houses promote laziness they are not 
good works. Preaching, praying, and 
singing, are not works; they are the blos- 
soms, with enticing fragrance. Yet satan 
persuadeth man that these are good works. 
Nevertheless, all fruit is preceded by blos- 
soms. The most learned man, the most 
pious man, and the greatest philosopher 
can not tell what is the meaning of the 
words, good works. But a mother, with a 
child one day old, can tell; a farmer, that 
hath sowed and reaped one harvest, and 
given half of it away to the less fortunate, 
can tell also. To bring forth out of the 
earth food or clothing, these are good 
works only so far as they exceed one's own 
requirements and are given to others. To 
live on the earnings of others, save in time 
of helplessness, is evil. To preach and not 
produce substance for others; such a man 
is a vampire. He selleth sermons and opin- 
ions to the ignorant, making believe his 
words are of Ormazd. 

The preacher shall dwell with the poor, 
taking hold with his own hands; teaching 
and helping; he who giveth words only, 
and not labor, is a servant of hell. He 
findeth honeyed words, and drawleth his 
voice; he liveth in ease and plenty; he 
stretcheth out a long face seriously; he is a 
hypocrite and a blasphemer against his 
Creator. 



508 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



LORDS' RECORD 



With love and rejoicing, and with will- 
ing hands, stand thou upright before Or- 
mazd; for thy preaching shall bear evidence 
of joyful light; and thy presence give to 
the weary and disconsolate assurance that 
thou art the Creator's son, come in earnest 
to glorify Him by righteous works and a 
helping hand. Besides Capilya's book of 
maxims, the quarter of which is not here 
related, he also restored the Zarathustrian 
commandments and the songs of Vivanho. 
Nor since two thousand years were the 
children so well standing before the world. 
And peace and plenty came upon the land 
of Vind'yu, even greater than in the days 
of Brahma. Thus closeth the history of 
Capilya, who was led in all things by Jeho- 
vih, through His angels, even to the words 
he uttered, though oft he knew it not. 
Now whilst this was going on in Vind'yu, 
the Creator also labored through His an- 
gels in the land of Egupt, with Moses. 

CHAPTER XII. 
HISTORY OF MOSES. 

God commanded his loo'is, in the high 
heavens, saying: Descend ye to the earth, 
to the land of Egupt, and raise me up a 
son capable of my voice. 

The angels descended as commanded, 
and searched over the land of Egupt and in 
the adjoining countries, examining into the 
flesh and the souls of men. And they call- 
ed unto God, saying: The land of Egupt 
is overrun with spirits of darkness, and 
mortals have attained to see them; and 
they dwell together as one people, angels 
and mortals. 

God said: Go ye amongst my chosen 
until ye find a man capable of understand- 
ing between truth and fable. Him inspire 
ye to an I'hin woman for my voice. 

In Ellakas the loo'is found a man, Bak- 
sa, a Fonecean, a Faithist, born a su'is, 
and they said unto him: Why art thou 
alone in the world? 

Baksa said: Alas, mine eyes have never 
seen God; mine ears never heard him. I 
am searching for God in the life of a re- 
cluse. 

The loo'is perceived what manner of 
man he was, and they led him to take an 
l'hin woman to wife, and she bore him a 
son, Hasumat. 



The loo'is guarded Hasumat till he was 
grown, and they spake to him, trying him 
also as to his power to distinguish angel 
voices. Him they also inspired to take an 
I'hin woman to .wife, and she bore a son, 
Saichabal, who was guarded in ;the same 
way. And the angels inspirel Saichabal to 
marry Terratha, of the line of Zed. Terra- 
tha bore a daughter who was named Eda- 
mas. And Edamas bore a son by an I'hin 
father without marriage, and she called his 
name Levi, signifying, joined together, be- 
cause his toes were not separate on the 
right foot, nor the fingers separate on the 
right hand. And Levi grew to be a large 
man, larger than two men. 

Levi, being of the fourth birth of I'hin 
blood, was not acknowledged an heir of 
the chosen race, the Faithists. Therefore 
Levi established a new line, which was 
called, the House of Levi. Levi, not be- 
ing eligible to a Faithist. wife, was inspired 
by the loo'is to take an I'hin, Metissa, to 
wife. Metissa bore him a son, Kohath, 
who, at maturity, was admitted to the Or- 
der of Avah, the third degree of Faithists, 
whereupon he was circumcised, and after- 
ward called an Israelite, the name given to 
the Faithists of Egupt. 

Kohath took to wife, Mirah, a devout 
worshipper of Jehovih. Mirah bore him a 
son, Amram, who took to wife Yokefed, 
sister-in-law to Kohath, and she bore him 
a son, who was Moses. Before Moses' 
birth the loo'is perceived that he would 
be capable of the Father's voice, and they 
called unto God saying: In the next gen- 
eration, behold, thy son will be born. 

CHAPTEL XIII. 

In these days in Egupt there were 
houses of records, where the affairs of the 
state, and of the king and governors, were 
recorded; also the births and marriages 
and deaths of people. The languages of 
the learned were Fonecean and Par'si'e'an; 
but the native languages were Eguptian, 
Arabic and Eustian and Semis. The times 
by the learned gave twelve months to a 
year, but the times of the tribes of Eustia 
gave only six months to a year. Accord- 
ingly, in the land of Egupt what was one 
year with the learned was two years with 
the Eustians and Semisians. 

God said: My people shall reckon their 






CYCLE OF LIKA 



loads' nccomo 



509 



times according to the place and the peo- 
ple where they dwell. And they did this. 
Hence, even the tribes of Israel had two 
calendars of time, the long and the short. 

To events of prophecy there was also 
another calendar, called the ode, signifying 
sky-time. One ode was equivalent to 
eleven years; three odes, one spell, signi- 
fying a generation: eleven spells, one Tuff. 
Thothma, the learned man, and builder 
of the great pyramid, had said: As a di- 
ameter is to a circle, and as a circle is to 
a diameter, so are the the rules of the sea- 
sons of the earth. For the heat or the 
cold, or the drouth or the wet, no matter, 
the sum of one eleven years is equivalent 
to the sum of another eleven years. One 
spell is equivalent to the next eleventh 
spell. And one cycle matcheth every 
eleventh cycle. Whoever will apply these 
rules to the earth shall truly prophesy as 
to the drouth and famine and pestilence, 
except wherein man contraveneth by drain- 
ing or irrigation. And if he apply himself 
to find the light and the darkness of the 
earth, these rules are sufficient. For as 
there are three hundred and sixty-three 
years in one tuff, so are there three hun- 
dred and sixty-three days in one year, be- 
sides the two days and a quarter when the 
sun standeth still on the north and south 
lines. 

In consequence of these three calen- 
dars, the records of Egupt were in confu- 
sion. The prophecies and the genealogies 
of man became worthless. And as to 
measurements, some were by threes, some 
by tens, and some by twelves; and because 
of the number of languages; the measure- 
ments became coufounded; so that with all 
the great learning of the Eguptians, and 
with all the care bestowed on the houses 
of records, they became even themselves 
the greatest confounding element of all. 

Jehovih had said: For two thousand 
years I gave My enemies a loose rein; and 
they have the longest line of kings in all 
the world; and yet in the midst of their 
prosperity they fall down like a drunken 
man. Even their language is become like 
a pearl that is lost in a mire. Because the 
kings of Egupt have outlawed My people, 
and denied them the right to obtain great 
learning, behold My people are divided 
also. One tribe hath one speech, another 



tribe another speech, and so on, till they 
can not now understand one another; ex- 
cept in their rites and signs, and pass- 
words. Yea, the kings have perceived that 
to keep My people in ignorance is to keep 
them forever in bondage. But I will raise 
up a leader amongst My chosen, and 
I will send him even into the house of 
the king, and the king shall give him great 
learning; he shall master all languages, 
and be capable of speaking with all My 
people. 

Because the Israelites worshipped not 
the Gods and Lords, but their Creator 
only, and because they resented not in- 
jury done by another, they had been lim- 
ited into servitude by the Eguptian laws, 
which had stood for fifteen hundred years. 
These laws were called the Sun laws, after 
the manner of the division of the Osirian 
system, which was: 

The sun is a central power; its accom- 
panying planets are satellites. In like man- 
ner the king of Egupt was the Sun King, 
and his sub-kings were satellites. Osiris, 
the highest angel in heaven, was the Sun 
God, that is, God of Gods; for all other 
Gods were his satellites. He revealed cer- 
tain laws to mortals, and these were Sun 
laws; and all minor laws were satellites. 
A Sun law extended over all of Egupt. 
but a satellite law pertained to the minor 
affairs of a city or province; but it must 
conform to the Sun laws. For in those 
days the spirits of darkness taught that 
the sun once whirled so fast that it cast 
off its outer extreme, and so made the 
earth, and moon, and stars; and this was 
the accepted philosophy of the learned 
Eguptians of that period. Because the 
worlds run in circles, the circle was the 
highest measure, or sun measure; and the 
diameter of the circle was called, the ode, 
a Fonecean word, signifying short meas- 
ure. And this name, ode, was applied to 
the Israelites in satire. But the Israelites 
made sweet songs and called them odes 
also. 

Among the Sun laws were the follow- 
ing: The God of Gods (Osiris) decreeth: 
Whoso boweth not down to me, shall not 
partake of me. Behold, mine is the sign 
of the circle! My enemies shall not receive 
great learning. They shall not hold sun 



510 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



LORDS' RECORD 



places but be as servants only all their 
lives. And these signs shall discover them: 

If they worship not me, but the Great 
Spirit; if they deny that the Creator is in 
the image of a man; if they circumcise, 
and will not serve as soldiers; 

Then their possessions are forfeited al- 
ready; nor shall they possess houses in 
their own right; nor send their children 
to the schools; for they shall be servants 
and the servants of servants forever. 

Under the Eguptian laws it was ac- 
counted a sufficient crime of idolatry to 
worship the Creator, Jehovih, and the 
Israelites were not even admitted to the 
courts to be tried for an offence, but fell 
under the jurisdiction of the master for 
whom they labored, and his judgments 
were unappealable. 

Now at the time of the birth of Moses, 
there were in Egupt thirteen million in- 
habitants; and of these, four million were 
Faithists, more or less faithful. For 
amongst the Israelites not all were of full 
faith, but many, to shirk the rigors of the 
Sun laws, professed to be worshippers of 
Osiris, and they who would also enlist as 
soldiers, and otherwise connive in the ways 
of men, for sake of favors. For which rea- 
son the Sun King feared the time might 
come when the Israelites might revolt 
against the Sun laws or become soldiers 
and confederate with foreign kingdoms for 
the overthrow of the Eguptian dynasty. 

For more than three hundred years the 
God Baal and the Goddess Ashtaroth had 
driven the foreign kingdoms to war; and 
in consequence of these wars the Faithists 
had fled into Egupt, and even accepted 
servitude rather than be slain elsewhere. 

Jehovih had said: Behold, Mine ene- 
mies in killing one another, frighten off 
My chosen. Now will I lead them into 
Egupt together, and give unto them a 
great leader, and he shall restore My doc- 
trines unto them, and I will afterward de- 
liver them into lands of their own. 

CHAPTER XIV. 

The king's palace and pyramids were 
surrounded by a wall of stone; with 
twelve gates, made of wood and iron. The 
wall was of sufficient breadth for twelve 
men to walk abreast thereon, and the 
height of the wall was equivalent to twelve 



squares. On the summit of the wall there 
were twelve houses for the accommodation 
of the soldiers who patrolled the walls. 
And in each and every gateway there were 
houses for the keepers of the gates. So 
that no man, woman, nor child, could 
come into the palace or palace grounds 
without permission. 

And it came to pass that when Leoto- 
nas, the king's daughter, walked near the 
river, accompanied by her maids, she be- 
held a child in a basket amongst the bul- 
rushes. Leotonas commanded her maids 
to bring it to her; and when she looked 
upon it and beheld it was an Israelitish 
child, she said: The Gods have sent him 
to me, and he shall be my child. 

And they bore the child into the pal- 
ace, and Leotonas said to the king: Be- 
hold, a wonder of wonders! I have found 
an Israelitish child in a basket in the 
rushes, and only Gods know how it came, 
or how it scaled the walls. The king said: 
Keep thou the child, and it shall be both 
a brother and a son to thee. Neverthe- 
less, my guards shall find the way my 
grounds are entered, or blood will be upon 
them. 

Now after some days, and when the. 
search had been completed and no way 
discovered as to the manner of the child's, 
ingress, the king issued a decree com- 
manding a thousand Israelitish male chil- 
dren to be put to death, Moses among the 
rest, unless the mother of the child, Moses, 
came and acknowledged as to the manner 
of ingress. The king allotted three days 
in which time the matter should culmin- 
ate; but nevertheless the mother came not 
and acknowledged. 

And the king called his daughter, and 
said unto her: What shall be done? Leo- 
tonas said: The king's word must not be 
broken; nevertheless, thou gavest the child 
to me, saying: Keep thou it, and it shall 
be a brother and a son to thee. And 
straightway I sent my maids and procured 
an Israelitish woman as nurse for the 
child. And I set my heart upon the child, 
nor can I part with it and live. ( Last 
night I consulted the oracle as to the mat- 
ter, for I saw that thy mandate must be 
fulfilled. 

The king said: And what said the ora- 
cle? Leotonas said: Give word abroad 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' RECORD 



511 



that the nurse of the child is its mother. 
Now I beseech thee, O king, let it be her- 
alded- abroad that all is acknowledged. 

The king, seeing the child, relented; 
and word was proclaimed as Leotonas had 
desired. And, moreover, the matter was 
entered in the recorder's house that the 
mother of the child had made the basket 
and placed it where it was found, though 
no reason was assigned therefor. Such, 
then, was the Eguptian explanation. 

Now the truth of the matter was, the 
angels of Jehovih came to Yokefed and 
said: Thy son's name shall be Moses, 
signifying, a leader-forth, for he shall de- 
liver the Israelites out of bondage. But 
he shall be taken from thee, and thou 
canst not find him. For the angels, of Je- 
hovih will deliver him into Leotonas' 
hands. And she shall adopt him as her 
brother and son, and bestow upon him the 
education of a prince. 

Yokefed feared, for in those days male 
children of Israelitish parentage were out- 
lawed, nor could any man be punished for 
slaying them. And Yokefed prayed Te- 
hovih, saying: Thy will be done, O Jeho- 
vih, for I know Thy hand is upon my son. 
But I beseech Thee, O Father, that I may 
come to the princess and be her nurse for 
the child. The angel of Jehovih said: 
Swear thou before Jehovih thou wilt not 
betray to the child that thou art his moth- 
er! 

Yokefed said: Though I be command- 
ed by the king, yet will I not own that I 
am the mother, and it be Thy will, O Je- 
hovih! 

And Jehovih's angels fashioned a bas- 
ket; and carried the child and placed it 
where it was found by Leotonas and her 
maids. And Leotonas, seeing it was a He- 
brew child, commanded one of her maids 
to go and bring an Israelitish woman to 
nurse it. And the maid went out beyond 
the Utak gate and found and brought 
Yokefed, the child's mother, but no one 
knew she was its mother. And when Yoke- 
fed had come before the princess, the lat- 
ter said unto her: Nurse thou the child, 
for I will be its mother and its sister, for 
the Gods have delivered it into my hands. 
And Yokefed said: It is a goodly child; I 
will nurse it for thee. 



Moses grew and became a large man, 
being a pure I'huan, copper-colored and 
of great strength. And Pharaoh, having 
no son, bestowed his heart on Moses, and 
raised him as a prince, having provided 
him men of great learning to teach him. 
Moses was master of many languages, and 
withal made acquainted with kings and 
queens and governors, far and near. And 
he espoused the cause of the king, whose 
dominions held seven kingdoms beyond 
Egupt as tributary kingdoms, which paid 
taxes to Pharaoh. 

So Pharaoh made Moses embassador 
to the foreign kingdoms, in which capacity 
he served twelve years. But because of the 
prejudice against him, for being of Israel- 
itish blood, the court of Pharaoh impor- 
tuned the king for his removal, and Moses 
was so removed from office under the king. 

The king said to Moses: My son, this 
is a double infliction on me in my old age; 
in the first place, it is as a sword-thrust, 
to cut off my love to thee, lest thou some 
day become king; and in the second place, 
it is hard for a Pharaoh to be dictated to 
by his own court. 

Moses replied: Fear not, O king, that 
my love and thine can be severed. Oft it 
happeneth that men are tried in a way 
they know not the wisdom of, but which, 
afterward, we realize to be the best thing 
that could have taken place. As for my- 
self, I think this rebuke it put upon me by 
Jehovih because I labored not for mine 
own people. 

The king said: How so? Moses re- 
plied: For many days a great heaviness 
hath come upon me; it is as if the wind of 
heaven bore down on my heart, saying: 
Moses, Moses, lift up thy voice for thy 
people. For, behold, the king, thy father, 
will favor thee! 

Pharaoh said: What wouldst thou, my 
son? And if it be possible to be done it 
shall be done. 

Moses answered: Until I have gone 
amongst them and ascertained their griev- 
ances, I know not how to answer thee. 
The king said: Go, and keep thy counsel 
to thyself till thou art returned. 

So Moses departed and traveled over 
the land of Egupt, and was four months 
absent, and then returned unto Pharaoh. 
And to him Moses related all the griev- 



512 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORD'S RECORD 



ances of the Israelites; explaining the tasks 
put upon them; their denial before the 
courts; their forbiddance to education; 
and withal extolled them highly for being 
a peaceful and virtuous people. 

The king said: It is a pity; it is a great 
pity. But what can I do, O Moses? Thou 
beholdest how even thou thyself art chas- 
tised by the king's court. If I demand the 
repeal of the laws, the court will heap coals 
of fire on thy head and on mine. 

Moses said: Neither know I, O king, 
what to do. And Moses was in great trou- 
ble of soul; and after he waited a while 
in silence, he said: O king, this night 
thou and Leotonas shall reason with me, 
for I feel it incumbent because of the pres- 
sure on my soul. 

When the three were alone that night, 
behold, it was the beginning of the dawn 
of light. And Moses' ears were opened, 
and he heard the Voice of Jehovih through 
his angels saying: 

Behold, O king, and thou, Leotonas, 
and thou, Moses, now is the beginning of 
My power on the face of the earth. Moses, 
My Son, thou shalt take thy people out of 
the land of Egupt; and I will bestow upon 
them the lands of the ancients, even whith- 
er I will lead thee. Change not thy laws, 
O king; let Egupt have her way; and let 
the Israelites have their way also. 

The king said: To deliver four million 
people! O what a labor! 

On the next day Moses walked out, go- 
ing into the woods to be alone, for heavy 
trouble was upon him. And an angel of 
Jehovih appeared in a flame of fire in a 
bush, calling: Moses, Moses, my son! 
And Moses saw that the bush was not 
burnt, and he said: Here am I, and I 
heard thy voice. 

The voice said: I am the God of Abra- 
ham, and of Isaac and Jacob. Moses said: 
What wouldst thou? 

The voice said: Go thou once more 
amongst thy people, and say thou: I, 
Moses, am come to deliver you out of the 
land of Egupt, and into an inheritance 
which shall be your own. Moses said: 
My people will ask of me: By whose au- 
thority speakest thou? What, then, shall I 
answer them? The voice said: Say thou to 
them: The I Am sent me. And if they 
question further, saying: Thou hast a de- 



ceiving spirit, like the Eguptians, then 
shalt thou say to them: How can ye dis- 
tinguish one spirit from another? and they 
will say: Whoso laboreth for himself will 
deceive us. And thou shalt say to them: 
Whosoever hath faith in Jehovih, let him 
give up all, even as I do; and let them fol- 
low me; for if a multitude go forth in 
Faith in the Father, then will the Father 
provide unto them. For this is the mean- 
ing of Faith, from which ye were named 
Israelites. 

So Moses and his brother, Aaron, trav- 
eled about in the land of Egupt, calling to- 
gether the Raban families, explaining to 
them, and urging the people to get ready 
and depart out of Egupt. For three years 
they thus labored, and it became known 
far and near that the project was on foot. 
And the oracles of the Eguptians prophe- 
sied that when the Israelites were once out 
of the country they would unite with the 
kingdoms whereto Moses had been embas- 
sador, and then return and overpower the 
Eguptians, 

And in order to stigmatize Moses they 
said he fled away from Pharaoh's palace 
because he had seen two men, an Egup- 
tian and an Israelite, fighting, and that 
Moses slew the Eguptian and buried him 
in the sand. And the recorders thus en- 
tered the report in the Recorder's House. 

Moses was of tender heart and he in- 
quired of the All Person, saying: Will 
ever a voice of justice speak in my behalf? 
Jehovih, through His angel, answered 
Moses, saying: Suffer thy enemies to put 
on record what they will, for the time will 
surely come when the truth shall be re- 
vealed unto men. Pursue thy course; for 
it shall be shown that thou dost still visit 
the king; wherefore, hadst thou fled as the 
records state, thou wouldst not return, 
with the report hanging over thy head. 

In those days Egupt was a land of glory 
and of misery. Hardly is it possible for 
words to describe the splendor in which 
the nobles lived. Of their palaces and 
chariots a thousand books might be writ- 
ten, and yet not reveal all. And as to the 
members of the king's court, so grand were 
they that many of them stood not on the 
ground from one year's end to the other; 
but caused carpets to be spread wherever 
they desired to walk. And as to their 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' RECORD 



513 



chariots, they were bound with silver and 
gold, and set with precious stones. 

Of the royal court and the nobles, 
there were two thousand four hundred and 
eighty, and they owned and possessed ev- 
erything in Egupt, which was the richest 
country in the world. The next in rank 
were the masters, who were servants and 
tenants to the courtiers and nobles; and 
the third in rank were the Faithists, called 
Israelites, who were servants under the 
masters. 

And it was against the law for any one 
to call a meeting of the Israelites, or to in- 
cite them against servitude to the masters; 
for which reason Moses and Aaron violat- 
ed the law of the land, nor dared any man 
to arrest them, because Moses bore with 
him the king's seal. 

Of the miseries of the land of Egupt 
the half hath never been told, for they were 
of the nature of the flesh, and of such kind 
that one may not mention them fully, for 
they involve the beasts of the fields, and 
dogs, male and female, and goats also. 
Suffice it, the people were victims of evil 
spirits, and had descended to such unnat- 
ural practices as poisoned the flesh, which 
became inhabited with vermin; and they 
had running sores; and only evil practices 
alleviated the pains. The people were 
subject to entrancement. by evil spirits, 
and the latter appeared amongst the peo- 
ple, taking on semblance of corporeal 
forms for evil's sake, also eating and drink- 
ing with mortals daily. 

When Moses beheld these things he 
prayed to Jehovih for wisdom and 
strength; for thousands and thousands of 
the Israelites were becoming afflicted in 
the same way. Jehovih answered Moses, 
saying: Because of the abundance of evil 
angels in this land it is impossible for My 
chosen to dwell herein and escape afflic- 
tion. Moses explained this matter to the 
Israelites. 

Jehovih said: Moses, thou and thy 
brother shall return to the king, for he is 
worried concerning thee and thy labors. 
Behold, the nobles have complained before 
the king against thee. 

Moses visited the king, who was sick 
with a fever; and the king was on his di- 
van at the fountain in the palace grounds, 
and the men servants were forcing water. 



When the king saw it was Moses, he rais- 
ed up, rejoicing, and called Moses to come 
and sit with him. And servants ran in and 
told Leotonas that Moses had returned, 
and Leotonas came also and rejoiced to 
see Moses. Now whilst they were talking 
the king was overcome and fell in a faint, 
whereupon Moses raised him up and re- 
stored him; and then carried the king unto 
the palace in his arms. 

Leotonas said: Moses, my son and 
brother, thou shalt not more leave us 
alone? Behold, my father is old, and he 
gave his heart to thee when thou wert a 
child. Be thou to him his son. Behold 
how he revives in thy strong hands ! 

Then spake the king, saying: My son, 
with all thy wisdom, canst thou under- 
stand a woman? 

Moses said: Alas, O king, save the 
princess, I have not studied them. But 
why askest thou? 

The king replied: Leonotas has not 
said one word about the affairs of the 
kingdom! What is uppermost in a wo- 
man's heart, that speaketh she first; but 
as to man, he speaketh first that which lieth 
at the bottom of his heart. I love thee, 
Moses, and delight in thy presence; but 
my kingdom concerneth me deeply. The 
nobles have complained against thee for 
meddling with their slaves, and for this I 
have desired to see thee. 

Moses said: The Voice came to me, 
informing me of what thou sayest, and 
then commanded me to come to thee, for 
thou wert ill with fever. And the king re- 
plied, saying: If I should die before thou 
hast accomplished the migration of thy 
people, I fear my successor, Nu-ghan, will 
make it hard for thee. Tell me, therefore, 
how matters stand with thee? 

Moses said: Jehovih hath planned 
this migration: it cannot fail. For, wit- 
ness thou what proof I have found: The Is- 
raelites were looking for a leader-forth,. 
even as I was named in the basket. And. 
wherever I have gone* the rab'bahs and. 
their families are acquainted with the mat- 
ter as if it were born in their souls. 

The king said: Everywhere the ora- 
cles declare against thee and Jehovih; say- 
ing thou art in the hands of evil spirits. 

Moses said: What are the oracles to 
me? To feel assured one is in a good 
work: this is better than oracles. 



514 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



LORDS' RECORD 



CHAPTER XV. 

The Voice of Jehovih came to Moses, 
saying: Have the king give thee commis- 
sioners who shall go in advance and ex- 
amine the countries whither I will lead 
thee; and when the commissioners have 
returned, thou shalt proclaim to My peo- 
ple what the commissioners say, and the 
people will be convinced, and rise up and 
follow thee. So Moses asked the king for 
a commission of Eguptians, and the king- 
appointed thirty-three men, and allotted to 
them seven months to accomplish the in- 
spection; and he gave to the commission 
camels and asses to ride upon, and to carry 
food to eat on the journey. 

Meanwhile, Moses sent Aaron around 
about through Egupt, to inform the peo- 
ple of the commission, and also as to how 
they should make their outfits. And Aa- 
ron said unto the rab'bahs: Be ye circum- 
spect as to the outfits of our people; ob- 
serving that they carry not away with 
them anything that is another's, even to a 
fraction; for thus hath Moses commanded 
me to say unto you. 

When the commissioners returned and 
made their report, which was favorable, 
Moses had the report sent amongst the 
Israelites; and Moses added: For these 
be such, as, having little faith in Jehovih, 
will have faith in the words of the commis- 
sioners. 

The Gods of the Eguptians were not 
idle, and they sent word by way of the or- 
acles to the courtiers and nobles to the ef- 
fect that Moses had persuaded the king to 
hand the kingdom over to the foreign na- 
tions, knowing the king had no son eligi- 
ble to the throne. 

The courtiers and nobles, therefore, 
importuned the king to choose one of 
two things: Either to banish Moses out of 
the country, and put aside all arrange- 
ments for the migration of the Israelites; 
or, on the other hand, to abdicate the 
throne in favor of Nu-ghan. In the mean- 
-time, a whole year's drouth came upon 
Egupt, and the rivers overflowed not, so 
that a famine was sure to fall upon many 
-jaarts of the country. 

The king answered the demand of the 
courtiers and nobles with these words : I 
am Pharaoh, king of Egupt! Look ye to 
the threatened famine; provide the stores 



for my people. I declare to you all, a new 
thing is come unto the world, which is: 
Migration from Bondage! Nor is it in 
the power of nobles or courtiers or kings 
to stay this. 

When the courtiers received this an- 
swer they said to one another: These are 
Moses' words, fashioned for the king's 
mouth. Certainly he hath lost the fear of 
the Lord, and hearkeneth to the God of the 
Israelites! 

Jehovih, through His angels, spake to 
Moses, saying: Now is thy time. Go to 
the Heads whom thou hast chosen and ap- 
point a time unto them of one place, and 
so on unto all the Heads. And thou shalt 
make the armies going forth so numerous 
that the Eguptians will be overwhelmed. 

These, then, are Heads, the chief rab'-. 
bahs appointed by Moses, and the places 
in Egupt whence they were to depart 
from: , Rasak, son of Ubeth, of the place 
Hagor; Ashimel, son of Esta, of the place 
Ranna; Gamba, son of Hanor, of the place 
Nusomat; Bothad, son of Nainis, of the 
place Palgoth; Amram, son of Yoth, of 
the place Borgol; Lakiddik, son of Sam- 
had, of the place Apau; Jokai, son of Ked- 
dam, of the place Hasakar; Jorvith, son of 
Habed, of the place Oeda; Sattu, son of 
Bal, of the place Harragatha; Tussumak, 
son of Aban, of the place Ra; Makrath, 
son of Filatti, of the place Nabaoth; Hi- 
jamek, son of Tor, of the place Nu'joram; 
Fallu, son of Hagan, of the place Ennitz; 
Shutta, of the place Romja; Jokkin, son of 
Rutz, of the place Moan; Tudan, son of 
Barrahha, of the place Hezron; Osharrak, 
son of Libni, of the place Raim; Tham- 
mas, son of Rodaad, of the place Sakaz; 
Misa, son of Tiddiyis, of the place Tessam; 
and Sol, son of Zakkas, of the place An- 
nayis. 

Jehovih said: And the Heads shall have 
notice seventy and seven days; and they 
shall notify the rab'bah of their places, 
that due preparation shall be made for the 
start. Nevertheless, the time appointed 
unto thy people shall be kept secret with 
the Heads and with the rab'bahs. And 
whatever number the rab'bah can send 
forth, he shall notify the Head; and when 
all things are in readiness, that number 
shall go forth on the day appointed, every 
one on the same day. 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' RECORD 



515 



And Moses appointed the month Abib, 
and the tenth day thereof, when all the 
people should start; and moreover, he said 
unto the Heads: Ye shall see to it that 
the night before they start, even at the 
hour of sunset, and the moment thereof, 
every family shall offer a lamb in sacrifice, 
and every man, and every woman, and 
every child that can speak, shall covenant 
unto Jehovih in the blood of the lamb. 
When the time of the slaughter is at hand, 
the family shall stand around, and the 
iamb shall be in the midst, bound head and 
foot; and, when the knife is raised for the 
blow, no one shall speak, for that which 
is to be, shall be the covenant of the blood 
of the lamb against Egupt. And when the 
throat is cut across and the blood flowing, 
they shall all say: In Egupt the lamb of 
Jehovih is dead; His God shall go hence 
with Israel, but Egupt shall be accursed 
from this night! Accept this, my cove- 
nant, with Thee, O Jehovih, for innocent 
blood hath been shed as a testimony before 
Thee that, with to-morrow's sun, I rise to 
lie not down again in Egupt forever! 

Thus went Aaron and Akad, bearing 
this message in secret to the Heads of the 
Houses of Israel, saying unto them: Thus 
saith Moses: This is the commandment of 
Jehovih, Who is Almighty! 

And now, on the eve of success to the 
Israelites, the king of Egupt, being at the 
point of death, sent for Moses, and Moses 
went to him. The king said: If it should 
be the Lord's will to take me off before 
thy people are gone, thou wilt have sore 
trials; for my successor, Nu-ghan, hath a 
great hate toward Israel. 

' Moses said: What, then, shall be done? 
The king said: Behold, the pestilence hath 
overspread Najaut and Arabenah. Thy 
people will be cut off from traveling by 
that way. Nu-ghan and his courtiers 
dwell in Harboath. Moses replied: My 
people shall march through Najaut and 
Arabenah; neither shall the pestilence come 
upon them, for the hand of the Almighty 
is in this matter. 

Leotonas, learning that Moses was with 
the king, went in to see him: She said: O 
my son and brother, thou art welcome. 
Behold, the trials of the royal court, and 
the persistence of the nobles, are the death 
of the king. 



To this the king said: And still I 
live, Leotonas! But, alas, these were his 
last words, for he laughed, and the blood 
bursted through his heart, and he died 
then and there, even in Moses' arms. 

CHAPTER XVI. 

Jehovih, through His angels, said unto 
Moses: When the body of the king is em- 
balmed and put away, thou shalt go quick- 
ly to thy people; for he who cometh to the 
throne is under the voice of the false 
Baal, and he will try to prevent the depart- 
ure of My chosen. So, Moses left the cap- 
ital and did as commanded. 

On Nu-ghan's being crowned he at 
once issued the following decree: Behold 
me, I am Pharoah, King of Egupt, and 
Ruler of the World. God hath raised his 
voice in my dominions, saying: Hail thou, 
Sun King of the corporeal world: Be- 
hold, I gave to thee all the living that are 
on the face of the earth, and in the waters 
of the earth, to be thine, to keep forever. 
And I say unto thee, what is thine own is 
thine own, and thou shalt have dominion 
in thine own way, for I made all that are 
alive on the earth to be thine forever! 
Whether of beasts of the field, or fish in 
the waters, or man on the earth; all the 
living I created for thee, and thou shalt 
possess them from everlasting to everlast- 
ing. And the life of the living gave I 
into thy keeping; and I said unto thee: 
The house of Pharaoh have I created, and 
it is my house also. And whoever ruleth 
on the throne of this land, the same is my 
son, and is the possessor whilst the breath 
of life is in him. But when he dieth, and 
the throne fall to his successor, the rights 
and the powers and possessions of thy 
kingdom shall not die nor be set at naught. 
But the successor shall be my Pharaoh 
whom I raised up unto my dominions; thus 
saith the Lord. 

Now, therefore, I, Pharaoh, who am 
king and possessor of all the world by com- 
mandment of God, and by his son, Osiris, 
who is dead and risen, being myself God 
of the earth, into whose hands are be- 
queathed all the living, am to-day, yester- 
day, and forever, the same everlasting king 
and Lord of all. And I decree unto my 
people, who are mine by virtue of my au- 
thority from God, that only by my gra- 



516 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



LORDS' RECORD 



cious indulgence hath any man or people 
right to put one foot before the other, on 
this my sacred earth. 

And whoso goeth here or there, save 
by the sign of the signet of my seal, shall 
surely be put to death. And any multi- 
tude of my people, who are my servants, 
whom the God of Gods hath given into 
my hands to do my works, to till my soil, 
or to build my houses, or dig canals, or 
make bricks, or gather harvests, or make 
cloth, or attend flocks, and to do any 
work whatsoever, who may design to es- 
cape out of Egupt, to go to my enemies, 
the foreign kings, shall be deemed guilty 
unto death. And if such people start 
forth, to quit my service, to go out of my 
holy land, then shall my loyal slaves fall 
upon them and slay them, right and left, 
sparing neither man, woman nor child. 
For thus commandeth the Lord God, 
whose son I am. 

Jehovih, through His angels, spake to 
Moses, saying: Go thou; take Aaron thy 
brother, and go before the king and plead 
thy cause. 

Moses said: O Jehovih, Thou Almigh- 
ty, why hast Thou said this unto me? I 
have no argument in me, like other men? 
nor have I courage to face a man or wo- 
man. My tongue is slow to find words till 
after the opportunity. From my youth up 
I have known this man, Nu-ghan, who is 
king, and if he but stamp his foot at me 
I am helpless before him. 

Jehovih said: For that reason, My son, 
I can give thee My words. Go, and fear 
not. Then Moses went before Pharaoh, 
taking Aaron with him. The king asked: 
What is thy will? 

And Moses said: I am come to beseech 
thee to suffer my people to depart out of 
Egupt. 

The king replied: The Lord is with 
me; he saith thou shalt not go; and I re- 
peat the words of my God. 

Then spake Moses, the power of Jeho- 
vih being upon him: Think not, O king, 
that bondage is for this world only; here 
doth not the matter end. Thou hast here 
said in thy decree, even from the Lord hast 
thou spoken, saying: The life of the liv- 
ing I give unto thy keeping. Saidst the 
Lord this to thee? Wherein, then, is jus- 
tice, since pestilence and death are coming 



upon thy people? Callest thou this keep- 
ing them? I declare unto thee, that even 
in the words of thine own God thou hast 
failed utterly, and this sin is upon thee. 
Suffer, then, my people, to depart, that 
thine own shortness may not be magnified 
unto thee, in the afflictions which will 
surely overspread this land. 

The king said: Thou hast no authority; 
thou art a frozen serpent' that was taken 
into the house of the king; and being 
thawed out, thou turnest to bite thy bene- 
factors. Thou art outlawed by men and ac- 
cursed by the oracles. It is said of thee, 
thou hast been to Hored, and there wed 
for sake of alliance with my high priest, 
Jethro, for conveyance of my lands unto 
thy people. Who art thou, that pretend- 
est to hear a voice, and to be led by the 
Unseen? Thou slave! 

Moses said: I am not here to plead 
mine own cause, O king, but my people's. 
Suffice it, though, that even as thy Lord 
God standeth upon miracles, I bow not 
down before him. For these are evidence 
that thy God and thy Lord are but an- 
gels of the dead, who labor for thee and 
thy aggrandizement, and not for all men's 
welfare. For I have miracles, also; and 
whatsoever thy magicians can do, that can 
I do also; have I not eyes and ears, even 
as the oracles? Now I declare a miracle 
unto thee, which is that thou thyself shall 
not only consent to my people going out 
of Egupt, but thou shalt send armies to 
drive them out. To turn a rod into a ser- 
pent, or water into wine; or to show thy 
spirits of the dead, alas, O king, even they 
that are of rotten flesh can do such thines! 

Pharaoh said: If the oracle hear God, 
is not this the greatest? 

Moses replied: He who uttereth what 
an angel bid him is that angel's servant; 
he who uttereth a good truth hath spoken 
with the Creator's voice. 

Pharaoh asked: Sayest thou thy words 
are the Creator's? 

Moses replied: I am as all good men 
who speak truth; all that is good, and all 
truth, are the Creator's words. In a rose He 
nndeth expression in perfume; in the light- 
ning His words are thunder; in a bird His 
words are songs; but in man, His voice is 
in man's words; for every living creature, 
and every living thing on the earth, or in 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



LOKDS' iiccono 



517 



the waters, or in the air above the earth, 
giveth expression in its own way; because 
the Father's hand is the foundation of all 
that is good and true. He is the I Am 
Who sent me to thee; by His command 
open I my mouth before thee. And in His 
name declare I unto thee thou shalt not 
only suffer my people to depart out of 
Egupt, but thou shalt send thy armies to 
drive them out. 

The king said: Moses, Moses, thou art 
mad! For though all Egupt run blood, yet 
will I not do as thou hast said. 

Then Moses replied: I tell thee, O 
king, there are two powers in heaven; that 
which is for Justice and Goodness, even 
the I Am; and that which is for sin and 
death. And if the Creator lift off His pro- 
tecting hand from Egupt, she shall in that 
day become the plague spot of the earth. 
Thou dost remember, when in the ancient 
days, great Thothma built the first pyramid, 
thy forefathers decried the power of hea- 
ven; and straightway all the land, and the 
great pyramid itself, was flooded with 
evil spirits. And then came foreign kings, 
and robbed and plundered Egupt. Think 
not, O king, these legends are but idle 
tales; there be Gods and Lords in heaven 
who could sweep the sea up, and drown all 
this country. Behold, a day is set; a night 
is marked out when the lamb of peace shall 
die. And in that night the first-born of 
every woman, and the first-born of every 
beast in the fields, shall die for all the 
Eguptians; and in that same night not one 
of the Israelites shall go down in death. 
Jehovih saith: I will show My power 
through My people in the time of My cov- 
enants. 

Pharaoh said: Were these things to be, 
God had come to more noble quarters. 
Thou art beside thyself. And I banish 
thee; nor will I again look upon thy face. 

Moses said: Whether in this world or 
the next, thou shalt yet call unto me to de- 
liver thee from torments. Nevertheless, I 
do thy bidding; neither will I come to thee 
again; nor shalt thou look upon my face 
for a long season. With that, Moses and 
Aaron saluted the king and departed. 

CHAPTER XVII. 

Pharaoh called his chief superintendent 
and said unto him: As to the Hebrew 



brickmakers, thou shalt no longer supply 
them with straw, but they shall continue to 
make the same number of bricks. And as 
to the tillers of the soil, thou shalt no 
longer suffer them to have cattle to draw 
the plows, but they shall draw the plows 
themselves, and they shall likewise break 
the same quantity of ground. And in this 
way the king put extra hardships upon the 
Israelites because he was angered at what 
Moses said. 

Moses perceiving this, cried out unto 
Jehovih, saying: O why didst Thou send 
me before Pharaoh? Behold, matters are 
worse than before. O that I had guarded 
my tongue and been of persuasive speech! 

Jehovih said to Moses: Rebuke not 
thyself, for thou hast done My commands. 
And it shall come to pass now, what oth- 
erwise would not. For such Israelites as 
hesitated about going out of Egupt, will 
now decide for themselves as to what they 
will do. And the hardships that Pharaoh 
hath newly added, shall be a blessing to thy 
people. 

And it came to pass that the Israelites 
went away from their taskmasters, and 
the rab'bahs sent them to the Heads: and 
the people of Israel were stirred up from 
one end of Egupt to the other. And as 
for the Eguptians. save the courtiers and 
nobles, they were likewise stirred up, but 
without any purpose or order; so that all 
the great land of Egupt had no tillers nor 
builders; and cleanliness departed away 
from them; and the country stank as a 
dead carcass, so that insects and vermin 
filled all that air of heaven. But of the 
Faithists, the flesh was good; and vermin 
came not upon them; nor were they strick- 
en with fevers, or lepers, or scabs, like the 
Eguptians. 

Pharaoh ordered his army of two hun- 
dred thousand men to take the field, but 
they were scattered and afflicted so that 
they were only as vagrants, without head 
or discipline. 

Jehovih spake to Moses, saying: Now 
will I show her philosophers a miracle in 
the air above the earth. Have they not 
said: All things come up out of the earth? 
for they have tried every way to put Me 
aside, and to explain My creation away as 
an idle tale. They shall look and see the 
sun, and declare of a truth there is no 



518 



CYCLE OF L1KA 



LORDS' RECORD 



cloud; but whilst they look up, they shall 
see a cloud high up in the heavens, and it 
shall be broad as the land of Egupt, a very 
black cloud. And it shall descend to the 
earth, and it shall prove to be locusts, 
come without any seed; and they shall be 
so numerous that in three days they will 
eat up every green leaf of every tree and 
herb in all the land. Neither shall they be 
like any other locusts that have been on 
the earth or ever shall be; for man shall 
comprehend that they are not of the seed 
of the earth. 

Moses sent with a herald this prophecy 
to the king, and he added thereto: Why 
hast thou put more hardships on my peo- 
ple? Seest thou not that the evil thou 
hadst hoped to accomplish hath cured it- 
self even before it came to pass? For the 
Israelites now work not at all, and their 
taskmasters are left in the lurch. Again I 
call upon thee to let my people go. 

The king replied not to this, but silent- 
ly put his officers to work, drilling and 
equipping his armies and collecting them 
together; which, when Moses beheld it, 
he understood to be the sign, as the Great 
Spirit had previously said, when the cloud 
would appear. And it came to pass on a 
very clear day, at noon, a cloud formed 
high up in the firmament, and it grew 
blacker and blacker, until it descended 
upon the earth; and it was locusts, and 
was even as a snowstorm that covered the 
land of the earth; in places to the depth of 
the shoes and ankles. And they ate every 
green leaf, and herb, and grass, so that in 
two days there was not a leaf to be found 
far or near. And on the third day, the lo- 
custs being still unappeased as to hunger, 
fell upon the Eguptians, old and young, 
feeding upon their clothes, and even upon 
the flesh of the Eguptians. And on the 
fourth day Jehovih caused a great wind to 
come, and it blew the locusts ofY into the 
sea. 

And again Moses sent heralds to the 
king, saying: Consider now my words 
and be wise. I have told thee that the 
hand of the Creator is upon this land. In 
thy heart thou sayest: Moses is a fool! 
Only a windstorm brought the locusts from 
a far-off country. But I say unto thee, O 
king, this is not so. And thou shalt still 
further behold Jehovih's power. For as 



the locusts came down out of the firma- 
ment, and thou hast a philosophy for the 
occurrence, behold, now another miracle 
shall come in another way: For there shall 
suddenly come up out of the water frogs 
and reptiles, and they shall likewise be 
so numerous on the land that man shall 
not find where to put his foot that it shall 
not come upon them. And the first day 
they shall be harmless; but on the second 
day they shall crawl upon the people, and 
under their clothes, and in their houses; 
and on the third day they shall eat the 
flesh of the Eguptians. But they shall not 
touch one Hebrew in all the land. Nor 
shall any man find whence came so many 
frogs and reptiles; for they shall not be 
like the seed of other frogs and reptiles. 
And on the fifth day all the frogs and rep- 
tiles shall suddenly disappear, neither by 
wind nor rain. But a stench, as of rotten 
flesh, shall strangle the Eguptians nigh 
unto death. 

Again I appeal unto thee, O king, to 
suffer my people to depart out of Egupt 
in peace. This is the last time I shall so- 
licit thee. And if thou answerest not me, 
then shall it come to pass in the month 
Abib, and on the ninth day and night 
thereof, the I Am will raise His hand over 
Israel; but as for Egupt, the Lord shall 
strike her in death. For in every family 
of Eguptians, far and near, on that night, 
shall the first-born fall dead; and that thou 
shalt not say the prophecy killed them, be- 
hold the first-born of every beast shall die 
also, even of goats, and sheep, and cattle, 
and asses, and of dogs and cats, and of 
every living creature man useth. For on 
that night, behold, four million Israelites 
shall make with Jehovih the covenant of 
death. And on the morning thereafter 
they will rise up to not lie down again in 
Egupt. And this shall be the testimony 
of innocent blood against thyself and all 
thy people, for what the Hebrews have 
suffered. 

The king answered not Moses; and be- 
hold Egupt was overspread with frogs and 
reptiles, in every particular, even as Moses 
had prophesied. Nevertheless, Pharaoh 
pursued his course. 

Jehovih spake to Moses, saying: Moses, 
My son, look upon man and pity him, for 
he believeth not in Me, though I multiply 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' RECORD 



519 



signs and omens continually, and give him 
prophecies without end. One thing only 
turneth man's eyes inward; that is, flesh 
of his flesh, lying dead before him. 

When the Israelites made the covenant 
of the blood of the lamb, a hot wind blew 
upon the face of the earth; and the first- 
born of the Eguptians fell dead, both man 
and beast. And Pharaoh's son died, and 
his brother's son; and the first-born of 
every courtier and every noble's first-born, 
and all other people, their first-born, so 
that in every family there lay one dead. 

Pharaoah was now stricken, but not 
unto repentance, for evil was in his heart, 
and he cursed Moses and the Israelites, 
and swore an oath to destroy Israel, man, 
woman and child, so that never more 
should there be one on the earth. And 
such a commandment he sent to his offi- 
cers, to begin the slaughter. As for 
the Faithists, not many of them had 
slept all the night, but were providing 
for the journey; so that when the morn- 
ing came, and at the time of sunrise, they 
every one started. From all the different 
regions of Egupt they went forth toward 
Sukkoth. The Heads led the way, and 
every commune was led by a rab'bah, and 
every man's family by the father of the 
family or by the eldest son. And at the 
start they spake through their leaders, 
saying: In Thy name, O Jehovih, we de- 
part out of the land of our birth, to return 
not forever! Neither shall Egupt prosper 
more till Thou hast subdued the whole 
earth unto Thee. 

But all things had changed wonderful- 
ly as to the Eguptians, for when they be- 
held the Israelites were indeed going, and 
knew the miracles that had taken place, 
they relented, and brought them gifts of 
gold and silver; and also asses and cam- 
els for the Hebrew women and children to 
ride upon; and gave them food to eat. 
But the Israelitish women said: Nay, if 
we take these things we will be under ob- 
ligations to the Eguptians. The Israelites 
accept not what they cannot pay for. Then 
the Eguptians bewailed in fear, saying: 
That we be not accursed by the Gods, take 
them, we beseech you in the name of your 
God also. So the Faithist women accept- 
ed the presents of asses and camels, and of 



other things besides; and they mounted 
the asses and camels, and rode them. 

When Moses heard of this afterward he 
rebuked Israel, saying: Because ye have 
accepted these things it will be said, ye 
borrowed them and begged them so as to 
despoil the Eguptians. 

When they arrived near Sukkoth, Je- 
hovih spake to Moses and Aaron, saying: 
Stand ye here for twelve days, that ye may 
behold My people as they pass, and that 
ye in turn may be seen by them. So 
Moses and Aaron pitched their tents by 
the way, on a high piece of ground, and 
remained there twelve days, and Moses 
showed himself before them, speaking and 
encouraging. 

After this the Israelites passed through 
Etham, on the borders of the wilderness, 
and thence toward Migdol, near Baal- 
zephon, the place of the oracle of the 
God, Baal, and they encamped before Pi'- 
hahiroth, where Moses commanded them 
to remain some days to rest. 

Now as for Pharaoh he had not made 
any attack on the Israelites, for the Lord 
held his army in confusion. Pharaoh, find- 
ing that the Israelites were not injured, 
decided to take the field himself; and ac- 
cordingly, having impressed all the chari- 
ots of Egupt, went ahead, leading his army 
in person. The Israelites were wearied 
and foot-sore, and discovering that Phara- 
oh was after them, many of them com- 
plained and grumbled, saying: O Moses, 
why broughtest thou us from home? Bet- 
ter was it for us to have remained in servi- 
tude to the Eguptians than to be slain. 

Moses rebuked them, saying: Profess 
ye to be Faithists but yet have not faith 
in the I Am? Put your trust in Him; for 
He will deliver ye safely, as He has prom- 
ised. 

Jehovih spake to Moses, saying: They 
shall behold the salvation of My hand; 
for the Eguptians who pursue them this 
day shall pursue them not again forever. 
For when thou bringest them to the sea, 
thou shalt lift up thy rod, and I will di- 
vide the sea, and My people shall walk 
across on the land at the bottom of the 
sea. And Pharaoh's army shall pursue, 
but be swallowed up in the waters. 

And so it came to pass. Jehovih 
brought a strong wind and divided the 



520 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



LORDS RECORD 



waters of the sea and swept them back, 
and the Israelites went over on land. But 
Pharaoh's army, who were in pursuit, 
were caught in the flood of the tide and 
were drowned. 

Thus delivered Jehovih the Israelites 
out of Egupt, and Israel believed in Him 
and in Moses, His servant. Now from the 
place Sukkoth unto the other side of the 
sea, a pillar of cloud preceded the Israel- 
ites by day, and a pillar of fire stood over 
them by night, and the people looked 
thereon and saw, every one, the cloud and 
the light. And the name of the place 
they reached when the crossed over was 
Shakelmarath; and they camped there 
many days. 

From the. time Moses began to put on 
foot the migration of Israel until he reach- 
ed Shakelmarath, was four years two 
hundred and seven days. And the number 
of Israelites that thus went forth out of 
Egupt was three million seven hundred 
and fifty thousand, men, women and chil- 
dren. And the number of other people 
who accompanied them was four hundred 
thousand; and because they were of the 
uncircumcised tribes of ancients, the He- 
brews nicknamed them Levites, meaning- 
imperfect flesh. And Moses commanded 
the Levites to camp aside, and not to mix 
with the Israelites, and they obeyed him 
in all things, maintaining that they were 
the true descendants of Abraham. 

CHAPTER XVIII. 

Moses called together the Heads and 
the rab'bahs, privily, and spake before 
them, saying: What have I taken upon 
me, O Jehovih? Behold Thy sons and 
daughters have followed me out of Egupt; 
how shall I bind them unto Thee and not 
unto me, O my Father in heaven? 

Jehovih said: Who is like unto thee, 
Moses, My son; in miracles who can match 
thee in the magnitude of thy proceeding? 
Who led forth My millions; and delivered 
them out of a great power without the loss 
of a man, woman or child? 

What I say unto thee, say thou unto 
the rab'bahs and unto the Heads: Not 
Moses, «nor the Heads, nor the rab'- 
bahs, brought ye out of Egupt; ye were 
brought out by the Creator, Jehovih, Who 



is God of all, Captain of all. Head of all, 
Rab'bah of all. For herein have I drawn 
the line betwixt My people and My ene- 
mies, the idolaters of men. Because of 
signs, and miracles, the idolaters make a 
man-God of their magician and worship 
him. 

But I declare unto thee, thou shalt do 
a greater miracle than any of these; for 
thou shalt preserve thyself from becoming 
an idol before men. For thou shalt pro- 
claim Me unto thy people in all things; 
teaching them that thou art but a man. 
And thy Heads and thy rab'bahs shall like- 
wise teach them after the same manner; 
for I will put away all idolatry from the 
face of the earth. Neither will I have 
kings nor queens; I am sufficient unto all 
men. 

As Abraham apportioned My people 
into families, with rab'bahs and with chief 
rab'bahs, so shalt thou re-establish them. 
And My commandments, which I gave 
unto Abraham, will I give unto thee; and 
My crescent will I re-establish with My 
rab'bahs. And My crescent shall be the 
fullness of My law unto the rab'bahs and 
chief rab'bahs. 

And when it was night Moses and the 
rab'bahs and the Heads went away aside; 
placing sentinels that they might be alone. 
And when they were thus prepared the 
light of Jehovih came upon Moses, and 
the books of the ancients were opened be- 
fore him. And he administered Emetha- 
chavah upon them; by the voice of Jeho- 
vih he re-established it; with all the rites 
and ceremonies. And after that the Heads 
were no longer called Heads, but Chief 
Rab'bahs; for Moses anointed them, by 
command of Jehovih. 

And in not many days Moses wrote 
the Levitican laws; for the inner temple 
of Jehovih was in spoken words only; but 
the outer temple was written. Wherefore 
it was said: The Hebrews have two laws; 
one which no man else knoweth; and one 
for them who are not eligible unto faith, 
being such as were called Leviticans, being 
those who had followed the Israelites out 
of Egupt and who for the most part had no 
God, little judgment and no learning. 

But of all that Moses did, and taught, 
and how he labored with his own hands, 
many books might be written. And it is 
doubtful if the world ever produced so 
good and great a man. 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



LOGOS' XCCOWO 



521 



At the time Moses reached Shakelma- 
rath he was forty-four years old by the 
Hebrew sun, but by the Eguptian he was 
eighty-eight years old. 

Of Pharaoh and his hosts who were not 
destroyed in the sea, be it said, they re- 
turned home to their places. And not 
long after that, Pharaoh banished Osiris 
from the earth, declaring himself the Sav- 
ior of the World, and Vice-Regent of the 
Creator. 

The scribes and recorders assembled in 
Kaona, and appointed Feh-ya, an Egup- 
tian, to write the departure of the Israel- 
ites out of Egupt. And Feh-ya wrote the 
account and called it the Exodus of the 
Hebrews, and it was recorded in the king's 
House of Records. And copies of it sent 
to the large cities, and there recorded also, 
for such was the law of Egupt. 

The Book of Genesis, as it stood in the 
Eguptian records, was written by Akaboth 
and Duerama and Hazed, and was the sub- 
stance from which Ezra copied it through 
his scribes. The inspiration of Genesis 
was from the God Osiris, the false, and his 
emissaries, chief of whom were Yotabba 
and Egupt, who were angel servants to 
Osiris. 

Touching genealogies, in which men 
seemed to have lived to so great an age, 
this, then, is the explanation thereof: 
Thothma had said to his recorders: In 
searching for the truth of legends, give ye 
the latitude thereof. For one legend will 
say, such a man lived seven hundred years 
ago; another will say he lived ten hundred 
and fifty years ago. The latitude between 
them is, therefore, three hundred and fifty 
years, which shall be the time of that man's 
life. 

And in this way latitude became con- 
founded with fact, and with no intent to 
deceive. And behold, it came to pass that 
the records were worthless; and to make 
matters worse the records were so volum- 
inous, being more than six thousand 
books. Nevertheless, they were all written, 
in the first place not by the Israelites, but 
by their enemies ; wherein the testimony of 
the miracle is none the weaker. 

CHAPTER XIX. 

In the time of Moses, the people of Ar- 
abin'ya worshipped many Gods and Lords. 



whose high heavenly Captain was Osiris. 
Four chief Gods were under him; they 
were: Baal, Ashtaroth, Dagon and Ash- 
dod. There were seven and twenty other 
Gods also, known to mortals. When the 
Israelites traveled forth amidst the differ- 
ent tribes, they were beset to know what 
Lord or what God they worshipped, and 
by what Lord or what God they were led 
forth. 

The Light came to Moses to say to 
them: Alas, His Name, whom we wor- 
ship, man dare not utter. Therefore, thou 
shalt say: The I Am. 

Within the commune families, were cer- 
tain signs and passwords belonging to the 
different degrees. There were also oral 
rules of life and worship, but these were, 
kept secret from the multitude, but the in- 
struction of the commune fathers to the 
families was by this method made to har- 
monize all the people. For general behav- 
ior, Moses gave ten commands, which 
were not only made public, but incumbent 
on the commune fathers to teach orally to 
their respective families. The following 
are the commandments thus taught: 

I am the I Am that brought thee out 
of Egypt. 

Thou shalt have no Gods nor Lords 
but the I Am. 

Thou shalt not make any' image of the 
I Am out of anything that is in heaven 
above, or on the earth beneath, or in the 
waters. 

Thou shalt not bow down thyself before 
idols nor images, nor anything having the 
form of anything in heaven, or on the 
earth, or in the waters. 

Thou shalt not speak My name in pub- 
lic, for I will not hold him guiltless that 
giveth it to idolaters and lovers of evil. 

Remember the sacred days and keep 
them holy. Six days shalt thou labor; but 
the seventh day is the Sa'abbadha. 

Honor thy father and thy mother. 

Thou shalt not kill any living thing. 

Thou shalt not commit adultery. 

Thou shalt not steal; nor bear false 
witness; nor covet anything that is an- 
other's. 

In those days it so happened that one 
Koetha, an Egyptian woman, a su'is, went 
into the lodge at noon, no person being 
within the lodge save herself. Now, whilst 



522 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS RECORD 



she was examining the implements, a 
Voice spake to her, saying: Touch not 
these, they are sacred. But, the woman, 
knowing it was a spirit, said: If I tell what 
I have heard, I will be accursed, for was it 
not the multitude of seeresses that brought 
the plagues on Egypt? 

Again the Voice spake, saying: I will 
give thee the signs and passwords of the 
High Fathers, that they may know that 
thou also knowest. Now, thereupon the 
Spirit told her the secrets; and he likewise 
said: Say thou to Moses, The I Am saith, 
Behold, these implements are sacred. Hide 
thou them by day, for those who have 
spirit perception, perceiving them, will ob- 
tain the signs and passwords. 

The woman, Koetha, did as command- 
ed, and Moses commanded workmen to 
make an ark and the sacred implements 
were kept within it, and this ark was the 
corporeal base of the arc of Bon, a local- 
ity in the etherean heaven, by which the 
light of the second resurrection reached 
the earth to Moses and his people, in a 
pillar of cloud by day and of light by night. 

The secret ceremonies commanded veg- 
etable diet for fathers, prophets, seers, and 
wanonas, and many of Koetha's people 
followed their example. After some years 
of experience, those who fasted from flesh, 
murmured, saying: What have we gained 
for our sacrifice? So they broke their 
fasts by hundreds and by thousands; and 
there came by their camps numberless 
birds, and they caught and killed and ate 
them freely; but, being unaccustomed to 
such diet, they were taken with fever and 
died, upward of sixty thousand of them, 
men, women and children, and the place 
was called Kibrath-Hattaavah, the place 
of lusters. 

In the year 3269 before Kosmon, the 
Israelites began to marry with the Canaan- 
ites, who were under the control of Baal. 
Ashtaroth, whose dominions extended 
jointly with Baal over Western and South- 
ern Arabin'ya, sent spirit emissaries to the 
handsomest of the women of Canaan, and 
by impression led them into the camps of 
the Israelites, to tempt the young men, for 
by these means did these heathen Gods de- 
termine to destroy the worshippers of the 
Great Unseen. And many of the Israelit- 
ish young men were tempted by the beau- 



ty of the heathen women and thus took 
them for wives; and these wives brought 
with them their own familiar spirits, who 
were slaves to Baal and Ashtaroth. 

God immediately sent Jerub, an ether- 
ean angel, into the Israelites' camp, giving 
him ten thousand inspiring spirits to coun- 
teract the labors of Baal and Ashtaroth. 

When the half-breed children were 
grown up, having Canaan mothers, they 
began to murmur against the peace policy 
of the Israelites, saying: As other people 
have kings and emperors, why not we? As 
other people raise up soldiers, declare 
war, and go forth possessing themselves of 
lands and cattle, why do not we? 

For three hundred and ninety-seven 
years after going out of Egypt, the Israel- 
ites lived without a corporeal king, or oth- 
er government, save the community of fa- 
thers; and they attained to the number of 
six million souls, men, women and chil- 
dren. But in the three hundred and nine- 
ty-seventh year, the Gods Baal and Ashta- 
roth triumphed, through their familiar 
spirits, and caused the Israelites to anoint 
a king to rule over them. This king was 
called Saul, signifying, Of the Lord God. 
Prior to this, the Israelites acknowledged 
no God nor Lord, but covenanted with the 
I Am, E-O-Ih. The name had been 
kept secret with the fathers, and the com- 
mandments were announced from the 
I Am. The familiar spirits now in- 
spired Saul to change the words of the 
commandments to the Lord Thy God, as 
a conciliatory stratagem to please the na- 
tions and tribes of people who worshipped 
Baal, Dagon, Ashtaroth, Haughak, and 
other Gods and Lords of the lower hea- 
vens. 

Thus was substituted Lord God for 
E-O-Ih, and as the Great Spirit had 
been heretofore taught to the Israel- 
ites as an inconceivable entity, Whose form 
and extent no man could attain to know, 
so was He now transformed and declared 
to be in the form of a man, and having a 
residence in the firmament of heaven. Thus 
they made the Creator merely an idol; thus 
they began the overthrow of the holy doc- 
trines of Moses. 

Jerub, the etherean angel in command, 
sought to preserve the old tenets, and 
amongst mortals sought out one, Samuel, 



CYCLE OF LI K A 



LORDS' RECORD 



523 



and inspired him to establish a college of 
prophets, and this was done at Naioth. 
and hither congregated the inspired; and 
they established a crescent Tablet, and 
made prophecies from etherea for a period 
of seventy years. 

At this time, the Israelites were twain, 
those of the king and those of E-O-Ih, the 
prophets, and these placed them at a dis- 
advantage before neighboring tribes and 
nations. Having sacrificed the name of 
the Creator, and -made Him into a 
man figure, the heathen said: What bet- 
ter is their Lord God than our Lord or our 
God? and they made war against the Is- 
raelites on all sides; and the latter having 
stooped to a corporeal king, went further 
on and raised armies of soldiers and went 
to war. 

In the four hundred and ninth year af- 
ter the departure out of Egupt, the entire 
Peace Policy and Non-resistance of the 
Mosaical Inspiration was overthrown, and 
the Israelites became warriors, and even 
warred against one another. 

The Israelites not only worshipped the 
imaginary idol, Lord God in heaven, but 
built representatives of him in stone and 
wood, and worshipped them also. 

And now, one Elijah, a young man 
from the college of prophets, foretold the 
coming captivity of the Israelites as a con- 
sequence of their idolatry. 

In the year 2768 before Kosmon, a 
young man, Elijah, was raised up from the 
branch of the college of prophets, and, un- 
der the inspiration of the angel Jerub, 
went forth preaching amongst the heathen, 
preaching not the Lord God, but Jehovih. 

Ahab, a king, a worshipper of Baal, 
said to Elijah: What better is one God than 
another, or more powerful? Are not all 
Gods but the spirits of men raised up in 
heaven? 

Elijah answered him, saying: I preach 
neither Lord, nor God, but Jehovih, the 
Creator, who is Ever Present and Potent 
over all things. 

Ahab said: Then thy Master hath nei- 
ther eyes nor ears, knowing nothing, like 
the wind. He is foolish, and without in- 
telligent answer to thy prayers. 

Elijah said: Summon thou thy priests, 
and thy high priests, who have power 
through Baal and Ashtaroth and Dagon, 



and they and their Gods shall try in a 
tournament against Jehovih. 

Ahab caused the tournament to take 
place, and when the priests and high 
priests of Baal had spread the sacrifice 
they repeated their invocations for a mir- 
acle to prove the power of Baal and the 
other Gods; and behold, Jerub, the ether- 
ean angel, with ten thousand spirits to as- 
sist him, prevented any sign or miracle 
being accomplished by the familiar spirits 
of Baal and Ashtaroth. 

And now Elijah stretched forth his 
hand unto Jehovih, saying: If it be Thy 
will, O Father, give these people a sign of 
Thy Power! 

And Jerub and his etherean host of 
angels, caused a flame of fire to descend on 
the altar and consume the sacrifice. The 
people feared, and many fell down, ex- 
claiming, Jehovih is mighty! Jehovih is 
mighty! 

When the tournament was ended, Eli- 
jah went upon Mount Carmel, and prayed 
for rain; and Jerub, with ten thousand 
times ten thousand angels, brought the 
winds from the north, south, east and west, 
and the moisture in the air above was con- 
verted into rain, and thus the long drouth, 
was ended. 

In the year 2635 before Kosmon, the 
college of prophecy raised up Jonah, and 
Amos, and Hosea. 

In the year 2574 before Kosmon, the 
kingdoms of Israel perished, and they be- 
came a scattered people, and fell into bond- 
age again. 

2439 years before Kosmon, Manasseth,. 
son of Hezekiah, established idol worship,, 
and, by law, abolished the worship of Je- 
hovih. He caused the prophet Isaah to* 
be sawn in twain; and the judgment was,, 
because he worshipped Jehovih. 

For three hundred years following, the 
only Faithists amongst the Israelites were 
the prophets, and the followers of the 
prophets, who had never affiliated with 
those of the kingdoms and armies. 

The Faithists proper were a small mi- 
nority, and scattered in many lands. The 
rest, who were called Jews, lived under 
written laws and ceremonies, which were 
compiled and established by Ezra, in Jeru- 
salem, and was completed in the year 2344 
before Kosmon. From that time forward. 



524 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



LORDS' RECORD 



the Jews became worshippers of the Lord 
and the God, but the scattered tribes of 
the Faithists still held to the Great Spirit, 
Jehovih, keeping their service secret. 
These latter were without sin, doing no 
war nor resistance of evil against evil, but 
returning good for evil, and loving one 
another as one's self. 

From the Faithist branch sprang the 
Es'eans, cultivating prophecy and purity 
■of spirit. The angels of Jehovih now dwelt 
with the Es'eans, who were the true Isra- 
elites; though many of the Jews also pro- 
fessed Jehovih under the name of God and 
Lord God. 

In three hundred and fifty years after 
this Jehovih raised up from the Es'eans, 
one Joshu, an iesu, in Nazareth. Joshu 
re-established Jehovih, and restored many 
of the lost rites and ceremonies. In the 
thirty-sixth year of Joshu's age he was 
stoned to death in Jerusalem by the Jews 
that worshipped the heathen Gods. 

CHAPTER XX. 

HISTORY OF CHINE. 

These are the generations of the seven 
antecedents of Chine, the chosen of the 
Great Spirit: Tse'wong begat Hi-gan, 
who begat Ah So, who begat T-sooYong. 
who begat Ah Paing, who begat T-chook 
Lee, who begat Tschine Loo, who begat 
Ah Sho'e, who begat Chine, gifted in su'is 
and sar'gis of six generations. Of these, 
T-soo Yong and Ah So were prophets of 
Ormazd, and Ah Sho'e was a seer; but the 
six generations could hear the Voice, and 
they walked upright, keeping in the com- 
mandments of Jehovih as revealed in the 
Zarathustrian laws. Ah Sho'e was a bas- 
ket-maker, and after the manner of the 
man, Zarathustra; and Chine, his son, 
was the fourth birth of Ah Sho'e's wife, 
Song Teng. Like Moses, Chine was of 
-copper color, and very large, but his hair 
was red, like a fox, and he was bashful 
and of few words. Ah Sho'e, Chine's fa- 
ther, said: I have had other sons; my 
words are wise and true; Chine was unlike 
any child born in the world; for boy child, 
or girl child, no physician could tell which, 
but rather to the boy kind was he. The 
angel of Ormazd came to me before the 
birth and said: The child shall be called 



Chine, signifying no sex; as it is written 
among the ancients, i-e-su, having no 
earthly desires. For he shall restore the 
chosen people of Ormazd. Whereof I 
told the physicians before the birth, but 
they would not believe. Nevertheless, by 
command of Jehovih, I sent for seven 
physicians to witness the birth, lest it be 
said after the surgeons have dealt wrongly 
with the child at its birth. These physi- 
cians came: Em Gha, Tse Thah, Ah Em 
Fae, Te Gow, T'si, Du Jon, Foh Chaing, 
and Ah Koan, and they beheld the child 
born, whereto they made oath, and a rec- 
ord thereof, touching the strangeness of 
such a birth, and of the prophecy of its 
coming into the world; this record was put 
in the Ha T'ae King of record belonging 
to the Sun King. 

Being now in my old age, I, Ah Sho'e, 
put these things on record, of which hun- 
dreds have come to ask me concerning the 
childhood of Chine. 

First, that 'he was the laziest of all chil- 
dren, and dull past belief. For his broth- 
ers and sisters mocked him, concerning 
my prophecy, as to becoming a great man. 

Second, he ate less than a Fa'ak, and 
grew so thin we were ashamed of him in 
his childhood; verily was he nothing but 
skin and bone, with a large head. 

Third, when he walked about, the stools 
and tables moved out of his way; and yet 
no hand touched them. Fourth, the an- 
gels of Ormazd oft carried him about the 
hut, and would lift him up to pick fruit 
from the trees. Fifth, he never laughed, 
but was serious and pleasant, like an old 
man that had abandoned the world. But 
he spoke so little no man knew whether 
he was wise or stupid. When he was three 
years old his mother weaned him, or rath- 
er he weaned himself. And from that time 
forth he never ate but fruit and nuts and 
grains of rice. When he was sixteen years 
of age he began to grow suddenly large 
and strong, and of deep color. Whereat I 
procured a teacher for him; and be- 
hold, he could learn a whole book in a 
day. He learned by hearing once; neither 
forgot he anything he learned. 

In his twenty-second year he began to 
talk, and the angels of heaven spake 
through him also. And great was his 
speech. From sunrise in the morning until 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS RECORD 



525 



late at night his tongue ceased not to 
speak. And his mouth was as if it were 
the mouthpiece of heaven. For when one 
angel had discoursed before an audience 
for a while, then came another and anoth- 
er, and so on; and when none came, then 
spake Chine himself. 

And there came before him men of 
great learning, and philosophers, to try him 
as to his knowledge; but they all went 
away confounded. Neither was it possible 
to ask him a question he could not an- 
swer correctly. Whether it was to read a 
tablet or to reveal the size and build of a 
temple he never saw; or the sickness of a 
man who was far away; for all things were 
to him as an open book. 

For four years this great wisdom re- 
mained in him, and his fame spread from 
east to west, and from the north to south; 
no man knew how far. When he was 
asked how far he could see and hear, he 
said: Over all my land. And he marked 
with his finger, saying: On this tablet, 
Chine land! 

Suddenly Chine's abundant speech ceas- 
ed, and he answered only yea and nay to 
all things. And he was silent for seven 
years and eighty days. And then the an- 
gels from the second resurrection came to 
him. After that he spake not as a man, 
save in private, but he spake as the All 
Light whereof the world knoweth the rest. 

CHAPTER XXI. 

After Jehovih's voice came to Chine he 
traveled far and near; and because of his 
wonderful wisdom, men of great learning 
and even kings sent for him. And wher- 
ever he went he preached after the same 
manner, for peace and love, and against 
war. For three years Chine traveled, pro- 
claiming the Creator above all else in hea- 
ven and earth. And then he rested one 
hundred and forty days, sleeping like a 
young child, saying naught more than a 
child would say. 

Then came a change upon Chine; he 
was as a new man in the world, and not 
as a God. And he rose up, saying, My Fa- 
ther, Creator of men, calleth me. I hear 
His voice. It is like a burning fire in my 
soul, moving me. Not with pain, but with 
great power. He saith: 



Chine, My Son! Chine, My Son! My 
house is on fire! My little ones are burn- 
ing. Go thou, Chine, to them. They are 
in fear and trembling; they know not which 
way to turn. The kings of the earth have 
outlawed them; they are hunted down, and 
are famished. Go thou to them, O Chine! 
For that end I created thee alive in the 
world; thou shalt be My Voice unto them. 
Who can overcome the fire when he re- 
maineth in the house? He goeth outside 
where there is water. Call thou My people 
out of the house of My enemies. Give them 
a spring of clean water; they are parched 
and athirst. Say to them: Jehovih liv- 
eth! His love aboundeth; come ye to My 
fountains that are not dried up. 

Chine made the following covenant: I 
swear to Thee, O Jehovih, Thou Al- 
mighty! I will have no other God but 
Thee, Thou Creator! All Light, Most 
Glorious! Thou art my King! Holy, 
Holy, Ever Present! O my Captain, my 
All Highest Captain! I salute Thee in the 
Rising Sun! In the High Noon, most 
Mighty! And in the sweet Setting Sun! 
I know nothing but Thee; to Thee I swear 
this my most solemn oath, O Jehovih! 
Call Thou up Thy angels, holy and most 
wise; Thy recording angels! They shall 
hear my covenant unto Thee, My Creator! 
They shall write it in the books of heaven, 

my Master! And whilst the sun stand- 
eth, and the moon and the earth and the 
stars, my oath unto Thee shall stand up 
against me: 

Thou only shalt be my King; Thou 
only shalt be my God and Heavenly Ruler. 
All other kings I forswear, and all other 
Gods and captains and great rulers: None 
of them will I bow down to or worship, 
forever. 

I swear unto Thee, Thou Great Spirit, 
Thou art my bond to the end of the world. 

1 will not war not abet war; to peace for- 
ever am I sworn. And though they im- 
press me and torture me, or slay me out- 
right, they shall not force me; I will not 
draw one drop of blood in any man or 
woman or child whom Thou hast created 
alive on the earth. 

I swear unto Thee, Thou All Person, 
Who art so large that the earth and sun 
and stars would not fill the hollow of Thy 
hand; to be like unto Thee, O Jehovih. 



526 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LOGOS' RECORO 



Fair dealing unto all men, as Thou 
wouldst; good, forgiving and without an- 
ger forever. And equally in all posses- 
sions with Thy chosen, O Jehovih. 

To raise them up that are cast down; to 
deliver the afflicted and helpless; to ren- 
der not evil, nor the fruit of anger, unto 
any man, forever, O Jehovih. And good 
to them that abuse me; and in my actions 
steadfast in Thy course, my Creator. 

In my blood do I covenant with Thee; 
by the veins in my flesh make oath for- 
ever. To wed not out of Thy Order, the 
Hi-tspe. Blood of the blood of Thy chos- 
en shall be my heirs and my heirs after me, 
forever. 

Hear me, O Jehovih; I make a new 
covenant; it shall be written upon the firm- 
ament of heaven. I will do good with all 
my might; the tears of the suffering poor 
shall be as scalding blood in my veins; I 
will not sit down and rest, nor take my 
ease, nor hold possessions whilst they are 
in want. 

Prick me, O my Father in heaven; 
sharpen my conscience keener than a 
sword; drive me to labor for the poor and 
afflicted, give me no rest, but whilst I am 
doing good unto them. O that my cove- 
nant were set with swords, pointing every 
way; that I could find no peace but in 
serving Thee, my Creator, Ormazd. And 
I were pure and strong and wise and swift- 
er than life and death, and as unfailing. 
And that my oath reached unto thy chosen, 
and they heard me; that my voice were 
sweet unto them, and enticing like an early 
love. That they would come forth from 
their hiding places, Thy faithful children, 
and be not afraid. 

I would go to them as a lover, and bow 
my head down to them for their long suf- 
fering, and their faith unto Thee, Jehovih. 
As a father that has lost his son and 
found him again, I would take them in my 
arms, Thy worshippers, Thou All One, Ev- 
erlasting Spirit. As a rose-bush trampled 
in the mire; how they have been scourged. 
O Jehovih. Poor unto death, and ragged 
and scattered. But I would wash them 
clean, and give them new soil; their 
voices in song and praise should gladden 
the whole earth. 



CHAPTER XXII. 

The great cities of the ancients in Jaf- 
feth were destroyed by Te-in and his evil 
spirits, who inspired mortals to war. And 
for the most part it was a land of ruins, 
but thousands of cities, standing beside 
the broken walls, were spread over the en- 
tire breadth of the land. 

Jehovih spake to Chine, saying; Now 
is a good time for My chosen. Behold My 
enemies, the idolaters. They are weak 
now. They pant with the labor of their 
great battles. Let My people come out 
of their quarters and hold up their heads. 

Say thou unto them, O Chine, there is 
no Joss, no Ho-Joss, no Te-in, no Po, no 
Po-Te-in, to make you afraid. And whilst 
the enemy resteth, bid My sons and daugh- 
ters arise! They shall inhabit the land that 
is spoilt, and cause it to bloom and bring 
forth abundantly. Call up My outlawed 
race; the enemy is sick of his wounds; his 
heart is ashamed and disconsolate, he is 
cast down. 

Chine went to A'shong and gathered 
up many converts, descendants of the 
Faithists, the pure Brahmins, the line of 
Zarathustra, the people of the Great All 
One, who accepted not Gods and Lords. 
And he established them, and invented 
plows and mattocks for digging the 
ground; for these implements had been 
lost and destroyed, hundreds of years, and 
no man knew how to make them. 

Chine said unto them; Wait not till ye 
are well fed and clothed before ye bow 
down your heads at the altar of Jehovih. 
When ye have prayed and sung before 
Him, then go forth into the field to work. 
And He will bless you. 

Remember the heathen, they say: First 
provide the natural body, and then the 
spirit. But I say unto you, Jehovih creat- 
ed them both together. And he who saith: 
First provide the natural body, never look- 
eth to his spirit afterward. In all things 
give ye precedence to the spirit. Herein 
lay the foundation of the wisdom of your 
forefathers, the Zarathustrians. 

Two extremes meeting are always dan- 
gerous: great wealth and extensive pov- 
erty. It not only devolveth on the rich to 
give their substance to the poor, but they 
shall go amongst them, teaching them and 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' RECORD 



527 



lifting them up. He who doeth not this, 
consider how vain it is for him to pray to 
Jehovih. 

Chine established families of the chos- 
en, but limited them to two hundred; and 
to each family he gave one priest. But he 
gave privilege to four thousand people to 
dwell in one city. 

Chine said: Ye have been afflicted with 
Gods; I was sent into the world by the 
Creator to deliver you, and because there- 
of this land shall be called Chine'ya. 

Chine said: I saw a great mathematician 
one day, and he said: There are no Gods, 
nor Lords, nor angels, nor any All Person. 
Everything is void. He showed me a book 
he had, and I asked: Who made the book? 
He said: I made it; nay, I made not the 
cloth, nor the binding; I mean, I made the 
philosophy that is in the book; nay, I 
made not the philosophy, but found it; 
nay, it was not lost; I mean I led myself 
to find the philosophy; nay, a man cannot 
lead himself; I mean that I searched and 
found what was new to me. So, but lit- 
tle of that book was his, after all. I saw 
three angels standing beside that man, and 
they were laughing at him. If I had asked 
the angels, they might have said: Nay, the 
thoughts were ours. And had I looked 
further I had seen angels back of them, 
claiming the same things. Yet, even such 
are not the highest. 

Wherefore I say unto you: All things 
come from an All Highest, name ye Him 
what ye will. He who saith: Jehovih spake 
to me: He is the nearest mark of all. For 
all good knowledge that cometh to man, is 
Jehovih's word to that man. Whether it 
come by an angel or by another man, or by 
the commonest corporeal thing, it is nev- 
ertheless from the All Highest. For which 
reason bow ye not down in worship to 
man nor angels, but only to the Highest. 
Jehovih, for He is head and pinnacle of the 
All Highest conceived of. And in contra- 
distinction, the all lowest; the foot of the 
ladder; call ye darkness and evil, wicked- 
ness, sin, death and satan. 

Attribute not to men nor angels this or 
that, for they themselves are not first 
causes nor responsible but in part; but at- 
tribute all good things unto Jehovih; and 
all evil things to satan. By these terms ye 
shall make plain to one another what ye 



mean; and it is an easy matter to look 
into your own souls and comprehend as to 

which of these two ye most incline. 

CHAPTER XXIII. 

Chine said: One man waiteth till he is 
rich, before helping the poor; another man 
waiteth for the angels to inspire him, and 
give him wonders, before he teacheth the 
unlearned; another waiteth for the multi- 
tude to join in first; and yet another wait- 
eth for something else. Beware of such 
men. The sons and daughters of Jehovih 
go right on. They say: It is the highest, 
best! I will go in! Though I do not ac- 
complish it, yet I will not fail in my part. 

Consider ye the foundation of things at 
all times. Jehovih saith: I created all the 
living to bring forth after their own kind. 
Be ye perceiving as to whom ye marry, 
considering as to the All Highest inspira- 
tion common to your choice. For the rais- 
ing up of the world shall be mostly accom- 
plished by the fruit of judicious marriage. 

I declare a bondage unto men that they 
know not of, for it belongeth in the next 
world; which is the begetting of selfish off- 
spring in this world. For whilst their heirs 
are in darkness they themselves cannot 
rise in heaven. And like unto this, I also 
declare a glory in heaven to them that wed 
in self-abnegation, who do good unto oth- 
ers constantly and with delight; for they 
bring forth heirs to glorify Jehovih in 
good works also. 

To this end was the mark of circumcis- 
ion given unto your forefathers, lest the 
Faithist women be led astray by idolaters. 
And yet, with these precautions, many fell. 
And their heirs descended lower and lower 
in darkness until they lost sight of the All 
Person, and believed not in Him. 

Consider thy heir; show him a house 
with a head, orderly. That he may grow 
up understanding the discipline of earth 
and heaven. The father shall be master in 
all things; and the mother shall be vice- 
master in all things, to rule in his absence. 
For each family shall be a kingdom of it- 
self; but no one shall be a tyrant, though 
he have precedence in all things. 

Sit not down by the table to eat until 
all stand about: and when they are seat- 
ed, thou shalt say: In Thy praise, O Je- 
hovih, receive we this. Thy gift: be Thou 



528 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



.0»DS' RECORD 



\. 



with us unto Thine own glory, forever, 
amen! For the chief virtue of the words 
lieth in the discipline to the young mind; 
holding him steadfast after the orderly 
manner of the angels in heaven. And be- 
cause he repeateth it with thee, he learneth 
to honor thee. 

And when thy sons and daughters are 
yet small, thou shalt teach them to work; 
but overtask them not, nor give them pain; 
remembering they are to be thy glory, 
which Jehovih bestowed unto thee to be in 
thy keeping. For they shall sing and play, 
and clap their hands and dance, for these 
are their thanks unto the Creator; and they 
shall be glad because they came into the 
world. 

Remember thou that labor shall be de- 
light, and toil a great delight; to have it 
otherwise to thy children and to thyself is 
to prostitute man to be as a beast of the 
field. But thou shalt bring them into 
groups, and their labor be full of in- 
struction. And even thy little ones 
shall learn that thou art but a brother, an 
elder brother, and one of the same Cre- 
ator's children; teaching them that one 
who hoardeth and keepeth things in his 
own possessions is as a cannibal that eat- 
eth his own kindred, flesh and blood. 

Above all things thou shalt teach them 
to keep holy and pure the body; 
for herein lieth health and strength. 
To be foul is to be sick, to be sick is to be 
foul. Behold the heathen and idolater, the 
feeders on flesh and blood; in the time they 
boast of health they stink as a carcass ; their 
flesh is congested and puffed up, their 
breath like a kennel of dogs. How can their 
souls be pure or their understanding clear? 
They have made themselves a festering 
stink-house for the spirit to dwell in. And 
they say: Bah! I see no Jehovih! I know 
no All Person! I deny the soul of things! 
Where is the spirit? I cannot see it? Or 
the sound of its voice? I cannot hear it. 
And there be a Great Spirit, let Him come 
before me! I would see Him. Yea, in 
their filthy bodies they say this. Let them 
be pure and they will understand the vanity 
of such words. 

CHAPTER XXIV. 

In years prior to this, when Chine had 
traveled and preached by the voice of Je- 



hovih, he visited the kings and princes and 
rich men in many regions; and whilst he 
was thus speaking, rebuking them for their 
governments and for their possessions, they 
took no part against him. But afterward, 
when he was gone, the kings and queens 
and nobles said: Chine hath preached a 
dangerous doctrine; for he said: Thou 
shalt have no king but the Creator, Who is 
King over all. Will not this set our slaves 
against us? And if the people go into 
communities of their own, ignoring the 
king, where will the king find his revenue? 
And there were priests of Dyaus and of 
other Gods, and speakers in temples where 
the Gods wrote on sand tables. Besides 
these there were seers and prophets with- 
out number. And the kings, being on the 
alert, went into the matter, inquiring of the 
spirits as to whether the doctrines of Chine 
were true. 

And some of the spirits said: There is 
no All Person. Behold, we have visited 
the stars and the sun, and looked far and 
near, and we saw not any Creator, or AIL 
Person. There is no Great Spirit, save Te- 
in, who was a one-time mortal, but hath 
risen to all power in heaven and earth.. 
And other spirits said: There is nothing 
in heaven that ye have not on earth. How 
shall we find Ormazd? Waste not your 
time with Chine and his doctrines. Eat, 
drink and satiate your desires; for these are 
the sum and substance of all things in hea- 
ven and earth. 

Te-zee, king of A'shong, the capital 
city of the Province of Aen-Na-Po'e, who 
was withal a great philosopher, had 
heard Chine preach, and was great- 
ly interested. Some time after this a ma- 
gician, Loo Sin, visited Te-zee, who told 
the magacian about the wonders of Chine. 
The magician listened to the king's story, 
and the king asked the magician whether 
he could himself, in addition to his sleight- 
of-hand, manifest wisdom in words, like 
Chine, and if so, how it could be attained? 

Loo Sin, the magician, answered: Te- 
zee, O king, thou knowest not how thou 
hast embarrassed me, thy servant. For 
when we are young, and, finding we have 
the natural powers for a magician, we go 
before an adept to be taught all the mys- 
teries of the order; and here we take a 
most binding oath never to reveal by hint, 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' RECORD 



529 



word, mark, -or written character, anything 
that will reveal any of our signs and mys- 
teries, binding ourselves under great penal- 
ties, which I cannot name to thee. Know 
then, O king, I can answer all thy ques- 
tions, and am anxious to serve thee, but 
what shall I do? 

The king said: I, being king, absolve 
thee from thy oath. 

The magician said: Compared to my 
power, though I only beg from door to 
door, thy power O king, is but as chaff be- 
fore the wind. In my subtle realms are the 
keys of all dominions. Not only do I and 
my craft rule over mortals, but over the 
spirits of the dead. My oath, then, is too 
great for thee to absolve, for I cannot even 
absolve it myself! 

Te-zee, the king, said: Since, then, thou 
canst not do all things, and especially, ab- 
solve an oath, thou art not sufficient for me 
to deal with. 

Loo Sin, being desirous of earning 
something, said: As for that, O king, I 
tell thee I cannot reveal all, for the virtue 
of my art dependeth much on its secrets 
and mystery. Nevertheless, as I am very 
poor, I might reveal an index to thee, to 
which, if thou wouldst apply thyself dili- 
gently, thou mightest attain the remainder. 
The king thereupon commanded him to 
perform before him, agreeing to award 
him according to the decree of the fates. 
And Loo Sin at once fell to work, per- 
forming wonderful feats, such as causing 
the tables, and seats, and desks, to move 
about and to roll over; and to cause voices 
to speak in unseen places. He also chang- 
ed rods into serpents, and caused birds to 
sit on the king's shoulder; and he changed 
water into wine, and also brought fish and 
laid them on the floor at the king's feet. 

The king said unto him: All these 
things I have witnessed from my youth up. 
Show me now, whilst thou remainest here, 
how thou canst see into my neighbor's 
house. 

The magician said: Yea, O king; but 
for that feat it is necessary to enter the 
state of entrancement, and the price is ex- 
pensive! 

The king said: I will pay thy price. 
Loo Sin turned up his eyes and gave a 
shudder, as one dying, and having stretch- 



ed himself on the floor, bade the king ques- 
tion him. 

The king said: Here is chalk; mark 
thou on the floor the character which is 
on the top of my tablet, on the left of the 
throne; Thereupon the magician marked 
correctly: And again the king tried him as 
to his power to see without his eyes, and in 
far-off places; and, having proved him in 
many ways, the king said: Canst thou also 
show the spirits of the dead? 

Loo Sin said: Of a truth I can, O king. 
But that requires me to enter the sublime 
state of creation, and is even yet more ex- 
pensive! 

The king said: Have I not said I will 
pay thee? 

Loo Sin then went into a dark corner 
and laid himself down on the floor, and 
then swallowed his tongue, and was mo- 
tionless and stiff, like one that is quite 
dead. Presently a light like a thin smoke 
rose up from the body and stood a little 
aside, and a voice spake out of the mist, 
saying: 

Who art thou that callest up the spirits 
of the dead? Beware! He whose body' 
lieth stiff and cold beside me, is one of the 
heirs of the immortal Gods! What wouldst 
thou, man of earth? 

The king said: Who art thou? The 
voice answered: I am Joss, Te-in! Ruler 
of heaven and earth! The Great Spirit per- 
sonified! Creator of all things! 

The king in satire said: Thou art wel- 
come, O Te-in! I am one of the most 
blest of mortals, because thou hast made 
my place a holy place. 

The spirit then assumed mortal shape 
and stood before the king, even whilst the 
magician's body lay on the floor in sight 
also. 

The spirit said: What question is it 
troubleth thee, O king? Speak thou, and 
I will answer thee, for I am all Wisdom 
and Truth personified. 

The king said: Why hast thou not ap- 
peared to me before this? Why have I 
been left in the dark as to thy real exist- 
ence! Answer thou me this, for it is the 
foundation on which I desire to rest many 
questions. 

The spirit said: My son, Te-zee, I have 
been with thee from thy youth up. watch- 
ing over thee, for thou shalt become the 



530 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' RECORD 



greatest king in all the world. Yea, there 
are great works for thee to do. And if 
thou desire to extend thy kingdom, or to 
win great battles, I will show thee the 
way. Or if thou desire another woman to 
wife, I will find her for thee. 

The king said: Thou art a great hea- 
venly ruler, I fully believe, but thou an- 
sweredst not my question. Moreover, thou 
questionest me about my kingdom and 
about another woman to wife, and these 
things are not what I desire of thee. And 
for the matter of women I have not yet 
one wife; consequently I desire not an- 
other. 

The spirit said: Who sayest thou I am? 

The king replied: I am at a loss to 
know if thou art a fool or a devil; and I 
say that I have either seen one like thee, 
or else thee, through many a magician. 
But, alas, there all knowledge endeth. 

The spirit said: Thou saidst thou would 
pay what the fates decreed. Hear me then, 
O king; thou shalt give to Loo Sin four 
pieces of gold. And after that I will ex- 
plain all things to thee. 

The king then cast the four pieces of 
gold to Loo Sin, and demanded the knowl- 
edge as promised. The spirit then said: 
And on thine oath thou wilt not reveal? 

The king said: I solemnly swear to re- 
veal naught of what thou teachest me. 

The spirit said: Now, then, O king, I 
am Loo Sin, the magician! By long train- 
ing, the magician attaineth to go out of his 
own body in spirit, and to appear in any 
form or shape desired. Wilt thou try me? 

The king said: Show me the spirit of 
king Ha Gow-tsee. 

The spirit walked back to the body of 
Loo Sin, and presently returned before the 
king, looking like the spirit of Ha Gow- 
tsee. 

The king said: It is like the king! 

The spirit answered: Here then, O 
man, is the end of philosophy. Behold, I 
am Loo Sin, also. Some men are one spir- 
it, some two, some three, and some four, 
to one corporeal body. And yet there is 
but one person in fact. 

The king asked: What becometh of the 
spirit when the corporeal part is dead? 

The spirit answered: One of two things 
is possible to every man: his spirit will 
either dissolve into non-existence, and be 



scattered and void like the air of heaven, 
like the heat of a fire that is burnt out; or 
else it will re-incarnate itself in the body 
of a child before it is born, and, so, live 
over again. Thus came all people into the 
world. A child that is still-born is one in 
whose body no spirit re-incarnated itself. 
There are no new creations. The same 
people live now on the earth that always 
lived on it; nor will there be any others. 
They go out of one body when it is old 
and worn out; and then enter a young one 
and live over and over again, forever. Nor 
is there more nor less unto any man, wo- 
man or child in all the world. 

The king asked: What, then, is the 
highest, best thing for a mortal man to do 
during life? 

The spirit said: To eat and drink, and 
sleep and rest, and enjoy begetting numer- 
our offspring. 

The king asked: How long would a 
spirit live if it did not re-incarnate itself? 

The spirit said: If the mortal body is 
burnt to ashes, then that is the time; if the 
body be buried, and rot, and return to 
earth, then that is the time; if the body be 
embalmed, and keepeth well, the spirit go- 
eth back in the embalmed body and remain- 
eth till that body is moldered into dust, or 
burnt to ashes, then is the spirit set free, 
and ready to either re-incarnate itself or to 
dissolve and disappear forever. 

The king asked: As it is with thee, is it 
the same with all magicians? 

The spirit said: Thou hast only given 
four pieces of gold; if thou wouldst have 
more, the'price is expensive. 

The king said: I have told thee I would 
pay whatever the fates decreed; therefore, 
proceed. 

The spirit said: It is even so with all 
magicians. 

The king asked: Show me now that 
thou canst preach like Chine? 

The spirit said: Thou shalt ask me 
questions, and I will preach on them. 

The king asked many questions, and 
the spirit spake thereon. Finally the king 
said: That is sufficient; I will pay thee; go 
thou thy way. As for thy preaching and 
thy doctrines, they are nothing. Now will 
I send and find another magician; for out 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



LORDS' RECORD 



531 



of a counsel with many I shall arrive at 
the truth. 

CHAPTER XXV. 

Te-zee, the king, sent for another magi- 
cian, Wan-jho, who came and was com- 
manded to exhibit his powers; but he also 
demanded a high price; which the king 
agreed to pay, and Wan-jho exhibited. 
First he caused a rose to come within a 
glass bottle whilst it was shut; then a small 
serpent he created out of a rod. and caused 
birds to come and sing to the king; then 
changed vinegar to water; then writing 
on a stone tablet without touching the tab- 
let, and even whilst the tablet lay under 
the king's foot. Now after he had exhibit- 
ed many more feats of like character, he 
demanded his money, saying: The angels 
are gone; I can do no more. 

The king said: And hast thou not pow- 
er to bring them back? 

Wan-jho said: How much wouldst 
thou give? 

The king answered: Three pieces of 
gold. 

Wan-jho said: Ah, in that case behold, 
they are come again! What wouldst thou? 

The king commanded him to show the 
spirits of the dead, so he might converse 
with them. 

Wan-jho went into the same place 
where Loo Sin had exhibited, and, lying 
down, cast himself in the death trance. 
Presently an angel, robed in white, appear- 
ed, and came and stood before the king, 
saying: Most mighty king, what wouldst 
thou? Behold me, I am the Goddess, Oe- 
tu Heng, come from my throne in high 
heaven. And be thou desirous of conquest 
in war, or to attain great riches, or more 
wives, most beautiful, then will I by my 
most potent will give unto thee? 

The king said: I am blest, O Goddess, 
because thou hast come to see me. But 
alas, none of the things thou hast mention- 
ed suiteth me. I desire nothing as regard- 
eth this world. Give me light as to the 
place in heaven where dwelleth king See 
Quan? 

The spirit said: Was he thy friend or 
thine enemy? 

The king answered: He was my dead- 
ly enemy. 



The spirit said: I asked thee, is he thy 
friend or thine enemy? Because I saw 
one See Quan in hell, writhing in great 
agony. And yet I saw another See Quan 
in Paradise. So, then, I will go and bring 
him that is in hell. The spirit passed over 
to the corner and presently returned, say- 
ing: O, O, O, O, O! Horrors! Demons! 
Hell! pretending to be in torments. After 
this the king called for many different spir- 
its, and whether they had ever been, or 
were fictitious, they came all the same. 

Finally Te-zee, the king, said: Bring 
me now the wisest God in heaven, for I 
would question him. 

So the spirit went again toward the 
corner, and then approached, saying: 
Man of earth! Because thou hast called 
me I have come, and I decree four gold 
pieces to Wan-jho, my prophet. ■ 

The king said: Most just, God! I 
will pay him. Tell me now whence Com- 
eth man, and what is his destiny? 

The spirit said: First, then, the air 
above the earth is full of elementary spir- 
its; the largest are as large as a man's fist, 
and the smallest not larger than the small- 
est living insect on the earth! Their size 
denoteth their intelligence; the largest be- 
ing designed for human beings. These 
fill all the air of the earth, and all the space 
in the firmament above the earth; they 
have existed from everlasting to everlast- 
ing, for they were without beginning. Now 
whilst a child is yet within the womb, one 
of these elementaries entereth in the child 
and straightway there is the beginning of 
the man. And in like manner are all 
things produced which live on the earth. 

The king asked: Before such time 
when man beginneth, whilst these element- 
aries are floating about, do they know any- 
thing? 

The spirit said: Many of them have 
great wisdom and cunning, and are withal 
great liars and thieves and rascals. Know- 
est thou one Loo Sin, a magician? 

The king answered: Yea. 

And then the spirit said: Well, Loo 
Sin is obsessed by the elementaries, and 
they are all great liars, pretending to be 
spirits of the dead! As for myself, I am a 
most virtuous Goddess, from the highest 
heavenly spheres. I tell thee, O king, 
these elementaries are the curse of the 



532 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' RECORD 



world; they are anxious to be born into 
life, so they may have souls, and they in- 
spire mortals to paternity and maternity 
that they may have an opportunity for in- 
carnation. 

The king said: Thou hast answered 
well, O Goddess. I will pay according to 
try decree. And thereupon the spirit de- 
parted. 

King Te-zee sent for another magician, 
Hi Gowh, of the rank of priest, and hav- 
ing bargained with him as to his price 
for exhibiting, commanded him to pro- 
ceed. 

Hi Gowh then exhibited after the same 
fashion as the others, doing great wonders. 
And him also did the king command to 
show him the spirits of the dead. Hi 
Gowh complained about the price. but 
being assured by the king that his demands 
would be paid, the magician went into the 
same corner and cast himself in a trance; 
and, presently, a spirit appeared, saying: 
Greeting to thee, O king! Whether thou 
desirest conquest, or riches, or more wo- 
men, name thou to me, and I will give 
abundantly. Know thou I am the spirit of 
the great Zarathustra. 

The king said: Great Zarathustra, thou 
art most welcome. But, alas, none of the 
things thou hast named are what I desire. 
Tell me, O Zarathustra, what is the origin 
and destiny of man? 

The spirit said: First, then O king, in 
days long past, the sun turned round so 
swiftly it threw off its outer rim, and the 
rim broke into a million pieces, flying ev- 
ery way, and these pieces are the stars and 
the earth and the moon. And for millions 
of years the earth was only a stone, melt- 
ing hot, but it cooled off in time; and the 
outer stones on the earth were oxidized, 
and this made moss; then the moss died, 
but the spirit of the moss re-incarnated 
itself, and this made grass; and the grass 
died; but the spirit of the grass lived and 
re-incarnated itself, and thus made the 
trees. Then the trees died; but the spirit 
lived, and it re-incarnated and became ani- 
mals; and they died, but their spirits lived 
and re-incarnated and became man. After 
that the spirit no longer re-incarnateth 
itself, but floateth upward into peace, and 
resteth for a long time, when it finally 



mergeth back into the sun and is extinct, 
like a lamp burnt out. 

The king asked: How, then, is it with 
thyself? 

The spirit replied: I was the original 
Sun God, that came away from the sun to 
take charge of this world. It is in my 
keeping. 

The king asked: Who, then, is the All 
First that still stayeth with the sun? 

The spirit answered: Because thou 
asketh so many questions, O king, thou 
shalt pay more money. 

The king assured the spirit that the 
money, to any amount, would be paid; 
thereupon the spirit said: Ahura-Ormazd 
was the original of all; but when the sun 
threw off its surface Ahura-Ormazd was 
thrown into pieces, one piece going to ev- 
ery star, save the earth, and I came here of 
my own accord, because it was larger and 
better than any other world. 

The king dismissed the spirit and the 
priest, and sent for another, a magician 
also of the rank of priest, Gwan Le. And 
Gwan Le, being assured that his price 
would be paid, proceeded to exhibit also. 
And he performed feats even like the oth- 
ers. Then the king commanded Gwan Le 
to call the spirits of the dead. The priest 
apologized about the expense of the death 
trance, but being further assured that his 
demands would be paid, he went into the 
corner and cast himself into the swoon, 
stiff and cold. 

Presently an angel appeared, saying: 
Behold me, O king, I am Brahma. And if 
thou desire conquest in war, or greater 
riches, or more women, I will grant unto 
thee. I can tell thee of hidden treasures, 
and of rich mines, and of women greatly to 
be desired. Also I can tell thee how thy 
armies can overcome thy enemies with 
great slaughter. 

The king said: I am delighted, O Brah- 
ma. But I desire nothing of which thou 
hast mentioned. Tell me of the origin and 
destiny of man. 

The spirit said: Know, then, O king, 
all things alive have two parts, the corpor- 
eal and the spiritual; all dead things are 
but one, which is the spirit. Thou, O king, 
wert first a stone, a very large stone; then 
when it moldered into dust thy soul went 
into silver, a very large piece; but when 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' RECORD 



533 



the silver rusted away, thy soul went into 
gold; and when the gold was worn away, 
thy soul began to run into vegetable life; 
and after that it ran into animal life, then 
into a low order of man, then into the 
high order of man, as thou now art. Thus 
came man up from the beginning, re-incar- 
nating himself over and over, higher and 
higher. And when he is perfected in spirit 
as thou art, he never more returneth to re- 
incarnate himself. 

The king asked: What doth the spirit 
after leaving this world? The spirit re- 
plied: Thou shalt then meet thy sexual 
indulgence, peopling the spirit realms with 
delightful offspring. 

The king said: It is well; thou hast a 
wonderful doctrine. Thereupon the spirit 
departed, and the priest also. 

The king sent for still another priest, 
Tseeing. And the king asked him: What 
seest thou for thy king? 

The priest said: By the rites of my 
order I cannot disclose any of the secrets 
of heaven or earth until thou hast paid the 
price of indulgence, which is two pieces of 
gold. So the king paid him. 

Tseeing said: If thou desire riches, 
or success in war, or new wives, speak 
thou, and I will grant unto thee according 
to the price. 

The king said: Alas, Tseeing. I desire 
none of these indulgences; tell me the ori- 
gin and destiny of man, for I would learn 
why I am, and the object and end? 

Tseeing said: The first of all was 
Brahma, which was round like an egg. 
Then Brahma broke open, and the shell 
was in two halves, and one half was the 
sky and the other half was the earth. 
Then Brahma incarnated himself in the 
earth; but he came not up as one only, as 
he expected, but he came up in ten mill- 
ions and one million parts, and every part 
was a living thing, a tree, or a plant, or a 
fish, or a bird, or a beast, or a man. And 
this is all there is or was or ever shall be. 
But Brahma looked over the world and he 
saw that some men were good and some 
evil. And he said: I will separate the good 
from the evil. And that justice might be 
done he called all the nations and tribes 
of men before him. And when they were 
come he said unto them: 



Whoever delighteth in the earth, it shall 
be his forever. And though he die, his 
spirit shall have power to re-incarnate it- 
self in another unborn child, and so live 
over again, and so on, forever. And he 
shall have great indulgence in the earth, in 
eating and drinking, and with women, and 
in all manner of delights, for they shall be 
his forever. 

But whosoever delighteth in spirit shall 
be blest in spirit. He shall not, after death, 
re-incarnate himself and live over again, 
but shall dwell forever in heaven and have 
heavenly delights. But since heavenly de- 
lights are not after the manner of earthly 
delights, then shall the spiritual chooser 
not live like earth-people. But he shall 
live secluded, and shall torment his flesh 
with fastings and with castigations. Nei- 
ther shall he marry or live with woman, 
nor beget children, nor have any indul- 
gence on the earth whatever, save merely 
to live, for the earth is not his, nor is he of 
the earth. And the more he tortureth the 
flesh, the higher shall be his bliss in hea- 
ven. 

Now, when Brahma had stated the two 
propositions unto the children of the earth, 
he further added: Choose ye now which 
ye will; for after ye have chosen, behold, 
there is the end. For ye that choose the 
earth shall be of the earth, even unto all 
succeeding generations. But whoso choos- 
eth heaven, to him and his heirs it shall be 
final and forever. 

Thereupon mortals made choice, and 
behold, nearly all of them chose the earth. 
But in thousands of years and millions of 
years afterward Brahma repented of his 
former decree, for he saw the earth became 
too full of people, and they were sinful be- 
yond bounds. And Brahma sent a flood of 
waters and destroyed ten hundred thou- 
sand million times ten millions of them. 
And he sent Zarathustra into the world to 
give new judgment. Zarathustra opened 
the door of heaven anew, saying: Whoev- 
er after this chooseth Brahma, and will 
torture his flesh, and hate the earth, and 
live away from the world, him will I save 
from the earth and from hell also, for I 
am very efficient and influential with the 
Creator. 

Such, then, O king, is the origin and 
destiny of man. Some are born for the 



534 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



LORDS' RECORD 



earth forever, and some are born for hea- 
ven. Nevertheless, the way is open unto 
all, to choose which they will, earth or hea- 
ven. 

CHAPTER XXVI. 

Te-zee pursued his researches for a long 
while, and with many prophets, magicians, 
seers and priests. Afterward he said: 

All is vanity; all is falsehood. No man 
hath answered me aright, as to the origin 
and destiny of man. Even the angels, or 
whatsoever they are, can only inform me 
of the things of earth; they only see as 
man seeth. And it may be true that these 
angels are nothing more than Loo Sin 
said, the spirit of the magician only. Be- 
cause his body entereth a trance it seem- 
eth reasonable. Now, therefore, I will put 
a stop to these magicians and priests; they 
are of no use. 

So Te-zee issued a decree covering his 
own province, commanding magicians and 
priests to quit the province, under penalty 
of death. And they thus departed out of 
his dominions. 

Now it so happened that in five other 
great provinces, the kings did precisely the 
same, at about the same time. And these 
were the provinces: Shan Ji, under king 
Lung Wan; Gah, under king Loa Kee; 
Sa-bin-Sowh, under king Ah-ka Ung; Gow 
Goo, under king Te See-Yong; and these 
provinces comprised the chief part of Jaf- 
feth. 

Jehovih commanded Chine to go before 
king Te-zee, and when he had come, the 
king said unto him: Some years since I 
heard thee, and thou wert profound. I 
am delighted thou hast come before me 
again, that I may question thee. 

Chine said: When thou heardest me be- 
fore, the Great Spirit spake through me. 
Now I am well learned, and He command- 
eth me to speak of my own knowledge. 

I am a man as thou art; yet every 
man hath a different work. Thou art 
king of this province, and I am told, 
moreover, thou art good and wise. I hope 
thou art. Otherwise my words will not 
please thee. As for myself, I was sent into 
the world to mark out this land and name 
it Chine'ya, and to establish anew those 
that accept the Great Spirit. For Chine'ya 



and her people shall remain a different 
country and different people from all the 
world. 

Know then, O king, I come not in vain- 
boasting. I am one of the weakest of men; 
and yet I have more power than any other 
man in the world. And yet, of myself, 
there is nothing whereof to boast. For I 
am as but a tool in the hands of Ormazd. 

I look upon thee and see thou hast been 
questioning magicions and priests, and 
that thou art unsatisfied. Know then, O 
king, this is thine error, in not magnifying 
thy judgment. Thou hast worked with 
magicians who are under the power of an- 
gels of the first resurrection, and even an- 
gels below them. All such angels teach on 
their own individual understanding; as 
wandering individuals they go about. And 
their miracles are of the same order, merely 
individual miracles. 

He, Whom I teach, worketh miracles, 
not in a small corner but in the affairs of 
kingdoms and nations; not through magi- 
cians only, but through kings and queens, 
and even through common people. Thou 
thyself art an instrument in His hand. 

Behold, in the same time thou issuest 
thy decree against magicians and asceti- 
cism, even in that same time five other 
great kings do the same thing! This is a 
miracle indeed! No man can counterfeit 
His miracles. Neither flatter thyself that 
such matters occur by accident. They do 
not occur by accident; but by Jehovih. 
For His angels in the second resurrection 
are organized, and work in mighty armies. 

Tezee said: Thou art great, Chine; or 
else thy sudden philosophy turneth my 
brain! Go on! How shall we know, first, 
that there are angels who are really the 
spirits of the dead? Second,, how shall we 
distinguish betwixt the first and second 
resurrections? 

Chine said: Only by seeing and hear- 
ing with the natural eyes and ears, and 
with the spiritual eyes and ears, can any 
man attain to know anything either on 
earth or in heaven. When these senses are 
pure and clear, then a man knoweth that 
the spirits of the dead do live. For I de- 
clare, O king, of a truth, that my spirit 
hath emerged from my body on many 
occasions sometimes going subjective- 
ly and sometimes objectively. Neither 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



LORDS' RECORD 



535 



is this a special creation to me only; but it 
is that which thousands and tens of thou- 
sands can attain to by discipline. 

Touching the first and second resurrec- 
tions, know thou, O king, spirits that dis- 
pose individual things, or earthly things; 
or propose riches or personal gain, or mar- 
riage, discanting to this man or that man as 
to what is good for him as an individual; 
spirits giving great names, professing to be 
this or that person long since dead; all 
such are deceivers and have not advanced 
beyond the first resurrection. They deny 
the I Am, the Great Spirit, the All Person. 
Their highest heaven is re-engraftment on 
mortals, and the reveling in lust. They flat- 
ter thee, telling thee thou wert this or that 
great man in a former re-incarnation. They 
labor to make profit to their own ma- 
gician; they are without truth or virtue, 
and of little wisdom. 

The second resurrection cometh not to 
an individual as an individual; it cometh 
as an army, but not to an individual, but to 
a kingdom, a nation, a community. For 
as such angels belong to organized com- 
munities in heaven, so doth that organiza- 
tion work with virtuous organizations of 
mortals. 

This is wisdom, O king; to get away 
from the individual self; to become one 
with an organization, to work with the 
Great Spirit for the resurrection of men. 
For as thou makest thyself one with many 
to this end, so laboreth the Father with 
thee and them. As thou keepest thyself 
as an individual self, so do individual an- 
gels come to thee as individuals. Individ- 
ual answereth to individual; the first res- 
urrection to the first; the second to the sec- 
ond. Moreover, the All Person is over all, 
and worketh each in its own order, unto 
a great purpose. 

Think not, O king, I am making a new 
doctrine; I am but declaring that which 
was also proclaimed to the ancients. And 
as many as came forward and had faith 
were called Jehovih's chosen people, be- 
cause, forsooth, they chose Him. 

Judge thou, then, whoso denieth the 
All Person is not of His order; neither 
hath such an one the light of the Father in 
him. But he who hath attained to under- 
stand that all things are but one harmoni- 
ous whole, hath also attained to know what 



is meant by the term, All Person, for He 
is All; and, consequently, Ever Present, 
filling all, extending everywhere. 

In contradistinction from Him, two phi- 
losophies have run parallel, which are dark- 
ness and evil. One saith the All is not a 
person, being void, and less than even the 
parts thereof; the other saith the only All 
High is the great angel I worship, who is 
as a man, and separate from all things. 
These comprise the foundation of all the 
doctrines in the world, or that have ever 
been or ever will be. The latter is idolatry, 
which is evil; the second, unbelief, which is 
darkness; and the first is faith, truth, love, 
wisdom and peace. 

Under these three heads are all men 
classified by Jehovih and His angels. And 
they may be likened to three men looking 
across a field; one sees a light and knows 
he seeth it; another thinks he seeth it, but 
the third sees nothing at all. 

As a witness, therefore, the latter is 
worthless; the second is a circumstantial 
witness; but the first is positive, and stand- 
eth the highest and firmest of all. He 
knoweth his Heavenly Father. He seeth 
Him in the flowers; in the clouds, and in 
the sunshine; in the fruits and herbs; and 
in the beasts of the field, and in every 
creeping thing; and in the stars and moon 
and earth and sun. In sickness, in health, 
in sorrow and rejoicing; verily he findeth 
Jehovih in all things; he knoweth Jehovih's 
eye is forever upon him; and he walketh 
upright in truth and faith, pride and re- 



joicing 



Te-zee, the king, asked: Tell me, O 
Chine, what is the origin and destiny of 
man? 

Chine said: The Ever Present quick- 
eneth him into life in his mother's womb; 
and he is then and there a new creation, his 
spirit from the Spirit Jehovih, and his 
body from the earth; a dual being the Fa- 
ther createth him. His destination is ever- 
lasting resurrection; in which matter, man 
can have delightful labor as he riseth up- 
ward forever and ever. 

The king asked: If Jehovih is all the 
time creating, will not the firmament be- 
come too full of angels? 

Chine said: A thousand men read a 
book, and yet that book is no fuller of 
ideas than at first. Ten thousand men may 



536 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' RECORD 



love thy flower-garden, yet thy garden is 
no fuller because of their love. The ma- 
terials of which man was created existed as 
a part of the Creator; and when man was 
created he filled no more room than the 
elements of which he was created. 

The king said: I would that I were as 
thou art! For which matter, if thou wilt 
use thy wand and make me even half as 
wise, I will give away all my kingdom! 

Chine said: Thou canst not bargain 
for Faith, or purchase it, as a coat or as 
sandals. And yet until Faith is attained 
there is no resurrection. No bird ever 
flew from its nest, without first having 
faith it could fly. And when thou hast 
Faith thou wilt cast away thy kingdom and 
choose heavenly treasures instead. Until 
thou hast attained Faith thou wilt retain 
thy kingdom. This is a judgment unto the 
rich man in the same way. Riches and a 
king's kingdom may be likened to balls of 
gold tied to a man's feet in deep water; he 
cannot rise until he cutteth himself loose, 
and casteth away that which bindeth him. 
So, also, are men bound in spirit, and until 
they put their own hands to the matter 
there is no resurrection for them. 

CHAPTER XXVII. 

Te-zee, the king, said unto Chine: Be- 
cause thou hast given me this great light, 
it seemeth to me I should issue a decree 
commanding all my people to accept thy 
doctrines. 

Chine replied: O man! How short 
thou art in understanding our Father! Vi- 
olence is His enemy. Such a decree would 
be no better than a decree establishing any 
other heavenly ruler. It would thwart it- 
self. He cometh not with sword and spear, 
like the idol-Gods; He cometh with educa- 
tion, the chief book of which is the exam- 
ple of good works, and of peace and free- 
dom to all. 

Te-zee said: Thou reasonest well. Hear 
me, then, thou greatest of men; command 
me even as if I were the meanest of ser- 
vants, and I will obey thee. 

Chine said: O king, thou tormentest 
me with my own inability to make thee un- 
derstand! Thou shalt not make thyself 
servant to any man, but to Ormazd, the 
Great Spirit. 



The king said: Then I will put away 
my kingdom. 

But Chine said: Consider first if thou 
can best serve Him by doing this way or 
that way, and then follow thy highest light, 
and thou shalt not err. 

The king asked: How, sayest thou, 
shall I put aside my kingdom and my 
riches and do as thou dost?, 

Chine said: Thou shalt be thine own 
judge. If I judge for thee, and thou fol- 
low my judgment, then am I bound to thee. 

Te-zee said: If the Great Spirit would 
give me thy wisdom, then would I serve 
Him. How long, sayest thou, a man shall 
serve Him in order to reach great wis- 
dom? 

Chine said: Suppose a man had several 
pieces of glass; some clear, some clouded 
with smoke and grease; how long, sayest 
thou, it would require to make them all 
clear alike? For such is the self in man; 
it cloudeth his soul; and when he hath put 
self away, then is his soul clear, and that 
is wisdom, for then he beholdeth the Fa- 
ther through his own soul; yea, and hear- 
eth Him also. And until he doeth this, 
he believeth not in His Person or Pres- 
ence, no matter how much he professeth. 

The king kept Chine many days, and 
questioned him with great wisdom and de- 
light. One day Chine said to him: Jeho- 
vih saith to me: Go thou quickly unto the 
five other great provinces of Chine'ya, and 
explain to the kings thereof Who I am. 
Therefore, O Te-zee, I must leave thee, but 
after many days I will return to thee and 
exhibit to thee the testimony of immortal 
life. 

The king provided camels and servants, 
and sent Chine on his way. And, after 
Chine was gone, Te-zee said to himself: 
Although I cannot decree Chine's doc- 
trines, I see no reason why I cannot decree 
the extinction of Te-in and other idol- 
Gods. And thereupon he did as he thought 
best, prohibiting the priests from doing 
sacrifice to Joss, Ho-Joss, Te-in, Po, or 
any other ruler in heaven, except the Great 
Spirit. 

CHAPTER XXVIII. 

In course of time Chine completed his 
labor with the six kings of Jaffeth, and re- 
turned to Te-zee, to die. At this time there 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' RECORD 



537 



had been established in different places 
more than a thousand communities of 
Faithists, either through Chine or his fol- 
lowers, the chief rab'bahs. And when Chine 
returned before the king, Te-zee, there 
came from every quarter of the world men 
and women to meet him and learn wis- 
dom. 

So Chine died, and his body was allow- 
ed to lie five days until the eyes were sunk- 
en and black, and on the sixth day was 
burnt to ashes under the superintendence 
of king Te-zee, and the ashes were scat- 
tered in the field as commanded. And 
on the seventh day, whilst the multitude 
surrounded all the place, a whirlwind came 
and gathered up the ashes, and the ashes 
became illumed, and the soul of Chine went 
therein, and he burst the whirlwind and 
came down even at the king's feet. 

And Chine said: Knowest thou who I 
am? 

And the King answered, saying: Of a 
truth thou art Chine; and thy native land 
shall henceforth forever be called Chine'ya, 
in honor thereof. And I will send unto the 
other kings also, and they will decree the 
same thing. 

Chine said: Even so, do thou. And 
since the Father hath allotted me seven 
days to remain with His chosen and with 
thee, O king, apprise thou, whom I will 
name to thee, to come and see me. And 
thereupon Chine told the king whom he 
desired to come. 

And Chine walked about on the earth, 
even the same as before death, nor could 
any man tell by looking at him that he had 
passed through death. Nor were his clothes 
different, although they were made out of 
the ashes in the whirlwind. 

CHAPTER XXIX. 

Chine said: My brothers and sisters, in 
the name of the Great Spirit, hear me: 
These are Chine's last words, for the Fa- 
ther calleth me. Be ye attentive, that ye 
may remember my sermon. 

I was sent into the world to wall this 
great people around with Jehovih's hand. 
I have made you an exclusive people for 
three thousand years to come. I have 
drawn a veil over the bloody past, and 
taught you to love and respect one another. 



Chine'ya shall become the most numer- 
ous nation in all the world. 

Be ye exclusive unto one another; suf- 
fering not outside barbarians to come 
amongst you, especially to marry with my 
people. Yet ye shall not war against 
them. But it is lawful for you to build 
walls to keep them away. 

And every change of the moon ye shall 
renew your covenant, which was my cove- 
nant, with Jehovih. Teaching it to your 
children, and commanding them to teach it 
to theirs after them, and so on forever! 
Swearing ye unto the Great Spirit to ig- 
nore all heavenly rulers but the Creator, 
the I Am. 

The Father hath made a wide world, 
and fruitful and joyous, and He giveth it 
unto man's keeping. Unto one people one 
country; unto another people another 
country, and so on, all the world over. 

Chine'ya He giveth unto you, and He 
saith: Be ye as brothers and sisters in this, 
My holy land. Which in the ancients' 
days was made to bloom as a flowery king- 
dom by My chosen, the Faithists of old. 

But they were neglectful of My com- 
mandments. Idolaters came upon them 
and destroyed them, and laid waste their 
rich fields; yea, the bones of My people 
were strewn over all the land. But ye are 
now once more delivered, and ye shall 
make Chine'ya bloom again as My celes- 
tial kingdom. 

And ye shall multiply, and build, and 
plant, and make this heritage, which I 
give unto you, as an example unto all peo- 
ples, of industry and peace and thrift. And 
of the multitude that can dwell in one king- 
dom, manifesting love, patience and vir- 
tue. And by your neglect of war and of 
war inventions, ye shall be a testimony of 
My presence in this day. For the time 
shall surely come when I will put down all 
unrighteousness, and war, and idolatry, and 
I will be the All Person unto the whole 
world. 

Chine hath spoken his last words. My 
ship of fire descendeth from the highest 
heaven! Chine will rise up in this; and 
even so shall ye who are pure and good and 
full of love. 

A light, like a great luminous cloud„ 
blinding with holy light, descended over 
all the field where the multitude were. 



538 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



LORDS' RECORD 



Many fell down in fear; and many cried 
aloud in great sorrow. 

Then Chine went and kissed Te-zee, 
and immediately walked toward the midst 
of the field, and was lost in the exceeding 
great light. And the light turned around 
like a whirlwind, and rose up, higher and 
higher, and then was seen no more. 

Chine was gone! 

Te-zee at once made special laws 
protecting all persons who rejected 
Gods, Lords and Saviors, but wor- 
shipped the All Light. Four other kings 
followed with the same edicts and laws. 
The Faithists were safely delivered into 
'freedom throughout Chine'ya. 

CHAPTER XXX. 
HISTORY OF SAKAYA. 

Sakaya was born in Hagotha, province 
•of Nao'wan, on the borders of Nepal. His 
"birth had been foretold by the Faithist 
prophets, and that he would re-establish 
the doctrines of Capilya. Sakaya's fa- 
ther's name was Metanga, and he was 
of the twelfth generation of Suddhodana. 
During which time, none of his forefathers 
ate fish or flesh, or of anything that breath- 
ed the breath of life. 

Metanga was very old when Sakaya 
was born, but the wife of Metanga was but 
'fifteen years old; for which reason, the peo- 
ple nicknamed the child, Sramana Gotama 
meaning passionless from father and moth- 
er. 

Metanga was High Father of the Prov- 
ince of Nao'wan; consequently, Sakaya 
was born a prince, as commanded of Je- 
hovih, in heaven, he should be. Wherein 
He said: He that I will raise up, shall 
liave the glory of the earth before him; and 
he shall grow up as learned as a king and 
a priest, and he shall re-establish peace and 
.good will on earth. 

Now there had been bloody times in 
Vind'yu for four hundred years; during 
which time a warring sect, who falsely 
•called themselves Brahmans, had overrun 
the land with sword and spear, lance and 
fire, destroying temples, oracles and lan- 
guages. These were the destructions done 
by the God Kabalectes, mortals supposing 
they were under the God Brahma. 

God, Jehovih's Son, had said to Etches- 
.-sa, chief guardian angel over Sakaya: Thou 



shalt cause thy ward to learn Brahmanism, 
asceticism and all other religions. 

Thus was Sakaya educated; and at 
twelve years of age, he took vows of Brah- 
manism. At fifteen, he desired to acquire 
the ecstatic state, and he joined a band of 
seven Brahmin priests, and went about for 
three years with the alms-bowl, begging 
for the poor, living as the poor, and fasting 
and praying, and studying with his teachers 
and priests. And, yet for other four 
years, he excluded himself from speech, 
save to the Holy Ghost, dwelling out of 
doors, night and day. 

But the ecstatic state came not to Sa- 
kaya. And one night, his guardian angel, 
Etchessa, spake to him in a dream, saying: 

Behold, I am Jehovih, and not the Holy 
Ghost! Yea, I am a very Person! And 
Ever Present! Why hast thou put Me off? 
Did I not create thee alive, and make thee 
a person also? Thou art born of the race 
of Suddhodana. Thy labor is not to seek 
the ecstatic state for thyself, but to 
renew My light on earth. Therefore, 
give up this, thy most useless life 
of going about praying, and return 
thou to thy father's house, and take thee 
a wife. For how canst thou attain the wis- 
dom of the earth, without becoming a hus- 
band and father? 

Sakaya awoke, remembering his dream, 
and he told it to his priests, and asked 
them to interpret it. And they said unto 
him: This was not a dream, but the voice 
of satan; put thou it aside. 

But Sakaya was more convinced of his 
dream than of his priests; and he, there- 
fore, gave up his fasting and praying, and 
returned to his father's house, saying: Fa- 
ther, thou art wise after the manner of thy 
generations. Henceforth I will be no more 
a priest, nor in fact a Brahman, for that 
matter, but pursue thy doctrines, which 
are of deeds more than words. Thou shalt, 
therefore, choose me a wife, for I will wed 
and become a father. 

So Sakaya wed, and his wife bore him 
a son. When he looked upon the child, he 
said: Thou art the greatest of sermons. 

Now, because of the strange life Sa- 
kaya had lived, being a prince, he was the 
wonder of the city of Hagotha, and was 
much loved by the people, especially the 
poor, for his alms-bowl had oft relieved 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' RECORD 



539 



them from hunger. Consequently, when it 
became known he was a father, there came 
before the royal palace thousands of the 
poor, singing songs of praise to Sakaya 
and his child and his wife. And the poor 
women had infants in their arms. When 
Sakaya saw the infants, he burst into tears, 
and came out before the multitude, and 
spake to them, saying: 

I have looked upon mine own son, and 
said within my soul: This is mine! And I 
considered how my son was born a prince 
and above want; but I considered not this 
great multitude of babes, who have no as- 
surance against starvation. Why, then, 
shall I remain with one, who hath sure 
provision, and glut myself in ease and the 
selfish joy of my own house? And leave 
this multitude of babes to the hazard of 
precarious life? 

Is not Sakaya of broader soul than this? 
Have I any right to bring more children 
into the world, until I have provided sure 
happiness to them that are already born? 
What is my family and my kingdom, 
though I win the land from Yaganosa to 
the ocean, if this burning within mine own 
soul will not away, but crieth out forever: 
Heal thou the sick earth! 

From this time forth do I covenant with 
Thee, Thou All Light, to give up all the 
earth, and to serve Thee. I will be Thy 
Son, O Jehovih! And all my days hence- 
forth on the earth, labor to ameliorate Thy 
abundant offspring! Behold these young 
babes turned upon me, with Thy smile, O 
Jehovih, in their innocent faces! calling to 
me: Help! Help! 

CHAPTER XXXI. 

Etchessa, chief of the loo'is, seeing 
the resolution of Sakaya, departed at once 
to Paradise, before God on the throne, to 
receive the commission of Jehovih, and to 
establish a line of es'ean light to the 
earth. And thereupon, God caused his 
officers to select from the volunteers the 
highest grades, and to arrange them in a 
line of light down to the earth, to Sakaya, 
that the voice of God and his Holy Eleven 
might speak through Sakaya, with the wis- 
dom of Jehovih. The hosts to be under 
the direction of Etchessa. The million 
loo'is were also summoned to their places 



in the line; and in five days' time, the light 
of the throne of God was made one with 
the soul of Sakaya, and he began preach- 
ing, even from the steps of the palace of 
the king, his father. 

In the meantime, the loo'is of the hosts 
of Etchessa inspired their mortal wards, 
men and women, who had been born into 
the world to become disciples and follow- 
ers of Sakaya, to come before him. And 
presently, there assembled in Sakaya's na- 
tive city, to hear him preach, men and wo- 
men from remote distances. 

These are the substance of the doctrines 
preached by Sakaya: 

I am but a man; worship not me. 

I declare my follies publicly before you. 
Inasmuch as I have been an example of fol- 
ly, learn ye to be wise by not following my 
past footsteps. In my youth, I was quick- 
ened to see the miseries and sorrows and 
afflictions of mortals. And I cried out unto 
Ahura'Mazda, as the priests had directed 
me, to find some sure way to do a great 
good in the world. 

But in the legends of the ancients I be- 
held, that certain signs and miracles attend- 
ed Capilya, Brahma and Zarathustra. So I 
grieved to attain to signs and miracles. 
I fasted and prayed and tortured my flesh, 
to make the earth abhorrent in my sight, 
according to the rules of the Brahman 
priests. But nothing came to me more 
than the commonest magician. 

So I declare unto you, I have renounced 
Brahmanism and asceticism, and taken up 
the Zarathustrian religion, which is, that 
good works are the only salvation. To 
know, then, what are good works, and to 
apply the same unto the inhabitants of the 
earth, should be the chief study of a 
preacher. 

• And, since most crime and misery come 
because of poverty, and because of the di- 
vision of the affairs of men, it is wise to 
devise, first, a remedy against poverty, and 
second, a means of attraction to bring about 
a brotherhood between men. To accom- 
plish which, the association of tens and 
twenties and hundreds and thousands, with 
rab'bahs unto each, as Capilya taught, is 
the highest and best plan. In which fami- 
lies, there shall be neither buying or sell- 
ing, nor ownership, nor divisions, nor 
castes, nor privileges of one above another. 



540 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



.OFtDS' RECORD 



Sakaya was asked about such as can 
work fast, and are strong, and can accom- 
plish much, shall they not have preference 
over those that produce little? 

Sakaya answered: A certain man had 
two sons, one was strong, and the other 
weak, and yet that father distinguished not 
between his sons in his will. Was he then 
just? 

They said: A most just father. 

Sakaya said: So declare I unto you, to 
give unto one another all things required, 
and without distinction as to strength, or 
as to expertness. 

CHAPTER XXXII. 

Sakaya said: Ye cannot associate with 
all men; for many are of diverse tastes and 
habits. Nevertheless, refuse ye not all as- 
sociation because of this, for there are such, 
as are consonant with you. And such, as 
are disagreeable to you, are nevertheless 
compatible to others. 

Ormazd hath created a large field; His 
people are numerous, and there are many in 
the world like unto others in all things. 
Choose ye such, and as ye are one with an- 
other, so are ye one with the Creator. 

But most of all, will virtue and indus- 
x try and good works come into the world 
by the examples ye place before the young. 
Better is it to hide and subdue your temper 
in presence of the young, than to conquer 
a whole state by force of arms. The young 
are your angels given you by the Creator; 
and ye are their Gods. Consider ye, then, 
what kind of a kingdom ye raise up. Hap- 
piness on earth is answered by happiness 
in heaven; and that, which planted on 
earth, is reaped in heaven. 

Touching charity: I say, it is good to 
take the alms-bowl, and go about begging 
for the poor; and yet, in the same breath, 
I say, it is an evil. This I have found of 
all charity: First, it flattereth him that giv- 
eth, that he hath done a good work; sec- 
ond, charity injureth the poor, because it 
destroyeth manhood, and giveth good 
caste to a beggar. 

Though this kingdom is filled with his- 
pitals and houses of charity, it is none the 
less free from vagrants and helpless ones. 
And through ye build a thousand houses 
for the poor, and feed them withal, yet ye 



will have just as many still unprovided for, 
as when there was but one poorhouse. The 
law is unalterable in- heaven and earth, that 
whatsoever ye nurse, will grow. 

I also declare unto you: That if ye do 
nothing to benefit the afflicted, distressed 
and helpless, ye commit a worse folly, but 
ye shall find a remedy in society itself, 
whereby there shall be no rich and no poor. 
For it is also law, that where there are 
rich, there must be poor. Where there are 
masters, there must be servants. 

Some one asked Sakaya: Suppose a 
rich man do not feed the poor and help- 
less, but he give employment to a thou- 
sand servants: is he not good? 

Sakaya answered: A man may feed his 
cattle, caring for the sick ones, but still he 
treateth them as cattle. A man may em- 
ploy many cattle, but still he treateth them 
as cattle. And he who doeth this to his 
brothers and sisters has a curse upon him. 
But if he give up, what he hath, and mak- 
eth himself a father over them, to develop 
himself in manliness and wisdom and vir- 
tue, then his charities are a virtue. In 
whatsoever a man doeth, and his own self 
receiveth prestige over others, that man of- 
fendeth in the sight of Ormazd. 

Yet these things are not new in the 
world; they were the doctrines of the an- 
cients. And in this day, the Brahman 
priests preach them in languages ye under- 
stand not. Behold, I break away from 
their languages, and preach the truth in. 
your native tongue, and it soundeth new to 
you. 

I have tried, and proved in mine own 
person, and I declare unto you, that preach- 
ing alone is of little avail in the world. 
Spoken words are a breath of air. They 
blow away. Written words lie in silence; 
they are dead. I am not come to preach, 
nor to build up a new order of preaching, 
but to found a practice in life, whereby 
crime and misery and starvation may be 
averted. 

Ye shall not eat the flesh of any crea- 
ture that breathed the breath of life; nor of 
fish that lived in the water nor under the 
water. 

Ye shall bathe once every day from the 
crown of the head to the sole of the feet. 
And before bathing, ye shall say: Before 
Thee, O Ormazd, I will put away the filth 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



.OROS' RECORD 



oil 



of my body and the evil of my spirit. And 
after bathing, ye shall say: As I have with 
water washed clean the outer man, O Thou, 
Jehovih, help me to make clean my spirit. 

In the morning, when thou wakest, 
thou shalt say: Help me, O Jehovih, to 
keep my thoughts pure this day; and my 
soul full of love and tenderness. 

In the evening, before sleeping, thou 
shalt say: Whilst my corporeal body 
sleepeth, O Ormazd, help my less incum- 
bered spirit to see the ways of Thy right- 
eous judgment. 

Without purity, no man can see the 
Creator; with purity, all men can see Him, 
and hear Him. It is easier to purify the 
corporeal body than the spiritual. For diet 
and baths can accomplish the former. 
A man may be clean, as to the flesh; but 
if he have impure thoughts, he is impure in 
spirit. Whoso speaketh cruelly or un- 
justly of his neighbor, is foul in spirit. If 
he speak of the shortcomings and decep- 
tions of his neighbor, he is foul in spirit. 
Therefore, purification is the first law. 

The second law is, to strive constantly 
to do good unto others. 

Some of the multitude asked: What 
meanest thou, by doing good unto others? 

Sakaya answered: It hath been said, 
from time without end, that to help the 
poor, to give to them, to serve them, is 
good works done unto others. But I say 
unto you, this is. but half-way to that which 
is good. For ye shall not only help them, 
but shall go and teach them, how to help, 
themselves. This is doing good unto oth- 
ers. 

Repeating a certain number of prayers 
daily is good. As ye have depended on the 
priests to pray for you, I come to teach 
you, to pray for yourselves. 

The third law is: To abnegate one's 
self; being willing in heart, to sacri- 
fice one's own desires, possessions and 
opinions, for sake of peace and the good of 
the family. This is the most difficult law. 
For the selfishness of man causeth him to 
say: I have such a love of liberty. Let 
me be the dictator, and do thou my decree. 
But for this evil amongst men, they could 
dwell together in peace, the world over. 

The fourth law is: To love all men, 
women and children, as brothers and sis- 
ters. 



The fifth law is: To return good for 
evil; to give pleasure to those that give 
pain. 

To practice those things, holding all 
things in common, is sufficient unto the 
redemption of the world from darkness, 
war and evil, unto peace, light and happi- 
ness to all the living. 

CHAPTER XXXIII. 

Sakaya said: Without rites and cere- 
monies, a people is like a collection of 
musicians, with every one playing a differ- 
ent tune. Without pledges to general 
rules, a community is like a farm without 
fences, where cattle roam about, destroy- 
ing the harvests. 

Take no man or woman into the family 
till first pledged to serve the All Person, 
Ormazd, with a full and willing heart. To 
shun satan and his emissaries, be circum- 
spect. 

And when ye are come together, choose 
ye the wisest, best man, to be the rab'bah 
of the community. 

When matters come up for discussion, 
whoever speaketh thereon shall speak in 
the behalf of light, and not of darkness. 
There are two modes of discussion before 
all men: One is to impart light, and the 
other is to abuse the opponent. The first 
is of Ormazd, the second is satan's meth- 
od. In the family discussion, the latter 
method shall not be tolerated by the rab'- 
bah. After the discussion is finished, the 
rab'bah shall decree according to the light 
of the Father in him. 

Sakaya was here asked: Why not de- 
cree according to the majority vote? 

Sakaya answered: That is the lower 
light, being the light of men only. It is 
incumbent on every man in the community 
that entereth the discussion, to speak from 
the higher light, as he perceiveth it, without 
regard to policy or consequences. And the 
same law shall be binding on the rab'bah; 
and though nine men out of ten side the 
other way, yet the rab'bah's decree shall 
stand above all the rest. 

When the discussion turneth upon rites 
and ceremonies, which the community may 
adopt, or the music, or the discipline re- 
garding funerals, or marriages, or births, 
the speakers shall remember that a family 
is composed of old and young; of sedate 



542 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' RECORD 



and jocose; and that every talent is created 
for the glory of the whole, and for the 
glory of the Creator; and they shall enlarge 
their understanding, to embrace the whole. 
Remembering, it is easier to walk beside a 
bull, and turn him in his course, than to 
come against him for the same purpose. 

One man hath joy in clapping his 
hands and dancing; another, in po- 
etry; another, in singing; another in 
silent prayers. And yet, one hath no pref- 
erence over another in sight of Him Who 
created them, for they are His own handi- 
work. Consider, then, that ye provide a 
time and place in the community for all of 
these; for if ye strive to bind them, that 
are of exuberant spirits, not to dance and 
clap their hands, they will find vent in se- 
crecy and to an evil end. Herein have the 
Brahman priests been aiders and abettors 
of bawdy houses and of drunkenness and 
licentiousness; because they have sought 
to make ascetics by overthrowing your nat- 
ural talents. 

Sakaya said: Of a truth, religion is no- 
thing more or less than rites and cere- 
monies in the discipline of a community. 
As when an army of soldiers are in training 
by their captains, when certain commands 
and manoeuvres cause the soldiers to be as 
a unit in movement; so is religion in a 
community, through rites and ceremonies, 
made as a unit to carry out works of char- 
ity and harmony and love and righteous- 
ness. And every member of a community, 
that taketh no part in its religion, is like 
an idler mixing in with a company of sol- 
diers, where his presence tendeth to evil. 

It is easy to preach and call it religion; 
but the fruit must be measured by the city 
or the state, that is saved from sin. Who, 
then, of all the priests in the temple, can 
say: Here is a community saved from sin! 
If they cannot do this, then they are them- 
selves hypocrites. 

Satan calleth out from a dark corner, 
saying: Remain thou within the wicked 
world, and live as an escetic, praying 
alone, living alone. Again he calleth from 
a dark corner, saying: Thou and thy 
friends are to pure to mix with the world; 
go ye away privily, and let the world take 
care of itself. 



Now, I say unto you: Do none of these 
things; and, in the same breath, I say: Do 
all of them. Let your community remain 
within the world, that it may be a proven 
example that love, peace, plenty and hap- 
piness are possible on the earth. Let the 
community be sufficiently ascetic to attain 
the beatific state, which is the triumph of 
spirit over the flesh. 

Take ye no part in the governments of 
men, of kings, or queens. Neither fight ye 
for them, nor against them. For they live 
under the lower law; but ye shall live un- 
der the law of Jehovih as He speaketh to 
the soul of man. Neither shall ye have 
kings, nor queens. 

Lastly, and above all things, live not 
for the corporeal wants only; remembering 
ye are not born in spirit, but are in embryo, 
shaping yourselves for the everlasting life. 

Three doctrines have been, now are, 
and ever shall be on the earth; they are: 
First, the believers in the All Per- 
son, Ever Present; second, the idol wor- 
shippers', who make the Creator into a 
man in heaven, and not present but by 
proxy of certain laws; and, third, infidels', 
who believe in nothink they cannot take 
up in the hand, and weigh. 

The Faithists beget Faithists, the idol- 
aters beget idolaters, the infidels beget in- 
fidels. For these three conditions are but 
outward manifestations of the spirit within. 
The infidel is nearly devoid of spirit; the 
idolater hath one grade more of spirit; but. 
the Faithist hath spiritual ascendency. 
Since the highest best things done in, 
the world, come of the order of Faithists^ 
be ye circumspect as to marriage, that your 
offspring incline more to spirituality than 
to earthliness. 

The laws of a community must die with 
the death of the rab'bah, and new laws must 
be made by the new rab'bah, or the old 
ones re-enacted. And, in no case, shall the 
law of precedent, of things past, apply tx> 
things present. 

When a rab'bah retireth from office, it 
shall be considered the same as a death,. 
Nor shall a rab'bah have any privileges or 
emoluments, over and above any member 
of the community; nor one man above an- 
other; nor one woman above another; for 
there shall be no partiality, even in favor 
of the learned and good, over the ignorant. . 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' RECORD 



543 



For ye are all brothers and sisters; chil- 
dren of One Father, created by Him in 
His own way and for His own glory. 

CHAPTER XXXIV. 

For four years Sakaya preached, travel- 
ing from the east to the west, and from 
north to south; and wherever he went, 
great multitudes came to hear him, for 
God had so prepared them. And there 
went with him seventy-two disciples, who 
were also inspired of God, to learn the wis- 
dom of Sakaya's words. And the people 
of Vind'yu were stirred up as they had not 
been from the time of Capilya. 

After a time the priests and magicians 
of Brahma sought to condemn Sakaya, say- 
ing: The oracles and the spirits of the 
dead declare, his words are not true words. 
Moreover, if he were of the Holy Ghost, 
he could show signs and miracles. 

So God gave Sakaya signs and miracles, 
even to showing the spirits of the dead, 
who came and stood beside him whilst he 
preached; and the spirits spake also, de- 
claring Sakaya's words were of Jehovih. 
And the multitude saw the spirits, and 
heard them speak. 

Sakaya said: Of a truth, I do not come 
of the Holy Ghost; I come of the All Per- 
son, Ormazd. 

Then God gave to Sakaya power of the 
Death Cast, whereat his own spirit went 
out of his corporeal body, and stood in the 
presence of many men, and was seen by 
'them; and his spirit spake to them, and 
they heard his words. And whilst his 
spirit was thus out of his corporeal body, 
another angel of God came and inhabited 
it, and spake before the multitude. 

Now, after these signs came to Sakaya, 
he preached again, and traveled four years 
more, showing these things wherever he 
went. And on these occasions he explain- 
ed the spirit of things. And he left 
his corporeal body, and went in spir- 
it to far-off cities and country places, 
showing his spirit in regions hun- 
dreds of miles remote, and he was recog- 
nized in the communities where he appear- 
ed. For there were learned men in those 
days, and they traveled to the places named 
to see his spirit, to witness if such a thing 



could be; and hundreds and thousands of 
them testified, it was true. 

Sakaya said: Of these matters be ye 
most expert in observation; for though 
they may be proved to you, yet I declare to 
you they are as nothing. For even magi- 
cians and spirits of darkness can attain to 
the same miracles. Nor is there in such 
wonders one single virtue, that would con- 
tribute to make the world better, or hap- 
pier. 

For the spirits of the lower heavens, 
like mortals, have multitudes of doctrines; 
and, for the most part, they know nothing 
of the higher heavens, which I proclaim to 
you. 

Consider, then, what ye can do that will 
raise you in spirit; for this is resurrection. 
First, to purify yourselves; second, to do 
all the good ye can; and third, to affiliate. 
Without these, there can be no resurrec- 
tion. Or, having two of them, and lacking 
in the third, there can be no resurrection. 

To practice sharply the convictions of 
the heart; these are the working-tools of 
resurrection. To practice not what one is 
convinced of, is hypocrisy; these are like 
stones tied to the neck of a man in deep 
water. 

In all, Sakaya preached and practiced 
fourteen years; and he founded seventy-two 
communities. And all the members thereof 
were sworn against war, and against caste, 
and against idleness, and to worship only 
the great spirit, Ormazd. And he gave 
them many rites and ceremonies. 

And then Sakaya said unto the Creator: 
I know Thou hast in some mysterious way 
inspired me to do all I have done. There- 
fore, all the glory is Thine. How best, O 
Father, may these great truths be impress- 
ed upon mortals, that they will not soon 
forget Thy words through me? 

Then answered God to Sakaya, saying: 
By thy death by the hand of the idolater. 

Sakaya said: Then, O Thou, Who cre- 
atedst me alive, provide Thou my death as 
Thou desirest. 

Then God cut asunder the cord of light 
that extended to the heavenly throne in 
Paradise. And now the Brahmans 
conspired against Sakaya, and they 
went privily and poisoned his food with 
the blood of swine, killed with poison. And 
Sakaya ate thereof, not perceiving it; and 
he was taken with a bloody flux, and died. 



544 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



LORDS' RECORD 



And his disciples took his body, accord- 
ing to the custom of the country, and burnt 
it, and scattered the ashes thereof to the 
four corners of the world. And in the 
night thereafter, God sent a million angels 
into the field of ashes, with a heavenly ship 
of fire, and they took the spirit of Sakaya 
therein, and bore him up to the throne of 
<Jod. 

CHAPTER XXXV. 
HISTORY OF KA-YU. 

Thoanactus, Chief of the million loo'is 
sent by God down to the earth, to Chine'- 
ya, to raise up an heir capable of the voice 
of God, sent word to God in Paradise, say- 
ing: 

Greeting to thee, O God, in the name 
of Jehovih. Thy Son is born! And his 
name is Ka'yu. He is son of Heih, who is 
sub-king of Te'sow, and his mother, Ching- 
tsae, is not fifteen years old. 

Let us rejoice before Jehovih, who hath 
quickened into life this tree of universal 
knowledge. Also have my hosts brought 
about more than three thousand births, 
who shall become his disciples in time to 
come. 

God returned answer to Thoanactus, 
saying: In Jehovih's name all praise to 
thee and thy hosts. Thy words have been 
proclaimed in Paradise! There is great 
joy in heaven. Send the grades of mortal 
resurrection in Chine'ya., with doctrines 
and rites and ceremonies and the dominion 
of the spirits of the dead. 

Thoanactus then applied to the angels 
who had charge of the numerating and ap- 
praising of mortals as to their grades; 
and having obtained the reports, he 
made selections, and reported as fol- 
lows: Thoanactus, greeting to God, 
Son of Jehovih: Ling, sun king of 
Chine'ya, with twelve sub-kingdoms, one 
to represent every month of the year. Four 
hundred and six millions of mortals; twen- 
ty-seven hundred million angels, not fet- 
tered by angel tyrants. Of the angel emis- 
saries of the Triune God, fifteen hundred 
millions. 

Mortal grade, eight; maximum, eighty; 
minimum, nothing. Of fifties, one to sev- 
en. Of twenty-fives, one to three; of tens, 
one to one; but of seventy-fives, one to 



forty, mostly guardian births. The rise in 
the eleventh year, two; in the thirty-third, 
five; in the hundredth, twelve. 

Of rites and ceremonies, seventy-two; 
of sacrifice without compunction, thirty- 
five. Funeral rites, ninety-eight; observ- 
ances in full, forty-five. Because Chine in- 
stituted reverence for the dead, the fun- 
eral rites have become worshipful. After 
the body is put away, either buried or 
burnt, mortals read prayers on three suc- 
ceeding days, at sunset, chanting the vir- 
tue and love of the dead; and oft the spirit 
returneth to them, taking on sar'gis, and 
talking to their mortal kin. 

Perception in su'is, one to three hun- 
dred and sixty-two; in sar'gis, one to six 
thousand two hundred and eight. Of spir- 
its in sar'gis, one to thirty-three thousand. 

Of drujas, not attained to live alone, 
seven hundred million. Of these, thirty 
per cent, are in declension, and seventy in 
ascension. Of mortals in idleness, includ- 
ing Druks, twenty per cent. 

Of such as are addicted to secret evils 
and pollution, seventy per cent.; of abor- 
tionists, one-half of one per cent. 

Furthermore, thy servant herewith send- 
eth to thee, for the libraries of heaven, a 
full record of the cities and country places 
of Chine'ya; and the grade and rate of ev- 
ery mortal. 

CHAPTER XXXVI. 

Ka'yu grew up to be a man, in every 
way adapted to the work for which the 
loo'is had him born into the world by 
command of God. And dispicles were also 
born, and duly prepared by the angels of 
God to become co-workers with Ka'yu. Of 
these disciples, seventy-two were called, 
chief disciples, being six from each of the 
twelve kingdoms and sub-kingdoms of 
Chine'ya. 

God had said: Suffer not Ka'yu and his 
chief disciples to know they are instru- 
ments in my hands, nor to know that my 
angels inspire them. 

When Ka'yu was ready for the work of 
God, there came to him from the twelve 
provinces of Chine'ya seventy-two men and 
women of great learning, having heard of 
Ka'yu's wisdom. 



CYCLE OF L1KA 



LORDS' RECORD 



545 



Ka'yu said unto them: Why have ye 
come? Some gave one reason, and some 
another. 

Ka'yu said: These things are the work 
of the Ever Present. Let us conduct. our- 
selves as Gods. Let us sit in crescent, af- 
ter the manner of Gods. 

CHAPTER XXXVII. 

God established a line of light from his 
throne in heaven down to Ka'yu; by the 
presence of half a thousand million angels 
maintained he this light of heaven with 
mortals. And God so spake through Ka'- 
yu, that man might not know it was God 
speaking; for he desired to inspire men to 
self-culture, instead of relying on Gods and 
angels as heretofore. 

In the language of Ka'yu, the Great 
Spirit was called, Shang Te; but the word, 
Te, was God. 

Ka'yu said: Behold, man hath block- 
aded the road to wisdom. In one place he 
hath heaped up thousands of books of the 
ancients; in another place, he wasteth time 
in rites and ceremonies. Our labor is to 
remodel the whole, by choosing from all 
the past that which is the best. Te will 
guide us in this. 

We must, therefore, make one book, 
acknowledging the Ever Present. And this 
book must contain all the glory and beauty 
now contained in the seven hundred sacred 
books of the empire. 

And since there are four hundred and 
eighty-six books on the intermediate 
world, which no man can learn, we must 
take from them all their soundest parts, 
and make one book thereof. And in the 
same connection, there being twelve hun- 
dred and seventy books on the spirits of 
the dead, and their testimonies of the lower 
and the higher heavens, we must make one 
book thereof. And of the two thousand 
two hundred books on magic, and on con- 
juring spirits, we must make one book 
thereof. 

Of books of families, there are more 
than four thousand, which shall also be 
condensed into one book. 

Of histories, there are more than' four 
thousand books, which shall be condensed 
into one book. 



Of law books, there are more than 
twelve thousand books, and of the prece- 
dent's of judges' decrees, there are more 
than thirty thousand books. All of these 
shall be condensed into one book. 

Of provinces, and of the empire, and of 
the governors and emperors thereof, there 
are two thousand seven hundred books, all 
of which shall be condensed into one book. 
And of government, there are seven hun- 
dred books, which shall be condensed into 
one. 

Of caste, there are four hundred and 
ninety books, and of properties, three hun- 
dred and twenty, and all of these shall be 
condensed into one book. 

My work is to bring confusion to a ter- 
mination. Of doctrines and laws and rites 
and ceremonies and philosophies, or both 
heaven and earth, we have had enough. 
Even the preachers and conductors of cer- 
emonies in the temples, who proclaim 
righteousness and charity and good works, 
do not practice what they preach. They 
live in ease and luxury, but tell us to go 
give to the poor. Yea, and they threaten 
us wkh hell, if we do it not. 

Of these different doctrines, there are 
seven hundred kinds in the sacred books; 
and they all condemn the followers of the 
others. Whereupon, to escape the damna- 
tion of hell, a man would need to do sacri- 
fice more than four thousand days every 
year! This is not possible to any man. 
For there are but three hundred and six- 
ty-five days in a year! Nor is it possible 
for any man to learn all the books; nay, a 
thousand years would not suffice. 

Te forbid that I may add more to the 
burden we have already. And I know he 
will preserve in our abridgement all that is 
good in the whole of them. Since we can- 
not live according to the multitude of doc- 
trines and philosophies, we must abridge 
them within the scope of man. Neither 
must we cut any of them off entirely, or 
we lead the followers thereof into rebellion. 

Since we have so many law books and 
so many judges' decrees, all of which a 
man must learn before he can become a 
judge of the court, we must cut them down 
into a few simples, but sufficient to cover 
the rules of discretion in judgment. Better 
is it to throw the judge of the court partly 
on his own judgment and responsibility, 



546 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' REC6RD 



than for him to be a blank as to judgment, 
simply reading the decree of a preceding 
judge. 

And as to the religion of this man, or 
that man; behold, each, in his own order, 
performeth his rites and ceremonies and 
sacrifices and prayers, like a trained horse 
in a showman's circle, going round and 
round, and knowing not the meaning there- 
of. 

I am not sent into the world to destroy 
what is, or what hath been.; there are 
enough evil men to do that. I am sent to 
cull the harvest, and to gather choice seed 
from what now is, and what hath been. 
The seed I plant is selected, not to be 
planted in the ocean, nor on the moon, nor 
in a far-off country; but to be planted in 
Chine'ya, and in Chine'ya I will plant it. 

CHAPTER XXXVIII. 

The old foundations were: 

To dwell in families with a father to 
each and with chief fathers over them. 

As a father is responsible for the behav- 
ior of his own child, so was the rab'bah re- 
sponsible for the behavior of his family; so 
t was the chief rab'bah responsible for his 
family of rab'bahs. 

The responsibility of a child to its nat- 
ural father; of a man to the rab'bahs; of 
the rab'bahs to the chief rab'bahs, was: 

The child shall be taught to love, re- 
vere and obey its father and mother; the 
man to love and revere the rab'bah; the 
rab'bahs to love and revere the chief rab' 
bahs. 

Now this doctrine of the ancients, hand- 
ed down from generation to generation, 
hath proved to be a good doctrine. 

The Creator taught the ancients these 
principles. The Creator sent His high an- 
gel, Te, down to mortals to teach them. 

The fundamental doctrines of the an- 
cient sacred books were: 

To worship none but the Creator. 

To have no images nor idols. 

To keep the day of the change of the 
moon as a sacred day, and to do no work 
on that day, but to practice rites, proces- 
sions and ceremonies, for the glory of the 
Creator. 

To love the Creator above all else. 

To love one's parents next to Him. 



To kill no living creature maliciously or 
for food. 

To tell no lies, nor to steal, nor to covet 
anything that is another's. 

To do unto others what we would 
that they should do unto us. 

To return good for evil. 

To feed and clothe the stranger, the sick 
and helpless. 

To be not idle, but industrious. 

To say no ill of any man nor woman nor 
child. 

To practice the highest wisdom one 
hath. 

To respect all people, as we desire to be 
respected. 

If a man do these things, when he dies 
his spirit is born into the air of the earth, 
which is the intermediate world, whether it 
sojourneth until sufficiently purified, and is 
reverential to the Creator; and then it is 
taken up by His angels to dwell in the 
higher heavens forever. 

But if he do not these things? 

His spirit will be bound in hell after 
death; he will become a victim for the de- 
light of demons. 

CHAPTER XXXIX. 

Ka'yu said: Such is the base the an- 
cients have given into our hands, but who 
could follow them into detail? 

In the ancient days our country was 
sparsely settled; families were a good con- 
venience. But, behold, the land is full of 
people. I have not to deal with a few scat- 
tered barbarians. I have to deal with a 
learned people, who have scarcely room to 
stand. I am only one man; and ye, but 
seventy-two. 

Of ourselves, we can do nothing. Shang 
Te hath shaped the times to our hands. 
Whether we live to see it, it mattereth lit- 
tle. The time will surely come, when the 
emperor will be obliged to destroy the 
books of the ancients. Let us therefore 
take the cream of them, and provide for 
their preservation while we may. 

Ka'yu then divided up the labor 
amongst his seventy-two disciples; appor- 
tioning the books of the ancients amongst 
them. And so great was the wisdom and 
learning of Ka'yu, that in twelve days 
time some of his disciples were ready with 
their reports to begin. And from these 



. CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' RECORD 



547 



reports Ka'yu dictated, and the scribes 
wrote down his words. And when a com- 
mittee presented a revision before Ka'yu 
that he even knew it before it was read in 
the Council. And he dictated thereon, 
making the necessary alterations. After 
which, the subject was given to the scribes 
to re-write out in full. 

Now the whole time of the first sitting 
of the Council was eight and a half years. 
But so great was the wisdom and mem- 
ory of Ka'yu, that he called out from the 
missings of his disciples sufficient to re- 
quire yet two years' more deliberation. 

And there were thus produced, from 
the lips of Ka'yu, twenty books, which con- 
tained the digest of upward of eighteen 
thousand books. Nor had any man in all 
the world ever done one-tenth so 
great a feat of learning. The scribes wrote 
six copies for every one of the disciples; 
and when they were thus provided, and 
were ready to depart, Ka'yu spake to them, 
saying: 

To know that one hath done the highest 
thing within his power, this is the highest 
satisfaction. For e what is any man at 
most, but an agent of the Most High? To 
be true to one's own highest idea, is this 
not serving the Father? To be neglectful 
in such conviction, is this not the sickness 
of all the learned? 

If those beneath him honor him, then it 
is no honor to him. If those above him 
honor him, then it is a reproval of his 
other deeds. But if he honor himself, he 
hath great honor indeed. 

To eat fruit and herbs and rice, these are 
the purest diet, but only a fool would starve 
rather than eat flesh. Rites and ceremonies 
are useful, but even these a man had better 
dispense with, than to go to war for them. 

To rest on the ancients only, this is 
great folly. To honor the ancients only, 
and to believe that they alone received rev- 
elation, these are the extremes of a foolish 
understanding. 

To remember that the Creator is Ever 
Present, and with as much power and love 
and wisdom to-day as in the ancient days, 
this is wisdom. 

To try to find some good thing one 
can do, this is creditable. But to do no- 
thing good, because one cannot do it in 



his own way, this is execrable. He who 
findeth a good work to do, and doeth it, 
hath much satisfaction. But he should not 
exult therein; for he hath only done his 
duty. 

Two kinds of men I have found: those 
who are predestined by the Gods to accom- 
plish a certain work, and those who are 
born with no predestination. The first are 
erroneously called the higher, because they 
are at the head of great undertakings; but 
they are nevertheless but instruments in 
the hands of the Gods. The others, who 
are born without any particular work, never 
can understand the former. 

To be born near enough to the Light 
to see it, and believe in it, and have faith 
in it, this is a great delight. To be so far 
from the Creator that one cannot believe 
in His Person and Presence, this is pitia- 
ble. 

To one man, celibacy is the highest life, 
because he hath joy in his Heavenly Fa- 
ther. But to one who hath not this joy, 
celibacy is a great punishment. The socie- 
ty must admit both conditions. There is 
no mean betwixt these two; therefore, both 
must be provided for. Those who desire 
celibacy, approach the termination of the 
race; those whose desires are the other 
way, are of a breed not so far on. There 
need be no quarrel betwixt them. The des- 
tiny of both must be completed some time. 
When a country is sparsely settled, 
those of extremes can go and live aside; 
it is nothing to govern such a state. Or 
to proclaim extreme doctrines before them. 
But when a country is full of people ; 
two extremes and the mean must dwell in 
proximity. It is not an easy matter to 
govern them wisely. 

Whatever people can dwell together in 
great numbers on the smallest piece of 
ground, and yet have peace and plenty, 
such a people are the highest of all peoples. 
Where an extreme doctrine cannot be 
carried out, it is better to have a less ex- 
treme doctrine. People, like a drove of 
sheep, are much inclined to follow a lead- 
er. Herein, politicians and lawyers and 
judges run the state into war. 

To legislate in such a way, that leaders 
cannot lead the multitude into evil, this is 
wisdom. Were all leaders dead, the people 
themselves would not be very bad. Yet it 



548 



CYCLE OF L1KA 



LORDS' RECORD 



is wrong to take any man's life; for life 
is something man hath no property in. 
Life resteth with Jehovih only; it is His. 

Before the ignorant, and before fools, 
we speak by commandment. Chine'ya hath 
passed that age; our books must be per- 
suasive. To dictate to the learned, is to 
cast one's treasures into the fire. By ask- 
ing them questions, we can often 
lead them. Coaxing, with effect, is 
greater than dictation unobeyed. We 
preach to the rich man, that he should give 
all he hath to the poor, and he walketh 
away, giving nothing. When we say to 
him: Give a little, he doeth it. Herein, 
the higher doctrine is the lower, and the 
lower doctrine is the higher, because it 
hath potency. 

The ancients said, the first best thing 
was to love the Creator; I think so too. 
But when a philosopher asketh me to prove 
that the Creator is a Person, and is worth 
loving; I am puzzled. To accept Him as a 
Person, and as All Good, without criticism, 
this I find giveth the greatest happiness. I 
have seen men who would pull the Creator 
to pieces and weigh His parts to know His 
worth, but such men end in disbelief in 
Him. One such man who accomplished 
Shy good in the world, I have not found. 
He is in the presence of goodly men like a 
fly that delighteth in breeding maggots ; 
pretty enough in himself, but a breeder of 
vermin in the state. ; 

Yet ne who saith : Let the evil practice 
evil, because the Creator created them, is of 
a narrow mind. Or, if he saith: Jehovih 
sent the rain-storm to destroy the harvest; 
or, Jehovih sendeth fevers to the dirty city: 
such a man lacketh discretion in words and 
judgment. But he who perceiveth that 
man is part of the creation, in which he 
must do a part of the work himself, or fe- 
vers will result, such a man hath his un- 
derstanding open in regard to the Father. 

Betwixt the too much casting of all 
things in Jehovih's face, and too little be- 
lief in Him, lieth the mean, which worketh 
the perfection of man. To try to find the 
Creator with love and adoration, instead 
of with a dissecting knife; this leadeth man 
on the highest road. To trust in Him, 
wherein we strive to do our best; this is 
good philosophy. To lie about idly, and 



not plant our fields, trusting in Him; this 
is great darkness. 

A wise man, perceiving the defects of 
the society, will not censure it, but turn to 
and find a remedy. It is for such purpose 
the angels of the higher heavens raise up 
great men in the world. I have seen many 
people in many different kinds of worship, 
and they go through their parts in the sac- 
rifice without perceiving the spiritual idea 
of the founders, and they are neither better 
nor worse for it. The infidel, with little 
discretion, seeing this, abuseth all the doc- 
trines, but a wise man looketh between 
them to find the good which others lost 
sight of. 

To find all the beauties in a man or 
woman, or in their behavior: this is God- 
like. 

I have seen the criminals being whip- 
ped, and I have said to myself: Only by 
a mere circumstance of birth, the wrong 
ones are being lashed. Otherwise, they 
had been governors of the states. I once 
helped a bad man to elude his pursuers, 
and he escaped whipping, and he reformed 
himself. Since then, I have been a con- 
vert to great leniency. The time will come 
when bad men will not be whipped nor tor- 
tured, but be appropriated to benefit the 
province; to shape our laws for such inter- 
pretation, is the beginning of wisdom in 
the government. 

To appropriate all men to the best use; 
this is the wisest governor. To punish a 
bad man for vengeance sake; this is evil. 

If a man slay my sister, I raise my 
sword up before him, that he may run 
against it, but I strike him not. To reform 
a man is better than to kill him; to lock up 
a bad man where he can do no harm, is 
sufficient for the state. 

I have watched the soldiers in drill, 
and I said: This is a beautiful sight! For 
I saw the colors of their clothes, and the 
poetry of their manoeuvres. But I watched 
them again, and I said: This is wicked! 
For I looked into the object of the drill, 
and I beheld blood and death. 

This I perceive : There were a few wise 
men among the ancients, as wise as the 
wisest of this day. But, to-day, there are 
more wise men than in the ancient times. 
Doth this not lead us to believe that a time 
will come, when all people will be wise? I 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' RECORD 



549 



should like to see this; it would settle 
many vexed questions. The seers tell us 
the soul of man is immortal; moreover, 
that they have seen the spirits of the dead. 
I tried for many years to ascertain if this 
were true, but I could not discover. Nev- 
ertheless, I said: It is a good doctrine; I 
will appropriate it. The Creator must have 
created man immortal. 

The priests have appropriated this doc- 
trine also. Moreover, the ancients say, the 
good are rewarded in heaven, and the evil 
punished in hell. The people have been 
told this, and yet they will not be good. 
Chine said: To deny one's self, and to la- 
bor for others with all Our wisdom and 
strength: this is the highest doctrine. 

I saw a man on a mountain, calling to 
his flocks in the valleys, but they under- 
stood him not, and came not. Then he 
came mid-way down the mountain, and 
called, and the flocks heard him, and un- 
derstood, and they went up to him. It is 
easy to plan out high doctrines, but not so 
easy to give an efficient doctrine. He, 
who is mid-way, is the most potent. I 
have observed, that all peoples have higher 
doctrines than they live up to. 

The boast of a government is not of its 
value and goodness, and its fatherly care of 
the helpless, but of its strength in arms, 
and in its power to kill. To reach the gov- 
ernment, and make it virtuous and fatherly. 
This can be done only through the family, 
then to the hamlet, then to the province, 
and then to the empire. But this cannot be 
done without sincere men, who would faith- 
fully practice these doctrines. 

That ye are sincere, it is proved in your 
being with me; that you are virtuous and 
discreet, with propriety, is proved in your 
giving ear to my words. Yet, in this, how 
can I be sincere? I say, my words, when, 
in fact, I feel that no words I utter before 
the Council, are my words in fact. Is not 
this true of all good men? Wherein they 
are mouthpieces for the Gods, or for the 
circumstances surrounding them? We 
open our mouth and speak, but where do 
our ideas come from? 

When the sun shineth on the field, the 
herbs come forth; is it not the Creator's 
light falling upon us, that causeth our ideas 
to come forth? And if we keep away the 
grass and the weeds, we receive a profita- 



ble harvest. I would that all men would 
write a book on the Creator. Thought, 
directed in this way, will not go far from 
the right road. To feel that He is with 
us, hearing all our words, seeing all our 
deeds: is this not the surest foundation to 
teach our children? To make them sin- 
cere, and to behave with propriety, what 
is so potent as faith in the Creator, and in 
His Son, Shang Te? 

CHAPTER XL. 

The following are the books of Ka'yu: 

Of the Creator, the Great Spirit, Eolin, 
and His Creation. 

Of the Plan of Corporeal Worlds, the 
sun, earth, moon and stars, and their 
sizes and motions, and their power to hold 
themselves in their places, by the velocity 
of rotation. 

Of Light and Heat, and thunder and 
lightning. 

Of the Unseen Worlds; the upper and 
lower heavens; the habitations of the Gods. 

Of the Intermediate World, or lower 
heaven, which resteth on the earth. 

Of Shang Te, who hath charge of this 
world and her heavens. 

Of False Gods, and their kingdoms in 
the lower heavens; and their power to 
catch the souls of men after death. 

Of Hell, where the spirits of bad men 
are tortured for a long season. 

Of the Highest Heavens, the Orian 
worlds, where the spirits of mortals dwell 
in everlasting bliss. 

Of the Administration of Gods and 
drujas over mortals; how nations are built 
up, or destroyed by the Gods. And these 
ten were such as in after years were re- 
corded as the Books of Great Learning, 
and were made by the Sun Emperor The 
Standard of the empire. 

The following books of Ka'yu were such 
as were called, The Lesser Scholarships: 

Ch'un'Ts'en, being the simples of prob- 
lems. 

The Perfect Man, or Highest Repre- 
sentative. 

The Mean Man. 

Purification; to purify the flesh; and to 
purify the spirit. 

Divination; consultation of spirits; leg- 
erdemain; sargis; su'is; power of the spir- 
its to give man dreams and visions. 



550 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS' RECORD 



Maxims, propriety, sincerity, rites and 
ceremonies, reverence to age, respect to 
the dead. 

Love; to love the Great Spirit; to love 
the parents; to love discipline and indus- 
try; marriage; marriage for earthly sake 
being wicked; marriage for spiritual re- 
demption of the world by generations of 
holier men and women. 

Book of histories, of Gods and Saviors, 
of kings and emperors, of wise men, of law- 
givers, of the rise and fall of nations. 

Book of Holies, in six parts: Omnipo- 
tence, Worship, Eolin's Judgments, Pro- 
gression, Reverence to the priests, and 
Obedience to the sacred commandment. 

Book of Gems, also in six parts: Prov- 
erbs, Poetry, Morning and Evening Devo- 
tion, Association, in the family, the com- 
munity, the state and the empire, Confes- 
sion of Sins, and Praise and Rejoicing in 
Eolin, the Great Spirit. 

Such were the twenty books of Ka'yu, 
which were the pith and cream of the 
eighteen thousand books of the ancients, 
together with all the light of the latter 
days added thereto. And in not many 
years, these also became the standard 
books of the Chine'ya empire. And the 
Council of Ts'Sin'Ne came to a close, and 
the disciples of Ka'yu departed to their re- 
spective provinces, taking copies of the 
books with them. 

And, during all these years of labor, 
Ka'yu knew not that he was inspired. 

And God looked upon the empire of 
Chine'ya, and he said: Behold, my son 
shall write other books, but less profound. 

And God inspired Ka'yu to write: 

A Book of Family Sayings; a Book of 
Anelects; a Book on Government; a Book 
on Life; a Book on Punishment; and a 
Book on Inventions. And these were all 
the books Ka'yu wrote. 

Nevertheless, his fame became so great 
that many men followed him about, even 
when he traveled into distant provinces, 
and they watched for words he spake, and 
they wrote them down, and these were also 
made into books. 

CHAPTER XLI. 
HISTORY OF JOSHU. 
Because Pharaoh persecuted the Is- 
raelites, Moses put a curse upon Pha- 



raoh. Now, after hundreds of years 
in the lower heavens, behold, Pha- 
raoh was cast into hell, and then into cha- 
os, and none but Moses could deliver him. 
Moses descended from the higher heavens, 
and delivered Pharaoh, and he provided 
Pharaoh a new name, Illaes, and sent him 
back to the earth to labor with the Israel- 
ites, in order to fulfill his shortness in 
righteous works. Illaes, therefore, became 
a willing volunteer, and many angels with 
him. 

And these angels inspired seven hun- 
dred Israelites to separate themselves from 
all other people, and to go and live by di- 
rection of the angels of Jehovih. More- 
over, the angels inspired these people to 
call themselves Es'eans, as commanded by 
Moses in heaven. These Es'eans were 
pledged to Jehovih, to have no king nor 
earth-ruler, save their rab'bahs. And they 
dwelt in communities and families of tens 
and twenties and hundreds, holding their 
possessions in common, and doing, in all 
things, after the manner of the ancient 
Faithists. 

Illaes had said: Because I persecuted 
the Faithists, and raised up my hands 
against them and against Jehovih, I was 
instrumental, in part, for their fall. Now 
will I labor with them, to re-establish them 
in purity and love. 

And Illaes and his angel hosts made 
the camps of the Es'eans their dwelling 
places, watching over these few Israelites, 
day and night, for hundreds of years, and 
guarded them from all the warring hosts 
of angels, belonging to the armies of Baal 
and Ashtaroth, and to the Triune God, 
Looeamong, and his hosts. And, though 
the Es'eans lived in great purity of body 
and soul, yet they were evilly slandered by 
the world's people. But Jehovih prospered 
the seed of the Es'eans, in holiness and 
love, for many generations. 

Then came Gafonya, chief of the loo'is, 
according to the command of God, to raise 
up an heir to the Voice of Jehovih. And, 
in four generations more, an heir was 
born, and named, Joshu, and he was the 
child of Joseph and his wife, Mara, of the 
Es'eans. And, because of the extreme 
youth of Mara, the child was of doubtful 
sex, whereupon the rab'bahs said, the child 
was an iesu. 



CYCLE OF LIRA 



LORDS' RECORD 



551 



The time of the birth of the child was 
three days after the descent of a heavenly- 
ship from the throne of God. And many 
of the Es'eans looked up and saw the 
ship, and they felt the cold wind of the 
higher heavens fall upon the place and 
about the tent, where the child was 
born. And they said, one to another: Je- 
hovih remembers us. So the messengers 
from heaven tarried until after the child 
was born, acquainting Illaes of the time 
ahead when Moses with his hosts would 
come to complete the deliverance of the 
spirits of the Eguptians, whom Moses had 
colonized in atmospherea. 

Illaes said: Thank Jehovih, I shall once 
more look upon Moses' face. 

When the birth was completed, the an- 
gels of heaven re-entered their star-ship 
and hastened back to Paradise, God's hea- 
venly seat. 



CHAPTER XLII. 

When Joshu was grown up, and ready 
for his labor, God provided a host of one 
hundred million angels to make a line of 
light from his Holy Council down to the 
earth; and they so made it. And God pro- 
vided a guardian host of two thousand mill- 
ion angels to protect the line of communi- 
cation; for it was war times in heaven and 
earth. 

These were the doctrines taught 
through Joshu: 

Thou shalt keep the ten commandments 
of Moses. 

Thou shalt not engage in war, nor abet 
war. 

Thou shalt eat no flesh of any animal, or 
fish, or bird, or fowl, or creeping thing 
which Jehovih created alive. 

Thou shalt dwell in families, after the 
manner of the ancient Israelites, who held 
all things in common. 

Thou shalt have no king nor queen, 
nor bow down in worship to any, save thy 
Creator. 

Thou shalt not call on the name of an- 
gels to worship them, nor counsel with 
them on the affairs of earth. 

Thou shalt love thy neighbor as thy- 
self, and do unto thy fellow man as thou 
wouldst have him do unto thee. 



Thou shalt return good for evil, and pity 
to them that sin. 

The man shall have but one wife, and 
the woman but one husband. ' 

As the children honor the father, so will 
the family be blessed with peace and plen- 
ty. 

Remember, that all things are of Jeho- 
vih, and ye are His servants, to help one 
another. And as much as ye do these ser- 
vices unto one another, so serve ye Jehovih. 

Behold only the virtues and wisdom in 
thy neighbor. 

Call not on the name of any God or 
Lord in worship; but worship Jehovih 
only. And when thou prayest, let it be 
after this manner: 

Jehovih, who rulest in heaven and earth, 
hallowed by Thy name, and reverent 
amongst men. Sufficient unto me is my 
bread. Make Thou me steadfast, to shun 
temptation, for all honor and glory are 
Thine, worlds without end. Amen! 

To visit the sick and distressed, the 
helpless and blind, and to relieve them; to 
provide for the widow and orphan, and 
keep thyself unspotted before men; these 
are the way of redemption. 

All men are the children of One Father, 
who is Jehovih; and whosoever chooseth 
Him, and keepeth His commandments, is 
His chosen. 

Thou shalt not wed but with the chosen. 

Contend not with any man for opin- 
ion's sake, nor for any earthly thing. And 
let thy speech be for others' joy. 

Preserve the sacred days of the rab'bahs; 
and the rites and ceremonies of Emetha- 
chavah. 

For three years, Joshu traveled amongst 
the Israelites, preaching these doc- 
trines. And there were gathered in 
groups, of tens and twenties and fif- 
ties, more than two thousand Israelites, of 
the ancient Order of Moses, who became 
steadfast followers of the teachings of 
Joshu. But, because of persecution, by the 
apostate Jews, they kept themselves aloof 
from the world, having signs and pass- 
words, whereby they knew one another. 

First the God, Baal, and after him, 
Thoth, inspired the kings and rulers, 
against these Faithists. And they proved 
them by commanding them to eat flesh, 
even swine's flesh, which, if they re- 



552 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



LORDS RECORD 



fused, was testimony sufficient before the 
laws, to convict them of being enemies 
against the Gods. So, they were scourged, 
and put to death, whenever found. 

Now, Joshu went into the city of Jeru- 
salem to preach, and in not many days 
thereafter, he was accused of preaching Je- 
hovih. And he was arrested, and whilst 
being carried to prison, he said: 

Ye hypocrites and blasphemers! Ye 
practice all the evils of satan. Behold, ye 
shall become vagabonds on the earth. 

At that, the multitude cast stones upon 
him, and killed him! And God sent a ship 
of fire, and bore his spirit to Paradise. 



Forty years after Joshu's death, a false 
God, Looeamong, with millions of angel 
emissaries, obsessed the inhabitants of all 
those countries and plunged them into war 
and anarchy. The Faithists were scattered 
to the four ends of the earth. 

Looeamong, the false God, now falsely 
called himself Kriste. And he raised up 
tribes of mortal warriors, who called them- 
selves Kriste'yans. The doctrine of these 
warriors was, that knowledge, which im- 
plieth general education, was the best pre- 
ventive against crime and misery. Neither 
understood any man in those days that the 
word Kriste had any reference to a man or 
person. 




KOSMON 



CHAPTER I. 

When Jehovih brought the great solar 
serpent along the road of vorkum, in ether- 
ea, behold, Earth passed into the light of 
the Arc of Kosmon. 

To his etherean Gods and Goddesses, 
Jehovih said: Behold, in twelve genera- 
tions the dawn of Kosmon will reach 
Earth. 

In former cycles, I sent My loo'is to 
raise up certain mortals, through whom I 
could reveal My commandments unto oth- 
ers. In Kosmon, behold, I shall not raise 
up any great leader- forth; My light shall 
fall upon thousands and thousands. Of 
many varieties of talents shall be My 
chosen in that day. For which reason, 
when ye have descended to Earth, ye shall 
appoint loo'is unto millions of mortals, 
and they shall raise up a numerous off- 
spring unto Me. 

And it shall be born with them to see 
and feel, that a new era is at hand; and they 
shall be born skeptical to the ancient doc- 
trines, Gods, Lords and Saviors. Never- 
theless, they shall be the best of men, and 
wise and charitable and most considerate 
of the opinions of others. 

And when the western continent is in- 
habited across from east to west, all the 
earth will be circumscribed with men of 
wisdom and learning. 

And the year of the circumscribing shall 
be the beginning of Kosmon. And the 
heavens of the earth shall be opened, and 
the angels thereof shall descend to the 
earth, and make themselves known to mor- 
tals; even through those whom your loo'is 
shall have born unto the work. 

And from that time forth, the old order 
shall decline, to be put away forever; and 
the new order shall take its place, to tri- 
umph over all the earth. Thereafter, shall 
the virtue of preaching come to an end; 
but practice, in fulfilling good works and 
living up to My commandments, shall be 



all that will avail for the establishing of 
My kingdom on earth. 

Go ye forth, My beloved; fulfill the sea- 
sons of Earth, that My people may rejoice 
in their lives. 

CHAPTER II. 

Far up in the vault of the firmament, in 
the etherean realms of Jehovih, the Voice 
of the Almighty had spoken. The Orian 
Chief of Huamat and Balis called unto the 
Gods and Goddesses on the plains of Thes- 
salona, Nadab and Vraghaoma, called for 
ten million volunteers. Chonling, Son of 
Jehovih, Chief of Fabi'wotch'osi and Balis, 
said: Come, O ye Gods and Goddesses, 
with me down to the red star; Earth nears 
the Arc of Kosmon. Come and think of 
mortals; inspire them with holier thoughts; 
make them comprehend the light of Je- 
hovih. 

Then spake Thetchaya, Chieftainess of 
Huamat and Dikaddonas, saying: I will 
lead you to the rising red star, the little 
traveling Earth. Behold, she cometh our 
way; she will cross the Arc of Kosmon in 
four hundred years. 

Litabakathrava, Orian Chief of Yoham- 
ma, of two hundred thousand years, God of 
Ithwan, forty thousand years, said: Be- 
hold, my otevan, my fire-ship, goeth that 
way on her cruise of ten thousand years. 
Come with me, my otevan will carry a 
thousand million; I will halt and leave you 
on Earth with mortals. 

Che Sin, Chief of Ahwentaba, of sixty 
thousand years, called a host of his swift 
messengers, ten thousand. Unto them he 
said: Provide an arrow-ship of great ve- 
locity, and go ye in the former roadway of 
Earth, in the regions whither she traveled 
thousands of years; proclaim it in the ether- 
ean heavens, the corporeal world, Earth, 
nears the time of Kosmon. Mortals on 
Earth are to be illumed, and made to com- 
prehend the glorious plans of the heavens 



554 



KOSMON 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



of the Almighty. In four hundred years, 
the Father's kingdom is to be founded on 
the red star. 

Bornothetes, Chief of Guaga, called his 
Holy Council, in the palace of Nu, gardens 
of Lasanitizi. And they looked across the 
firmament, far off, to see the slow rolling 
Earth, where mortals still groped in dark- 
ness; whose people could not read the un- 
seen heavens. 

Then spake Atavia, Goddess of Peroni- 
tus. She said: O, I remember Earth! 
The form of her lands changed by Aph, in 
the Arc of Noe, twenty-four thousand years 
ago. Hi'ata, Goddess of the Flying Wing, 
was there, and I with her, in her airavagna. 
O, it is a glorious world. I will be one 
to go thither, for the four hundred years. 

Atavia was the first volunteer; but now, 
the names enrolled like sparks of fire, 
flashing in the firmament. Presently the 
numerators sent up rockets, the signals, 
that the ten million had responded to Je- 
hovih's call. 

These, then, were the etherean king- 
doms that contributed. Jaison in the 
swamps of Loe; Rodus, of the mountains 
of Kembak; Tisain and Carwa, of the 
plains of Tassahacha; Amos, the Chosone 
Resort, and Sagamma, the kingdom of Me- 
thiasi, Goddess of Tuesta. 

Bornothetes sent swift messengers to 
these kingdoms; some were half a million 
miles distant, and some lay amidst nebu- 
lous forests, thousands of miles high and 
broad. And he called them, to assemble in 
Piatya, under the arches of Geddis, to con- 
sult together, and prepare for the journey. 
So, when the hosts were assembled in Pia- 
tya, Jehovih appointed Thotagawawa as 
God of the cruise and mission. 

And Litabakathrava ordered his fire 
ship to be brought to Piatya, where it no 
sooner arrived than the hosts of the mis- 
sion, the ten million, went aboard, as 
guests and companions to Litabakathrava's 
fifty million traveling visitors to worlds, 
ten thousand times further on. 

And now began the trumpeters and the 
es'enaurs in songs of praise. Then 
upward, outward, rose the airavagna, the 
ship of fire, whose photosphere, as to size, 
was like a world; rose up higher and high- 
er, heading for the far-off red star, that 



coursed in the serpent's coil, a million and 
a half miles a day. 

Two thousand million miles off, lay the 
red star, Earth, seen by the magnifying in- 
struments of the Gods, seen in its little 
orbit round the sun, of half a thousand mill- 
ion miles. Four hundred million miles a 
day, sped the airavagna through the ether- 
ean worlds; like a flash of light shot forth 
the ship of Litabakathrava, Orian Chief of 
thousands of years, coursing the etherean 
heavens of Jehovih! A God that, but to 
look on a corporeal world, knew the grade 
of her mortals and angels, even as in his 
flight he passed on. 

Five days and nights traveled the hosts 
of the emancipated heavens, to reach 
Earth; traveled through thousands and 
thousands of etherean worlds, of forests 
and swamps of ji'ay, and of nebula, and a'ji r 
and regions of light, and mountains and 
rivers and plains; countless places, inhab- 
ited and uninhabited in the great expanse 
of Jehovih's kingdoms. Then they came to 
Chinvat, and there halted to survey Earth 
and her unruly heavens, where the four 
false Gods proclaimed themselves mon- 
archs of the universe! A day they rested, 
in a day they measured the grade and 
standing of Earth's mortals and angels, 
and then they descended straight to Para- 
dise, the place of God, Jehovih's Son. 

CHAPTER III. 

Kabalactes said: My most high Holy 
Council, Lords of heaven and earth, give 
ear. This day, my scouts on the borders 
of Vridat, my suburban kingdom in Tua, 
saw a light descending, like a world on fire. 
Consternation came upon my dutiful sub- 
jects, fearing some foreign God menaced 
their liberties. To appease them, Hathav, 
my Lord in- command, despatched hither 
messengers, to know my will. But when 
they arrived, others came also, but from 
the heavenly plateau, Itussak, my northern 
kingdom, with the same ominous tale. 
Then others, from other kingdoms in my 
heavenly regions. Some have seen the 
light but faintly, some have seen it bril- 
liant as a pillar of fire. Whilst here within 
our well secured heavenly seat, it hath been 
only as a falling meteor. Speak, my Lords, 
know ye more of this? 



KOSMON 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



555 



Maithivi, Lordess, said: All Highest 
of Gods, be considerate of womanly fears, 
and detract accordingly from my magnified 
expressions. To me, this descended star is 
some far-off ally with God, Jehovih's wor- 
shipper in Paradise. For by the course of 
the falling light, it landed thither. Is not 
this some stratagem to re-establish Jeho- 
vih, Whom we have chased from earth and 
heaven? 

Fiebkh, Lord, said: It is not a year 
since some other foreign God descended to 
Paradise. Behold, this last one cometh 
from the same angle beyond Chinvat. Per- 
adventure, the former was but a scout sent 
from some heavenly realm, which hath 
now answered with this mighty airavagna? 

Sin Loo, Lord, said: It was said of old: 
When the heavens clear, look out for Jeho- 
vih's worshippers, the infidels against the 
reigning Gods. Now, behold, in the very 
season when a'ji flieth away, and our souls 
are on the eve of rejoicing, here cometh an 
ominous meddler with our slaves, to do us 
mischief. 

Thus spake many Lords. And in 
Kabalactes' Holy Council of one million 
members, were many who had been long 
promised preferment and higher dominion 
than to legislate for another's kingdom; 
and they had received nothing worthy of 
the name, for more than a thousand years. 
And these had a small spark of hope left, 
that some external disaster to Kabalactes' 
extensive kingdoms would open the way 
for rich adventures in their own behalf, 
with millions of slaves to do them rever- 
ence. So, even whilst their tongues upheld 
their monstrous idol, the false Budha, their 
own souls were equally perfidious. 

When many of the High Council had 
spoken, then again Kabalactes went on: 
My marshal in chief shall select a host a 
million strong, and provide them an arrow- 
boat; to command which I appoint Tean- 
vettas, general, to go to Paradise in my 
name, greeting, to learn the will and pleas- 
ure of this adventurous God that cometh to 
the vanquished kingdom of Jehovih's Son; 
to offer him the freedom of my kingdom 
for a monthly visit. Perchance, he hath 
never seen a city built of gems and pre- 
cious stones; and the palace and throne of 
the all highest God. The which to look 



on may abash him from undertaking some 
foolish scheme. 

Now, accordingly, from the false Bud- 
ha's magnificent heavenly kingdom, there 
went an arrow-boat, the most precious 
gem ever built in these heavens. And in it 
a million hosts, arrayed as very Gods and 
Goddesses in splendor. Whilst Teanvettas, 
with his shining crown and blazing jewels,, 
bespake his generalship as from a rich 
kingdom. Two hundred thousand slaves 
worked the boat, and many of these had 
been in earth-life Budhist priests, and were 
now serving their apprenticeship of two 
hundred years, in order to have the privi- 
lege in future time of crawling on their 
bellies to see the throne of the false Bud- 
ha, and see their all highest ideal God. 

CHAPTER IV. 

Whilst Ennochissa and His High Coun- 
cil were assembled in the palace of Eta- 
shong, there came messengers from no less 
than thirty and six of Ennochissa's sub- 
kingdoms, alarmed, and with magnified ac- 
counts of the fire-ship seen descending to 
Paradise. And each and all of these mes- 
sengers told his tale before the. throne; 
expressing the fear of the sub-Lords' king- 
doms, and praying to know Ennochissa's 
will and pleasure. 

Now, here, even as at Haractu, the 
Lords of the High Council spake express- 
ive of their hopes and fears. And here 
also were many Lords, who had been long 
promised exaltation, but never received it. 
And they pretended heartfelt loyalty to 
Ennochissa, the false Brahma, even whilst 
with secretive hope they prayed some ad- 
venturous God might come and break up 
Ennochissa's kingdom, feeling, that in the 
spoil they would profit in heavenly king- 
doms of their own. 

Then spake Ennochissa, saying: In the 
name of the Holy Ghost, I thank you all. 
And for your loyalty make myself your 
humble God to do your wills and pleas- 
ure. 

First, then, that our unapproachable 
kingdom shall ever remain the all highest 
heaven, where ye shall rest secure forever, 
I will prove most alert to learn the designs 
of this visiting God. Behold, I will send 
thither an arrow-boat, with a million Lords. 



556 



KOSMON 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



arrayed in splendor, and every one crown- 
ed; and over them, Kosimathara, Lord in 
chief. In my name and in the name of the 
Holy Ghost, my hosts shall greet this God, 
and invite him hither on a monthly visit. 
Perchance he hath no knowledge, as to 
what the all highest God is. 

So, an arrow-boat was made, the most 
magnificent ever seen in Eta-shong; and in 
it the million Lords with jeweled crowns 
embarked, commanded by Kosimathara, 
Lord in chief, and they sped off for Para- 
dise also. 

CHAPTER V. 

When the Lords of the High Council, 
of Kalla-Hored, the heaven of the false 
Mohammed, had expressed their hopes and 
fears as to the fire-ship descending to Par- 
adise, Gabriel said: 

Who here feareth, let him speak; who 
here feareth not, let him speak also. I will 
know my Lords and High Council. Be- 
Tiold, I am a warrior God. I profess not 
peace, like the Triunes, and practice war. 
I profess war, and practice it. 

I made Looeamong. When he chose 
to have himself established, as Kriste, I es- 
tablished him. When he denied me jus- 
tice, I exposed him in heaven and on the 
earth as false. When he refused me the 
heavenly kingdom which he promised, I 
took it, and established myself. I made ye 
Lords of my High Council; I drove away 
from the earth a thousand false Lords, and 
broke up the oracle-houses of mortals. 

What, then, have I to fear from a for- 
eign God, coming to the heavens of the 
earth? Behold, these heavens belong to 
such as are born of the earth. Let the for- 
eign Gods return to worlds where they 
were native born. If this God hath come to 
battle me, in behalf of Jehovih's God, let 
him come. Till he or I shall be cast into 
hell, let the battle wage. Did I not the 
daring Goddess, Ashtaroth, send to hell? 
and the mighty Baal after her? And all 
the Argos'yan Gods; and the Gods of 
Roma silence and cast into torments? 

Now, behold, I will send an arrow-boat, 
a million strong, to Paradise, and banter 
this adventurous God to give me battle. 
Better try our respective powers, as to who 
shall go down, than to live in uncertain 



surmises as to such a God's business in an- 
other God's heavens. 

Then let my marshal provide an arrow- 
boat, armed with shafts of fire and water, 
and choose a million warriors for this ad- 
venture. Over them, my warrior Lord, 
Justin, shall hold command. And he shall 
go to Paradise, greeting, in the name of 
God-Gabriel, to know of the coming God 
by what right he hath ventured near my 
holy kingdoms. 

So, Thoth despatched a boat to Para- 
dise. 

Even as at the heavenly kingdoms of 
the other three false Gods, so was the 
alarm in Hapsendi, capital of the heavenly 
kingdom of Looeamong, who had falsely 
assumed to be Kriste. After Looeamong's 
hundreds of messengers, from his various 
sub-kingdoms, had made their reports as 
to the appearance of the great light that 
had descended to Paradise, and of the con- 
sternation of the sub-Lords, then spake 
the High Council before the throne of Loo- 
eamong. Some magnified the omen as a 
menace; some suggested doubling the 
number of the standing armies of Looe- 
among's heavenly kingdoms, and yet oth- 
ers suggested numerous other things. Af- 
ter thousands of them had spoken, then 
spake Looeamong, saying: 

Wise and Holy Lords and Gods of the 
all highest heavenly kingdom, great have 
been your wisdom and suggestions. Now, 
therefore, by the light of the Holy Ghost, 
hear ye my decrees: 

I will send unto this stranger God, who 
hath come to Paradise, a fire-boat a million 
strong, and every one shall go crowned 
and arrayed with jewels and diadems, and 
weapons of warfare; and they shall have 
shields and figure-heads of tau and aries 
as symbols of my attributes. Behold, I 
send unto him as a lamb of peace, but I 
send also the spear and the sword. 

In command of the fire-boat and the 
hosts thereof I appoint Ajudus, whom I 
will crown with the mitre and the triangle 
and the cut ring. And this shall be my 
message to the stranger God: 

In the name of the Holy Ghost and of 
the Son, greeting and love. Behold the 
kingdom of Hapsendi, the all highest holy 
heaven, is open, and free unto thee. The 
all highest God and ruler of the greatest 



KOSMON 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



557 



heavenly kingdom would know thy will 
and pleasure. And if it be thy purpose to 
engage in a good and holy work, behold, I 
have employment for thee, for thy profit 
and honor and glory. And, for whatso- 
ever thou canst accomplish for the resur- 
rection of my people, shall receive a just 
reward from my hand. 

Accordingly, a fire-boat of excellent 
workmanship was provided, and equipped 
gorgeously and in splendor. And into it 
the million hosts, crowned as Lords, and 
commanded by Ajudus, embarked, and set 
sail for Paradise, the heavenly place of 
God, Jehovih's Son. 

To work the fire-boat there were four 
hundred thousand slaves, composed of the 
spirits of such as had been on earth, popes, 
archbishops, bishops, cardinals, priests, 
and others who were serving their bondage 
of two hundred years, for the privilege of 
ultimately crawling on their bellies through 
the arena of the palace, and to approach 
near enough to look upon Looeamong, 
their supposed all highest God and Savior. 

CHAPTER VI. 

After the Light of Jehovih came to God, 
saying: Go, provide mortals to cross the 
ocean, to build up the western continent, 
God ceased striving to redeem the four 
heavenly kingdoms of the four false Gods, 
but directed his energies, to regain a broad- 
er earth-anchorage for Jehovih's kingdom 
on earth. 

So, God sent down from Paradise, one 
Melkazad, crowned as Lord, with ten 
thousand angels in his command to inspire 
migration to Guatama, and to make the 
country known to the eastern peoples. 

And Melkazad, with his hosts, came and 
ascertained the grade and choice of mor- 
tals for such purpose. And Melkazad and 
his hosts did raise up Columbo, a mortal 
from Genoa, together with crews sufficient 
in number, whom they inspired to go with 
ships to the westward, across the ocean, in 
search of the lay and plan of the world. 
And Columbo, thus inspired of God, 
through his holy angels, did discover the 
western continent, not knowing he was un- 
der inspiration. 

It was shortly after this, that the angel 
hosts from etherea came down to the 



throne of God in Paradise, to labor with 
him in providing for the approach of the 
kosmon era. Now, whilst God and his 
angels in the heavenly kingdom of Para- 
dise were rejoicing because of the success 
of Columbo, which had been reported by 
Melkazad to God, behold, in that same 
time the etherean ship of Litabakathrava 
arrived. 

And God received the ethereans with 
great rejoicing; and, after due ceremonies, 
God declared a recreation of three days, 
that the angels of Paradise might rejoice, 
before Jehovih, because of the a'ji of so 
many hundreds of years was breaking 
away, and because of Columbo's success, 
and because of the coming of the ether- 
eans. Great, indeed, were the rejoicings, 
the praise, the music and glee of the thou- 
sand million angels of Paradise. 

At the end of three days, the trumpet 
called the Holy Council of God, to resume 
labor before the throne. Then, the mar- 
shals from various places in God's king- 
doms called their students and laborers, 
and withdrew to their several departments. 
The Holy Council resumed their .places be- 
fore God, and God ascended the throne, 
and order reigned. 

Then, God called the ethereans, Chon- 
ling, Thetchaya, Che Sin, Bornothetes, 
Atavia and Thotagawawa, to come and 
honor the throne. Whereupon, these visit- 
ing Gods did as commanded. 

Then spake God, saying: What trib- 
ute, O Jehovih, can I pay to Thy Son, Lit- 
abakathrava? For the light and glory of 
his presence provide Thou unto me and my 
Holy Council. 

Thereupon, all the Holy Council, one 
million, rose to their feet, and then all the 
Gods rose up also. God said: Come thou, 
honor my throne. 

Then, Litabakathrava walked up, and 
sat on the throne of God. When he was 
seated, God commanded all the rest to be 
seated. And thereupon, Litabakathrava 
rose up, and said: 

Thou hast given me great honor, O 
God of Earth and her heavens. May the 
light of the Person of Jehovih dawn upon 
all the kingdoms of heaven and earth. 

Yet, O God, be not puffed up with the 
hope of sudden success. I have seen many 
corporeal worlds arrive at the kosmon era. 



558 



KOSMON 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



But it is like a new birth, brought forth in 
pain, and with much labor. 

Thou hast yet several generations of 
mortals to be born ere kosmon come. The 
four dark corners of the lodge will bound 
upon thee, to destroy the work of thy hand 
and of Jehovih's. The four false Gods will 
fight thee to the death; only till they go 
down in hell, can Jehovih's kingdom come. 

On all the corporeal worlds it is ever 
the same; certain four false Gods rise up 
to possess the corporeal worlds and their 
heavens. They will profess truth, but prac- 
tice falsehood; profess peace, but practice 
war. They will incite mortals and angels 
to all manner of evil for sake of thwarting 
Jehovih's Person and proceedings. 

And when thy people profess Jehovih 
and not them, behold, they will inspire oth- 
ers to fall upon thy people to destroy them 
or to torture them with great suffering. 
^Nevertheless, Jehovih shall triumph over 
-all the earth and in the heavens of the 
.earth. Men and angels shall be free, and 
none shall make them afraid. 

Litabakathrava ceased, and sat down, 
and suddenly a great shining light gathered 
above his head, and a Voice spake out of 
the light, saying: 

All the earth is Mine, and the waters, 
and the air above the earth. These are 
members of My body and Person. Man I 
created not to possess them, but to dwell 
thereon and therein. Unto all men alike 
gave I of these inheritances; nor to any 
man a part, nor to any nation or people 
a part. But with liberty and privilege to 
draw sustenance and support therefrom. 
All men are My children; into conscious 
being created I them alike, privileged unto 
all the earth, and the air in the firmament 
above the earth. Brothers and sisters cre- 
ated I them; of various tribes and races 
and colors and sizes, but nevertheless, in 
Mine own way I created them, every one 
for a glory in the way I made him. 

In the early days, I kept certain races on 
certain continents and places, that I might 
unfold him in the glory for which I design- 
ed him. But in kosmon, I open the gates 
of the oceans, and the seas, and the rivers, 
and I say unto all My people: Come forth, 
behold your brethren; go ye into this coun- 
try, and into that, and learn wisdom from 



that which I have proved in the family of 
My house. Be ye profitable unto one an- 
other, in the experience and practice of My 
hand upon all peoples. 

In one, tallness; in another, shortness; 
in one, sound teeth and bones and well- 
formed limbs; in another, sagacity; in one, 
a dense population and well-tilled lands; in 
another, plain food and long life; for in 
kosmon, man shall go abroad into all coun- 
tries, one nation with another; and they 
shall profit by wisdom, to bring forth a 
new race with all the glories selected from 
the whole. 

Neither shall man be bound more by 
the doctrines of this God or that God, or 
by this Savior or that Savior, nor by any 
of the ancient books, nor by inspirations 
of the olden times. But he shall know how 
to obtain inspirations from My Gods, and 
My heavens for his own good, and for his 
own wisdom. 

Neither shall one nation cry out, hea- 
then; nor pagan. Behold, My mark is 
upon all those that engage in war, or who 
maintain warriors; or forts and arsenals, 
and use weapons of death; and upon all 
who kill, and eat flesh of anything I cre- 
ated alive; for all such are pagan and hea- 
then in My sight. 

My Gods shall minister unto all nations 
and peoples to these ends, to bring them 
together in peace and harmony, to open 
the ports of those that have been seclusive 
nations and peoples, to persuade them to 
put away war and destruction, to make na- 
tions and peoples acceptable to one an- 
other. 

The Voice of the Light ceased, and all 
about the throne of God was like a sea of 
golden fire. The time for the departure of 
Litabakathrava and his hosts had arrived. 
Accordingly, he went down, and sat on the 
foot of the throne, and then God descend- 
ed, and took his hand, saying: Arise, Ori- 
an Chief, Jehovih's Son, and go thy way. 
The Father calleth thee and thy people. 

So Litabakathrava passed down into the 
arena, and saluted on the sign, Dawn of 
Kosmon, and God answered in the sign, 
Fortified in Jehovih's name! 

Litabakathrava and his hosts then went 
into the otevan, the mighty ship, with its 
photosphere, large as a continent. And 
presently, whilst the es'enaurs and the 



ROSMON 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



559 



trumpeters chanted, Praise to the Almigh- 
ty, the vessel started from its foundation, 
and rose slowly upward, applauded by the 
thousands of millions assembled in Para- 
dise. 

CHAPTER VII. 

Now, behold, just as the ship of Lita- 
bakathrava was starting forth, the fire-boats 
of the four false Gods arrived in Paradise. 
And the hosts, in the boats, were discom- 
fited and angry, because their boasted au- 
dacity was thwarted from having an inter- 
view with the Orian Chief and his hosts. 

And they of the fire-boats saw one an- 
other, and were incensed and jealous, and 
puzzled to know what to do. Neither would 
any of them confer with God, Jehovih's 
Son, for they had been thus commanded by 
the respective false Gods. Now, therefore, 
after the fire-boats had cruised about a 
while, displaying their splendor, three of 
them departed, leaving only the fire-boat of 
Looeamong's hosts remaining. 

The captain of this boat had said: It is 
not sufficient that I come hither, and find 
the foreign God departed. I will ascertain 
what hath been said and done, and what 
these Jehovih worshippers are up to. 

So, he went aside, and made his boat 
fast, and he and his hosts, arrayed in splen- 
dor, went and talked with the inhabitants 
of Paradise, inquiring, amongst other 
things, the cause of such great rejoicing 
amongst the people. And one of the peo- 
ple, being unguarded, said: Behold, it is 
well with us that we rejoice; God, Jeho- 
vih's Son, hath inspired a new mortal an- 
chorage. He hath taken Columbo across 
the ocean, and showed him a new country, 
where only the Great Spirit, Jehovih, is 
worshipped. 

The captain of the fire-boat thus discov- 
ered one of the plans of God for redeeming 
the world; but the captain disclosed not 
his joy, though presently, he and his hosts 
went aboard and departed, making all 
haste to Hapsendi, the heaven of Looea- 
mong, the false Kriste. 

On the day after Looeamong learned 
this matter, he sent a war-ship with seven 
million warring angels to stir up a mutiny 
amongst mortals in countries whence Co- 
lumbo sailed. And, by inspiration, Looea- 



mong's warrior angels did set the rulers of 
Spain against Columbo, and had him cast 
in prison, thus breaking the chain of in- 
spiration betwixt Columbo and the throne 
of God. 

In the meantime, Looeamong's angels 
made all haste to have mortal ships and 
shipmasters of their own king cross the 
ocean to countries Columbo had discover- 
ed. Thus did Looeamong's mortal worship- 
pers cross over to Guatama, and, with 
them, Looeamong landed and stationed in 
Guatama one thousand million angel war : 
riors, sworn laborers to the false Kriste, 
to establish him in these great lands. 

When God saw how evil had already 
taken root in these countries, behold, he 
was doubly resolved to obey Jehovih's 
commandment in regard to the inquisi- 
tions. In which Jehovih had said: 

Permit Looeamong to carry out the in- 
quisitions, to put to death whomsoever he 
will. For behold, the spirits of those he 
slayeth in Roma and Venice and Napla and 
all other cities and countries will remain 
in their places with vengeance on their 
souls. And the time shall come when thou 
shalt withdraw thy protecting angel hosts 
from these cities; and these angels of ven- 
geance will come forth and visit their 
wrath upon this false God and his king- 
doms. 

So, God was strong in resolution to let 
evil take its course; and in all countries 
where the false Kriste had been afflicting 
mortals, God withdrew his protecting 
hosts, leaving those countries and those 
heavens to take their course. And the an- 
gels of vengeance began to battle other 
angels, and to obsess mortals unto battle 
also, and all against the false Kriste. 

Thus opened the door for dissolution 
in Looeamong's doctrines, which was to 
end in the entire overthrow of the 
Trinity, and of the Holy Ghost, and of 
Looeamong also, under his false name. 
Thus did war begin again on earth, and in 
Looeamong's heavens, about himself and 
his doctrines. 

To make matters worse for himself, he 
established angel emissaries in his earthly 
kingdom, in Roma, to inspire the popes to 
cause mortals to be scourged, imprisoned 
and put to death for heresy, and these 
things were done in the name of Kriste and 



560 



KOSMOJST 



CYCLr OF LIKA 



the Holy Ghost. And no man could ex- 
press a word, or thought, reflecting upon 
Looeamong's earthly doctrines or govern- 
ment, without falling a victim to mortal and 
angel emissaries of this false Kriste. Ver- 
ily were many of these mortal cities ob- 
sessed by angels of darkness and evil. 

In course of time, behold, mortals, in- 
spired by vengeance-loving spirits, rose up 
against Looeamong's popes and cardinals, 
and protested against the abnegation of 
man's right to think for himself; and these 
people called themselves, protestants, pro- 
'fessing that there were two Kristes, a true 
one and a false one, and, moreover, that 
they themselves were worshippers of the 
true Kriste. Nevertheless, they were also 
under the inspiration of evil angels, for 
they fell to work burning and flaying their 
opponents also. 

And God saw that now was the time to 
inspire the western nations of Uropa to 
great learning and to science and to philos- 
ophy and to western migration. So, God 
sent angels to teach man once more the tel- 
escope and the art of printing; and to in- 
spire man to question the spiritual powers 
of kings. 

Thus was Looeamong's power in great 
measure locked up in managing his disrupt- 
ed kingdoms, whilst God's holy angels pur- 
sued the road of righteous development for 
the coming time of kosmon. 

CHAPTER VIII. 

When God saw that Looeamong's war- 
rior angels had come upon the earth re- 
gions, discovered by Columbo, God with- 
drew, saying: Behold, I will use this testi- 
mony unto Jehovih and against this false 
Kriste, in time to come. For I will with- 
draw my angel hosts and give up, for a 
season, the central lands of Guatama. And 
mortals in these lands shall not prosper in 
peace, nor righteousness, nor in learning, 
nor in science, nor inventions, nor 
in anything good. For Looeamong's 
warrior angels shall obsess them, and they 
shall build up and then destroy, and the 
people of Aliattes, the Yodopans, shall be 
destroyed, and the I'huans and their cities 
shall be ruined. 

So God withdrew from the central 
lands of Guatama, and it fell under the do 
minion of the warrior angels of Looea- 



mong, the false Kriste, and they became 
warriors and destroyers; nor rose they in 
peace, nor wisdom, nor in anything good 
under the sun. But they lived as pilferers, 
debauchees, warriors, murderers and idol- 
aters of the false Kriste. 

God had said: I will go to the north- 
ward, to the western coast of Uropa, and 
my angel hosts shall inspire another people 
to migrate to Guatama. And it shall 
be proved, in time to come, that 
they whom I shall take across the 
ocean, shall inherit Guatama; and they 
sha'* prosper in peace, virtue, wisdom, 
learning and inventions. And man, in after 
time, shall witness the difference betwixt 
the people of Looeamong's possessions as 
compared with mine own in the northern 
regions. 

And so, God sent his angel hosts 
amongst the factions of western Uropa, 
and inspired mortals to rise up, and depart 
out of that country. And they that were 
inspired of God crossed over the ocean, 
and landed in Guatama, and they named 
the place of their landing Plymouth Rock, 
saying: For God's sake and for liberty, 
help us, O Thou, our Creator. But they 
said not: For Kriste's sake, nor for the 
sake of the Holy Ghost. 

Nevertheless, Looeamong's angel war- 
riors had accompanied them across the 
ocean; and, when they beheld what mor- 
tals had done, they departed, by means of 
the mortal ships returning to Uropa, for 
these angels were too low in grade to cross 
the ocean without the presence of mortals. 
And, when they had come to the other 
side, they reported to Looeamong's angel 
generals what had been done by mortals, 
in Guatama, and these angel generals sent 
a dispatch to Hapsendi, Looeamong's hea- 
venly kingdom, to learn his will and pleas- 
ure. 

'Looeamong sent back word as follows: 
Send thou a sufficient inspiring host 
to obsess all mortals who have thus pos- 
sessed Guatama, lest the country fall into 
Jehovih's hands. Spare them not; possess 
all, or ruin all, in the name of Kriste and 
the Holy Ghost. 

God had inspired, for sake of Jehovih, 
certain other people in northwestern Uro- 
pa, who were Faithists in heart, but not 
practicers of the rites and ceremonies, call- 



KOSMON 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



561 



ed Quakers, to migrate to Guatama, to 
shape the destiny of the inhabitants to 
oeace and virtue and wisdom; and these 
Quakers were covenanted to Jehovih, to 
never engage in war, nor to quarrel, nor to 
contend with any man for opinion's sake. 

So Looeamong's obsessing angels fell 
upon the colonies of settlers in Guatama, 
and obsessed them to flay and to burn 
and to exterminate the Quakers, for 
Kriste's sake, as mortals said. And the 
angels of Looeamong inspired mortals to 
lie in wait for any such other Faithists as 
might migrate to Guatama. 

God had said: Suffer these hardships 
to my people to be recorded, for in kosmon 
they shall be testimony of the power of 
heaven on mortals. 

CHAPTER IX. 

Now, after the etherean angels came to 
Paradise, in answer to God's prayer for 
help, God divided his hosts unto all the 
earth, and the heavens thereof, not for sud- 
den triumph by violent means, but to the 
end that man should, in after years, com- 
prehend the wisdom and glory of Jehovih. 

So, God made divisions of his hosts, 
four divisions for the earth, he appointed 
Eezen, Khan, Ah Cho and Lakash, to go 
to hada, the heavenly kingdoms of the four 
false Gods, to establish a guard, thence to 
the earth. And God gave to each of them 
one thousand million hosts to labor with 
them. And when these were all selected, 
and had come before the throne of God, 
he said unto them: 

Because the four false Gods have ac- 
complished all the good they can accom- 
plish, and are now only leading mortals 
and angels down into darkness, I shall pres- 
ently cut them and their supplies off from 
the earth. In that day and hour there will 
be danger in heaven. For there are more 
than three hundred million spirits in the 
hadan heavens, who were put to untimely 
deaths, in order to establish the false Brah- 
ma, the false Budha, the false Kriste, and 
the false God-Gabriel. 

Go ye, then, to your places, and pro- 
vide yourselves in wisdom and strength. 
Guard well these spirits, for once they con- 
gregate for vengeance' sake, they will cast 
their Gods in hell. 



They answered with one voice: Jeho* 
vih's will and thine be done! And they 
saluted, and departed. 

God then called up the other seven of 
the Holy Eleven: Yopes Leo, Likar, Vad- 
huan, Ardolfus, Yutemis, Zahakee and 
Yedna, together with their seven thousand 
million hosts, and he said unto them: 

Behold, the eleven kingdoms which 
have been preparing for more than two 
thousand years shall now be opened up, 
and established, with roadways to the king- 
doms of the four false Gods. For the time 
is near at hand when I shall cast them out, 
and remove them and their kingdoms away 
from the earth, and forever. 

That a revolt may be prevented, ye shall 
provide places and vessels for the removal 
of their drujas, of which there are more 
than twenty thousand million. Go, then, 
to your respective places, and be ye ready 
by the time of my command. 

They answered unanimously: Jehovih's 
will and thine be done! And they saluted, 
and departed also. 

After this, God appointed twelve of the 
etherean Gods and Goddesses as a Sever- 
ing Host, and he allotted to them six thou- 
sand million angels to work with them, 
when the time should require them. To 
these twelve Gods and Goddesses, God 
said: 

When the time is at hand, ye shall 
take your six thousand million hosts 
and cut off all the earth supplies on which 
the four false Gods and their kingdoms 
subsist. And their kingdoms shall fall in 
anarchy and ruin. Their drujas shall be 
liberated; and they shall fall upon their 
Gods' kingdoms, and despoil them utterly, 
and cast their false Gods into hell. Go, 
therefore, to the places whither I have pro- 
vided, as my messengers will show you. 
and make ready in all things, for the time 
and the signal of my hand. 

So, these twelve Gods and Goddesses sa- 
luted and departed for their labor also. 

Now, as yet, none but the Holy Council 
and the Gods and Goddesses knew the 
plans of God, Jehovih's Son, nor the ob- 
ject and labor provided unto the hosts sent 
thus forth to all parts of the earth and the 
hadan heavens. Nevertheless, God had 
commanded the officers to maintain lines 
of light with his throne in Paradise, so that. 



562 



ROSMON 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



concert of action would manifest all around 
the earth, in the same moment of time. 

Now, of the fire-boats and crews sent 
by the false Gods to Paradise, only one, 
Looeamong's, returned to tell the tale of 
chagrin and disappointment in not meeting 
the etherean God, Litabakathrava. As for 
the other three, fitted out so extravagantly, 
with a million hosts, crowned and adorned 
in such magnificence, they concluded to go 
away, each into a different heavenly region, 
and establish three independent kingdoms 
of their own. 

Many of these angel hosts had been 
promised, for hundreds of years, that they 
should have sub-kingdoms, with millions 
of slaves, but had ever been put off, until 
they were discouraged. Accordingly, they 
resolved to appropriate their outfits in 
founding thrones and capitals. 

So, the fire-boat sent out by Ennochissa, 
returned to his heavenly kingdoms, but 
not to Ennochissa. And that of Kabalac- 
tes went to his regions, but not to Kabal- 
actes. And that of Gabriel returned to his 
regions, but not to him. And they all pro- 
ceeded much after the same manner, which 
was, after having founded a throne, they 
went about in the fire-boat, enticing sub- 
jects to come to their places. 

And ere their respective masters 
were aware of it, they had heaven- 
ly kingdoms, with hundreds of millions of 
slaves. When the three false Gods, Enno- 
chissa, Kabalactes and Gabriel, heard of 
the proceedings of their traitorous subjects, 
they, separately, declared war against the 
pretenders. 

In not many years, therefore, from this 
small beginning, great wars engrossed 
these three false Gods' kingdoms on every 
side, but wholly interior to each one's 
kingdom. Which enabled God, Jehovih's 
Son, to pursue the two great plans for the 
redemption of mortals and angels. These 
plans were, to provide protection to the 
Ka'yuans of Chine'ya, the worshippers of 
Jehovih, and to found the country of Guat- 
ama free from the grasp of Looeamong. 
So, as soon as God had provided a suffi- 
cient protecting host of angels for the 
Ka'yuans, he devoted his energies to Guat- 
ama and her heavens. 



CHAPTER X. 

Whilst the heavens of the earth were 
thus stirred up with war and with antici- 
pated misfortunes and strange doctrines, 
there came to Paradise, before the throne 
of God, a host of seven thousand angels 
who had been victims of the inquisitions 
under the inspiration of Looeamong, pray- 
ing an audience with God. God command- 
ed them to approach and speak. 

And those who were leaders then came, 
and spake; and this is the substance of 
what they said: 

Most Holy God. Jehovih's Son, greet- 
ing in lov», in pity and in anger! We are 
not Gods, nor pure, nor holy. Therefore 
pity us. 

We are not happy, and feel that in our 
struggles to find truth we have been un- 
fairly used. Therefore, pity us. 

We were born in mud-holes, and have 
soiled garments. Therefore, have compas- 
sion on us. We are in search of clean wa- 
ter. Therefore., guide us. We have such 
strength as a mad wolf might be proud of, 
Therefore, use us. 

We have not such mercy and forgive- 
ness as becometh Gods. Therefore, give 
us rough work to do. Such work, in fact, 
as would require no one to split a hair to 
discern right or wrong. 

Not that, we desire to glut ourselves in 
vengeance, against the false Kriste. One 
step higher, O God. As such a matter, if 
an innocent lamb were pursued by a wolf, 
give us to rush in, and save the lamb! 

Now, behold, the rumor hath come to 
us, that thou wilt establish Guatama free 
from the dominion of Gods and Saviors. 
And now, O God, we are so far on 
the road to purification, that we can no 
longer catch the false Kriste's angels, and 
hurl them into hell. Nevertheless, we are 
not so fastidiously pure, but we would 
seize his evil-working angels, and hold 
them by the throats till thou hast thy 
great country founded safely for Jehovih's 
kingdom. 

If, therefore, thou canst appropriate 
seven thousand angels in some loose and 
unscrupulous corner, to do thee good ser- 
vice against the tyrant and remorseless 
Looeamong, behold, we stand before Je- 
hovih and thee, to do thy will as thou may- 
est command. 



KOSMON 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



563 



God said unto them: My brothers and 
sisters, in the name of Jehovih, I welcome 
you. What ye can do, that shall ye do; 
nor shall any but yourselves judge your- 
selves. 

As far as ye have the light of the Fa- 
ther, so shall ye serve Him. To Him only 
are ye responsible; for His triumph shall 
be the redemption of heaven and earth. 
Behold, Looeamong will surely inspire a 
war, both in Guatama, with mortals, and in 
the heavens thereof, with the angels. 

My angel hosts shall inspire the mortals 
of Guatama to found a government free 
from the dominion of Gods and Saviors. 
War will follow. 

Now, behold, I have appointed Yotahi- 
za, as my Lord for those regions. Repair 
ye thither with my messengers who know 
the way, and Yotahiza will receive you in 
my name, and give you work in justice, 
truth and wisdom. 

The army of the inquisition then salut- 
ed, and departed, and they came to Yota- 
hiza's heavenly station with the colonists 
in Guatama. 

CHAPTER XI. 

Since three hundred years, the loo'is of 
God's allotment to the earth, had been pro- 
viding the generations of men unto the 
coming work of God. And through these 
had God, Jehovih's Son, raised up one 
thousand two hundred men, to be directly 
under the inspiration of the second resur- 
rection, for establishing an emancipated 
government for mortals. And these one 
thousand two hundred men were raised to 
grades above sixty, and some of them to 
eighty. 

Chief of these men raised up by God, to 
establish the foundation of Jehovih's king- 
dom with mortals, were/the following, all 
of whom were above grade eighty: Paine, 
Jefferson, Adams, Franklin, Carroll, Han- 
cock and Washington. 

Into the hands of these seven men did 
Jehovih, through God, His Son, place the 
leadership of the mortal hosts; and they 
were under the guidance of Jehovih's Lord, 
Yotahiza. 

And the Lord caused Paine, to proclaim 
the new doctrines, as against Looeamong 
and the sacred books, on which the inqui- 



sitions had been carried out. These, then, 
were the doctrines of Paine, inspired by 
the Lord, Jehovih's Son: 

One, the Creator, Who is Almighty, 
matchless in wisdom, truth, power and un- 
ity of purpose; the author of all things, on 
the earth. 

That the soul of man is immortal and 
everlasting, and shall ultimately attain to 
peace and joy in the heavens of the Al- 
mighty. That, according to man's good or 
evil deeds, words, thoughts and actions 
whilst on earth, even so shall he inherit in 
heaven, light or darkness, joy or unhappi- 
ness. 

That all the world is my country; to do 
good, my religion. 

That man hath a natural right, above all 
kings, priests and sacred writings, to serve 
his Creator in his own way. 

That this is an age of reason, in which 
all men should be inspired, to read and 
think, and judge with their own judgment 
and not through any priest or church or 
Savior. 

That the doctrine of a Savior is unjust; 
that no honest man should accept another's 
dying for him. 

That the so-called sacred books are not 
the writings of the Creator; that their mul- 
tiplicity of defects prove them to have been 
manufactured by corruptible authors. 

That, in practice, the said sacred books 
have been used by unprincipled priests to 
promote wars, 'inquisitions, tyranny and 
destruction. 

That man should rise up in his might to 
embrace his Creator, by the practice of 
good works, and by promoting brotherly 
love toward all men; and by charity and 
independence elicit the protection, the 
pride and the glory of the Almighty. 

The doctrines of God, Paine proclaimed 
publicly; and they were printed, and cir- 
culated amongst the inhabitants of Guat- 
ama. And they fell into the hands of such 
men and women as had been previously 
prepared by God to receive them. And 
these people applauded the new doctrines 
to so great an extent that the colonies re- 
pudiated the Divine right of kings to gov- 
ern without the consent of the goverr ~d. 

Looeamong, the false Kriste, pex reived 
the design of God, Jehovih's Son, and im- 
mediately sent down to the earth, to Guat- 



564 



KOSMON 



CYCLE OE LIKA 



ama, two thousand angel warriors, to over- 
throw Paine's doctrines, and to precipitate 
the colonies into war against the home 
government in western Uropa. So, war in 
Guatama, on earth, and in the heavens 
thereof, set in, mortals against mortals and 
angels against angels. 

The Lord, Yotahiza, now assigned the 
army of the inquisition, the seven thousand 
angel volunteers to be the protecting hosts 
to the seven leaders of the Guatama revolt. 

Besides these angels, who were generals 
and captains of the hosts, there were of 
non-commissioned angel officers, two thou- 
sand seven hundred and eighty-four, who 
had also been martyred as to earth-life, by 
scourging, and by the rack, and by being 
pulled in quarters, and by being burnt, who 
were distributed amongst the mortal ar- 
mies of soldiers. And these angel officers 
had angel armies and companies, discip- 
lined and quartered in the camps of the 
mortals with the soldiers. 

Such, then, were the inspiring hosts, 
varying in number from six million to 
twelve million, who remained with the sol- 
diers of the republic during the war, day 
and night, inspiring them to fortitude, and 
manipulating them to give them health and 
strength and endurance. 

God spake to the angel commander of 
these hosts, saying: Though thy hosts in- 
spire these mortals to liberty as to earthly 
things, yet thou shalt also take advantage 
of this opportunity to sow the seed of 
higher spiritual light amongst them. Re- 
member, then, the sermon of the All High: 
And with this shall thy hosts forever in- 
spire mortals. 

For seven years the war lasted, and dur- 
ing all the while, the earthly commander, 
Washington, was under the guardianship 
of the commander of the angel hosts, and 
one thousand angels, day and night. And 
though he was shot at, and in many ways 
sought for to be destroyed, these angels 
saved him, even catching in their hands the 
bullets that were fired at him. And in like 
manner were many other mortal leaders 
and privates in the war protected and saved 
from harm by the angels. 

And yet all this while the angels of 
Looeamong fought on the other side, en- 
deavoring to pull away the guarding an- 
gels, and so make the mortal leaders vul- 



nerable. But these angels were lower in 
grade and less potent, and, withal, not so 
enthusiastic, for they had not suffered mar 
tyrdom. 

And the republic was established. 

And God caused the commander of the 
angels who had accomplished this work, 
to call his hosts together, that they might 
hear the voice of Jehovih. And there thus 
assembled eighteen million three hundred 
and forty thousand in number, in an ex- 
temporized heaven above the Haguan 
mountains, where the chiefs of Paradise 
had already prepared an altar to Jehovih 
for the occasion. Of the higher grades 
from other plateaux, were here assembled 
in the sacred circle, seventy million angels, 
to promote the Voice. Of which matters 
God had previously sent word to Aronu, 
that a chain of light might be made to the 
upper heavens. 

Now, when the angels of the inquisition 
were thus assembled before God, and duly 
placed by the marshals, God caused the 
light to be lowered, so that they might re- 
joice rather than suffer because of its bril- 
liancy. And when God sat on the throne, 
and the es'enaurs had chanted unto Jeho- 
vih glory for having founded the republic 
of mortals, a ray of light was seen descend- 
ing from the upper realms, and it extended 
down to the throne of God, where now, on 
all sides, the illumination was in splendor. 
Presently, just above the throne, a single 
star of light was formed, and out of this 
came the Voice of Jehovih, saying: 

Peace, My beloved. The way is open: 
liberty to the conscience of mortals is 
founded on earth. Ye have lifted them 
above the bondage of Gods. Because ye 
were cut down before ye had finished your 
labor on earth, I allowed ye to come back 
to mortals to complete your own aspira- 
tions. Because you united with one anoth- 
er in companies and phalanxes for a good 
work, instead of working single-handed, 
ye are now admitted into the second resur- 
rection of My kingdoms. By the light of 
My throne are ye this day absolved from 
the bondage of earth and first resurrection. 

The Voice ceased; but God spake unto 
his marshals, saying: Provide ye an aval- 
anza sufficient for the ascension of these 
my beloved angels, and take them to the 
fields and forests of Attusasabak, in the Or- 



KOSMON 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



565 



theon plateau, where I have already pro- 
vided them ample residences. And, after 
they are delivered, grade them, and give 
unto them suitable instructors and compan- 
ions, that in due time they may become 
Brides and Bridegrooms to Jehovih, and 
ascend to the emancipated kingdoms in the 
etherean worlds. 

Suffer them now to pass before the 
throne, that they may receive badges from 
the Most High! For these will be to them 
a connection with the exalted kingdoms. 

The marshals then filed them past the 
throne, and there fell, from the heavens 
above, upon them, badges of immortal 
light, unchangeable. And the builders in 
Yutis brought them an avalanza, and they 
went therein, to the sound of the singing 
of three million voices in Jehovih's praise. 
And when they were within, God again 
spake to them, saying: 

Ye go now far off from the earth. But 
as ye freed this land unto itself, and now 
go away, behold, I will call ye back again 
before another hundred years, to free the 
people from the doctrines and creeds of the 
ancients. No God nor Lord nor Savior 
shall be enforced in this land! Till then, 
Jehovih will be with you all, and give you 
joy and happiness! 

Thereupon, the officers of the avalanza 
set it in motion, rising upward. And the 
musicians, they that remained and they 
that ascended, sang and trumpeted until 
the fire-ship ascended out of sight. 

CHAPTER XII. 

For three hundred years prior to the 
above transactions, the four false Gods had 
been in war to a limited extent in their hea- 
vens, and for certain earth possessions also. 

In Chine'ya, the Ka'yuans had made 
great progress, to the injury of the false 
Brahma, Ennochissa. But the latter had 
pushed his people into Vind'yu and Par'- 
si'e. 

On the part of Kabalactes, the false 
Budha, he had pushed his people into 
Chine'ya and Par'si'e also. And in many 
parts of Vind'yu, these Budhists had treat- 
ed the Brahmins with great slaughter. 

But neither of the above false Gods was 
a match for God-Gabriel. Under the name 
and doctrines of Mohammed, he had made 
great inroads upon the possessions of the 



other two false Gods, both as to the earth 
and the heavens thereof. 

And yet, on the other hand, Looea- 
mong, the false Kriste, had taken advant- 
age of all the other three false Gods. He 
had found mortal emissaries in western 
Uropa whom he had inspired under the 
name, East India Company. To these he 
had said: Come, I will lead you where 
there is great wealth and most luxurious 
enjoyment. Behold, ye shall possess the 
place, and overcome the heathen of a rich 
country. 

So, Looeamong led them, and they took 
with them missionaries, bibles, swords and 
cannons, and warships. And when they 
arrived at Vind'yu, Looeamong, through 
his angel hosts, said unto them: 

Tell these heathen, ye are worshippers 
of the Lamb of Peace; that ye have come 
in love and for righteousness' sake. And, 
behold, they will receive you. And it shall 
come to pass, when ye are once within, ye 
shall fall upon them, and destroy them by 
the million, men, women and children. 
And ye shall fall upon their aqueducts, 
which irrigate the lands, and ye shall de- 
stroy them also; and, behold, millions of 
these heathen shall starve every year, be- 
cause of the famines that shall surely come 
upon them. 

Now, all these came to pass; the idola- 
ters of Looeamong. fell upon the Bud- 
hists' earthly possessions, and possessed 
the land of Vind'yu, and, in the name of 
Kriste and the Holy Ghost, killed seven 
million men, women and children. And 
they also destroyed the aqueducts whereby 
famines came upon the Vind'yuans, so that, 
in course of time, thirty million more per- 
ished of starvation. 

Now, although Kabalactes thus lost, in 
a great measure, his earthly possessions, he 
still maintained the heavens of Vind'yu, so 
that Looeamong really gained but few 
souls, in heaven, after all his destructions. 

Looeamong had also led his mortal 
emissaries into Chine'ya, in hope to possess 
that country also. He had said to them: 
Go thither, and enforce upon them the opi- 
um trade. And because thereof, they 
will become a drunken and worthless peo- 
ple, and ye shall fall upon them, and over- 
come them, and possess all their country, 
wherein are stored great riches. 



566 



K08M0N 



CYCLE OF LIKA 



And the idolaters of trie false Kriste 
fell upon the Chine'yans and enforced 
the opium trade, and also made many 
of them a drunken and worthless people. 
And after they were thus drunk, the idola- 
ters of the false Kriste raised the cry: Be- 
hold, the drunken heathen! The indulgers 
in opium! Nevertheless, the Ka'yuans of 
Chine'ya were a mighty power, and they 
baffled Looeamong's emissaries in all fur- 
ther encroachments. 

Now, although Looeamong had been 
beaten by the wisdom of God, in possessing 
the colonies of Guatama, nevertheless, 
Looeamong still hoped to regain the coun- 
try to himself. And to carry out his de- 
signs, he sent two thousand million angel 
warriors to accomplish the destruction of 
the Algonquin tribes that inhabited the 
country. And the idolaters of Looeamong 
fell upon the Algonquins, and caused three 
million of them to be put to death, men 
women and children. 

CHAPTER XIII. 

When the right time came, Jehovih 
spake to God, saying: My Son, behold, 
the kosmon era is near, and the light of 
the Arc of Kosmon entereth the fields of 
Paradise. Stretch forth thy hand over the 
nations of Earth and over the heavens 
thereof, and sweep clean thy kingdoms 
for My everlasting light. The four false 
Gods, the perpetuators of the beast, will 
call out in agony, but thou shalt heed them 
not in My judgments. 

Then God sent forth his disciplined 
hosts, twelve thousand million, to cut off 
the supplies of the earth. Even as a mor- 
tal general cutteth off the supplies of a 
wicked city to subdue it, so was cut off 
the accumulated power of the four false 
Gods, they that had proclaimed themselves 
the Saviors of mortals and angels. And 
the angels of God spread around about the 
whole earth! In armies of millions and 
tens of millions, well disciplined, they gath- 
ered together in the mortal cities, and in 
the country places, amongst all nations, 
tribes and peoples. And these angel ar- 
mies were officered and drilled to work in 
concert, with lines of light extending to 
the throne of God. 

And God spake in Paradise, by means 
of the lines of light, and his voice went 



into all the mighty armies of his hosts, the 
twelve thousand million, saying: 

Cut off the earth supplies of the four 
beasts of the earth! They and their count- 
less legions of followers have become pro- 
fitless in the resurrection of mortals and 
angels. Their names have become a stench 
upon the earth. Their mortal followers are 
grovelers in all manner of uncleanness. 
Their spirits have become as vagabonds on 
the earth and in the heavens thereof. My 
hosts have tried to persuade them, but they 
will not hear; the light of the upper king- 
doms, they will not receive. But I will 
make them look up. Like beasts that are 
untamed, they shall cry out for sustenance, 
but they shall not find it in the places of 
their old haunts. 

Then, the hosts of God marched in be- 
twixt the drujas, the worshippers of the 
four false Gods, and their mortal harvests. 
And the drujas turned to their respective 
Gods, the false Brahma, the false Budha 
and Gabriel, and the false Kriste, crying 
out: 

Behold, our supplies are cut off! Is not 
the earth thy kingdom, and the place of 
thy footstool? Saidst thou not that thou 
wert the Almighty? How, then, hath an- 
other God come between? If thou art, 
indeed, our Savior, now save us! But if 
thou hast been all this while deceiving, 
then shall hell be thy portion! 

The four false Gods heard the cry of 
anger and suspicion in their mighty king- 
doms; heard the wailings of the sixty thou- 
sand million. And they feared, and trem- 
bled. Most of all in fear was the false 
Kriste, for, for sake of aggrandizing his 
own kingdom, he had had it proclaimed on 
the earth that: Whosoever believeth in me 
shall be saved; but whosoever believeth 
not in me, shall be in danger of hell-fire! 

And countless millions of mortals had 
taken no thought as to self-resurrection, 
but taken him at his word; and so had 
lived and died and become his slaves for 
hundreds of years. Millions of these an- 
gels had heavenly banners made, with the 
promises of this false Lord inscribed there- 
on, and with these went in processions in 
heaven, crying out: Bread or blood! 
Bread or blood! We come not to bring 
peace in heaven; we come to bring a 
sword! We come to set angel against an- 



KOSMON 



CYCLE OF ES 



567 



gel! Give unto us, O thou, our God, or 
hell shall be thy portion! 

And the four false Gods, fearing the 
fires of hell, went about, crying out: I am 
not the true Brahma! I am not the true 
Budah! I am not the true God! I am not 
the true Kriste! 

For they hoped thereby to save them- 
selves. But, alas, for them. Their thou- 
sands of millions fell upon their heavenly 
cities, palaces and thrones, and robbed 
them. And, when their fury found vent, 
behold, the vast multitudes rushed for the 
false Gods, and fell upon them, beat them, 
suffocated them with foul smells, covered 
them up with suffocating gases, walled 
them in with sulphurous fires. And they 
brought the officers and priests and monks 
and high officers, and cast them into hells 
also, millions and millions of high-ruling 
angels of the false Gods. 

Thus were these four false Gods hem- 
med in, even within their own dissolute 
kingdoms, and every day and every hour 
grew more terrible. It was the infuriated 
madness of sixty thousand million deceived 
angels, broken loose from slavery, turned 
upon them. 

Then Jehovih's God, from Paradise, 
went forth in a ship of fire, brilliant, past 
the endurance of drujas; went forth with 
ten million high in the grades from the 
realms of Aroqu and Harivya, well discip- 
lined for the purpose. And on the ship, 
and on the banners thereof, were inscribed 
these words: 

There is but one Great Spirit, Jehovih. 
To Assimilate with Him, is the salvation 
of mortals and angels. He crieth out: 
Come unto Me; My kingdoms are ample 
unto all the living. Be ye strong in resur- 
rection, for I am come to deliver. 

And God gathered in from the highest 
grades of the disrupted heavenly kingdoms 
thirteen thousand million homeless angels, 
who had been worshippers of the four false 
Gods. And God had them sent to Luana, 
on the plateau, Hivestos, where he officered 
them in colonies, with places for education 
and labor. 

God said unto them: Ye hoped to as- 
cend to Jehovih's highest kingdom by 
prayers and confessions to false Gods. Be- 
hold, I say unto you, there is no resurrec- 
tion but by developing the talents Jehovih 



created unto all men. Go ye to work, 
therefore, and to places of education, that 
ye may become fit companions to Jehovih's 
exalted angels. 

CHAPTER XIV. 

CYCLE OF ES. 

Now was God, Jehovih's Son, master 
of the whole Earth and her heavens. The 
light of the Arc of Kosmon had fallen on 
the throne of God. Jehovih's Orian Chiefs 
from the emancipated heavens had come! 
Paradise was like a new kingdom. A 
thousand million ethereans had arrived to 
labor with God, in clearing away the hells 
of the lower heavens, and in providing for 
opening the gates of the heavens for the 
angels to appear unto mortals. 

Methazi, Goddess of Alefad, in the 
roads of Loo, in etherea, had brought 
back the armies of the inquisitions. Ha- 
tivi, Goddess of the Lutian swamps, in 
Wessatow plains, in etherea, was there, 
with Massecred of Bough-ghan-ghad. 
Monetzian, Goddess of Tussia, was there. 
Norwothchissa, Goddess of the forest of Ni- 
dea, in etherea, were there. Besides these, 
there were forty-six other Goddesses, each 
with a host of angels who had in the an- 
cient times striven against Jehovih, in favoi 
of some false God. But now, in the com 
ing of kosmon, behold, they returned as 
pure and exalted Gods and Goddesses. 

And God, Jehovih's Son, called forth all 
these one-time persecutors, and he said 
unto them : 

Behold, there are four great hells and 
six smaller hells and fourteen still smaller 
hells, still existing in these lower heavens. 
Since ye were once cast into hells, and af- 
terward delivered by the angels of Jeho- 
vih, go ye now, and deliver the hells of 
these heavens. And bring ye the chief 
false Gods before me. My marshal will al- 
lot you to the respective places I have ap- 
pointed unto you. 

Then went forth the Gods and Goddess- 
es as appointed by God to deliver the 
twenty-four hells of the heavens of the 
earth. And they took with them unto this 
labor six thousand million angel laborers 
well skilled in such matters. And, in thir- 
ty-four days, the hells were delivered, brok- 



568 



KOSMON 



CYCLE OF CS 



en up and gone, And from these hells, 
there were thus delivered more than sev- 
enty thousand million angels; who were 
carried to the plateaux, prepared for them 
by God, Jehovih's Son. 

And God had also provided unto them, 
in their new heavenly places, divisions and 
sub-divisions, with generals, captains, over- 
seers and such other officers, necessary to 
prevent them running into knots and hells 
again. 

Of the false Gods and Goddesses thus 
delivered and brought before God, in Para- 
dise, for judgment, the chiefs of them were: 
Looeamong, Kabalactes, Ennochissa, Ga- 
briel, Baal, Ashtaroth, Dagon, Ashdod, 
Yotemas, Sathias, Goluth, Plutoya, Itis, 
Hamgad, Moak and Hoar. Besides these, 
there were seventy other false Gods and 
Goddesses delivered, but who were not 
brought before the throne of God, but were 
sent to hospitals, because they were in 
chaos. 

God had previously provided Paradise, 
through his Holy Council, for the time of 
the judgment of the false Gods, that were 
brought before him. So the Holy Councils 
were formed in crescent, so that the throne 
of God laid betwixt the horns thereof, in 
order to promote the Voice. The mar- 
shals then brought the false Gods and God- 
desses into the arena of circle where the 
light should fall upon them. 

CHAPTER XV. 

The Voice spake out of the light over 
the throne of God, saying: 

Because I admonished both earth and 
heaven, saying: Whoso setteth up more 
than the I Am, shall be bound: And whoso 
hearkeneth unto them, and runneth after 
them, shall be bound unto them. And they 
heeded not My commandments, but made 
worshipful other Gods than Me, so shall 
they reap the harvest they have sown. 

Because they drew the sword to estab- 
lish themselves, they were bound by the 
sword. Because they took upon them- 
selves heavenly kingdoms, I bound them 
thereunto. 

Because they professed salvation in the 
names of false Gods, I let them run their 
course; and, behold, they have shown no 
salvation in heaven or earth. They have 



built up kingdom against kingdom, stand- 
ing army against standing army. Verily, 
they have brought judgment upon them- 
selves. 

Hear the words of Jehovih, O ye false 
Gods and Goddesses, who set up heavenly 
kingdoms against Me. Who slew hun- 
dreds of millions of mortals, in order to 
make other names than Mine worshipful 
on earth and in the heavens thereof. 

Ye, who cried out falsely: Behold me; 
I am the light and the life; through me is 
the way of salvation. 

Ye, who have used your names to lead 
mortals and angels away from the Creator; 
saying of yourselves: Behold me, I am the 
Lord; I am God; my heavenly place is the 
all highest. 

Behold, I had spoken in the olden times, 
saying: 

Whosoever taketh from My people 
for his own glory or dominion, shall ren- 
der unto Me the just value. 

These have been My doctrines since 
thousands of years, and known unto you 
before ye deserted My kingdoms. 

Hear ye, then, the judgment of Jehovih: 
Whosoever hath established the name of 
any God but the Creator, and made it wor- 
shipful on earth or in heaven, shall be 
bound in the first resurrection till that 
name is no longer worshipful on earth or in 
heaven. 

And whatever God or Goddess hath 
said: Come unto me, ye that are heavily 
laden, and I will give you rest, for I am the 
way of salvation and of light and of ever- 
lasting life, then, that God or Goddess 
shall be bound in the first resurrection as 
long as mortals or angels go unto him or 
her. 

And, when all of you have purified, and 
raised up all those who idolize you, in that 
same time, will I raise you up to higher 
heavens also. 

And now, when the Voice ceased, and 
all was still, the false Gods and Goddesses 
raised up their heads, and they spake with 
one voice, saying: 

Thou art just, O Jehovih. Unto Thee 
do I now covenant that I will serve Thee 
forever. Neither will I aspire to rise to 
higher heavens till I have raised up all 
whom I have led astray. Make me strong, 
O Jehovih, in this my everlasting cove- 



KOSKON 



CYCLE OF ES 



569 



nant! Teach me, O Father, the labor I 
should do, that Thou shalt be glorified for- 
ever! 

Thus ended the judgment. God's mar- 
shals removed them to the places allotted 
for them, and they went to work. 

CHAPTER XVI. 

Such, then, was the fate of the chief 
false Gods in the lower heavens. But, dur- 
ing the last three or four hundred years, 
many of the officers of these false Gods 
had seceded from them, and had set up 
small heavenly kingdoms of their own. 
And their mortal followers were called 
sects. 

These little heavens were, for the most 
part, situated on the earth, and usually 
these small Gods inhabited the churches 
where mortals came to worship. And the 
preachers within these churches fell under 
the inspiration of these itinerant Gods and 
their gangs of wandering spirits. 

In Guatama, these inspirations were car- 
ried to such an extent, by these drujan 
Gods, that the mortals of one sect were 
made hostile, one sect against another. 
An enmity, therefore, existed betwixt pro- 
testants and catholics, and betwixt protest- 
ants themselves, and betwixt all of these 
and Jews. And, not only on earth, betwixt 
mortals, did these things take place, but 
these petty Gods had small kingdoms of 
their, own; as a Presbyterian heaven; a 
Methodist heaven; a Baptist heaven, and 
so on. And, when a mortal member died, 
his spirit fell into his heaven, where he had 
lived, becoming a servant to these drujas. 
And, when he cried out: I want to go to 
Jesus, I want to go to Kriste, he was 
shown the drujan God, and told: That is 
he! Which he would believe to be true. 
For what is bound on earth, is bound in 
heaven. 

A drujan God, Piad, established a sect, 
and named it Mormon, and he located his 
kingdom on earth with his mortal follow- 
ers, and he became master over the spirits 
of his mortal followers in the same way, 
calling himself, the True Kriste. Piad 
taught, that all good Mormons would ulti- 
mately attain to rule over some planet and 
her heavens. But, he never permitted the 
angels of his kingdom to go out of his 



reach. He also taught mortals, that the 
more numerous progeny a man begot, the 
greater would be his heavenly kingdom, in 
time to come. For this was Piad's scheme, 
to make his own heavenly kingdom large 
and powerful. 

Another drujan God, Lowganus, estab- 
lished a kingdom on earth, and named it 
Shaker Heaven, pretending he was the 
True Kriste. And his place became a hea- 
venly bondage unto himself. . 

Another drujan God, Sayawan, estab- 
lished a heavenly kingdom on earth, and 
called it The All Highest Heaven. This 
Lord called himself The Lord. He raised 
up a mortal, Swedenborg, whom he took in 
spirit, subjectively, into many of the low- 
est heavens and hells, saying to him: 

Behold, they that serve not The LordL 
How hard it is with them! And he fur- 
ther said: This place of darkness is the 
Brahman heaven; that place of darkness is 
the Budhist heaven! But this place of light 
is my heaven, I, The Lord. 

Thus did this drujan God establish a 
Swedenborg heaven, and mortals looked 
upon him as the true Kriste, and, after 
death, their souls went thither. So, it came 
to pass, as had been prophesied of old: Lo, 
Kriste, here! Lo, Kriste, there! 

And, as it was with Looeamong's hea- 
venly kingdoms, thus split into hundreds 
of remnants, even so was it with the hea- 
venly kingdoms of the other false Gods, 
Brahma, the false, and Budha, the false, 
so that there were on earth thousands of 
petty Gods' heavenly kingdoms of dark- 
ness and misery. 

Now, all of these drujan Gods, whether 
of Chine'ya, or Vind'yii, or Arabin'ya, or 
Uropa, or Guatama, rejected Jehovih, but 
took the name of some one of the four false 
Gods, and protested that he himself was the 
real and true God and Savior. And mortal 
sects, that followed them, did the same 
thing; and none of them practiced right- 
eousness and good works, but were war- 
riors and money-getters, for self sake. 

God said: Behold, I give a new testi- 
mony unto the nations of the earth: In the 
time I overcame, and cast out the four 
heads of the beast, the acrimony existing 
between the different sects began, suddenly, 
to die out, and they spake friendly to one 
another. 



570 



KOSMON 



CYCLE OF ES 



CHAPTER XVII. 
THE DAWN OF KOSMON. 

Now, whilst the Holy Council were still 
sitting in Paradise, a light, like a star, 
came, and stood above the throne of God. 
And the Voice came out of the light, say- 
ing: 

Behold, the false Gods are cast out, and 
sent unto their places. Never more shall 
there be any other false God, or Lord, or 
Savior, to lead My people away. I am 
sufficient unto Mine own creations. 

Let this, therefore, be the beginning of 
the kosmon era. 

My people have settled the whole earth 
around, from east to west; the lands on 
the western borders of Guatama have be- 
come inhabited. 

Go, then, My Son, open the gates of 
heaven unto mortals. Let the angels meet 
them, and talk with them, face to face. 

Behold, My etherean embassadress, 
Che'sivi'anathaotes, cometh in a sea of 
fire! 

The ship of the etherean Goddess was 
seen descending from the higher heavens, 
coming as an open ring, to embrace the 
whole earth. 

Swifter and swifter came the etherean 
archangels, till all the heavens of Paradise 
were encircled in the love of the Almighty. 

Then, God called out the legions who 
had the matter in charge, where mortals 
had been born for the work of Jehovih's 
kingdom. And God said: 

Open the gates of heaven; let the angels 
of Jehovih speak with mortals; the time 
of the Father's kingdom is at hand! Open 
the gates of heaven! Let the angels come 
forth in power! 

CHAPTER XVIII. 

Now, when God looked abroad over 
Guatama, he saw four million people in 
bondage, as slaves; and he saw that they 
must be liberated. And so, God inquired 
of the chief mathematician in the Holy 
Council, one Arak, saying: 

Who, of all the kings of earth, hath had 
the greatest number of slaves? 

And Arak said: Xerxes, who dwelleth 
in Yope'gah, in atmospherea. 

God said: Send thou a heavenly ship 
for him, and for a thousand million of his 



angels. And send also for Leonidas, the 
Argos'yan, and for a thousand million of 
his angels. And, when they are brought 
here, they shall descend to the earth, to 
these barbarians, and liberate their slaves. 

Arak saluted, and departed, giving his 
instructions to the heavenly marshals, who 
at once sent ships and messengers as di- 
rected. 

God, then, said: I will now recall the 
ashars, who hold guard over these mortals; 
and for a season they shall dwell in drujan 
darkness. 

And this was accomplished, and 
straightway a war ensued betwixt the own- 
ers of the slaves and the neighboring 
states. Then came the Gods and angels, 
high in the grades, to witness the play of 
mortal death, and to determine how best 
to win to liberty and to Jehovih, the in- 
habitants of this great land. 

And, there rose up two million men in 
arms, pushing on in war on every side, 
coursing the rich soil in mortal blood. And 
yet, neither side had defined its principles, 
or taken stand for righteousness' sake. 
But went on in fearful destruction, laying 
in death tens of thousands, and tens of 
thousands! 

Jehovih said: Send thou, thy Par'siVan 
and Argos'yan angels, down to these mor- 
tals, and, by inspiration and by dreams and 
by visions, thy angels shall say to them: 
Whoso professeth the earth, shall battle in 
vain; but whoso professeth righteousness 
in My name, shall win. 

And millions of angels descended, and 
tried to persuade them. But mortals would 
not hear. Even the chief general, on lib- 
erty's side, closed his soul against Jehovih. 
Aye, himself, enforced slavery with his 
mighty army. And years went on, and all 
the people began to perceive that, without 
righteousness, there would be no end to 
the war. 

Jehovih said: Only death can reach 
these people, or make them behold My 
hand. Yet, thou shalt send thy angel 
hosts over all the north regions and inspire 
them to call out for liberty. 

Then went forth Xerxes and Leonidas, 
with their two thousand million angels, to 
overspread the north, to inspire mortals to 
a more heavenly stand, to make them see 
justice and liberty. And, for a hundred 



KOSMQN 



CYCLE OF ES 



571 



•days, these angels dwelt with mortals; but 
many mortals were too gross to com- 
prehend. Then, Xerxes came to New 
York, and took hence the guardian 
angels, those of holiness, and he left the 
city in the hand of drujas. And, at once, 
the city was plunged in riots, and the peo- 
ple were as a mad people, wild and fearful. 

Again, Jehovih spake in the Holy Coun- 
cil in heaven: Let My angels go once 
more, and inspire mortals to rise to the 
light of My will. 

Again, the angels overrun the land, in- 
spiring mortals day and night to demand 
freedom for the slaves. And the Embas- 
sadress of Jehovih said to her inspiring 
hosts of angels: Number ye the mortals, 
north and south, as to their majority voice 
for freedom. 

Now, when the Gods numbered the 
mortals and graded them, they discovered 
the majority had turned to freedom's side. 

Jehovih said to His Embassadress: Take 
thine own inspiring host, and go down to 
the City of Washington, to the president, 
and hold this matter up to him, that he 
may understand Me. For he is not bound 
in doctrines. For which reason My angels 
made him president. And the president 
will hear thee, and he shall resolve in his 
own mind unto freedom for the slaves. 
But he will seek for some external sign, 
fearing he may have mistaken the angels 
that minister unto him. But I will pro- 
vide a way for this also. 

And the angels of Jehovih went to the 
president in a vision, like a dream, and 
they called unto him. And he answered: 
Who art thou? 

And the angels said: Such as come in 
Jehovih's name for freedom's sake. Behold, 
millions of His angels look down from 
heaven, and would come to thy armies, if 
thou wouldst but proclaim freedom to the 
slaves. Jehovih's hand is in this matter. 

The president awoke, and was troubled 
with his dream. 

The next night, the angels came again, 
and re-told their words, and added there- 
unto: The great majority of the country is 
ripe for this matter. Thou fearest this is 
but a foolish dream. Behold, we will give 
the proof to-morrow. 



The president awoke more troubled than 
before, but remembered, the angels said: 
We will give thee proof to-morrow. 

Jehovih said: I will make this a matter 
of testimony to this nation, so that no man 
may gainsay it. And I will show also how 
My angels work singly and in mighty le- 
gions. 

Now, at that time, there was living in 
Washington a seeress, through whom spir- 
its spake by entrancement. And on the 
day mentioned, the angels spake through 
her, saying: Go and bring the president 
into the presence of this woman. 

And the president was told what was 
said. And when the president came before 
the seeress, the angel of Jehovih entranced 
her, and said unto him: 

We said we would give thee proof to- 
morrow. Behold, we repeat unto thee, Je- 
hovih is in this matter. Save thou pro- 
claimest the freedom of the slaves thou 
shalt not succeed. Do thou this, and the 
enemy's armies shall melt away like snow 
in the sun. 

The president's eyes were opened, and 
he went straightway, and proclaimed free- 
dom to the whole four million slaves. 

Xerxes said to Leonidas: Thou, great 
conqueror, thou shalt conquer me. Take 
thy thousand million angels, and go with 
the armies of the north, and inspire them 
on to victory. Give them such strength 
and courage as they have not before mani- 
fested. And, as for myself and my hosts, 
we will go to the armies of the south, and 
we will inspire them to believe they are 
conquered, and so make them flee before 
thy soldiers. 

Thus, these great angel warriors allot- 
ted themselves to the war. And, behold, 
the northern armies ran forth over the 
enemy's country as if war were but play; 
and the southern armies vanished, disarm- 
ing themselves, and returning to their 
homes. 

The slaves were free! 

Jehovih said: Let this be a testimony, 
that this land is the place of the beginning 
of the kosmon era. There shall be no caste 
amongst My people. Behold, I went to 
the Israelites, and I said: Keep yourselves 
as a separate people! For I had work for 



572 



KOSMON 



cvcle or ES 






them; which was to travel westward, and 
establish Me, the All One. And they came 
westward, and fulfilled My command- 
ments. Wherefore I have blessed them. 
And I went to Chine'ya, and I said: Let 
the followers of Chine keep themselves as 
an exclusive people; for I have work for 
them; which was to establish Me, the All 
One, and to demonstrate the most numer- 
ous people in all the world united as one 
people, peacefully. And they have accom- 
plished their work. And I blessed them. 
And I went to Vind'yu also, and establish- 
ed a mighty people with a multiplicity of 
Gods and languages. For I had a work 
for them to do, which was to preserve My 
revelations of some of the divisions in My 
heavens above; and to prove, in after-time, 
things which I had revealed to the ancients. 
They have accompished their work also, 
and I have blessed them. 

But, in this era, I come not to an ex- 
clusive people, but to the combination of 
all peoples commingled together as one 
people. 

Henceforth, My chosen shall be of the 
amalgamated races, who choose Me. And 
these shall become the best, most perfect 
of all peoples on the earth. And they shall 
not consider race or color, but health and 
nobleness as to the mortal part; and as to 
spirit, peace, love, wisdom and good works, 
and one Great Spirit only. 

Leonidas said to Xerxes: It will be re- 
vealed ere long that we have been here with 
our angel hosts. As a testimony of this, 
let us allot a number of our angels to re- 
main a season with mortals. And they 
shall inspire them to athletic sports pecu- 
liar to the Argos'yans and Par'si'e'ans. 

To this, Xerxes consented, and they 
asked for six hundred thousand angel vol- 
unteers; and they received them, and offi- 
cered them, and distributed them in such 
way that their inspiration should develop 
mortals in health, strength and endurance, 
by means of athletic games. And it came 
to pass that the angels of heaven establish- 



ed athletic games amongst this people, far 
and near. 

CHAPTER XIX. 

God, Jehovih's Son, was now relieved 
of his arduous toils over Earth and her 
heavens; and his successor and the Lords 
were duly crowned. Then, the Chieftain- 
esses and high Gods and Goddesses, from 
the etherean heavens, prepared for the mar- 
riage of Jehovih's Brides and Bridegrooms. 

And God and his Lords and high offi- 
cers called in all heavenly grades prepared 
for the third resurrection; and there were, 
in all, twenty-seven thousand million 
Brides and Bridegrooms. Beside these, 
there were in Paradise, to witness the cere- 
monies, more than thirty thousand million 
angels of lower grades. 

So, accordingly, the ceremonies were 
accomplished in the usual form; and the 
Brides and Bridegrooms were conducted 
into the avalanzas, of which there were 
eleven in number. Then went in the ether- 
ean hosts, who had brought forth the birth 
of kosmon. And, after them, God and his 
Lords and high officers. In the meantime, 
the es'enaurs and trumpeters, two thousand 
million, chanted and played before the 
hosts in glory to Jehovih. 

After that, the Chieftainess gave the 
signal for the ascent, and, with. one voice, 
the mighty hosts said: Arise! To Thee, 
Jehovih! Nearer, nearer to Thee. Thou 
Almighty. 

And the fire-ships started upwa.J, turn- 
ing and rising. With more than forty thou- 
sand million angels aboard, rose the avalan- 
zas above the pillars of fire, above the 
throne of God, higher and higher. And 
the angels arising, and the angels below, 
clapped their hands and shouted in glee 
and exalted glory, because of the over- 
whelming scene. 

Thus rose up, and departed to the high- 
er heavens, those thousands of millions of 
worshippers of the Creator, who had wit- 
nessed the birth of the kosmon era, for the 
angels and morals of the red star, Earth. 



The Merchants Publishing Co. 

Printers and Binders, 

Denver. 



Jtaly-ie. isoi 



W^Wi 




*«8 



-JlfeA^i^Sfe ^ Wllirm/r:li^ PreservationTechnologies 

FV^HK I W"^^^ V^ JkC0 A WORLD LEADER ,N PAPER PRESErJaV.ON 

m^\, y '/ W ^i Wd&il .ll^^U 4r^-V* LrP^J ^^ / f i S«y 111 Thomson Park Drive 



(724)779-2V 







£ \ m 



